|
Wayne R. Dynes Originally published in:
Garland Reference Library of Social Science, vol. 313, F. ENCYCLOPEDIAS AND DICTIONARIES D. COMPARISONS OF LESBIANS AND GAY MEN B. ANCIENT NEAR EAST AND EGYPT Q. CHINA, KOREA, AND CENTRAL ASIA U. THE HOMOSEXUAL MOVEMENT: UNITED STATES V. THE HOMOSEXUAL MOVEMENT: ABROAD C. ART: THE RENAISSANCE TRADITION D. MAIN CHRISTIAN DENOMINATIONS E. GAY CHURCHES, ORGANIZATIONS, AND OBSERVERS B. DICTIONARIES AND GLOSSARIES A. SOCIAL SEMIOTICS AND LIFESTYLE TRENDS A. ECONOMICS, BUSINESS, AND LABOR A. COUNSELING AND SOCIAL SERVICES H. HOMOPHOBIA AND STEREOTYPING K. RORSCHACH AND OTHER PROJECTIVE TESTS D. OTHER DEPTH PSYCHIATRY SCHOOLS J. RELIGIOUS AND RELATED "CURES" A. HOMOSEXUALITY AND (HETEROSEXUAL) MARRIAGE E. CHILDREN OF LESBIANS AND GAY MEN F. PARENTS OF GAYS AND LESBIANS C. TRANSSEXUALISM AND SEX REASSIGNMENT B. ANCIENT, CIVIL, AND CANON LAW I. GENERAL The tentative beginnings of the task of gathering references about
homosexual behavior ("sodomy") lie in the 17th and 18th centuries,
when savants--generally forensic physicians, legal scholars, and
theologians--began to record such writings as they were able to discover. The
19th century saw two major advances: the creation of erotic bibliographies
(comprising what were sometimes termed "curiosa") by collectors and
booksellers; and the compiling of systematic lists of references by
homosexuals themselves (e.g. Meienreis and Ulrichs). Much has been
accomplished in the present century, so that bibliographical control in the
sphere of homosexuality is currently regarded as well developed by
librarians at the Kinsey Institute, who enjoy a panoramic command of the
fields of sex research. Yet problems persist. There is a tendency, found
particularly but not exclusively among American scholars, to concentrate on
work in one language group, so that one's vision of the universe of research -
geographical and temporal — is narrowed. Moreover, there is no current annual
survey of progress in gay and lesbian studies. Only recently, in fact, have
some of the major current subject bibliographies, such as Art Index and MLA Bibliography, introduced homosexuality as a category. Entries in
some existing retrospective bibliographies are marred by misprints and
incomplete references, faults which may to some extent be excused because of
the rarity of many publications, which were often
published semiclan- destinely. In addition to the general bibliographies
cited below, more specialized ones will be found throughout this work under
the appropriate subject categories. 1. ASHBEE, HENRY SPENCER ("Pisanus Fraxi"). Bibliography of Forbidden Books. Introduction by Gershon Legman. New York: Jack
Brussel, 1962. 3 vols. Originally published in London under three
titles: Index librorum prohibitorum (1877), Centuria librorum absconditorum (1879), and Catena librorum tacendorum (1885). Other reprints are known. In addition to
standard bibliographical data, entries frequently contain an annotative essay
summarizing the contents with liberal quotations. Although these volumes
cover the whole field of erotica, they mention a considerable number of works
on homosexuality, some now neglected. Each volume has an index of authors,
titles, and subjects. 2.
AUGUST, EUGENE R. Men's Studies: A Selected and
Annotated Interdisciplinary Bibliography. Littleton, CO: Libraries Unlimited,
1985. 233 pp. Covers some 600 English-language books, arranged in 21 topical
chapters, of which the last concerns homosexuality. Includes autobiographies
and fiction, as well as non-fiction. 3.
BEASLY, RUTH (ed.). International Directory of Sex Research and Related
Fields.
Boston: G. K. Hall, 1976. 2 vols. Lists over 1600 persons and
groups in 48 countries, with selected publications; derives from the files of
the Alfred C. Kinsey Institute, Indiana University. 4. BELL, LOUIS NEWTON. The Gay Seen,
or 200+ Approaches to the Fiction and Non-Fiction of the Other Sexual
Minority. Dominguez Hills: Educational Resources Center of
California State College, 1975. 147 pp. (Dominguez Hills Bibliographical
Series, 11) Select bibliography with
annotations; indexed. Sometimes idiosyncratic. 5. BREWER, JOAN SCHERER, and ROD W. WRIGHT (eds.). Sex Research: Bibliographies from the Institute for Sex Research. Phoenix: Oryx Press, 1979. 212 pp. Classified list
of 4267 items, unannotated, selected from the holdings of the Alfred C.
Kinsey Institute, Indiana University. Homosexuality has restricted coverage
on the grounds that it is well treated in other publications. See "Sex
Variations" (pp. 43-56) and "Pedophilia" (pp. 138-41). Author
and subject indexes. 6. BULLOUGH, VERN L., W. DORR LEGG, BARRETT W. ELCANO,
and JAMES KEPNER (eds.). An Annotated Bibliography of Homosexuality.
New York: Garland, 1976. 2 vols. (406; 468 pp.) Despite some valid criticisms,
this monumental work (almost 13,000 entries) opened a new era in research
horizons in its subject as the first attempt to cover, without limitations of
country or time period, the entire ensemble of relevant fields—scholarly,
scientific, and creative. The title notwithstanding, only a few items are
annotated; misprints abound (esp. in the numerous German entries); and some
items are incorrectly assigned to the topical categories. Each volume has an
author index, but the absence of subject indexes hinders retrieval of
material on specific themes. 7.
Catalogus
van de Bibliotheek van het Nederlandsch Wetenschappelijk Humanitair Komitee. The Hague: MWHK, 1922. 55 pp. Catalogue of books (Dutch,
German, French, and English) kept in the house of Jacob Anton Schorer, a
principal figure in the Dutch Scientific-Humanitarian Committee. An important
reference for its time, the Catalogus had a number of supplements,
of which four were published: 1 (1926; 28 pp.); 2 (1930; 22 pp.); 3 (1932; 24
pp.); and 4 (1936; 28 pp.). 8. COUROUVE, CLAUDE. Bibliographie des homosexualités, 1478-1881. Third ed. Paris: The author, 1981. A useful guide to French-language
publications, fiction and non-fiction, (This section is published together
with Fragments
4, by Courouve and Robert Kozérawski). It is continued in Bibliographie des homosexualités II, 1882- 1924. Third ed. (Paris: The author, 1981). A new, more comprehensive
edition is in preparation. 9. CRAWFORD, WILLIAM (ed.). Homosexuality in Canada: A Bibliography. New ed. Toronto:
Canadian Gay Archives, 1984. 378 cols. (CGA Publications, 9) Useful
classified list of material published in Canada or by and about Canadians
abroad. Less comprehensive for French-language than English-language
materials. 10. DALL'ORTO, GIOVANNI. Leggere
omosessuale.
Turin: Edizioni Gruppo Abele, 1984. 108 pp. Fundamental list of 749
Italian-language items published between 1800 and 1983, annotated throughout.
Includes translations into Italian as well as original works. 11. DYNES, WAYNE. "A Bibliography of Bibliographies
of Homosexuality," Cabirion and Gay Books Bulletin, no. 10
(1984), 16-22. About 180 items, annotated, in all major languages. Includes
some fugitive and minor items not cited here. There is also a somewhat
different version in Italian: "Bibliografia di bibliografie sull'omosessualità," Sodoma, 2
(1985), 39-54. 12. ELYSIAN FIELDS, BOOKSELLERS. Gay Literature [Title varies]. Elmhurst, NY: Elysian Fields, 1974ff. About 25 catalogues in this
series have appeared, which are noteworthy for
unusual and out-of-print items, which are sold by mail order. A number of gay
and lesbian bookstores in the United States have also produced noteworthy
catalogues, including A Different Light (Los Angeles), L'Androgyne
(Montreal), Chosen Books (Detroit), Giovannis Room (Philadelphia), Lambda
Rising (Washington, DC), Oscar Wilde Memorial Bookshop (New York City), and
Womanbooks (New York City). 13.
FEUCHT, RAINER C. Homosexualität und
Randgebiete. Ulm: BMCF Antiquariat, 1977. about 60 pp.
Carefully compiled bookseller's catalogue of 640 items in several languages.
Other useful European catalogues have been produced by the bookstores Les Mots à la Bouche (Paris),
Prinz Eisenherz (Berlin), Sodom (Munich), and De Woelrat (The Hague). 14. GAY, JULES, "COMTE
D'IÉNA."
Bibliographie des ouvrages relatifs à l'amour. Fourth ed., revised by J. Lemonnyer. Paris: J.
Lemonnyer, and Lille: Stéphane Bécour, 1894-1900. 4 vols. The most elaborate general erotic
bibliography of the 19th century. See also: Louis Perceau, Bibliographie du roman erotique au XIXe siècle (Paris: Georges Fourdrin- ier, 1930; 2 vols.). 15. A Gay Bibliography: Eight Bibliographies on Lesbian and Male
Homosexuality
[ed. by Jonathan Katz et al.]. New York: Arno Press, 1975. Comprises five short
bibliographies by Marion Zimmer Bradley; Gene Damon [Barbara Grier] and Lee
Stuart,
The Lesbian in Literature, A Bibliography (San Francisco,
1967); Noel I. Garde, The Homosexual in Literature (New York,
1959); and William Parker, Homosexuality: Selected Abstracts and Bibliography
(San Francisco, 1966). 16. GITTINGS, BARBARA. A Gay Bibliography.
Sixth ed. Philadelphia: Gay Task Force, American Library Association, 1980. 16
pp. List of 563 current items
selected to provide material that is supportive of gay people and arranged in
ten major categories. In addition to books and some periodical citations
(English language only), includes films and filmstrips. 17. HANSEN, BENT (ed.). Nordisk Bibliograf!:
Homoseksualitet. Copenhagen: Forlaget Pan, 1984. 32 pp. Annotated list of
original publications, fiction and nonfiction, arranged by country (Denmark,
Finland, Iceland, Norway, and Sweden). 18.
HERZER, MANFRED. Bibliographie zur
Homosexualität: Verzeichnis des deutschsprachigen nichtbelletristischen
Schrifttums zur weiblichen und männlichen Homosexualität aus den Jahren 1466
bis 1975 in chronologischer Reihenfolge. Berlin: Verlag Rosa Winkel, 1982. 255 pp. Exemplary bibliography (3404
items) of German-language non-fiction material arranged in chronological
order. Subject and author indexes. A complementary volume, admitting novels,
short stories, poetry and plays, is in preparation. 19. INDIANA UNIVERSITY. ALFRED C. KINSEY INSTITUTE FOR
SEX RESEARCH.
Sex Studies Index, 1980. Boston: G. K. Hall, 1982. 219 pp. Classified list for the year by
author and subject (see esp. pp. 108-22). Apparently not continued. See also
R. Beasly; and J. S. Brewer and R. W. Wright, above; and M. S. Weinberg and A. Bell, below. 20. KEARNEY, PATRICK J. The Private Case: An Annotated Bibliography of the
Private Case Erotica Collection in the British (Museum) Library.
London: Jay Landesman, 1981. 360 pp. Definitive catalogue of the
long-mysterious British Library special collection, supplanting A. Rose (see
below) for the items that it contains. Only a small number of entries are
directly pertinent. 21. [MEIENREIS, RICHARD.]
"Bibliographie der Homosexualität,"
JfsZ, 1 (1899), 215-38. This list inaugurated the
annual bibliographical coverage of the Jahrbuch für sexuelle Zwischenstufen,
published under the auspices of the Berlin Scientific-Humanitarian Committee,
which set world standards for homosexual bibliography. In the first ten years
of compilation over 1000 contemporary publications were noted, some reviewed
in considerable detail by Eugen Wilhelm. 22. MILLER, ALAN V. Homosexuality in Specific Fields: The Arts, the
Military, Prisons, Sports, Teaching and Transsexuals: A Selected
Bibliography.
Toronto: Ontario
Ministry of Labour, Library, 1978. 58 pp. Something of an omnium
gatherum, but sometimes useful for out-of-the-way items. The author has since
pursued more defined bibliographical tasks in excellent work produced under
the auspices of the Canadian Gay Archives in Toronto. 23. MILLETT, ANTHONY PERCIVAL UPTON.
Homosexuality: A Bibliography of Literature Published Since 1959 and
Available in New Zealand. Wellington, NZ: Library School, 1967.
55 pp. (Bibliographical Series, 5) Conscientious list, chiefly of
interest for a few local publications. 24. PAOLELLA, EDWARD. "A Gay/Lesbian Studies
Bibliography of Resources Selected from Non-Homosexual Periodical
Literature,"
Gay Books Bulletin, no. 6 (1981), 26-30. Continued, with contributions
from various researchers, in Gay Books Bulletin, nos.
7-9. 25. PARKER, WILLIAM. Homosexuality: A Selective
Bibliography of Over 3000 Items. Metuchen, NJ: Scarecrow Press,
1971. 323 pp. Emphasizes nonfiction, in
English only, with the items arranged by type of publication. Subject and
author indexes. Continued in his useful Homosexuality Bibliography:
Supplement 1970-1975 (Metuchen, NJ: Scarecrow Press, 1977; 337
pp.); and
Homosexuality Bibliography: Second Supplement, 1976-1982
(Metuchen, NJ: Scarecrow Press, 1985; 395 pp.). 26. PIA, PASCAL. Les livres de l'enfer du XVIème siecle à nos jours. Paris: C. Coulet et A. Faure, 1978. 2 vols. Definitive bibliographie raisonnée of the famous Enfer (private case) of the Bibliothèque Nationale, Paris. The
annotations contain much useful information on obscure writers, editors, and
publishers. Alphabetically arranged by title, with author index. 27. POTTER, CLARE. The Lesbian Periodicals Index. Tallahassee,
FL: Naiad Press, 1986. 413 pp. Comprehensive index of 42 U.S. lesbian
periodicals by author and subject (1947ff.). Does not include The Ladder (which
has its own index, included in the 1975 Arno Press reprint) or
"mixed" periodicals with substantial lesbian content, such as
Boston's Gay
Community News. 28. [ROSE, ALFRED.] "ROLF S. READE."
Registrum librorum eroticorum. London: privately printed, 1936.
2 vols. Ambitious, occasionally
disorganized and inaccurate list of 5,061 erotic works in major European
languages. A reprint appeared in 1965 (New York: Jack Brussel). 29. SEROYA, FLORA C., et al. Sex and Sex Education: A Bibliography. New York: Bowker, 1972.
336 pp. A well-balanced selection for the period, with some
annotation. Author, title, and analytic subject indexes. "Homosexuality
and Lesbianism" (pp. 94-104). 30. [SFEIR-YOUNIS, LOUIS F., ed]. Vital
Research on Homosexuality. Ann Arbor, MI: University Microfilms
International, 1982. 16 pp. List of 214 M.A. and Ph.D.
dissertations submitted to U.S. universities, 1936-82, and available in xerox
or microfilm editions. 31. SHARMA, UMESH D., and WILFRIED C. RUDY. Homosexuality:
A Selected Bibliography. Waterloo, Ont.: Waterloo Lutheran
University, 1970. 114 pp. A conscientious effort in its
time, now largely obsolete. 32. SHORE, DAVID A. An Annotated Resource Guide to Periodicals in Human
Sexuality.
Chicago: The author, 1978. 38 pp. Discusses 53 periodicals. 33. SLEUTJES, MARTIEN (ed.). Catalogus van Leeuwen Bibliotheek: Historische
Bibliotheek van de N.V.I.H.-C.O.C. Amsterdam:
N.V.I.H.-C.O.C., 1983. 123 pp. Catalogue of the collections of
the leading Dutch homosexual organization (ca. 2177 titles). 34. SURGEON GENERAL'S OFFICE. UNITED STATES ARMY. Index-Catalogue
of the Library. Washington, D.C.: Government Printing Office,
1880-1955. 58 vols, in 4 series. Contains references to medical
and psychiatric books and articles in many languages, some not noticed
elsewhere. See "Sexual Instinct
..." as well as "Homosexuality." 35. TASK FORCE ON LESBIAN AND GAY
ISSUES. An Annotated Bibliography of Lesbian and Gay Readings. New York:
Council on Social Work Education, 1983. 41 pp. About selected 350 entries,
almost all annotated. Chiefly nonfiction with a social-science emphasis, but
including a few novels and poetry collections. 36.
ULRICHS, KARL HEINRICH.
"Argonauticus." Zastrow und die Urninge des pietistischen,
ultramontanen und freidenkenden Lagers, Leipzig: Serbe, 1869.
159 pp. This pamphlet, ninth in the
writer's series on Uranian love, concludes with the first known attempt at a
separate bibliography on homosexuality (pp. 155-58). The list
("Schriften über Urningsliebe") begins with Ulrichs first eight
pamphlets, followed by 27 works in ancient and modern European languages.
This bibliography is not included in reprints of the pamphlet. 37.
WEIGEL, ADOLF. Bibliographisches
Verzeichnis der Bibliotheken von Professor Dr. Paul H. Brandt and Baron
Werner v. Bleichroder. Leipzig: The author, 1930. The first half of this book
catalogues the scholarly library of Paul H. Brandt ("Hans Licht";
1875-1929), the great German expert on homosexuality in classical antiquity. 38. WEINBERG, MARTIN S., and ALAN P. BELL (eds.). Homosexuality:
An Annotated Bibliography. New York: Harper and Row, 1972. 550
pp. This large work, compiled under the auspices of the Kinsey Institute of
Indiana University, provides detailed but uncritical abstracts for 1,263
books, pamphlets, and articles published in the English language from 1940 to
1968. The book stresses psychiatric, medical, and social-science
contributions (many harshly negative), of which only a selection is given in
this
Guide. This compilation, which is conscientiously done within
its own terms of reference, will serve to reconstruct th»e climate of opinion
prevailing in the United States and Britain through the late 1960s. For reasons that have not yet
been fully explained, the modern approach to the study of homosexual
behavior—its etiology, cultural history, psychology, and sociology—
originated in the 19th century, primarily in Germany. Independent scholars
such as Hoessli and Ulrichs, very much aware of their outsider status, delved deeply into
the history of the subject. Their accomplishments laid the foundations for
the Berlin Scientific-humanitarian Committee, begun in 1897 with the dual aim
of promoting legal reform and knowledge. The 19th century also saw the rise
of the modern psychiatric approach to the subject. (For Freudian
psychoanalysis, see XVII.B-C.) 39. ALETRINO, ARNOLD. "Uranisme et dégénérescence," Archives d'Anthropologie Criminelle, 23 (1908), 633-67. An early sympathetic overview by a Dutch physician and novelist (1858-1916), who concludes that "degeneracy and innate homosexuality are no more closely linked than degeneracy and heterosexuality." The belief that homosexuality can occur in normal individuals was first enunciated by Aletrino in "Over uranisme en het laatste werk van Raffalovich (Marc André)," Psychiatrische en Neurologische Bladen 1 (1897), 351-65, 452-83. See Maurice van Lieshout, "Stiefkind der natuur: Het homobeeld bij Aletrino en Von Römer," Homojaarboek, 1 (1981), 75-105. 40.
BLOCH, IWAN. Das Sexualleben unserer
Zeit in seinen Beziehungen zur modernen Kultur. Berlin: Marcus, 1907. 822 pp. An early synthesis of the whole field of sexology by a Berlin dermatologist and polymath (1872-1922). There is an English translation by M. Eden Paul, The Sexual Life of Our Time in Its Relations to Modern Civilization (London: William Heinemann, 1908; 790 pp.); see Chapter 19, "The Riddle of Homosexuality" (pp.487-535) and Chapter 20, "Pseudo-Homosexuality" (pp. 537-54). Among the many learned works Bloch published, his masterwork is probably Der Ursprung der Syphilis (Jena: Fischer, 1901-11; 2 vols.). Bloch sometimes wrote under the pseudonym "Eugen Dühren." 41. BLÜHER, HANS. Die Rede des
Aristophanes: Prolegomena zu einer Soziologie des Menschengeschlechts. Hamburg:
Kala-Verlag, 1966. 166 pp. An attempt, written towards the end of his life,
by the right-wing German homosexual theoretician (1888-1955), to summarize
his ideas. Blüher is best known for his stress on the role of male bonding in
the formation of states, as seen in his: Die Rolle der Erotik in der männlichen Gesellschaft (Jena:
Diederichs, 1917-18; 2 vols.). See Richard Mills in Gay Sunshine, no. 41-43
(1980, 41-45. 42. BURTON, RICHARD, SIR. "Terminal Essay, Part IV,
Social Conditions—Pederasty," in The Book of the Thousand Nights and
a Night (London: privately printed, 1886), vol. 10, pp. 205-54. In this learned essay, the
English diplomat and orientalist (1821-90) contends that there exists a
"sotadic zone" between the thirtieth and forty-third degrees, north latitude, within which homosexual behavior is popular and
endemic. For some glosses on this text, see Stephen W. Foster, "The
Annotated Burton," in: Louie Crew (ed.), The Gay Academic
(Palm Springs, CA: ETC, 1978), pp. 92-101. There is a biography, not
altogether satisfactory, by Fawn M. Brodie, The Devil Drives: A Life of Sir
Richard Burton (London: Penguin Books, 1971; 505 pp.). 43. CARPENTER, EDWARD. Homogenic Love and Its Place in a
Free Society. Manchester: Labour Press, 1894. 51 pp. An early defense of the dignity
of homosexual love by an English socialist and feminist (1844-1929). This
book was followed by several other notable publications, including Ioläus:
An Anthology of Friendship (London: Sonnenschein, 1902; 190 pp;
the third edition of 1920 was reissued by Pagan Press, New York, in 1982); The
Intermediate Sex: A Study of Some Transitional Types of Men and Women
(London: Sonnenschein, 1908; 175 pp.); Intermediate Types among Primitive
Folk (London: George Allen and Unwin, 1918; 185 pp.). The
fullest account of his life is: Tsu- shichi Tsuzuki, Edward
Carpenter... (Cambridge: Cambridge University Press, 1980; 237
pp.). See also:
A Bibliography of Edward Carpenter (Sheffield: Sheffield
Central Libraries, 1949; 83 pp.); and Jonathan Cutbill, The
Writings of Edward Carpenter ... (London: Gay's the Word, 1980;
9 pp.). 44. CHEVALIER, JULIEN. Une maladie de personnalité:
l'inversion sexuelle: psycho-physiologie, sociologie, tératologie,
aliénation mentale, psychologie morbide, anthropologie, médecine judiciaire.
Lyon: Storck, 1893. 520 pp. A major early work on sexual inversion, which
treats it as a chief symptom of a hereditary neuro-psychopathic condition
that constitutes neither a distinct disease entity nor an instinctive
monomania. It is innate, appears from earliest childhood, is stable, is
accompanied by a significant phenomenology of mental or nervous
disturbances, and causes irrestistible impulses. The book is an expanded
version of an earlier work: De l'inversion de l'instinct sexuel au point de vue médico-légal (Paris: 0. Doin, 1885;
168 pp.). 45. ELLIS, HAVELOCK. Sexual Inversion. New
York: Arno Press, 1975. 299 pp. The noted English sexologist
and moralist (1859-1939) viewed homosexuality sympathetically, as a
congenital variation. This issue reprints the first English edition (London:
1897), which is quite rare. The book was actually first published in German
as translated by Alfred Kurella: Das konträre Geschlechtsgefühl
(Leipzig: Georg Wigand, 1896; 308 pp.), a version which bore the name of
Ellis's collaborator, John Addington Symonds, removed in subsequent issues at
the behest of Symonds's heirs. Claude Courouve, in: Gay
Books Bulletin, no. 5 (1981), 23-25; and in:
Cabirion, no. 12 (1985), 30-31. 52. GUYON, RENÉ. Etudes
d'éthique sexuelle. Saint- Denis: Dardaillon, 1929-38. 6 vols. Of the ten volumes originally
projected by the French jurist and adviser to the Thai government, only the
first six appeared. Guyon sought to work out the full implications of the
distinction between the sexual instinct and the reproductive function. Two
parts have been translated into English: The Ethics of Sexual Acts (New
York: Knopf, 1934; 383 pp.); and Sexual Freedom (New
York: Knopf, 1939; 344 pp.). 53.
HEIMSOTH, KARL-GUENTHER. Hetero- und Homophilie: eine
neuorientierende An- und Einordnung der Erscheinungsbilder, der
"Homosexualität" und der "Inversion: in Berücksichtigung der
sogenannten "normale Freundschaft" auf Grund der zwei verschiedenen
erotischen Anziehungsgesetze und der bisexuellen Grundeinstellung des Mannes. Dortmund: Schmidt und Andernach, 1924. 33 pp. Heimsoth, an eccentric right-wing
German theorist, is remembered for two things: (1) he introduced the term
homophilia; and (2) he advocated an astrological approach to homosexuality
(see
Charakterkonstellationen, Munich: Barth, 1928; 200 pp.). 54.
HILLER,
KURT.
Paragraph 175: Die Schmach des Jahrhunderts! Hannover: P. Steegmann, 1922. 133 pp. Essays and speeches by a German
essayist, publicist and advocate of gay rights (1885-1972), involved in
several avant-garde and independent left movements during the period. See his
autobiography:
Leben gegen die Zeit (Reinbek bei Hamburg: Rowohlt, 1969-73; 2
vols.); as well as Lewis D. Wurgaft, The Activists: Kurt Hiller and the
Politics of Action on the German Left, 1914-1933 (Transactions
of the American Philosophical Society, 67:8, 1977; 114 pp.). 55. HIRSCHFELD,
MAGNUS.
Die Homosexualität des Mannes und des Weibes. Berlin: Louis Marcus, 1914. 1067 PP. This encyclopedic, indeed
monumental work sums up the accomplishments of a decade and a half of intense
activity on the part of a team of scholars associated with the Jahrbuch
für sexuelle Zwischenstufen, published by the Berlin
Scientific-Humanitarian Committee. Of necessity dated in the legal and
psychiatric fields, it remains worth consulting for the historical and
cultural information it distills. Numerous footnotes and indexes of names,
and subjects. There are complete reprints of 1920 and 1985, but the 1963
issue (Köppern im Taunus: Dithmar) is to be avoided inasmuch as it is
drastically abridged. 60.
JÄGER,
GUSTAV.
Entdeckung der Seele. Second ed.
Leipzig: E. Guenther, 1880. 387 pp. On pp. 245-54 and 264-66 of this now forgotten book, which promoted an eccentric olfactory theory of sexual attraction, the new term "homosexual" was transmitted to the medical and general public. Thereby Jager's informant Kertbeny relayed his ideas and terms to the generation of activists that emerged about 1900. See also his: "Ein bisher ungedrücktes Kapitel über Homosexualität aus Der Entdeckung der Seele," JfsZ, 2 (1900), 53-125. 61.
[KERTBENY, KÄROLY MARIA.] Paragraph 143 des Preussischen
Strafgesetzbuches von 14, April 1851 und seine Aufrechterhaltung als
Paragraph 152 im Entwürfe eines Strafgesetzbuches für den Norddeutschen
Bund. Leipzig: Serbe, 1869. 88 pp. This pamphlet is a legal memoir
by an Austrian-Hungarian writer (born Karl Maria Benkert; 1824-1882), calling
for the abrogation of the penalty for male homosexual conduct in the
projected penal code. This text employed the word "homosexual" for
the first time. The
memoir was supplemented by another: Des Gemeinschädliche des Paragraph
143 des preussischen Strafgesetzbuches vom 14. April 1851 und daher seine
nothwendige Tilgung als Paragraph 152 im Entwürfe eines Strafgesetzbuches fur
den Norddeutschen Bund (Leipzig: Serbe, 1870; 75 pp.). The attribution to Kertbeny, though likely, is not
absolutely certain; see Manfred Herzer, "Kertbeny and the Nameless
Love,"
JH, 12 (1985), 1-26. 62.
KRAFFT-EBING,
RICHARD VON.
Psychopathia sexualis: eine klinisch-forensische Studie. Stuttgart: Enke, 1886. 110 pp. The book that made the Austrian psychiatrist (1840-1902) famous: the first best seller in modern sexology. Pages 56-72 and 102-08 deal with sexual inversion. The author revised it repeatedly so that it attained 414 pp. by the ninth ed. of 1894. The twelfth ed. (1903) was the last he personally supervised. There are several English versions; see, e.g., that of Franklin S. Klaf, Psychopathia Sexualis, with Especial Reference to the Antipathic Sexual Instinct: A Medico-Forensic Study (New York: Stein and Day, 1965; 434 pp.). See also his "Neue Studien auf dem Gebiete der Homosexualität," JfsZ, 3 (1901), 1-36. 63. LOMBROSO, CESARE, and GUGLIELMO FERRERO. La donna
delinquente: la prostituta e la donna normale. Turin: Roux,
1893. 640 pp. Lombroso (1836-1909) was an
influential Italian criminologist who advocated a congenital theory of
criminal behavior. He regarded same-sex behavior—in this case lesbianism—as
an aspect of degeneration. There is an English version: The
Female Offender (New York: Philosophical Library, 1958; 313
pp.). See also:
L'uomo delinquente in rapporto all'antropologia, alia giuris- prudenza e alia
psichiatria. Turin: Bocca, 1889; 3 195 pp. An essay by a Spanish novelist and literary critic (1882-1937),
intended as a complement to Gide's Corydon. See also his work of literary criticism: Homosexualism«) creador. (Madrid: Javier Morata, 1933; 383 pp.). 69. RAFFALOVICH, MARC ANDRÉ. Uranisme et unisexualité: étude sur différentes manifestations
de l'instinct sexuel. Lyon: Storck, 1896. 363 pp. This substantial work by the Anglo-French-Polish writer (1864-1934)
offers a positive overview of the subject, seeking to redirect the dominant
medical discourse onto a more humane path. Raffalovich, who frequently contributed
articles on contemporary events and theories to the French periodical Archives d'Anthropologie Criminelle, showed a strong interest in the biographies of noted
homosexuals. See Philip W. J. Healy, "Uranisme et Unisexualité: A Late Victorian View of Homosexuality," New Blackfriars, 59 (1978), 56-65; and "The Making of an
Edinburgh Salon," Journal of the Eighteen Nineties Society, no. 12-13 (1981-82), 25-39. 70.
RAMDOHR, FRIEDRICH WILHELM BASIL VON.
Venus urania: über die Natur der Liebe, über ihre Veredelung und
Verschönerung. Leipzig: Göschen, 1798. 4 vols. A diffuse work in the Sturm und Drang mode on love and
friendship, with some guarded comments on emotional relations between men as
a Platonic counterpart of heterosexual passion (vol. 3, 133-230). 71. SYMONDS, JOHN ADDINGTON. Male Love: A Problem in Greek
Ethics and other Writings. Edited by John Lauritsen. New York: Pagan Press, 1983.
162 pp. The Essay "A Problem in Greek Ethics," which has a
complicated publishing history, was written by Symonds in 1873 as a defense
of homosexuality from the ancient Greek example. This volume contains an
appreciation of Symonds (1840-93) by Robert Peters. See also Symonds, The Letters. Edited by Herbert M. Schueller and Robert Peters
(Detroit: Wayne State University Press, 1967-69; 3 vols.) and the Memoirs. Edited by Phyllis Grosskurth (New York: Knopf,
1985; 319 pp.). Some passages not otherwise easily available are found in
Percy Lancelot Babington, Bibliography of the Writings of John Addington
Symonds (London:
John Castle, 1925; 244 pp.). 72. TAMASSIA, ARRIGO.
"Sull’inversione dell'istinto sessuale," Rivista sperimentale di freniatria e di medicina
legale, 4 (1878), 93-117. In an analysis deriving from the writings of J. L. Casper, K. F. 0.
Westphal and R. von Krafft-Ebing, the Italian psychiatrist introduced the
term "sexual inversion" as the equivalent of Westphal's
"konträre Sexualempfindung," which earlier writers in the Romance
languages had paraphrased awkwardly at best. Inversion became the inter- key insight of universal bisexuality was further
developed by the psychoanalytic school. See the translation: Sex and
Character (New York: G. Putnam's Sons, 1906; 356 pp.). 77. WESTERMARCK, EDWARD. The Origin and Development of Moral
Ideas. London: Macmillan, 1906-08. 2 vols. See Chapter 43,
"Homosexual Love" (vol. 2, pp. 456-89). From his field work and
extensive reading, the Finnish anthropologist Westermarck (1862-1939)
produced a remarkable cross-cultural tableau, which implicitly demonstrated
the variability of same-sex relations. See Timothy Stroup (ed.), Edward
Westermarck: Essays on His Life and Works (Acta Philosophica
Fennica, Helsinki, 34, 1982; 299 pp.; bibliography of his writings, pp.
274-92). 78. WESTPHAL, KARL FRIEDRICH OTTO. "Die konträre Sexualempfindung: Symptom eines neuropathologischen (psychopathischen) Zustandes," Archiv für Psychiatrie und Nervenkrankheiten, 2 (1869), 73-108. This paper is the starting
point for the modern psychiatric approach. Westphal's observations are based
largely on one female case examined in the psychiatric ward of the Charite
(General Hospital) in Berlin, as well as a male transvestite. He introduced
the concept of "contrary sexual feeling"—later standardized as the
Latin- derived "sexual inversion." In the 1920s efforts were made
in various countries to diffuse sexual enlightenment—birth control, marriage
counseling, and a better understanding of what were still called sexual
anomalies. The Great Depression, beginning in 1929, crippled these efforts
toward popular education. At the same time Hitler's rise to power radically
transformed German sexology, undercutting its position of leadership in the
world. Emigration from the European continent brought many
psychoanalytically oriented psychiatrists to English-speaking countries,
particularly to the United States. With a few exceptions, these psychiatrists
generally regarded homosexuality as pathology, tended to acquiesce in the
indigenous penchant for "social engineering" as the answer to all
human problems, and helped to rationalize lingering religious opposition to
homosexuality. At the end of the 1940s the homosexual movement began in the
United States, making contact with the renascent but still stunted European
groups. Only later, in a changed social and intellectual climate, were open
homosexuals able to have a voice in their own self-defin- ition. 79. "ANOMALY." The
Invert. Second, enlarged ed. London: Baillere, Tindall and Cox,
1948. 290 pp. Reflections of a tormented English Catholic on a range of
homosexual behavior and ethics, intended as a plea for understanding. The
first half—originally published in 1927--is a valuable indicator of the
ambivalence then widespread in the English-speaking world. 80. ARTHUR, GAVIN. The Circle of Sex.
San Francisco: Pan-Graphic Press, 1962. 86 pp. A San Francisco homophile
writer uses the face of a clock to present twelve types of sexual
identity/orientation, ranging from exclusively heterosexual to exclusively
homosexual for both men and women. 81. CHESSER, EUSTACE. Odd Man Out: Homosexuality in Men and Women. London: Victor
Gollancz, 1959. 192 pp. A relatively liberal work for
its time, showing the influence of Kinsey's findings and the Wolfenden
Report. Chesser assumes that homosexual behavior is created by a faulty
child-parent relationship, but society has complicated the matter by
repressing deviant sexual behavior. See also: Edward Glover (ed.), The
Problem of Homosexuality (London: Institute for the Study of
Treatment of Delinquency, 1957; 40 pp.). 82. CHURCHILL, WAINRIGHT. Homosexual Behavior among Males: A Cross-Cultural
and Cross-Species Investigation, New York: Hawthorne Books, 1967.
349 PP. A synthesis by a homosexual
psychologist, discussing the history of homosexuality (including Christian
prohibitions) and theories of its causation. Churchill regards homosexual
responsiveness as a component of mammalian sexuality, increasing as the
evolutionary scale is ascended. Decries the sex-negativism ("eroto-
phobia" and "homoerotophobia") that our civilization has
enshrined in its legislation. 83. FISHER, PETER. The Gay Mystique: The Myth and Reality of Male
Homosexuality.
New York: Stein and Day 1972. 258 pp. A representative document of
the gay-liberation ferment following the Stonewall Rebellion in 1969,
discussing such matters as variations in gay-male lifestyles, civil rights,
and self-esteem. See also: John Murphy, Homosexual Liberation: A Personal
View (New York: Praeger, 1971; 182 pp.). 84. GROSS, ALFRED A. Strangers in Our Midst: Problems of
the Homosexual in American Society. Washington, DC: Public
Affairs Press, 1962. 182 pp. Humane views for the time of
the Director of the George W. Henry Foundation, New York. Criticizes the
police and the church for their tendencies to condemn rather than to
understand, but holds that homosexuals need psychotherapy for | their "disease." See also Gross's
reminiscences of his career: "American Experiment," Man and
Society: Journal of the Albany Trust, no. 10 (Winter 1966),
12-22. 85. KARLEN, ARNO. Sexuality and Homosexuality: A New View. New York: W. W.
Norton, 1971. 666 pp. Parts 1 and 2 (pp. 1-235) are chiefly concerned with
historical data, from ancient Mesopotamia to the present. The remainder of
the work presents case studies and interviews, framed by questionable
psychoanalytic interpretations. While this large book is poorly organized
and often intrusively judgmental, so that it must be used with caution, it
does contain many references ("Critical Bibliography," pp. 619-46).
See Geoff Puterbaugh, "The Mind of Arno Karlen," Gay
Books Bulletin, no. 8 (1982), 20-22. 86. MAGEE, BRYAN. One in Twenty: A Study of Homosexuality in Men and
Women.
London: Seeker and Warburg, 1966. 192 pp. BBC journalist's account of
homosexual behavior in Great Britain and the Netherlands, with discussions of
psychiatric attitudes, social patterns, and the legal situation. 87. MERCER, JESSIE DECAMARRON. They Walk in Shadow: A Study of Sexual Variations
with Emphasis on the Ambisexual and Homosexual Components and Our
Contemporary Sex Laws. New York: Comet Press Books, 1959. 573 pp. Turgid presentation of
biological, psychological, medical, socio-moral and legal aspects of sexual
variation. Commends the Wolfenden Report. 88. MIRABET I MULLOY, ANTONI. Homosexualidad hoy. Barcelona:
Editorial Herder, 1985. 490 pp. Comprehensive, positive work,
reviewing (1) recent scientific literature; (2) the history of repression
from the classical era through the Inquisition to modern times; (3) the
history of the gay movement from the turn of the century onwards; (4) the
achievements of gay and lesbian organizations in Catalonia. 89. PLUMMER, DOUGLAS. Queer People: The Truth about
Homosexuals. London: W. H. Allen, 1963. 122 pp. A British homosexual describes
his own life as well as the difficulties faced by homosexuals in England in
the days prior to the law reform of 1967. 90. SAGHIR, MARCEL T. and ELI ROBINS. Male and Female Homosexuality: A Comprehensive Investigation. Baltimore:
Williams and Wilkins, 1973. 341 pp. Covers the whole area of male and female
homosexuality under a series of parallel chapter headings: childhood-
adolescent characteristics; sexual psychologic responses; homosexual
practices: statistical and behavioral considerations; heterosexual practices;
psychopathology; parental, home and family relationships; and sociological
considerations. Concludes that "treating homosexuality as a disease
and homosexuals as patients is neither scientifically tenable nor actually
feasible and practical." 91. SANDERS, DENNIS. Gay Source: A Catalog for Men. New York: Coward, McCann and
Geoghegan, 1977. 288 pp. A series of short pieces
coordinated to show the panorama of cultural, historical, lifestyle, and
political aspects of male homosexual experience. The lists of addresses of
organizations and the like are now largely out of date. 92. STEARN, JESS. The Sixth Man. Garden
City, NY: Doubleday, 1961. 286 pp. A heterosexual journalist
surveys the homosexual world in the Eisenhower-Kennedy era, covering places
of entertainment, professional interests, contacts, problems with the police
and blackmail, homosexual circles, aging, and homosexual types. 93. TRIPP, CLARENCE A. The Homosexual Matrix.
New York: McGraw-Hill, 1975. 314 pp. Stimulating, sometimes
controversial discussion of sexual behavior from a multi-disciplinary
perspective that owes much to the work of Alfred C. Kinsey. Strongly
criticizing psychoanalytic beliefs and therapy, Tripp offers his own theories
concerning the dynamics of sexual relationships and the conditions that
produce eroticization of stimuli. He seeks to distinguish homosexual behavior
as such from effeminacy and inversion. 94. WEINBERG, GEORGE. Society and the Healthy Homosexual.
New York: St. Martin's Press, 1972. 147 pp. Pro-homosexual arguments of a
heterosexual psychologist. Strongly condemning irrational antihomosexual
prejudice, Weinberg's book disseminated the term "homophobia." 95. WEST, DONALD J. Homosexuality Re-examined. Minneapolis, MN: University of
Minnesota Press, 1977. 359 pp. This volume—a revision of the
author's 1968 book,
Homosexuality—seeks to present an updated review of the
psychological, sociological, and popular literature concerning the factors
that determine sexual orientation, the place of homosexuals in society, and
the problems they may encounter. The point of view is that of a reasonable,
though somewhat old-fashioned psychiatric liberalism. See also his:
"Homosexuality and Lesbianism," British Journal of Psychiatry,
143 (1983), 221-26. 96. ZANE, DAVID. Oh! Downtrodden.
Roslyn Heights, NY: Libra Publishing, 1976. 774 pp. Autodidact's collage of quotation and opinion,
focusing in large part on the posited parallels of the
stigmatiz- ation of homosexuals, Jews, blacks, cripples, and the mentally
ill. The appearance of the first
Kinsey Report in 1948, fifteen years after the destruction of the Berlin
Institut fiir Sexualforschung, represents a major turning point in the study
of sex. The work of Kinsey and his associates placed the subject in a
positivistic and quantitative framework that enhanced their authority in the
Anglo- Saxon mind. The Report also showed that the incidence of homosexual
behavior was much greater than had been previously assumed, and that it could
no longer be regarded as a rare anomaly. Moreover, the publications of
Kinsey and his associates also contributed to a movement for homosexual law reform,
which was to triumph in England and Germany in the late 1960s, enjoying
considerable, though incomplete success in the United States. There was much
resistance to the Kinsey Reports (the second, female one having appeared in
1953) , and some serious flaws were detected.
However, no other research team succeeded in rivaling these monuments of
investigation. In the 1970s the prestige of the Kinsey publications served as
the pretext for a tribe of illegitimate offspring—the journalistic
"reports," which professed to offer large cross- sectional studies
of current sexual mores, but were often little more than gossip. 97. A BANCROFT, JOHN. Human Sexuality and Its Problems. New York: Churchill Livingston,
1983. 447 pp. cottish author attempts a digest of sexual research to 1980 for
"health professionals specially inter- ed in working with sexual
problems." Clinically ented, the book's main focus is on research data
and interpretation. 98. BEACH, FRANK A. (ed.). Human Sexuality
in Four Perspectives, Baltimore: Johns Hopkins Press, 1977. 330 pp. Eleven
well-coordinated papers surveying the state of the question from the
developmental, sociological, physiolog¬ical, and evolutionary points of view.
See esp. "Homosexuality" by Martin Hoffman (pp. 164-89) 99. BELL, ALAN P., and MARTIN S.
WEINBERG. Homosexualities:
A Study of Diversity among Men and Women, New York: Simon and
Schuster, 1978. 505 pp. This ambitious study, intended as a complement to the
two masterworks of A. C. Kinsey et al. (see below), examines the various ways
individuals have made social and psychological adjustments to their
homosexuality. The monograph is based on interviews conducted in the San
Francisco Bay area with 1500 individuals (including black men and women,
groups omitted from the two Kinsey studies) in a project supported by the
National Institute of Mental Health. The book has attracted criticism on
several grounds: (1) the limitation to San Francisco makes extrapolation to
the rest of North America problematic; (2) interviewing standards are
unclear; (3) the proposed typology of specific kinds of partnerships or
lifestyles— close-coupled, open-coupled, functional, dysfunctional, and
asexual—is of uncertain value. 100. BELL, ALAN P., MARTIN S. WEINBERG, and SUE KIEFER HAMMERSMITH. Sexual
Preference: Its Development in Men and Women. Bloomington:
Indiana University Press, 1981. 242 pp. Like the previous work, this monograph
appears under the sponsorship of the Alfred C. Kinsey Institute for Sexual
Research, Indiana University. Reviewing the existing literature, the authors
conclude that there is no significant correlation between early family
experience and adult sexual preference and therefore that sexual preference
must be controlled essentially by biological-constitutional factors. In
addition to the expository volume, there is also a Statistical Appendix
(Blooming- ton: Indiana University Press, 1981; 321 pp.). 101. DOWNEY, LOIS. "Intergenerational Change in Sex Behavior: A
Belated Look at Kinsey's Males," Archives of Sexual Behavior,
9 (1980), 307-17. Five generations of respondents
(5,460 white males) were compared in terms of total frequency of sexual
behavior. Although homosexual contacts accounted for a constant percentage of
unmarried males over the five generations, more males in each generation were
actively engaging in homosexual activity. 102. GAGNON, JOHN H. "Sex Research and Social Change," Archives
of Sexual Behavior, 4 (1975), 111-41. Argues that since the turn of
the century there has been a close relationship between sex research and
general social conditions. While the biological tradition is still strong
today, new emphasis is being placed on a cognitive-social learning
perspective. 103. GEBHARD, PAUL, and ALAN B. JOHNSON. The Kinsey Data: Marginal Tabulations of the 1938-1963 Interviews
Conducted by the Institute of Sex Research. Philadelphia: W. B. Saunders, 1979. 642 pp. Permits the reexamination of
certain questions covered in the 1948 and 1953 volumes. Tables 432-569
contain data pertinent to homosexual behavior. Responds in part to questions
posed by William G. Cochran et al., Statistical Problems in the Kinsey
Report (Washington, DC: American Statistical Association, 1954;
338 pp.). 97. GIESE, HANS. Der homosexuelle Hann in der Welt. Second ed. Stuttgart: F. Enke, 1964. 228 pp. Liberal views, conditioned by existentialist philosophy, of a closeted gay sex researcher (1920-70), who worked chiefly in Hamburg. See his: "Differences in the Homosexual Relations of Man and Woman," International Journal of Sexology, 7 (1954), 225-27. A contemporary synthesis is Rudolf Klimmer, Die Homosexualität als biologischsoziologische Zeitfrage (Hamburg: Kriminalistik, Verlag für kriminalistische Fachliteratur, 1965; 487 pp.). 98. HAEBERLE, ERWIN J. The Sex Atlas: A New Illustrated
Guide. New York: Seabury Press, 1978. 509 pp. A San Francisco researcher's
handbook of the whole range of human sexuality, with positive treatment of
homosexual behavior. 99. HITE, SHERRY. The Hite Report: A Nationwide Study
on Female Sexuality. New York, NY: Macmillan, 1976. 438 pp. Summarizes the responses of
3000 American women to a questionnaire concerning their own sexuality. This
book launched the fashion for a series of pop avatars of Kinsey. As samples
they are almost worthless, but they reveal much of changing fashions--in this
instance Hite's own feminist concepts of sexuality. See also: The Hite
Report on Male Sexuality (New York: Knopf, 1981; 1129 pp. ) . 100. HUNT, MORTON. Sexual Behavior in the 1970s. New
York: Playboy, 1974. 388 pp.
Journalist's effort to update Kinsey's findings; as such, it is
methodologically inadequate. See pp. 303-27. 101. JAY, KARLA, and ALLEN YOUNG. The Gay Report. New
York: Summit Books, 1979. 861 pp. Modeled on The Hite
Report and its sequel, this compendium of the results of
questionnaires submitted by gay men and lesbians is entertaining and
sometimes instructive. It does not reflect a serious effort to obtain a
balanced sample. See also: James Spada, The Spada Report: The Newest Survey
of Gay Male Sexuality (New York: New American Library, 1979;
339 pp.). 102. KATCHADOURIAN, HERANT A. (ed.). Human Sexuality: A Comparative and Developmental
Perspective. Berkeley: University of
California Press, 1979. 358 pp. Seventeen new papers by
established sex researchers, addressed to lay readers and summarizing the
state of research from evolutionary, biological, psychological, and
sociological perspectives. 110. KINSEY, ALFRED C., et al.
"Concepts of Normality and Abnormality in Sexual Behavior," in: P.
H. Hoch and J. Zubin (eds.). Psychological Development in Health
and Disease. New York: Grune and Stratton, 1949, pp. 11-32.
Surveys the historical origins of sexual taboos as shapers of current notions
of "unnatural acts." Examining recent data,
concludes that prevailing concepts of normality and abnormality in human
sexual behavior are simply moral evaluations. On Kinsey's (1894-1956) life,
see Wardell Pomeroy,
Dr. Kinsey and the Institute for Sex Research (New York: Harper
and Row, 1972; 479 pp.). 111. KINSEY, ALFRED C., WARDELL. B. POMEROY, CLYDE E. MARTIN,
and PAUL. GEBHARD. Sexual
Behavior in the Human Female. Philadelphia: W. B. Saunders,
1953. 841 pp. This sequel to Kinsey's first
great study evaluates data obtained in interviews with some 6,000 white
women. Sexual orientation is presented on a scale similar to the one used in
the first volume; however, one to three percent of the sample were found to
be essentially nonsexual. Information is provided in relation to age, marital
status, educational level attained, parental occupation, class, decade of birth, age at onset of adolescence, rural-urban
background, religion, techniques, and social significance. The volume, which
benefits from some methodological refinements over the first one, contains a
comparison of male and female response with respect to anatomy, physiology,
psychological factors, neural mechanisms, and hormonal factors. 112. KINSEY, ALFRED C., WARDELL B. POMEROY, A. and CLYDE E. MARTIN. Sexual
Behavior in the Human Male. Philadelphia: W. B. Saunders, 1948.
804 pp. Monumental presentation of data gathered by the Institute of Sex
Research, Indiana University, through interviews with 5,300 white males,
concerning sexual outlets and the factors affecting the differential
frequency of these various outlets. Sexual orientation is treated in the
famous 0-6 scale, ranging from exclusive heterosexuality to exclusive
homosexuality. Apart from its scientific quality, the book had a major impact
on the concept of sex in the United States and throughout the world. The
finding that 37% of American men had had homosexual experience to orgasm
meant that the behavior could no longer be viewed as a rare and exotic
deviation, but was a major facet of sexual experience. Some corrections to
the data regarding homosexuality appear in Paul H. Gebhard et al., Sex
Offenders (New York: Harper and Row, 1965; 875 pp.). 113.
KRONHAUSEN,
EBERHARD, and PHYLLIS KRONHAUSEN. Sex Histories of American
College Men. New York: Bal-
lantine, 1960. 313 pp. Popularized account of the
varieties of sexual behavior of American college men based upon personal
histories of about 200 students at an all-male college. Findings,
including those for homosexuality, correspond with those of Kinsey. 114. LESTER, DAVID. Unusual Sexual Behavior: The Standard Deviations.
Springfield, IL: Charles Thomas, 1975. 242 pp. Summarizes a large body of
research that tends to attribute sexual variation either to biology or to
family circumstances. See pp. 37-123. 115. MASTERS, WILLIAM H., and VIRGINIA E. JOHNSON. Human
Sexual Response, Boston: Little, Brown, 1966. 366 pp. This book, produced at Masters
and Johnson's Reproductive Biology Research Foundation, St. Louis, made the
couple famous. They supplemented Kinsey by producing more detailed accounts
of the physiology of the sexual act. This volume contains little on
homosexuality, for which see their Homosexuality in Perspective
(Boston: Little, Brown, 1979; 450 pp.). 116. ROBINSON, PAUL. The Modernization of Sex: Havelock Ellis, Alfred
Kinsey, William Masters and Virginia Johnson. New York: Harper and Row, 1976. 200
pp. Using an intellectual-history
approach, Robinson seeks to identify the assumptions, biases, tensions, and
modes of reasoning that characterize these four researchers, who are probably
the most influential ones produced by the English-speaking world. 117. SCHMIDT, GUNTER. "Allies and Persecutors: Science and Medicine in
the Homosexuality Issue," JH, 10:3-4 (1984),
127-40. Traces research from the
third-sex theory at the beginning of the present century to some current
hormonal approaches, concluding that the results can be used against
homosexuals and, in fact, have been. This category comprises several
types of publications: (a) acts or proceedings of scholarly congresses, often
containing material of diverse scope and quality; (b) essay collections
presenting new material commissioned to create a mosaic picture of a subject;
(c) assemblages of reprinted articles or excerpts (sometimes termed
"casebooks"); (d) collected essays by a particular author. Some
collections pertaining to lesbianism appear in the following chapter (II). 118. ALBEE, GEORGE, et al. Promoting Sexual Responsib- ilitj and Preventing Sexual Problems, Hanover, NH: University Press of New England, 1983, 440 pp.
Twenty-two papers from a 1981 conference generally supporting the claim that
the sexist nature of our society is the root cause of sexual problems, 119, BARNEY, NATALIE CLIFFORD. Aventures de l'esprit. New York: Arno Press, 1975, 278 pp. Reprint of the 1929 Paris
edition of essays by the American expatriate lesbian writer on Djuna Barnes,
Romaine Brooks, Colette, Max Jacob, Marcel Proust, Renee Vivien and others. 120, BENOÎT, LUC (ed.). Sortir. Montreal: L'Aurore, 1978. 303 pp. Twenty-two essays and creative
pieces on sexual variation and liberation by Québécois writers, some homosexual and
some heterosexual. 121,
BIANCHI,
HERMANUS, et al. Der
homosexuelle Nächste. Hamburg: Furche
Verlag, 1963. 288 pp. Nine papers by Dutch and German writers generally sympathetic to homosexuality in the spheres of sociology, law, religion, etc. Incorporates material from the Dutch collection De homoseksuele naaste (Baarn: Bosch & Keuning, 1961; 158 pp.). See also Theodor Bovet (ed.), Probleme der Homophilie in medizinischer, theologischer und juristischer Sicht (Bern: Haupt, 1965); and Wilhart Siegmar Schlegel (ed.), Der grosse Tabu (Munich: Rutten und Loening, 1967), 122, BULLOUGH, VERN L. (ed.). The Frontiers of Sex Research.
Buffalo, NY: Prometheus Books, 1979. 190 pp. Eighteen essays by American
scholars and activists on sex roles, normality, transvestism, transsexualism,
homosexuality, etc. 123, CHARDANS, JEAN-LOUIS. History and Anthology of
Homosexuality—Histoire et anthologie de l'homosexualité. Paris: Centre d'Etudes et de Documentation Pédagogiques, 1970. 381 pp. Amateurish but extensive gathering of texts given parallel in
English and French; illustrated, 124, COOK, MARK, and GLENN WILSON (eds.). Love and Attraction: An
International Conference. Oxford: Pergamon Press, 1979. 554 pp. Papers on a wide variety of
topics. See pp. 258-60, 263, 337, 381-86, 387-93, 497-535. 125, CORY, DONALD WEBSTER (pseud, of Edward Sagarin), (ed.).
Homosexuality in Cross-Cultural Perspective, New York: Julian
Press, 1956. 440 pp. Reprints older classic essays
and chapters from books on homosexuality by such writers as Richard Burton,
Edward Carpenter, Alfred C. Kinsey,
Paolo Mantegazza, Voltaire, and Edward Westermarck. 119. COUROUVE, CLAUDE, and ROBERT KOZERAWSKI. Fragments. Paris:
The authors, 1980-81. 4 brochures. Collects about 200 pithy texts
on the question of same-sex love, from Aragon to Zola. 120. CREW, LOUIE.
The Gay Academic. Palm Springs, CA: ETC, 1978. 444 pp. A collection of twenty-five
essays exploring the status of homosexuals in the academic community and
their contributions to traditional academic disciplines, including
psychology, literature, history, religion, and philosophy. 127. D'ARCANGELO, ANGELO. Inside the Sexual Revolution. New York:
Lancer Books, 1971. 381 pp. Lightweight articles and essays
by a gay journalist who captured some of the brash optimism of the
"Stonewall mood" in New York City. 128. DUYVES, MATTIAS, et al. (eds.). Among Men, among Women: Sociological and Historical
Recognition of Homosocial Arrangements. Amsterdam: University of Amsterdam,
1983. 611 pp. Proceedings of an international
conference held in Amsterdam on June 22-26, 1983, sponsored by the Gay
Studies and Women's Studies Programs at the University of Amsterdam. All
texts are in English. In addition to loose papers issued as supplements,
however, there is a selection of fourteen revised texts in Dutch: Onder
mannen, onder vrouwen: studies van homosociale emancipatie
(Amsterdam: SUA, 1984). 129. GAGNON, JOHN H., and WILLIAM SIMON (eds.). Sexual Deviance. New
York: Harper and Row, 1967. 310 pp. With one exception, this is a
collection of articles reprinted from other sources. Parts 3 and 4 contain
pertinent articles by Nancy Achilles, Gagnon and Simon, Evelyn Hooker,
Maurice Leznoff, Albert J. Reiss, and William A. Westley. 130. GAY, A. NOLDER (pseud, of William Koelsche). The View
from the Closet: Essays on Gay Life and Liberation, 1973-1977.
Boston: Union Park Press, 1978. 108 pp. Urbane commentary on homosexual
life and history by a Boston scholar and newspaper columnist. 131. GAY ACADEMIC UNION (ed.). Universities and the Gay Experience: Proceedings of a Conference. New York: Gay Academic Union,
1974. New York: Gay Academic Union, 1974. 105 pp. Addresses, papers and
discussions from the first GAU Conference held at John Jay College, New York,
on Thanksgiving Weekend, 1973, and covering such topics as coming out, the history of science, literature, and religion.
The acts of succeeding annual GAU conferences were not published as such,
though some individual papers were printed in the periodicals Gai Saber and
Gay Books Bulletin. 132. HAHN, PIERRE (ed.). Français encore un effort: l'homosexualité et sa
répression: Choix de textes. Paris: Martineau, 1970. 215 pp. Anthology of short texts from
ancient Greece to the present, with commentary by Hahn, a French gay
activist. 133. HAIRE, NORMAN (ed.). World League for Sexual Reform: Congress, London,
1929. London: Kegan Paul, Trench, Trubner and Co., 1930. 670 pp. Papers covering a wide spectrum
of subjects addressed by the sexual reform movement on the eve of the Great
Depression. 134. A Homosexual Emancipation Miscellany, c. 1835- 1952. New
York: Arno Press, 1975. 172 pp. Contains the poem "Don
Leon," falsely attributed to Lord Byron, as well as documents by Magnus
Hirschfeld, the British Society for the Study of Sex Psychology, and the
American gay rights pioneers Henry Gerber and Henry Hay. 135. ITALIAANDER, ROLF (ed.). Weder Krankheit
noch Verbrechen: Plädoyer für eine Minderheit. Hamburg: Gala Verlag,
1969. 332 pp. Collection of short pieces by well-known German and foreign
writers, which are generally supportive of homosexual rights, accompanied by
historical and biographical notes. 136. JAY, KARLA, and ALLEN YOUNG (eds). Out of the Closets: Voices of Gay
Liberation. New York: Douglas Books, 1972. 403 pp. Collection of short articles,
many experiential and militant, representing the
radical phase of gay liberation immediately following the Stonewall
Rebellion. See also their other collections: After You're Out (New
York: Links, 1975; 296 pp.); and Lavender Culture (New
York: Harcourt, Brace, Jovanovich, 1979; 493 pp.). 137. JOHANSEN, ANETTE, and JORGEN JOHANSEN. Rapport om homofile. Copenhagen:
Lindhart og Ringhof, 1973. 187 pp. Essays and interviews on social
conditions of homosexuals. 138. KEPNER, JAMES. A Selection of Gay Liberation Essays: 1953-1973.
Torrance, CA: Kepner, 1973. 40 pp. A group of articles by a senior
figure in the Los Angeles gay movement, reprinted mainly from ONE
Magazine, HELP/ Drummer, and the early
Advocate. 139. KLEINBERG, SEYMOUR. Alienated Affections: Being Gay in America.
New York: St. Martin's Press, 1980. 256 pp. Somewhat astringent essays
written from a radical-existentialist perspective by a New York City
professor, who was one of the founders of the Gay Academic Union. 140. KRICH, AARON M. (ed.). The Homosexuals: As Seen by
Themselves and Thirty Authorities. New York: Citadel Press, 1954.
346 pp. Part 1 consists of individual
case histories of homosexuals and autobiographical accounts written by them.
Part 2 presents "an overview of major trends in treatment" by
physicians and psychoanalysts. This book is a characteristic document of a
period in which the views and experiences of "deviants" were
treated as meaningful only when interpreted and validated by judgmental
psychiatric authorities. 141. LORAINE, JOHN A. Understanding
Homosexuality: Its Biological and Psychological Bases. New York: American Elsevier, 1974. 217 pp. Nine articles treating such
topics as psychological, biological, and endocrinological factors in the
etiology of homosexuality; religious and legal aspects; and the current role
of homophile organizations. 142. MARMOR, JUDD (ed.) Sexual Inversion: The Multiple Roots of Homosexuality.
New York: Basic Books, 1965. 358 pp. Collection of papers in the
fields of history, comparative zoology, genetics, endocrinology, sociology,
anthropology, law, psychology, and psychoanalytic psychiatry. This
collection, still dominated by psychiatric attitudes, should be compared with
its more liberal successor: Judd Marmor (ed.), Homosexual Behavior: A Modern
Reappraisal (New York: Basic Books, 1980; 416 pp.). 143. REES, JOHN TUDOR, and HARLEY V. USILL (eds.). They
Stand Apart: A Critical Survey of the Problems of Homosexuality.
London: William Heinemann, 1955. 220 pp. A collection of articles from
diverse points of view on the legal situation, the nature of homosexuality,
whether it is harmful, and its moral status. 144. RUITENBEEK, HENDRIK M. (ed.). The Problem of Homosexuality in
Modern Society. New York: E. P. Dutton, 1963. 304 pp. Reprints sixteen papers,
several of them (such as those by George Devereux, Evelyn Hooker, and Albert
J. Reiss) classics, generally in psychiatry and the social sciences. 145.
SCHWULENREFERAT
IM ALLGEMEINEN STUDENTENAUSSCHUSS DER FU BERLIN (ed.). Dokumentation der Vortragsreihe "Homosexualität
und Wissenschaft." pp. Papers
by fifteen authors presented at the Free University, Berlin, on law,
literature, politics, and the history and future of the gay movement in
Germany. 146. WARREN, CAROL (ed.). Sexuality: Encounters, Identities, and Relationships.
Beverly Hills: Sage, 1976. 136 pp. Reprints six papers on such
topics as massage parlors; the interrelation between sex, situation, and
strategies in the pairing ritual of homo ludens; secrecy in the lesbian
world; bisexuality in men; family attitudes and Mexican male homosexuality;
and meanings and process in erotic aggression. 147. WELTGE, RALPH W. (ed.). The Same Sex: An Appraisal of Homosexuality. Philadelphia: Pilgrim Press, 1969. 164 pp. Eight of the essays in
this book discuss homosexuality (esp. in relation to religion, ethics, and
the law) fairly neutrally, while three reflect the point of view of the
emerging gay movement. 148.
ZIEGLER,
ALEXANDER.
Kein Recht auf Liebe: Reportagen, Aufsätze, Stücke. Frankfurt am Main: Fischer,
1978. 278 pp. Crusading essays on pederasty,
homosexuals in the work place and other subjects by a Swiss gay novelist. F. ENCYCLOPEDIAS AND DICTIONARIES Until quite recently general
encyclopedias, whose publishers were aware that the volumes were destined
for the shelves of secondary school and college libraries, discretely shunned
the whole subject of homosexuality or dismissed it with a few evasive or
uninformative remarks. Hence the topic was treated only in specialized
reference works, which were, however, usually compiled by individuals
working in the tradition of the sexual science that had emerged in the early
twentieth century. Their treatments summarize what was then known (or simply
believed) by the major investigators of homosexual behavior and psychology. 149. ELLIS, ALBERT, and ALBERT ABARBANEL (eds.). The Encyclopedia of Sexual Behavior. New York: Hawthorn Books, 1961. 2 vols. Articles by various writers with a cross-cultural and international emphasis. While attitudes are often dated, the entries still convey useful information. Bibliographies; index. 150.
GIESE, HANS. Wörterbuch der Sexualwissenschaft. Bonn: Instituts-Verlag,
1952. 216 pp. Dictionary of sex research compiled by a
(closeted) West German homosexual scholar. 151. HAIRE, NORMAN (ed.). The Encyclopedia of Sexual Knowledge. New York: Coward McCann, 1934. 636 pp. Based in
large measure on material assembled in France by "Dr. Costler"
(Arthur Koestler). Haire, an Australian physician and leader of the sex
reform movement in the interwar period, was homosexual. 152.
HEGELER,
INGE, and STEN HEGELER. An ABZ of Love. New York: Medical Press of New York, 1963. 288 pp. Translation of a Danish work.
About 600 entries, with 120 drawings; emphasizes sexual techniques. 153.
MARCUSE,
MAX (ed.).
Handwörterbuch der Sexualwissenschaft. Bonn: A. Marcuse und E. Weber, 1923. 481 pp. An encyclopedic dictionary
fusing sexological and psychiatric viewpoints. Contains several outstanding
articles by Hans Licht (Paul Brandt). 154. ROBINSON, VICTOR (ed.). Encyclopaedia Sexualis: A Comprehensive
Encyclopaedia-Dictionary of the Sexual Sciences. New
York: Digwall-Rock, 1936. 819 pp. Reflects European sex research
of the pre-1933 period, though many articles are written by Americans. In
addition to the usual entries, see "Elmira Reformatory, Sex in,"
"Hirschfeld, Magnus," and "Homosexual Twins." 155. SANTA VICCA, EDMUND F. The Treatment of Homosexuality in
Current Encyclopedias. Ann Arbor: University of Michigan, 1977.
323 pp. (unpublished dissertation). Treats mainly general
encyclopedias, rather than specialized ones. The emergence of gay and
lesbian studies has posed special problems for cataloguing and collection of
materials, some of which can be best solved in the special gay and lesbian
archives. As regards the profession, anecdotal evidence suggests that a high
proportion of male librarians are homosexual, but the actual incidence and
its sociopsychol- ogical grounding have not been elucidated. 156. BERMAN, SANFORD. The Joy of Cataloging.
Phoenix: Oryx Press, 1980. 242 pp. Heterodox and stimulating
reflections by a Minnesota librarian who has championed the cause of adapting
cataloguing practices to new social realities. 157. BROOKS, JOAN, and HELEN C. HOFFER (eds.). Sexual Nomenclature: A Thesaurus.
Boston: G. K. Hall, 1976. Computer printout of 2,000
descriptors (subject headings) and their hierarchies, as well as 250
cross-references from unused to used terms, documenting cataloguing practice
at the Kinsey Institute for Sex Research, Indiana University. 158. FRASER, JAMES A., and HAROLD A. AVERILL. Organizing an
Archives: The Canadian Gay Archives Experience.
Toronto: Canadian Gay Archives, 1983. 68 pp. (CGA Publication no. 8) Comprehensive, practical guide
to planning and running a gay/lesbian archive, presenting the CGA experience
and recommendations for use elsewhere. See also: Rick Bebout, "Stashing
the Evidence: The Canadian Gay Archives," Body Politic, no. 55
(August 1979), 21-22, 26. 159. GELLATLY, PETER. Sex Magazines in the Library Collection: A
Scholarly Study of Sex in Serials and Periodicals. New
York: Haworth Press, 1981. 142 pp. Twelve papers on an important
body of material not adequately addressed, as a rule, in libraries. Note esp.
Frederick McEnroe, "A Select Bibliography of Gay and Lesbian
Periodicals" (pp. 87-97). 160. GITTINGS, BARBARA. "Combatting the Lies in the Library," in:
Louie Crew (ed.),
The Gay Academic (Palm Springs: ETC, 1978), 107-20. Lively account of experiences
in the American Library Association's Task Force on Gay Liberation, which she
heads. See also the brochure published by this task force (subtitled: How to
Get Gay Materials into Libraries: A Guide to Library Selections Policies fy
the Non-Librarian): Stuart R. Miller, Censored, Ignored, Overlooked, Too
Expensive? (Philadelphia: ALA Gay Task Force, 1979; 10 PP-) 161. GRECO, STEPHEN, and CHARLES FABER. "In Search of Our History:
Archives, Libraries and Projects in History," Advocate, no. 330
(November 12, 1981), 22-27. On emerging institutions in New
York City, San Francisco, and Los Angeles. 162. HANCKEL, FRANCES, and JOHN CUNNINGHAM. "Can Young Gays Find
Happiness in YA Books?" Wilson Library Bulletin,
50 (1976), 528-34. Positive advice on selecting
fiction with gay themes and characters for library collections serving young
adults. Since this article was written,
there has been considerable improvement, both quantitatively and
qualitatively; see: Christine Jenkins and Julie Morris, A Look
at Gay- ness: An Annotated Bibliography of Gay Materials for Toung People.
Second ed. (Ann Arbor: Kindred Spirit Press, 1982; 19 pp.). 163. LEHMAN, J. LEE. "The Lesbian Herstory Archives," Advocate,
no. 264 (April 5, 1979), 14-17. Account of the formation of the
Archives in New York City in 1973, its scope, acquisitions, and cataloguing
practices. See also Beth Hodges, "Interview with Joan and Deborah of
the Lesbian Herstory Archives," Sinister Wisdom, no.11
(Fall 1979), 3-13; and no. 13 (Spring 1980), 101-05. Bibliographies and
information about acquisitions are published in Lesbian Herstory Archives News.
See also: Clair Potter, The Lesbian Periodicals Index
(Tallahassee, FL: Naiad, 1986; 413 pp.) 164. MICHEL, DEE.
Gay Studies Thesaurus. Revised ed. Princeton, NJ: The author,
1985. 76 pp. Contains a total of 1215 items,
of which 911 are preferred terms, to assist in "indexing and accessing
materials of relevance to gay culture, history, politics and psychology."
This work, with a male emphasis, may be complemented by the Lesbian
Periodicals Index Thesaurus and the Women's Studies Database. 165. TIMMONS, STUART. "Special Report: Gay/Lesbian Archives,"
Advocate, no. 447 (May 27. 1986), 30-33. More than sixty gay and lesbian
collections now exist. They share poor finances and a growing concern about
the preservation of their holdings. 166. WOLF, STEVE. "Sex and the Single Cataloguer," in: Celeste
West and Elizabeth Katz (eds.). Revolting Librarians.
San Francisco: Bootlegger Press, 1972, pp. 39-44. About prejudices in subject
headings and classification systems. In the same volume, see also Bianca
Guttag, "Homophobia in Library School" (pp. 37-38). The establishment of a large
and viable gay and lesbian press in North America has been a surprising and
welcome development of the post-Stonewall years—even
if the papers are more notable for their numbers than for sustained quality
of journalism. Pre-Hitler Germany offers some precedent, and currently there
are significant gay presses in France, the Netherlands, Australia and a few
other countries. A different topic is the treatment of homosexuality in the
mainstream press, as well as the newer media of radio and television. For a long time
these mainstream outlets drew a veil of silence over the whole matter. Once
this blackout was ended, they retained a real potential for stereotypical and
inadequate coverage. Concern for apparent imbalance has called into being
several homosexual groups to monitor coverage, especially in television—where
there has been some resentment at the appearance of what others regard as yet
another pressure group. 167. ANDERSON, SCOTT. "The Gay Press Proliferates—and So Do Its
Problems,"
Advocate, no. 282 (December 13, 1979), 19-23. This issue contains other relevant articles. 168. ARMSTRONG, DAVID. A Trumpet to Arms: Alternative Media in America.
Boston: South End Press, 1981. 359 pp. An illustrated account of the
rise of the "underground press" in the 1960s and 1970s. See esp.
pp. 230-53. 169. BRODY, MICHAL (ed.). Are We There Yet? A Continuing History of Lavender
Woman, A Chicago Lesbian Newspaper, 1971-1976. Iowa City: Aunt Lute, 1985. 188 pp. Reprints of articles
interspersed with interviews present a composite picture of the paper and its
times. 170. CHESMAN, ANDREA, and POLLY JOAN. Guide to Women's Publishing.
Paradise, CA: Dustbooks, 1978. 304 PP« Includes data on lesbian
presses, magazines, newspapers, literary-cultural journals, print shops,
bookstores, and organizations. 171. CLARKE, LIGE, and JACK NICHOLS. I Have More Fun with You Than
Anybody. New York: St. Martin's Press, 1972. 152 pp. Memoirs of the gay activist
lovers who edited the New York City Newspaper Gay. 172. COLLYER, ROBIN, et al. "The Body Politic Trial," Centerfold
(Toronto), (February-March 1979), 92-114. Account of the prosecution of
the distinguished Canadian gay monthly for printing an article on pedophilia.
Needless to say, the ongoing course of the trials is covered in editorials
and stories in
The Body Politic itself. 173. COON, EARL O. "Homosexuality in the News," Archives
of Criminal Dynamics, 2 (1957), 843-65. Purports to offer a method of
reading between the lines of news stories to detect homosexual situations
that were not explicitly mentioned in the press of that day.
GORZINE, HAROLD JAY. The Gay Press. St.
Louis: Washington University, 1977. 277 pp.
(unpublished dissertation) Careful study of selected runs
of gay newspapers.
A Gay News Chronology, January 1969-May 1975. New
York: Arno Press, 1975. 156 pp. Abstracts (562) of articles appearing in The New
York Times. May be supplemented for succeeding years by consulting The New
York Times Index.
"Gay News: How Good Are the Mainstream
Media?"
Advocate, no. 347 (July 22, 1982), 25-27, 54. Most gay reporters and editors
remain closeted, and thus a newsroom climate antagonistic to gays is allowed
to thrive and influence the choice and tone of stories.
GIROUARD, MICHEL. Je vis mon homosexualité. Montreal: Québécor, 1980. 224 pp. Autobiographical account of a
French-Canadian television personality.
GOULD, ROBERT E. "Homosexuality on
Tэlevision," Medical Aspects of Human Sexuality. 7
(October 1973), 116-27. An early article when offerings
were indeed meager. Lists of relevant television programs (of necessity
incomplete) may be found in William Parker, Homosexuality Bibliography:
Supplement, 1970-1975 (Metuchen, NJ: Scarecrow, 1977), pp.
274-76; and idem,
Homosexuality Bibliography: Second Supplement, 1976-1982
(Metuchen, NJ: Scarecrow Press, 1985), pp. 322-27.
GRIER, BARBARA, and
COLETTA REID (eds.). The Lavender Herring: Lesbian Essays from The
Ladder. Oakland, CA: Diana Press, 1976. 357 pp. Writings selected from the
leading lesbian monthly, The Ladder (1956-72), which was itself reprinted in its
entirety, with a new index, by Arno Press, New York, 1975.
HANSCOMBE, GILLIAN, and ANDREW LUMSDEN. Title
Fight: The Battle for Gay News. London: Brilliance Books, 1984.
264 pp. Account of the complex
maneuvers that resulted in the demise of Britain's chief gay newspaper.
HEMMINGS, SUSAN. "Horrifjic Practices: How
Lesbians Were Presented in the Newîspapers of 1978," in: Gay Left Collective (ed.),
Homosexuality: Power and Politics. London: Allison and Busby,
1980, pp. 157-71. In 1978 British newspapers
broke their habitual silence on lesbianism in a series of sensational
stories—on a lesbian Member of Parliament; on|artificial insemination; and
on a teacher.
HOFSESS, JOHN. "The Sexual Niggers," Content:
Canada's National News Media Magazine,(August 1977), 15,
18-19, 21-25. Surveys treatment of
homosexuals in major newspapers and magazines of Canada.
HOHMANN,
JOACHIM S. (ed.).
Der Eigene: Ein Blatt für männliche Kultur, Frankfurt am Main:
Foerster, 1981. 379 pp. Selection of articles, fiction
and illustrations from the German magazine, which appeared in Berlin—with
interruptions— from 1896 to 1931. See also the same editor's selection from
the Swiss magazine (1933-67) Der Kreis (Frankfurt
am Main: Foerster, 1980; 285 pp.)
HOWES, KEITH, and JULIAN MELDRIM.
Declaring an Interest: A Projected Catalogue of Gay Images on Television in
Britain. Third ed. London: Hall- Carpenter Archives, 1983. 56 pp. An alphabetical list of
programs (including discussions, documentaries, television plays, series, and
films) broadcast since 1954 on British public and commercial television, with
brief descriptive comments. Index of persons.
LAERMER, RICHARD. "The Televised Gay: How We're
Pictured on the Tube," Advocate, no. 413 (February 5, 1985),
20-25. Well informed survey, with
relevant quotations from network officials and producers.
KPFA-FM (Radio Station, Berkeley, CA). The Homosexual in Our Society: The Transcript of a
Program Broadcast on November 24, 1958. San Francisco: Pan-Graphic Press, 1959.
32 pp. Two-hour program with gay and non-gay discussants,
perhaps the first of its kind. Text reprinted in Mattachine Review, 6:7 (July
1960), 12-28; 6:8 (August 1960), 9-25.
LESBIAN AND GAY MEDIA ADVOCATES. Talk
Back! The Gay Person's Guide to Media Action. Boston: Al- yson,
1982. 119 pp. How to get complaints about
homophobic material in the media taken seriously.
LEVINE, RICHARD M. "How the Gay Lobby Has
Changed Television," TV Guide, 29:22 (May 30, 1981), 2-6; and 29:23
(June 6, 1981), 47-52. Objective presentation of the
impact of the Gay Media Task Force in pressing for positive images of gays
and lesbians, as well as in combatting stereotypes.
MAURIAC, JEAN-PIERRE. "Arcadie, l'homophile et
la presse," Arcadie, 243 (March 1974), 148-66. The monthly Arcadie,
at that time the only French gay periodical, contrasts its role with that of
the mainstream press.
MAYNOR, JOE E. "Fundamentalist Ministers vs.
Gay Rights Groups," TV Guide, 28:46 (November 15, 1980),
16-20. A clash in Charlotte, NC,
presents problems for the Federal Communications Commission. 191. MONTGOMERY, KATHRYN. "Gay Activists and the Networks," Journal
of Communication, 31 (Summer 1981), 49-57. Gay activists have had success
with the television networks by adapting themselves to their structure,
geographical and operationally, while using techniques of surveillance and
feedback. See also her (unpublished) dissertation: Gay
Activists and the Networks: A Case Study of Special Interest Pressure on the
Networks (Los Angeles: University of Southern California, 1979;
243 pp.). 192. NICHOLSON, JOE. "Coming Out at the New York Post," Columbia
Journalism Review, 20 (March-April 1982), 26-27. Personal account of experiences
at the controversial New York City afternoon paper. 193. PARK, JAN CARL. "An Annotated Bibliography of Gay and Lesbian
Communication Studies, Alternative Communications, 1:2 (May
1979). [entire issue] Survey by the editor of
Alternative Communications, published by the Caucus of Gay Male
and Lesbian Concerns of the Speech Communication Association. 194. PEARCE, FRANK. "How to Be Immoral and 111, Pathetic and Dangerous
All at the Same Time," in: Stanley Cohen and Jack Young (eds.), The
Manufacture of the News. London: Constable, 1973, pp. 284-301. Analysis and critique of the
treatment of homosexuals in the British media, 195. PECK, ABE. Uncovering the Sixties: The Life and Times of
Underground Newspapers. New York: Pantheon, 1985. 304 pp. Lively account by a participant
of the rise, heyday, and fall of the underground presses, 1964-1973, cast
against the culture and politics of the era. Only sporadic discussion of the
gay/lesbian press, which is (perhaps ironically) virtually the sole survivor
of this once flourishing phenomenon. 196. PIERSON, RANSDELL. "Uptight on Gay News," Columbia
Journalism Review (March-April 1982), 25-33. Concludes that, while papers
frequently present gays in a crime or drag-queen context and sporadically
report on their political activities, they almost never treat the wider
issues of how gays live. 197. RADER, DOTSON. "An American Son," Rolling Stone, (April
27, 1973), 44-46. On the brief fame of Lance
Loud, a young man of Santa Barbara who came out on the television documentary
"An American Family." 198.
SCHMIDT,
WOLFGANG JOHANN (ed.). Jahrbuch fiir sexuelle Zwischenstufen. Frankfurt am Main: Qum- ran, 1983. 2 vols. Selection of articles from the
great German Yearbook, which had been published by the
Scientific-Humanitarian Committee from 1899 to 1923. Includes Tables of
Contents for all issues. 199. SPIEGELMAN, WILLARD. "The Progress of a Genre: Gay Journalism and
Its Audience,"
Salmagundi, 58 (1982), 308-25. A not unsympathetic examination
of some continuities in gay male journalism, which
yet concludes: "To define an audience through sexual inclination alone
is to appeal to the lowest common denominator, the cravings of the
flesh." 200. WINTER, ALAN D. The Gay Press: A
History of the Gay Community and Its Publications. Austin, TX: The
author, 1977. 114 pp. Perceives four phases in the American gay press: secretive
and conservative (1950s); open and moderate (1960s); radical and militant
(1969-71); seeking new directions (1972ff . ). The existence of
"personals" columns in middle-class newspapers opened a path for
homosexuals to meet—at least in a few newspapers willing to accept discreetly
worded notices. With the lifting of taboos in the 1960s, it was possible to
create explicit ads—though the franker ones appeared mainly in the underground
press and gay papers. Sociologists have studied these ads as evidence of
courtship patterns and concepts of desired sexual partners. 201. ASCHAFFENBURG, GUSTAV. "Homosexuelle Werbeschriften," Ärztliche Sachverständigenzeitung, 34 (1928), 351-54. Homosexual advertisements in Weimar Germany. 202. BERNAY, JÉRÔME. "Les homosexuels à travers les petites
annonces du Nouvel Observateur," Arcadie, no. 298 (October 1978), 505-18. Attitudes revealed by
French personal advertisements. 203. DEAUX, KAY, and RANDEL HANNA. "Courtship
in the Personals Column: The Influence
of Gender and Sexual Orientation," Sex Roles, 11:5/6
(1984), 353-75. An analysis of 800 ads, equally
balanced between men and women, heterosexual and homosexual, shows that men
were more concerned with physical characteristics, while women stressed
psychological factors. Homosexuals were more concerned with sexuality, while
heterosexuala specified a broader range of characteristics. 204. KLIMMER, RUDOLF. "Annoncen in einer Zeitschrift für Homosexuelle," Nervenarzt, 40 (1969), 272-75. Analysis of ads in a Danish gay
magazine. See also his article on S & M ads in:
Sexualmedizin, 4 (1974), 585- 88. 205. LANER, MARY R. "Media Mating II: 'Personals' Advertisements of
Lesbian Women," JH, 4 (1978), 41-61. Advertisements were found to be
more like those of nonles- bian women advertisers than like those of men of
either orientation. 206. LANER, MARY R., and G. LEVI KAMEL. "Media Mating I: Newspaper
'Personals' Ads of Homosexual Men," JH, 3 (1977), 149-62. Homosexual ads were more frank
than heterosexual ones, and more specific about goals for desired
relationships, reflecting the "virilization" of the gay male
subculture. 207. LEE, JOHN A. "Meeting Males by Mail," in Louie Crew (ed.), The Gay
Academic. Palm Springs, CA: ETC, 1978, pp. 415-27. Besides attempting to
characterize the differences between Canadian and U.S. ads (based on analysis
of the ads in Body
Politic and The Advocate respectively, Lee reports
on his own luck with ads he placed. 208. LUMBY, MALCOLM E. "Men Who Advertise for Sex," JH, 4
(1978), 63-72. Based on a content analysis of
1,111 paid ads in
The Advocate, characterises differences between personal and commercial
(models, masseurs, and escorts) ads. 209. NÄCKE, PAUL. "Angebot und Nachfrage von Homosexuellen in Zeitungen," Archiv für Kriminalanthropologie und Kriminalistik, 8 (1902), 339-50; 9 (1902), 217-18. Together with
"Päderastische Annoncen"—loc. cit., pp. 215-16—the first studies of
gay "personals" advertisements. 210. NACKE, PAUL. "Zeitungsannoncen von weiblichen Homosexuellen," Archiv für Kriminalanthopologie und Kriminalistik, 10 (1903), 225-29. On turn-of-the-century lesbian advertisements. 211. PRAETORIUS, NUMA (pseud, of Eugen Wilhelm). "Homosexuelle
Inserate,"
Anthropophyteia, 6 (1909), 167-77. Study of personal ads in the
Paris newspaper
Le Journal. Followed by another study on ads in Le
Supplement, ibid., 8 (1911), 231-43.
Cf. also ibid., 8 (1911), 224-31. 212. PRESTON, JOHN, and FREDERICK BRANDT. Classified Affairs: A Gay Man's Guide to the Personal Ads. Boston:
Alyson, 1984. 120 pp. How to write and interpret an ad,
and where to place it--with model examples. 213. "Thirty-one Words," Body Politic, no. 113
(April 1985), 29-32, 45. Opinions by various members of
the editorial board of the Canadian gay monthly regarding the acceptability
of a racially explicit ad. Note an earlier contribution by a reader (Allen
Max), ibid., no. 55 (August 1979), 6. The concept of public opinion
tends to oscillate between two objects: (1) the views held by everyone who
holds an opinion, the public in the broad sense; and (2) the views of
"opinion-making" elites—professionals, politicians, journalists,
etc. Both concepts have been employed in measuring attitudes regarding
homosexual behavior. Apart from their value in supporting legal and political
efforts to secure civil rights for homosexuals, public opinion surveys
provide information on myths and stereotypes perpetuated by the masses. 214. BOWMAN, RICHARD.
"Public Attitudes toward Homosexuality in New Zealand,"
International Review of Modern Sociology, 9 (1979), 224-243.
Interviews with 321 heterosexual adults in two New Zealand cities found that
the great majority did not express anti- homosexual attitudes and supported
removal of negative sanctions against homosexuals. 214A. CHAPPELL, DUNCAN, and
PAUL R. WILSON. "Public Attitudes to the Reform of the Law Relating to
Abortion and Homosexuality," Australian Law Journal,
42 (1968), 120-21, 175-79. Shows the lingering of older attitudes. See also
the follow-up article, idem, "Changing Attitudes toward Homosexual Law
Reform," ibid., 46 (1972), 22-29; and Hong
Sung-Mooh, "Australian Attitudes towards Homosexuality: A Comparison
with College Students," Journal of Psychology,
117 (1984), 89-96. 215. DE BOER, CONNIE. "The Polls: Attitudes toward Homosexuality," Public
Opinion Quarterly, 44 (Summer 1978), 266-76. Offers some international
comparisons. 216. "Les français et l'homosexualité: sondage réalisé par 1 ' I. F. 0. P.," Arcadie, no. 304 (April 1979), 283-68. Results of a survey on homosexuality by the French Institute of Public
Opinion, presented with commentary by André Baudry, Marc Daniel, and others. 217. GALLUP OPINION INDEX, PRINCETON. "Homosexuality in America—Poll
Findings,"
The Gallup Report, no. 147 (October 1977), 1-24. A majority held that
homosexuals deserve equal rights in jobs, but in general the poll discloses a
mixed pattern. Some minor advances are shown in the subsequent study, ibid., no. 205, 3-19. 218. GLASSNER, BARRY, and CAROL OWEN. "Variations in Attitudes toward
Homosexuality,"
Cornell Journal of Social Relations, 11 (1976), 161-76. Reports on an attitude
questionnaire given to 61 undergraduates at a St. Louis university. Being
female, having known homosexuals, and having parents perceived as having an
accepting attitude toward them were factors associated with less social
distance from homosexuals. 219. GROSS, ALAN E., et al. "Disclosure of Sexual Orientation and
Impressions of Male and Female Homosexuals," Personality and Social Psychology
Bulletin, 6 (1980), 307-14. In a videotape test,
homosexually identified targets were judged more stereotypically by subjects
of their own sex than by tho se of the other sex. 220. HENLEY, NANCY, and FRED PINCUS. "Interrelationship of Sexist,
Racist, and Antihomosexual Attitudes," Psychological Reports,
42 (1978), 83-90. Evaluating a questionnaire
adminstered to 211 undergraduates, sexism and antihomosexual attitudes were
negatively correlated with father's and mother's
education. Religious and political orientation was also important. 221. "Homosexuality: Public Attitudes," Drum,
no. 25 (August 1967), 11-13, 29-31. Reports on a CBS survey. 222. HONG, SUNG-MOOK. "Sex, Religion
and Factor Analytically Derived Attitudes toward Homosexuality,"
Australian Journal of Sex, Marriage and Family, 4 (1983),
142-50. Two factors were identified:
Social-Personal Acceptance and Perceived Normality, indicating that attitudes
toward homosexuality involve multidimensional rather than unidimensional concepts. 223. IRWIN, PATRICK, and NORMAN L. THOMPSON. "Acceptance of the
Rights of Homosexuals: A Social Profile," JH, 3 (1977), 107-21. Evaluating data from a
nationwide survey, the authors conclude that respondents who were willing to
grant rights to homosexuals tended to be well educated, young, Jewish or
nonreligious, from urban areas, raised in the Northeast or Pacific states,
and willing to provide freedom of expression to people with nonconformist
political ideas. 224.
LARSEN,
KNUD S. et al. "Attitudes of Heterosexuals
toward Homosexuality: A Likert-type Scale and Construct Validity," Journal of Sex Research, 16 (1980),
245-57. Reports on the development and
testing with undergraduates of a 20-item Heterosexual Attitudes Toward
Homosexuality (HATH) Scale. See alpo Larsen et al., "Anti-Black Attitudes,
Religious Orthodoxy, Permissiveness, and Sexual Information: A Study of the
Attitudes of Heterosexuals toward Homosexuality,"
ibid., 19 (1983), 105-18. 225. LAURENS, ANDRE. Les Francais:
Passions et tabous. Paris: Editions Alain Moreau, 1985. 328 pp.
Correlates results of public opinion surveys conducted by the Institut
Francais de Recherches Economiques et Soc- iales. French opinion on
homosexuality is changing, thanks to extensive discussion in the media. More
tolerant views are held by young people and by Socialist Party voters. 226.
LEVITT,
EUGENE E., and ALBERT D. KLASSEN. "Public
Attitudes toward Homosexuality: Part of the 1970 National Survey by the
Institute for Sex Research," JH (1974), 29-43. Based on a sample of 30,018
Americans, prsents data on feelings of distrust and repugnance, rights of
homosexuals, causes and cures of homosexuality, legal controls, and
homophobia. 227. MCCLOSKY, HERBERT, and ALIDA BRILL. Dimensions of Tolerance: What
Americans Believe about Civil Liberties.
New York: Russell Sage Foundation, 1983. 512 pp. This major study compares the
findings of two surveys commissioned by the Russell Sage Foundation with
others. Concludes that tolerance must be learned, and the sophisticated
arguments on which it is based make it much harder to learn than intolerance.
The surveys also highlight the role of the elites, who tend to hold views in
advance of those of the population at large, and thereby to serve to some
extent as a bulwark against the potential "tyranny of the
majority." See esp. pp. 202-07. 228. MILLHAM, JIM, et al. "A Factor-Analytic Concep tualization of
Attitudes toward Male and Female Homosexuals," JH 2 (1976), 3-10.
Evaluating a questionnaire administered to 785 male and female heterosexuals,
it was found that they make greater distinctions in conceptualizing
homosexuality than had been previously recognized. 229. MORIN, JEAN-PAUL, and GEORGETTE ST. ARNAUD. "Perceptions de l'homosexualité dans la société québécoise contemporaine," Service
Social (Canada), 24 (July-December
1975), 47-89. Includes comparison of opinions
of homosexuals with a random sample of the public. 230. NEWMAN, GRAEME. Comparative Deviance: Reception and Law in Six
Cultures.
New York: Elsevier, 1976. 332 pp. Study of opinion and mores in
India, Indonesia, Iran, Italy, the United States, and Yugoslavia showed wide
variations with regard to abortion and homosexuality, whereas murder,
robbery, rape and the like were universally condemned. 231. NYBERG, KENNETH L., and JON P. ALSTON. "Analysis of Public
Attitudes toward Homosexual Behavior," JH, 2 (1976-77),
99-107. Data from a 1974 survey of
1,197 persons showed that more favorable attitudes toward homosexuality were
held by those who were under 30, lived in larger urban centers, and had
college experience. See also Nyberg and Alston, "Homosexual Labeling by
University Youths," Adolescence, 12 (1977), 541-46. 232. PRICE, JAMES H. "High School Students' Attitudes toward
Homosexuals,"
Journal of School Health, 52 .(1982),
469-74. Males generally held more
negative views on homosexuality than did females, though both agreed that is
"unnatural." The author discusses ways in which adolescents can
become more accepting of homosexuals, 233. ROONEY, ELIZABETH A., and DON C. GIBBONS. "Social
Reactions to 'Crimes without Victims.'" Social Problems, 13
(1966), 400-10. Interprets answers of 353 San
Francisco area residents regarding abortion, drugs, and homosexuality—with
very mixed opinions expressed regarding the last. 234. SCHNEIDER, WILLIAM, and I. A. LEWIS. "The Straight Story on
Homosexuality and Gay Rights," Public Opinion, 7
(February-March 1984), 16-20, 59-60. Interprets Los Angeles Times
polls of September 1983 (national) and October 1983 (California), concluding
that "there are reasons to believe that sympathy for homosexuals will
grow in time.... The gay rights movement, however, faces a far more difficult
situation that the comparable movements for civil rights and women's rights."
See also: Schneider, "Homosexuality Still 'Wrong,' But No Public
Backlash on AIDS," Los Angeles Times, Opinion section
(January 5, 1986). 235. SHERRILL, KENNETH. "Homophobia: Illness or Disease?" Gai
Saber, 1 (1977), 27-40. Analyzes data on aversive
attitudes to homosexuality collected by the National Opinion Research Center
(University of Chicago) in 1973. Concludes that support for civil rights and
liberties is linked to the trend toward the youth culture and the "new
morality." 236. SIMMONS, J. L. "Public Stereotypes of Deviants," Social
Problems, 13 (1965) 223-32. In a survey studying the public
perception of deviance, homosexuality was the most frequent response to the
question of what constitutes deviance. 237. SMOLENAARS, A. J. "Analysis of Pick 3/8 Data on Attitudes toward
Homosexuality, by the Compensatory Distance Model,"
Nederlands Tijdschrift voor de Psychologie en haar Grensgebieden,
29 (1974), 631-47. Reports on a survey of 385
Dutch subjects of different professions, indicating that some professions
were more homogeneous in their opinions than others. 238. SOBEL, H. J. "Adolescent Attitudes toward Homosexuality in
Relation to Self Concept and Body Satisfaction,"
Adolescence, 11 (1976), 443-53. Psychodynamic approach. 239. TURNBULL, DEBI, and MARVIN BROWN. "Attitudes towards
Homosexuality and Male and Female Reactions to Homosexual and Heterosexual
Slides,"
Canadian Journal of Behavioural Science, 9 (1977), 68-80. Saskatchewan students were more
antihomosexual than an Ontario sample. Antihomosexual attitudes tended to
correlate with dislike of the slides as pornographic. 240. WARD, R. A. "Typifications of Homosexuals," Sociological
Quarterly, 20 (1979), 411-23. Categorization as found in public opinion inquiries. 241. WEIS, CHARLES B., and ROBERT N. DAIN. "Ego Development and Sex
Attitudes in Heterosexual and Homosexual Men and Women," Archives
of Sexual Behavior, 8 (1979), 341-56. More negative attitudes toward
homosexuality were correlated with higher levels of personal guilt for
heterosexual and homosexual men and for heterosexual women. 242. WEST, WALTER G. "Public Tolerance of Homosexual Behavior," Journal
of Social Relations, 12 (1977), 25-36. Tabulation of the answers of
1,504 respondents disclosed that the less tolerant individual is older, less
educated, and attends church more frequently. 243. YOUNG, MICHAEL, and JEAN
WHIRTVINE. "Attitudes of Heterosexual Students toward Homosexual
Behavior," Psychological
Reports, 51 (1982), 673-74. Results from a required freshman
course showed predominantly negative attitudes. See also: Randall G. Cuenot
and Stephen S. Fugita, "Perceived Homosexuality: Measuring Heterosexual
Attitudinal and Nonverbal Reactions,"Personality and Social
Psychology Bulletin, 8 (1982),100-06. Professional opinion,
especially in the helping professions, is of consequence not merely for its
influence on the society as a whole, but also because of the contact of
professional individuals with homosexuals, including ones who have problems
exacerbated by their marginal and socially precarious lifestyles. 244. AMERICAN PSYCHOLOGICAL ASSOCIATION, TASK FORCE ON THE STATUS OF
LESBIAN AND GAY MALE PSYCHOLOGISTS. Removing the Stigma: Final Report of
Board of Social and Ethical Responsibility. Washington, DC:
American Psychological Association, 1980. 151 pp. (Manuscript no. 2121) Strongly positive statement. 245. BARR, R. F., and S. V. CATTS. "Psychiatry Opinion and
Homosexuality: A Short Report," JH, 1 (1974), 213-15. In a survey of about 200
psychiatric professionals, the majority took the view either that
homosexuality is a developmental anomaly not necessarily associated with
neurotic symptoms or that it is a normal variant like left-handedness. See
also: Frances E. Baum, "Gay and Lesbian Lifestyles: Implications for
Social Workers," Australian Social Work, 36 (March 1983),
23-29; and Peter J. Blizzard and Murray S. Smith, "Medical Students;
Attitudes and Opinions about Human Sexual Behavior," Australian
Journal of Social Issues, 10:4 (1975), 229-313. 246. DAVISON, GERALD C., and G. TERRENCE WILSON. "Attitudes of Behavior
Therapists toward Homosexuality," Behavior Therapy, 4
(1973), 6830-96. Responses to a questionnaire
sent to British and American behavior therapists reveal continuing strong
support for aversion therapy and for changing homosexual orientation. 247. DRESSLER, JOSHUA.
"Study of Law Student Attitudes Regarding the
Rights of Gay People to Be Teachers,'1 JH, 4 (1979), 315-29. From
a survey of 528 students at 12 schools concludes that law students, esp.
women, are comparatively tolerant of the right of homosexual persons to serve
as teachers, 248. FORT, JOEL, et al. "Attitudes of Mental Health Professionals
toward Homosexuality and Its Treatment," Psychological Reports,
29 (1971), 347-50. Survey of 163 professional
therapists in the San Francisco Bay area showed little support for mandatory
treatment, near unanimity on the need for liberalization of the law, and
widespread support for nonexclusionary employment practices. 249. GAGNON, JOHN, et al. "Report of the American Sociological
Association's Task Group on Homosexuality," American Sociologist,
17 (1982), 164-80. Consistent with previous stands
by the Association, the Report was strongly supportive. 250. GARFINKLE, ELLEN M., and STEPHEN F. MORIN. "Psychologists'
Attitudes toward Homosexual Psychotherapy Clients," Journal
of Social Issues, 34 (1978), 101-12. In blind tests of a
hypothetical client (presented as either heterosexual or homosexual)
attributions of psychological health were found to differ as a function of
sexual orientation of client and sex of therapist. 251. GARTRELL, NANETTE, et al. "Psychiatrists' Attitudes toward
Female Homosexuality," Journal of Nervous and Mental Disease,
159 (1974), 141-44. Of 908 psychiatrists responding
to a questionnaire, 66% challenged the traditional belief that lesbianism
equates with sickness or inadequacy. 252. GOCHROS, HARVEY L. "Teaching More or Less Straight Social Work
Students to Be Helpful to More or Less Gay People,"
Homosexual Counseling Journal, 2:2 (1975), 58-67. Discomfort among social workers
in dealing with homosexual clients is often owing to inexperience with them,
and can be lessened through a program of learning experiences. See also:
Gochros: "Teaching Social Workers to Meet the Needs of the Homosexually
Oriented,"
Journal of Social Work and Human Sexuality, 2 (1983-84), 137-56. 253. GROSS, MARY J. "Changing Attitudes toward Homosexuality—or Are
They?"
Perspectives in Psychiatric Care, 16 (1978), 70-75. Some change for the better is
found among medical and psychiatric professionals, but old attitudes linger
among many. 254. MANOS, NIKOLAS.
"Sexual Life, Problems, and Attitudes of the Prospective Greek
Physicians," Archives
of Sexual Behavior, 12 (1983), 435-443. Results of a
questionnaire given to 82 male and 48 female Greek medical students showed liberal
trend. 255. MAY, EUGENE P. "Counselors', Psychologists', and Homosexuals'
Philosophies of Human Nature and Attitudes toward Homosexual Behavior,"
Homosexual Counseling Journal, 1 (1974). 35 pp. Similarities and contrasts
among the three groups based on the Philosophies of Human Nature Scale of L.
S. Wrights- man. 256. MORRIS, PHILIP A. "Doctors' Attitudes to Homosexuality," British
Journal of Psychiatry, 122 (1973), 435-36. On more than 200 questionnaires
returned, only a few respondents considered homosexuality a disease, though a
large number regarded it as an aberrant behavior pattern. 257. SCHWARTZ, MICHAEL. "Military Psychiatry—Theory and Practice in
Noncombat Areas: The Role Conflicts of the Psychiatrist,"
Comprehensive Psychiatry, 12 (1971), 520-25. Protests that in the military
the psychiatrist has been forced to relinquish his role as helper therapist
and to become, instead, detective-interrogator for the institution. This
creates distrust among those he should be trying to help. In the English-speaking world
virtually all writings on homosexuality were long thought obscene. Only in
recent decades has the right to publish, distribute and sell increasingly
explicit materials with a homosexual content been recognized by the courts
and the police. The works listed below deal with some of the problems
occasioned by homosexual and other pornography and by the feminist backlash
against the flood of what some women consider offensive and even threatening
publications. The struggle for the freedom of the gay press is far from
ended, as is shown by recent cases in Canada and Great Britain. 258. ATHANASIOU, ROBERT, and
PHILLIP SHAVER. "Correlates of Response to Pornography: A Comparison of
Male Heterosexuals and Homosexuals," Proceedings of the Annual
Convention of the American Psychological Association, 5 (1970),
349-50. In a survey of 20,000 Americans more monotonie relationships between response
to pornography and behavior were found for heterosexuals than for
homosexuals. 259. BLACtfFORD, GREGG. "Looking at Pornography: Erotica and the
Socialist Morality," Gay Left, 6 (1978), 16-20. Asks: Can we retain the erotic
values of sexual images, while eliminating the sexist and exploitative
elements? 260. BURGESS, ANN WOLBERT, and MARIEANNE LINDEQVIST CLARK (eds.). Child
Pornography and Sex Rings. Lexington: Lexington Books, 1984.
227 pp. Papers from a social-work perspective, some tending to judgmental,
even inflammatory attitudes. 261. BURSTYN, VARDA (ed.). Women
against Censorship. Vancouver: Douglas and Mclntyre, 1985. 208 pp. Papers by
Canadian and U. S. feminists, arguing that women have nothing to gain by
allying themselves with censorship advocates and politicians. 262. CALIFIA, PAT. "Feminism vs. Sex: A New Conservative Wave?" Advocate, no. 286 (February 21, 1980),
13-15. Warns of the dangers of a de
facto alliance of antiporn feminists—some lesbian—and the New Right. See also
her: "Among Us, Against Us: The New Puritans," ibid., no. 290
(April 17, 1980), 14-18; "The Age of Consent: An Issue and Its Effects
on the Gay Movement," ibid., no. 303 (October 16, 1980), 19-23, 45, and
no. 304 (October 30, 1980), 17-23, 45; and "See No Evil: The Antiporn
Movement," ibid., no. 428 (September 3, 1985), 35-39. 263. CLAPP, JANE. Art Censorship: A
Chronology of Proscribed and Prescribed Art. Metuchen, NJ: Scarecrow Press, 1972. 582 pp. This rather dry compilation
serves to focus attention on censorship of the fine arts, which has been
neglected in recent controversies centering on printed matter and film.
Bibliography of 641 items; index. 264. COPP, DAVID, and SUSAN WENDELL (eds.). Pornography and Censorship.
Buffalo: Prometheus Books, 1983. 414 pp. Valuable collection of papers
treating the problems from several vantage points of philosophy, social
science, and law. 265. DWORKIN, ANDREA. Pornography: Hen Possessing Women. New York: Perigee
(Putnam), 1981. 300 pp. An impassioned polemic, which has proved an effective
vehicle for the propagation of Dworkin's militant views. Unfortunately the
treatment of gay-male erotica is tendentious and misleading. 266. ENGLISH, DEIRDRE. "The Politics of Porn: Can Feminists Walk the
Line?"
Mother Jones, 5:3 (April 1980), 20-23, 43-50. Well-reasoned critique of the antipornography trend
among some feminists (including Dworkin), arguing that taking
men's pornography away will not alter how they think and feel about women. 259.
FAUST, BEATRICE. Women, Sex and Pornography. New York: Macmillan, 1981. 239 pp. Fair-minded, but
properly critical examination of the antipornography arguments. 260.
GOLDSTEIN, MICHAEL J., and HAROLD S. KANT. Pornography and Sexual Deviance: A Report of the
Legal and Behavioral Institute, Beverly Hills, California. Berkeley, CA: University of California Press, 1973. 194 pp. Compared results of extensive
interviews among atypical groups (rapists, homosexuals, and heavy users of
pornography) with two control samples, concluding that the nondeviant groups
had had significantly greater exposure to pornographic materials during
adolescence than the deviants. 261. GOODMAN, MICHAEL BARRY. Contemporary Literary Censorship:
The Case of Burroughs' Naked Lunch. Methuen, NJ: Scarecrow
Press, 1981. 330 pp. Traces the controversy
beginning in 1958, which was ultimately settled in a successful court battle
undertaken by Grove Press, with important consequences for the freedom to
read and publish. See also: Charles Rembar, The End of Obscenity: The Trials of
Lady Chatter- ley, Tropic of Cancer, and Fanny Hill (New
York: Random House, 1968; 528 pp.). 262. JENKINSON, EDWARD B. Censors in the Classroom. New
York: Avon, 1982. 184 pp. Offers a number of case studies
of recent campaigns in the United States for censorship of textbooks and
other reading materials. 263.
LAURITSEN, JOHN. Dangerous Trends in Feminism: Disruptions, Censorship, Bigotry. New York: The author, 1977. 9 pp. The
author was one of the first to point out the problems posed by the Susan
Brownmiller-Andrea Dworkin trend in feminism. See also his: Rape, Hysteria, and Civil |
Liberties (New
York: The author, 1979; 14 pp.). 264. LEDERER, LAURA (ed.). Take Back the Night: Women on
Pornography. New York: Morrow, 1980. 361 pp. Collection of papers by a
number of writers who argue that pornography is causally linked to male
aggressiveness and attacks on women. 265. LEWIS, FELICE FLANNERY. Literature, Obscenity and Law. Carbondale: Southern Illinois
University Press, 1976. 297 pp. Lucid and scholarly portrayal of the
interaction of literary art, society's values and pressures, and the legal
system's response to changing conditions—chiefly in 20th century American
literature. See also: Dorothy Ganfield Fowler, Unmailable: Congress and the Post
Office (Athens: University of Georgia Press, 1977; 266 pp.). 266. MCCOY, RALPH E. Freedom of the Press: An Annotated Bibliography.
Carbondale: Southern Illinois University Press, 1968. about
500 pp. An exemplary record of
English-language materials from the 16th century to 1966. A Ten Year
Supplement (1967-1977) appeared in 1979 (557 pp.). 267. MALAMUTH, NEIL M., and EDWARD DONNERSTEIN (eds.). Pornography
and Sexual Aggression. Orlando, FL: Academic Press, 1984. 333
pp. Papers by various researchers
grouped under the categories of individual differences, experimental studies,
correlational and cross-cultural factors, communicative factors, and legal
implications of the research. They tend to the conclusion that pornography is
harmful, though judgments vary as to the degree and character of the harm. 268. MASTERSON, JOHN. "The Effects of Erotica and Pornography on
Attitudes and Behavior: A Review," Bulletin of the British
Psychological Society, 37 (1984), 249-52. Questions the reliability of
data on availability and use of pornography. Concludes that it in fact may be
useful barometer of the state of male-female relations in society. 269. PECKHAM, MORSE. Art and Pornography: An Experiment in Explanation.
New York: Basic Books, 1969. 306 pp. Stimulating, though sometimes
opaque discussion of current theories of literary and visual erotica, with
considerable attention to homosexuality. Reaches a surprisingly positive
conclusion: "European and American pornography ... has been as steadily
innovative as science itself..." (p. 298). Includes discussion of the
concept of "porno- topia," introduced by Stephen Marcus in The
Other Victorians (New York: Basic, 1966). 270. The Report of the Commission on Obscenity and
Pornography.
New York: Random House, 1970. 700 pp. Main text of the the Report of
a Presidential Commission appointed in 1968. (There are also nine volumes of
supplementary, "technical" material.) The Report generally
supports the liberal position that pornography has no substantial harmful
effects, a conclusion that is still hotly debated. See also: Walter Barnett,
"Corruption of Morals: The Underlying Issue of the Pornography Commission
Report,"
Law and the Social Order (1971), [part 2] 189-243. 271. THOMPSON, ANTHONY HUGH. Censorship in Public Libraries in the United
Kingdom during the Twentieth Century. New York: Bowker, 1976. 236 pp. Chronological survey citing
numerous cases in the country that is the source of our common
"Anglo-Saxon" attitudes in the matter. 272. VALSTAR, JOOP, et al. Porno: analyzes van de verkeerde kant. Boskoop, Netherlands: De Woerat, 1982. (Homopolitieke
teksten, 3) Five papers analyzing the porno controversy from a gay-
liberation viewpoint, and arguing for the freeing of fantasy. 273. WALKER, CHRIS. "Potentially Beneficial Aspects of
Pornography,"
Fag Rag, no. 25 (1978), 8-10. Images of beautiful bodies
bring beauty to the homely, memories to the old, and anticipation and dreams
to the young. 274. WILLIAMS, BERNARD. Report of the Committee on Obscenity and Film
Censorship. London: Her Majesty's Stationery Office, 1979. 270
pp. This British official
commission recommends abandoning such terms as "obscene" and
"indecent." Holds that the printed word deserves protection, but
that restrictions may be legitimately applied to visual and theatrical works. 275. YAFFE, MAURICE, and EDWARD NELSON (eds.). The Influence of Pornography on
Behavior. New York: Academic Press, 1982. 276 pp. Assesses the current debate in
which substantial harmful influence has been argued, in contrast to earlier
skepticism. II. WOMEN'S STUDIES Although men have shown a certain prurient interest in lesbian
behavior since the 16th century, it is only in recent decades that the
subject has received attention from women and men that begins to compare with
that bestowed on male homosexuality. Even today, there is uncertainty about
the scope of the field, with some stipulating lesbian sexual relations as a
defining feature, while others broaden the definition to include affectionate,
not necessarily genital relations and the "woman-identified woman."
Needless to say, the "second wave" of the women's movement, from
the 1960s on, and women's studies programs, have greatly promoted the study
of lesbianism—though sometimes at the cost of melding the subject with others
which are akin to it, but still distinct. Apart from the entries in this
general section, there are studies on particular aspects of lesbianism in the
appropriate sections of this work. 284. ABBOTT, SIDNEY, and BARBARA
LOVE. Sappho Was
a Right On Woman: A Liberated View of Lesbianism. New York: Stein and Day, 1972. 251 pp. This statement by two New York
City activists presents the lesbian experience in two parts: What It Was
Like, and Living in the Future. Includes discussion of open identity,
activism, and links with the feminist movement. 285. ALBRO, JOYCE C., and CAROL TULLY. "A Study of
Lesbian Lifestyles in the Homosexual Micro-Culture and the Heterosexual
Macro-Culture," JH, 4 (1979), 331-44. In a survey of 91 lesbians, it was found that they reported a sense
of isolation from the heterosexual macro- culture and turned to the
homosexual microculture, for friends, emotional support, and social
interaction. 286. ALDRICH, ANN. We Walk Alone. New York: Fawcett, 1955. 143 pp. A lesbian novelist shows that the lesbian is "many women,"
with a wide range of backgrounds and psychological characteristics. See also
Aldrich (ed.), Carol in a Thousand Cities (Greenwich, CT: Fawcett, 1960; 256 pp.). 287. ARNUP, KATHERINE, and AMY GOTTLIEB. "Annotated
Bibliography," Resources for Feminist Research, 12:1 (March 1983), 90-100. This issue is entirely devoted to lesbian
topics. There are also indices to several lesbian periodicals, a film- and videography (pp. 87-89), and a bibliography of
lesbian mothers and custody (pp. 106-09). Some Canadian emphasis. 284.
BAETZ, RUTH (ed.). Lesbian Crossroads: Personal Stories of Lesbian Struggle and Triumph. New York: William Morrow,
1980. 273 pp. Statements by a number of wpmen on self-realization,
interpersonal relations, religion, and lesbian community—as well as
interviews with parents and siblings. 285.
BONNET, MARIE-JO. Un choix sans equivoque: recherches historiques sur les relations amoureuses entre les femmes,
XVIe-XXe siècle. Paris: Denoël, 1981. 296 pp. Scholarly study of lesbian
history, chiefly from French literary sources. In addition to recording known
facts, treats the character of the sources, with particular reference to elements
of reticence and concealment. This remarkable work contains an extensive
bibliography, pp. 253-93. 286.
BRAUCKMANN, JUTTA. Weiblichkeit,
Männlichkeit, und Antihomosexualität: Zur Situation der lesbischen Frau. Berlin: Verlag Rosa Winkel, 1981. 94 pp. Divides into four sections: (1)
Female Homosexuality and Heterosexuality; (2) Heterosexuality and Sexual Identities;
(3) Antihomosexuality and Sexual Roles; and (4) Feminine Roles and Lesbian
Life. Contends that as long as there are stringent definitions of
"femininity" and "masculinity," discrimination against
lesbians will continue. Extensive notes and bibliography. 287.
BROOKS, VIRGINIA. Minority Stress and Lesbian Women. Lexington, MA: Heath, 1981. 219 pp. Systematic
presentation of a new model of stress and stress management. Revised version
of a doctoral dissertation in sociology, University of California, Berkeley,
1977. I 292. CAVIN, SUSAN. Lesbian Origins. San
Francisco: Ism Press, 1985. 288 pp. A lesbian feminist analysis of the
origins of human society (reflecting in part the ideas of Frederick j
Engels); sources of women's and lesbian oppression; and new perspectives in
women's liberation. Sometimes speculative, this book offers insights into a
number of little studied areas. 293.
CHAFETZ, JANET S., et al. "A
Study of Homsosexual Women," Social
Work, 19 (1974), 714-23. Based on a sample of 51 Houston women,
the article exlores their lifestyles, problems, views of themselves, relationships
with others, and their perceptions of society's ;
reactions to them. See also: Wayne L. Cotton, "Social and Sexual
Relationships of Lesbians," Journal of Sex Re- search, 11 (1975), 139-48. 294. CORY, DONALD WEBSTER (pseud, of Edward Sagarin). The
Lesbian in America. New York: Citadel Press, 1964. 288 pp. An ethnographic study of
lesbianism by a well-known male homosexual writer, who holds that lesbianism
is a learned condition, established when experience proves it to be
pleasurable. Also covered are lesbians' attitudes toward men, incidence,
"butch" and "femme" styles, bisesxuality, family
relations, passing, legal problems, and organizations for lesbians. 295. CRONIN, DENISE M. "Coming Out among Lesbians," in: Erich
Goode and Richard R. Troiden (eds.), Sexual Deviance and Sexual Deviants.
New York: Morrow, 1974, pp. 268-77. From interviews and
questionnaires, concludes that adopting a homosexual identity has a less
drastic effect on the lives of lesbians than it does on the lives of gay men.
Lesbians are women first and homosexuals second. 296. CRUIKSHANK, MARGARET (ed.). Lesbian Studies: Present and
Future. Old Westbury, NY: Feminist Press, 1982. 286 pp. Twenty-eight articles by
lesbian scholars, some experiential, others more strictly academic. Among
the useful reference features provided are "Sample Syllabi from Courses
in Lesbianism" (pp. 217-35); "Bibliography: Books" by Lyndell
MacCowan (pp. 237-60); and "Articles" by Margaret Cruikshank (pp.
261-73). See also: Cruikshank (ed.), The Lesbian Path: 37 Lesbian
Writers Share Their Personal Experiences, Viewpoints, Traumas and Joys (Monterey,
CA: Angel Press, 1980; 248 pp.). 297. DARTY, TRUDY, and SANDEE POTTER (ed.). Women-Identified Women.
Palo Alto, CA: Mayfield, 1984. 316 pp. Nineteen essays, some previously
published, emphasizing the plurality of lesbian identities, problems
engendered by social intolerance, and lesbian culture. This informative
collection also cites many useful references. 298. DOMINY, MICHELE D. "Lesbian-Feminist Gender Conceptions:
Separatism in Christchurch, New Zealand," Signs, 11 (1986), 274-89. Field study showing the
contrast between activist groups and cultural lesbian-feminists who are
seeking to achieve an "ethos of natural purity." 299. ETTORE, ELIZABETH M. Lesbians,
Women and Society. Boston: Routledge and Kegan Paul, 1980. 208 pp.
Employing data gathered from interviews and participant observation, an
American lesbian residing in Britain offers a quasi-Marxist theory of stages
of emergent lesbian political consciousness. Sometimes opaque. 300. FARLEY, PAMELLA. "Lesbianism and the Social
Function of Taboo," in: Hester Eisenstein and Alice Jardine (eds.), The
Future of Difference (Boston: G. K. Hall, 1980), 267-73. "[B]y definition
heterosexuality denies homosexuality; but it both requires and suppresses the
scapegoat.... Not only are the oppressed made to disappear, rendered invisible
and even obliterated. So too are the means of oppression made to
disappear." 301. FERGUSON, K. D., and DEANA C. FINKLER. "A Involvement and Overtness Measure for Lesbians: Its Development
and Relation to Anxiety and Social Zeitgeist," Archives
of Sexual Behavior, 7 (1978), 211- 27. Interpreting a battery of
tests, finds that anxiety was not related to degree of homosexual
involvement, while it reflected degree of overtness in low- but not
high-status lesbians. 302. GALANA, LAUREL, and GINA COVINA. The New
Lesbians: Interviews with Women across the U.S. and Canada.
New York: Random House, 1977. 223 pp. Presents interviews with
twenty-one women of diverse backgrounds and situations. 303. GARTRELL, NANETTE. "The Lesbian as a 'Single'
Woman,"
American Journal of Psychotherapy, 35 (1981), 502-09. Presents
the process of coming out as a means of working through the conflicts that social definitions of the "single woman"
create for lesbians. See rebuttal by Charles W. Socarides, ibid.,
510-15. 304. GOLDSTEIN, MELVIN. "Some Tolerant Attitudes
toward Female Homosexuality throughout History," Journal
of Psychohistory, 9 (1982), 437-60. Offers psychohistorical
speculations as to why lesbianism has historically been tolerated, accepted
and even encouraged. See comment by Robert J. Saunders, ibid.,
10 (1983), 520-21. See also Wardell B. Pomeroy, "Why We I Tolerate
Lesbians,"
Sexology, 31 (1965), 652-55. 305.
GOODE,
ERICH, and LYNNE HABER. "Sexual
Correlates of Homosexual Experience: An Exploratory Study of i
College Women,"
Journal of Sex Research, 13 (1977), A small group of college women
who had had lesbian contacts were found to be in general more sexually
experienced than a larger group without such contacts. 306.
GOODMAN, BERNICE. The Lesbian: A Celebration of the Difference. Brooklyn, NY: Out and Out, 1977. 69 pp. Political essays, with emphasis
on the situation of lesbian mothers. 307. GREGORY-LEWIS, SASHA. Sunday's Women: A Report on Lesbian
Life Today. Boston: Beacon Press, 1979. 217 pp. A journalist's report,
competent and non-sensationalized, on the state of lesbian America at the
time of writing. Shows a political spectrum ranging from traditionalists,
through liberationists and radicals to authoritarians. 308. HALLIDAY, CAROLINE, et al. Hard Words and Why Lesbians Have to
Say Them. London: Onlywoman, 1978. 16 pp. Contrasts self-understanding with
environing stereotypes. 309. HASSELL, JULIE, and EDWARD W. SMITH. "Female Homosexuals'
Concepts of Self, Men, and Women," Journal of Personality Assessment,
39 (1975), 154-59. From a battery of tests given
to 48 women, concludes that the lesbian may be more independent, changeable,
and sexually preoccupied, and less well adjusted than her heterosexual
counterpart. 310. HEDBLOM, JACK H. "Dimensions of Lesbian Sexual Experience," Archives
of Sexual Behavior, 2 (1973), 329-41. In a study of 65 Philadelphia
lesbians, find that early sexual experiences were consensual, refuting
seduction stereotypes. Also examines coming out, awareness of lesbianism, and
heterosexual involvements. See also: Hedblom, "The Female Homosexual:
Social and Attitudinal Dimensions," in J. A. McCaffrey (ed.), The
Homosexual Dialectic. Englewood Cliffs, NJ: Prentice-Hall,1972, pp. 31-64; as well as Hedblom and John J. Hartman,
"Research on Lesbianism: Selected Effects of Time, Geographic Location
and Data Collection Technique," Archives of Sexual Behavior,
9 (1980), 217-34. 311. HESS, ELIZABETH P. "Feminist and Lesbian Development: Parallels
and Divergencies," Journal of Humanistic Psychology, 23
(1983), 67-78. Explores the means by which an
identity as a "feminist" or "lesbian" becomes a positive
one, as well as the interaction between the two identities. 312. HOGAN, ROBERT A. et al. "Attitudes, Opinions, and Sexual
Development of 205 Homosexual Women," JH, 3 (1977), 123-36. Results show a high rate of
only-child status among lesbian women, a tendency towards ambivalence of
opinion on many issues, and a lack of insight into self and others. 313. HOJGARD, GUNNA. Kaere foraeldre: Lesbiske fortael- ler om deres
forhold til familien. Copenhagen: Demos, 1978. 124 pp. Presents inverviews with lesbian women concerning
their relations with their families. 314. HOPKINS, JUNE H. "The Lesbian Personality," British
Journal of Psychiatry, 115 (1969), 1433-36. In place of the descriptor
"neurotic," the following terms are suggested as describing
lesbians: more independent, more resilient, reserved, dominant, bohemian,
self-sufficient, and more composed. 315. HUGHES, NYM, et al. Stepping Out of Line. Vancouver, BC:
Press Gang, 1985. 208 pp. Essays for study and teaching
on lesbianism and feminism, coming out, parenting, reorganizing the law,
religion, and the medical system. Canadian emphasis; references. 316. JOHNSTON, JILL. Lesbian Nation: The Feminist Solution.
New York: Simon & Schuster, 1973. 283 pp. A militant writer advocates
lesbian separatism. The text is adapted from columns in The
Village Voice (New York). In a more tranquil mode, see her:
"Lesbian/Feminism Reconsidered," Salmagundi, no. 58-59
(1982-83), 10-24. 316A. KEHOE, MONICA (ed.).
Historical, Literary and Erotic Aspects of Lesbianism. New York: Haworth Press, 1986. 182 pp. Thirteen papers corresponding
to
JH, 12:3-4 (May 1986). 317. KITZINGER, CELIA, and REX S. ROGERS. "A Q-Method- ological Study
of Lesbian Identities," European Journal of Social
Psychology, 15 (1985), 167-87. English data from 41 women
revealed identity factors explicated as Personal Fulfillment, Special
Person, Individualistic, Radical Feminist and Traditional identities. 318. KLEMESRUD, JUDY. "Lesbians: The Disciples of Sappho,
Updated,"
New York Times Magazine (March 28, 1971), 38-39, 41-52. Journalistic apercus of
interest chiefly for the date of their appearance in a mainstream
publication. Discussion in issues of April 11 (pp. 5, 55) and May 9 (pp. 79-80). 319. KOKULA, ILSE. Formen lesbischer Subkultur: Vergesellschaftung und
soziale Bewegung. Berlin: Verlag Rosa Winkel, 1983. 168 pp. The writer, a German lesbian
sociologist and activist, portrays the structure of dynamic of lesbians in
three spheres: the bar, the clique, and the activist group. 320. KRIEGER, SUSAN. "Lesbian Identity and Community: Recent Social
Science Literature," Signs, 8 (1982), 91-108. Recent studies view lesbianism
as a product of multiple influences, and the examine
the lesbian in terms of her relationships in couples, institutions,
communities, and society rather than as an isolated individual or in relation
to her family of origin. Integration in such communities may threaten as well as support the growth of
individual identity. 321. KRIEGER, SUSAN. The Mirror Dance: Identity in a Woman's Community.
Philadelphia: Temple University Press, 1983. 199 pp. Ethnography of a
midwestern lesbian community, where lesbian relationships are complex
because they pose fundamental challenges to the individual's sense of self. 322. KUDA, MARIE JAYNE. Women Loving Women: A Selected and Annotated
Bibliography. Chicago: Lavender Press, 1975. 28 pp. List of about 200 entries,
largely superseded by M. Cruik- shank, above, and by Barbara Grier, The
Lesbian in Literature (Tallahassee: Naiad Press, 1981; 168
pp.). 323. LANER, MARY R., and ROY H. LANER. "Sexual Preference or Personal
Style? Why Lesbians are Disliked," JH, 5 (1980), 339-56. As in the case of homosexual
men, the authors found that lesbians are disliked both for sexual preference
and for personal style (departure from expected gender-role models). 324. LANNING, LEE, and VERNETTE HART. Ripening: An Almanac of Lesbian
Lore and Vision. Minneapolis: Word Weavers, 1982. 160 pp. Free-form work expressing
oneness with nature. See also their: Dreaming: An Almanac of Lesbian
Lore and Vision (Minneapolis: Word Weavers, 1983; 153 pp.). 325. LATORRE, RONALD A., and KRISTINA WENDENBURG. "Psychological
Characteristics of Bisexual, Heterosexual and Homosexual Women," JH,
9 (1983), 87-97. Of 125 women, feminine subjects
were under-represented among homosexual and bisexual women. Otherwise, the
three groups showed similar profiles. 326. LE GARREC, EVELYNE. Des femmes qui s'aiment.
Paris: Seuil, 1984. 286 pp. Sociological study of French
lesbians in relation to society; includes personal testimonies. See also:
Marie Lago and France Paramelle, La femme homosexuelle
(Tour- nai: Casterman, 1976; 203 pp.); and Nella Nobili and Edith Zha, Les
femmes et 1'amour (Paris: Hachette, 1979; 318 pp.). 327. LYNCH, JEAN M., and MARY ELLEN REILLY. "Relationships: Lesbian
Perspectives,"
JH, 12:2 (1986), 53-69. A study of 70 largely
middle-class and upper-middle-class lesbian couples finds that most achieve
partnerships characterized by equality and freedom from traditional
butch-femme role playing. 328. MANNION, KRISTIANN. Female Homosexuality: A Comprehensive Review of
Theory and Research. Washington: American Psychological
Association, 1976. 95 pp. (Catalogue of Selected Documents, 6:44) The empirical research involves
three major areas of investigation: assessment of the lesbian personality by
projective techniques; personality assessment studies using nonprojective
personality inventories and clinical interviews; and biographical variables
derived from projective tests designed to measure attitudes toward the
family, as well as from biographical questionnaires. 329. MARTIN, DEL, and PHYLLIS LYON. Lesbian/Woman. San
Francisco: Glide Foundation, 1972. 283 pp. Forthright account of lesbians
in America by two founders of Daughters of Bilitis in San Francisco—about
which organization the book gives considerable information. The lesbian is
defined as "a women whose primary erotic, psychological, emotional and
social interest is in a member of her own sex, even though that interest may
not be overtly expressed." The revised edition (New York:, Bantam, 1983)
has a ten-year update (1972-82). 330. NEWTON, ESTHER. "The Mythic Mannish Lesbian: Rad- clyffe Hall and
the New Woman,"
Signs, 9 (1984), 557-75. Historically, the trend of
cross-dressing for women initially signaled an asexual desire for autonomy,
but gradually became linked to lesbian sexual expression as feminists sought
to break out of the asexual model of romantic friendships with other women. 331.
PACZENSKY, SUSANNE VON. Verschweige Liebe: Zur Situation der
lesbischen Frau in der Gesellschaft. Munich: Bertelsmann,
1984. 206 pp. Interviews with 75 Hamburg lesbians and analysis of their
responses. 332. PASTRE, GENEVIEVE. De l'amour lesbien. Paris: Pierre Horay,
1980. 298 pp. Somewhat subjective reflections
by a French lesbian theorist . 333. PEPLAU, LETITIA A. et al. "Loving Women: Attachment and Autonomy
in Lesbian Relationships," Journal of Social Issues,
34 (1978), 7-27. In a questionnaire study of 127
lesbians, the majority said that their current relationship was extremely
close, personally satisfying, and egalitarian. See also: Peplau et al.,
"Satisfaction in Lesbian Relationships," JH, 8 (1982), 23-35. 334. PONSE, BARBARA. "Secrecy in the Lesbian World," Urban
Life, 5 (1976), 313-38. In fear of disapproval and sanctions, lesbians tend
to hide their identity behind a heterosexual facade. Life
is compartmentalized into gay and straight spheres. Under the influence of
women's and gay liberation this situation is changing. See also her:
Identities in the Lesbian World: The Social Construction of the Self
(Westport, CT: Greenwood Press, 1978; 228 pp.). 335. POOLE, KENNETH. "The Etiology of Gender Identity and the
Lesbian,"
Journal of Social Psychology, 87 (1972), 51-57. Finds support for a hypothesis
that the childhood socialization experience of heterosexual females differs,
in certain role-learning aspects, from that of homosexual females. 336. PRIETO, ENRIQUE. La homosexualidad feminina. Madrid: Uve, 1982. 116
pp. This popularizing work, though primarily designed to satisfy sexual
curiosity, offers some glimpses of Spanish lesbian life. 337. RICH, ADRIENNE. "Compulsory
Heterosexuality and Lesbian Existence," Signs, 5 (1980), 631-60. Controversial article
criticizing perceived heterosexist bias in much current feminist scholarship.
"The denial of reality and visibility to women's passion for women,
women's choice of women as allies, life companions, and community, the
forcing of such relationships into dissimulation and their disintegration
under intense pressure have meant an incalculable loss to the power of all
women to change the social relations of the sexes, to liberate ourselves and each other." See responses by Anne
Ferguson et al., ibid., 7 (1981), 158-99. 338. RIESS, BERNARD F. et al. "Psychological Test Data on Female
Homosexuality: A Review of the Literature," JH, 1 (1974), 71-85. Critical and comparative review
of existing studies on responses by female homosexuals to projective and
nonpro- jective tests. See also: Riess, "New Viewpoints on the Female
Homosexual," in: V. Franks and V. Burtle (eds.), Women in
Therapy: New Psychotherapies for a Changing Society (New York:
Brunner/Mazel, 1974), pp. 191-214. 339. ROSEN, DAVID H. Lesbianism: A Study of Female Homosexuality« Springfield, IL:
Charles C. Thomas, 1974. 123 pp. Presents a review of the literature on
lesbianism and results of a research study of 26 women. 340. RUPP, LEILA J. '"Imagine My Surprise': Women's Relationships in
Historical Perspective," Frontiers: A Journal of Women's
Studies, 5:3 (Fall 1980), 61-70. Reviews the
conflicting approaches scholars have taken, presents examples of different kinds of relationships from
the American women's movement in the 1940s and 50s, and proposes a conceptual
approach that recognizes the diversity of women's relationships without
denying their common bond. 341. SCHÄFER, SIGRID. "Sexual and Social Problems of Lesbians," Journal
of Sex Research, 12 (1976), 50-69. From questionnaire data
collected from 151 West German lesbians, discusses the coming out period, the
meaning of their heterosexual experiences, and the social and psychological
challenges lesbian life poses. 342. SCHWARZ, JUDITH. "Lesbians," in: Sarah M. Pritch- ard, The
Women's Annual Number 4, 1983-1984.
Boston: G. K. Hall, 1984, pp.
107-24 Bibliographical essays of work in recent years (emphasizing 1983),
including such themes as third-world lesbians, sexuality, history, and
lesbian lives. 343. SEGREST, MAB.
My Mama's Dead Squirrel: Lesbian Essays on Southern Culture.
Ithaca, NY: Firebrand Books, 1985. 237 pp. Region, family, personality and
self examined by an articulate Southern lesbian. 344. SHACHAR, SANDRA A., and LUCIA A. GILBERT. "Working Lesbians: Role
Conflicts and Coping Strategies," Psychology of Women Quarterly,
7 (1983), 244-56. The most frequently reported
interrole conflicts among 70 Texas women studied were bewteen the work and
lover roles, and the most frequent interrole conflicts involved the work and
daughter roles. 345. SIMON, WILLIAM, and JOHN H. GAGNON. "Femininity in the Lesbian
Community,"
Social Problems, 15 (1967), 212-21. Contends that lesbians tend to
conform to rather than deviate from the female gender role. Within
relationships lesbian sexuality is typically feminine, resulting in the
stability of couple bonds. See also their: "The Lesbians: A Preliminary
Overview," in: Gagnon and Simon (eds.), Sexual Deviance (New
York: Harper and Row, 1967), pp. 247-82. 346. SIMPSON, RUTH. From the Closet to the Courts: The Lesbian Transition. New York: Penguin,
1977. 180 pp. New York lesbian activist
discusses oppression of homosexuals by the church, psychiatric profession,
police, and media—as well as the women's movement and common myths about
lesbians. 347. SOPHIE, JOAN. "A Critical Examination of Stage Theories of
Lesbian Identity Development," JH, 12:2 (1986),
39-51. Repeated interviews with 14
women were used to test existing stage theories and to formulate a new
general theory. 348. STANLEY, JULIA PENELOPE, and SUSAN J. WOLFE (eds.). The
Coming Out Stories. Watertown, MA: Persephone Press, 1980. 252
pp. Forty-two personal narratives
emphasizing diversity and pride. See also M. Cruikshank (ed.), above. 349. STEARN, JESS.
The Grapevine. New York: Mcfadden- Bartell, 1965. 320 pp. Journalistic expose, typical
for the period, discussing types of lesbians, their private and social lives,
and organizations. 350. VETERE, VICTORIA A. "The Role of Friendship in the Development
and Maintenance of Lesbian Love Relationships," JH, 8 (1982), 51-65. Finds that friendship was a key
factor in the formation of women's first same-sex relationship, and that it
remains a prime developmental and maintenance factor in current relationships.
See also: Jean Weber,"Lesbian Networks," Christopher
Street, 3:9 (April 1979), 51-54. 351. VIDA, GINNA (ed.). Our Right to Loves A Lesbian Resource Book.
Englewood Cliffs, NJ: Prentice- Hall, 1978. 318 pp. A well-coordinated collective
work dealing with many aspects of lesbian life and with the lesbian feminist
movement. Bibliography by Carol D. Lightner (pp. 284-88). 352. WILSON, M. LEE. "Female Homosexual's Need for Dominance and
Endurance,"
Psychological Reports, 55 (1984), 79-82. The lack of a unique pattern
for lesbians supports the contention that homosexuals can have many
personalities within normal limits. 353. WOLFF, CHARLOTTE. Love between Women. New York: St.
Martin's Press, 1971. 230 pp. Psychoanalytic approach by a
London-based therapist. Sympathetic in intent, it nonetheless presents a
model of lesbian existence as one marred by conflict and impairment
. 354. WOLF, DEBORAH GOLEMAN. The Lesbian Community. Berkeley: University of
California Press, 1979. 196 pp. An ethnography of a lesbian feminist community based on field work
in San Francisco. Finds that the impact of women's liberation has profoundly
altered lesbian culture, creating a community centering on collective
principles and autonomous institutions. 355. WYSOR, BETTIE. The
Lesbian Myth. New York: Random House, 1974. 438 pp. Seeks to
expose misconceptions found in religion, science, psychiatry, and
literature—and offers discussions by lesbians on motherhood, lifestyles,
sexuality, and activism. The rise of the contemporary
feminist movement produced a considerable interest in theory, some of it
informed by Marxist or other leftist concerns. In some instances, especially
during the radical period of the early 1970s it was suggested that the only
true feminist is a lesbian— hence the phenomenon of the "political
lesbian," that is one who adopts this position essentially out of
political conviction rather than affectional preference.
ALLEN, HILARY. "Political Lesbianism and Feminism—Space
for a Sexual Politics?" M/F (London), 7
(1982), 15-34. Examines difficulties inherent
in political lesbianism and the consequences for feminist politics of
sexuality.
BARRETT, MICHELE. Women's Oppression Today: Problems in Marxist Feminist Analysis. New York: Schocken, 1980. 269
pp. Criticizes the semantic unclarity of three key terms: patriarchy,
ideology, and reproduction. See index for "homosexuality" and
"lesbianism."
BEAUVOIR, SIMONE DE. The Second Sex.
Translated by H. M. Parshley. New York: Modern Library, 1968. 732 pp. A much admired and influential work, first published in France in 1949 and prophetic of
the "second wave" of feminism, by an existentialist thinker and
novelist. See Chapter 15, "The Lesbian" (pp. 404-24).
CARTLEDGE, SUE, and JOANNA RYAN (eds.). Sex and
Love: New Thoughts and Contradictions. London: Women's Press,
1983. 237 pp. Fourteen original essays
reflecting "the diversity of women's experience—both within the
categorizations 'lesbian' and 'heterosexual,' and across the whole
continuum—and the plurality of options this necessitates ."
CHODOROW, NANCY. "Feminism and Difference:
Gender, Relation, and Difference in Psychoanalytic Perspective,"
Socialist Review, 46 (1979), 51-69. Examines probl ems with the
project of degendering society in order to eliminate male dominance.
COWARD, ROSALIND. Patriarchal Precedents: Sexuality
and Social Relations. Boston: Routledge and Kegan Paul, 1983.
326 pp. Critical examination of the
history of the concept of patriarchy in Marxist, psychoanalytic, and
anthropological theory. Contends that this multiple legacy, stemming mainly
from the 19th and early 20th centuries, has contributed to our present
misunderstanding of the family, sexual relations, and sexual characteristics.
DALY, MARY. Gyn/ecology: The Metaethics of
Radical Feminism. Boston: Beacon Press, 1978. 485 pp. A theologian turned radical
feminist theorist has created a compendium of religio-historical speculation,
together with neologism-laden visions for a post-patriarchal future. Daly
defines the concept lesbian broadly, as "woman-identified woman."
See also her:
Pure Lust, Elemental Feminist Philosophy (Boston: Beacon,
1984; 471 pp.).
DEFRIES, ZIRA. "Political Lesbianism and Sexual
Politics,"
Journal of the American Academy of Psychoanalysis, 6 (1978),
71-78. Found that some women who had
sought security in lesbianism experienced disenchantment as they discovered
that the interpersonal dynamics of female-female and male-female
relationships were similar.
DEMING, BARBARA. We Are All Part of One Another: A
Barbara Demj?ng Reader. Edited by Jane
Meyerding, with a Forward by Barbara Smith. Philadelphia: New Society
Publishers, 1984. 320 pp. Representative collection
spanning her work (1959-81) as an activist for civil rights, feminism, and
lesbianism. See also her: Remembering Who We Are (Tallahassee:
Naiad Press, 1981; 240 pp.).
DONOVAN, JOSEPHINE. Feminist Theory: The Intellectual Traditions of
American Feminism. New York: Frederick Ungar, 1985. 237 pp. An expository synthesis,
mapping the following traditions: enlightenment liberal feminism, cultural
feminism, Marxism, psychoanalysis, existential, radical feminism, and the
"new feminist moral vision." With considerable attention to lesbian
theory, this useful guide offers numerous quotations and references.
EICHLER, MARGRIT. The Double Standard: A Feminist
Critique of the Social Sciences. New York: St. Martin's Press,
1980. 151 pp. In this broad-gauged critique, see esp. pp. 86,
130-31.
EVANS, SARAH. Personal Politics: The Roots of Women's Liberation
in the Civil Rights Movement and the New Left. New York: Knopf, 1979. 274 pp. Historical reconstruction which highlights some of
the contradictions prevalent during the 1960s. See "Lesbianism"
(pp. 225-31). 361. FADERMAN, LILLIAN. "The 'New Gay' Lesbians," JH, 10:3-4
(1984), 85-95. Presents the developmental
process of women who have come to lesbianism through the radical feminist
movement of the past fifteen years. 362. FRIEDAN, BETTY. The Feminine Mystique. New York: Norton,
1963. 410 pp. Catalytic statement for
"second wave" feminism in North America, helping to precipitate a
general reexamination of sex and gender roles, and thereby influencing the
gay and lesbian movement. In the text, however, Friedan claimed that "the
shallow unreality, immaturity, promiscuity, and lack of lasting human
satisfaction that characterize the homosexual's sex life usually characterize
all his life and interests." 363. Love Your Enemy? The Debate Between Heterosexual
Feminism and Political Lesbianism. London: Only- women, 1981. 68 pp. Theoretical letters and
articles by British women. 364. MCALLISTER, PAM (ed.). Reweaving the Web of Life: Feminism
and Nonviolence. Philadelphia: New Society, 1982. 440 pp. This feminist-pacifist anthology
includes an interview with Barbara Deming by Mab Segrest and an essay on
Natalie Barney by Karla Jay. 365. MASSEY, MARILYN CHAPIN. Feminine Soul: The Fate of an Ideal. Boston: Beacon Press, 1985. 219 pp. Reconstructs a Central European
concept as embodied in Romantic works of imagination by Johann Heinrich
Pestaloz- zi, Novalis, and Friedrich Froebel. The conclusion points to
parallels with such contemporary thinkers as Mary Daly and Adrienne Rich. 366. MYRON, NANCY, and CHARLOTTE BUNCH. Lesbianism and the Women's
Movement. Baltimore: Diana Press, 1975. 120 pp. Collection of essays reprinted
from
The Furies discussing aspects of lesbian-feminist politics:
heterosexual privilege, bisexuality, heterosexism, and lesbian separatism. 367. PRESTON, JOHN. "Goodbye, Sally Gearhart: Gay Men and Feminists
Have Reached a Fork in the Road," Christopher Street,
no. 58 (November 1981), 17-26. Holds that the activities of
antipornography women mandate a reassessment of the relationship between gay
men and feminists, including lesbians. See also: Brian Mossop, "Gay
Men's Feminist Mistake," Body Politic, no. 67
(October 1980), 32. 368. SNITOW, ANN, et al. (eds.). The Politics of Sexuality.
New York: Monthly Review Press, 1983. 489 pp. Collection of chiefly
sex-positive papers and statements, all by women scholars, except for two (by
Allen Berube and John D'Emilio). 369. VANCE, CAROLE S. (ed.). Pleasure and Danger: Exploring
Female Sexuality. Boston: Routledge and Kegan Paul, 1984. 462 pp. Papers from the controversial
1982 Barnard College conference. They are generally supportive of an
exploratory, libertarian approach and opposed to antipornographic rigorism. With the acceptance of women's
studies in many universities in North America and abroad, there has been an
almost explosive growth in scholarship. To survey the field adequately would
require a work several times the size of the present one. The following
citations will enable one to find other references. 370. DAVIS, NANETTE J., and JONE M.
KEITH. Women and Deviance: Issues in
Social Conflict and Change: An Annotated Bibliography. New
York: Garland, 1984. 236 pp. Describes some 500 items
(articles and books), in such areas as criminal behavior, substance abuse,
lesbianism, and mental illness. 371. EVANS, MARY, and DAVID MORGAN. Work on Women: A Guide to the
Literature. New York: Methuen, 1980. 83 pp. Unannotated bibliography
divided into nine subject- specific chapters. 372. GILBERT, V. F., and D. S. TATLA. Women's Studies: A Bibliography of Dissertations 1870-1982. Oxford:
Basil Blackwell, 1986. 512 pp. Lists over 12,000 unpublished dissertations
completed in Britain and North America in a range of disciplines. 373. HABER, BARBARA. Women in America: A Guide to Books. Second ed. Urbana:
University of Illinois Press, 1981. 262 pp. Selected, annotated list of books
arranged by subject and covering the period 1963-79. 374. HINDING, ANDREA (ed.). Women's
History Sources: A Guide to Archives and Manuscript Collections in the United
States.
New York: R. R. Bowker,
1979. 2 vols. Very comprehensive, but
inadequately indexed for lesbianism. Permits access to much otherwise
unretrievable material. 368. JACOBS, SUE ELLEN. Women in Perspectives A Guide for Cross-Cultural
Studies. Urbana: University of Illinois Press, 1974. 299 pp. An anthropologist provides help
in escaping Western parochialism. 369. KRICHMAR, ALBERT. The Women's
Movement in the Seventies: An International English-Language Bibliography. Metuchen, NJ: Scarecrow, 1977. 875 pp. Presents 8,637 citations, with
one-line annotations. Complements the author's The Women's Rights Movement in the
United States, 1848-1970s A Bibliography and Sourcebook
(Metuchen, NJ: Scarecrow, 1972; 436 pp.). 370. OAKES, ELIZABETH H., and KATHLEEN E. SHELDON. Guide to Social Science Resources in Women's
Studies. Santa
Barbara: ABC-Clio, 1978. 162 pp. Selective, well-annotated bibliography aimed
primarily at "professors of introductory interdisciplinary women's
studies" and other teachers. Core lists in anthropology, economics,
history, psychology, sociology, and contemporary feminist thought, stressing
contemporary book- length contributions. Well indexed. 371. REINHARZ, SHULAMIT, et al. "Methodological Issues in Feminist
Research: A Bibliography of Literature in Women's Studies, Sociology and
Psychology," Women's
Studies International Forum, 6 (1983), 437-54. Presents material on such
issues as institutional bases, sex biases, feminist critiques, and cognitive
style differences between men and women. 372. SAHLI, NANCY.
Women and Sexuality in Americas A Bibliography. Boston: G. K.
Hall, 1984. 404 pp. Annotated, with material from
the late 19th century on, which is of value in tracing historical antecedents
of present positions. See "Lesbians" (pp. 281-303). 373. SEARING, SUSAN E. Introduction to Library Research in Women's Studies. Boulder, CO: Westview Press, 1985. 257 pp. "User friendly" guide
to practical aspects of research, offering selected annotated lists by
subject. See esp. pp. 123-24, 184, 218-19. 389. STINEMAN, ESTHER. Women's
Studies: A Recommended Core Bibliography. Littleton, CO: Libraries
Unlimited, 1979. 672 pp. Selected list of 1,763 books and periodicals,
grouped in twenty-one subject areas, with thoughtful, detailed
annotations. 390. TERRIS, VIRGINIA R. Women in America: A Guide to Information Sources.
Detroit: Gale, 1980. 520 pp. Ambitious research guide and
bibliography, with author, title, and subject indexes. 391. WARREN, MARY. The Nature of Women: An Encyclopedia and Guide to
the Literature.
Inverness, CA: Edge- press, 1980. 701 pp. This massive volume offers a
collection of short essays on topics and authors, arranged alphabetically.
Each essay presents first an objective summary, followed by the author's
judgments. Strong on philosophy and theory. 392. WILLIAMSON, JANE. New Feminist Scholarship: A Guide to Bibliographies.
Old Westbury, NY: Feminist Press, 1979. 139 pp. Lists nearly 400 bibliographies
under 30 subject headings: about half the items are annotated. See also: Patricia
K. Ballou,
Women: A Bibliography of Bibliographies (Boston: G. K. Hall,
1980; 155 pp.—annotates material from 1970 through 1979); and Maureen
Ritchie,
Women's Studies: A Checklist of Bibliographies (London:
Mansell, 1980; 107 pp.—unannotated list of about 500 items). D. COMPARISONS OF LESBIANS AND GAY MEN The considerable differences
between lesbian and male- homosexual behavior have been relatively little discussed.
Sometimes they are taken for granted as reflecting more general differences
between men and women. Apart from the fact that these differences are as yet
poorly understood, it cannot be excluded that just as male and female
homosexuals differ from their heterosexual counterparts, they will differ
from each other in ways that are not predictable from heterosexual-based
studies of male-female differences. Others seek to minimize lesbian-gay male
differences because of an allegiance to a concept of human androgyny, which
stresses the malleability of all gender conditioning. Finally, there are
those who hold that the political necessity of an alliance between lesbians
and gay men makes discussion of differences inexpedient. 393. DE MONTEFLORES, CARMEN,
and STEPHEN J. SCHULTZ. "Coming Out: Similarities and Differences for
Lesbians and Gay Men," Journal of Social Issues, 34 (1978),
59-72. Differences in the coming-out experiences of men and women are related
to conformity to a violation of sex-role expectations, as well as to political and legal
issues. 394. "DOB Questionnaire Reveals Some Comparisons between Male and
Female Homosexuals," Ladder, 4:12 (1960), 4-25. Gay men did not show as great
an income superiority as expected, and they had experienced more frequent
conflicts with the law. Men had more frequent and earlier homosexual
experiences, but fewer of them had had heterosexual experiences. 395. HENDERSON, ANN F. "Homosexuality in the College Years:
Developmental Differences between Men and Women," Journal
of American College Health, 32 (1984), 216-19. Contends that sexual
orientation is established later for women than for men, and is subjected to
different psychological stresses. 396. KARR, M. A. "Sally Gearhart: Wandering—and Wondering-—on Future
Ground,"
Advocate, no. 286 (February 26, 1980), pp. 21-22. Gearhart, a San Francisco
lesbian activist and writer, holds that women have a "unique capacity
for collective psychic power," which men lack. For this and other
reasons, an alliance between lesbians and gay men is problematic. 397. NYBERG, KENNETH L. "Sexual Aspirations and Sexual Behaviors among
Homosexually Behaving Males and Females: The Impact of the Gay
Community,"
JH, 2 (1976), 29-38. Interprets questionnaire
results as indicating that differences between lesbians and gay men reflect
not only gender and general cultural differences determined by the larger
society, but also the differing reception of specific movements for social
change among them. 398. SAGHIR, MARCEL T., and ELI ROBINS. "Male and Female
Homosexuality: Natural History," Comprehensive Psychiatry,
12 (1971), 501-10. Finds that the homosexual male
begins his sexual involvement in early adolescence while the lesbian begins
several years later. 399. SCHÄFER, SIEGRID. "Sociosexual Behavior in Male and Female
Homosexuals: A Study in Sex Differences," Archives of Sexual Behavior,
6 (1977), 355-64. Interpretation of West German
data indicates that being a woman tends to influence the sociosexual behavior
of lesbians more than being homosexual. 400. WINCZE, JOHN P., and C. BRANDON QUAILS. "A Comparison of
Structural Patterns of Sexual Arousal in Male and Female Homosexuals," Archives
of Sexual Behavior, 13 (1984), 361-70. In a study of responses to films, it was found -—
not surprisingly -- that lesbians showed little response to male erotic films and gay men were correspondingly indifferent to lesbian erotic films. III. HISTORY AND AREA STUDIES Inasmuch as homosexual behavior
is practiced by individuals, the biographical method has often proved
appealing— hence the "hall of fame" approach singling out
homosexual notables, who are often presented as moral exemplars set apart
from their historical context. (See "Biographies: Collective,"
III.T). A contrasting historiographic trend seeks to determine context, and
then to situate the individuals within it. This approach, often associated
with the Social Construction research program, has its own problems stemming
from its tendency to reduce individuals to the status of mere puppets of
their social situation and to obscure continuities linking experience from
one era to another. There is also a trend to broaden the scope of inquiry to
comprise
homosociality, including same-sex friendship, whether or not
this be expressed genitally (see
"Friendship," XIV.K). Another area of uncertainty is the
parallelism that has often been assumed—rather than demonstrated—between
lesbian and gay male experience. Historically, many cultures have not
regarded the two as homologous. This section cites short methodological
studies as well as larger works attempting synthesis. 401. AGUIAR, ASDRUBAL ANTONIO D'. "Evolucao da Pederas- tia e do
Lesbismo na Europa," Arquivo da Univer- sidade do Lisboa, 11
(1926), 336-620. Survey of the history of male
homosexuality and lesbianism in Europe from classical antiquity to the
present, citing many texts. While much is understandably culled from other
sources, this major study is useful for Spain and Portugal, and for statutory
law (including that pertaining to lesbianism). 402. ARIES, PHILIPPE, and ANDRE BEJIN (eds.). Western Sexuality: Practice and
Precept in Past and Present. Oxford: Basil Blackwell, 1985. 220
pp. Collection of papers treating
the history of sexuality from ancient Greece onwards, several directly
relevant. Translated from Communications [Paris], no. 35 (1982). 403. BOSWELL, JOHN. "Revolutions, Universale and Sexual
Categories,"
Salmagundi, no. 58-59 (1982-83), 89- 113. Methodological reflections
which seek to clarify the problem of continuity in sexual history by
proposing a threefold typology. Boswell proposes to apply the medieval
conflict between nominalism and essentialism as a model for understanding current controversies. 404. BULLOUGH, VERN. Sex, Society and History. New York:
Science Society Publications, 1976. 186 pp. Reprints fourteen scholarly
papers ranging from ancient Mesopotamia through the middle ages to
nineteenth- century America. 405. BULLOUGH, VERN. Sexual Variance in Society and History. New York: John
Wiley, 1976. 715 pp. An ambitious work of synthesis, correlating
homosexuality with other modes of sexual behavior, and showing the
overarching control of culture, including religion. The contrast between
sex-positive and sex-negative societies is overly schematic. The notes offer
much documentation. See also his introductory work:
Homosexuality, A History: From Ancient Greece to Gay Liberation
(New York: New American Library, 1979; 196 pp.). 406. BULLOUGH, VERN, and BONNIE
BULLOUGH. Sin, Sickness and Sanity: A
History of Sexual Attitudes. New York: New American Library,
1977. 276 pp. (Meridian Books) Stimulating but rapid survey of
a vast domain; see pp. 3-4, pp. 3-4, 52-53, 84-85, 154-55, 201-10. 407. CHAMBERLAIN, J. EDWARD, and SANDER L. GILMAN (ed.).
Degeneration: The Dark Side of Progress. New York: Columbia
University Press, 1985. 303 pp. Papers of varying quality on
the permutations of the concept in several fields, mainly in Europe in the
19th and 20th centuries. Considerable indirect interest. For an exhaustive study
of a related problem, see: Alexander Demandt, Der Fall Roms: Die Auflösung des
Römischen Reiches im ürteil der Nachwelt (Munich: С. H. Beck, 1984; 695 pp.), which lists 210
factors—including homosexuality—which have been implicated in the fall of Rome. 408. CROMPTON, LOUIS. "Gay Genocide from Leviticus to Hitler,"
in: L. Crew (ed.),
The Gay Academic. Palm Springs, CA: Etc., 1978, 67-91. Surveys the persecution of male
homosexuals through the application of the death penalty, from Biblical times
through the Nazi era. 409. DALL'ORTO, GIOVANNI. "L'evoluzione del concetto di 1omosessualità1 nei secoli," in: F. Castellano (ed.), Essere
omosessuale. Cuneo: AGA, 1981, 39- 62. Outline of changing concepts of
homosexual behàvior from the Greeks to
the present. 410. DANIEL, MARC (pseud.)". "Essai de
méthodologie pour l'étude des aspects homosexuels de ^histoire." Arcadie,
no. 131 (November 1964), 497-505; no. 132 (December 1964), 559-65. Criticizes methods of
historical analysis applied by US Movement scholars. A shortened version
appeared in:
ONE Quarterly (Fall 1960). 411. DYNES, WAYNE, and WARREN JOHANSSON. "Eros, Myth and Stigma: The
Historical Semantics of Sexual Intolerance," The Voice [San Francisco],
3:2 (January 14, 1981), 8. Continues in successive issues
of the newspaper until 3:10 (May 8, 1981), 34. Examines the historical role
of such concepts as the unnatural, decadence, and sexism. Largely
incorporated in: Dynes, Homolexis (New York: Gay Academic Union,
1985; 177 pp.). 412. EAUBONNE, FRANÇOISE D'.
Eros minoritaire. Paris: Ballard, 1970.' 326 pp. Literary-historical survey of "minority"
sexual behavior. 413. EGLINTON, J. Z. (pseud.). Greek Love. New York:
Oliver Layton Press, 1964. 504 pp. The title notwithstanding, this
book offers a comprehensive study of sexual and educational relationships
between men and boys with special reference to historical aspects over the
centuries (not limited to Greece). There is considerable emphasis on literary
works and legal sources. 414. FLANDRIN, JEAN-LOUIS. Le sexe et l'Occident. Paris: Seuil, 1981. 376 pp. Collection of essays by a French historian
who has become influential through his pioneering use of quantitative and and
analytical methods. Of general, rather than specifically homosexual
interest. 415. FOUCAULT, MICHEL. The History of Sexuality: Vol. I: An Introduction. Translated from French by R.
Hurley. New York: Pantheon, 1978. 170 pp. Stimulating, but sometimes opaque
essay on the conceptual foundations of modern sexuality, which has had a
great influence on the Social Construction school of homosexual history. This
programmatic text—published in Paris in 1976 as La volonté de savoir—vas to be
followed by five more volumes offering supporting detail for recent centuries.
Although this project was not realized, two volumes dealing instead with
classical antiquity did appear just before his death in 1984. 416.
FRIELE,
KAREN-CHRISTINE.
De vorsvant bare ... Fragmente av homofiles historié. Oslo: Gyldendal Norsk Forlag, 1985. 200 pp. A noted Norwegian lesbian
activist and scholar presents aspects of homosexual
history from Old Testament times to ca. 1950. 417. GREENBERG, DAVID, and MARCIA BYSTRYN. "Capitalism, Bureaucracy,
and Male Homosexuality," Contemporary Crises, 8 (1984), 33-56.
Argues that the late 19th- and 20th-century stigmatization of homosexual
behavior is a consequence of competitive capitalism and bureaucratic
organization. 418. HARDMAN, PAUL D. Homoaffectionalism: The Civilizing Factor.
Los Angeles: One Institute, 1985. Reviews history from the
Hittites through the Middle Ages in a new theoretical perspective. 418A. HOFFMAN, RICHARD J.
"Clio, Fallacies, and Homosexuality," JH, 10:3/4 (Winter
1984), 45-52. Signals such methodological faults as the assertion of
assumptions as proven, monothematism, semantic distortion, ethnocentrism,
anachronism, historicism, the pathetic fallacy, and tunnel history. 419. KEPNER, JIM.
Becoming a People ... A 4,000 Year Gay and Lesbian Chronology.
Los Angeles: National Gay Archives, 1983. 79 pp. Persons and events from history
marshalled chronologically, with introductory reflections on method.
"Prepub- lication Edition" containing some imperfections. 420. Lesbian History Issue. Frontiers: A Journal of Women's
Studies, 4:3 (Fall 1979). 88pp. Collection of essays, many
containing references, chiefly on recent history. Note especially: Judith
Schwartz, "Questionnaire on Issues in Lesbian History," pp. 1-12. 421. LICATA, SALVATORE, and ROBERT J. PETERSEN (eds.). Historical
Perspectives on Homosexuality. New York: Stein and Day/Haworth
Press, 1981. 224 pp. Book publication of a special number of JH
(6:1/2; Fall-Winter 1980-81) containing twelve papers of exceptional quality
(high Middle Ages to the 20th century). 422. NOONAN, JOHN T. Contraception: A History of Its Treatment by the
Catholic Theologians and Canonists. Cambridge, MA: The Belknap Press,
1966. 561 pp. Study of remarkable scope with
considerable indirect application to homosexuality. 423. PADGUG, ROBERT. "Bibliography," Committee on Lesbian and Gay
History Newsletter (Summer 1983), 12-16. Classified list of 119
items, many annotated. Continued in Newsletter, no. 8
(Summer
1984) [published in IGLA Bulletin, no. 2],
38-42 (142 items). 424. PADGUG, ROBERT. "Sexual Matters: On Conceptualizing Sexuality in
History,"
Radical History Review, 20 (1979), 3-23. A gay historian attempts to
fuse the Social Construction approach to the history of the development of
sex- ual behavior with Marxist immanentism. See also Bert
Hansen, "Historical Construction of Homosexuality." ibid., 66-73. 425. PARKER, WILLIAM. "Homosexuality in History: An Annotated
Bibliography,"
JH, 6:1/2 (Fall-Winter 1980-81), 191-210. Classified selection of 123
items, all in the English language. 426. SPRAGUE, GREGORY A. "Male Homosexuality in Western Culture: The
Dilemma of Identity and Subculture in Historical Research." JH,
10:3/4 (Winter 1984), 29-43. Reviews recent scholarship on
the emergence of homosexual identities and subcultures in Western societies. 427. STONE, LAWRENCE. "Sex in the West." New
Republic (July 8, 1985), 25-37. A noted historian's thoughtful
synthesis for the lay reader of publications in the history of sexuality over
the last decade. 428. TAYLOR, GORDON RATTRAY. Sex in History. New
York: Vanguard, 1954. 336 pp. Offers a dualistic scheme of history as a succession of "matrist" and "patrist" eras. Only in the former, in which women had high status, did homosexuality come to flourish openly. Willful. 429.
USSEL,
JOSEF MARIA WILLEM VAN. Sexualunterdriick- ung. Hamburg:
Rowohlt, 1970. 248 pp. A Belgian scholar interprets
the sexual history of Europe as a pattern of repression—a view that is
probably overstated. This work, translated from a Dutch original (1968),
derives from a thesis emphasizing the 18th century, which remains the most
useful aspect of the book in its several published versions. B. ANCIENT NEAR EAST AND EGYPT The civilizations of the
ancient Near East, here embracing an arc from Egypt to Iran, are difficult for the nonspec- ialist to penetrate.
Because of the hermetic complexities of the written and archaeological
evidence, progress in our knowledge is of necessity in the hands of trained
specialists. In evaluating the citations listed below it is well to bear in
mind that some are relatively specialized and technical, while others are
addressed to the lay reader. In addition to their intrinsic importance, the
civilizations of the ancient Near East are significant as a foundation for
ancient Greece (see III.C) and a major influence on the Bible (see VII.B). 430. ALDRED, CYRIL. Akhenaten, Pharaoh of Egypt: a New Study. New York: McGraw-Hill,
1968. 272 pp. See Chapter 8, "The Pathology ot Akhenaten" (pp.
133-39), advancing a dubious medical explanation for the heretical ruler's
androgynous appearance, which has often been remarked. 431. BIGGS, ROBERT D. SA.ZI.GA: Ancient
Mesopotamian Potency Incantations in Texts from Cuneiform Sources. Locust Valley, NY: J. J. Augustin, 1967. 86 pp. Texts shedding light on the
attitudes toward sexuality in general, and about homosexuality, including
anal intercourse. See also his: "Medicine in Ancient Mesopotamia,"
History
of Science, 8 (1969), 94-105. 432. BOTTERO, JEAN, and H. PETSCHOW. "Homosexualität," Reallexikon der Assyriologie, 4 ['1975 ], ' 459-68 . Well-documented survey in
French of ancient Mesopotamian written and artistic evidence. 433. BULLOUGH, VERN. "Attitudes toward Deviant Sex in Ancient
Mesopotamia,"
Journal of Sex Research, 7:3 (1971), 184-203. Argues that there were fewer
prohibitions against sex in these early societies than in our own time. 434. BULLOUGH, VERN. "Homosexuality as Submissive Behavior," Journal
of Sex Research, 9:4 (1973), 283-88. Argues, chiefly from
mythological evidence, that the Egyptians used anal intercourse to symbolize
dominance. For a broader perspective on ancient Egypt, see the author's Sexual
Variance in Society and History (New York: Wiley, 1976), 58-73. 435. DEAKIN, TERENCE J. "Evidence for Homosexuality in Ancient
Egypt,"
International Journal of Greek Love, 1:1 (1966), 31-38. A useful survey, critical and well referenced. 436. DORNSEIFF, FRANZ. "Ägyptische Liebeslieder, Hoheslied, Sappho, Theokrit," Zeitschrift der Deutschen morgenländischen Gesellschaft, 90 (1931), 588-601. Detects an Egyptian model for Sappho's poetry. 437. DUCHESNE-GUILLEMIN, JACQUES. Symbols and Values in Zoroastrianism: Their Survival and Renewal. New York: Harper and Row,
1966. 167 pp. In Iran the procreative ethic of Zoroastrianism produced
sometimes virulent condemnations of homosexuality, though Herodotus (1:135)
mentions it as flourishing there (p. 149 ff.). 438. GOEDICKE, HANS. "Unrecognized
Sportings,"
Journal of the
American Research Center in Egypt, 6 (1967), 97-102. Maxim 32 of the Instructions to
Ptahhotep (Papyrus Prisse 14.4-6) is interpreted (uncertainly) as an
admonition to refrain from pederastic assault after meeting objections to
advances. 439. GRIFFITHS, JOHN GWYN. The Conflict of Horus and Seth. Chicago: Argonaut,
1969. 182 pp. Interpretation of key Egyptian mythological texts with salient
homoerotic features. See also his: The Origins of Osiris and His Cult
(Leiden: E. J. Brill, 1980; 287 pp.), p. 15. 440. HELD, GEORGE F. "Parallels between The Gilgamesh Epic and Plato's
Symposium,"
Journal of Near Eastern Studies, 42 (1983), 133-41. Close reading of the language
of Gilgamesh's dream reveals its homoerotic character. Translations of the
epic tend to be bowdlerized in this and other regards. Note also an earlier
article by Thorkild Jacobsen, "How Did Gilgames Oppress Uruk?" Acta
Orientalia, 8 (1930), 70 ff.; as well as Giuseppe Furlani,
"L'epopea di Gilgames come inno all'amicizia,"
Belfagor, 1 (1946, 577-89. See also: A. D. Kilmer; and B. Thorbjornsrud , below. 441. HILLERS, DELBERT R. "The Bow of Aqhat: The Meaning of a Mythological Theme," in: Harry A. Hoffner, Jr. (ed.). Orient and Occident. Kevelaer: Verlag Butzon und Bercker, 1973, pp. 70-80. Transvestism, eunuchism, and
male cult prostitution in the ancient Near East. 442. HOFFMAN, RICHARD J. "Vices, Gods, and Virtues: Cosmology as a
Mediating Factor in Attitudes toward Male Homosexuality," JH,
9:2/3 (1983-84), 27-44. Using historical and
anthropological evidence, argues a contrast between monotheism and polytheism
with regard to male homosexuality. Speculative. 443. HOFFNER, HARRY A., JR. "Incest, Sodomy and Bestiality in the
Ancient Near East," in: Hoffner (ed.), Orient and Occident.
Kevalaer: Verlag Butzon und Bercker, 1973, pp. 81-90. Comparative study of texts from
different regions of the ancient Near East. 444. KILMER, ANNE DRAFFKORN. "A Note on an Overlooked Word Play in the
Akkadian Gilgamesh," in: G. Van Driel et al. (eds.), Zikir
Sumim: Assyriological Studies Presented to F. R. Kraus on the Occasion of His
Seventieth Birthday. Leiden: E. J. Brill, 1982, pp. 128-32. On homosexual puns in the Gilgamesh epic. 445. LAMBERT, W. G. "Morals in Ancient Mesopotamia," Ex oriente lux, 15 (1957-58), 184-96. Reveals some striking contrasts with our own attitudes. 446. LECLANT, JEAN. "Les textes de la
Pyramide de Pépi
(Saqqara)," Académie des
Inscriptions et Belles Lettres, Comptes-Rendus, 1977, pp. 269-290. For an Old Kingdom text from Saqqara on the relation
between Osiris and Seth, see pp. 278-79. 447. MANNICHE, LISE. "Some Aspects of Ancient Egyptian Sexual Life," Acta
Orientalia, 38 (1977), 11-23. See pp. 14-15 for brief
comments on male homosexuality and lesbianism. 448. MONTET, PIERRE. "Le fruit défendu," Kémi: Revue de Philologie et d'Archéologie Egyptiennes et Coptes, II
(1950), 85-116. Discusses problems of
translating early Egyptian texts that seem to forbid homosexuality. 449. MORAN, W. L. "New Evidence from Mari on the History of Prophecy," Biblica,
50 (1969), 15-56. Possible citations from
Mesopotamian palace correspondence to homosexual favorites of the king,,and to homosexual cult officials. 450. MORET, ALEXANDRE. Du caractère religieux de la royauté pharaonique. Paris: Ernest Leroux, 1902. (Annales du Musée Guimet, Bibliothèque d'Etudes, 15). For symbolic divine homosexual embraces in the coronation rites of
Ramses II and II, see pp. 45-48, 100-01, 106-08. See
also his:
Le rituel du culte divin journalier en Egypte. (Paris: Ernest Leroux, 1902; Annales du Musée Guimet, Bibliothèque d'Etudes, 14), pp. 22^-24, 99-101. 451. NIBLEY, HUGH. The Message of the Joseph Smith Papyri: An Egyptian Endowment. Salt Lake City: Deseret, 1976. 305 pp. For description of the ritual
coronation embraces of the Egyptian king, see pp. 241-66. 452. POSENER, GEORGES. "Le conte de Neferkaré et du général Sisiné," Revue d'Egyptologie, 11 (1957), 119-37. Text, translation and commentary and of Middle
Kingdom Egyptian story of King Pepy II's (2355-2261 B.C.) amorous trysts
with his general. See also his: "Sur l'emploi
euphématique de hftj(w) 'ennemi(s), "' Zeitschrift für ägyptische Sprache,
96 (1969), 30-35. 453. PRITCHARD, JAMES B. (ed.). Ancient Near Eastern Texts Relating
to the Old Testament. Third ed. Princeton: Princeton University
Press, 1969. 710 PP. In this standard collection of
translations, see pp. 34-35 (Egyptian Protestation of
Guiltlessness), p. 181 (Middle Assyrian Laws), and p. 196 (Hittite Laws:
father-son incest is a capital offense). 454. REEDER, GREG. "Journey to the Past: Egypt and a Gay Tomb?" Advocate
(May 12, 1983), 25ff. Finds homosexuality in an Old Kingdom tomb's frescos. The tomb is published in Ahmed M. Moussa and Hartwig Altenmuller, Das Grab des Nianchnum and Chnumhotep. (Mainz: Von Zabern, 1977; 180 pp. Archäologische Veröffentlichungen des Deutschen Archäologischen Instituts, Abteilung Kairo, 21). 455. RIEFSTAHL, ELIZABETH. "An Enigmatic Faience Figure," in: Miscellanea
Wilbouriana (Brooklyn Museum), vol. 1, p. 137ff. An ithyphallic figurine found
in a tomb at Lisht is cautiously interpreted as a catamite for the enjoyment
of the deceased. 456. THORBJORNSRUD, BERIT. "What Can the Gilgamesh Myth Tell Us about
Religion and the View of Humanity in Mesopotamia?" Temenos,
19 (1983), 112-37. Interprets the relationship of
Gilgamesh and Enkidu as a homosexual friendship that entails the rejection of
Ishtar, the female principle. Much later, the Assyrians prohibited male
homosexuality and abolished the cult prostitution connected with the shrines
of Ishtar. 457. VELDE, H. TE. Seth, God of Confusion. Leiden: E. J. Brill, 1967. 183 pp. This standard work on the
somewhat sinister Egyptian God Seth includes discussion of his homoerotic
relation with Horus. 458.
WESTENDORF,
WOLFHART. "Homosexualität," Lexikon
der Ägyptologie, 2 (1977), cols. 1272-74. Concise summary of current
knowledge about ancient Egyptian homosexuality, with references. Interest in Greek and Roman
homosexuality as a subject begins with the Renaissance, as part of the
learned enterprise of humanistic philology, which provided "cover"
for the exploration of pédérastie themes. In the 18th century, neoclassicism sparked a
new wave of interest, as seen in the career of J. J. Winckelmann, who is
often regarded as the first modern art historian. With new critical methods
and the beginnings of field archaeology, the 19th century revolutionized the
study of the ancient past. Classical philology played an important part in
the formation of the ideas of such homosexual scholars as J. A.
Symonds and K. H. Ulrichs. Since about 1965 there has been a fresh wave of
classical scholarship throwing light on (homo)sexuality
by profiting from the removal of taboos. See also Ancient Art (VI.B), for the
important subject of vase painting, a medium that also yields social and
historical data. For ancient medicine, see XXIII.D. The classical sources
themselves, which exist in many editions, are not listed here as such; see
the bibliographies in the monographs of K. J. Dover (491), F. Buf- fiere
(477), and S. Lilja (536), as well as the Personal Names Index. 459. AFRICA, THOMAS. "Homosexuals in Greek History," Journal
of Psychohistôry, 9:4 (1982), 401-20. Focusing largely on the
relatively neglected Hellenistic period, the author attempts a biographical
approach, which is marred by anachronistic psychoanalytic assumptions. For a
critique, suggesting homophobia on Africa's part, see Fernando
Gonzalez-Reigosa and Angel Velez-Diaz, ibid., 10:4
(1983), 511-19; followed by Africa's intemperate response, ibid., 11:1
(1983), 129-32. 460. ARBOIS DE JUBAINVILLE, HENRI D.' La famille celtique. Paris: Bouillon, 1905. 221 pp. The appendix (pp. 187-199)
treats the question: were the ancient Celts homosexual? 461. BABUT, DANIEL. "Les Stoiciens et l'amour," Revue des Etudes Grecques, 76 (1963), 55-63. Refutes Flaceliere's claim that
the later Stoic thinkers condemned homosexual love. See also J. M. Rist, Stoic
Philosophy (Cambridge: Cambridge University Press, 1969), pp.
56-69. 462. BAIRD, LORRAYNE Y. "Priapus
gallinaceus: The Role of the Cock in Fertility and Eroticism in Classical
Antiquity and the Middle Ages," Studies in Iconography,
7-8 (1981-82), 81-111. Extensively documented study on
the erotic connotations of the rooster. "In ancient Greece and
surrounding areas, the most common erotic association of the cock ... seems
to have been with homosexual affairs." 463. BALSDON, J. P. V. D. Romans
and Aliens. Chapel Hill: University of North Carolina Press,
1979. 310 pp. This encyclopedic work helps to
situate Roman concepts of pederasty in the framework of their attitudes
toward foreigners. See pp. 225-27. 464. BERNAY, JEROME. "Folies romaines: les homosexuels dans
l'oeuvre de Juvénal," Arcadie, no. 259-60 (July-August 1975), 356-64. Characters in the poet's satires. See also his:
"La repression de l'homosexualité
dans la Rome antique," ibid., no. 250
(October 1974), 443-55. 454. BETHE, ERICH. "Die dorische Knabenliebe: ihre Ethik und ihre Idee," Rheinisches Museum, 62 (1907), 438-75. This influential study by a
noted philologist offers an imaginative reconstruction of the dynamics of the
relation between the male lover and his beloved in ancient Greece. Yet
Bethe's attribution of the origins of the Greek institution of pederasty to
the Dorian influx has been weakened by recent criticisms by Sir Kenneth
Dover. The paper was reissued in 1983 in Berlin (Verlag Rosa Winkel) as an
independent brochure (48 pp.), with an introduction by Wolfram Setz. 455. BEYER, RUDOLF. Fabulae graecae
quatenus quave aetate puerorum amore commutatae sint. Weida, Thuringia: Thomas und Hubert, 1910. 77 pp. This published dissertation in
Latin is an important source for Greek myths of affairs between gods and
their beloved boys. 456. BLOCH, ROBERT D. Pseudo-Luciani amoribus: dissertatio inauguralis. Strasbourg: Truebner, 1907. 49 pp. Valuable philological analysis,
in Latin, of the essay on love mistakenly attributed to Lucian. 457. BOWRA, CECIL MAURICE, SIR. Greek Lyric Poetry: from Alcman to
Simonides. Second, revised ed. Oxford: Clarendon Press, 1961.
444 pp. Contains chapters on Sappho
(pp. 176-240); Ibycus (pp. 241-67); and Anacreon (pp. 268-307, esp. pp.
277-84). 458. BOWRA, CECIL MAURICE, SIR. Pindar. Oxford: Clarendon
Press, 1964. 446 pp. Standard account in English of
the great Theban poet; see esp. pp. 106-07, 166-70, 274, 362, 386-88. 459. BRELICH, ANGELO. Paides e parthenoi. Rome: Edi- zioni dell'Ateneo, 1969. 500 pp. Greek rites of initiation,
including pederasty, from a comparative perspective. 460. BREMMER, JAN. "An Enigmatic Indo-European Rite: Paederasty,"
Arethusa, 13:2 (1980), 279-98. Controversial cross-cultural
analysis of parallels for Greek initiatory homosexuality. 461. BRIGHT, DAVID F. Haec mihi fingebam: Tibullus and His World. Leiden: Brill,
1978. 275 pp. Includes discussion of lyrics
addressed to the boy Marathus. 473. BRISSON, LUC. "Aspects politiques de la bisexualité: l'histoire de Polycrite." In: M. B. De Boer and T. A. Eldridge (eds.), Hommages à Maarten J. Vermaseren. Leiden: Brill, 1978, vol. 1, pp. 80-122. On a legend found in Phlegon of Tralles and Proclus concerning the birth of an androgynous
monster. See also his: Le mythe de Tirésias (Leiden: Brill, 1976; 189 pp.). 474.
BROUWER, PETRUS VAN LIMBURG. Histoire de la
civilisation morale et religieuse des Grecs. Groningen: W. van Boekeren, 1833-42. See volume 4 (of part 2), pp. 224-75, for a Dutch classicist's
detailed and relatively objective account of "l'amour des males,"
remarkable for its time. 475.
BRUYN,
E. B. DE.
Sex en eros bij Martialis. Amsterdam: Arbeiderspers,
1979. 225 pp. Sex and love in the epigrams of
Martial. 476. BUCKLER, JOHN. The Theban Hegemony, 371-362 B.C. Cambridge, MA: Harvard
University Press, 1980. 339 pp. The period of the triumph of
the Theban Band, whose homosexual character is regrettably scanted by Buckler. 477. BUFFIÈRE, FÉLIX. Eros adolescent: la péderastie dans la Grèce antique. Paris: Les Belles Lettres, 1980. 703 pp. Monumental survey of Greek
homosexuality, including its prolongation into Hellenistic and Roman times,
with numerous textual analyses and translations. Sometimes uncritical. Note
esp. the full index of ancient authors (pp. 660-71). 478. BURNETT, ANNE PIPPIN. "Desire and Memory (Sappho frag. 94).," Classical Philology, 74 (1979), 16-27. On the poet's poignant lyric of
parting. In general, see Jeffrey Duban, Ancient and Modern Images of Sappho (Lanham, MD: Classical
Association of the Atlantic States/University Press of America, 1983;
Classical World Special Series, 2). 479. CALAME, CLAUDE. Les choeurs de jeunes filles en Grèce archaique. Rome: Ateneo & Bizzarii, 1977. 2 vols. See vol. 2 esp. for evidence from Alcman's poems on lesbian aspects
of girls' initation rites in early Greece. 480. CARTLEDGE, PAUL. "The Politics of Spartan Pederasty,"
Proceedings of the Cambridge Philological Society, 207 (1981),
17-36. Useful, but somewhat
inconclusive review of the evidence. 481. CLARKE, W. M. "Achilles and Patroclus in
Love," Hermes,
106 (1978), 381-96. From a review of textual
evidence and ancient parallels, the author concludes that Homer's heroes were
indeed in love. Contrast D. S. Barrett, "The Friendship of Achilles and
Patroclus,"
Classical Bulletin, 57 (1981), 87-93, who (writing evidently in
ignorance of Clarke's arguments) excludes homoeroticism. See also D. S.
Sinos,
Achilles, Patroklos and the Meaning of 'Philos' (Innsbruck: 1980); and W. Thomas MacCary,
Childlike Achilles: Ontogeny and Phylogeny in the Iliad (New
York: Columbia University Press, 1982). 482. CODY, JANE M. "The senex amator in
Plautus' Casina,"
Hermes, 104 (1976), 453-76. Useful study of the Roman
playwright's most homosexual work. 483. COLIN, JEAN. "Juvenal et le mariage mystique de Gracchus," Atti della Accademia delle scienze
di Torino, 90:2 (1955-56), 114-216. Detailed study of a kind of
male-male marriage under religious auspices, citing not only Juvenal but
many other Latin authors. 484. COURTNEY, E. C. A Commentary on the Satires of Juvenal. London: Athlone
Press, 1980. 662 pp. The most detailed commentary on the Roman poet's text.
See satires 2 and 9; also 5:56-62; 6:33-37; 11:145-58; and 15: 135-37. See
also J. Gerard,
Juvenal et la realite contemporaine (Paris, 1956). 485. CROMPTON, LOUIS. "What Do You Say to
Someone Who Claims that Homosexuality Caused the Fall of Greece and
Rome?"
Christopher Street (March 1978), 49-52. Useful concise demolition of such myths. 486. DANIEL, MARC. Des dieux et des garçons: étude sur l'homosexualité dans la mythologie
grecque.
Paris: Arcadie, 1968. 38 pp. Magico-religious elements in Greek pederasty. 487. DELCOURT, MARIE. Hermaphrodite: Myths and Rites of the Bisexual Figure in Classical Antiquity. Translated by Jennifer
Nicholson. London: Studio Books, 1961. 109 pp. A standard work on the varied
aspects of the hermaphrodite myth in Greco-Roman times. See also her
complementary work, stressing archaeology and art: Hermaphroditéa: recherches sur l'être double promoteur
de la fertilité dans le monde classique (Brussels: Latomus/Revue d'Etudes
Latines, 1966;
76 pp.). 488. DELEPIERRE, JOSEPH OCTAVE. Dissertation sur les idées morales des Grecs et sur le danger de lire Platon. Rouen: J. Lemonnyer, 1879. 20 pp. Curious period document introducing the term
"philopede" derived from Greek philopais. 489. DELORME, JEAN, and WOLFGANG SPEYER. "Gymnasium," Reallexikon
fur Antike und Christentum, 13 (1984), cols. 155-76. Includes a concise account of
pederasty in the gymnasia, and of Christian
objections thereto. See also Delorme's book: Gymnasion: Etude sur les monuments consacrés à l'éducation en Grèce (Paris: E. de Boccard, 1960; 530 pp. ). 490. DEVEREUX, GEORGE. "Greek
Pseudo-homosexuality and the 'Greek Miracle.'" Symbolae
Osloenses, 42 (1967), 69-92. Paradoxical psychoanalytic
study treating Greek pederasty as both an indispensable element of Greek high
culture and a symptom of immaturity. See also his: "The Nature of
Sappho's Seizure in fr 31 LP as Evidence of Her Inversion,"
Classical Quarterly, N.S., 20 (1970), 17-31; and "Why
Oedipus Killed Laius," International Journal of Psychoanalysis,
34 (1953), 132-41. 491. DOVER, KENNETH J., SIR. Greek Homosexuality.
Cambridge, MA: Harvard University Press, 1978. 244 pp. 106 illustrations. Penetrating study of literary
sources for classical Greece (largely excluding the Hellenistic and Roman
sequels, for which see esp. Buffiere, above). Beginning with a detailed analysis
of Aeschines' "Contra Timarchum," the analysis broadens to
encompass a wide range of topics, some of which are discussed brilliantly.
The treatment of the iconography of vase painting is less satisfactory
(compare, e.g., H. A. Shapiro, "Courtship Scenes in Attic Vase Painting,
"American Journal of Archaeology, 85, 1981, 133-43). For
critical reflections on the book, see John Ungaretti, "De-moralizing
Morality: Where Dover's Greek Homosexuality Leaves Us," JH
8 (1983), 1-17. See also Dover: "Eros and Nomos," Bulletin
of the Institute of Classical Studies (London), 11 (1964),
31-42. 492. DOVER, KENNETH J., SIR. Greek Popular Morality in the Time
of Plato and Aristotle. Oxford: Basil Blackwell, 1975. 330 pp. An attempt to correct the
traditional overintellectualized picture of Greek attitudes, including those
pertaining to sex, by retrieving the views of the man and woman in the
street. 493. DUBOIS, PAGE. "Phallocentrism and Its Subversion in Plato's
Phaedrus,"
Arethusa, 18 (1985), 91-103. Revising an interpretation of
Jacques Derrida, seeks to show that Plato appropriated maternity to the male
philosopher. See also: Dorothea Wender, "Plato: Misogynist,
Paedophile, and Feminist," Arethusa, 6 (1973),
75-90. 494. DUGAS, LUDOVIC. L'amitié antique d'après les moeurs populaires et les theories des philosophes, Paris: Felix Alcan, 1894. 654 pp. Reprinted New York: Arno Press, 1976. In this comprehensive work concerning ancient
ideas of friendship, see esp. "L'amour
grec" (pp. 84-104), on pederasty. A more recent synthesis
is Jean Fraisse, Philia: la notion d'amitié dans la philosophie antique (Paris: J. Vrin, 1974; 504 pp.). 495. DUMÉZIL, GEORGES. Romans de Scythie et d'alentour. Paris: Payot, 1978. 380 pp. A distinguished French scholar
of comparative Indo-European institutions reflects on the noted passage in
Herodotus 4:67, concerning Scythian effeminacy in relation to subarctic
shamanism ("La maladie des Enarées," pp. 212- 18). 496. DYOR, EUGÈNE. "Dialogues sur l'amour," Arcadie, no. 67-68
(July-August 1959), 397-405. On the work attributed to
Plutarch. See also the edition of this text, Dialogues sur l'amour (Eroticos). Text, translation, and introduction by Robert Flacelière (Paris: Les Belles Lettres, 1952; 141 pp.; an enlarged edition appreared in
1980). 497. EYBEN, EMIEL. De jonge Romein volgens de literaire bronnen der periode ca. 200 Chr. tot ca. 500 n. Chr. Brussels: 1977.
(Verhandelingen van de Koninklijke Academie voor Wetenschappen, Letteren en
Schone Künsten van Belgiën, Klasse der
Letteren, 39, 81). 691 pp. Granting that in young Romans the expression of
homosexual impulses was stimulated by the school, the gymnasia and the army,
Eyben tends to overstate negative attitudes (see esp. pp. 197, 475-79). There
is a 29-page English summary. 498. FERRI, SILVIO. "Sui vasi greci con epigrafi 'acclamatorie,'" Rendiconti della R. Accademia nazionale dei
lincei; classe di scienze morali
storiche e filologiche, 6th ser., 14 (1938), 93- 179. Claims (unconvincingly) that
the love names on Greek vases are in honor of deceased youths; useful
appendix of texts, pp. 158-79. 499. FIGUEIRA, THOMAS J., and GREGORY NAGY (eds.). Theognis
of Megara: Poetry and Polis (Baltimore: Johns Hopkins University Press, 1985. 346 pp. Essays on the archaic Greek
poet and the associated corpus (the Theognidea). See esp. Daniel B. Levine,
"Symposium and the Polis (pp. 176-96), John M. Lewis, "Eros and the Polis in Theognis Book II (197-222), and Walter Donlan,
"Pistos Philos Hetairos"
(223-45). 500. FINLEY, MOSES I. The
World of Odysseus. Second ed. New York: Viking, 1978. 188
pp. This influential analysis of Homeric culture, first published in 1954,
highlights the intensity of male bonding in contrast to the relative unimportance
of marital relationships . 501. FLACELIÈRE, ROBERT. Love in
Ancient Greece. New York: Crown, 1962. 224 pp. Translation of L'amour en Grèce (Paris: Hachette, 1960). Although this book is by a classical scholar
of repute, the chapter on homosexuality (pp. 63-100) is tendentious and
sometimes inaccurate. See also: Paul Frischauer, La sexualité dans l'antiquité (Paris: Stock, 1969); Jacques Mazel, Les métamorphoses d'Eros: L'amour dans la Grèce antique (Paris: Presses de la Renaissance, 1984); Frida Wion, "L'amour grec," Bulletin de l'Association Guillaume
Budé, 4th ser., 2 (1970), 249-58. 502. FORNARA, CHARLES W. "The Cult of Harmodius and Aristogeiton," Philologus, 114 (1970), 155-80. On the Athenian custom of commemorating the tyrant slayers, who were
homosexual lovers. 503.
FOUCAULT, MICHEL. L'usage des plaisirs. Paris: Gallimard, 1984. 285 pp. This posthumously published
volume 2 of
Histoire de la sexualité (on a very different plan from that originally envisaged) concentrates on
ancient Greek texts bearing on the economy of self-management, including
pleasure and sex. There is an English translation by Robert Hurley: The Use
of Pleasure (New York: Pantheon, 1985; 293 pp.). Followed by Le souci de soi (Paris: Gallimard, 1984; 284 pp.). 504. FRANCIS, E. D. and M. VICKERS. "Leagros
Kalos," Proceedings
of the Cambridge Philological Society, 207
(1981), 97-136. Major review of
historical problems arising from one of the most famous of the love names
found on Greek vases. 505. FRIEDRICH, PAUL. The Meaning of Aphrodite. Chicago:
University of Chicago Press, 1978. 243 pp. Primarily a reconstruction of
proto-Indo-European cosmology, this monograph includes a discussion of
Sappho and female homosexuality on Lesbos (pp. 108-17). 506.
FUCHS,
HERMANN.
Die Hylasgeschichte bei Apollonios Rhodios und Theokrit. Würzburg: Universität, 1969. 85 pp.
(Inaugural-Dissertation) The tragic story of Hercules'
beloved Hylas, as rendered by two leading Hellenistic writers. 507. GARLAND, YVON, and 0. MASSON. "Les acclamations pédérastiques
de Kalami (Thasos)," Bulletin de Correspondance Hellénique, 106 (1982), 3-22. Publishes a collection of explicit pédérastie
inscriptions from the island of Thasos. See also Merle K. Landon,
"Hymettiana," Hesperia, 54 (1985), 257-70 (esp. p.
264ff. on Attic kalos graffiti). 508. GARRIDO-HORY, MARGUERITE. "La vision du dépendant chez Martial à travers les relations sexuelles," Index (Naples), 10 (1981), 298-315. Structuralist analysis of
evidence from Martial's Epigrams for homosexual (and heterosexual) relations
between masters and slaves. In the same issue, see: Jerzy Kolendo, "L'esclavage et la vie sexuelle des hommes libres à Rome," 288-97; and Claudine Leduc,
"Le discours d'Aristophane et de Ménandre sur la sexualité des maitres
et des esclaves," 271-87; and in vol. 11 (1982), Maria Anton- ietta Cervellera, "Omosessualità e ideologia
schiavistica in Petronio," 221-34. 509. GOLDEN, MARK. "Slavery and Homosexuality
at Athens,"
Phoenix, 38 (1984), 308-24. Holds that the influence of the
institution of slavery affected, sometimes negatively, even relations between
free-born males. 510. GONFROY, FRANÇOISE. "Homosexualité et idéologie esclavagiste chez
Cicéron,"
Dialogues d'histoire ancienne, 4 (1978), 219-65. (Besancon, Université:
Annales littéraires, 225) Exposes Cicero's exploitation of sexual invective for political ends; note useful charts of terms, pp. 238-62. 511. GRANAROLO, JEAN. "L'heure de vérité pour Tallus le cinède (Catulle
XXV),"
Revue des Etudes Anciennes, 60 (1958), 290-306. Observations on the meaning of cinaedus in Roman life. See also his: L'oeuvre de Catulle: aspects religieux, éthiques et stylistiques (Paris: Les Belles Lettres, 1967; 406 pp.), pp. 160-204. 512. GRIFFIN, JASPER. "Augustan Poetry and the Life of Luxury," Journal
of Roman Studies, 66 (1976), 87- 105. Challenges the view that
homosexual poems are of a different order of unreality from heterosexual
ones (as maintained, e.g., by Gordon Williams, Tradition and Originality in Roman
Poetry, London: Oxford University
Press, 1968, p. 551). Insists that Augustan writers in both homosexual and
heterosexual poetry reflect "a mode of life familiar to their
reader." See also Griffin, Latin Poets and Roman Life
(London: Duckworth, 1986; 240 pp.). 513. GRIMAL, PIERRE. L'amour à Rome. Second ed. Paris:
Les Belles Lettres, 1980. 346 pp. While this monograph on Roman
sexual life scants homosexual themes, it is useful for comparative purposes. 514. HERMANN, ALFRED. "Antinous infelix: Zur Typologie des
Heiligen-Unheiligen in der Spätantike," in: Mullus: Festschrift für Theodor
Klauser. Münster:
Aschendorff, 1964, pp. 155-67. Early Christian transformations of the image
of Hadrian's favorite Antinous into that of an "unsaint," a demonic
counter-figure to the Christian saint. 515. HERTER, HANS. "Effeminatus," Reallexikon für Antike und
Christentum, 4 (1959), cols. 620-50. Important learned article on effeminacy and androgyny in Greco-Roman and early
Christian civilization, and the explicit condemnation of the effeminate
"lifestyle" by the Church. 516. HOFFMAN, RICHARD J. "Some Cultural Aspects of Greek Male
Homosexuality,"
JH, 5:3 (1980), 217-26. Stresses the centrality of the
Greek family in relation to the acceptance of homosexual behavior. 517. HOWELL, PETER. A Commentary on Book One of the Epigrams of Martial.
London: Athlone Press, 1980. 369 pp. Provides detailed comment on
the 20-odd sexually explicit poems, including one lesbian example. A dense
treatment of another book is N. M. Kay, Martial: Book XI: A Commentary
(London: Duckworth, 1985; 304 pp.). See also the commentary of C. Citroni,
accompanying his edition of M. Valerii Martialis Epigrammata (Florence,
1975). 518. HUBERT, CURT.
De Plutarchi amatoria. Kirchhain: Max Schmersow, 1903. 98 pp. Philological commentary on the
essay on love attributed to Plutarch. 519.
HUNGER,
HERBERT.
Lexikon der griechischen und römischen Mythologie. Sixth ed. Vienna: Hollinek, 1969. 444 pp. Valuable concise lexicon of
Greco-Roman mythology, providing not only the essentials of the myths and
their sources, but also lists of later works using them as themes. See
entries for Ganymedes, Hyakinthos, Hylas, etc. 520. JEANMAIRE, HENRI. Couroi et courètes: essai sur
l'éducation
Spartiate et sur les rites d'adolescence dans l'antiquité
hellénique.
Lille: Bibliothèque Universitaire, 1939. 638 pp. Reprinted New York: Arno Press, 1975. See esp. pp. 456-60 on the pédérastie graffiti of the island of Thera. 521. JOCELYN, H. D. "A Greek Indecency and Its Students:
laikazein," Proceedings of the Cambridge Philological Society,
206 (1980), 12-66. On fellation from evidence in literary works
and graffiti. 522. KEULS, EVA C. The Reign of the Phallus: Sexual politics in Ancient Greece. New York: Harper and Row, 1985. 452 pp. Argues that
there is a close bond between the Athenian fixation on the phallus and the
exploitative domination of women and slaves, on the one hand, and ruthless
imperial aggression, on the other. Overstated and sometimes inaccurate, as
when it claims that pederasty involved prepubertal boys. 523. KIEFER, OTTO. Sexual Life in
Ancient Rome.
New York Dutton, 1935. 379 pp. A somewhat routine
compilation, but occasionally quite useful. Translated by Gilbert and Helen
Highet from Kiefer's Kulturgeschichte Roms (1933). 524. KISELBERG, STEFFEN. De gamle graekere og den nye mand. Copenhagen:
Museum Tusculanum Forlag, 1982. 93 pp. (Rudimenta Graecolatina, 4) Seeks to
relate the ancient Greeks to today's sociosex- ual movements. 525. KNIGHT, RICHARD PAYNE. Sexual Symbolism; A History of
Phallic Worship. New York: Julian Press, 1957. 217, 196 pp. A pioneering investigation
(1786), using archaeological and literary evidence. In this edition Knight's
work— originally titled A Discourse on the Worship of Priapus— is
followed by Thomas Wright's The Worship of the Generative Powers
(1866). 526. KRENKEL, WERNER A. "Pueri meritorii," Wissenschaftliche Zeitschrift der Wilhelm Pieck Universität Rostock, 28 (1979), 179-89. Review of sources on male
prostitution in ancient Greece and Rome, arguing that the boundaries between
ordinary relations and prostitution are fluid. See also his: "Fellatio
und irrumatio," ibid., 29 (1980), 77-88; and
"Masturbation in der Antike," ibid., 28 (1979), 159-78. 527. KROLL, WILHELM. Freundschaft und Knabenliebe. Munich: Ernst Heimeran, 1927. 39 pp. (Tusculum- Schriften, 4) Reprinted by September Verlag,
Almendingen,
1983. Survey of Greco-Roman pederasty by a noted classical
scholar. See also: H. Reynen, "Philosophie und Knabenliebe," Hermes, 95
(1967), 308-16). 528. LAMBERT, ROYSTON. Beloved and God: The Story of Hadrian and Antinous.
New York: Viking, 1984. 298 pp. Sensitive retelling of the most
famous homoerotic love affair in antiquity. A more explicitly fictionalized
version is Marguerite Yourcenar's celebrated Hadrian's Memoirs
(New York: Farrar, Straus and Young, 1954; 313 pp.). 529. LESKY, ALBIN. Vom Eros der Hellenen. Gottingen: Vandenhoeck und Ruprecht. 1976. 155 pp. Somewhat rambling essay on
ancient Greek Eros as god and concept; for pederasty, see p. 78ff. 530. LEWIS, THOMAS S. W. "Brothers of Ganymede," Salmagundi,
no. 58-59 (Fall 1983-Winter 1983), 147- 65. Seeks to downplay the physical
side of Greek homoerot- icism. 531. LICHT, HANS (pseud, of Paul Brandt). Beiträge
zur antiken Erotik. Dresden: P. Aretz, 1924. 230 pp. Collected essays on (homo)eroticism by the greatest scholar of the subject of his
time (1875-1929). 532. LICHT, HANS. "Homoerotik in den homerischen Gedichte," Anthropophyteia, 9 (1912), 291-300. On homoerotic themes in the Homeric poems. See also: "Die Erotik in den epischen Gedichten der Griechen mit besonderer Berücksichtigung des Homoerotischen," Zeitschrift für Sexualwissenschaft, 9 (1922), 65-74; "Der paidon eros in der griechischen Literatur: I. Die lyrische und bukolische Dichtung," JfsZ, 8 (1906). 619-84; "Der paidon eros in der griechischen Dichtung: II. Die Gedichte der Anthologie," (by "P. Stephanus," pseud.), JfsZ 9 (1908), 213-312; and "Der paidon eros in der griechischen Dichtung: III. Die attische Komödie," Anthropophyteia, (1910), 128-78. 533. LICHT, HANS. Die Homoerotik in der griechischen Literatur: Lukianos von Samosata. Bonn: A. Marcus & E. Weber, 1921. 78 pp. (Abhandlungen aus dem Gebiet der Sexualforschung, 3:3) Homoerotic themes in the work of Lucian. See also: "Die homoerotischen Briefe des Philostratos," Anthropophyteia, 8 (1911), 216-23; and "Sexuelles aus dem Geschichtswerk des Herodot," JfsZ, 22:3/4 (1922), 65-71. 534.
LICHT, HANS. Sappho: Lebensbild
aus den Frühlingstagen altgriechischer Dichtung. Leipzig: Rottbarth, 1905. 144 pp. Critical-biographical study of
Sappho that utterly fails to deal with the evidence for her lesbianism. 535. LICHT, HANS.
Sexual Life in Ancient Greece. London: London: Routledge and
Kegan Paul, 1932. 555 pp. Several times reprinted,
including New York: Barnes and Noble, 1953. This encyclopedic work, a
landmark in its time, has not entirely been replaced by the recent contributions
of K. Dover and F. Buffiere. There are some minor cuts from the original
German text, whose sumptuous plate volume (now rare) was not retained: Sittengeschichte
Griechenlands (Dresden, 1925-28, 3 vols., with some 500
plates). 536. LIDA TARAN, SONYA. "Eisi triches: An Erotic Motif in the Greek Anthology," Journal
of Hellenic Studies, 105 (1985), 90-107. Discusses the theme of
transitoriness in the pédérastie poems of Book XII, as exemplified by the motif fo
the growth of hair, which marks the end of the short span of sexual
attractiveness. 537. LILJA, SAARA.
Homosexuality in Republican and Augustan Rome. Helsinki:
Societas Scientiarum Fennica, 1983. 164 pp. (Commentationes Humanarum
Litterarum, 74) Judicious and penetrating study
of the ancient sources, including Plautus, Catullus, Vergil, Horace, and
Cicero— as well as graffiti and legal evidence. See also her: The
Roman Elegists' Attitudes to Women (New York: Garland, 1978),
pp. 219-25. 538. LUCK, GEORG.
The Latin Love Lyric. New York: Barnes and Noble, 1960. 182 pp. See pp. 85-92 on Tibullus. 539. MACMULLEN, RAMSAY. "Roman Attitudes to Greek Love,"
Historia, 31 (1982), 484-502. Reviews some negative attitudes
toward homosexuality found in Roman sources. 540. MARCOVICH, MIROSLAV. "Anacreon 358 PMG," American Journal of
Philology, 104 (1983), 372-83. Lesbianism in an early Greek lyric. 541. MARROU, HENRI-IRENEE. A History of Education in Antiquity. Translated by
George Lamb. New York: New American Library, 1956. 600 pp. In Chapter 3,
"Pederasty in Classical Education" (pp.50- 62), the noted French
scholar points out that Greek homosexuality was associated not only with
military comradeship, but also with idealized pedagogy. The English
translation has been criticized, and it is preferable to use the original: Histoire de l'éducation dans l'antiquité (Paris: Le Seuil, 1948). 542. MAXWELL-STEWART, P. G. "Strato and the musa puerilis," Hermes, 100 (1972), 116-40. Philological examination of the
pédérastie poems of the
Greek Anthology, stressing the deployment of wit. 543. MORGAN, M. GWYN. "Catullus
112: A Pathicus in Politics," American Journal of Philology,
100 (1979), 377-80. Critique of one of the Roman poet's more enigmatic and
sardonic lyrics, 544. MUECKE, FRANCES. "Portrait of the Artist as a Young Woman,"
Classical Quarterly, N.S., 32 (1982), 41-55. Lesbian insights. 545. MURGATROYD, P. "Tibullus and the puer delicatus," Acta Classica: Proceedings of the
Classical Association of South Africa, 20 (1977), 105-19. Useful article on the Greek and
Augustan background of the Tibullus' poems to the boy Marathus. 546. PACION, STANLEY. "The Life of Nero: Sex and the Fall of the Roman
Empire,"
Medical Aspects of Human Sexuality, 5 (March 1971), 171-85. Journalistic repackaging of
Suetonius, of interest only as a specimen of the genre. 547. PAGE, DENNIS L. Sappho and Alcaeus. Oxford: Oxford
University Press, 1955. 340 pp. Selected texts with extended
commentary; useful for lesbian themes in Sappho, which the writer, a distinguished
English philologist, affirms. For a different view, see: Judith P. Hallett,
"Sappho and Her Social Context: Sense and Sensuality," Signs,
4 (1979), 447-64. See also Giuseppe Giangrande, "Sappho and the
olisbos," Emerita, 48 (1980), 249-50. 548. PATZER, HARALD. Die griechische Knabenliebe. Wiesbaden:
Franz Steiner Verlag, 1982. 131 pp. (Sitzungsberichte
der Wissenschaftlichen Gesellschaft an der Johann Wolfgang Goethe
Universität Frankfurt am Main) Rambling, sometimes obtuse reflections on some
modern works on Greek pederasty, concluding that there were two successive
types, the Dorian and the classic, and that in each the sexual element was
secondary. See critical remarks by Detlev Fehling, Gnomon, 57 (1985),
116-20. 549. PETERS, E. BROOKS. "Freud's Blind Spot," Christopher
Street, 7:5 (June 1983), 38-42. On Oedipus' homosexual father
Laius, and the occultation of his
character in Freud's theory. See also G. Dever- eux, above. 550. POGEY-CASTRIES, L. R. DE. (pseud, of Georges
Herelle).
Histoire de l'amour grec dans l'antiquité. Paris: Stendhal, 1930. 316 pp. This book, which has been
several times reprinted, is a revised and enlarged version of a comprehensive
German article by M. H. E. Meier in
Allgemeine Encyclopädie der Wissenschaften und Künste, 9
(1837), 149-88. Though dated and sometimes inaccurate, this book is still
useful for aspects not covered by other authors. The unpublished papers of
Herelle, which contain drafts for a supplementary volume, are preserved in
the Bibliothèque Municipale, Troyes. 551. RICHARDSON, T. WADE. "Homosexuality in the
Satiricon," Classica et Mediaevalia, 35 (1984), 104-27. Despite a mild psychoanalytic bias, useful as a refutation of the
common scholarly view that Petronius' master- work is essentially a parody of
the heterosexual love romance tradition. See also Cecil Wooten,
"Petronius and ' Camp,'" Helios, N.S., 11 (1984), 133-39. 552. RICHLIN, AMY. The Garden of Priapus:
Sexuality and Aggression in Roman Humor. New Haven: Yale University Press, 1983. 296 pp. While the book's central theme is sexism in Roman society and
literature, it offers some material on male homosexuality. For a searching
critique, see H. D. Jocelyn, Echos du Monde Classique/Classical Views, 29 (1985), 1-30. 553. ROSENBAUM, JULIUS. The Plague of Lust. Paris: Charles Carrington, 1898. 2 vols. This work, an anonymous translation from the German Ge- schichte der Lustseuche im
Alterthume (1839 and successive editions), has been several times reprinted. The
treatment of the "feminine disease" of the Scythians (vol 1, pp.
143-256) is still worth consulting, as well as the discussion of other
aspects of Greek homosexuality. 554. SARTRE, MAURICE. "L'homosexualité dans la Grèce ancienne," L'Histoire, no. 76
(March 1985), 10-17. Upholds the initiatory character of Greek pederasty. 555. SERGENT, BERNARD. Homosexuality in Greek Myth. Translated by Arthur Goldhammer. Boston: Beacon Press, 1986. 288 pp.
Contrary to the findings of other scholars, this innovatory monograph
locates the roots of Greek homosexuality in a postulated institutionalized
pederasty of ancient Indo- European culture. Sergent relates pédérastie myths to the foundation legends of Greek cities. 556. SHACKLETON-BAILEY, D. R. Profile of Horace. Cambridge, MA: Harvard University Press, 1982. 142
pp. Refutes the claim of Gordon Williams and others that the Roman poet's
homoerotic references are a mere "literary exercise." 557. SKINNER, MARILYN B.
"Pretty Lesbius," Transactions of the American Philological Association,
112 (1982), 197-208. Homosexual innuendoes in Catullus' poem 79. 558. SLATER, PHILIP. The Glory of Hera: Greek Mythology and the Greek
Family. Boston: Beacon Press, 1968. 513 pp. Psychoanalytically slanted approach to Greek male-female relations,
ostensibly seen through a mythological mirror. For another approach to the
matter, see Curtis Barnett, God as Form: Essays in Greek Theology. (Albany: SUNY Press, 1976). 559. STIGERS, EVA. "Sappho's Private World," Women's Studies, 8 (1981), 47-63. Argues that Sappho's poetry is "fundamentally different from that
of the male lyric poets." 560. SYMONDS, JOHN ADDINGTON. A Problem in Greek Ethics. London: n. p., 1901. 73 pp. Only 100 copies of this first edition were printed for private
circulation; the text has been several times reprinted, sometimes in
truncated form. See now the anthology of Symonds's work edited by John
Lauritsen, Male Love (New York: Pagan Press, 1983). The noted scholar's discrete but
forceful defense of the ideals of Greek homosexuality is a landmark in the
English-language discussion of the subject. 561. THESLEFF, HOLGER. "The Interrelation and Date
of the Symposia of Plato and Xenophon," Bulletin of the Institute of
Classical Studies [London], 25 (1978), 157-70. For Plato's text, see the edition by K.J. Dover, Cambridge: Cambridge
University Press, 1980. 562. TURCAN, ROBERT. Heliogabale et le sacre du soleil. Paris: Albin Michel, 10985. 285 pp. Study of the
outrageous 3rd-century emperor by a senior French academic, who emphasizes
the Semitic religious background, neglecting the psychosexual aspects. Does
not discuss the image of Heliogabalus in 20th-century creative literature. 563. TYRRELL, WILLIAM BLAKE. Amazons: A Study in Athenian
Mythmaking. Baltimore: Johns Hopkins University Press, 1982. 192 pp. Employs structuralist methodology to explore the myth within the
context of the sharp male-female polarities of Athenian culture. 564. UNGARETTI, JOHN. "Pederasty, Heroism, and the
Family in Classical Greece," JH, 3 (1978), 291-300. Argues that the concept of the ideal warrior documented from Homer
onwards is essential to the understanding of homosexual relations in Greece. 565. VERSTRAETE, BEERT C. Homosexuality in Ancient Greek and Roman
Civilization: A Critical Bibliography with Supplement. Toronto: Canadian Gay
Archives, 1982. 14 pp. (Publication no. 6) Reprints the annotated bibliography of 38 items published in JH 3 (1979), 79-81, adding 13 new entries. Limited to secondary works. See the
critical supplement by Wayne Dynes in Gay Books Bulletin, 8 (Fall-Winter 1982), 13-15. 566. VERSTRAETE, BEERT C. "Slavery and the Social
Dynamics of Male Homosexual Relations in Ancient Rome," JH 5 (1980), 227-36. Holds that more than any other institution, slavery places its stamp
on male homosexual relations in ancient Rome. 567. VEYNE, PAUL. "L'homosexualité à Rome," Communications, no. 35 (1982), 26-33. Brief synthesis by a noted French historian. 568. WILHELM, FRIEDRICH. "Zu Achilles Tatius," Rhein- isches Museum, N.S. 57 (1902), 55-75. A still useful article on the sources of the Greek genre of debating
the worth of the two genders as sexual objects. 569. WILKENSON, L. P. "Classical Approaches. IV:
Homosexuality," Encounter, 51:3 (September 1978), 20-31. A fairly traditional survey of Greece and Rome by an English classical
scholar. 570. WISEMAN, T. P. Catullus and His World: A Reappraisal. Cambridge: Cambridge University Press, 1985. 305
pp. Although discussion of Catullus' homosexual poems forms only a small
portion of the text, this book is useful for understanding Roman sexuality as
a whole. See also: Brian Arkins, Sexuality in Catullus (Hildesheim: Altertumswis- senschaftliche Texte und Studien [8], 1982); and the commentary of John
Ferguson, Catullus (Lawrence, KN: Coronado Press, 1985). Until rec ently the subject of homosexuality in this period was
neglected. Perceiving a parallel to the witch craze, lay persons tended to
view medieval homophobia as a vast, but undifferentiated rage for persecution
of homosexuals, or simply as a subject about which little was known (the
"Dark Ages"). Recently, considerably more data have become
available, in large part funneled through the controversy surrounding John
Boswell's book (578). These studies emphasize the Mediterranean heritage to
which most of the evidence pertains, yet Scandinavian sources also disclose
an important but independent tradition. Homosexuality in Byzantium and the
Slavic middle ages has scarcely begun to be explored. See also
"Religion," VII.Bff. 571. ANSEN, JOHN. "The Female Transvestite in Early Monasticism:
The Origin and Development of a Motif," Viator, 5 (1974), 1-32. Interprets material from the lives
of the saints. 572. BARBER, MALCOLM. The Trial of the Templars. Cam- bridge: Cambridge University Press, 1978. 312 pp.
Concluding that the charges of sodomy made against the Templar Order in 1308
are unproven, exposes the use of antihomosexual
prejudice in late-medieval politics. 573. BERNARDINO OF SIENA, ST. Le prediche volgari. Edited by Piero Bargellini. Milan: Rizzoli, 1936. 1173
pp. In this collection of vernacular sermons by the fifteenth- century
monk, there are two vituperative ones against sodomy: predica 35 (pp.
795-797) and predica 39 (pp. 893- 919). Other references occur in his Latin
works (e.g., sermons 11 and 15, in: Opera omnia, Florence, 1950). 574. BIELER, LUDWIG (ed.). The Irish Penitentials. Dublin: Institute for Advanced Studies, 1963. 367 pp. The early medieval penitentials, or confessional formularies, are an
important source for attitudes towards sodomy and sexual variation in
general. This edition tends somewhat to obscure the matter; see P. J. Payer,
below. 575.
BLEIBTREU-EHRENBERG,
GISELA. Tabu Homosexualität: die Geschichte eines
Vorurteils. Frankfurt am Main: S.
Fischer, 1978. 444 pp. Traces the history of prejudice against homosexuals from early German
times, marshalling an abundance of documentary evidence. May overstate the
Germanic contribution to antihomosexual sentiment. 576. BLOCH, IWAN. "Die
Homosexualität in Köln am Ende des 15. Jahrhunderts," Jahrbuch für Sexualwissenschaft, 1 (1908), 528-35. Analyzes a Low German text showing the existence of a sodomite
subculture in late 15th-century Cologne. 577. BOLOGNA, CORRADO (ed.). Liber monstrorum de diversis generibus: libro delle
mirabili diffor- mita. Milan: Bompiani, 1979. 221 pp. Example of a genre
of medieval literature evoking marvels and monsters; this specimen begins
with a description of a homosexual. 578. BOSWELL, JOHN. Christianity, Social Tolerance and Homosexuality: Gay People in
Western Europe from the Beginning of the Christian Era to the Fourteenth
Century. Chicago: Chicago
University Press, 1980. 424 pp. An ambitious, erudite, and much-acclaimed treatment of: the meaning
and exegetical destiny of the main Biblical proof-texts (controversial); the
Roman heritage; the sexual lore of the hare, the hyena, and the weasel;
continuity of themes of passionate friendship and boy-love in Christian
writers; the concept of Nature as sexual norm; and the putative social causes
of toleration and repression of homosexual behavior. For criticism see W, Johansson et
al., below, 573. BOSWELL, JOHN, Rediscovering Gay History:
Archetypes of Gay Love in Christian History. London: Gay Christian Movement, 1982. 21 pp.
(Michael Harding Memorial Address) Offers some oblique answers to criticisms of the work cited above, and
unveils a "gay marriage" thesis. 574. BULLOUGH, VERN. "Transvestites in the Middle
Ages," American Journal of Sociology, 79 (1974), 1381-94. Analyzes material from the lives of the transvestitic saints
(Margaret-Pelagius, Marina, Athanasia, et al.). Reprinted with changes in
the following collection. 575. BULLOUGH, VERN, and JAMES BRUNDAGE (eds.). Sexual Practices and the
Medieval Church. Buffalo: Prometheus, 1982. 289 pp. Eighteen papers, some reprinted with
revisions from earlier publications. Opens new institutional perspectives, 576. BYNUM, CAROLINE WALKER. Jesus as Mother: Studies in the Spirituality of the
High Middle Ages. Berkeley: University of California Press, 1982. 282 pp. See pp. 110-69 for "Jesus as Mother and Abbot as Mother: Some
Themes in Twelfth-Century Cistercian Writing." Compare Rudolf Berliner,
"God is Love," Gazette des Beaux-Arts, ser. 6, 42 (1953), 9-26. 577. CLEUGH, JAMES. Love Locked Out: A Survey of Love, License, and
Restriction in the Middle Ages, London: Anthony Blond, 1963. 320 pp. Dated, semipopular panorama covering a bit of everything, including
homosexuality, 578. CROMPTON, LOUIS. "Sodomy and Civil Doom: The
History of an Unchristian Tradition," Vector (November 1975), 23-27, 57-58. Overview of Christian hostility to homosexual behavior. The writer is
preparing a book-length treatment of the subject, 579. CURTIUS, ERNST ROBERT. European Literature and the
Latin Middle Ages. Translated by Willard R. Trask. New York: Pantheon, 1953. 662 pp. In this major work by a great German humanistic scholar, see
"Sodomy" (p. 113ff.), which offers a succinct analysis of some
leading themes. 580. DAMIAN, PETER, ST. Book of Gomorrah. Translated by Pierre J, Payer, Waterloo, Ont.: Wilfred Laurier University Press, 1982, 108 pp. Diatribe by an
11th-century rigorist against "unnatural vice" in the medieval church. An improved edition
of the Latin text appears in Kurt Reindel (ed.), Die Briefe des Petrus Damiani, 1, (Munich: Monumenta Germaniae Histor- ica, 1983;
509 pp.) 581. DEMURGER, ALAIN. Vie et mort de l'ordre du Temple. Paris: Le Seuil, 1985. 336 pp. Traces the whole history of the Templar
Order, situating the sodomy charges brought against the Templars in their
contemporary political context. 582. DRONKE, PETER. Medieval Latin and the Rise of
European Love-Lyric. Second ed. Oxford: Clarendon Press, 1968. 2 vols. (603 pp.) In this landmark work of philology, see vol. 1, pp. 195- 201, 218-19;
vol. 2, 495. 583. EVANS, ARTHUR. Witchcraft and the Gay
Counterculture. Boston: Fag Rag Books, 1978. 180 pp. This seemingly scholarly book paints a fantastic picture of a benign
Old Religion in which homosexuals and women were honored. Counterculture Utopian revery disguised as research. 584. GOODICH, MICHAEL. The Unmentionable Vices Homosexuality in the Later
Medieval Period. Santa Barbara: Ross-Erikson, 1979. 164 pp. Useful essays on attitudes toward homosexuality in Western Europe from
the eleventh through the fifteenth centuries. Many references from legal and
ecclesiastical sources; literary and artistic evidence is scanted. 585. GREENBERG, DAVID. F., and MARCIA H. BYSTRYN.
"Christian Intolerance of Homosexuality," American Journal of Sociology, 88 (1982), 515-48. Surveys evidence, mainly as conveyed by secondary sources, concluding
that intolerance was "variable." 586. HERMAN, GERALD. "The 'Sin against Nature' and
Its Echoes in Medieval French Literature," Annuale mediaevale, 17 (1976), 70-87. Discusses a number of authors, including Gilles de Cor- beil, John of
Salisbury, Gautier de Coincy, and Marie de France, who tend to be hostile to
homosexual behavior. 587. HORN, WALTER, and ERNEST BORN. The Plan of St. Gall. Berkeley: University of California Press, 1979. 3 vols. This monumental commentary on the ninth-century monastic plan includes
a discussion of the Benedictine regulations designed to prevent sexual
contacts with young monks, and their architectural embodiment. 588. IVO OF CHARTRES. Decretum. In: J.-P. Migne (ed.), Patrologia Latina, 161 (ca. 1860), cols. 47-1022. See cols 681-82 for denunciations of sodomy and lesbianism. The
issuance of a number of ecclesiastic collections of this type from ca. 850
onwards shows that opposition to homosexuality was by no means stilled among
clerical authorities during this obscure period. 589. JENKINS, ROMILLY J. H. Byzantium: The Imperial
Centuries, A.D. 610-1071. New York: Random House, 1967. 400 pp. As yet little research has been done on Byzantine homosexuality; see pp. 88, 165-66, 198-99, and 301 for some suggestive apercus. For the survival of Greek genres of erotic writing,'see Hans-Georg Beck, Byzantinisches Erotikon: Orthodoxie-Literatur-Gesellschaft. Munich: 1984. 174 pp. (Bayerische Akademie der Wissenschaften, Phil.-hist. Klasse, Sitzungsberichte, 1984, no. 3) 590. JOHANSSON, WARREN. "London's Medieval
Sodomites," Cabirion, 10 (1984), 6-7, 34. Using a text of Richard of Devizes, Johansson uncovers a homosexual
subculture in late 12th-century London. 591. JOHANSSON, WARREN, et al. Homosexuality, Intolerance
and Christianity: A Critical Examination of John Boswell's Work. New York: Scholarship Committee, Gay Academic
Union, 1981. 22 pp. (Gai Saber Monograph no. 1) Contains: "Ex parte Themis: The Historical Guilt of the Christian Church"
by Warren Johansson; "Christianity and the Politics of Sex" by
Wayne Dynes; "Culpa ecclesiae: Boswell's Dilemma" by John Lauritsen. The
conclusions of the essays are convergently negative towards the book. An
enlarged edition of this critique appeared in 1985, with an annotated
bibliography of responses to the Boswell monograph. 592. KAY, RICHARD. Dante's Swift and Strong:
Essays in Inferno: Essays in Inferno XV. Lawrence: Regent's Press of Kansas, 1978. 446 pp. Argues that the "sodomy" depicted in Canto XV is meant in a
broader, spiritual sense, rather than in an exclusively sexual one. See also
his "The Sin of Brunetto Latini," Medieval Studies, 31 (1969), 262-86; as well as: Sally Mussetter,
"'Ritornare a lo suo principio': Dante and the
Sin of Brunetto Latini," Philological Quarterly, 63 (1984), 431-48; and A. Pezard, below. 593. KÜSTER, HENDRIKUS JOHANNES. Over homoseksualiteit in middeleeuws West-Europa
(Some Observations on Homosexuality in Medieval Western Europe). Utrecht: The author, 1977. 175 pp. Doctoral dissertation offering an
overview, but depending too much on incompletely assimilated secondary
sources. See the critical review by A. H. Bredero, Tijdschrift voor Geschiedenis, 91 (1978), 256-62. 600. LEA, HENRY
CHARLES. A History of the Inquisition of the Middle Ages. New York: Harper, 1887. 3 vols. Dated and with a Protestant bias, but still worth consulting. See
vol. 1, pp. 32-34, 85, 101; vol 2, pp. 150, 335, 408; vol. 3, p. 639. 601. MCALPINE, MONICA. "The Pardoner's Homosexuality
and How It Matters," Publications of the Modern Language Association, 95 (1980), 8-22. Argues that the phrase "a mare"in Chaucer's portrait of the
Pardoner should be translated as "a homosexual." See also Jill
Mann, Chaucer and Medieval Estates Satire, Cambridge: Cambridge University Press, 1973, pp.
145-52; Beryl Rowland, "Chaucer's Idea of the Pardoner," Chaucer Review, 14 (1979), 140-54 (holds that the Pardoner is a
"testicular pseudo-hermaphrodite of the feminine type"); and Melvin
Storm, "The Pardoner's Invitation: Questor's Bag or Beckett's
Shrine," Publications of the Modern Language Association, 97 (1982), 810-18 (emphasizes sterility). 602. MCCALL, ANDREW. The Medieval Underworld. London: Hamish Hamilton, 1979. 319 pp. Chapter 7, "Homosexuality" (pp. 199-209), is a superficial
compilation from other sources. Nonetheless this book is of some interest for
the overall context. 603. MCNEILL, JOHN THOMAS, and HELENA M. GAMER (eds.). Medieval Handbooks of Penance. New York: Columbia University Press, 1938. 476 pp. The largest collection of these materials in English. For analysis,
see P. Payer, below. 604. MARCHIELLO-NIZIA, CHRISTIANE. "Amour courtois, société masculine et figures de pouvoir," Annales ESC (November-December 1981), 969-82. Courtly love as a disguised expression of homoeroticism. 605. MARTINEZ PIZARRQ, JOAQUIN. "On Nid against Bishops," Medieval Scandinavia, 11 (1978-79), 149-53. Cites texts that show four instances in which "[t]he principles
and models of behavior of the Christian church clashed strongly with Germanic
values of honor and virility." See also T. L. Markey, "Nordic nidvisur: An Instance of Ritual Inversion," ibid, 5
(1972), 7-19. 606. MEULENGRACHT SORENSEN, PREBEN. Unmanly Men: Concepts of Sexual Defamation in
Early Northern Society. Odense: Odense University Press, 1983. 115 pp. Thorough analysis of textual evidence in Old Norse for homosexual
behavior and defamatory accusations thereof. 607. PARTNER, PETER. The Murdered Magicians: The
Templars and Their Myth. London: Oxford University Press, 1982. 209 pp. Suggests, in effect, that where there is smoke there is fire; that is,
that the charges of sodomy leading to the arrest of the French Templars in
1307 were not entirely baseless. 608. PAYER, PIERRE J. Sex and the Penitentials: The
Development of a Sexual Code, 550-1150. Toronto: Toronto University Press, 1984. 219 pp. Careful study of the surviving body of documents compiled to aid early
medieval confessors in Western Europe. As regards homosexuality, Payer
reaches substantially more negative conclusions than does Boswell; see esp.
pp. 135- 39. 609. PÉZARD, ANDRÉ. Dante sous la pluie de feu (Enfer, chant XV). Paris: J. Vrin, 1950. 468 pp. (Etudes de philosophie medievale, 40). On the sodomites in Inferno 15, especially Brunetto
Latini. See also R. Kay, above. 610. ROBY, DOUGLASS. "Early Medieval Attitudes toward
Homosexuality." Gai Saber, 1 (1977), 67-79. An introductory sketch, now dated. 611. ROSELLÔ VAQUER, RAMÔN. L'homosexualitat a Mallorca a la edat mitjana. Barcelona: Olaneta, 1978. 32 PP. Discusses several cases of executions in the 15th century on the
island of Majorca. 612. ROTH, NORMAN. "Deal Gently with the Young Men:
Love of Boys in Medieval Poetry in Spain," Speculum, 57 (1982), 20-51. Comprehensive study of Hebrew pédérastie poetry in Moorish Spain citing many examples. 613. ROUGEMONT, DENIS DE. Love in the Western World. Translated from the French by Montgomery Belgion. New York: Pantheon,
1956. 336 pp. Influential argument that romantic love is unknown before the
rise of amour courtois in Western
Europe in the 11th century. Strongly criticized by Peter Dronke (see above)
and others. 614. ROUSSELLE, ALINE. Porneia: de la maîtrise du corps à la privation sensorielle—Ile-IVe siècles de l'ère chrétienne. Paris: Presses Universitaires de France, 1983. 254 pp. Seeks to trace the rise of ascetic and sex-negative attitudes in late antiquity through
patristic, medical, and other texts. 615. SCHIRMANN, JEFIM. "The Ephebe in Medieval
Hebrew Poetry," Sefarad, 15 (1955), 54-68. An introduction to Hebrew pédérastie poetry in Moorish Spain inspired by Arabic models; treated more
extensively by N. Roth, above. 616.
SCHRÖTER,
MICHAEL. "Staatsbildung und Triebkontrolle: zur gesellschaftlichen
Regulierung des Sexualverhaltens vom 13. bis 16. Jahrhundert," Amsterdams Sociologisch
Tijdschrift, 8 (May 1981), 48-90. On the intensification of state intervention to control sexuality from
the 13th to the 16th century. 617. "Spuren von KontrarSexualität bei den alten Skandinaviern: Mitteilungen eines norwegischen Gelehrten," JfsZ, 4 (1902), 244-63. Pioneering article by an anonymous Norwegian scholar on evidence for
homosexuality in medieval Scandinavia. 618. STEHLING, THOMAS (ed.). Medieval Latin Poems of Love
and Friendship. New York: Garland Publishing, 1984. 167 pp. Comprehensive anthology of 127 items; English translations with Latin en face. See also his "To Love a Medieval Boy,"
JH, 8:3/4 (1983), 151-70, which analyzes poems by Marbod of Rennes, Baudri of
Bourgueil, and Hilary the Englishman. 619. STROM, FOLKE. Nid, Ergi and Old Norse Moral
Attitudes. London: University College, 1974. 20 pp. (Dorothea Coke Memorial
Lecture) Analyzes use of accusations of passive homosexuality as insults. In
addition to verbal attacks, "fighting words," small sculptures were
carved for this purpose. 620. VANGGAARD, THORKIL. Phallos: A Symbol and Its
History in the Male World. New York: International Universities Press, 1973.
231 pp. Arguing for the generalized existence of a "homosexual
radical" in men, the author of this semipopular work takes much of his
historical material from medieval Scandinavia. 621. ZIOLKOWSKI, JAN. Alan of Lille's Grammar of
Sex: The Meaning of Grammar to a Twelfth-Century Intellectual. Cambridge, MA: The Medieval Academy of America,
1985. 171 pp. (Speculum Anniversary Monographs, 10) Includes discussion of the use of grammatical metaphors to castigate
sexual deviation, including homosexuality. See also John A. Alford, "The
Grammatical Metaphor: A Survey of Its Use in the Middle Ages," Speculum, 57 (1982), 728- 60; and Richard Hamilton Green,
"Alan of Lille's De planc- tu naturae," Speculum, 31 (1956), 649-74. This period, broadly from the 15th through the 18th centuries, saw
the spread of Renaissance ideals throughout Europe. The revival of
Greco-Roman culture, particularly as evident in the philosophical doctrine
known as Neo- platonism, fostered a cautious exploration of the theme of
pederasty. The Reformation and Counterreformation caused an intensification
of religious zealotry, in which charges of sodomy were hurled on both sides.
The exploration of the New World produced some findings, interpreted at the
outset in a totally hostile manner, on cross-cultural comparisons in regard
to homosexual behavior (see Meso-Amer- ican and South American Indians; IV.F).
There is much detailed evidence for legal prosecutions and executions of male
homosexuals (see also the following sections on individual countries; and
"Law," XX). 622. CROMPTON, LOUIS. "The Myth of Lesbian Impunity," JH, 6 (1980-81), 11-26. Shows that beginning in the 13th century some theologians assimilated
lesbianism to male homosexuality as worthy of death. However, only about ten
executions are known, chiefly of women who had made use of a dildo. 623.
DEJOB, CHARLES.
Marc-Antoine Muret: un
professeur français en Italie dans la seconde moitié du ïVIe siècle. Paris: E. Thorin, 1881. 497 pp. Reprinted by Slatkine, Geneva in 1970. See Chapter 3, pp. 46-61, on
his imprisonment and condemnation for sodomy. 624. FOUCAULT, MICHEL. Madness and Civilization: History of Insanity in the Age of Reason. Translated by Richard Howard. New York: Pantheon,
1965. 299 pp. An influential study by the late French historian on the link between
the definition of madness and authoritarian social control. Note that the
English version derives from an abridged French edition. For full references,
consult the revised full text: Histoire de la folie à l'âge classique (Paris: Gallimard, 1972; 613 pp.) 625.
GERARD, KENT, and GERT HEKMA (eds.). The Pursuit of Sodomy in Early Modern Europe: Male
Homosexuality from the Renaissance through the Enlightenment. Special issue of JH, 12:4/13:4 (Winter 1985/Spring 1986). Papers covering virtually the whole of western Europe, but with
special attention to the Netherlands. 626. GILBERT, ARTHUR N. "Conceptions of
Homosexuality and Sodomy in Western History," JH, 6 (1980-81), 57-68. Contrasts the biographical approach with broader inquiries of labeling
and intolerance. In the latter, Gilbert argues that irrational fears of anal
intercourse may have played a greater role than is usually allowed. 627. HAGSTRUM, JEAN H. Sex and Sensibility: Ideal and
Erotic Love from Milton to Mozart. Chicago: University of Chicago Press, 1980. 350 pp. This sensitive study in cultural history has a general bearing, as
well as some specific discussion; see esp. pp. 45-46, 82-83, 86, 102-04, 146,
189, 193, 202-03, 217, 22, 234, 269-70, 295, 305. 628.
KARLSTADT,
ANDREAS BODENSTEIN VON. De coelibatu, monachatu
et viduitate ... Wittenberg: Melchior Lotter, 1521. 36 pp. A characteristic Lutheran attack on monastic vices, esp. sodomy and
masturbation. 629. MONTER, E. WILLIAM. "Sodomy and Heresy in Early
Modern Switzerland," JH, 6 (1980-81), 42-55. Compares sodomy trials from Protestant Geneva with those in Catholic
Fribourg, showing also an urban vs. rural contrast. 630. MURRAY, STEPHEN, and KENT GERARD. "Renaissance
Sodomite Subcultures?" in: Among Men, Among Women. Amsterdam: Universiteit, 1983 [Congress preprints], 183-96. Surveys our present knowledge, chiefly from records of trials and
executions, with suggestions for further research. 631. PRESCOTT, ANNE LAKE. "English Writers and
Beza's Latin Epigrams," Studies in the Renaissance, 21 (1974), 83-117. Theodore de Beze, a major leader of Calvinism, was subjected to
considerable criticism for lechery and homosexuality because of some early
Latin poems. See the edition of the poems by Alexandre Machard (Paris:
Liseux, 1879). 632. ROUSSEAU, G. S. "The Pursuit of Homosexuality
in the Eighteenth Century: 'Utterly Confused Category' and/or Rich
Repository?" Eighteenth-Century Life, 9 (1985), 132-68. Analyzes literary materials according to a six-category schema, citing
many little known texts. 633. RUIG, ROB DE. In de schaduw van de grand seigneur. Utrecht: E.J. van Himbergen, 1984. Class differences, esp. homosexuality as a feature of the pleasure
life of the nobility, in ancien regime Europe. 634. SCHOUTEN, H. J. "Die vermeintliche Päderastie des Reformators Jean Calvin," JfsZ, 7 (1905), 289-306. Although the Reformer John Calvin was probably not homosexual, the
efforts of Catholic polemicists to discredit him by such accusations form an
interesting chapter in cultural history. 635. TRUMBACH, RANDOLPH. "Sodomite Subcultures, Sod- omitical
Roles, and the Gender Revolution of the Eighteenth Century: The Recent
Historiography," Eighteenth-Century Life, 9 (1985), 109-21. Analysis of assumptions and
findings of a decade of study of homosexual behavior in Western Europe. Students of British history are beset by two opposing temptations: to
regard the islands as sui generis, at most linking them to the
English-speaking world (exceptional- ism) ; or to
regard them as offshore dependencies of the European continent (Europeanism).
Both trends may be found in actual British attitudes toward homosexual
behavior. Exceptionalism is evident in a preference for slow change, rather
than abrupt breaks; a desire to preserve propriety and respectability,
sometimes at the cost of even forbidding discussion of sexual matters; and a
tendency to avoid theoretical approaches among intellectuals. On the other
hand, the reception of Christian hostility toward homosexuality, the
Reformation inflection of them, and in recent times the emergence of sexual
reform attest successive waves of influence from the European continent.
Legal aspects are treated under XX.D; the public school tradition under XI.A,
and military history under XII.A. 636. ACKERLEY, JOSEPH R. My Father and Myself. New York: Coward-McCann, 1968. 219 pp. Autobiographical memoir in which the English writer-editor (1896-1967)
reconstructs his father's bisexual past, with many revealing historical sidelights.
See also: The Ack- erley Letters. Edited by Neville Braybrooke (New York: Harcourt
Brace, 1975; 354 pp.) and My Sister and Myself: The Diaries of J. R.
Ackerley. Edited by Francis King (London: Hutchinson, 1982; 217 pp.). 637. ACKLAND, VALENTINE. For Sylvia: An Honest Account. New York: W. W. Norton, 1986. 135 pp. Ackland (b. 1906) describes her relationship with the writer Sylvia
Townsend Warner, offering insights on the situation of British lesbians in
the first half of the present century. 638. BARNARD (BERNARD), NICHOLAS. The Penitent Death of ••• John
Atherton. Dublin: Society of Stationers, An account of the notable hanging of the Anglican Bishop of Waterford
and Lismore for buggery. Further editions appeared in London in 1642 and
1651. 639. BARRETT, CONNIE. "Wearing of the Gay," Christopher Street, no. 70 (November 1982), 32-38. On gay life in today's Ireland. 640. BINGHAM, CAROLINE. "Seventeenth Century
Attitudes toward Deviant Sex," Journal of Interdisciplinary History, 1 (1971), 447-68. Focuses on the trial and execution of the Earl of Castle- haven (1631)
for sodomy. 641. BLOCH, IWAN. Das Geschlechtsleben in England. By Eugen Duhren (pseud.). Berlin: Barsdorf,
1901-03. 3 vols. This massive history is a quarry of information. Regrettably, the
English version—Sexual Life in England Past and Present (London: Aldor, 1938; also several other
printings)—is heavily abridged and should be avoided. 642. BRAY, ALAN. Homosexuality in Renaissance England. London: Gay Men's Press, 1982. 149 pp. Argues that a major shift
developed in the course of the seventeenth century from an older,
quasimagical concept of homosexual behavior to a stigmatized, subcultural
form, which foreshadows our own. 643. BRISTOW, EDWARD J. Vice and Vigilance: Purity
Movements in Britain since 1700. Totowa, NJ: Row- man and Littlefield, 1977. 274 pp. A useful synthesis of outbreaks of antisexual attitudes and their
forms of social organization. 644. BURFORD, E. J. The Orrible Synne: A Look at London Lechery from
Roman to Cromvellian Times. London: Calder and Boyars, 1973. 256 pp. In this popularized panorama, see pp. 19, 23, 47-48, 67, 75, 139, 144,
149, 167, 218, and 233. 645. BURG, R. R. Sodomy and the Perception of Evil: English Sea
Rovers in the Seventeenth-Century Caribbean. New York: New York University
Press, 1983. 215 pp. Something of a shaggy dog story, inasmuch as little evidence in this
potentially fascinating area is offered. See also his: "Ho Hum: Another
Work of the Devil," JH, 6 (1981-82), 69-78. 646. CALDER-MARSHALL, ARTHUR. "Havelock Ellis and
Company," Encounter, 37 (December 1971), 8-23. On controversies about sexuality in the 1890s. 647. CROFT-COOKE, RUPERT. Feasting with Panthers. New York: Holt, Rinehart and Winston, 1967. 309 pp. Depicts some late Victorian figures, including John Addington Symonds
and Oscar Wilde, as their lives intersected with homosexuality. 648. CROMPTON, LOUIS. Byron and Greek Love: Homophobia in 19th-century
England. Berkeley: University of California Press, 1985. 419 pp. Comprehensive study of George Gordon, Lord Byron's (1788- 1824)
bisexuality, set against the English background of the time—including the
thought of Jeremy Bentham. 649. DANIEL, MARC (pseud.). "L'homosexualité en Angleterre," Arcadie, no. 47 (November 1957), 5-10; no. 48 (December 1957), 12-17; no. 49 (January 1958),
40-42; no. 51 (March 1958), 28-30. Views of a French archivist and historian,
who subsequently produced a major biography: Michel Duchein, Jacques 1er Stuart: le roi et la paix, Paris: Presses de la Renaissance, 1985. 429 pp. 650. ELTON, GEOFFREY R. Policy and Politics: The Enforcement of the
Reformation in the age of Thomas Cromwell. Cambridge: Cambridge
University Press, 1972. 447 pp. A distinguished English historian shows the complicated permutations
of Henry VIII's policies, which included the first civil statute in England
against buggery (1533). 651. FADERMAN, LILLIAN. Scotch Verdict. New York: Morrow, 1983. 320 pp. Subjective investigation of an Edinburgh controversy (1811-19)
involving lesbian allegations. 652. GILBERT, ARTHUR N. "Sexual Deviance and Disaster
during the Napoleonic Wars." Albion, 9 (1977), 98-113. Shows how after a period of neglect, the persecution of sodomites
reached new heights in Britain in the early 19th century, culminating in 1810
with the exposure of the Vere Street Coterie. Gilbert suggests scapegoating
as an explanation. See also his: "The Africaine Courts- Martial: A Study of Buggery and the Royal
Navy," JH, 1 (1974), 111-22; and "Buggery and the British Navy, 1700-
1861," Journal of Social History, 10 (1976-77), 72-98. 653. GORDON, MARY LOUISA. The Chase of the Wild Goose. London: Hogarth Press, 1936. 279 pp. On the "ladies of
Llangollen," Lady Eleanor Butler and Sarah Ponsonby, who conducted a
passionate relationship in 18th-century Britain. 654. GRAHAM, JAMES. The Homosexual Kings of England. London: Universal Tandem Publishing, 1968. 92 pp. Lackluster
biographical sketches of William Rufus, 384 pp. Transcript of the three trials in London in 1895, accompanied by
useful introduction and appendices by Hyde. 663. IVES, GEORGE CECIL. Man Bites Man: The Scrapbook
of an Edwardian Eccentric. Edited by Paul Sieve- king. London: Jay Landesman,
1980. Selections from some 20,000 pages of the diary of a man (1867-1950)
who seemingly knew everyone, chosen from 122 volumes (now in the Library of
the University of Texas, Austin). 664. JEFFREYS, SHEILA. The Spinster and Her Enemies: Feminism and
Sexuality 1880-1930. London: Pandora Press, 1985. Examines the later phases of the social purity movement in England and
the beginnings of serious sex research and sexual reform. Documents some
tenacious antilesbian attitudes . 665. JENKYNS, RICHARD. The Victorians and Ancient Greece. Cambridge, MA: Harvard University Press, 1980. 386 pp. Presents relevant material on Walter Pater, J. A. Symonds, and Oscar
Wilde; unsympathetic. 666. KNOWLES, DAVID. Bare Ruined Choirs: The
Dissolution of the English Monasteries. Cambridge: Cambridge University Press, 1976. 330
pp. In this study by a major historian of British monasticism, see pp.
177-78, 184-85, 188. Items 667-676 omitted. 677. LIPSHITZ, SUSAN. Sexual Politics in Britain: A Bibliographical Guide
with Historical Notes. Hassocks, England: Harvester Press, 1977. 41 pp. Introduces an
emerging field of study. 678. LUTTRELL, NARCISSUS. A Brief Historical Relation of
State Affairs. Oxford: Oxford University Press, 1857. 6 vols. Contains references to executions and persecutions between 1687 and
1707. See vol. 1, p. 395; vol. 2, pp. 596, 613, 615; vol. 3, pp. 317, 320;
vol. 4, pp. 461-62; 543; vol. 6, p. 219, 222-26. 679. MARCUS, STEPHEN. The Other Victorians. New York: Basic Books, 1966. 292 pp. This landmark study of several salient (heterosexual) figures lifted
the mask of Victorian respectability. 680. MAVOR, ELIZABETH. The Ladies of Llangollen. London: Joseph, 1971. 238 pp. The story of the 18th-century lesbian
couple. See also M. L. Gordon, above. 681. Miss Marianne Woods and Miss Jane Pirie against above. 689. Sins of the Cities of the Plain; or the Recollections
of a Mary Anne, with Short Essays on Sodomy and Tribadism. London: Leicester Square,
1881. 95 PP. On the Bolton-Park scandals and other contemporary matters. 689A. STAVES,
SUSAN. "A Few Kind Words for the Fop," SEL: Studies in English
Literature 1500-1800, 22 (1982), 413-28. Presents evidence, drawn from plays, for the different
meanings of effeminacy in the 17th and 18th centuries. 690. TELLEGEN, JAN-WILLEM. "'Some Unmanly Oddities': enige spekulaties over de konstruktie van manne- lijkheid en homoseksualiteit in victoriaans Engeland," Psychologie en Naatschappij, 8:4 (1984), 457-78. Reflections on the construction of male identity and homosexuality in
19th-century England. 691. THOMPSON, ROGER. Unfit for Modest Ears: A Study of Pornographic» Obscene and Bawdy
Works Written or Published in England in the Second Half of the Seventeenth
Century. London: Macmillan, 1979.
233 pp. See pp. 10, 13, 32-33, 36, 41, 43-44, 51, 124-129, 137-39, 141, 149,
170, 172, 198. See also David Foxon, Libertine Literature in England, 1660-1745 (New Hyde Park, NY: University Books, 1965; 70
pp.); and Peter Naumann, Keyhole und Candle: John Clelands "Memoirs of
a Woman of Pleasure" und die Entstehung des pornographischen Romans in
England (Heidelberg: Carl Winter, 1976; 468 pp.). 692. TRUMBACH, RANDOLPH. "London's Sodomites:
Homosexual Behavior in the Eighteenth Century," Journal of Social History, 11 (1977), 1-33. Argues from a survey of the anthropological literature and from the
evidence of the raids on the London sodomite sub-culture in the 1720s that
Europeans were unique in not tolerating homosexual behavior and that there
had probably been illicit sodomite subcultures in the cities of Europe since
the 12th century. 693. TRUMBACH, RANDOLPH (ed.). Sodomy Trials: Seven
Documents. New York: Garland Publishing, 1986. (Marriage, Sex, and the Family in
England, 1660- 1800, vol. 44) Includes: The Tryal and Condemnation of Mervin, Lord Audley
Earl of Castle-Haven ... 1631 (1699); The Woman- Hater's Lamentation (1707); A Faithful Narrative of the Late Affair between the
Rev. Mr. John Swinton, and Mr. George Baker (1739); The Whole Proceedings on the Wicked Conspiracy ... (1751); The Trial of Samuel Scrimshaw and John Ross (1759); The Trial of Richard Branson (1760); and The Phoenix of Sodom, or the Vere Street Coterie (1813). In this series of Garland reprints see also Select Trials at the Sessions
House in the Old Bailey (4 vols, reprinted in 2), vol. 1, 105, 158-60, 280-82, 329-30; vol.
2, 362-72; vol. 3,36-40, 74-75. 689. VICINUS, MARTHA. Independent Women: Work and
Community for Single Women, 1850-1920. Chicago: Chicago University Press, 1985. 396 pp. Kaleidoscopic picture of single women in Britain from High
Victorianism through the Suffragette era. including
discussion of schoolgirl crushes ("raves") and intense
"spiritual friendships." 690. WARD, EDWARD (NED). A Compleat and Humorous Account of All the
Remarkable Clubs and Societies in the Cities of London and Westminster. London, 1756. First edition 1709. Includes an account of the molly houses. 691. WEEKS, JEFFREY. Sex, Politics and Society: The Regulation of
Sexuality Since 1800. London: Longman, 1981. 306 pp. Paints a broad canvas, including such themes as social control, male
and female sex roles, prostitution, eugenics, and the sexual purity
movement. For homosexuality, see esp. pp. 96-121. Sometimes marred by
Franglais jargon and murky analysis. See also his: Coming Out: Homosexual
Politics in Britain from the Nineteenth Century to the Present (New York: Horizon Press, 1977; 278 pp.); and
"Inverts, Perverts and Mary-Annes: Male Prostitution and the Regulation
of Homosexuality in England in the Nineteenth and Early Twentieth
Centuries," JH, 6 (1980-81), 113-34. 692. WILDEBLOOD, PETER. Against the Law. London: Wei- denfeld and Nicolson, 1956. 189 pp. An English journalist offers a first-hand account of his arrest,
conviction and imprisonment through involvement in the Lord Montagu case
(1954). The evidence for homosexual behavior in France, especially from
literary sources, is extensive. Perhaps for this reason, no satisfactory
syntheses have been produced. It is evident, however, that just as the
Revolution of 1789 constitutes the great divide of French history as a whole,
so it also separates homosexual history into two phases. From the Middle Ages
(see III.D), France had preserved the religious and legal prohibitions of
same-sex behavior. But then, relying on conceptual foundations laid by the Enlightenment thinkers, the Revolution
decriminalized sodomy—the first accomplishment of this goal in any European
country. Social toleration was slower in coming, however, and the 19th
century provides much evidence of continuing social disapproval and official
surveillance of homosexual behavior. The defeat of 1940 and the ensuing Vichy
regime saw a deterioration of the situation of homosexuals in France, which
was not fully overcome until the modernization process hit its stride in the
1960s and 70s. 693. Anandria, ou confessions de Mademoiselle Sapho; contenant les détails de sa réception dans la Secte Anandrine sous la
présidence de Mlle Raucourt et ses diverses aventures. Paris: "En Grèce," 1789. 140 pp. This text, first published in 1784, is one of several purported
accounts of initiation into the lesbian coterie surrounding the actress Françoise Raucourt ("les anan- drines," or menless women). 694. Anecdotes pour servir à l'histoire des Ebugors. Amsterdam: J. P. du Valis, 1733. 106 pp. Fanciful account of a war between
the Ebugors (bougres) and the Cythereans (heterosexual women). The modern edition prepared
by Jean Hervez for the Bibliothèque des Curieux, Paris, 1912, provides additional material, including
the "Statuts des Sodomites au XVIIe
siecle." 695. AUBIGNÉ, THÉODORE AGRIPPA D'. Oeuvres. Edited by
Henri Weber. Paris: Gallimard, 1969. 1594 pp. In this collected edition of the works of the French Protestant
statesman and writer, see pp. 72, 73 (1. 827, "androgarae"), 74, 76
(1. 934, "un Bathille"), 79, 81, 84, 85, 339, 344, (1. 52, "bougrerie"),
585-89, 605, 606 ("amour philosophique et sacrée"), 610 ("frères de la Sacrée Société") 616, 626 ("bougre agent"; "bougre patient"), 647, 828. 696. BARBEDETTE, GILLES, and MICHEL CARASSOU. Paris gay 1925. Paris: Les
Presses de la Renaissance, 1981. 312 pp. Panorama of the homosexual scene in Paris in the 1920s,
featuring interviews with survivors and excerpts from the pioneering magazine Inversions (1924-25). For a hostile contemporary report, see:
Georges Anquetil, Satan conduit le bal (Paris: Georges-Anquetil, 1925; 536 pp.). 697. BAUDRY, ANDRÉ. La condition des homosexuels. Toulouse: Privat,
1982. Overview of the present situation by the director of Ar- cadie, the
French homophile organization (1957-82). 698. BAUMANN, F. "Duelle homosexueller Frauen in Paris," Die Zeitschrift (Hamburg), 31 (1912), 54- 63. Lesbian duels in Paris. 699. BAYLE, PIERRE. Dictionnaire historique et critique. Third ed. Rotterdam: M. Böhm, 1720. 4 vols. In this magnum opus by the noted rationalist critic (1647- 1706), see
the following articles: Adonis, Anacreon, Antinous, Bathylle, de Bèze, Chrysippe, Dassouci, Ganymede, Hadrien, Jules II, Sixte IV, Vayer, as well as the section entitled "Eclaircissements sur les obscénités." 700. BÉNÉDICTI, JEAN. La somme des péchés et le remède d'iceux. Paris: G. Chaudière, 1601. 827 pp. In this influential manual for confessors, see "De mollesse" and "De sodomie," pp. 152-62. 701. BERNAY, JÉRÔME (pseud, of Francois Jacques). Grand'peur et misère des homosexuels français: enquête auprès des homophiles provinciaux. Paris: Editions Arcadie, 1977. 74 pp. From interviews constructs a picture of
the often lonely lives of French homosexuals living in the provinces. 702.
BLOCH, IWAN. Der Marquis de Sade und seine Zeit: ein Beitrag
zur Kultur- und Sittengeschichte des 18. Jahrhunderts, mit besonderer
Beziehung auf die Lehre von der Psychopathia Sexualis.
By Eugen Dühren (pseud.).
Berlin: Barsdorf, 1900. 502 pp. A major study of the late 18th century with much
information about French sexual "nonconformists." Unfortunately,
the English version is heavily abridged: Marquis de Sade, the Man and His Age (Newark, NJ: Julian, 1931; 290 pp.; various
reprints). 703. BON, MICHEL, and ANTOINE D'ARC. Rapport sur l'homosexualité de l'homme. Paris: Editions Universitaires, 1974. 526 pp. Based on a survey of members of Arcadie, presents a five- part study of
causation, sociology, sex behavior, couples, and social settings. These
findings are updated in Jean Cavailhes et al., Rapport gai: enquête sur les modes de vie homosexuels en France (Paris: Persona, 1984; 273 pp.). 704. BONNET, MARIE-JO. Un choix sans équivoque: recherches historiques sur
les relations amoureuses entre les femmes, xvie-xxe siècle. Paris: Denoël, 1981. 295 pp. Major study, well documented with literary and other references,
on the understanding of lesbianism from the Renaissance to the present. 705. BOUCHARD, JEAN-JACQUES. Confessions. Paris: Li- seux: 1881. 256 pp. Offers some contemporary information on homosexual behavior among
schoolboys and in the Corsican galley station (ca. 1630) 706. BRANTÔME, PIERRE. The Lives of Gallant Ladies. Translated by Alec Brown. London: Elek, 1962. 537 pp. Translation of a work published posthumously in 1665. This French
classic contains a number of important references to lesbian behavior in the
time of the writer (15357-1614). 707. BRASSAI (pseud, of Gyula Halasz). The Secret Paris of the 30's. Translated by Richard Miller. New York: Pantheon Books, 1976. 200
pp. In this album of work and text by the noted photographer, see the
sections, "The Urinals of Paris" and "Sodom and
Gomorrah." 708. BRÉCOURT-VILLARS, CLAUDINE. Petit glossaire raisonné de l'erotisme saphique, 1880-1930. Paris: J.-J. Pauvert, 1980. 123 pp. Profusely illustrated book on lesbian eroticism
during the Third Republic. 709. BRÉZOL, GEORGES. Henri III et ses mignons. Paris: Les Editions de Bibliophiles,
1911. 245 pp. Account of France's 16th-century homosexual king and his male
favorites. 710. CARLIER, FRANÇOIS. Etudes de pathologie sociale: les deux prostitutions, 1860-1870. Paris: Dentu, 1887. 514 pp. As chief of the the vice squad in Paris under the
Second Empire, Carlier drew upon personal knowledge and his extensive files
to produce a detailed picture of urban prostitution and street life. See
"Prostitution anti- physique," pp. 275-473. 711. COUROUVE, CLAUDE. Les gens de la manchette. Paris: The author, 1978. 24 pp. Presents 18th-century archival
documents documenting the existence of a homosexual subculture in Paris. Much
useful information also appears in Courouve's major work of historical
semantics Vocabulaire de l'homosexualité masculine (Paris: Payot, 1985; 248 pp.). 712. COUROUVE, CLAUDE. "Sodomy Trials in France," Gay Books Bulletin, 1:1 (1979), 22-23, 26. Annotated list of 53 known sodomy trials between 1317 and 1783. 713. COWARD, D. A. "Attitudes to Homosexuality in
Eighteenth-Century France," Journal of European Studies, 10:4 (December 1980), 231-55. Well documented study of the sometimes elusive attitudes toward sexual
variation in the last century of the Ancien Regime. 714. DANIEL, MARC (pseud.). "A Study of
Homosexuality in France during the Reigns of Louis XII and Louis XIV," ONE Institute Quarterly, no. 14 (Summer 1961), 77-93; and no. 15 (Fall
1961), 125-36. Translated by "Marcel Martin" (Ross Ingersoll) from articles
in Arcadie (December 1956-September 1957). Informative survey
based mainly on the lives of prominent persons. See also his Hommes du grand siècle (Paris: Arcadie, 1957; 65 pp.). 715. DELON, MICHEL. "The Priest, the Philosopher, and
Homosexuality in Enlightenment France," Eighteenth- Century Life, 9 (1985), 122-131. Citing a variety of evidence, including observations of exotic
peoples, Delon claims that "the Englightenment helped to
conceive a polymorphos body of pleasure which replaced the body of glory of theology." Emphasis on Diderot and
Voltaire. See also: Jacob Stockinger, "Homosexuality and the French
Enlightenment," in: G. Stam- bolian and E. Marks (eds.), Homosexualities and French
Literature. Ithaca: Cornell University Press, 1978, pp. 161-85. 716. DESMON, ANDRE CLAUDE (pseud, of A. Lafond).
"L'homophilie dans la France d'aujourd'hui," Arcadie, no. 202
(October 1970), 457-95. Report on contemporary French conditions and public attitudes
. 717. DICKERMAN, EDMUND H. "Henry Ill's Devotions: A
Study in Sex and Religion," Journal of Psycho- history, 5:3 (1978), 429-42. Psychoanalytic study linking the king's religious mania to his
"feminine nature." 718. DUBOIS-DESAULLE, GASTON. Prêtres et moines non- conformistes en amour: Hémoires secrets de la
Lieutenance Générale de Police. Paris: Editions de la Raison, 1902. 344 pp. Confidential police records as evidence of forbidden sexual activities among the Ancien Regime clergy. 719. DUPERRAY, MICHEL. De l'état et da la capacité des ecclésiastiques pour les ordres et bénéfices. Paris: P. Eméry et M. Brunet, 1703. 683 pp. For sodomites among the clergy, see pp. 312-20 (III, 8). 720. Les enfans de Sodome a l'Assemblée Nationale, ou députation de l'Ordre de la Manchette. Paris: "Chez le Marquis de
Villette," 1790. ca. 35 pp. A rare pamphlet
of the French
Revolution, naming some 160 purported homosexuals, male and female, and
proffering the bylaws of a secret society, l'Ordre de la Manchette. A similar pamphlet, Les petits bougres au manège (Paris, "Chez Pierre Pousse-Fort," 1790; 31 pp.) advocates a kind of
proto-gay rights position, under the cover of facetiousness. 721. ESTRÉES, PAUL D' (pseud, of Henri Quentin). Les infâmes sous l'ancien régime. Paris: Gugy, 1902. Collects unpublished police documents from the Bibliothèque Nationale and the Bibliothèque de l'Arsenal, Paris. 722. FLEISCHMANN, HECTOR. L'enfer de la galanterie a la
fin de l'ancien régime: le cénacle libertin de Mlle Raucourt (de la Comédie
Française). Paris: Bibliothèque des Curieux, 1912. 329 pp. Attempts to synthesize what is known about the actress Françoise Raucourt, who ostensibly founded a lesbian secret
society during the reign of Louis XVI. 723. FLEISCHMANN, HECTOR. Histoire licencieuse: les maîtresses de Marie
Antoinette. Paris: Editions des Bibliophiles, 1910. 260 pp. Historical gossip about the queen's supposed lesbian liaisons. See
also his: Mme de Polignac et la cour galante de Marie Antoinette d'après les libelles obscènes (Paris: Bibliothèque des Curieux, 1910. 255 pp.). 724. FOURNIER-VERNEUIL, and H. DE
MONTROUGE. Paris: tableau moral et philosophique. Paris: 1826. 632 pp. For pédérastie
cliques in Paris since the Revolution, see pp. 313-1A, 335-38, 367, and 397-98. 725. GLATIGNY, ALBERT, et al. La Sultane Rozréa y Badinguette et autres chansons
contemporaines. Strasbourg:
Société des Bibliophiles Cosmopolites, 1871. 84 pp. See pp. 17-22 for the homosexual clique known as the Société des Emiles, discovered by the French police in 1864, whose
president was an Alsatian officer (later senator of the Second Empire) who
had killed the poet Pushkin in a duel in 1837. Prints the songs
"Lamentation des filles" and "Les deux trous." 726. HAHN, PIERRE (éd.). Nos ancêtres les pervers: la vie des homosexuels sous
le second empire. Paris: Olivier Orban, 1971. 336 pp. Selection of original texts offering a panorama of homosexual life in France (1852-1870), with lengthy introduction. 727. HERNANDEZ, LUDOVICO (pseud.). Les procès de sodomie aux xvie, xviie et xviiie siècles. Paris: Bibliothèque des Curieux, 1920. Provides texts of court records of sodomy trials under the Ancien Régime. 728. HERVEZ, JEAN (pseud, of Raoul Vèze). Les sociétés d'amour au xviiie siècle. Paris: Daragon, 1906. 358 pp. On 18th century secret societies; see pp. 238-74. 729. JARRIGE, PIERRE. Les jésuites mis sur l'eschauf- faud. Leiden:
J. Nicolas, 1649.
In this polemical
work by an ex-Jesuit converted to Calvinism, see Chapter 5, "Les impudicites des jesuites dans leurs classes." 730. JULLIAN, PHILIPPE. Montmartre, Translated
by Anne Carter. New York: E. P. Dutton, 1977. 206 pp. In this study of one of Paris's major modern literary and artistic
quarters, see pp. 88-95 ("Mount Lesbos") and pp. 178-85 ("The
Boulevards of Sodom"). 731. JURIEU, PIERRE. Préjugés légitimes contre le papisme. Amsterdam: H. Desbordes, 1685. Includes violent attacks on sodomy among
the Catholic clergy. 732. LACHÈVRE, FRÉDÉRIC. Le prince des libertins du xviie siècle: Jacques Vallée des Barreaux, sa vie et ses
poésies (1599-1673). Paris: H. Leclerc, 1907. 264 pp. During this period libertine primarily connoted free thought, and only secondarily sexual licence.
See, however, pp. 44, 61, 184-87, 221, 228. 733. LACHÈVRE, FRÉDÉRIC (éd.). Le libertinage au xviie siècle. Paris: H. Champion, 1909-11. 2 vols. See vol. 2, pp. 85-86 (epigram by Denys Sanguin de Saint- Pavin; 1595-1670); and pp. 287-91 (poems by Théophile de Viau; 1590-1626). 734. LEDUC, VIOLETTE. Mad in Pursuit. New York: Far- rar, Straus and Giroux, 1971. 351 pp. In the period covered by this memoir (1945-49), Leduc entered the literary world, becoming acquainted
with Simone de Beauvoir,
Jean Cocteau, and Jean Genet. 735. LEVER, MAURICE. Les bûchers de Sodome. Paris: Fayard, 1985. 426 pp. Social history chiefly concerning the 17th and 18th centuries
in France; provides considerable information, but in a largely anecdotal
context. 736. LORENZ, PAUL. Sapho 1900: Renée Vivien. Paris: Julliard, 1977. 184 pp. Study of the noted Anglo-French lesbian writer and her times. 737. MACÉ, GUSTAVE. Mes lundis en prison. Paris: Charpentier, 1889. 415 pp. (Police parisienne) Account by the Chef de Service de la Sûreté of homosexuality in the French capital during the
early years of the Third Republic, when the vice squad came into operation. 738. MAGNE, EMILE. Le plaisant abbé de Boisrobert, fondateur de
l'Académie Française, 1592-1662; documents inédits. Paris: Mercure de France, 1909. 497 pp. Publication of primary documents on the poet François de Metel, sieur de Boisrobert, with commentary by Magne, which somewhat slights his homosexuality; compare N.
Prae- torius, below. 739. MARAIS, MATHIEU. Journal et mémoires sous la régence et le règne de Louis XV (1715-1737). Paris: Firmin-Didot, 1863-68. 4 vols. In this chronicle of the regency period and the first part of the
reign of Louis XV, see vol. 1, p. 278; vol. 2, pp. 319-22, 467; vol. 3, pp.
65, 114, 290-300, 308-09, 393- 94, 423, 462; vol. 4, pp. 3-4, 8, 226-17, 142,
146-47, 149-152, 155, 168, 305. 740. MERCIER, LOUIS-SEBASTIEN. Tableau de Paris. Amsterdam: n. p., 1782-88. 4 vols, in 12. In these social commentaries by the dramatist (1740-1814), see vol. 1
p. 278 (the Greek taste revived); vol. 2, p. 158 (the elegant replaces the
petit-maitre); vol. 3, pp. 130-32 (new vices a hundred years before)' vol. 4,
p. 239 (punishment of pederasts as a public scandal). 741. MONNIER, ADRIENNE. The Very Rich Hours of Adrienne Monnier. Translated with additional material by Richard McDougall. New York:
Scribner's, 1976. Memoirs of the noted proprietor of a left-bank bookstore,
with reminiscences of many lesbian and gay luminaries in the 1920s and 1930s. 742. NOUVEAU, PIERRE. "Le péché philosophique ou de l'homosexualité du xviiie
siècle," Arcadie, nos. 254-259/60 (February-October 1975), 77-82, 134-41, 275-81, 334-39,
396-400, 556-62. Various aspects of homosexuality in 18th-century France. 743. ORLEANS, DUCHESSE D'. A Woman's Life in the Court of the Sun King:
Letters of Liselotte топ der Pfalz, 1652-1722 (Elisabeth Charlotte, Duchesse d'Orléans). Translated from the German by
Elborg Forster. Baltimore: Johns Hopkins University Press, 1985. 287 pp. Letters written by the second wife of Philippe, Due d'Or- leans, the
homosexual brother of Louis XIV, which contain acerbic comments on the
homoerotic leanings of aristocrats of several European countries. An
annotated edition of the material pertinent to homosexuality is in preparation
by Claude Courouve and Roland Schaer. 744. PEYREFITTE, ROGER. Voltaire, sa jeunesse et son temps. Paris: Albin Michel, 1985. 2 vols. This leisurely life (by a prolific French
homosexual novelist) of Voltaire up to his thirty-second year shows the role of nonconformity, including libertinism in his
development—his Jesuit education notwithstanding. Reveals the role of the Société du Temple, a parasodom- ital group. 745. PEYRONNET, PIERRE. "Le péché philosophique." In: Aimer en France, 1760-1860. (Clermont-Ferrand:
Association des publications de la Faculté des lettres et des sciences humaines, 2, 1980), 471-78. Aperçus mainly concerning lesbianism. 746. PORCHE, FRANÇOIS. L'amour qui n'ose pas dire son nom. Paris: Bernard
Grasset, 1927. An advanced and
tolerant text for the period, written by a heterosexual. 747. PRAETORIUS, NUMA (pseud, of Eugen Wilhelm). "Der homosexuelle Abbé Boisrobert, der Gründer der Académie Française," Zeitschrift für Sexualwissenschaft, 9 (1922), 4-7, 33-43.^ 0n Boisrobert (1592-1662), poet and one of the founders of the French Academy. Compare E. Magne, above. 748. PRAETORIUS, NUMA. "Das Liebesleben 1. des Königs Heinrich III von Frankreich, 2. des Bruders von Ludwig XIV, Königs von Frankreich, Philipp d'Orléans, 3. des Königs Ludwig XVIII von Frankreich," Zeitschrift für Sexualwissenschaft, 18 (1932), 522-654. Homosexual aspects of the lives of three leading French royals. 749. PRAETORIUS, NUMA. "Zwei französische Dichter des 17. Jahrhunderts (Théophile de Viau und Jacques Valle des Barreaux) und ihre Beziehungen zur Homosexualität," Zeitschrift für Sexualwissenschaft, 5 (1918), 95-108. On two 17th-century poets; on another, see his "Ein homosexueller Dichter des 17. Jahrhunderts Saint-Pavin, der 'König von Sodom, "' ibid., 5:8 (1918-19), 261-71. See also F. Lachèvre, above. 750. RABUTIN, ROGER DE, COMTE DE BUSSY (ascribed to). Histoire amoureuse de Gaules. Paris: Grance, 1754. 5 vols. See the chapter "La France devenue italienne" (which was not, however, written by Rabutin). 751. RAYNAUD, ERNEST. "Voltaire et les fiches de police," Mercure de France» 199 [no. 705] (November 1, 1927), 536-56. Discusses the accusation that Voltaire was homosexual. 757. RELIQUET,
PHILIPPE. Gilles de Rais, maréchal, monstre et martyr. Paris: Belfond, 1982. 282 pp. Recent attempt to arrive at the truth about the 15th century
mass-murderer of boys, sometimes identified with the
legendary Bluebeard. The secondary literature on Gilles de Rais—much of it
semifictional—is enormous; suffice it to mention the names of M. Bataille (1965), E. Ferrero (1975), J. Rouille (1978) and J. Bressler (1981). 758. REY, MICHEL. "Police et sodomie à Paris au xviiie siècle: du péché au désordre," Revue d'histoire moderne et contemporaine, 29 (1982), 113-24. Based chiefly on the Archives of the Bastille, now kept in the Bibliothèque de l'Arsenal, Paris. See the English version "Parisian
Homosexuals Create a Lifestyle, 1700- 1750: The Police Archives," Eighteenth-Century Life, 9 (1985), 179-91. See also his "L'art de 'raccrocher' au xviiie siècle," Masques, 24 (Winter
1984-85), 92-99 (on cruising in 18th-century
Paris). 759. RÖMER, L. S. A. M. VON. "Die Homosexualität Heinrichs des Dritten, Königs von Frankreich und Polen," JfsZ, 4 (1902), 572-669. Solid study of the homosexuality of Henry III and its treatment in
contemporary sources. 760. SHEHADI, PHILIP. "Action in a Socialist
France," Advocate, no. 330 (November 12, 1981), 14-15, 18, 52. On the favorable response of the newly elected Mitterand government to
the requests of homosexual spokespeople. 761. SOMAN, ALFRED. "The Parlement of Paris and the Great Witch-Hunt," Sixteenth Century Journal, 9 (1978), 30-44. Presents research into unpublished trial appeals showing that 178
sodomy cases were judged by the Parlement of Paris during the years 1565-1640, with 77 death sentences
confirmed. 762.
TALLEMANT
DES REAUX,
GEDEON. Historiettes. Edited by A.
Adam. Paris: Gallimard, 1960-61. 2 vols. These texts offer many revealing aperçus of the erotic life of this time (1619-1692). 763. THOMAS, ARTUS, SIEUR D'EMBRY. L'Isle des Hermaphrodites. Paris: 1605. 235 pp. Satire on effeminates at the court of Henry III, inspired by accounts
of the berdaches in the New World. An enlarged edition was published in
Cologne in 1724, 764. TORCHE, ANTOINE. La toilette galante de l'amour. Paris: E. Loyson, 1670. 246 pp. See pp. 106-26, "La mariage d'amitié entre deux belles," and following discussion. (Contemporary comment on "lesbian marriage.") 765. VOLTAIRE. Dictionnaire philosophique. Edited by Raymond Naves. Paris: Garnier, 1967. 632 pp. See the article,
"Amour nommé Socratique," pp. 18-21, the best known of Voltaire's writings on
homosexuality, which first appeared in the edition of 1769. See also the
articles "Amitié,"
"Ange," "Genèse." H. GERMANY AND AUSTRIA Drawing upon secure foundations developed by philological and
scientific research, the scholarly study of homosexuality emerged in
German-speaking countries in the 19th century. It is a curious fact, however,
that this research—being conceived as a universalizing endeavor— never
brought forth a comprehensive picture of the history of homosexual and lesbian
behavior in Germany, Austria, and German-speaking Switzerland. Moreover,
there is a break in continuity caused by the 1933-45 (Nazi) period— which has
in itself been the subject of a certain amount of specialized research with
regard to the situation of homosexuals. For the homosexual rights movement in
Germany, see III.V. 766. BLEUEL, HANS PETER. Sex and Society in Nazi Germany. Translated from the German by J. Maxwell Littlejohn. Philadelphia:
Lippincott, 1973. 272 pp. In this popular account, see "Ernst Roehm, A Taste for Men,"
pp. 95-101; and "Drowned in a Bog," pp. 217-25. 767. Documents of the Homosexual Rights Movement in
Germany 1836-1927. New York: Arno Press, 1975. Reprints ten texts, nine in German and one in French. A comprehensive
list of German-language nonfiction materials through 1975 appears in Manfred
Herzer, Bibliographie zur Homosexualität (Berlin: Verlag Rosa Winkel, 1982). Only a small
selection of these can be offered here. 768.
EISSLER, W. U.
Arbeiterparteien und Homosexuellenfrage: zur Sexualpolitik von SPD und KPD
in der Weimarer Republik. Berlin: Verlag Rosa Winkel,
1980. 142 pp. Analysis of how the two major left parties, the Socialists (SPD) and the Communists (KPD), dealt with the subject of homosexuality in the 1920s. English summary. 769.
Eldorado: Homosexuelle Frauen und Männer in Berlin
1850-1950: Geschichte, Alltag und Kultur.
Berlin: Frölich & Kaufmann, 1984. 216 pp. Collection of essays (derived from an exhibition in the Berlin Museum)
providing a remarkable conspectus of gay male and lesbian life in Berlin over
a century. 758. ERIKSSON, BRIGITTE. "A Lesbian Execution in
Germany, 1721: The Trial Records," JH, 6 (1980-81), 27-40. Translation of a record of a court proceeding
that ended in one woman's being condemned to death. 759. GALLO, MAX. Night of the Long Knives. New York: Harper and Row, 1972. 310 pp. A somewhat confusing narration of Hitler's 1934 massacre of Ernst Rohm
and his homosexual Brownshirt circle. 760.
GAUER, KARL.
Neudefinitionen abweichenden Sexualverhaltens gegen Ende des 19. Jahrhunderts. Constance: Universität, 1979. 112 pp. (dissertation) Attributes the major shift in conceptualizing sexual deviance (late
19th century) to changing social conditions reaching back to the 18th
century. 761. GRAND-CARTERET, JOHN. Derrière "Lui" (L'homosexualité en
Allemagne). Paris: E. Bernard, 1908. 176 pp. Contemporary comment on the scandals at the court of Wilhelm II ("Lui"). Illustrated with 150 caricatures of the period. 762. HAEBERLE, ERWIN J. "Swastika, Pink Triangle and
Yellow Star--the Destruction of Sexology and the Persecution of Homosexuals
in Nazi Germany," Journal of Sex Research, 17 (1981), 270-87. Links the official policy of persecuting homosexuals to a hostility toward sexology. For a different view, see M.
Herzer, below. 763. HARTHAUSER, WOLFGANG (pseud. of Reimar Lenz). "Der Massenmord an Homosexuellen im Dritten Reich," In: Wilhart Schlegel (ed.), Das grosse Tabu: Zeugnisse und Dokumente zum Problem der Homosexualität, Munich: Rutten & Loening, 1967, pp. 7-37. An early attempt to draw
a comprehensive picture of the persecution of homosexuals in the Third Reich. 764. HEGER, HEINZ. The Men with the Pink Triangle. Translated, with an introduction by David Fern- bach. London: Gay
Men's Press, 1980. 128 pp. Moving account by an Austrian homosexual inmate of
Hitler's concentration camps, first published in
German in 1972. This book is one of the sources for Martin Sherman's famous
play, Bent. 765. HENDERSON, SUSAN W. "Frederick the Great of
Prussia: A Homophile Perspective," Gai Saber, 1:1 (Spring 1977), 46-54. Gathers literary evidence purveying innuendoes of the king's (1712-86)
homophile orientation, and that of others of the period. 766. HERZER, MANFRED. "Nazis, Psychiatrists, and
Gays: Homophobia in the Sexual Science of the National Socialist
Period," Cabirion, no. 12 (1985), 1-5. Shows that sexual research did continue during the Nazi era, and that
Nazi attitudes regarding homosexuality were more diverse than is usually
allowed. 767. HIRSCHFELD, MAGNUS. Berlins drittes Geschlecht. Berlin: Hermann Seemann, 1904. 77 pp. The noted sexologist offers a
kind of tour through Berlin's homosexual subculture at the turn of the
century cliques, gathering places, hustlers, etc. Reprinted in Documents, above (767). Also appeared in a French version: Le troisième sexe: les homosexuels de Berlin (Paris: Rousset, 1908; 103 pp.). 768. HOHMANN, JOACHIM S. Keine Zeit für gute Freunde. Frankfurt am Main: Foerster, 1982. 176 pp. Reconstructs the situation of homosexuals in Germany
after World War II. 769. HUGLANDER, F. (pseud, of Hugo Friedländer). "Aus dem homosexuellen Leben Alt-Berlins," JfsZ, 14 (1914), 45-63. Glimpses of homosexual life in Berlin, chiefly in the first half of
the 19th century, before the city became a great imperial capital. 770. IGRA, SAMUEL. Germany's National Vice. London: Quality Press, 1945. 102 pp. Grotesque specimen of the "fascist perversion" myth, linking
the Nazis to homosexuality. Such smears were common in the émigré literature, e.g.,Hans Erich
Kaminski, El nazismo como problema sexual (Buenos Aires: Iman, 1940; 186 pp.; see esp. pp.
13-15 and 41-65). 771. ISHERWOOD, CHRISTOPHER. Christopher and His Kind, 1929-1939. New York: Avon, 1977. 340 pp. The real story of the writer's Berlin
years. 772. JANSEN, VOLKER (ed.). Der Weg zu Freundschaft und Toleranz: männliche Homosexualität in den 50er Jahren. Berlin: Verlag Rosa Winkel, 1985. ca. 96 pp. Exhibition catalogue with contributions by H. W. Bendt, M. Herzer, and 0. Stuben on homosexuals in
West Germany during the "Adenauer era." 773.
KOKULA, ILSE.
Weibliche Homosexualität um 1900 in zeitgenössischen Dokumenten.
Munich: Frauenoffensive, 1981. 288 pp. Reprints documents on lesbianism and women's emancipation from 1880 to
1912. 774. KOLPA, RONALD et al. (eds.). Fascisme en homosek- sualiteit. The Hague: De Woelrat,
1985. 208 pp. Articles in Dutch chiefly on Nazism and its affinities, with several
seeking to discern contestable current parallels (i.e.,with
S & M). 775. LAUTMANN, RÜDIGER. "The Pink Triangle: The Persecution
of the Homosexual Male in Nazi Germany," JH, 6 (1980-81), 141-60. In this shortened extract from the following work, Lautmann estimates the total number of pink-triangle inmates at about 10,000: Rüdiger Lautmann and others, Seminar: Gesellschaft nnd Homosexualität. (Frankfurt am Main: Suhrkamp, 1977; 570 pp.). 776. LEONHARDT, W. "Die Homosexualität der ältesten deutschen Literatur," JfsZ, 12 (1911-12), 153-65. Homosexual elements
in medieval German literature. 777.
Lesbianism and
Feminism in Germany, 1895-1910. New York: Arno Press, 1975. Eleven German-language texts. Some of this
material, together with related items appears in translation in Lillian
Faderman and Brigitte Eriksson (eds.), Lesbian/ Feminism in
Turn-of-the-Century Germany (Weatherby Lake, MO: Naiad Press, 1980). 778.
LINNHOFF,
URSULA. Weibliche Homosexualität zwischen
Anpassung und Emanzipation. Cologne: Kiepenheuer & Witsch, 1976. 141 pp. Examines lesbian progress in West Germany from several perspectives. 779.
MARKUS,
GEORG. Der Fall Redl.
Vienna: Amalthea,
1984. 286 pp. On the Austrian double agent, who was blackmailed for his
homosexuality by the Russians in the years before World War I. This book, which reflects new research, cites correspondence
documenting Redl's affection for young men. Now obsolete is Robert B. Asprey, The Panther's Feast (New York: Putnam, 1959; 317 pp.). 792.
MEYER, ADELE. Lila Nächte: die Damenklubs der
zwanziger Jahre. Berlin: Zitronenpresse, 1981. 172 pp.
I The lesbian cabaret
scene in Weimar Germany. 793. MILLS, RICHARD. "A Man of Youth: Wilhelm Jansen
and the German Wandervogel Movement," Gay Sunshine, no. 44-45 (1980), 48-50. Traces the career of a little-known figure in the German gay movement
(1866-1943). See also Mills's previous article, "A Matter of Honor: Hans
Blüher and Magnus Hirschfeld," ibid., no. 42-43
(Spring 1980), 21-25. For a general treatment, see J. Steakley, below. 794. MIRABEAU, HONORE GABRIEL RIQUETTI, COMTE DE. The Secret History of the
Court of Berlin. London: 1789. 2 vols. Translation of Histoire secrete de la cour de Berlin (Paris: 1789). Contains gossip about the court of Frederick the Great, mentioning also the homosexuality of his brother Prince Henry, a sometime candidate for the throne of the United States. On Prince Henry, see also Numa Praetorius, "Die Homosexualität des Prinzen Heinrich von Preussen, des Bruders Friedrich des Grossen," Zeitschrift für Sexualwissenschaft, 15 (1928-29), 465-76. 795. MOSSE, GEORGE. Nationalism and Sexuality: Respectability and
Abnormal Sexuality in Modern Europe. New York: Howard Fertig, 1985. 232 pp. Somewhat diffuse series of
studies dealing with such themes as nudity, life-style reform, classicism,
taste, friendship, and homosexuality. 796. PLANT, RICHARD. The Pink Triangle: The Nazi War against
Homosexuals. New York: Holt, 1986. 259 pp. Clearly and eloquently written, this is the best account in English of
these terrible events. 797. SCHILLING, HEINZ-DIETER. Schwule und Faschismus. Berlin: Elephanten-Presse, 1983. 174 pp. Narrative of homosexual
persecution in the Third Reich. 798. SHEPHERD, NAOMI. Wilfred Israel: German Jewry's
Secret Ambassador, London: Weidenfeld and Nicol- son, 1984. 297 pp. Biography of courageous opponent of the Nazi regime (1899- 1944), who
was also a closeted homosexual. 799. STEAKLEY, JAMES D. "Gays under Socialism: Male
Homosexuality in the German Democratic Republic," Body Politic, 29 (December 1976-January 1977), 15-18. Paints a somewhat too rosy picture of conditions in East Germany (with background from 1949). See also: Siegrid Schäfer, "Sexuelle und soziale Probleme von Lesbierinnen in der DDR," in: E. Schorsch and G. Schmidt (eds.), Ergebnisse der Sexualforschung (Cologne: Wissenschaft-Verlag, 1975), pp. 299-325; as well as Steakley, "The Gay Movement in Germany Today," Body Politic, 13 (May-June 1974), 14-15, 21, 23. 800. STEAKLEY, JAMES D. The Homosexual Emancipation
Movement in Germany. New York: Arno Press, 1975. 121 pp. Factual account of the efforts, centering largely on Magnus Hirschfeld
and his Scientific-humanitarian Committee, to abolish Article 175 of the
penal code, and to promote toleration for homosexuals in Wilhelmine and then
Weimar Germany, See also John Lauritsen and David Thorstad, The Early Homosexual Rights
Movement (1864- 1935). (New York: Times Change Press, 1974). 801. STEAKLEY, JAMES D. "Iconography of a Scandal:
Political Cartoons and the Eulenburg Affair," Studies in Visual
Communication, 9:2 (1983), 20-51. Judicious reconstruction of the scandals involving a homosexual
favorite of the Kaiser's from 1907 to 1909, accompanied by 39 cartoons. 802.
STÜMKE, HANS-GEORG, and RUDI FINKLER.
Rosa Winkel, rosa Listen: Homosexuelle und "gesundes Volksempfinden"
von Auschwitz bis heute. Reinbek bei Hamburg: Rowohlt,
1981. 512 pp. Detailed account with many quotations of persecution of and
discrimination against homosexuals in Germany in the second third of the 20th
century. 803.
WEINDEL.
HENRI DE, and F. P. FISCHER. L'homosexualité en Allemagne: étude documentaire et
anec- dotique. Paris: Félix Juven, 1908. 315 pp. Inspired by the contemporary Harden-Eulenburg-von Moltke scandals. 804. WILDE, HARRY. Das Schicksal der Verfemten: die Verfolgung der Homosexuellen im "Dritten Reich" und ihre Stellung in der heutigen Gesellschaft. Tubingen: Katzmann, 1969. 154 pp. Sympathetic account of the fate of
homosexuals under the Nazis and their uncertain status in the immediate
postwar period. 805. WITTE, HEINRICH. Der letzte Puller von Hohenburg: ein Beitrag zur politischen und Sittengeschichte des Elsasses und der Schweiz im 15. Jahrhundert sowie zur Genealogie des Geschlechts von Puller. Strasbourg: Heitz und Mündel, 1893. (Beiträge zur Landes- und Volkskunde von
Elsass-Lothringen, 16) Traces the career of the noble Richard Puller von
Hohenburg in Alsace and Switzerland, where he was repeatedly arrested for
sodomy and finally executed. For a review of the relevant aspects, see Numa
Praetorius, "Ein homosexueller Ritter des 15. Jahrhunderts," JfsZ, 12 (1911- 12), 207-29. 806. YOUNG, IAN. Gay Resistance. Toronto: Stubblejumper Press, 1985. 23 pp. Pamphlet offering an account of homosexuals (and possible homosexuals)
in the German resistance against Hitler. While the Netherlands was one of the main centers of the homosexual
rights movement in the first decades of the present century, intensive
scholarship on the history of homosexuality in the Low Countries developed
only from about 1965 onwards. The number and quality of publications,
of which only a selection is presented here, are impressive. Continuing work
can be monitored in the bimonthly Homologie and in the annual Homojaarboek (both published in Amsterdam). 807. BOON, LEO J. "De grote sodomietenvervolging in
he gewest Holland, 1730-1731," Holland, 8:3 (June 1976), 140-52. Account, with references to primary documents, of the great persecution of sodomites in the Province of Holland 1730-31. See also his article "Het jaar waarin elke jongen een meisje nam: de sodomietenvervolgingen in Holland in 1730," Groniek, 12:6 (January 1980), 14-17. 808. "'Utrechtenaren': de sodomieprocessen in Utrecht, 1730-1732," Spiegel Historiael, 17:11 (November 1982), 553-58. Sodomy trials in Utrecht, 1730-32. Utrechtenaar (someone from Utrecht) is Dutch slang for a
homosexual male, a usage Boon derives from these trials. 809. COHEN TERVAERT, G. M. De Grietman Rudolf de Mepsche. The Hague: 1921. Monograph on the Groningen official who condemned 22
sodomites to death in 1731. 810. DEBEUCKELAERE, GEERT. "Hoe meer zielen, hoe meer vreugde: homosubkultuur in Antwerpen 1781," Homokrant, 9:2 (February 1983), 9-12. On Antwerp's homosexual subculture in 1781. See also his: "Mayken en Leene: een lesbische geschiedenis in Brugge uit 1618," Homokrant, 9:9 (May 1983), 3-5; "'Ver- keerd zijn' in beroerde tijden: de Gentse sodomieten Processen van 1578," Homokrant, 7:3 (March 1981), 3-6. 811. EVERARD, MYRIAM. "Tribade of
zielsvriendin," Groniek, no. 77 (May 1982), 16-20. Treats several cases of Dutch women charged with sodomy i the late
18th century. 812. Groniek: Gronings Historische Tijdschrift, no. 66 (January 1980); no. 77 (May 1982). These two theme numbers of the
Groningen periodical are devoted entirely to
homosexual history, chiefly Dutch. 813. HEKMA, GERT. "Profeten op papier, pioniers op pad," Spiegel Historiael, 17:11 (November 1982), 566-71. Discusses several aspects of male homosexual life in Amsterdam in the
19th century, including Platonic friendships, cliques, street life, and
cafes. 814. HEKMA, GERT. "De strijd om homoseksualiteit: de
oprichting van een Janusbeeld," Groniek, no. 77 (May 1982), 7-15. On changing concepts of homosexuality, mainly in the
19th century. Some of this material is summarized in his "Social
Philosophies, Social Practices: Some Preludes to the Homosexual," Among Hen, among Women, Amsterdam: Uni- versiteit, 1983, 258-67, 578. See also
his "Homosek- sualiteit: van zonde tot geaardheid," Spiegel Historiael, 15:9 (September 1980), 484-91. 801. HUUSSEN, AREND H., JR. "Gerechtelijke vervolging van 'sodomie' gedurende de 18e eeuw in de Repub- liek, in het bijzonder in Friesland," Groniek, no. 66 (January 1980), 18-33. Judicial prosecution of sodomy in the Dutch Republic in the 18th
century, especially in Friesland. 802. HUUSSEN, AREND H., JR. "Strafrechtelijke vervolging van 'sodomie' in de Republiek," Spiegel Historiael, 17:11 (November 1982), 547-52. Criminal prosecution for sodomy in the Dutch Republic. English
version, "Sodomy in the Dutch Republic in the Eighteenth Century," Eighteenth-Century Life, 9 (1985), 169-78. 803.
KOENDERS,
PIETER. Homoseksualiteit in bezet Nederland,
verzweyen hoofstuk. The Hague: De Woelrat, 1983. 173 pp. Discusses various aspects of homosexual oppression and persecution in
the occupied Netherlands during World War II. 804. MEER, THEO VAN DER. "'Liefkozerijen en Vuylig-
heden'" Groniek, no. 66 (January 1980), 34-37. Discusses the sodomy trials of several Amsterdam women in the late
18th century. 805.
MEER, THEO VAN DER.
De wesentlijke sonde van sodomie en andere vuyligheeden: Sodomietenvervol-
gingen in Amsterdam 1730-1811. Amsterdam: Tabula, 1984. 237
pp. Major study treating the period from the onset of the
i great persecution in 1730 to the decriminalization of 1811, as a
result of the introduction of the Napoleonic Penal Code upon annexation by
France. 806. MEIJER, MAAIKE. "Pious and Learned Female
Bosom- Friends in Holland in the Eighteenth Century," Among Men, among Women, Amsterdam: Universiteit, 1983, 404-19, 573-76. On circles of women and their publications. 807. NIP, R. I. A. "Bengaert Say, een 15de eeuws
ambtenaar," Holland, 15:2 (April 1983), 65-75. Discusses the role of Say, prosecutor general of the Estates of
Holland in the 1448 trial and execution for sodomy of Gooswijn de Wilde,
president of the Estates of Holland. See also Gerrit Kuijk and Renee Valens-Nip, "Saeye
Zonden," Groniek, no. 78 (July-August 1982), 17-21, which concerns the 1495
denunciation for sodomy of Philips Say, son of Bengaert. 808. NOORDAM, DIRK JAAP. "Homosexual Relations in
Leiden (1533-1811)," Among Men, among Women, Amsterdam: Universiteit, 1983, 218-23, 603. See also his more detailed
article: "Homosexualiteit en Sodomie in Leiden," 1533-1811, Leids Jaarboekje, no. 75 (1983), 72-105; as well as his
"Homoseksuele relaties in Holland in 1776," Holland, 16:1 (February 1984), 3-34. 809. OVEZALL, J. J. "Over het sociale aspect van de homosexualiteit in de 18e eeuw in Nederland," Nederlands Tijdschrift voor de Psychologie en haar grensgebieden, N.S. 8 (1953), 305-49. Social aspects of homosexuality in the 18th century Netherlands, when
economic decline was followed by persecution. 810. RAMSAY, RONALD W., P. M. HERINGA, and I. BOORSMA.
"A Case Study: Homosexuality in the Netherlands," in J. A. Loraine
(ed.), Understanding Homosexuality: Its Biological and Psychological Bases, New York: American Elsevier, 1974, pp. 121-59. The recent situation viewed through the lens of a now somewhat dated
methodology. Note also the comparative discussion of the Netherlands in
Martin S. Weinberg and Colin J. Williams, Male Homosexuals: Their
Problems and Adaptations (New York: Oxford University Press, 1974; 316 pp.). 811. RÖMER, L. S. A. M. VON. "Der Uranismus in den Niederländen bis zum 19. Jahrhundert, mit besonder er Berücksichtingung der grossen Uranierverfolgung im Jahre 1730," JfsZ, 8 (1906), 365-512. Extensive study, now obsolete in some details, of homosex uality in
the Natherlands, with special emphasis on the great persecution beginning in
1730. 812. SALDEN, MAARTEN J. M. "Van doodstraf tot straffe- loosheid," Spiegel Historiael, 17:11 (November 1982), 559-65. Historical-legal study of the evolution in the Netherland that finally
led to the abrogation of the medieval laws in 1811. 813. SCHUYF, JUDITH. "Homosocial Existence and
Patriar chy," Among Men, among Women, Amsterdam: Univer- siteit, 1983, 450-53, 597. Discusses "passing women" and female friendship forms in the
early modern Netherlands. 814. Spiegel Historiael, 17:11 (November 1982). Special number on the
history of homosexuality in the Netherlands. 815. TANG, A. VAN DER. "De zaak Jillis Bruggeman," Scyedam, 5:6 (1979), 4-13. On the Bruggeman affair, a sodomy case from 1803. 816. TIELMAN, ROB. Homoseksualiteit in Nederland: Studie van een emancipatiebeveging. Meppel: Boom, 1982. 336 pp. Comprehensive work on homosexuality in the Netherlands, concentrating
on the homophile movement from 1911 onwards. 817. VANDEPITTE, G. "Van Hekse en de Boze, Sappho 1618, Mayken de Brauwere en Magdaleene van Steene," Rond de Poldertorens, 24 (1982), 127-35. On a witchcraft case of 1618 with lesbian overtones. _ 818. VLEER, W. T. "Sterf Sodomieten!" Rudolf de Mepsche, de homofielenvervolging, het Faanse zedenproces, en de massamoord te Zuidhorn. Norg: VEJA, 1972. On the Groningen persecutor of sodomites, Rudolf de
Mepsche, the Faan morals trial, and the mass execution at Zuidhorn. The traditional Christian condemnation of homosexuality took on
particular ferocity in Spain and Portugal owing to the Inquisition and the
struggle with the Moors, who were on occasion stereotyped as sodomites. In
modern times the continuing alliance of throne and altar has imposed a
pervasive censorship that made investigation of heretical sexuality
difficult. Only in the last few years then, prompted by a vigorous trend
towards intellectual modernization and the rise of homosexual rights
movements, especially in Catalonia, have some historical elements of Iberian
homosexual culture begun to emerge from obscurity. 819. ALCALDE DE ISLA, JESUS, and RICARDO JAVIER BARCELÖ. Celtiberia gay. Barcelona: Editorial Personas, 1976. 174 pp. Popular account. See also: Alberto Garcia Valdes, His- toria y presente de la
homosexualidad (Madrid: Akal, 1981); and Jose Antonio Valverde, El macho herido: retrato
sexual de los espanoles (Madrid: Quorum, 1986). 820. ALONSO TEJADA, LUIS. La represion sexual en la
Espana de Franco. Barcelona: Caralt, 1977. 261 pp. Post-1936 sexual repression in Spain and its gradual recession; see
esp. pp. 217-24. 821. ALZIEU, PIERRE et al. (eds.). Poesia erotica del siglo de ого. Second ed. Barcelona: Editorial Critica, 1984. 361 pp. In this anthology and commentary on 17th-century erotic poetry, see
pp. 46-47 (lesbian sonnet); and 238-40, 250-54 (satires on male homosexuals). 822. ANABARBITE RIVAS, HECTOR, and RICARDO LORENZO SANZ. Homosexualidad: el asunto esta caliente. Madrid: Queimada, 1979. 112 pp. Historical account, with some data on
Inquisition persecutions, followed by exposition of then-current gay liberation
theory and politics. 823. BAROJA, JULIO CARO. "Honour and the
Devil," in J. G. Peristiany (ed.), Honour and Shame: the Values
of Mediterranean Society, Chicago: Chicago University Press, 1970, pp. 79-137. Discusses the social penalties imposed by southern Spanish culture for
gender-role deviation. 824. BARRIOBERO Y HERRAN,
EDUARDO. Los delitos sexuales en las viejas leyes espanoles. Madrid: Mundo Latino, 1930. 206 pp. Excerpts, with commentary, from older Spanish legal codes on sexual
crimes. See also: Victoriano Domingo Loren (ed.), Los homosexuales frente a la ley: los juristas opinan (Barcelona: Plaza y Janes, 1977; 315 pp.). 825. BENNASSAR, BARTOLOME. The Spanish Character: Attitudes
and Mentalities from the Sixteenth to the Nineteenth Century. Translated from the French by Benjamin Keen.
Berkeley: University of California Press, 1979. 325 pp. In this stimulating work of cultural history, sodomy is discussed in
several contexts; see pp. 28-30, 59, 85, 207-10, 292-93. 826. BERNALDO DE QUIRÖS, CONSTANCIO, and J. M. LLANAS AUGILANIEDO. La mala vida en Madrid: estudio psico-sociolôgico. Madrid: B.
Rodriguez Serra, 1901. 363 pp. In this study of street life in fin-de-siècle Madrid, see pp. 262-85 for effeminate homosexuals and hustlers. 827. CABALLERO, OSCAR. El sexo del franquismo. Madrid: Editorial Cambio 16, 1977. 319 pp. Journalistic account of sexual life in Spain under Franco; see pp.
193-211. 828. ENRIQUEZ, JOSÉ RAMÖN (ed.). El homosexual ante la sociedad enferma. Barcelona:
Tusquets, 1978. 227 pp. Articles by Spanish and Mexican authors attacking patterns of social
repression of homosexuality.
GARCIA CÄRCEL,
RICARDO. Herejia y sociedad en el siglo XVI: la Inquisiciön en Valencia, 1530-1609. Barcelona: Ediciones 62, 1980. 352 pp. See "La sexualidad
contranatura," pp. 288-94.
GARCIA Y PEREZ, ALFONSO. La rebelion de los homosexuales. Madrid: Pecosa, 1977. 160 pp. Journalistic presentation
of mixed quality.
GIL DE BIEDMA,
JAIME. "Homosexuality in the Spanish Generation of 1927: a Conversation
with Jaime Gil de Biedma" (Interview conducted by Bruce Swansey and José Ramon Enriquez), Gay Sunshine, no. 42-43 (1980), 18-20, 14. A contemporary Spanish writer speaks about Cernuda, Lorca, and others.
GOMES, JULIO.
"Portugal" in his: A Homossexualida- de no Mundo, vol. 2, Lisbon: The author, 1983, pp. 175-270. Discusses law, famous Portuguese homosexuals, hustling, crime, and
employment.
LEA, HENRY C. A History of the Inquisition in Spain. New York: 1922. 4 vols. In this now dated study, see vol. 4, pp.
361-77, for executions between 1497 and 1723. For a contemporary approach to
the general subject, see Henry Kamen, Inquisition and Society in
Spain in the Sixteenth and Seventeenth Centuries (London: Weidenfeld and Nicolson, 1985; 312 pp.)
LOPEZ Y LINAGE, JAVIER (ed.). Grupos marginados y peligrosidad social. Madrid: Campo Abierto, 1977. 204 pp. Analyzes the social effect of the Law of Social Dangerous- ness on
several marginalized groups.
MCCASKELL, TIM.
"Out in Basque Country," Body Politic (August 1980), 25-28. Reports on the flourishing gay culture that has developed in the
Basque provinces of northern Spain.
MARANÖN, GREGORIO. Ensayo biolögico sobre Enrique IV de Castilla y su tiempo. Madrid: Espasa Calpe, 1956. 216 pp. In this reprint of a work first published in 1930, the writer claims
that Henry IV of Castille (1425-1475) suffered from eunuchism and acromegaly.
On this book, see Daniel Eisenberg, "Enrique IV and Gregorio
Maranön," Renaissance Quarterly, 21 (1976), 21-30. See also Townsend Miller, Henry IV of Castile (Philadelphia: Lip- pincott, 1972).
MONTEIRO, ARLINDO
CAMILO. "II peccato nefando in Portugallo ed il Tribunale dell1Inquisizione," Rassegna di studi sessuali, 6 (1926), 161-76 and 265-80; 7 (1927), 1-28.
Somewhat labored study of sodomites caught in the Inquisition's net in
Portugal. There is also a good deal of information on Portugal in his magnum
opus: Amor säfico e socrätico (Lisbon: The author, 1922; 552 pp.).
MONTOYA, BALDOMERO. Los homosexuales. Barcelona: Dopesa, 1977. 128 pp. A somewhat old-fashioned presentation of the forms of homosexual
behavior.
PERRY, MARY
ELIZABETH. Crime and Society in Early Modern Seville, Hanover, NH: University Presses of New England, 1980. 298 pp. In 16th
century Seville rapid urban growth was accompanied by the spectacle of
executing sodomites, generally from the lower class. Perry's main source is a
1619 account of 309 persons attended by Pedro de Leon prior to their
execution, including 52 convicted of sodomy.
SERRANO Y VICENS,
RAMON. La sexualidad de la mujer. Madrid: Jucar, 1975. Surveys the sexual behavior of Spanish women, including lesbianism. The homosexual history of Italy has left rich deposits in literature,
art, and historical records. Because of the political fragmentation of the
country (until 1870), this history has been expressed in regional
terms--Lombardy, Venice, Florence, etc.—and an overall history has not yet
emerged. This task is the goal of a number of scholars now working in Italy.
For Renaissance and Baroque art, see VI.C.
BALDELLI, IGNAZIO.
"Lingua e letteratura
di un centro trecentesco: Perugia," Rassegna della letteratura italiana, 66 (1962), 3-21. Treats a group of homoerotic poets active in Perugia in the 14th
century (pp. 4-9).
BARTOLINI, ELIO. L'assassinio di Winckelmann: gli atti original! del processo criminale (1768). Milan: Longanesi, 1971. Text of the trial of the murderer of the great
archaeologist Winckelmann, which took place in Trieste 1768.
BELGRANO, LUIGI. Della vita privata dei Genovesi. Second ed. Genoa: Tipografia dell'Istituto Sordomuti, 1875. 538 pp. See pp. 427-29 on sodomy in Genoese history. 843. BENVENUTI, MATTEO. "Come facevasi guistizia
nello stato di Milano dall'anno 1471 al 1763," Archivio storico lombardo, 9 (1882), 442-82. See pp. 452-53 for a list of condemnations for sodomy pronounced
between 1572 and 1615; see also p. 448. 844. BERTOLOTTI, A. "Gli studenti a Roma nel secolo
XVI," Giornale storico della letteratura italiana, 2 (1883), 141-48. Reconstructs a scandal of 1555 provoked by carousing
students in Pavia who had read a carnevalesque "praise of sodomy"
in Latin. 845. BONGI, SALVATORE. Bandi Lucchesi del secolo deci- moquarto tratti dai
registri Archivio di stato in Lucca. Bologna: Progresso, 1863. 434 pp. See pp. 377-81 and 386 for medieval and Renaissance laws in Lucca (Tuscany),
including an account of the burning of a sodomite in 1369. 846. BROWN, JUDITH C. Immodest Acts: The Life of a
Lesbian Nun in Renaissance Italy. New York: Oxford University Press, 1985. 214 pp. Reconstructs the life of Sister Benedetta Carlini of Pescia (Tuscany)
as disclosed by official records of an inquiry in 1619-23. Her sexuality was
enveloped within an elaborate religious imagery that allowed her erotic
licence inside the confines of a magical mental world. 847. BRUCKER, GENE. The Society of Renaissance Florence: A Documentary
Study. New York: Harper and Row, 1971. 262 pp. For the operations of the special anti-sodomy magistracy established
in 1432, see pp. 201-06. 848. CARINI, ISIDORO. La "difesa" di Pomponio Leto. Bergamo: Flandinet, 1894. Discusses the defense of the humanist
Pomponio Leto, accused of having sought to seduce two boys in Venice (pp.
27-28, 35-37). 849. CERUTTI, FRANCO. "L'homosexualité dans les lettres italiennes
contemporaines," Arcadie, no. 67-68 (July-August 1959), 406-15. Reflects 1950s attitudes. See also his "Ombres et lumières en Italie," ibid., no. 78 (June 1960), 329-40. 850. CHASTEL, ANDRÉ. Art et humanisme à Florence au temps de Laurent le Magnifique. New ed. Paris: Presses Universitaires de France, 1961. 580 pp. This standard work on quattrocento culture in Florence offers a short but interesting section on attitudes toward "Socratic love" on pp. 289-98. 851. CORRADI, A. "Nuovi documenti per la storia
delle malattie veneree in Italia dalla fine del 1400 alia meta del 1500," Annali universitari di medicina e chirurgia, 269 (October 1884), 289-386. Presents several documents relating to sodomy in the 16th century (pp.
310-17, 366-82). 852. DALL'ORTO, GIOVANNI. "Antonio Rocco and the Background of His 'L'Alcibiade
Fanciullo a Scola' (1652)," in: Among Men, among Women. Amsterdam: University, 1983, pp. 224-32, 571-72. Scholarly investigation of this milestone work in the history of pédérastie love. 853. DALL'ORTO, GIOVANNI. "L'omosessualita nella
poesia volgare italiana fino a Dante," Sodoma, 3 (1986), 13-37. Close study of evidence from early Italian poetry. See also his: "Le parole per dirlo," ibid.,
81-95; (with Carlo Marcandalli), "Arsi finché morte ne segua," Lotta Continua (April 10, 1982), 11-13; and "Peccati politici
e peccati capital!," ibid. (April 24, 1982), 19. 854. DALL' ORTO, GIOVANNI. "Le ragioni di una persecu- zione." In: Martin Sherman, Bent (Ital. version). Turin: Edizioni Gruppo Abele, 1984, pp. 101-19. The first general study of the treatment of
homosexuals in Fascist Italy, though several novels and films have explored
the subject. More information appears in Dall'Or- to, "Per il bene délia razza al confino il pederasta," Babilonia (April 1986), 14-18 (continued in the following
issue). For references to Italian history and literature, esp. of the 19th
and 20th centuries, see the fundamental bibliography of Dall'Orto, Leggere omosessuale:
bibliogra- fia (Turin: Edizioni Gruppo Abele, 1984; 108 pp.). 855. DALL' ORTO, GIOVANNI. "An Unpublished Document from the Archivio di Stato,
Venice (1717)," Gay Books Bulletin, no. 9 (Spring/Summer 1983), 24-25. Translation and commentary of the minutes of a sodomy trial, ill
ustrating the 18th-century legal situation. 856. DELFINO, GIOVANNI. "Dei martiri e delle pene: il caso Bonfadio," Sodoma: rivista omosessuale di
cultura, 1 (Autumn-Winter 1984), 81-92. Analyzes documents and texts on the execution of Jacopo Bonfadio for
sodomy in Genoa on July 19, 1550. 857. FERRAI, L. "Dalla supposta calunnia del Vergerio contra il Duca di Castro," Archivio storico per Trieste, l'Istria e il Trentino, 1 (1882), 300-12. On the purported intervention of the humanist Pier Paolo Vergerio in
the matter of Pier Luigi Farnese and the Bishop of Fano, and a similar
affair concerning Marco Bracci. 873. FRATI, LODOVICO. La vita privata di Bologna dal secolo XIII al XVIII. Bologna: Zanichelli, 1900. 287 pp. For sodomy trials
in Bologna, see pp. 81-82. 874. FULIN, RINALDO. "Gli inquisitori dei
Dieci," Archivio veneto, 1 (1871), 1-64, 298-318; 2, (1871), 357-391. Publishes some interesting material on deliberations concerning sodomy
by the Venetian Council of Ten (pp. 18- 19, 45-46, 306, 317, 368, 370-81). 875. FUSCO, DOMENICO. L'Aretino sconosciuto e apocrifo, Turin: Berruto, 1953. 64 pp. The chapter "Fu l'Aretino
sodomita?" (pp. 34-39) discusses accusations that the Venetian writer
(1492-1556) was a sodomite, concluding that they are probably calumnies. 876. GUERRI, DOMENICO. La corrente popolare nel Rinascimento: Berte burle
e bale. Florence: San- soni, 1931. 174 pp. An important text for the understanding of 14th and 15th century
burlesque literature touching homosexuality (pp. 36, 44, 51-84, 121-71). See
also his: "Dal 'gagno' di Alighiero e fra'
Timoteo," La nuova Italia, 2 (1931), 493-96; and "Ancora il 'gagno' d1Alighiero,"
ibid., 3 (1932), 458-67. 877. GUNDERSHEIMER, WERNER. "Crime and Punishment in
Ferrara," in: Lauro Martines (ed.), Violence and Civil Disorder in
Italian Cities. Berkeley: University of California Press, 1972. Finds that 4% (of 200) capital punishments between 1440 and 1550 were
for sodomy (p. 114). 878. INFESSURA, STEFANO. Diario délia città di Roma. Rome: Forzani (Istituto Storico Italiano), 1890. 334 pp. See pp. 155-56, where the diarist (ca. 1440-1500) asserts that Pope
Sixtus IV (1414-84) made his barber a cardinal because he was his son's
lover. 879. LABALME, PATRICIA H. "Sodomy and Venetian
Justice in the Renaissance," Tijdschrift voor Rechts- geschiedenis/The Legal
History Review, 52:3 (1984), 217-54. Survey, with many citations of primary documents, of measures taken by
the Venetian state against sodomy from 1407 to the end of the 16th century,
covering magistrature, surveillance, court procedures, special treatment of
patricians and clergy, and punishments. 880. LABATE-CARIDI, VALENTINO. "II cavaliere Marino
nella tradizione popolare," Rivista abruzzese di scienze, lettere et arti, 12 (1897), 312-22. Treats a series of pornographic writings attributed to Giambattista
Marino (1569-1625). 881. LANDUCCI, LUCA. A Florentine Diary from 1450 to 1516, Continued by an Anonymous Writer
till 1542. Translated by A. de Rosen Jervis. New York: Dut- ton, 1927. 308 pp. In
these witnesses of stormy times for Florence, see pp. 77-78, 101, 124, 181,
201, 218, and 237. 882. LANZA, ANTONIO. Polemiche e berte letterarie nella Firenze del
primo Quattrocento. Rome: Bulzoni, 1972. 409 pp. An important study of the polemic-jocose literature of the first half
of the 15th century in Florence. See esp. pp. 103-08, 136-71, 309-57, and
396-406. Se also his edition of Lirici toscani del Quattrocento (Rome: Bulzoni, 1973; 2 vols.). 883.
LORENZONI,
PIERO. Erotismo e pornografia nella letteratura
italiana. Milan: II Formichiere, 1976. 322 pp. Although this book is strictly speaking an anthology of erotic
literary texts, it offers much material on the history of homosexuality and
homosexual writers, esp. during the Renaissance in Italy. 884. LUZIO, ALESSANDRO. Pietro Aretino nei primi suoi anni a Venezia e la
corte dei Gonzaga. Turin: Loe- scher, 1888. 135 pp. Cites two sonnets in which the Venetian writer confesses himself to be
a sodomite (pp, 23-24) and two relevant letters of Federico Gonzaga of
February 1528 (pp. 78-79). 885. MARIOTTI, ETTORE. "Giovanni della Casa," Arcadie, no. 79-80 (July-August 1960), 401-06. On the prelate and writer (1503-57), founder of the Papal Index, who
had the ill-repute of being a self-confessed sodomite because of his poem
"II Capitolo del forno." 886. MARTI, MARIO. Cultura e stile nei poeti giocosi del tempo di Dante. Pisa: Nitri-Lischi, 1953. 228 pp. Treats a number of homosexual poets of the 13th-14th century, esp. in
Tuscany. See also his: Poeti giocosi del tempo di Dante (Milan: Rizzoli, 1959). 887. MASINI, MARIO, and GIUSEPPE PORTIGLIOTTI. "I
famuli di Sisto IV," Archivio di Antropologia Criminale, 37 (1916), 462-81. Useful study of homosexuality in 15th-century Italy, with emphasis on
the papal court of Sixtus IV. See also their: "Attraverso il
Rinascimento: Pier Luigi Farnese," Archivio di Psichiatria, 38 (1917), 177-92. 888. NOVATI, F. "Gli scolari romani nei secoli XIV e
XV," Giornale storico della letteratura italiana, 2 (1883), 129-40. Account of Roman students' carnival pranks in the
Renaissance, with discussion of the homosexuality of Porcellio. Publishes a
short satirical Latin poem on the subject, 889. OMBROSI, LUCA. Vita dei Medici sodomiti. Florence: Canesi, 1965. 171 pp. Lives of the 18th-century grand dukes of Tuscany—Ferdinand II, Cosimo
III, and Gian Gastone—as well as of Prince Ferdinand and Cardinal Francesco
Maria, written by a contemporary. This material was in part utilized in
Jonathan Drake, "The Florentine Medici," Kalos, no. 1 (Spring 1976), 9-15. 890. PAVAN, ELISABETH. , "Police des moeurs, société et politique à Venise à la fin du
Moyen Âge," Revue Historique, 264 (1981),
241-88. In this study of mechanisms of social control in Venice at the end of
the middle ages, see esp. pp. 266-88. 891. PETRARCA, VALERIO. "L'osceno letterario nell
lirica dialettale de Nicola
Capasso," Sociologia della letteratura, no. 4-5 (1979), 191-203. On a Neapolitan dialect poet of the 17th century and his times. 892. RUGGIERO, GUIDO. The Boundaries of Eros; Sex, Crime and Sexuality in
Renaissance Venice. New York: Oxford University Press, 1985. 223 pp. See Chapter VI:
"Sodom and Venice" (pp. 109-45), which analyzes the rationale of
Venetian measures against sodomy and heterosexual buggery. Complements his
earlier studies, "Sexual Criminality in the Early Renaissance: Venice,
1338-1358," Journal of Social History, 8 (1975), 18-37; and Violence in Early Renaissance
Venice (New
Brunswick: Rutgers University Press, 1980; 235 pp.). 893. SCARABELLO, GIOVANNI. "Devianza ed interventi
di giustizia a Venezia nella prima meta del XVI secolo," in: Tiziano e Venezia. Venice: Neri Pozza, 1980, pp. 75-84. The background of legal proceedings against deviants in Venice in the
age of Titian and Aretino. 894. SEMPRINI, GIOVANNI. "L'erotismo nel
Rinascimento," Rassegna di studi sessuali, 2 (1922), 272-77. Discusses Benedetto Varchi, Pomponio Leto (Roman humanists), Antonio
Loredano (Venetian ambassador at Rome), Politian, Filelfo, Bracciolini, and
others. 895. SHREVE, JACK. "Homosexuality in Renaissance
Italy," Gay Literature, 2 (Spring 1975), 10-14. Brief discussion of literary evidence. 896. SOLERTI, ANGELO. "Anche Torquato Tasso?" Giornale storico dell
letteratura italiana, 9 (1887), 431- 40. Presents some letters of the great 16th century writer, which seem to treat homoerotic love in a veiled fashion. 897. TASSINI, GIUSEPPE. II libertinaggio in Venezia. Venice: Filippi, 1968. 128 pp. See pp. 27-32 which present a summary of the
deliberations of the Venetian Council of Ten on sodomy, with a discussion of
two cases. See also his: Alcune delle piu clamo- rose condanne capitali
eseguite in Venezia sotto la Repubblica (Venice: Filippi, 1970), pp. 91-94, 162-63; and Curiosité veneziane (Venice: Filippi, 1970), pp. 41, 131, 307, 389,
456, 655, 732. 898. VARCHI, BENEDETTO. "Sopra la pittura e scultura
(1546)," in his: Scritti. Trieste: Lloyd Austri- aco, 1858-59, vol. 2,
pp. 611-27. Towards the end of this discussion the humanist turns to two
homoerotic sonnets of Michelangelo, which prompt cautious statements about
same-sex love. 899. VOLPI, GUGLIELMO. Il bel giovine nella letteratura volgare del sec. XIV. Verona: Donato Tedeschi, 1891. (reprinted from
Biblioteca delle scuole italiane, 15) Analyzes the stereoype of male beauty found in 14th- century poetry,
including references to some unpublished homoerotic compositions. 900. ZANETTE, EMILIO. Suor Arcangela, monaca del Seicento veneziano. Venice: Istituto per la Collaborazione Culturale,
1960. See pp. 21-22 and 133-34 for discussion of lesbianism in Venetian
nunneries. 901. ZAPPERI, ROBERTO. L'uomo incinto: la donna,
l'uomoy il potere. Cosenza: Lerici, 1979. In this interesting study of male pseudo-pregnancy, see pp. 126-37,
discussing some facetiae on sodomy in the Renaissance. The sexual life of the pagan Eastern Slavs has scarcely been
investigated. The Greek Orthodox heritage of Kievan and then Muscovite Russia
gave the sexuality of the "white" (parish) clergy a different cast
from that of the secular clergy in the Latin West. The extent to which the
early Soviet regime tolerated homosexuality remains a topic of controversy
among leftists and emigre scholars. For the most part the history of homosexual
behavior in other eastern European countries is even more obscure than that
of Russia. The southern Balkans, where in modern Greece and Albania remnants
of once-flourishing homoerotic subcultures survive, are something of an
exception, though more work is needed. 889. BATKIS, GREGORIÎ A. Die Sexualrevolution in Russland.
Berlin: E. Kater, 1925. 23 pp. (Beitrâ- ge zum Sexualproblem, 4) A Soviet functionary's explanation—for
foreign consumption—of the regime's purportedly liberal sexual policies in
the 1920s. 890. DE JONG, BEN. "'An Intolerable Kind of Moral
Degeneration': Homosexuality in the Soviet Union," Review of Socialist Law (The Hague), 4 (1982), 341-57. Surveys opinion and law enforcement, chiefly in regard to male
homosexuality, since ca. 1960. "[T]he Soviet authorities' policy of
giving incomplete and distorted information on the subject has the effect of
reinforcing existing prejudices among the population." 891. DÉMIS (pseud.). "Chronique athénienne," Arcadie, no. 108 (December 1962), 651-54; no. 109 (January
1963); no. Ill (March 1963), 151-55; no. 113 (May 1963), 306-11; no. 118
(October 1963), 469-73. A series of reports reflecting the situation in Greece before the
Colonels' coup. 892. "G." "The Secret Life of
Moscow," Christopher Street, (June 1980), 15-30. American academic's candid account of his trip to the Soviet capital
in 1979. Compare the impressions of George Schuvaloff: "Gay Life in
Russia," Christopher Street (September 1976), 14-23. 893. GEL'MAN, IZRAIL' GRIGOR'EVICH. Polovaia zhizn, sovremennoi molodiozhi. Moscow: Gosudarstvennoe Izdatel'stvo, 1923. In this work entitled "Sexual Life of Contemporary Youth,"
see pp. 117-21 ("Sexual Anomalies) for a pathological interpretation of
two lesbian cases. There is a Spanish translation of this book: La vida sexual de la juventud contemporanea (Madrid: M. Aguilar, 1932). 894. HERBERSTEIN, SIGMUND, FREIHERR VON. Description of Moscow and
Muscovy, 1557. Translated by J. B. C. Grundy. New York: Barnes and Noble, 1969. 105
pp. In this translation of Rerum Moscovitarum commentarii, see pp. 40, 52. 895. HORNER, TOM. Eros in Greece: A Sexual Inquiry. New York: Aegean Books, 1978. 128 pp. Contrasts in modern Greece
between accepted views and practice; see esp. pp. 54-74. 896. HOSI WIEN, AUSLANDSGRUPPE. Rosa Liebe unterm roten Stern: zur Lage der Lesben und Schwulen in Ost- europa.
Hamburg: Fruhlings Erwachen, 1984. 142 pp. Comprehensive work on social life, laws, culture,
media and gay movement stirrings in Eastern Europe. Compiled by members of
Homosexuelle Initiative, Vienna, which also publishes reports in its
periodical Lambda Nach- richten as a function of the Eastern Europe Information
Pool of the International Gay Association. 897. IAROSLAVSKII, EMEL'IAN MIKHAILOVICH (pseud, of MINEI
IZRAILEVICH GUBEL'MAN). Bibliia dlia veruiushchikh i neveruiushchikh.
Chast' II. Kniga Bytiia. [The Bible for Believers and Unbelievers. Part II. The Book of
Genesis]. Moscow and Leningrad: Gosudarstvennoe izdatellstvo, 1925, pp. 34-
39. In this classic of Soviet antireligious literature, originally
published as a series of articles in the journal Bezbozhnik in 1922-25, the chapter entitled "Sodomitskie
greshniki i sodomitskie pravedniki" [The sinners of Sodom and the
righteous of Sodom] likens the sexual practices of the Sodomites to Oriental
and Greek pederasty and to the vices that flourished in Christian
monasteries. The book continues to be reprinted and translated in the Soviet
Union as a mainstay of propaganda against religion. 898. KARLINSKY, SIMON. "Russia's Gay Literature and
History (11th-20th centuries)," Gay Sunshine, nos. 29-30 (Summer-Fall 1976), 1-7. Useful survey concentrating on the late 19th-early 20th century
flowering of Russian culture (including gay culture). Attacks the facile view
that things were rosy under Lenin's regime. Enlarged Italian version: Sodoma, 3 (1986), 47-70. See also his: "Gay Life
before the Soviets: Revisionism Revised," Advocate, no. 339 (April 1, 1982), 31-34. 899. NACKE, PAUL. "On Homosexuality in
Albania," International Journal of Greek Love, 1:1 (1965), 39-47. On brotherhood pacts between men. Translated by Warren Johansson from
the German text in JfsZ, 9 (1908), 325-37. 900. ROZANOV, VASILli VASIL'EVICH. Four Faces of Rozanov:
Christianity, Sex, Jews, and the Russian Revolution. New York: Philosophical Library, 1978. 310 pp. Pp. 39-194 of this strange period document—the original Russian text
in question (Liudi lunnogo sveta) dates from 1913—offer an attack on the
"moonlight men," i.e.,sexual deviates who are held responsible for
the ascetic bias of medieval Christianity. There is a short study of the
author by Renato Poggioli: Rozanov (New York: Hillary House, 1962; 104 pp.). 914. SHARGORODSKli,
MIKHAIL DAVIDOVICH, and PAVEL PAVLOVICH OSIPOV. "Prestupleniia protiv lichnosti" [Crimes against the person], in: A. A. Zhdanov University (Leningrad), Kurs sovetskogo ngolovnogo
prava [A Course
in Soviet Criminal Law], vol, 3, Leningrad: Izdatel'stvo Leningradskogo
universite- ta, 1973, pp. 645-648. On Article 121 of the Penal Code of the
RSFSR (muzhelozh- stvo = sodomy). The authors criticize the existing Soviet law, saying that
for some persons homosexuality is a natural form of
sexual gratification and that Soviet juridical literature has never
furnished a satisfactory scientific basis for making consensual sodomy a
criminal act. The trend in both capitalist and socialist countries is toward
repeal of the law. 915.
STERN, BERNHARD.
Geschichte der öffentlicheil Sittlichkeit in Russland.
Berlin: Barsdorf, 1908, 652 pp. A general history of morals in Tsarist Russia, with some relevant material
in the second volume, including homoero- tic poems from the reign of Nicholas
I. 916. STERN, MIKHAIL. Sex in the USSR. Edited and translated from the French by Mark
Howson and Cary Ryan. New York: Times Books, 1980. 304 pp. Composite picture drawn by an endocrinologist who emigrated in 1977;
see esp. pp. 214-27. 917. VONK, HANS. Homoseksualiteit in staatssocialist- iese landen. Amsterdam: Subfaculteit der Algemene Politieke en Sociale Wetenschappen, 1983. 59 pp. (Mededelingen, 36) Seeks to assemble what is known of gay life and its restrictions in
the countries of "actually existing socialism" (Eastern Europe,
China, Cuba, and Nicaragua). 918. WEISSENBERG, S. "Das Geschlechtsleben des russischen Studententums der Revolutionszeit," Zeitschrift für Sexualwissenschaft, 11 (1924), 209-216. Evaluates questionnaires administered to Soviet students on their sex
life, with some conclusions on the incidence of homosexuality. See also the
writer's article "Die Verwahrlosung der Jugend in Sowjetrussland," ibid., 15 (1928), 225-53. 919. WORTIS, JOSEPH. Soviet Psychiatry. Baltimore: Williams & Wilkins, 1950. 314 pp. On pp. 213-15 the author, an American psychiatrist, introduces in a
tone of cynical amusement the Stalinist laws of 1934, asserting that
"deliberate efforts were made to break up the sequestered coteries of
sexual deviates... by enacting more stringent legislation on certain abnormal
sex practices." In the Nordic countries of Denmark, Finland, Norway, and
Sweden—commonly known as Scandinavia—lively homosexual rights movements have
stimulated scholarship since the end of World War II. Important advances have
also been registered in the legal and social status of lesbians and male
homosexuals. For medieval Scandinavia, see III.D. 920. BOHM, KRI. Oppet brev om lesbisk karlek. Stockholm: Forum, 1977. 75 pp. Advice from a Swedish lesbian on coping with society. 921. CARLING, FINN. De homofile: en skisse av en stengt tilvaerelse. Oslo: Gyldendal Norsk Forlag, 1965. 89 pp. Difficulties of homosexual life in Norway in the 1960s discussed by a
sympathetic heterosexual. 922.
CHRISTENSEN, AKSEL.
Et seksuelt mindretal: en skitsemaessig beskrivelse af det homoseksuelle
problem. Copenhagen: Hans Reitzels
Forlag, 1961. 182 pp. Evaluates the "homosexual problem" on the basis of 104
interviews. For presentation based on a slightly later period, see Martin S.
Weinberg and Colin J. Williams, Male Homosexuals: Their Problems and Adaptations (New York: Oxford University Press, 1974), esp.
Chapter 6. 923. ELLIOTT, NEIL. Sexuality in Scandinavia. New York: Weybright and Talley, 1970. 271 pp. In this popular work, see
Chapter 17, "Homosexuality" (pp. 186-99); and Chapter 18, "Lesbians,
pederasts and boy prostitution" (pp. 200-07). 924.
FRIELE,
KAREN-CHRISTINE. Fra undertrykkelse
til opprrfr. Oslo: Gyldendal, 1975. 161 pp. Outspoken book on the situation of male and female homosexuals in
Norway by a lesbian activist. 925. HALLBECK, NILS. Mannen och pojken. Stockholm: Forfatteres Bokmaskin, 1980. 56 pp. A somewhat rhapsodic defense of man-boy love. 926. HANSSON, JOHAN (ed.). Homosexella och omvarlden. Stockholm: Liber, 1982. 250 pp. Collection of articles on the situation
of homosexuals in society, including official and church attitudes. 927.
Homosex: Om konsroller samlevnad och sexuellt
fortryckt. Stockholm: Prisma, 1976. 144
pp. Interviews with male homosexuals and lesbians in Sweden, together with
information on homosexual organizations. 928. KOCH, MARTIN. Guds Vackra Varld. Stockholm: Bonnier, 1916. 2 vols. Hostile account of homosexuality in Sweden, which is nonetheless
useful for the information it gives on street life, hustling, and meeting
places. 915. MELIN, OLLE-PETTER. Homosexualitet—en bibliog- rafi. Bor8s: Bibliotekshogskolan, 1975. 88 pp. Extensive
bibliographical compilation of relevant Swedish material, concentrating on
fiction and belles lettres, but with some scholarly books and articles. 916.
NYCANDER,
GUNNAR. En sjukdom sob
bestraffas: En studie i homosexualitetens psykofysik.
Stockholm:
Wahlstrom & Widstrand, 1933. 159 pp. Although this book incorporated negative psychiatric attitudes, it did
advocate legal reform for homosexuals which was then
being debated in the Swedish parliament. For the discussions, see: Vilhelm
Lundstedt, Otukt mot naturen (Stockholm: Bonnier, 1933; 111 pp.). 917.
PALLESEN,
HENNING. De avvikande.
Stockholm: Bonnier, 1964. 180 pp. A relatively positive text for the period, with a number of case
histories. 918. PARIKAS, DODO. Frigorelse: Leva oppet som bog
eller lesbisk. Stockholm: Liber, 1981. 182 pp. Handbook on lesbian
life and liberation in Sweden today. 919. REGMAN, CARL (pseud, of Carl Rademyr). Konsten att alska annorlunda: Den homosexuella erotiken. Norrkoping: AKRO, 1966. 163 pp. Sociological study of life ways of
Swedish male homosexuals. 920. SIEVERS, KAI, and OLLI
STALSTROM (eds.). Rakkauden monet kasvot: homoseksuaalisesta rakkaudesta
ihmisoikeuksista ja vapautumisesta. Espoo: Weilin & Goos,
1984. 440 pp. Articles by various authors on the homosexual situation in Finland
today. 921. SILVERSTOLPE, FREDERIK. "Upon the diversity of
Love: Pontus Wikner (1837-1888)," in: Among Men, among Women. Amsterdam: University, 1983, pp. 268- 77, 577. On a closeted Swedish philosopher and his times. See also the
biography by Lechard Hoannesson, Pontus Wikner: Dag- bokerna beratter (Bodafors: Doxa, 1982; 139 pp.). 922. STOCKHOLM, NATIONALMUSEUM. Christina, Queen of Sweden—a Personality in
European Civilization. Stockholm: Nationalmuseum, 1966. 622 pp. 96 illus. Offers a many-sided picture of the famous bisexual queen (1626-89) and her times. See also Sven Stolpe, Christina Queen of Sweden (London, 1965), and Sophie Hochstetter, "Christine von Schweden in ihre Jugend," JfsZ, 9 (1908), 937. THORSELL,
ERIC. En
homosexuell arbetares memoar- er: järnbruksarbetaren Eric Thorsell berattar. Edited by Frederik SilverStolpe. Stockholm: Barrikaden, 1981. 213 pp.
Autobiography of a Swedish iron and steel worker (1899- 1980). N. NORTH AMERICA For the most part attitudes toward homosexuality in colonial America
were imported from England, though a good deal of laxity prevailed with
regard to the enforcement of legal sanctions. In the second half of the 19th
century, urban subcultures of male homosexuals came to the attention of the
authorities, leading to increased surveillance and eventual repression. In
North America homosexuality did not assume a character distinct from that of
Europe until after World War II, when adaptation to the consumer society, together
with the rise of the American homosexual rights movement (see III.U) made it
paradigmatic for advanced Western industrial countries. 938. ANDERSON, NELS. The Hobo: the Sociology of the
Homeless Man. Chicago: University of Chicago, 1961. 196 pp. First published in 1923; see pp. 144-49. See also his "The
Juvenile and the Tramp," Journal of Criminal Law, 14 (1923), 290-312. See also Roger A. Bruns, Knights of the Road: A Hobo
History. (New York: Methuen, 1980; 214 pp.). 939. BALL, JOHN. Trip to Homoland. Los Alamitos CA: Manifest Publications, 1968. 192
pp. Typical example of a pseudo-sociological exploitation literature that
flourished in the 1950s and 60s. Revealing for its incarnation of now
fortunately dated attitudes. 940. BERUBE, ALAN. "Marching to a Different
Drummer," Advocate (October 15, 1981), 20-24. Account of gay men and lesbians in the US armed forces in World War II
and, in many cases, their expulsion from the service with dishonorable
discharges (beginning in 1943). For general background, see: John Costello, Virtue under Fire: How World
War II Changed Our Social and Sexual Attitudes (Boston: Little, Brown, 1986; 309 pp.). 940. BOX-CAR BERTHA. Sister of the Road: the Autobiography of Box-car
Bertha as Told to Dr. Ben L. Reit- man. New York: Gold Label Books, 1937. 314 pp. In this
period document of hobo life, see pp. 62, 65-67, 69-70, 94, 149-50, 210, 228, 265, 283, 288. 942. BULLOUGH, VERN, and BONNIE BULLOUGH.
"Lesbianism in the 1920s and 1930s: A Newfound Study," Signs, 2:4 (1977), 895-904. Reviews contents of an unfinished manuscript describing an informal
group of 25 lesbians in a middle-sized American city. 943. BULLOUGH, VERN, and MARTHA VOGT. "Homosexuality
and Its Confusion with the "Secret Sin" in Pre- Freudian
America," Journal of the History of Medicine and Allied Sciences, 27:2 (April 1973), 143-55. The secret sin is masturbation. 944. BURNS, ROBERT J. "'Queer Doings': Attitudes
towards Homosexuality in 19th Century Canada," Body Politic, no. 29 (December 1976-January 1977), "Our
Image" Section, pp. 4-7. In 1838 George Markland, Inspector General of Upper Canada, was forced
to resign in the course of an inquiry into his fraternizing with young men. 945. CHAMBERS-SCHILLER, LEE VIRGINIA. Liberty a Better Husband:
Single Women in America: The Generation of 1780-1840. New Haven: Yale University Press, 1984. 285 pp. Based on writings of over 100 northeastern women. See pp. 199, 204. 946. DAVIS, MADELEINE, and ELIZABETH LAPOVSKY KENNEDY.
"Oral History and the Study of Sexuality in the Lesbian Community:
Buffalo, New York, 1940-1960," Feminist Studies, 12 (1986), 7-26. Shows that the butch-femme distinction was socially sanctioned in the
lesbian community during this period. 947. D'EMILIO, JOHN. "Gay Politics and Gay
Community: the San Francisco Experience," Socialist Review, 11:1 (January-February 1981), 77-104. Account of changes in San Francisco since World War II. The story is
continued, from a different perspective, by David Thomas, "The Gay Quest
for Equality in San Francisco," in: J. K. Bowles (ed.), The Egalitarian City. (New York: Praeger, 1986), pp. 27-41. See also
D'Emilio's book: Sexual Politics, Sexual Communities. (Chicago: University of Chicago Press, 1983). 948. DUBERMAN, MARTIN. About Time: Exploring the Gay Past. New York: Seahorse Press, 1986. 425 pp. Reprints documents, mainly
from the 19th and first half of the 20th century, some of them having first
appeared serially in the Hew York Native under the rubric "About Time."
Supplements the two volumes edited by Jonathan Katz, cited below. 949. DUBERMAN; MARTIN. "'1 Am Not Contented': Female
Masochism and Lesbianism in Early Twentieth-Century New England," Signs, 5 (1980), 825-41. Psychiatric records
from the second decade of the century. 950. DUBERMAN, MARTIN. "'Writhing Bedfellows': 1826—
Two Young Men from Antebellum South Carolina's Ruling Elite Share
'Extravagant Delight."' JH, 6 (Fall-Winter 1980-81), 85-102. Two titillating letters written by the 22-year-old Thomas Jefferson
Withers to James H. Hammond. 951. DUGGAN, LISA. "Lesbianism and American History:
a Brief Source Review," Frontiers, 4:3 (Fall 1979), 80- 85. Useful indications. 952. ESCOFFIER, JEFFREY. "Sexual Revolution and the
Politics of Gay Identity, Socialist Review, no. 81- 82
(July-October 1985), 119-53. Interprets the development of sexual politics in
the United States since World War II in terms of three factors: the impact
of Kinsey's Reports; "Keynsianism" (postwar prosperity); and shifts in the
sex/gender code. 953. FLYNT, JOSIAH (pseud, of J. F. Willard). Tramping with Tramps. New York: The Century Company, 1893. 398 pp. An early classic of hobo life. 954. FOSTER, MARION, and MURRAY KENT. A Not So Gay World:
Homosexuality in Canada. Toronto: McClellan and Stewart, 1972. 240 pp. Despite the title, a reasonably balanced picture for the period, based
on interviews with 50 persons. Contains a list of organizations. 955. GAY, PETER. The Tender Passion. New York: Oxford University Press, 1985. 490 pp.
(The Bourgeois Experience: Victoria to Freud, 2) Provides an idealized picture of 19th century marriage and love in
Europe and North America. On homosexuality, Gay presents some new material
from the diary of Yale student Albert Dodd in the 1830s. 956. GERASSI, JOHN. The Boys of Boise: Furor, Vice and Folly in an
American City. New York: Macmillan, 1966. 328 pp. Ten years after it occurred, an investigative reporter reconstructs
the "homosexual scandal" of the Idaho capital, and the wrecked
lives that resulted. 957. GERBER, HENRY ("Parisex"). "In
Defense of Homosexuality," The Modern Thinker (June 1932), 286-97. This article was written by Gerber, a pioneer in the campaign for
civil rights for homosexuals, in response to a hostile article by an Adlerian
psychiatrist (W. Beran Wolfe) in the April issue. It was reprinted in A Homosexual Emancipation
Miscellany, (New York: Arno Press, 1975). 958. GRUBE, JOHN. "Queens and Flaming Virgins:
Towards a Sense of Gay Community," Rites (Toronto), 2:9 (February 1986), 14-17. Presents results of an interview project with 30 older Toronto gay men
that reveal the mentality and lifestyles that prevailed before 1969. 959. HAMILTON, WALLACE. Christopher and Gay: a Partisan's View of the
Greenwich Village Homosexual Scene. New York: Saturday Review
Press, 1973. 215 pp. Personal narrative of the impact of Manhattan's street people on a
middle-aged writer. 960. HARTLAND, CLAUDE. The Story of a Life. San Francisco: Grey Fox Press, 1985. 99 pp. First published in 1901, this book is believed to be the first
autobiography written by an open homosexual in America. 961. INTERRANTE, JOSEPH. "From the Puritans to the
Present: 350 Years of Gay History in Boston," Alternate, 3:17 (January 1981), 23-29. An example of a genre of local history that is developing in many
places in North America. 962. JOHNSON, WILLIAM. "The Gay World." In:
William Edward Mann (ed.), The Underside of Toronto. Toronto: McClellan & Stewart, 1970, pp. 322-33. Reprinted from: W. E. Mann (ed.), Deviant Behaviour in Canada (Toronto: Social Science, 1968, pp. 519-28). Paints
an unattractive picture. 963. KATZ, JONATHAN. Gay American History: Lesbians and Gay Men in the
U.S.A.: a Documentary. New York: Thomas W. Crowell, 1976. 690 pp. Vast collection of 186 documents, many little known, covering the
period from 1528 to the early seventies, accompanied by an at times
controversial commentary. Unaccountably neglects religion; no continuous
narrative. Many references in the notes lead to other items. For a detailed
review of contents and underlying methodology, see Jim Levin, Reflections on the American
Homosexual Rights Movement. (New York: Gay Academic Union, 1983), pp. 57-67. 964. KATZ, JONATHAN (NED). Gay/Lesbian Almanac: a New Documentary. New York: Harper and Row, 1983. 769 pp. Sequel to the preceding. The documents are selected from the period
1607-1740 and 1880-1950. The gap apparently signals Katz' conversion to the
Social Construction approach, which holds that the "modern homosexual"
came into existence only in the closing decades of the 19th century. Like the
other book, this one is furnished with an abundance of references; as these
volumes are readily available most of them will not be repeated here. 965. KENNEDY, HUBERT C. "The Case for James Mills
Peirce," JH, 4 (Winter 1978), 179-84. Proposes that Peirce (1834-1906), a mathematician and Dean of
Harvard's graduate school, wrote a defense of homosexuality that was
published anonymously in 1897. 966. MITZEL, JOHN. The Boston Sex Scandal. Boston: Glad Day Books, 1980. 148 pp. Account of the persecution by Boston police and courts of a group of
homosexuals and pederasts, which was the prelude to the formation of NAMBLA. 967. OAKS, ROBERT F. "Things Fearful to Name: Sodomy
and Buggery in Seventeenth-Century New England," Journal of Social History, 12 (1978), 268-81. Punishments became less common as religious zeal waned in the latter
part of the century. See also his "Perceptions of Homosexuality by
Justices of the Peace in Colonial Virginia," JH, 5 (1979-80), 35-41. 968. RUGOFF, MILTON. Prudery and Passion: Sexuality
in Victorian America. New York: G. P. Putnam's Sons, 1971. 413 pp. Popular history beginning in colonial times and extending to the end
of the 19th century. See pp. 263-70 and 365-69. 969. "S., H." "Gay Old New York," Der Kreis, 21:6 (June 1953), 31-34. Unusual glimpse of Greenwich Village in the immediate postwar years. 970. SCHWARTZ, JUDITH. Radical Feminists of Heterodoxy:
Greenwich Village, 1912-1940. Lebanon, NH: New Victoria Publishers, 1982. 110 pp. Recreates a largely lesbian New York circle of women who were
outspoken and often militant. 971. SÉGUIN, ROBERT-LIONEL. La vie libertine en
IJouvelle-France au dix-septième siècle. Montreal: 'Leméac, 1972. 2 vols. See vol. 1, p. 343ff.: "La sodomie et l'inceste." 972. SMITH-ROSENBERG, CARROLL. Disorderly Conduct: Visions
of Gender in Victorian America, New York: Alfred A. Knopf, 1985. 357 pp. On women's changing roles in response to socio-economic thinking,
eventuating (at the turn of the century) in a kind of androgynous or
sexual-convergence ideal. Offers some contestable observations on male
homosexuality. 972. SPRAGUE, GREGORY. "Chicago Past: A
Rich Gay History," Advocate, no.
374 (August 18, 1983),
28f f. Gay life in the Second City during the 20th
century. 973. SYLVESTRE, PAUL-FRANÇOIS. Bougrerie en Nouvelle France.. Hull, Quebec: Editions Asticou, 1983. Various incidents in the French colony of Canada or New France;
bibliography, pp. 87-89. 974. TAYLOR, CLARK, "Folk Taxonomies and Justice in
Dade County," ARGOH Newsletter, 4:1 (1982), 9-16; 4:2 (1982), 17-28; 4: 4 (1983),
13-22. Account of a 1950s campaign against homosexuals in south Florida. O. LATIN AMERICA The existence of flourishing homosexual subcultures in the cities of
Latin America has long been known to travelers, but until recently it has not
been regarded as a suitable subject for scholarly investigation, except in
Brazil, which displays a different range of attitudes from those found in the
Hispanic Americas. The spread of gay liberation groups in Latin America and
the attention of sympathetic foreign scholars has
begun to alter and flesh out our picture of a major aspect of world
homosexuality. For the indigenous (Amerindian) cultures of Mexico, Central
and South America, see IV.F. 975. ARBOLEDA G. MANUEL. "Gay Life in Lima," Gay Sunshine, no. 42-43 (1980, 30. Knowledgeable report on cruising and social patterns in the Peruvian
capital, 976. ARCILA GONZALEZ, ANTONIO. Les lesbianas. Bogota: Ediciones Sexo y Cultura, 1969. 195 pp. Negative, popularized presentation. See also his: El tercer sexo (Medellin: Ediciones Sexo y Cultura, 1961; 186
pp.), 977. ARGUELLES, LOURDES, and B. RUBY RICH. "Homosexuality,
Homophobia, and Revolution: Notes toward an Understanding of the Cuban
Lesbian and Gay Male Experience: I," Signs, 9 (1984), 683-99. Reports interviews among exiles in the U.S., Puerto Rico, Mexico, and
Spain. While ostensibly arguing for a "socialist countercritique"
on behalf of homosexuality, this article (concluded in the following issue)
in fact tends to excuse the homophobic policies of the Castro regime. 978. BLAIR, DONIPHAN. "Gay Men in Nicaragua: Living
on Both Sides of the Revolution," Advocate, no. 422 (June 11, 1985), 48, 51. Interviews with Nicaraguans of several political persuasions who
reported that conditions for gay people were deteriorating under the
Sandinistas. 979. BOOGAARD, HENK VAN DEN. Homoseksualiteit: Ideologie en politiek, Cuba. Amsterdam: SUA, 1982. 120 pp. While granting that
homosexuals have a hard life in Cuba, the author, active in the Cuban-Dutch
friendship organization, nonetheless perceives hopeful signs. See also:
Boogaard and Kathelijne van Kämmen, "We Cannot Jump over Our Own Shadow:
On Cuban Actions against Homosexuals and Against Antihomosexuality," in: IGA Pink Book 1985. (Amsterdam: COC, 1985), pp. 29-41; and A. Young,
below. 980. CAMINHA, ADOLFO. Bom Crioulo (The Black Man and
the Cabin Boy). Translated from the Portuguese by E. A. Lacey. San Francisco: Gay
Sunshine Press, 1982. 141 pp. A novel first published by a Brazilian writer (1867-97) in 1895, this
book affords a rare glimpse of male homosexual life and feelings in Rio de
Janeiro. This English- language edition includes notes on words and places. 981. CAPISTRANO DE ABREU, J. (ed.). Primeira visitacao do Santo Officio as partes do
Brasil ..,: Confisso- es da Bahia, 1591-92, Rio de Janeiro: Briguiet,
1935. 195 pp. Edited version of the official records of the inquisitors' clerk in
the Bahia region at the end of the 16th century. There are many confessions
by sodomites and lesbians. See also: R. Garcia, Terceiro livro das
denunciacoes de Pernambuco (1593-95) (Sao Paulo, 1929). 982. CARRIER, JOSEPH M. "Mexican Male
Homosexuality," JH, 11 (1985), 75-85. Analysis of material collected by the author over a fifteen-year
period suggests that bisexual behavior is more easily accepted by Mexican
males and is more widely practiced than in the United States. See also his:
"Cultural Factors Affecting Urban Male Homosexual Behavior," Archives of Sexual Behavior, 5 (1976), 103-24; "Family Attitudes and
Mexican Male Homosexuality," Urban Life, 5 (1976), 359-75; and "Unusual Cross-Gender
Behavior in Northwestern Mexico," ARGOH Newsletter, 3:3 (1981), 2-5. 983. CIONE, OTTO MIGUEL. Luxuria: la vida nocturna de
Buenos Aires. Santiago de Chile: Editorial Ercilla, 1936. 328 pp. See "Natura morta" (pp, 132-38) on homosexuals and lesbians
in the night life of Buenos Aires in the 1930s. 984. DA GRIS, CARLOS A. El homosexual en la Argentina. Buenos Aires: Continental Service, 1965. 298 pp. Journalistic account
of Argentine homosexual life, mainly in Buenos Aires, before the repression
of the 1970s. Appendix on Japan. See now: Alejandro Jockl, Ahora, los gay (Buenos Aires: La Pluma, 1984). 985. DOURADO, LUIZ ANGELO. Homossexualismo (masculino e feminino) e
Delinquencia. Second ed. Rio de Janeiro: Zahar, 1967. 245 pp. Psychiatrically oriented study based in
part on projective tests administered to Brazilian homosexual subjects. 986. ESPINOSA MOLINA, CLAUDIO. . Criaines sexuales en Chile. Santiago: Neupert, 1965. 182 pp. Journalist's report on sex crimes in Chile; see esp. "El rey de
los homosexuales" (pp. 93-101). 987.
FICHTE, HUBERT.
Xango: Die afroamerikanischen Religionen: Bahia, Haiti, Trinidad.
Frankfurt am Main: S. Fischer Verlag, 1976. 351 pp. Account by a gifted German gay writer (1935-1986) of his experiences with Afro-American religious cults. There is also a sequel: Petersilie: Die afroamerikanischen Religionen Santo Domingo, Venezuela, Hiama, Grenada (Frankfurt am Main: S. Fischer Verlag, 1980; 401 pp.). 988. FREYRE, GILBERTO. The Masters and the Slaves. Translated by Samuel Putnam. New York: Knopf, 1956. 537 pp. In this
noted study of colonial and imperial Brazil, see pp. 33, 117, 119, 121, 123, 149. 989. FRY, PETER. "Male Homosexuality and Spirit
Possession in Brazil," JH, 11:3-4 (1985), 137-53. On the relationship between male homosexual and the Afro- Brazilian
possession cults in Belem do Para. Analyzes two categories, bicha and man, with discussions of advantages acquired by
those who assume the former status. See also Peter Fry (ed.), Para Ingles Ver: Identidade e
Politica na Cultura Brasileira (Rio de Janeiro: Zahar,_1982);
and Fry and E. McRae, 0 que e Homossexualidade (Sao Paulo: Editorial Brasiliense, 1983). 990. JAIME, JORGE. Homossexualismo Masculino. Rio de Janeiro: The author, 1947. 170 pp. Published version of a thesis for
the Faculdade Nacional de Direito. Following a brief medico-legal account,
Jaime reprints letters and a long diary by Brazilian homosexuals. 991. KUTSCHE, PAUL. "Situational Homosexuality in
Costa Rica," ARGOH Newsletter, 4:4 (1983), 8-13. Discusses lack of
gay identity in three men interviewed. 992. LACEY, E. A. "Latin
America," Gay Sunshine, no. 40 (1979), 22-31. Overstates the absolute character of the activo/passivo contrast in the self-consciousness and organization
of Latin American homosexuals, but does recognize differences caused by
economic disparities, 993. LANDES, RUTH. "A Cult Matriarchate and Male
Homosexuality," Journal of Abnormal and Social Psychology, 35 (1940), 386-97. Early description of Afro-Brazilian cults with prominent male
transvestism. 994. LANE, ERSKINE. Game Texts: A Guatemalan Journal. San Francisco: Gay Sunshine Press, 1978. 156 pp. Poetic travel
reminiscences, including sexual encounters with adolescent activos. See also his: "Guatemalan Diary," Gay Sunshine, no. 26-27 (Winter 1975-76), 13-15. 995. LENNOX, DAVID R. "Gay Life in Macho
Mexico," Christopher Street (July 1977), 6-18; and (August 1977), 34-42. Points up contrasts with customs and habits in the U.S. 996. LEYLAND, WINSTON (ed.). My Deep Dark Pain Is Love: A Collection of Latin
American Fiction. Translated from the Spanish and Portuguese by E. A. Lacey. San
Francisco: Gay Sunshine Press, 1983. 383 pp. Translations of fiction from a number of Latin American countries
offering insights into attitudes and the texture of homosexual life there.
There is a useful Introduction and notes by the translator. See also the
earlier anthology edited by Leyland: Now the Volcano: An Anthology of Latin American Gay
Literature (San Francisco: Gay Sunshine Press, 1979; 287 pp.). 997. LIMA, DELCIO MONTEIRO DE. Comportamento Sexual do Brasileiro. Third ed. Rio de Janeiro: F. Alves, 1978. 220 pp. Semipopular report
on sexual behavior in contemporary Brazil; see pp. 135-73. 998. MCCASKELL, TIM. "Sex and Sandinismo: Gay Life
in the New Nicaragua," Body Politic, no. 73 (May 1981), 19-21. Nicaraguan gay life remains profoundly affected by class differences.
The revolution has no concept of sexual politics. See also his: "Gay
Life in Colombia: Hiding, Hustling, and Coming Together,"
ibid., no. 68 (December 1980-January 1981), 25-27. 999. MOTT, LUIZ R. B. "Slavery and
Homosexuality," Quarterly (San Francisco), no. 24 (Winter 1985), 10-25. Evidence mainly from Brazil (16th-18th century), with some reference
to the African background. 1000. MURRAY, STEPHEN 0. Latino Homosexuality. San Francisco: Social Networks, 1980. 14 pp. Booklet with brief comments
on various locales and discussion of social-structure obstacles to gay
institutional elaborations among Latinos. 1001. PARKER, RICHARD. "Masculinity, Femininity, and
Homosexuality: On the Anthropological Interpretation of Sexual Meanings in
Brazil," JH, 11:3-4 (1985), 155-63. Reviewing recent research, contends that male homosexuality in Brazil
can only be fully understood when situated in the wider context of sexual
meanings. 1002. PAZ, OCTAVIO. The Labyrinth of Solitude: Life and Thought in
Mexico. New York: Grove, 1950. 212 pp. In this classic study of the Mexican national character (including
sexual aspects), note esp. p. 39. 1003. REICHEL-DOLMATOFF, GERARDO, and ALICIA REICHEL-
DOLMATOFF. The People of Aritama: The Cultural Personality of a Colombia Mestizo
Valley. Chicago: Chicago University Press, 1961. 483 pp. In this study of a
mestizo community, which was Indian only a hundred years ago, see pp. 49-50,
105-06. 1004. SALAS, LUIS. Social Control and Deviance in
Cuba. New York:
Praeger, 1979. 399 pp. Perceives a shift in Castro's Cuba from an "extreme position...
during the initial phase" to "a more moderate reaction... in more
recent times." See pp. 150-77. 1005. SANZIO, ALAIN et al. "Cuba: un goulag
tropical," Masques, no. 22 (Summer 1984), 87-101. Reflections on the repression of homosexuals in Cuba and the tendency
to conceal this abroad promoted by the film "Improper Conduct."
Includes an interview with the filmmaker Nestor Almendros and the texts of
the repressive legislation. 1006. TAYLOR, CLARK. "Mexican Male Homosexual Interaction
in Public Contexts," JH, 11:3-4 (1985), 117-36. Using game theory, shows the modus operandi
and locales for homosexual encounters in Mexico, which are quite different
from U.S. patterns. Based on the author's Ph.D. dissertation (anthropology,
University of California, Berkeley, 1978). See also his: "Ethnographic
Material on Mexican Male Homosexual Transvestites," ARGOH Newsletter, 3:1 (1981), 3-6; and "Mexican Gay Life in
Historical Perspective," Gay Sunshine, no. 26-27 (Winter 1975), 1-4. 1007. TREVISAN, JOAO. Perverts in Paradise. London: Gay Men's Press, 1986. 208 pp. Pot-pourri of vibrant Brazilian gay life and culture from the 16th
century to the present, including voodoo priests, prize-winning dramatists,
papal inquisitors, and Guevarist revolutionaries. 1008. VALDIOSERA, RAMON. El lesbianismo en Mexico. Second ed. Mexico City: Editores Asociados M., 1980. 157 pp. Semipopular; includes case histories, 1009. WHITAM, FREDERICK L. "Entendidos de Sao Paulo,"
Gay
Sunshine, 38 (1979), 16-17. Profiles a "gay life" consisting mostly of friendship
cliques with a few commercial establishments. 1010. YOUNG, ALLEN. "Gay Gringo in Brazil," in:
Len Richmond and Gary Noguera (eds.). The Gay Liberation Book. San Francisco: Ramparts Press, 1973), pp. 60-67. Social and political reflections based on two year's residence. See
also: Dennis Altman, "Down Rio Way," Christopher Street, 4:8 (April 1980), 22-27. 1011. YOUNG, ALLEN. Gays under the Cuban Revolution. San Francisco: Grey Fox Press, 1981. 112 pp. In this incisive book a scholar and former New
Left journalist and scholar documents the homophobia of Cuba's revolutionary
regime, and the sufferings that it has caused. He also criticizes the left,
including the gay left in the United States, for its crime of silence. 1012. ZAPATA, LUIS. Adonis Garcia: A Picaresque Novel. Translated by E. A. Lacey. San Francisco: Gay Sunshine Press, 1981. 208 pp. Although cast in the form of a novel, this work
gives— through the eyes of its hustler-narrator--vivid glimpses of homosexual
life in Mexico City today. First published in Spanish as: Las aventuras, desventuras, y
suenos de Adonis Garcia, el vampiro de la Colonia Roma (Mexico City: Editorial Grijalbo, 1979). Although some homosexuals in Western countries tend to idealize
homosexual life in Islam, it is clear that that civilization harbored a
number of ambiguities toward it. Social conditions often fostered same-sex
relations, at least for men, but these factors were counterbalanced by
traditional and religious currents of disapproval. Male- male love,
especially in its pederastic form, was often celebrated in writings in
Arabic, Persian, Turkish, and Urdu. The abund ance of literary evidence on
the subject makes this field a fruitful one for historical research. 1000. ABBOTT, NABIA. Two Queens of Baghdad: Mother
and Wife of Harun al-Rashid. Chicago: University of Chicago Press, 1946. 277 pp. Panorama of aristocratic life under the Abbasid caliphate. See pp.
210-12 for the homosexuality of Muhammad al-Amin, his infatuation with his
eunuchs (whom he dressed as girls), and his favorite poet, the pederast Abu
Nuwas. 1001. ARNOLD, THOMAS WALKER, SIR. Painting in Islam. New York: Dover, 1965. 159 pp. In this now somewhat dated work (first published in 1928), see pp.
89-90, 146. 1002. BABINGER, FRANZ CARL HEINRICH. Mehmed the Conquerer and His
Time« Translated
from the German by Ralph Manheim. Princeton: Princeton University Press,
1978. 549 pp. On the pederastic Turkish sultan Mehmed II (1430-81); see pp. 93, 96,
212, 334, 427, 450, 475. 1003.
BABUR
(ZAHIR UD-DIN MUHAMMAD). The Babur-nama in English. Translated by Annette Susannah Beveridge. London:
Luzac, 1922. 2 vols. Autobiographical work of the founder of the Mughal dynasty of India
(1483-1530), whose career began in Central Asia. 1004. BADAYUNI, ' ABDUL QAIR. Muntakhabu-'t-tawarikh. Translated by George Ranking, W. H. Lowe, and Sir Wolseley Haig.
Patna: Academica Asiatica, 1973. 3 vols. For pederastic poets and rulers of Mughal India, see vol. 1, 611-12;
vol. 2, 13-17; vol. 3, 243, 256-57, 265, 331, 333, 339. 1005. BARBER, NOEL. The Sultans, New York: Simon and Schuster, 1973. 304 pp. In this history of Turkey, see pp. 35-36, 45, 83, 102-03. 1006. BLOUNT, HENRY. A Voyage into the Levant, London: Andrew Crooke, 1636. 126 pp. For Turks see pp. 14, 79, 112. 1007. The Book of the Thousand Nights and a Night: the
Arabian Nights Entertainments. Translated by (Sir) Richard F. Burton. Benares:
Kamashastra Society, 1885-88. 16 vols. Apart from the notes to individual tales, see vol. 10, pp. 63-260, for
the Terminal Essay, which contains important historical and comparative
material on homosexuality in Islam. 1008. BOSWORTH, C. E. et al. "Liwat" [Sodomy],
in: Encyclopedia of Islam. New ed. Leiden: E. J. Brill, vol. 5 (1986), 776-79. Covers the ambivalent attitudes toward
homosexuality in Islamic society from the time of the Prophet to the end of
the Middle Ages. 1009. BOUHDIBA, ABDELWAHAB. La sexualité en Islam. Paris: Presses Universitaires de France, 1975. 320 pp. Study of Islamic sexual attitudes based on Arabic sources. For a
somewhat scanty and negative presentation of homosexuality, see pp. 44-45 on liwat (male homosexuality) and musah'aqa (lesbianism), as well as pp. 203-07 on the hammam (baths). For
different view of the whole subject, see Vern Bullough, Sexual Variance in Society and
History (New York: Wiley, 1976), 205-244. 1010. BRUNEL, RENÉ. Le monachisme errant dans l'Islam: Sidi Heddi et les Heddava. Paris: Librairie Larose, 1955. 471 pp. (Publications de l'Institut des Hautes Etudes Marocaines, 47) Pederasty in a heterodox
Moroccan Islamic order whose members could not marry. 1011. CHÉNIER, LOUIS DE. The Present State of the Empire of Morocco. Anonymous translation. London: G. and J. Robinson,
1788. 2 vols, in 1. In this translation of Recherches historiques sur les Maures» vol. 3, see vol. 1, p. 73; vol. 2, pp. 250, 287, pertaining to Sultan Abdallah V (ruled 1729-57). 1012. CHRISTOWE, STOYAN. The Lion of Yannina. New York: Modem Age Books, 1941. 424 pp. On the Albanian homosexual leader Ali Pasha (ca. 1744- 1822); see pp. 77, 141, 158, 191, 203, 276, 294, 327, 342-43. 1013. CLINE, WALTER. Notes on the People of Siwah and El Garah in the Libyan Desert. Menasha, WI: George Banta Publishing Co., 1936. 64 pp. (General series on Anthropology,
4) Asserts that in this oasis culture, "all men and boys practiced
sodomy," speaking freely of their experiences. Confirmed by Robin
Maugham, Journey to Siwa (New York: Harcourt, Brace, 1950; 120 pp.) 1014. CONTINENTE FERRER, J. M. "Aproximacion
al estudio del tema del amor en la poesia hispano-arabe en los siglos XII y XIII," Awraq (Instituto Hispano-arabe de Cultura), 1 (1978), 12-28. Surveys the characteristic themes of pédérastie love in the Moorish poetry of Spain. Compare Norman
Roth, "'Deal Gently with the Young Man': Love of Boys in Medieval Hebrew
Poetry of Spain," Speculum, 57 (1982), 20-51. 1015. COON, CARLETON. Tribes of the Rif. Cambridge, MA: Peabody Museum, 1931. 417 pp. For boy slave markets in Morocco see pp. 110-11. 1016. DANIEL, MARC. "La civilisation arabe et l'amour masculine," Arcadie, no. 253 (January 1975), 8-19; no. 254 (February
1975), 83-93; no 255 (March 1975), 142-50; no. 257 (May 1975), 269-74; and
no. 258 (June 1975), 326-330. A major study, with numerous references, emphasizing poetry. An
English translation by Winston Leyland appeared in Gay Sunshine, no. 32 (Spring 1977), 1-11, 27. 1017. DANIEL, MARC. "L'Ayatolla et les pelotons de l'exécution," Arcadie, no. 305 (1979), 388-89. On the pédérastie poetry of Saadi and Omar Khayyam. 1018. DAVEY, RICHARD. The Sultan and His Subjects. New ed. London: Chatto and Windus, 1907. 507 pp. Contains
some material on harem catamites in Turkey. 1019. DE MARTINO, GIANNI, and ARNO
SCHMITT. Kleine Schriften zu zwischenmännlicher
Sexualität und Erotik in der muslimischen Gesellschaft.
Berlin: Schmitt, 1985. 58 pp. Essays on several aspects of homosexual life in Islam past and
present, including a critique of John Boswell's treatment of Moorish Spain.
English summary by Schmitt, the principal author, "Some Reflections on
Male-Male Sexuality in Muslim Society" (pp. 54-58). 1020. DORDEVIC (GJORGJEVIC), BARTOLOMEJ. De Turcarum moribus epitome. Lyon: Jean de Tournes, 1555. 184 pp. Account of the writer's capture and enslavement by the Turks, with
observations on pédérastie practices. There is a contemporary English version (London, 1560). 1021. DRAKE, JONATHAN (pseud, of Parker Rossman). "'Le Vice' in Turkey," International Journal of Greek
Love, 1:2 (1966),
13-27. Well-documented study of pederasty in the Turkish domains (14th-20th
cent.), including the slave trade. 1022. DUCHESNE, EDOUARD ADOLPHE. De la prostitution dans la ville d'Alger depuis la conquête [1830]. Paris: Bailliere, 1853. 231 pp. Offers some information on hustling by Algerian youths. 1023. EDWARDES, ALLEN (pseud, of D. A. Kinsley). The Jewel in the Lotus: A
Historical Survey of the Sexual Culture of the East. New York: Julian, 1959. 293 pp. Diverting anecdotal material, chiefly on the Arab world and India.
Derived mainly from 19th-century sources, this book often relays their
stereotypes uncritically, and must be used with caution. See esp. pp. 199-263. 1024. FABRI, FÉLIX. Le voyage en Egypte, 1483. Translated into French by Jacques Masson. Cairo: Institut Français d'Archéologie Orientale du Caire, 1975. 3 vols. (1066 pp.) A westerner's observations on the last days of Mamluk rule; see vol. 2, pp. 704-07. 1025. FLAUBERT, GUSTAVE. The Letters of Gustave Flaubert, 1830-1857. Translated by Francis Steeg- muller. Cambridge, MA:
Harvard University Press, 1979. 267 pp. See pp. Ill and 129 for baths in Cairo and male brothels in
Constantinople. For the original texts see: Correspondence, I 1830-1851. Edited by Jean Bruneau (Paris: Gallimard, 1973; 1173 pp.), pp. 567-74, 638, 669. 1026. GIFFEN, LOIS ANITA. Theory of Profane Love among the Arabs: The
Development of the Genre. New York: New York University Press, 1971. 167 pp. While somewhat reticent
on the subject of homosexuality, this scholarly study focusing on twenty
essays and treatises throws light on the concepts of 'ishq (passionate love) and hawa (desire, lust). 1027. GLAZER, MARK. "On Verbal Duelling among Turkish
Boys," Journal of American Folklore, 89 (1976), 88-91. Challenges the interpretation of homosexual themes offered by A.
Dundes et al. ("The Strategy of Turkish Boys' Duelling
Rhymes" in: J. Gumperz and D. Hynes, eds., Directions in
Sociolinguistics, New York, 1972, pp. 130-60). 1028. GLUBB, JOHN B. Soldiers of Fortune: The Story of the Mamlukes. New York: Stein and Day, 1973. 480 pp. Court and military history of the dynasty that ruled Egypt in
pre-Ottoman times, detailing a number of homosexual intrigues. 1029. GODARD, ERNEST. Egypte et Palestine, observations médicales et scientifiques. Paris: V. Masson, 1867. 458 pp. In this travel
account, see pp. 104-06 and 111-12. 1030. GROTZFELD,
HEINZ. Das Bad im arabischen Mittelalter: eine
kulturgeschichtliche Studie. Wiesbaden: Harrassowitz, 1970.
159 pp. On homosexual activity in the medieval Islamic sauna (hammam), see pp. 89-91. For a somewhat negative analysis of
the modern hammam, see Abdelwahab Bouhdiba, "Le hammam: contribution à une psychanalyse de l'Islam," Revue Tunisienne des Sciences Sociales, 1 (September 1964), 7-14. 1031. HANSEN, WALDEMAR. The Peacock Throne. New York: Holt, Rinehart and Winston, 1972. 560 pp. For the career of
Sarmad, a Persian Jewish homosexual convert to Islam, see Chapter 24 (pp.
396-412). 1032. HELLER, BERNHARD, and GEORGES VAJDA. "Lut" [Lot], in: Encyclopedia of Islam. New ed. Leiden: E. J. Brill, vol. 5 (1986), pp.
832-833. On the Koranic and later Islamic versions of the Biblical legend of
Lot in Sodom. It is remarkable that in Islam the Sodomites have become the ahl Lut (people of
Lot), and so luti has acquired the sexual meaning of sodomite. 1033. HERBERT, THOMAS, SIR. A Relation of Some Yeares
Travaile into Afrique, Asia, Indies. New York: Da Capo Press, 1971. 225 pp. Facsimile of the 1634 edition. For Persia in the early 17th century,
see pp. 63-64, 75, 87, 98-99. 1034. HERVÉ, GUY, and THIERRY KERREST. Les enfants de Fez. Paris: Editions Libres Hallier, 1979. 202 pp. Evidence taken from tape recordings of the life of young people in the
ancient Moroccan city, including hustling. 1035. HEYD, URIEL. Studies in Old Ottoman Criminal Law. Edited by V. L. Menage. Oxford: Clarendon Press, 1973. 340 pp. For
legal provisions affecting pederasty, see pp. 30, 100-03, 136, 261, 265, 278. 1036. HOUEL, CHRISTIAN. Maroc: marriage, adultère, prostitution: anthologie. Paris: H.
Daragon, 1912. 202 pp. "If there are many prostitutes in Morocco, there are even more
sodomites." See esp. pp. 139-42. See also P. Rem- linger, "La
prostitution en Maroc," Annales d'Hygiène Publique (February
1913). 1037. IBN AL-NADIM, MUHAMMAD. The Fihrist: a Tenth-cen- tury Survey of Muslim
Culture. Translated by Bayard Dodge. New York: Columbia University Press,
1970. 2 vols. In this encyclopedic work, see vol. 1, pp. 247-48, 333-36, 392, 503;
vol. 2, pp. 737, 927. 1038. IBN DAWUD (MUHAMMAD IBN DAWUD AL-ISFAHANI). Kitab al-zahra (The Book of
the Flower). Arabic text ed. by Richard Nykl. Chicago: Oriental Institute, 1932.
406 pp. This 9th-century compilation includes love poetry to boys by several
authors. 1039.
IBN
HAZM, ALI IBN AHMAD. A Book Containing the Risala
Known as the Dove's Neckring, about Love and Lovers. Translated by Alois Nykl. Paris: Geuth- ner, 1931.
244 pp. An erotic classic compiled by an 11th-century scholar residing in
Cordoba. 1040.
IBN
KHALDUN, ABD AL-RAHMAN. The Muqaddimah: an Introduction
to History. Translated by Franz Rosenthal. New York: Pantheon, 1958. 3 vols. In this work by the celebrated historical theorist, see the poems in
vol. 3, pp. 444-78. 1041. IBN KHALLIKAN. Wafayat al-a'yan va авЪа. abna' al-zaman. Translated by Baron McGucklin de Slane. Ed.
by S. Mopinul Haq. Karachi: Pakistan Historical Society, 1964-76. This classic biographical dictionary (of which this is the only
unexpurgated version) contains numerous references (e.g.,on
Yahya ibn Aktham, vol. 6, pp. 230-34). 1042. IBN SASRA, MUHAMMAD. A Chronicle of Damascus, 1389-1397. Translated by William M. Brinner. Berkeley: University of California,
1963. 2 vols. In this Syrian source, see vol. 1, pp. 189, 217. 1043. IBN TAGHRIBIRDI, ABU AL-MAHASIN YUSUF. History of Egypt, 1382-1469. Translated by William Popper. Berkeley: University
of California Press, 1954. 7 vols. For Mamluk sultans,
see vol. 1, p. 43. 1044. INGRAMS, WILLIAM HAROLD. Abu Nuvas in Life and Legend. Port Louis,
Mauritius: La Typographie Moderne, 1933. 95 pp. Stories and poems by and about the famous Arab homosexual poet
(762-ca. 815). 1045. JAHIZ, AL-, ' AMR IBN BAHR. The Life and Works of Jahiz. Translated (from the French of Charles Pellat) by D. M. Hawke.
Berkeley: University of California Press, 1969. 286 pp. Regrettably this
selection from the 9th-century writer's work omits his debate on the merits
of women and boys (Kitab Mufakharat al jawari wa-al-ghilman. Ed. by Charles Pellat. Beirut: Dar al Makshuf, 1958; 94 pp.). See, however, pp. 27,
269-71. 1046. JAMES, BEN. The Secret Kingdom: an Afghan Journey. New York: Reynal and Hitchcock, 1934. 295 pp. For King Amanullah
(1892-1960), see pp. 194-97, 215. 1047. KARSCH-HAACK, FERDINAND. "Die Rolle der Homoerotik im Arabertum," JfsZ, 23 (1923), pp. 100-170. Survey of then-current historical knowledge on homosexuality among
the Arabs. 1048. KOCHER, ADOLPHE. De la criminalité chez les Arabes. Paris: Baillière, 1884. 242 pp. See pp. 169-77 for male and female homosexuality among the Algerians. 1062. The Koran Interpreted. A translation by Arthur J. Arberry. London: George Allen & Unwin, 1955. 2 vols. (350, 358
pp.) Includes pejorative comment on the ahl Lut or
"people of Lot" (i.e.,Sodomites), which
have been taken by some ex- egetes (as in fundamentalist Iran) as authorizing
the death penalty for male homosexuals. See viii, 78-84 ("you approach
men lustfully instead of women"; vol. 1, p. 181); xi, 74-84 ("we
turned it [Sodom] uppermost nethermost"; 1, pp. 248-49); xv, 57-77 (1, pp.
284-85); xxvi, 160-74 (2, p. 72); and xxvii, 54-59 (2, p. 81). 1063. LINDHOLM, CHARLES. Generosity and Jealousy: The
Swat Pukhtun of Northern Pakistan. New York: Columbia University Press, 1982. 321 pp. For changing patterns in the role of the bedagh (catamite), see esp. pp. 224-27. 1064. MASSIGNON, LOUIS. The Passion of al-Hallaj: Mystic and Martyr. Translated by Herbert Mason. Princeton: Princeton
University Press, 1982. 4 vols. Encyclopedic work on the poet who was killed in 922, with considerable
indirect interest. 1065. MAXWELL, GAVIN. Lords of the Atlas. London: Century, 1983. 312 pp. Travel book first published in 1966. Deals with the French satrap El
Glaoui in southern Morocco. 1066. NÄCKE, PAUL. "Die Homosexualität im Orient," Archiv für Kriminal-Anthropologie und Kriminalistik, 16 (1904), 353-55. Followed by "Die Homosexualität in Konstantinopel," ibid., 26 (1906), 106-08.. Both deal with
homosexual behavior in Istanbul. 1067. NAFZAWI (NEFZAOUI), SHAYKH. Le Jardin parfumé du Cheikh Nefzaoui. Paris: I. Liseux, 1886. 300 pp. This text of the 15th-century Tunisian erotological treatise seemingly
contains the whole of Chapter 26 on pederasty, which is usually truncated in
the English renderings. 1068. OLEGNA, R. "Il catechismo turco e 1'omosessual- ità," Rassegna di studi sessuali, 2 (1922), 354-56. On a Turkish Islamic catechism which does not consider homosexuality as such as a sin. Brief further discussion in ibid. , 3 (1923), 115-18. 1069. PARET, RUDI. Früharabische Liebesgeschichten: ein Beitrag zur vergleichenden Literaturgeschichte. Bern: Haupt, 1927. 80 pp. Noted Arabist studies the motifs of early
Arabic love narratives. 1070. PÉRÈS, HENRI. La poésie andalouse en arabe classique au XIème siècle, Paris: Maisonneuve, 1953. 541 pp. Reviews principal themes of Moorish love poetry, with some attention to pédérastie elements. 1071. PROTHRO, EDWIN TERRY. "Sexual Behavior of
University Students in the Arab Near East," Journal of Abnormal and Social
Psychology, 49 (1954), 63-64. Survey research on attitudes and behavior. 1072. REED, DAVID. "The Persian Boy Today: Sexual
Politics in Teheran," Christopher Street (August 1978), 15-17. Personal experiences from pre-Khomeini Iran revealing strong
gender-role polarization among those engaging in homosexual acts. For the
survival of the millennial Iranian pédérastie tradition, even after the executions of 1981-82, see Hélène Kafi, "Téhéran: L'amour à jet de pierres," Gai Pied, no. 190 (October 19-25 1955), 44-47. 1073. RITTER, HELLMUT. Das Meer der Seele: Gott, Welt und Mensch in den Geschichten Fariduddin 'Attars, Leiden: E. J. Brill, 1955. 777 pp. Fundamental study of Sufi mystical imagery as
refracted in the work of 'Attar, with considerable attention to infatuation
with beloved youths, in particular the love of Sultan Mahmud of Ghazna for
his slave boy Ayaz. 1074. ROSENTHAL, FRANZ. "Ar-Razi on the Hidden
Illness," Bulletin of the History of Medicine, 52 (1978), 45-60. On a treatise by Abu Bahr ar-Razi (Rhazes; 865-925) on ubnah (passive male homosexuality). If the disease is
prolonged it is incurable, but if it is ego-alien and the patient is ashamed
of his urges, it can be treated by a regime of physical and medicinal
therapy. 1075. RYCAUT, PAUL. The History of the Present State of the Ottoman
Empire. London: Cleve, 1701. A French traveler's classic account of the sultan's rule, with some
discussion of catamites, 1076. SAYYID-MARSOT, AL-, AFAF LUTFI (ed.). Society and the Sexes in
Medieval Islam, Malibu, CA: Undena Publications, 1979. 149 pp. Seven papers. Note esp. James A. Bellamy, "Sex and Society in
Islamic Popular Literature," pp. 23-42; cf. also pp. 47-48, 58-60, 111,,
130-33, 139. 1077. SCHIMMEL, ANNEMARIE. Mystical Dimensions of Islam. Chapel Hill: University of North Carolina Press, 1975. 506 pp. See
pp. 287-343 for the Sufi poetical tradtion as a mingling of love for beloved
youths with love of God. 1078. SHALAQ, ALI. La poésie erotique d'Abu Nuwas. Paris: 1952. Thesis, published in Beirut in Arabic in 1954, on the works of the
noted homosexual poet (762-ca. 815). 1079. SONNINI DE MANONCOUR, CHARLES-NICOLAS-SIGISBERT. Travels in Upper and Lower
Egypt. London:
John Stockdale, 1799. 2 vols. "The passion contrary to nature ... is generally
diffused over Egypt; the rich and the poor are equally
infected with it; contrary to the
effect it produces in colder countries, that of being exclusive, it is there
associated with the love of women." (vol.1, pp. 251-52). 1080. SOUTHGATE, MINO0 S. "Men, Women and Boys: Love
and Sex in the Works of Sa'di," Iranian Studies, 17 (1984), 413-52. Characteristic themes in the work of the great Persian poet (d. 1291). 1081.
STERN,
BERNHARD. Medizin, Aberglaube und Geschlechtsleben
in der Türkei. Berlin: H. Barsdorf, 1903. 2 vols. In this work on medical and sexual folklore in Turkey, Chapter 42
discusses homosexuality. 1082. SURIEU, ROBERT. Sarv-e Naz: an Essay on Love and the Representation
of Erotic Themes in Ancient Iran. Translated by James Hogarth. New York: Nagel, 1967.
185 pp. Scants homosexual love, but useful for comparative material. 1083. TALBOT, SERGE. "Les tabous sexuels de l'Islam,"
Arcadie, no. 118 (October 1963), 451-59. The existence of sexual taboos shows that Islam is not as "sex
positive" as some have claimed. 1084. THESIGER, WILFRED. The Marsh Arabs. New York: Dutton, 1964. 242 pp. See pp. 123-24 for male prostitution and transvestite dancers in
southern Iraq, where peer homosexuality is also practiced discreetly by young
men before marriage. 1085. WAGNER,
EWALD. Abu Nuwas: eine Studie zur arabischen
Literatur der frühen Abbasidenzeit.
Wiesbaden: F. Steiner, 1965. 532 pp. Massive study by the leading contemporary authority on the classical
homosexual poet (762-ca. 815). 1086. WALTHER, WIEBKE. Women of Islam. Translated by C. S. U. Salt. Montclair, NJ: Abner
Schram, 1981. 204 pp. A lavishly illustrated popular work that covers the subject from the
beginning of Islam to the present day. See pp. 117-18. 1087. WELCH, STUART CARY. Wonders of the Age: Master
pieces of Early Safavid Painting, 1501-1576. Cambridge, MA: Fogg Art Museum, 1979. 223 pp. For miniatures of beloved youths, see pp. 180-81, 186-89, 192-97,
200-01, 212-18. 1088. WESTERMARCK, EDWARD. Ritual and Belief in Morocco. London: Macmillan, 1926. 2 vols. See vol. 1 of this classic anthropological study for the benefits of sexual intercourse with a saintly person, as well as negative attitudes to boy prostitutes and passive adult homosexuals. See also his "The Moorish Conception of Holiness," Finska Vetenskaps-Societetens Forhandling- ar, 58 [Afd. B, no. 1] (1915-16), p. 85ff. 1089. WESTPHALL-HELLBUSCH, SIGRID. "Transvestiten bei arabischen Stämmen," Sociologus, n. s. 6:2 (1956), 126-37, On South Arabian singers and dancers who are homosexual transvestites. 1090. WIKAN, UNNI. "Man Becomes Woman: Transsexualism
in Oman as a Key to Gender Roles," Man, N.S. 12 (1977), 304-19. Interprets anthropological field work among the xanith, or male prostitutes in the town of Sohar (northeast
Arabian peninsula), who are in some respects classed socially as women. Note
also the occasionally caustic ensuing discussion, and replies by Wikan: ibid., 13 (1978), 133-34, 322- 23, 473-75; 15 (1980),
541-42. See also Wikan's book: Behind the Veil in Arabia: Women in Oman (Baltimore: Johns Hopkins University Press, 1982;
314 pp.). For further details on the muxannath and the mutaraggala (the woman dressed in man's clothing), see Carlo de
Landberg, Etudes sur les dialectes de l'Arabie méridionale. II. Datinah (Leiden: E.J. Brill, 1905), pp. 937-40. 1091. WORMHOUDT, ARTHUR. "Classic Arabie Poetry," Gay Books Bulletin, 4 (Fall
1980), 23-25. Discusses verse by
Abu Tammam, al-Tanisi, and others. Q. CHINA, KOREA, AND CENTRAL ASIA China can boast the longest continuous record of homosexual behavior
of any civilization. Until the Ch'ing Dynasty (1644-1912), male homosexuality
seems to have been discussed with considerable frankness. This rich vein of
material—manifested in novels, poetry, and works of art, as well as
documentary sources—is only now beginning to be exploited. Chinese Criminal Law. London: Luzac, 1899. 677 PP • See "Unnatural Offenses" (pp. 368-69) on the Ch'ing period.
When treated as fornication, 100 strokes of bamboo are imposed; when violence
is involved, or a boy under 12 years, it is regarded as rape. See also M. J.
Meijer, below.
AOKI MASARU. Chung-kuo chin-shih-hsi ch'u-shih [The History of Modern Chinese Drama]. Hong Kong: Chung-hua shu-ch'u,
1975. 2 vols. For homosexual practices among Ch'ing dynasty actors, see pp.
446-53.
BAO RUO-WANG
(formerly Jean Pasqualini), with RUDOLPH CHELMINSKI. Prisoner of Mao. New York: Penguin, 1976. 326 pp. Personal account of thought-reform in prison camps of the People's
Republic, including summary execution of homosexual man (pp. 188-190).
BARROW, JOHN, SIR. Travels in China. London: T. Cadell and W. Davies, 1804. 636 pp. Includes references to male prostitution.
BEURDELEY, MICHEL et
al. Chinese Erotic Art. Rutland, VT: Tuttle, 1969. 215 pp. Offers some discussion of male homosexuality under the rubric
"cut sleeves," pp. 161-69. Illustrated.
BODDE, DERK
(translator). Law in Imperial China: Exemplified by 190 Ch'ing Dynasty Cases. Translated from the Hsing-an
hui-lan. Annotated by Derk Bodde and Clarence Morris. Cambridge, MA: Harvard
University Press, 1967. 615 pp. See pp. 383, 409, and 428 for cases of 1809 and 1819.
BRACKMAN, ARNOLD C. The Last Emperor. New York: Scribner's Sons, 1975. 360 pp. Frank account of the life of China's last Ch'ing (Manchu) ruler, the
homosexual "Henry" P'u Yi. See esp. pp. 121- 22. Reissued as The Prisoner of Peking (New York: Van Nostrand Reinhold, 1980. 360 pp.).
CHANG CHING-SHENG. Sex Histories: China's First
Modern Treatise on Sex Education. Translated by Howard S. Levy. Yokohama: 1967. 117 pp. Written in the 1920s (original title: Hsing shih). See pp. 3, 54-56, 69, 90, 93.
CHOU, ERIC. The Dragon and the Phoenix. New York: Bantam Books, 1972. 290 pp. History of Chinese
sexuality, based on sources in Chinese, but not intended for scholars.
Offers some material on Manchu emperors. See pp.14-15, 90-93, 112- 16.
CLARK, CHARLES
ALLEN. Religions of Old Korea. Seoul: Christian Literature Society of Korea, 1961. 295 pp. See pp.
182-86 for cross-dressing shamans. COHEN, JEROME ALAN, et al. (eds.). Essays on China's Legal Tradition. Princeton: Princeton University Press, 1980. 438 pp. See pp. 178-80.
EBERHARD, WOLFRAM.
China und seine westlichen Nachbarn: Beiträge zur mittelalterlichen und
neueren Geschichte Zentralasiens. Darmstadt: Wissenschaftliche
Buchgesellschaft, 1978. 343 pp. A noted sinologist's collected essays on China's relations with
Central Asian peoples. See pp. 111-17, 186-246, 291- 98.
FRIEND, ROBERT.
"Homosexuality in China," Eastern Horizon (July 1978), 36-37. Offers a rather optimistic view of attitudes in the People's Republic,
which is said to practice tolerance-- though it is held that homosexuality is
more prevalent in disintegrating societies.
GULIK, ROBERT HANS
VAN. Sexual Life
in Ancient China: A Preliminary Survey of Chinese Sex and Society from ca.
1500 В. C. till 1644 A. D. Leiden: E. J. Brill, 1961. 392 pp. Copiously documented study of evidence until the end
of the Ming dynasty; scants homophile aspects, but useful for comparative
purposes. There is also a French translation, La vie sexuelle dans la Chine
ancienne (Paris: Gal- limard, 1971; 466 pp.), with some additional notes by
Jacques Reclus. Gulik, a major scholar known to the general public by his
Judge Dee mystery novels, died in 1967.
HENTHORN, WILLIAM
E. A History
of Korea. New York: Free Press, 1971. 256 pp. See pp. 44-45 for the hwarang, an elite
military corps selected partly for their physical charms (Silla period).
HONG KONG, LAW
REFORM COMMISSION. Report on Laws Governing Homosexual Conduct. Hong Kong: Government Printer, 1983. 374 pp. Wide-ranging collection of material, including history, laws in Asia,
oral and written testimony, newspaper articles, and recommendations for
reform. (Available from Alternative Distribution, PO Box 29627, Philadelphia,
PA 19144.) KARSCH-HAACK, FERDINAND. Das gleichgeschlechtliche Leben der Kulturvölker: I: Das gleichgeschlecht- liehe Leben der Ostasiaten:
Chinesen, Japaner, Kofeer. Munich: Seitz und
Schauer, 1906. 134 pp. (Forschungen über gleichgeschlechtliche Liebe) A noteworthy attempt to
sum up what was known at the time of writing of homosexual life among the
Chinese, Koreans, and Japanese; with many bibliographical references to older
works. Rare. (The planned series on homosexuality in the high cultures was
not continued.) For a more recent attempt at synthesis for China, see Vern
Bullough, Sexual Variance in Society and History (New York: Wylie, 1976), 281-314.
KAYE, BARRINGTON. Upper Nankin Street, Singapore: A Sociological
Study of Chinese Households. Singapore: University of Malaya Press, 1960. 439 pp. See pp. 232-33 in
relation to lesbianism.
KIM, YOUNG JA.
"The Korean Namsadang," Drama Review, 15 (1981), 9-16. On an indigenous
touring troupe of the early 20th century.
KLEINMAN, ARTHUR,
and TSUNG-YI LIN (eds.). Normal and Abnormal Behaviour in Chinese Culture. Dordrecht: Reidel, 1981. 436 pp. The essay by James McGough contains
some material on same-sex unions.
LANGLOIS, JOHN D.
(ed.). China under Mongol Rule. Princeton: Princeton University Press, 1981. 487 pp. See esp. Morris Rossabi "The Muslims in the Early Yuan
Dynasty," (pp.257-95); also pp. 212-54, 304, 318-19, 434-65.
LAUFER, BERTHOLD.
"Homosexuelle Bilder aus China," Anthropophyteia, 6 (1909),
162-66. Brief commentary on
Chinese homosexual art.
LETHBRIDGE, H. L.
"The Quare Fellow: Homosexuality and the Law in Hong Kong," Hong Kong Law Journal, 6 (1976), 292-326. In keeping with the present illegality, homosexuals are generally
discreet in Hong Kong. There are three patterns: impersonal sex; domestic
(dyadic); and male prostitution. See also his: "Pandora's Box: The
Inspector MacLennan Enigma," ibid., 12 (1982),
4ff.
LEVY, HOWARD
SEYMOUR. Chinese Footbinding: The History of a Curious Erotic Custom. New York: W. Rawls, 1966. 352 pp. See pp. 125,
131-32, 194-95, 318.
LEVY, HOWARD
SEYMOUR. Chinese Sex Jokes in Traditional Times. Taipei: Orient Cultural Service, 1974. 361 pp. Includes a collection of jokes from classical texts which deal with
homosexual themes (pp. 252-65).
LIEH-MAK, F., K. M. 0' HOY, and S. L. LUK. "Lesbianism in the Chinese of Hong
Kong," Archives of Sexual Behavior, 12 (1983), 21-30. Following a short review of the background of lesbianism in China,
the authors present findings derived from 15 Chinese lesbian subjects.
LIU
MAO TSAI. Die chinesischen Nachrichten zur
Geschichte der Ost-Tiirken (T'u-kue). Wiesbaden: Otto Harrassowitz, 1958. 2 vols. (831
pp.) Analyzes Chinese reports of the Eastern Turks of Central Asia.
LI YU. Wu sheng hsi [Dramas without Sound]. Ed. by Helmut Martin.
Taipei: Chin-hsueh shu-chu, 1969. The story "Nan-Meng-mu fang-he san-ch'ian" ("A Male
Mother Named Meng Is Forced to Change Residence Three Times," pp.
5381-5452) describes the tribulations of a man and his boy lover. The work
begins with a short apologia of homosexuality.
MACKERRAS, COLIN P. The Rise of the Peking Opera, 1770-1870: Social
Aspects of the Theatre in Manchu China. Oxford: Clarendon Press, 1972.
316 pp. Throughout this work the author describes homosexual relations between
famous male actors and their literati patrons.
MACLENNAN, JOHN
RICHARD. "Scandal in Hong Kong: Hugh Johnson," Medico-legal Journal, 51:2 (1983), 70-84. One of a flurry of articles occasioned by the suicide of a homosexual
policeman. See also Linda Jawin, "Homosexuality, Controversy in Hong
Kong," Asiaweek (March 8, 1982), 20-21; and Mary Lee, "Homosexuality and the
Police in Hong Kong," Far Eastern Economic Review, 109 (July 18, 1980), 18-20; 112 (June 26, 1981),
18-19; and 114 (October 9, 1981), 46-47.
MAO, NATHAN KWOK-KUEN. Li Yu's Twelve Towers, Retold by Nathan Mao. Hong Kong: Chinese University of Hong Kong, 1975.
137 pp. Pages 52-62 contain a translation of "Ts'ui-ya lou" ("The
Elegant Eunuch"), a 17th-century short story of homosexual desire which
ends in castration and retribution.
MATIGNON,
JEAN-JACQUES. "Deux mots sur la pédérastie en Chine," Archives d'anthropologie criminelle, 14 (1899), 38-53. Affirms that homosexuality is widely tolerated and practiced in
(imperial) China, but there is a reluctance to discuss the matter openly. See
also his book: La Chine hermétique: superstition, crime et misère. New ed. Paris: Librairie Orientaliste Paul Geuthner, 1936; 397 pp.; "Deux
mots pp. 263-81, and "Les
eunuques," 201-222).
MEIJER, M. J.
"Homosexual Offenses in Ch'ing Law," T'oung Pao, 71 (1985), 109-33. Study of the Та Ch'ing Lii Li (1679ff.), apparently the first Chinese law code to introduce
provisions against homosexual relations. The cases examined, mainly from the
19th century, show that it was applied mainly when there was violence or some
other complication. Distinctions of age and class were also important.
Homosexuality between consenting adults seems to have engaged the attention
of the authorities very rarely.
MICHAEL, JAY
(pseud.). "Gays in China," Advocate, no. 423 (June 25, 1985), 28-29, 32-33. Claims that gay street life flourishes in the People's Republic today.
See also" John Cabral, "Gay Life in Mainland China," Christopher Street, no. 62 (March 1982), 27-34.
MITAMURA TAISUKE. Chinese Eunuchs. Translated by Charles A. Pomeroy. Rutland, VT:
Tuttle, 1970. 176 pp. Of considerable
cognate interest.
PAI HSIEN-YUNG. Wandering in the Garden,
Waking from a Dream: Tales of Taipei Characters. Blooming- ton: Indiana University Press, 1982. 199
pp. The story "A Sky Full of Bright, Twinkling Stars" (pp.
138-44) , presents a view of homosexual life in
modern Taiwan by one of China's leading authors.
PAN KWONG-TAN. Psychology of Sex. Shanghai: The Commercial Press, 1947. See "Cases of Homosexuality in the Chinese Documents and Literature"
(pp. 380-408), discussing evidence from the Shang dynasty onwards.
RIASANOVSKY, V. A. Customary Law of the Mongol
Tribes (Mongols, Buriats, Kalmucks). Harbin: Artistic Printing House, 1929. 306 pp. A fragment of the great Yassa, a law code introduced by Genghis Khan,
provides death for sodomy. The early 19th- century Laws of Mongol and Kalmuk
peoples provided a fine of one animal and fifty strokes with a whip for
pederasty—less than for rape.
RUTT, RICHARD.
"The Flower Boys of Silla (Hwa- rang): Notes on the Sources," Transactions of the Korean
Branch of the Royal Asiatic Society, 38 (1961), 1-66. Historical evolution of Korean female impersonators/boy dancers;
pederasty during the Yi dynasty.
SAMSHASHA (Xiaomingxiang). Zhongguo tongxingai shilu [History of Homosexuality in China]. Hong Kong:
Pink Triangle Press, 1985. 378 pp. Illustrated overview in Chinese by a gay scholar, concentrating on
historical and literary figures. Detailed table of contents in English.
SANKAR, ANDREA.
"Sisters and Brothers, Lovers and Enemies: Marriage Resistance in
Southern Kwang- tung," JH, 11:3-4 (1985), 69-82. Examines the structure and content of relationships among members of a
sisterhood in Hong Kong. This institution has roots in the Pearl River Delta
surrounding Canton from ca. 1865 onwards.
SCHLEGEL,
GUSTAAF. "lets over de prostitutie in China,"
Verhandelingen van het Bataviaasch genoot- schap van kunsten en vetenschap
[Batavia: Lange], 32:3 (1866). 25 pp. See pp. 21-25 for notes on male prostitutes and the relevant
terminology in China. Apparently Schlegel's His- toire de la prostitution
en Chine (Rouen: J. Lemonnyer, 1880; 47 pp.) is an enlarged version of this
monograph.
SPENCE, JONATHAN D. Emperor of China: Self-portrait
of K'ang-hsi. New York: Vintage Books, 1975. 218 pp. Account of the Chinese contemporary of Louis XIV (reigned 1661-1722)
in his own words. See pp. xxi, 125-27, and 129 for his disapproval of the
apparent homosexual behavior of his son Yin-jeng.
SPENCE, JONATHAN D. The Memory Palace of Matteo
Ricci. New York:
Viking Press, 1984. 350 pp. Reconstruction from diaries and letters of the background of the
Jesuit savant's life (d. 1610) in China, with considerable material
contrasting Catholic and Asian attitudes toward homosexual behavior.
TREVOR-ROPER, HUGH. Hermit of Peking: The Hidden
Life of Sir Edmund Backhouse. New York: Penguin Books, 1978. 391 pp. Account of the shady life of an English baronet and sinologist
who lived most of his life (1873-1944) in Peking, based on his unpublished
memoirs, which—despite their unreliability—offer fascinating glimpses of late
Ch'ing China. Trevor-Roper has been criticized for his facile assumption of
the "decadent" character of the homosexual Backhouse,
Tuan hsiu pien [Record of the Cut Sleeve], in: Hsiang yen tsung shu, chi 9, chuan 2. Shanghai: Kuo-hsueh fu-lun-she,
1909-11. A 17th-century anonymous compilation of biographies and short accounts
of famous homosexuals.
WANG CH'UNG. Lun-heng: Philosophical and
Miscellaneous Essays. Second ed. New York: Paragon Book Gallery, 1962. 577 and 536 pp. Reprint of 1907-11 edition. See vol. 1, p. 309; vol. 2, p. 34.
WANG SHU-NU. Chung-kuo ch'ang-chi shih [The History of Chinese Prostitution]. Shanghai:
Sheng- huo shu-tien, 1935. 358 pp. Pp. 46-49 discuss ancient Chinese
homosexuals. Pp. 62-66 treat homosexuals of the Wei
and Chin dynasties. Pp. 225- 30 deal with Ming dynasty homosexuals. Pp.
317-28 discuss Ch'ing dynasty homosexuality. Consists mainly of short
quotations from classical Chinese sources, with minimal commentary and
interpretation.
WEI-HSING-SHIH-KUAN-CH'I-CHU.
Chung-kuo
t'ung- hsing-luan-mi-shih [The Secret History of Chinese Homosexual
Practices]. Hong Kong: Chai-you chu-pan-she, 1964. 2 vols. This compilation of classical sources by an anonymous association of
scholars is the only extensive modern treatment of Chinese homosexuality.
WU
SHAN SHENG. Erotologie de la Chine.
Paris: Jean-Jacques
Pauvert, 1963. For male homoerotic art and homosexuality among palace eunuchs, see
pp. 89, 157-58. A broad range of homosexual behavior has been presented in scholarly
and popular works in Japanese, of which only some aspects are reflected in
works in European languages. Historically homosexual life in Japan has been
organized around a number of foci, some of them essentially indigenous (the
Samurai tradition) and others linked to developments abroad (Buddhist
monasticism, the theatre, the Western influenced bar culture of today). 1142. AKIYAMA
MASAMI. Homo tekkunikku. Tokyo: 1968. 238 pp. Illustrated popular
work on "homosexual technique."
BOWERS, FAUBION. Japanese Theatre. New York: Hermitage House, 1952. 294 pp. For the female
impersonation tradition, see pp. 45-49.
BOXER, CHARLES
RALPH. The Christian Century in Japan, 1549-1650. Berkeley: University of California Press, 1967. 535 pp. For sexual aspects of the culture clash, see pp. 35, 66, 69, 459.
BURUMA, IAN. Behind the Mask: On Sexual Demons, Sacred Mothers,
Transvestites, Gangsters, Drifters and Other Japanese Cultural Heroes. New York: Pantheon, 1984. 242
pp. British observer's account of some striking aspects of Japanese
popular culture today, a book which has been criticized by some as purveying
stereotypes. See esp. pp. 15 and 127-31.
CARON, FRANÇOIS. A True Description of the Mighty Kingdoms of Japan and Siarn. Edited by C. R. Boxer. London: Argonaut Press,
1935. 197 pp. In this edition of the 1663 translation of a Dutch work, see pp. 23-24
and 43. (The material on Siam is by Joost Schouten.)
CHILDS, MARGARET.
"Chigo monogatari: Love Stories or Buddhist sermons?" Monumenta Nipponica, 35 (1980), 127-51. Concerning stories about monks' loves for boys aged 7 to 14, chiefly
from the Muromachi period. Includes translated specimen (ca. 1372).
CHILDS, MARGARET.
"Japan's Homosexual Heritage," Gai Saber, 1 (1977), 41-45. Presents some historical and literary evidence for nanshoku (male
homosexuality).
DANIEL, MARC
(pseud.). "Les
amants du soleil levant," Arcadie, no. 66 (June 1959), 346-51. Manly love among the samurai compared with ancient Greek paiderasteia. Note the
earlier exploration of the parallel by Edward Carpenter, Intermediate Types among
Primitive Folk (London: Allen and Unwin, 1919), pp. 137- 60.
Danshokumonoshu. 37
(1978), 192 pp. This volume is devoted to anecdotes, facetiae, and satire concerning
homosexuality in Japanese literature.
DE VOS, GEORGE
et al. Socialization for Achievement: Essays on the
Cultural Psychology of the Japanese. Berkeley: University of
California Press, 1973. 597 pp. See pp. 237 and 269-70.
DOI TAKEO. The Anatomy of Dependence. Translated by John Bester. Tokyo: Kodansha, 1973.
170 pp. On the national character of the Japanese, emphasizing amae
(dependence), and arguing that the desire for passive love among socially
intimate males is "the essence of homosexual feelings." (p. 118). 1138. DOMOTO MASAKI. Danshoku engeki shi. New ed. Tokyo: Bara Jujisha, 1976. 293 pp. Homosexuality in Japanese
literature and drama. 1139. DOWNSBOROUGH, NIGEL. Paedomorphs Is The Story of a Young Boy in Рге-War Japan. Taipei: Kinyado Publishing
Co., 1979. Purports to be the first part of the autobiography of the late Karl
Kliest, covering his teenage loves in Japan, edited by his attorney. 1140. FITZPATRICK, WILLIAM. Tokyo after Dark. New York: MacFadden, 1955. 128 pp. Popular paperback with two chapters on male prostitution. 1141. HACHIMONJIYA JISHO. The Actors' Analects (Yakusha rongo). Edited and translated by Charles J. Dunn and Bunzo
Torigoe. New York: Columbia University Press, 1969. 306 pp. In this
18th-century compilation, see pp. 5, 9, 41-43, 51, 58-60, 92-93, 172, 194. 1142. HIRANO TOSHIZO. Doseiai no sekai. Tokyo: 1968. 254 pp. Popular work on "the world of homosexuality." 1143. HIRATSUKA RYOSEN. Nihon ni okeru nanshoku no kenkyu. Tokyo: Ningen no Kagakusha Shuppan Jigyabu, 1983.
"A Study of Male Homosexuality in Japan." 1144. IHARA SAIKAKU. Tales of the Samurai. Tokyo: Tuttle, 1972. 135 pp. This prolific author of the Tokugawa era wrote several collections of
stories on the homosexual loves of the Samurai. This one dates from 1682. See
also the collection translated by Caryl Ann Callahan: Tales of Samurai Honor (Tokyo: Monumenta Nipponica, 1982; 156 pp.). 1145. INAGAKI TARAHO. Shonen'ai no bigaku. Tokyo: 1968. 245 pp. "Aesthetics of Boy Love." 1146. IWATA JUN'ICHI. Honcho nanshoku ко. Tokyo: 1973. 340 pp. Historical survey of pederasty and homosexuality in Japan. 1147. IWATA JUN'ICHI. Nanshoku bunken shoshi. Tokyo: 1973. 371 pp. Bibliography of homosexuality in Japan. 1148. IWAYA SUYEWO, "Nan sho k': Die Päderastie in Japan," JfsZ, 4 (1902), 263-71. Some aspects of pederasty in newly modernizing Japan, with a look
backward at the heritage of the Tokugawa era. Perhaps the first article on
the subject in a Western language. 1149. KEENE, DONALD. World without Walls: Japanese Literature of the
Pre-Modern Era, 1600-1867. New York: Holt, Rinehart and Winston, 1976. 605 pp. In this standard
English-language work, see Chapter 8 on Ihara Saikaku (1642-1693), pp.
167-215 (esp. p. 188ff.). 1150. KIRKUP, JAMES. These Horned Islands. New York: Macmillan, 1962. 447 pp. Autobiographical response of a homosexual British poet to residence in
Japan. 1151. KRAUSS, FRIEDRICH SALOMO. Das Geschlechtsleben in Glauben, Sitte, Brauch und Gewohnheit der Japaner. Second ed. Leipzig: Ethnologischer Verlag,
1911. 314 pp. This general monograph on Japanese sexual life contains a contribution
by "Doriphorus" on the prevalence of pederasty in modern Japan. 1152. KYOOKA SUMIKO. Onna to onna. Tokyo: 1968. 174 pp. Popular work on lesbianism ("Woman to Woman"); illustrated . 1153. LEVY, HOWARD S. Sex, Love and the Japanese. Washington, DC: Warm-Soft Village Press, 1971. 91 leaves. See esp. leaf 10. 1154. LOHR, STEVE. "The New Face of Kabuki," New York Times Magazine (May 30, 1982), 13-17. Gay Japanese are among the followers of
Kabuki, with its traditional art of male impersonation. 1155. LOUIS, FREDERIC (pseud.). Daily Life in Japan at the
Time of the Samurai, 1185-1603. Translated by Eileen M. Lowe. New York: Praeger, 1972.
256 pp. See pp. 37-38. 1156. MONTANUS, ARNOLDUS. Atlas Iappanensis. Translated by John Ogilby. London: T. Johnson, 1670.
488 pp. Translation of a 1669 Dutch work by an official of the Netherlands East
India Company, with observations on homosexual conduct in Japan. See also
Bernardus Varenius, Descriptio regni Iaponiae (Amsterdam: Elzevier, 1649; 2 vols.). 1157. NARABAYASHI YASUSHI. Rezubian rabu. Tokyo: 1967. 235 pp. Popular work on
lesbianism ("Lesbian Love"). 1158. OKIHERA SHUNJI. Onnagata. Tokyo: Tamasaburo Bando, 1983. Lavish color photo
book on the traditional female imper- sonators of the
Kabuki theater, 1159. PINKERTON, JOHN. A General Collection of the Best and Most
Interesting Voyages and Travels in All Parts of the World. London: Longman, 1811. For homosexuality among Japanese priests and nobility in the early
17th century, see vol. 7, pp. 629-31. 1160. SCOTT-STOKES, HENRY. The Life and Death of Yukio Mishima. New York: Farrar, Straus and Giroux, 1974. 344 pp. Sympathetic
account of the life of this major bisexual author (1925-70), whose novels Confessions of a Mask and Forbidden Colors provide a remarkable conspectus of gay life in
Japan. See also John Nathan, Mishima: A Biography (Boston: Little, Brown, 1974; 300 pp.); and
Marguerite Yourcenar, Mishima, ou la vision du vide (Paris: Galli- mard, 1980; 124 pp.). 1161. TYTHERIDGE, A. C. "Beobachtungen über Homosexualität in Japan," JfsZ, 22 (1922), 23-36. Observations on
homosexuality in Japan. Apart from East Asia and Islamic West Asia, homosexual behavior has
been relatively little studied in Asia. On the whole Hinduism has not favored
it, with the significant exception of the hijras. Thailand, the Philippines, and Indonesia seem to be
significant areas. With rapid modernization, much evidence seems to be
disappearing. 1162. AMIR, MOHAMMED. "II Travestismo in Batavia," Archivio di antropologia
criminale, 54 (1934), 896-906. Cross-dressing in
Java under Dutch rule. 1163. BAIÂO, ANTONIO. A Inquisicào de Goa: Correspondèn- cia dos Inquisidores da India. Coimbra: Imprensa da Universidade, 1930. Reports from the Portuguese colony of Goa in India, and instructions
to it, some concerning the repression of sodomy, 1164. BERCKMANN, JEAN-NOËL. La sexualité à travers le monde: étude sur la
péninsule Indochinoise. Paris: Le Trèfle d'0r, 1966. 170 pp. For maie prostitution in Vietnam, see pp. 78-80, 85. 1165. BLATT, EMILY. "Wadam and Bisu: Male Transsexualism and Homosexuality in Indonesia," Gay Community News (Australia), 4:6 (July 1982), 26-27. Account of a visit to a vadam show in Java, with some examination of the
background as known from the 17th century onwards. 1166. CARSTAIRS, G. MORRIS. The Twice-born: A Study of a
Community of High Caste Hindus. Bloomington: Indiana University Press, 1967. 343
pp. Includes information on the hijara (hijra), cross-gender behaving males of northern India.
Carstairs' interpretations were harshly reviewed by Morris E. Opler, American Anthropologist, 61 (1957), 140-41; and ibid. 62 (1960), 505-12. See
also: A. M. Shah, "A Note on the Hijadas of Gujarat,"
ibid., 63 (1961), 1325-30; and S. Nanda, below. 1167. CIPRIANI, LIDIO. The Andaman Islanders. Translated by D. Taylor Cox. New York: Praeger,
1966. 159 pp. See pp. 22-23. 1168. COLE, FAYE-COOPER. The Tinguian: Social, Religious, and Economic Life
of a Philippine Tribe. Chicago: Field Museum, 1922. 493 pp. See pp. 360-01 and plate 36. 1169. DE LEEUW, HENDRIK. Crossroads of the Java Sea. New York: Cape and Smith, 1931. 350 pp. In this work on the customs of
the Dutch East Indies, now Indonesia, see pp. 47, 104-05, 231, and 288-90. 1170. DEVI, SHAKUNTALA. The World of Homosexuals. New Delhi: Vikas Publishing House, 1977. 160 pp. Positive account, partly
general and partly explicitly concerned with India. 1171. EDWARDES. ALLEN (pseud, of D. A. Kingsley). The Rape of India: A Biography
of Robert Clive and a Sexual Conquest of Hindustan. New York: Julian Press, 1966. 350 pp. Racy account of the sexual exploits of the soldier (1725- 1774) who
founded the British empire in India, based on manuscript and other materials.
See also the anonymous contemporary Intrigues of a Nabob ••• or, Bengali the Fittest
Soil for the Growth of Lust (1773). 1172. FRANCO, GUIDO ("G. F."). Desert patrol (une aventure sous les tropiques). Paris: Editions de la Jungle, 1980. 185 pp. Text and photos presenting an
unflattering image of Caucasian boy-lover tourists in Southeast Asia. Similar
is his: Prières pour des paradis meilleurs (Paris: Editions
de la Jungle, 1984). 1173. FREEMAN, JAMES M. Untouchable: An Indian Life History. Stanford: Stanford University Press, 1979. 421 pp. Offers material on
the hijras (pp. 16, 24-25, 61, 250, 256, 294-315). 1173. Gays in Indonesia: Selected Articles from Print
Media. Fitzroy,
Australia: Sybylla Press, 1984. 61 pp. Articles chosen and translated by the Gays in Indonesia Translation
Group, PO Box 108, North Carlton, Victoria 3054, Australia. 1174. GEERTZ, CLIFFORD. The Religion of Java. Glencoe, IL: Free Press, 1960. 392 pp. Pages 289-300 deal with various forms of popular entertainment—dramatic
presentations and parties—in which male homosexual and transvestite dancers
play a considerable role. The dances and street shows contain explicitly
homosexual elements, and the town of Ponorogo, where the art of the wandering
troupes is said to be at its strongest, is noted for male homosexuality. 1175. HAMILTON, ALEXANDER. A New Account of the East Indies ... from the Year
1688 to 1723. Edinburgh: J. Mosman, 1727. 2 vols. Provides several references, including one to Sultan Mah- mud I of
Johore (ruled 1683-99). 1176. HARRIS, MAX. "A Hell for Homosexuals," Spectator, 239 (November 12, 1977), 16-17. Despite evidence to the contrary, claims that homosexuality is
unknown on the island of Bali because of an absence of dependency needs. 1177. HART, DONN V. "Homosexuality and Transvestism
in the Philippines," Behavioral Science Notes, 3 (1968), 211-48. Reports on the complex social organization of a town on Cebu which
focuses around a drag "beauty contest." The tolerance of
homosexuality in Filipino society may reflect the view that it is natural and
inborn. 1178. HEIDE,
AB VAN DE. De zaak tegen Mr. L. A. Ries,
thesaurier-generaal bij het Departement van Financien: eenige beschouwingen
en kritische opmerkingen. The Hague: Leopold, 1936. 74 pp. Commentary on a morals scandal that rocked the Dutch administration in the East Indies (now Indonesia). See also B. T. de Jongh, Wat de Indische zedenmisdrijven ons te zeggen hebben (Amsterdam: De Ploeger, 1939; 24 pp.). 1179. HEIMANN, ELLIOTT, and CAO VAN LE. "Transvestism
in Vietnam," Archives of Sexual Behavior, 4 (1975), 89-96. Confusingly conflates urban homosexual prostitutes and village
cross-gender shamans. 1180. HURGRONJE, CHRISTIAAN SNOUCK. The Achehnese. Translated by A. W. S. O'Sullivan. Leiden: Brill, 1906. 2 vols. In this monograph on a Sumatran tribe, see vol. 1, p. 361. 1181. JACOBS,
JULIUS. Het familie- en kampongleven op
groot-Atjeh, eene bijdrage tot de ethnographie van noord-Sumatra.
Leiden: Brill, 1894. 2 vols. In this study of family and village life in great Atjeh (north
Sumatra), see vol. 1, p. 80ff. 1182. JUNGHUHN, FRANZ. Die Battalander auf Sumatra. Berlin: Reimer, 1847. 2 vols. On the Bataks of Sumatra; see vol. 1, p.
157. 1183. KIEFER, THOMAS M. "A Note on Cross-dressing
Identification among Musicians," Ethnomusicology, 12 (1968), 107-08. "Professional musician" (mangangalang) is a niche for sensitive men (bantut) in the Islamic Taosug warrior culture of the Sulu
archipelago. See also Kiefer, The Tausug (New York: Holt, 1972; 145 pp.—p. 36). 1184. KOCH, OSKAR. Der indianischer Eros. Berlin: Con- tinent-Verlag, 1925. 122 pp. In this popular work on love in India, see pp. 61-65. 1185.
KROEF,
JUSTUS M. VAN DER. "Transvestism and the Religious Hermaphrodites in
Indonesia," University of Manila Journal of East Asiatic Studies, 3 (1954), 257-65. "Transvestism is .. the consequence of the religious adjustment of two
cultures, in one of which the women traditionally had a pre-eminent place as
the chief socio-economic unit ..., while in the other the male had or
attained a similar place." 1186. LEVIN, THOMAS HERBST. Wild Races of South-Eastern
India. London: W.
H. Allen, 1870. 352 pp. Contains some information on transvestites among tribal peoples. 1187. MARION, A.-P. "L'homme nu," Arcadie, no. 69 (September 1959), 478-87. Report on travel to Laos and Vietnam. See also his: "Voyage ä
Kandy (Ceylon)," Arcadie, no. 58 (October 1958), 14-20. 1188. MARK, MARY ELLEN. Falkland Road: Prostitutes of Bombay. New York: Knopf, 1981. 17 pp.; 66 plates. Photodocumentary; includes
some transvestite males (hijra). 1189. MARNAIS, PHILIP. Saigon after Dark. New York: MacFadden-Bartell, 1967. 127 pp. Contains a section on gay life in the South Vietnamese capital during
the civil war and American intervention. 1190. MARSDEN, WILLIAM. History of Sumatra. London: J. McCreery, 1811. See p. 261ff. 1191. MEYER, JOHANN JACOB. Sexual Life in Ancient India: A Study of the
Comparative History of Indian Culture. New York: Dutton, 1930. 2
vols. Focuses on an analysis of the sexual practices in the Ramayana and
Mahabharata, and in consequence is largely tangential to our subject. 1192. NANDA, SERENA. "The Hijras of India: Cultural
and Individual Dimensions I of an Institutionalized Third Gender Role," JH, 11:3-4 (1985), 35-54. The most informative field study of this group (whose members include
Hindus and Muslims), showing that they do engage in homosexual relations.
See also her: "The Hijras of India: A Preliminary Report," Medicine and Law, 3 (1984), 59-75. 1193. NERY, LAMBERTO C. "The Covert Subculture of
Male Homosexual Prostitutes in Metro Manila," Philippine Journal of
Psychology, 12 (1979), 27-32. Conclusions derived from interviewing six 18-22-year-old call boys at
a brothel/gay bar. Although money is important, they made statements
indicating enjoyment of their work. 1194. NIMMO, H. ARLO. "The Relativity of Sexual Deviance:
A Sulu Example," Papers in Anthropology, 19 (1980), 91-97. Contrasts acceptance of prostitution and homosexuality in two cultures
in the Sulu archipelago. One, Islamic, shows elaborated homosexuality. 1195. OBEYESEKERE, GANANATH. The Cult of the Goddess
Pattini. Chicago: University of Chicago Press, 1984. 629 pp. Male homosexuality is common in Sri Lanka before marriage, though a
taboo on anality restricts contact to interfemor- al. The book contains
material on transvestism among priests of the goddess, whose cult, the author
holds, was introduced in late antiquity by Syrian merchants. 1196. 0'FLAHERTY, WENDY DONIGER. Women, Androgynes and Other
Mythical Beasts. Chicago: Chicago University Press, 1980. 382 pp. This book, by a noted contemporary Indologist, discusses sexual
metaphors and animal imagery in over 3000 years of Indian mythological
development. 1197. SALETORE, RAJARAN NARAYAN. Sex Life under Indian Rulers. Delhi: Hind, 1974. 251 pp. Popular account including information on homosexuality under Moghul
and Hindu rule. 1198. SCHNEEBAUM, TOBIAS. Wild Man. New York: Viking Press, 1979. 243 pp. New York artist's low-key memoir of travels, chiefly in India,
Indonesia, and New Guinea, where he sought to avail himself of male sexual
encounters. 1199. STAVORINUS, JOHAN SPLINTER. Voyages to the East- Indies. Translated by S. H. Wilocke.
London: G. G. Robinson, 1798. See pp. 455-57 for male and female homosexuality and bestiality in
Moghul Bengal. 1200. SUTLIVE, VINSON, H., JR. "The Iban Manang: An
Alternate Route to Normality," in: G. N. Appell, Studies in Borneo Societies. DeKalb: Northern Illinois University Press, 1976,
64-71. (Center for Southeast Asian Studies, Northern Illinois University,
Special Report, 12) For those unable to fulfill societal prescriptions for masculine
achievement, the status of manang (shaman) provides "emotional supports"
and "collective solutions to the basic problems of existence." 1201. THIEULOY, JACK. La passion indonésienne. Paris:
Presses de la Renaissance, 1984. 400 pp. Enthusiastic account of sexual adventures in today's Indonesia . 1202. WALKER, BENJAMIN. The Hindu World. New York: Praeger, 1968. 2 vols. An encyclopedic survey of Hindu thought and civilization; see e.g.
"Androgyny," 1, 43-45; "Gender," 1, 388-89. The impulse to draw up extensive biographical lists of notable
homosexuals of the past began with 19th-century homosexual scholars in
German-speaking countries. Parallel tendencies occur with scholars
representing other minority groups, where such lists seem to function to
provide historical witness of the collective worth of an ostracized group.
This "hall of fame" approach has recently been criticized as
skewing homosexual and lesbian history towards an
unrepresentative elite, effacing historical variety and class differences.
The search for famous homosexuals also provokes a largely fruitless series of
disputes over whether figures of the past, such as Socrates or Caesar, were
truly homosexual. A more recent trend is toward collective biographies of
living individuals, with the aim of producing a representative cross-section
rather than a roster of notables. 1205. ADAIR, NANCY, and CASEY ADAIR (eds). Word Is Out: Stories of Some of Our Lives. New York: Dell, 1978. 320 pp. Experiential accounts of the lives of gay men and lesbians from
college students to senior citizens. The text corresponds, in large part, to
the film of the same name. 1206. BUUREN, HANNEKE VAN, and PAUL DE VILDER (eds.). Als
je me
de bek
openbreekt: homofielen over zich self. Amsterdam: Wetenschappelijke Uitgeverij, 1974. 136
pp. Personal
testimonies of Dutch gay men and lesbians. 1207. CASSIDY, JULES, and ANGELA STEWART-PARK (eds.). We're Here: Conversations with
Lesbian Women. London: Quartet, 1976. 150 pp. Interviews and photographs of British
lesbians from various walks of life. 1208. CRUIKSHANK, MARGARET (ed.). The Lesbian Path: 37 Lesbian Writers Share Their Personal Experiences,
Viewpoints, Traumas, and Joys. Monterey, CA: Angel Press, 1980. 248 pp. Short autobiographies by contemporaries. See also: Ruth Baetz (ed.), Lesbian Crossroads: Personal
Stories of Lesbian Struggles and Triumphs (New York: Morrow, 1980; 273 pp.); Laurel Galana
and Gina Covina, The New Lesbians: Interviews with Women Across the U.S. and Canada (Berkeley, CA: Moon, 224 pp.); and Susan J. Wolfe and
Julia Penelope Stanley, The Coming Out Stories (Waterton, MA: Persephone Press, 1980; 251 pp.). 1209. DUROC, PIERRE. Homosexuels et lesbiennes illustres: dictionnaire anecdotique. Brussels: Les Auteurs Réunis, 1983. 505 pp. Alphabetical listing of some 1000 famous homosexuals (or persons claimed as such),
including mythological figures, with spare documentation. Emphasis on
Greco-Roman and French figures. 1210. EBERT, ALAN. The Homosexuals. New York: Macmil- lan, 1977. 332 pp. Depressing collection of interviews with seventeen ostensibly
representative homosexual men. Similar is: David Gottlieb, The Gay Tapes: A Candid
Discussion about Male Homosexuality (New York: Stein and Day, 1977; 178 pp.). 1211. GREIF, MARTIN. The Gay Book of Days. Secaucus, NJ: Lyle Stuart, 1982. 224 pp. Described as an "illustrated Who's Who of who is, was, may have
been, probably was, and almost certainly seems to have been gay during the
past 5,000 years," this volume offers amusing profiles of gay men and a
few lesbians. Evidence is rarely given for the anecdotes: the book is
entertainment rather than scholarship. Index of almost 1000 names. 1212. GARDE, NOEL I. (pseud.). Jonathan to Gides The
Homosexual in History. New York: Vantage Press, 1964. 751 pp. Biographies of some 300 men alleged in other sources to be homosexual.
Based on secondary sources, this book must be used with caution. There is no
doubt, however, that it belongs to a venerable tradition of "ancestor
hunting" that has served as a stimulus to research. See also W. H. Kayy
(pseud.), The Gay Geniuses: Psychiatric and Literary Studies of Famous
Homosexuals (Glendale, CA: Marvin Miller, 1965; 223 pp.). 1213. GRIER, BARBARA, and COLETTA
REID (eds.). Lesbian Lives: Biographies of Women from The Ladder. Oakland, CA: Diana Press, 1976. 432 pp. Biographical sketches of some
sixty women in history who were or may have been lesbians: famous couples,
adventurers, novelists, queens and their consorts, poets, artists, writers,
and pathbreakers. See also: Charlotte Bunch and Nancy Myron (eds.), Women Remembered (Baltimore: Diana Press, 1974; 92 pp.). 1214. HENNEFELD, PAUL. Gay and Lesbian History on
Stamps: Achilles to Zeus. Upper Montclair, NJ: The author, n.d. (ca. 1982). about 60 pp. Alphabetical listing by personality, with Scott Catalog numbers. Some
illustrations. There is also an Addendum (6 pp.), ca. 1983. 1215. LEONETTI, PAUL-FRANCOIS. Je suis un homo ... comme ils
disent. Paris:
Alain Lefeure, 1980. 300 pp. Contemporary testimonies of French male homosexuals. 1216. LEYLAND, WINSTON (ed.). Gay Sunshine Interviews. San Francisco: Gay Sunshine Press, 1978. 328 pp. Interviews with such
writers as William Burroughs, Charles Henry Ford, Jean Genet, Allen Ginsberg,
as well as with the composer Lou Harrison. See also: Gay Sunshine Interviews,
Volume Two (San Francisco: Gay Sunshine Press, 1983; 288 pp. 1217. PERRIN, ELULA. So Long as There Are Women. Translated by H. Salemson. New York: Morrow, 1978.
216 pp. Lives of nine lesbians as told by the owner of a Paris cabaret for
women, Kathmandu. 1218.
RIESS,
CURT. Auch Du, Cäsar ... Homosexualität als
Schicksal. Munich: Universitas, 1981. 447 pp. Thirty-one short biographies of male homosexuals in history—writers, artists,
athletes, and political figures. 1219. ROWSE, ALFRED L. Homosexuals in History: Ambisexu- als in Society,
Literature, and the Arts. New York: Macmillan, 1977. 346 pp. A British academic and popularizer
offers opinionated anecdotal sketches of homosexual men from the time of
Richard Lion Heart to the present (Englishmen, Frenchmen, Italians, Germans,
Russians, and a few Americans). 1220. SONENSCHEIN, DAVID. Some Homosexual Men: Interviews
from 1967. Austin, TX: The author, 1983. 217 pp. Transcriptions of tapes made with street contacts when he was
conducting work under the auspices of the [Kinsey] Institute for Sex
Research. 1221. STAMBOLIAN, GEORGE. Male Fantasies/Gay Realities. New York: Sea Horse Press, 1984. 1'67 pp. Interviews with ten east-coast gay men,
emphasizing sexuality and identity. U. THE HOMOSEXUAL MOVEMENT: UNITED STATES After an abortive attempt initiated by Henry Gerber in Chicago in
1924-25, the contemporary American homosexual rights movement commenced in
Southern California at the end of the 1940s, spreading to a number of other
cities in the following decade. This movement began largely in ignorance of
European precedents and parallels, though relations were quickly established
with groups in Europe. Historians have articulated the relatively short
history of the American movement into several periods, of which one may best
perhaps retain three: the "homophile phase," concentrating on a
largely integrationist civil-rights approach (1950-1969) the high radical phase , ushered in by the Stonewall Rebellion (1969-73);
and the post-radical era, which tended to synthesize the two previous approaches
. 1235. ALTMAN, DENNIS. Homosexual: Oppression and Liberation. New York: Outerbridge and Dienstfrey, 1971. 242 pp. An "instant interpetation" by a gay Australian journalist
and politics professor of the goals and theory of U.S. homosexual liberation,
with New Left overtones. Perceiving a need for a complete transformation of
society—in the Utopian vein of the period—Altman stressed the analogies with the aims and
tactics of the black and women's liberation movements. See also his essay
collection: Coming Out in the Seventies (Sydney: Wild and Woolley, 1979; 312 pp.); and his: The Homosexualization of
America, the Americanization of the Homosexual (New York: St. Martin's Press, 1982; 242 pp.). 1236. BELL, ARTHUR. Dancing the Gay Lib Blues: A Year in the Homosexual Liberation Movement. New York: Simon and Schuster, 1971. 189 pp. Gay
journalist's memoir of the gay liberation movement in New York City
immediately after the Stonewall Rebellion, focusing on the Gay Activists
Alliance. See also: Arnie Kantrowitz, Under the Rainbow: Growing Up
Gay (New York:
Morrow, 1977; 255 pp.). 1237. BENENSON, ROBERT. "Gay Politics," Editorial Research Reports, 1:24 (June 29, 1984), 471-88. Contrasts the political activities of the gay movement with the
religious condemnation of homosexual conduct and the refusal of the churches
to approve the "gay lifestyle." 1238. BLAKE, ROGER. The Homosexual Explosion. North Hollywood, CA: Brandon House, 1966. 188 pp. Sensationalistic expose of "the sexual revolution that is
sweeping the world." A pulp document of the period. 1239. COLE, ROB. "Collision in San Francisco," Advocate, no. 43 (September 30-0ctober 13, 1970), 1-2, 6-7,
12, 23; no. 44 (October 24-27, 1970), 8, 11. Report of the four-day convention (August 25-28) in San Francisco of
the North American Conference of Homophile Organizations (NACHO), which led
to the demise of this sole attempt to organize the diverse movement groups
into a single, national body. 1240. CORZINE, JAY et al. "The Gay Movement and
Social Change," Heuristics, 7 (1977), 44-57. Contends that the gay movement is developing "new men" who
embody a homoerotic consciousness fully grounded in eros and constituting an
alternative to the heteroerotic consciousness grounded in logos—and hence in
domination, role inequality, and other aspects of non-sensuous materialism. 1241. CUTTLER, MARVIN (pseud, of W. Dorr Legg/William
Lambert). Homosexuals Today: A Handbook of Organizations and Publications. Los Angeles: ONE, Inc., 1956. 188 pp. Surveying the homophile movement in the United States and abroad
(France, Germany, The Netherlands, Italy, Scandinavia, and Switzerland) a
decade after the end of World War II, this book is a valuable record of the
outlook and expectations prevailing at that time. Lists of organizations
and publications. 1242. D'EMILIO, JOHN. Sexual Politics, Sexual Communities: The Making of
a Homosexual Minority in the United States, 1940-1970. Chicago: Chicago University
Press, 1983. 257 pp. An account of the gay and lesbian movement in the United States
showing the 1940s background out of which it arose in Southern California,
early growth pains, the "homo- phile" phase, and incipient radicalization following
the Stonewall Rebellion (1969). Despite a few factual errors and mistaken
emphases, this book is generally recognized as the standard account of the
history of the U.S. movement. See also his: "Gay Politics, Gay
Community: San Francisco's Experience," Socialist Review, no. 55 (1981), 77-104. 1243. DENNENY, MICHAEL. "Sixteen Propositions for the
Eighties," Gay News (London), no. 213 (April 1981), 15-17. A strongly worded manifesto, first published in Christopher Street (January 1981), and reflecting a major strand of
contemporary gay opinion on the eve of the AIDS crisis. See response by Ian
Harvey, "Sixteen Questionable Propositions Questioned,"
ibid., no.216 (May-June 1981, 31. See also: Pat Califia, "What is
'Gay Liberation'?" Advocate, no. 320 (June 25, 1981), 30, 36-37, 58. 1244. DEVALL, WILLIAM. "Gay Liberation: An
Overview," Journal of Voluntary Action Research, 2 (1973), 24-35. Sociologist's review of the literature covering precipitating
factors, organization, ideology, and impact. 1245. ELSHTAIN, JEAN BETHGE. "Homosexual Politics:
The Paradox of Gay Liberation," Salmagundi, no. 58-59 (1982-83), 252-80. Unsympathetic critique, chiding gay-liberation politics with seeking
to collapse the distinction between private and public spheres, and for
seeking validation through enactment of symbolic legislation. Contends that
"maximal liberationists" practice a "politics of self-delusion
and narcissistic insulation." 1246. FABER, CHARLES. "30 and Going Strong," Advocate, no. 349 (August 19, 1982), 32-35. Account of ONE, Inc., of Los Angeles, which celebrated its thirtieth
anniversary under the guidance of W. Dorr Legg, making it the oldest
continuous gay organization in the country. 1247. GERBER, HENRY. "The Society for Human Rights—
1925," One Magazine, 10:9 (September 1962), 5-11. Autobiographical account of Gerber's (1896-1972) founding of a gay
rights organization in Chicago, the first that is known in this country. 1248. GREENBERG, JERROLD S. "The Effects of a
Homophile Organization on the Self-Esteem of Its Members," JH, 1 (1976), 313-17. In a study of members of one group, it was found that at first
self-esteem remained unaffected while alienation levels decreased, but
started rising again after one year of participation. 1256. KIRK, MARSHALL K., and ERASTES PILL (pseuds.). "Waging
Peace,"
Christopher Street, no. 95 (1985), 33-41. Analyzes the heterosexuals'
aversion to gays (which "purple Polyannas" underestimate) as
manifestations of the unknown, the alien, the loathsome, and the contrary.
Proposes an aggressive strategy to combat this negativism. 1257. LEITSCH, DICK. "A New Frontier for Freedom," Social
Action, 34 (1967), 21-29. Brief historical review and
optimistic forecast by the sometime leader of the Mattachine Society of New
York. 1258. LEVIN, JIM.
Reflections on the American Homosexual Rights Movement. New
York: Gay Academic Union, 1983. 67 pp. After outlining the conditions
that made the emergence of the movement possible after World War II, argues
that the "radicalized" period after 1969 was a deflection
("temporarily off course"). The book contains an
"Afterword" by Wayne Dynes, as well as Levin's essay-review of
Jonathan Katz'
Gay American History (New York: Crowell, 1976). 1259. LICATA, SAL. "The Homosexual Rights Movement in the United
States: A Traditionally Overlooked Area of American History," JH, 6
(1980-91), 161-89. Presents the movement as
developing in eight stages: (1) sporadic individual attempts, 1908-45; (2)
the dawning of minority consciousness, 1945-50; (3) search for identity,
1950-52; (4) righteous indignation, 1952-53; (5) information and education,
1953-60; (6) civil rights activism, 1961-69; (7) gay liberation, 1969-73; and
(8) institutional responses, 1973-79. 1260. MCCAFFREY, JOSEPH A. (ed.). The Homosexual Dialectic.
Englewood Cliffs, NJ: Prentice-Hall, 1972. 218 pp. Collection of articles and
manifestos, most of them reprints, reflecting the
radical ferment of the time (though including also some negative material by
Irving Bieber and others). Makes accessible a widely noticed text of the time:
Carl Wittman, "Refugees from Amerika: A Gay Manifesto" (pp.
157-71). 1261. MAROTTA, TOBY. The Politics of Homosexuality: How Lesbians and Gay
Men Have Made Themselves a Political and Social Force in Modern America. Boston: Houghton Mifflin,
1981. 369 pp. After some background on
Southern California, Marotta concentrates narrowly on New York City, chiefly
during the period 1969-73. 1262. MASTERS, ROBERT E. L. The Homosexual Revolution: A Challenging Expose of
the Social and Political Directions of a Minority Group. New York: Julian 1982. 186 pp.
(unpublished Ph. D. dissertation, psychology and sociology) Based on a
17-page schedule of inquiry submitted to leaders in Los Angeles, San Diego,
and San Francisco, Russo found that the power was "expert, referent, and
conjunctive." 1270. SAGARIN, EDWARD. Structure and Ideology in an Association of Deviants.
New York: Arno Press, 1975. 446 pp. A reprint of Sagarin's 1966
dissertation (New York University), this sociological study stems from the
writer's participant-observation (as "Donald Webster Cory") in the
Mattachine Society of New York. As an organization, MSNY was found to be
strongly instrumental on the manifest level, while latently almost entirely
expressive. The somewhat negative picture of factionalism and confusion that
the author gives would appear to reflect in part his own frustrations in
being rejected in his candidacy for president. See also his: Odd Man
Out: Societies of Deviants in America (Chicago: Quadrangle,
1969). 1271. STEIN, THEODORE J. "Gay Service Organizations: A Survey,"
Homosexual Counseling Journal, 3 (1976), 84-97. Presents data from
questionnaires returned by 38 organizations. 1272. SWEET, ROXANNA. Political and Social Action in Homophile
Organizations. New York: Arno Press, 1975. 252 pp. Reporting on San Francisco organizations, finds important similarities to the early
labor movement, and the women's and black civil rights movement. Argues that
homophile organizations must be seen in the context of American values and
institutions. The book is a reprint of her Ph.D. dissertation in criminology,
University of California, Berkeley. 1273. TEAL, DONN.
The Gay Militants. New York: Stein and Day, 1971. 355 pp. This detailed study of New York
City from June 1969 to June 1970, with particular attention to the Gay Liberation
Front and the Gay Activists Alliance, incorporates much primary material from
periodicals and leaflets. 1274. TOBIN, KAY, and RANDY WICKER. The Gay Crusaders. New
York: Paperback Library, 1972. 238 pp. Autobiographical sketches of
eleven male and four female leaders prominent in the American gay movement at
the time. 1275. YEARWOOD, LENNOX, and THOMAS S. WEINBERG. "Black Organizations,
Gay Organizations: Sociological Parallels," in: Martin P. Levine (ed.), Gay Men: The Sociology
of Male Homosexuality (New York: Harper and Row, 1979, pp.
301-16. Based on a literature review, the authors find a number of
significant parallels in ideology, tactics, structure, and goals. V. THE HOMOSEXUAL MOVEMENT: ABROAD Although several earlier
theorists had conceived of the idea in some form--and indeed its spiritual
roots are situated in the 18th-century Enlightenment—the homosexual rights
movement began with the founding of the Scientific- humanitarian Committee in
Berlin in 1897. From the beginning the German movement operated on two
fronts: the legal-legislative and the scholarly. It was recognized that
unless an enlightened intelligentsia could be formed that would be prepared
to discard inherited stereotypes in favor of solid scientific and scholarly information, no lasting reforms could be achieved or
maintained. Although the movement spread into neighboring countries of
northern Europe, Germany remained dominant until 1933, when Hitler's
suppression of all homosexual groups combined with the Great Depression to
end two generations of fruitful work. In a tentative fashion, gay rights
movements revived in a number of European countries after World War II (a tenuous
continuity had been maintained in Switzerland and Sweden). In the 1970s these
groups, then well established, received a vigorous infusion of American
activist concepts and lifestyle elements. Despite some stirrings in the Third
World, which the International Gay Association (founded in England in 1978)
has sought to foster, the gay and lesbian movement has remained largely
restricted to the industrialized countries of the Western world. Regarding
homosexuality itself as a mark of capitalist decadence, Marxist regimes do
not permit any independent organized homosexual groups. 1270. ADAM, BARRY D. "A Social History of Gay Politics," in:
Martin P. Levine,
Gay Men: The Sociology of Male Homosexuality. New York: Harper
and Row, 1979, pp. 285-300. From a Marxian perspective, a
Canadian scholar argues that capitalism generated the social conditions which
produced the gay subculture and the homosexual rights movements. (Adam does
not explain why Germany, the last of the major capitalist powers to emerge, should
have been the first to develop a homosexual rights movement.) 1271.
AXGIL,
AXEL, and HJELMER FOGEDGAARD. Homofile kampar: B^sseler gjennom
tiderne. Ridk^bing: For-
laget Grafolio, 1985. 216 pp. Account of the founding and
growth of the Danish gay- rights group Forbundet af 1948 and of the
periodical Vennen, which Fogedgaard edited. 1272. BANENS, MAKS. "De eerste jaren van het COC," Homojaarboek
(Amsterdam), 1 (1981), 133-60. Account of the first five years
(1946-51) of the leading Dutch homosexual social and rights organization
Cultuur en Ontspannings Centrum (COC; now NVIH/COC). This volume contains
other articles on homosexual rights work in the Netherlands by Judith Schuyf,
Maurice van Lieshout, and Rob Tielman. The major synthesis of the matter is:
Rob Tielman,
Homoseksualiteit in Nederland (Amsterdam: Boom Meppel, 1982;
336 pp.). 1273. BAUDRY, ANDRÉ, et al. Le regard des autres.
Paris: Arcadie, 1979. 260 pp. Proceedings of the international homosexual congress held in
Paris in May 1979 to celebrate the 25th anniversary of the French Arcadie
organization. This was to prove the last such congress conducted by Arcadie
before its dissolution in 1982. See also the earlier proceedings, L'homophilie à visage découvert: actes du colloque international organisé
par Arcadie, Paris, 1, 2 et 3 Novembre 1973 (Paris: Arcadie, 1973; 138 pp.). For the origins of the group, see: Baudry, "La naissance d'Arcadie," Arcadie,
no. 100 (April 1962), 204-09. 1274. BOUCHARD, ALAIN. Nouvelle approche à l'homosexualité: style de vie. Montreal: Homeureux, 1977. 129 pp. Asserts that the construction of a positive lifestyle is the homosexual's
first task. See also his: Le complexe des dupes (Montreal: Homeureux, 1980); as well as Jean Le Derff, Homolibre (Montreal: René Ferron, 1974); and Homosexuelle? Et pourquoi pas! (Montreal: René Ferron, 1973). 1275. COHEN, ALFREDO, et al. La
politica del corpo. Rome: Savelli, 1976. 208 pp. Collection of texts published in the Turin gay liberation
periodical
FUORI! (1971-75). 1276. DÉMERON, PIERRE. Lettre ouverte aux hétérosexuels. Paris: Albin Michel, 1969. 144 pp. (Collect ion Lettre ouverte) Good-humored prohomosexual statement. 1277. DIECKMANN, BERNHARD, and FRANCOIS PESCATORE. Elemente
einer homosexuellen Kritik: französische Texte
1969-77.
Berlin: Verlag Rosa Winkel, 1979. 239 pp. Translations of French articles and manifestos, mainly stemming from left sources, such as the Front Homosexuel d'Action Révolutionnaire, and from the post-structuralist trend. See also their (ed.): Drei Milliarden Perverse (Berlin: Verlag Rosa Winkel, 1980; 185 pp.). 1278. Documents of the Homosexual Rights Movement in Germany, 1836-1927. New York:
Arno Press, 1975. Reprints nine texts by German activists and scholars (Edwin
Bab, Adolf Brand, Magnus Hirschfeld, Ferdinand Karsch-Haack, and Karl
Heinrich Ulrichs), together with a hostile French critique by Ambroise Got. 1279. FINDLAY, DENNIS, et al. The Operation Socrates Handbook. Waterloo, Ont.: Operation Socrates, Federation of Students,
University of Waterloo, 1973. 39 pp. Provides information on
Canadian gay movement groups and resources at the time of writing. 1280.
FRIELE,
KAREN-CHRISTINE.
Homofili. Oslo: Det Norske Forbundet av 1948, 1972. 28 pp. Statement by a lesbian
spokesperson for the chief Norwegian homosexual rights group. 1281. FRIELING, WILLI (ed.). Schwule Regungen—schwule Bewegungen. Berlin: Verlag
Rosa Winkel, 1985. 205 pp. Essays, reports, and
conversations on the German gay movement by a group of German men, most of
whom became active in the radical phase after 1968, and who now reflect on
the changes that have ensued since. Includes chronology, 1969-83 (pp. 183-200). 1282. FRONT D' ALLIBERAMENT GAI DE CATALUNYA. Manifest. Barcelona:
FAGC, 1977. 47 pp. Manifesto of the most important
gay liberation group in Catalonia. 1283. FRONT HOMOSEXUEL D'ACTION RÉVOLUTIONNAIRE. Rapport contre la normalité. Paris: Champ Libre, 1971. 125 pp. Manifesto of the French radical group (FHAR) stemming from the events of May 1968. 1284. GIRARD, JACQUES. Le mouvement homosexuel en France 1945-1980. Paris: Syros, 1981. 206 pp. Although though this book is
presented as a history of the homosexual movement in France, the presentation
is selective and skewed towards radical groups, such as FHAR. Marred by
minor factual mistakes and typographical errors. 1285. HOCQUENGHEM, GUY, and JEAN-LOUIS BORY. Comment nous appelez-vous déjà? ces hommes que l'on dit
homosexuels. Paris: Calmann-Levy, 1977. 237 pp. Subjective memoirs by
two French writers and activists. 1286. HOFFMÜLLER,
UDO, and STEPHAN NEUER. Unfähig zur
Emanzipation? Homosexuelle zwischen Getto und Befreiung: Eine Untersuchung
zur Stagnation der Homosexuellenbewegung.
Giessen: Focus Verlag, 1977. 316 pp. Leftist, jargon-laden presentation of factors that
are considered to be retarding the
progress of the homosexual emancipation movement in the German Federal
Republic, 1287. INTERNATIONAL COMMITTEE FOR SEXUAL EQUALITY. Rapport du troisième congrès international.
Amsterdam: I.C.S.E., 1953. 93 pp. Report
of the Third International Congress of the Comité International pour l'Egalité
Sexuelle (ICSE), Amsterdam, September 12-24, 1953. ICSE arose
after World War II to continue the international work of sexual reform that
had been interrupted by the Depression and the rise of Hitler fifteen years
before. 1288. JOUHANDEAU, MARCEL. Ces messieurs: Corydon résumé et augmenté. Paris: Lilac, 1951. 104 pp. A portion of this book
by a noted French writer is a reworking of Gide's ideas as expressed in Corydon. 1289. KUCKUK,
INA (pseud.; ed.). Der Kampf gegen
Unterdrückung: Materialien aus der deutschen Lesbier- innenbewegung.
Munich: Verlag Frauenoffensive, 1975. 143 pp. Documents from the German
lesbian movement. 1290. KYPER, JOHN. "Organizing in Mexico," Gay
Community News, 7:8 (September 15, 1979), 10-11. On the Frente Homosexual de
Acciön Revolucionaria, formed in Mexico City in April 1978. 1291. LAURITSEN, JOHN, and DAVID THORSTAD. The Early Homosexual Rights Movement (1864-1935). New
York: Times Change Press, 1974.
93 pp. Offers a clear account of scholarly and political activity, mainly in
Germany, but also in England, with biographical sketches of key figures
(including Karl Heinrich Ulrichs, Magnus Hirschfeld, and Edward Carpenter).
The later sections overstate the case for the socialist-communist
contribution in Germany, and the book has been used to buttress the uncertain
case that there is a special affinity between homosexual emancipation and the
revolutionary left. There are German, Italian, and Spanish translations. See
also: James Steakley, The Homosexual Emancipation
Movement in Germany (New York: Arno Press, 1975; 121 pp.). 1292. LEE, JOHN. "Remembering Stonewall: The Relevance of Stonewall to
Australian Homosexuality," Gay Changes
(Australia), 2:4 (1979), 4-5, 10. Treats the emergence of CAMP,
Inc., in 1970 and Sydney Gay Liberation in 1971, the latter ostensibly more
radical. 1293. MENARD, GUY. L'homosexualité démystifiée: questions et réponses. Montreal: Leméac, 1980. 188 pp. Seeks to destroy myths with
straightforward answers to questions. 1294. MIELI, MARIO.
Homosexuality and Liberations Elements of a Gay Critique.
Translated by David Fernbach. London: Gay Men's Press, 1980. 247 pp. This book, which appeared in
Italy in 1977, is the chief Italian contribution to the theory of homosexual
liberation. Mieli considers that the chief problem is the repression of
homosexuality latent in heterosexuals. The text is sometimes overambitious
and confusingly paradoxical. 1295. MODUGNO, ELIO. La mistificazione eterosessuale. Milan:
Gammalibri, 1977. 276 pp. A gay
Marxist criticizes psychoanalytic trends which "mystify"
homosexuality. 1296. OKITA, HIRO (pseud.). Homossexualismo: da Opressäo a Libertacào. Säo Paulo: Proposta, 1980. 74 pp. A brief history of the earlier
movements from a Marxist point of view serves as a prologue to an account
(pp. 44- 75) of recent developments in the Brazilian gay movement. 1297. SPOLATO, MARIA SILVIA. I movimenti omosessuali di liberazione. Rome: Samona e Savelli, 1972. 159 pp. An objective work surveying the
origins of the gay liberation movement in Italy and abroad. 1298. SYLVESTRE, PAUL-FRANÇOIS. Les homosexuels s'organisent au Québec et ailleurs. Montreal: Homeureux, 1979. 166 pp. An examination of the legal status of homosexuality in Canada and of the
gay liberation movement, esp. in Quebec, since 1969. See also his: Propos pour une liberation homosexuelle (Montreal: Editions de l'Aurore, 1976; 154 pp.). 1299. Tuntenstreit:
Theoriediskussion der Homosexuellen Aktion Westberlin.
Berlin: Verlag Rosa Winkel, 1977. Reprints texts from 1974-75 on
the question of whether the homosexual movement should be autonomous or
integrated into the labor movement. 1300. WALTER, AUBREY (ed.). Come Together: The Tears of Gay
Liberation, 1970-73. London: Gay Men's Press, 1980. 218 pp. Texts, documents, and
photographs from the formative years of the English gay movement, with
special attention to feminist theory and the relationship between lesbians
and gay men. 1307. Was
soll das Volk vom Dritten Geschlecht wissen? Leipzig:
Spohr, 1901. 26 pp. An explanation
of homosexuality for the lay public prepared by the Berlin
Scientific-Humanitarian Committee under the direction of Magnus Hirschfeld.
This pamphlet, which was often reprinted, is
the prototype of educational brochures created by homosexuals throughout the
world in an effort to reach the public directly and refute myths and
slanders, 1308. WEEKS, JEFFREY. Coming Out: Homosexual Politics in Britain from the
Nineteenth Century to the Present. London: Quartet Books, 1977.
278 pp. In the late 19th century,
according to Weeks, capitalist society sought to control homosexual behavior
by defining it in increasingly hostile terms. This repression led, by way of
reaction, to the creation of a homosexual subculture, and eventually to
efforts toward reform. Weeks offers considerable
attention to individual reformers (Havelock Ellis, John Addington Symonds,
Edward Carpenter) and to developments before and after World War II, leading
to the Wolfenden Report and the implementation of its recommendations in
1967. See also: Sheila Rowbotham and Jeffrey Weeks,
Socialism and the New Life: The Personal and Sexual Politics of Edward
Carpenter and Havelock Ellis (New York: Pluto Press, 1980; 200
pp.). 1309. WRIGHT, LES. "The RFSL and Gay Liberation in Sweden," Gay
Books Bulletin, no. 5 (1981), pp. 25- 27. Brief account of the Swedish
homosexual rights group, RFSL (National Union for Sexual Equality), which
separated from its Danish parent, Forbundet av 1948, in 1950. IV. ANTHROPOLOGY Although Europeans had become
familiar with homosexual behavior in other cultures through medieval contact
with Islam and Renaissance conquests in Asia and the Americas, an attempt to
present some image of the world-wide diffusion of "strange sexual
practices" began only in the 19th century with such globetrotters as Sir
Richard Burton, Paolo Mantegazza, and "Jacobus X." The approach
has lingered in pulp publications--some of them approximating
adult-bookstore fare. Beginning with the large armchair synthesis of the
German scholar Karsch-Haack (1333), professional anthropologists attempted
more factual balance sheets. Despite the recording of substantial quantities
of information, the still-tentative character of these summations
demonstrates that more ethnologies (and more accurate and revealing ones)
are needed from many parts of the world before we can attempt a great map, so
to speak, of world homosexuality that will accurately mirror both the
genuine typological affinities and the profound differences in cultural form
that define homosexual behavior in various societies. 1310. BAUMANN, E. D. "Vervrouwelijking bij de primi- tieven," Mensch en Maatschappij, 10 (1934), 118-33. Surveys ancient literature and
anthroplogical accounts for evidence of "change of sex," ranging
from mere cultic transvestism to the homosexual aspect of the berdache.
Stresses the universality of the phenomenon of feminization
. 1311. BAUMANN, HERMANN. Das doppelte
Geschlecht: ethnologische Studien zur Bisexualität in Ritus und Mythus.
Berlin: Reimer, 1955. 420 pp. Despite some questionable
Jungian assumptions, this major study collects much tribal material on
"bisexuality," that is to say androgynous concepts of the divine
and gender-mixing behavior. Africa is specially emphasized. His "Der
kultische Geschlechtswandel bei Naturvölkern," Zeitschrift
für Sexualforschung, 1:1 (1950), 97-114; 1:3-4 (1950), 259-97,
was largely incorporated in this book. 1312. BENEDICT, RUTH. Patterns of Culture. Boston: Houghton
Mifflin, 1934. 290 pp. In this influential statement of
cultural relativism by a closeted lesbian anthropologist (1887-1948), see pp.
262-65. See also her: "Anthropology and the Abnormal," Journal
of General Psychology, 10 (1934), 59-82. 1308. BLACKWOOD, EVELYN (ed.). Anthropology and Homosexual
Behavior. Binghamton, NY: Haworth Press, 1986. 217 pp. Thirteen new scholarly papers,
generally on non-Western cultures. This collection provides a useful
conspectus of much of what has been accomplished, suggesting also future
avenues of research. Many references; index. Originally published as JH, 11:3-4
(1985). 1309. BLEIBTREU-EHRENBERG, GISELA. Der Weibmann: kultische
Geschlechtswandel im Schamanism: eine Studie zur Transvestition und
Transsexualität bei Naturvölkern.
Frankfurt am Main: Fischer, 1984. 200 pp. Comparative study of
transvestism and transsexualism in Eurasian shamanism, with some information
on other cultural spheres. The author posits a linear developmental process
linking these "archaic" magico-sexual phenomena. 1310.
BLOCH,
IWAN.
Beiträge zur Aetiologie der Psychopathia sexualis. Desden: H. R. Dohm, 1902-03. 2 vols. Vol. 1 was translated (by Keith Wallace) as
Anthropological Studies in the Strange Sexual Practices of All Races in All
Ages, Ancient and Modern, Oriental and Occidental, Primitive and Civilized (New York: Anthropological Press, 1933; 246 pp.); vol. 2 (by Ernst
Vogel) as Anthropological and
Ethnological Studies in the Strangest Sex Acts in Modes of Love of All Races
Illustrated, Oriental, Occidental, Savage, Civilized (New York: Falstaff Press, 1935). Although Bloch was a distinguished
Berlin historian of sexual behavior, these early works do not rank among his
best productions. 1311. BROUDE, GWEN J., and SARAH J. GREENE. "Cross-Cultural Codes on
Twenty Sexual Attitudes and Practices," Ethnology, 15 (1976),
409-29. Tabulates data on homosexuality
in 37 of 200 societies surveyed. Schematic and of uncertain value. Similar is
L. Minturn et al., "Cultural Patterning of Sexual Beliefs and Behavior," ibid., 8 (1969), 301-18. 1312. BROWN, JULIA S. "A Comparative Study of Deviations of Sexual
Mores,"
American Sociological Review, 17 (1952), 135-46. Correlates data on 110
societies from the Human Relations Area File (HRAF). Male homosexuality was
found to be punished by 68% of the 44 societies in which it was reported.
Note that this conclusion differs from that of C. S. Ford and F. A. Beach,
below, and that the reliability of HRAF in detail has been questioned. 1313. CALLENDER, CHARLES, and LEE M. KOCHEMS. "Men and Not-Men:
Gender-Mixing Statuses and Homosexuality," JH, 11:3-4 (1985), 165-78. The writers contend that in cultures exhibiting a
ber- dache-type institution, observers' frequent equation of
gender-mixing statuses with homosexuality is a misunderstanding: in these
contexts sex with men is a secondary and derivative characteristic. 1314. CARDIN, ALBERTO. Guerreros, chamanes y travestiss- indicios de
homosexualidad entre los exoticos. Barcelona:
Tusquets, 1984. Semipopular study of warrior and shamanic homosexuality in
tribal societies. 1315. CARPENTER, EDWARD. Intermediate Types among Primitive Folk.
Second ed. London: George Allen and Unwin, 1911. 185 pp. Presents cross-cultural
evidence first for the the wizard type, often "hermaphroditic"
(gender-mixing), and then for its polar opposite, the warrior homosexual, of
which the samurai is the quintessential embodiment. 1316. CARRIER, JOSEPH M. "Homosexual Behavior in Cross- Cultural
Perspective," in: Judd Marmor (ed.), Homosexual Behaviors A Modern
Reappraisal. New York: Basic Books, 1980, pp. 100-22. An anthropologist seeks to
convey the multifariousness of our knowledge by presenting examples of
accomodating and disapproving societies, societies with ritualized masculinity,
and the availability jof sexual partners. See also his: "Sex-Role
Preference as an Explanatory Variable in Homosexual Behavior," Archives
of Sexual Behavior, 6 (1977), 53-65. 1317. CARSTAIRS, G. MORRIS. "Cultural Differences in Sexual
Deviation," in Ismond Rosen (ed.), The Pathology and Treatment of
Sexual Deviations A Methodological Approach. London: Oxford
University Press, 1964, pp. 419-34. Reviewing the diversity of
patterns in societies where such behavior is known, concludes that the
evidence "supports the contention that all human beings are capable of
learning to respond in homosexual relationships; this potentiality is
realized in all the members of some societies, but in only a few members of
others." 1318. DAVENPORT, WILLIAM. "Sex in Cross-Cultural Perspective,"
in: Frank A. Beach (ed.), Human Sexuality in Four Perspectives.
New York: Wiley, 1977, pp. 115-63. Seeks to balance the
conflicting claims of the biological and the cultural approaches. See esp.
pp. 153-57. 1319. DAVIS, NIGEL.
The Rampant Gods Eros Throughout the World. New York: William
Morrow, 1984. 300 pp. Popular cross-cultural survey,
with many references to homosexuality. The bibliography (pp. 285-91) suggests
that the writer's research has been less than exhaustive. 1320. EDWARDES, ALLEN, and R. E. L. MASTERS. The Cradle of Erotica.
New York: Julian Press, 1963. 362 pp. Potpourri of sexual practices
in African and Asian societies. Uncritical in its use of sources, this book nonetheless
offers some suggestive material. See also: Edwardes, The
Jewel in the Lotus (New York: Julian Press, 1959; 293 pp.);
Masters,
Forbidden Sexual Behavior and Morality: An Objective Re-examination of
Perverse Sex Practices in Different Cultures (New York: Julian
Press, 1962; 431 pp.); and George Allgrove, Love in the East (London:
A. Gibbs and Phillips, 1962; 159 pp.). 1321. ELIADE, MIRCEA. Shamanism: Archaic Techniques of Ecstasy. Translated from
the French by Willard R. Trask. Princeton: Princeton University Press, 1964.
610 pp. This major work by a leading
scholar in the field of comparative religion is somewhat disappointing on
transvestism and the berdache-like aspects of shamanism; see however pp.
168, 258, 351-53, 395, and 461. 1322. FEHLING,
DETLEV. Ethnologische Ueberlegungen auf dem Gebiet
der Altertumskunde: Phallische Demonstration, Fernsicht, die Steinigung.
Munich: Beck, 1974. 107 pp. (Zetemata, 61) Presents cross-cultural (and
cross-species) material on phallic presentation. 1323. FITZGERALD, THOMAS K. "A Critique of Anthropological Research on
Homosexuality,"
JH, 2 (1977), 385-97. Examines some methodological
presuppositions underlying current endeavors. Bibliography, pp. 395-97. 1324. FORD, CLELLAN STEARNS, and FRANK A. BEACH. Patterns of Sexual Behavior.
New York: Harper, 1951. 307 pp. Scholarly survey by an
anthropologist (Ford) and a psychologist (Beach). In Chapter 7 (pp. 125-42)
it is indicated that of 77 societies for which records were available to the
authors, 49 (64%) tolerated or encouraged homosexual behavior. Also occurring
in subhuman primates and lower animals, it must be considered natural. 1325. GOODLAND, ROGER. A Bibliography of Sex Rites and Customs: An
Annotated Record of Books, Articles, and Illustrations in All Languages. London: Rout- ledge, 1931. 752
pp. Inasmuch as this major
bibliography scants homosexual behavior, it can only serve comparative
purposes. 1326. GREGERSEN, EDGAR. Sexual Practices: The Story of Human Sexuality. London: M.
Beazley, 1982. 320 pp. Semipopular survey by an
anthropologist, stressing the variety of sexual customs. 1327. KARDINER, ABRAM. The Individual and His Society. New
York: Columbia University Press, 1939. 503 pp. Psychoanalytic approach drawing
on some ethnological material from the Marquesas Islands, Madagascar, etc. 1328.
KARSCH-HAACK,
FERDINAND.
Das gleichgeschlechtliche Leben der Naturvölker. Munich: Ernst Reinhardt, 1911. 668 pp. Intended as a grand synthesis
in the 19th-century manner, this massive survey of male homosexuality and
lesbianism among tribal peoples in Africa, the Americas, the Pacific regions,
and Siberia does distill much information, providing copious bibliographical
references and quotations. Some methodological assumptions are dated, so that
the work must be used with care. (Reprinted by Arno Press, New York, 1975). 1329. LABARRE, WESTON. The Human Animal. Chicago: Chicago
University Press, 1954. 371 pp. A speculative anthropologist
attempts to discredit religion by claiming that patriarchal monotheism is a
product of the male homosexual imagination of the Greeks (pp. 267-302). 1330. LEWANDOWSKI, HERBERT, and HARRY BENJAMIN (ed.). Ferne
Länder—fremde Sitten: Einführung in die Vergleichende Sexualethnologie. Stuttgart: H. E. Gunther, 1958. 337 pp. Anthology of papers on
comparative sexual ethnology. Bibliography, pp. 319-29. 1331. MANTEGAZZA, PAOLO. Anthropological Studies of Sexual Relations of
Mankind. Translated by James Bruce. New York: Anthropology
Press, 1932. 258 pp. First published in Italian in
1886, this early "best-seller" of popular anthropology set the
pattern for the "strange customs of distant peoples" genre. It does
contain some material on homosexual behavior, presented in a relatively
objective fashion. 1332. MARSHALL, DONALD S., and ROBERT
C. SUGGS (eds.). Human Sexual Behavior: Variations in the Ethnographic Spectrum:
Studies in Sex and Society. New York: Basic Books, 1971. 302 pp. Collection of nine papers with some
material on homosexual conduct. 1333. MEAD, MARGARET. Male and Female: A Study of the Sexes in a Changing
World. New York: William Morrow, 1949. 477 pp. Influential statement of
cultural relativism by an anthropologist whose accomplishments have recently
become the focus of controversy. Mead contends that in some cultures, as the
American Plains Indians, homosexuality and transvestism may result from
failure to meet pressures and demands for masculinity. In other cultures,
homosexual behavior may be accepted, in some circumstances at least, as
unproblematic. This book, its flaws notwithstanding, presents a more balanced
picture than her widely cited (and vulnerable) study: Sex and
Temperament in Three Primitive Societies (New York: William
Morrow, 1935; 335 pp.). On Mead's own bisexuality—including her relationship
with Ruth Benedict (see 1312)—see the biography by her daughter, Mary
Catherine Bateson,
With a Daughter's Eye: A Memoir of Margaret Mead and Gregory Bateson (New
York: Morrow, 1984; 242 pp.). 1334. MUNROE, ROBERT L., and RUTH H. MUNROE. "Male Transvestism and
Subsistence Economy," Journal of Social Psychology, 103
(1977), 307-08. Finds that a society is likely
to institutionalize a male transvestite role if high subsistence requirements
exist for the men or if differentiation between male and female roles is
relatively small. See also Robert L. Munroe, "Male Transvestism and the
Couvade: A Psycho-Cultural Analysis," Ethos, 8 (1980),
49-59; and Robert Munroe et al., "Institutionalized Male Transvestism
and Sex Distinctions," American Anthropologist,
71 (1969), 87-91. 1335. MURRAY, STEPHEN 0. "Fuzzy Sets and Abominations," Man,
18 (1983), 396-99. Difficulties with categories do
not necessarily result in a sense of danger which leads to the tabooing of
the unclassifiable (as the theory associated with Mary Douglas would
suggest). It is in societies where gender is not the most salient criterion
of social organization and without a rigid sexual division of labor that
homosexual behavior has been targeted for extirpation. 1336. OPLER, MARVIN K. "Anthropological and Cross-Cul- tural Aspects of
Homosexuality," in: Judd Marmor (ed.), Sexual Inversion: The Multiple
Roots of Homosexuality. New York: Basic Books, 1965, pp.
108-23. Suggests that the extreme
diversity of sexual customs disclosed by anthropological investigation
falsifies linear Freudian notions of normal sexual development. 1337. SELIGMAN, CHARLES GABRIEL. "Sexual Inversion among Primitive
Races,"
Alienist and Neurologist, 23 (1902), 580-83. This early article by a leading
British social anthropologist (1873-1940) documents various cases of
homosexuality, pederasty, pseudo-hermaphroditism, and marked inversion of
the secondary sexual characters among primitive peoples of the New World and
of (British) New Guinea. 1338. SONENSCHEIN, DAVID. "Homosexuality as a Subject of
Anthropological Inquiry," Anthropological Quarterly,
39 (1966), 73-82. Holds that anthropologists can
advance the knowledge of homosexuality through their field work among tribal
peoples, as well as through the study of homosexuality as a subculture in
more advanced societies. 1339. WERNER, DENNIS. "A Cross-Cultural Perspective on Theory and
Research on Male Homosexuality," JH, 4 (1979), 345-62. Favors a "cultural materialist theory," which views homosexuality as adaptive under conditions of population pressure. See also: "Erratum," ibid., 5 (1980), 333-34. 1340. WINTHUIS,
JOSEF. Das Zweigeschlechterwesen bei den
Zentralaustraliern und anderen Völkern.
Leipzig: Hirschfeld, 1928. 297 pp. Universalizing perspective on
androgyny (with special emphasis on Australia) by a Catholic priest. 1345A. X,
JACOBUS (pseud.). The Erogenous Zones of the World: Description of the Intra-Sexual Manners
and Customs of the Semi-Civilized Peoples of Africa, Asia, America, and
Oceania. New York: Book Awards, 1964. 448 pp. An example of the "strange
customs" genre. Impressions gathered by a French army surgeon beginning
in the 1860s. A belief traceable to the 18th
century holds that homosexual behavior is unknown in sub-Saharan Africa, a
notion that sometimes resurfaces even today. As the entries that follow
indicate, this concept of African exceptionalism cannot be sustained. In
keeping with the great variety of African social organizations, there are
many types of male homosexual and lesbian behavior, and further field work
will be necessary to elucidate the full picture. For North Africa, see III.P. 1341. AMBROGETTI, P. La vita sessuale nell'Eritrea. Rome:
Capaccini, 1900. 19 pp. See pp. 15-19 for
native lesbianism, and pederasty involving Italian colonial troops. 1342. BESMER, FREMONT E. Horses, Musicians, & Gods: The Hausa Cult of
Possession-Trance. South Hadley, MA: Bergin & Garvey, 1983.
304 pp. For cult transvestism and
homosexuality in this West African people, see pp. 18-21, 27-28, and 122-23. 1343. BIEBER, FRIEDRICH J. "Brieflicher Bericht über Erhebungen unter äthiopischen Völkerschaften," Anthropophyteia, 6 (1909), 402-05. Letter on pederasty and lesbianism among Ethiopian tribes. Continued in his: "Neue Forschungen über das Geschlechtsleben in Äthiopien," ibid., 7 (1910), 227-32; 8 (1911), 184-93. 1339. BRINCKER, H. "Character, Sitten und Gebräuche speciell der Bantu Deutsch-Südwestafrikas," Mitteilungen des Seminars für orientalische Sprachen an der K. Friedrich-Wilhelms-Universität zu Berlin, 3 (1900) [Abteilung 3: Afrikanische Studien], 66-99. On the Bantu of Namibia (former
German Southwest Africa). 1340. BRYK, FELIX.
Voodoo-eros: Ethnological Studies in the Sex-life of the African Aborigines.
Translated by Mayne F. Sexton. New York: United Book Guild, 1964. 251 pp. In this popular work, which first appeared in German as Neger-Eros (1925), see
pp. 226-30. 1341. BUXTON, JEAN. "Mandari Witchcraft," in: John Middleton and
W. H. Winter (eds.),
Witchcraft and Society in East Africa. New York: Praeger, 1963,
pp. 99-121. The Mandari of Equatoria
Province, Sudan, tend to link witchcraft and
homosexuality. See also her Religion and Healing in Mandari (London,
1973), p. 209. 1342. COLSON, ELIZABETH. Marriage and the Family among the Plateau Tonga of
Northern Rhodesia. Manchester: Manchester University Press, 1958.
379 pp. In this ethnography see pp.
139-40. 1343. DYNES, WAYNE. "Homosexuality in Sub-Saharan Africa: An
Unnecessary Controversy," Gay Books Bulletin, 9
(Spring-Summer 1983), 20-21. List of 84 items in several
languages, refuting the notion that homosexuality is unknown in Black Africa.
For the older literature, see Ferdinand Karsch-Haack, Das
gleichgeschlechtliche Leben der Naturvölker (Munich: Ernst
Reinhardt, 1911), pp. 116-80 (male homosexuality) and 471-84 (lesbianism), as
well as the relevant notes. 1344. EVANS-PRITCHARD, EDWARD EVAN. "Sexual Inversion among the
Azande,"
American Anthropologist, 72 (1970), 1428-34. The study of Sudanese groups
was virtually the life work of the influential British social anthropologist.
Here he presents data and observations omitted from his better known books. 1345. FALK, KURT. "Gleichgeschlechtliches Leben bei einigen Negerstämmen Angolas," Archiv für Anthropologie, N.S. 20 (1920), 42-45. Homosexual behavior among the
Wawike, Ovivangella, and Ngine (Angola), as reported by a long-time resident. 1346. FALK, KURT. "Homosexualität bei den Eingeborenen in Südwest-Afrika," Archiv für Menschenkunde 1 (1925-26), 202-14. Account of homosexuality among
the indigenous peoples of Namibia (Southwest Africa). 1347. FAUPEL, J. F.
African Holocaust: The Story of the Uganda Martyrs. New York:
P. J. Kennedy, 1962. 242 pp. King Mwanga's 1886 persecution
of the Christian pages was largely motivated by their rejection of his
homosexual advances (pp. 9-10, 68, 82-83). 1348. GAY, JUDITH. "'Mummies and Babies' and Friends and Lovers in
Lesotho,"
JH, 11:3-4 (1985), 97-106. Examines a pattern of
institutionalized friendship among adolescent girls and young women in a southern
African society, where a large proportion of the men are away performing
migrant labor. 1349. HABERLANDT, M. "Conträre Sexualerscheinungen bei der Negerbevölkerung Sansibars," Verhandlungen der Berliner Anthropologischen Gesellschaft, 31 (1899), 668ff. Sexual inversion among the
Negro people of the island of Zanzibar. 1350. HALLPIKE, C. R. The Konso of Ethiopia: A Study of the Values of a
Cushite People. Oxford: Oxford University Press, 1972. 342 pp. In this ethnography see pp.
13-37, 150-51, 279. 1351. HAMMER, WILHELM. "Liebesleben und -Leiden in West-Mittelafrika," Geschlecht und Gesellschaft, 4 (1909), 193-201. Homosexuality among the Kru of
Liberia and other groups. 1352. HANRY, PIERRE. Erotisme africain: le comportement sexuel des adolescents guineens. Paris: Payot, 1970. 201 pp. Contains information on the
incidence of homosexual behavior among high school students in Guinea (West
Africa). 1353. HERSKOVITS, MELVILLE JEAN. Dahomey: An Ancient West African
Kingdom. Evanston: Northwestern University Press, 1967. 2 vols. In this classic ethnography
(first edition 1938), see vol. 1, pp. 239-42, 288-89. See also his "A
Note on 'Woman Marriage' in Dahomey, Africa, 10 (1937),
335-41. 1354. JUNOD, HENRI ALEXANDRE. The Life of a South African Tribe.
Neuchatel: Attinger Freres, 1912. 2 vols. For "unnatural vice in the
Johannesburg compounds," see vol. 1, pp. 492-95. 1355. KRIGE, M. J.
"Woman-marriage with special reference to the Lovedu,"
Africa, 44 (1974), 11-36. Suggests, not altogether
convincingly, that the marriages are without a sexual component. 1356. LA FONTAINE, JEAN SYBIL. The Gisu of Uganda.
London: International Africa Institute, 1959. 68 pp. In this ethnography see pp. 34,
60-61. 1357. LASNET, ALEXANDRE. "Notes d'ethnologie et
de médecine sur les Sakalaves du Nord-Ouest," Annales
d'hygiène et de médecine coloniale, 2 (October-December 1899), 471-97. Report on pederasty and berdaches among a Madagascar group. 1358. LAUBSCHER, BAREND J. F. Sex, Custom and Psycho- pathology: A Study of South
African Pagan Natives. New York: Humanities Press, 1952. 347 pp.
See pp. 23, 25, 31, 257-59, 283-84. 1359. LAURENT, EMILE. "Les Ahimbavy de Madagascar," Archives d'Anthropologie Criminelle, 26 (1911), 241-48. Describes a highly feminized
Hova group, claiming that they rarely engage in homosexual acts. 1360. MARTIN, MAURICE. Au coeur de l'Afrique équatoriale (journal d'un officier). Lille: Lefebure-Ducrocq, 1912. 215 pp. In this account by a French officer of service in central Africa, see pp.
139-60, 164, 187-88. 1361. MERRIAM, ALAN P. "Aspects of Sexual Behavior among the Bala
(Basongye)," in: D. Marshall and R. Suggs (eds.), Human
Sexual Behavior. New York: Basic Books, 1971, 71-102. Discusses the kitesha,
a gender-crossing role among the Bala people in Kasai Oriental Province,
Democratic Republic of the Congo. See also his: An African World: The Basongye
Village of Lupupa Ngye. (Bloomington: Indiana University Press,
1974; 347 pp.), pp. 319-21. 1362. MORRIS, DONALD R. The Washing of the Spears: A History of the Rise of
the Zulu Nation under Shaka and Its Fall in the Zulu War of 1879. New
York: Simon and Shuster, 1965. 655 pp. In this massive narrative see pp. 35-36,
46, 51-52, 54, 66, 107-08, 117, 279-81, 287-88, 587. See also Brian Roberts, The
Zulu lings (New York, 1975), pp. 86-87. 1363. NADEL, S. F. "Two Nuba
Religions: An Essay in Comparison," American Anthropologist,
57 (1955), 661-79. While among the Heiban male
homosexuals are regarded as abnormal, among the Otoro they are
"allocated a special role, allowed to dress as females and to live in most
respects a woman's life" (p. 677). 1364. OBOLER, R. S. "Is the Female Husband a Man? Woman/Woman Marriage
among the Nandi of Kenya," Ethnology, 19 (1980),
69-88. The erotic dimensions of such
union are a matter of controversy. 1365. PARIN, PAUL, FRITZ MORGENTALER,
AND GOLDY PARIN- MATTHEY. Fear Thy Neighbor as Thyself: Psycho- alysis and Society
among the Anyi of West Africa. Chicago: University of Chicago
Press, 1980. 408 pp. This somewhat opaque text
indicates pédérastie preferences
for some Anyi (pp. 204-10). 1366. RACHEWILTZ, BORIS DE. Black Eros: Sexual Customs of Africa from Prehistory
to the Present Day. Translated by Peter Whigham.
New York: L. Stuart, 1968. 329 pp. In this popular account by an
Italian Egyptologist, see pp. 191, 280, 282. 1367. ROUX, J. "Note sur un cas
d'inversion sexuelle chez une Comorienne," Bulletin de la Société
d'Anthropologie, 6 (1905), 218-19. Lesbian case in the Comoro Islands (near
Madagascar). 1368. SELIGMAN, CHARLES GABRIEL, AND BRENDA Z. SELIGMAN. Pagan
Tribes of the Nilotic Sudan. London: Rout- ledge, 1932. 565 pp. In this major ethnological work
on the peoples of the upper Nile, see pp. 506-07, 515. 1369. SIGNORINI, ITALO. "Agonwole agyale: il matrimonio tra individui dello stesso sesso negli
Nzema de Ghana
sud-occidentale,"
Rassegna Italiana di Sociologia, 12 (1971), 529-45. While informants deny that
there is an overt sexual element these marriages between older and younger
same-sex persons, sexual objectification is certainly present. 1370. TEGNAEUS, HARRY. Blood-brothers: An Ethno-socio- logical Study of
the Institution with Special Reference to Africa. New York: Philosophical
Library, 1952. 181 pp. Includes also comparative
material and perspective for other areas. 1371. TESSMANN, GUENTHER. "Die Homosexualität bei den Negern Kameruns," JfsZ, 21 (1921), 121-38. Report from the former German colony of Cameroun. 1372. WEEKS, JOHN H. "Anthropological Notes on the Bangala of the Upper Congo
River,"
Journal of the Anthropological Institute of Great Britain and
Ireland, 39 (1909), 97-136, 416-59 (esp. pp. 448-49) . Solitary and mutual
masturbation, as well as sodomy, are "very common." 1383.
WILSON, MONICA. Good Company: A Study of the Nayakusu Age-Villages. London:
Oxford University Press, 1951. 278 pp. Homosexuality among adolescent males
is accepted practice (pp. 87-88, 196-97). For Europeans of the 18th
century, the South Seas loomed as a kind of hedonistic dreamland in which
sexual pleasures (heterosexual) were freely available. Such dreams of a
sensual
Utopia still color our view of Hawaii and Tahiti. Only in the
20th century, however, did anthropologists begin to investigate the
homosexual aspects of Pacific cultures. It was found that the mahu
phenomena of relatively advanced Polynesia were different from the ritual
initiatory homosexuality of Melanesia, and that the Stone Age aborigines of
Australia formed a third sphere. Recently, Melanesian New Guinea has emerged
as an area of particular richness for evidence of homosexuality; see the
thorough bibliographical review in G. H. Herdt (1400). 1384. BAAL, JAN VAN. Dema: Description and Analysis of Nerindanim
Culture (Nev Guinea). The Hague: Mar- tinus Nijhoff, 1966. 988 pp. In this comprehensive ethnology
of a Melanesian group, the Dutch scholar presents adolescent boys
"subjected to homosexual intercourse" as part of an initiation
ritual (pp. 479-80). See also his: "The Dialectics of Sex in Merind-
anim Culture," in Gilbert H. Herdt (ed.), Ritualized Homosexuality in
Melanesia. (Berkeley: University of California Press, 1984), pp.
167-210. 1385. BERNDT, RONALD M., and CATHERINE H. BERNDT. Sexual
Behavior in Western Arnhem Land. New York:
Viking Fund, 1951. 247 pp. (Publications, 16) In this monograph on Australian
aborigine behavior, "Sexual Abnormality" (pp. 66-68) mentions
mutual masturbation and homosexual experiments among single boys who sleep in
a collective camp. 1386. BLEIBTREU-EHRENBURG,
GISELA. Mannbarkeitsriten: zur institutionellen
Päderastie bei Papuas und Melanesiern.
Berlin: Ullstein, 1980. 175 pp. Reviews the ethnological literature on homosexual
initia- tion rites in New Guinea and other parts of the world
where analogous customs occur. See also G. H. Herdt (ed.),below, 1387. BOUGE, J. L. "Un aspect du rôle rituel du "mahu" dans l'ancien Tahiti," Journal de la Société des
Océanistes, 11 (1955), 147-49. Ritual functions of the mahu
in pre-acculturation Tahiti. 1388. COOK, JAMES.
The Journals of Captain James Cook on His Voyages of Discovery.
Edited by J. C. Beagle- hole. Cambridge: Cambridge University Press, 1955-68.
4 vols. For Hawaii in 1779, see vol. 3,
part 1, pp. 509, 596, 624; part 2, pp. 1171-72,
1184. 1389. CREED, GERALD W. "Sexual Subordination: Institutionalized
Homosexuality and Social Control in Melanesia,"
Ethnology, 23 (1984), 157-76. "Ritualized
institutionalized homosexuality in New Guinea [is] a mechanism of social
control that operates to perpetuate a system of inequality based on sex and
age." 1390. DANIELSSON, BENGT, et al. "Polynesia's Third Sex: The Gay Life Starts in
the Kitchen,"
Pacific Islands Monthly (August 1978), 10-13. On the mahu
(French Polynesia),
fafalieti (Tonga), and fa'a fafine (Samoas).
See also the issues of October 1978, pp.8-9, and February 1983, pp. 11-12. 1391. DAVENPORT, WILLIAM, "Sexual Patterns and Their Regulation in a
Society of the Southwest Pacific," in: Frank A. Beach (ed.), Sex and
Behavior. New York: Wiley, 1965, 164-207. In an unnamed Melanesian group
(in the Santa Cruz Islands, east of New Guinea), male homosexuality is
engaged in extensively by nearly every male. There are two types: that
between young single males of similar age and that between older men and
boys. 1392. DEACON, A, B. Malekula: A Vanishing People in the New Hebrides. London: Routledge,
1934. See pp. 260-62 and 267 for ritualized homosexuality among the Big
Nambas, a Melanesian group. 1393. DU TOIT, BRIAN M. Akuna: A New Guinea Village Community. Rotterdam:
Balkema, 1975. 386 pp. Homosexual play among boys and girls continues until
the participants are sixteen or seventeen, dispite disapproval voiced by
adults (pp. 219-20). Enforced abstinence during pregnancy may result in
homosexuality in both sexes (p. 269). 1394. GLUCKMAN, LAURIE K. "Transcultural Considerations of
Homosexuality with Special Reference to the New Zealand Maori,"
Australian and New Zealand Journal of Psychiatry, 8 (1974), 121-25. Claims that homosexuality in both sexes was unknown
in New Zealand before European contact—an ex-silentio argument based on mere
lack of indigenous terms in missionary dictionaries and translations of the
Bible. See the critique by Manuel Arboleda G. and Stephen 0. Murray,
"The Dangers of Lexical Inference with Special Reference to Maori Homosexuality," JH,
12 (1986), 129-34. See also Gluckman, "Lesbianism in the Maori: A Series
of Three Interconnected Clinical Studies," Australian and New Zealand Journal
of Psychiatry, 1 (1967), 98-103. 1384. GODELIER, MAURICE. "Le sexe comme
fondement ultime de l'ordre social et cosmique chez les Baruya de
Nouvelle-Guinée," in A. Verdiglione, Sexualité et pouvoir.
Paris: Payot, 1976, pp. 268-306. Provides a symbolic contextualization of homoerotic activities in a Buruya New Guinea tribe. 1385. GRAY, J. PATRICK. "Growing Yams and Men: An Aspect of Kiman Male
Ritualized Behavior," JH, 11:3-4 (1985), 55-68. Explores the meaning of
ritualized homosexual behavior involving the transfer of sperm from older
males in a society of Kokpom Island near Irian Jaya (eastern New Guinea),
Indonesia. 1386. HAGE, PER. "On Male Initiation and Dual Organization in New
Guinea,"
Man, 16 (1981), 268-75. Contends that ritual homosexuality
in New Guinea stems from an underlying structure of "sexual
symmetry," which is also reflected in dual organizations, initiation
rites, and a "big man complex." See also Ann S. Meigs, "Male
Pregnancy and the Reduction of Sexual Opposition in a New Guinea Highlands
Society,"
Ethnology, 15 (1976), 393-407; and Harriet Whitehead, "The
Varieties of Fertility Cultism in New Guinea," American
Ethnologist, 13 (1986), 80-99. 1387. HARDMAN, EDWARD T. "Notes on Some Habits and Customs of the
Natives of the Kimberley District, Western Australia,"
Proceedings of the Royal Irish Academy, 17 (1888), 70-75. The boy at five years of age is
usually given as boy-wife to one of the young men. There is no doubt that the
two have sexual connection, but the natives "repudiate with horror and
disgust the idea of Sodomy." 1388. HERDT, GILBERT. Guardians of the Flutes: Idioms of Masculinity.
New York: McGraw-Hill, 1981. 382 pp. In-depth documentation and
analysis of a secret male cult practicing ritualized fellatio in a remote
tribe in the New Guinea highlands (the "Sambia"). While this study
is of great value as ethnology, some have questioned the introjection of
psychoanalytic concepts based in part on the ideas of Robert Stoller. See
also his: "Fetish and Fantasy in Sambia Initiation," in: Herdt
(ed.),
Rituals of Manhood (Berkeley:
University of California Press, 1982), pp. 44-98; and "Semen Depletion
and the Sense of Male- ness," Ethnopsychiatrica, 3
(1980), 79-116. 1389. HERDT, GILBERT H. (ed.), Ritualized Homosexuality in Melanesia. Berkeley: University of California Press, 1984. 409 pp. This major
work is a collective contribution to our knowledge of tribal homosexual
behavior. The first essay, by Herdt (pp. 1-82), is a comprehensive review of
the scholarly literature from 1862 to 1983 that must be consulted by anyone
concerned with the subject. The other eight contributors both summarize and
reconsider their own earlier work and evaluate the contributions of others.
It has been remarked that a number of the contributors reflect the concerns
of the "culture and personality" approach in anthropology, with its
psychoanalytic affinities. Also, as the title indicates, the book concerns
only the major phenomenon of ritual homosexuality in Melanesia, without
considering non-ritual or secular same-sex behavior. 1390. HOGBIN, HERBERT IAN. "Puberty to Marriage: A Study of the Sexual
Life of the Natives of Wogeo [New Guinea]," Oceania, 16 (1946),
pp. 185-209. Discusses homosexual behavior
among migrant workers (pp. 205-06). See also his: Transformation Scene: The Changing
Culture of a New Guinea Village (London: Routledge and Kegan
Paul, 1951; 326 pp.), pp. 190-93, 269. 1391. KABERRY, PHYLLIS M. Aboriginal Woman, Sacred and Profane. London: George
Routledge and Sons, 1939. 294 pp. Finds acceptance of close
relationships between women in Australian aborigines. 1392. KELLY, RAYMOND. Etoro Social Structure. Ann Arbor:
University of Michigan Press, 1980. Provides a contrast of three
neighboring tribes' use of oral, anal, and masturbatory homosexuality in
initiation rites with the ethnography of the Etoro (p. 80). 1393. LAYARD, JOHN. "Homo-eroticism in a Primitive Society as a
Function of the Self," Journal of Analytical Psychology, 4 (1959),
101-15. Argues that in Australia and
Oceania homosexual behavior functions as an incest substitute. 1394. LEVY, ROBERT ISAAC. Tahitians: Mind and Experience in the Society Islands.
Chicago: University of Chicago Press, 1973. 547 pp. Offers information on village mahu
transvestites and theri role, also noting an incipient "gay" role
(raerae). See pp. 38, 72-73, 116, 127, 130-41, 235-36, 239,
420, 471-73, 486. See also his: "The Community
Function of Tahitian Male Transvestites: A Hypothesis," Anthropological
Quar- terly, 44 (1971), 12-21. 1395. MACFARLANE, D. F. "Transsexual Prostitution in New Zealand:
Predominance of Persons of Maori Extraction," Archives
of Sexual Behavior, 13 (1984), 301-09. Based on 27 subjects, concludes
that 90% of the transsexual prostitute population of Wellington is Maori
(where they constitute only 9% of the total population). 1396. MATHEWS, R. H. "Native Tribes of Western Australia,"
Proceedings of the American Philosophical Society, 39 (1900),
123-25. After undergoing circumcision
and subincision, the man is assigned a boy who has not undergone the
operations and is a brother of the woman whom the man is entitled to claim as
his wife. The boy is used for pederastic purposes. See also his:
"Phallic Rites and Initiation Ceremonies of the South Australian
Aborigines," ibid., pp. 622-38; and "The
Bora,"
Journal of the Royal Anthropological Institute, 25 (1896),
318-39. 1397. MEAD, MARGARET. Growing Dp in New Guinea. New York: William Morrow, 1930. 215
pp. See pp. 193-99 for homosexual behavior among migrant workers. 1398. METRAUX, ALFRED. Ethnology of Easter Island, Honolulu: Bishop
Museum, 1940. 432 pp. Reports that "abnormal sexual relations between
women [were] tolerated and accepted" (p. 108). 1399. OLIVER, DOUGLAS L. A Solomon Island Society. Cambridge,
MA: Harvard University Press, 1955. 535 pp. Claims that sodomy was
introduced by outside natives, who learned the practice from white sailors
(pp. 498-99 1400. PURCELL, BRABAZON H. "Rites and Customs of Australian Aborigines," Verhandlungen der Berliner Gesellschaft für Anthropologie, Ethnologie, und Urgeschichte, 25 (1893), 286-89. Reports pedophilia in the Kimberley
District: sexual contact between "every useless member of the
tribe" and a boy about 5-7 years old (p. 287), as well as a ceremony in
which the youth is made to drink semen. 1401. RAVENSCROFT, A. G. B. "Some Habits and Customs of the Chingalee
Tribe, Northern Territory, S. A.," Transactions of the Royal Society of
South Australia, 15 (1892), 21-22. Old men are often accompanied
by one or two boys whom they jealously guard and with whom they "indulge
in the vice." 1402. ROHEIM, GEZA. "Psychoanalysis of Primitive Types," International
Journal of Psycho-analysis, 13 (1932), 1-224. Roheim, a Freudian specializing
in Australian ethnology, often referred to homosexual behavior in his publications.
Here he notes that the "boy wife" precedes his sister among the
Nambutji of Australia and is later given a sister of the older man. See also
his:
Children of the Desert: The Western Tribes of Central Australia,
Ed. by Werner Muensterberger (New York: Basic Books, 1974; 262 pp.), pp.183,
243-44, 247-48, 251. 1403. SCHIEFFELIN, EDWARD L. The Sorrow of the Lonely and the
Burning of the Dancers. New York: St. Martin's Press, 1976.
243 pp. Includes an ethnological
reconstruction of anal homosexual initiation rites among the Kaluli of New
Guinea. 1404. SPENCER, BALDWIN, and F. J. GILLEN. The Arunta. London:
Macmillan, 1927. 2 vols. In a primitive Australian
desert culture, boys were used to fulfil a family's obligation to provide a
wife. 1405. SUGGS, ROBERT C. Marquesan Sexual Behavior. New York: Harcourt
Brace, 1966. 251 pp. This study of the behavior of
an Austronesian group revises an earlier interpretation put forward by Ralph
Linton. 1406. THOMPSON, DENISE. Flaws in the Social Fabric: Homosexuals and Society in
Sydney. Sydney: Allen and Unwin (Australia), 1985. 220 pp. Sociological account of the
social management of homosexuality in the Australian city since the 19th
century. 1407. WILLIAMS, F. E. Papuans of the Trans-Fly. Oxford:
Clarendon Press, 1936. 450 pp. Although this study was preceded
by other more concise accounts, it was the first to draw widespread attention
to the importance of homosexual initiation in New Guinea. See pp. 182, 199, 200-04. D. SUBARCTIC CULTURES Towards the end of the 19th
century, travelers began to report that the shamanistic religious practices
of some tribes, especially in Siberia, involved ritual transvestism and
homosexuality. This phenomenon is related typologically—and
possibly historically—to the Amerindian berdache (see IV.E). 1419.
BILLINGS, JOSEPH. An Account of a Geographical and Astronomical Expedition to the
Northern Parts of Russia ... in the Tear 1785 . .. to 1794. London: Cadell and Davies, 1802. 332, 58 pp. Prepared for publication by Martin
Sauer. See pp. 160, 175 on Siberian tribes and the Eskimo. 1420. BLEIBTREU-EHRENBERG, GISELA. "Homosexualität und Transvestition in Schamanismus," Anthropos, 65 (1970), 189-228. Overview of research on Eurasian shamanism in relation to homosexuality and cross-dressing; brief English summary. See now her book Der Weibmann: Kultischer Geschlechtswandel im Schamanismus (Frankfurt am Main: Fischer, 1984; 200 pp.). 1421. BOGORAS, WALDEMAR (VLADIMIR BOGORAZ). The Chuk- chee. New
York: American Museum of Natural History, 1904-09. 3 parts (733 pp.) (Jessup
Expedition Report, 7) Landmark account of Siberian
tribal people, including discussion of homosexual shamanism (pp. 37, 44,
98-99, 415-16, 448-57). See also Bogoras' articles in American
Anthropologist, 3 (1901), 80-108; and 4 (1902), 577-683. 1422. CZAPLICKA, MARIE ANTOINETTE. Aboriginal Siberia: A Study in
Social Anthropology. Oxford: Clarendon Press, 1914. 374 pp. A pioneering anthropological
investigation which discusses the link between homosexuality and transvestism
in shamanism (pp. 243-53). 1423.
OHLMARKS,
AKE.
Studien zum Problem des Schamanismus. Lund: С.
W. К. Gleerup, 1939. 396 pp. On shamanism as a phenomenon of
sub-Arctic culture. Pp. 293-301 deal with change of sex and ritual
transvestism as traits of the shaman. The bibliography includes both
Scandinavian and Russian sources. In what is now the United
States, homosexual behavior attracted the attention of Europeans in the 18th
century, when the distinctiveness of the berdache (originally spelled
bardache, a French word derived from Persian) phenomenon was noted.
Affinities to the berdache—essentially a cross-dressing priest-like figure
who may or may not engage in homosexual behavior—have been found outside
North America, but the nature of the phenomenon is still being debated. Still
little known is non-berdache homosexuality among American Indians, as well
as acculturation types resulting from the reception of the gay lifestyle. 1424. ALLEN, PAULA GUNN.
"Lesbians in American Indian Cultures,"
Conditions, 7 (1981), 67-87. Subjective approach. A somewhat
shortened version appears in: T. Darty and S. Potter (eds.),
Women-identified Women (Palo Alto, CA: Mayfield, 1984), pp.
83-96. 1425. ANGELINO, HARRY, and CHARLES SHEDD. "A Note on Berdache," American
Anthropologist, 57 (1955), 121-25. Discusses some conceptual
problems in the research on the subject, including the term itself. For the latter,
see now Claude Courouve, "The Word ' Berdache,1"
Gay Books Bulletin, no. 8 (1982), 18-19. 1426. BLACKWOOD, EVELYN. "Sexuality and Gender in Certain Native
American Tribes: The Case of Cross-gender Females," Signs, 10:4 (Autumn
1984), 27-42. From evidence from thirty-three
tribes concludes that their position was not symmetrical with that of the
male berdache. 1427. BROCH, HARALD B. "A Note on Berdache among the Hare Indians of
Northwestern Canada," Western Canadian Journal of Anthropology,
7 (1977), 95-101. Shows berdache adaptations to
acculturation, including acquisition of new trades. 1428. CALLENDER, CHARLES, and LEE M. KOCHEMS. "The North American
Berdache,"
Current Anthropology, 24:4 (August-October 1983), 443-70. Thorough review and analysis of
the literature on the berdache phenomenon in 113 tribal groups, with comments
by other scholars and extensive bibliography. See also the earlier
bibliography compiled by Stephen Wayne Foster, included in J. Katz (ed.), Gay American
History (New York: Crowell, 1976), pp. 619-27. 1429. CATLIN, GEORGE. Letters and Notes on the Manners, Customs and
Conditions of the North American Indians, Written During Eight Years' Travel (1832-1839). New York: Dover, 1973. 2 vols. Reprint of the London 1844
edition, with numerous additional reproductions of the paintings. See vol.
1, pp. 96, 111-14; and (for the berdache dance), vol. 2, pp. 214- 15. 1430. CROWE, K. J.
A History of the Original Peoples of Northern Canada. Montreal:
McGill University Press, 1974. 226 pp. See pp. 72-90 for "strong
women" among Athapascan tribes. 1431. DEVEREUX, GEORGE. "Institutionalized Homosexuality of the Mojave
Indians,"
Human Biology, 9 (1937), 498-527. Identifies two types: the alyha
(men who dress as women and assume the female role) and hwame
(women who take male roles). Describes the ceremonies of initiation, physiological
and psychological patterns, courtship, and social aspects of their role. An
often-cited article by a Freudian anthropologist. 1432. FORGEY, DONALD G. "The Institution of the Berdache among the
North American Plains Indians," Journal of Sex Research,
11 (1975), 1-15. Attempts a synthetic treatment. 1433. FRANKLIN, JOHN, SIR. Narrative of a Second Expedition to the Shores of
the Polar Sea, in the Years 1825, 1826, and 1827. London: J. Murray, 1828. 320
& clvii pp. See pp. 305-06 for a rare early
reference to lesbianism among Amerinds. 1434. GREENBERG, DAVID F. "Why Was the Berdache Ridiculed?" JH,
12:3-4 (1985), 179-189. Finds that since apparent
ridicule of berdaches occurs during traditional joking activity, it need not
be interpreted as evidence that the Indians held negative views of
homosexuality. 1435. HAMMOND, WILLIAM A. "The Disease of the Scythians (morbus
feminarum) and Certain Analogous Conditions," American
Journal of Neurology and Psychiatry, 1:3 (1882), 339-55. An early attempt to understand
the berdache, in part through Herodotus. See also Henry Hay, "The
Hammond Report," ONE Institute Quarterly, 6 (1963), 1-21,
65-67. 1436. HENNEPIN, LOUIS. Nouvelle découverte d'un très grand pays situé dans l'Amérique entre le
Nouveau Mexique et la Mer Glaciale. Utrecht: G. Broedelet, 1697. 506 pp. See Chapter 33 (p. 217 ff.) on the "unnatural sins" of the Illinois
Indians. 1437. HILL, WILLARD WILLIAMS. "The Status of the Hermaphrodite and
Transvestite in Navaho Culture," American Anthropologist,
37 (1935), 273-79. Illustrates the fading of the
formerly honorific status of the berdache in this culture. See also his
"Notes on the Pima Berdache," ibid., 40
(1938), 338-40 (they lead a covert existence). 1438. HOLDER, A. B. "The Bote: Description of a Peculiar Perversion
Found among North American Indians," New York Medical Journal,
1 (1889), 623-25. "The word bo-te' ... is
used by the Absaroke Indians of Montana, and literally means 'not man, not
women.'" See also William J. Robinson, "The Bote," Journal
of Sexology and Psychoanalysis, 1 (1923), 544-46. 1439. JACOBS, SUE ELLEN.
"Berdache: A Brief Review of the Literature," Colorado Anthropologist,
1 (1968), 25-40. Seeks to pull together the
scattered literature on the subject. 1440. KROEBER, ALFRED. Handbook of the Indians of California.
Washington, DC: Government Printing Office, 1925. 995 pp. (Bureau of
Ethnology, Smithsonian Institution, Bulletin 78) A classic work of synthesis in
Anthropology; see pp. 46, 180, 497, 500, 647, 748, 803.
See also his article "Psychosis or Social Sanction,"
Character and Personality, 8 (1940), 204-15, esp. pp. 209-10. 1441. LABARRE, WESTON. The Ghost Dance: Origins of Religion.
New York: Dell, 1972. 677 pp. This ambitious and
controversial work contains a good deal on the berdache institution. 1442. LAFITAU, JOSEPH FRANÇOIS. Customs of the North American
Indians Compared with the Customs of Primitive Times. Edited and translated by William N. Fenton and
Elizabeth L. Moore. Toronto: Cham- plain Society, 1974. 2 vols. Translation of Moeurs des sauvages amériquains (Paris: 1724). The French Jesuit was
one of the first to address the berdache question on a comparative basis. 1443. LANDES, RUTH. The Mystic Lake Sioux: Sociology of
the Mdewakantonwan Santee. Madison: Wisconsin University Press,
1968. 224 pp. For Santee youths forced to
wear dresses at social dances, see pp. 206-07; see also pp. 29, 31-32, 57,
66, 112-13, 127-28, 153, 193. 1444. LANDES, RUTH. Ojibwa Sociology. New
York: Columbia University Press, 1937. 144 pp. A basic source for the female
berdache. 1445. LANTIS, MARGARET. "The Aleut Social System, 1750 to 1810."
In M. Lantis (ed.),
Ethnohistory in Southwestern Alaska and the Southern Yukon. Lexington:
University of Kentucky Press, 1970, pp. 139-301. See pp. 205-14 for open
acceptance of transvestites who did women's work. 1446. LURIE, NANCY 0. "Winnebago Berdache," American
Anthropologist, 55 (1953), 708-12. "Most informants felt that
the berdache was at one time a highly honored and respected person, but that
the Winnebago had become ashamed of the custom because white people thought
that it was amusing or evil." 1447. MCMURTRIE, DOUGLAS C. "A Legend of
Lesbian Love among the North American Indians," Urologic
and Cutaneous Review (April 1914),
192-93. A rare source for this period.
MILLER, JAY. "People, Berdaches, and
Left-handed Bears: Human Variations in Native America," Journal
of Anthropological Research, 38 (1982), 274-87. Attempts a structuralist
approach, regarded by some as eccentric.
OSGOOD, CORNELIUS. Ingalik Social Culture.
New Haven: Yale University Press, 1958. (Publications in Anthropology, 53).
289 pp. See pp. 222-23 for discussion of homosexual activity.
SIGNORINI, ITALO. "Transvestism and Institutionalized
Homosexuality in North America." In: Atti del XL Congresso
Internazionale degli America- nisti. Genoa: Tilgher, 1972, vol.
2, 153-63. Discussing a number of
neglected European sources, Signorini stresses the uniting of male and
female, serving to attain "totality" and acquire power. The sexual
ambiguity of the berdache commanded respect because it represented access
to socially needed qualities.
STEWART, OMER C. "Homosexuality among the
American Indians and Other Native Peoples of the World," Mattachine
Review, 6 (January 1960), 9-15, and (February 1960), 13-19. Broad survey of the berdache
and seemingly kindred phenomena on other continents.
STOLLER, ROBERT J. "Two Feminized Male American
Indians,"
Archives of Sexual Behavior, 5 (1976), 529-38. Two young adult American
Indians who wished to change sex.
WHITEHEAD, HARRIET. "The Bow and the Burden
Strap," in: Sherry S. Ortner and Harriet Whitehead (eds.), Sexual
Meaning: The Cultural Construction of Gender. New York:
Cambridge University Press, 1981, pp. 80-115. Emphasizing occupations and
prestige, regards the chief defining feature of the berdache role as
"doing women's work."
WILLIAMS, WALTER L. The Spirit and the Flesh: Sexual Diversity in
American Indian Culture. Boston:- Beacon, 1986. 312
pp. A comprehensive work,
synthesizing the existing literature with the author's fieldwork. Shows the
positive role of the berdache in tribal cultures and the survival of the
institution into today's world. See also his: "Persistence and Change
in the Berdache Tradition among Contemporary Lakota Indians," JH,
11:3-4 (1985), 191-200. F. MESO-AMERICAN AND SOUTH
AMERICAN INDIANS The Spanish conquistador
writers produced a certain quantity of hostile information on homosexual practices,
which were vigorously suppressed. In addition to European written records,
there is also a small quantity of surviving artistic evidence from
pre-Columbian societies. Indigenous homosexuality survived in areas untouched
by European conquest or was transformed into new forms adapted to the mestizo
culture of the cities (see "Latin America," III.O). Only recently
have a few anthropologists begun to collect data on contemporary homosexual
practices among indigenous peoples of the remote areas of South America.
ANGHIERA, PIETRO MARTIRE D'. The
Decades of the New World or West India. Translated by Richard
Eden. London: William Powell, 1555. For a description of Balboa's
vicious destruction of some forty effeminate Indians, members of a male harem
of the king of Quarequa, by sicking dogs on them, see fol. 89b- 90.
Anghiera's
De rebus oceanicis et orbe novo decades tres
(Basel, 1533) was one of the first histories of the discovery of America.
ARBOLEDA G., MANUEL. "Representaciones
artisticos de actividades homoeroticos en la ceramica Moche," Boletin
de Lima, 16 (1981), 98-107. Archaeological considerations
on pottery depicting homosexual acts from Moche, a pre-Inca kingdom of
northern Peru.
BANCROFT, kUBERT HOWE. The Works. San
Francisco: Bancroft, 1883-90. 39 vols. Vols. 1-5 are a reprint of The
Native Races of the Pacific States of North America (1875-76),
which includes a discussion of Mexico and Central America. See vol. 1, pp.
58, 81-82, 92, 415, 515, 585-86, 773-74; vol. 2, pp. 467-69, 664, 677-78;
vol. 5, p. 198.
BEALS, CARLETON. "Latin America, Sex Life
in," in: Albert Ellis and Albert Abarbanel (eds.), The
Encyclopedia of Sexual Behavior. New York: Hawthorn, 1967, pp.
599-613. In this general survey, see
esp. p. 605.
BEALS, RALPH L. "The Contemporary Culture of
the Cahita Indians," Bureau of American Ethnology Bulletin,
142 (1945). 244 pp. Yaqui and Nayo have reputations
for homosexuality, but themselves insist that only
mestizos practice it, except for one Mayo woman who reported lesbianism as
well as male homosexuality (p. 82). See also Beals: Cheran:
A Sierra Tarascan Village (Washington, DC: Government Printing Office, 1946), p. 177; and The
Comparative Ethnology of Northern Mexico before 1750 (Berkeley:
University of California Press, 1932), p. 205. 1448. BLAFFER, SARAH C. The Black Man of Zinacantan. Austin, University of Texas Press, 1972. 194 pp. In this
ethnographic study of a group in southern Mexico, see p. 8. 1449. BRICKER, VICTORIA REIFLER. Ritual Humor in Highland Chiapas.
Austin: University of Texas Press, 1973. 257 pp. For female impersonators and
sexual badinage in southeastern Mexico, see pp. 148-49, 185-87, 212. 1450. CALANCHA, ANTONIO DE LA. Cronica moralizada del Orden de San Augustin en el Peru, con suceso egenplares en esta monarquia. Barcelona: 1638. 968 pp. For the Jesuit's denunciation
of sodomy in the New World, see pp. 571-79. 1451. CASTANEDA DE NAGERA, PEDRO DE. Relation du voyage de Cibola y entrepris en 1540. Paris: A. Bertrand, 1838. 392 pp. For sodomy among the Indians of
northern Mexico, see pp. 150, 152, 155-56. 1452. CHAGNON, NAPOLEON A. Yanomamo. New York: Holt, 1977. 174 pp. In this Amazonian tribe
"some of the teen-age males have homosexual affairs with each
other" (p. 76). 1453. CHINAS, BEVERLY. "Isthmus Zapotec 'Berdache,'" ARGOH Newsletter,
7:2 (1980), 1-4. In a society in which women
have a prominent economic role, ira' muxe, a third sex, is accepted more readily than lesbian couples. 1454. CIEZA DE LEON, PEDRO DE. The Travels of Pedro Cieza de Leon, A. D. 1532-50,
Contained in the First Part of his Chronicle of Peru. Translated by C. R. Markham.
London: Hakluyt Society, 1864. 438 pp. In this first part of his
relation, Cieza detects sodomy in every province, esp. in what is now
Ecuador. He claims, however, that the Incas prohibited it. See also his: The
Incas. Translated by Harriet de Onis. (Norman: University of Oklahoma Press, 1959;
397 pp.), pp. 93, 113, 178-81, 293, 313-15. 1^67. CLASTRES, PIERRE. Chronique des Indiens Guayaki. Paris: Pion, 1972. 366 pp. On the Ache nomads of Paraguay, see
pp. 273-308. 1468. CLAVIGERO, FRANCISCO JAVIER. Storia antica del Messico.
Cesena: Gregorio Biasini, 1780-81. 4 vols. In this "potent
idealization of Mexican society" (B. Keen), Clavigero combats Cornelis
De Pauw's claims that toleration of sodomy weakened the Indians. See vol. 4,
pp. 195, 199-200. A somewhat unreliable English version was published in
London in 1787; the Spanish original did not appear until 1945. 1469. FERNANDEZ DE PIEDRAHITA, LUCAS. La historia general de las
conquistas del Nuevo Reino de Granada. Bogota: Imprensa de la
Editorial ABC, 1942. 4 vols. In what is now Colombia, among
the Laches, the sixth son was brought up as a girl (cusmo); see vol. 1,
pp. 25-26, 86. 1470. FOSTER, STEPHEN WAYNE. "A Bibliography of Homosexuality among
Latin-American Indians," Cabirion and Gay Books Bulletin,
no. 12 (1985), pp. 17-19. Lists about 110 items in five
languages. 1471.
FRIEDERICI,
GEORG.
Die Amazonen Amerikas. Leipzig: Verlag von Simmel & Co.,
1910. 25 pp. The author, a distinguished
Americanist of the first half of the century, mentions (pp. 7, 11-13, 19-20)
accounts of lesbianism among the native women of Brazil and New Granada as
one source of the Amazon legend in the New World. 1472. FRIEDERICI,
GEORG. Der Charakter der Entdeckung und Eroberung
Amerikas durch die Europäer: Einleitung zur Geschichte der Besiedlung
Amerikas durch die Völker der alten Welt.
Stuttgart: Verlag Friederich Andreas Perthes, 1925. 3 vols. See vol. 1, pp. 259-63 for the Spanish
conquistadors' rationale that the sodomy of the Indians justified their
subjection and enslavement. 1473. GARCILASO DE LA VEGA. The Inca: The Royal Commentaries
of the Inca. Translated by Maria Jolas; notes by Alain
Gheerbrandt. New York: Avon, 1964. 447 pp. The author (1539-1616), a scion
of the Inca nobility on his mother's side, wrote this account to record the
glorious traditions of his ancestors for a Spanish audience. For this
reason, perhaps, one need not take altogether at face value his insistence
that the Incas abhorred sodomy (pp. 103, 201, 216, 326-28). 1474. GOSSEN, GARY H. Chamulas in the World of the Sun: Time and Space in
a Maya Oral Tradition. Cambridge, MA: Harvard
University Press, 1974. 3Ö2 pp. For a typical exchange of sexual
badinage, see pp. 99-105. 1475. GREGOR, THOMAS. Anxious Pleasures: The Sexual Lives of an Amazonian
People. Chicago: University of Chicago Press, 1985. 223 pp. Although Mehinaku men disdain
homosexual contacts, they sometimes practice them with white men. However,
"myths and rituals suggest that there is a feminine core to the male
personality that is in normal times shouted down." See pp. 59-61. See
also Gregor's earlier ethnography (which this book complements),
Mehinaku: The Drama of Daily Life in a Brazilian Indian Village
(Chicago: University of Chicago, 1977; 382 pp.). 1476. GRIFFEN, WILLIAM B. Notes on Seri Indian Culture, Sonora, Mexico. Gainesville, FL:
University of Florida Press, 1959. 54 pp. (Latin American Monographs, 10) In
former times a man who took a woman's duties and lived like a member of the
opposite sex was thought to be very intelligent. Inverse behavior on the part
of women incurs disapproval (p. 33). 1477. GUERRA, FRANCISCO. The Pre-Columbian Mind: A Study into the Aberrant
Nature of Sexual Drives, Drugs Affecting Behaviour, and the Attitude towards
Life and Death, with a Survey of Psychotherapy in Pre- Columbian America. London: Seminar Press, 1971.
335 pp. Quoting extensively from post-Conquest sources, this work documents the attitudes of the Spaniards as well as their (often harshly disapproving) records of sodomy among the Indians. See esp. pp. 26-27, 34, 45, 222-29. 1478. HELFRICH, KLAUS. "Sexualität und Repression in der Kultur der Maya," Baessler-Archiv, N.S., 20 (1972), 139-71. Includes discusssion of Maya
bisexual gods, as well as a fieldwork report of sexual practices among the
Choi today, who ridicule homosexual behavior among mestizos. 1479. HIDALGO, MARIANA. La vida amorosa en el Mexico antiguo. Mexico City: Diana, 1979. 118 pp. In this
popular work, see "Homosexualidad y sodomia" (pp. 69-81). 1480. HUGH-JONES, STEPHEN. The Palm and the Pleiades: Initiation and Cosmology
in Northwest Amazonia. Cambridge: Cambridge University
Press, 1979. 332 pp. Claims that homosexual behavior
amounts only to joking play, which "does not entail sexual
satisfaction." See also: Christine Hugh-Jones, From the
Milk River: Spatial and Temporal Processes in Northwest Amazonia
(Cambridge: Cambridge University Press, 1979), pp.
160-61. 1481. Handbook of the South American Indians. New York: Cooper Square, 1963. 7 vols. In this standard reference
work, see vol. 1, pp. 160, 324; vol. 2, pp. 187, 400, 544, 710, 750, 805;
vol. 3, pp. 304, 337, 366; vol. 4, pp. 363, 379, 453, 467, 478, 486, 531;
vol. 5, pp. 588-89, 723, 757. 1482. KAUFMANN-DOIG, FEDERICO. Sexual Behaviour in Ancient
Peru. Lima: Kompaktos, 1979. 181 pp. General study by an
archaeologist of the evidence from ceramics (see esp. pp. 46-51, 90-91,
140-41). See also: Paul H. Gebhard, "Sexual Motifs in Prehistoric
Peruvian Ceramics," in: Theodore Bowie et al.,
Studies in Erotic Art (New York:
Basic Books, 1970), pp. 109-69. 1483. KEEN, BENJAMIN. The Aztec Image in Western Thought, New Brunswick, NJ:
Rutgers University Press, 1971. 668 pp. European writers tended to ascribe
sodomy stereotypically to Amerindians, without regard to nuances. A few
tribes seem to have been homophobic. See pp. 61-63, 83, 85, 87, 101, 111,
140, 149, 153, 171-72, 222. 1484. KRACKE, WAUD H. Force and Persuasion: Leadership in an Amazonian
Society, Chicago: University of Chicago Press, 1978. 322 pp. This study of the Kagwahu tribe
(Tupi speaking) of the Amazon River discusses homoerotic dreams; homosexual
tales about others; the fantasy that the passive partner is magically turned
into a woman; irrational jealousy and sadism as ways of coping with
homosexual feelings; the homoerotic component of male bonding; homosexual
attraction to the men dominated by the leader; and a psychoanalytic
interpretation of the role of the bisexual in personality integration and
conflict. See pp. 212-13, 221-25, 230-31, 241, 264-65. 1485. LABARRE, WESTON. The Aymara Indians of the Lake Titicaca Plateau.
Menasha, WI: American Anthropological Society Memoirs, 1948. (no. 68). 250 pp. Records the former existence of
male and female gender- crossing homosexuality as attested by an 18th-century
Jesuit dictionary. Provides no ethnographic report of homosexual behavior
today. See pp. 133-35. 1486. LATCHAM, R. E. "Ethnology
of the Araucanos," Journal of the Royal Anthropological Institute of
Great Britain and Ireland, 39 (1909), 334-70. "Pederasty was common
among the
machis (medicine men) an still is to a
great extent, though not so much as formerly. Those who exercise the office
are called hueye."
(p. 353). 1487. LÉVI-STRAUSS, CLAUDE. Tristes tropiques. Translated by John Weightman and Doreen Weightman.
New York: Atheneum, 1974. 425 pp. This anthropological classic by
a French scholar mingles personal experience with observations in Brazil. See
pp. 313-34, 356-57. See also his:
"The Social Use of Kinship Terms among Brazilian Indians," American
Anthropologist, 45 (1943), 395-401 ,
esp. p..
400; and "La vie familiale et sociale des Indiens Nambikwara," Journal
de la Société des Américanistes de Paris, 37 (1948), 75-76. 1488. LÔPEZ DE
GOMARA, FRANCISCO. "Hispania victrix: primera y segunda parte de la
Historia general de las Indias,"
Biblioteca de autores espanoles, 22 (1852), 155-455. See chapters 46, 47 and 224 on sodomy among the Indians. 1489. LUCENA SALMORAL, MANUEL. "Bardaje en una tribu Guahibo del Tomo," Revista Colombiana de Antropolo- gia, 14 (1966), 263-66. Reports interview with a
25-year-old man who dressed and worked as a women, and had been married to
his "sister's son." Compare the 1736 report of Juan Rivero on
Guahibo polygamy
(Historia de la misiones de los llanos de Casanare y los rios Orinoco y Meta, Bogota). 1490.
MAGALHÂES DE GANDAVO, PERO DE.
The Histories of Brazil. Translated by John B. Stetson, Jr. New York: Cortes Society, 1922. 2
vols. For females who follow all the
pursuits of men and have a female companion as wife, see vol. 2, pp. 89-90,
173. 1491. MONTESINOS, FERNANDO. Memorias antiguas, histor- iales y politicas del Peru. Madrid: Ginesta, 1882. 259 pp. A 17th-century writer reports
on Inda sodomy legends; see pp. 54, 85, 88-92, 102-04, 106, 115-16, 199-200. 1492. PARSONS, ELSIE CLEWS. Mitla, Town of the Souls and Other
Zapoteec-Speaking Pueblos of Oaxaca, Mexico. Chicago: University of Chicago
Press, 1936. 590 pp. See p. 437 (description of an
efeminado) and p. 506 (one man, a Spaniard, reputed to be a
"hermaphrodite"). 1493. REQUENA, ANTONIO. "Noticias y consideraciones sobre las anormalidades sexuales de los aborigenes americanos: sodomia," Acta
Venezolana, 1:1 (1945), 1-32. Useful survey of information by
tribe and source of homosexual practices among Amerinds. See the English
version: "Sodomy among Native American Peoples," Gay
Sunshine, no. 38-39 (Winter 1279), 37-39. 1494. REICHEL-DOLMATOFF, GERARDO. Amazonian Cosmos: The Sexual
and Religious Symbolism of the Tukano Indians. Chicago: University of Chicago Press, 1971. 290 pp. The Desana of Colombia "operate cultural mechanisms that produce a very marked
sexual repression." Their world view focuses on intense struggle between
the sexes. They also have a high incidence of homosexuality. See pp. 19-
20, 68, 244. 1495. ROMOLI, KATHLEEN. Balboa of Darien. Garden City, NY:
Doubleday, 1953. 431 pp. For the conquistador's
murderous reaction to indigenous homosexuality, see pp. 55, 157, 217. 1496. SCHNEEBAUM, TOBIAS. Keep the River on Your Right. New York: Grove, 1969.
184 pp. This book purports to give an account of a New Yorker's
stay among a wholly homosexual tribe in the upper Amazon. Doubts have been
expressed about the authenticity of this report. 1497. SORENSON, ARTHUR P. "Linguistic Exogamy and Personal Choice in
the Northwest Amazon," Illinois Studies in Anthropology, 14
(1984), 180-93. Occasional sex is regarded as
behavior to be expected among male friends. 1498. THOMPSON, JOHN ERIC S. Maya History and Religion. Norman: University of Oklahoma
Press, 1970. 415 pp. Records a wooden sculptural
group representing two men engaged in sodomy (p.21). See also pp. 46, 286. 1499. VALDIZÄN, HERMILIO, and ANGEL MALDONADO. La medicina popular peruana:
contribuciön al folklore medico del Peru. Lima: Torres Aguirre,
1922. 3 vols. For sexual folklore, see pp.
310-30, esp. the list of terms on p. 314. 1500. VILLAVICENCIO, VICTOR, LUCIO. La vida sexual del indigeno
peruano. New ed. Lima: 1966. 110 pp. Holds that in old Peru sodomy
generally had a religious character (pp. 73-77). 1501. WAGLEY, CHARLES. Welcome of Tears. New York: Oxford
University Press, 1977. 328 pp. Study of a southern Amazonian
tribe, the Tupirape, where until recently men had engaged in anal intercourse
(p. 160). 1502. WILBERT, JOHANNES. Survivors of Eldorado: Four Indian Cultures of
South America. New York: Prae- ger, 1972. 212 pp. Among the Yanoama homosexuality
occurs between women, but is considered repulsive (p. 55). Among the Warao
references to homosexual acts appear in oral literature. Male transvestites
occur; the trait is supposed to run in families. The transvestites are not
persecuted. 1503. WILBERT, JOHANNES, and KARIN SIMONEAU (eds.). Folk
Literature of the Ge Indians. Los Angeles: UCLA Latin American
Center, 1984. Vol. 2. 684 pp. From "The Origin of Women": In the
beginning there were only men who practiced homosexual intercourse. One of
them became pregnant, but was unable to give birth and died. The supernatural
origin of women ensued. V. TRAVEL Although the link has never
been adequately studied, it seems that there is an affinity between
homosexuality and travel. Often dissatisfied with opportunities in his own
country or region, the male homosexual yields to the "grass is
greener" syndrome. Having been accustomed at home to combine surface
conformity with a covert quest of the unconventional, he may find it easier
to "fit in" abroad than does the ordinary tourist. There too he may
discover, at least on a short visit, sexual opportunities harder to find in
his own country. The outsider's ignorance of the rules serves as an excuse
for violating them--a violation that the natives affect to find quaint rather
than offensive. A related phenomenon is the prominence of homosexual
contacts during wartime, which brings its own suspension of peacetime norms.
The travel literature pertinent to homosexuality begins in the 16th century.
Only a few representative examples are cited here; others appear in the
sections concerned with the countries and regions visited (e.g.,Islamic
Countries, III.P; China, III.Q; Japan, III.R.; South and Southeast Asia,
III.S; Africa, IV, B; Pacific Societies, IV, C; Meso-America and South
America, IV, F). 1504. CAMUS, RENAUD. Notes sur les manières du temps. Paris: P. 0. L., 1985. 412 pp. Modem moral
reflections based on the novelist's travels in a number of countries. 1505. CHURCHILL, AWNSHAM, and JOHN CHURCHILL (eds.). A
Collection of Voyages and Travels ... London: Wal- thoe, 1732.
6 vols. In this massive anthology, see
vol. 1, pp. 68, 231; vol. 2, p. 235; vol. 3, p. 522; vol. 5, pp. 689, 703;
vol. 6, p. 685. 1506. DE TERRA, HELMUT. Humboldt: The Life and Times of Alexander von
Humboldt, 1769-1859. New York:- Knopf, 1955.
386 pp. Life of the polymath German
scientist, explorer, statesman, and homophile. 1507. FARIA E SOUSA, MANUEL DE. Âsia Portuguesa. Porto: Livraria Civilizaçâo, 1945-47. 6 vols. A collection of Portuguese
travel narratives from the 16th and 17th centuries. See vols. 2 and 3 on
sodomy in Pegu (Burma), Japan, and Celebes (Indonesia). 1504. GEMELLI CARRERI, GIOVANNI FRANCESCO. Giro del mondo.
Naples: 1699-1700. 6 vols. Account of travels around the
world, including Turkey, Persia, India, China, the Philippines, and New
Spain. 1505. GOMES VIANA, ANTONIO JULIO. A homossexualidade no mundo.
Lisbon: The author, n. d. [1979-81?]. 2 vols. Observations by the author, a
world traveler, arranged by country and supplemented by secondary sources. 1506. HOCQUENGHEM, GUY. Le gay voyage: guide et regard homophile sur les grands métropoles. Paris: Albin Michel, 1980. 238 pp. A French novelist and
homosexual theorist's impressions of Berlin, Amsterdam, New York, Rome, and Rio de Janeiro. 1507. HOUGH, RICHARD A. The Bounty. New York: Penguin, 1984. 293
pp. For observations on the
emotional relationship between Captain William Bligh and Fletcher Christian
(culminating in the mutiny of 1789), see pp. 34-35, 42, 55, 90, 273- 78. This
is a new edition of a book first published in 1972. 1508. HUNTFORD, ROLAND. Scott and Amundsen: The Race to the South Pole. New York: Putnam, 1980. Includes discussion of the homosexuality of
Sir Clements Markham, president of the Royal Geographical Society. 1509. LE GOLIF, LOUIS ADHEMAR TIMOTHEE. The Memoirs of a Buccaneer. Translated and edited by Malcolm Barnes. London:
Allen and Unwin, 1954. 235 pp. Rare account of homosexual
behavior among 17th-century pirates in the West Indies. 1510. LITHGOW, WILLIAM. The Totall Discourse of the Rare Adventures and
Painful Peregrinations. Glasgow: P. MacLehouse, 1906. 448 pp. A Scotsman reports on sodomy in
Italy and the Turkish Empire during travels, 1609-22. 1511. PSALMANAZAR, GEORGE. Memoirs of **** commonly known by the Name of
George Palmanazar, a Reputed Native of Formosa. London: R. Davis, 1714. 364. Purports to jbe the memoirs of
a convert to Christianity, with observations on homosexual behavior on the
island of Formosa (Taiwan) and other countries visited. 1512. RAYFIELD, DONALD. The Dream of Lhasa: The Life of Nikolay
Przhevalsky, Explorer of Central Asia. Columbus: Ohio University Press, 1977. 221 pp. Life
of the Russo-Polish soldier-explorer Przewalski (1839-88), who was
homosexual. 1517. WHITE,
EDMUND. States of Desire: Travels in Gay America. New York: E. P.
Dutton, 1980. 336 pp. A noted homosexual novelist, then residing in
Manhattan, reports on his observations of gay life in a number of American cities.
While his comments are sometimes penetrating, White's stay in most of the
places mentioned was too short for him to permit him to draw a convincing
profile. The 18th century saw the
appearance of a minor genre of expose literature treating the
"naughty" side of life in the great cities of Europe, especially
London and Paris. As late as the first half of the 20th century, however,
this literature included only incidental or ambiguous mention of homosexual
places and pleasures. At some point, which is now impossible to determine,
gay people began to make their own summary lists, a kind of samizdat
multiplied only in carbon copies or through the mimeograph, and sold--if at
all—only surreptitiously. This clandestinity helped to protect the
establishments themselves, which would suffer police harassment if their
character were too widely advertised. In any event, after World War II such
lists began to make their way into print—eventually blossoming (in tandem
with the growth of gay entrepreneurship itself) into thick tomes of hundred
of pages. Subject to social and legal pressures, as well as rapid changes of
fashion, the life cycle of most gay and lesbian meeting places is short. In
historical retrospect, the guides help to reconstruct the "homo-geography"
of former times. See also XIV.L on the so-called gay ghettos. 1518. The Advocate Gay Visitors Guide to Los Angeles. San Mateo, CA: Liberation
Publications, 1982. 157 pp. Organized by topic, this
pocket-sized paperback includes general information and addresses for the
visitor, as well as ones of specific interest to gay men and lesbians in the
greater Los Angeles area. Also covers Palm Springs. 1520. The Advocate Gay Visitors Guide to San Francisco. San Mateo, CA: Liberation
Publications, 1982. 155 pp. Similar to the preceding.
Provides a chapter on gay history in the city. Also covers Russian River and
side trips. 1521. BABILONIA.
Italia gay 1984. Milan: Edizioni Moderne, 1984. 252 pp. Listings by city for Italy
prepared by the editors of the country's leading gay monthly. In addition,
provides data for metropolitan centers in other European nations. 1522. BARD, BRICE (BRUCE). Le guide gris (The Grey Guide), Ninth edition. San Francisco: Mattachine Society, 1972. 249 pp.
World-wide guide (excluding the United States) of gay entertainment spots
and meeting places. First issued in 1958. 1523. BAXANDALL, LEE. World Guide to Nude Beaches
and Recreation, New York: Harmony House, 1983. 220 pp. Up-to-date guide to these sometimes hard-to-find beaches, with reports
on gay status where appropriate. 1524.
Berlin von hinten. Berlin: Bruno
Gmünder Verlag, 1981. 256 pp. Offers well-informed articles on gay history in Berlin by Manfred
Herzer, Peter Schult, and others, as well as directory listings by category. 1525. Best Guide to Great Britain 1987. Amsterdam: Acolyte Press, 1986. 228 pp. The most comprehensive guide to gay Britain, reflecting extensive
visits and research. 1526. Bob Damron's Address Book 1985. San Francisco: Bob Damron Enterprises, 1985. 460 pp. Pocket guide emphasizing places of sexual contact (commercial
establishments and cruising spots) for gay men in the U.S. and Canada. 1526A. BOUCHARD, ALAIN. Le guide gay du Québec. Third ed. Montreal: Editions Homeureux, 1983. 130 pp. About
two-thirds of the contents of this guide, written by an established
French-Canadian author, pertain to Montreal and environs. 1527. BURNS, RICHARD and others. Gay Jubilee: A Guide to Gay
Boston—Its History and Resources. Boston: Lesbian and Gay Task Force, 1980. 64 pp. Includes historical notes as well as contemporary listings. 1528. COX, CHRISTOPHER. A Key West Companion. New York: St. Martin's Press, 1983. 214 pp. A literate narrative history
and guide to the Florida resort. 1529. Eurogay 86: Pocket Guide to Gay Europe. Halbaek, Denmark: Coq International, 1986. 229 pp. Concise listings on a country-by-country barsis. 1530. FOERSTER,
K.-J. Gay Guide 1981: Reiseführer fur die Bundesrepublik
Deutschland, Schweiz und Oesterreich.
Berlin: Foerster, 1980. 320 pp. Lists hotels, bars, bathhouses, and other places of accomodation and
entertainment in West Germany, Switzerland, and Austria. 1531. Frankfurt/Offenbach/Main/Wiesbaden von hinten. Berlin: Bruno Gmiinder Verlag, 1984. 224
pp. Addresses,
with some historical notes, for these West German cities. 1532. GaYellow Pages. Fourteenth ed. New York: Renaissance House, 1985.
252 pp. Carefully edited directory of service organizations and commercial
establishments for gay men and lesbians in the United States and Canada. A
standard work because of its thorough and reliable coverage by state and city
with brief annotations. Includes national and local periodical publications
and newsletters. Also published in regional editions. 1533. GAI PIED HEBDO. Guide Gai pied 85. Paris: Gai Pied, 1985. 290 pp. Prepared by the staff of the leading French gay weekly, this is the
fullest gay guide to France (with some additional material on Switzerland and
Belgium). First issued in 1983 as Guide France. Although primarily directed at gay men, the present
edition includes some women's addresses, 1534. Gay German Guide 1986. Hamburg: Pink Rose Press, 1985. 412 pp. Listings for Germany, mainly of places of entertainment, by postal
code (pp. 33-241); the remainder of the book is a somewhat patchy "Gay
Guide International." 1535. Gay Scandinavia 1983. Holbaeck, Denmark: COQ International, 1983. 128 pp. Text in Danish, English and German. Covers Denmark, Finland, Iceland,
Norway, and Sweden. 1536. GLENCROSS, PETER (ed.). Best Guide to Amsterdam 1986. Amsterdam: Eden Cross, 1985. 224 pp. Easygoing, but
informative guide to Amsterdam for foreign gay male visitors. 1537. Guild Guide 1964. Washington, DC: Guild Press, 1964. 93 pp. State-by-state listing of gay meeting places in the United States
issued by a well-known porno publisher of the period. 1538.
Hamburg von hinten. Berlin: Bruno
Gmiinder Verlag, 1982. 256 pp. In addition to directory chapters, contains valuable information on
gay history in the Hanseatic city. 1539. HEYSLIN, PHILIPPE, and MARC BERARD. Paris gay province. Paris: Henri Veyrier, 1983. 157 pp. Three-fifths of
this guide concern Paris, the rest covers France selectively by provinces. 1540. HOMOSEXUAL INFORMATION CENTER. Directory of Homosexual
Organizations and Publications. Sixth ed. Hollywood, CA: HIC, 1982. 62 pp. About 1000 entries for the United States and Canada, with useful
category index. 1541. HORN, SANDY. Gala's Guide International. Twelfth ed. New York: Gaia's Guide, 1986. 300 pp. Comprehensive guide to places to go for women in North America,
Europe, Australia, New Zealand and some Latin American countries. 1542. HUNTER, JOHN FRANCIS (pseud, of John Paul Hudson). The Gay Insider USA. New York: Stonehill, 1972. 629 pp. Heroic one-man job, of interest for the author's opinions which
reflect the gay liberation/counter-culture mood of the period. See also his: The Gay Insider: A Hunter's
Guide to New York and a Thesaurus of Phallic Lore (New York: Traveller's Companion, 1971; 300 pp.). 1543. Incognito guide: Europe, Méditerranée. Paris: A.S.L., 1965. 48 pp. With comments in English, this guide to gay meeting places was much
used by American and British travelers in the period. An enlarged ed. (71 pp.)
appeared in 1966. 1544. KENT, KIM (ed). Eos-Guide 69. Fourth ed. Copenhagen: Eos, 1968. 259 pp. Alphabetical listings, by city, of gay meeting places throughout the world, prepared by a Danish gay leader and entrepreneur. The first ed. appeared in 1966. 1545.
Köln von hinten. Berlin: Bruno
Gmünder Verlag, 1983. 256 pp. Includes articles on gay history in Cologne, as well as a directory
arranged by category. 1546.
Lesbische Informatie Boekje
'85/'86. Amsterdam: COC-Magazijn, 1985. 74 pp. Comprehensive listing of groups, meeting places, and cultural
facilities for lesbians and women generally in the Netherlands. 1547. Man to Man: Gay/Lesbian Gyuide to Holland 1986/87. Amsterdam: City Map Produkties, 1986. 104 pp. Comprehensive listing of
Dutch cities with annotations in English. English and French. There is an
appended Belgian section, mainly covering the Flemish part of the country. 1548.
MARCUS,
ERIK, and PAUL VERSTRETEN. Amsterdam in je
kontzak: een homo-stadsgids. Amsterdam: Stichting JIF, 1984. 288 pp. Comprehensive listings of businesses, places of entertainment, cultural centers and organizations, etc., preceded by historical and interpretive articles on the Dutch city. Male emphasis. 1549. München von hinten. Berlin: Bruno Gmünder Verlag, 1983. 224 pp. Offers essays as well as listings by category for the Bavarian capital
and environs. 1550. NERF, SWASARNT, PETER ASTI, and DAPHNE DILLDOCK
(pseuds.). The Gay Girl's Guide: A Primer for Novices: A Review for Roues. [New York?:] Phallus, 1949.
69 pp. Campy mimeographed guide for gay men, with sections on vocabulary and
technique. The main part, a directory of "where to make contacts"
begins on p. 46 (bars, bathhouses, and public places). There were at least
two subsequent eds., in 1950 and in the mid-1950s. 1551. New England Community Guide for Gay Males and
Lesbians, 1983. Boston: The Community Guide, 1983. 96 pp. Contains short articles, as well as listings of places of
entertainment, businesses, and service organizations. 1552. Odysseus 85: An Accommodations Guide for Gay Men. Flushing, NY: Odysseus Enterprises, 1985. 273 pp. Lists and describes some 450 places to stay, especially guest houses,
small hotels, and ranches, mainly in North America. 1553. Party Guia Gay de Espana. Barcelona: Ediciones Amaika, 1984. 130 pp. Annotated guide to bars, clubs, bathhouses, restaurants, cinemas, and
outdoor cruising places in major Spanish cities and resort areas. 1554. Places of Interest 1984: Gay Guide with Maps, USA
and Canada. Phoenix: Ferrari Publications, 1984. 238 pp. Maps make this guide esp. useful for the motorist. 1555. Places of Interest to Women. Fourth ed. Phoenix: Ferrari Publications, 1985. 145
pp. Covers about 700 cities in the U.S., Canada, and the Caribbean. 1556. RAND, BILL, and BO SIEWART. Barfly. Los Angeles: Advocate, 1972. 2 vestpocket vols. Guide to "more than 1000" gay bars in the U.S. (also some
Canadian and Mexican listings) divided into an eastern and western half. 1557. STAMFORD, JOHN A. (ed.). Spartacus Guide for Gay Men. Amsterdam: Spartacus, 1984. 784 pp. This hefty tome—virtually the
standard work—covers bars, clubs, discos, saunas, beaches, cruising places,
hotels, restaurants, cafes, and gay. stores
throughout the world (except for the U.S. section, which is quite brief).
Useful for Third World countries not covered elsewhere, though some
complaints have been made that the information is not always complete or
up-to-date. Texts in English, German, French, and Spanish. 1558. TAYLOR, JEFF. Gay Guide for the Pacific Northwest. Bellevue, WA: The author, 1975. 32 pp. Covers Seattle, Portland, and
Vancouver, BC. 1559.
VOIGT,
WOLFGANG, and KLAUS HEINRICH. Hamburg ahoi! Berlin:
Verlag Rosa Winkel, 1982. 300 pp. Contains articles on the history of gay life in Hamburg since the 18th
century, together with illustrations and listings. VI. HUMANITIES Researchers in the field of homosexuality in art have tended to
concentrate on a few broad cultual areas: classical antiquity, the
Renaissance, modern Europe and north America (see the following sections),
and Islam (see III.P). While certain themes from classical mythology and
history are homosexual in content, and many individual artists have been homosexual
or lesbian, attempts to define a distinctive homosexual sensibility in the
fine arts have proved elusive. 1560. AYMAR, BRANDT. The Young Male Figure in Paintings, Sculptures, and
Drawings from Ancient Egypt to the Present. New York: Crown, 1970. 247 pp. Collection of 275 reproductions, chiefly of mainstream works, arranged
historically (separate section on Asia). No overt eroticism. 1561. BECKER, RAYMOND DE. The Other Face of Love. Translated by Margaret Crosland and Alan Daventry. New York: Grove
Press, 1969. 209 pp. Although this book, originally published in Paris as L'erotisme d'en face in 1964, seems intended as a general history of
same-sex love, it is valuable mainly for its varied complement of
illustrations. 1562. BEURDELEY, CECILE (ed.). L'Amour bleu. New York: Rizzoli, 1978. 304 pp. Lavishly produced volume offering 290 illustrations of works of art from the Greeks to the present, interspersed with apt selections from literary classics. Male interest. 1563. Bilderlexikon der Erotik. Vienna: Verlag für Kulturforschung, 1928-31. 4 vols. Apart from the definitions, this pictorial lexicon presents a
wide-ranging repertory of visual material for the whole field of erotic
imagery. The work was reissued in Hamburg, 1961, in 8 volumes, with two
supplementary volumes prepared by Armand Mergen. 1564. DYNES, WAYNE. "Gay Art Research: A
Bibliographical Review," Cabirion and Gay Books Bulletin, no, 11 (Fall-Winter 1984), 8-9. Selective presentation with running
commentary. 1565. KIEFER, OTTO. Der schöne Jungling in der bildenden Kunst aller Zeiten, Berlin: Adolf Brand/Der
Eigene, 1922. 68 pp. Compilation of art works depicting beautiful
youths. 1557. LUCIE-SMITH, EDWARD. Eroticism in Western Art. New York: Praeger, 1972. 273 pp. Fluent survey of major aspects of European high art, marred by some
glib Freudian assertions. See pp. 84-87, 130-33, 180-81, 202-07, 234-36,
264-65, 272. 1558. RAWSON, PHILIP. Erotic Art of the East: The Sexual Theme in
Oriental Painting and Sculpture. New York: G. P. Putnam's Sons, 1968. 380 pp. Offers nearly 300
illustrations (interspersed with classic texts) from the major art traditions
of Asia. Like most such works, this volume scants homoerotic aspects. 1559. SASLOW, JAMES. "Closets in the Museum:
Homophobia and Art History," in: Karla Jay and Allen Young (eds.), Lavender Culture. New York: Jove, 1978, 215-27. On the obscuring of homosexual themes and lives in art by art
historians seeking to preserve their own respectability. 1560. WALTERS, MARGARET. The Nude Male: A New Perspective. New York: Paddington Press, 1978. 352 pp. Feminist study of the nude from the Greeks to the present, complementing Lord Kenneth Clark's resolutely asexual The Nude, while proffering some questionable views as to how homosexual men view erotic art. A similar perspective appears in: Sarah Kent, "The Erotic Male Nude," in: S. Kent and J. Morreau (eds.), Women's Images of Men (London: Writers and Readers, 1985), pp. 75-105. For bibliography on the larger problem, see Andreas Kuntz, Der blosse Leib: Bibliographie zur Nacktheit und Körperlichkeit (Frankfurt: Europäische Hochschulschriften, 1985; 260 pp.).
B. ART: ANCIENT AND MEDIEVAL The prominence of homoerotic elements in Greek civilization as a
whole has assured the salience of such themes in art, especially in vase painting.
In other media, however, such as sculpture, the professional reticence of
classical scholars has hindered the foregrounding of relevant themes and
aspects. 1570. BEAZLEY, JOHN DAVIDSON, SIR. "Some Vases in the Cyprus
Museum," Proceedings of the British Academy, 33 (1947), 197-244. Under this innocuous title is hidden a discussion
and classification of Greek vases showing male-male court- ship scenes. Beazley's list is supplemented by Kurt Schauenberg, "Erastes und Eromenos auf einer Schale des Sokles," Archäologischer Anzeiger (1965), 845-67. 1571. BOARDMAN, JOHN, and EUGENIO LA ROCCA. Eros in Greece. New York: Erotic Art Book Society, 1977. 175 pp. Picture book offering some male-male examples from ancient Greek art
(chiefly vase paintings). 1572. BONGHI JOVINO, MARIA. "Una tabella Capuana con
ratto di Ganimede," in: Hommages à Marcel Renard. Brussels: Collection Latomus, 1969, vol. 3, pp. 66-78. On a newly discovered representation of Zeus abducting Ganymede. 1573. BRENDEL, OTTO J. "The Scope and Temperament of
Erotic Art in the Greco-Roman World," in: Theodore Bowie (ed.), Studies in Erotic Art. New York: Basic Books, 1970, pp. 3-107. Well-documented account by an archaeologist of the state of the
question, somewhat slighting the hômosexual element . 1574. BRUNEAU, PHILIPPE. "Ganymede et l'aigle: images, caricatures et parodies animales du rapt," Bulletin de Correspondance Hellénique, 86 (1962),
193-228. Account of caricatures of Zeus' abduction of Ganymede in later Greek
art; complements H. Sichtermann, below. 1575. BRUNNSAKE, STURE. The Tyrant-slayers of Kritios and Nesiotes. Second ed. Stockholm: Svenska Institutet i Athen, 1971. 189 pp. Art historical account of the important group created in 477 B.C. to commemorate the heroic Athenian male couple Harmodios and Aristogeiton. See also Burkhard Fehr, Die Tyrannentöter, oder, kann man der Demokratie ein Denkmal setzen? (Frankfurt am Main: Fischer, 1984; 82 pp.). 1576.
CLAIRMONT, CHRISTOPH.W.
Die Bildnisse des Antinous: ein Beitrag zur Porträtplastik unter
Kaiser Hadrian. Rome: Schweizerisches Institut,
1966. 62 pp. Standard work on the surviving corpus of sculptural portraits of
Hadrian's favorite, who died tragically in A.D. 130. 1577. DAVIES, MARK I. "The Tickle and Sneeze of
Love," American Journal of Archaeology, 86 (1982), 115-18. On a painted,
inscribed vase by Duris in the Louvre. 1578. DELCOURT, MARIE. Hermaphroditéa: Recherches sur l'être double promoteur de la fertilité
dans le monde classique. Brussels, 1966. 76 pp. Provides a typology of the Hermaphrodite. This monograph complements her Hermaphrodite: Myths and Rites of the Bisexual
Figure in Antiquity (London: Studio Books, 1961; 109 pp.). 1579. DYNES, WAYNE. "Orpheus without Eurydice," Gai Saber, 1:3/4 (1978), 267-73. Overview, with references, of the homoerotic Orpheus in Greece, Rome,
and Renaissance Europe. 1580. FORSYTH, ILENE H. "The Ganymede Capital at
Veze- lay," Gesta, 15 (1976), 241-46. Analyzes a 12th-century Romanesque carved capital depicting the
Abduction of Ganymede, interpreting it as referring to monastic oblates. 1581. GRANT, MICHAEL. Eros in Pompeii: The Secret Rooms of the National
Museum in Naples. New York: Morrow, 1975. 170 pp. Presents 160 color plates made from photographs taken by Antonia Mulas
of explicit works of painting and sculpture, a few of them homoerotic. 1582. IMMERWAHR, H. R. "A Lekythos in Toronto and the
Golden Youth of Athens," Studies in Attic Epigraphy, History and Topography
Presented to Eugene Vanderpool (Hesperia Supplement, 19, 1982), 59-65. A painted vase and
its connections. 1582A. JOHNS, CATHERINE. Sex or Symbol: Erotic Images of Greece and Rome. Austin: University of Texas Press, 1982. 160 pp.
Fluent, but somewhat superficial illustrated account of ancient erotic art.
Homosexuality is treated, oddly, in the chapter "Men and Beasts"
(pp. 97-114). 1583.
KAEMPF-DIMITRIADOU, SOPHIA.
Die Liebe der Götter in der attischen Kunst des 5. Jahrhunderts Chr. Basel: Antike Kunst, 1979. 125 pp. See pp. 7-21 and 76-92 for representations in vase painting of boys beloved of the gods, with catalogue of works. See also her article: "Zeus und Ganymed auf einer Pelike des Hermonax," Antike Kunst, 22 (1979), 49-54. 1584. KOCH-HARNACK, GUNDEL. Knabenliebe und Tierge- schenke. Berlin: Mann, 1983. 288 pp. Analysis of scenes in
vase paintings showing gifts (rabbits, roosters, foxes, etc.) presented by
the older wooer to the desired boy, with cross-cultural reflections. Some
related material appears in Dietrich von Bothmer, The Amasis Painter and His
World (New York:
Thames and Hudson, 1985). 1585.
KUNZE, EMIL. "Zeus und Ganymedes: eine
Terrakottagruppe," in: Hundertstes
Winckelmanns-Programm der Archaeologischen Gesellschaft zu Berlin.
Berlin: 1940, pp. 25-50. Account of the discovery and formal properties of a
major sculpture found at Olympia. 1586. LEGG, W. DORR. "The Sodomy Rite," ONE Institute Quarterly, 1:3 (1958), 98-101. Detects homosexual implications in the Altamira and other cave
paintings. 1587. MARCADE, JEAN. Eros kalos: Essay on Erotic Elements in Greek Art. New York: Nagel, 1962. 167 pp. Lavishly illustrated coffee-table book with some relevant material.
See also the companion volume: Roma amor: Essay on Erotic Elements in Etruscan and
Roman Art (New York: Nagel, 1961; 129 pp.). 1588. MILLER, STELLA G. "Eros and the Arms of
Achilles," American Journal of Archaeology, 90 (1986), 159-70. Beginning with a late-5th-century vase from Olynthus, reconstructs and
iconographical scheme in which the figure of Eros represents the
love-friendship of Achilles and Patroclus. 1589. MOON, WARREN G. (ed.). Ancient Greek Art and Iconography. Madison: University of Wisconsin Press, 1983. 346 pp. See pp. 147-51
(by Jiri Frei) and 226 (by Eva C. Keuls). 1590. NAPOLI, MARIO. La Tomba del Tuffatore: La scoperta della grande
pittura greca. Bari: De Donato, 1970. 213 pp. Documents the
discovery of Greek frescoes in a tomb at Paestum in Campania, including one showing male
lovers banquetting. See esp. 124-28. 1591. PINNEY, G. FERRARI. "For the Heroes Are at
Hand," Journal of Hellenic Studies, 104 (1984), 181-83. Interprets an Attic red-figured vase in
Hamburg (ca. 480 B.C.) as showing a comic
homosexual encounter. 1592. RICHTER, GISELA. Kouroi: Archaic Greek Youths. Third ed. London: Phaidon, 1970. 365 pp. Standard corpus of plates and
catalogue of the monumental male nude sculpture of the archaic period.
Sedulously avoids placing the figures against their historical background, a
task that needs to be addressed. 1593. ROBINSON, DAVID M., and EDWARD J. FLUCK. A Study of the Greek
Love-Names, including a Discussion of Paederasty and Prosopographia. Baltimore: Johns Hopkins Press, 1937. 204 pp. Comprehensive study of the kalos names (invocations of admired youths) on the vases. 1594.
SCHEFOLD, KARL.
Die Göttersage in der klassischen und hellenistischen Kunst.
Munich: Hirmer, 1981. 391 pp. In this comprehensive work on the legends of the gods in classical and
Hellenistic art, see pp. 192-93 (Eros), 211-18 (Zeus and Ganymede), 248-49
(Poseidon and Pelops), 298-99 (Hermes), 300-01 (Pan), 304-05 (Hermaphroditos)
307-18 (Eos pursuing Tithonos and Kephalos),,324-27
(Zephyros and Hyakinthos). 1595. SHAPIRO, H. ALAN. "Courtship Scenes in Attic
Vase Painting," American Journal of Archaeology, 85 (1981), 133-43. Useful survey collecting previous literature; somewhat
controversial on the sociopolitical background. See also his related
articles: "Epilikos and Skythes," ibid.,
86 (1982), 285; "Hippokrates Son of Anxileos," Hesperia, 49 (1980), 289-93; and "Kallias Kration Alopethen,"
ibid., 51 (1982), 69-73. 1596.
SICHTERMANN, HELLMUT.
Ganymed: Mythos und Gestalt in der antiken Kunst.
Berlin: Mann, 1953.
125 pp. Standard work on the iconography of Zeus' favorite in Greco-Roman art. 1597. VERMEULE, EMILY. "Some Erotica in Boston," Antike Kunst, 12 (1969), 9-15. Publication (with 9 pp. of plates) of vases, painted chiefly by
Athenian artists, ca. 540-470 B.C., most of them given to the Museum of Fine
Arts in the early years of the century by the homophile writer and collector
Edward Perry Warren. C. ART: THE RENAISSANCE TRADITION In the Italian Renaissance the custom of using teenage garzoni as models and shop assistants seems to have
fostered homosexuality and bisexuality among artists. At first tolerated,
this tradition was largely driven underground as a result of the spread of
the Counter-Refor- mation in the second half of the 16th century. The revival
of classical subject matter led to the cultivation of a certain number of
subjects, such as Ganymede and Orpheus, that were
congenial to homoerotic interpretation. 1598. BOUSQUET, JACQUES. Mannerisms The Painting and
Style of the Late Renaissance. Translated by Simon Watson Taylor. New York:
Braziller, 1964. 347 pp. In this lavishly illustrated monograph of the "stylish
style" of the 16th century, see pp. 196-202, 295, 323. 1599. CLEMENTS, ROBERT L. The Poetry of Michelangelo. New York: New York University Press, 1965. 368 pp. In this study by a
noted Romance philologist, see Chapter 6 ("The Fifty Poems for the Truffle, Turtle and Trout," pp.
134-53), illustrating themes of homosexual longing, as well as pp. 205-16.
Clements' conclusion that Michelangelo's sexual feelings for his garzoni were actualized, is
contradicted (probably mistakenly) by Robert S. Liebert, Michelangelo: A Psychoanalytic
Study of His Life and Images (New Haven: Yale University Press, 1983. 447 pp.). 1600. EEKHOUD, GEORGES. "Saint Sebastien dans la
pein- ture," Akademos, 1 (February 15, 1909), 171-75. The Belgian novelist, writing at the end of the fin-de- siecle era,
was the first to try to put into perspective the modern fascination of
homosexuals with the figure of St. Sebastian. 1601. EEKHOUD, GEORGES. "Un illustre uraniste du XVIIe
siecle: Jerome Duquesnoy," JfsZ, 2 (1900), 277-87. First study of the Belgian sculptor's homosexuality, which was
disclosed by his condemnation and execution for sodomy with two boys in Ghent (1654). See also: Lydie Hadermann- Misguich, Les Duquesnoy (Gembloux, 1970); and Geert De- beuckelaere, "'Omme dieswille
dat Gij, Hieronymus Duquesnoy ...," Tijdskrift ?oor
Homo-Geschiedenis, 1:1 (February 1984), 5-22. 1602. FERNANDEZ, DOMINIQUE. Signor Giovanni. Paris: Balland, 1981. 99 pp. Review of evidence concerning the murder of J. J. Winckel- mann in
Trieste in 1768, arguing that the great archaeologist was sexually repressed
almost until the end, when he embarked on a fatal fling. See also W.
Leppmann, and T. Pelzel, below. 1603. FROMMEL, CHRISTOPH LUDWIG. Michelangelo
und Tommaso dei Cavalieri. Amsterdam: Castrum Per- egrini, 1979. 129 pp. Account of Michelangelo's Platonic love for the nobleman Cavalieri,
and the anguished drawings he produced to express his feelings. 1604. FUMAGALLI, GIUSEPPINA. Eros di Leonardo. New ed. Florence: Sansoni, 1971. 242 pp. A standard (though reticent) work on Leonardo's sexuality, criticizing
earlier approaches, including the Freudian. 1605. GRECI, LUIGI. "Benvenuto Cellini nei delitti e
nei processi fiorentini, riconstruiti attraverso le leggi del tempo," Archivio di antropologia
crimi- nale, 50 (1930), 342-85 and 509-42. Surveys the documentary evidence for the artist's (1500- 1571)
homosexual behavior, and the legal steps taken to punish him. 1606. HIBBARD, HOWARD. Caravaggio. New York: Harper and Row, 1983. 404 pp. This book is
recognized as the best general monograph on the Italian artist (1571-1610). For interesting, but
incomplete observations on his sexuality, see pp. 87-88, 151-60, 247, 258, 306. See also D. Posner, below. 1595. JANSON, HORST W. The Sculpture of Donatello. Princeton, NJ : Princeton University Press,
1957. 2 vols. This monograph, which ranks as one of the finest studies ever produced
on a major Renaissance artist, also opened the way to an interpretation of
the homosexuality of Donatello (1386-1466). See the discussion of two sculptures,
David and St. George, the latter serving as a focus for the homosexual
fantasies of others. Recently, Janson's interpretation has been subjected to
a harsh, unmerited attack by John Pope-Hennessy, "Donatello's Bronze
David," in: Mauro Natale (ed.), Scritti di storia dell'arte in onore di Federico Zeri (Milan: 1984), pp. 122-27. 1596. KEMPTER,
GERDA. Ganymed: Studien zur Typologie,
Ikonographie und Ikonologie. Cologne: Bohlau Verlag, 1980.
231 pp. Able, well-illustrated survey of the fortunes of the Ganymede image in European art. See also J. Saslow, below. 1597. KUPPFER, ELISAR VON. "Giovan Antonio—il Sodoma, der Maler der Schönheit," JfsZ, 9 (1908), 71-167. A sensitive, subjective interpretation of the Sienese painter (1477-1549), by a German
homophile artist and poet, which has been neglected by recent scholarship
(e.g.,Andree Hayum, Giovanni Antonio
Bazzi—"II So- doma." New York: Garland, 1976; 335 pp., which ignores the
psychosexual aspects). 1598. LANGEARD, PAUL. L'intersexualité dans l'art: psychologie intersexuelle
en général et chez Michel- Ange en particulier. Montpellier: Imprimerie de la
Presse, 1936. 186 pp. Published version of medical dissertation. 1599.
LEPPMANN,
WOLFGANG. Winckelmann. New York: Knopf, 1970.
324 pp. Somewhat prosaic account of the life and times of the founder of
modern archaeology (1717-1768), who linked the cult of ancient works of art
to homoerotic sensitivity. See pp. 11, 32,
49-52, 158, 161, 165, 172-73, 209, 251- 54. For Winckelmann in relation to
his milieu, see the classic biography of Karl Justi,
Winckelmann: sein Leben, seine Werke und seine Zeitgenossen
(Leipzig: F. C. W. Vogel, 1866-1872. 3 vols.). 1600. LE TARGAT, FRANÇOIS. Saint-Sébastien dans l'histoire de l'art depuis le
XVe siècle. Paris: Paul Vermont, 1977. 204 pp. Reproductions of paintings and other works of art depic- ting the Christian figure who has been hailed as the
"gay saint," though this reputation is apparently not older than
the late 19th century. See also Saint Sébastien: Adonis et martyr (Paris: Editions Persona, 1983; 128 pp.); and J. Saslow, below. 1601. LISE, GIORGIO. L'altro Michelangelo. Milan: Cor- dani, 1981. 145 pp. A knowledgeable work which seeks honestly to link Michelangelo's work
with his psychosexual character, without necessarily commanding the assent of
other scholars in all respects. Compare with R. J. Clements, above. 1602. MARONE, SILVIO. "Homosexuality and Art," International Journal of
Sexology, 7:4 (1954), 175-90. Psychoanalytic approach employed with particular reference to major
Renaissance artists. 1603. MASINI, MARIO. "Gli immorali nell'arte:
Giovanni Antonio Bazzi detto il Sodoma," Archivio di antropologia
criminale, 36 (1915), 129-51 and 257-77. An important documentary study of the Sienese painter's sexuality. 1604. PEDRETTI, CARLO. Leonardo da Vinci: A Study in
Chronology and Style. Berkeley: University of California Press, 1973. 192 pp. A leading Leonardo scholar, in the course of a general study, offers
some views on new information bearing on the artist's sexuality (p. 140ff.).
Compare Stanley J. Pacion, "Leonardo da Vinci: A Psychosexual
Enigma," Medical Aspects of Human Sexuality, 5:12 (December 1971), 34-41. 1605. PELZEL, THOMAS. "Winckelmann, Mengs and
Casanova: A Reappraisal of a Famous Eighteenth Century Forgery," Art Bulletin, 14 (1972), 301-15. Discusses "Jupiter and Ganymede," a forgery created to
appeal to Winckelmann. See also Elio Bartolini and Cesare Pagnini, L'assassinio di Winckelmann:
gli atti del processo criminale (Milan: Longanesi, 1971; 306 pp.) 1606. PERRIG, ALEXANDER. "Bemerkungen zur Freundschaft zwischen Michelangelo und Tommaso de' Cavalieri," in: Stil und Überlieferung in der Kunst des Abendlandes, Berlin: Mann, 1967, vol. 2, pp. 164- 71. Remarks on Michelangelo's passionate friendship with a young Roman
nobleman as clarified by the drawings. See also Judith Anne Testa, "The
Iconography of the Archers: A Study of Self-Concealment and Self-Revelation
in Michelangelo's Presentation Drawings," Studies in Iconography, 5 (1979), 44-72. 1619. POPE-HENNESSY, JOHN, SIR. Cellini. New York: Abbe- ville, 1985. 324 pp. Lavishly produced biography
concentrating on the major works of the artist (1500-71), and treating his
sexuality on pp. 11, 28-29, 31, 172, 178, 228, 231, 253-55.
See also The Life of Benvenuto Cellini, translated by John Addington Symonds (first
published, London, 1887, and often reprinted). 1620. POSNER, DONALD. "Caravaggio's Early Homo-erotic
Works," Art Quarterly, 24 (1971), 301-26. Shows that the painter's early Roman works were created in the ambit
of his homosexual patron, Cardinal del Monte. See also Christoph Liutpold
Frommel, "Caravaggios Fruhwerk und der Kardinal Francesco Maria del
Monte," Storia dell'arte (1971), 5-52. 1621. SASLOW, JAMES M. Ganymede in the Renaissance:
Homosexuality in Art and Society. New Haven: Yale University Press, 1986. 265 pp. Thoughtful discussion of the Ganymede theme with special reference to
the homoerotic aspects. The author focuses on portrayals of the Phrygian
youth by Michelangelo, Correggio, Giulio Romano, and Cellini, showing how the
Counter-Reformation altered the intellectual climate in which such images
flourished. See also Anette Kruszyn- ski,
Der Ganymed-Mythos in Emblematik und mythograph- ischer Literatur des 16. Jahrhunderts (Worms: Wernersche Verlagsgesellschaft, 1985). 1622. SASLOW, JAMES M. "The Tenderest Lover: Saint
Sebastian in Renaissance Painting: A Proposed Iconology for North Italian
Art, 1450-1550," Gai Saber 1:1 (Spring 1977), 58-66. Attempts to anchor homoerotic sentiment in choice of subject matter
with particular reference to the controversial question of St. Sebastian.
See reply by Wayne Dynes, ibid., 1:2 (Summer 1977),
150-51. 1623. SCHENK, J. "Homoseksualiteit in de Nederlandse
beeldende kunst voor 1800," Speculum Historiaele, 17:11 (November 1982), 576-83. Treats homosexual themes in Netherlandish art up to 1800 in several
categories, including mythology and scenes of execution. 1624. SCHNEIDER, LAURIE. "Donatello and Caravaggio:
The Iconography of Decapitation," American Imago, 33 (1976), 76-91. Applies psychoanalytic concepts derived from Freud and Ferenczi to
Donatello's bronze "David" and Carvaggio's paintings "David
with the Head of Goliath" and "Medusa's Head." Criticized by
John W. Dixon, "The Drama of Donatello's David: Re-examination of an
Enigma," Gazette des Beaux-Arts, 93 (January 1979), 6-12; to which Schneider
replied, ibid., 94 (July-August 1979), 48. 1625. SCHUSTER, PETER-KLAUS. "Zu Dürer's Zeichnung 'Der Tod des Orpheus' und verwandter Darstellungen," Hamburger Kunstsammlungen, 23 (1978), 7-24. Compares Albrecht Dürer's drawing of Orpheus as a homosexual with the
artist's "Hercules." 1626. STEINBERG, LEO. The Sexuality of Christ in Renaissance Art and in
Modern Oblivion. New York: Pantheon, 1984. 222 pp. While not about homosexuality, this book
provides an invaluable paradigm for the investigation of the web linking art,
genitality, and religion. 1627. WITTKOWER, RUDOLF, and MARGOT WITTKOWER. Born under Saturn. New York: W. W. Norton, 1963. 344 pp. In this study of the characterology of Renaissance artists, see esp.
pp. 169-75. The history of art in the 19th and 20th centuries discloses a number
of significant figures who led closeted lives—and more recently openly gay
and lesbian artists. Investigations designed to find distinctive styles or
traits applicable collectively to the work of gay and/or lesbian artists have
not as yet produced plausible results. Apart from their work as artists,
homosexuals and lesbians have sometimes excelled as taste-makers— critics,
collectors, dealers, and aestheticians. Taste formation is a field in which
much relevant information probably remains to be discovered, and only when
this is done will an adequate synthesis be possible. 1628. ALPATOV, MIKHAIL VLADIMIROVICH. Aleksandr Andre- evich Ivanovs
zhizn' i tvorchestvo. Moscow: Iskus- stvo, 1956. 2 vols. The prominent Russian academic-romantic painter Ivanov (1806-1858)
combined mystical Christian subject matter with a pronounced appreciation for
the young male form. 1629. BATE, NEEL ("BLADE"). The Barn, 1948; and More Dirty
Pictures by Blade. New York: Stompers; and Leslie-Lohman Galleries, 1980. 32 pp. Reissue of an explicit album that originally appeared in an edition
limited to 12 copies; with additional material. Of slight interest as art,
this collection reveals something of the taste of ordinary gay men during
the period. 1630. BOIME, ALBERT, "The Case of Rosa Bonheur: Why
Should A Woman Want to Be Like a Man?" Art History, 4 (1981), 384-409. Examines her defiance of gender role expectations, female friendships,
and her art as an animal painter as related phenomena. See also Dore Ashton
and Denise Brown Hare, Rosa Bonheur: A Life and a Legend (New York: Studio/Viking, 1981; 206 pp.). 1620. BOIME, ALBERT. Thomas Couture and the Eclectic Vision. New Haven: Yale University Press, 1980. 683 pp. Not stressed by Boime and probably impossible to show definitively,
pederastic motives are implied by Cou- ture's (1815-79) paintings of
adolescents. See pp. 90- 93, 106-14, 335-42. 1621. BRION, MARCEL. Leonor Fini et son oeuvre. Paris: Jean-Jacques Pauvert, 1955. unpaged Illustrated monograph on the surrealist painter whose works explore
androgyny, lesbianism, and matriarchy. 1622. BURK, CAROLYN. "Gertrude Stein, the Cone
Sisters and the Puzzle of Female Friendship," Critical Inquiry, 8
(1982), 543-64. Stein played a major role in the diffusion of the taste for modernist
painting in the English-speaking world, in part through her attachment to the
art-collecting Cone sisters. See also: Brenda Richardson: Dr. Claribel and Miss Etta (Baltimore: Museum of Art, 1986; 202 pp.). 1623. CALLOWAY, STEPHEN. Charles Ricketts: Subtle and
Fantastic Decorator. New York: Thames and Hudson, 1979. 100 pp. Although the author conceals Ricketts' (1866-1931) homosexuality
(including his "marriage" to Charles Shannon), the illustrations
tell their own story. 1624. CAMERON, DAN. Extended Sensibilities. New York: New Museum, 1981. (exhibition catalogue) The exhibition of gay male and lesbian artists was organized around
Cameron's detection of a neo-Mannerist tendency. See also Nicolas A.
Mouffarege, "Lavender: On Homosexuality and Art," Arts Magazine,
57:2 (October 1981), 78-87. 1625. CLAY, JEAN. Romanticism. Secaucus, NJ: Chart- well, 1981. 320 pp. In this lavishly
produced survey, see pp. 122-28. 1626. CLIFF, MICHELE. "Object into Subject: Some
Thoughts on the Work of Black Women Artists," Heresies, no. 15 (1982),
34-40. Subjective
reflections by a Black lesbian writer. 1627. COOPER, EMMANUEL. The Sexual Perspective: Homosexuality and Art in
the Last 100 Tears in the Vest. London: Routledge and Kegan Paul, 1986. 320 pp. Attempts a summing up,
stressing major living figures. 1628. CORINNE, TEE A. Labiaflowers. Tallahassee: Naiad Press, 1981. 40 pp. Drawings of labia adapted from photographs. (Revised ed. of the Cunt Coloring Book.) 1629. CRAWFORD, ALAN. C. R. Ashbee: Architect,
Designer, and Romantic Socialist. New Haven: Yale University Press, 1985. 499 pp. Detailed biography of the life, times, and work of Charles Robert
Ashbee (1863-1942), a disciple of Edward Carpenter and an influential figure
in the arts and crafts movement. 1630. DE ANTONIO, EMILE, and MITCH TUCHMAN. Painters Painting: A Candid
History of the Modern Art Scene, 1940-70. New York: Abbeville, 1984. 192 pp. Purveys some intimate details about Andy Warhol, Henry Geldzahler, and
others in the New York art scene. 1631. DE PISIS, FILIPPO. II marchesino pittore. Milan: Bompiani, 1969. Includes frank reminiscences by the painter (1869-1956) about his
homosexual life in Paris. See also his Poesie (Milan: Vallecchi, 1942), which has a dozen poems
about boys. The artist's oeuvre includes about 200 male nudes, of which only
a few were shown at the 1983 retrospective of his work. 1632. DETROIT INSTITUTE OF ARTS. French Painting, 1774-1830: The Age of Revolution. Detroit Institute of Arts, 1975. 712 pp.
(exhibition catalogue) See pp. 54, 360-61 ("Funeral of Patroclus," by Jacques-
Louis David); 180, 339-41 ("Death of Hyacinth," by Jean Broc); and
264, 404-05 ("Apollo and Cyparissus," by Claude-Marie Dubufe). 1633. DUBSKY, MARIO. Tom Pilgrim's Progress among the Consequences of
Christianity and Other Drawings. Introduction by Edward Lucie-Smith. London: Gay Men's Press, 1981. 84
pp. Reproduces some fifty drawings by the English gay artist, chiefly male
nudes. 1634. EGGUM, ARNE. "Munch's Self-portraits," in:
Robert Rosenblum et al., Edvard Munch: Symbols and Images. Washington, DC: National Gallery of Art, 1978, pp. 11-31. Contains
brief discussion of the Norwegian artist's (1863- 1944) enigmatic homoerotic
masterwork of 1904, "Bathing Boys" (Oslo, Munch-Museet), pp. 20-22. 1635. ELIASOPH, PHILIP. Paul Cadmus: Yesterday and Today. Oxford, OH: Miami University Art Museum, 1981. 128 pp. This monograph
on the American realist painter, which also served as an exhibition
catalogue, presents the fruit of a scholars' serious study of the artist, but
is insufficient on the homoerotic aspects of the iconography. See
review by Jim Wickliff, Cabirion & Gay Books Bulletin, no. 10 (Winter-Spring 1984), 25-27. 1636. ELLIOT, MARGUERITE TUPPER. "Lesbian Art and the
Community," Heresies, no 3 (Fall 1977), 106-07. Discusses the lesbian-feminist art community in Los Angeles during the
mid 1970s. This issue contains other relevant items. 1637. ENDICOTT-ROSS, MICHAEL, et al. [Gay Art Issue.] Alternate, 2:12 (1980), 8-42. Presents the then-growing phenomenon of galleries specializing in
male imagery, followed by brief profiles of a dozen artists. 1638. FALKON, FELIX LANCE (pseud, of George Scithers). A Historic Collection of Gay
Art. San Diego:
Green- leaf, 1972. 225 pp. Chiefly commercial and exploitation material. 1639. FARNHAM, EMILY. Charles Demuth: Behind a Laughing Mask. Norman: University of Oklahoma Press, 1971. 238 pp. Somewhat conventional biography of the American homophile painter (1883-1934),
but reproducing several revealing works. A Demuth catalogue raisonne is in
preparation by Alford L. Eiseman. 1640. HAMMOND, HARMONY. Wrappings: Essays in Feminism,
Art and the Martial Arts. New York: T.S.L. Press, 1984. 112 pp. Essays by an outspoken New York lesbian artist and critic. 1641. HARDISON, SAM. "The Art and Politics of the
Male Image: A Conversation between Sam Hardison and George Stambolian," Christopher Street, 4:7 (March 1980), 14-22. Sam Hardison was director of the Robert Samuel Gallery (New York
City), specializing in male-image art. 1642. HASKELL, BARBARA. Marsden Hartley. New York: New York University Press, 1980. 224 pp. Based on a the comprehensive exhibition at
the Whitney Museum, this is the first adequate account of the American
artist's (1877-1943) life and imagery. Bibliography and list of exhibitions. 1643. HENDRICKS, GORDON. The Life and Work of Thomas Eakins. New York: Grossman, 1974. 367 pp. Although concrete evidence of
practice is still lacking, elements of homoerotic sensibility have been
detected in the work of Eakins (1844-1916), one of America's greatest
painters. See also Hendricks: The Photographs of Thomas Eakins (New York: Grossman, 1972. 214 pp.); includes a
number of nude photographs of men and boys. 1644. HERRERA, HAYDEN. Frida: A Biography of Frida Kahlo. New York: Harper and Rowe, 1983. 256 pp. Biography of the tempestuous
life of the bisexual Mexican painter. 1645. HIERONYMUS, EKKEHARD. Elisar von Kupffer (1872- 1942). Basel: Kunsthalle, 1979. 20 pp. Account of the artist-poet's life and
neo-gnostic philosophy (Klarismus), together with his villa at Minusio in
Switzerland, the Sanctuarium Artis Elisarion, which became the physical
embodiment of his vision. 1646. HOCKNEY, DAVID. David Hockney by David Hockney. Edited by Nikos Stangos; introduction by Henry Geldzahler. New York:
Abrams, 1976. 312 pp. Candid autobiography, enriched
with 414 illustrations, of the chic English artist, including his affair with
Peter Schlesinger. For a more conventional art-historical account of his
development as a painter, see Marco Livingstone, David Hockney (New York: Holt, Rinehart and Winston, 1981; 250
pp.). 1647. JULLIAN, PHILIPPE. Dreamers of Decadence:
Symbolist Painters of the 1890s. Translated by Robert Baldick. New York: Praeger,
1971. 272 pp. Remarkable conspectus of typical themes of late 19th-century
Symbolism, including some homosexual artists and writers (pp. 47-48, 1121-13,
164, 183, 193). 1648. KIRSTEIN, LINCOLN. Paul Cadmus. New York: Imago, 1984. 144 pp. Handsomely produced book with 100 illustrations of paintings,
drawings, and etchings. The text, by a long-time associate of Cadmus, is
regrettably opaque, 1649. LAMBOURNE, LIONEL, et al. Solomon: A Family of Painters. London: Geffrye Museum, 1985. 88 pp. Exhibition catalogue of the work of the siblings Abraham, Rebecca, and
Simeon Solomon, of whom the last, a pre-Raph- aelite with fin-de-siecle
connections, was convicted for buggery in 1873. 1650. LEONARD, MICHAEL. Changing. London: Gay Men's Press, 1983. 112 pp. Sensitive drawings of chaste male striptease by a younger English gay
artist. 1651. LLOYD, PHOEBE. "Washington Allston: American
Martyr," Art in America, 72:3 (March 1984), 145-55, 177-79. Includes a sensitive exploration of the possible homosexuality of one
of the "founding fathers" of American painting. 1663. LUCIE-SMITH,
EDWARD. The Male Nude. New York: Rizzoli, 1985. 176 pp. The images derive from a 1983 London exhibition curated by François de Louville. Works by 49 artists, many English, and
most executed in the 1970s and 80s. 1664. NEDRA, PIERRE. "Géricault et ses amis," Àrcadie, no. 35 (November 1956), 31-40. Argues that the French pioneer of romanticism (1791-1824) was
homosexual based on his friendships. The argument has been accepted by Lord
Kenneth Clark, but is rejected by Lorenz Eitner, a leading Géricault scholar. 1665. PAYNE, ELIZABETH ROGERS. "Anne Whitney,
Sculptor," Art Quarterly, 25 (Autumn 1962), 244-61. Whitney (1821-1915), an abolitionist and suffragist, lived with
Adeline Manning, who devoted her life to her. 1666. PINCUS-WITTEN, ROBERT, et al. Keith Haring. New York: Tony Shafrazi Gallery, 1982. about 130 pp. (exhibition catalogue) Documents the work (occasionally sexually
explicit) of the New York wunderkind. For his subway graffiti, see Henry
Geldzahler, Art in Transit: Subway Drawing by Keith Haring. (New York: Harmony Books, 1984; about 80 pp.). 1667. PLAGENS, PETER. "Gilbert and George: How
English Is It?" Art in America, 72 (October 1982), 178-83. On the art of the London-based duo, which
incorporates sardonic camp elements. 1668. PORCELLA, ANTONIO (ed.). Renzo Vespignani. Venice, 1982. 82 pp. Retrospective of a contemporary Italian artist. 1669. RADER, DOTSON. Harold Stevenson. New York: Alexander Iolas Gallery, 1973. (exhibition catalogue) The work of a muralist active in Idabel, OK. 1670. RAVEN, ARLENE, and RUTH ISKIN. "Through the
Peephole: Towards a Lesbian Sensibility in Art," Chrysalis: A Magazine of
Women's Culture,no. 4 (1977), 19-31. Begins an effort to define a lesbian aesthetic. 1671. REED, DAVID. "Repression and Exaggeration: The
Art of Tom of Finland," Christopher Street, 4:8 (April 1980), 16-21. The cartoon-like figures of this Finnish artist, each seemingly more
macho than the last, have attained the status of minor gay-male icons. 1672. RESTREPO PELÂEZ, PEDRO. El homosexualismo en el arte actual. Bogota: Ediciones Tercer Mundo, 1969. 126 pp. Echoing the ideas of the New York psychoanalyst Edmund Bergler,
Restrepo holds that homosexuals are manipulating the art market and public
taste to create transitory fads. Abstract art is a product of this "feminizing
tendency." 1673. RIVERS, LARRY. Drawings and Digressions. With Carol Brightman. New York: Clarkson N. Potter,
1979. 164 pp. This primarily heterosexual painter's recollections
of his love affair with poet Frank O'Hara casts valuable light on the
"bisexual" side of the New York School. 1674. ROCHE, PAUL. With Duncan Grant in Southern Turkey. London: Honeyglen, 1982. 134 pp. The English artist Grant intersperses
contemporary comment in his old age with reminiscences of the Bloomsbury
scene. 1675. RUSSELL, JOHN. Francis Bacon. Revised ed. New York: Oxford University Press,
1979. 192 pp. Perceptive analysis of the imagery, which is sometimes searingly
homoerotic, of the leading British artist. Bacon himself supervised the
choice of the 241 illustrations making up Michel Leiris, Francis Bacon (New York: 1984). 1676. SASLOW, JAMES. "Ars Gratia Erotica: The
Laidback Leslie-Lohman Gallery Is Home for Homoerotic Art," Advocate, no. 252 (October 18, 1978), 38-39. On the unfortunately brief boomlet in gay-image galleries; see also
Saslow et al., "Gay Art and the Galleries," Advocate, no. 263 (March 22, 1979), 20-23. Saslow, an Advocate editor, wrote many articles for the publication on
gay art in the the 1970s and early 80s. 1677. SECREST, MERYL. Between Me and Life. Garden City, NY: Doubleday, 1974. 432 pp. Full-scale biography of the American artist Germaine Brooks, a major
figure in the Parisian expatriate scene. In 1975 Arno Press of New York
reprinted Brooks' Portraits, Tableaux, Dessins, which first appeared in Paris in 1952. 1678. SOKOLOWSKI, THOMAS W. The Sailor 1930-45: The Image
of an American Demigod. Norfolk, VA: Chrysler Museum, 1983. 116 pp. (exhibition catalogue) Paintings, drawings, prints, photographs and advertisements of the
American "gob," where—in many instances—a homosexual subtext is
evident. 1678A. STANLEY, NICK (ed.). Out in Art. London: Gay Men's Press, 1986. 96 pp. Documents the work of five artists in their
twenties— Christopher Brown, Christopher Corr, Norman, Richard Royle, and
Graham Ward—exploring such themes as the masculine stereotype, pornography,
the fragility of relationships, the celebration of the male body, and the
need for tenderness. 1679. STILLMAN, AMY. [Bibliography of Lesbian Art and
Artists], Heresies, no. 3 (Fall 1977), 115-17. Records over 100
items, published and unpublished. 1680.
TAVEL,
HANS CHRISTOPH VON, et al. Otto Meyer-Am-
den: Begegnungen. Bern: Kunstmuseum, 1985. 208 pp. Exhibition catalogue, with supporting documentation, of the work of
the reclusive Swiss artist (1885-1933), who often depicted young boys. 1681. TOMKINS, CALVIN. Off the Wall: Robert Rauschenberg and the Art World
of Our Time. Garden City, NY: Doubleday, 1980. 324 pp. Treats (with some discretion) the American artist's (b. 1925) liaisons
with Jasper Johns, Steve Paxton, and Robert Peterson. (See p. 260 for the
curious notion of a "homintern" in the arts.) 1682. TYLER, PARKER. The Divine Comedy of Pavel Tcheli- tchew. New York: Fleet, 1967. 504 pp. A pioneering effort
to capture the sensibility of the Russian-American surrealist painter. Only in the early 20th century did such figures as Fred Holland Day
and Wilhelm von Gloeden open paths for exploring themes such as the male
nude which had long been of interest to homosexual artists. The 1970s saw a
surge of interest in erotic photography, making possible the establishment of
new reputations as well as the exploration of forgotten earlier figures. 1683. BARNES, LAWRENCE (ed.). The Male Nude in Photography. Waitsfield, VT: Vermont Crossroads Press, 1980. 96 pp. Representative
selection based on an exhibition. 1684. BIREN, JOAN E. (pseud.: JEB). Eye to Eye: Portraits of
Lesbians. Washington, DC: Glad Hag Books, 1979. Forty photographs, with introductory essay on the history of lesbian
photography by Judith Schwarz. See also: JEB, "Lesbian
Photography--Seeing through our Own Eyes," Studies in Visual
Communication, 9 (Spring 1983), 81-95. 1685. BLANK, JOANI (ed.). I Am My Lover. Burlington, CA: Down There Press, 1978. Photographs by Honey Lee Cottrell and Tee Corinne of women
masturbating. 1686. BLOK, DIANA, and MARLO BROEKMANS. Invisible Forces. Amsterdam: Uitgeverij Bert Bakker, 1983. Somewhat surreal imagery
exploring women-women relationships .
CORINNE, TEE. Yantras of Woman Love. Tallahassee, FL: Naiad Press, 1982. 64 pp. The artist photographed women being sensual, and then solarized and
processed her images to create kaleidoscopic patterns. See also her: Labia Flowers (Tallahassee, FL: Naiad Press, 1981; 36 pp.).
DOAN, WILLIAM, and
CRAIG DIETZ. Photoflexion: A History of Bodybuilding Photography. New York: St. Martins Press, 1984. 127 pp. One-hundred fifteen black-and-white photos originally gathered for an
exhibition. The text, while usefully surveying the history of this popular
art form its turn-of-the-century origins to the present, underplays the
homoerotic component.
EMORY, MICHAEL
(ed.). The Gay Picture Book. Chicago: Contemporary Books, 1978. 125 pp. Images from 35 gay and
lesbian photographers, assembled to create a kind of community scrapbook, a
blend of street photography, photojournalism, and art. FALZONE BARBARO, MICHELE, MARINA MIRAGLIA, and ITALO MUSSA. Le fotografie di Von Gloeden. Milan: Longanesi, 1980. 128 pp. Picture book on the noted German
photographer of boys (1856-1931), who resided in Sicily; with biographical
data. See also C. Leslie, below.
FISCHER, HAL. 18th near Castro St x 24. San Francisco: NFS Press, 1979. 56 pp. Photographs taken over a 24-hour
period at the corner of 18th and Castro streets in San Francisco.
HOLABIRD, KATHERINE
(ed.). Women on Women. Arber, NY: A & W Publishers, 1979. Black-and-white and color photographs by twelve women photographers.
Holabird's introduction relates the sensual character of the photos to
women's need to define their own sexuality.
JUAN-CARLOS,
RICARDO. Photographing the Male. New York: Crescent, 1983. 159 pp. Phil Flasche's stunning photographs of men in every sort of revealing
pose make this book more an album than a how- to guide.
JUSSIM, ESTELLE. Slave to Beauty. Boston: David R. Godine, 1981. 310 pp. Illustrated biography of the long-neglected, but historically
important Boston art photographer F. Holland Day (1864-1933), who among other
things discovered the poet Kahlil Gibran. 1679.
KÖHLER, MICHAEL, and GISELA BARCHE.
Das Aktfoto: Ansichten vom Körper im fotografischen Zeitalter: Aesthetik,
Geschichte, Ideologie. Munich: Bucher, 1985. 391 pp. Attempts an encyclopedic survey of 150 years of nude photography, both
male and female, with many references and index. 1680.
LESLIE, CHARLES.
Wilhelm von Gloeden: Photographer. New York: Soho Photographic Publishers, 1977.
143 pp. Documents the work of the German photographer (1856-1931), who
developed a romantic genre idealizing Sicilian youths in pseudo-classical
poses. 1681. LEYLAND, WINSTON (ed.). Physique: A Pictorial History
of the Athletic Model Guild. San Francisco: Gay Sunshine Press, 1983. Presents the work of the Los Angeles firm that set an exotic style
which proved to be in tune with the tastes of gay men from the 1940s to the
60s. 1682. LYNES, GEORGE PLATT. George Piatt Lynes Photographs,
1931-1955. Pasadena, CA: Twelvetrees Press, 1981. 156 pp. Representative selection of 85 works of Lynes (1931-55), who created a
distinctive style by fusing elegance of pose with expressive contrasts of
light and shadow. While influencing women's high fashion photography, at the
same time he was publishing many of his homophile photos in the Swiss gay
monthly Der Kreis/Le Cercle (under the pseudonym of "Rolf"). 1683.
MAPPLETHORPE, ROBERT.
Robert Mapplethorpe. Frankfurt am Main:
Frankfurter Kunstverein, 1981. 136 pp. Catalogue of a retrospective exhibition of the contemporary American
photographer, who specializes in trans- gressive themes. 1684. MARCUSE PFEIFFER GALLERY. The Male Nude: A Survey of
Photography. New York: Marcuse Pfeiffer Gallery 1978. Catalogue for an exhibition, June 13-July 28, 1978. Introduction by
Shelley Rice. 1701. MAROT, GERARD. Les p'tits mecs. Poissy: Editions Imagine,
1983. 62 pp. Photographs of boys. See also his Transparence (Paris: G, Tautin, 1977; 32 pp.) 1702. MICHALS, DUANE. Homage to Cavafy. New York: Addison, 1979. Interpretive photographs by Michals to accompany ten poems 1703. PHILLIPS, DONNA-LEE, and LEW THOMAS (eds.). Eros and Photography: An
Exploration of Sexual Imagery and Photographic Practice. San Francisco: Camerawork/NFS Press, 1977. 119 pp. Essays and
photographs. 1704. PUIG, HERMAN. Akadémia: le nu académique français. Paris: Puig, 1982. Selection of historic academic photographs of the male nude; one
of several such collections gathered by this author. 1705. RUSSELL, BRUCE. "Wilhelm von Pluschow and
Wilhelm von Gloeden: Two Photo Essays," Studies in Visual
Communication, 9:2 (1983), 57-80. Affords a glimpse of the work and career of von Pluschow, cousin of
the better known von Gloeden. 1706. SECORD, FREDERICK. Twelve: A Day in the Life of a Boy. New York: Book Adventures, 1966. 156 pp. Romantic photographs of a
boy. A characteristic "softcore" publication of the period. Edited
by Georges St. Martin (pseud, of Martin W. Swithinbank). 1707. STEWART, STEPHEN. Positive Image: A Portrait of Gay America. New York: William Morrow, 1985. 191 pp. Photodocumentary recording many gay and lesbian leaders of note
assembled from extensive cross-country travel. 1708. TRESS, ARTHUR. Facing Up. New York: St. Martins Press, 1980. 79 pp. Photographs of men in setting suggestive of the New York City pier scene, now vanished. Introduction by Yves Navarre. 1709. VICKERS, HUGO. Cecil Beaton: A Biography. Boston: Little, Brown, 1986. 656 pp. Frank biography of the English society photographer, who was an
ultra-snob and "homosexualist" (his term), using material
expurgated from the published version of his Diaries. 1710. WAUGH, TOM. "Photography, Passion and
Power," Body Politic (March 1984), 29-33. Describes a remarkable collection of historical gay photographs
preserved in the Kinsey Institute, Indiana University. 1711. WEBER, BRUCE. Photographs. Pasadena,CA: Twelve- trees
Press, 1983. Weber's work created a new definition of male beauty in the
advertising world. Ninety gravure plates. F. FILM There were several exceptional films on homosexual themes in the
silent era. In the 1930s homosexuality went largely underground, represented,
up to a point, by sissy parts and occasional "drag" performances.
With the relaxation of formerly stringent U. S. censorship in the 1960s (see
I.L), more overt depictions became possible even in the mainstream cinema. At
the same time a genre of gay pornographic films appeared, becoming gradually
more explicit and finding a home in a series of "adult theatres" in
major cities. A special topic is the existence of homosexual and lesbian
performers, whose orientation tends to be carefully concealed but sometimes
emerges, at least after their death. Only recently have openly gay directors
appeared, most of them European. 1712. ALLEN, NICK (pseud.). Dynasty of Decadence. North Hollywood, CA: Brandon House, 1966. 176 pp. Anecdotes purporting to show that a "homosexual clique"
dominates the film and television industry in Hollywood. 1713.
ANGER,
KENNETH. Hollywood Babylon II.
New York: Dutton, 1984. 332 pp. This second helping of raunchy gossip offers some relevant tidbits,
unlike its predecessor Hollywood Babylon (Phoenix: Associated Professional Services, Inc. 1965; 271 pp.). Regrettably, neither book reflects the filmic
brilliance of the creator of Fireworks and Scorpio Rising. 1714. ARCE, HECTOR. The Secret Life of Tyrone Power. New York: William Morrow, 1979. 317 pp. Notes a number of the bisexual actor's (1913-58) homosexual affairs with (usually unnamed) actors. 1715. ATWELL, LEE. "'Word Is Out' and 'Gay
USA,'" Film Quarterly, 32 (Winter 1978-79), 50-57. Sympathetic presentation of two film documentaries. At- well is also
author of a two-part article: "Homosexual Themes in the Cinema," Tangents, 1:6 (March 1966), 4-10; and 1:7 (April 1966), 4-9. 1716. AUSTIN, BRUCE A. "Portrait of a Cult Film Audience:
The Rocky Horror Picture Show," Journal of Communication, 31 (1981), 43-54. The leading "midnight movie" cult, involving spectacular
participation rituals, which have attracted many young gay people. 1717. BACHSTEIN, HEIM. "Anders als die Anderen: Homosexualität in Film," Retro (Munich), 16 (July-August 1982), 5-12. Brief survey of homosexuality in the cinema. 1718. BATTCOCK, GREGORY (ed.) The New American Cinema: A
Critical Anthology. New York: Dutton, 1967. 256 pp. Twenty-nine essays reflecting the heyday of the so-called Underground
Cinema, which was strongly tinged with gay sensibility, while rarely
displaying overt homosexual content. 1719. BECKER, EDITH et al. "Lesbians and Film," Jump Cut, nos. 25-26 (1981), 17-21. Argues that while feminist criticism has developed new theoretical
tools with which to examine cinematic images, structures, and themes,
nevertheless there has been a failure to confront lesbian issues. This
article introduces a valuable special section of the issue on lesbians and
film (with filmo graphy). 1720. BECKER, RAYMOND DE. "Notes sur un cinéma homophile," Arcadie, no. 74 (February 1960), 97-100. Perhaps the first
article on the subject. 1721. BELL-METEREAU, REBECCA. Hollywood Androgyny. New York: Columbia University Press, 1985. 260 pp. Subjective examination of American films involving cross-dressing and
sex-role reversals from Charlie Chaplin's "The Masquerader" (1914)
to the present. 1722. BOSWORTH, PATRICIA. Montgomery Clift: A Biography. New York: Harcourt Brace Jovanovich, 1978. 438 pp. An honest and
sympathetic account of the homosexual actor's tormented life. See also
Robert LaGuardia, Monty: A Biography of Montgomery Clift (New York: Arbor House, 1977; 304 pp.). 1723. BRIAN, DENNIS. Tallulah, Darling: A Biography
of Tallulah Bankhead. New York: Macmillan, 1980. 292 pp. Somewhat more forthcoming than the other biographies of the much
gossipped-about actress (see pp. 2, 48, 66, 240- 41, 283). 1724. CODY, BART. "How Movies Got Gay ... and Gayer .. and Gayer," Advocate, 2 (August 1968), 16-19. First report in the
Los Angeles magazine. 1725. COMMISSION ON GAY/LESBIAN ISSUES IN SOCIAL WORK
EDUCATION. Annotated Filmography of Selected Films with Lesbian/Gay Content. New York: Council on Social Work Education, 1984.
25 pp. Part I is a comprehensive list of about 70 "educational
films;" Part II a selection of 25 feature-length films. Appendix
provides a list of distributors. 1726. CONNOR,
EDWARD. "Film in Drag: Transvestism on the Screen," Films in Review, 32 (1981), 398-405. Short survey of the material
documented more fully by H. Dickens, below. 1727. DAVIDSON, SARAH. Rock Hudson: His Own Life. New York: William Morrow, 1986. 311 pp. Authorized biography made with the actor's assistance before he died
of AIDS on October 2, 1985. See also Mark Bego, Rock Hudson: Public and
Private. (New York: New American Library, 1986: 189 pp.); and J. Oppenheimer
and J. Vitek, Idol (New York: Villard Books, 1986; 224 pp.). 1728. DAWSON, BONNIE. Women's Films in Print: An Annotated Guide to 800
Titles of 16mm Films by Women. San Francisco: Bootlegger, 1975. 165 pp. Complements the historical
list prepared by K. Sullivan, below. 1729. DICKENS, HOMER. What a Drag: Hen as Women and Women as Men in the
Movies. New York: Quill, 1984. 266 pp. A picture book of stills with index of performers that reveals a
surprising amount of material. 1730. DURGNIAT, RAYMOND. Sexual Alienation in the Cinema: The Dynamics of
Sexual Freedom. London: Studio Vista, 1973. 319 pp. Concentrating on the period 1966-73, offers some material on Kenneth
Anger and Andy Warhol. 1731. DYER, RICHARD. "Pasolini and
Homosexuality" in: Paul Willemen (ed.), Pier Paolo Pasolini. London: British Film Institute, 1977, pp. 56-63. Argues that the representation of the male figure in Pasolini's work
is embedded in a tradition of self- oppressive rhetoric, which
"reiterates heterosexual norms." See also his: "Don't Look
Now—The Male Pin-up," Screen, 23:3/4 (1982). 1732. DYER, RICHARD. "Victim: Hermeneutic
Project," Film Form, 1 (1977), 3-22. Analysis of the landmark 1961 British film featuring Dirk Bogarde. 1733. DYER, RICHARD (ed.). Gays and Film. Enlarged ed. New York: New York Zoetrope, 1984. 110
pp. The original core of the 1977 edition (London: British Film Institute)
comprised three essays: "Lesbians and Film--Some Thoughts: by Caroline
Sheldon (pp. 5-26); "Stereotyping" by Richard Dyer (pp. 27-39); and
"Camp and Gay Sensibility" by Jack Babuscio (pp. 40-57). While
employing different political perspectives, all reflect the gay-liberation
approach characteristic of the period. The enlarged edition contains a new
essay, "Notes on Recent Gay Film Criticism" Andy Medhurst (pp.
58-64), and important new filmography (pp. 69-107), and additional
bibliography. 1734. EDWARDS, DOUGLAS et al. "Gays and the Art of Motion Picture
Making," Advocate, no. 285 (February 7, 1980), 28-32+. Inside scrutiny of gays in Hollywood and recent trends in film. 1735. EISNER, LOTTE. Murnau. Revised ed. Berkeley: University of California Press, 1973. 287 pp. Somewhat reticent account of life and works of the noted homophile
German-American director, who died mysteriously in 1931. 1736.
FASSBINDER,
EGON et al. (eds.).
Film. Berlin: Rosa Winkel Verlag, 1986. 96 pp. (Klappentexte, 6) A mixed bag of interviews and essays by German gay film makers and
critics. 1737. FORBES, DENNIS. "Creating Peter Berlin," After Dark, 7 (February 1975), 44-51. Peter Berlin (a.k.a. Peter Burian), a German actor working in the
United States, fashioned his own image as a porn star. 1738. GARS, JEAN-FRANÇOIS. Cinémas homosexuels. Paris: 1983.
165 pp. Originally published as CinémAction, no. 15 (1981). A mixed bag: short, sometimes superficial pieces, many
translated from English-language sources; filmography of 200 items (pp.
160-65). 1739. GIDAL, PETER. Andy Warhol: Films and Paintings. London: Studio Vista, 1971. 160 pp. Survey of the American pop artist
at the height of his film-making phase. 1740. GUTHMAN, EDWARD. "Gay Film Festivals," Advocate, no 345 (June 24, 1982), 59-63. On a annual institution emerging in a number
of North American and European cities. 1741. HAYMAN, RONALD. Fassbinder: Film Maker. London: Weidenfeld and Nicolson, 1984. Factual, but shallow biography of the late German director, asserting
that "Fassbinder's importance
as a film maker depends on his ability to translatq his neurosis into
cinematic fiction." There is an extensive and growing literature in
German, some of which has contributed, inadvertently or intentionally, to
the myth of the doomed gay director—a German counterpart to the Pasolini
image. 1742. HEPWORTH, JOHN. "Hitchcock's Homophobia," Christopher Street, no. 64 (May 1982), 42-49. While this article on the noted director received a mixed review, it
raises a kind of question that needs to be asked. 1743.
HETZE,
STEFANIE. Happy-end für wen? Kino und
lesbischen Frauen. Frankfurt am Main: Tende, 1986. 190 pp. Attempts a comprehensive view of lesbianism in film (including such
stereotypes as the old maid, trousers roles, and vampires) from a
lesbian-feminist standpoint. Filmography with short descriptive comments. 1744. HIGHAM, CHARLES. Charles Laughton: An Intimate Biography. Garden City, NY: Doubleday, 1976. 239 pp. Frank life of the English actor (1889-1962), with sympathetic
Introduction by his wife, Elsa Lanchester. 1745. HIGHAM, CHARLES. Errol Flynn: The Untold Story. New York: Doubleday, 1979. 370 pp Controversial, possibly unreliable
account of the Australian-born film actor (1909-59) as bisexual and spy. 1746. HINXMAN, MARGARET, and SUSAN D'ARCY. The Cinema of Dirk Bogarde. South Brunswick, NJ : A.
S. Barnes, 1974. 200 pp. Survey of the work of one of the few major film stars to "come
out" as a homosexual. Recently, Bogarde has written several novels and
memoirs of relevance. 1747. HIRSCHFELD, MAGNUS, and HERMANN BECK. Gesetze
der Liebe: aus der Mappe eines Sexualforschers.
Berlin: Neue
Gesellschaft, 1927. 64 pp. Summary of the German silent film made to propagate Hirschfeld's
ideas, with stills. 1748. HOBERMAN, JAMES, and JONATHAN ROSENBAUM. Midnight Movies. New York: Harper and Row, 1983. 338 pp. Well-informed account of the popular-culture phenomenon, including the
(largely gay) cult that has grown up around "The Rocky Horror Picture
Show"; and the John Waters films (featuring Divine). 1749. HOCQUENGHEM, GUY. Race d'ep: un siècle d'images de l'homosexualité. Paris: Editions Libres/Hallier, 1977. 192 pp. Glimpses from 100 years of male homosexuality, closely following the
film of the same title, sometimes known in English-speaking countries as
"The Homosexual Century." Many illustrations. 1750. HUGHES, JEREMY. "Professional Innovator," In Touch, 19 (August-September 1975), 54-57. About Pat Rocco, Los Angeles film-maker and gay community leader. 1751.
JACOBSON,
WOLFGANG et al. Rosa von Praunheim.
Munich: Hansen, 1984.
280 pp. Essays on the controversial German gay film-maker (a.k.a. Holger
Mischwitzky), with filmography. 1752. JARMAN, DEREK. Derek Jarman's Caravaggio. London: Thames and Hudson, 1986. 132 pp. Illustrated text of the film liberally interpreting the life of the Italian artist, which won a Silver Bear award at the 1986 Berlin film festival. On the British director's work, see the special issue, "Derek Jarman ... Of Angels and Apocalypse," Afterimage, no. 12 (1986); 89 pp. 1753. JESTER, KLAUS. "Die 'Normalen' ihre eigene Betroffenheit bewusst machen," Cinema (Switzerland), 3 [no. 77], (1980), 20-32. On gay films as political instruments for "consciousness raising." 1754. KANE, B. M. "Thomas Mann and Visconti," Modern Languages, 53 (June 1972), 74-79. On the translation of Mann's novella "Death in Venice" to
the screen. 1755. KEPNER, JIM. "The Posthumous Trial of Ramon
Novarro," Advocate, 3:9 (October 1969), 5, 20-21, 23; 3:10 (November 1969), 1, 3, 8; 3:11
(December 1969), 5, 36-37; 4:1 (January 1970), 5-6, 9. Careful coverage of the trial of Thomas and Paul Ferguson for the
murder of silent film star Novarro (1905-1968). 1756. KLEINHANS, CHUCK et al. [Special Section:]
"Gays and Film," Jump Cut, no. 16 (November 1977), 13-33. Stimulating pieces, generally from a "cultural-left"
perspective. See also Ray Olson, "Gay Film Work: Affecting but Too
Evasive," Jump Cut, no. 20 (May 1979), 9-12. 1757. KNIGHT, ARTHUR, and HOLLIS ALPERT. Playboy's Sex in Cinema. Chicago: Playboy Press, 1971. 144 pp. Includes some material on homosexuality, esp. in the experimental
cinema. 1758. KUREISHI, HANIF. My Beautiful Laundrette and
The Rainbow Sign. London: Faber, 1986. Ill pp. Script of the 1984 British film, which concerns a love affair between
an Anglo-Pakistani youth and his punk Wasp assistant, followed by an
astringent, partly autobiographical essay by Kureishi. 1759. LANCINI, FIORENZO, and PAOLO SANGALLI. La gaia musa. Milan: Gammalibri, 1981. 133 pp. Somewhat impressionistic account of the international "gay
film" (as seen in and from Italy). Index of "Filmi citati,"
pp. 129-32. 1760. LAVALLEY, AL. "The Great Escape," American Film, 10 (April 1985), 29-34, 70-71. During the years of absence of any real representation of themselves
on screen, gay audiences created their own canons for straight films,
yielding an aesthetic that was part projection and part exposure of strands
of gay sensibility brought to celluloid by homosexual set designers, makeup
men, costumers, writers, actors, and directors. 1761. LAVALLEY, AL, et al. "Out of the Closet and on
to the Screen," American Film, 7:10 (September 1982), 57-64, 81. Symposium of nine gay film critics exploring positive aspects of
recent Hollywood films, esp. "Making Love." 1762. LENNE, GERARD. Sex on the Screen: Eroticism in Film. New York: St. Martin's Press, 1985. 352 pp. Popular survey, with 300 photographs, including some discussion of
gay men and lesbians, as well as S & M and fetishism. 1763. LEOPOLD, ALLAN. "Actor Calvin Culver," In Touch (July 1979), 16-23. Profile of the New York actor who (as "Casey Donovan")
projected a wholesome-sexy image in "The Boys in the Band" and
succeeding porno films. 1764. Liebe
der Nacht: Homosexuelle in Film. Basel: HABS, 1982. 54 pp. Listing and description of homosexual-theme films, with filmography,
bibliography, addresses, and stills. 1765. LIMBACHER, J. L. Sexuality in World Cinema. Metuchen, NJ: Scarecrow, 1983. 2 vols. (1511 pp.) This reference work
includes sections on lesbians and gay men in film. 1766. MCDONALD, BOYD. Cruising
the Movies: A Sexual Guide to "Oldies" on TV. New York: Gay Presses of New York, 1985. 175 pp. Sassy animadversions on popular entertainment figures, gay and
straight, as seen on TV, by the founding editor of Straight to Hell magazine. 1767. MELLEN, JOAN. Women and Their Sexuality in
the Hew Film. New York: Horizon Press, 1973. 255 pp. In this feminist study, see "Lesbianism in the Movies" (pp.
74-105), "Visconti's Death in Venice" (pp. 203-15), and "Outfoxing
Lawrence" (pp. 216-28). 1768. PERRY, GEORGE. Life of Python: And How for Something Completely
Different. Boston: Little, Brown, 1983. 192 pp. Popular illustrated account of the British satire group Monty Python,
first on television and more recently in films. Apart from the high camp
character of the troupe, many of its principals have been gay. 1769. PETERSON, WOLFGANG, and ULRICH GREIWE. Die Resonanz: Briefe und Dokumente zum Film "Die Konsequenz,"
Frankfurt am Main: Fischer, 1981. Articles and letters responding to the
pro-homosexual film made from the novel by Alexander Ziegler. 1770. PEVNIK, STEFAN. "Gay Filmmakers Confront Media
Homophobia in the US," Advocate, no 331 (November 26, 1981), 37-38. The National Association of Lesbian and Gay Filmmakers is addressing the need to crate a market for gay media. It
seeks to provide a support network, offers financial consultation and funding
leads, pursues job markets, and has supported demonstrations against homophobic
films. 1771. PHILBERT, BERTRAND. L'homosexualité a l'écran. Paris: H. Veyrier,
1984. 180 pp. Lavishly illustrated survey. See also: Armand Jammot, Les homosexuels aux dossiers de l'écran. (Paris: Robert Laffont, 1975; 93 pp.). 1772. PHILIPS, GENE D. "The
Boys on the Bandwagon: Homosexuality and the Movies,"
in: Thomas R. Atkins (ed.), Sexuality in the Movies. Bloomington: Indiana University Press, 1975, pp.
157-71. Hollywood began coming to grips with homosexuality in the late 1960s,
still trailing behind Britain and the U.S. Underground. 1773.
PRAUNHEIM,
ROSA VON (pseud, of Holger Mischwitzky). Sex
und Karriere. Reinbek bei Hamburg: Rowohlt, 1978. 349 pp. Provocative memoir by the Berlin film-maker and activist; with
filmography to date. 1774. PURDON, NOEL. "Gay Cinema," Cinema Papers, no. 10 (September-October 1976), 115-19. Notes by an English film critic. 1775. RAYNS, TONY (ed.). Fassbinder. Second ed. London: British Film Institute, 1980.
121 pp. Essays covering various aspects of the late German director's career. 1776. ROWE, CAREL. The Baudelairean Cinema: A
Trend vithin the American Avant-Garde. Ann Arbor,
MI: UMI Research Press, 1982. 172 pp. Argues that a trend in American avant-garde ("underground")
cinema, esp. as seen in the work of Jack Smith, Kenneth Anger, and Andy
Warhol, continues the 19th-century decadent/symbolist aesthetic rooted in the
work of the French poet Charles Baudelaire. 1777. RUSSO, VITO. The Celluloid Closet:
Homosexuality in the Movies. New York: Harper and Row, 1981. 256 pp. Restores visibility by unearthing neglected and repressed moments of
film history. Includes an important essay on the "sissy" type.
Informed by 1970s gay-liberation politics, sometimes overstated in terms of
righteous indignation. See the thoughtful essay-review by Richard Dyer, in: Studies in Visual
Communication, 9:2 (Spring 1982), 52-56. 1778. SANZIO, ALAIN, and PAUL-LOUIS THIRARD. Luchino Visconti cinéaste. Paris:
Persona, 1984. 174 pp. Seductively illustrated survey of the films of the Italian director
(1906-76) . 1779. SCHEUGL,
HANS. Sexualität und Neurose im Film: Kinomythen
von Griffith bis Warhol. Munich: Hanser, 1974. 433 pp. This survey of "neurosis" in film includes considerable
discussion of homosexuality. 1780. SCHIDOR, DIETER. Querelle: The Film Book. New York: 1983. 180 pp. Script and stills from Rainer Werner Fassbinder's last, controversial film, derived from Jean
Genet's novel. 1781. SCHUMACH, MURRAY. The Face on the Cutting Room Floor: The Story of
Movie and Television Censorship. New York: William Morrow, 1964. 305 pp. Comprehensive and temperate account of the 40-year blight of
censorship in Hollywood, which goes far to explain the stunted history of gay
representation in the medium. 1782. SERVADIO, GAIA. Luchino Visconti. New York: Franklin Watts, 1983. 262 pp. Life of the great Italian director (1906-76), showing his shift to
homosexuality in Paris during the 1930s and subsequent relationships. 1783. SHOELL, WILLIAM. Stay Out of the Shower: 25 Years of Shocker Films Beginning with
"Psycho." New York: Dembner Books, 1985. 184 pp. Popular illustrated survey,
including "snuff" and "splatter" films. See esp. pp. 57-66. 1784. SICILIANO, ENZO. Pasolini: A Biography. Translated by John Shepley. New York: Random
House, 1982. 435 pp. Stresses political aspects of the director-writer's life. See also Pasolini on Pasolini:
Interviews with Oswald Stack (Bloomington: Indiana University Press, 1969; 176
pp.). 1785. SIEBENAND, PAUL ALCUIN. The Beginnings of Gay Cinema
in Los Angeles: The Industry and the Audience. Los Angeles: University of Southern California,
1975. 213 pp. (unpublished dissertation, Department of Communications and
Cinema) Careful study of the subject, created with the help of ONE Institute
and the filmmakers themselves. 1786. SIKOV, ED. "Homosexuals, Bandits, and
Gangsters: Gay Images in La Cage aux folles," Cineaste, 2:4 (1982), 30-35. Holds that this "comic froufrou" demands camp recognition,
but ultimately disfigures camp humor by appealing to reactionary
stereotypes. 1787. SITNEY, P. ADAMS. Visionary Film: The American Avant-Garde, 1943-1978. Second ed. New York: Oxford University Press, 1979.
463 pp. First in-depth study of the so-called "cinema Underground,"
including the work of Kenneth Anger, James Broughton, Gregory Markopoulos,
Ron Rice, and Jack Smith. 1788. STORA, JEAN-PIERRE. Jean Marais. Paris: Pac
Editions, 1984. Album of photographs of the actor, a protege of Jean Cocteau, some of whose unpublished writings on Marais are included here, as well as interview material by
Stora. 1789. STREFF,
JEAN. Le masochisme au cinéma, dans l'art et la littérature. Paris: Veyrier, 1978. 272 pp. A study of masochism in the arts, with some relevance
to our subject. 1790. SULLIVAN, KAYE. Films for, by and about Women. Metuchen, NJ : Scarecrow, 1980. 552 pp. See
index under "homosexuality" and "lesbianism." 1791. TUCHMAN, MITCH. "Journals: L.A.," Film Comment, 13 (May-June 1977), 4-5. Interview with Bill Dakota, publisher of the Hollywood Star, a raunchy gay scandal sheet. 1791A. TUCKER, SCOTT. "Sex, Death and Free Speech: The Fight to
Stop Friedkin' s Cruising," in Elliott Shore et al. (eds.), Alternative Papers: Selections from the Alternative Press, 1979-1980 (Philadelphia: Temple University Press, 1982), pp.
322-29. Thoughtful qssay on the implications of the street effort to stop the
/filming. Reprinted from Body Politic (November 1979), 23-27; and followed by a note by
Leo Case and Gary Kinsman, pp. 329-30. See also Scottie Ferguson, "The
Film as Film: A Different Critical View," Advocate, no. 290 (April 17, 1980), 15, 20; Tom Ryan,
"Cruising 1," Cinema Papers, no. 29 (October-November 1980), 322-24; and Louis
Tjetje and Gary Schuler, "Setting 'Cruising' Straight," Union Seminary Quarterly
Review, 35 (Spring-
Summer 1980), 211-16. 1792. TURAN, KENNETH, and STEPHEN F. ZITO. Sinema: American Pornographic Films and the People
Who Make Them. New York: New American Library, 1974. 273 pp. Comprehensive
popular study with interviews of filmakers and stars; see esp. pp. 120-27 (on Fat Rocco) and pp.
209- 19 (the homosexual blue movie). 1793. TYLER, PARKER. Screening the Sexes: Homosexuality in the Movies. New York: Holt, Rinehart and Winston, 1972. 367 pp.
Landmark work by the veteran American homophile writer and critic, now
somewhat dated because of reliance on inappropriate psychoanalytic concepts. 1793A. VERSTRAETEN, PAUL. "Homoseksualiteit in de film: weg bij de pisbak," VPRO-Cinema, 2 (January-April 1985), 14-18. Discusses a number of old and new films. This issue of the Dutch
periodical contains several other relevant short articles. 1794. VOGEL, AMOS. Film as a Subversive Art. New York: Random House, 1974. 336 pp. In this study by a New York critic active in the Underground Cinema,
see the chapter, "The Breaking of Sexual Taboos: Homosexuality and Other
Variants." 1795. WATNEY, SIMON. "Hollywood's Homosexual
World," Screen, 23:3/4 (September-October 1982), 107-21. Includes discussion of the "Cruising" controversy. 1796. WAUGH, TOM. "Men's Pornography: Gay and
Straight," Jump Cut, no. 30 (March 1985), 30-35. Presents a series of charts comparing the two film genres as to
production, consumption, iconography (sexual acts presented), and political
context. 1796A. WAUGH, TOM
(THOMAS). "Murnau: The Films Behind the Man," Body Politic, no. 51 (March-April 1979), 31-34. Seeks to show how the art of the director Friedrich Wilhelm Murnau
(1888-1931) was shaped by his place in the heterosexist society of the day. 1797. WERNER, GÖSTA. Mauritz Stiller och hans filmer 1912-1916. Stockholm: Norstet & Soners, 1969. 380 pp. Contains the text of Stiller's 1916 film "The Wings," based
on Herman Bang's novel Mikael. This is said to be the "first gay film"
by Mark Finch, Body Politic, no 107 (October 1984), 32. 1798. WOOD, ROBIN. "Responsibilities of a Gay Film
Critic," Film Comment, 14 (January-February 1978), 12-17. Reflections of a respected British critic, who is now Professor of
Film Studies, York University, Ontario. See also his essay collection: Hollywood from Vietnam to
Reagan (New York:
Columbia University Press, 1986; 328 pp.). 1799. WRANGLER, JACK (pseud, of Jack Stillman), and CARL
JOHNES. The Jack Wrangler Story: What's a Nice Boy Like You Doing in a
Business Like This? New York: St. Martins Press, 1984. 256 pp. Sympathetic, but not altogether candid account of the gay porno star's
extensive career, concluding in a heterosexual relationship with singer
Margaret Whiting. 1800. YACOWAR, MAURICE. Tennessee Williams and Film. New York: Frederick Ungar, 1977. 168 pp. Fifteen chapters on the major
films made from his writings, from "The Glass Menagerie" (1950)
onwards. 1801. ZIMMERMAN, BONNIE. "Daughters of Darkness:
Lesbian Vampires," Jump Cut, no. 24-25 (1981), 23-24. Pre-1970 examples express a nostalgia for
death and a subtle "juxtaposition of erotic and macabre imagery";
after 1970 film-makers began to explore the links between sex and violence
not only in a heterosexual context, but in a lesbian one as well. Homosexual themes occurred as a matter of course in ancient Greek
tragedy and comedy (see III.C). This tradition was interrupted in late Roman
times, and the Renaissance theater represents a new start (though it was
influenced, especially in Italy, by classical prototypes). The employment of
boy actors in women's roles led to a certain undercurrent of same-sex
feeling, as seen particularly in the Elizabethan theater. Analogous phenomena
are found in the dramas of China (III.Q) and Japan (III.R). The prominence of
homosexual and lesbian players (and their counterparts in the dance) in the
19th and 20th century is well known, but has been little studied as such. 1802. ACKROYD, PETER. Dressing Up: Transvestism and
Drag: The History of an Obsession. New York: Simon and Schuster, 1979. 160 pp. Broad-gauged survey of historical and cross-cultural aspects. See esp.
"Transvestism as Performance" (pp. 89- 140). 146 illustrations. 1803. ARMSTRONG, JAMES. "Interview: Charles Pierce,
Female Impersonator," Advocate, no. 190 (May 19, 1976), 19-21. Pierce's career reflects a considerable tradition in American gay-male
entertainment. For an anthropological approach to the broader context, see
Esther Newton, Mother Camp: Female Impersonators in America (Englewood Cliffs, NJ: Prentice-Hall, 1972; 136
pp.). 1793. BAKER, ROGER. Drag: A History of Female Impersonation on the
Stage. London: Triton Books, 1968. 256 pp. Performance transvestism culminating in "intentional glamor"
in the 20th century. 1794. BARISH, JONAS A. The Antitheatrical Prejudice. Berkeley: University of California Press, 1981. 499 pp. In this substantial history of a persistent tradition, gender crossing
emerges as one source of the prejudice; see pp. 44, 287, 321-22. 1795. BINNS, J. W. "Women or Transvestites on the
Elizabethan Stage: An Oxford Controversy," Sixteenth Century Journal, 5 (October 1974), 95-120. Reviews the controversy among Gager, Gentili, and Rain- olds, with its
reflexes on both the academic and popular stages. 1796. BOWERS, FAUBION. Theatre in the East: A Survey
of Asian Dance and Drama. New York: T. Nelson, 1956. 374 pp. In this somewhat uneven survey, see pp. 140, 158, 189, 198-99, 228-31,
260-61. 1797. BOYETTE, PURVIS E. "Wanton Humor and Wanton
poets: Homosexuality in Marlowe's Edward II," Tulane Studies in English, 22 (1977), 33-50. A study of themes and imagery. 1798. BRADBURY, GAIL. "Irregular Sexuality in the
Spanish Comedia," Modern Language Review, 76 (July 1981), 566-80. Spanish gender-disguise plays of the siglo de oro and their roots in Italian Renaissance comedy. 1799. BRAVO VILLASANTE, CARMEN. La mujer vestida de hombre en el teatro Espanol,
siglos XVI-XVII. Madrid: Revista de Occidente, 1955. 238 pp. In this study of women
dressed as men on the classic Spanish stage, see pp. 196-98 on Catalina
Erauso, the female ensign. 1800.
BRECHT,
STEFAN. Queer Theatre.
Frankfurt am Main: Suhrkamp, 1978. 178 pp. Occasional essays on the experimental theater in New York City from
1965 on, esp. in the work of Charles Ludlam, Jack Smith, Ronald Tavel, and
Andy Warhol. 1801. BUCKLE, RICHARD. Diaghilev. New York: Athenaeum, 1979. 616 pp. Standard biography of the great Russian ballet impresario (1872-1929),
with candid discussion of his sexual liaisons. See also Buckle: Nijinsky. (New York: Simon and Schuster, 1971; 482 pp.). See
also S. Karlinsky, below. 1802. CANALES, LUIS. "0 Homossexualismo como Tema no
Moderno Teatro Brasileiro," Luso-Brazilian Review, 18 (1981), 173-81. Analyzes some recent plays as evidence that Brazilian society is
freeing itself of taboos about homosexuality. 1803. CARLSEN, JAMES W. "Images of the Gay Male in
Contemporary Drama," in: James W. Chesebro (ed.), Gayspeak. New York: Pilgrim Press, 1981, pp. 163— 74. Assesses recent plays, using Mart Crowley's "Boys in the
Band"(1968) as the watershed. 1804. CHESLEY, ROBERT. "A Perfect Relationship with
Gay Theatre: Playwright Doric Wilson," Advocate, no. 264 (April 5, 1579), 33-34. Profile of a key
figure in NYC's gay theater movement. 1805. CURTIN, KAIER. "We Can Always Call Them Bulgarians," New York Native (August 1-14, 1983), 39-41. Lesbianism in American theater from the late 19th century onwards. 1806. DAVIES, W. ROBERTSON. Shakespeare's Boy Actors. London: 1939. 217 pp. Standard, but reticent work on this important aspect of Elizabethan
theater practice. 1807. DEATS, SARA MUNSON. "Myth and Metamorphosis in
Marlowe's Edward II," Texas Studies in Literature and Language, 22 (Fall 1980), pp. 304-32. Shows the playwright's use of mythological allusion, particularly as
illustrative of the relationship between the king and his favorite Gaveston. 1808. Drag Show. Woollhara, Australia: Currency Press, 1977. 144 pp. Includes Reg Livermore on Sydney's transvestites, Rose Jackson on drag
queens, Holly Brown on being on stage, members of the Seashore Club talking
about transvestism, and the texts of two drag plays (by Peter Kenna and Steve
J. Spear). 1809. DYNES, WAYNE. "Bibliographical Essay:
Homosexuality and Theater," Cabirion and Gay Books Bulletin, no. 12 (Spring-Summer 1985), 20-22. Historically
arranged survey of secondary literature. 1810. EMDE
BOAS, COENRAAD VAN. Shakespeare's
sonnetten en hun verband aet de travesti-double spelen: een
medisch-psychologische studie. Amsterdam: Wereld- Bibliothek,
1952. 528 pp. Studies the Sonnets in comparison with Shakespeare's double-disguise
plays ("As You Like It," "Cymbeline," "Twelfth
Night," and "Two Gentlemen of Verona"); with extensive
citations and bibliography. Short summaries in English are his: "The Connection between Shakespeare's Sonnets
and his 'Travesti-double' Plays," International Journal of
Sexology, 4 (1950), 67-72; and "The Boy Actor and the 'Double Disguise' in
Shakespeare's Works," International Journal of Greek Love, 1:1 (1965), 18-23. 1811. FRANK, LEAH D. "Torch Song Lights Up Broadway:
First Gay Play to Go Legit, Advocate, no.347 (July 22, 1982), 41-43. On the phenomenal success of Harvey Fierstein's trilogy. See also Anna
Mayo, "Harvey Fierstein and 'Torch Song Trilogy' on Broadway," Village Voice (October 12, 1982), 43-47. 1812. FREEBURG, VICTOR OSCAR, Disguise Plots in Elizabethan
Drama: A Study in Stage Tradition, New York: Columbia University Press, 1915. 241 pp. See "The Boy
Bride," pp. 61-120. 1813. FROW, GERALD. "Oh, Yes It Is!" A
History of Pantomime. London: British Broadcasting Corporation, 1985. 192 pp. Well-researched history of the British pantomime tradition—which has
incorporated both male and female cross— dressing perfomances—from its
origins in the commedia dell'arte to the present. 1814. FUCHS, HANNS. "Die Homosexualität in Dramen der Gegenwart und Zukunft," Die Kritik des öffentlichen Lebens, 17 [no. 215] (August 1902), 512-18. Homosexuality in the plays of the present and the future. Probably the
first article on the subject. 1815. GELLERT, BRUCE. "A Survey of the Treatment of
the Homosexual in Some Plays," Nattachine Review, 7:3 (March 1961), 11-21. Pioneering American
article. 1816. HALL, RICHARD. Three Plays for a Gay Theater
and Three Essays. San Francisco: Grey Fox Press, 1983. 179 pp. The Essays (pp. 147-77) offer thoughtful reflections by a writer who
is both a playwright and a critic. 1817. HELBING, TERRY. "Gay Plays, Gay Theatre, Gay
Performance," Drama Review, 25 (1981), 35-46. Assigns the plays written in the 1970s to several categories,
including relationships, the old-young theme, coming out, and the
old-college-friend type. Notes the growth of gay theater companies. See also
Helbing: "Boom Time for Theatre," Advocate, no. 335 (January 21, 1982), 43, 51-55, 1818. HELBING, TERRY. Gay Theatre Alliance Dirctory
of Gay Plays. New York: JH Press, 1980. 180 pp. Invaluable
alphabetical roster of some 400 plays, many unpublished, with plot and character summaries, as well as
information on rights. 1819. HOFFMAN, WILLIAM M. (ed.) Gay Plays: The First
Collection. New York: Avon, 1979. 493 pp. Editor's Introduction offers considerable historical information.
There is also an extensive bibliography (pp. 475-87). 1820. HOWE, FREDERICK. "Homosexuality in English
Drama" and "Homosexuality in American Drama," Advocate, no 210 (February 23, 1977), 43-45; and no 211
(March 9, 1977), 41-43. Journalistic surveys. See also his: "Gay Theater USA," Advocate, no. 234 (Feburary 8, 1978), 29-30. 1821. JACKSON, GRAHAM. "The Theatre of Implication:
Homosexuality in Drama," in: Ian Young (ed.), The Male Homosexual in
Literature: A Bibliography. Second ed. Metuchen, NJ: Scarecrow Press, 1982, pp. 246-58. Sensitive
observations by a Canadian critic. 1822. JACKSON, GRAHAM. "Toeing the Line: In Search of
the Gay Male Image in Contemporary Classical Ballet," in: Karla Jay and
Allen Young (eds.), Lavender Culture. New York: Jove, 1978, pp. 157- 70. Discusses
stereotyped responses to male love in ballet. 1823. KARLINSKY, SIMON. "Diaghilev: Public and
Private," Christopher Street, 4:7 (March 1980), 48-54. The ballet impresario's relationships with Dima Filosofov, Vaslav
Nijinsky, Leonide Massine, Anton Dolin, Serge Lifar, and Igor Markevich. See
also R. Buckle, above. 1824. KIRK, KRIS, and ED HEATH. Men in Frocks. London: Gay Men's Press, 1984. 160 pp. Numerous photographs, with commentary on the English panto and drag
scene since World War II. 1825. KURIYAMA, CONSTANCE BROWN. Hammer or Anvil: Psychological Patterns in Christopher
Marlowe's Plays. New Brunswick, NJ: Rutgers University Press, 1980. 288 pp. Some assumptions of this psychocritical study have been questioned
(discussion of "repressed homosexual themes"). 1826. LAHR, JOHN. Coward the Playwright. New York: Avon, 1983. 179 pp. Study of Noel
Coward's sensibility as a comedy writer. 1827. LAHR, JOHN. Prick up Your Ears: The Biography of Joe Orton. New York: Knopf, 1978. 302 pp. Incorporating diary materials, probably the
most explicit account of the homosexual life of a contemporary play- wright. 1828. LEAVITT, DINAH LUISE. Feminist Theatre Groups. McFarland and Co., 1980. 154 pp. Account of four Minneapolis groups,
including the Lavender Cellar Theatre. 1829. LIEBERMAN, JOSEPH ALPHONSUS. The Emergence of Lesbians and Gay Men as Characters
in Plays Produced on the American Stage from 1922 to 1954. New York: City University, 1981. 592 pp. (unpublished dissertation) Surveys over a hundred works, including some not previously noticed,
showing the stifling effects of censorship as well as the ultimately
successful efforts to overcome it. 1830. LOEFFLER, DONALD L. An Analysis of the Treatment of the Homosexual
Character in Dramas Produced in the Hew York Theater from 1950 to 1968. New York: Arno Press, 1975. 201 pp. Useful as a narrative history, but
Loeffler is somewhat uncritical about stereotypes and changing standards of
permissiveness. (This book is a slightly enlarged version of a dissertation
submitted at Bowling Green State University in 1969.) 1831. "DIE
MAINTOCHTER." Die Wildnis der
Doris Gay: Beschreibung eines schwulen Projects.
Berlin: Verlag Rosa Winkel, 1979. 125 pp. Text and discussion of a provocative West German gay-lib- eration
theater event. 1832. NELSON, IDA. La sottie sans souci: essai d'interprétation
homosexuelle. Paris: H. Champion, 1977. 276 pp. (Bibliothèque du XVe siecle, 39) Detects homosexual wordplay in texts of a genre of late medieval
satirical drama, the sottie. 1833. PATRICK, ROBERT. "Gay Analysis," Drama Review, 22 (Summer 1978), 67-72. Reflections of the iconoclastic playrwright, who for several years
wrote a column in the gay paper, The Hew York City Hews. 1834. PERCIVAL, JOHN. Theatre in My Blood: A
Biography of John Cranko. New York: Franklin Watts, 1984. Cranko, who died in 1973, was mainly active as choreographer of the
Stuttgart Ballet, where he developed innovative concepts that have spread
everywhere. 1835. PORZGEN, HERMANN. Theater ohne Frau: Das Bühnenleben kriegsgefangenen Deutschen 1914-1920. Königsberg: Ost-Europa Verlag, 1933. 221
pp. On plays and
dramatic skits in prisoner-of-war camps during the First World War. 1836. ROSE, MARY BETH. "Women in Men's Clothing: Apparel
and Social Status in The Roaring Queen," English Literary History, 14:1 (Autumn 1984), 367-91. Reflections on the character of Moll Frith in the play of Middleton
and Decker (ca. 1608-11), seen against contemporary discussions of women in
men's clothing (the "man- woman" ) . 1837. S., W. "Vom Weibmann auf der Bühne," ZfsZ, 3 (1901), 313-25. An anonymous physician reports on his acquaintance with eight
theatrical female impersonators. 1838. SANCHEZ MARIN, CRISTOBAL. Los homosexuales en la danza. Madrid: Napint, 1979. 84 pp. Popular account of homosexuals in ballet and dance. 1839.
SCHÄFER,
MARGARETE. "Theater, Theater!" in Eldorado:
Homosexuelle Frauen und Männer in Berlin 1850-1950.
Berlin: Frölich und
Kaufmann, 1984, pp. 180-86. Well-informed account of lesbian themes in German theater under the
Weimar Republic. 1840. SCHAUER, JOHN. "Arpino: Dance and the Male Mystique," Advocate, no. 237 (March 22, 1978), 32-33. On an influential figure in contemporary dance, Gerald Arpino. See
also Schauer, "The Tiptoeing Trockadero," ibid.,
no. 203 (November 17, 1976), 24-26+ (on the New York cross-dressing ballet
company). 1841. SENELICK, LAURENCE. "The Evolution of the Male
Impersonator in the Nineteenth Century Stage," Essays in Theatre (Guelph, Ont.), 1 (1982), 31-44. Reconstructs the lives and careers of several actresses taking male
parts on the English and American stage, ca. 1850-1914; with useful reference
notes on this underre- searched topic. 1842. SHAPIRO, STEPHEN RICHARD. The Theme of Homosexuality in
Selected Theatrical Events Produced in the United States between 1969 and 1974. Santa Barbara: University of California, 1976. 234
pp. (unpublished dissertation) Discusses 28 plays, concluding that the stage continues to propagate
the idea of homosexuals as "a troubled, unstable, unhappy group of
human beings." 1843. SHAWN, TED, and GRAY POOLE. One Thousand and One Night
Stands. Garden
City, NY: Doubleday, 1960. 288 pp. Reminiscences of Shawn (1891-1972) who, though a closeted homosexual,
managed to convince the American public that modern dance was a manly
activity; his association with Ruth St. Denis and the founding of Jacob's
Pillow. See also: Walter Terry, Ted Shawn, Father of American Dance: A Biography. (New York: Dial, 1976; 186 pp.), which is frank about Shawn's
problems in handling knowledge of his homosexuality. 1844. SISLEY, EMILY L. "Notes on Lesbian
Theatre," Drama Review, 25 (1981), 47-56. While the definition of lesbian theatre is contested, it is clear that
it is tied to the great surge of feminism in the 1960s and 1970s. Women's
theatre groups that have specifically identified themselves as lesbian are
few. 1845. SOLOMON, ALISA. "The WOW Cafe," The Drama Review, 29:1 (1985), 92-101. Account of a woman's performance space and its companies in New York's
East Village. This issue contains several other short articles on current
happenings in the off-off- Broadway scene. 1846. STEWART, PAMELA D. "A Play on Doubles: La Calan- dria," Modern
Language Studies, 14 (1984), 23-32. On the 1513 work of Bernardo Dovizi da Bibbiena, the prototype of the
titillating Renaissance gender confusion comedy, in which a male (or female)
character is disguised as a female (or male), attracts the amorous attentions
of a person of the "wrong" sex, but ultimately reveals himself
(herself), so that heterosexual normality is restored. 1847. SUMMERS, MONTAGUE. The Playhouse of Pepys. London: Routledge, 1935. 485 pp. Provides considerable information on
homosexuality in the Restoration stage. Summers goes so far as to speak of
"the prevalence of uranianism in the theatre" during this period
(p. 295). 1848. TAUBMAN, HOWARD. "The Subtle Persuasion in the
American Theater," Cosmopolitan, 155 (November 1963), 88-91. A characteristic specimen of homophobia in the theater criticism of
the period. Taubman claims that "homosexuality is nearly
everywhere," and "it often poisons what you see and hear."
This insidious critical trend was effectively anatomized by Benjamin DeMott,
"But He's a Homosexual...," in Irving Buchen (ed.), The Perverse Imagination (New York: New York University Press, 1970), pp. 147-64. 1849. TOUCHET, GENE RAY. American Drama and the Emergence
of Social Homophilia. Tallahassee: University of Florida, 1974. 213 pp. Detects a surprisingly sunny pattern in the 20 plays examined. 1850. WANDOR, MICHELENE. Understudies: Theatre and
Sexual Politics. New York: Methuen, 1981. 80 pp. The author, who has worked with feminist and gay theater companies in
Britain, provides an account of this activity in the 1970s. 1851. WEINER, BERNARD. "The Romans in Britain
Controversy," Drama Review, 25 (1981), 57-68. On the brouhaha occasioned by the London staging (with a simulated act
of sodomy) of Howard Brenton's play. 1852. WILLIAMS, GWYN. Person and Persons in Shakespeare. Cardiff: University of Wales Press, 1981. 141 pp. Contains an essay "The Loneliness of the Homosexual in
Shakespeare." It may be noted that despite the enormous production of
scholarship on the greatest playwright in English, the homosexual aspects of
his work have been surprisingly obscured. See, however, Seymour Kleinberg,
"The Merchant of Venice: The Homosexual as Antisemite in Nascent Capitalism," JH 9:3/4 (Spring-Summer 1983), 113- 26); Philip J.
Traci, "As You Like It: Homosexuality in Shakespeare's Play," CLA Journal, 25 (September 1981), 91-105; and C. van Emde Boas
(1821), above. A strong case for the bard's personal bisexuality is made in:
Joseph Pequigney, Such Is My Love: A Study of Shakespeare's Sonnets (Chicago: University of Chicago Press, 1985). Although countless literary figures are now known to have been
homosexual, in many instances their orientation is not emphasized in the
work; indeed, to the ordinary reader it may be imperceptible, occasioning
astonishment and disbelief when well-known writers of the past are revealed
to be homosexual or lesbian. At a higher level of generality, it has proved
difficult to define a specific "aesthetic" or sensibility of
either gay male or lesbian writing. However this may be, our growing
knowledge of these figures guarantees that, rightly or wrongly, they will be
taken as representative of key aspects of the homosexual experience. In
keeping with the character of the present Guide, primary works of fiction and poetry are not listed
in this and the following two sections, though the items cited, especially
bibliographies, may be used to locate them. 1864. BEACH, SYLVIA. Shakespeare and Company: The Story of an American
Bookshop in Paris. New York: Har- court, Brace, 1959. 248 pp. Beach recalls her days as
proprietor of the famous bookshop in Paris where expatriate American and
British writers met—many of them gay or lesbian. Noel Riley Fitch, Sylvia Beach and the Lost
Generation: A History of Literary Paris in the 20s and 30s (New York: Norton, 1983; 417 pp.). 1865. BITHELL, JETHRO. Modern German Literature, 188(b 1950. Third ed. London: Methuen, 1959. 548 pp. In this general survey, see
pp. 56, 117, 140-41, 184, 216, 229, 272, 307, 312, 374, 386, 471, 476. 1866. BOLD, ALAN (ed.). The Sexual Dimension in Literature. Totowa, NJ: Barnes and Noble, 1982. 224 pp. Essays by various hands, including some discussions of the literary
underground. 1867. BOSWELL, JEANETTA. Past Ruined Ilion: A Bibliography of English and
American Literature Based on Greco-Roman Mythology. Metuchen, NJ: Scarecrow, 1982.
321 pp. Listing arranged by author, with annotations describing the nature of
the treatment of the myth. See index for such figures as Antinous, Ganymede, Hylas, etc. Replaces Helen Law, Bibliography of Greek Myth in
English Poetry. Revised ed. (Folcraft: Folcraft Press, 1955; 39 pp.). 1868. BUSST, A. J. L. "The Image of the Androgyne in
the Nineteenth Century," in: Ian Fletcher (ed.), Romantic Mythologies. London: Routledge and Kegan Paul, 1967, pp. 1-96. Comprehensive survey of concepts of the androgyne in 19th- century
French literature and social thought. See also: Jean Molino, "Le Mythe de 1' androgyne," in: P. Viallaneix and J. Ehrard, Aimer en France, 1760-1760. Clermont-Ferrand: Faculté des Lettres, 1980, pp. 401-11. 1869. CARTER, ALFRED EDWARD. The Idea of Decadence in
French Literature. Toronto: Toronto University Press, 1958. 154 pp. This topic has considerable generic significance (see pp. 23, 39-42,
and 89-122). See also: Koenraad Swart, The Sense of Decadence in
Nineteenth-century France (The Hague: Martinus Nijhoff, 1964); and John P.
Reed, Decadent Style (Athens: Ohio Universities Press, 1985; 234 pp.). 1870. CHARNEY, MAURICE. Sexual Fiction. New York: Methuen, 1981. 180 pp. Examines issues posed by leading works of (chiefly heterosexual)
erotic fiction, from Séde to Erica Jong (but see pp. 74, 91, 96-98, 164). 1871. COCKSHUT, A. 0. J. Man and Woman: A Study of Love and the Novel, 1740-1940. New York: Oxford University Press, 1978. 221 pp.
The title notwithstanding, this book does discuss same-sex relations in
English fiction: "The Male Homosexual" (pp. 161-85) and "The
Lesbian Theme" (pp. 186-208). 1872. CREW, LOUIE, and RICTOR NORTON (eds.) "The Homosexual
Imagination," College English, 36:3 (November 1974), 174-404. Special issue of 14 articles, mainly by gay and lesbian teachers
reflecting on their pedagogical experiences and expectations. 1873. CUCCO, ENZO (ed.). Orgoglio e pregiudizios l'eros lesbico e
omosessuale nella letteratura del Nove- cento. Turin: Fondazione Sandro
Penna, 1984. 137 pp. Contributions by several gay and lesbian scholars on such writers as
Comisso, Lezama Lima, Pasolini, Penna, Testori, and Woolf—as well as on
American literature from Whitman to Ginsberg. 1874. DUFFY, MAUREEN. The Erotic World of Faery. London: Hodder and Stoughton, 1972. 352 pp. Wide-ranging survey of considerable indirect relevance, from the
middle ages to the present, of the hidden world of meaning in fantasy—marred
by occasional Freudian over- interpretation. 1875. EDEL, LEON. Bloomsbury: A House of Lions. New York: Avon, 1980. 333 pp. Readable and well-informed account of the celebrated group of British
intellectuals and aesthetes—including Duncan Grant, John Maynard Keynes,
Lytton Strachey, Virginia Woolf, and others. The secondary literature on the
Bloomsbury group is very extensive; it is perhaps best approached through
critical works on the individual figures . 1876. EICKHORST, WILLIAM. Decadence in German Fiction. Denver: Swallow, 1953. 179 pp. See esp. pp. 125-30 on Friedrich Huch. Bibliography, pp. 165-77. 1877. FASSLER, BARBARA. "Theories of Homosexuality as
Sources of Bloomsbury's Androgyny," Signs, 5:3 (Winter 1979), 237-51. Influence of the turn-of-the-century theorists, chiefly on V.
Sackville-West and Lytton Strachey. 1878. FLETCHER, IAN (ed.). Decadence and the 1890s. London: Edward Arnold, 1979. 216 pp.
(Stratford-on— Avon Studies, 17). Eight papers, chiefly on British literature, including discussions of
Walter Pater and Oscar Wilde. 1879. FORD, HUGH. Published in Paris: American and British Writers,
Printers, and Publishers in Paris, 1920-1939. New York: Macmillan, 1975. 454
pp. In this standard work on the (often nonconformist) expatriates, see
Chapter 21 (Robert McAlmon, pp. 34-94); Chapter 6 (Gertrude Stein, pp.
231-52); and references in index to Djuna Barnes, Charles Henri Ford,
Radclyffe Hall, and others. 1880. GATLAND, JAN OLAV. "Homofile tema: norsk
littera- tur," Samtiden, 92)2 (1983), 74-79. Homosexual motifs in Norwegian literature. 1881. GAUTHIER, XAVIÈRE. Surréalisme et sexualité. Paris: Gallimard, 1971. 381 pp. In this monograph on the role of
sexuality in surrealist imagery, see esp. pp. 230-45. 1882. GIESE,
FRITZ. Der romantische Charakter, 1. Band: Die Entwicklung
des Androgynenproblems in der Früh-Romantik.
Langensalza: Wendt und Klawell, 1919. 466 pp. Study of the development of the androgyne theme in the literature of
early romanticism. 1883. GOODMAN, JAN. "Out of the Closet, But Paying
the Price: Lesbian and Gay Characters in Children's Literature," Interracial Books for Children
Bulletin, 14: 3/4 (1982), 13-14. Critical of some current trends in this genre. 1884. HARDY, ROBIN. "Günsels and Gumshoes," Advocate, no. 353 (October 14, 1982), 63-65, 73. Writers of the hardboiled detective genre have included homosexuals as
part of their vision of the modern city as dominated by corruption and
alienation. See also: Vern Bullough, "'Deviant Sex' and the Detective
Story," Mystery and Detection Annual, 2 (1973), 326-30; and Jim Levin, "Pervo
Killers and Gay Dicks: Gays in American Mystery Novels," New York Native (May 10, 1982), 26-27+ 1885. KELLOGG, STUART (ed.). Essays on Gay Literature. New York: Harrington Park Press, 1985. 174 pp. Twelve essays, mainly on Anglo-American literature. In the
Introduction (pp. 1-12) the editor explores the variety of uses of
homosexuality in literature. This book is a reissue of JH, 8:3/4 (Spring-Summer 1983), which also appeared in
1983 as Literary Visions of Homosexualty. 1886. LEGMAN, GERSHON. Love and Death. New York: Hacker Art Books, 1963. 95 pp. Reprint of 1949 Freudian diatribe on literary manifestations of
American sexual malaise, including homosexuality as a symptom of immaturity. 1887.
LEWANDOWSKI,
HERBERT. Das Sexualproblem in der modernen
Literatur und Kunst. Dresden: Paul Aretz, 1927. 362 pp. A pioneering survey of sexuality in literature and the arts. 1888. LIESHOUT, MAURICE VAN. "Homo's tussen fiktie en
werkeligheid: uitgangspunkten voor literaire-his- torisch onderzoek naar
homoseksualiteit," Homologie, 7:1 (January-February 1984), 33-37. Advances criteria for the evaluative discussion of homosexuality in
literature. 1889. MAYER, HANS. Outsiders: A Study in Life and Letters» Translated by Denis Sweet. Cambridge, MA: MIT Press, 1982. 434 pp. A
threefold study by a German Marxist critic of the literary image of women,
Jews, and homosexuals. The treatment of the latter has been criticized as
external and incomplete. 1890. NICOLSON, NIGEL. Portrait of a Marriage. New York: Athenaeum, 1973. A frank account by their son of an unusual English literary couple: the lesbian Vita Sackville-West and the homosexual Harold Nicolson. See esp. pp. 135-85. 1891. OTT,
VOLKER. Homotropie und die Figur des Homotropen in der Literatur des zwanzigsten
Jahrhunderts. Frankfurt: Peter D. Lang, 1979.
452 pp. Somewhat ponderous study (originating in a doctoral dissertation) of
selected works of fiction and drama in German, English, and French. 1892. PAGLIA, CAMILLE. "The Apollonian Androgyne and
the Faerie Queene," English Literary Renaissance, 9 (1979), 42-63. Sensitive essay on
three of Edmund Spenser's Amazons. 1893. PRAZ, MARIO. The Romantic Agony. Translated by Angus Davidson. Second ed. London:
Oxford University Press, 1951. 502 pp. A classic work on the origins and vogue for decadence in European
fiction; see esp, the Chapter 5, "Byzantium," pp. 287-411. 1894. RUITENBEEK, HENDRIK M. (ed.). Homosexuality and Creative
Genius. New York: Astor-Honor,
1967. 330. Essays, sometimes dated but still worth consulting, on Oscar Wilde,
John Addington Symonds, Walt Whitman, Radclyffe Hall, Denis de Saint-Pavin,
Arthur Rimbaud, Andre Gide, Marcel Proust, Percy Bysshe Shelley, and Emile
Zola. 1895. SINFIELD, ALAN (ed.). Society and Literature 1945-1970. London: Methuen, 1985. 266 pp. Collection of essays (note esp.
Jonathan Dollimore, "The Challenge of Sexuality") with considerable
discussion of literary homophobia (e.g.,in the
Angry Young Men writers of the 1950s). 1896. STAMBOLIAN, GEORGE, and ELAINE
MARKS. Homosexualities and French Literature: Cultural Contexts, Critical
Texts. Ithaca, NY: Cornell University Press, 1979. 387 pp. Essays and interviews on 19th-century and
20th-century French writing. An uneven collection, some items being of
ephemeral significance, others marred by fashionable, but opaque jargon. 1897. STOCKINGER, JACOB. "Homotextuality: A Proposal," in:
Louie Crew (ed.), The Gay Academic. Palm Springs, CA: ETC, 1978, pp. 135-51. Proposes
critical strategies for recovering and evaluating "homotextual
space," See also his "Toward a Gay Criticism," College English, 36 (1974), 303-10. Homosexuality in literature has been the occasion of much evasiveness
and hypocrisy on the part of both authors and critics. The former employed
the "language of Aesop" to sneak their writings past the informal
but pervasive censorship of publishers and to escape the disapproval of a
heterosexual reading public, while the latter often chose to ignore or
conceal the homoerotic elements which they perceived beneath the surface of
the works they were analyzing. This was particularly true in critical writings
destined for college courses in which such a corrupting theme as same-sex
relations would have been intolerable. So it is only in recent decades that
the truth about many homosexual or bisexual authors has been frankly treated
in biographical or critical studies. The insightful analysis of prose and
poetry with homoerotic themes enables us to appreciate aspects of the homosexual
sensibility of periods in which such feelings had to be carefully hidden from
the vindictive scrutiny of an intolerant heterosexual society. 1898. ADAMS, STEPHEN. The Homosexual as Hero. Totowa, NJ: Barnes and Noble, 1980. 208 pp. Straightforward, but somewhat lackluster studies of the work of Gore
Vidal, James Baldwin, James Purdy, John Rechy, E. M. Forster, Christopher
Isherwood, Angus Wilson, Jean Genet, and others. See also Adams, James Purdy (London: Vision Press, 1966; 166 pp.). 1899. AUSTEN, ROGER. Playing the Game: The
Homosexual Novel in America. Indianapolis: Bobbs-Merrill, 1977. 240 pp. Sure-footed selective account, which is highly readable, charting the
constraints and conventions of the American gay novel as the genre developed
until ca. 1965. See also J. Levin, below. Harlem. Westport,CT: Lawrence Hill and Co., 1983.
376 pp. Although the author of the this critical
biography of the noted Black poet (1902-67) was denied access to some documents,
the homophile (though perhaps necessarily highly closeted) sensibility of
Hughes is evident. 1901. BERTHIER, PHILIPPE. "Balzac du coté de Sodome," L'Année balzacienne (1979), 147-77. Comprehensive account of homosexual characters and themes in the work
of the most encyclopedic of all French novelists. See also his,
"Portrait de Stendhal en Evêque de Clogher," Stendhal Club, no. 98 (January 15, 1983), 244- 54. 1902. BINDING, PAUL. Lorca: The Gay Imagination. London: Gay Men1 s Press, 1985. 238 pp. Somewhat inconclusive study of the work of Federico Garcia Lorca, centered on Poeta en Nueva York. See also: Ian Gibson, The Assassination of Federico Garcia Lorca (New York: Penguin, 1983); and Richard L. Predmore, Lorca's New York Poetry:
Social Injustice, Dark Love, Lost Faith (Durham, NC: Duke University Press, 1980; 116 pp.), pp. 65-88. 1903. BLANCH, LESLIE. Pierre Loti: The Legendary Romantic. New York: Carrol and Graf, 1983. 336 pp. Biography of the fin-de-siècle writer and adventurer (1850-1923), whose sometimes exotic works
conjured up ambivalent images. 1904. BOONE, BRUCE. "Gay Language as Political
Praxis: The Poetry of Frank 0'Hara," Sociotext, no. 1 (Winter 1979), 59-92. Attempts to create a Marxist methodology for a realm lying on the
border between sociolinguistics and literary criticism. 1905. CARPENTER, EDWARD (ed.). Ioläus: An Anthology of
Friendship. London: Sonnenschein, 1902. 190 pp. A collection of writings on male same-sex friendship from classic
times through the 19th century, interspersed with comment by Carpenter. This
collection was inspired by what appears to be the first example of the genre,
Elisar von Kupffer, Lieblingsminne und Freundesliebe in der Weltliteratur (Berlin: Adolf Brand, 1900; 220 pp.). The 1917
edition of Carpenter's work was reprinted by Pagan Press, New York, 1982. An
offshoot, unacknowledged as such, of Carpenter's anthology is Byrne Fone
(ed.), Hidden Heritage: History and the Gay Imagination (New York: Avocation, 1980; 323 pp.). 1906. CARPENTER, HUMPHREY. W. H. Auden: A Biography. Boston: Houghton Mifflin, 1981. 496 pp. In the burgeoning secondary
literature on the poet (1907- 1973), this biography is outstanding: detailed,
well-bal- anced, and frank. On Auden's thirty-year relationship
with Chester Kallman, see the anecdotal acccount of Dorothy J. Farman, Auden in Love: The Intimate
Story of A Lifelong Affair (New York: New American Library, 1985; 253 pp.). An
indispensable work of criticism is Edward Mendelson, Early Auden (New York: Viking, 1981; 407 pp.). See also Barry
Cambray Bloomfield and Edward Mendelson, W. H. Auden: A Bibliography,
1924-1969. Second ed. (Charlottesville: Bibliographical Society of the University
of Virginia, 1972; 420 pp.), and Martin E. Gingerich, W. H. Auden: A Reference Guide (Boston: G. K. Hall, 1977; 145 pp.). 1901. CHEEVER, SUSAN. Home before Dark. Boston: Houghton, Mifflin, 1984. 243 pp. Reveals the bisexuality of her father, novelist John Cheever,
including his attraction to his elder brother, Fred. 1902. CLAY, JAMES WILLIAM. "Self and Roles in
Relation to the Process of Writing in Jean Genet's Journal du voleur and John Rechy's City of Night," Gai Saber, 1:2 (Summer 1977), 112-31. A somewhat turgid, but useful comparative study focusing on the
concept of role. 1903. COE, RICHARD N. The Vision of Jean Genet. New York: Grove, 1968. 343 pp. Thematic study examining the works seriatim. The critical approach is
strongly influenced by the existentialism of Jean-Paul Sartre, Saint Genet: Actor and Martyr. Translated by
Bernard Frechtman (New York: Braziller, 1963; 625 pp.). See also: Marion
Luckow, Die Homosexualität in der literarischen
Tradition: Studien zu den Romanen von Jean Genet.
(Stuttgart: Enke,
1962; 149 pp.); and Philip Thody, Jean Genet: A Study of His Novels and Plays (New York: Stein and Day, 1968; 261 pp.); as well
as J. W. Clay, above; and esp. R.C. and S. A. Webb, below. 1904. CRAFT, CHRISTOPHER. "'Kiss Me with Those Red
Lips': Gender and Inversion in Bram Stoker's Dracula," Representations, no. 8 (1984), 107-33. Finds occult or displaced homoeroticism in Harker's passivity and in
the mingling of male blood in Lucy's transfusions. 1905. DE-LA-NOY, MICHAEL. Denton Welch: The Making of a Writer. New York: Viking, 1984. 303 pp. A frank, but somewhat uncritical
biography of the late English novelist. See also Welch, The Journals. Edited by Michael De-La-Noy (New York: Dutton,
1984; 378 pp.), which replaces the heavily cut version issued in 1952. 1906. DELAY, JEAN. The Youth of André Gide. Abridged and
translated from the French by June Guichar- naud. Chicago: University of
Chicago Press, 1963. 498 pp. Shortened version of a major, though contestable study of the
formation of Gide's personality in terms of "angelism." The French
version, in two volumes, was published by Gallimard, Paris, in 1956-57. See also: C. D. E. Tolton, André Gide and the Art of Autobiography (Toronto: Macmillan. of Canada, 1975; 122 pp.); Eric
Marty, L'ecriture du jour: le Journal d'André Gide (Paris: Seuil, 1985; 272 pp.) and, for the political aspect, Rudolf
Maurer, André Gide et l'URSS (Bern: Tillier, 1983; 252 pp.); as well as R. Fernandez, below. 1907. DELLAMORA, RICHARD. "An Essay in Sexual Liberation, Victorian Style: Walter Pater's 'Two Early French Stories,'" JH, 8 (1983), 139-50. From two medieval stories by the English writer Dellamora concludes
that Pater was an important originator of homosexual criticism. See also
Michael Levey, The Case of Walter Pater. (London: Thames and Hudson, 1978; 255 pp.). 1908. DE MOTT, BENJAMIN. "But He's a Homosexual
...," in: Irving Buchen (ed.), The Perverse Imagination. New York: New York University Press, 1970, pp. 147-
64. Incisive critique of then-prevalent manipulative techniques of
critics decrying the influence of homosexuals in the arts. 1909. DOWDEN, GEORGE. A Bibliography of Works by
Allen Ginsberg. San Francisco: City Lights, 1971. 343 pp. Helps to trace the poet's fugitive publications (1943- 1967).
Supplemented by Michelle Kraus, Allen Ginsberg: An Annotated Bibliography,
1969-1979 (Metuchen, NJ: Scarecrow Press, 1980; 362 pp.). 1910. EDEL, LEON. Henry James: The Master, 1901-1916. Philadelphia: Lippincott, 1972. 591 pp. This final volume of Edel's
magisterial biography contains some reflections on the novelist's sexuality
and material on his male acolytes. For a theory that James was in love with
his brother William, see Richard Hall, "An Obscure Hurt: The Sexuality
of Henry James," New Republic, 180:16 (April 28, 1979) and 180:18 (May 5, 1979). 1911. EDWARDS, A. S. G. "The Authorship of Sodom," Papers of the Bibliographical Society
of America, 71 (1977), 208-12. On the "closet drama" attributed, probably falsely, to
Rochester. See also: Richard Elias, "Political Satire in Sodom," Studies in English
Literature, 18 (1978), 423-38. 1912. EDWINSON, EDMUND (pseud, of Edward Mark Slocum). Men and Boys: An Anthology. Second ed. New York: Coltsfoot Press, 1978. 54, 83 pp. This reprint of a
1924 anthology of pédérastie verse contains a lengthy scholarly introduction by Donald H.
Mader, providing biographical material on the poets included. 1913. ELLMANN, RICHARD, and JOHN ESPEY. Oscar Wilde: Two Approaches:
Papers Read at a Clark Library Seminar, April 17, 1976. Los Angeles: William Andrews Clark Library, 1977.
56 pp. Ellmann's paper ("A Late Victorian Love Affair," pp. 3-21)
"traces the destructive course of Wilde's affair with Lord Alfred
Douglas and explores the literary manifestations of the homosexual theme in
the works of Wilde and others." See also Ellmann's book, Golden Codgers: Biographical
Speculations (New York: Oxford University Press, 1973; 192 pp.), which offers
penetrating observations on literary relations between Pater and Wilde, and
between Wilde and Gide. 1914. ERKKILA, BETSY. Walt Whitman among the French:
Poet and Myth. Princeton: Princeton University Press, 1980. 296 pp. Model study of the American poet's influence in one country; of
especial interest is the link with Andre Gide. 1915. FAAS, EKBERT. Young Robert Duncan: Portrait
of the Poet as Homosexual in Society. Santa Barbara: Black Sparrow Press, 1983. 361 pp. Biographical and critical study of the formative years of the
influential Bay Area poet (b. 1919). See also Duncan's collected essays: Fictive Certainties (New York: New Directions, 1986; 320 pp.). Primary
works are logged in Robert Berthoff, Robert Duncan: A Descriptive Bibliography (Santa Barbara: Black Sparrow Press, 1984; 500
pp.). 1916. FERNANDEZ, RAMON. Gide ou le courage de s'enga- ger. Preface by Pierre Masson. Paris: Klinck- sieck,
1985. 143 pp. Reissue (with supplementary materials) of a perceptive critical
study first published in 1931 by an associate, who was an influential figure
in his own right (see esp. pp. 62-79 on Corydon). 1917. FIEDLER, LESLIE. An End to Innocence: Essays in Culture and
Politics. Boston: Beacon, 1955. 214 pp. The famous essay, "Come Back to the Raft Ag'in Honey" (pp.
142-51), links the Negro and the homosexual as an "archetypal
complex" informing some of America's greatest fiction (an idea said to
have been purloined from Gershon Legman). Subsequently Fiedler presented the
concept more diffusely and negatively in his book: Love and Death in the American
Novel. (New York:
Criterion Books, 1960; 603 pp.). 1918. FINNEY, BRIAN. Christopher Isherwood: A Critical Biography. New York: Oxford University Press, 1979. 336 pp. This careful work is the essential vademecum for the study of the
Anglo-American novelist (1904-1986). See also, however, Claude J. Summers, Christopher Isherwood (New York: Frederick J. Ungar, 1980; 182 pp.), as
well as Isherwood's own autobiographical works. 1919. FONE, BYRNE R. "This Other Eden: Arcadia and
the Homosexual Imagination," JH 8:3/4 (1983), 13-34. Varied functions of the Arcadian ideal in the homosexual literary
tradition—as redoubt, context, and metaphor. 1920. FORREY, ROBERT. "Male and Female in London's
The Sea Wolf," Literature and Psychology, 24 (1974), 135-43. Interprets Jack London's novel as an unconscious attempt to resolve
the author's homosexual components. 1921. FOSTER, STEPHEN WAYNE. "Beauty's Purple Flame:
Some Minor American Gay Poets, 1786-1936," Gay Books Bulletin, 7 (Spring 1982), 15-17. Forgotten poets retrieved through their imagery and subject matter. 1922. FOSTER, STEPHEN WAYNE. "Latin American
Studies," Cabirion and Gay Books Bulletin, no. 11 (1984), 2-7, 29. On Central American and Chilean novelists. 1923. FOSTER, STEPHEN WAYNE. "Sandro Penna's Lyrical
Realism," no. 5 (1981), 27-29. Presentation of the noted Italian poet (1906-1977), with bibliography
to date. See now also: Maria Grazia Boccolini, Sandro Penna: il cosmo, il
fanciullo, il kouros e il cinema dell'Eros (Rome: II Ventaglio, 1985); Cesare Garboli, Penna Papers (Milan: Garzanti, 1984; 99 pp.); and Elio Pecora, Sandro Penna: una chieta
follia (Milan:
Fras- sinelli, 1984; 238 pp.). 1924. FREEDMAN, SANFORD. Roland Barthes: A Bibliographical
Reader's Guide. New York: Garland, 1983. 409 pp. Comprehensive guide to primary texts, with detailed summaries;
selective annotated bibliography of secondary writing on Barthes. Since the
French critic (1915-1980) led a closeted life, details of his homosexuality
remain somewhat sparse. See, however, Richard Sennett: "An Evening of
Barthes," Christopher Street, 7:4 [no. 76] (1983), 22-28. 1925. FURBANK, PHILIP N. E. M. Forster: A Life. New York: Harcourt Brace Jovanovich, 1978. 359 pp. Full biography of the English novelist, including his homosexual
relationships. Since Forster's death in 1970, increasing awareness of the
importance of his sexual orientation to his work has generated a
considerable, but scattered secondary literature, of which only a few
examples can be cited here: Judith S. Herz, "The Double Nature of
Forster's Fiction: A Room with a View and The Longest Journey," English Literature in
Transition, 21 (1978), 254-65; Dixie King, "The Influence of Forster's
Maurice on Lady Chatterley's Lover," Contemporary Literature, 23 (1982), 65-82; Robert K. Martin, "Edward
Carpenter and the Double Structure of Maurice," JH, 8:3/4 (1983), 35-46; Barbara Rosecrance,"
Forster's Comrades," Partisan Review, 47 (1980),591-603; Wilfred Stone, "Overleaping
Class: Forster's Problem in Connection," Modern Language Quarterly, 39 (1978), 386-404; and Anne M. Wyatt Brown,
"Buried Life: E. M. Forster's Struggle with Creativity," Journal of Modern Literature, 10 (March 1983), 109-24. See also C. J. Summers,
below. 1926. FUSSELL, PAUL. The Great War and Modern Memory. New York: Oxford University Press, 1975. 364 pp. Chapter 8
("Soldier Boys," pp. 270-308) of this well regarded study on the
impact of World War I on British writing includes the following topics: Mars
and Eros; the British Homoerotic Tradition; the Homoerotic Sensuous- ness of
Wilfred Owen; and Soldiers Bathing. See also: John Lehmann, The English Poets of the First
World War (London: Thames and Hudson, 1981; 144 pp.). 1927. GARDE, NOEL I. (pseud.). The Homosexual in Literature: A Chronological
Bibliography circa 700 B.C.-1958. New York: Village Press, 1959. 32 pp. "A chronological listing
of ... books in the English language, in the general field of fiction,
concerned with male homosexuality, or having homosexual characters."
Theme and author indices. Reprinted in A Gay Bibliography (New York: Arno Press, 1975). 1928. GIANTVALLEY, SCOTT. "Recent Whitman Studies and
Homosexuality," Cabirion and Gay Books Bulletin, no. 12 (1985), 14-16. Knowledgeable review of work since 1968. Supplements Giantvalley's
major work, Walt Whitman, 1838-1939: A Reference Guide (Boston: G. K. Hall, 1981; 465 pp.); and R. Martin,
below. 1929. GNERRE, FRANCESCO. "The Homosexual Novel in Italy," Gay Books Bulletin, no. 9 (1983), 22-23, 26. Supplements his L'eroe negato (1946) by discussing some novels of the late 1970s
and early '80s. A somewhat shortened version of this article appeared as
"'Ecco': The New Gay Literature in Italy," Advocate, no. 367 (May 12 1983), 33, 36-37. 1930. GNERRE, FRANCESCO. L'eroe negato: il personaggio omosessuale nella
narrativa italiana contempor- anea. Milan: Gammalibri, 1981. 164
pp. Systematic presentation of the Italian gay novel since World War II,
evaluating strengths and weaknesses. Bibliography, pp. 159-61. 1931. GRAVES, RICHARD. A. E. Housman: The Scholar Poet. New York: Scribner's, 1980. 304 pp. Sensitive and frank account of the
somewhat melancholy life of the English classicist and lyric poet (1859-
1936). Some additional material is supplied by: Norman Page, A. E. Housman: A Critical
Biography (London: Mac- millan, 1984; 236 pp.). 1932. HAFKAMP, HANS. "Homosexualiteit in de Nederlandse literatuur," Spiegel Historiael, 17:11 (1982), 548-93. Account of homosexual themes and writers in Dutch literature
. 1933. HAGSTRUM, JEAN. "Gray' Sensibility," in:
J. Downey and B. Jones (eds.), Fearful Joy: Papers from the Thomas Gray
Bicentenary Conference at Carleton University. Montreal: McGillQueen's University, 1974, pp. 6-19. On the homoerotic sensibility of the English poet (1716- 1771), esp.
as reflected in his attachment to Charles Victor de Bonstetten. 1934. HARRISON, GILBERT A. The Enthusiast: A Life of Thornton Wilder. New Haven: Ticknor and Fields, 1983. 403 pp. This biography, the fullest available, includes a meagre discussion of
Wilder's homosexuality, whose secret the writer so carefully tried to
conceal. 1935. HATFIELD, HENRY CARAWAY. Aesthetic Paganism in German
Literature: From Winckelmann to the Death of Goethe. Cambridge, MA: Harvard University Press, 1964. 283
pp. Chapter 1 ("Winckelmann and the Myth of Greece," 1-23) shows
the power of the homosexual archaeologist's influence on the emerging German Klassik. 1936. HELMS, ALAN. "Whitman Revised," Etudes anglaises, 37:3 (July-September 1984), 259-71. Addresses the question: how can the knowledge of Whitman's
homosexuality help us read his poetry more clearly? See also: Joseph Cady,
"Homosexuality and the Calamus Poems," American Studies, 19 (1978), 5-22; and S. Giantvalley, above. 1937. HODGES, ROBERT R. "Deep Fellowship:
Homosexuality and Male Bonding in the Life and Fiction of Joseph
Conrad," JH 4:4 (1979), 379-93. Methodologically interesting, in that Hodges shows how the homoerotic
strands have been ignored because Conrad is viewed as a "male
writer." 1938. HOLLAND, NORMAN NORWOOD. Psychoanalysis and
Shakespeare. New York: McGraw-Hill, 1966. 412 pp. This book has been influential in its (perhaps contestable) genre.
See pp. 83-88, 93-94, 99, 108, 119,139, 156, 182-83, 194, 209, 238-39,
249-51, 280-81, 330-31, 342, 366. 1939. HOLROYD, MICHAEL. Lytton Strachey: A Critical Biography. New York: Holt, Rinehart and Winston, 1967-68. 2 vols. (1233 pp.)
This massive, but engaging biography broke new ground in treating the
homosexual life of the English critic and historian (1880-1932) fully and
fairly, while helping to revive Strachey's reputation and contributing to the
vogue of Bloomsbury. 1940. HOWES, ROBERT W. "Fernando Pessoa, Poet,
Publisher, and Translator, British Library Journal, 9:2 (1983), 161-70. Factual account of the works of Portugal's greatest 20th-century poet
(1888-1935), including homoerotic poems written in English. The criticism of
Pessoa in Portuguese is enormous; see José Blanco, Fernando Pessoa: esbo- co de uma bibliografia (Lisbon: Imprensa Nacional/Casa da fioeda, 1983; 482 pp.). 1941. HOYT, EDWIN P. Horatio's Boys: The Life and work of Horatio Alger, Jr. Radnor, PA: Chilton Books, 1974. 263 pp. Offers a frank discussion of the pédérastie scandal that ended Alger's schoolteaching career, and indirectly
launched him on the path of becoming one of America's most influential
novelists. There are some additional insights in Gary Scharnhorst, Horatio Alger, Jr. (Boston: Twayne, 1980). 1942. HYDE, H. MONTGOMERY. Oscar Wilde: A Biography. New York: Farrar, Straus and Giroux, 1975. 410 pp. The most detailed and accurate life. However, Oscar Wilde's own
letters, as edited by Rupert Hart-Davis, convey a much more
lively picture. See also Mark Nicholls, The Importance of Being Oscar:
The Life and Wit of Oscar Wilde (New York: St. Martin's, 1980; 238 pp.); Rodney
Shewan, Oscar Wilde: Art and Egotism (New York: Barnes and Noble, 1978; 239 pp.); and R.
Ellmann, above. 1943. HYDE, LEWIS (ed.). On the Poetry of Allen Ginsberg. Ann Arbor, MI: University of Michigan Press, 1984.
462 pp. Intended as a comprehensive anthology of critical responses to the
poet's work from 1952 to 1982, this book scants homoerotic analysis. See also
Paul Portuges, The Visionary Poetics of Allen Ginsberg (Santa Barbara: Ross- Erickson, 1978). 1950. HYNES, SAMUEL. The Auden Generation: Literature and Politics in England in the 1930s. New York: Viking Press, 1977. 429 pp. Useful
critical overview of a period in English letters when many of the leading
writers were homosexual (though Hynes does not stress the sexual aspect). 1951. KARLINSKY, SIMON. The Sexual Labyrinth of Nikolai Gogol. Cambridge, MA: Harvard Unviersity Press, 1976. 334 pp. A closely
argued study, concluding that the key to the writer's (1809-52) complex
personality lies in repressed homosexual longing. See also Alex Alexander,
"Two Ivan's Sexual Underpinnings," Slavic and East European
Journal, 25 (1981), 24-37. 1952. KARLINSKY, SIMON. "The Soviet Union vs. Gennady
Trifonov," Advocate, no. 453 (August 10), 1986), 43-49. Trials and triumphs of the only openly gay poet living in the U.S.S.R. 1953.
KEILSON-LAURITZ,
MARITA. Von der Liebe die Freundschaft heisst ...? Relevanz und Aussagestrategien der Homoerotik
im Werk Stefan Georges. Amsterdam:
University, 1986. 138 pp. (Ph. D. dissertation issued in a limited edition by Vrolijk
bookshop) Careful analysis of elusive but important homoerotic elements in the
work of Germany's greatest 20th-century poet. 1954. KIKEL, RUDY. "After Whitman and Auden: Gay Male
Sensibility in Poetry Since 1945," Gay Sunshine, no. 44/45 (1980),
34-39. Reflects the critical attitude of the post-Stonewall
years. 1955. KNIGHT, GEORGE WILSON. Lord Byron's Marriage: The
Evidence of Asterisks. London: Routledge and Kegan Paul, 1957. 398 pp. Provided the first exposure of the Don Leon poems and of Byron's
pederastic tendencies. See now Louis Crompton, Byron and Greek Love (Berkeley: University of California Press, 1985). 1956. KRIEG, JOANN P. (ed.). Walt Whitman: Here and Now. Westport, CT: Greenwood Press, 1985. 248 pp. Proceedings of a
Conference held at Hofstra University in 1980, with relevant papers by Harold
Aspiz, Joseph Cady, Alan Helms, and M. J. Killingsworth 1957. KRÖHNKE,
FRIEDRICH. Jungen in schlechter Gesellschaft: Zum
Bild des Jugendlichen in der deutschen Literatur von 1900-1933.
Bonn: Bouvier, 1980. 213 PP. Study of youth in German literature in the first third of the century,
with special attention to the works of P. M. Lampel. Also discusses Bronnen, George, Schonsted, Vogel, and Wedekind. 1958. KUZMIN, MIKHAIL ALEKSEEVICH. Sobranie stikhov. Edited by John E. Malmstad and V. Markov. Munich:
Wilhelm Fink Verlag, 1977-78. 3 vols. Volume 3 of this collected edition of the works of the brilliant
Russian homosexual writer (1872-1936) contains a biography in English by
Malmstad. 1959. LANGGUTH, A. J. Saki: A Life of Hector Munro. New York: Simon and Schuster, 1981. 366 pp. Documents the homosexuality of
the English writer (1870- 1916), best known for the sardonic wit of his short
stories. 1960. LEHMANN, DAVID, and CHARLES BERGER. James Merrill: Essays in
Criticism. Ithaca: Cornell University Press, 1983. 329 pp. Eleven essays, generally reticent, exploring aspects of the
contemporary American poet's work. To be supplemented by Edmund White,
"The Inverted Type: Homosexuality as a Theme in James Merrill's
Prophetic Books," JH, 8:3/4 (1983), 47-52. 1961. LEVIN, JAMES. The Gay Novel: The Male
Homosexual Image in America. New York: Irvington Press, 1983. 404 pp. Enlarges the purview of Austen's Playing the Game (see above), examining the novels as evidence of
social changes and shifts in sexual-personal self-consciousness, as well as
bringing the story to the early 1980s. See review by Leon Clavius, Cabirion and Gay Books
Bulletin, no. 12 (1985), 24-27. 1962. LIDDELL, ROBERT. Cavafy: A Critical Biography. London: Duckworth, 1974. 222 pp. Frank biography of the Alexandrian Greek poet (1874- 1935). For the
poetry, consult Edmund Keeley, Cavafy's Alexandria: A Study of Myth in Progress (Cambridge, MA: Harvard University Press, 1976; 196
pp.); Carmen Capri- Karka, Love and the Symbolic Journey in the Poetry of
Cavafy, Eliot, and Seferis (New York: 1982); and J. L. Pinchin, below. 1963. MCCANN, JOHN S. The Critical Reputation of Tennessee Williams: A
Reference Guide. Boston: G. K. Hall, 1983. 430 pp. Annotated list of secondary literature, with detailed index. 1964. MARTIN, ROBERT BERNARD. Tennyson: The Unquiet Heart. New York: Oxford University Press, 1980. 643 pp. Shows the lifelong importance of the poet's (1809-1892) intense
feeling for Arthur Henry Hallam, who occasioned his greatest poem, "In Memoriam." 1965. MARTIN, ROBERT K. Hero, Captain, and Stranger: Male Friendship,
Social Critique, and Literary Form in the Sea Novels of Herman Melville. Chapel Hill: University of
North Carolina Press, 1986. 144 pp. Contends that the novelist's fundamental orientation was a homosexual
one, but that he could not realize that desire at home. Only in the world of
the ship and the "primitive" cultures of the South Sea could he
envisage an honorable place for male-male affection. 1966. MARTIN, ROBERT K. The Homosexual Tradition in
American Poetry. Austin: University of Texas Press, 1980. 259 pp. Concentrates on forerunners (Fitz-Greene Halleck and Bayard Taylor)
and followers (Hart Crane, Richard Howard, et al.) of Walt Whitman, for whose
own poetry Martin offers challenging close readings. 1967. MEYERS, JEFFREY. Homosexuality and Literature 1890-1930. Montreal: McGill-Queens University Press, 1977. 183 pp. Essays on
mainstream writers based on the premise that repression offers a positive
stimulus to literary subtlety. 1968. MILLER, JAMES E., JR. T.S. Eliot's Personal
Wasteland: Exorcism of the Demons. University Park: Pennsylvania State University
Press, 1977. 176 pp. Argues that Eliot's masterpiece reflects in part his love for a young
Frenchman, Jean Verdenal. While this thesis has been received with scepticism
by Eliot scholars, the larger question of Eliot's sexual quandary abides.
John Soldo is preparing a new study. This subject was first broached in an
article by John Peters, "A New Interpretation of The Waste Land," Essays in Criticism, 2 (July 1952), 242-66, which Eliot tried to
suppress; it was reprinted in ibid., 19 (April
1969), with a "Postscript," 165-66. 1969. MITZEL, JOHN. John Horne Burns: An
Appreciative Biography. Dorchester, MA: Manifest Destiny, 1976. 135 pp. Subjective reflections on a neglected American novelist
. 1970. MORGAN, TED. Maugham. New York: Simon and Schuster, 1980. 711 pp. Treats Maugham's (1874-1965) homosexuality (including his long
partnership with Gerald Haxton) honestly, showing that the novelist's
obsessive concern with concealment stunted his life—and perhaps his art as
well. 1971. MORRISON, KRISTIN. "Lawrence, Beardsley, Wilde:
The White Peacock and Sexual Ambiguity," Western Humanities Review, 30 (1976), 241-48. Turn-of-the-century
links in British culture. 1972. MOTTRAM, ERIC. William Burroughs: The Algebra of Need. London: Marion Boyars, 1977. 282 pp. Sometimes volcanic effort at a
summation by a sympathetic English critic, who stresses Burroughs' interest in" contemporary morality and his concern over technological
and bureacratic erosion of individual choice. A more conventional study is: . Jenie Skerl, William S. Burroughs (Boston: Twayne, 1985; 127 pp.). 1973. NELSON, EMMANUEL S. "James Baldwin, John Rechy
and the American Double Minority Literature," Journal of American Culture (Summer 1983), 70-74. Brief exploration
of an understudied question. 1974. NIN FRIAS, ALBERTO. Homosexualismo creador. Madrid: Javier Morata, 1933. 383 pp. An early exploration of
homosexuality in Spanish and European fiction by a little known critic and
novelist (1882-1937). Bibliography, pp. 369-76. See also his: Alexis o el significado de
temperamento urano (Madrid: Javier Morata, 1932; 195 pp.). 1975. NORSE, HAROLD. "Cutting Up at the Beat
Hotel," Advocate, no. 377 (September 29, 1983), 38-41. Gay poet's memoir of William Burroughs and other proto- Beats in Paris
in the 1950s. Chapter from a projected autobiography. 1976. NORTON, RICTOR C. The Homosexual Literary
Tradition: An Interpretation. New York: Revisionist Press, 1974. 399 pp. Stimulating, but unconvincing exploration of purported archetypal
patterns in Greco-Roman and Elizabethan literature. 1977. O'BRIEN, JUSTIN. "Albertine the Ambiguous: Note
on Proust's Transposition of Sexes," PMLA, 64 (December 1949), 933-52. Pioneering exploration of Proust's disguise of a male lover as a woman
in his masterwork, sometimes termed the "Albertine complex." 1978. PEQUIGNEY, JOSEPH. Such Is My Love: A Study of
Shakespeare's Sonnets. Chicago: University of Chicago Press, 1985. 264 pp. Subjecting previous scholarship of the Sonnets to withering
criticism, offers a close reading of selected texts to argue that the poems
are "the grand masterpiece of homoerotic poetry." See also: Judith
Kegan Gardiner, "The Marriage of Male Minds in Shakespeare's
Sonnets," Journal of English and Germanic Philology, 84 (1985), 328-47. 1979. PERKINS, MICHAEL. The Secret Records Modern
Erotic Literature. New York: William Morrow, 1977. In this selective critical study, see "Homosexual Erotic
Fiction" (pp. 168-86), which chiefly concerns pulp novels. 1980. PERLOFF, MARJORIE. Frank O'Hara: Poet among Painters. New York: George Braziller, 1977. 234 pp. This book is primarily a critical study, seeking to situate the New
York poet in the context of American modernist poetry and his relation to
painting. However, there is some discussion of his love affairs, e. g.,with Vincent Warren. See also: Bill Berkson and Joe
LeSeuer (eds.), Homage to Frank O'Hara (Berkeley: Creative Arts, 1982; 224 pp.). 1981. PETERS, ROBERT. The Great American Poetry Bake- off. Metuchen, NJ: Scarecrow Press, 1979. 274 pp.
Critical essays by a poet on Walt Whitman, Allen Ginsberg, Harold Norse,
Frank O'Hara, Gerard Malanga, and others. A second series was issued by the
same publisher in 1982; 409 pp. 1982. PINCHIN, JANE LAGOURDIS. Alexandria Still: For- ster,
Durrell, and Cavafy. Princeton: Princeton University Press, 1976. 256 pp. Evaluates the influence of the genius loci of the Egyptian city and
its tutelary spirit, the poet Cavafy, on two English writers, one homosexual,
the other including major homosexual characters in his work. 1983. RADER, DOTSON. Tennessee: Cry of the Heart. Garden City, NY: Doubleday, 1985. 348 pp. A boon companion's gossipy,
but probably largly authentic account of Williams' later years, emphasizing
his homosexuality. More comprehensive and factual, though somewhat
lackluster is Donald Spoto, The Kindness of Strangers: The Life of Tennessee
Williams (Boston: Little, Brown, 1985; 409 pp.). See also: Williams, Memoirs (Garden City, NY: Doubleday, 1975; 264 pp.); and J.
S. McCann, above. 1984. READ, BRIAN (ed.). Sexual Heretics: Male Homosexuality in English
Literature from 1850 to 1900. London: Routledge and Kegan Paul, 1970. 459 pp. Anthology reprinting
89 original texts in prose and poetry, here cited
for the Introduction (pp. 1-56), which provides considerable bibliographical
and other information. 1985.
REINHARDT,
KARL J., et al. "The Image of Gays in Chicano Prose Fiction," Explorations in Ethnic Studies (July 1981), 41-55. Panel discussion. 1986. RIVERS, JULIUS E. Proust and the Art of Love: The Aesthetics of
Sexuality in the Life, Times and Art of Marcel Proust. New York: Columbia University
Press, 1980. 440 pp. In this important monograph Rivers' performs a recuperative analysis,
whereby the negative stereotypes are transformed, by placing them against the
evolving character of contemporary thinking about homosexuality, into
positive insights. See also: Henri Bonnet, Les amours et la sexualite de
Marcel Proust (Paris: Nizet, 1985; 103 pp.); and David R. Ellison, "Comedy and
Significance in Proust's Recherche: Freud and the Baron de Charlus," Modern Language Notes, 98
(1983), 657-74. 1987. SAROTTE, GEORGES-MICHEL. Like a Brother, Like a Lover. New York: Anchor Press/Doubleday, 1978. 339 pp. This French critic's study of homosexuality in major authors of
American fiction and drama is regarded by some as hampered by dated critical
concepts. 1988. SCHLOSSER, RUDOLF. August Graf von Platen. Munich: Piper, 1930. 2 vols. Comprehensive study of the German
homosexual poet (1796— 1835), using the diaries. Much of the subsequent extensive
Platen literature is listed in Fritz Redenbacher, Platen-Bibliographie. Second ed. (Hildesheim: Georg Olms, 1972). For an
account of his life in English, see Xavier Mayne (pseud.), The Intersexes (Naples: The author, 1908), pp. 563-620. 1989.
SCHMIDT,
E. A. "Künstler und Knabenliebe: Eine vergleichende Skizze zu Thomas
Manns Tod in Venedig und Vergils 2.
Ekloge," Euphorion, 68 (1974), 437-46. Mann's novella compared to a Latin analogue. 1990. SCHNEIDER, LUIS MARIO. "El tema homosexual en
la nueva narrativa mexicana," Casa del tiempo, 5 [no. 49-50] (February-March 1985), 82-86. Homosexual themes in Mexican fiction, esp. after 1960. 1991. SCHWARTZ, JOSEPH. Hart Crane: A Reference Guide. Boston: G. K. Hall, 1983. 251 pp. Chiefly an annotated list of
writings about the poet, 1919-80. A large, somewhat uncritical and evasive
compendium is: John Unterecker, Voyager: The Life of Hart Crane (New York: Farrar, Straus and Giroux, 1969; 787
pp.). 1992. SCHWARTZ, KESSEL. "Homosexuality as a Theme in
Representative Contemporary Spanish American Novels," Kentucky Romance Studies, 32 (1975), 247-57. Although it mentions some earlier writers, this article concentrates
on works of the 1960s, by such authors as Jose Donoso, Jose Lezama Lima, Renato Pellegrini, and Oswaldo Reynoso. 1993. SCHWENTGER, PETER. Phallic Critiques: Masculinity
and Twentieth Century Literature. London: Routledge and Kegan Paul, 1984. 172 pp. Explores "ambivalence" of masculine assertion in such
writers as Ernest Hemingway, Norman Mailer, Aloberto Moravia, and Yukio
Mishima. See also Kate Millett, Sexual Politics (Garden City, NY: Doubleday, 1970). 1994. SEDGWICK, EVE KOSOFSKY. Between Men: English Literature and Male Homosocial
Desire. New York: Columbia University Press, 1985. 244 pp. Structuralist-feminist
essays concerning such authors as Shakespeare, Sterne, Wicherley, Tennyson,
and Dickens. Often opaque in style and thought; possibly innovative. 1995. SIMES, GARY. "Gai Saber: Homosexuality and the
Poetic Imagination," Gay Information (Sydney), no. 14-15 (1984), 21-33. Explorations of subtlety and indirection, mainly in examples of the 19th
and 20th century. 1996. SIPRIOT, PIERRE. Montherlant sans masque: tome I: L'enfant prodigue,
1895-1923. Paris: Robert Laffont, 1982. 504 pp. Reveals the homosexuality of the French novelist and playwright, who
remained closeted throughout his life (1895-1932). A revealing, even
scandalous light on his later years is cast by Henry de Montherlant/Roger
Peyre- fitte, Correspondence (Paris: Robert Laffont, 1983; 321 pp.), 1997. SMITH, TIMOTHY D' ARCH. Love in Earnest: Some Notes on the Lives and
Writings of English Uranian Poets from 1889 to 1930. London: Routledge and Kegan
Paul, 1970. 280 pp. An invaluable study of the lives, work and themes of the often obscure
"Calamite" poets of the late 19th and early 20th century who wrote
on the love of adolescent boys. See also: Brian Taylor, "Motives for
Guilt-free Pederasty: Some Literary Considerations," Sociological Review, N.S. 24 (1976), 97-114. 1998. STARKIE, ENID. Flaubert: The Making of the Master. London: Penguin Books, 1971. 461 pp. This biography first explored
the homosexual strand in the character of the great French novelist
(1821-80). See pp. xiii-xiv, 40, 169, 299. For some
of the evidence, see Flaubert, The Letters. Translated by Francis Steegmuller (Cambridge, MA:
Harvard University Press, 1980), pp. 105, 107, 110-12, 125, 129, 148. See
also the diffuse magnum opus of Jean-Paul Sartre, L'idiot de la famille (3 vols. Paris: Gallimard, 1971-72). 1999. STEEGMULLER, FRANCIS. Cocteau: A Biography. Boston: Little, Brown, 1970. 582 pp. Straightforward account of the
life, loves and friendships of the many-sided French homosexual writer Jean
Cocteau (1889-1963). See also: Jean Cocteau and the French Scene (New York: Abbeville Press, 1984; 239 pp.), which
is an illustrated composite account with contributions by Dore Ashton, Neal
Oxenhandler, Ned Rorem, Francis Steegmuller, and others. 2000. STEWARD, SAMUEL M. "The Life and Hard Times of
the Legendary Porn Writer Phil Andros," Advocate, no. 307 (December 11, 1980), 23-27. Reminiscences showing the writer's cautious progress towards sexual
explicitness—in Steward's case through the Phil Andros stories he began to
publish in European homophile magazines in the 1960s. See also his: Chapters from an Autobiography (San Francisco: Grey Fox Press, 1981; 147 pp.). 2001. SUMMERS, CLAUDE J. E. M. Forster. New York: Frederick Ungar, 1983. 416 pp. Sensitive book-by-book survey integrating the novelist's sexuality
into the critical perspective. See also P. N. Furbank, above. 2002. SYLVANDER, CAROLYN WEDIN. James Baldwin. New York: Frederick Ungar, 1980. 181 pp. Thoughtful and we11-documented account of the Black novelist's work
to date, not scanting sexual themes. See also Fred L. Standley, James Baldwin: A Reference
Guide (Boston:
G. K. Hall, 1980; 310 pp.). 2003. TYTELL, JOHN. Naked Angels: The Lives and Literature of the Beat
Generation. New York: McGraw- Hill, 1976. 274 pp. Perhaps the best synthetic critical study of the lives and works of
William Burroughs, Jack Kerouac, and Allen Ginsberg. Much new information is
disclosed in Gerald Nicosia, Memory Babe: A Critical Biography of Jack Kerouac (New York: Grove Press, 1983; 787 pp.). 2004.
VENEMA,
ADRIAAN. Homoseksualiteit in de Neder- landse
literatuur. Amsterdam: Manteau, 1972. 205 pp. Survey of homosexuality in Dutch literature; regarded by some Dutch
critics as offering a somewhat arbitrary selection of authors. See also H.
Hafkamp, above. 2005. WEBB, RICHARD C., and SUZANNE A. WEBB. Jean Genet and His Critics: An
Annotated Bibliography, 1943- 1980. Metuchen, NJ: Scarecrow, 1982. 600 pp. Provides full documentation of analyses of Genet (1910-86) and his
work in French and English, with extensive coverage of reviews and newspaper
articles, including those of productions of plays, permitting one to chart
the impact of his work. 1790 items. 2006. WHITE, PATRICK. Flaws in the Glass: A Self-Por- trait. London: Cape, 1981. 260 pp. The novelist, a Nobel
laureate, describes his long-term relationship with Manoly Lascaris and his
extended process of coming to terms with himself as an Australian and a
homosexual. 2007. WINSTON, RICHARD. Thomas Mann: The Making of an Artist. New York: Knopf, 1981. 352 pp. Although this biography is
incomplete, it does include discussion of the novelist's (1875-1955)
self-recognition as an "urning." 2008. YOUNG, IAN. The Male Homosexual in Literature. Second ed. Metuchen, NJ: Scarecrow Press, 1982. 360 pp. Much enlarged edition of an indispensable reference book (first
published 1975), now comprising 4282 items arranged alphabetically by author
(fiction, plays, poetry). Analytics are provided for anthologies; index of
titles; additional prose essays. Limited to works published in English
(including translations). Some reservations have been expressed about a few
inclusions, and about the system of starring items according to importance. 2009. ZWEIG, PAUL. Walt Whitman: The Making of the Poet. New York: Basic Books, 1984. 372 pp. Seeks to show how Whitman's
personal life and his creative energies intersected in the 1850s to transform
him into a bardic figure. Includes some discussion of the role that his male
attachments played in this change. See also Harold Aspiz, Walt Whitman and the Body
Beautiful (Urbana: University of Illinois Press, 1980; 290 pp.); and Justin
Kaplan, Walt Whitman: A Life (New York: Simon and Schuster, 1980; 432 pp.).
Whitman's own diaries and autobiographical writings are being published in
monumental editions by New York University Press. 2010.
ZYNDA,
STEFAN. Sexualität bei Klaus Mann.
Bonn: Bouvier, 1986.
157 pp. Traces the evolving nature of Klaus Mann's sexual self- awareness in
relation to his works. The attention accorded women writers in the past often overlooked the
lesbian strain, even when the overall merit of the work gained it national or
international acclaim. More recent critics and biographers have sought to redress
this omission, and to place the creations of lesbian writers within the
larger context of women's literature. Likewise, feminist critics have called attention to the distinctive
character of this literature and its contribution to the women's movement for equality in a male-dominated society.
The specific consciousness of women not psychologically dependent upon men is
a notable quality of lesbian writing and one of its major inputs into the feminist
movement. 1999. AUERBACH, NINA. Communities of Women: An Idea in Fiction. Cambridge, MA: Harvard University Press, 1978. 222 pp. Traces the
history of the idea of separation in literature, from the Graie and Amazons
through 19th and early 20th century authors to the present. 2000. BARCLAY, GLEN ST. JOHN. Anatomy of Horror: The Masters
of Occult Fiction. New York: St. Martin's Press, 1979. 144 pp. For lesbianism in the novels of Dickens, Le Fanu, and Meredith, see pp. 25, 27, 33-38, 129-30. 2001. BARR, MARLENE S. (ed.). Future Females: A Critical Anthology. Bowling Green, OH: Bowling Green State University Popular Press,
1981. Includes discussions of Ursula LeGuin, Marge Piercy, Joanna Russ, and
others. See also Betty King: Women of the Future: The Female Main Character in
Science Fiction. (Metuchen, NJ: Scarecrow, 1984). 2002. BELL, QUENTIN. Virginia Woolf. New York: Harcourt Brace Jovanovich, 1972. 2 vols,
in 1 The standard biography of the noted bisexual novelist (1882-1941), by
a younger member of the Bloomsbury circle who had direct access to the
milieu. See also Lyndall Gordon, Virginia Woolf: A Writer's Life (London: Oxford University Press, 1984; 341 pp.);
and S. M. Squier, Virginia Woolf and London: The Sexual Politics of the City (Durham: North Carolina University Press, 1985; 220
pp.). 2003. BLOUIN, LENORA P. May Sarton: A Bibliography. Metuchen, NJ: Scarecrow Press, 1978. 236 pp. Standard bibliography of
the novelist. 2004. BRADY, MAUREEN, and JUDITH MCDANIEL. "Lesbians
in the Mainstream: Images of Lesbians in Recent Commercial Fiction," Conditions: Six (Summer 1980), 82-105. Monitoring the changing image. 2005. BRIDGMAN, RICHARD. Gertrude Stein in Pieces. New York: Oxford University Press, 1970. 411 pp. Critical study which makes a useful contribution to the interpretation
of lesbian elements in her work. 2018. BRIGHT, JOYCE. "A Decade of Tending the Well- spring: Barbara Grier and the Naiad Press," Advocate, no. 382 (December 8, 1938), 38+ On the contribution
of the Naiad Press to lesbian literature (and of Grier—"Gene
Damon"—whose work goes back to the 1950s). 2019. BRITTAIN, VERA MARY. Radclyffe Hall: A Case of
Obscenity? London: Femina, 1968. 185 pp. Account of the court trials and attempt to suppress her novel Well of Loneliness (1925). See also: Michael Baker, Our Three Selves: A Life of
Radclyffe Hall (London: Hamilton, 1985; 380 pp.); Inez Martinez, "The Lesbian
Hero Bound: Radclyffe Hall's Portrait of Sapphic Daughters and Their
Mothers," JH, 8:3/4 (1983), 127-37; and Esther Newton, "The Myth of the
Mannish Lesbian: Radclyffe Hall and the New Woman," Signs, 9:4 (1984), 557-75. 2020. BROWN, LINDA. "Dark Horse: A View of Writing
and Publishing by Dark Lesbians," Sinister Wisdom, 13 (Spring 1980), 42-50. Surveys the emergence of writing and publishing by lesbians of color
(1975ff.); with contact lists. 2021. BROWNE, F. W. STELLA. "Der weibliche Typus inversus in der neueren Literatur: Renee Vivien, Colette Willy, Mary MacLane," Die neue Generation, 18 (1922), 90-96. Early study of lesbian fiction—from a clinical standpoint
. 2022. BULKIN, ELLY. "An Interchange on Feminist
Criticism on 'Dancing through the Minefield,'" Feminist Studies, 8 (Fall 1982), 635-54. Concerning homophobia and racism in feminist literary criticism. See
also her: "Heterosexism and Women's Studies," Radical Teacher, 17 (Winter 1981), 25-31; and "Racism and
Writing: Some Implications for White Lesbian Critics," Sinister Wisdom, 13 (1980), 3-22. 2023. BULKIN, ELLY. "'A Whole New Poetry Beginning
Here': Teaching Lesbian Poetry," College English, 40 (1979), 874-88. Distills experiences in practical criticism through teaching. 2024. CADOGAN, MARY, and PATRICIA
CRAIG. You're a Brick Angela: The Girls' Story 1839-1945. New ed. London: Gollancz, 1986. 405 pp. Study of British children's literature
emphasizing the "girls at school" genre, including the novels of
the ever-popular Angela Brazil. A postscript discusses the 1980s. 2025. CARR, VIRGINIA SPENCER. The Lonely Hunter: A Biography of Carson McCullers. Garden City, NY: Doubleday, 1975. 600 pp. Candid and detailed account of the bisexual
Southern writer (1917-67), including her friendships with Tennessee Williams,
Truman Capote, and W. H. Auden. 2026. CARRUTHERS, MARY J. "Re-vision of the Muse:
Adrienne Rich, Audre Lorde, Judy Grahn, Olga Broumas," Hudson Review, 36 (1983), 293-322. Comparison of four
proudly lesbian contemporary poets. 2027. CHENEY, ANNE. Millay in Greenwich Village. Tuscaloosa: University of Alabama Press, 1975. 160 pp. Makes the lesbianism of the poet Edna St. Vincent Millay (1892-1950)
quite evident. 2028. CLARKE, CHERYL et al. "Black Women on Black Women: Conversations and Questions," Conditions: Nine (1983) , 88-137. Dialogue among Clarke, Jewelle Gomez, Bonnie Johnson, and Linda
Powell. 2029. COOK, BLANCHE WIESEN. "'Women Alone Stir My
Imagination': Lesbianism and the Cultural Tradition," Signs, 4 (1979), 718-39. Literary evidence of the emergence of modern lesbian consciousness in
the first part of the 20th century. 2030. COOPER, JANET. "Female Crushes, Affections, and
Friendships in Children's Literature," Gai Saber, 1:2 (1977), 83-88. Such themes flourished in American children's literature up to the
1920s, when they were gradually extinguished. 2031. CROWDER, DIANE GRIFFIN. "Amazons and Mothers? Monique Wittig, Hélène Cixous and Theories of Women's Writing," Contemporary Literature, 24:2 (1983), 117-44. Contrasts the political views of the two French writers, seeking to
show how these differences mold differences of style. 2032. CRUIKSHANK, MARGARET. "Notes on Recent Lesbian
Autobiographical Writing," JH, 8:1 (1982), 19-26. Emphasizes work produced in the late 1970s and early 80s, arguing that
in the strict sense little true lesbian autobiography existed before then,
owing to reticence and self-censorship. A number of literary topics are
covered in Margaret Cruikshank (ed.), Lesbian Studies: Present and Future (Old Westbury, NY, Feminist Press, 1982; 286 pp.). 2033. DEEGAN, DOROTHY. The Stereotype of the Single
Woman in American Novels. New York: King's Crown Press, 1951. 252 pp. With the wisdom of hindsight, one can perceive that some of these
women characters were "variant," or ambiguously lesbian, 2034. EMPLAINCOURT, MARILYN. La Femme Damnée: A Study of the Lesbian in
French Literature from Diderot to Proust. Tuscaloosa: University of Alabama, 1977. 445 pp.
(unpublished dissertation) From the appearance of La Religieuse at the end
of the 18th century onwards, discerns several phases of development keeping
pace with general literary fashion. 2035. EVERARD, MYRIAM. "Galerij der vrouwenliefde:
'Sex Variant Women' in de Nederlandse literatuur, 1880-1940," in: Mattias Duyves (ed.), Homojaarboek 2. Amsterdam: Van Gennep, 1983, 80-112. Traces a number of themes in Dutch lesbian literature up to World War
II: classical antiquity, schoolgirl romances, decadence, inversion, the woman
as man, prostitution, free love, and the women's movement. 2036. FADERMAN, LILLIAN. "Lesbian Magazine Fiction in
the Early Twentieth Century," Journal of Popular Culture, 11 (1978), 800-17. Commercial outlets were more hospitable at this period than later. 2037. FADERMAN, LILLIAN. Surpassing the Love of Men: Romantic Friendship and
Love between Women from the Renaissance to the Present. New York: William Morrow,
1981. 496 pp. This major study, of theoretical as well as historical importance,
presents literary evidence from both Europe and North America to trace a
broad pattern of homosocial behavior among women (rather than necessarily
lesbian- lism). Copious references in the notes. 2038. FIELD, ANDREW. Djuna: The Life and Times of
Djuna Barnes. New York: G. P. Putnam's Sons, 1983. 287 pp. Readable, but superficial account of the life of the innovative American
writer (1892-1982) in Greenwich Village and Paris, which tends to downplay
her lesbianism. See also Mary Lynn Broe (ed.), Silence and Power: A Réévaluation of Djuna Barnes (Carbondale: Southern Illinois University Press,
1986; 186 pp.); Louis F. Kannenstine, The Art of Djuna Barnes:
Duality and Damnation (New York: New York University Press, 1977); and James B. Scott, Djuna Barnes (Boston: Twayne, 1976). 2039. FOSTER, JEANNETTE H. Sex Variant Women in Literature: A Historical and
Quantitative Survey. New York: Vantage Press, 1956. 412 pp. This still-standard work covers
literature in English, French, and German, with discussion of themes and
characters of works and bibliographical data. The reissues of 1975
(Baltimore: Diana Press) and 1985 (Tallahassee: Naiad Press) contain some
supplementary bibliography. 2040. FRIEDMAN, SUSAN STANFORD. "'I Go Where I Love':
An Intertextual Study of HD and Adrienne Rich," Signs, 4:2 (1983), 228-45. Comparison of the two poets; followed by Rich's comment (pp. 733-38)
and Friedman's reply (738-40). 2041. GLENDINNING, VICTORIA. Vita. New York: Knopf, 1983.
464 pp. Life of the English bisexual writer Victoria Sackville- West
(1892-1962), who had an affair with Virginia Woolf and was married to Harold
Nicolson. See also: Sack- ville-West, Letters to Virginia Woolf. Edited by L. De Salvo and M. Leaska (London:
Hutchinson, 1984; 473 pp.). 2042. GRAHN, JUDY. The Highest Apple: Sappho and the Lesbian Poetic
Tradition. San Francisco: Spinsters' Ink, 1985. 159 pp. Subjective essays on Sappho, Emily Dickinson, Amy Lowell, Gertrude
Stein, Adrienne Rich, Paula Gunn Allen, Audre Lorde, Olga Broumas, and Judy
Grahn. 2043. GRIER, BARBARA. Lesbiana: Book Reviews from
the Ladder, 1966-1972. Weatherby Lake, MO: Naiad Press, 1976. 309 pp. Chronicle of reviews from the monthly column of The Ladder (as by "Gene Damon"), with index, pp.
293-309. 2044. GRIER, BARBARA. The Lesbian in Literature. Third ed. Tallahassee: Naiad Press, 1981. 168 pp. This standard work contains about 2100 entries, including many rare
and out-of-the-way items, twice the number of the second (1975) edition.
Entries are coded for relevance and quality. While the emphasis is mainly creative
work (novels, short stories, drama, and poetry), biographies and some
critical works also appear. The first edition (1967), reprinted in 1975 in A Gay Bibliography (New York: Arno Press), preserves references to a
quantity of "lesbian trash" items that were subsequently jettisoned.
For a supplement covering 1981-83, see Margaret Cruikshank, New Lesbian Writing: An
Anthology (San Francisco: Grey Fox Press, 1984; 200 pp.), pp. 184-200. 2045. GUBAR, SUSAN. "Blessings in Disguise:
Cross-dres- sing as Redressing for Female Modernists," Massachusetts Review 22 (1981), 477-508. Speculative observations on the theme in Virginia Woolf and others. 2046. GUBAR, SUSAN. "Sapphistries," Signs, 10
(1984), 43-62. The influence of the Greek poet on such writers as Renee Vivien, H.
D., Amy Lowell, and Marguerite Yourcenar. 2047. GUEST, BARBARA. Herself Defined: The Poet H. D. and Her World. Garden City, NY: Doubleday, 1984. 384 pp. Although awkwardly written, this book affords the fireal understanding
of the link between H. D. (Hilda Doo- little) and Bryher (Annie Winifred
Ellerman), whose relationship spanned three countries and four decades. 2048. HACKER, HANNA. "Eigensinn und Doppelsinn in frauenbezogenen und lesbischen literarischen Texten österreichischer Autorinnen, 1900-1938," Kultur- jahrbuch: Wiener Beiträge zu Kulturwissenschaft und Kulturpolitik, 2 (1983), 264-81. Woman-identified and lesbian themes in Austrian women authors from the
turn of the century to the Anschluss. 2049. HEILBRUN, CAROLYN G. Toward a Recognition of Androgyny. New York: Knopf, 1973. 189 pp. Examines works by Virginia Woolf and
the Bloomsbury circle, finding in them a plea for reducing the distance
between the genders. 2050. HENNEGAN, ALISON. "Lesbians in
Literature," Gay Left, no. 9 (1979), 20-25. Reflections on the complexities of discovering or deciding who
lesbians were and what lesbianism is from literary evidence. 2051. HODGES, BETH (ed.). Lesbian Feminist Writing and Publishing. Special Issue of Margins: A Review of Little Magazines and Small
Press Books (August 1975). 72 pp. Useful overview, by several hands, of what was being accomplished in
the first half of the 1970s. 2052. JACQUEMIN, GEORGES. Marguerite Yourcenar. Lyon: La Manufacture, 1985. 250 pp. Biographical study of the noted French novelist, the first woman to be
a member of the French Academy. 2053. KARLINSKY, SIMON. Marina Tsvetaeva: The Woman,
Her World, and Her Poetry. Cambridge: Cambridge University Press, 1986. 289 pp. Critical and biographical study of a major Russian poetess of the 20th
century, who was famous for the violent crushes she conceived for persons of
both sexes. 2054. KAYE, MELANIE. "Culture-making: Lesbian
Classics in the Year 2000?" Sinister Wisdom, no. 13 (Spring 1980), 23-34. On canon formation in relation to lesbian writing. 2055. KENNARD, JEAN E. "Ourself behind Ourself: A
Theory for Lesbian Readers," Signs, 9 (1984), 647-62. Proposes a theory of polar reading, permitting the participation of
the lesbian reader in any text, thus opening the possibility of wide literary
experience without involving the reader's denial of her sexual identity and
self. 2056. KLAICH, DOLORES. Woman + Woman: Attitudes
toward Lesbianism. New York: Simon and Schuster, 1974. 287 pp. Includes sensitive critical interpretation of such literary figures as
Sappho, Renee Vivien, Colette, Rad- clyffe Hall, and Virginia Woolf. 2057. LANGER, ELINOR. Josephine Herbst. Boston: Little, Brown, 1984. 384 pp. Sympathetic study of East Coast literary radical (1892- 1969), who
loved both men and women. 2058. LIBERTIN, MARY. "Female Friendship in Women's
Verse: Towards a New Theory of Female Poetics," Women's Studies, 9 (1982), 291-308. Poetry as a vehicle
for women's homosocial perceptions. 2059. MACLEAN, JUDY. "New Writing by Lesbians of
Color," Advocate, no. 382 (December 8, 1983), 38-39. Review essay on recent (and some not-so-recent) literature by minority
lesbians. 2060. MAY, GEORGES CLAUDE. Diderot et "La
Religieuse": Etude historique et litteraire. New Haven: Yale University Press, 1954. 245 pp. Study of Denis
Diderot's lesbian novel. 2061. MELLOW, JAMES R. Charmed Circle: Gertrude Stein and Company. New York: Praeger, 1974. 528 pp. The fullest
account of the fascinating circle around the American writer in Paris. See
also Linda Simon, The Biography of Alice B. Toklas (New York: Avon, 1977. 407 pp.); Samuel Steward
(ed.), Dear Sammy: Letters from Gertrude Stein and Alice B. Toklas (Boston: Houghton- Mifflin, 1977). 2062. O'BRIEN, SHARON. '"The Thing Not Named': Willa
Cather as a Lesbian Writer," Signs (1984), 576-99. Thoughtful examination of the appropriateness of the concept to the
work of the American novelist (1873- 1947). See also Phyllis C. Robinson, Willa: The Life of Willa
Cather (New York:
Holt, Rinehart and Winston, 1984); and Deborah Lambert, "The Defeat of a
Hero: Autonomy and Sexuality in My Antonia," American Literature 53 (1982), 676-90. 2063. PATAI, DAPHNE. "When Women Rule:
Defamiliarization in the Sex Role Reversal Utopia," Extrapolation, 23 (1982), 56-69. Discusses a number of science fiction and fantasy novels portraying
societies in which women dominate or there is no distinction between the
sexes. 2064. PATTERSON, REBECCA. The Riddle of Emily Dickinson's
Imagery. Boston: Houghton-Mifflin, 1951. 434 pp. Pioneering, but still controversial work arguing Dickinson's
lesbianism from internal evidence found in the poems. See also Richard B.
Sewall, The Life of Emily Dickinson (New York: Farrar, Straus and Giroux, 1974). 2065. PHELPS, ROBERT. Belles saisons: A Colette Scrap- book. New York: Farrar, Straus and Giroux, 1978. 302 pp. Illustrated biography of the French novelist (1873-1954). See also:
Genevieve Dormann, Amoureuse Colette (Paris; Herscher, 1984; 319 pp.). 2066. RULE, JANE. Lesbian Images. Garden City, NY: Doubleday, 1975. 246 pp. Canadian novelist offers interpretations of the lives and writings of
Radclyffe Hall, Gertrude Stein, Willa Cather, Vita Sackville-West, Ivy
Compton-Burnett, Elizabeth Bowen, Colette, Violette Leduc, Margaret Anderson,
Dorothy Baker, May Sarton, and Maureen Duffy. 2067. RUSS, JOANNA. How to Suppress Women's Writing. Austin: University of Texas Press, 1983. 159 pp. Passionate defense of
the qualities of women's writing, and the dangers she perceives to its
existence. See also her Magic Mommas, Trembling Sisters, Puritans and
Perverts. (Trumansburg, NY: Crossing Press, 1985). 2068. SAHLI, NANCY. "Smashing: Women's Relationships
before the Fall," Chrysalis, no. 8 (1979), 17-27. Argues that after
1875 same-sex crushes became suspect. 2069.
SCHOPPMANN,
CLAUDIA. "Der Skorpion": Frauenliebe in
der Weimarer Republik. Hamburg: Fruhlings Erwachen, 1985. 81 pp. Study of Anna Elisabet Weirauch (1887-1970),
and her novel Der Skorpion, against the background of lesbian life in Germany, 1918-33. 2070. SEGREST, MAB. "Lines I Dare to Write: Lesbian
Writing in the £outh," Southern Experience, 9 (1981) ,
53-55 and 57-62. Poet and editor reflects on her sisters in Dixie. 2071. SHAKTINI, NAMASCAR. "Displacing the Phallic
Subject: Wittig's Lesbian Writing," Signs, 8 (1982) ,
19-44. Philological and mythological aspects of the transformations effected
by the French writer. 2072. SHAW, NANETTE. "Jocelyn Francois: An Introduction," Thirteenth Moon, 7 (1984), 39-49. Includes excerpts by, and interview with the
French novelist. 2073. SHOCKLEY, ANN
ALLEN. "The Black Lesbian in American Literature: An Overview," in:
Trudy Darty and Sandee Potter (eds. ), Women-identified Women. Palo Alto, CA: Mayfield (1974), 267-75. Reasons for
the neglect of this literature and discussions of work by Maya Angelou, Ann
Shockley, Rosa Guy, Gayl Jones, Pat Parker, and others. 2074. STIMPSON, CATHARINE. "Zero Degree Deviancy: The
Lesbian Novel in English," Critical Inquiry, 8 (1981), 363-79. Thoughtful essay treating a few selected examples, including The Well of Loneliness and Lover. 2075. TUBACH, SALLY P. Female Homoeroticism in German
Literature and Culture. Berkeley: University of California, 1980. 582 pp. (unpublished dissertation) Explores reasons for late emergence in German literature; Bettina von
Arnim, effects of psychiatric theories; 20th- century authors (including
Ingeborg Bachmann and Verena Stefan). 2076. WELLEK, RENE. "Vernon Lee, Bernard Berenson and
Aesthetics," in: Vittorio Gabrieli (ed.), Friendship's Garland: Essays
Presented to Mario Praz on His Seventieth Birthday. Rome: Edizioni di Storia e Letteratura, 1966, pp.
529-47. On the English writer Vernon Lee and her circle in Florence. 2077. WHITE, RAY LEWIS. Gertrude Stein and Alice B.
Toklas: A Reference Guide. Boston: G. K. Hall, 1984. 282 pp. Chiefly an annotated list of writings about the famous couple
(1909-81). See also: Maureen R. Liston, Gertrude Stein: Annotated
Critical Bibliography (Kent, OH: Kent State University Press, 1979; 230 pp.). 2078. ZIMMERMAN, BONNIE. "Is 'Chloe Liked Olivia' a
Lesbian Plot?" Women's Studies International Forum, 6 (1983), 169-75. Author calls for all women to destroy patriarchal myths about
lesbians; recover the works of lesbians, and proclaim the word
"lesbian" forcefully. See also her "The Politics of
Transliteration: Lesbian Personal Narratives," Signs, 9 (1984), 663-82; and "What Has Never Been: An
Overview of Lesbian Feminist Criticism," Feminist Studies, 7 (1981), 451-75. In its essence abstract, music would seem to be unrelated to sexual
orientation. However, closer inspection reveals a number of interesting
facets: the historical vogue of castrati, individual homosexual and lesbian composers and
performers, and homosexual elements in lyrics and librettos of musical
works. An unsolved problem in the sociology of taste is why certain types of
music (opera, musical comedy, organ music) seem to hold great attraction for
homosexual audiences and others not. See also "Theater and Dance,"
VI.G. 2074. ALBERTSON, CHRIS. Bessie. New York: Stein and Day, 1972. 243 pp. In this life of the great Black blues singer Bessie Smith (1874-1937),
see pp. 14, 116-20 for lesbian aspects. In general see: Derrick
Stewart-Baxter, Ma Rainey and the Classic Blues Singers (New York: Stein and Day, 1970; 112 pp.). 2075. AVICOLLI, TOMMI. "Images of Gays in Rock
Music," in: Karla Jay and Allen Young, Lavender Culture. New York: Jove, 1978, pp. 182-94. "Bisexual chic" and gay/lesbian themes in rock music. 2076. BARRICELLI, JEAN-PIERRE, and LEO WEINSTEIN. Ernest Chausson: The Composer's
Life and Works. Norman: University of Oklahoma Press, 1955. 241 pp. For Chausson's attachment to Claude Debussy, see pp. 37, 59-70. 2077. BENTLEY, GLADYS. "I Am a Woman Again," Ebony, 7 (August 1952), 92-98. A Black songwriter, pianist, and male impersonator writes
with some reticence about her past. 2078. BOWERS, FAUBION. The Mew Scriabin: Enigma and Answers. New York: St. Martin's Press, 1973. 210 pp. A study that mentions the feminine elements in the personality of the
19th-century Russian composer. 2079. BROWN, DAVID. Tchaikovsky: The Early Years, 1840-1874. New York: Norton, 1978. 348 pp. For the Russian composer's
homosexuality, see pp. 50, 248-49. Continued in two subsequent vols. See also
Brown: "Tchaikovsky, Pyotr Il'yich," Hew Grove Dictionary of Music
and Musicians, 18 (1980), pp. 606-36 (on pp. 626- 28 Brown endorses the
controversial theory of the composer's death: see A. Orlovska, below). 2080. BROWN, PETER, and STEVEN GAINES. The Love You Make: An
Insider's Story of the Beatles. London: Macmillanj, 1983. 401 pp. Franker on manager Brian Epstein's homosexuality than earlier
accounts. 2086. CASERTA, PEGGY, and DAN KNAPP. Going Down with Janis. New York: Dell, 1974. 367 pp. Account of life with the tormented rock
singer Janis Joplin (1943-1970), by her lesbian lover. 2087. DEVOE, JOHN. "Pop Music: What's Gay About
It," Advocate, no. 187 (April 7, 1976), 24-25. Beginning of a special section (pp. 24-40) on the pop music world. 2088. DOBKIN, ALIX. Alix Dobkin's Adventures in
Women's Music. Preston Hollow, NY: Tomato Publications, 1979. 70 pp. Compositions of the popular lesbian performer, with commentary,
photos, drawings, and an autobiographical essay. 2089. EWEN, DAVID. American Composers: A Biographical Dictionary. New York: G. Putnam's Sons,1982.
742 pp. See pp. 147-51 on Henry Cowell, mentioning his morals charge,
incarceration in San Quentin, and subsequent loss of friendship with Charles
Ives, a vehement homophobe. 2090. FABER, NANCY. "Never in the Closet or on the
Charts: Holly Near Sings Uncompromisingly of Gay Love," People Weekly, 16 (July 13, 1981), 103-04. Noted lesbian singer keeps her principles and distinctive style. 2091. FUCHS,
HANNS. Richard Wagner und die Homosexualität;
unter besonderer Berücksichtigung der sexuellen Anomalien seiner Gestalten.
Berlin: Barsdorf, 1903. 278 pp. Period study of Wagner (1813-1883) and homosexuality, with special
reference to the sexual anomalies of his characters. 2092. GRECO, STEPHEN, et al. "Merry
Musicmakers," Advocate, no 312 (March 5, 1981), T7-10. On gay men's choruses in New York City, Los Angeles, Chicago, and San
Francisco. 2093. GRILLO, RUDY. "Gay Moments in Straight
Music," Gay Books Bulletin, no 8 (Fall-Winter 1982), 22-26. Perceptive analysis of lyrics and other aspects of American popular
music, chiefly in the first half of the 20th century. 2094. GRUEN, JOHN. Menotti: A Biography. New York: Mac- millan, 1978. 245 pp. Covers the American composer's (1911- ) long-term relationship with
the late Samuel Barber, and with young proteges. 2095. GUTMAN, ROBERT W. Richard Wagner: The Man, His Mind and His Music. London: Penguin, 1971. 693 pp. Chapter 10 (pp. 329-69) shows the German composer's manipulation of
the homoerotic longing of his patron, King Ludwig II, and his use of a
homosexual motif in Tristan and Isolde. 2096. HARRISON, LOU. [Interview], in: Winston Leyland
(ed.), Gay Sunshine Interviews. San Francisco: Gay Sunshine Press, 1978, pp.
163-89. The innovative contemporary composer speaks frankly of his music and
gay relationships. 2097. HENZE, HANS WERNER. Music and Politics: Collected Writings, 1953-81. Translated by Peter Labanyi. Ithaca, NY: Cornell
University Press, 1982. 286 pp. Mixture of music and ingenuous leftism by the contemporary German
composer (b. 1926), who moved to Italy in 1953 to escape homophobia in his
own country. 2098. HERBERT, DAVID (ed.). The Operas of Benjamin Britten. New York: Columbia Unversity Press, 1979. 400 pp. The British homosexual composer's (1913-76) articles and libretti,
some of which contain homophile themes. 2099. HERIOT, ANGUS. The Castrati in Opera. London: Seeker and Warburg, 1956. 243 pp. Traces the history of the fashion for castrati down through the 19th
century, with biographical sketches of celebrated performers. 2100. HOWE, FREDERICK. "The American Musical: Grand,
Gaudy, and Guardedly Gay," Advocate, no 213 (April 6, 1977), 17-19. Historically the Broadway musical, so beloved of gay men, has by and
large sought to present a seemingly straight facade to the middle-class
audience. 2101. JENNINGS, BRIAN (pseud, of William Jennings Bryan).
"Music: The Hermaphroditic Art," ONE Institute Quarterly, 7:1-2 (Winter-Spring 1964), 20-24. A Los Angeles gay pianist reflects on music. 2102. JIOZEMGA, CHRIS. "Tom Robinson 'Comes Out' with
a New Album," After Dark, 11 (May 1978), 78-80. Britain's first openly gay rock musician gives an overview of the gay
influence in contemporary rock and punk. See also Adam Block's interview with
Robinson, Advocate, no. 420 (May 14, 1985), 31-32. 2103. KIRK, KRIS. The Vinyl Closet. London: Gay Men's Press, 1986. 160 pp. Multifaceted survey of the gay side of the pop music scene, including
interviews and photos. Comprehensive gay discography. 2104. KOPKIND, ANDREW. "Gay Rock: The Boys in the
Band," Ramparts, 11 (March 1973), 49-51. Extravagances of the counterculture era. 2105. KUPPER, WILLIAM H. "Immortal Beethoven: A Repressed
Homosexual?" ONE Magazine, 15 (February 1967), 4-6. Homoerotic components of Beethoven's personality have long been
suspected, but remain elusive. See, e.g., Editha and Richard Sterba, Ludwig van Beethoven nnd sein
Neffe (Munich:
Szczesny, 1964; 350 pp.). 2106. MAISEL, EDWARD, Charles T. Griffes: The
Life of an American Composer, New York: Knopf, 1984. 336 pp. Enlarged reissue of the 1943 original, which was (for the period)
surprisingly frank about Griffes' (1884-1920) homosexual liaisons, notably
with a married New York City Police officer. Many important documents were
destroyed by his homophobic family. This new edition adds reference notes. 2107. MITCHELL, DONALD. Britten and Anden in the
Thirties: The Year 1936. London: Faber, 1981. 176 pp. Intersection of the careers of England's two leading homosexual
creative figures of the time. 2108. ORLOVA, ALEXANDRA. "Tchaikovsky: The Last Chapter," Music and Letters, 62 (April 1981), 125-45. Orlova's macabre reconstruction of the circumstances of the composer's
death has been criticized as inadequately documented, 2109. PLASKIN, GLENN. Horowitz: A Biography of
Vladimir Horowitz, New York: William Morrow, 1983. 607 pp. The noted pianist is said to have remarked: "There are three
kinds of pianists: Jewish ones, homosexual ones, and bad ones." This
frank and detailed biography covers his sexual orientation—as well as his
marriage to Wanda Toscanini. 2110. RIMMER, DAVE. Like Punk Never Happened: Culture Club and the New
Pop. London: Faber, 1985. 195 pp. Journalist for Smash Hits speaks his mind on Boy George, Frankie Goes to
Hollywood, and other androgynous/gay phenomena of the 1980s British pop
scene. See also Chris Cutler, File under Popular (London: November Books, 1985). 2111. ROREM, NED. The Paris Diary of Ned Rorem. New York: Braziller, 1966, 240 pp. The American composer recounts frankly
his exploitation of his good looks and homosexual affairs as an expatriate,
1951-55. He continues the story in The New York Diary (New York: Braziller, 1967; 218 pp.) and The Final Diary, 1961-72 (Holt, Rinehart and Winston, 1974; 439 PP.). 2112. SALES, GROVER. "The Strange Case of Charles
Ives or, Why is Jazz Not Gay Music," Gene Lee's Jazz- letter, 4:5 (December 1984), 1-8. Argues that jazz musicians are hardly ever homosexual (without noting
the exceptions of Bix Beiderbecke and Bunny Berrigan). Despite overstatement
of the case, an interesting discussion of musical taste and sexual
orientation. 2113. SCHWARTZ, CHARLES. Cole Porter. New York: Dial Press, 1978. 365 pp. Life of the noted popular music figure (1893-1964), whose
sophisticated lyrics are one of the defining instances of High Camp. 2114. SHILTS, RANDY. "Pop Music: Strictly between the
Lines," Advocate, no 187 (April 7, 1976), 25-27. Commercial constraints make "coming out" hard in the music
business. 2115. SIMELS, STEVEN. Gender Chameleons: Androgyny
in Rock and Roll. New York: Arbor House, 1985. 112 pp. Illustrated journalistic book: from fifties origins to Boy George and
Michael Jackson. 2116. SMITH, A. E. "Peter Ilyich Tschaikovsky: His
Life and Loves Re-examined," OHE Institute Quarterly, no 12 (1961), 20-36. Argues that the Russian composer was a vigorous and creative
homosexual, as well adjusted as the circumstances of his time would allow.
His life was not the tragedy that some have claimed. 2117. THORSON, SCOTT. "Liberace Bombshell—Boyfriend
Tells All about Their Six Year Romance," National Enquirer (November 2, 1982), 48-51. Less a bombshell perhaps than a confirmation of what had long been
evident to the discerning regarding one of America's most popular
entertainers. 2118. TILCHEN, MAIDA. "Lesbians and Women's
Music," in: Trudy Darty and Sandee Potter (eds.), Women Identified Women, Palo Alto, CA: Mayfield, 1984, pp. 287-303. Fifteen years of women's (separatist) music from tentative beginnings
to growing recognition and institutional forms. 2119. WEAVER, NEAL. "In Search of Gay Heroes: Singers
Michael Cohen and Steven Grossman," In Touch (October 1974), 22-27, 75-76. On two upfront gay
vocalists of the counterculture era. 2120. WHITCOMB, IAN. Rock Odyssey. Garden City, NY: Doubleday, 1983. Memoirs of British singer/rock impresario in Hollywood during the late
sixties and seventies. 2121. WHITE, ERIC WALTER. Benjamin Britten: His Life and Operas. Second ed. Berkeley: University of California Press, 1984. 320 pp.
The new edition brings the account up to date, by incorporating the last six
years of the composer's life (1913- 1976). 2122. YOUNG, IRENE. For the Record. Oakland, CA: Olivia, 1982. 58 pp. Photographic portraits of performers in the women's music
. scene. 2123. ZIEGLER, MARION. "The Great Gay
Composers," in: Dennis Sanders (ed.), Gay Source. New York: Berkeley, 1977, pp. 83-95. Notes on the lives of Handel, Beethoven, Schubert, Tchaikovsky, and
others. While present evidence in some cases may be thin, this article offers
many leads which later researchers should follow up. VII. PHILOSOPHY AND RELIGION The exploration of philosophical issues related to homosexuality,
particularly as regards the metaphysic of love, began in ancient Greece, when
most leading thinkers were either bisexual or homosexual (see III.C). In the
many renascences of Greek thought, however, this aspect has been occulted or
neglected altogether. In the 20th century, philosophy—especially in English
speaking countries—adopted an austere credo known as the analytic philosophy,
which discouraged the exploration of social and ethical questions. Recently,
however, philosophers have begun to concern themselves with "mortal
issues" affecting people's lives, such as abortion, the handicapped,
and sexuality. The women's movement has also made an appreciable impact; for
this, see also "Lesbian-Feminist Theory," II.B. Some ethical
aspects are discussed in the following sections on "Religion,"
VII.Bff. Moreover, as in every other field of human endeavor, there is the
question of which philosophers were homosexual, and how their orientation may
have affected their thought. 2124. ARAGONA, TULLIA. Delia infinita d'amore. Ed. by Alessandro Zilioti. Milan: G. Daellei, 1864. 93 pp. See pp. 64-74 for Renaissance discussion (1547) in dialogue form of
the tradition of Greek love according to Plato and Ficino. 2125. BAKER, ROBERT, and FREDERICK ELLISTON (eds.). Philosophy and Sex. Second enlarged ed. Buffalo: Prometheus Books, 1984. 521 pp. Includes papers specifically addressing homosexuality by Jeremy
Bentham, Frederick Elliston, Michael Ruse, Frederick Suppe, and Joyce
Trebilcot—together with much other indirectly relevant material. A useful
bibliography, compiled by William Vitek, appears on pp. 471-521. The first
edition of this book (1975) contains some papers omitted from the new
edition. 2126. BARTHES, ROLAND. A Lover's Discourse: Fragments. Translated by Richard Howard. New York: Hill and Wang, 1978. 234 pp. Somewhat cryptic but suggestive comments on the
nature of love, in which the homosexuality of the writer, an influential
French literary critic and structuralist (1915- 1980), emerges between the
lines. See Richard Sennett, "An E vening of Barthes," Christopher Street, no. 76 (1983), 22-28. 2120.
BARTLEY,
WILLIAM WARREN, III. Wittgenstein. Philadelphia: Lippincott, 1973. 192 pp. Presents the first gathering of evidence, since fully confirmed, that
the Austro-British philosopher (1889- 1951) was homosexual. The new edition
(La Salle, IL: Open Court, 1985) contains an Afterword, "On Wittgenstein and
Homosexuality," reflecting on the controversy that developed when the
Wittgenstein establishment tried to suppress the information, the text of
which is substantially the same as the author's article in Salmagundi, no. 58-59 (1982), 166-96. 2121. BENSON, R. 0. D. In Defense of Homosexuality, Male and Female: A
Rational Evaluation of Social Prejudice. New York: Julian Press, 1965.
239 pp. A critical examination of the arguments against homosexuality,
concluding that homosexual behavior is as ethically defensible as
heterosexual behavior. Reprinted as: What Every Homosexual Knows (New York: Ace Books, 1965). 2122. BENTHAM, JEREMY. "Offenses against One's Self:
Paederasty," JH, 3 (1978), 389-405; 4 (1978), 91-107. First publication, edited by Louis Crompton, of an essay written by
the utilitarian philosopher about 1785. Arguing that homosexual acts do not
"weaken" men or threaten population or marriage, he offers the
first known argument for homosexual law reform in England. A later essay on
the subject (1814-16), "Offenses against Taste," was published by
C. K. Ogden in his edition of Bentham, The Theory of Legislation (London: Kegan Paul, 1931), 476-97.
For the historical background, see Louis Crompton, Byron and Greek Love (Berkeley: University of California Press, 1985). 2123.
BRÈS,
YVON. La psychologie de Platon. Paris:
Presses Universitaires
de France,
1968. 438 pp. An ambitious, but flawed attempt to combine psychoanalysis and
classical philology to show links between Plato's life and his thought. See
the critical remarks by Luc Brisson, Revue des Etudes Grecques, 86 (1973),
224-31. Compare Hans Kelsen, "Platonic Love," American Imago, 3 (1949), 1-70 (translation of a German article
that appeared in 1933). 2124. CANGEMI, JOSEPH P. et al. "The Philosophy of Existentialism and a
Psychology of Irreversible Homosexuality," College Student Journal
Monograph, 8:3, part 2 (September-October 1974). 12 pp. Stresses that the essence of man is his existence, and the
individual's richest existence is to be what he can become. 2125. DESMON, ANDRE-CLAUDE (pseud, of A. Lafond). "A la recherche d'une éthique: méditations spinozistes," Arcadie, no. 73 (January 1960), 9-17; no. 74 (Feb- ruary 1960), 80-87. Advocates a version of Spinoza's philosophy. 2126. DIDEROT, DENIS. Oeuvres. Paris: Gallimard, 1951. 1480 pp. In this selection of the works of the Enlightenment polymath
(1713-84), see "Suite de l'Entretien" (pp. 939-42); "Supplément au Voyage de Bougainville" (pp. 999-1001); and "Essai sur la peinture" (pp. 1143-44). 2127. DOVER, KENNETH J., SIR. "Aristophanes' Speech in Plato's Symposium," Journal of Hellenic Studies, 86 (1966), 41-50. Close reading of this celebrated disquisition on the origins of same-sex
attraction. See also Dover, "Eros and Nomos," Bulletin of the Institute of
Classical Studies (London), 11 (1964), 31-42; and the notes to his edition of the Greek
text of the Symposium (Cambridge: Cambridge University Press, 1980; 185 pp.). 2128. FOUCAULT, MICHEL. The Foucault Reader. Ed. by Paul Rabinow. New York: Pantheon, 1984. 390 pp. Even before his death in Paris in 1984, Foucault had emerged as a figure of vast and ramifying
influence. This book is a selection from a number of his works, emphasizing
the theoretical dimension and focusing in part on his overarching concept of
power as it manifests itself in schools, hospitals, factories, and sexual
arrangements. Indispensible for a thorough study of Foucault's work is: Michael Clark, Michel Foucault: An Annotated Bibliography (New York: Garland, 1983; 608 pp.). See also: John
Rajchman, Foucault: The Freedom of Philosophy (New York: Columbia University Press, 1985; 131
pp.). 2129. FOUCAULT, MICHEL. Power/Knowledge: Selected Interviews and Other Writings, 1972-1977. Ed. by Colin Gordon. New York: Pantheon, 1980. 270
pp. Occasional pieces focusing upon Foucault's concern with the mechanisms
whereby power "reaches into the very grain of individuals, touches their
bodies and inserts itself into their actions and their discourses, learning
processes and everyday lives." 2130. FRAISSE, JEAN-CLAUDE. Philia: la notion d'amitié dans la philosophie antique. Paris: J. Vrin, 1974. 504 pp. Encyclopedic work on the ideas of friendship put forth by the
philosophers of Greco-Roman antiquity. See also Ludovic Dugas, L'amitié antique d'après les moeurs populaires et les théories des philosophes (Paris: Félix Alcan, 1894; 454 pp.). 2131. FRYE, MARILYN. The Politics of Reality: Essays in Feminist Theory. Trumansburg: Crossing Press, 1983. 150 pp. Papers by a lesbian philosopher treating such issues as abortion,
women's oppression, separatism, race, and homophobia. 2132. GOLDBERG, STEVEN. "Is Homosexuality
Normal?" Policy Review no. 21 (1982), 119-38. Tendentious effort to restore the judgmental efficacy of the concept
of abnormality. Discussion in no. 23 (1983), 3-9. Compare M. Levin, below. 2133. GRAVES, JOHN. "Philosophy and Sexuality," Gai Saber, 1:1 (Spring 1977), 23-26. Attempts a general theory of the categories of sex. 2134. HELLMANN,
RODERICH, Ueber Geschlechtsfreiheit: ein
philosophischer Versuch zur Erhöhung des menschlichen Glücks.
Berlin: Staude, 1878. 287 pp. A pioneering exploration of sexual libertarianism. See, e.g., p. 179
for a description of the taste of semen. 2135. HILLER, KURT. "Ethische Aufgabe der Homosexuellen," Der Kreis, 28:4 (1960), 2-6. The German homosexual activist reflects on the ethical task of the homosexual. 2136. HIRSCHFELD, MAGNUS. "Ueber den Begriff der "Widernatürlichkeit," JfsZ 12 (1911-12), 282-96. An early critique of the pseudo-scientific (and religious) concept of
the unnatural. See now Wayne Dynes, Homolexis (New York: GAU-NY, 1985), pp. 100-01. 2137. HUME, DAVID. An Inquiry Concering the Principles of Morals; with
a Supplement: A Dialogue« Indianapolis: Bobbs-Merrill, 1957. 158 pp. The Dialogue (1751) concerns a Utopia where pederasty is respected
(see pp. 142, 145-46). 2138. INGRAM, KENNETH. Sex-Morality Tomorrow. London: Allen and Unwin, 1940. 175 pp. Quasi-visionary reflections by a closeted man. See "Homosexuality"
pp. 99-130. 2139. JURTH, MAX. "Confucius, ou une religion
accessible aux homophiles," Arcadie, no. 85 (January 1961), 26-35. Confucianism as an ethical guide for homosexuals. 2140. KANT, IMMANUEL. Lectures on Ethics. Translated by L. Infield. New York: Harper and Row, 1963. Classroom lectures (1775-80) as taken down by students. Kant defends
the idea that sex is only permissible within the boundaries of a monogamous
heterosexual relationship. He condemns homosexual behavior as "contrary
to the ends of humanity," whereby "the self is degraded below the
level of the animals." (p. 170). 2141. KOERTGE, NORETTA (ed.). Philosophy and Homosexuality, New York: Harrington Park Press, 1985, 98 pp. Four papers, by Michael Ruse, Lynda I. A. Birke, John P. De Cecco, and Frederick Suppe, which chiefly concern
so- ciobiological issues, rather than strictly philosophical ones. Originally
published as JH 6:4 (Summer 1981). 2142. KRISTELLER, PAUL OSKAR. The Philosophy of Marsilio Ficino. Translated by Virginia Conant. Gloucester: P. Smith, 1964. 441 pp.
In this overview of the thought of the Florentine neo-Pla- tonist, see pp.
277-88. 2143.
LAGERBORG,
ROLF HERIBERT HJALMAR. Die Platonische Liebe.
Leipzig: Felix
Meiner, 1926. 295 pp. According to B. C. Verstraete, "Although very much dated . . . ,
this remains a sensitive and often penetrating study of the idealized
homoerotic love advocated by Plato. Lag- erborg dwells at great length on the
close link between repressed sexuality and religious and philosophical mysticism."
(Translated from the Swedish: Den platoniska kàrleken.) 2144. LA METTRIE, JULIEN OFFRAY DE. "L'art de jouir," in his: Oeuvres philosophiques. Berlin: 1791, vol. 3. The Enlightenment thinker (1709-51) explores "that realm of love which knows no limits save
those of pleasure." 2145. LA MOTHE LE VAYER, FRANÇOIS DE. Cincq dialogues faits à l'imitation des anciens. Mons: P. de la Flèche, 1671. 332 pp. In this work by the French sceptic, see the "Banquet sceptique" [1630] (pp. 129-131). 2146. LEVIN, MICHAEL. "Why Homosexuality is
Abnormal," The Monist, 67 (1984), 251-83. Attempts, with spurious logic, to revive a teleological theory to the
effect that homosexual acts are "a misuse of bodily parts";
consequently the homosexual lifestyle inevitably leads to unhappiness. 2147. LEVY, DONALD. "The Definition of Love in
Plato's Symposium," Journal of the History of Ideas, 40 (1979), 285-90. Close reading of the argument. 2148. LEVY, DONALD. "Perversion and the Unnatural as
Moral Categories," Ethics, 90 (1980), 191-202. Seeks to clarify and rehabilitate the natural/unnatural dichotomy,
purging it of homophobic content. 2149. LEVY, PAUL. Moore: G. E. Moore and the Cambridge Apostles. New York: Holt, Rinehart and Winston, 1980. 335 pp. The philosopher's influence on Goldsworthy Lowes Dickin- son, John Maynard Keynes, Lytton Strachey, Ludwig
Wittgenstein, and others, ca. 1895-1914. 2150. MASON, H. A. "Plato's Comic Masterpiece? A Discussion
of the Scope and Function of Plato's 'Drinking Party,'" Cambridge Quarterly, 9 (1980), 114-42. Reexamines the narrative strategy and arguments of Plato's Symposium. 2151. MERRITT, THOMAS M. "Homophile Ethics," ONE Institute Quarterly, 3:4 (Fall 1960), 262-67), Advocates an approach he terms "personalistic or dynamic
idealism." See also his "Philosophy for the Homophile," ibid., 2:3 (Summer 1959), 77-82. 2152. MONTAIGNE, MICHEL DE. The Complete Essays of Montaigne. Translated by Donald M. Frame. Stanford, CA: Stanford University
Press, 1958. 883 pp. In this celebrated work by the French Renaissance thinker (1533-92),
see esp. I, 28 ("Of Friendship"), II, 12 ("Apology for Raymond
Sebond"), and III, 5 ("On Some Verses of Virgil"). A start has
been made towards analysis of Montaigne's significance in this field by
William John Beck, "Montaigne face à l'homosexualité," Bulletin de la Société des amis de Montaigne, no. 9/10 (1982), 41-50. 2153. NAGEL, THOMAS. "Sexual Perversion," Journal of Philosophy, 66 (1969), 1-17. This often-cited paper argues that perversion is a psychological
state rather than a physiological act; perversions are "truncated or
incomplete versions of the complete figuration" (e. g., bestiality, where there is lack of reciprocity). 2154. NIETZSCHE, FRIEDRICH. Menschliches allzu Menschliches. New ed. Leipzig: Fritsch, 1882. 377 pp. This work by the German thinker (1844-1900)—several times translated as "Human, Ail-Too Human"—contains a number of pertinent remarks. Some of Nietzsche's comments were collected by L. S. A. M. von Römer, "Stellen aus Friedrich Nietzsche's Werke über Uranismus," Zeitschrift für Sexualwissenschaft, 1 (1908), 39-46. 2155. OBERHOLZER, W. DWIGHT (ed.). Is Gay Good?:
Ethics, Theology and Homosexuality. Philadelphia: Westminster, 1971. 287 pp. A collection of essays refelcting the climate of the late
1960s—"balanced" in that some are favorable, others unfavorable. 2156. ROSAN, LAURENCE J. "Philosophies of Homophobia
and Homophilia," in: Louie Crew (ed.), The Gay Academic. Palm Springs, CA: ETC Publications, 1978, pp. 255-81. Valuable overview of the bearing of major philosophical traditions on
homosexuality (materialism, idealism, solipsism, dualism). 2157. RUSE, MICHAEL. Is Science Sexist? and
Other Problems in the Biomedical Sciences. Boston: D. Reid- el, 1981. 299
pp. Well-referenced paper by a philosopher of science, chiefly on
evolutionary theory, genetics, and sociobiology. Note esp. no. 1: "Are
Homosexuals Sick" (pp. 245-76), which sets firm limits on the way in
which such a claim could be meaningfully advanced. 2158.
SADE, DONATIEN A. F.
DE, MARQUIS.
La philosophie dans le
boudoir. Paris: Union
Générale d'Editions, 1972. 313 pp. Exposition, in dialogue form, of his libertine concepts of sex; first published in 1795. The character Dolmance is a
homosexual spokesman. There are several English versions. 2159. SCHOPENHAUER, ARTHUR. The World as Will and Representation. Translated by E. F. J. Payne. New York: Dover, 1966. 2 vols. Schopenhauer (1788-1860) thought that, in the male, homosexual
relations are appealing before puberty and in old age, when generation is not
possible (vol. 2, pp. 541, 560-69). His relatively favorable views of homosexuality
(pederasty) have sometimes been linked to his misogyny. 2160. SCRUTON, ROGER. Sexual Desire. London: Weidenfeld and Nicolson, 1985. 428 pp. A florid, but sometimes stimulating book by a conservative English
philosopher. Scruton concedes that homosexuality is not a perversion, but
still finds it problematic. 2161. SOBLE, ALAN (ed.). Philosophy of Sex: Contemporary
Readings. Totowa, NJ: Littlefield and Adams, 1980. 412 pp. Includes articles by Thomas Nagel, Robert Gray, and Donald Levy,
attempting to clarify the nature of perversion. 2162. VANNOY, RUSSELL. Sex without Love: A Philosopher's Exploration. Buffalo: Prometheus, 1980. 226 pp. Examines and rejects the
traditionalist approach that sex should occur only between two people who are
in love. 2163. VEST, D. B. (pseud, of Gerald Heard). "The
Phyl- ogeny of Homo Crescens," ONE Institute Quarterly, 3:4 (Fall 1960), 252-57. Syncretistic presentation, combining evolutionary biology with Eastern
thought. The British writer Gerald Heard (1889-1971) was active in Southern
California, where he attracted a circle of devotees. See also his: "The
Iso- phyl as a Biological Variant: An Enquiry into the Racial and Civilic
Value of the Human Intergrade," ibid., 1:2 The traditional condemnation of homosexuality in Christian moral
theology—as the heritage of Hellenistic Judaism— has been the starting point
for efforts to mitigate the harshness of the prohibition and to find a modus
vivendi for the homosexual in Christian society. These have taken the form of
confrontations with the older theological views and appeals for a humanistic
approach to the plight of the homosexual seeking to live a Christian
existence, though the ascetic principles of Christian thought make it
difficult to convince those who feel a profound moral commitment to the
time-honored beliefs. For Christianity and history, see also "Middle
Ages," III.C. For Judaism, see VII.C, VII.H. The great religious traditions
of the East are best examined in an area-studies context; see
"Islam," III.P; "China, Korea, and Central Asia," III.Q;
and "Japan," III.R. 2164. AERWYN, TOM. "Law, Morality and Religion in a
Christian Society," Religious Studies, 20 (March 1984), 79-98. Post-Wolfenden perspectives. 2165. ALEXANDER, JOHN F., et al. (eds.). [Special Issue.] The Other Side: A Magazine of
Christian Discipleship, no. 81 (June 1978). Issue devoted, somewhat patronizingly, to "the gay person's
lonely search for answers." 2166. ANDERSEN, W. E., and B. V. HILL (eds.).
"Homosexuality and the Education of Persons," Journal of Christian
Education, 59 (September 1977), 3-82. Articles of some length devoted to Christian education and sexuality. 2167. ATKINSON, D. J. Homosexuals in Christian
Fellowship. Grand Rapids, MI: Eerdmans, 1979. 128 pp. An English scholar grounds his conservative approach in a
knowledgeable scrutiny of Biblical texts, 2168. BAILEY, DERRICK SHERWIN, CANON. Homosexuality and the Western
Christian Tradition. London: Longmans, Green, 1955. 181 pp. Pioneering examination of Biblical, historical, and legal topics—now
dated. Bailey interprets the Sodom story as condemning the sin of
inhospitality (rather than intended homosexual rape). Surveys Roman law,
medieval canon law and Church practice, and recent social attitudes and law
(in England). Permeated by an overall bias towards exculpation of the
Christian church from responsibility for the intolerance of homosexuality in
Western civilization. 2169. BATCHELOR, EDWARD (ed.). Homosexuality and Ethics. New York: Pilgrim Press, 1980. 261 pp. Reprints papers and selections from books reflecting a spectrum of
Protestant, Catholic and Jewish views—from homosexuality as
"intrinsically evil" to "naturally good." Authors range
from Thomas Aquinas to Robert Gordis, Norman Pittenger, and Rosemary Ruether.
There is a useful appendix of official statements adopted by Christian
denominations. 2170. BLÙHER, HANS.
Die Aristie des Jesus топ
Nazareth: Philosophische Grundlegung der
Lehre und Erschein- ung Christi. Prien: Kampmann und Schnabel, 1921. 325 pp. Curious blend of German homosexual movement ideas, psychoanalysis,
male bonding theories, and Christianity. 2171. CAHILL, LISA SOWLE. "Sexual Issues in Christian
Theological Ethics: A Review of Recent Studies," Religious Studies Review, 4
(1978), 1-14. Critical overview of 1970s publications. 2172. CARPENTER, EDWARD. "On the Connection between
Homosexuality and Divination and the Importance of the Intermediate Sexes
Generally in Early Civilizations," American Journal of Religious
Psychology and Education, 4 (1911), 210-43. Based in part on ethnological evidence of the berdache and shaman
types, holds that homosexuals have special religious qualifications.
Reprinted as the first four chapters of his Intermediate Types among
Primitive Folk (London: Allen and Unwin, 1918). 2173. CHARLIE, ROBERT. La chasteté cléricale. Brussels: Librairie Socialiste de Henri Kistemaeckers, 1878. 208 pp. Attack on the vices of the clergy in France and Belgium, including purported sexual
attacks on boys. A specimen of a type of writing fairly common in the heyday
of the anticlerical movement in Europe. 2174. COLEMAN, JOHN. "Révolution homosexuelle et herméneutique," Concilium, no. 193 (June 1984), 95-110. Canvases some ideas of psychiatric origin, and offers a critique of
the United States gay movement. 2175. COLEMAN, PETER. Christian Attitudes to Homosexuality, London: S.P.C.K., 1980, 376 pp. Following surveys of the Biblical texts and the development of
attitudes in history, Coleman discusses the recent shift in Christian ethical
judgment from hostility to tolerance and towards acceptance. 2176. COURT, J. H. "Homosexuality: A Scientific and
Christian Perspective," Interchange, no. 13 (1973), 24-40. An Australian view. 2177. "David und der heilige Augustin, zwei Bisexuelle," JfsZ, 2 (1900), 288-94. Early attempt to compare David and St. Augustine as bisex- uals
revered by the Church. 2178. FARRAKHAN, LOUIS. "Breaking Your Agreement with
Hell," Final Call, 1:6 (1981), 2-5, 8-9, 18. Black Muslim
leader's antihomosexual statement. 2179. FERM, DEAN W. Alternative Lifestyles
Confront the Church. New York: Seabury, 1983. 144 pp. What many churches are (and are not) doing to meet the need of
congregants who are not part of traditional family units—including
homosexuals. 2180. FRANKLIN, PATRICK. "Religion: Bond or Bondage
for Gays," Advocate, no. 306 (1980), 21-23. Arg ues that gay people should avoid committing themselves to any
group within the Judeo-Christian tradition, because of the record of
intolerance and persecution. 2181.
Geloof, kerk en homoseksualiteit.
Amsterdam: N.V.I.H.-C.0.C., 1984. 22 pp. Bibliography of mainly positive Dutch religious books and articles.
See also Franz-Joseph Hirs, "Homoseksualiteit en theologie: een
overzicht over de afgelopen tien jaar," Tijdschrift voor theologie, 22 (1982), 178-98. 2182. GREENBERG, DAVID, and MARCIA H. BYSTRYN.
"Christian Intolerance of Homosexuality," American Journal of Sociology, 88 (1982), 515-48. Links Early Christian intolerance to ascetic movements in late antique
society. After a period of occultation in the earlier Middle Ages, Christian
sexual intolerance revived after A.D. 1000 because of the Gregorian reforms,
coupled with social and economic changes. Bibliography, pp. 544-48. The
presentation is more even-handed than that of John Boswell, Christianity» Social
Tolerance, and Homosexuality (Chicago: University of Chicago Press, 1980; 424
pp.). 2183. GUINDON, ANDRE. The Sexual Language: An Essay
in Moral Theology. Ottawa: University of Ottawa Press, 1976. See
"Homosexuality," pp. 299-377. 2184. HORNER, TOM. Homosexuality and the Judaeo-Christian Tradition:
An Annotated Bibliography. Metuchen, NJ: Scarecrow Press, 1981. 131 pp. Judicious selection and
annotation—459 entries—by an authority in the field. Restricted to
English-language material: books, pamphlets, and articles. Subject and author
indices. Additional references, esp. for older and foreign material, appear
in Vern Bullough et al. (eds.), An Annotated Bibliography of Homosexuality (New York: Garland, 1976), vol. 1, pp. 331-62. 2185. JONES, CLINTON. Understanding Gay Relatives
and Friends. New York: Seabury Press, 1978. 133 pp. Sympathetic guide for the lay reader by the canon at the Hartford (CT)
Episcopal Cathedral. 2186. JONES, E. KIMBALL. Towards a Christian Understanding
of the Homosexual. New York: Association Press, 1966. 160 pp. Holds that the "true homosexual" can only achieve self-re-
alization in an encounter with a person of the same sex. 2187. LAURITSEN, JOHN. Religious Roots of the Taboo on Homosexuality: A
Materialist View. New York: The author, 1974. 26 pp. An indictment, from an atheist and materialist standpoint, of the
Christian church as the prime source of antihomo- sexual prejudice in Western
civilization. 2188. MALLOY, EDWARD A. Homosexuality and the
Christian Way of Life. Washington, DC: University Press of America, 1981. 382 pp. "Moderately conservative" response by University of Notre
Dame professor to the increasing visibility of gays in the Church. Opposed to
homosexuality, but not rabidly so. 2189. MILETICH, LEO N. "Now I Lay Me Down to
Sleep," Humanist, 44 (1984), 28-31. Humanist critique of religion. 2190. STINE, ESTHER C. (ed.). "Homophobia: The Overlooked
Sin," Church and Society, 73 (November-De- cember 1982), 3-71. Articles on antihomosexual attitudes in the churches, and steps that
are being taken to reduce them. 2191. THEVENOT, XAVIER. Homosexualité masculine et morale chrétienne. Paris: Le Cerf, 1985. 326 pp. A somewhat jargon-ridden essay in moral theology heavily dependent on
the psychoanalytic concepts of Jacques Lacan. This book is a revised version of a dissertation for the doctorate in
theology at the Institut Catholique in Paris (1980). See André Guindon, "Homosexualités et méthodologie éthique: à propos d'un livre de
Xavier Thevenot," Eglises et Theologie, 17 (1986), 57-84. 2192. TWISS, HAROLD (ed.), Homosexuality and the Christian Faith: A Symposium. Valley Forge, PA: Judson, 1978. 110 pp. Essays representing a variety of views, both pro- and antihomosexual. 2193. WILLENBECHER, THOM. "Gay Atheists Come
Out," Advocate, no. 284 (January 10, 1980), 19-21. Presents views of some leading gay atheists—which can be examined in
greater detail in their periodical GALA, published by the San Francisco chapter of the Gay
Atheists League of America. 2194. WOGGON, HARRY A. "A Biblical and Historical
Study of Homosexuality," Journal of Religious Health, 20 (1981), 156-73. Argues that for responsible persons, sexual orientation and behavior
as such should not be a barrier to church membership. 2195. WOOD, ROBERT W. Christ and the Homosexual. New York: Vantage Press, 1960. 221 pp. This sympathetic, though perhaps
now dated work was a milestone: an early admonition to the churches that
their traditional attitudes must be reexamined. A few significant passages in both the Old and the New Testament have
served as reference points for the continuing Jewish and Christian
condemnation of homosexuality. Subsequent discussion has focused on the
elucidation of these texts, as well as attempting a broader theological
interpretation of the place of sexuality and homosexuality. For the Near
Eastern background to the Old Testament, see III.B. 2196. ASTOUR, MICHAEL. "Tamar the Hierodule," Journal of Biblical
Literature, 85 (1966), 185-96. Presents evidence from Ugarit and Sumeria suggesting that the qedeshim of the Old Testament were indeed male cult
prostitutes. 2197. BARTLETT, DAVID L. "A Biblical Perspective on
Homosexuality," Foundations: Baptist Journal of History and Theology, 20 (1977), 133-47. Holds that the biblical references to homosexuality are condemnatory.
Yet God's grace is stronger than any condemnation; hence acceptance is
indicated. 2198. BROOTEN, BERNADETTE. "Paul's Vision of the
Nature of Women and Female Homosexuality," in: Clarissa W. Atkinson et
al., Immaculate and Powerful. Boston: Beacon Press, 1985, pp. 66-87. Although this paper makes the questionable assumption that
Romans 1:26-27 condemns female homosexuality, it
does
review a number of pieces of evidence for lesbianism
in
the ancient world. 2199. COLE, WILLIAM GRAHAM. Sex and Love in the Bible. New York: Julian Press, 1956. 448 pp. Chapter 10, "Homosexuality in the Bible" (pp. 342-72), finds
the major Scriptural passages to be condemnatory, but with his vulgar
psychoanalytic bias Cole asserts that "the homosexual is sick and knows
he is sick." 2200. DEVOR, RICHARD C. "Homosexuality and St.
Paul," Pastoral Psychology, 23 [no. 224] (May 1972), 50-58. Argues that Paul's list in I Corinthians 6:9-10 reflects the Jewish
view of the Gentile world as swarming with those guilty of various
perversions. 2201. DOUGHTY, DARRELL J. "Homosexuality and
Obedience to the Gospel," Church and Society, 67:5 (May-June 1977),
12-23. Holds that we cannot appeal to the letter of the New Testament to be
justified, for this itself would be contrary to the spirit of the gospel,
which requires theological, rather than historical or legalistic answers. 2202. ENGLAND, MICHAEL. The Bible and Homosexuality. San Francisco: Metropolitan Community Church (MCC), 1980. 44 pp. England, pastor of a gay church (MCC), examines eight major passages
in the Old Testament and the New Testament, concluding that their
antihomosexual content is time-bound or otherwise minimal. 2203. FURNISH, VICTOR PAUL. The Moral Teaching of Paul:
Selected Issues. Nashville: Abingdon, 1979. Finds that Paul knew only the exploitative type of homosexuality, and
it is only to this type that his condemnation applies (pp. 52-83). 2204. GANGEL, KENNETH. The Gospel and the Gay. Nashville: Nelson, 1978. 202 pp. Despite the title, mainly concerned with the Old Testament; regards
homosexuality as a "tragic involvement." 2205. HAY, HENRY. "The Mordl Climate of Canaan at the
Time of the Judges," ONE Institute Quarterly, no. 1 (Spring 1958), 8-16; and no. 2 (Summer 1958),
50-59. Somewhat subjective reflections by one of the founders of the American
gay movement. 2206. "Homosexualität und Bibel; von einem katholischen Geistlichen," JfsZ, 4 (1902), 199-243. Pioneering examination, by an anonymous Catholic religious, of
several key biblical proof texts, suggesting that they are less
antihomosexual than the received interpretation holds—thus foreshadowing the
ideas of Canon Bailey and Father McNeill. 2200. HORNER, TOM. Jonathan Loved David: Homosexuality in Biblical
Times. Philadelphia:
Westminster, 1978. 161 pp. Treating both the Old Testament and the New Testament, this careful,
comprehensive study makes sensible criticisms of previous work. As was
perhaps inevitable in an ambitious work of synthesis such as this, disagreements
have been registered in some areas (e.g.,the reconstruction
of the Canaanite background and the lesbian interpretation of the Ruth and
Naomi story). 2201. HORNER, TOM. Sex in the Bible. Rutland, VT: Tuttle, 1974. 188 pp. Ranges the material under twenty-four headings. See Prostitution, pp.
65-73; Eunuchs and Transvestites, pp. 76-80; and Homosexuality, pp. 81-92. 2202. JEREMIAS, JOACHIM. "Zu Rm I 22-32," Zeitschrift für die neutestamentliche Wissenschaft, 45 (1954), 119-21. Offers careful analysis of the argument of Romans 1:22-32, which
stigmatizes homosexual conduct as "unnatural." 2203. JOHANSSON, WARREN. "Ex parte Themis: The Historical Guilt of the Christian
Church," in: Homosexuality, Intolerance, and Christianity: A Critical Examination
of John Boswell's Work. Second ed. New York: Scholarship Committee (GAU), 1985, pp. 1-7. A searching philological inquiry into the meaning of the two key terms in I Cor. 6:9, malakos and arsenokoites, showing that they are unmistakeably antihomosexual. 2204. JOHANSSON, WARREN. "Whoever Shall Say to His
Brother, Racha (Matthew 5:22)," Cabirion and Gay Books Bulletin, no. 10 (1984), 2-4. Closely argued philological study of the term rachä, concluding that it is a Hellenistic loanword from
the Hebrew rakh "passive-effeminate homosexual." 2205.
KAHLER,
ELSE. "Exegese zweier neutestamentlicher Stellen," in: Theodor
Bovet (ed.), Probleme der Homophilie in
medizinischer, theologischer und juristischer Sicht.
Bern: Haupt, 1965, pp.
12-43. Interprets the New Testament texts, Romans 1:18-32 and I Corinthians
6:9-11. 2206. KRAUSS, SAMUEL. Das Leben Jesu nach jüdischen Quellen. Berlin: S. Calvary, 1902. 309 pp. Mentions Hebrew, Judeo-German and Latin
sources for a version of the combat in the air between Judas Iscariot and
Jesus in the Toledoth Jeshu, in which Judas sodomizes his adversary to break the magic spell that
envelops him (pp. 8, 268). 2207. MCNEILL, JOHN J. The Church and the Homosexual. Kansas City, KN: Sheed, Andrews and McMeel, 1976, 211 pp. This work by a Jesuit theologian maintains that the Bible does not
forbid homosexuality as we understand it, but only perverse forms of it. His
exegesis of the Sodom story in Genesis 19 as a condemnation of inhospitality
follows Canon D. S. Bailey. 2208. MARTIN, A. DAMIEN. "The Perennial Canaanites:
The Sin of Homosexuality," Etc, 41 (1984), 340-61. Citing passages in Genesis, Leviticus, and the New Testament,
questions the fundamentalist Christian use of the scriptures as infallible
evidence of the sinfulnesss of homosexuality. 2209. MOUNT, ERIC, and JOHANNE W. H. BOS. "Scriptures
on Sexuality: Shifting Authority," Journal of Presbyterian
History, 59 (Summer 1981), 219-42. Seeks to place changing interpretations in context. 2210. NIDITCH, SUSAN. "The 'Sodomite' Theme in Judges
19-20: Family, Community, and Social Disintegration," Catholic Biblical Quarterly, 44 (1982), 365-78. Shows important parallels with the Sodom legend proper (Gen. 19:1-11). 2211. PATAI, RAPHAEL. Sex and the Family in the
Bible and the Middle East. Garden City, NY: Doubleday, 1959. Assuming an essential continuity in Middle Eastern folkways, uses
modern travelers' reports and anthropological data to interpret the Old
Testament. See esp. pp. 168- 76. 2212. PHILLIPS, ANTHONY. "Uncovering Father's
Skirt," Yetus Testamentum, 30 (1980), 38-43. Interprets Deuteronomy 23:16, Leviticus 18:7 and Genesis 9:20ff.
(Ham's uncovering his father's nakedness) as prohibitions, prompted by
anti-Canaanite sentiment, of sons seducing their fathers. On the Ham
incident, see also H. Hirsch Cohen, The Drunkenness of Noah (University: University of Alabama Press, 1974), p.
13ff. (where, however, Ham's act is interpreted as a visual violation). 2213.
RIDDERBOS,
SIMON JAN. "Bibel und Homosexualität," in:
Der homosexuelle Nächste. Hamburg: Fusche Verlag, 1963, pp. 50-73. Perspective by a Dutch scholar, sympathetic for its time. 2214. ROTH, WOLFGANG. "What of Sodom and Gomorrah?
Homosexual Acts in the Old Testament," Explor, 1:2 (Fall 1975), 7-14. Holds that the men of Sodom and Gomorrah are condemned chiefly because
they break covenant between host and guest. In discussing the Leviticus
passages, employs the ideas of the anthropologist Mary Douglas (Purity and Danger. London: Routledge and Kegan Paul, 1966). 2215. SCHOEPS, HANS-JOACHIM. "Homosexualität und Bibel," Zeitschrift für evangelische Ethik, 6 (1962), 369- 74. Observations by one of the pioneers in the study of the subject, now
chiefly of historical interest. 2216. SCROGGS, ROBIN. The New Testament and
Homosexuality. Philadelphia: Fortress Press, 1983. 158 pp. Argues that New Testament references to homosexuality deal not with
same-sex preferences in general, but with specific forms prevalent at the
time of the composition of the texts. Hence they cannot provide a basis for
Christian condemnation of homosexuality today. Offers some discussion of
Greek evidence on pederasty (a familiar phenomenon to the New Testament
writers), Jewish sources, and patristic texts. 2217. SHEPPARD, GERARD T. "The Use of Scripture
within the Christian Ethical Debate Concerning Same-Sex Oriented Persons," Union Theological Seminary
Quarterly Review, 40 (1985), 13-35. Seeks to set forth hermeneutic foundations for the interpretation of
homosexual behavior which will both "affirm the authority of
scripture" and "explicate the Gospel as a message of human
liberation." 2218. SMITH, MORTON. Clement of Alexandria and a
Secret Gospel of Mark. Cambridge, MA: Harvard University Press, 1973. 453 pp. Complex learned investigation seeking to authenticate a purported
Gospel fragment describing Jesus' nocturnal initiation of a young man. See
also Smith's more popular presentation: The Secret Gospel: The
Discovery and Interpretation of the Secret Gospel of Mark (New York: Harper and Row, 1973); and his review of
the matter (which remains controversial): "Clement of Alexandria and
Secret Mark: The Score at the End of the First Decade," Harvard Theological Review, 75 (1982), 449-61. 2219. STRECKER, GEORG. "Homosexualität in biblischer Sicht," Kerygma und Dogma, 28 (1982), 127-41. Homosexuality, though forbidden in the Old Testament and attacked in
the New, must be evaluated today not legalis- tically, but in the context of
God's judgment and grace. 2220. TARACHOW, SIDNEY. "St. Paul and Early Christianity:
A Psychoanalytic and Historical Study," in: W. Muensterberger (ed.), Psychoanalysis and the Social
Sciences. New York: International Universities Press, 1955, vol. 4, pp. 223-81. Holds that Paul had a need for male companionship, not women.
"His ethics, his life and this theology bear a strong, latent passive
homosexuality." 2221. UKLEJA, P. MICHAEL. "Homosexuality and the Old
Testament," Bibliotheca sacra, 104 (1983), 259-66. Rejecting the arguments of homophile scholars,
supports the traditional (rigorist) interpretation. See also the companion
article: "Homosexuality in the New Testament,"
ibid., 104 (1983), 350-58 (affirms the antihomo- sexual character of
Rom 1:26-27; 1 Cor. 6:9; and 1 Tim. 1:10). 2222. WEBER, JOSEPH C. "Does the Bible Condemn
Homosexual Acts?" Engage/Social Action, 3:5 (May 1975), 28-31, 34-35. Offers an original interpretation of the Pauline texts. 2223. WHITE, ANDREW DICKSON. A History of the Warfare of
Science with Theology in Christendom. New York: D. Appleton and Co., 1890. 2 vols. In this work by a closeted university president and diplomat, Chapter
18 (pp. 209-63 of vol. 2) deals with the legend of Sodom, "From the Dead
Sea Legends to Comparative Mythology," showing that the account in
Genesis 19 is without historical foundation, but is a geographical legend
inspired by the barrenness and salinization of the region around the shores
of the Dead Sea. 2224. WINK, WALTER. "Biblical Perspectives on
Homosexuality," Christian Century, 96:36 (November 7, 1979), 1082-86. After reviewing a number of texts, Wink concludes that the Bible has
not a sexual ethic, but "only a love ethic." See readers'
responses, ibid. (January 2-9, 1980), 20-25. 2225. WOOD, ROBERT W. "Homosexual Behavior in the
Bible," ONE Institute Quarterly, 5:1 (1962), 10-19. Regards both the David-Jonathan story and the Ruth-Naomi one as
probably homosexual. 2226. WRIGHT, DAVID F. "Homosexuals or Prostitutes?
The Meaning of Arsenokoitai (1 Cor. 6:9, 1 Tim. 1:10)," Vigiliae Christianae, 38 (1984), 125-53. Painstaking and probably definitive philological demonstration that
the koine Greek word cannot be assigned the meaning "prostitute" as
John Boswell maintains. See also W. Johansson, above. 2227. ZAAS, PETER. "Was Homosexuality Condoned in the
Corinthian Church?" in: P.J. Achtemeier (ed.), Society of Biblical Literature
1979 Seminar Papers. Missoula: SBL, 1979, vol. 2, pp. 205- 12. In providing a negative answer, Zaas offers some interesting
comparative material from ancient moral and astrological texts. D. MAIN CHRISTIAN DENOMINATIONS The recent social visibility of homosexuality, as
well as the concerns of homosexual persons within the churches, have
stimulated a reexamination of the issues by church bodies. The resulting
studies represent a wide range of opinion, from a relatively high degree of
toleration to a harsh reaffirmation of traditional positions. 2228. ARCHDIOCESE OF SAN FRANCISCO, COMMISSION ON SOCIAL
JUSTICE. Homosexuality and Social Justice: Report of the Task Force on
Gay/Lesbian Issues. San Francisco: Commission on Social Justice, 1982. 155 pp. In the view of the Commission's Chairperson, "In this report we
have the most systematic, comprehensive, and theologically articulate
presentation on homosexuality and Roman Catholicism yet available." The
report—not approved by the diocesan hierarchy—deals with such issues as
violence, intercommunity relations, the family, and spiritual considerations
in the lives of gay men and lesbians. 2229.
BARNHOORN,
J. A. J., et al. Het vraagstuk der
homosexualiteit. Roermond: Romen, 1941, 192 pp. Papers from a Dutch Roman Catholic conference held just before the
outbreak of World War II, when attitudes remained largely negative. For the
enormous strides made subsequently, see Willem Berger and Jacques Janssen, [The
Catholics and Their Psychology], Tijdschrift ?oor
Psychologie en haar Grensgebieden, 35 (1980), 451-65. 2230. BARTH, KARL. Church Dogmatics. Edinburgh: T. and T. Clark, 1949-65. 4 vols, in 12 In vol. 3, part 4, the noted Protestant Swiss theologian sets forth
his negative views about homosexuality, which he regards as both a sin
(disobedience) and unnatural (a perversion of the created order). 2231. BAUM, WILLIAM, CARDINAL, et al. Educational Guidance in Human Love. Vatican City: Sacred Congregation for Catholic
Education, 1983. 36 pp. Holds that homosexuality, along with extramarital relations and
masturbation, is a moral disorder. Homosexuals should be helped to overcome
their "social maladapta- tion." See also: Franjo Cardinal Seper, Declaration on Certain
Questions Concerning Sexual Ethics (Rome: Sacred Congregation for the Doctrine of the
Faith, 1975). 2232. BERRY, C. MARKHAM. "The Christian
Homosexual," Journal of Psychiatry and Christianity, 1 (1982), 33-38. The homosexual who is a Christian can find his condition a gift rather
than a curse. The church has much to gain from accepting these brethren openheartedly• 2247. BLAMIRES, DAVID. Homosexuality from the Inside. London: Social Responsibility Council of the Religious Society of
Friends, 1973. 45 pp. Positive English Quaker statement. 2248. BROWNING, DON S. "Homosexuality, Theology, the
Social Sciences and the Church," Encounter 40 (1979), 223-43. Evaluates denominational studies of homosexuality by the Disciples of
Christ, The United Church of Christ, and Roman Catholics. 2249. BRUSSARD,
A. J. A., et al. Een mens hoeft niet alleen te
bleven: een evangelische visie op homofilie.
Baarn: Ten Have, 1977. 179 pp. Dutch evangelical views. 2250. BUCKLEY, MICHAEL J. Morality and the Homosexual: A
Catholic Approach to a Moral Problem. Westminster, MD: Newman Press 1960. 214 pp. Manual for Roman Catholic priests, purporting to offer a deeper
understanding of the nature of homosexuals' "psy- chosexual
disorder." Also, defends the traditional inter pretation of the Sodom legend in a vehement critique of Canon
Bailey's work with texts from the Church fathers as the main evidence. 2251. CATHOLIC COUNCIL FOR CHURCH AND SOCIETY (THE
NETHERLANDS). Homosexual People in Society: A Contribution to the Dialogue within
the Faith Community. Translated by Bernard A. Nachbar. Mt. Rainier, MD: New Ways Ministry,
1980. 21 pp. A pioneering document advocating a new approach and showing sympathy
for homosexual people. 2252. CAVANAUGH, JOHN R., and JOHN F. HARVEY. Counseling the Homosexual. Huntington, IN: Our Sunday Visitor, 1977. 352 pp. Revision of a work first published in 1965, retaining its traditional
negative stance. 2253. CHURCH OF ENGLAND, GENERAL SYNOD BOARD FOR SOCIAL
RESPONSIBILITY. Homosexual Relationships: A Contribution to Discussion. London: CIO Publishing, 1979. 94 pp. Concludes that "there are circumstances in which individuals may
justifiably choose to enter into a homosexual relationship." See Basil
Mitchell, "The Homosexuality Report," Theology» 83 (1980), 184-90; and the conservative attack on
it: Michael Greene et al., The Church and Homosexuality: A Positive Answer to
Current Questions (London: Hodder and Stoughton). 2254. CHURCH OF ENGLAND IN AUSTRALIA AND TASMANIA, DIOCESE OF SYDNEY, ETHICS AND SOCIAL QUESTIONS COMMITTEE. Report on Homosexuality. Sydney: Church of England, Diocese of Sydney, 1973. 60 pp.
The muted Australian reception of the Anglican trend towards reform. 2255. COLEMAN, GERALD D. Homosexuality—An Appraisal. Chicago: Franciscan Herald, 1978. 88 pp. Favors civil rights for gays,
but clings to the official Catholic position that homosexuality is a moral
disorder. See also Conrad Baars, The Homosexual's Search for Happiness (Chicago: Franciscan Herald, 1977; 34 pp.); and
George Anthony Kelly, The Political Struggle of Active Homosexuals to
Gain Social Acceptance (Chicago: Franciscan Herald, 19>5; 104 pp.). 2256. "A Colloquy on Homosexuality and the
Church," The Circuit Rider, 4:3 (March 1980), 3-13. Six articles in the magazine of the United Methodist clergy. See also:
"Homosexuality: A Re-examination: E/SA Forum 60," Engage/Social Action, 8:3 (March 1980), 9-56. 2257. DOUMA, JOCHEN. Homophilie. Fifth ed. Kampen: Uitgeverij
van den Berg, 1984. 117 pp. Moderate views of a theologian of the Dutch Reformed (Calvinist)
Church, with considerable emphasis on Biblical passages. Opposes
discrimination. 2258. DRAKEFORD, JOHN W. A Christian View of Homosexuality. Nashville: Broadman, 1977. 140 pp. A conservative, yet not entirely condemnatory approach by a faculty
member of the Southwest Baptist Theological Seminary, who favors modifying
behavior through "Integrity Therapy," 2259. DURAND, GUY. La sexualité et la fois synthèse de théologie morale. Montreal: Fides, 1983. 426 pp. In this French-Canadian Roman Catholic work, see Chapter 10, "L1 homosexualité" (pp. 235-81). 2260. EARLY, TRACY. "The Struggle in the
Denominations: Shall Gays Be Ordained?" Christianity and Crisis, 37:9/10 (May 30-June 13, 1977), 118-22. Surveys how mainline Protestant churches have approached the issue. 2261.
EICHRODT,
WALTHER, et al. Homosexualität in
evangelischer Sicht. Wuppertal: Aussaat-Bucherei, 1965. 103 pp. Four papers from a
German Evangelical point of view. 2262. Fede cristiana ed omosessualita. Prali, Italy: Edizioni Centro Ecumenico di Agape,
1981. Acts of a conference held in 1980 to evaluate links between
Christianity and homosexuality from various standpoints—Protestant, Roman
Catholic, and atheist. 2263. FISHER, DAVID H. "The Homosexual Debate: A
Critique of Some Recent Critics," St. Luke's Journal of
Theology, 22 (1979), 176-84. Anglican statement arguing in essence: wait and see. 2264. FULIGA, HOSE B. "Christian Moral Theological
Reflections on the Ethical Issue of Homosexuality," South East Asia Journal of
Theology, 16:2 (1975), 40-44. A Third World
perspective. 2265. GALLAGHER, JOHN (ed.). Homosexuality and the Magisterium. Mount Rainier, MD: New Ways Ministry, 1985. Anthology of twenty complete or excerpted official Catholic
statements, pastoral letters, plans for ministry and other documents from
Roman congregations, the U.S. National Conference of Catholic Bishops,
individual cardinals, archbishops, and bishops as well as individual diocesan
organizations. 2266. GEARHART, SALLY, and WILLIAM R. JOHNSON (eds.). Loving Women/Loving Men: Gay
Liberation and the Church. San Francisco: Glide, 1974. 165 pp. Positive essays issued under the auspices of a pro-gay church. 2267.
GOTTSCHALK,
JOHANNES. "Pastorale Betrachtungen und moraltheologische Ueberlegungen
zur Frage der Homosexualität," in: W. S. Schlegel (ed.),
Das grosse Tabu. Munich: Rütten und Loening, 1967, pp. 120-46. Relatively positive German considerations. 2268. HAAS, HAROLD L. "Homosexuality," Currents in Theology and
Mission, 5:2 (April 1978), 82-104. Scholarly Lutheran essay concluding that the churches should be
accepting of ethically structured, stable relationships . 2269. HARVEY, JOHN F. "Reflections on a Retreat for
Clerics with Homosexual Tendencies," Linacre Quarterly, 46 (May 1979), 6-40. Recent article by a prolific Roman Catholic author, who has not
essentially revised his conservative viewpoint since he first presented it in
1955. 2270. HILLIARD, DAVID. "'Unenglish and Unmanly':
Anglo- Catholicism and Homosexuality," Victorian Studies, 25 (1982), 181-210. The Oxford Movement fostered intense and demonstrative male
friendships, the practice of celibacy, and the consequent foundation of
religious brotherhoods. These trends laid the foundations for an enduring
tradition of affinity between homosexual aesthetes and Anglo-Cathol- icism. 2271.
JAEKEL,
HANS GEORG. Ins Ghetto gedrängt—Homosexuelle
berichten. Hamburg: Lutherisches Verlagshaus, 1978. 180 pp. German Lutheran presentation, including ten personal accounts by gay
men and lesbians. 2272. JONES, JOE R. "Christian Sensibility with
Respect to Homosexuality," Encounter, 40 (1979), 209-221. Although "the homosexual does not stand under any special
condemnation from God," the author thinks that it is an option that
should not be exercised. 2273. KEYSOR, CHARLES W. (ed.). What You Should Know about
Homosexuality. Grand Rapids, MI: Zondervan, 1979. 254 pp. Six papers, chiefly from a conservative Methodist viewpoint, that tend to present homosexuality as intrinsically wrong. 2274. KOSNIK, ANTHONY (ed.). Human Sexuality: New Directions
in American Catholic Thought. New York: Paulist Press, 1977. 322 pp. A very progressive, unofficial Roman Catholic inquiry. A positive
discussion of homosexuality appears on pp. 186- 218. A counterstatement is:
Dennis Doherty (ed.), Dimensions of Human Sexuality (Garden City, NY: Doubleday, 1979; 249 pp.). 2275. KUHN, DONALD. The Church and the Homosexual:
A Report on a Consultation. San Francisco: Glide Urban Center, 1965. This brochure is an
early positive statement. 2276. LINDSELL, HAROLD. "Homosexuals and the
Church," Christianity Today, 17:25 (September 1973), 8-12. Negative: the church cannot admit, he says, those whom God excludes. 2277.
LOOSER,
GABRIEL. Homosexualität: menschlich—
christlich-moralisch. Frankfurt: P. Lang, 1984. 385 pp. Dissertation of a Roman Catholic theologian on the moral status of
homosexuality within the framework of normative ethics. 2278. MARTIN, ENOS D., and RUTH K. MARTIN.
"Developmental and Ethic Issues in Homosexuality: Pastoral
Implications," Journal of Psychology and Theology, 9 (1981), 58-68. Authors seek to show how homosexual orientation can be approached
within a supportive Christian ministry, while adhering to the church's
traditional values. 2279. METHODIST CHURCH (ENGLAND).
DIVISION OF SOCIAL RESPONSIBILITY. A Christian Understanding of Human Sexuality: A
Report of a Working Party for the National Conference of the Methodist Church, June 1979. London: Division of Social Responsibility of the
Methodist Church, 1979. 13 pp. Section CIO states that homosexual
relationships should be judged by the same criteria as heterosexual ones. 2280. MOORE, PAUL, JR. Take a Bishop like Me. San Francisco: Harper and Row, 1979. 200 pp. The Episcopal bishop of New
York discloses his compassionate view toward homosexuality, discussing also
his ordination of Rev. Ellen Barrett, first avowed lesbian priest.
Subsequently, Bishop Moore has taken a prominent role in the fight against
AIDS discrimination. 2281. NELSON, JAMES B. Embodiments An Approach to Sexuality and Christian
Theology. Minneapolis: Augsburg, 1978. In the view of the author, a United Church of Christ ethics professor,
the flesh does not oppose the spirit but embodies it. He contends that most
forms of the sexual outlet, including homosexuality, are good and should be
accepted (see pp, 180-210). See also his article "Homosexuality and the
Church: Towards a Sexual Ethics of Love," Christianity and Crisis, 37:5 (April 4, 1977), 63-69 (discussion in issue
9-10, May 30-June 13, 1977, pp. 116-18). 2282. ODENWALD, ROBERT P. The Disappearing Sexes. New York: Random House, 1965. 175 pp. Views of a Roman
Catholic psychiatrist. 2283. ORAISON, MARC. The Homosexual Questions An Attempt to Understand
an Issue of Increasing Urgency within a Christian Perspective. Translated by Jane Z. Flynn.
New York: Harper and Row, 1977. 132 pp. A French Roman Catholic priest and psychiatrist presents
relatively liberal views. 2284. PHILPOTT, KENT. The Gay Theology. Plainfield, NJ: Logos International, 1977. 194 pp. Presents testimonies of homosexuals who were reputedly able to change
their orientation through "the power of Christ." 2285. Principles to Guide Confessors in Question of Homosexuality. Washington, DC: National Council of Catholic
Bishops, 1973. Pamphlet
reaffirming traditional attitudes. 2286. RAMM, BERNARD L. The Right, the Good and the Happy. Waco, TX: Word Books, 1971. 188 pp. An Evangelical teacher adopts
surprisingly liberal attitudes. 2287. SAMUEL, K,
MATTHEW, "A Judeo-Christian Attitude to Homosexuality: An Historical
View," AME Zion Quarterly Review, 93 (April 1981), 24-31. Views of a Black clergyman
and scholar. 2288. SCANZONI, LETHA, and VIRGINIA RAMEY MOLLENKOTT. Is the Homosexual My Neighbor?
Another Christian View. San Francisco: Harper and Row, 1978. 176 pp. Pro-gay book by two Evangelical feminists, who challenge their
coreligionists to abandon bigoted attitudes. 2289. SIMS, BENNETT J. "Sex and Homosexuality: A
Pastoral Statement," Christianity Today, 22:10 (February 24, 1978), 23-30. The Episcopal bishop of Atlanta gives voice to his anti- homosexual
views. 2290. SMITH, HERBERT F., and JOSEPH
A. DILENNO. Sexual Inversion: The Questions with Catholic Answers. Boston: Daughters of St. Paul, 1979. 177 pp. Negative. 2291. SPIJKER,
ANTONIUS VAN DE. Die gleichgeschlechtliche Zuneigung:
Homotropie—Homosexualität, Homoerotik, Homophilie-und die katholische Moraltheologie,
Ölten: Walter, 1968. 321 pp. Learned and (for the time) liberal views of a Dutch Catholic priest.
Useful for its many references. 2292. THIELICKE, HELMUT. The Ethics of Sex. Translated by John Doberstein. New York: Harper and
Row, 1964. 338 pp. The German Protestant theologian regards homosexuality as in fact a
perversion in the perspective of God's creation, but recognizes the dilemma
for those so inclined. For them he recommends celibacy, though some ethically
responsible relationships may be allowed. At the time, even these views were
often found to be too liberal; see Klaus Bockmühl, "Homosexuality in
Biblical Perspective— An Interview," Christianity Today, 17 (February 16, 1973), 12-18; and Walter Eichrodt,
"Homosexualität: Andersartigkeit oder Perversion," Reformatio (Zurich), 12 (1963), 67-82. 2293. Towards a Quaker View of Sex: An Essay by a Group of
Friends. Ed. by Alastair Heron. London: Friends Home Service Committee, 1963. 84
pp. A pioneering Quaker statement, which distinguishes between acts
(possibly wrong) and the homosexual condition itself. Rejects the notion that
homosexual feelings are "unnatural" per se. 2294. TRIMBOS, CORNELIS J. B. J. (ed.). Pastorale
zorg -voor homofielen. Utrecht: Spectrum,
1968. 58 pp. Papers on pastoral care for homosexuals from a Dutch conference held
under joint Protestant and Roman Catholic auspices. 2295. UNITED CHURCH OF CHRIST. Human Sexuality: A Preliminary
Study. New York:
United Church, 1977. 258 pp. Study commissioned in 1975 by the denomination's General Synod, which
reached relatively pro-homosexual conclusions. 2296. UNITED PRESBYTERIAN CHURCH IN THE U.S.A., ADVISORY
COUNCIL. Report on the Work of the Task Force to Study Homosexuality. New York: Advisory Council on Church and Society
(UPCUSA), 1978. 201 pp. The majority report recommended that the ordination of self-acknowledged
practicing homosexuals would not necessarily threaten the unity of the
Church. However, the Church's Assembly, which had commissioned the Report,
did not accept this recommendation. 2297. VALENTE, MICHAEL. Sex: The Radical View of a
Catholic Theologian. Milwaukee: Bruce, 1970. 158 pp. Strongly libertarian views of a professor of religion, who
subsequently left the church. 2298. WAGENAAR, THEODORE C., and PATRICIA E. BARTOS.
"Orthodoxy and Attitudes of Clergymen towards Homosexuality and Abortion," Review of Religious Research, 18:2 (Winter 1977), 114-25. Clergy who do not have a unidimensional view of life, and who
distinguish their own religious sense of what is right from the standpoint of
civil society, are more accepting. 2299. WIEDEMANN, HANS-GEORG. Homosexuelle Liebe: Für eine Neuorientierung in der christlichen Ethik. Stuttgart: Kreuz Verlag, 1982. 220 pp. Sympathetic views of a parish
priest in Düsseldorf, who denies that homosexual behavior is sick. Ethical
and theological condemnations are to be rejected. 2300. WIGNEY, TREVOR J. "Mates and Lovers:
Theological Perspectives on Gay Relationships in Australia," St. Mark Review, no. 106 (June 1981), 24-35. Argues that the churches in Australia have, in effect, colluded with
popular attitudes of bigotry, which are unChristian. The churches should
take positive steps to improve the situation of homosexuals (including open
acceptance in the church and ordination). 2301. WOODS, RICHARD. Another Kind of Love:
Homosexuality and Spirituality. Revised ed. Garden City, NY: Doubleday, 1978. 155 pp. A Dominican priest makes cautious recommendations for acceptance, with
advice to the ministry. 2302. WRIGHT,
ELLIOTT. "The Church and Gay Liberation," Christian Century, 88:9 (March 3, 1971), 281-85. Shows the first effects on the churches of the post-Stonewall era. E. GAY CHURCHES, ORGANIZATIONS, AND OBSERVERS A visible homosexual presence in certain Anglican church
congregations, especially those emphasizing elaborate liturgy and vestments,
became evident in the late 19th century. However, the formation of gay
churches as independent and self-declared organizations begins only in the 1960s, A period of rapid growth which then set in saw the
development of gay and lesbian organizations corresponding to virtually
every significant Christian denomination. 2303, AFFIRMATION, GAY AND LESBIAN MORMONS. After Marriage What? Los Angeles: Affirmation, 1980. 39 pp. Self-help advice with some personal testimonies. 2304, ANDERSON, SCOTT. "Gay Religious Groups Call for
Acceptance," Advocate, no. 288 (March 20, 1980), 22-23, 47, Overview of gay religious organizations that emerged in the 1970s. 2305. ARTHUR, L. ROBERT. Homosexuality and the Conservative
Christian. Los Angeles: Universal Fellowship Press (SEC Publications), 1982. 56
pp. Homosexuality in the light of Biblical language and culture; an
evangelical approach sanctioned by the Metropolitan Community Church, the
leading gay church, 2306. BAUER, PAUL F. "Homosexual Subculture at
Worship: A Participant Observation Study," Pastoral Psychology, 25 (Winter 1976), 115-27, Short
"ethnographic" study of a gay church. 2307. BIRCHARD, ROY. "Metropolitan Community Church:
Its Development and Significance," Foundations: Baptist Journal
of History and Theology, 20:2 (April-June 1977), 127-32. Brief history of the predominantly gay church (MCC), from its
foundation by the Reverend Troy Perry to the date of writing. 2308, BLAIR, RALPH. Homophobia in the Church. New York: The author, 1979. 25 pp. Evangelical homosexual urges Christians
who fear and loathe homosexuals overcome their negative feelings through
return to a sound Christian ethic. See also his: An Evangelical Look at
Christianity. (New York: The author, 1972; 12 pp.); and Holier-than-Thou Hocus Pocus and Homosexuality. (New York; The author, 1977; 48 pp.). 2309. BLAIR, RALPH. Wesleyan Praxis &
Homosexual Practice. New York: The author, 1983. 36 pp. Presents sympathetic elements in the Methodist tradition. 2310. BLAIR, RALPH (ed.). Homosexuality and Religion. New York: National Task Force on Student Personnel Services and
Homosexuality, 1972. 21 pp. Four papers by gay religionists (Christian
Science; Roman Catholic; liberal Protestant; and Evangelical). 2311. CREW, LOUIE. "At St. Luke's Parish: The Peace
of Christ Is Not for Gays," Christianity and Crisis, 37:9-10 (May 30-June 13, 1977), 140-44. A professor of English at a state college in Georgia— and a founder of
Integrity, the Episcopal gay group— recounts the harassment he and his Black
male spouse endured at their local church. 2312. EDWARDS, GEORGE R. Gay Lesbian Liberation: A
Biblical Perspective. New York: Pilgrim Press, 1984. 153 pp. While the main part of this book consists of a somewhat routine review
of the Bailey-McNeill et al. arguments for mitigating the chief biblical
proof texts, the book's main contribution lies in its attempt to apply Latin
American liberation theology to the situation of homosexuals
. 2313. ENROTH, RONALD M., and GERALD E. JOHNSON. The Gay Church. Grand Rapids, MI: Eerdmans, 1974. 144 pp. An early attempt to come to grips with the gay church movement.
Written from a fundamentalist perspective, the book has negative conclusions, 2314. FORTUNATO, JOHN. Embracing the Exile: Healing
Journeys of Gay Christians. New York: Seabury Press, 1982. 137 pp Fortunato writes of his experiences in several Christian
denominations, gay and mainstream, recounting the stages of his spiritual
odyssey and self-analysis. 2315. GEYER, MARCIA LEE. Human Rights or Homophobia?
The Rising Tide. Los Angeles: Universal Fellowship, 1977. Advice from a Metropolitan Community Church minister on coping with
homophobia through "a Christ-like program of loving action," 2316. GINDER, RICHARD. Binding with Briars: Sex and
Sin in the Catholic Church. Englewood Cliffs, NJ: Prentice-Hall, 1975. 251 pp. A radical critique by a respected Catholic writer of the Church's
sexual ethic, endorsing masturbation and homosex- uality. The book caused a scandal, leading its author to
come out as gay. 2315. GRAMMICK, JEANNINE (ed.). Homosexuality and the Catholic
Church. Chicago: Thomas Moore Press, 1983. 176 pp. Nine articles on "Sociological Perspectives" and
"Ecclesiastical Perspectives" by Catholic laity and religious;
based on presentations given at the First National Symposium on Homosexuality
and the Catholic Church, Washington, DC, November 1981. 2316. GROS, JEFFREY. "Gay Church in the NCC?" Christianity and Crisis, 43 (May 2, 1983), 167-71. On the controversial application of the Universal Fellowship of the
Metropolitan Community Church to join the National Council of Churches. For
other comment, see Christian Century, 99 (April 14,1982),
461-62; (December 1, 1982),1222-23; 100 (April 6, 1983), 299-300; (June 1,
1983), 539-40. 2317. HALLORAN, JOE. Understanding Homosexual Persons. Hicksville, NY: Exposition Press, 1979. 81 pp. The writer, a Roman
Catholic priest, reports on a year's work with Dignity, the Catholic gay
group, in the Bay Area. 2318. IRLE, ROGER D. "Minority Ministry: A Definition
of Territory," International Review of Modern Sociology, 9 (1979), 193-209. Sets forth a typology of four kind of
organizations: 1) the independent gay church; (2) gay caucuses within
denominations; (3) interdenominational groups; (4) ex- gay groups. 2319. ITKIN, MIKHAIL. The Radical Jesus and Gay Consciousness. Second ed. Long Beach, CA: Communi- versity West,
1972. 64 pp. One of a number of documents, which are now rare, by a counterculture
priest (Syrian Orthodox) and theoretician, who resides in San Francisco. 2320. JOHNSTON, MAURY. Gays under Grace: A Gay Christian's Response to
the Moral Majority. Nashville, TN: Winston-Derek, 1983. 225 pp. Seeks to ground rebuttal to Moral Majority positions in Scripture. 2321. KRODY, NANCY E. "An Open Lesbian Looks at the
Church," Foundations: Baptist Journal of History and Theology, 20:2 (April-June 1977), 148-62. Krody expresses the ambivalence felt by some lesbians in continuing in
seminaries and congregations. 2322. LUCAS, DONALD S. (ed.). The Homosexual and the Church. San Francisco: Mattachine Society, 1966. 50 pp. A compilation of the responses of forty gay men to a questionnaire
about their attitudes toward religion. 2323. MCNAUGHT, BRIAN. A Disturbed Peace: Selected Writings of an Irish
Catholic Homosexual. Washington, DC: Dignity, 1981. 125 pp. Eloquent, brief pieces reflecting on the writer's personal
difficulties with the Catholic establishment in Detroit and Boston, and the
predicament of gay Catholics more generally. 2324. MACOURT, MALCOLM (ed.). Towards a Theology of Gay Liberation. London: SCM, 1977. 113 pp. Essays on homosexuality and scripture and male homosexual
relationships and lifestyles reflecting gay Christian experience in England. 2325. MENARD, GUY. De Sodome à l'Exode: Jalons pour une théologie de la libération gaie. Montreal: Univers, 1980. 268 pp. A French-Canadian
theologian examines the sources of the traditional condemnation, which he finds to be of cultural
rather than divine origin. 2326. MICHAEL, GARY. Jesus Christ Homosexual. Denver: Church of World Peace, 1984. 64 pp. Subjective reflections on passages from the Gospels. Conclusion:
"If it is even possible that Jesus was homo- sexually inclined,
Christians should pause before condemning homosexuality on religious
grounds." 2327. MICKLEY, RICHARD R, Christian Sexuality: A Reflection on Being
Christian and Sexual. Second ed. Los Angeles: Universal Fellowship, 1976. Manual intended for local church study groups of the Metropolitan
Community Church. 2328. NUGENT, ROBERT. A Challenge to Love: Gay and Lesbian Catholics in
the Church. New York: Crossroad, 1983. 290 pp. Thoughtful essays by various writers, some with extensive references. 2329. PENNINGTON, SYLVIA. But Lord, They're Gay. Hawthorne, CA: Lambda Christian Fellowship, 1981. 171 pp. Minister writes of her progress from a mission to "save"
gays to being pastor of a predominately gay congregation. 2330. PERRY, TROY, with CHARLES LUCAS. The Lord is My Shepherd and He
Knows I'm Gay. Los Angeles: Nash Publishing Co., 1972. 232 pp. The story of the founder of the Metropolitan Community Church, the
personal and organizational obstacles he had to overcome, and his commitment
to forceful action for gay civil rights. 2331. PITTENGER, NORMAN. Time for Consent. London: SCM, 1967. 124 pp. Work by a noted Anglican theologian presenting homosexuality as an
accepted part of the created order. Regarded by many at the time as an
important breakthrough. Third, enlarged ed., 1976. See also his: Making Sexuality Human (New York: United Church, 1970); and Gay Lifestyles: A Christian
Interpretation of Homosexuality and the Homosexual (Los Angeles: Universal Fellowship, 1977). 2332. PRESTON, D. The Gay Bible. Revised ed. New York: The author, 1978. 36 pp. A gay layperson offers homespun advice for grappling with the
stumbling blocks offered by Bible passages 2333. Prologue: An Examination of the Mormon Attitude
towards Homosexuality. Salt Lake City: Prometheus Enterprises, 1979. 58 pp. Difficulties of being gay in a church that has remained steadfastly
negative. 2334. SWICEGOOD, TOM. Our God Too. New York: Pyramid, 1974. 379 pp. Account of the founding of the Metropolitan Community Church by
Reverend Troy Perry and its remarkable growth up to the time of writing. 2335. THOMPSON, MARK. "Getting in the Habit to 'Give
Up Guilt,'" Advocate, no. 311 (February 19, 1981), Tll-13. On the Sisters of Perpetual Indulgence, an order of "gay male
nuns" based chiefly in San Francisco. In the eyes of some a scandal, the
sisters have earned the plaudits of others as offering a useful sendup of the
pomposities and contradictions of organized religion. 2336. WICKLIFF, JAMES (ed.). In Celebration. Oak Park, IL: Integrity, 1975. 91 pp. Papers and addresses from the first national convention of Integrity,
the gay Episcopalian society. The first half of the book is the keynote
speech of Norman Pittenger (see above), 2337. WOODS, RICHARD, et al. "Toward a Gay Christian
Ethic," Insight: A Quarterly of Lesbian/Gay Catholic Opinion, 3:2 (Spring-Summer 1979), 5-12. The writers address the topic of ways of conducting oneself as an
ethical person and a homosexual. Evidence exists from the Middle Ages (see III.D) of the attraction of
homosexuals and lesbians to the sex-seg- regated institutions of the Catholic
church. During the Reformation their presence attracted the polemical scorn
of Protestant writers, and this critique was later taken up by secularist and
atheist writers seeking to discredit the church. Only in the second half of
the 20th century have significant numbers of homosexual and lesbian
religious, from various denominations, come forward to tell their own
stories. 2338. BERRIGAN, DANIEL. "The Leveling of John
McNeill," Commonveal, 104 (1977), 778-83. On the Church's silencing the Jesuit scholar for the outspoken views
embodied in his: The Chnrch and the Homosexual (Kansas City, KN: Sheed, Andrews and McMeel, 1976). 2339. BOYD, MALCOLM. Take Off the Masks. Garden City, NY: Doubleday, 1978. 160 pp. In this, one of a number of autobiographical books, the religious
activist speaks for the first time with full frankness about his
homosexuality. He is now an Anglican priest in Santa Monica, CA. 2340. BREWSTER, RALPH HENRY. The 6000 Beards of Athos. London: L. and V. Woolf, 1935. 219 pp. Discreet account of the
all-male monastic enclave in northern Greece. 2341. CURB, ROSEMARY, and NANCY MANAHAN (eds.). Lesbian Nuns: Breaking the
Silence. Tallahassee, FL: Naiad Press, 1985. 383 pp. Personal recollections of some 50 former and present religious women
on "particular friendships" and self- discovery, 2342. Defensa de los religiosos de Convento de la Merced
contra el proyecto de ley sobre supresion de las comunidades en el Peru, Lima: 1886, Defense of a monastery that was slated for dissolution because of
"unnatural practices." 2343. DE MARIA-KUIPER, JOHANNES W. Hot under the Collar:
Self-Portrait of a Gay Pastor. Columbia, MO: Mercury Press, 1983. 177 pp. A former minister of the Reformed Dutch Protestant Church tells how he
was forced to leave that denomination and join the Metropolitan Community
Church, where he could pursue a career as a gay activist. 2344. DE STEFANO, GEORGE. "Gay under the Collar: The
Hypocrisy of the Catholic Church," Advocate, no, 439 (February 4, 1986), 43-48. How gay priests, nuns, and brothers, estimated at 30% to 60% of the
total number of religious, are coping with the Church's rigid attitudes.
DLUGOS, TIM.
"A Cruel God: The Gay Challenge to the Catholic Church," Christopher Street, 4:9 (September 1979), 20-39. From interviews and personal experience, postulates that much
homosexual behavior is occurring behind cloister and parish walls.
FISKE, ADELE M. Friends and Friendship in the
Monastic Tradition. Cuernavaca, Mexico: Centro Internacional de Documentacion, 1970. Facsimiles of articles written by a nun on same-sex friendships in the
Middle Ages.
GUIRDHAM, ARTHUR. Christ and Frend: A Study in Religious Experience
and Observance. London: Allen and Unwin, 1959. 193 pp. See
"Homosexuality in Clericalism" (pp. 122-28).
GRIFFIN, DAVID R.
"Ordination for Homosexuals? Yes," Encounter, 40 (1979), 265-72. Makes a brief case in a controversy that continues to simmer. For a
differing view, see: Ronald E. Osborn, "Ordination for Homosexuals: A
Negative Answer Qualified by Some Reflections," ibid.,
245-63.
HEYWARD, CARTER.
"Coming Out: Journey without Maps," Christianity and Crisis, 39:10 (June 22, 1979), 153-56. Professor at the Episcopal Divinity School, Cambridge, MA, speaks of
her decision to acknowledge her lesbianism publicly.
HONEFFER,
AUGUST. Der Priester, seine Vergangen- heit und
seine Zukunft. Jena: Eugen Diederichs, 1912. 2 vols. Homosexuality among
priests is discussed in vol. 2.
HOOYDONK, JAN VAN
(ed.). Homo en pastor. Amers- foort: De Horstink, 1983. 142 pp. Analysis of questionnaires filled out by some 350 priests in the
Utrecht diocese.
JOHNSON, WILLIAM R.
"The Saga of Bill Johnson," Trends, 5 (July-August 1973), 3-9. Johnson was the first open homosexual ordained as a minister by a major
denomination (United Church of Christ). See also his essay:
"Protestantism and Gay Freedom," in: Betty Berzon and Robert
Leighton (eds.), Positively Gay (Millbrae, CA: Celestial Arts, 1979), 65-78.
KRAFT, WILLIAM F.
"Homosexuality and Religious Life," Review for Religious, 40 (1981), 370-81. See also his:
"Homogenitalism," in: Sexual Dimensions of the Celibate Life (Kansas City, KN: Sheed, Andrews and McMeel, 1979),
151-62.
KRATT, MARY.
"Church 'Always Resistant to Change,'" Christian Century, 97 (1980), 237-38. Lesbian priest vistis her hometown church in North Carolina.
RABINOWITZ,
SEYMOUR. "Developmental Problems in Catholic Seminarians," Psychiatry, 32 (1969), 107-17. Working with 25 Roman Catholic seminarians,claims to have found
"three types of psychopathology": homosexuality, psychophysiology,
and related responses and depression «,
SCOTT, DAVID A.
"Ordaining a Homosexual Person: A Policy Proposal," St. Luke's Journal of Theology, 212:3 (June 1979), 185-96. Holds that ordination should be conditional
on the candidate's not promoting, by example or teaching, genital homosexual
relations as a normative alternative; in other words, one must remain in the
closet.
WAGNER, RICHARD, 0.
M. I. Gay
Catholic Priests: A Study of Cognitive and Affective Dissonance. San Francisco: Institute for Advanced Study of Human Sexuality, 1980.
(dissertation) Reflects interviews with fifty Roman Catholic priests, one
quarter of whom had a current lover.
WARD, W. RALPH.
"United Methodists Won't Ordain Homosexuals," United Methodists Today, 2:6 (June 1975), 77-83. The bishop of the New York area of the United Methodist Church rejects
homosexual ordination.
WOODS, RICHARD.
"Gay Candidates, the Religious Life and the Priesthood," Call to Growth/Ministry, 4:4 (Summer 1979), 24-43. Argues in favor of admitting gay and lesbian candidates to the
religious life. The rise of the contemporary homosexual movement since 1950, and the
increasing visibility of homosexuals within the church, has provoked a new
literature attacking these developments. In large measure this backlash
material simply recycles older traditionalist condemnations, with minor
variations according nominal recognition to changed conditions. In a few
instances, however, there is a more sustained effort to grapple with the new
situation. 2345. ARMSTRONG, HERBERT. The Missing Dimension in Sex. Pasadena: Ambassador College Press, 1971. 236 pp. Displays the
antihomosexual views of the founder of the World Wide Church of God. 2346. BAHNSEN, GREG L. Homosexuality: A Biblical View. Grand Rapids, MI: Baker, 1978. 152 pp. Professor at the Reformed
Theological Seminary, Jackson, MS, says that homosexuality is not only a sin,
but a crime which must be prohibited by law. He advocates discrimination in
housing and employment. 2347. BARNHOUSE, RUTH TIFFANY. Homosexuality: A Symbolic
Confusion. New York: Seabury Press, 1976. 190 pp. Mingling religious exhortation, myth, and trickle-down psychiatry,
this book is aptly titled. 2348. BRADFORD, BRICK, et al. Healing for the Homosexual. Oklahoma City: Presbyterian Charismatic
Commununion, 1978. 64 pp. Essays, with case histories, arguing the homosexuality can and should
be overcome. 2349. BRYANT, ANITA. The Anita Bryant Story: The Survival of Our
Nation's Families and the Threat of Militant Homosexuality. Old Tappan, NJ: Revell, 1977.
156 pp. Chronicles her vocal opposition to gay rights in Dade County, FL,
culminating in the referendum held there in June 1977. Following her apparent
triumph, Bryant quickly faded from view; see Cliff Jahr, "Anita Bryant's
Startling Reversal," Ladies Home Journal, 97 (December 1980), 60-68. 2350. CAMERON, PAUL and KENNETH P. ROSS. "Social
Psychological Aspects of the Judeo-Christian Stance toward
Homosexuality," Journal of Psychology and Theology, 9 (1981), 40-57. Argues that the Judeo-Christian position is that homosexuality, and
toleration of it, tend toward lethality (evil) and away from social cohesion
and respect for human life. Cameron, cynically exploiting the AIDS crisis,
has since emerged as one of the most determined opponents of homosexual
rights. 2351. DU MAS, FRANK M. Gay Is Hot Good. Nashville: Thomas Nelson, 1979. 332 pp. Revealing farrago of backlash arguments against homosexual visibility
by a provincial psychologist seeking to generate a militant heterosexual
response. Advocates sections of "heterosexual books" in public
libraries. 2352. FALWELL, JERRY. Listen
America! Garden City, NY: Doubleday, 1980. 269 pp. Mr. Moral Majority's call for a return to rigid traditional morality;
see pp. 181-86. Other publications of Fal- well's group teem with antihomosexual exhortation and
exposes. 2353. JOHNSON, BARBARA F. Where Does a Mother Go To
Resign? Minneapolis: Bethany Fellowship, 1979. 154 pp. Hostile statement
of a parent. 2354. KIRK, JERRY, The Honosexual Crisis in
the Mainline Church: A Presbyterian Minister Speaks Out. Nashville: Nelson, 1978. 191 pp. Written by a Cincinnati pastor to
oppose liberalization in his Church. The only hope for homosexuals, he holds,
lies in repentance. 2355. LA HAYE, TIM. The Unhappy Gays: What Everyone Should Know about Homosexuality. Wheaton, IL: Tyn- dale House, 1978. 207 pp. Presents an eighteen-point program for overcoming homosexuality, See
also: Paul Morris, Shadow of Sodom: Facing the Facts of Homosexuality (Wheaton, IL: Tyndale House, 1978; 164 pp.). 2356. LOVELACE, RICHARD F, Homosexuality and the Church. Old Tappan, NJ: Revell, 1978. 158 pp. Evangelical theologican argues
that the church should not alter its traditional attitude of disapproval of
homosexuality. 2357. RODGERS, WILLIAM D. The Gay Invasion: A Christian Look at the Spreading
Homosexual Myth. Denver: Accept Books, 1977, 160 pp. Naively antihomosexual book concocted by a fundamentalist layman (an
advertising executive). 2358. ROSE, TERENCE B. "Emerging Social Problems in
Jamaica and Their Pastoral Implications," Caribbean Journal of Religious
Studies, 6 (1985), 29-45. Complains of increasing toleration of homosexuality in Jamaica,
fostered by growing acceptance in U. S. churches. 2359. RUEDA, ENRIQUE F. The Homosexual Network:
Private Lives and Public Policy. Old Greenwich, CT: Devin Adair, 1982. 680 pp. By far the largest (though padded) assemblage of antihomosexual
arguments, authored in this case by a Cuban Roman Catholic priest. As a scare
tactic, Rueda vastly exaggerates the size and power of the gay movement. A
main selection of the Conservative Book Club. 2360. SCANZONI, LETHA. "Conservative Christians and
Gay Civil Rights," Christian Century, 93:32 (October 13, 1976), 857-62. Article by a progay author documenting the 1975 controversy in
Bloomington, Indiana, over a gay rights ordinance. 2361. WHITE, JOHN. Eros Defiled. Downers Grove,IL: In-
ter-Varsity, 1977. 172 pp. The author regrets the homosexual experiences of his youth (pp.
105-39). 2362. WILLIAMS, DON. The Bond That Breaks: Will
Homosexuality Split the Church? Los Angeles, CA: BIM Publishing Co., 1978. 176 pp. Replies to several writers who, in his view, have made unwarranted
defenses of homosexuality. Relies on European theologians, together with some
Bible interpretation. 2363. YOUNG, PERRY DEAN. God's Bullies: Native Reflections
on Preachers and Politics. New York: Holt, Rinehart and Winston, 1982. Gay journalist exposes chicanery employed by the religious right in an
effort to impose its values on America. See pp. 36-54, 132-52. The subject of attitudes to homosexuality in normative Judaism (from
approximately the third century of our era to the present) has not yet been
studied adequately. For Biblical precedents, see VII.C; see also "Middle
Ages," III.D. Recent increases in societal awareness have prompted a
reexamination of the problem in ethical terms on the part of several sections
of Jewish opinion. Paralleling the rise of the gay churches is the founding
of gay synagogues. 2364. AMADO LÉVY-VALENSI, ELIANE. Le grand désarroi: aux racines de l'énigme homosexuelle. Paris: Editions Universitaires, 1973. 177 pp. Speculative and eclectic essay, using Biblical quotations to weave an
antihomosexual argument, 2365. BECK, EVELYN T. (ed.). Nice Jewish Girls: A Lesbian Anthology. Watertown, MA: Persephone Press, 1982. 286 pp. Essays from a variety of standpoints: personal, religious, and
historical. 2366. BLUE, LIONEL. Back Door to Heaven. London: Dar- ton, Longman and Todd, 1977. Memoirs of a gay
rabbi. 2367. BRICK, BARRETT L. "Judaism in the Gay
Community," in: Betty Berzon and Robert Leighton (eds.), Positively Gay. Millbrae, CA: Celestial Arts, 1979, pp. 79-87. Emphasizes the
Jewish tradition of opposition to oppres- sion and discrimination, and charts the growth of the
gay synagogue movement. 2368. EDWARDES, ALLEN (pseud, of D. A. Kinsley). Erotica Judaica: A Sexual
History of the Jews. New York: Julian Press, 1967. 238 pp. Fascinating collection of historical
data and folklore about erotic aspects of Jewish life from the Old Testament
onwards. Not always reliable. 2369. FEINBERG, ABRAHAM L. Sex and the Pnlpit. Toronto: Methuen, 1981. See "Homosexuality: Salute to a Gay Friend" (pp. 230-66). A
leftist heterosexual rabbi's response to the gay movement and to the
formation of gay Jewish groups and synagogues. Concludes with a plea for
toleration of homosexual expression. 2370. GENGLE, DEAN. "Beth Chayim Chadashim: Gay
Jewish Temple in Los Angeles," Advocate, no. 197 (August 25, 1976), 16-17. Early report on one of the most successful of the gay synagogues. 2371. GORDIS, ROBERT. Love and Sex: A Modern Jewish Perspective. New York: Farrar, Straus and Giroux, 1978. 290 pp. See Chapter 10, "Homosexuality and the Homosexual" (pp.
149-61), where the theologian declares that homosexuality is an illness,
nonetheless "homosexuals deserve the same inalienable rights as do all
their fellow human beings." 2372. GORDIS, ROBERT (ed.). "Homosexuals and
Homosexuality: Psychiatrists, Religious Leaders and Laymen Compare
Notes," Judaism, 32 (Fall 1983), 390-443. Symposium reflecting various mainstream views, tending toward the
moderately conservative. 2373. GREENGROSS, WENDY. Jewish and Homosexual. London: Reform Synagogues of Great Britain, 1982.
50 pp. Sympathetic overview
for the lay public. 2374. HERMAN, ERWIN. "A Synagogue for the Jewish Homosexual," Central Conference of American
Rabbis Journal (Summer 1973), 33-40. Observes that "[t]he congregation consists, in the main, of men
and women homosexuals who represent a variety of Jewish backgrounds,
socially, economically, and intellectually." 2375. JACOBOVITS, IMMANUEL. "Homosexuality," Encyclopedia Judaica, 8 (1971), 961-62. An overview of historical data in the post-Biblical literature.
Claims, implausibly, that the relative paucity of references (as now known),
reflects the rarity of homosex- ual practice among Jews. 2378. LAMM, MAURICE. The Jewish Way in Love and Marriage. San Francisco: Harper and Row, 1980. 288 pp. Traditional viewpoint (see pp. 65-70). 2379. LAMM, NORMAN. "Judaism and the Modern Attitude
to Homosexuality," in: Encyclopedia Judaica Yearbook 1973. Jerusalem: Encyclopedia Judaica, 1974, pp. 194-205. "Judaism allows no compromise in its abhorrence of sodomy, but
encourages both compassion and efforts at rehabilitation." 2380. MARKS, NEIL A. "New York Gaycult: The Jewish
Question and Me," Christopher Street, no. 58 (November 1981), 8-21. Reflections of a secular Jew and gay activist writer. 2381. MATT, HERSCHEL J. "Sin, Crime, Sickness, or
Alternative Life Style? A Jewish Approach to Homosexuality," Judaism: A Quarterly of Jewish
Life and Thought, 27 (Winter 1978), 13-24. Because of the centrality of the family to its tradition,
homosexuality poses a problem for Judaism. Nonetheless, Matt urges
compassion. 2382. MEHLER, BARRY ALAN. "Gay Jews: One Man's
Journey from Closet to Community," Moment (January 1977), 22-24, 55-56. "I am a homosexual, and it was in 1972 that I 'came out' .... And it was then that my life
came unglued." 2383. MILLER, JUDEA. "Exclusive Rites?" Moment (December 1982), 62-63. Jewish community group has problem in sharing holocaust memories with
homosexuals. 2384. ROSSO UBIGLI, LILIANIA. "Alcuni aspetti della
concezione della^porneia' nel tardo-giudaismo," Henoch, 1 (1979), 201-45. On the sexual material in the pseudepigraphical Testaments of the
Twelve Patriarchs, which strongly influenced the New
Testament and the nascent Christian Church. 2385. ROTH, NORMAN. "'My Love Is Like a Gazelle':
Imagery of the Beloved Boy in Religious Hebrew Poetry," Hebrew Annual Review (Ohio State University), 8 (1984), 143-65. Discusses the allegorical use of the "beloved boy" motif in
the religious poetry of medieval Spain. See also his: '"Deal Gently with
the Young Man': Love of Boys in Medieval Hebrew Poetry of Spain," Speculum, 57 (1982), 20-51; "The Lyric Tradition in Hebrew Secular Poetry
of Medieval Spain," Hispanic Journal, 2:2 (1981), 7-26; "'Sacred' and 'Secular'" in the Poetry of Ibn Gabirol,"
Hebrew
Studies, 20-21 (1979-80), 75-79; and "Satire and Debate in Two Famous
Medieval Hebrew Poems from Al-Anda- lus: Love of Boys vs. Girls, the Pen and
Other Themes," Maghreb Review, 4 (1979), 105-13. 2386. SCHINDLER, RUBEN. "Homosexuality, the Halacha,
and the Helping Professions," Journal of Religion and Health, 18 (April 1979), 132-38. Orthodox Jewish social-work perspective. 2387. SCHWARTZ, BARRY DOV. The Jewish Tradition and Homosexuality • New York: Jewish Theological Seminary of
American, 1979. 173 pp. (unpublished dissertation) Traces the Jewish view historically and legally in the context of the
overall view of sexuality. Discusses prohibitions in Leviticus and
Deuteronomy, as well as Rabbinic and post-Rabbinic comments. See also his:
"Homosexuality: A Jewish Perspective," United Synagogue Review, 30 (1977), 4-5, 23, 25-27. 2388. SPERO, MOSHE H. "Homosexuality: Clinical and Ethical Challenge," Tradition (September 1979), 17-53. Adheres to the Orthodox viewpoint regarding homosexuality:
"Judaism cannot admit this sexual orientation into its continuum of
sanctified behavior." Nonetheless, "Homosexuals are bona fide
members of the Jewish community." 2389. YOUNGMAN, BARRY, "Gay Life in Israel," Advocate, no. 272 (July 26, 1979), 20-22. Despite religiously motivated restrictions, gay life flourishes there. From time to time homosexuals and lesbians, having concluded that
Christianity and Judaism have little to offer, have sought religious
affirmation in other traditions. In the late 19th century, Theosophy began
to attract some homosexuals. (Helena Blavatsky, the founder of the sect, is
considered by some to have been a Lesbian). The Theosophical affinity
foreshadowed the counterculture enthusiasm for Eastern religions in the
1960s. This decade also saw the rise of neopagan forms of worship, some of
them finding positive values in witchcraft and others seeking to establish
anew a putative faith in the Great Goddess of archaic human history. Goddess
worship has appealed particularly, though not exclusively, to women involved
in what is known as cultural (rather than political) lesbianism. 2401. ADLER, MARGOT. Drawing Down the Noon: Witches, Druids,
Goddess-worshippers, and Other Pagans in America Today. New York: Viking Press, 1979.
455 pp. This book, which relates to a number of trends among women, has also
had some impact on the (male) "fairy spirituality" movement. [For
an attempt to give a myth- historical foundation to the latter, see Arthur
Evans, Witchcraft and the Gay Counterculture (Boston: Fag Rag Books, 1978)]. See pp. 123, 147,
177, 179, 183, and 220. 2402. CARSON, ANNE. Feminist Spirituality and the Feminine Divine: An
Annotated Bibliography. Trumansburg, NY: Crossing Press, 1986. 140 pp. Alphabetical list by
author of 739 items; subject index. 2403. DONNELLY, DODY H. Radical Love: An Approach to
Sexual Spirituality. Minneapolis: Wilson Press, 1984. 135 pp. Holding that alienating dichotomies should be overcome, the author
affirms sexual pluralism. She condemns the idolatry of using heterosexual
intercourse as the norm. 2404. FREIMARK, HANS. "Helena Petrovna Blavatzky: ein weiblicher Ahasver," JfsZ (1906), 525-64. Argues that the founder of Theosophy had a "mannweibliche"
(androgynous) disposition. 2405. ISHERWOOD, CHRISTOPHER. My Guru and His Disciple. New York: Farrar, Straus and Giroux, 1980. 338 pp. The novelist's account of his encounter with Vedanta in Los Angeles in
the 1940s. 2406. JOHNSON, EDWIN CLARK. In Search of God in the Sexual
Underworld. New York: Quill, 1983. 238 pp. Combines an account of the writer's experiences as a researcher among hustlers
and marginal types of San Francisco's Tenderloin with somewhat jejune
religious effusions, mingling Jung, J. D. Salinger, and Theosophy. 2407. LARKIN, PURUSHA. The Divine Androgyne. San Diego: Sanctuary Publications, 1982. 200 pp. Lavishly illustrated
presentation of a personalized neo- Hinduism. 2408. LAWTON, GEORGE. "The Psychology of Spiritualist
Mediums," Psychoanalytic Review, 19 (1932), 418-45. Mentions frequency of homosexual orientation among mediums. 2409. LUTYENS, MARY. Krishnamurti: The Tears of
Awakening. New York: Farrar, Straus and Giroux, 1975. 325 pp. The religious thinker was discovered as a boy in India by the Liberal
Catholic bishop C. W. Leadbeater, a pederast, causing a great controversy (see G. Tillett, below). See
pp. 15-16, 42, 61-62, 64, 66, 68-70, 78, 142-44, and 146. 2410. PILLION, NUMA. Nana: A Life Readings A
Metaphysical Autobiography. Great Neck, NY: Todd and Honeywell, 1984. 278 pp. Autobiography of a gay quasidrifter and spiritualist (born 1927), who
has been influenced by Edgar Cayce. 2411. RUMAKER, MICHAEL. My First Saturnalia. Bolinas, CA: Grey Fox Press, 1978. 180 pp. Somewhat star-struck account of a visit to a fairy-spir- ituality
gathering in New York City. 2412. SPRETNAK, CHARLENE (ed.). The Politics of Women's Spirituality: Essays on the
Rise of Spiritual Power within the Feminist Movement. Garden City, NY: Anchor
Press/Doubleday, 1982. 591 pp. A set of essays denouncing patriarchal religion and calling for a
return of the worship of feminine deities. 2413. STARHAWK. The Spiral Dance: A Rebirth of the Ancient Religion
of the Great Goddess. San Francisco: Harper and Row, 1979. 214 pp. Poetic overview of the older
history and modern reemer- gence of witchcraft as a religion with special
relevance to the women's movement. 2414. STONE, MERLIN. When God Was a Woman. New York: Harcourt, Brace Jovanovich, 1978. 265 pp. Attempts to reconstruct the primordial religion of the Goddess, and to
show how this worship was suppressed in the Judeo-Christian tradition. This
and other books of Merlin Stone, have been
influential in the development of "new age" spirituality. 2415. TILLETT, GREGORY. The Elder Brother: A Biography
of Charles Webster Leadbeater. Boston: Routledge and Kegan Paul, 1982. 338 pp. Life of the eccentric English clergyman, theosophist and pederast, who
founded the first gay church (Australia 1916). 2416. WALKER, MITCH. Visionary Love: A Spirit Book of Gay Mythology and
Transmutational Faerie. San Francisco: Treeroot Press, 1980. 102 pp. This book, inspiring or vapid
according to taste, helped to launch the radical fairy movement. 242OA. WRIGHT,
EZEKIEL, and DANIEL INESSE. God is Gay: An Evolutionary Spiritual Work. San Francisco: Tayu, 1979. 100 pp. Account of personal experiences in spiritual expression in the San
Francisco Bay area. Apart from the intrinsic interest of all words, and especially those
concerned with sexual behavior, the study of language offers a number of
valuable perspectives for the understanding of homosexuality. The structure
of vocabulary employed by the larger society to describe homosexuality,
whether the terms be of learned or slang origin, belongs broadly to the
apparatus of social control, and stands over against the body of words
created, adopted, and adapted by homosexuals themselves, which reflect,
however incompletely, a tendency of resistance to control. Moreover, the
meaning of words alters over time, and these semantic changes can be
used—with all due caution—to monitor shifting patterns of conceptualizing and
stereotyping. The existence of homosexual vocabularies in the various
languages offers considerable vistas for cross-cultural comparison--though at
present only the classical and modern European languages have been examined
in this light. Much work of all sorts--lexical, semantic, and
sociolinguistic—remains to be done among the languages not influenced by the
classical tongues of Europe. 2417. ADAMS, J. N. The Latin Sexual Vocabulary. London: Duckworth, 1982. 272 pp. A major contribution to the study of Latin semantics, metaphor, and
the definition of words. Treats the semantic fields of penis, female
genitalia, sexual acts, and (concisely) anus/rectum. For more detail on the
last topic, see his "'Cuius,' 'Clunes' and Their Synonyms in
Latin," Glotta, 59 (1981), 231-64. 2418. ARANGO, ARIEL C. Las malas palabras. Buenos Aires: Legasa, 1983. 223 pp. Psychoanalytically oriented study of taboo words; international
rather than purely Hispanic emphasis. 2419. ASHLEY, LEONARD R. N. "Kinks and Queens:
Linguistic and Cultural Aspects of the Terminology for Gays,"
Maledicta, 3:2 (Winter 1979), 215-56. Witty, but somewhat impressionistic collage of characteristic
expressions in American and British slang. See also his: "Lovely,
Blooming, Fresh and Gay: The Onomastics of Camp,"
ibid., 4:2 (1980), 223-48; and "Dike Dictum: The Language of
Lesbians," ibid., 6 (1982), 123-62. 2423A. BARON, DENNIS. Grammar and Gender. New Haven: Yale University Press, 1986. 249 pp. Historical notes on such
questions as the search for a gender-neutral third person singular pronoun, the origin of Ms.,
and changes in occupational names prompted by feminism. 2420. CHAUTARD, EMILE. La vie étrange de l'argot. Paris: Denoël et Steele, 1931. 720 pp. "Comment ils aiment" (pp. 155-393) contains an extensive vocabulary of sexual expressions from the
slang of the French criminal underworld. Still other terms are scattered
throughout the volume. An "Index alphabétique" appears on pp. 685-720. 2421. CORY, DONALD WEBSTER (pseud, of Edward Sagarin).
"The Language of the Homosexual," Sexology, 32:3 (1965), 163-65. Comments on the use of the sublanguage as a device for reinforcing
social solidarity among its users, with a short glossary. A longer
lexicon—about 80 items — appears in his (with John P. Leroy): The Homosexual and His Society (New York: Citadel, 1963), 161-66. See also Sagarin, The Anatomy of Dirty Words (New York: L. Stuart, 1962), pp. 109-12. 2422. COUROUVE, CLAUDE. Vocabulaire de l'homosexualité masculine. Paris: Payot, 1985. 248 pp. Precise and richly documented essays on 74 key words in the French
language for male homosexuality, with many insights on French history and
literature. About 1000 source citations are included. Appendices of texts;
bibliography; index. See also his "Aspects of Male Love in the French
Language," Gay Books Bulletin, no. 7 (1982), 13-14; and "The Word
'Bardache,'" ibid., no. 8 (1982), 17-19. 2423. DAHLSTEDT, KARE-HAMPUS. "Spraksituationen i Norden," Nordisk utredningsserie, 32 (1975), 19-30. On minority speech,
including gay speech, in Scandinavia. 2424. DYNES, WAYNE. Homolexis: A Historical and
Cultural Lexicon of Homosexuality. New York: Scholarship Committee, Gay Academic
Union, 1985. 177 pp. A series of essays on historical semantics intended chiefly as a
contribution to the history of ideas (and of ideology), though information is
given on more than 600 words, including their sources in other languages.
Annotated bibliography; index of words. 2425. FÉRAY, JEAN-CLAUDE.
"Une histoire critique du mot homosexualité," Arcadie, no. 325 (January 1981), 11-21; no. 326 (February 1981), 1150-24; no. 327 (March 1981), 171-81; and no. 328 (April 1981), 246-58. Traces the German origins and diffusion of the term "homosexual ( ity ), " with useful references. 2430. FISCHER, EDITH. Amor und Eros: eine Untersuchung des Wortfeldes "Liebe" im
Lateinischen und Griechischen. Hildesheim: Gerstenberg, 1973. 83 pp. Philological
study of Greek and Latin words for "love." 2431. GALLI DE' PARATESI, NORA. Le brutte parole: se- mantica dell'eufemismo. Milan: Mondadori, 1969. 221 pp. Study of linguistic substitution and censorship, particularly in the
sexual sphere (see esp. pp. 132-36). Bibliography; index of expressions. 2432. GRAHN, JUDY. Another Mother Tongue: Gay Words, Gay Worlds. Boston: Beacon, 1984. 325 pp. While the personal narrative of this
popular book is lively and sometimes moving, as a contribution to philology
and historical semantics it is fanciful and unreliable (as seen in the
absurd derivation of the word "dyke" from Queen Boudicca). 2433. GUIRAUD, PIERRE. Le jargon de Villon, ou le gai savoir de la coquille. Paris: Gallimard, 1968. 326 pp. Advances a controversial
argument interpreting the obscure language of Francois Villon's (b. 1431) six Ballades
as being written (at one level) in homosexual argot. For another speculative
contribution to this period, see: Ida Nelson, La sottie sans souci: essai d'interprétation
homosexuelle (Paris: Champion, 1977). 2434. HENDERSON, JEFFREY. The Maculate Muse: Obscene Language in Attic Comedy. New Haven: Yale University Press, 1975. 251 pp. Of limited value: scants homoerotic material and is sometimes
unreliable for what it does contain. 2435. HILLER, KURT. "Zur Frage der Bezeichnung," Der Kreis, 14:8 (1946), 2-6. Proposes the terms Androtrope and Gynäkotrope for the male and female homosexual respectively. 2435A. HOLZINGER, HERBERT. Beschimpfung im heutigen Französisch: Pragmatische,
syntaktische und semantische Aspekte. Salzburg: Universität, 1984. 292 pp. (dissertation)
Contemporary French insults as found in novels and cartoons; includes the
semantic field pede. 2436. JOHANSSON, WARREN. "The Etymology of the Word
'Faggot,'" Gay Books Bulletin, no. 6 (1981), 16-18, 33. Definitive study of this controversial term, showing that it is an American
slang use of the British dialectal word faggot, a contemptuous term for a fat, slovenly woman, and
has nothing to do with the supposed burning of sodomites at the stake in
medieval England. 2437. KAHANE, HENRY, and RENEE KAHANE. "Romano-Aegypti-
aca: I. The Stone peridot," Romance Philology, 14 (1961), 287-89. Peridot, at present a designation of the chrysolite and olivine,
derives from the Greek paideros, "boy love." 2438.
KRAMARAE,
CHERIS, and PAULA A. TREICHLER. A Feminist Dictionary. Boston: Pandora, 1985. 588 pp. A resolutely engage work, mingling exhortation and feminist assertion
with fact. Some will question the assumption that there are two entirely
different genres of dictionaries, one for men and the other for women, as
implying a cognitive dichotomy of all human experience. Useful for the
numerous quotations. 2439. MEILAKH, MIKHAIL. "L'argot de la subculture homosexuelle
en Russie," Spirales, no. 12 (February 1982), 10-11. Soviet scholar's summary of his research on Russian homosexual slang
in the USSR, which may never be published in full because of his arrest. 2440. NEVIS, JOEL A. "Gal, Gei, Homo, and Homoseksuali in Finnish," Maledicta 8 (1984-85), 158-60. Difficulties of integrating the international vocabulary into Finnish. 2441. OPELT,
ILONA. Die lateinische Schimpfwörter nnd ▼erwandte
sprachliche Erscheinungen. Heidelberg: Winter, 1965. 283 pp. In this study on terms of abuse in Latin, see pp. 122, 155, 174-75,
228, 260, 264. 2442. RICHLIN, AMY. "The Meaning of irrumare in Catullus and Martial," Classical Philology, 76 (1981), 40- 46. On the Latin expression for active buccal thrusts during fellation.
See also her book: Garden of Priapus« (New Haven: Yale University Press, 1983). 2443. ROBERTS, J. R. "In America They Call Us Dykes:
- Notes on the Etymology and Use of 'Dyke,'" Sinister Wisdom, no. 9 (Spring 1979), 3-11. Offers a plausible explanation, based on conventions of dress.
Reprinted in E. Shore (ed.) Alternative Papers (Philadelphia: Temple University Press, 1982), pp.
313- 17. See also R. A. Spears, below. 2443A. SPEARS,
RICHARD A. "On the Etymology of Dike," American Speech 60:4 (1985), 318-27. Canvases a broader range of possibilities than
J. Roberts (above), suggesting that the word may be a clipped form of
"bulldike" and its variants. 2444. STONE,
CHARLES. "The Semantics of Gay," Advocate, no. 325 (September 3, 1981), 20-22. Suggests that the
outrage expressed by pop grammarians at the purported "kidnapping"
of the word gay (in contrast to their silence vis-a-vis pansy, fruit, and fairy) reflects their discomfort in seeing homosexuals
manifest their own power. See also: Scott Tucker, "The Power of
Naming," Christopher Street, no. 58 (1982), 60-63. B. DICTIONARIES AND GLOSSARIES Dictionaries and word lists that are useful in studying homosexual
words are of two kinds: general and specialized (erotic). While older
dictionaries tend to restrict coverage of sexual words, there are exceptions,
and in any case it is often necessary to examine the older works in order to
trace the development of current terms. 2445. ALMEIDA, HORÂCIO DE. Dicionàrio de Termos Erôticos e Afins. Second ed. Rio de Janeiro: Civilizaçâo Brasileira, 1981. 285 pp. Brazilian-Portuguese
sexual vocabulary, including some local Brazilian dialect terms; occasional
source citations from other dictionaries and novels. 2446. BARDIS, PANOS D. "A Glossary of
Homosexuality," Maledicta, 4:1 (1980), 59-64. Modest roster of 46 terms, ostensibly chosen because of their rarity. 2447. BLONDEAU, NICOLAS. Dictionnaire érotique latin- français. Paris:
Liseux, 1885. 152 pp. Blondeau's manuscript, which
was completed in the 17th century, contains much material of value in
deciphering Renaissance erotic poetry. 2448.
BORNEMAN,
ERNEST. Sex im Volksmund: der obszöne Wortschatz
der Deutschen. Reinbek bei Hamburg: Rowohlt, 1974. 2 vols. Dictionary of contemporary German sexual slang, particularly rich in
the language of prostitutes. Vol. 1 presents the words in alphabetical order;
vol. 2 offers a thematic classification in the manner of Roget's Thesaurus . 2449. BOSWORTH, JOSEPH, and T. NORTHCOTE TOLLER. An Anglo-Saxon Dictionary. London: Oxford University Press, 1898. 1302 pp. See pp. 65 (baeddel, baedling); and 1156 (waepen- wifestre) all defined as "hermaphrodite." According
to most authorities, the first two are the origin of the modern English word
"bad." See also the 1921 Supplement to the work, where (p. 61), baedling is defined as "an effeminate person," 2450. BURNADZ, JULIAN M. Die Gaunersprache der Wiener Galerie, Lübeck: Verlag für polizeiliches Fachschrifttum Georg Schmidt-Romhild, 1966, 124 pp. A lexicon of the argot of the Viennese criminal underworld, Unlike many previous glossaries in this field, it is rich in terms for male and female homosexuality, since "in the underworld everything in the last analysis turns around easily acquired money and (much of the time perverted) sexuality." Compare: Max Pollak, "Wiener Gaunersprache," Archiv für Kriminal-Anthropologie und Kriminalistik, 15 (1904), 171-237. 2451. CANTAGALLI, RENZO. Con rispetto parlando: seman-
tica del doppiamento. Milan: Sugar, 1972. 239 pp. Dictionary of common Italian double-entendre terms (see e.g.,the entries for bagascia, bardascia, checca, finoc- chio, frocione,
zia). 2452. CARADEC, FRANCOIS. Dictionnaire du français argotique et populaire. Paris: Larousse, 1977. 251 pp. Practical and up-to-date lexicon of French vernacular, essential for
contemporary French studies. See also: Rene James Herail and Edward Lovatt, Dictionary of Modern
Colloquial French (Boston: Routledge and Kegan Paul, 1984; 327 pp.); and Emile Chautard, La vie étrange de l'argot (Paris: Denoël et Steele, 1931: 720 pp.). 2453. DELVAU, ALFRED. Dictionnaire érotique moderne, par un professeur de
langue verte. Brussels ["Freetown"]: Gay, 1864. 320 pp. This pioneering dictionary of taboo words, several times enlarged and
reprinted, is with its quotations from the erotic classics an archetypal work
in the genre. 2454. DE MAURO, TULLIO. "Lessico dell'omosessualità," in: Riccardo Reim et al., Pratiche innominabili. Milan: Mazzotta, 1979, pp. 98-112. Despite De Mauro's established reputation, this word list is insufficient and
unreliable; it will be replaced by a major work by Giovanni Dall'Orto in
preparation. 2454A. ENDT, ENNO, and LIENEKE FRERICHS.
Bargoens woordenboek. Revised ed. Amsterdam: Bakker, 1986. 193 pp. Glossary of current Dutch urban slang with many entries for
homosexuals and lesbians. 2455. FARMER, JOHN STEPHEN. Vocabula amatoria: A
French—English Glossary. New York University Books, 1966. 268 pp. Reprint of the 1903 edition, when it appeared as vol. 8 of Farmer and
W. E. Henley's classic Dictionary of Slang and Its Analogues, Past and
Present. This vol., assembled by compiling several French-language dictionaries,
gives English definitions, together with brief source citations. 2455A. FERRERO,
ERNESTO. I gerghi della mala vita del cinquecento a
oggi. Milan:
Mondadori, 1972. 383 pp. Dictionary of Italian argot and low-life terms; see index under
"omosessuale. " 2445. FORBERG, FRIEDRICH KARL. Manual of Classical Erotology
(De figuris veneris). New York: Grove Press, 1966. 2 vols, in 1. Reprint of the 1884 edition (including misprints). Originally written
as a learned appendix to Forberg's 1824 edition of Panormita's Hermaphroditus, this landmark of erudition quotes some 500
passages from about 150 Greek and Latin authors. Index of terms (vol. 2, pp. 211-35). 2446. GALLO, CRISTINO. Language of the Puerto Rican Street: A Slang
Dictionary with English Cross-Ref- erence. Santurce, PR: Book Service of
Puerto Rico, 1980. 214 pp. Contains a fair number of terms for popular terms for
homosexuality—many of which are known, of course, among Spanish speakers of
the eastern continental United States. 2447. Guild Dictionary of Homosexual Terms. Washington, DC: Guild Press, 1965. 51 pp. Brochure containing about 700 terms (some are proper names—homosexual
historical figures). 2448. GUIRAUD, PIERRE. Dictionnaire érotique. Paris: Payot, 1978. 639 pp. This large work by a noted philologist subsumes, somewhat
uncritically, the gleanings of a long series of glossaries of la langue verte. For
Guiraud's exploration of the issues involved, see his: Sémiologie de la sexualité (Paris: Payot, 1978; 247 pp.); and Les gros mots (Paris: Presses Universitaires de France, 1975; 127 pp.). 2449. HENKE, JAMES T. Courtesans and Cuckolds: A Glossary of Renaissance Dramatic Bawdy (Exclusive of Shakespeare). New York: Garland, 1979. 329 pp. Cites some relevant material from the works of Dekker, Jonson, Marlowe, Marston etc. See
also E. A. M. Colman, The Dramatic Use of Bawdy in Shakespeare (London: Longman, 1974; 230 pp.), which has a
glossary, pp. 182-224. 2450. IRWIN, GODFREY. American Tramp and Underworld
Slang. New York:
Sears, 1931. 264 pp. Despite the reference to homosexuals as "degenerates," this
book offers a number of early citations; see pp. 19, 39, 43, 70, 77, 88, 110,
117-19, 124, 127, 131, 151-53, 174, 176, 195-96, 201.
See also Noel Ersine, Underworld and Prison Slang (Upland, IN: Freese, 1933; 80 pp. 2451.
KUPPER,
HEINZ. Illustriertes Lexikon der deutsch- en
Umgangssprache. Stuttgart: Klett, 1982. 8 vols. Lavishly illustrated popular dictionary of contemporary German slang.
Numerous entries, but without source citations. 2452. LEGMAN, GERSHON. "The Language of
Homosexuality: An American Glossary," in: George W. Henry, Sex Variants (New York: P. B. Hoeber, 1941), pp. 1147-78. The first such list published in the United States, with 329 terms
(omitted in the second edition of Henry's book). 2453. PETROPOULOS, ELIAS. Kaliarda. Fourth ed. Athens: Nepheli, 1980. 262 pp. Glossary of specialized contemporary Greek gay argot. This edition
contains commentary on press and other responses to previous editions. For
description and analysis, see John Taylor, Gay Books Bulletin, 9 (1983), 14-19, and Cabirion, no. 11 (1984), 10-11; as well as Steve A. Dema-
kopoulos, "The Greek Gays Have a Word for It," Maledicta, 2 (1978), 33-39. 2454. PIERRUGUES, PIERRE. Glossarium eroticum linguae latinae. Paris: Dondey-Duprey, 1826. 518 pp. A learned Latin dictionary, in Latin; still
useful. 2455. RODGERS, BRUCE. The Queens' Vernacular: A Gay
Lexicon. San Francisco: Straight Arrow Books, 1972. 254 pp. Campy, uncritical lexicon of over 12,000 items, including many
(evidently) nonce expressions invented ad hoc by teasing queens. Reissued
without change as Gay Talk (New York: Putnam's, 1979). 2456. RODRIGUEZ CASTELO, HERNAN. Lexicon sexual ecuator- iano y
latino-americano. Quito: Libri Mundi, 1979. 401 pp. Thoughtful, scholarly work on Spanish-American sexual language; see
pp. 321-49. 2457. SOUTO.MAIOR, MARIO. Dicionario do Palavrao e
Termos Afins. Third ed. Recife: Guararapes, 1980. 166 pp. Brazilian-Portuguese dictionary of erotic language, with many source
citations. 2469.
VORBERG,
GASTON. Glossarium eroticum.
Stuttgart: Puttmann, 1932. 768 pp. Ambitious illustrated dictionary of Greek and Latin erotic terms with
explanations in German; not always reliable. Sociolinguistics, which is concerned with the use of language in human
encounter situations, is a recent development in the ensemble of linguistic
fields. While the discipline holds considerable promise in view of the social
anchoring of homosexual behavior, as yet the results have been somewhat
limited. 2470. ALLEN, IRVING LEWIS. The Language of Ethnic Conflict: Social
Organization and Lexical Culture. New York: Columbia University Press, 1983. 162 pp. Presents results of
an analysis of more than a thousand terms of abuse which
have been used for and by 53 differ- lent groups of ethnic Americans.
Shows correlations between the number of slurs, the size of a group, and a
group's contact and conflict with other groups. The perspectives disclosed by
this book should be extended to gay men and lesbians. 2471. CHESEBRO, JAMES W. "Paradoxical Views of
'Homosexuality' in the Rhetoric of Social Scientists: A Fantasy Theme
Analysis," Quarterly Journal of Speech, 66 (1980), 127-39. Using a method created by E. G. Bormann, identifies three themes: the
homosexual as degenerate, mainstreaming the homosexual, and cultural
compatibility of the heterosexual and homosexual cultural systems. 2472. CHESEBRO, JAMES W. (ed.). Gayspeak: Gay Male and Lesbian
Communication. New York: Pilgrim Press 1981. 367 pp. Twenty-five papers of varying quality on communications and
sociolinguistics arranged under six topics: the social meanings of the words
homosexual, gay, and lesbian; inside the gay community; homophobia;
institutional forces shaping the public images of gay males and lesbians; gay
liberation as a rhetorical movement; and gay rights and the political
campaign. 2473. FARRELL, R. A. "The Argot of the Homosexual
Subculture," Anthropological Linguistics, 14:3 (1972), 97-109. Analyzes the responses to a questionnaire, concluding that homosexual
slang expresses the preoccupations of the gay subculture. 2474. GOLDHABER, GERALD M. "Gay Talk: Communication
Behavior of Male Homosexuals," Gai Saber, 1:2 (1977), 136-49. Combines anecdotal and statistical evidence to suggest patterns of
communication, verbal and nonverbal. 2475. HAYES, JOSEPH. "Gayspeak," Quarterly Journal of Speech, 62 (1976), 256-66. Examines three major aspects of homosexual language— secret, social,
and radical activist—reviewing current research problems. 2476. HAYES, JOSEPH. "Language and Language Behavior
of Lesbian Women and Gay Men: A Selected Bibliography," JH, 4:2 (Winter 1978), 201-212; and 4:3 (Spring 1979),
299-309. A remarkably comprehensive roundup, which may be used to supplement
the items listed here. However, as Hayes' astute annotations demonstrate,
much of the material published up to the time of his writing was methodologically
immature. 2477. KEY, MARY RITCHIE. Male-female Language; with a
Comprehensive Bibliography. Metuchen, NJ: Scarecrow, 1975. 200 pp. Surveys the problem of gender-marked differences in vocabulary and
usage. 2478. LERMAN, J. W., and P. H. DANUTE. "Voice Pitch
of Homosexuals," Folia Phoniatrica, 21 (1969), 340-46. A start on the
study of a neglected topic. 2479. LUMBY, MALCOLM E. "Code Switching and Sexual
Orientation: A Test of Bernstein's Sociolinguistic Theory," JH 1:4 (Summer 1976), 383-99. Concludes that the ideas of the British sociologist cannot be accepted
without modification for stigmatized groups. 2480. MURRAY, STEPHEN 0. "Lexical and Institutional
Elaboration: The 'Species Homosexual' in Guatemala," Anthropological Linguistics, 22 (1980), 177-85. Analyzes the social elements characterizing the use of words by local
informants. 2481. MURRAY, STEPHEN 0., and
ROBERT C. POOLMAN, JR. "Labels and Labeling: Folk Models of 'Gay Community'." Working Papers of the Language
Behavior Research Laboratory, 52 (1982). 34 pp. Sexual and social notions of who is included in San Francisco gay
men's understanding of "gay community." 2482. PONSE, BARBARA. "Secrecy in the Lesbian
World," Urban Life, 3 (1976), 313-38. Analyzes lesbian techniques for minimizing self-revelation, including
nonverbal communication. 2483. SAGARIN, EDWARD (Donald Webster Cory).
"Language of the Homosexual Subculture," Medical Aspects of Human
Sexuality, 4:4 (April 1970), 37, 39-41. Anecdotal evidence. This article is a condensation of a chapter in
Cory, The Homosexual in America (New York: Greenberg, 1951.) 2484. SONENSCHEIN, DAVID. "The Homosexual's
Language," Journal of Sex Research, 5 (1969), 281-91. Presents the results of a participant-observation study in a
southwestern U. S. city, showing how at that time gay men's argot effeminized
nouns and pronouns, from which Sonenschein draws conclusions about their
social role, 2485. STANLEY, JULIA PENELOPE. "Homosexual
Slang," American Speech, 45 (1970), 45-59. Interprets questionnaires to conclude that gay men posses a more
extensive "marginal vocabulary" than either heterosexual men or
lesbians. See also her: "When We Say '0ut of the Closets'," College English, 36 (November 1974), 385-92. 2486. TAUB, DIANE, and ROBERT G. LEGER. "Argot and
the Creation of Social Types in a Young Gay Community," Human Relations, 37 (1984), 181-89. Gay terms and expressions collected were grouped in a method similar
to factor analysis to locate specific dimensions of behavior in a community
of college-age persons. Special attention was given to the presence of binary
oppositions. See also: Aaron Bruce W. Ostrom, "A Study of Lexical Items
in the Gay Subculture," in: J. A. Edmondson (ed.), Research Papers of the Texas
SIL: Pilot Studies in Sociolinguistics (Dallas: Summer Institute of Linguistics, 1983),
72-87. 2487. THORNE, BARRIE, CHERIS KRAMARAE, and NANCY HENLEY. Language, Gender and Society. Rowley, MA: Newbury House, 1983. 342 pp. Ten papers seeking to display progress made in the field since 1975,
followed by a noteworthy annotated bibliography (pp.151-331). See esp. pp.
125-37 and 327. 2488. VETTERLING-BRAGGIN, MARY (ed.). Sexist Language: A Modern
Philosophical Analysis. Totowa, NJ: Little- field, Adams and Co., 1981. 329 pp. Papers seeking to state the rationale and implications of the
feminist-sponsored language reform. Although most of the contributors in the
anthology tend to take the feminist critique of language too much for
granted, a number of secondary issues are usefully canvased. Bibliography,
pp. 319-23. Although surviving graffiti from Greece and Rome (including some that
bear on homosexuality; see III.C) have been studied for linguistic and social
attitudes, in subsequent centuries the practice has been neglected.
Contemporary graffiti have, however, attracted the attention of folk- lorists
and amateurs since the beginning of the century. 2489. ALEXANDER, BOB. "Male and Female Restroom Graffiti," Maledicta, 2 (1978), 42-59. Finds that homosexual graffiti in male restrooms tend to be
aggressive, while graffiti in female restrooms have "an element of what
might be called tenderness." See also Wendy Reich et al., "Notes on
Women's Graffiti," Journal of American Folklore, 90 (April 1977), 188-91. 2490. II
cesso degli angeli. Milan: Gammalibri,
1979. 122 pp. Anonymous illustrated work treating graffiti as indices of the male
mentality; see pp. 47-66. 2491.
EIGELTINGER,
WILFRIED. Graffiti für Vespasian: Die Kunst im
Pissoir. Berlin: Verlag Rosa Winkel, 1981. 94 pp. Attempts to place graffiti in historical context so as to evaluate
them as a "continuing cultural achievement of humanity." 2492. ERNEST, ERNEST (pseud.). Sexe et graffiti. Paris: Alain Moreau, 1979. 349 pp. Texts selected from several thousand graffiti collected by the author
over fifteen years in Paris, the French provinces, and several neighboring
countries. See pp. 85-315 for homosexual examples. 2493. PRAETORIUS, NUMA (pseud, of Eugen Wilhelm). "Homosexuelle Pissoir-Inschriften aus Paris," Anthropophyteia, 8 (1911), 410-22, 425-26. Report on homosexual graffiti observed in Parisian toilets. 2494. SECHREST, LEE, and LUIS FLORES. "Homosexuality
in the Philippines and the United States: The Handwriting on the Wall," Journal of Social Psychology, 79 (1969), 3-12. Comparing samples from the two countries it was found that the
American ones were more likely to be humorous, political, and philosophical,
while the Philippine ones had a higher amount of hostile content and
disapproval of sexual ideation. See also Lee Sechrest and A. K. Olson,
"Graffiti in Four Types of Institutions of Higher Education," Journal of Sex Research, 7 (1971), 62-71. Until recently folklorists—with the exception of a few Freudians—have
tended to avoid dealing explicitly with sexual matters. The study of
homosexuality in folklore has not yet achieved defined parameters.
Accordingly, the entries listed below offer only a few glimpses of the broader panorama that may one day be unfolded. 2485. DUNDES, ALAN, JERRY LEACH, and BORA OZKOK. "The
Strategy of Turkish Boys' Verbal Dueling," in: J. Gumpertz and D. Hymes
(eds.) Directions in Socio- linguistics: The Ethnography of Communication. New York: Holt, 1972, pp. 130-60. Accusations of passive homosexuality as insults. Note the modification
proposed by M. Glazer, "On Verbal Dueling Among Turkish Boys," Journal of American Folklore, 89 (1976), 87-89. 2486. FLYNN, CHARLES P. "Sexuality and Insult
Behavior," Journal of Sex Research, 12 (1976), 1-13. Insults indicate the boundaries of acceptable sexual behavior in a
given culture. The frequency of homosexual insults in American culture
contrasts with their apparent absence from many tribal cultures. 2487. GOODWIN, JOSEPH PAUL. More Man Than You'll Ever Be:
Gay Folklore and Acculturation. Bloomington: Indiana University, 1984. 386 pp.
(unpublished dissertation) Seeks to determine the socio-cultural meaning of gay argot, jokes,
female impersonation, and the like—including their role in maintaining
social cohesion and in coping with conflict. 2488.
GREENBERG,
H. R., et al. "The Jelly Baby," Psychiatric Quarterly, 42 (1968), 211-16. A folk practice occurring among certain menstruating lesbians, and the
fantasies associated with it. 2489. HOFFMAN, FRANK. Analytical Survey of
Anglo-Amer- ican Traditional Erotica. Bowling Green, OH: Bowling Green University
Popular Press, 1973. 309 pp. Emphasizes
literature and film. 2490. KOUKOULES, MARY. Loose-Tongued Greeks: A Miscellany
of Neo-Hellenic Erotic Folklore. Translated by John Taylor. Paris: Digamma, 1983.
181 pp. Erotic sayings and rhymes collected in modern Greece (bilingual); a
few examples refer to homosexuality. An appendix is "A Glossary of
Modern Greek Erotic Speech." 2491. LEGMAN, GERSHON. The Horn Book: Studies in
Erotic Folklore and Bibliography. New Hyde Park, NY: University Books, 1964. 565 pp. Includes a study of "Pisanus Fraxi" (Henry Spencer Ash-
bee); great collectors of erotica; and a series of papers on problems of
erotic literature. 2492. MURRAY, STEPHEN 0. "The Art of Gay
Insulting," Anthropological Linguistics, 21 (1979), 211-23. Parallels and
contrasts with the better-known art of in- suits among blacks. See also his:
"Ritual Insults in Stigmatized Subcultures—Gay—Black—Jew," Maledicta, 7 (1983), 189-211. 2493. MONEY, JOHN, and GEOFFREY HOSTA. "Negro
Folklore of Male Pregnancy," Journal of Sex Research, 4 (1968), 34-50. Seeks to link the folk belief (documented from nine black homosexuals)
in the "blood baby" to the mother-centered Black culture of the
United States, 2494. WESTERMEIER, CLIFFORD P. "The Cowboy and
Sex," in: Charles W. Harris and Buck Rainey (eds.), The Cowboy: Six Shooters,
Songs and Sex. Norman: University of Oklahoma Press, 1976, pp. 98-105. Throws a little light on a still very obscure subject. As a general rule, minority groups tend to create distinctive forms
of humor as a defensive device and for ironic self-reflection. Among male
homosexuals this "ethnic" humor has tended to take the form of
camp, an ironic self- parody which also functions as social criticism.
Lesbian humor, which has been falsely claimed to be nonexistent, has not yet
been sufficiently studied to afford generalizations. Cross-cultural studies
are entirely lacking. Needless to say, there exists a substantial body of
jokes told by heterosexuals, which convey hostile stereotypes; this form of
humor offers some insight into popular attitudes, including response to
changing events (e.g.,the 1980s vogue of AIDS
jokes). 2495. BALLIET, BEV, and PATTI PATTON. Graphic Details. Phoenix: Star Publications, 1980. 44 pp. Lesbian erotica and humor in prose, poetry, and photography
. 2496. BOOTH, MARK. Camp. London: Quartet, 1983. 189 pp. Attempts to define the phenomenon and plot its history and
characteristics. Holds that camp is not the same as gay, though there is a
large overlap. Offers almost 200 illustrations, from Carpaccio to David
Bowie. 2497. BROWN, HUDSON. The First Official Gay
Handbook: Manual for Quiche Eaters. New York: Printed Matter, 1983. 160 pp. Exploits the brief vogue of the "quiche eater" satire,
supposedly the favorite food of certified wimps. 2508. CORE, PHILIP. Camp: The Lie That Tells the Truth. New York: Delilah Books, 1984. 192 pp. An illustrated biographical
dictionary of campy persons and those who have been the objects of camp
veneration. The choice of entries—including Alexander the Great, Fran
Lebowitz, and Cardinal Newman—is sophisticated, but sometimes debatable. 2509. DE MOSS, VIRGINIA. "The Joke's on Us: The Fag
Joke Phenomenon," Advocate, no. 289 (April 3, 1980), 26-30. Antihomosexual jokes in the media, especially television, trivialize a
whole range of experience, and the gay community seems unable or unwilling
to combat the practice. 2510. EDWARDS, VAL. "Robin Tyler: Comic in Contradiction:
A Profile," Body Politic, no. 56 (September 1979), 21-23. Situates the popular lesbian comic in the context of the new women's
humor which gave women the opportunity to make not themselves the brunt of
the jokes, but the society that oppresses them. See also M. A. Karr, Advocate, no. 268 (May 31, 1979), 26+. 2511. GITECK, LENNY. "Gay Humor: Comedy Comes Out of
the Closet," Advocate, no. 300 (September 4, 1980), 23-26. On some gay and lesbian performers. 2512. HENLEY, CLARK. The Butch Manual. New York: Sea Horse Press, 1982. Ill pp. Send up of gay mimicry of macho styles, with numerous photographs. 2513.
HOHMANN,
JOACHIM S. (ed.). "Hoffentlich
sind die Jungs auch pünklich." Berlin: Rosa Winkel Verlag, 1976. 92 pp. Male homosexual jokes and wit. 2514. LEGMAN, GERSHON (ed.). The Limerick: 1700 Examples, with Hotes,
Variants and Index. New York: Bell, 1974. 508 pp. All more or less erotic. See Chapter 5, "Buggery" (pp.92-
108); and Chapter 6 "Abuses of the Clergy" (pp. 109-17). See also
the sequel: The Hew Limerick: 2750 Unpublished Examples, American and British (New York: Crown, 1977; 729 pp.). 2515. LEGMAN, GERSHON. [Ho Laughing Matter.] Rationale of the Dirty Joke:
An Analysis of Sexual Humor: Second Series. New York: Breaking Point, 1975.
992 pp. Sequel to his 1968 volume. Although much interesting material is
included, the analysis is largely vitiated by heavy-handed and homophobic
Freudian interpretations. See "Homosexuality" (pp. 55-183). 2516. LYNCH, MICHAEL, and MARIANA VALVERDE. "Pat
Bond: (Role) Playing Stein," Body Politic, no. 59 (December 1979-January 1980), 21-24. Interview with comedian Pat Bond who states: "Gertrude Stein is
important to lesbians today because she's a role model for us." See also
M. A. Karr, Advocate, no. 256 (December 13, 1978), 27-28. 2517. ORTLEB, CHARLES, and RICHARD FIALA. Le Gai Ghetto: Gay Cartoons
from Christopher
Street. New York: St. Martin's Press, 1980. about 50
pp. Sophisticated cartoons in the mould of New Yorker magazine. Other collections of the work of gay
cartoonists include Joe Johnson, ... And So,This Is Yonr Life, Miss
Thing (Los
Angeles: Funny Bone Press, 1973); Nazario, Anarcoma (New York: Catalan Communications, 1983; 69 pp.);
Hippolyte Romain, Les Cheries (Paris: Leroy, 1984; 46 pp.); and Stefan, Der Schwuchtelpeter (Berlin: Verlag Rosa Winkel, 1980; 32 pp.). Under
the editorship of Harold Cruse, five issues of Gay Comics magazine have appeared. 2518. PAINTER, DOROTHY S. "Lesbian Humor as a Normalization
Device," in: Virginia A. Erman and Cynthia L. Berryman (eds.), Communication, Langnage and
Sex: Proceedings from the First Annual Conference. Rowley, MA: Newbury, 1980, 132-48. Derived from her doctoral dissertation: A Communicative Study of Humor
in a Lesbian Speech Community: Becoming a Member (Columbus: Ohio State University, 1978; 237 pp.) 2519. SCHMIDT, CASPER G. "AIDS Jokes: Or, Schadenfreude around an Epidemic," Maledicta, 8 (1984-85), 69-75. A first approach to this repellent genre of contemporary folklore.
More examples appear on page 214-16 of this issue; see also ibid., 7 (1983), 280, 290-93. 2520. SONTAG, SUSAN. "Notes Toward a Definition of
Camp," Partisan Review, 31 (1964), 515-30. Widely-read essay that put camp "on the map" among the intelligentsia.
See also Jim Hunter, "On Camp: The Sensibility of Innocent
Frivolity," Journal of the West Virginia Philosophical Society, 9 (Fall 1975), 28-30; Vito Russo, "Camp,"
in: Martin Levine (ed.), Gay Men: The Sociology of Male Homosexuality (New York: Harper and Row, 1979), pp. 205-10; as
well as M. Booth, and P. Core, above. 2521. STANLEY, JULIA P., and SUSAN W. ROBBINS.
"Lesbian Humor," Women, 5 (1980), 26-29. Hypothesizes that humor serves a bonding function for lesbians, in
somewhat the same manner as the special vocabulary of gay men (which lesbians
largely lack). See also idem, "Mother Wit: Tongue in Cheek," in:
Karla Jay and Allen Young (eds.), Lavender Culture (New York: Jove, 1979), 299-307. 2522. SUMMERBELL, RICHARD. Abnormally Happy: A Gay Dictionary. Vancouver: New Star Books, 1985. 66 pp. A gentle Devil's Dictionary, with illustrations by Paul Aboud. 2523. TURNER, GLENN. Fairy Tales: A Treasure of Gay Jokes. New York: Pinnacle Books, 1985. 119 pp. Pulp collection of longer jokes and quickies
told by or ridiculing homosexuals. Some were originally straight jokes,
transformed into gay ones. 2524. WATSON, LARRY. The Homosexual Joke Book. New York: Gay Presses of New York, 1985. 63 pp. Mostly one-liners, some
quite amusing. A. SOCIAL SEMIOTICS AND LIFESTYLE TRENDS In this section, the term semiotics is not used in the usual sense of
a science of signs and symbols, but refers to repertoires of nonverbal tokens
of communication. As the homosexual subculture has become less clandestine,
the character of such tokens and gestural patterns has shifted from that of
the carefully guarded possession of an insider culture to that of a more
open and accessible repertoire (as seen, for example, in the lambda symbol,
which is often worn to elicit comment). With the advancing social pluralism of
Western industrial societies, it was perhaps inevitable that subcultural groups
be more and more identified with distinctive and visible lifestyles. The
increasing salience of male homosexuals and lesbians has become part and
parcel of this development. 2525. ALFRED, RANDY. "Will the Real Clone Please
Stand Up?" Advocate, no. 338 (March 18, 1982), 22-23. Views the clone consciousness as one of passive consumerism. See
also: Phillip Carswell, "Clones," Gay Community News (Melbourne), 2:9 (November 1980), 24-26. 2526. ALTMAN, DENNIS. The Homosexualization of America, the Americanization
of the Homosexual. New York: St. Martin's Press, 1982. 242 pp. Ambitious but impressionistic attempt to characterize the leading
trends of the current situation in the United States and their interaction
with the rest of the non-Communist world. Contains many references to
stories in the gay and mainstream press. 2526A. ANDERSON, TIMOTHY. "Psychosexual Symbolism in the
Handwriting of Male Homosexuals," Psychological Reports, 58 (1986), 75-81. Claims to find differences
between male homosexuals and male heterosexuals in the formation of the
letter "I" (but not for other letters). 2527. BERGLER, EDMUND. Fashion and the Unconscious. New York: Brunner, 1953. 305 pp. The antihomosexual psychoanalyst claims that women's fashions are a
"masculine invention secondarily thrust upon women to alleviate man's
unconscious masochistic fear of the female body," and that women's
fashions are designed by male homosexuals, "their bitterest
enemies." See also: Michael M. Miller et al., "Viewpoints: Why Are
the Women's Fashion and Hair-styling Industries Dominated by Homosexual
Males?" Medical Aspects of Human Sexuality, 5 (May 1971),
60-67. 2522. BOIGEY, MAURICE. "Les detenus tatoués," Archives d'anthropologie criminelle, 25 (1910),
439-57. On tattooing among convicts, a subject of great interest to
criminologists at the turn of the century as a criminal (and homosexual)
subcultural trait. 2523. BOURGEOIS, M., and A. CAMPAGNE, "Tatouage et psychiatrie," Annales médico-psychologiques, 129/2 (October 1971), 391-413. Presents a historical
overview of the relation between tattooing and psychopathological states,
supplemented by clinical data. Claims that "latent or overt homosexual
elements are easily identified." 2524. BROWN, GABRIELLE. The New Celibacy: Why More Men and Women Are
Abstaining from Sex—and Enjoying It. New York: McGraw-Hill, 1980. 200 pp. Popular work on the vogue of sex
sabbaticals (not lifelong abstinence) among the upwardly mobile. 2525. BURKE, TOM. "The New Homosexuality," Esquire, 73 (December 1969), 178, 304-18. Article bringing to the attention of the mass audience the new
salience of non-stereotypical ("masculine") homosexuals. 2526. CORY, DONALD WEBSTER (pseud, of Edward Sagarin).
"Can Homosexuals Be Recognized?" ONE Magazine, 1:9 (1953), 7-11. Although only about five to ten percent of homosexuals are
recognizable to the general public through their effeminate or other
mannerisms, the author claims that most homosexuals are recognizable to
other homosexuals by means of more subtle signs (dress, hair style, tonal
modulation in speech, gait, eye contact, etc.). 2527. DEVALL, WILLIAM. "Leisure and Lifestyles among
Gay Men: An Exploratory Essay," International Review of Modern Sociology, 9 (1979), 166-86. Postulates that the leisure activities of gay men, as for example
tourist travel, may prefigure patterns of postmodern leisure in other
segments of the population. 2528. EISLER, BENITA. Class Act: America's Last
Dirty Secret. New York: Franklin Watts, 1983. 352 pp. Chapter 9, "Coming Out and Moving Up" (pp. 197-225),
presents observations (otherwise rare in the recent spate of popular books on
class) on upward mobility among gay men and downward mobility among lesbians. 2535. ENGEL, PETER.
"Androgynous Zones," Harvard Magazine (January-February 1983), 24-32. Spots a trend in 1980s fashion and
popular culture. 2536. FARREN, MIKE. The Black Leather Jacket. New York: Abbeville, 1985. 96 pp. Fashion and lifestyle survey from World
War II through the 'fifties and S & M to punk; 150 photographs. 2537. FISCHER, HAL. Gay Semiotics: A Photographic Study of Visual
Coding among Homosexual Men. San Francisco: NFS Press, 1977. 56 pp. Stimulating but brief study of
handkerchief and other visual codes among gay men. 2538.
FRINGS,
MATTHIAS, and ELMAR KRAUSHAAR (eds.). Männer-Liebe:
Ein Handbuch fur Schwule und alle, die es werden wollen.
Reinbek bei
Hamburg: Rowohlt, 1982. 382 pp. Sometimes playful collage of words and pictures on facets of gay-male
culture in West Germany today (coming out, bars and entertainment, social
circles, the gay movement). 2539. HARRIS, MAZ. Bikers: Birth of a Modern-day Outlaw. London: Faber, 1985. 128 pp. Illustrated account of a lifestyle that has shown affinities with
both macho homophobia and the gay leather subculture. 2540. HUMPHREYS, LAUD. "New Styles in Homosexual
Manliness," Trans-action (March-April 1979), 38-46, 64-66. Spotlighting trends towards virilization and subcultural diversity,
Humphreys discusses five major classes of homosexuals—trade, ambisexuals,
closet queens, gays, and hustlers. 2541. MCDONALD, SHARON. "My Body or My
Politics," Advocate, no. 357 (December 9, 1982), 33-35. Identifies a new openness among lesbians occasioned by the popularity
of punk styles and a willingness to discard restrictivist taboos—whether
ordained by feminists or by parents. 2542. MARSAULT R., RALF. "Pascal, t'as tout tatoué," Gai pied, no. 202 (11-17 January 1986), 52-55. Interview with a tattooed French gay man, showing the melding of
attitudes with those of tattooed straight men. 2543. MARSHALL, JOHN. "The Macho Debate," Gay Hews (London), no. 242 (June 10-23 1982), 28-29. Argues that macho images can be employed for a wide range of reasons,
"not all of which are personally or politically dubious." See
also: Peter York, "Machomania," Harpers and Queen (February 1979), 58-61. 2544. PARRY, ALBERT. Tattoo: Secrets of a Strange Art as Practiced among
the Natives of the United States. New York: Simon and Schuster, 1933. 171 pp. Useful period document. 2545. RICHIE, DONALD, and IAN BURUMA. The Japanese Tattoo. Tokyo: Weatherhill, 1980. 116 pp. Attempts a history of tattooing in Japan from early times to the
present, treating also iconography, sociosexual significance, and traditional
techniques. Numerous photographs. 2546. THOMPSON, MARK. "To the Limits and Beyond:
Folsom Street," Advocate no. 346 (July 8, 1982), 28-31, 57. If the clone uniform of the 1970s announced a kind of adolescent
camaraderie, it is the stoic and more highly charged semiology of black
leather, Thompson claims, that will define many men's quest for maturity in
the 1980s. 2547. VINING, DONALD. "Signs and Shibboleths," Advocate, no. 338 (March 18, 1982), 24-27. Reminiscences of one man's acculturation to the gay semiotics of the
1940s and 50s (rings, silver identification bracelets, jacket worn over the
shoulder, etc.). The term popular culture lacks sharp definition. It may apply to
entertainments diffused by the mass media, especially radio and television,
or simply to diversions preferred by the masses—in contradistinction to high
culture. Some popular culture elements, such as astrology are many centuries
old. Apart from the efforts of a few interested individuals, the prejudices
of the educated have hindered the investigation of popular culture. Lack of
study is especially evident for popular culture variants common among
homosexuals, which require far more study than they have hitherto received. 2548. AUSTEN, HOWARD, and BEVERLY PEPPER. The Myra Breckinridge
Cookbook. Boston: Little, Brown, 1970. 344 pp. Typical of a number of campy cookbooks intended for the gay-male
reader. Includes recipes for "Flaming Faggot Trout," "Cod
Pieces," and "Cumin Covered Cook." See also (e.g.): Rick Leed, Dinner for Two: A Gay Sunshine
Cookbook (San Francisco: Gay Sunshine Books, 1981). 2549. BRONSKI, MICHAEL. Culture Clash: The Making of Gay Sensibility. Boston: South End Press, 1984. 249 pp. Gay-male popular culture and its interaction with the
mainstream—including such topics as the gay movement, Hollywood, publishing,
and advertising--analyzed from a moderate left point of view. 2550. CALIFIA, PAT. "The Sex Industry and Its
Workers," Advocate, no. 378 (October 13, 1983), 41-44. Protests against reductivist critiques of the sex industry as mere exploitation.
Advocates deregulation and the legalization of brothels. 2551. CARTNAL, ALAN. California Crazy. Boston: Houghton Mifflin, 1981. 204 pp. New-journalist account of the intersecting worlds of rock, pop, and
film in Southern California. 2552. DAM, WIM VAN. Astrology and Homosexuality. York Beach, ME: Samuel Weiser, 1985. 93 pp. First published in Dutch in 1983, this book draws on the Hindu navamsa
tradition, concluding that astrology does not distinguish between male and
female homosexuality. 2553. DYER, RICHARD. "In Defense of Disco," Gay
Left, no. 8 (1979), 20-23. Argues that disco is more than a form of music, it is a sensibility. 2554. EMERSON, KEN. "The Village People: America's
Male Ideal?" Rolling Stone, no. 275 (October 5, 1978), 26-27. On the (brief) mainstream success of a musical group that mimicked
macho. See also: David Rensin, "Can't Stop the Muse," Playboy, 27 (July 1982), 106-07. 2555. FRASER, BRAD. "Coming Out in the Comics," Body Politic, no. 105 (July-August 1984), 31-34. Recalls gay subtexts detectable in the comic strips of his youth. 2556. HEIMSOTH,
KARL-GUENTHER. Character-Konstellation: mit
besonderer Berücksichtigung der Gleichgeschlechtlichkeit.
Munich: Barth Verlag, 1928. 200 pp. Astrological approach, apparently the first in modern times, but in
fact reviving an old, suppressed tradition stemming from Teucer of Babylon,
Ptolemy, Girolamo Car- dano, and others. 2557. JAY, KARLA, and ALLEN YOUNG (eds.). Lavender Culture. New York: Jove (Harcourt Brace Jovano- vich), 1978.
491 pp. Reprints a broad selection of 43 articles on gay culture in the
narrower sense (art, music, drama, and literature), together with others on
sociology and the state of the movement. 2558. JAY, MICHAEL. Gay Love Signs. New York: Ballan- tine, 1980. 416 pp. Popular astrology for homosexual men, modeled on Linda Goodman's Sun Signs. See also Vivian E. Robson, An Astrology Guide to Your Sex
Life (New York:
Arc Books, 1963), pp. 47-51; and John Savage, The Gay Astrologer (Port Washington, NY: Ashley Books, 1982; 119 pp.). 2545. LEMAY, HELEN. "The Stars and Human
Sexuality," Isis, 71 (1980), 127-37. Shows the origins and development in medieval Islam of a hermetic
tradition of astrological determination of sexual orientation. 2546. PERKINS, K. B. "Gay Pornography and Sex
Paraphernalia Shops: An Ethnography of Expressive Work Settings," Deviant Behavior, 2 (1981), 305-12. Makes a beginning on studying the sites of the commerce, rather than
just the goods that are sold, which have been the main focus up to now. 2547. PETERSON, DAVID M., and PAULA DRESSEL. "Equal
Time For Women: Social Notes on the Male Stripper," Urban Life, no. 11
(1982), 185-208. About the homosocial environment and sexual objectifica- tion of
masculinity for performers, some of whom are gay. 2548. RIDDIOUGH, CHRISTINE. "Culture and
Politics," in: Working Papers on Gay/Lesbian Liberation and
Socialism. Chicago: New American Movement, 1979, pp. 12-28. Gay culture includes such institutions as bars, centers, and
newspapers, as well as the language, humor and ideas of gay people. Despite
the charge of complicity with capitalism, this culture has a basically
subversive nature. 2549. WERTHAM, FREDERIC. The Seduction of the Innocent. New York: Rinehart, 1954. 397 pp. A typical pop-psychiatric diatribe
of the period, conjuring up all sorts of horrors in the comics, including
homosexuality as implicit in male bonding. The stereotypical concept of the male homosexual as a mere milktoast
precluded any understanding of gays in sports—a blindspot that has been
erased by individual revelations as well as the Gay Games which are held in
San Francisco. While lesbian participation was somewhat more visible, the
discussion of it was considered taboo—but this rule too has been broken. What
has not yet been investigated is whether there are particular concentrations
of gay men and lesbians in particular sports and, if so, what dynamic may lie
behind this pattern of attraction. 2564. CASAS, SIMON, and PIERRE CARPENTIER. Tons Toreros. Paris: Denoel, 1985. 96 pp. Casas, director of the arenas at Nimes and
Valencia, holds that homosexuality is constant, though in a latent form,
in all aspects of bull-fighting, including the bond between the torero and
the audience. With photographs by Roland Cros. 2565. COBHAN, LINN N1. "Lesbians in Physical
Education and Sport," in: Margaret Cruikshank (ed.), Lesbian Studies. Old Westbury, NY: Feminist Press, 1982, pp. 179-86. From observations in the physical education department of a large
university, concludes that while there are many lesbians in sports and
physical education, they seem to find their core identity more as athletes
than as lesbians . 2566. DEFORD, FRANK. Big Bill Tilden: The Triumphs and the Tragedy. New York: Simon and Schuster, 1976. 286 pp. Life of America's greatest tennis star (1893-1953), who
was persecuted and humiliated for his homosexuality. 2567. DUNDES, ALAN. "Into the Endzone for a Touchdown:
A Psychoanalytic Consideration of American Football," Western Folklore, 37 (1978), 75-88. Quasi-Freudian speculations (perhaps not entirely serious) on
homosexual ritual behavior in football, using mainly linguistic evidence. 2568. GARNER, BRIAN, and RICHARD W. SMITH. "Are There
Really Any Gay Male Athletes? An Empirical Survey," Journal of Sex Research, 13 (1977), 22-34. Questionnaires answered by male college athletes on three California
university teams indicate that a substantial minority had engaged in gay
activity. 2569. Gay Athletic Games I: Summer 1982. San Francisco: Gay Athletic Games, 1982. 64 pp. Brochure produced to accompany this historic international event,
originally to be called the Gay Olympic Games. See also: Paul Trefziger,
"The Gay Olympic Games," Advocate, no. 348 (August 5, 1982), 18-19; and Stephen Kulieke and Pat Califia, "In the
True 'Olympic' Tradition: The Gay Games," Advocate, no. 353 (October 14, 1982), 29-34. 2570. HICKS, BETTY. "Lesbian Athletes," Christopher Street, 4:3 (October-November 1979), 42-50. A major portion of lesbian athletes' energies must be directed toward
maintaining straight facades. See also Hicks: "The Billie Jean King
Affair," ibid. (July 1981), 13-17. 2571. KING, BILLIE JEAN, and FRANK DEFORD. Billie Jean. New York: Viking, 1982. 128 pp. A somewhat evasive account of the career and recent troubles of the
tennis ace whose lesbianism was revealed by her ex-lover Marilyn Barnett's
lawsuit. The revel- ation received much attention in the mainstream media
during 1981. 2565. KOPAY, DAVID, and PERRY D.
YOUNG. The David Kopay Story: An Extraordinary Self-Revelation. New York: Arbor House, 1977. 247 pp. Kopay describes his Catholic
childhood, his career as a professional football player, his unsuccessful
marriage, his acceptance of his homosexuality, and the consequences of his
public coming out. 2566.
LIEBER,
JILL, and JERRY KIRSHENBAUM. "Stormy Weather at South Carolina," Sports Illustrated, 56 (February 8, 1982), 30-37. A former basketball
coach is dragged out of the closet. 2567. LORGE, BARRY. "...Women's Tennis and the
Feminine Mystique," World Tennis (January 1982), 43-48, 73. Broader aspects of the role of women in tennis brought to light by the
attention bestowed on the Billie Jean King revelations. 2568. MITZEL, JOHN. Sports and the Macho Male. Boston: Fag Rag Books, 1976. 31 pp. Sharp attack on the cult of sports in contemporary America:
"Competitive team athletics are used by macho straight men to concentrate,
stereotype, and enforce their superficial heterosexuality." 2569. NAVRATILOVA, MARTINA, and GEORGE VECSEY. Martina. New York: Knopf, 1985. The star speaks frankly about the emergence of her lesbian feelings in
Czechoslovakia and her recent partnerships. 2570. SMITH, MICHAEL J. "The Double Life of a Gay
Dodger," Inside Sports (October 1982), 57-63. Sympathetic account of a black California athlete, who lived two lives
for six years, one as a professional ballplayer, the
other as a homosexual. 2571. SUAREZ-OROZCO, MARCELO. "A Study of Argentine
Soccer: The Dynamics of Its Fans and Their Folklore," Journal of Psychoanalytic
Anthropology, 5 (1982), 7-28. Suggests that the popularity of soccer among Argentine men is owing to
their need for a therapeutic outlet for taboo thoughts and fears of
homosexuality and emasculation. 2572. THOMPSON, MARK et al. "The Western Range,"
Advocate, no. 315 (April 16, 1981), Tll-14. On gay cowboys and
rodeos. D. ETIQUETTE AND SELF-HELP In keeping with the older stereotype of homosexual men as aping
feminine manners, they were thought to be particularly concerned with the
cultivation of refinements of etiquette—a notion that has been exploited by
Quentin Crisp, among others. Apart from this older notion of special
sensitivity, it has recently become clear that differences in lifestyle may
require alterations or special inflections of social prescriptions. Moreover,
the dispensing of useful advice regarding behavior to homosbxuals cannot
escape dealing with the consequences of internalized self-contempt. The newer
manuals therefore deal not solely with interpersonal concerns, but with the
cultivation of a respectful self-image. 2573. CLARK, DON. Loving Someone Gay. New York: New American Library, 1978. 274 pp. California clinical psychologist seeks to show "how gays can give
support to one another, shed guilt, form meaningful relationships, gain
self-respect, and grow stronger." The book also "helps families,
friends, and caring non- gays to confront their own fears and
prejudices." See also his: Living Gay (Millbrae,CA: Celestial
Arts, 1979; 192 pp.). 2574. CRISP, QUENTIN. How to Have a Lifestyle. New York: Methuen, 1979. 178 pp. A series of aphorisms and amusing
anecdotes, rather than strictly a guide. One of several short books by the
English eccentric extending material from his stage presentations. 2575. CURZON, DANIEL. The Joyful Blue Book of
Gracious Gay Etiquette. San Francisco: D. Brown Books, 1980. 115 pp. Campy and serious reflections by the noted gay novelist. See also:
Kevin Michaels, The Gay Book of Etiquette (New York: MLP Enterprises, 1982; 72 pp.). 2576. D' ARCANGELO, ANGELO (pseud, of Joseph Busch). The Homosexual Handbook. New York: Ophelia Press, 1968. 281 pp. Offered as "a clearly written guide to homosexual pleasure and
practice, full of 'helpful hints,' advice and diagrammatic
explanation." An amusingly outrageous work now redolent of the
atmosphere of the incipient post-Stonewall era. 2577. GITECK, LENNY. Cruising to Win: A Guide for Gay Men. San Francisco: Pnatera Press, 1982. 250 pp. An Advocate editor's breezy guide to making out and afterwards;
a kind of hard sell of the "you deserve to give yourself these
pleasures" genre. Some will find the mood of carefree enjoyment unsuited to the AIDS era. 2572. GOODSTEIN, DAVID. Superliving: You Can Have the
Life You Want! Englewood Cliffs, NJ: Prentice- Hall, 1983. 202 pp. Advice, esp. on financial independence, by the late tycoon and Advocate owner, with biographical asides. 2573. LOOVIS, DAVID. Gay Spirit: A Guide to
Becoming a Sensuous Homosexual. New York: Strawberry Hill/ Grove Press, 1974. 171
pp. Generally sensible advice about becoming more sensuous, as well as
dressing, cruising, sexual techniques, and keeping a lover. Although the
period flavor is there, this book has held up surprisingly well. 2589. MARSAN, HUGO. Un homme, un homme. Paris: Autre- ment, 1983. 192 pp. Readable, somewhat lightweight exposition of the middle- of-the-road
approach to gay life supported by the Gai pied editorial group. 2590. MUCHMORE, WES, and WILLIAM HANSON. Coming Out Right: A Handbook
for the Gay Male. Boston: Aly- son, 1982. 200 pp. A basic and usable work for the truly inexperienced: how to get up
your courage to enter a gay bar, how to converse, turn someone down
tactfully, etc. See also the sequel: Coming Along Fine: Today's Gay Man and His World (Boston: Alyson, 1986; 149 pp.). 2591.
SIEMS,
MARTIN. Coming Out: Hilfen zur homosexuel- len
Emanzipation. Reinbek bei Hamburg: Rowohlt, 1980. 237 pp. Advice by a homosexual therapist on self-acceptance, recommending yoga
exercises and encounter groups. In late Victorian times, as it came to be recognized that the mass of
the population was woefully ignorant of sexual techniques—including
contraceptive methods—the first cautious manuals began to appear. In the
1920s these works became more explicit and more freely available, but they
did not address the needs of homosexuals. To do so would have been regarded
as patently pornographic, and in fact the first attempts (not recorded here)
were illustrated exploitation brochures sold, as often as not, under the
counter. There is now a considerable range of genuine works in this field.
Also included here are some studies on the symbolism and physiology of the
penis, of particular (though not exclusive) interest to gay men. For medical
problems that may be associated with male homosexual behavior, see XXII.A-C. 2592. BARTON-JAY, DAVID. The Enema as an Erotic Art and Its History. Second ed. New York: The author, 1984. 329 pp. Illustrated
omnium gatherum compiled by an enthusiast. 2593. BERKELEY, BUD, and JOE TIFFENBACH. Foreskins Its Past, Its Present & ... Its Future? San Francisco: Bud Berkeley, 1983. 208 pp. Illustrated survey, including personal testimonies, intended for those
with an erotic or other preference for the uncut. For a strong condemnation
of the practice, with many individual testimonies, see Rosemary Romberg, Circumcisions The Painful
Dilemma (South
Hadley, MA: Bergin and Garvey, 1985; 435 pp.). 2594. DEMARTINO, MANFRED F. Human Autoerotic Practices. New York: Human Sciences Press, 1979. 378 pp. Reprints 21 papers on
masturbation in both men and women, by such writers as Alex Comfort, Havelock
Ellis, Helen Singer Kaplan, and Masters and Johnson, with concluding comment
by the editor. In contrast to earlier scares, these papers are generally
approving of the practice. Bibliography, pp. 361-66. See also Robert E. L.
Masters (ed.), Sexual Self-Stimulation (Los Angeles: Sherbourne, 1967; 352 pp.); and
Irving Sarnoff and Suzanne Sarnoff, Masturbation and Adult Sexuality (New York: Evans, 1985; 336 pp.). 2595. FOURNIER, R. A. The Intelligent Man's Guide to Handball (The Sexual
Sport). New York: The author, 1983. 69 pp. Advocacy pamphlet on anal penetration with the fist—now recognized to
be a very dangerous practice. See also Angus MacKenzie, "Lust with a
Very Proper Stranger," Body Politic, no. 82 (April 1982), 50-51; and J. Morin, below. 2596. FREEDMAN, MARK, and HARVEY
MAYES. Loving Mans A Photographic Guide to Gay Male Lovemaking. New York: Hark Publishing Co., 1976. 132 pp.
Clear and comprehensive account of positions and pleasures, illustrated with
photographs by Edd Dundas. 2597. LEGMAN, GERSHON. Oragenitalism. New York: Julian Press, 1969. 320 pp. Chapter 2, "Fellatio" (pp. 169-245), purports to incorporate
a "practical treatise" translated from a French manuscript, as the
author claims that his aversion to the subject prevented direct treatment. As
with all of Legman's work, there is some psychoanalytic overinterpreta-
tion. 2598. MORIN, JACK. Anal Pleasure and Healths Guide for Men and Women. Burlingame, CA: Down There Press, 1981. 241 pp. A well-balanced manual which stresses both the development of positive
feelings (escaping from inherited taboos) and safeguarding health. See also
Jeremy Agnew, "Some Anatomical and Physiological Aspects of Anal Sexual
Practices," JH, 12 (1986), 75-96. 2589. MORIN, JACK. Men Loving Themselves: Images
of Male Self-sexuality. Burlingame, CA: Down There Press, 1980. 104 pp. Self-oriented sensuousness as a mark of healthy self- acceptance . 2590. RABOCH, JAN. "Penis Size: An Important New
Study," Sexology (June 1970), 16-18. Summarizes the results of a study of more than 20,000 European males,
finding that homosexuals exceed heterosexuals by 10% in penis length and by
8% in breadth. 2591. RANCOUR-LEFERRIERE, DANIEL. "Some Semiotic
Aspects of the Human Penis," VS: Quaderni di studi semio- tici, no. 24 (September-December 1979), 37-82. Includes cross-cultural and visual material. The analysis shows the
impact of feminist discussions. See also his book: Signs of the Flesh: An Essay
on the Evolution of Hominid Sexuality (Berlin: Mouton/de Gruyter, 1985; 460 pp.). On a
more popular level, see: Mark Strage, The Durable Fig Leaf: A
Historical, Cultural, Medical, Social, Literary, and Iconographic Account of
Man's Relations with his Penis (New York: Morrow, 1980); and Kit Schwartz, The Male Member (New York: St. Martin's Press, 1985). 2592. SILVERSTEIN, CHARLES, and
EDMUND WHITE. The Joy of Gay Sex: An Intimate Guide for Gay Men to the Pleasures of
a Gay Lifestyle. New York: Crown, 1977. 239 pp. Based on the model established by the popular Alex Comfort books, this
work offers a positive and detailed account, illustrated with line drawings. 2593. WALKER, MITCHELL. Men Loving Men: A Gay Sex
Guide and Consciousness Book. San Francisco: Gay Sunshine Press, 1981. 160 pp. Intended to develop positive feelings, this book offers historical and
psychological asides, as well as the essential "how to"
information. Illustrated with photographs and drawings. Lesbian sexual behavior has been a source of some curiosity on the
part of men and nonlesbian women—much more so than gay-male behavior, which
can apparently be conceptualized by analogy with heterosexual copulation.
With the exception of the first two works (2604-05), the items listed below
are entirely written by lesbians and for lesbians. Although perceptions of
the use of dildos have been much exaggerated, there does seem to be a certain
popularity of vibrators among lesbians and single women. 2594. BLANK, JOANI. Good
Vibrations: The Complete Guide to Vibrators.
Burlingame, CA: Down There Press,
52 pp. Guide to selection
of vibrators and related appliances, as well as the sexual enhancement they afford. 2595. BOSTON WOMEN'S HEALTH COLLECTIVE. The New Our Bodies Ourselves. New York: Simon and Schuster, 1984.
647 pp. In this encyclopedic work on women's bodies, health, and social
concerns, see esp. pp. 141-61. 2606. CALIFIA, PAT. Sapphistry: The Book of Lesbian Sexuality. Weatherby Lake, MO: Naiad Press, 1980. 195 pp. Frank and explicit textbook on lesbian sexual behavior, with
illustrations by Tee Corinne. 2607. CEDAR and NELLY (eds.). A Woman's Touch: An Anthology of Lesbian Eroticism
and Sensuality for Women Only. Eugene, OR: Womanshare Books, 1979. 158 pp. Covers a variety of experience, including S & M. 2608. LOULAN, JOANN. Lesbian Sex. San Francisco: Spinsters Ink, 1985. 309 pp. Perhaps the most far-reaching book in this category. In addition to
the basic "how to" information, offers affirmative discussion of
such topics as sexual addiction, levels of desire, orgasmic problems,
fantasies, aids to improved communication, alcoholism and sobriety, aging,
and youth. 2609. NOMADIC SISTERS. Loving Women. Second ed. Son- ora, CA: Nomadic Sisters, 1976. 55
pp. A brief, evocative guide. 2610. SISLEY, EMILY, and BERTHA HARRIS. The Joy of Lesbian Sex. New York: Simon and Schuster, 1977. 223 pp. Ranges beyond sex to such topics as consciousness raising and the
upbringing of children. Sometimes speculative. The association of sex and pain in the form of master- slave
domination has been found in many historical cultures (e .g.,ancient Rome and imperial China). However, sadomasochism
in the sense of consensual play activity between two persons seems to have
been known only in Western countries for roughly the last two centuries. The
interpretation of the behavior remains controversial: some hold that by
dramatizing power relationships it has an emancipatory effect, while others
insist that it reinforces existing patterns of domination. The physiological
mechanisms that lie behind sadomasochistic experiences are as yet
imperfectly understood. 2606. BUHRICH, NEIL. "The Association of Erotic
Piercing with Homosexuality, Sadomasochism, Bondage, Fetishism, and
Tattoos," Archives of Sexual Behavior, 12 (1983), 167-71. Content analysis of the "dalliance columns" of a genital
piercing magazine (6 females and 154 males). 2607. CALIFIA, PAT. "Beyond Leather: Expanding the
Realm of the Senses to Latex," Advocate, no. 395 (May 29, 1984), 26-28, 52. Fantasy affinities
of rubber in relation to bondage. 2608. CALIFIA, PAT. "Unraveling the Sexual Fringe: A
Secret Side of Lesbian Sexuality," Advocate, no. 283 (December 27, 1979), 19-23. Holds that in a S & M context the
uniforms and roles and dialogue become a parody of authority, a challenge to
it, and a recognition of its secret sexual nature. See also her:
"Feminism and Sadomasochism," Heresies, no. 12 (1981), 30-34. 2609. ELLIS, H. HAVELOCK. "Love and Pain," in
his: Studies in the Psychology of Sex, vol. 3. Philadelphia: F. A. Davis, 1920, pp.
66-188. Perceiving a base in violent courtship among some animals, the noted
sex researcher presents cross-cultural data on love bites, flagellation,
genital appliances, and strangulation . 2610. GIBSON, IAN. The English Vice: Beating, Sex and Shame in
Victorian England and After. London: Duckworth, 1978. 364 pp. A detailed and in some respects standard work, reticent on
homosexuality (but see sections on schools and the Navy). 2611. GOSSELIN, CHRIS, and GLENN
WILSON. Sexual Variations: Fetishism, Sadomasochism, Transvestism. New York: Simon and Schuster, 1980. 191 pp. Popular effort at a
comparative approach. 2612. GREENE, GERALD, and CAROLINE GREENE. S/M: The Last Taboo. New York: Grove, 1974. 345 pp. Popular account with relatively little direct treatment of
homosexuality, 2613. GRUMLEY, MICHAEL. Hard Corps: Studies in Leather and Sadomasochism. Photographs by Ed Gallucci. New York: E. P. Dutton,
1977. 88 pp. Provocative photographs of both homosexual and heterosexual
sadomasochists, accompanied by brief text. 2614. HALBERSTADT-FREUD, H. Het sadomasochisme: Proust en Freud.
Amsterdam: Arbeiderpers, 1977. 370 pp. Psychoanalytic approach using literary materials. 2615. KAMEL, G. W. LEVI. "Leathersex: Meaningful
Aspects of Gay Sadomasochism," Deviant Behavior, 1 (1980), 171-91. Outlines a six-stage "career" model of S & M: disenchantment,
depression, curiosity, attraction, drifting, and limiting. 2616. LEE, JOHN A. "The Social Organization of Sexual
Risk," Alternative Lifestyles, 2 (1979), 69-100. Comprehensive examination of problems of entrusting one's body to the
control of others. 2617. LELY, GILBERT. The Marquis de Sade: A Biography. Translated by Alec Brown. New York: Grove, 1970. 464 pp. Includes reliable accounts of the bisexual French writer's (1740-1814)
own somewhat limited experiments in pain and sex. 2618. LINDEN, ROBIN RUTH (ed.). Against Sadomasochism: A
Radical Feminist Analysis. East Palo Alto, CA: Frog in the Well, 1982. 208 pp. Various papers, some subjective responses, others seeking to set forth
an ideological rationale for opposition to S & M. 2619. MAINS, GEOFF. Urban Originals: A Celebration
of Leather Sexuality. San Francisco: Gay Sunshine Press, 1984. 187 pp. Mingles advocacy, graphic scenes (San Francisco), and some new
speculations about biological release mechanisms. 2620. RUBIN, GAYLE. "The Leather Menace," Body Politic, no. 82 (April 1982), 33-35. Cautions against restrictivist "good girl" feminism,
asserting that there is much to be learned from sexual outlaws. 2621. SAMOIS COLLECTIVE. Coming to Power: Writings and Graphics on Lesbian
S/M. Boston: Alyson, 1981. 240 pp. Collection of many short pieces, the longest being Pat Califia's
account of the creation of a lesbian S and M community in the San Francisco Bay area, over strong
objections from "politically correct" feminists. 2622. SCHAD-SOMERS, SUZANNE P. Sadomasochism. New York: Human Sciences Press, 1982. 300 pp. Holds that S and M is "an adaptive response to the sadism of the
parent." Psychoanalytically prescriptive point of view. 2623. SCHRIM, JANICE. "S/M for Feminists," Gay Community News, 8:41 (May 9, 1981), 8-9, 13. Holds that the anti-S & M campaign is at least in part an attempt
to keep the women's movement "respectable." Anti-S & M
feminists endanger the very existence of the women's movement through their
lack of regard for the principles of civil liberties: they covertly cherish
censorship. 2624. SCOVILLE, JOHN W. Sexual Domination Today. New York: Irvington Press, 1985. 243 pp. Overview, from a social-science
point of view, of S & M, mainly gay male. 2625. SPENGLER, ANDREAS. "Manifest Sadomasochism of
Males: Results of an Empirical Study," Archives of Sexual Behavior, 6 (1977), 441-56. Comparative study based on responses from 245 West German men, presenting conclusions with respect to the invisibility of the deviant behavior, seeking of partners, participation in the subculture, realization of desires, self— acceptance, preferences for S & M roles and practices, masturbation, and coming out. See also his book: Sado- masochisten und ihre Subkulturen. (Frankfurt am Main: Campus Verlag, 1979). 2626.
STEKEL,
WILHELM. Sadism and Sadomasochism: The Psychology of Hatred
and Cruelty. Translated by Louise Brink. New York: Livewright, 1955. 2 vols. Popular presentation by one of Freud's more simplistic followers, with
many case histories in the venerable Krafft-Ebing manner. 2627. TOWNSEND, LARRY. The Leatherman's Handbook II. New York: Modernismo Publications, 1983. 333 pp. Like the original
work (The Leatherman's Handbook. New York: The Other Traveler, 1972; 319 pp.)—of
which this is both a sequel and a revision—this book offers information and
personal comment (generally sound), interspersed with titillating vignettes
of the various "scenes." 2628. WEINBERG, THOMAS S. "Sadism and Masochism:
Sociological Perspectives," Bulletin of the American Academy of Psychiatry and
the Law, 6 (1978), 284-95. Attempts to apply Irving Goffman's frame analysis to the phenomenon.
See also Weinberg and Gerhard Falk, "The Social Organization of Sadism
and Masochism," Deviant Behavior, 1 (1980), 379-93. 2634. WEINBERG, THOMAS S., and G. W. LEVI KAMEL (eds.). S and M: Studies in Sadomasochism. Buffalo: Prometheus Books, 1983. 211 pp. Some
early views (Krafft-Ebing, Havelock Ellis, etc.), followed by recent work in
a "social dramaturgy" vein. Includes some heterosexual material,
though the bulk of the work is directly relevant. X. ECONOMICS A. ECONOMICS, BUSINESS, AND LABOR Conditions in business firms, whether large or small, are not as a
rule conducive to "coming out" on the part of gays and lesbians.
The stereotypical images of the gay hairdresser or lesbian truckdriver serve
to mask the fact that homosexuals are found in every profession. Although
data are lacking, it seems likely that homosexuals are nonetheless more
strongly represented in some job areas than in others. A different phenomenon
is the appearance of businesses which are not sexually related, but which
cater to gays and lesbians (banks, legitimate bookstores, guesthouses, etc.).
These are listed in various directories, including specialized telephone
books. See also "Travel," V.A-B, "Lifestyles," IX.A-B,
and "Discrimination," XII.C. 2635. APRIL, WAYNE. "Business Boom of Gay Savings and
Loan," New York Native (December 6, 1982), 24-25. On a trend in banking in New York City and San Francisco. See also
George Heymont, "There's Nothing Queer about a $3 Bill: The Gay Business
Community Flexes Its Muscle," New York Native (March 1, 1982), 11-13. 2636. CARRIGAN, TIM, and JOHN LEE. "Male Homosexuals
and the Capitalist Market," Gay Changes (Australia), 2:4 (1979), 39-42. Male homosexual subculture is now a multimillion-dollar industry
affecting not only the social lives of many male homosexuals but also their
politics. 2637. ESCOFFIER, JEFFREY. "Stigmas, Work Environment,
and Economic Discrimination against Homosexuals," Homosexual Counseling Journal, 2 (1975), 8-17. Workplace problems occasioned by overt and covert discrimination. 2638. ESKOW, JOHN. "Mirage on the Mountain," New Times, 10 (March 6, 1978), 44-46. On a motel for
homosexuals. 2639. FAIN, NATHAN, and BRANDON JUDELL. "The Gay
Market: A Sign of Progress?" Advocate, no. 352 (October 14, 1982), 37-42. Assesses recent
developments. 2640. FIELDS, STEVE. "Gay Business Groups Are
Growing," Advocate, no. 236 (March 8, 1978), 17-18. The trend toward
forming business associations. 2641. FLOWER, JOE. "Gays in Business: The Prejudice
and the Power," San Francisco Magazine, 22:9 (September 1980), 41-45. The view from San Francisco, where matters are less rosy than they
might seem. 2642. "Fundraising for the Gay Community," Advocate,
no. 346 (July 8,
1982), 21-23. Excerpts from a report prepared and published by San Francisco Gay
Care. Of 55 nonprofit gay organizations in San Francisco, the 1981
identifiable expenditure easily exceeds $2,000,000. The organizations are
much stronger, have larger programs, better publicity and more volunteer
workers. 2643. HOLLEY, STEVE. "Gay and Lesbian Lifestyles
Expo: A Different Kind of Trade Show," Advocate, no. 308 (December 1980), 14-25, 30. Expo (December 12-14, 1980) was organized to provide the business
community direct sales contact with the Los Angeles gay population amid such
attractions as live entertainment, dancing, fashion shows, physical fitness
exhibitions, cooking and craft demonstrations, contests, and prize drawings. 2644. "The Homosexual Economy," Economist (January 23, 1982), 73-74. On surveys of gay lifestyles by Gay Nevs (UK) and The Advocate (US). This periodical has published a number of
short articles on the gay and lesbian market. 2645. JACOBS, BRUCE A. "Homosexuals in
Management," Industry Week, 202 (July 23, 1979), 52-59. A hidden phenomenon attracts attention in the mainstream media. 2646. MCCAGHY, CHARLES H., and JAMES K. SKIPPER, JR.
"Lesbian Behavior as an Adaptation to the Occupation of
Stripping," Social Problems, 17 (1969), 262-70. In stripping the adaptation appears to be related to the following
conditions: (a) isolation from affective social relationships; (b) stunted
relationships with men; (c) an opportunity structure allowing for a wide
range of sexual behavior. 2647. MILLER, ALAN V. Homosexuality and Employment:
A Selected Bibliography. Toronto: Ontario Ministry of Labour, 1978. Ill pp. A wide-ranging
list, unannotated. 2648. RUSSO, VITO. "When It Comes to Gay Money Gay
Lib Takes Care of the Pennies; Will Big Business Take Care of the
Pounds?" Gay News, no. 212 (April 1981), 16-17. An independent
study has shown that gays control more than 19% of the spendable income in the United States. Yet gay businesses
seem unable to tap more than a small portion of this. 2649. SCHNEIDER, BETH. "Peril and Promise: Lesbians'
Workplace Participation," in: Trudy Darty and Sandee Potter (eds.), Women-Identified Women. Palo Alto, CA: Mayfield, 1984, pp. 211-30. Analyzes a study of 228 lesbian workers with respect to making
friends; finding a partner; coming out; and being harassed. See also her:
"Consciousness about Sexual Harassment among Heterosexual and Lesbian
Women Workers," Journal of Social Issues, 38 (December 1982), 75-97. 2650. SCHROEDEL, JEAN REITH. Alone in the Crowd: Women in
the Trades Tell Their Story. Philadelphia: Temple University Press, 1985. Personal accounts of 25 women. They indicate that lesbians in
nontraditional jobs can experience a degree of isolation, alienation, and
loneliness not felt by their heterosexual co-workers. 2651. SIMONOT, PHILIPPE. Le sexe et l'économie, ou la monnaie des sentiments. Paris: Jean-Claude Lattes, 1985. 249 pp. Somewhat impressionistic exploration of the connections between sex and economy—including the venerable idea that sperm is a
kind of capital. 2652. SKIDELSKY, ROBERT. John Maynard Keynes: I. Hopes
Betrayed, 1883-1920. New York: Viking, 1986. 447 pp. In this first volume of the major biography of the most influential
economist of the 20th century, his early homosexual affairs are frankly
discussed. The author avoids making simplistic connections between his
sexuality and his innovative theories. See also Charles H. Hession, John Maynard Keynes: A Personal
Biography (New York: Mac- millan, 1984; 400 pp.). 2653. STABINER, KAREN. "Tapping the Homosexual
Market," New York Times Magazine (May 2, 1982), 34, 36, 74, 78, 80-82, 84-85. "For the first time, advertisers are vying for homosexuals'
buying power, though they worry about offending mainstream consumers. ... The
homosexual community asks if economic acceptance is true acceptance." 2654. WEINSTEIN, JESS. "Four Lies about Gay Male
Fashion: Hit 'Em with Your Pocketbook, Stanley," Village Voice (April 8-14, 1981), 70-74. Illusions and
realities of fashion marketing. 2655. WESTON, KATHLEEN M., and LISS B. ROFEL. "Sexuality, Class and Conflict in a Lesbian
Workplace," Signs, 9 (1984), 623-46. Issues involved in a workers' strike at a lesbian auto- repair shop
that employed ten self-identified lesbians, including the two owners. This
study shows flaws in a number of concepts: lesbian-feminist assumptions of
solidarity, liberal analysis downplaying social-structure strains, and the
heterosexual bias of socialist and socialist-feminist approaches. 2656. WHITAM, FREDERICK L., and MARY JO DIZON. "Occupational
Choice and Sexual Orientation," International Review of Modern Sociology, 9 (1979), 137-49. Comparison of occupational
choices of male homosexuals in the United States and Brazil shows a strong
interest in entertainment in both societies. This congruence calls into
question prevailing notions of the shaping of occupational choice by
labeling and description. XI. EDUCATION The once-dominant pattern of segregation of pupils by gender, particularly in early
adolescence, inevitably produced a tendency to same-sex eroticization, which
perhaps reached its height in the English public school tradition. In the—now
typical — coeducational schools, the emergence of sexual feelings during the school
years has stimulated interest in sex education, though such programs remain
controversial in some quarters, and the attention accorded homosexual
behavior within them is slight. In the late 1960s gay student organizations
emerged on North American college campuses .and have since spread elsewhere,
chiefly in the English-speaking world. On the opinions of college students in
general regarding sexual behavior, see I.J. 2657. BLAINE, GRAHAM B., and CHARLES C. MCARTHUR. Emotional Problems of Students. Second ed. New York: Appleton-Century-Crofts, 1971.
388 pp. Traditional approach; see Chapter 6, "Basic Character Disorders
and Homosexuality" (pp. 94-108). 2658. BLAIR, RALPH. Student Personnel Services and Homosexuality: A
National Review of Provisions and Opinions of Deans of Students, Directors of
Counseling, and Homosexual College Students. New York: National Task Force
on Student Personnel Services and Homosexuality, 1972. 7 pp. This brochure, incorporating material from Blair's dissertation
(Ed.D., Pennsylvania State University, 1971), is no. 2 of the Otherwise
Monograph Series (edited by Blair), which contains several items of
educational interest, as does the Homosexual Counseling Journal, also edited by Blair. 2659. BRAATEN, LEIF JOHAN, and C. DOUGLAS DARLING.
"Overt and Covert Homosexual Problems among Male College Students," Genetic Psychology Monographs,
71:2 (1965),
269-310. Presents some methodologically dubious procedures for detecting
homosexual students. Their "problems" are assessed only in the
perspective of departure from the heterosexual norm. 2660. CHANDOS, JOHN. Boys Together: English Public Schools, 1800-1864. New Haven: Yale University Press, 1984. 412 pp.
Using journals, letters, and autobiographies of the time, the author reconstructs life in the English elite
boarding schools in the period before the reform of 1862-64. See Chapter 14,
"A Dream Hovering" (pp. 284-319). 2661. CHANG, CHWEE LYE. "Adolescent Homosexual Behavior
and the Health Educator," Journal of School Health, 50 (1980), 517-21. Reflects perspectives of high school professionals and bureaucrats. 2662. CORBETT, SHERRY L., et al. "Tolerance as a Correlate of Experience with
Stigma: The Case of the Homosexual," JH, 3 (1977), 3-13. Findings suggest that although gay students expressed a significantly
higher amount of tolerance for other unconventional groups, they appeared to
have reservations in terms of total personal acceptance. 2663. CREW, LOUIE. "Before Emancipation: Gay Persons
as Viewed by Chairpersons of English," in: Crew (ed.), The Gay Academic. Palm Springs, CA: ETC, 1978, 3-48. Evaluation of a questionnaire mailed to 893 Chairpersons showed the
persistence of much antihomosexual sentiment. See also: Crew and Karen
Keener, "Homophobia in the Academy: A Report of the Committee on
Gay/Lesbian Concerns," College English, 43 (1981), 77-84. 2664. CULLINAN, ROBERT G. "'Gay' Identity Emerges on
Campus Amidst a Sea of Prejudice," National Association of
Student Personnel Administrators Journal, 10 (1973), 344-77. An early report reflecting the new visibility of gay groups on campus. 2665. DUBERMAN, MARTIN. Black Mountain: An Exploration in Community. New York: Dutton, 1972. 578 pp. This detailed study
of the history of Black Mountain College in North Carolina shows that,
despite the school's image as a progressive, proto-counterculture
institution, authorities there could be as homophobic as anywhere else, and
were perhaps more than most. 2666. EIGUER, ALBERT. "Falstaff et le prince Henry ou l'homosexualité initiatique," Etudes psychothérapeutiques, 13 (1982),
281-89. On the latent homosexual component in student-teacher and
student-prince relationships. 2667. GATHORNE-HARDY, JONATHAN. The Old School Tie: The Phenomenon of the English
Public School. New York: Viking, 1978. 480 pp. Anecdotal, but serious study of the
English elite schools from their Tudor beginnings to the present. See pp. 38,
45, 80-82, 159-80, 214-15, 301, 363-64, 406. 2668. GIBBS, ANNETTE. "Colleges and Gay Student Organizations:
An Update," NASPA Journal, 22 (Summer 1984), 38-41. After fifteen sometimes turbulent years, they seem to be here to stay. 2669. GREENBERG, JEROLD S. "A Study of Personality
Change Associated with the Conduction of a High School Unit on
Homosexuality," Journal of School Health, 45 (1975), 394-98. Comparison of students who took a homosexuality unit with a control
group who did not suggests that the former had become somewhat more
accepting, though this was hard to measure. 2670. HONEY, JOHN RAYMOND DE SYMONS. Tom Brown's Universe: The Development of the
English Public School in the nineteenth Century. New York: Quadrangle, 1977.
416 pp. While this book offers a good picture of the setting in which
homosexuality developed in the schools in their heyday, it does little to
explore the underlying psychology; see pp. 24, 178-94, 201-02, 209, 378-81. 2671. KENDALL, ELAINE. Peculiar Institutions: An Informal History of the
Seven Sisters Colleges. New York: Putnam's, 1976. 272 pp. In this account of the Northeast's elite
women's colleges, see Chapter 13, "Strong Characters." 2672. KIRKENDALL, LESTER ALLEN. Sex Education as Human
Relations. New York: Inor, 1950. 351 pp. This study by a pioneer in the promotion of more enlightened
attitudes to sexuality in education contains a number of references to
homosexuality. 2673.
KLESZCZ, ANNETTE, and HOLGER NEUHAUS.
Wie antihomosexuell sind unsere Sexualkundebücher? Die Darstellung des
Themas "Homosexualität" in Schriften zur Sexualerziehung
1969-1979. Münster in Westfalen: Universität
Münster Kopiedruck, 1980. 122 pp. Study of the treatment of homosexuality in German sex education
textbooks, showing transmission of negative attitudes. 2674. KRIEGMAN, GEORGE. "Homosexuality and the Educator," Journal of School Health, 39 (1969), 305-11. Traditional approach: regards the educator's role as one of prevention
and cure. 2675. LEHMANN, J. LEE (ed.). Gays on Campus. Washington, DC: National Students Association,
1975. 88 pp. Anthology reflecting the rapid growth of gay student groups and sense
of identity, with list of organizations and gay-studies syllabi. 2676. LÉVY, J. M. Maîtres et
élèves: essai de psychopédagogie affective. Paris: Vrin, 1935. In this study of the bonds between teachers and students, see "Facteurs erotiques" (pp. 156-69). See also: René Félix Allendy and H. Lobstein, Le problème sexuel à l'école. (Paris: Fernand Aubier, 1938; 253 pp.). 2677. MCDANIEL, JUDITH, et al. "We Were Fired: Lesbian Experiences in
Academe," Sinister Wisdom, 20 (Spring 1982), 30-43. Accounts of a fate that was all too common among those who came out in
the heady days of gay/lesbian liberation. 2678. MANFORD, MORTY. "Gay Columbia: Yesterday and
Today: A Study of Institutional Alienation," Gai Saber, 1:3/4 (Summer 1978), 263-67. Reflections by a gay activist on student days (early 1970s) in the Ivy
League, emphasizing institutional insensitivity. 2679. MARTIN, ROBERT. "The Student Homophile League:
Founder's Retrospect," Gay Books Bulletin, 9 (1983), 30-33. Recollections of the formation of the first gay student group in the
United States—at Columbia University in New York in April 1967. 2680. MELIKIAN, LEVON H., and E. TERRY PROTHRO. "Sexual Behavior of University Students in the
Arab Near East," Journal of Abnormal and Social Psychology, 49 (1954), 59-64. Study of 113 Beirut students showed that more Arab than American
students had positive histories of both homosexual and heterosexual
intercourse. See also Melikian, "Social Change and Sexual Behavior of
Arab University Students," Journal of Social Psychology, 73 (1967), 169-75. 2681. MORIN, STEPHEN F. "Educational Programs as a
Means of Changing Attitudes toward Gay People," Homosexual Counseling
Journal, 1 (1974) , 160-65. Improved attitudes were found in a group of advanced college students
after exposure to gay speakers. 2682. NAVA, MICA. "Everybody's Views Were Just Broadened:
A Girls' Project and Some Responses to Lesbianism," Feminist Review, 10 (Spring 1982), 37-60. Reports on a project with some thirty teenage girls. 2683. NEWTON, DAVID E. "Representations of
Homosexuality in Health Science Textbooks," JH, 4 (1979), 247-54. A careful analysis of strengths and weaknesses. See also his: "A
Note on the Treatment of Homosexuality in Sex Education Classes in the Secondary Schools, JH, 8 (1982), 97-99. 2684. NEWTON, DAVID E., and STEPHEN J. RISCH.
"Homosexuality and Education: A Review of the Issue," High School Journal, 64 (1981), 191-202. A clear account, refuting some false perceptions. 2685. NUEHRING, ELANE M., et al. "The Gay College Student:
Perspectives for Mental Health Professionals," Counseling Psychologist, 4:4 (1974), 64-72. Asserts that the "illness" model is not appropriate in
dealing with gay clients. Their primary problem is that of any other
minority: discrimination. 2686. SEGAL, JAY. The Sex Lives of College Students. New York: Dell, 1984. Popular presentation claiming to distill some
24,000 "sexual autobiographies." 2687. SERDAHELY, WILLIAM, and GEORGIA Z. ZIEMBA.
"Changing Homophobic Attitudes through College Sexuality
Education," JH, 10 (1984), 109-16. Results of a controlled experiment show some improvement in attitudes. 2688. SHIVELY, MICHAEL, and JOHN P. DE CECCO. "Sexual
Orientation Survey of Students on the San Francisco State University
Campus," JH, 4 (1978), 29-39. Analysis of questionnaires of 1039 students showed that significantly
more homosexual students majored in subjects emphasizing
"divergent" thinking. 2689. SNYDER, SUSAN UNTENER, and SOL GORDON. Parents as Sexuality Educators: An Annotated Print
and Audiovisual Bibliography for Professionals and Parents (1970-1984). Phoenix: Oryx
Press, 1984. 212 pp. Lists 2531 items, including periodicals, audiovisual materials,
reading lists and Spanish-language books. See Subject Index:
"Homosexuality" and "Lesbianism." 2690. THOMPSON, GEORGE H., and WILLIAM R. FISHBURN. "Attitudes
toward Homosexuality Among Graduate Counseling Students," Counselor Education and
Supervision, 17 (1977), 121-30. Finds that student counselors feel ill-prepared to deal with
homosexual clients. 2691. VICINUS, MARTHA. "Distance and Desire: English
Boarding-School Friendships," Signs, 9 (1984), 600-22. Uses literary sources to try to reconstruct "raves"
(crushes) in boarding schools, ca. 1870-1930, when women were being prepared
to enter public life. 2692. VISSER, R. S. "De 16PF-scores van een groep homofiele studentien," Nederlands Tijdschrift ?oor de Psychologie en haar Grensgebieden, 26 (1971), 159-68. In this study of male university and high school students, the
homosexuals (n = 41) exceeded the controls in self- confidence, fickleness,
independence, impatience, indolence, nonconformity, eccentricity,
introversion, sensitivity, and emotionality. 2693. WEITZ, ROSE. "From the Closet to the Classroom:
Homosexuality in Abnormal Psychology and Sociology of Deviance
Textbooks," Deviant Behavior, 3 (1982), 385-98. In an analysis of 22 texts, the sociology books that discuss
homosexuality tend to be more accurate. Psychology texts published since 1974
are more accurate and sympathetic than the older ones. 2694.
WYNEKEN, GUSTAV ADOLPH.
Eros. Lauenberg: Saal, 1921. 72 pp. Programmatic Statement by a controversial German educator on the role of homerotic
attraction in teaching. On Wyneken see:
Erich Ebermayer, Gustav Wyneken:
Chronik einer grossen Freundschaft. (Frankfurt am Main: Dipa-Ver- lag, 1969; 146 pp.). B. TEACHERS The ancient Greeks held that homosexual feelings, far from being a
defect, could be an asset to a teacher in fostering a special sensitivity to
students' needs. However, this may be, modern
associations of gay and lesbian teachers have essentially the character of
trade unions, designed to protect the interests of members from discrimination.
For legal aspects of employment, see XX.J. 2695. DRESSLER, JOSHUA. "Gay Teachers: A Disesteemed
Minority in an Overly Esteemed Profession," Rutgers/Camden Law Journal, 9
(1978), 399-345 A spirited defense. See also his: "Study of Law Student Attitudes
regarding the Rights of Gay People to Be Teachers," JH, 4 (1979), 315-29. 2696. HECHINGER, GRACE, and FRED M. HECHINGER. "Should Homosexuals Be Allowed to
Teach?" McCall's (March 1978), 100, 160, 162-64. "No rational obstacle should stand in the way of letting
homosexuals become and remain teachers, subject to those controls and
standards of behavior that the profession applies to all teachers." See
also Steven W. Hendryx, "In Defense of the Homosexual Teacher," Viewpoints in Teaching and Learning, 56 (Fall 1980), 74-84. 2684. KANTROWITZ, ARNIE. Under the Rainbow: Growing Up Gay. New York: William Morrow, 1977. 255 pp. Autobiographical account of
English professor at Staten Island College (CUNY), stressing his gay
activism. See also his: "Teachers: The Human Cost of Coming Out," Advocate, no. 277 (October 4, 1979), 22-23. 2685. NATIONAL COUNCIL FOR CIVIL LIBERTIES. Homosexuality and the Teaching
Profession. London: NCCL, 1975. Presents the replies of forty-seven local education authorities
canvased in England and Wales. Two-thirds were classified as
"unbigoted," though some hedged. 2686. ROBINSON, PAUL. "In the First Person—Dear Paul:
An Exchange between Teacher and Student," Salmagundi, no. 58/59 (1982), 25-41. Subjective account of the mutual self-revelation of a California
university professor and his student. 2687. ROFES, ERIC. Socrates, Plato and Guys Like Me: Confessions of a Gay Schoolteacher. Boston: Alyson, 1985. 163 pp. Candid account of the
entry-level experiences of an openly gay teacher in suburban Massachusetts,
September 1976-June 1978. 2688. RUBIN, MARC. "Gay Teachers Association—New York
City," Gai Saber, 1 (1977), 89-92. Founder's account of the formation of the Gay Teachers Association as
a result of a struggle with the United Federation of Teachers (1974). 2689. WARBURTON, JOHN. Open and Positive. London: Gay Teachers Group, 1978. London teacher dismissed because he refused to sign a document saying
that he would not discuss homosexuality with pupils. 2690. WARD, MICHAEL, and MARK FREEMAN. "Defending Gay
Rights: The Campaign against the Briggs Amendment," Radical America, 13:4 (1979), 11-26. On the successful campaign in November 1978 against the Briggs
Amendment, which would have barred homosexual teachers from
employment. 2703A. WELLS, ANNA M. Miss Marks and Miss Woolley. Boston: Houghton Mifflin, 1978. 268 pp. Account of
the life-long love of Mary Woolley, president of Mount Holyoke College, and
Jeanette Marks, a professor there. C. GAY AND LESBIAN STUDIES In Germany the early homosexual-rights movement recognized the need
for primary research into the history and nature of homosexual behavior and
its situation in the larger society (see I.B). For the most part this work,
which often produced impressive results, was conducted by private scholars,
unsupported by academic appointments and largely ignored by the tenants of
professorial chairs. In contrast to the institutional good fortune of women's
studies, efforts to establish gay studies in universities have borne little
fruit thus far (except in the Netherlands). Faute de mieux, it appears that
the tradition of the private scholar is destined to remain dominant. 2691. ALTMAN, DENNIS. "Gay Studies and the Quest for
Academic Legitimacy," Advocate, no. 378 (October 13, 1983), 32-34. Contrasts the merits of separate courses on gay studies vs.
integrating the material into "mainstream" courses. 2692. BROGAN, JAMES E. "Teaching Gay Literature in
San Francisco," in: Louie Crew (ed.), The Gay Academic. Palm Springs, Ca; ETC, 1978, pp. 152-63. Recounts personal experiences in teaching courses in gay, lesbian, and
bisexual literature at San Francisco State College over a number of years.
See also Brogan's memoir: Jack and Jim: A Personal Journal of the '70s. (Bo- linas, CA: Equanimity Press, 1982; 174 pp.). 2693. FOLLETT, RICHARD J. "Censors in Our
Midst," College English, 43 (1981), 690-93. Informed comment on problems of teaching gay literature. See also his:
"Is It Dishonest of English Teachers to Ignore the Homosexuality of
Literary Figures Whose Works They Teach?" English Journal, 71 (April 1982), 18-21. 2694. GAY ACADEMIC UNION. The Universities and the Gay Experience:
Proceedings of the Conference Sponsored by the Women and Hen of the Gay
Academic Union, November 23 and 24, 1973. New York: Gay Academic Union,
1974. 105 pp. Texts from some of the papers and addresses at the historic first GAU
Conference, held at John Jay College of Criminal Justice (CUNY), New York
City. Although a variety of points of view are represented, many contributions
preserve a strong period flavor of the counterculture. 2695. GOMEZ, JOSE. Demystifying Homosexuality: A
Teaching Guide. New York: Irvington, 1984. 175 pp. Compilation sponsored by the Human Rights Foundation, affil iated with
the National Gay Task Force. Includes lesson plans and reading lists, 2696. GORDON, LENORE (ed). "Homophobia and
Education," Interracial Books for Children, 14:3/4 (1983). 40 pp. (special issue) Offers a variety of short articles, with
recommended readings. 2697. MOHR, RICHARD C. "Gay Studies in the Big Ten: A
Survivor's Manual," Teaching Philosophy, 7:2 (1984), 97-108. Lively, revealing account of experiences in getting a philosophy
course off the ground at the University of Illinois, Urbana. 2698. NORTON, RICTOR. "Homosexual Literary Tradition:
Course Outline and Objectives," College English, 35 (1974), 674-78. Detailed outline broken up into course units, which occasioned some
controversy. See critique by Thomas K. Gordon, ibid.,
36 (1974), 503-04. 2699. Radical Teacher, no. 24 (Fall 1983). [Gay Studies issue.] Includes
reflections by Dan Allen, Margaret Cruikshank, and others. 2700. SCHREIBER, RON. "Giving a Gay Course," College English, 36 (1974), 316-23. Personal report by a poet and literary scholar. 2701. SMITH, BARBARA (ed.). "Sample Syllabi for
Courses on Lesbianism," in: Margaret Cruikshank (ed.), Lesbian Studies. Old Westbury, NY: Feminist Press, 1982, pp. 217-35. Syllabi by nine scholars, which can be used as models for courses.
This volume contains much other relevant material, including personal
experiences and a detailed bibliography, pp. 239-73. Other syllabi, including
gay- male ones, appear in J. Lee Lehman (ed.), Gays on Campus (Washington, DC: National Students Association,
1975), pp. 59-66. XII. POLITICS Until recently societal sanctions have dictated that most homosexuals
live in a state of clandestinity and invisibility ("the closet").
The perceived need for concealment has deprived them of the opportunity of
intervening openly in politics on their own behalf. A few courageous heterosexuals
have spoken out for them. A different aspect of politics is reflected by
individual homosexuals in the diplomatic corps and in espionage and kindred
areas of the intelligence community. 2702. ASPREY, ROBERT B. The Panther's Feast. New York: Putnam, 1959. 317 pp. Lightly fictionalized biography of Alfred Redl, the Austrian
intelligence officer who was a double agent and a homosexual in the years
before World War I. For new data on the Redl affair, see Georg Markus, Der Fall Redl: Mit
unveröffentlichten Geheimdokumenten zur folgenschwersten Spionage-Affaire
des Jahrhundterts (Vienna: Amalthea, 1984; 286 pp.). 2703. BAMFORD, JAMES. The Puzzle Palace: A Report on
America's Most Secret Agency. Boston: Houghton Mifflin, 1982. 465 pp. Account of the U.S. National Security Agency, including queer-baiting
episodes in 1960 and 1980. 2704. BAUMAN, ROBERT. The Gentleman from Maryland: The Conscience of a
Gay Conservative. New York: Arbor House, 1986. 276 pp. The ex-Republican congressman retraces his years in the as a closet
gay and a closet alcoholic, culminating in his public exposure. More briefly,
he recounts his frustrations in seeking help after his being "forced
out" (rather than coming out). 2705. BEBEL, AUGUST. "The Man Who Spoke Out: 80th
Anniversary of a Landmark in Gay Rights," Gay News (London), no. 136 (February 1978), 18. Translated excerpts—with commentary by John Lauritsen—of a speech by
the Social Democratic leader (1840-1913) in the German Parliament, January
13, 1898. For the original text, see: JfsZ 1 (1899), 272-80. 2706. BERNSTEIN, EDUARD. Bernstein on Homosexuality: Articles
from "Die neue Zeit," 1895 and 1898. Translated by Angela Clifford. Belfast: Athol
Books, 1977. 40 pp. The German Social Democrat's (1850-1932) reflections on the situation
of homosexuals, occasioned by the trials of Oscar Wilde. 2709. BOYLE, ANDREW. The Fourth Man: The Definitive Account of Kim
Philby, Guy Burgess, and Donald Maclean, and Who Recruted Them to Spy for
Russia. New York: Dial Press, 1979. 504 pp. Detailed account of a group of
double agents, three of whom were homosexual. The book explores the participation
of art historian (Sir) Anthony Blunt. (Published in Britain as: The Climate of Treason: Five
Who Spied for Russia.) See also: Bruce Page et al., The Philby Conspiracy (New York; Ballantine Books, 1981; 295 pp.); Andrew
Sinclair, The Red and the Blue: Intelligence,Treason,
and the Universities (London: Weidenfeld and Nicol- son, 1986; 175 pp.); and Douglas
Sutherland, The Great Betrayal (New York: Penguin, 1980; 174). 2710. BRANCH, TAYLOR. "Closets of Power," Harpers, 265 [no. 1589] (October 1982), 34-50. Profile of Dan Bradley, former head of the Legal Services Corporation
in Washington, combining his personal story with observations on homosexuals
in politics. 2711. BUCKLEY, WILLIAM F., JR. Right Reason. New York: Doubleday, 1985. 454 pp. Selections of newspaper columns by the Tory writer and publisher of
the Hational Review, including some diatribes against homosexuals. 2712. BUSH, LARRY. "The Anatomy of a Scandal: Who
Created It: For What Purpose?" Advocate, no. 353 (October 14, 1982), 21-25. On the bizarre case of a Congressional page who first claimed to have
had sex with several Congressmen, and then admitted that he had been lying. 2713. BUSH, LARRY. "Has the FBI Been in Your Closet?
Investigation of Gay People Confirmed," Advocate, no. 346 (July 8, 1982), 16-20. Information about 1970s
surveillance obtained through the Freedom of Information Act. See also: Sasha
Gregory-Lewis, "Secret Investigation of Gay People: A Gay Bugaboo or a
Reality?" Advocate, no. 199 (September 23, 1976), 6-9; as well as ibid.,
no. 210 (February 23, 1977), 12-15; no. 211 (March 9, 1977), 13-16+; no. 215
(May 4, 1977), 7-9; and no. 22 (August 24, 1977), 36-38. 2714. BUSH, LARRY. "Homosexuality and the New
Right," Village Voice (April 20, 1982), 1, 16, 18. Conservative leader Terry Dolan, rumored to be gay, opposes verbal
attacks and discrimination against homosexuals by his allies. See also Bush:
"New Right Leader Terry Dolan," Advocate, no. 340 (April 15, 1982), 15-17; and "Naming Gay Names: Larry Bush on the Ethics
of Dis- closure," Village Voice (April 27, 1982), 22, 24-25. 2715. BUSH, LARRY, and RICHARD GOLDSTEIN. "Where Have
All the Liberals Gone?" Advocate, no. 321 (July 9, 1981), 17-19. Warns against anti-gay coalition building by the New Right. Liberals
and moderates should be made to realize that faggots are being used to fuel a
fire that may engulf them as well. (Reprint of an article, "The
Anti-Gay Backlash," published in The Village Voice, April 8-14, 1981). 2716. CARPENTER, TERESA. "From Heroism to Madness:
The Odyssey of the Man Who Shot A1 Lowenstein," Village Voice (May 13-19, 1981), 3, 20-24. This Pulitzer Prize winning story hints that the assassin of the
former New York congressman had been entangled in a homosexual affair with
his victim. Subsequently, Low- enstein's closeted homosexual side has been
much discussed—e.g.,in David Harris, Dreams That Die Hard: Three
Men's Journey through the Sixties (New York: St. Martin's, 1982; 341 pp; and Richard
Cummings' controversial The Pied Piper: Allard K. Lowenstein and the
Liberal Dream (New York: Grove Press, 1985). 2717. CHESTER, LEWIS, MAGNUS LINKLATER, and DAVID MAY. Jeremy Thorpe: A Secret Life. London: Fontana, 1979. 384 pp. Well-documented account of the scandalous 1979 London trial of the
former leader of the Liberal Party on charges of conspiring to murder his
former lover, Norman Scott. See also: Peter Bessell, Cover Up: The Jeremy Thorpe
Affair (Oceanside,
CA: Simons Books, 1981; 574 pp.); Peter Chippendale and David Leigh, The Thorpe Committal (London: Arrow, 1980; 189 pp.); and Auberon Waugh, The Last Word: An Eyewitness
Account of the Trial of Jeremy Thorpe (Boston: Little, Brown, 1980; 240 pp.). 2718. COLQUHOUN, MAUREEN. A Woman in the House. London: Scan Books, 1980. Memoirs of an openly lesbian member (Labour Party) of the British
House of Parliament (1974-79). 2719. COOK, BLANCHE WIESEN. "Female Support Networks an Political Activism: Lillian Wald, Crystal Eastman, Emma
Goldman," Chrysalis, no. 3 (1977), 43-61. Explores the relationship between female homosociality and political
activism in the early decades of the present century. 2720. Does Support For Gay Rights Spell Political Suicide? A Close Look at Some Long-held Myths. New ed. Washington: Gay Rights National Lobby/National Gay
Task Force, 1980. 42 pp. Documents successes of openly gay political figures,
and gay interventions in politics. 2721. ELSHTAIN, JEAN BETHKE. "Homosexual Politics:
The Paradox of Gay Liberation," Salmagundi, no. 58/59 (1982-83), 252-80. Negative critique, sometimes thoughtful, but based on a straw-man
concept—a reconstruction of homosexual aims that is not generally held. 2722. FRIEDMAN, NANCY. "Gay Power: From Closet to
Voting Booth," California Journal (October 1975), 341-44. Shows results of gay organizing in the nation's most populous state. 2723. GALLOWAY, BRUCE (ed.). Grass Roots: A Campaign Manual
for Gay People. London: Grass Roots Group/ Campaign for Homosexual Equality, 1982. Pamphlet on
practical political work in Britain. 2724. GALLOWAY, BRUCE, and BERNARD GREAVES. Out from the Closet: A Liberal
Focus on Gay Rights, Hebden Bridge, West Yorks: Association of Liberal Councillors, 1983.
23 pp. Covers discrimination against gay people, changing law and public
opinion, and "the Liberal commitment." 2725. GOLDSTEIN, RICHARD. "Sex on Parole: The Future
of Gay Liberation," Village Voice (August 20-26, 1980), 1, 20-23. Asserting that most people are aware of a gap between what the
movement hopes to gain from civil rights and what they want out of life,
urges preservation of the Stonewall spirit.! 2726. GREGORY-LEWIS, SASHA. "Anti-gay Crusade," Advocate, no. 223 (September 7, 1977), 6-7. Key article in a series by this writer exploring New Right coalitions
and networking. 2727. GREGORY-LEWIS, SASHA. "A Fresh Look at the
GOP," Advocate, no. 200 (October 7, 1976), 7-8, 10. An early look at Republican potential, prior to the more recent growth
of gay Republican groups. 2728. HAMILL, PETE, and DENNIS HAMILL. "The Rise and
Fall of Fred Richmond," New York Magazine (November 22, 1982), 36-44. Tragic history of
New York's disgraced gay congressman. 2729. HUMM, ANDREW. "Personal Politics of Lesbian and
Gay Liberation," Social Policy, 11 (Summer 1980), 40-45. Reflections of a
New York City gay political leader. 2730. KENNEDY, HUBERT. "J. B. von Schweitzer, the
Faggot Marx Loved to Hate," Fag Rag, no. 19 (Spring 1977), 6-8. A well-documented
study of the now obscure German politician Jean-Baptiste von Schweitzer, who
became the butt of a homophobic tirade on the part of Karl Marx. 2731. KNIGHTLEY, PHILIP, and COLIN SIMPSON. The Secret Lives of Lawrence
of Arabia. New York: McGraw-Hill, 1969. 333 pp. Makes use of new materials to explore the tormented life of the
British archaeologist, military leader, and writer (1888-1935), whose
political activities in the Middle East are obscurely linked to his
sexuality. See also: Desmond Stewart, T. E, Lawrence: A New
Biography (New York: Harper and Row, 1977; 352 pp.). 2732. LACHMAN, LINDA. "Electoral Politics: Interview
with Elaine Noble," in: Ginny Vida (ed), Our Right to Love. Englewood Cliffs, NJ: Prentice-Hall, 1976, 128-32. Outspoken views of the openly lesbian Massachusetts legislator. See
also: Judith Nies, "Elaine Noble Not Just Another Legislator," Ms, Magazine (August 1975), 58-61, 79, 108. 2733. LAIT, JACK, and LEE MORTIMER. Washington Confidential. New York: Crown, 1951. 310 pp. This expose, a characteristic example of prurient gossip during the
McCarthy period, offers some description of the "homosexual
underground" in the nation's capital. 2734. LANSDOWN, ANDREW. "Homosexuals on the
Offensive," Quadrant (Australia), no. 154 (June 1980), 26-31. Misgivings of a heterosexual regarding purported excesses of the gay
movement in Australia. 2735. LASSWELL, HAROLD DWIGHT. Psychopathology in Politics. New ed. New York: Viking, 1960. 319 pp. This political-science study (first edition, 1930) was one of the
first to give attention to homosexuality; see pp. 99, 109-11, 123, 125-26, 178-79. 2736. LERNER, MAX. The Unfinished Country: A Book
of American Symbols. New York: Simon and Schuster, 1959. 733 pp. The then-liberal columnist reprints (pp. 311-19) newspaper articles on
the McCarthyite persecution of homosexuals. 2737. MCCRACKEN, SAMUEL. "Are Homosexuals Gay?" Commentary, 67 (January 1979), 19-29. An antihomosexual academic attempts to grapple with some recent serious books on the
subject. Note also the many sharp responses, ibid. (April 1979), pp. 12-31. 2738. MILLIGAN, DON. The Politics of Homosexuality. London: Pluto Press, 1973. 19 pp. An attempt to articulate a gay
British perspective from the Gay Liberation Front days. 2739. MITZEL, JOHN. The Boston Sex Scandal. Boston: Glad Day, 1980. 149 pp. Hard-hitting expose of a government campaign against boy lovers in
Massachusetts, with broader implications. 2740. PORTLAND TOWN COUNCIL. A Legislative Guide to Gay
Rights. Portland:
Portland Town Council, 1977. Comprehensive brochure prepared by the leading Oregon gay rights
group, giving background and practical advice for effecting change, much of
which remains valid. 2741. PRESSMAN, STEVEN. "The Gay Community Struggles
to Fashion an Effective Lobby," National Journal, 16 (August 4, 1984), 1470-72. Growing pains of gay political intervention. 2742. REAL, JERE. "Gay Rights and Conservative Politics.
I. Minority Report: Mad about the Boys," National Review (March 17, 1978), 342-45. Gay conservatives and how some Republicans are alienating them. 2743. REEVES, THOMAS C. The Life and Times of Joe McCarthy. New York: Stein and Day, 1982. 819 pp. The Wisconsin Senator
(1908-57) made homosexuality a secondary target in his anti-Communist
witchhunt. This exhaustive biography also discusses the rumors, which
apparently cannot be substantiated, that the Senator was himself a closeted
homosexual. 2744. REID, B. L. The Lives of Roger Casement. New Haven: Yale University Press, 1976. 532 pp. Full life of the Irish
humanitarian and patriot (1864- 1916), assessing his homosexuality in
relation to the evidence of the diaries which the British used to discredit
him. See also: Brian Inglis: Roger Casement (New York: Harcourt Brace, 1973; 448 pp.); and
Roger Sawyer, Casement: The Flawed Hero (Boston: Routledge and Kegan Paul, 1984; 199 pp.). 2745. SEDGWICK, DEREK. "Out of Hiding: The
Comradeship of Daniel Guerin," Salmagundi, no. 58-59 (1982-83), 197-220. Explores the complexities of the life of a French bisexual political
writer, showing how his gay experiences meshed (and did not mesh) with his
radical politics. 2746. SHILTS, RANDY. The Mayor of Castro Street:
The Life and Times of Harvey Milk. New York: St. Martin's Press, 1982. 388 pp. Full account of the noted gay politician, from his childhood on Long
Island, through his struggles and triumphs in San Francisco, and his murder
by Dan White in 1978. See also: Warren Hickle, Gayslayer! (Virginia City, NV: Silver Dollar, 1985; 100 pp.). 2747. SNODGRASS, TOM (ed.). For Men against Sexism. New York: Times Change Press, 1977. Collection of articles on sex, power, sexism, the male movement,
homosexuality and racism—generally enunciating an Utopian male-effeminist point of view. 2748. "Studds Comes Out," Nation, 237 (August 20-27, 1983), 132. One of a number of articles in the mainstream press marking the
courage of Massachusetts Rep. Gerry E. Studds, who frankly discussed his
homosexuality on the floor of the House of Representatives. (He was
subsequently reelected in 1984.) 2749. VASSALL, JOHN. Vassall: The Autobiography of a Spy. London: Sidgwick and Jackson, 1975. 200 pp. Account of a British spy,
less well known than Burgess and Maclean (see A. Boyle, above). 2750. VIDAL, GORE. "Neo-Con Homophobia: 'Some Jews'
and 'the' Gays," Nation, 233 (November 14, 1981), 489, 509-17. Controversial article attacking the homophobia of the Commentary group of writers. See responses in ibid., 234 (1982), 2+. 2751. ZELIGS, MEYER A. Friendship and Fratricide: An Analysis of Whittaker
Chambers and Alger Hiss. New York: Viking Press, 1967. 476 pp. Zeligs' revelation of ex-Communist
Chambers' homosexuality, though perhaps politically motivated, was subsequently
confirmed through release of FBI records. Several of the pioneers of homosexual studies, including Edward
Carpenter and Kurt Hiller, were socialists of one sort or another, while
others, such as Hans Bluher and Benedikt Friedlaender, advocated conservative
theories (see I.B). Owing in part to the conjunction of the rise of gay
liberation (1969ff.) with the counterculture, much recent political
theorizing has been influenced by New Left and radical feminist ideas. As the Utopian hopes of the 1970s have faded and homosexuals and
lesbians have concomitantly become less alienated from existing society,
centrist opinions have become more prominent. 2763. BRADLEY, IAN. The Strange Rebirth of Liberal Britain. London: Chatto and Windus, 1985. 259 pp. Extended political manifesto
and prognosis, seeing homosexuals as playing a role in the revival of
centrist politics in Britain.
DAWSON, KIPP. Gay Liberation. New York: Pathfinder, 1975. 127 pp. Marxist perspective of the Socialist Workers Party (Trotskyist).
DYNES, WAYNE.
"Homophobia--Liberal and Illiberal," Gay Books Bulletin, no. 3 (1980), 2, 28. Identifies a trend toward resistance to homosexual rights among some
mainstream liberals in the 1970s.
ENGELS, FRIEDRICH. The Origin of the Family, Private Property and the
State; in the Light of the Researches of Lewis H. Morgan. Translated by Alec West (revised). Introduction and
notes by Eleanor Burke Leacock. New York: International Publishers,' 1972.
285 pp. In this work of speculative history, first published in German in 1884
and recently fashionable in some circles, Marx's collaborator denounces the
"abominable practice of sodomy" among the Greeks (p. 128). See also
pp. 129, 140. See also Marx-Engels Verke (Berlin: Dietz, 1953ff.), vol. 32, p. 122 (on Karl
Boruttau) and pp. 324-25 (attacks on K. H. Ulrichs and J. B. von Schweitzer).
FERNBACH, DAVID. The Spiral Path: A Gay Contribution to Human
Survival. Boston: Alyson, 1981. 240 PP. Seeks to integrate perspectives of gay liberation, feminism,
socialism, and ecology. Eccentric, stimulating, and occasionally bizarre. See
also his: "Toward a Marxist Theory of Gay Oppression," Socialist Revolution, 6:2 (1976), 29-41.
FOURIER, FRANÇOIS MARIE CHARLES. Vers la liberté en amour. Edited, with an introduction by Daniel Guérin. Paris: Gallimard, 1975. 256 pp. Collection of texts advocating sexual liberty by the French radical
prophet (1772-1837). There are several English-language selections from Fourier's
work, but none focuses closely on his visionary sexual ideas—including
same-sex relations.
GAY LEFT COLLECTIVE
(London). Homosexuality: Power and Politics. London: Allison and Busby, 1980. 224 pp. Seventeen essays reflecting the viewpoint of the review Gay Left, from which some of them were reprinted.
GIOVANNINI, FABIO. Comunisti e diversi: il PCI e la questione omosessuale. Bari: Dedalo, 1980. 206 pp. Traces the halting efforts, mainly in the 1970s, of the Italian
Communist Party to attain a better comprehension of homosexuality. For an
indication of further progress, see Nichi Vendola, "L'omosessualità esce del ghetto," Democrazia e diritto (September-October 1984).
GOODMAN, GERRE, et al. Ho Turning Back: Lesbian and Gay Liberation for the '80s. Philadelphia: New Society Publishers, 1983. 153 pp. Attempting to bring up-to-date the New Left perspectives of the 1970s,
presents a five-stage program for moving towards a liberated society,
illustrating each stage with examples from the gay and other struggles.
GOTTLIEB, RHONDA.
"The Political Economy of Sexuality," Review of Radical Political
Economy, 16 (Spring 1984), 143-65. Presents heterosexual and homosexual relations
in a "manner analogous to Marx's labor theory of value."
GOUGH, JAMIE, and
MIKE MACNAIR. Gay Liberation in the Eighties, London: Pluto Press, 1985. 131 pp. British primer attempting to refurbish gay Marxism; the product seems
more nostalgic than contemporary. GRAF, THORSTEN, and MIMI STEGLITZ. "Homosexuellenunterdrückung in der bürgerlichen Gesellschaft," Probleme der Klassenkampf, no. 4 (1974), 17-50. Marxist analysis of the oppression of homosexuals in bourgeois
society.
GUÉRIN, DANIEL. Proudon oui et non. Paris: Gallimard, 1978. 245 pp. See pp. 195-230 on the repressed sexuality of the socialist thinker
Pierre-Joseph Proudhon (1805-1865). GUÉRIN, DANIEL. Homosexualité et révolution. Saint-Denis: Les Cahiers du Vent du Ch'min, 1984. 70 pp. Somewhat schematic summary of his ideas (which partake of both
socialism and anarchism), with quotations from earlier writings.
KATZ, JONATHAN.
"Gay Men, Lesbians and Socialism: A Bibliography of Some Relevant Books,
Pamphlets, Essays, Peridicals, and News Items," Gay Insurgent, no. 4-5 (Spring 1979), 51-56. A knowledgeable and
useful compilation.
LENIN, VLADIMIR IL'ICH. The Emancipation of Women, New York: International Publishers, ca. 1969. 136 pp. The remarks recorded by Clara Zetkin in the fall of 1920 (pp. 97-132)
show Lenin's (1870-1924) vehement opposition to the bourgeois obsession with
"decadence" and "perversion," which he saw as
distracting the communist movement from the urgent tasks of the revolution.
See also the fuller text in Clara Zetkin, Reminiscences of Lenin (New York: International Publishers, 1934).
LOS ANGELES
RESEARCH GROUP. Toward a Scientific Analysis of the Gay Question. Cudahy, CA: Los Angeles Research Group, 1975. 40 pp. Left-sectarian position paper by
a Marxist group seeking to "refute the incorrect analyses that are
dominant today in the communist movement," especially the "anti-gay
line" which excludes homosexuals from Communist organizations oriented
toward Moscow or Peking.
MCCUBBIN, BOB. The Gay Question: A Marxist Approach. New York: World View, 1976. 83 pp. A simplistic Marxist catechism of
history from prehistoric times to the present by a member of the Workers
World Party.
MITCHELL, PAM
(ed.). Pink Triangles: Radical Perspectives on Gay Liberation. Boston: Alyson, 1980. 187 pp. Fourteen essays generally from a New Left point of view on political
theory, culture, pornography, pedophilia, etc.
MOVEMENT FOR A NEW
SOCIETY, GAY THEORY WORK GROUP. Gay Oppression and Liberation, or: Homophobia: Its
Causes and Cure. Philadelphia: Movement for a New Society, 1977. 134 pp. Somewhat Utopian sociopolitical critique from a New Left and feminist perspective.
RAICO, RALPH. Gay Rights: A Libertarian Approach. Washington, DC: McBride for President Committee, ca. 1976. Well-reasoned pamphlet, presenting the extension of state power as the
principal obstacle to sexual liberation, and comparing the Libertarian view
with that of other parties.
RAIMONDO, JUSTIN. In Praise of Outlaws: Rebuilding Gay Liberation. San Francisco: Students for a Libertarian Society, 1979. 47 pp.
Vigorous manifesto from a Libertarian-Anarchist point of view; San Francisco
emphasis.
REICHE, REIMUT. Sexuality and the Class Struggle. New York: Praeger, 1971. 175 pp. German Marxist discussion, with some
material on homosexuality (see pp. 115-20).
THORSTAD, DAVID
(ed.). Gay Liberation and Socialism: Documents from the Discussion on Gay
Liberation Inside the Socialist Workers Party (1970- 1973. New York: The author, 1976.
142 pp. Preserves verbatim the often turgid debates within this Trotskyist
group. The material is supplemented by: Steve Forgione and Kurt T. Hill
(eds.), No Apologies: The Unauthorized Publication of Internal Discussion
Documents of the Socialist Workers Party (SWP) concerning Lesbian/Gay Male
Liberation [Part II: 1975-1979] (New York: Privately printed, 1981; 149 pp.). 2787. YOUNG, ALLEN.
"Silence on the American Left," Advocate, no. 330 (November 12, 1981), 14-17. Indicts
straight left periodicals for their failure to criticize or even discuss
discrimination against gays in Castro's Cuba, an inquiry that deserves to be
broadened. This article is an excerpt from the author's book, Gays Under the Cuban
Revolution (San Francisco: Grey Fox Press, 1981). Inasmuch as most homosexuals and lesbians remain "in the
closet," it has been hard to document discrimination against them and to
devise legal remedies. The popular mind supports prejudice and discrimination
by various myths and canards, which are not unlike those that
linger regarding racial and ethnic minorities. 2788. BEER, CHRIS, et al. Gay Workers: Trade Unions and the Law. London: National Council for Civil Liberties, 1981.
Overview of employers' discrimination against gay and lesbian workers,
showing how the discrimination is reinforced by the power of the state. 2789. DE CECCO, JOHN P., and MARY C. FIGLIUOLO.
"Methodology for Studying Discrimination Based on Sexual Orientation
and Social Sex-role Stereotypes," JH, 3 (1978), 235-41. Seeks to determine how departures in sexual orientation and social
sex-role serve as pretexts for the abridgment of civil liberties. See also,
Marcy R. Adelman, "Sexual Orienatation and Violations of Civil
Liberties," JH, 2 (1977), 327-30: John De Cecco, "Studying Violations of Civil
Liberties of Homosexual Men and Women," JH, 2 (1977), 315-22; Mary C. Figliuolo et al.,
"The Relationship of Departures in Social Sex-role to the Abridgment of
Civil Liberties," JH, 3 (1978), 249-55; Petra Liljestrand et al.,
"The Relationship of Assumption and Knowledge of the Homosexual
Orientation to the Abridgment of Civil Liberties," JH, 3 (1978), 243-48; and Michael G. Shively and Marny
A. Hall, "Departures from Sex-Role Stereotypes of Appearance and
Violations of Civil Liberties," JH, 2 (1977), 331-35. 2790. GALLOWAY, BRUCE (ed.). Prejudice and Pride: Discrimination against Gay
People in Modern Britain. Boston: Routledge and Kegan Paul, 1983. 246 pp. Eleven well-prepared
essays by Campaign for Homosexual Equality members on discrimination against
gay men and lesbians at home, at school, at work, on the streets, and in
prison. Indicates the inadequacies of the 1967 law reform, which meant that homosexuality was merely tolerated
when hidden. 2788. HODGES, ANDREW, and DAVID HUTTER. With Downcast Gays—Aspects of
Homosexual Oppression. Toronto: Pink Triangle, 1974. 42 pp. This deservedly widely read pamphlet analyzes some aspects of the way
in which homosexuals have internalized contempt for their own kind stemming
from the host society, thereby collaborating in the perpetuation of their own
oppression. 2789. LEVINE, MARTIN P. "Employment Discrimination
Against Gay Men," International Journal of Modern Sociology. 9 (1979), 150-62. Reviews the literature on job discrimination, detailing discriminatory
practices and extent of discrimination. See also Jeffrey Escoffier,
"Stigmas, Work Environment, and Economic Discrimination against
Homosexuals," Homosexual Counseling Journal, 2 (1975), 8-17. 2790. LEVINE, MARTIN P., and ROBIN LEONARD.
"Discrimination against Lesbians in the Work Force," Signs, 9 (1984), 700-10. Reviews the existing literature, and presents new evidence from 203
lesbian women in a metropolitan area, serving to confirm the fact that
employment discrimination is a serious problem. 2791. THOMPSON, DENISE. Discrimination and Homosexuality. Sydney: New South Wales Anti-discrimination Board,
1982. A major study of the problem in Australia. Because of the notion that homosexual behavior merits social control,
gay people have been the repeated object of official investigation in
English-speaking countries. Some other items of this kind are listed in the
appropriate subject categories, especially those
pertaining to law (see XX.A ff.). 2795. CALIFORNIA.
LEGISLATURE, ASSEMBLY. Preliminary Report of the Subcommittee on Sex Crimes of the Assembly
Interim Committee on Judicial System and Judicial Process. Sacramento: Assembly, 1950.
269 PP. The first of three negative reports from this body; the others
appeared in 1951 and 1952. The enquiry did engender a more enlightejnd
document prepared by the Department of Mental Hygiene and the Langley Porter
Clinic, headed by Karl M. Bowman, Final Report on California Sexual Devia- tion Research (Sacramento: Assembly, 1954; 164 pp.)« 2796. CANADA. ROYAL COMMISSION ON THE CRIMINAL LAW
RELATING TO CRIMINAL SEXUAL PSYCHOPATHS. Report. Ottawa: Queen's Printer, 1958. 130 pp. Also known as the McRuer Commission Report. Needless to say, it is
unsympathetic to homosexuality. 2797. CHICAGO. VICE COMMISSION. The Social Evil in Chicago: A Study of Existing
Conditions by the Vice Commission of Chicago. Chicago: Gunthorp- Warren,
1911. 399 pp. In this characteristic document of the confluence of the social-purity
trend with muckraking reform, see pp. 295-98 for a brief, but revealing
glimpse of the gay subculture in Chicago. 2798. Government versus Homosexuals. New York: Arno Press, 1975. A reprint collection of three government documents. Contains: (1) Alleged Immoral Conditions at
Newport [Rhode
Island] Training Station (Washington, DC: U. S. Senate, Committee on Naval Affairs, 1921)—a
scandal involving vice squad investigators who entrapped homosexuals; (2) Employment of Homosexuals and
Other Sex Perverts in Government (Washington, DC: U.S. Senate, Subcomittee on
Expenditures in the Executive Departments, 1950)—in which the committee
appointed in the wake of charges made by Senator McCarthy determined that
homosexuals are unfit for federal employment because they are security risks,
criminals and social outcasts; and (3) Homosexuality and Citizenship
in Florida: A Report (Tallahassee; Florida Legislative Investigation Committee, 1964)—a
sometimes laughable, but also deadly serious document, which contemplated
severe restrictions on the civil rights of homosexuals. 2799. GREAT BRITAIN. HOME OFFICE. Report of the Working Party on
Vagrancy and Street Offenses. London: Her Majesty's Stationery Office, 1976. 30
pp. One of a number of official British reports (which properly belong
under the category of law) following the Wolfen- den Report of 1957 and the
legal reform of 1967. See pp. 22-23, 26. 2800. MYERS, VICTORIA. A Sexual Preference Study. Tulsa, OK: City of Tulsa, 1976. 93 pp. After a brief summary of the literature on homosexuality, presents
sumaries of resolutions, policies and ordinances passed by national
organizations and cities dealing with discrimination based on sexual
orientation, as well as the results of surveys of attitudes among business
people, employers, landlords, and the general public in Tulsa. 2801. SULLIVAN, GERARD. "A Bibliographic Guide to Government
Hearings and Reports, Legislative Action, and Speeches Made in the House and Senate of the United
States Congress on the Subject of Homosexuality," JH, 10 (1984),
135-89. An invaluable, annotated guide to this material, which is sometimes
difficult to trace. Except for one entry--for 1921—all are from 1948 to 1983. XIII. MILITARY The citizen armies of ancient Greece were directly linked, in many
cases, with the institution of pederasty (see III.C). In Europe, from the
18th century onwards, there are documented cases of homosexual generals and
military officers. Wartime experiences seem to foster the emergence of
homosexual patterns of behavior. On the other hand, since the late 19th
century there has been a controversy over the fitness of homosexuals for
military service, which still continues in the United States armed forces
(see XX.M). 2802. ANDERSON, CHARLES. "On Certain Conscious and
Unconscious Homosexual Responses to Warfare," British Journal of Medical
Psychology, 20 (1944), 161-74. Of 5000 patients admitted to a World War II neurosis center, 4% were
conscious homosexuals and another 4% were "latent homosexuals."
Anderson claims that combat experience can lead to the reactivation of
homosexual sadomasochistic trends. 2803. AUSTEN, ROGER. "But for Fate and Ban:
Homosexual Villains and Victims in the Military," College English, 36 (1974), 352-59. A literary critic examines judgments of homosexuality implicit in the
works of several modern writers dealing with the officer-subordinate
relationship. 2804. BERUBE, ALAN. "Coming Out under Fire," Mother Jones, 8:11 (February-March 1983), 23-29, 45. Trials and triumphs of gay and lesbian servicemen in World War II.
This article is part of a larger study the author is undertaking on the
official decision, in the middle of World War II, to identify homosexuals in
the service and discharge them--and the malign effects of the decision in
American society generally after the war. See also his: "Lesbian and Gay
GIs in World War II: Marching to a Different Drummer," Advocate, no. 328 (October 15, 1981), 20-24. 2805. BERUBE, ALAN, and JOHN D'EMILIO. "The Military
and ) Lesbians during the McCarthy Years," Signs, 9 (1984), 759-75. Includes transcripts of official documents and letters
pertaining to the policy of expelling lesbians from the service. 2802.
BLEY,
WULF. "Spionage und anormale Veranlagung," in:
Die Weltkriegsspionage. Munich: Moser, 1931, pp. 378-83. Espionage and "abnormality" in World War I. 2803. BOONE, JOEL T. "The Sexual Aspects of Military
Personnel," Journal of Social Hygiene, 27:3 (1941), 113-24. Claims that homosexuality is regarded with loathing and contempt by
most men in the U. S. Navy, who report deviates so that they may be sent to
naval psychiatric institutions for treatment. 2804. BOTCHAREVA, MARIA LEONTIEVNA. Yashka: My Life as Peasant,
Officer and Exile. New York: Stokes, 1919. 340 pp. In these reminiscences of a leader of "Kerensky's Amazons,"
recorded by Isaac Don Levine, see pp. 82, 106, 121. 2805.
BRAUBACH,
MAX. Prince Eugen von Savoyen.
Vienna: Oldenbourg, 1963-65. 5 vols. Standard life of the great homophile general and statesman (1662-1736)
in the service of the Habsburgs. 2806. BRICKENSTEIN, RUDOLF. "Homosexualität und Wehrdienst," Wehrmedizin, 4:9-10 (1966), 193-97. Argues that homosexuals are unsuited for military service. One of a
series of articles by this author, resuming an argument that was much
canvased in Wilhelmine Germany. 2807. BULLINGA, MARCEL. Het leger maakt een man van je. Amsterdam: SUA, 1984. 192 pp. Interviews with some 50 present and
former Dutch servicemen about attitudes to gender and sex in the military. 2808.
BÜRGER-PRINZ,
HANS, et al. Beurteilung der
Wehrdiensttauglichkeit und Dienstfähigkeit Homosexueller.
Beuel: Sanitatsamt
des Bundeswehr, 1966. 102 pp. (Beiträge zur Wehrpsychiatrie, 2) Papers discussing the fitness of homosexuals for military service from
several points of view on the eve of the 1969 West German decriminalization. 2809. CHAVIGNY, PAUL. "L'homosexualité dans l'armée," Revue de l'hypnotisme, 23 (1908),
39-40. Only violations of public decency, abuse of authority, or forceful
acts were punishable as homosexual offenses in the French army. In regiments
composed of natives of the French colonies, homosexual activity was so widespread
that it was virtually disregarded save in circumstances that would have
merited criminal proceedings in civilian life. 2810. CHILES, JOHN A. "Homosexuality in the United
States Air Force," Comprehensive Psychiatry, 13 (1972), 529-32. Brands current U.S. Air Force treatment of homosexuals
as needlessly punitive and confusing because regulations do not provide clear
answers as to what homosexuality is and how to deal with it. Questions the
assumption that all homosexuals should be excluded from the service. 2811. DAUTHEVILLE, LOUIS. "Le cafard ou psychose des pays chauds," Archives d'anthropologie criminelle, 26 (1911), 5-27. See esp. pp. 13-14 for homosexuality, ostensibly induced by climate, among French
troops in North Africa. See also: R. Jude, Les dégénérés dans les bataillons d'Afrique (Vannes: Le Beau, 1907), 33-39. 2812. DRUSS, RICHARD G. "Cases of Suspected Homosexuality Seen at an Army Mental
Hygiene Consultation Service," Psychiatric Quarterly, 41 (1967), 62-70. Discusses anomalies in the Army's handling of homosexuals,
recommending that they be discharged, but with no punitive measures. 2813. DUBERMAN, MARTIN. "Case of the Gay
Sergeant," New York Times Magazine (November 9, 1975), 16-17, 58. On the sensational affair of Air Force Sergeant Leonard Matlovich, who refused to be discharged quietly. See also Time, 105 (June 9, 1975), 18-19. 2814. "Frauen als Soldaten im Weltkrieg," JfsZ, 15 (1915), 36-47, 95-97, 120-47; 16 (1916), 66-87; 17 (1917), 37-47, 102-14, 170-81. A series of contemporary reports on women soldiers on both sides in
World War I, ascribing their success to "masculine" qualities
which Hirschfeld assimilated to lesbianism . 2815. FROMAGET, GEORGES. Les mesures de protection a l'égard des pervers qui s'engagent dans l'armée. Lyon: Bosc, 1935. 99 pp. "Prophylactic" measures to be taken against perverts in the
French army of the interwar period. 2816. "Gay People and the Military: Advocate Special
Report," Advocate, no. 167 (July 2, 1975), 19-29. Articles by Arnie Kantrowitz and others, including one on the Leonard
Matlovich case. 2817. GIBSON, E. LAWRENCE. Get Off My Ship: Ensign Berg v. the D. S. Navy. New York: Avon, 1978. 385 pp. Detailed account of
the ordeal of Ensign Vernon E. Berg III, who challenged the Navy's policy
towards homosexual personnel, written by Berg's lover. 2818. GILBERD, KATHLEEN,
and JOSEPH SCHUMAN (eds.). Fighting Back: Lesbian and Gay Draft, Military, and Veterans' Issues. Chicago: Midwest Committee for Military Counseling, 1985. 142 pp.
Manual for activist lawyers and counselors including analysis of pertinent
regulations for the military, selective service, and Veteran's
Administration, as well as step-by-step guidance for draft, military, and
veterans' cases. 2819. GILBERT, ARTHUR N. "The 'Africaine' Courts Martial: A Study of Buggery in the Royal
Navy," JH, 1 (1974), 111-22. Reconstructs the investigation and trial that led the British Navy
(1815-16) to hang four members of the ship's crew. 2820. GILBERT, ARTHUR N. "Buggery and the British
Navy, 1700-1861," Journal of Social History, 10 (1977), 72-98. Shows that sanctions against homosexual conduct—when detected—were
quite severe in this period, esp. during the wars with revolutionary and then
imperial France. In some instances it was possible, however, to escape by a
type of plea bargaining. See also Gilbert, "Sexual Deviance and
Disaster during the Napoleonic Wars," Albion, 9 (1977), 98-113. 2821. HARRY, JOSEPH. "Homosexual Men and Women Who
Served Their Country," JH, 10 (1984), 117-25. Reports interview data on 1456 respondents collected in 1969 and 1970. 2822. HIRSCHFELD, MAGNUS, and ANDREAS GASPAR. Sittengeschichte
des Weltkrieges, Leipzig: Verlag für Sexualwissenschaft
Schneider, 1930. 2 vols. (Sittengeschichte der jüngsten Zeit, 2-3) Lavishly produced compilation on sex life in World War I that
naturally reflects Hirschfeld's concern with homosexuality. A 40 pp.
supplementary fascicle appeared in 1931. An abridged English version, Sexual History of the World
War (New York:
Panurge) appeared in 1934, and was several times reissued. 2823. KERIEN, ANDRÉ. "L'homosexuel face au service militaire," Arcadie, no. 219 (March 1972), 109-15; 220 (April 1972),
194-98. A French perspective reflecting the immediate post-De Gaulle years, 2824.
KERRUEL,
YVES. Des pavois et des fers. Paris: Julliard, 1971. 252 pp. Account of French naval officer dismissed for homosexuality. See also his: Le soldat nu (Paris:
Julliard, 1974; 224 pp.). 2825. LATTES, LEONE. Gli omosessuali nell'esercito. Rome: Voghera, 1917. 14 pp. Homosexuals in the Italian military in World War I. 2826. LEEXOW,
KARL FRANZ (pseud.). Armee und
Homosexualität: Schadet Homosexualität die militärische Tüchtigkeit der
Rasse? Leipzig: Max Spohr, 1909. 112 pp. Disputes the notion that homosexuality undermines military fitness. See
also: Benedict Friedlaender, "Schadet die Freigabe des homosexuellen
Verkehrs die kriegersiche Tüchtigkeit der Rasse?"
JfsZ, 7 (1905-06), 463-70, 614. 2827. LEVY, CHARLES J. Spoils of War. Boston: Houghton Mifflin, 1974. 172 pp. For homophobia among the American troops in Vietnam, see pp. 51-72. See also his: "ARVN as Faggots: Inverted Warfare
in Vietnam," TransAction, 8 (October 1971), 18-27. 2828. LOESER, LEWIS H. "The Sexual Psychopath in the
Military Service: A Study of 270 Cases," American Journal of
Psychiatry, 102 (1945), 92-101. Period document offering generalizations from 270 unrepresentative cases. 2829. MCCRARY, JEREL, and LEWIS GUTIEREZ. "The
Homosexual Person in Military and in National Security Employment," JH, 5 (1979), 115-46. A maze of regulations exists to promote government exclusionary
policies, but their implementation can often be successfully fought on a
case-by-case basis. 2830. MURPHY, JOHN. "Cleaning Up Newport: The U.S.
Navy's Persecution of Homosexuals after World War I," Journal of American Culture, 7 (1984), 57-64. Reconstructs an official effort to eliminate homosexuals from the Navy
at Newport, RI, spearheaded by Franklin D. Roosevelt. See also: George
Chauncey, Jr., "Christian Brotherhood or Sexual Perversion? Homosexual
Identities and the Construction of Sexual Boundaries in the World War One
Era," Journal of Social History, 19 (1985), 198-211. 2831.
PFEIFFER,
GEORG PHILIPP. Männerheldentum
und Kameradenliebe im Krieg. Berlin: Brand/Der Eigene, 1924. 24 pp. Interprets letters and other documents of male comradeship in World
War I. 2832. PORCH, DOUGLAS. The Conquest of Morocco. New York: Alfred A. Knopf, 1983. 335 pp. Includes discussion of the homosexuality of Marshall Louis Hubert
Gonzalve Lyautey (1854-1934), who organized the French conquest. 2833. RICHARDSON, FRANK M. Mars without Venus: A Study of
Some Homosexual Generals. Edinburgh; William Blackwood, 1981. 188 pp. From Prince Eugene to Lawrence of Arabia. Offers some useful biographical information, but set in a naive psychiatric
framework derived from Alfred Adler. Richardson is also the author of Napoleon: Bisexual Emperor (New York: Horizon Press, 1972; 255 pp.), a book
which has met a poor reception from Napoleon scholars. 2834. ROYLE, TREVOR. Death before Dishonor: The
True Story of Fighting Mac. Edinburgh: Mainstream, 1982. 176 pp. Biography of British Major-General Sir Hector MacDonald, who committed
suicide in Paris in 1903 when faced with a homosexual scandal. At the end,
the book is marred by some unlikely speculation. 2835. SCHWALM, GEORG. "Die Streichung des Grundtatbestandes homosexueller Handlungen und ihre Auswirkung auf das Disziplinarrecht," Neue Zeitschrift für Wehrrecht, 12:3 (1970), 81-98. Discusses effects of decriminalization on military discipline in the
army of the German Federal Republic. 2836.
SCHWELING,
OTTO PETER. Die deutsche Militärjustiz in der
Zeit des Nazionalsozialismus. Edited by Erich Schwinge. Marburg: N. G. Elwert, 1977.
396 pp. See pp. 286-90 for German military prosecutions for homosexuality
under Articles 175 and 175a during the Nazi era. As a residue of Hirschfeld's
campaign for the constitutional etiology of homosexuality, the practice of
German military justice was less sweeping than the American one. 2837. SNYDER, WILLIAM P., and KENNETH L. NYBERG.
"Gays and the Military: An Emerging Policy Issue," Journal of Political and
Military Sociology, 8 (1980), 71-84. In recent years the military, though still attempting to exclude
homosexuals, has mitigated its policies by tending to give honorable
discharges. The article considers the potential effects of possible further
liberalization. 2838. SOCIETY FOR INDIVIDUAL RIGHTS. The Armed Servies and
Homosexuality. San Francisco: SIR, 1968. 12 pp. One of a number of brochures published by homosexual groups in a
period when the Vietnam war was creating ambivalence about the draft and
military service. 2839. WARREN, CAROL A., and JOANN S. DE LORA.
"Student Protest in the 1970s: The Gay Student Union and the
Military," Urban Life, 7 (1978), 67-90. Case study of the effectiveness of a protest against the campus ROTC
unit by the gay student organization of a small Western university. 2840. WATKINS, JOHN. The Respectful Memorial of John Watkins, Late a
Major in the Fifth Regiment of Light Cavalry, Madras Establishment. London: 1835. 20 pp. Account of a scandal provoked by a British army officer's unsuccessful
pursuit of an Indian subject. 2841. WEINBERG, MARTIN S., and COLIN J. WILLIAMS. Homosexuals and the Military:
A Study of Less Than Honorable Discharge. New York: Harper and Row, 1971. 221 pp. Using an interview sample obtained through homosexual organizations,
evaluates the effect of official labeling. Undesirable discharges generate
employment discrimination and psychological trauma sometimes leading to
suicide. Moreover, separation procedures violate basic civil rights. 2842. WEISS, ISIDORE I. "Homosexuality with Special
Reference to Military Prisoners," Psychiatric Quarterly, 20 (1946), 485-523. Claims that in an armed forces rehabilitation center a small number of
homosexuals induce others to engage in homosexual acts. 2843. WEST, LOUIS JOLYON, et al. "An Approach to the
Problem of Homosexuality in Military Services," American Journal of Psychiatry, 115 (1958), 392-401. Asserts that methods then in use failed to distinguish the
"true" from the "incidental" homosexual, thus losing
valuable personnel. Suggests that safeguards for accused individuals are
insufficient, and that punitive attitudes of the command should be modified. 2844. WILLIAMS, COLIN J., and MARTIN S. WEINBERG.
"Being Discovered: A Study of Homosexuals in the Military," Social Problems, 18 (1970), 217-27. The most common type of discovery entailed being turned in by another
person; the second, voluntary admission with the hope of receiving a
discharge; the last, being caught engaging in homosexual relations. The study
also compares the backgrounds of individuals who received honorable
discharges with those of personnel receiving dishonorable discharges. Inasmuch as homosexual behavior by definition involves the interaction
of two or more persons, it would seem to be a prime case for social science
investigation. Yet the founders of modern sociology, both in Europe and in
North America, tended to ignore homosexuality, and it is only in recent years
that social theory has attempted to come to grips with it. This new
seriousness is linked to the fact that an increasing number of trained
scholars are openly homosexual, and can combine experiential with theoretical
perspectives. Current bibliography may be monitored in Social Sciences Index (1974- ) and Sociological Abstracts (1952- ). 2845. ADAM, BARRY D. "Inferiorization and 'Self-Es-
teem," Sociometry, 41 (1978), 47-53. Critique of the social-psychological tendency to conflate the
consequences of discrimination with the internal formation of self-images. 2846. ADAM, BARRY D. "Structural Foundations of the
Gay World," Comparative Studies of Society and History, 27 (1985), 658-71. Following in part a Marxist-feminist approach,
"puts forth some structural linkages which set homosexuality within the
context of the larger histories of gender, family, and production."
Argues that Western industrial capitalism has given birth to the new
configuration of the gay world, i.e. modern homosexuality as we know it. 2847. ADAM, BARRY D. The Survival of Domination: Inferi- orization and
Everyday Life. New York: Elsevier, 1978. 179 pp. Comparative study of the social psychology of oppression, presenting
Jews, blacks, and gay people as salient instances in our society. Using a
neo-Marxist methodology, Adam examines the process whereby such groups are
inferiorized, the countertactics evolved to cope with inferiorization, and
how such responses coalesce with structures of domination. 2848. ASHWORTH, A. E., and W. M. WALKER. "Social
Structure and Homosexuality: A Theoretical Appraisal," British Journal of Sociology, 23 (1972), 146-58. Emphasizes situations in which social structure restricts accesss by
members of one sex to the other, as in unisex communities (boarding schools
and prisons) and in certain occupational and ethnic groups. In these circumstances
homosexuality may be functional. 2849. BACH, GERARD. Homosexualités: Expression/repression. Paris: Le Sycomore, 1982. 120 pp. Social-psychological study based on present-day conditions in France,
offering linguistic and historical background as well as future vistas. On a
factual plane, see Jean Cavailhes, Pierre Dutrey, and Gerard Bach-Ignasse, Rapport gai: enquête sur les modes de vie homosexuels (Paris: Persona, 1984; 275 pp.). 2850. BELL, ALAN P., and MARTIN S. WEINBERG. Homosexualities: À Study of Diversity among Men and Women. New York: Simon and Schuster, 1978. 505 pp. Sets forth conclusions
derived from in-depth interviews of 979 San Francisco Bay area residents,
conducted under the auspices of the Kinsey Institute of Indiana University,
mainly in 1969. Offers a five-fold typology of homosexuals: close-coupled,
open-coupled, functional, dysfunctional, and asexual. This typology has been
criticized as not strictly following from the data (as claimed), and as
serving to bolster the book's underlying message—its ideology, so to
speak—that is to say, the integrationist notion that in terms of sociosex-
ual adjustment homosexuals are much like everyone else. Compare M. S. Weinberg and C. J. Williams, below—to which this
book is to some extent a sequel. 2851. DANK, BARRY M. "The Social Construction and
Destruction of the Homosexual," Humanity and Society, 4 (1980), 133-47. Social science has often acted to transform persons into objects and
things. Through acceptance of the dehumanized concept of a homosexual
problem, social science allows itself to be transformed into a means of
social control. 2852. DANNECKER, MARTIN. Theories of Homosexuality. Translated by David Fernbach. London: Gay Men's Press, 1981. 123 pp.
Concise observations—sometimes shrewd, sometimes truis- tic—on current
sociological and psychiatric approaches. See also his: "Towards a Theory
of Homosexuality: Socio- Historical Perspectives," JH, 9:4 (Summer
1984), 1-8. 2853. DANNECKER, MARTIN, and REIMUT REICHE. Der gewöhnliche Homosexuelle: eine soziologische Untersuchung über männliche Homosexuelle in der Bundesrepublik. Frankfurt am Main: Fischer, 1974. 430 pp. Using questionnaires and interviews (summarized in
statistical tables), attempts a full-scale description of the individual and
social development of male homosexuals in West Germany. Deals with coming
out, friendship, sexuality, employment, the homosexual subculture, and psychological
maladjustment. For an English summary of some of the findings, see: Reimut
Reiche and Martin Dannecker, "Male Homosexuality in West Germany: A
Sociological Investigation," Journal of Sex Research, 13 (1977), 35-53. 2854. DAVIES, CHRISTIE. "Sexual Taboos and Social
Boundaries," American Journal of Sociology, 87 (1982), 1032-63. Argues that historically certain closely knit groups (e.g.,Old Testament Israelites, Parsees, and modern armies)
have sought to maintain a strong sense of social boundaries, using such
deviations as homosexuality, bestiality, and transvestism as markers of
exclusion from the group. This approach was anticipated by Fritz Wittels,
"Collective Defense Mechanisms against Homosexuality," Psychoanalytic Review, 31 (1944), 19-33. 2855. DUYVES, MATTIAS. "Bij de meerderjarigheid van
homostudies: Nederlandse sociologen over homosek- sualiteit 1965-1985," Sociologische Gids, 32 (1985), 332-351. Until the end of the 1970s Dutch sociological investigation of
homosexuality was concerned with the interplay of social discrimination and
individual deviance. In the 1980s departments of gay studies were established
in some Dutch universities (Amsterdam, Utrecht), while research approaches
came under the influence of the "constructionist" trend. 2856. FITZGERALD, THOMAS K. "A Theoretical Typology
of Homosexuality in the U. S.," Corrective Psychiatry and Social Therapy, 9 (1963), 28-35. Classification of homosexual types according to the degree that they
have internalized the values of the environing society. 2857. GAGNON, JOHN H. and WILLIAM
SIMON. Sexual Conduct: The Social Sources of Human Sexuality. Chicago: Aldine, 1973. 316 pp. In keeping with symbolic
interactionism, holds that sexual behavior is learned through social scripts
which vary cross-culturally and historically. Sets forth a model of
psychosexual development, articulated into various phases of the life cycle.
See pp. 129-216, 235-59. 2858. GOFFMAN, ERVING. Stigma: Notes on the
Management of Spoiled Identity. Englewood Cliffs, NJ: Prentice-Hall, 1963. 147 pp. Not concerned primarily with homosexuality, this influential work
deals in part with "passing" and the problems that arise from the
creation of the self under the constraints that require such a strategem. 2859. GUERIN, DANIEL. Shakespeare et Gide en
correction- nels essais. Paris: Scorpion, 1959. 127 pp. A French anarcho-socialist thinker's observations on the social and
cultural determination of the situation of homosexuals. 2860. HARRY, JOSEPH, and MAN SINGH DAS. Homosexuality in International
Perspective. New Delhi: Vikas, 1980. 134 pp. Nine essays of high quality on such topics as occupational choice,
employment discrimination, leisure, religion, public opinion, male
prostitution, and schools. This book is a reissue of a special number of International Review of Modern
Sociology, 9:2 (1979). 2861. HART, JOHN, and DIANE RICHARDSON. The Theory and Practice of
Homosexuality. Boston: Routledge and Kegan Paul, 1981. 206 pp. Collection of twelve papers written from a social construction viewpoint,
stressing divergent processes of socialization within present constraints of
gender identity. The writers tend to regard homosexuality as something that
is chosen and maintained, rather than constitutionally or biologically given.
They also emphasize everyday problems, which theory must confront. 2862. HAUSER, RICHARD. The Homosexual Society. London: The Bodley Head, 1962. 167 pp. Discerns a number of types in the English homosexual community: the
bisexual, the married man, the self-isolated homosexual, the "fully
sublimated" homosexual, prostitutes (with five subtypes), "sugar
daddies," prison "queers," pub and club types, pedophiles,
psychopaths, voyeurs, and transvestites. 2863. HOCQUENGHEM, GUY. Homosexual Desire. Translated by Dangoor Daniella. New York: Schocken,
1980. 144 pp. A somewhat opaque French New Left essay, which grounds the social fear
of homosexuality in the replication of the Oedipal family under capitalist
conditions and finds the transgressive essence of the homosexual challenge in
anality. 2864. HOFFMAN, MARTIN. The Gay Worlds Male Homosexuality and the Social
Construction of Evil. New York: Basic Books, 1968. 212 pp. A pioneering ethnographic account of gay life in San Francisco,
written by a then-closeted gay psychiatrist (1935-1981). Now somewhat dated
and judgmental. 2865. HOOKER, EVELYN. "Male Homosexuals and Their
'Worlds,'" in: Judd Marmor (ed.), Sexual Inversions The Multiple
Roots of Homosexuality. New York: Basic Books, 1965, 83-107. Based on Los Angeles observations,
describes homosexual public meeting places; patterns of public encounter and
interaction; and communication and socialization. Stresses the gay bar as a
key institution. Dr. Hooker was perhaps the first important American social
scientist to ad opt the working hypothesis that homosexuals were not per se
neurotic or maladjusted, an idea one can see emerging in her early paper,
"A Preliminary Analysis of Group Behavior of Homosexuals," Journal of Psychology, 42 (1956), 217-25. 2866. HUMPHREYS, LAUD. Out of the Closets: The
Sociology of Homosexual Liberation. Englewood Cliffs, NJ: Prentice-Hall, 1972. 176 pp. Attempts, perhaps prematurely, a typological placement of gay
liberation as a social movement. Characterizes the reality of the oppression
of homosexuals, which is conceived as having three facets: legal-physical,
occupational, and ego-destructive. See also his: "Exodus and Identity:
The Emerging Gay Culture," in: Martin Levine (ed.), Gay Men: The Sociology of Male
Homosexuality. New York: Harper and Row, 1979, pp. 134-47. 2867. KING, DAVE. "Condition, Orientation, Role or
False Consciousness? Models of Homosexuality and Transsexualism," Sociological Review, 32 (1984), 38-56. Posits four models, two regarding the deviant behavior as acceptable
(orientation; role) and two as unacceptable (condition; false consciousness). 2868.
LAUTMANN,
RÜDIGER (ed). Seminar: Gesellschaft und
Homosexualität. Frankfurt am Main:
Suhrkamp, 1977. 570 pp. In this group endeavor, coordinated and largely written by Professor
Lautmann, the chief emphasis is on the many facets of discrimination against
homosexuals (law, medicine, church, media, etc.). There is also a major section
on the response and resistance on the part of homosexuals themselves. 2869. LEVINE, MARTIN P. "The Sociology of Male
Homosexuality and Lesbianism: An Introductory Bibliography," JH, 5 (1980), 249-75. An exemplary annotated bibliography, the items included being chosen
for their impact in terms of being widely read, cited, or discussed. Contains
about 140 entries, grouped into three general sections: theoretical perspectives,
methodological assessments, and social world. 2870. LEVINE, MARTIN P. (ed.). Gay Men: The Sociology of Male
Homosexuality. New York: Harper and Row, 1979. 346 pp. Organized around a minority-group framework, this collection of 21
papers (many of them reprints) describes many aspects of gay men's place in
society. There are two main sections: Oppression (negative public opinion;
legal sanctions; therapeutic abuse); and Social World (identity formation;
lifestyles; gathering places; political movements). 2875. LINDNER,
ROBERT. Must You Conform? New York: Rinehart, 1956. 210 pp. Psychoanalytic approach to the problem of conformity, which was much
discussed in the Eisenhower years. Perceives homosexuality as a response of
nonconformity or rebellion; since the conformance pressure in society is becoming
more intense, so is homosexuality. 2876. MARMOR, JUDD (ed.). Homosexual Behavior: A Modern
Reappraisal. New York: Basic Books, 1980. 416 pp. Collection of twenty-three essays, a few retained from the
Marmor-edited Sexual Inversion: The Multiple Roots of Homosexuality (New York: Basic Books, 1965; 358 pp.). (A
comparison of what has been retained and what omitted offers an interesting
commentary on changing fashions in social science.) While some of the essays,
particularly in the biological and general social science areas, are useful
surveys of current knowledge, others are trivial and inadequate. 2877. MILESKI, MAUREEN, and DONALD J. BLACK. "The
Social Organization of Homosexuality," Urban Life and Culture, 1 (1972), 187-202. Employing participant-observation data, attempts to deal with social
mechanisms that facilitate homosexual behavior. 2878. MURRAY, STEPHEN. Social Theory, Homosexual Reality. New York: Scholarship Committee, Gay Academic
Union, 1984. 83 pp. (Gai Saber Monographs, 3) Concise but searching review of leading theories—Movement, symbolic
interactionist, functionalist, psychoanalytic—as they bear on sociology and
anthropology. This pithy and challenging monograph is an essential guide to
the strengths and weaknesses of the social theory of same-sex behavior. 2879. PAUL, WILLIAM, et al (eds.). Homosexuality: Social,
Psychological and Biological Issues. Beverly Hills, CA: Sage, 1982. 416 pp. A collective work, conceived under the sponsorship of the Society for
the Psychological Study of Social Issues, with the aim of providing a fair,
comprehensive, and positive synthesis of the achievements of the social and
biological sciences. Unfortunately, the individual essays— which are often
valuable in themselves—are not organized into a coherent whole. 2880. PLUMMER, KENNETH. Sexual Stigma: An Interactionist Account. Boston: Routledge and Kegan Paul, 1975. 258 pp. Applying symbolic interactionism, Plummer concentrates on such
questions as stigma, career construction, subcul- tural development, and
interactional problems—with special emphasis on homosexuality. Although it
ranks as an important contribution, this book originated as a doctoral
dissertation, and is not exempt from the longueurs that afflict the species. 2881. PLUMMER, KENNETH (ed). The Making of the Modern Homosexual. Totowa, NJ: Barnes and Noble, 1981. 280 pp. A collection of eight essays, some new and others reprinted, by
English academics who are generally adherents of the social construction
approach. Influenced by Michel Foucault, they hold that, although same-sex
behavior may have existed throughout human history, the concept of the
"homosexual" is a particularly modern idea which has structured
recent patterns of experience. Culture, rather than nature, is the decisive
shaping force. 2882. SAGHIR, MARCEL T., and ELI ROBBINS. Male and Female Homosexuality:
A Comprehensive Investigation. Baltimore: Williams and Wilkens, 1973. 341 pp. Interpreting interviews with 89 gay men and 57 lesbians in Chicago and
San Francisco, seeks to determine developmental attributes, sexual behavior,
romantic attachments, psychopathology, family background, and demographic
characteristics . 2883. SCHOFIELD, MICHAEL GEORGE. Sociological Aspects of Homosexuality: A
Comparative Study of Three Types of Homosexuals. Boston: Little, Brown, 1965.
244 pp. In this British study, 150 male homosexuals were considered in three
groups of 50: those in prison, those currently under treatment, and those
who had never been in prison or under treatment. These were matched with several
control groups. Concludes that male homosexuals differ from male
heterosexuals mainly in the choice of sex object. See also his previous
monograph, published under the name of "Gordon Westwood," A Minority: A Report on the
Life of the Male Homosexual in Great Britain (London: Longmans, Green, 1960). 2884. WARREN, CAROL A. Identity and Community in the Gay World. New York: John Wiley, 1974. 191 pp. Explores ways in which members of
an upper-class gay community relate to each other and to the environing
straight world. Discusses the gay concepts of space and time; rituals,
interactions, and relationships; vocabulary, literature, and ideology; and
secrecy, stigma, and existential identity. 2885. WEEKS, JEFFREY. Sexuality and Its Discontents:
Meanings, Myths and Modern Sexuality. London: Routledge and Kegan Paul, 1985. 324 pp. Oscillating between present concerns and 19th and 20th century
foundations, Weeks attempts to unravel the web of historical, theoretical,
and political forces that have produced the contemporary "crisis of
sexual meanings and values." Includes discussion of the New Right, the
pornography conflict, Freud, and the sexological tradition (which the author
holds has ascribed an inflated impor- tance to sexuality). See also his: "The Development
of Sexual Theory and Sexual Politics," in: Mike Brake (ed.), Human Sexual Relations: Towards
a Redefinition of Sexual Politics (New York: Penguin, 1982), 293-309. 2886. WEINBERG,
MARTIN S., and COLIN J. WILLIAMS. Male Homosexuals: Their
Problems and Adaptations. New York: Oxford University Press, 1974. 316 pp. Working under the
auspices of the Kinsey Institute (compare A. Bell and M. Weinberg, above),
the authors collected data on ca. 2400 homosexuals in the United States, the
Netherlands, and Denmark. The book attempts a comparative ethnographic sketch
of gay life in each of the three countries, and provides data on passing,
self- esteem, social skills, social isolation, employment, and problems of
adjustment. The clandestinity in which the majority of homosexuals continue to
exist poses problems of sampling, inasmuch as a truly random sample is
usually impossible to attain. Despite every precaution, there remains the
possibility that data are skewed toward the more overt, easily accessible
types. This danger is particularly evident in the so-called "convenience
sample," whereby responses are collected from self-selected volunteers.
Conversely, publication of some which have been obtained by surreptitious
means may violate "closet rights." 2887. BEAUCHAMP, TOM L., et al (eds.). Ethical Issues in Social
Science Research. Baltimore: Johns Hopkins University Press, 1982. For the controversy centering on Laud Humphreys' monograph Tearoom Trade, see pp. 11-16, 22, 24, 28, 32, 34, 35, 60, 61, 85,
105, 106, 108, 110, 118, 154, 168, 169, 211, 212, 241, 250, 251, 258, 259.
See also: Myron Glazer, The Research Adventure: Promise and Problems of
Field Work (New York: Random House, 1972), pp. 107-24. 2888. BELL, ALAN P. "Research in Homosexuality: Back
to the Drawing Board," Archives of Sexual Behavior, 4 (1975), 421-31. Calls for more sophisticated methodology, permitting the disclosure of
the multifariousness of ways in which individuals are homosexual, and for
awareness of the propensity of theoretical bias to cloud our comprehension
of the quality of real experience. 2889. BULLOUGH, VERN. "Challenges to Societal
Attitudes toward Homosexuality in the Late Nineteenth and Early Twentieth
Centuries," Social Science Quarterly, 58 (June 1977), 29-44. "Changes in attitudes of the scientists
involved are dependent not only upon internal developments within a field but
[upon] basic changes within society itself." 2887. BURDICK, J. ALAN, and STEWART D. YVETTE.
"Differences between 'Show' and 'No Show' Volunteers in a Homosexual
Population," Journal of Social Psychology, 92 (1974), 159-60. Results indicate that homosexuals who voluntarily participate as
research subjects may be more neurotic and extraverted than the total
population of homosexuals. 2888. DE CECCO, JOHN, and MICHAEL G. SHIVELY. "From
Sexual Identity to Sexual Relationships: A Contextual Shift," JH, 9:2-3 (1983-84), 1-26. Pointing out various sorts of problems that have arisen in existing
work, urges redirection of research on sexual identity so that the focus is
on sexual relationships. 2889. KAYAL, PHILIP. "Homophobia in Sociology," Gai Saber, 1:2 (1977), 95-98. The sociological profession lacks a humanistic and com- prenhensible
base from which to operate; if something cannot be quantified, it is not
studied. In addition, present procedures tend to enshrine the parochial views
of heterosexual males as eternal verities. 2890. KOERTGE, NORETTA. "The Fallacy of Misplaced
Precision," JH, 10:3-4 (1984), 15-21. Complaints about confusing and inappropriate terminology in research
on homosexuality may be invalid, inasmuch as it has been established that
other disciplines often make use of cluster concepts and fuzzy sets to grasp
reality. 2891. KOWALSKI, STAN (pseud.). "A Problem in Greek
Ethics and Methodology," Sociologists' Gay Caucus Newsletter, no. 22 (1980), 5-7. Weighs bias in samples of one's sexual partners against increased
confidence (validity) in behavior participation rather than relying on
self-reports. 2892. LEZNOFF, MAURICE. "Interviewing
Homosexuals," American Journal of Sociology, 62 (1956), 202-04. Overt homosexuals try to draw the interviewer into inter- clique
quarrels, while closeted ones are reluctant to participate. The researcher's
unfamiliarity with gay argot may lead to misunderstandings. 2893. MACDONALD, A. P., JR. "Reactions to Issuues Concerning
Sexual Orientations, Identities, Preferences, and Choices," Jfr, 10:3-4
(1984), 23-27. Cautions against monothematic explanations, which focus on single
causes to the exclusion of other contributory factors, and against rigid
dichotomies. 2894. RICHARDSON, DIANE. "The Dilemma of Essentiality
in Homosexual Theory," JH, 9:2-3 (1983-84), 79-90. Homosexuality has been viewed as a general state of being, as a state
of desire, as a form of behavior, and as a personal identification. These
conflicting views reflect difficulties with the essentialist approach, which
should be discarded. 2895. ROSS, MICHAEL W. "Retrospective Distortion in
Homosexual Research," Archives of Sexual Behavior, 9 (1980), 523-31. Concludes that sex-role rigidity and attitudes toward homosexuality
may play an important part in differences between a Swedish and an Australian
group that completed questionnaires. 2896. SAGARIN, EDWARD. "Ideology as a Factor in the
Consideration of Deviance," Journal of Sex Research, 4:2 (1968), 84-94. Contends that behavioral scientists have allowed their own values to
color their attitudes toward deviants; out of sympathy for the plight of the
deviant they have attempted to picture him as normal and unable to change. 2897. SIMON, WILLIAM, and JOHN H. GAGNON. "Homosexuality:
The Formulation of a Sociological Perspective," Journal of Health and Social
Behavior, 8:3 (1967), 177-85. Calls for abandonment of monothematic emphases on
single factors such as etiology in favor of a flexible approach recognizing
the variety of individual development within the maturational process. 2898. SUPPE, FREDRICK. "In Defense of a
Multidimensional Approach to Sexual Identity," JH, 10:3-4 (1984), 7-14. Argues that current conceptions need to be examined in the context of
the Verstehen controversies in the philosophy of science. In this light, some
current notions are revealed as unidimensional. 2899. TROIDEN, RICHARD R. "Self, Self-Concept,
Identity, and Homosexual Identity: Constructs injNeed of Definition and
Differentiation," JH, 10:3-4 (1984), 97-109. Uses symbolic interactionist theory to clarify the terms self, self-concept, identity, and homosexual identity, 2900. WARREN, CAROL A. "Fieldwork in the Gay World:
Issues in Phenomenological Research," Journal of Social Issues, 33:4 (1977), 93-107. Field research in the gay world is shaped by two factors: the secrecy
of many gay groups and the stigmatization both of gays and of researchers who
study them. While entry into public gay settings is often easy, entry into
more private arenas depends upon the establishment of interpersonal
relationships. See also her: "Observing the Gay Community," in:
Jack D. Douglas (ed.), Research on Deviance (New York: Random House, 1972), 139-63; and Carol
A. Warren and Paul K. Rasmusèen, "Sex and Gender in Field Research," Urban Life, 6 (1977), 349-69. 2901. WEINBERG, MARTIN A. "Homosexual Samples: Differences
and Similarities," Journal of Sex Research, 6 (1970), 312-25. While the clandestinity of much homosexual life precludes
representative sampling, the researcher can approach this desideratum by
pooling samples derived from gay bars, homosexual clubs, and mail
organizations, each involving a different type of subject. 2902. WESTWOOD, GORDON (pseud, of Michael Schofield). "Problems of Research into
Sexual Deviations," Man and Society, 1 (1961), 29-32. Discusses bureaucratic obstacles, problematic cooperation with other
individuals and agencies, sampling, questionnaire construction, level of
information elicited, interviewer bias, and interpretation of the data. The emergence of gerontology as a serious body of knowledge is rather
recent. In the case of gay men and lesbians it has disclosed one important
counterintuitive finding: homosexual individuals do not become more unhappy as they grow older, but in many instances
adjust well to the aging process. Social work intervention has also developed
in this sphere, though only in an incipient stage. 2903. ALMVIG, CHRIS. The Invisible Minority: Aging and Lesbianism. Utica, NY: Syracuse University Press, n. d. (ca. 1983). 198 pp. After
a review of the literature, presents results of questionnaire administered in
1977 and 1978 to 74 lesbians over 50. Almost half had been married at one
time, little religious belief was held, most had adequate income, and few
reported serious psychological problems. 2904. BARACKS, BARBARA, and KENT JARRATT (eds.). New York:
Teachers and Writers Collaborative, 1980. 115 pp. Anthology of journals, poetry, fiction, and other literature by four
women and four men, produced in the writing workshop of Senior Action in a
Gay Environment (SAGE). 2908. BAUDRY,
ANDRE. "Le
vieillard homophile," Arcadie, no. 141 (September 1965), 367-72. Observations on homosexual aging by the founder of the Arcadie group. 2909. BENNETT, KEITH C., and NORMAN L. THOMPSON.
"Social and Psychological Functioning of the Ageing Male
Homosexual," British Journal of Psychiatry, 137 (1980), 361-70. Findings from 478 Australian male homosexuals do not support the
stereotype of the older male homosexual (i.e., disengagement from the
homosexual world, loneliness, rejection, depression, and unhappiness). 2910. BERGER, RAYMOND M. Gay and Grays The Older
Homosexual Man. Urbana: University of Illinois Press, 1982. 233 pp. Interpretive sociological study, followed by in-depth profiles of six
men. Concludes that the stereotypes of the life of the older gay man as
lonely and hopeless are wide of the mark. See also his: "Psychological
Adaptation of the Older Homosexual Male," JH, 5 (1980), 161-75; "Realities of Gay and
Lesbian Aging," Social Work, 29 (1984), 57-62; and "The Unseen Minority:
Older Gays and Lesbians," Social Work, 27 (1982), 236-42. 2911.
BRECHER,
EDWARD M., et al. Love, Sex and Aging. By Edward M. Brecher and the Editors of Consumer Reports. Boston: Little, Brown, 1984. 384 pp. Reports findings of a 1978-79 study, conducted with 4,246 volunteer
respondents, aged 50 to 93. 2912. CALLEJA, M. A. "Homosexual Behavior in Older
Men," Sexology, 34 (1967), 46-48. Personal interviews with 1,737 older men, mostly in Spain, show that
homosexuality is more common among them than is usually supposed. For some,
homosexual activity began only after 60 years of age. 2913. CATALANO, DONALD, SHARON RAPHAEL, and MINA K. ROBINSON. Bibliography: Lesbian and Gay
Aging. San Francisco: National Association of Lesbian and Gay Gerontologists,
[1982]. 10 pp. Mimeographed list recording books (including a few novels),
articles, theses, and papers. 2914. FRANCHER, J. SCOTT, and JANET HENKIN. "The Menopausal
Queen: Adjustment to Aging and the Male Homosexual," American Journal of
Orthopsychiatry, 43 (1973), 670-74. Extensive interviews with ten over-50 male homosexuals, suggest that
they commonly experience a "life crisis" early in their development
and are therefore less affected by the trauma of role loss that occurs for
most men in later life. 2915. FRIEND, RICHARD A. "GAYging: Adjustment and the
Older Gay Male," Alternative Lifestyles, 3 (1980), 231-48. Reports on interviews with 43 self-identified older
gay men in relation to coming out, support systems, and sex- role
flexibility.
GWENWALD, MORGAN.
"The SAGE Model for Serving Older Lesbians and Gay Men," Journal of Social Work and
Human Sexuality, 2:2-3 (1983-84), 53-61. Gives the history and character of New York's Senior Action in a Gay
Environment (SAGE), which was founded in 1977. A small number of paid staff
work with a large group of volunteers to provide a monthly social event,
publicity and outreach programs, discussion and writing groups, financial
planning, and intake and matching of new volunteers.
HADER, MARVIN.
"Homosexuality as Part of Our Aging Process," Psychiatric Quarterly, 40 (1966), 515-24. Interview^ with 23 Jewish males, 73 to 94 years old, suggest that
homosexual interests increase in old age among men.
HARRY, JOSEPH, and
WILLIAM DEVALL. "Age and Sexual Culture among Homosexually Oriented
Males," Archives of Sexual Behavior, 7 (1978), 199-209. Utilizing data from 243 males from the Detroit area, finda that the
thesis that gay men are heavily youth-oriented has been exaggerated.
Preference for younger partners varies according to social status, lifestyle,
and other factors.
KANTROWITZ, ARNIE.
"Gay and Gray," Advocate, no. 192 (June 16, 1976), 21, 29. First of several articles in this issue on gay seniors. See also: Judy
MacLean, "National Conference on Lesbian and Gay Aging," Advocate, no. 334 (January 7, 1982), 15-17.
KELLY, JAMES.
"The Aging Male Homosexual: Myth and Reality," Gerontologist, 17 (1977),
328-32. A study of 241 gay men found little evidence to suggest that being
homosexual itself causes problems in old age, but
that societal stigma does.
KIMMEL, DOUGLAS.
"Adult Development and Aging: A Gay Perspective," Journal of Social Issues, 34 (1970, 113-30. Studies older homosexual men using D. J. Levinson's concept of
developmental periods. Finds that stereotypes are not valid for the majority.
See also his: "Life-History Interviews of Aging Gay Men," International Journal of Aging
and Human Development, 10 (1980), 239-48; and "Psychotherapy and the Older Gay
Man," Psychotherapy: Theory, Research and Practice, 15 (1978), 386-402. 2922. LANER, MARY R. "Growing Older Female: Heterosexual and Homosexual," JH, 4 (1979), 219-35, 267-75.
Analyzed the age-related content of personals advertisements placed by
heterosexual and homosexual women. Contrary to popular notions, lesbians
were not found to be seeking young partners. See also her: "Growing
Older Male: Heterosexual and Homosexual," Gerontologist, 18 (1978), 496-501, showing a similar method and
results. 2923. LEVY, NORMAN J. "The Middle-aged Male
Homosexual," Journal of the American Academy of Psychoanalysis, 7 (1970), 405-18. Discussion from the point of view of depth
psychoanalysis. 2924. MINNIGERODE, FRED A. "Age Status Labeling in
Homosexual Men," JH 1 (1976), 273-76. Asked 95 gay men between 25 and 68 years of age to classify
themselves as young, middle-age, or old. The popular suggestion of
accelerated aging in homosexual men was not supported. 2925. MINNEGERODE, FRED A., and MARCY R. ADELMAN. "Elderly
Homosexual Women and Men: Report on a Pilot Study," Family Coordinator, 27 (1978), 451-56. Reports on in-depth interviews with eleven 60-77-year-old homosexual
women and men, examining physical change and physical health; work,
retirement, and leisure time; social behavior; psychological functioning;
sexual behavior; and personal perspective on the life course. 2926. RAPHAEL, SHARON, and MINA K. ROBINSON. "The
Older Lesbian: Love Relationships and Friendship Patterns," Alternative Lifestyles, 3 (1980), 207-29. Concentrates on support and intimacy as fostered by love relationships
and friendship patterns. Based on a sample of twenty California women over
50. 2927. VACHA, KEITH (ed.). Quiet Fire: Memories of Older Gay Men. Trumansburg, NY: Crossing Press, 1985. 219 pp. From over 100 interviews, Vacha has selected 17 to show a range of
experiences and attitudes. 2928. VINING, DONALD. "The Advantages of Age," Advocate, no. 313 (March 19, 1981), 22-23. Subjective observations by the diarist and playwright, now retired
from his office job. 2929. WEG, RUTH B. (ed.). Sexuality in the Later Tears:
Roles and Behavior. New York: Academic Press, 1983. 299 pp. Although there is no single paper concerned with gay and lesbian aging
in this collection, the subject is frequently discussed in context. See
index. 2930. WEINBERG, MARTIN S. "The Male Homosexual: Age-Related
Variations in Social and Psychological Characteristics," Social Problems, 17 (1970), 527-37. A sample recruited in San
Francisco and New York refutes negative views of older gay men, who are found
in fact to be better adjusted psychologically than younger gay men, though
they are more likely to be withdrawn from the gay world. The tendency of homosexual men ("sodomites") to gather in
taverns, where they encountered other socially marginal elements, seems to
begin in 15th-century Europe, though these locales did not come into their
own until the 19th century. The modern gay bar seems to be a distinctively
northern European and North American institution. In much of North America,
the bars are, apart from the gay churches, the only homosexual gathering
places. Regulation of alcohol consumption has repeatedly brought homosexual
bar patrons into conflict with the police and, in the wake of Prohibition,
also the underworld (see XXI.A). 2931. ACHILLES, NANCY. "The Development of the
Homosexual Bar as an Institution," in: John H. Gagnon and William Simon
(eds.), Sexual Deviance. New York: Harper and Rciw, 1967, pp. 228-44. In large cities different kinds of bars can specialize so as to serve
more specific functions. Facing the difficulties of underworld control and
police corruption, the community and the bar owners find cohesion in their
reaction to police hostility. Decor and personnel are important in establishing
the individual character of a bar. (Reflects her 1964 M.A. thesis, University
of Chicago). 2932. BEARCHELL, CHRIS. "Bar-Hopping," Body Politic, no. 77 (October 1981), 15-27. Traces changing patterns in Toronto lesbian bars over two decades. Unlike
the city's gay men's bars, the lesbian bars remain a combination of
straight-owned and "underground" membership clubs. Compare Nancy L.
Lisagor, Lesbian Identity in the Subculture of Women's Bars (unpublished Ph.D. dissertation, Sociology,
University of Pennsylvania, 1980; 244 pp.). 2933. BRANSON, HELEN P. Gay Bar. San Francisco: Pan- Graphic Press, 1957. 89 pp. The owner of a Los Angeles establishment with a homosexual (mostly
male) clientele describes her bar, comments on the problems of her customers,
and characterizes the types of people she meets. 2934. CARSWELL, PHILLIP. "Life behind Bars," Gay Commun- ity News (Melbourne), 2:4 (May 1980), 30-33. While it is
easy to conclude that the sole purpose of bars is for cruising, bars can
serve other purposes, and indeed have real potential for change. 2935. CAVAN, SHERRI. Liquor Licence: An Ethnography of Bar Behavior. Chicago: Aldine, 1966. 246 pp. Characterizes the nature of gay bars
in terms of the acceptability of displays of affection, milling, pickups, and
erotic behavior. Frequent comparisons with heterosexual bars are offered.
See also her "Interaction in Home Territories," Berkeley Journal of Sociology, 8 (1963), 17-32. 2936. DALLAS, MICHAEL, et al. De leerscene—een onder- zoek
naar de ontwikkeling van mannelijkheid. Amsterdam: University, Sociologisch Instituut,
1985. 105 pp. Theoretical and empirical considerations by a team of Amsterdam
graduate students on the leather scene, esp. as observed in the city's bars. 2937. HARRY, JOSEPH. "Urbanization and the Gay
Life," Journal of Sex Research, 10 (1974), 238-47. With increasing size of cities there is increasing specialization of
gay bars. In metropolitan cities bars cater to different age groups and
different lifestyles, and this diversity encourages migration of small town
gays to urban areas. 2938. HIGHLAND, JIM. "Raid!" Tangents, 2:4 (January 1967), 4-7. Account of the Black Cat raid by the Los Angeles police, which
triggered a street confrontation two years before the Stonewall riot that
involved several hundred people. 2939. HOOKER, EVELYN. "The Homosexual
Community," in: John H. Gagnon and William Simon (eds.), Sexual Deviance. New York: Harper and Row, 1967, pp. 176- 94. In the gay community, bars serve as sexual marketplaces; they are
centers of communication and social activity; and they function as induction,
training and integration centers for new members of the community. 2940. JACKMAN, JIM. "Missing the Ports of Call,"
in: Karla Jay and Allen Young (eds.), Lavender Culture. New York: Jove, 1978, pp. 150-54. Recollections of a gay bar in Worcester, MA. See also John Kelsey,
"The Cleveland Bar Scene in the Forties," ibid.,
146-49; and Thomas J. Noel, "Gay Bars and the Emergence of the Denver
Homosexual Community," Social Science Journal, 15 (April 1978), 59-74. 2941. MYRICK, FRED L. "Homosexual Types: An Empirical Investigation," Journal of Sex Research, 10 (1974), 226-37. Analyzing the attitudes of gay bar patrons, finds that homosexuality
exists on a continuum from complete concealment to complete disclosure. 2942. POULIQUEN, JEAN-PAUL. "La Tournée des bars," Gai pied, no. 103 (January 21-27, 1984), 24-27, 58. Problems of gay bars in Paris, including high costs and police
intimidation. 2943. READ, KENNETH E. Other Voices: The Style of a
Male Homosexual Tavern. Novato, CA: Chandler and Sharp, 1980. 212 pp. Closeted anthropologist's ostensibly reflexive ethnography of a
Seattle Tenderloin bar. 2944.
REITZES,
DONALD C., and JULIETTE K. DIVER. "Gay Bars as Deviant Community Organizations:
The Management of Interactions with Outsiders," Deviant Behavior, 4 (1982), 1-18. Interprets data collected in 10 Atlanta area bars to show the processes
used by the bars to define the role of outsiders and manage interaction
through the use of location, announcement, screening and interior design.
Four outsider roles were identified: antagonist, guest, competitor, and
customer. 2945. SHILTS, RANDY. "Big Business: Gay Bars and
Baths Come Out of the Bush Leagues," Advocate, no. 191 (June 2, 1976), 37-38+. Gay liberation has meant increasing prosperity and visibility for
once clandestine gay meeting places. 2946. WEIGHTMAN, BARBARA A. "Gay Bars as Private
Places," Landscape (Berkeley), 24 (1980), 9-16. Physical aspects of the bars as home territories. In ancient Rome and in Islamic civilization public baths were
frequently patronized by those in search of homosexual contact, though few
seem to have been exclusively devoted to such traffic. The emergence of the
distinctively gay sauna (popular known as "the baths") seems to be
essentially a product of the last hundred years or so: as the need for public
baths among the general population decreased, the few remaining ones tended,
in many instances, to acquire an exclusively homosexual character. Outdoor
homosexual bathing areas may have their origin in the traditional "old
swimming holes" where men and boys bathed in the nude and therefore
without female companionship. 2947. BERUBE, ALAN. "The History of the Gay
Bathhouse," Coming Up! (San Francisco), 6:3 (December 1984), 15-19. Includes information on the Baker Steet Club Raid (1918) and Jack's
Baths in the 1930s and '40s, both in San Francisco. 2948. BOYD, JERRY T. The "P" Street Beach Handbook: The Art of
Gay Sunbathing in the Nation's Capital. Washington,DC: PSBH Associates, 1985. 130 pp.
Campy tidbits revolving around "our national gay park." 2949. BROWN, RITA MAE. "Queen for a Day: A Stranger
in Paradise," in: Karla Jay and Allen Young (eds.), Lavender Culture. New York: Jove, 1978, 69-76. Lesbian writer visits New York gay sauna clandestinely and emerges
with a positive impression. In this volume, see also: Arthur Bell, "The
Gay Bath Life Gets Respectability," pp. 77-84. 2950. CANAVAN, PETER. "The Gay Community at Jacob
Riis Park," in Vernon Boggs et al. (eds.), The Apple Sliced. South Hadley, MA: Berger and Garvey, 1984, pp.
67-82. Reports 1974 interviews with gay men regarding nude bathing and
pickups at a popular New York City beach. 2951. COSSOLO, FELIX, and IVAN TEOBALDELLI. Cercando il paradiso perduto. Milan: Gammalibri, 1981. 113 pp. Photographs, interviews, poetry, and articles from the "gay
summer camps" at the beach in Greece and Southern Italy, 1978-80. 2952. DECTER, MIDGE. "The Boys at the Beach," Commentary, 70:3 (September 1980), 36-48. Hostile account of gay lifestyle on Fire Island, NY, prior to 1970,
attempting to discredit gay liberation by associating it with "drugs,
S-M, and suicide." 2953. DOUGLAS, JACK D., and PAUL K. RASMUSSEN. The Nude Beach. Beverly Hills, CA: Sage, 1977. 244 pp. All the big nude beaches have "gay scenes," and both heterosexuals
and homosexual greatly prefer sexual segregation (pp. 184-90). See also: Lee
Baxandall, World Guide to Nude Beaches and Recreation (New York: Harmony House, 1983; 220 pp.). 2954. FLEMING, THOMAS. "Criminalizing a Marginal
Community: The Bawdy House Raids," in: Thomas Fleming and L. A. Visano
(eds.), Deviant Designations: Crime, Lav and Deviance in Canada. Toronto: But- terworth, 1983, pp. 37-60. A case study of the 1979-81 Toronto raids of gay bathhouses
demonstrates that the pursuit of deviant groups, and the selection of previously tolerated behaviors for
criminalization, carry significant costs for society, the criminalized, and
the police. See also Gerald Hannon, "Rage, Raids and Bawdyhouses,"
in: Ed Jackson and Stan Persky (eds.), Flaunting It! (Vancouver: New Star, 1982), pp. 273-94. 2942. KEPNER, JIM. "Gay Beach" [by "Frank
Golovitz, pseud.], ONE Magazine, 6:7 (July 1958), 5-10. Captures something of what it was like at a popular late 1950s beach
in Southern California. 2943. NESTLE, JOAN. "Lesbian Memories 1: Riis Park,
New York City, ca. 1960," Common Lives/Lesbian Lives (Summer 1983), 14-16. Recollections of Riis Park when it was the beach for gay men as well as many lesbians of New
York. 2944. NICHOLS, JACK. Welcome to Fire Island. New York: St. Martin's Press, 1976. 148 pp. A noted gay journalist offers appropriately breezy comment on the
noted Long Island resort. 2945. RUMAKER, MICHAEL. A Day and Night at the Baths. Bolinas, CA: Grey Fox Press, 1978. 81 pp. Perhaps the best subjective
account of the pre-AIDS experience of visiting a gay baths (NYC). See also:
Richard Goldstein, "A Night at the Continental Baths," New York, 6 (January 8, 1973), 51-55. 2946. STYLES, JOSEPH. "Outsider/Insider: Researching
Gay Baths," Urban Life, 8 (1979), 135-52. A young sociologist becomes a participant-observer at a bathhouse.
Presents an eight-step typology of relationship escalation, from sexual
encounter tout court to long- term relationship. 2947. WEINBERG, MARTIN S., and COLIN J. WILLIAMS.
"Gay Baths and the Social Organization of Impersonal Sex," Social Problems, 23 (1975), 124-36. Conditions described by patrons as ideal include: protection; ample,
accessible opportunities; a known, shared, and organized reality; bounding of
the experience; congeniality; and a comfortable physical setting. F. BISEXUALITY The term bisexuality has an uncertain conceptual status, in that while
there are heterosexual and homosexual acts, there is no such thing as a
bisexual act. Determination of who is a bisexual may then be attempted either
on the basis of comparative frequency of the two types of acts or inner
psychic attunement. The controversial concept of universal bisexuality stems from psychoanalytic speculation
(see XVII.B-C). 2948. ALTSHULER, KENNETH Z. "On the Question of
Bisexuality," American Journal of Psychotherapy, 38 (1984), 484-93. Contends that sexual choice is dichotomous, rather
than continuous, and inferences based on a continuum are untenable.
Self-labeling of oneself as bisexual is held to be a matter of face-saving,
status, and denial of conflict. 2949. BISHOP, GEORGE. The Bisexuals. Los Angeles: Century, 1964. 154 pp. Pulp account displaying then-current popular attitudes. See also: D.
Wise, Understanding Bisexuality (Los Angeles: Centurion Press, 1971; and D. Wise
and J. Jar- dine, The Bisexual Male (Los Angeles: Centurion Press, 1971). 2950.
BLUMSTEIN,
PHILIP, and PEPPER SCHWARTZ. "Bisexuality in Men," Urban Life, 5 (1976), 339-58. Data from 75 men shows that they commonly exhibit sexual behavior
inconsistent with self-identity. The authors suggest that the term
"ambisexuality" should replace "bisexuality," since
equal attraction to men and women is virtually nonexistent; instead one finds
varying degrees of eroticization of both genders. See also their: "Bisexuality:
Some Social Psychological Issues," Journal of Social Issues, 33 (1977), 30-45. 2951.
BLUMSTEIN,
PHILIP, and PEPPER SCHWARTZ. "Lesbianism and Bisexuality," in: Erich
Goode and Richard R. Troiden (eds.), Sexual Deviance and Sexual Deviants. New York: William R. Morrow, 1975, pp. 278-95. As in the parallel study with men, data from 75 women show discordance
between sexual identity and sexual behavior. In the case of women there is
the complication that lesbian activists discourage bisexual behavior, while
sexual libertarians welcome it. 2952. BODE, JANET. View from Another Closet:
Exploring Bisexuality in Women. New York: Hawthorn Books, 1976. 252 pp. Semipopular,
anecdotal treatment. 2953. BREITNER, BURCHARD. Das Problem der Bisexual!- tat.
Vienna: M. Maudrich, 1951. 77 pp. Theoretical considerations from a
medical-psychiatric standpoint. 2954. DOUGLAS, JASON. Bisexuality. London: Canova, 1970. 191 pp. Popular but
informed presentation covering a broad range of subjects: the nature of bisexuality,the naking of a
bisexual, the all-round lover, the bisexual woman and man, the nymphomaniac
and the satyr, the bisexual in literature, and the future of bisexuality. 2955. FAST, JULIUS, and HAL WELLS. Bisexual Living. New York: M. Evans, 1975. 240 pp. Popular account for the titillation of the curious. See also:
Bernhardt J. Hurwood, The Bisexuals (Greenwich, CT: Fawcett, 1974; 208 pp.). 2956. HERDT, GILBERT. "A Comment on Cultural
Attributes and Fluidity of Bisexuality," JH, 10:3-4 (1984), 53-61. Presents examples from Melanesia as cross-cultural evidence in
relation to current debates. 2957. KAPLAN, GISELA T., and LESLEY J. ROGERS.
"Breaking Out of the Dominant Paradigm: A New Look at Sexual
Attraction," JH, 10:3-4 (1984), 71-75. Contends that genital organs are not the prime focus of sexual
attraction. Careful studies may reveal that sexual arousal is based on
criteria that transcend genital categories. 2958. KLEIN, FRED. The Bisexual Option: A Concept of One Hundred
Percent Intimacy. New York: Arbor House, 1978. 222 pp. Popular account proselytizing for bisexuality as the best of three
worlds, with discussions of literary treatments and list of "famous
bisexuals." 2959. KLEIN, FRITZ, and TIMOTHY J. WOLF (eds.). Two Lives to Lead: Bisexuality
in Men and Women. New York: Harrington Park Press, 1958. 255 pp. Collection of papers
treating theoretical issues; psychological aspects of bisexuality;
cross-cultural perspectives; women in marriages; men in marriages; bisexual
organizations; and bibliography. Claims to the contrary notwithstanding,
many of the authors seem to accept the concept of bisexuality as
unproblematic, avoiding the thornier problems. This volume is a reprint of
JH, 11:1-2 (Spring 1985). 2960. KOHN, BARRY, and ALICE MATUSOW. Barry and Alice: - Portrait of
a Bisexual Marriage. Englewood Cliffs, NJ: Prentice-Hall, 1980. 217 pp. Lightweight joint autobiography of two people, a Philadelphia couple,
who regard themselves as bisexual, though their modalities are clearly
different. 2961. MCINNESS, COLIN. Loving Them Both: A Study of
Bisexuality and Bisexuals. London: Martin Brian and 0'Keefe, 1973. 55 pp. Semisubjective study by an Anglo-Australian novelist, himself
bisexual, whose fictional writings show many insights into the sexual diversity found in contemporary London. 2962. PAUL, JAY P. "The Bisexual Identity: An Idea
without Social Recognition," JH, 9:2-3 (1983-84), 45-63. Asserts that the disadvantage self-identified bisexuals now face, that
of being marginal to the other groups, can be turned into an asset, in that
they are more able to adopt a broader and more integrated perspective on sexuality
and human relationships. 2963. ROSS, MICHAEL W. "Beyond the Biological Model:
New Directions in Bisexual and Homosexual Research," JH, 10:3-4 (1984), 63-70. Questions two assumptions: (1) that gender is the critical determinant
of a sexual relationship; and (2) that sexual orientation is an essential
condition. 2964. SPIERS, DUANE E. "The
No-Man's Land of the Bisexual," Corrective and Social Psychiatry and Journal of
Behavior Technology, Methods and Therapy, 22 (1976), 6-11. The bisexual person must struggle to find a livable lifestyle and an
adequate reference group for socialization. The bisexual person cannot easily
be located on Kinsey's 7-point scale. Clinicians working with bisexuals
should be careful not to "dichotomize" them. 2965. STEIR, CHARLES. "A Bibliography on
Bisexuality," JH, 11:1-2 (1985), 235-48. About 375 entries, mainly English-language, with occasional
annotations. This list, which spreads a broad net, should be consulted to
extend the selection included in the present work. 2966. STEKEL, WILHELM. Bi-Sexual Love. Translated from the German by James S. Van Teslaar.
Brooklyn: Physicians and Surgeons Book Co., 1934. 359 pp. Popularization of Stekel's psychoanalytic ideas, including the claim
that "All persons are bisexual." (p. 27). This view was to be
rejected by many analysts in North America, beginning with Sandor Rado.
Stekel provides many case histories and dream analyses. 2979A. WOLFF, CHARLOTTE. Bisexnalitys A Study. London: Quartet Books, 1977. 245 pp. Psychoanalytically oriented observations,
chiefly on women, by a British-based therapist, with roots in the Central
European tradition of sexology. A much-discussed problem in the 19th and first half of the 20th
century was the blackmailing of homosexuals, either by professionals or by
opportunistic amateurs, A related peril was entolage, the theft of valuable items from homosexuals in
the assurance that the victims would not dare report the loss to the police.
The emphasis on blackmail in the propaganda of the early homophlle movement
boomer- anged in the late 1940s and after, when the fear that homosexuals
could be the object of pressure by Communist intelligence services made them
"security risks" in the eyes of counterintelligence. With more
tolerant social attitudes, accompanied by easing of legal sanctions, these
problems have fortunately become rare in Western countries, even if the
discriminatory regulations remain. Travelers to Third World nations sometimes
experience these difficulties. 2972. BURCHARD, ERNST. Erpresser-Prostitution.
Berlin: Kampf-Verlag, 1905. 14 pp. Short study on blackmail as practiced by male prostitutes, one of the most serious problems faced by homosexuals in Wilhelmine Germany. See also Ludwig Frey, "Zur Character- isierung des Rupfertums," JfsZ, 1 (1899), 71-96; and Magnus Hirschfeld, "Aus der Erpresserpraxis," JfsZ, 13 (1912-13), 288-315. 2973. CANLER, LOUIS. Mémoires de Canler, ancien chef du Service de sûreté. Edited by
Jacques Brenner. Paris: Mercure de France, 1968. 551 pp. See Chapter 33, "Les antiphysiques et les chanteurs." While homosexuality as such was not criminal in
France, those practicing it, esp. foreign visitors from countries where it
remained illegal, were often victimized. These memoirs of the French security
chief (1797-1865) were first published in 1862 in a censored version, which
was immediately banned. An English translation also appeared: Autobiography of a French
Detective from 1818 to 1858 (London: Ward and Lock, 1862; 315 pp.). 2974.
HENTIG,
HANS VON. Die Erpressung.
Tubingen: Möhr,
1959. 318 pp. Discussion of blackmail in postwar Germany, with particular emphasis
on the sexual aspects. 2975. KIN-BERG, OLOF. "On the So-Called Vagrancy:
Medico- Sociological Study," Journal of the American Institute of Criminal Law
and Criminology, 24 (1933), 409-27, 552-83. See pp. 418-20, 553-55 on prostitutes, including the practice of entolage (theft from clients). 2976. LEGG, W. DORR. "Blackmailing the
Homosexual," Sexology, 33 (1967), 554-56. Discussing the situation at that period, from his observations at
ONE, Inc., Legg comments that then-existing legal codes and social mores
provided a screen behind which the blackmailer could operate with impunity, threatening not only
the confirmed homosexual but also those who had casual or unique experiences
with their own sex. See also: Dane Möhler, "Homosexual Blackmail," Tangents, 2 (December 1966), 4-8. 2977. REINHOLD, JOSEPH. Die Chantage: ein
Beitrag zur Reform der Strafgesetzgebung.
Berlin: Guttertag, 1909. 118 pp. Urges legal reform to prevent blackmail. 2978. SCHIMA, KONRAD. Erpressung und
Nötigung: eine kriminologische Studie.
Vienna: Springer, 1973. 264 pp. See pp. 121-26 (homosexuality as basis for blackmail) and 178-80
(hustlers as blackmailers). 2979. TARDIEU, AMBROISE. Etude médico-légale sur les attentats aux moeurs. 7th edition.
Paris: Bail- lière, 1878. 296 pp. This study by an influential French specialist in forensic medicine
(first ed. 1857) has a section (pp. 194-294) ,
entitled "De la
pédérastie et de la sodomie." The author's first-hand observations of the homosexual underworld of the Paris of
1845-75 are supplemented by material drawn from foreign authors, in
particular the French translation of Johann Ludwig Casper, Traité pratique de médecine légale (Paris: Baillière, 1862; 2 vols.). Much of the book is concerned with the question of
determining the physical traces of sodomitical practices in suspects. Of the
302 subjects examined by the author 101 had "habitudes à la fois actives et passives,"
that is to say they were "modern" homosexuals well before the
advent of the homophile movement and the psychiatric notion of sexual
inversion. The book establishes beyond a doubt that a vast homosexual
subculture flourished in mid-19th century Paris despite the depredations of
professional blackmailers and occasional harassment by the police. 2980.
TRESCKOW,
HANS VON. "Erpressung auf sexueller Grundlage," in:
Zur Reform des Sexualstrafrechts. Berlin: Bircher, 1926, pp. 177-86. Informed comment on blackmail of homosexuals, written by the Chief of
the Berlin Police, together with his suggestions for reform. Tresckow also
published Von Fürsten und anderen Sterblichen. Erinnerungen eines
Kriminalkommissars (Berlin: Fontane, 1922; 240 pp.), which deals with the background of
the homosexual scandals that rocked the German capital in the first decade of
the 20th century, and in particular the Harden-Eulenburg affair, the heroes of which had figured in the dossier kept by the
Berlin vice squad. His personal experience with the problem of blackmail led
him to support Hirschfeld's efforts to obtain repeal of Paragraph 175. The tendency of adult homosexuals and lesbians to form dyadic pairs
can be studied beginning in the 18th century, when homosocial forms,
necessarily clandestine, began to be influenced by new notions of
companionate (heterosexual) marriage. It was only in the second half of the
20th century, when large numbers of unmarried heterosexual pairs began to be
visible, that the study of "the couple" --whether straight or
gay--became a fashionable theme of social science. Conceptually, the fading
of strong moralizing condemnation has fostered the abandonment of the earlier
sharp contrast between the positively charged married pair and the negatively
charged fornicating/adulterous pair (including homosexuals); now there is a
neutral, tripartite division: married heterosexuals; unmarried, cohabiting
heterosexuals; and cohabiting homosexuals—all ranged under the umbrella
category of couples. (For the controversial, perhaps even quixotic concept of
homosexual marriage, see XX.L). 2981. ALAIN (pseud.). "Du couple homophile," Arcadie, no. 100 (April 1962), 210-24. Essay on male homosexual couples in France. See also: An- toine D'Arc,
"Essai socio-psychologique sur le couple homosexuel," Arcadie, no. 196 (April 1970), 178-82; no. 197 (May 1970),
234-42; no. 198 (June 1970), 287-95. 2982. BABUSCIO, JACK. "Splitting Up," Gay News (London), no. 220 (July 23-August 5, 1981), 22-23;
no. 221 (August 6-19, 1981), 24-25. The fact that many gays and lesbians do, contrary to popular
stereotypes, form at least one deep dyadic relationship in their lives is
attested by the intensity and complexity of the feelings that accompany and
last beyond the experience of breaking up. 2983.
BLUMSTEIN,
PHILIP, and PEPPER SCHWARTZ. American Couples: Money, Work,
Sex. New York:
William Morrow, 1983. 656 pp. Reflects data collected from over 4000 heterosexual couples, nearly
1000 male couples, and 788 female couples. The book is divided into five
major sections: how couples handle finances; how they balance work and
relationship commitments; their sexual behavior; a follow-up study; and
vignettes of twenty couples. 2984. BOYDEN, TOM, et al. "Similarity and Attraction
in Homosexual Males: The Effects of Age and Masculin- ity-Femininity," Sex Roles, 10 (1984), 939-48. Interpretation of a questionnaire completed by 110 gay men suggests
that long-term partner preference among homosexual males is determined by
the same principles that guide heterosexual selection. 2985. CARDELL, MONA. "Sex-Role Identity, Sex-Role Behavior,
and Satisfaction in Heterosexual, Lesbian, and Gay Male Couples," Psychology of Women Quarterly, 5 (1981), 488-94. Satisfaction was related to the amount and type of sex- role behavior,
but unrelated to gender, background characteristics, BSRI score, or couple
type. 2986. CLARKE, LIGE, and JACK NICHOLS. Roommates Can't Always Be
Lovers: An Intimate Guide to Male-Male Relationships. New York: St. Martin's Press, 1974. 194 pp. Light essays on male-male relationships alternating with letters to
and from Clarke and Nichols when they were editors of Gay, a now-defunct New York City periodical. 2987. DAILEY, DENNIS M. "Adjustment of Heterosexual
and Homosexual Couples in Pairing Relationships: An Exploratory Study," Journal of Sex Research, 15 (1979), 143-57. In a limited sample, homosexual couples showed significantly lower
levels of success than did married couples. Lesbians had lower scores on
self-esteem and generalized contentment, suggesting that being lesbian and a
woman may be a twofold problem. See also his: "Legitimacy and Permanence
in the Gay Relationship: Some Intervention Alternatives," Journal of Social Welfare, 4:2-3 (1977), 81-88. 2988. DE CECCO, JOHN P., and MICHAEL G. SHIVELY. "A
Study of Perceptions of Rights and Needs in Interpersonal Conflicts in
Homosexual Relationships," JH, 3 (1978), 205-16. Interviews with 91 men and 34 women indicated that the right most
frequently perceived as important was participation in decision making, and
the need most frequently perceived was power. 2989. DENNENY, MICHAEL. Decent Passions: Real Stories about Love. Boston: Alyson, 1984. 223 pp. Interviews with a a gay couple, a lesbian couple, and an interracial
heterosexual couple emphasizing love and passion. See also his: Lovers: The Story of Two Men. Interviews with Philip Gefter and Neil Alan Marks
(New York: Avon, 1979; 159 pp.). 2990. FALBO, TONI, and LETITIA A. PEPLAU. "Power
Strategies in Intimate Relationships," Journal of Personality and
Social Psychology, 38 (1980), 618-28. Presents a model of power strategies, which is of uncertain value
inasmuch as no differences were disclosed in this dimension between
homosexuals and heterosexuals. 2991. "Gay Couple Counseling," Homosexual Counseling Journal, 1:3 (1974), 88-139. Condensed
proceedings of a conference sponsored by the Homosexual Community Counseling Center in May 1974. 2992. HARRY, JOSEPH. "Decision Making and Age Differences
among Gay Male Couples," JH, 8:2 (1982) 9-21. In an exploration of patterning of attractions among 1,556 gay men,
age was found to be the major criterion defining pools of potential erotic
and romantic partners. Moreover, age defined the dominance structure in a
relationship. 2993. HARRY, JOSEPH. Gay Couples. New York: Praeger, 1984. 152 pp. Based on a study of over 1000 Chicago men, the author finds support
for the "resource theory" of family dynamics; the homogamous selection
hypothesis; and predominant nonexclusiveness (which is not necesarily a
negative factor). Also treats cohabitation; gender-role playing; intimacy;
and masculinity/femininity. See also: Joseph Harry and Robert Lovely,
"Gay Marriages and Communities of Sexual Orientation," Alternative Lifestyles, 2 (1979), 177-200; and Joseph Harry, "Gay Male
and Lesbian Relationships," in: Eleanor D. Macklin and Roger H. Rubin
(eds.), Contemporary Families and Alternative Lifestyles (Beverly Hills, Ca: Sage, 1983), 216-34. 2994. IHARA, TONI, and RALPH WARNER. "Gay
Couples," in: The Living Together Kit. Second ed. Occidental, CA: Nolo Press, 1979, pp.
184-200. Practical advice in the context of today's joint living
arrangements. 2995. JENSI, MEHRI S. "Role Differentiation in Female
Homosexual Quasi-Marital Unions," Journal of Marriage and the
Family, 36 (1974),
360-67. Interviews with 34 lesbians record adherence to butch/ femme
role-differentiation pattern. 2996. JONES, RANDALL W., and JOHN E. BATES.
"Satisfaction in Male Homosexual Couples," JH, 3 (1978), 217-24. Records the development of a Gay Relationship Questionnaire. 2997. LANER, MARY R. "Permanent Partner Priorities:
Gay and Straight," JH, 3 (1977), 21-39. In a survey of two groups of students it was found that heterosexuals
and homosexuals look for the same qualities in partners, but misperceive the
priorities of others. 2998. LEWIS, ROBERT A., et al. "Commitment in
Same-Sex Love Relationships," Alternative Lifestyles, 4 (1981), 22-42. In a questionnaire study of 32 lesbians and 50 gay men who had lived
in coupled relationships for at least six months, lesbians scored higher than
gay men on three separate indices of commitment, but on the whole there were surprisingly few differences between the two groups. 2999. MCWHIRTER, DAVID P., and ANDREW M. MATTISON. The Male Couple: flow
Relationships Develop. Englewood Cliffs, NJ: Prentice-Hall, 1984. 341 pp. Based on a five-year program of interviews with 156 male couples
living in Southern California. The study outlines a sequence of six stages in
which the couples are claimed to pass over many years. 3000. MENDOLA, MARY. The Mendola Report: A Hew Look
At Gay Couples. New York: Crown, 1980. 269 pp. Journalistic presentation of gay male and lesbian lifestyles, based
on some 400 couples. 3001. MORRIS, VICKI. "Helping Lesbian Couples Cope
with Their Jealousy," Women and Therapy, 1:4 (1982), 27- 34. Explores special factors that may engender jealousy in a lesbian
relationship, and offers a speculative treatment model (declaring feelings,
clarifying misinformation, consciousness raising,
negotiation of needs and rights, and individual therapy as needed). 3002. NANDA, SERENA, and J. SCOTT FRANCHER. "Culture
and Homosexuality: A Comparison of Long Term Gay Male and Lesbian
Relationships," Eastern Anthropologist, 33 (1980), 139-52. In a study of 20 male and 20 female homosexuals of New York City, who
have been in committed same-sex relationships for at least ten years, it was
found that the men came out earlier than the lesbians, had much less heterosexual
experience, and far more frequently engaged in casual sex encounters. 3003. NESTLE, JOAN. "Butch-Fem Relationships: Sexual
Courage in the 1950s," Heresies, no. 12 (1981), 21-24. Based on personal experience, Nestle argues that butch-fem
relationships among lesbians were complex erotic statements, not mere
mimicry of heterosexual dyads. 3004. NICHOLS, MARGARET. "The Treatment of Inhibited
Sexual Desire (ISD) in Lesbian Couples," Women and Therapy, 1:4 (1982), 49-66. Even in a loving, considerate relationship ISD may occur. The author
recommends H. S. Kaplan's technique of sensate focus exercises as therapy. 3005. PENDERGRASS, VIRGINIA E. "Marriage Counseling
with Lesbian Couples," Psychotherapy: Theory, Research and Practice, 12 (1975), 93-96. Highlights fears of dependence and role conflict; the acceptance of a
particular dominant or submissive role is not necessarily consonant with
acceptance of a corresponding sex identity. 3006. PEPLAU, LETITIA ANN. "What Homosexuals Want in
Relationships," Psychology Today, 15 (March 1981), 28-34, 37-38. "Whatever their sexual preferences, people in intimate
relationships today struggle to reconcile a longing for closeness with a
desire for independence and self-realization." See also Peplau et al.,
"Loving Women: Attachment and Autonomy in Lesbian Relationships," Journal of Social Issues, 34:2 (1978), 71-27. 3007. PEPLAU, LETITIA ANN. "Research on Homosexual
Couples: An Overview," JH, 8 (1982), 3-8. Reviews current literature on gay male and lesbian couples, which is
presented as moving in accord with the trend in sociology away from the
deviance perspective to one studying "alternate lifestyles." 3008.
PINGEL,
ROLF, and WOLFGANG TRAUTVETTER. Homosexuelle
Partnerschaftens Eine empirische Untersuchung.
Berlin: Verlag Rosa
Winkel, 1986. 112 pp. Investigates the functioning of dyadic relationships of gay men in
West Germany. 3009. REECE, REX, and ALLEN E. SEGRIST. "The
Association of Selected 'Masculine' Sex-Role Variables with Le ngth of Relationship in Gay Male Couples," JH, 7 (1981), 33-47. Separated respondents to a
self-report battery scored lower on cooperation than members of ongoing
relationships and were more likely to be androgynous. See also Reece:
"Coping with Couplehood," in: Martin P. Levine (ed.), Gay Men (New York: Harper and Row, 1979), 211-21. 3010. SCHULLO, STEPHEN A., and BURTON L. ALPERSON.
"Interpersonal Phenomenology as a Function of Sexual Orientation, Sex,
Sentiment, and Trait Categories in Long-Term Dyadic Relationships," Journal of Personality and
Social Psychology, 47 (1984), 983-1002. Applied the Extended Personal Attributes Questionnaire (modified) to
20 gay male, 20 lesbian, and 40 heterosexual couples. 3011. SILVERSTEIN, CHARLES. Man to Mans Gay Couples in America. New York: Quill, 1981. 347 pp. Providing extended profiles of individual gay
couples, explores their problems and satisfactions. 3012. SONENSCHEIN, DAVID. "The Ethnography of Male
Homosexuals' Relationships," Journal of Field Research, 4:2 (1968), 69-83. An associate of the Kinsey Institute offers a typology of gay-male
relationships based on field work in a Southwest city. 3021. STARN, JACK. "Homosexual Couple: Jack Baker and Michael McConnell," Look, 35 (January 26, 1971), 69-71. Journalist's profile of a Minnesota pair who attempted
(unsuccessfully, but with much publicity) to obtain a legal marriage. 3022. TANNER, DONNA M. The Lesbian Couple. Lexington, MA: Lexington Books, 1978. 142 pp. From in-depth interviews with 24 lesbian couples in Chicago, explores
how homosexual women form and maintain dyadic relationships. Indicates how
they define household tasks, financial arrangements, and sexual patterns. 3023. THERRIAULT, JACQUES. Homosexualité et vie à deux. Montreal: Leméac, 1981. 239 pp. A kind of "letter" on the life of homosexual
couples addressed to heterosexuals. 3024. TULLER, NEIL R. "Couples: The Hidden Segment of
the Gay World," JH, 3 (1978), 331-43. Of 15 couples interviewed, found that the partners met in social as
contrasted to sexual settings, that relationships were more common for
females than for males, that females required sexual fidelity more than
males, that males desired children more than females, and that butch- femme
role playing was absent. 3025. UHRIG, LARRY. The Two of Us. Boston: Alyson, 1984. 140 pp. Commonsense guide for couples concerning "affirming, celebrating
and symbolizing gay and lesbian relationships" in what are sometimes
termed holy unions. Author is pastor of the Metropolitan Community Church,
Washington, DC. Sociologists and criminologists have taken deviance to refer to
behavior that is prohibited, censured, stigmatized, or penalized. The
boundaries of the concept, and its appropriateness for homosexuality, have
not been settled; it originated in the wish for a neutral term that would not
imply approval or disapproval of the activity, whatever the attitude of the
environing society might be. Critics of the approach assert that it offers
little more than a jumble of "nuts, sluts, and perverts." For the
study of homosexuality, however, its value may lie in the fact that it does
make one think of analogies and differences between homosexuals and other
groups. Compare the discussion of the minority concept, XIV.S. 3026. BEST, JOEL, and DAVID F. LUCKENBILL. "The Social Organization of Deviance," Deviant Behavior, 2 (1982), 231-58. Distinguishes three forms:
individual deviance, deviant exchange, and deviant exploitation. 3027. BRYANT, CLIFTON (ed.). Sexual Deviancy in Social Context. New York: New Viewpoints, 1977. 292 pp. Reprints 21 papers,
generally of current interest in spheres of popular culture and street life.
Two are of direct interest, by Alan J. Davis (on jailhouse rape) and Kenneth
N. Ginsburg (on hustling). 3028. CLINARD, MARSHALL B., and ROBERT F. MEIER. Sociology of Deviant
Behavior. Fifth ed. New York: Holt, Rinehart and Winston, 1979. 613 pp. \ In this updated edition of a popularly used textbook, homosexuality is presented as a form of social deviance. 3029. COCHRANE, RAYMOND. "Values as Correlates of
Deviancy," British Journal of Social and Clinical Psychology, 13 (1974), 257-67. Arguing that value systems are potentially the most profitable
variable to study in the etiology of deviance, examines four groups:
prisoners, delinquents, drug users, and homosexuals. 3030. DURBIN, STEVE C. "The Moral Continuum of
Deviancy Research," Urban Life, 12 (1983), 75-94. Discussion of the Chicago school of sociology approach to taxi-dance
halls, including Saul Alinsky's observations on a homosexual one. 3031. FARRELL, RONALD A., and JAMES F. NELSON. "A
Causal Model of Secondary Deviance: The Case of Homosexuality," Sociological Quarterly, 17 (1976), 109-20. Self-definition among homosexuals is shown not to be related to
secondary deviance, but affected by perceived rejection. Implications for the
labeling, anomie, and social and cultural support theories are discussed. See
also: Ronald A. Farrell and Clay W. Hardin, "Legal Stigma and Homosexual
Career Deviance," in: M. Riedel and T. P. Thornberry (eds.), Crime and Delinquency:
Dimensions of Deviance (New York: Praeger, 1974), 128-40; and Farrell, "Deviance
Imputations, Early Recollections and the Reconstruction of Self," International Journal of
Social Psychiatry, 30 (1984), 189-99. 3032. GOODE, ERICH, and RICHARD TROIDEN. Sexual Deviance and Sexual
Deviants. New York: William Morrow, 1975. 409 pp. In this anthology prepared by two academic sociologists with a special
interest in the theme, see "Coming Out among Lesbians" by Denise M.
Cronin (pp. 268-77); "Femininity in the Lesbian Community" by
William Simon and John H. Gagnon (pp. 256-67); "The Homosexual" by
Barry M. Dank (pp. 174-210); "Lesbianism" by Goode and Troiden (pp.
229- 37); "Lesbianism and Bisexuality" by Philip W. Blumstein and
Pepper Schwartz (pp. 278-95); and "Male Homosexuality" by Goode
and Troiden (pp. 149-60). 3033. JACOBS, JERRY (ed.). Deviance: Field Studies and
Self-Disclosures. Palo Alto, CA: National Press, 1974. 190 pp. A series of readings on deviant behaviors—prostitution, drug
addiction, homosexuality, etc.—and the way in which they are handled by
courts and other bureaucratic agencies. 3034. KELLY, DELOS H. Deviant Behavior: Readings in
the Sociology of Deviance. New York: St. Martin's Press, 1979. 769 pp. Reprints articles by Robert Emerson, Charles McCaughy and James
Skipper, Jay Corzine and Richard Kirby, and Albert Reiss (pp. 334-44, 478-88,
574-628). 3035. SCHUR, EDWIN M. The Politics of Deviance:
Stigma Contests and the Uses of Power. Englewood Cliffs, NJ: Prentice-Hall, 1980. 241 pp. An influential sociologist deals with such topics as control through
commitment, the role of the state and the power elite, stigma contests,
stereotypes and propaganda, and deviant protest movements. Homosexuality is
discussed throughout (see esp. pp. 212-27). With its broad range and many
references, this volume is useful for orientation. 3036. SIMMONS, JERRY L. Deviants. Berkeley: Glendessary Press, 1969. 134 pp. A study of stereotyping of homosexuals and other social deviants on
the part of students. The study was replicated on the East Coast by Russell
Ward, "Typification of Homosexuals," Sociological Quarterly, 20 (1979), 411-23. 3037. WINSLOW, ROBERT W., and VIRGINIA WINSLOW. Deviant Reality: Alternative
World Views. Boston: Allyn and Bacon, 1974. 335 pp. Intended as an introduction to psychological and sociological
theories of deviance, presents thirteen types of deviant behavior (including
homosexuality) through transcripts of interviews and discussions with
individuals involved. Study of the problems of the handicapped as persons is quite recent.
Handicapped homosexuals face two special problems: double discrimination; and
difficulties in achieving sexual contact. With regard to nonhandicapped persons, there has been little academic study of the erotic
interest in crippled and physically defective partners. 3027. BARTHELL, CHARLES N. "Deaf and Gay: Where is My
Community?" Readings in Deafness, no. 9 (1983), 147-57. Attitudes of the hearing and deaf population toward deaf sexuality and
gay deaf persons, the incidence of homosexuality in the deaf community, the
attitude toward homosexuals as reflected in American Sign language and patterns
of support among the deaf/gay population. 3028. BROWNE, SUSAN E., et al. (eds.). With the Power of Each Breath:
A Disabled Women's Anthology, Pittsburgh: Cleis, 1985. 360 pp. Personal testimonies from over 50 contributors affirming self-worth
and women's solidarity. See also: Jo Campling (ed.), Images of Ourselves: Women
with Disabilities Talking. (Boston: Routledge and Kegan Paul, 1981.) 3029. CHESLEY, ROBERT, and DAVID GLASBERG. "See Me!
Hear Me!" Advocate, no. 274 (August 23, 1979), 17-20. The gay blind and deaf ask to be heard. See also: Neal Twyford,
"The Double Closet: Disabled Gays Who Cope with Coming Out—Twice," ibid., no. 336 (February 18, 1982), 18-21. 3030. DANNENBERG, J. "Jugendliches Stottern und Homosexualität," Jahrbuch der Psychoanalyse: Beiträge aur Theorie und Praxis, 1 (1960), 253-74. The problems of young stutterers in relation to homosexuality
. 3031. DE LA CRUZ, FELIX F., and GERALD D. LAVECK (eds.). Human Sexuality and the
Mentally Retarded. New York: Brunner/Mazel, 1973. 347 pp. This volume represents the
proceedings of a conference sponsored by the National Institute of Child
Health and Human Development, U. S. Department of Health, Education and
Welfare. See index for references to homosexuality. 3032. DIXON, DWIGHT. "An Erotic Attraction to
Amputees," Sexuality and Disability, 6 (1983), 3-19. Reviews data from a study conducted in 1976 by an
enterprise selling amputee fantasy materials. Those who returned the
questionnaire were typically married white males of above-average educational
and occupational achievement. 3033. FRECHETTE, DAVE. "Fat and Gay," Advocate, no. 419 (April 30, 1985), 29-31. One man's story of life in the "fat lane," along with a look
at some of the organizations for gay heavyweights. 3045. HANNON, GERALD. "No Sorrow, No Pity: The Gay Disabled," in: Ed Jackson and Stan Persky (eds.), Flaunting It! Vancouver: New Star, 1982, pp.64-71. Hard-hitting
profiles of gay disabled, esp. blind persons. 3046.
HESLINGA, K.
Wij zijn niet van steen: seksuele problematiek van de gehandicapte mens.
Leiden: Stafleu, 1972. 212 pp. Sexual problems of the handicapped, who are
"not made of stone." 3047. MILAM, LORENZO WILSON. The Cripple Liberation Front
Marching Band Blues. San Diego: Mho and Mho Works, 1984. 219 pp. Searing memoirs of an adolescent polio victim who, after much anguish,
reconstructed his life as a productive gay man. 3048. RIVLIN, MARK. "The Disabled Gay: An
Appraisal," Sexuality and Disability, 3 (1980), 221-22. Discusses the effects of attitudinal prejudice on disabled homosexual
clients, the activities of two British organizations for them, and the
problems created by grouping disabled homosexuals with disabled
heterosexuals. 3049. ZAKAREWSKY, GEORGE. "Patterns of Support among
Gay and Lesbian Deaf Persons," Sexuality and Disability, 2 (1979), 178-91. For deaf gay men and lesbians, assimilation into the homosexual
subculture can be as difficult as assimilation into the hearing world
because the same prejudices permeate both. The subject of friendship clearly parallels that of homosexuality,
though experientially the two are usually found to be distinct. Some favor a
new term, homosocial- ity, to include both same-sex friendship and homosexual attraction. The
subject was extensively canvased in ancient Greece and Rome, where sex
segregation meant that most significant friendships were between two people
of the same sex (see also III.C). In the middle ages (see III.D)
"special friendships" developed in monasteries and nunneries; their
homosexual character is uncertain, and clearly
varied from case to case. See also the discussion of gay clergy, VII.F. 3050. ADAMS, MARGARET. Single Blessedness: Observations on the Single
Status in Married Society. New York: Penguin, 1978. 264 pp. Social worker's report on in-depth
interviews with 27 unmarried men and women in Boston, New York, and Phila- delphia, including the male-female and homosexual
friendships. 3051. AELRED OF RIEVAULX. Spiritual Friendship. Translated by M. E. Laker.
Introduction by Douglass Roby. Kalamazoo, MI: Cistercian Publications, 1974.
144 pp. This study by an Anglo-French Cistercian (1110-1167) is justly
regarded as a landmark in the "special friendship"
tradition—though it is problematic whether it can be annexed without
anachronism to a "gay" sensibility. See, e.g., Kenneth C. Russell,
"Aelred, the Gay Abbot of Rievaulx," Studia Mystica, 5:4 (Winter 1982), 51-64. 3052. ALGER, WILLIAM ROUNSEVILLE. The Friendships of Women, Boston: Roberts Brothers, 1875. 416 pp. See "Friendships of Woman with Woman" and "Pairs of
Female Friends" (pp. 266-363). This remarkably rich source on passionate
friendships between women was first published in 1867. 3053. ARIES, ELIZABETH J., and FERN L. JOHNSON.
"Close Friendship in Adulthood: Conversational Content between Same-Sex
Friends," Sex Roles, 9 (1983), 1183-96. Results of a questionnaire completed by 62 male and 74 middle-aged
adults support sex-stereotypical assumptions about the nature of male-male
and female-female conversations (i.e.,the former being about business,
sports and other "objective" concerns; the latter being more
intimate and personal). 3054. ARISTOTLE. Nicomachean Ethics. Translated by H. Rackham. Cambridge, MA: Harvard
University Press, 1975 [1934]. 650 pp. Books 8 and 9 (pp. 450-575) offer a clasic statment on the mutuality
of friendship, based on equality, which time is required to solidify.
Concentrates on close, deep friendships. 3055. AVRILLON, JEAN-BAPTISTE-ELIE,
FATHER. Traités de
l'amour de Dieu à l'égard des hommes, et de l'amour du prochain, Paris: Pierres, 1740. 430 pp. Discusses "particular friendships" on pp. 347-92. 3056. BAB,
EDWIN. Die gleichgeschlechtliche Liebe (Lieblingminne):
ein Wort über ihr Wesen und ihre Bedeutung.
Berlin: Schildeberger, 1903. 79 pp. Defends a concept of Lieblingminne (a neo-medieval expression, sometimes rendered "chivalric love"), rejecting earlier medical theories. See also his: Frauenbewegung und Freundesliebe: Versuch einer Lösung des geschlechtlichen Problems (Berlin: Brand, 1904; 24 pp.); reprinted in Lesbianism and Feminism in Germany, 1895-1910 (New York: Arno Press, 1975). 3057. BARKAS, JANET L. Friendship: A Selected,
Annotated Bibliography. New York: Garland, 1985. 135 pp. List of 670 English-language items, many annotated. Not strong on
homosexuality, but useful for comparative study. 3058. BELL, ROBERT R. Worlds of Friendship. Beverly Hills, CA: Sage, 1981. 216 pp. Holds that friendship has become more important in modern American
society "because of the weakening of many kinship ties." 3059. BERNIKOW, LOUISE. Among Women. New York: Harmony Books, 1980. 196 pp. On intimate friendships, chiefly among writers. See pp. 155-92,
281-85. 3060. BLUEHER. HANS.
Die Rolle der Erotik in der männlichen Gesellschaft: eine Theorie der menschlichen
Staatsbildung nach Wesen und Wert.
Jena: Eugen Diederichs, 1917-19. 2 vols. Influential, though sometimes murky work of a significant German
homosexual theorist. Stresses the importance of male bonding in the genesis
of the state as opposed to the family, which is grounded in heterosexual
relations with reproduction as its aim. 3061. BRAIN, ROBERT. Friends and Lovers. New York: Basic Books, 1976. 287 pp. Includes cross-cultural discussion of ritual friendship. The author,
an Australian, is not well disposed to homosexual behavior. 3062. BRY, ADELAIDE. Friendship: How to Have a
Friend and How to Be a Friend. New York: Grosset and Dunlap, 1979. 193 pp. In this popular work, see pp. 42, 68-69, 78, 81, 89, 161-62. 3063. CHARLIER, YVONNE. Erasmus et l'amitié d'après sa correspondance. Paris: Les Belles Lettres, 1977. 358 pp. Friendship in Erasmus of Rotterdam (ca. 1466-1536) as revealed by
his correspondence (in which homoerotic subtexts have sometimes been
detected). 3064. CICERO. "On Friendship," in: De senectute, De amicitia, De divinatione. Translated by William Armistead Falconer. Cambridge, MA: Harvard
University Press, 1971 [1923], pp. 108-224. Following Aristotle, Cicero—writing in 44 B.C.—stresses that
self-sufficiency is essential for friendship, which requires respect, virtue,
and honesty. For an anonymous translator-commentator's relevant glosses, see Cicero's Laelius: with a
Dialogue Preferring Friendship above Love, Written by the Translator (London: William Crooke, 1691). 3065. COTT, NANCY. The Bonds of Womanhood. New Haven: Yale University Press, 1977. 225 pp. Concentrating on middle-class Protestant New Englanders, charts the
emergence in 19th-century America of a "newly self-conscious and
idealized concept of female friendship." More recently, this matter has
been extensively treated by Lillian Faderman, Surpassing the Love of Hen:
Romantic Friendship and Love between Women from the Renaissance to the
Present. (New York: William Morrow, 1981; 496 pp.). 3066. CRONT, GHEORGHE. Institutii medievale
romänesti: Infrätivea de mo$ie; Juratorii. Bucharest: Editura Academiei Republicii Socialiste
Romania, 1969. 244 pp. (Biblioteca istoricä, 18). Account of Romanian blood-brotherhood rites and their role in feudal
society. See also: Harry Tegnaeus, Blood-Brothers: An Ethno-Sociological Study of the
Institution (New York: Philosophical Library, 1952; 181 pp.). 3067. DAVIDSON, LYNNE R., and LUCILE DUBERMAN.
"Friendship, Communication, and Interactional Patterns in Same-Sex
Dyads," Sex Roles, 8 (1982), 809-22. Specifies three levels of communication—topical, relational, and
personal—concluding that women relate on all three levels, while men relate
primarily on the topical level. 3068.
DIETRICH,
HANS (pseud, of Hans Dietrich Hellbach). Die
Freundesliebe in Literatur. Leipzig: Hellbach, 1931. 192 pp. Close friendships in German literature. (Originally the author's
thesis, University of Leipzig, 1930.) See also:
Wolfdietrich Rasch, Freundschaftskult
und Freundschaftsdichtung im deutschen Schrifttum des 18. Jahrhunderts vom
Ausgang des Barock bis zu Klopstock (Halle: Niemeyer,
1936); and Eva Thaer, Die Freundschaft
im deutschen Roman des 18. Jahrhunderts (Hamburg: Berngruber, 1917; 125 pp.). 3069. DUCK, STEVE. Friends for Life: The
Psychology of Close Relationships. New York: St. Martin's Press, 1983. 200 pp. Psychologist's delineation of the stages through which friendship
evolves. 3070. EISENSTADT, S. N. "Ritualized Personal
Relations:- Blood Brotherhood, Best Friends,
Comrades, etc.: Some Comparative Hypotheses and Suggestions," Han, 96 (1956), 90-96. Concludes that all these relationships share the fact that they are
"particularistic, personal, voluntary, and fully institutionalized
(usually in ritual terms)." Contrast Yehudi A. Cohen, "Patterns of
Friendship," in his (ed.): Social Structures and Personality (New York: Holt, Rine- hart and Winston, 1961), pp.
351-86. 3071. HINDY, CARL G. "Children's Friendship Concepts
and the Perceived Cohesiveness of Same-Sex Friendship Dyads," Psychological Reports, 47 (1980), 191-203. A study of 149 girls and 129 boys in grades 1-8 provides support for a
three-stage model: 91) the unilateral phys- icalistic; (2) the reciprocal
physicalistic; and (3) the reciprocal emotional. 3072. KLEINBERG, SEYMOUR. "Alienated Affections:
Friendships between Gay Men and Straight Women," Christopher Street, 4:3 (October-November 1979), 26-40. Finds strongly positive qualities in close friendships between gay men
and heterosexual women. Both find it a relationship purged of sexual tension,
and the men are able vicariously to explore aspects of the feminine that
intrigue them. See also, in the same issue, Roberta Pliner, "Tea and
Empathy: Friendships between Straight Women and Gay Men--Fag Hags, Friends or
Fellow Travelers?" ibid., pp. 15-25; and J. W.
Malone, below. 3073. HIRSCHFELD, MAGNUS. "Bündnissformen homosexueller Männer und Frauen," Geschlecht und Gesellschaft, 9 (1913), 465-80. On types of bonding between homosexual men and women. 3074.
LANKHEIT,
KLAUS. Das Freundschaftsbild der Romantik.
Heidelberg: Winter,
1952. 200 pp. On the custom of German intellectuals to commission dual portraits in
token of spiritual friendship (late 18th-19th century). 3075. LEPP, IGNACE. The Ways of Friendship: A Psychological
Exploration of Man's Most Valuable Relationship. New York: Macmillan, 1966. 127
pp. Views of a European Christian therapist, who considers homosexuality
resulting from sexual experiences with adolescent friends to be a
"deplorable aberration" and "a rare exception." 3076. LEWIS, ROBERT A. "Emotional Intimacy among
Men," Journal of Social Issues, 34 (1978), 108-21. Although men report more same-sex friendships than women do, most of
these are not close, intimate, or characterized by self-disclosure.
Homophobia may play a part in these limitations. 3077. MALONE, JOHN W. Straight Women/Gay Men: A
Special Relationship. New York: Dial Press, 1980. 207 pp. Perhaps the best of a series of popular publications on this type of
dyad, involving a gay man and a so-called "fag hag." See also:
Camilla Decarnin, "Interviews with Five Faghagging Women," Heresies, no. 12 (1981), 10-14; S, Kleinberg, above; Rebecca
Nahas and Myra Tur- ley, The New Couple: Women and Gay Men (New York: Seaview Books, 1979; 291 pp.); and
Laurie Stone, "Women Who Live with Gay Men," Ms. (October 1981), 103-04, 106, 108. 3078. MICHAELIS, DAVID. The Best of Friends: Profiles
of Extraordinary Friendships. New York: William Morrow, 1983. 318 pp. Journalistic account of the role of friendship in the lives of
fourteen men, most of them upper-class Americans . 3079. MILLER, STUART. Men and Friendship. Boston: Houghton Mifflin, 1983. 206 pp. Fear of homosexuality inhibits the formation of close bonds among men. 3080. MILLS, LAURENS J. One Soul in Bodies Twain: Friendship in Tudor
Literature and Stuart Drama. Bloomington, In: Principia Press, 1937. 470 pp. Standard, conventional work on this theme in English literature. See also: Hans Kliem, Sentimentale Freund- schaft in der Shakespeare-Epoche (Jena: Vopelius, 1915; 62 pp.; Ph.D. dissertation). 3081.
MONTAIGNE,
MICHEL DE. "Of Friendship," in: The Complete Essays of
Montaigne. Translated by Donald M. Frame. Stanford: Stanford University Press,
1958, pp. 135-44. Following Aristotle and Cicero, Montaigne (1533-92) insists that
friendship requires equality. Affection for women cannot be characterized as
friendship. See: Maurice Riveline, Montaigne et l'amitié (Paris: F. Alcan, 1939; 268 pp.). 3082. NESTOR, PAULINE. Female Friendships and Communities: Charlotte
Bronte, George Eliot, Elizabeth Gaskell. Oxford: Clarendon Press,
1985. Explores the attitudes to, and
representations of female friendships and communities in the lives and works
of three major 19th-century British women writers, set against the
contemporary controversy over single "superabundant" women and the
public debate about women's relationships with women. 3083. PEBWORTH, TED-LARRY. "Cowley's Davideis and the Exaltation of Friendship," in:
Raymond-Jean Fron- tain and Jan Wojcik (eds.), The David Myth in Western
Literature. West Lafayette, IN: Purdue University Press, 1980, pp. 97-200. The David and Jonathan relationship as portrayed in a Biblical epic of
1656. 3084. PLATO. "Lysis," in: Lysis, Sumposium, Gorgias. Translated by W. R. M. Lamb. Cambridge, MA: Harvard
University Press, 1975 [1925], pp. 1-71. Through the friendship of two boys, Lysis and Menaxenus, Plato
explores the concept of friendship. See: David Bolotin, Plato's Dialogue on
Friendship: An Interpretation of the Lysis, with a New Translation (Ithaca, NY: Cornell University Press, 1979; 227
pp.). See also passages in such other works of Plato as the Symposium,
Phaedrus, Timaeus, Republic, Statesman, and Laws. 3085. RAYMOND, JANICE G. A Passion for Friends: Toward a Philosophy of Female
Affection. Boston: Beacon Press, 1986. 275 pp. A radical feminist proposes a new theory of friendship— individual and
communitarian—based in part on historical evidence. 3086. SAHLI, NANCY. "Smashing: Women's Relationships
before the Fall," Chrysalis, no. 8 (1979), 17-27. Discusses a network of intimate supportive relationships among
American women during much of the 18th and 19th centuries, which was
subjected to increasing stress after ca. 1875. 3087. SIMMEL, GEORG. The Sociology of Georg Simmel. Translated by Kurt H. Wolff. New York: Free Press, 1950. 445 pp. The writings of the German sociologist Georg Simmel (1858- 1918) on
the dyad and the triad have been widely influential. He also dealt with the
"stranger" as social type, as well as the social psychology of
secrecy, subordination, and urbanism. 3088. STEINBERGER,
JOSEPH. Begriff und Wesen der Freundschaft bei
Aristoteles und Cicero, Erlangen: 1955. 175 pp. German dissertation analyzing the writings of the two most influential
writers on friendship from classical antiquity. 3089. TALBOT, SERGE. "La Fraternité du sang, " Arcadie, no. 194 (February 1970), 76-82. On homosexual aspects of blood brotherhood in a number of cultures. 3090. TAMASSIA, GIOVANNI. L'affratellamento (adelpho- poiia): studio
storico-giuridico. Turin: Fratelli Bocca, 1886. 77 pp. A comparative study of blood brotherhood in the context of
Mediterranean high cultures, emphasizing legal aspects. 3091. TAWHIDI, ABU HAIYAN 'ALI IBN MUHAMMAD AL-. Epitre as-Sadaqa wa s-sadiq (L'ami et l'amitié). Edited and annotated by Ibrahim Kailani. Damascus: Dar al-Fikr, 1964.
540 pp. Arabic text of a treatise on friendship, by an author who died in A.
D. 1023. 3092. TENNOV, DOROTHY. Love and Limerance: The Experience
of Being in Love. New York: Stein and Day, 1979. 336 pp. This much-noticed popular work launched a brief vogue of the neologism
"limerance" (in effect, romantic love), which differs from both lust and simple friendship. 3093. TIGER, LIONEL. Men in Groups. New York: Random House, 1969. 254 pp. An anthropologist's semisensationalized approach to male bonding,
which was treated as of major importance by the popular press when it
appeared, but which has proved to have little lasting resonance. 3094. TODD, JANET. Women's Friendships in Literature. New York: Columbia University Press, 1980. 434 pp. A solid work of
literary criticism, emphasizing British and American literature. 3095. WARREN, CAROL A. "Women among Men: Females in
the Male Homosexual Community," Archives of Sexual Behavior, 5 (1976), 157-69. Employed participant observation and interviewing to examine the types
of interaction and relationship among male homosexuals and lesbians and
female heterosexuals. Women gave four reasons for this involvement: greater
sociability of gay men compared to lesbians, a liking for traditionally
"feminine" women (whom they would meet in the cliques), the safety
factor, and functional reasons . 3096. WELTER, ERNST GÜNTHER. Bibliographie Freundschaf tseros einschliesslich Homoerotik, Homosexualität und die verwandte und vergleichende Gebiete. Frankfurt am Main: Dipa Verlag, 1964. 145 pp. Wide-ranging, but somewhat personal bibliography
on friendship stressing the homoerotic aspects but sharply distinguishing it
from overt "modern" homosexuality. In addition to print materials,
mostly German, has information on films, photograph^, and statues. 3097. WITTELS, FRITZ. "Collective Defense Mechanisms
against Homosexuality," Psychoanalytic Review, 31 (1944), 19-33. Asserts that covenants of men—religious, military, and small
groups—operate as a defense against homosexuality by sublimating or
desexualizing it. If the bonds of the group are weakened, overt homosexuality
can break through strongly, since the energy of the drive was fed in the
group. In recent years the term ghetto has undergone a perhaps excessive
expansion from its original definition as a quarter of late medieval cities
where Jews were required to live. Through journalistic usage, the expression
"gay ghetto" has gained a certain currency. Under this cat- egory are included various studies of the spatial organization
of urban homosexuals--whether or not these living and socializing
arrangements constitute ghettos in any strict sense of the term. 3098. BURKS, JOHN. "The Gay Mecca; But San Francisco
is Still No Utopia for Homosexuals," San Francisco (April 1970), 30-34, 42-45. Profile of the city just prior to the changes symbolized by the rise
of Castro Street. 3099. CASTELLS, MANUEL, and KAREN MURPHY. "Cultural
Identity and Urban Structure: The Spatial Organization of San Francisco's
Gay Community," in: Norman Fainstein and Susan Fainstein (eds.). Urban Policy under Capitalism. Beverly Hills, CA: Sage, 1982. Offers a neo-Marxist approach. See also Castells, The City and the Grassroots: A
Cross-Cultural Theory of Urban Social Movements (Berkeley: University of California Press, 1983;
450 pp.). 3100. EIGHNER, LARS. "The Ghetto and the Gay
Ghetto," Cabirion and Gay Books Bulletin, 12 (1985), 6-8. Sketch of historical and sociological conceptualizations of the idea.
Finds the first (metaphorical) use of the term "homosexual ghetto"
in Alfred A. Gross, Strangers in Our Midst (Washington: Public Affairs Press, 1962), pp.
131-33. 3101. FISCHER, CLAUDE S. To Dwell among Friends: Personal
Networks in Town and City. Chicago: University of Chicago Press, 1982. 451 pp. Influential contrast of personal networks in the San Francisco Bay
area. See esp. pp. 63-74, 237-40 on gay and black cultures in the city. 3102. GITECK, LENNY. "How Gay Are the Ghettos?" Advocate,
no. 275 (September 6,
1979), 15-18. Report on the current scene by a San Francisco journalist. See also:
Gordon Johnston, "Keys to the Ghetto," Christopher Street (January 1980), 21-32. 3103. HANSEN, EDWARD, et al. The Tenderloin Ghetto: The
Young Reject in Our Society. San Francisco: Council on Religion and the
Homosexual, 1966. 29 pp. Pioneering study of conditions in San Francisco's inner city, its
dweller (including many young gay males), and the availability of social
services. 3104. HARRY, JOSEPH, and WILLIAM B. DEVALL. The Social Organization of Gay
Males. New York:
Praeger, 1978. 223 pp. Integrates existing knowledge with data obtained from 243 Detroit gay
males and field work elsewhere. In addition to material on gay ghettos, offers information on
stereotypes, age preferences, and job discrimination. Shows that
differentiation of specialty bars is a predictable function of population
size. See also Joseph Harry, "Urbanization and Gay Life," Journal of Sexual Research, 10 (1974), 238-47. 3093. HELMER, W. J. "New York's Middle-Glass Homosexuals," Harper's, no. 226 (March 1963), 85-92. The public is becoming aware of "pansy patches" and
"fairy flats" in the large cities. 3094. KOPKIND, ANDREW. "Gay City on the Hill: Once
Upon a Time in the West," Nation (June 1, 1985), 672-67. The factors that produced the first incorporated municipality with a
gay majority on the city council (West Hollywood ,
CA) . 3095. LEE, JOHN ALAN. "The Gay Connection," Urban Life, 8:2 (July 1979), 175-98. Essays a theoretical overview, including boundaries, population,
territory, time, and niches. 3096. LEVINE, MARTIN P. "Gay Ghetto," JH, 4
(1979), 363-77. Spotmaps and fieldwork in five American cities (Boston, Chicago, Los
Angeles, New York, and San Francisco) document the existence of (chiefly
male) gay enclaves. Applies Wirth and Park's conceptualization to them. 3097. LEZNOFF, MAURICE, and W. A. WERTLEY. "The
Homosexual Community," Social Problems, 2 (1956), 257-63. Through 60 in-depth interviews and participant observation, charts
the social structure of Montreal homosexuals. Cliques provide social
support. 3098. MCNEE, BOB. "If You Are Squeamish," East Lakes Geographer, 19 (1984), 16-27.. A gay professional geographer's account of Denver's East Colfax strip.
See also his "It Takes One to Know One," Transitions: Quarterly Journal
of the Socially and Ecologically Responsible Geographers, 14:3 (Fall 1983, 12-15 (reflections on thirty-five
years of observation of the urban gay "turf"). 3099. MURRAY, STEPHEN 0. "Institutional Elaboration
of a Quasi-Ethnic Community," International Review of Modern Sociology, 9 (1979), 165-78. Discussion of the applicability of "community" in its
technical meaning with data on the residential and recreational ecology of
Toronto. 3100. VAN DYNE, LARRY. "Is DC Becoming the Gay
Capital of America?" Washington, 15 (September 1980), 96-101, 133, 141. Reflects the
enhanced visibility of the gay and lesbian community in the nation's capital, as well as the significance
of the black contribution. 3101. VOJIR, DAN. The Sunny Side of Castro Street: A Diary of Sorts. San Francisco: Strawberry Hill Press, 1982. 144 pp. Lightweight personal memoir, contrasting growing
up in a lower middle-class Chicago suburb with initiation into San
Francisco's premier gay ghetto. 3102. WARE, CAROLINE. Greenwich Village 1920-1930: A Comment on American
Civilization in the Post-War Years. New York: Harper and Row,
1965. 496 pp. An early mention of residential concentration of homosexuals, as part
of "Bohemia." (pp. 238, 252). This book was first published in 1935
(Boston: Houghton Mifflin). 3103. WEIGHTMAN, BARBARA. "Commentary: Towards a Geography
of the Gay Community," Journal of Cultural Geography, 1 (1981), 106-112. Offers a territorial approach. 3104. WILLENBECHER, THOM. "Gentrification: Has the
Gay Role in Urban Restoration Built Up a Backlash?" Advocate, no. 298 (August 7, 1980), 17-19. The straight press, relyingjon a number of misconceptions, tends to
portray the housing problem in a number of inner city areas as a struggle
between poor minorities and decadent well-healed gays. See also: Allen Young,
"Gentrification," Fag Rag, no. 26 (1979), 14-15, 30. The idea of identity has both an individual
dimension, the self-concept that is rooted in the human capacity for re-
flexivity and self-awareness, and a social dimension, in which identity is
shaped and reshaped in interaction with others. Apart from investigations by
sociologists and social psychologists, homosexuals themselves have evolved a
way of speaking and thinking about the process of identity formation, which
they term "coming out." The question remains complex and hard to
clarify, probably because it involves both contested areas of social theory
and the variable life adjustments of individuals in a society that continues
to stigmatize them. 3117. CASS,
VIVIENNE C. "Homosexual Identity: A Concept in Need of Definition,"
JH, 9:2-3 (1983-84), 105- 26. In a sphere where previous attempts have been characterized by
confusion, disarray, and ambiguity, it is necessary to undertake a serious
multidisciplinary approach. 3131. MILLER, BRIAN. "Adult Sexual Resocialization:
Adjustment toward a Stigmatized Identity," Alternative Lifestyles, 1 (1978), 207-34. Employing a social construction of reality perspective, explores the
lifestyles of gay husbands (coping strategies, coming out patterns, and gay
identity development) . 3132. MINTON, HARRY, and GARY J. MCDONALD.
"Homosexual Identity Formation as a Developmental Process," JH, 9:2-3 (1983-84), 91-104. Using J. Habermas' theory of ego development, conceptualizes
homosexual identity as a life-spanning development process in three stages
(egocentric, norm-acquisitive, and post-conventional). 3133. MONTEFLORES, C., and S. J. SCHULTZ. "Coming
Out: Similarities and Differences for Lesbians and Gay Men," Journal of Social Issues, 34 (1978), 59-72. Apart from significant similarities, differences between lesbians and
gay men in coming out are ascribed to gender role socialization and political
and legal concerns. 3134. MOSES, ALICE. Identity Management in Lesbian Women, New York: Praeger, 1978. 120 pp. Social work report which explores
the effect of labeling, exploring new concepts in the sphere of deviance. 3135. PONSE, BARBARA. Identities in the Lesbian World: The Social
Construction of Self. Westport, CT: Greenwood Press, 228 pp. Within a symbolic interactionist framework, the author sets forth the
process whereby lesbians develop a sexual identity, noting the difference
between identity and sexual behavior and bringing out the importance of reference
groups. See also her "Secrecy in the Lesbian World," Urban Life, 5 (1976), pp. 313-38. 3136. TROIDEN, RICHARD R. "Becoming Homosexual: A
Model of Gay Identity Acquisition," Psychiatry, 42 (1979), 362-73. Proposes the following sequence: sensitization; dissociation and
signification; coming out as self-definition; commitment. See also: Richard
R. Troiden and Erich Goode, "Variables Related to the Acquisition of a
Gay Identity," JH, 5 (1980), 383-392. 3137. WEINBERG, THOMAS S. Gay Men, Gay Selves: The Social Construction of
Homosexual Identities. New York: Irvington Press, 1983. 329 pp. Using interview material,
Weinberg presents sex activity as almost always preceding identity,
which—once it has been constructed—is not a static artifact but must be
maintained over one's career. Symbolic interactionist approach. See also his:
"On Doing and Being Gay: Sexual Behavior and Homosexual
Self-Identity," JH 4 (1978), Often dismissed as "promiscuity," impersonal sex contacts
have long been significant for gay men, for whom they can be documented as
early as the 12th century in Europe. In 20th-century North America,
impersonal or anonymous sex encounters have undergone significant
modifications through the universalization of the car culture—a nexus aptly
conveyed by the term "pick up." Uncommon among lesbians, impersonal
sex patterns among homosexual men are generally associated with high numbers
of partners. 3138. CORZINE, JAY, and RICHARD KIRBY. "Cruising the
Truckers: Sexual Encounters in a Highway Rest Area," Urban Life, 6 (1977), 171-92. Ethnographic study of encounters beween gay male "cruisers and
truckers i n the vicinity of St. Louis. 3139. DELPH, EDWARD W. The Silent Community: Public
Homosexual Encounters. Beverly Hills, CA: Sage, 1978. 188 pp. Field study of modes of communication in anonymous sexual encounters
in New York City (sex clubs, bathhouses, subway restrooms, backrooms, and
parks). 3140. GOODE, ERICH, and RICHARD R. TROIDEN. "Correlates
and Accompaniments of Anonymous Sex among Male Homosexuals," Psychiatry, 43 (1980), 51-59. From interviews with individuals from the New York City and
Minneapolis areas, an attempt is made to differentiate them according to
degree of promiscuity and dangers incurred (e.g. assault, venereal disease,
arrest). 3141. HUMPHREYS, LAUD. Tearoom Trade: Impersonal Sex
in Public Places. Chicago: Aldine, 1970. 180 pp. Field study of anonymous sex acts in public restrooms (near St. Louis,
IL), showing the modus operandi of the participants, cautions observed, and
their background. Owing to its controversial methodology, this monograph has
gained a certain notoriety. In the expanded 1975
edition (New York: Hawthorne), Humphreys prints some critics' comments with
his reply. 3142. LEE, JOHN A. Getting Sex: A Hew Approach,
More Fun, Less Guilt. Don Mills, Ont.: Musson Book Co., 1978. 318 pp. Ethnography of mid-1970s Toronto area bars, bathouses, and bushes. 3143. PONTE, MEREDITH R. "Life in a Parking Lot: An Ethnography of a Homosexual Drive-In," in: Jerry Jacobs (ed.), Deviance: Field Studies and
Self-Dis- closures. Palo Alto, CA: National Press Books, 1974, pp.
7-29. Car-engineered encounters (also restroom) at a Los Angeles Beach. 3144. RECHY, JOHN. The Sexual Outlaw: A Documentary. New York: Grove Press, 1978. 307 pp. Lightly fictionalized account of
a series of impersonal sex encounters in Los Angeles. 3145. SURZUR, ROLAND. "Les autoroutes de l'amour," Gai pied, no. 189 (October 12-18, 1985), 23-25. Sex at reststops on
French superhighways; with two maps. 3146. TROIDEN, RICHARD R., and ERICH GOODE.
"Homosexual Encounters in a Highway Reststop," in: Goode and
Troiden (eds.), Sexual Deviance and Sexual Deviants. New York: William Morrow, 1975, pp. 211-28. Field study of participants—some gay-identified, some
straight-identified--at a rest area in the Northeast. Treats techniques of
solicitation, sexual practices, and reasons for participation. 3147. VASSI, MARCO. The Metasex Manifesto. New York: Bantam, 1976. 213 pp. Experiential discussion of impersonal sex at the trucks (pp.121-130)
and the baths (pp. 145-65) in New York City. O. INCEST Definitions of incest vary not only cross-culturally but also over the
course of Western civilization, an element of variability that has been
obscured by the current sensationalizing of the problem. While serving to
foster unreasoning dread and even hysteria in the popular mind, the current
association of sexual relations within the family with child abuse and rape
has had the by-product of focusing attention on neglected aspects, including
homosexual incest. 3148. BIXLER, RAY. "Homosexual Twin Incest
Avoidance," Journal of Sex Research, 19 (1983), 296-302. Reviews literature, tentatively concluding that homosexuals orient
sexually toward same-sex siblings much as do heterosexuals toward
opposite-sex siblings. The actual dynamics of the avoidance remain to be
explained. 3149. CABANIS, DETLEF, and EHRARD PHILLIP. "Der pado- phil-homosexuelle "Inzest" vor Gericht," Deutsche Zeitschrift für die gesamte gerichtliche Medizin, 66 (1969), 47-47. Legal sanctions against "pedophile-homosexual
incest" in the German Federal Republic. 3150. DE YOUNG, MARY. Incest: An Annotated Bibliography. Jefferson, NC: McFarland, 1985. 161 pp. Classified list of 410 items with descriptive annotations arranged by
categories. Author and subject indexes. 3151. HAMILTON, GILBERT VAN TASSEL. "Homosexuality,
Defensive," in: Victor Robinson (ed.), Encyclopedia Sexualis. New York: Dingwall-Rock, 1936, pp. 334-42. Claiming that "fear of incest is the most important of the
factors involved in the overdelopment of the homsexual tendency,"
Hamilton suggests that overt homosexuality in both males and females is a
defensive "flight from incest," though female homosexuality has a
more complex determination. 3152. JUSTICE, BLAIR, and RITA JUSTICE. The Broken Taboo: Sex in the
Family. New York: Human
Sciences Press, 1979. 304 pp. In this semipopular work, see pp. 74, 89, 128, 196-97, 291. 3153.
LANGSLEY,
DONALD G., et al. "Father-Son Incest," Comprehensive Psychiatry, 9 (1968), 218-26. Profiles a case of father-son incest through investigations of both parents, the son and the family group as a unit. 3154. MYERS, MICHAEL F. "Homosexuality, Sexual
Dysfunction, and Incest in Male Identical Twins," Canadian Journal of
Psychiatry, 27 (1982), 144-47. Describes a set of adult male monozygotic twins (aged 27 years) who
were living together in a "highly ambivalent incestual
relationship." Therapy induced separation. 3155. RUBIN, RICK, and GREG BYERLY. Incest: The Last Taboo: An
Annotated Bibliography. New York: Garland, 1983. 169 pp. Presents 419 items (about fifteen directly relevant). Periodical,
author, and subject indexes. 3156. SIMARI, C. GEORGIA, and DAVID BASKIN.
"Incestuous Experiences within Homosexual Populations: A Preliminary
Study," Archives of Sexual Behavior, 11 (1982), 329-44. Retrospectively examines the incidence, frequency rates, and effects
of both homosexual and heterosexual incestuous experiences within lesbian
and male homosexual populations (29 women and 54 men). Essentially the same
article appears in Child Psychiatry Quarterly, 17 (1984), 21-40. In earlier centuries impressionistic notions of the rarity of
homosexual contacts went hand in hand with their conceptualization as
abnormal or unusual pathology. Although some European studies had questioned
the conventional wisdom of low incidence, it was the massive data that was
accumulated by Alfred Kinsey and his associates at Indiana University that
first revealed how widespread homosexual activity was, thus compelling a
rethinking of the problem and its relation to the purported
"unnaturalness" of same-sex behavior. 3157. DAVIS, KATHERINE B., and MARIO
E. KOPP. Factors in the Sex Life of Twenty-two Hundred Women. New York: Harper, 1929. 430 pp. In this report on 1,000 married and 1,200
single women (mostly college educated, from the Northeast U.S.), about 40%
disclosed that they had had an "intense emotional relationship with
other women." Some 14% of the married and 19% of the unmarried reported
some overt lesbian contact. 3158. FRIEDEBERG, L. VON. Zum Umfrage in der Intimsphäre« Stuttgart: F. Enke, 1953. About 23% of West German males surveyed reported homosexual
experiences. 3159. GEBHARD, PAUL H. "Incidence of Overt
Homosexuality in the United States and Western Europe," in: John M.
Livingood (ed.), Final Report and Background Papers, National Institute of Mental
Health Task Force on Homosexuality. Washington, DC: Govenment Printing Office, 1972, pp.
22-29. Surveys the existing literature on incidence in Europe and the United
States, indicating the need for a more consistent definition of homosexual
behavior so that results can be compared. Much existing work shows a bias
towards upper-middle and upper class respondents, including students.
Because of overrepresentation of prisoners, the 1948 Kinsey male data are
distorted—though independent evidence suggests that the famous figure of 37%
for overt male homosexual experience is not much exaggerated. (Nonetheless it
is essential to consult the 1948 and 1953 Reports of Alfred Kinsey et al.). 3160.
GIESE,
HANS, and GUNTER SCHMIDT. Studenten-Sexualität:
Verhalten und Einstellung. Reinbek bei Hamburg: Rohwohlt, 1968. 415 pp. Results of a questionnaire returned by West German university
students show that 15% of the males and 3% of the females reported homosexual
experience, mainly in adolescence . 3161. HIRSCHFELD, MAGNUS. "Ergebnisse und statistische Untersuchungen über den Prozentsatz der Homosexuellen," JfsZ, 6 (1904), 109-75. From questionnaires sent to students and to metalworkers, estimates the homosexual population of the German Empire as about 2.3%, with 3.4% bisexual. See also the supplementary remarks in Vierteljarhresbericht des Wissenschaftlich-humanitären Komites (1913), 14-22, 166-74. 3162. RÖMER,
L. S. A. M. VON. Die uranische Familie:
Untersuchungen über die Aszendenz der Uranier. Amsterdam: Maas & Suchtelen, 1906. 107 pp. Of 308 Dutch
male university students responding, 1.9% reported that they were homosexual
and 3.9 said they were bisexual. 3163. SPENCER, S. J. G. "Homosexuality among Oxford
Undergraduates," Journal of Mental Science. 105 (1959), 394-405. Of 200 students, half of them psychiatric patients, 13% reported
recent homosexual activity. Cross-cultural comparisons, even among Western societies, are still
uncommon in homosexual studies. This neglect may be attributed to a variety
of causes: the need to record local manifestations which in many spheres are
only just emerging from clandestinity; lack of research funds; and an
unanalyzed notion that homosexuality is the same everywhere. It is just the
latter question that the neglect of this kind of research begs. Also needed,
of course, is more work on non-Western societies (see IV.A-F). 3164. ALTMAN, DENNIS. "The Ockerism of Gay
Sydney," Mean- jin (June 1983), 215-19. Holds that the gay world in Australia is marked by working-class
culture, while that of the U. S. reflects the hegemony of middle-class
values. 3165. BATSELIER, STEVEN DE, and H. LAURENCE ROSS (eds.). Les minorités homosexuelles: une approche comparative:
Allemagne, Pays-Bas, Etats-Unis. Gembloux: Duculot, 1973. 294 pp. Offers separate, but to some extent coordinated presentations on Germany (by Johannes
Werres, pp. 81-150), The Netherlands (by Cees Straver, pp. 151-208), and the
United States (by Edward Sagarin, pp. 208-66). Comparative material on
Denmark, The Netherlands, and the U. S. appears in Martin S. Weinberg, and
Colin J. Williams, Male Homosexuals: Their Problems and Adjaptations (New York: Oxford University Press, 1974; 316 pp.). 3157. BROWN, MARVIN, and DONALD M. AMOROSO.
"Attitudes toward Homosexuality among West Indian Male and Female
College Students," Journal of Social Psychology, 97 (1975), 163-68. Complementing the measures of attitudes toward homosexuality, sexual
liberalism vs. conservatism, and sex guilt, previously given by J. Dunbar et
al. (see below) to Canadian and Brazilian students, tests were administered
to 69 male and 51 female West Indian students. The males scored more
anti-homosexual than the Canadians, but less so than the Brazilians. 3158. BUHRICH, N., et al. "Bisexual Feelings and Opposite
Sex Behavior in Male Malaysian Medical Students," Archives of Sexual Behavior, 11 (1982), 387-93. Of 65 Malaysian medical students (21-26 years old), 40% were aware of
homosexual feelings before age 15, and 17% were currently aware of such
feelings. Results are discussed in the light of a similar investigation with
Australian medical students. 3159. DUNBAR, JOHN, et al. "Attitudes toward
Homosexuality among Brazilian and Canadian College Students," Journal of Scoial Psychology, 90 (1973), 173-83. Compared with Canadians, Brazilian antihomosexual subjects were more
disapproving of variant sexual practices and reported greater sex guilt than
pro-homosexual subjects. They were also more inclined to classmate
homosexuals as "feminine." 3160. GODBILL, BONNIE M. "Power Relations,
Homosexuality and the Family: A Review of the Literature, Including
Cross-Cultural Studies (Homosexuality and the Family in the Mohave, Chinese
and Iraqi Cultures), Journal of Comparative Family Studies, 14 (1983), 315-331. Finds that the Mohave culture is accepting of alternative sex-roles
for either sex. In China, an occultation process occurs, but when
homosexuality does appear, it tends to be somaticized. In Iraq, homosexuality
was traditionally practiced as a normal phase in masculine development. 3161. GRANERO, MIRTA. "Diferencias entre homosexuales
y heterosexuales (varones y mujeres) en temores, asertividad y
autosuficiencia," Revista latinoame- ricana de psicologia, 16 (1984), 39-52. In this Argentine report, it was found that homosexuals had more fears
than heterosexuals, and women had more fears than men; there were typical
homosexual fears and typical female fears. The differences were explained in
terms of early learning. 3162. GRAY, J. PATRICK, and JANE E. ELLINGTON.
"Institutionalized Male Transvestism, the Couvade, and Homosexual
Behavior," Ethos, 12 (1984), 54-63. Hypothesized that there was a negative association between the
presence of a couvade in a society and the frequency of male homosexual
behavior. Comparisons are offered between tribal societies and contemporary
Western ones. 3163. JANSSENS, MARIE-JOSE, and WILHELMINA VAN WETERING. "Mati en lesbiennes: homoseksualiteit en etnische identiteit bij Creools Surinaamse vrouwen en Neder- land," Sociologische Gids, 32 (1985), 394-415. Shows that among creole Suriname women who emigrate
to the Netherlands, the indigenous mati pattern of female homosociality persists, without
assimilating to the metropolitan lesbian model. 3164. MORSE, STANLEY. "Requirements for Love and
Friendship in Australia and Brazil," Australian Journal of
Psychology, 35 (1983), 469-76. Females and Brazilians expect somewhat more from friendship than
males and Australians. 3165. OYHENART-PERERA, M. F. "La iniciacion sexual de
varones androtropicos," Revista de psiquiatria y psicologia medica, 16 (1984), 469-90. Examined the characteristics of the sexual initiation of 118 Uruguayan
and 100 Spanish male homosexuals. 3166. ROSS, MICHAEL W. "Femininity, Masculinity and
Sexual Orientation: Some Cross-Cultural Comparisons," JH, 9 (1983), 27-36. Administering the Bern Sex-Role Inventory to males from Australia,
Sweden, and Finland suggests that while there is no relationship between
femininity and degree of homosexuality, masculinity is inversely related
depending on the degree of sex-role stereotyping and anti-homosexual
attitudes of the society the subjects live in. See also his: "Societal
Relationships and Gender Role in Homosexuals: A Cross-Cultural
Comparison," Journal of Sex Research, 19 (1983), 273-88; and "Actual and Anticipated
Societal Reaction to Homosexuality and Adjustment in Two Societies [Australia
and Sweden]," Journal of Sex Research, 21 (1985), 40-55. 3167. WHITAM, FREDERICK L. "Culturally Invariable
Properties of Male Homosexuality: Tentative Conclusions from Cross-Cultural
Research," Archives of Sexual Behavior, 12 (1983), 207-26. Based on field work in homosexual communities in the U.S., Guatemala,
and the Philippines, Whitam offers six tentative conclusions about cultural
invariability: (1) homosexual persons appear in all societies; (2) the percentage
of homosexuals seems to be about the same; (3) social norms neither impede or
facilitate the emergence of homosexual orientation; (4) given sufficient
aggregates of people, homosexual subcultures appear in all societies; (5)
homosexuals in different societies tend to resemble one another; (6) all
societies produce similar continua, from overtly masculine to overtly feminine homosexuals. These findings
are elaborated in Whitam and Robin M. Mathy, Male Homosexuality in Four
Societies: Brazil, Guatemala, the Philippines, and the United States (New York: Praeger, 1986; 240 pp.). For criticism, see
Joseph M. Carrier, "Childhood Cross-gender Behavior and Adult
Homosexuality," Archives of Sexual Behavior, 15 (1986), 87-91. The sociological concept of labeling, which posits that behavioral
patterns of individual deviants are shaped by the epithets and
classifications that society attaches to them, remains controversial, though
it seems clear that it has some explanatory power. The term stigma emphasizes
the negative consequences of labeling. 3168. BOBYS, RICHARDS, and MARY R. LANER. "On the
Stability of Stigmatization: The Case of Ex-Homosexual Males," Archives of Sexual Behavior, 8 (1979), 247-61. Analysis of data obtained by questionaire from 281 respondents (17-75
years old) showed that the variable most strongly related to stigmatization
of ex-homosexuals was degree of "dangerousness" attributed to
them. 3169. HENCKEN, JOEL D. "Conceptualizations of
Homosexual Behavior Which Preclude Homosexual Self-Labeling," JH, 9 (1984), 53-63. Because of the pervasiveness of the stigma, those who would engage in
homosexual acts, yet avoid self-labeling must engage in intricate
psychological footwork. 3170. KARR, RODNEY G. "Homosexual Labeling and the
Male Role," Journal of Social Issues, 34 (1978), 73-84. In comparisons with control groups, men were perceived as being less
masculine and less preferred as a fellow participant when they were labeled
homosexual, 3171. KITSUSE, JOHN I. "Societal Reactions to Deviant
Behavior: Problems of Theory and Method," Social Problems, 9 (1963), 247-56. While not directly pertinent, this article has been influential, and
is in fact regarded as a locus classicus of labeling theory. 3181. POLLACK, STEPHEN et al. "The Dimensions of Stigma: The Social Situation of the Mentially 111 Person and the Male
Homosexual," Journal of Abnormal Psychology, 85 (1976), 105-12. Reports two studies designed to
test the assumptions that stigmatizing labels not only lead observers to
perceive more deviance but also lead the labeled individual to behave more
deviantly. 3182. SCHUR, EDWIN M. Labeling Deviant Behavior: The
Sociological Implications. New York: Harper and Row, 1971. 177 pp. Introduction to the concept of labeling with some references to
homosexuality, by an influential, humanistically oriented sociologist. 3183. SCHUR, EDWIN M. Labeling Women Deviant:
Gender, Stigma and Social Control. Philadelphia: Temple University Press, 1984. 286
pp. Examines the ways in which societal definitions of behavior deemed
problematic have a negative impact on women, including lesbians. A well
referenced work, affording many vistas. Originally a political term, referring to nongoverning groups in a
parliamentary organization, the term minority came to be widely applied to
ethnic groups constituting permanent minorities in a parliamentary
multi-national state such as Austria-Hungary or Switzerland in the aftermath
of the discussion of President Wilson's Fourteen Points at the close of World
War I. With the increasing attention to ethnic and racial minorities in
recent decades, especially in the United States, the concept began to appeal
to homosexual researchers and political figures. To be sure, prejudice and
discrimination (see XII.C) directed toward gay men and lesbians are not
unlike those employed against racial and religious minority members. Yet
homosexuality has failed to gain acceptance in the field of minority
studies, and many homosexuals feel little affinity for the idea. 3184. ADAM, BARRY D. "Some Continuities in Out-Group
Stereotypes," Gal Saber, 1 (1977), 72-77. Posits commonalities in the stereotypes of Jews, blacks, and homosexuals.
The argument of this article was pursued in greater detail in his: The Survival of Domination:
In- feriorization and Everyday Life (New York: Elsevier, 1978; 180 pp.). 3185. ALLEN, FREDERICK H. "Homosexuality in Relation
to the Problem of Human Differences," American Journal of Orthopsychiatry, 10 (1940), 129-35. Contends that there is a
parallel between nationalism and homosexuality, both phenomena springing from
a feeling of insecurity. |
BETH, HANNO.
"Minorität und Majorität: das Beispiel Homosexualität," Liberal, 11 (1969), 198-210. Political science approach to the minority-majority contrast, using
homosexuality as the focus.
BUSH, LARRY.
"The Challenge of Community," Advocate, no. 370 (June 23, 1983), 42-45, 80. Problems connected with the national groups that claim to speak for
gays and lesbians.
CORY, DONALD
WEBSTER (pseud, of Edward Sagarin). The Homosexual in America: A Subjective Approach. New York: Greenberg, 1951. 326 pp. In its time probably the most
widely read work on the subject, this book is organized around the minority
concept, which is deployed not only as a means of understanding the
folkways of (mainly) male homosexuals, but also as a political argument for
greater tolerance. Sagarin offers useful ethnographic observations for the
period, including bars, cruising, and couples. Some psychoanalytic concepts
are uncritically relayed. A second edition, with some additional material but
also with omissions, was published in 1960 (New York: Castle; 334 pp.); the
1975 edition (New York: Arno Press) combines the material from both editions.
See also: Edward Sagarin, Odd Man In: Societies of Deviants in America (Chicago: Quadrangle, 1969; 287 pp.).
HACKER, HELEN M.
"Homosexuals: Deviant or Minority Group," in: Edward Sagarin (ed.), The Other Minorities. Waltham, MA: Ginn and Co., 1971, pp. 000. Contends that homosexuals meet the requisite for classification as a
minority group, and that this concept should be preferred to that of
deviance. Yet they differ from other minority groups in that their status is
acquired and not merely ascribed, and that their minority status is
contested. Twenty years earlier Hacker wrote a prescient article on
"Women as a Minority." Social Forces, 30 (1951), 60-69.
HUMPHREYS, LAUD.
"Exodus and Identity: The Emerging Gay Culture," in Martin P.
Levine (ed.), Gay Men: The Sociology of Male Homosexuality. New York: Harper and Row, 1979, pp. 134-47. Traces how gay liberation transformed the gay world from a frightened,
clandestine existence to an open, vital community, thus helping to repair
damaged feelings of self- worth . ITALIAANDER, ROLF. "Die Homophilen," in: Bernhard Doerdelmann (ed.), Minderheiten in der Bundesrepub- lik. Munich: Delp, 1969, pp. 131-57. Chapter by a
pioneering German gay-rights champion in an anthology on minorites in the
German Federal Republic.
MARTIN, A. DAMIEN.
"The Minority Question," Etc., 39 (1982), 22-42. The evaluation of whether "any hated group deserves minority ...
status" does not depend upon its numbers or upon the existence of
negative social attitudes. The proof rests upon the adequacy of the rationale
for the fear and hatred. If the negative attitude—however rationalized—can be
shown to be erroneous and based on overgeneralization, then the prejudice is
a manifestation of bigotry.
MILLER, WAYNE
CHARLES. A Comprehensive Bibliography for the Study of American Minorities. New York: New York University Press, 1976. 2 vols. (1380 pp.). Contains 29,300 entries on major and minor European groups, American
Indians, blacks, Asian settlers, Middle Eastern and Spanish immigrants. Does
not deal with sexual minorities, and hence is useful chiefly for comparative
purposes.
PARKER, WILLIAM.
"The Emerging Homosexual Minority," Civil Liberties Review, 2 (1975), 136-44. Civil rights perspective.
POPERT, KEN.
"Dangers of the Minority Game," Body Politic, no. 63 (May 1980), 3-7. If we view ourselves simply as a minority group we risk dead-ending
ourselves into a political strategy which neglects the large number of
so-called heterosexuals who have a stake in gay liberation. Ethnic minorities
are accidents of history; gay people are part of the working out of history.
SCHLACHTER, GAIL A. Minorities and Women: A Guide to Reference
Literature in the Social Sciences. Los Angeles: Reference Service Press, 1977. 349 pp. Substantially
annotated lists covering American Indians, Asian Americans, black Americans,
Spanish Americans, and women. Indirect relevance.
ULLERSTAM, LARS. The Erotic Minorities. New York: Grove, 1966. 172 pp. Popular discussion, treating homosexuality alongside the paraphilias
(fetishism, s/m, etc.). Male prostitutes serving male clients are known (inter alia) from
ancient Mesopotamia, Biblical Israel, ancient Greece, and China (see the
appropriate historical sections). In recent decades these individuals, often
described by the street term hustlers, have been recorded by journalists and sociologists.
No female equivalent— that is women performing sexual services for other
women—is known. Thus both categories of prostitutes, female and male, have
men as their customers.
ACKERMARK,
LARS-ERIK. "44 prostituerade pojkar: ett stickprobe pa den homosexelle
prostitutione i Stockholm," Popular tidskrift for psykologi och sexualkunskap, 6 (1955), 13-18. Study of 44 boy prostitutes in Stockholm.
ADAM, CORINNA.
"A Special House in Hamburg," New Statesman, 85 (April 13, 1973), 521-22. On a male brothel in West Germany, where they were then legally
permitted.
ALLEN, DONALD M.
"Young Male Prostitutes: A Psychosocial Study," Archives of Sexual Behavior, 9 (1980), 399-426. From a three-year study of 98 male prostitutes, separated them into
four groups: full-time street and bar hustlers; full-time call boys or kept
boys; part-time hustlers; and peer delinquents, who used the activity as an
extension of other deliquent acts.
BELOUSOV, V. A.
"Sluchal gomoseksuala—muzhskoi prostitutki," Prestupnik i
prestupnost'• Sbornik [Moscow, Kabinet i klinika po izucheniiu
lichnosti prestupnika i prestupnosti], 2 (1927), 309-17. Case history of a male prostitute arrested for theft
in Moscow in 1927. The subject was 32, a native of Smolensk gubernia, and had
been a homosexual prostitute since the age of 15.
BENJAMIN, HARRY,
and R. E. L. MASTERS. "Homosexual Prostitution," in their: Prostitution and Morality. New York: Julian Press, 1964, pp. 286-337. Reviews the history of prostitution from ancient civilizations until
the 1950s. Includes a report by Hall Call on male prostitution on the U. S.
west coast.
BLOCH,
IWAN. Die Prostitution.
Berlin: L. Marcus, 1911-25. (Handbuch der gesamten Sexualwissenschaft in Einzeldarstellungen,
Bd 1 & Bd. 2, Halfte 1) A major work of synthesis on prostitution, with many erudite
references to the history of the subject. Male homosexual prostitution is
dicussed in vol. 1, esp. pp. 387-427. 3204. BOYER, DEBRA K., and JENNIFER JAMES. "Prostitutes as Victims," in: Donal E. MacNamara and Andrew
Karmen (eds.), Deviants: Victims or Victimizers? Beverly Hills, CA: Sage, 1983, pp. 109-46. An exploration of the
hazards of the prostitute's trade, male and female. 3205. BRULE, CHRISTIAN. Nom: toxicomane; sexe: masculin; profession: prostitué;
spécialité: hommes. Versailles: Association d'aide aux jeunes en difficulté, 1984. 140 pp. Unsympathetic presentation of drug problems among French hustlers. 3206. BULLINGA, MARCEL, et al. Van de liefde kun je niet leven: Interviews met hoeren en hoerenjongens. Nijmegen: SOF, 1982. Interviews with Dutch female and male prostitutes, as well as an
analysis of the social world of homosexual prostitution . 3207. BULLOUGH, VERN, et al. A Bibliography of Prostitution. New York: Garland, 1977. 419 pp. Vast, but uncritical and misprint-ridden repertoire of some 5500
citations, with relatively restricted coverage of homosexual prostitution
(pp. 239-243—occasional references elsewhere). 3208. BUTTS, WILLIAM MARLIN. "Boy Prostitutes of the
Metropolis," Journal of Clinical Psychopathology, 8 (1947), 637-81. In-depth interviews with 26 boys allow a presentation
of their backgrounds, living arrangements, and charactero logy. 3209. CAUKINS, SIVAN E., and NEIL R. COOMBS. "The
Psychodynamics of Male Prostitution," American Journal of
Psychotherapy, 30 (1976), 782-89. Evaluates research with 33 youths in Los Angeles, classifying them
among the following subtypes: street hustlers, bar hustlers, call boys, and
kept boys. 3210. COOMBS, NEIL R. "Male Prostitution: A
Psychosocial View of Behavior," American Journal of Orthopsychiatry, 44 (1974), 782-89. Study based on 41 hustlers in Los Angeles, ages 12 to 28. Finds that
the majority exhibited constellations of negative traits, concluding that
"[t]his group appeared to contain men for whom competition has proved
too much, losers in the game of economic survival." 3211. CRAFT, MICHAEL. "Boy Prostitutes and Their
Fate," British Journal of Psychiatry, 112 (1966), 111-14. Observations from the life histories of 33 "apprehended and
treated" British hustlers, many of whom transacted business in movie
houses. 3212. DECKER, JOHN F. Prostitution: Regulation and
Control. Litteleton, CO: Fred B. Rothman, 1979. 572 pp. In this massive
legal and criminological study, see esp. pp. 207-14. 3213.
DEISHER,
ROBERT W., et al. "The Adolescent Female and Male Prostitute," Pediatric Annals, 11 (1982), 819-25. Offers a
comparative perspective. 3214. DEISHER, ROBERT W., et al. "The Young Male
Prostitute," Pediatrics, 43 (1967), 936-41. Research with 63
hustlers in San Francisco and Seattle. 3215. DESPINE,
PROSPER. Psychologie naturelle: étude sur les facultés intellectuelles et morales
dans leur état normal et dans leur manifestations anormales
chez les aliénés et chez les criminels. Paris: F. Savy, 1868. 3 vols. Provides some discussion in vol. 3 of male prostitution. For this period in France, see also esp. Francois Carlier, Etude de pathologie sociale: les deux prostitutions (Paris: Dentu, 1887), pp. 275-473. 3216. DIETZ, PARK ELLIOTT. "Medical Criminology Notes #5: Male Homosexual
Prostitution," Bulletin of the American Academy of Psychiatry and the Lav, 6 (1978), 468-71. Concise evaluation
of the existing literature. 3217. DUARTE, ANTONIO, and HERMINIO CLEMENTE. Prostituç- ao masculino em Lisboa. Lisbon: Contra-regra, 1982. 177 pp. Two journalists on the life of hustlers in Lisbon, with interviews and
photographs. 3218. DUNNE, GARY. "The Male Street-Walker: A Sydney
Report," Forum: The Australian Journal of Interpersonal Relations, 7 (1979), 7-12. Australian conditions follow essentially the European- North American
pattern. 3219. FIDANZA, DENISE. Etude sur les prostitués homosexuels travestis. Paris: AGEMP, 1966. 157 pp. On cross-dressing hustlers in France (study presented as a medical thesis). 3220. GANDY, PATRICK, and ROBERT W. DEISHER. "Young Male Prostitutes: The Physician's Role
in Social Rehabilitation," JAMA: Journal of the American Medical Association, 212 (1970), 1661-66. Reports on a fifteen-month intervention program for vocational
retraining. Prospects for success are poor with (1) psychopathic
personalities, and (2) very successful hustlers. 3221. "FLAME." Flame: A Life on the Game. London: Gay Men's Press, 1984. 159 pp. Reminiscences of working-class Liverpool youth who became a hustler in
London 3222. GINSBURG, KENNETH N. "The 'Meat-Rack': A Study
of the Male Homosexual Prostitute," American Journal of
Psychotherapy, 21 (1967), 170-85. Sets forth the theory that the hustler's family constellation
engenders a pathologic state characterized by an unstable self-identity, an
inadequate self-evaluation, and little learned interaction potential or
alternatives for action. 3223. GIZA, JERZY S. "Prostitucja homoseksualna w
swietle badan terenowych," Panstwo i prawo, 18 (1963), 889-97. A study of male and female prostitutes in Poland, with statistics on
age at which the subjects began their careers, social origins, and number of
convictions. Also legal recommendations. See also his: "Wielko- miejskie
srodowisko homoseksualne—Studium kryminologicz- ne," Sluzba MO, 6 (1969), 729-44; and "Zur Problematik der homosexuellen
Prostitution in Polen," Archiv für Kriminologie, 133 (1964), 146-56. 3224. HARLAN, SPARKY, et al. Male and Female Adolescent
Prostitution: Huckleberry House Sexual Minority Youth Services Project. Washington, DC: Youth Development Bureau, U. S.
Department of Health and Human Services, 1981. Study based primarily on runaways. See also: Jennifer James, Entrance into Juvenile Male
Prostitution (Washington, DC: National Institute of Mental Health, 1982). 3225. HARRIS, MERVYN. The Dillyboys: The Game of
Male Prostitution in Piccadilly. Rockville, MD: New Perspectives, 1973. 126 pp. Tolerant and well informed field study presenting an ethnographic
account of English teenage male prostitution. 3226. HENNIG, JEAN-LUC. Les garçons de passe: enquête sur la prostitution masculine. Paris: Hallier, 1978. 374 pp. Gifted French journalist's assemblage of interview materials on present-day
hustling in the Paris region, including ethnic aspects, 3227. HOFFMAN, MARTIN. "The Male Prostitute," Sexual Behavior, 2 (1972), 16-21. Discusses two groups: one of teenagers who sold their bodies but did
not regard themselves as hustlers; another slightly older one consisting of
men who did regard themselves as hustlers but not homosexuals. Concludes
that, "protective coloration" aside, there are some hustlers who
are homosexual and some who are not. 3228.
JANUS,
MARK-DAVID, et al. "Youth Prostitution," in: A. W. Burgess (ed.), Child Pornography and Sex
Rings. Lexington,
MA: Lexington Books, 1984, pp. 127-46. From a study in metropolitan Boston, describes the various types of
hustlers. Also discusses backgrounds, involvement in pornography, and
sadomasochism. 3229. KEARNS, MICHAEL. The Happy Hustler: My Own Story. By Grant Tracy Saxon [pseud.]. New York: Warner Paperback Library,
1975. 189 pp. Frivolous, but occasionally insightful
"autobiography" of a bisexual male prostitute, meant in part as a
satire on Xaviera Hollander's The Happy Hooker. The author is a successful Hollywood starlet. 3230. KLEMENS, KLAUS ULRICH. Die
kriminelle Belastung der männlichen Prostituierten: zugleich ein Beitrag zur
Rückfallsprognose. Berlin: Duncker und Hum- blot, 1967. 123 pp. (Berliner
jurischer Abhandlungen, 15) Criminality of male prostitutes, together with a consideration of the
prognosis for recidivism. 3231. LASERSTEIN, BOTHO. Strichjunge Karl: ein internationaler kriminalistischer Tatsachenbericht aus dem Land der Liebe, die ihren Namen nicht nennt. Hamburg: Hansen Schmidt, 1954. 78 pp. Profile of a typical West German
street hustler, with international comparisons. 3232. LLOYD, ROBIN. For Money or Love: Boy Prostitution in America. New York: Vanguard Press, 1976. 326 pp. Superficial, sensationalist presentation in the guise of tough
investigative journalism. Attempts to offer some historical background (pp. 63-77). 3233. LUCKENBILL, DAVID F. "Entering Male
Prostitution," Urban Life, 14 (1985), 131-53. Uses Chicago interview data to demonstrate two paths of initial
involvement: defensive (in which boys turn to hustling to solve desperate
living and financial problems) and adventurous (in which youths seek extra
money or "kicks," sometimes including sexual pleasure). The first
group advances quickly into regular involvement, the second only months or
years after the initial experiment. 3234. MACKAY, JOHN HENRY. The Hustler. Translated by Hubert Kennedy. Boston: Alyson, 1985.
299 pp. Novel, first published in German as Der Puppenjunge in 1926, which serves to document not only the milieu Of teenage hustlers in Berlin of the Weimar era, but also the psychology of an idealistic client. A similar work from this period is Friedrich Radszuweit, Männer zu verkaufen: Wirklichkeitsroman aus der Welt der männlichen Erpresser und Prostituierten (Leipzig: Lipsia, 1932; 125 PP.). 3235. MARKHAM, FRED. "Fred's Piece," Fag Rag, no. 30 (1982), 4-8. Memoirs of a 1950s
hustler in Seattle. 3236. MARLOWE, KENNETH. Mr. Madam: Confessions of a Male Madam. Los Angeles: Sherbourne Press, 1964. 246 pp. A Hollywood transvestite describes the origins of his own career and
the operations of a call-boy service, which he managed. Some skepticism is in
order regarding details. 3237. NICOSIA, GERALD, and RICHARD ROFE. Bughouse Blues: An Intimate
Portrait of Gay Hustling. New York: Vantage Press, 1977. 166 pp. Composite derived from interviews with male prostitutes in Chicago's
"Bughouse Square" (officially Washington Square). 3238. 0'DAY, JOHN. Confessions of a Male Prostitute. As told to John O'Day, with psychological evaluations by
Leonard A. Lowag. Los Angeles: Sherbourne Press, 1964. 136 pp. Purports to be
the reminiscences of a male prostitute who services both men and women. Like
other pulp exposes of the period, this book is of some interest for
contemporary attitudes. 3239. PARENT-DUCHÄTELET, ALEXANDRE J. B. De la prostitution dans la
ville de Paris. Paris: Bailliere, 1836. 2 vols. This pioneering sociological-criminological study of prostitution in
Paris concentrates on women, but has a few references to male homosexual
prostitution as well. 3240. PIEPER, RICHARD. "Identity Management in Adolescent
Male Prostitution in West Germany," International Review of Modern
Sociology, 9 (1979), 239-59. Combines reports in the literature with field work in Hamburg (West
Germany) to describe the phenomenon, esp. with respect to the inherent
strains. Presents a typology of the participants and a model of the process
of development and stabilization of the role. 3241. PITTMAN, DAVID J. "The Male House of
Prostitution," TransAction, 8:5-6 (1971), 21-27. Field study recording the modus operandi of a male brothel. 3242. RAVEN, SIMON. "Boys Will Be Boys: The Male
Prostitute in London," in: Hendrik M. Ruitenbeek (ed.), The Problem of Homosexuality in
Modern Society. New York: E. P. Dutton, 1963, pp. 279-90. Journalist finds five categories of male prostitutes in London:
servicemen; men who wish to improve their incomes; men of low intelligence
and background; men who are accustomed to shady enterprises; and the
full-time professional prostitute, with no other source of income. 3243. RECHY, JOHN. City of Night. New York: Grove Press, 1963. 410 pp. Written in the form of a novel, this is the account of a hustler's
life in New York City, California, and New Orleans, In the introduction to
the 1985 reissue of the book Rechy explains how he came to write it and
something of the degree of correspondence to his real life, 3244.
REDHARDT,
REINHARDT. "Zur gleichgeschlechtlichen männlichen Prostitution,"
in: Studien zur mannlichen Homosexualität.
Stuttgart: Enke,
1954, pp. 22- 72 (Beitrage zur Sexualforschung, 5) Criminological study attributing a role to endocrinology, as well as
psychological problems connected with puberty. 3245. REIM, RICCARDO. Una questione diversa. Cosenza: 1978. Includes a series
of interviews with Italian hustlers. 3246. REISS, A. J., JR. "The Social Integration of
Queers and Peers," Social Problems, 9:2 (1961), 102-20. An often-cited study revealing the dissonance between sexual identity
and behavior in lower-class boys in Nashville, and showing how potential
image problems are regulated in transactions with clients. 3247. ROSS, H. LAURENCE. "The 'Hustler' in
Chicago," Journal of Student Research, 1 (1959), 13-19. Interviews with one client and seven male hustlers serve as the basis
for generalizations about types and motivations. 3248. RUSSELL, DONALD H. "On the Psychopathology of
Boy Prostitutes," International Journal of Offender Therapy, 15 (1971), 49-52. Claims that early maternal deprivation is at the root of many boy prostitute's choice of career. 3249. SALVARESI, ELISABETH. Travelo. Paris: Les Presses de la Renaissance, 1982. 184 pp. Inquiry concerning French cross-dressing prostitutes, with personal
narratives. 3250. SCHICKEDANZ,
HANS-JOACHIM. Homosexuelle Prostitution: eine
empirische Untersuchung über sozial-des- kriminiertes Verhalten bei
Strichjungen und Callboys« Frankfurt am Main:
Campus Verlag, 1979. 252 pp. West German
empirical study of street hustlers and call boys . 3251. SCHMIDT-RELENBERG,
NORBERT, et al. Strichjungen-
Gespräche: Zur Soziologie jugendlicher homosexuellen Prostitution.
Darmstadt: Luchterhand, 1975. 254 pp. Combines interviews with young West German hustlers, presented in their own words, and
sociological analysis. 3252. SERENY, GITTA. The Invisible Children: Child Prostitution in
America, West Germany and Great Britain. New York: Knopf, 1985. 254 pp. This collection of interviews with prostitutes includes two with
hustlers, "Ruprecht" (West Germany) and "Alan" (Britain). 3253. SHEARER, JOHNNY. The Male Hustler. Cleveland: Century Books, 1966. 190 pp. "Soft-core" pulp presentation, typical of the period. 3254.
STIEBER,
WILHELM JOHANN CARL EDUARD. Die Prostitution
in Berlin und ihre Opfer. Berlin: Hofmann, 1846. 210 pp. An early criminological study (published anonymously), which chiefly
concerns female prostitution, but with some references to male homosexual
prostitution. 3255. URBAN AND RURAL SYSTEMS ASSOCIATES (URSA). An Annotated Bibliography on
Adolescent Male and Female Prostitution and Related Topics. Washington, DC: Youth Development Buireau, U. S.
Department of Health and Human Services, 1981. One of a number of official publications, reflecting growing public
concern. See also: URSA, Juvenile Prostitution: A Resource Manual (Washington, DC: U. S. Department of Health and
Human Serives, 1982). 3256. VIGNOLI, GIULIO. Contributo ad una indagine sulla prostituzione
maschile. Savona: 1973. 35 pp. Theoretical and practical considerations on male prostitu- tion in
Italy. 3257. WEISBERG, D. KELLY. Children of the Hight: A Study
of Adolescent Prostitution. Lexington, MA: Lexington Books, 1985. 298 pp. Concentrates on etiology, the young prostitutes' lifestyle, and
involvement with the juvenile justice and social service delivery systems.
Ethnographic research was conducted in San Francisco and New York City. For
hustlers, see pp. 19-83, and for comparison of female and male adolescent
prostitution, pp. 153-88. 3258. WEISS, JOEL. Arraché au trottoir: le drame de la prostitution masculine. Paris: Garancière, 1985. 191 pp. Account focused largely on one male
prostitute, whom the author helped to leave his profession. 3259. WINICK, CHARLES, and PAUL M. KINSIE. "Male Homosexual
Prostitution," in: The Lively Commerce: Prostitution in the United
States. Chicago:
Quadrangle, 1971, pp. 89-96. A brief but comprehensive description of
hustlers, their modus operandi, sociological profile, psychology, and
rehabilitation programs aimed at their resocialization. In view of the attention that has rightly been bestowed on the
questions of race, race relations, and ethnicity in the United States over
the last few decades, it is surprising how little these matters have been
considered in relation to sexual orientation. This neglect is now yielding to
enquiries on a number of fronts. 3260. BASS-HASS, RITA. "The Lesbian Dyad," Journal of Sex Research, 4 (1968), 108-26. Interpreting interviews with 370 women, compares white and black
lesbians with respect to class and demography, soci- osexual relationships,
and domestic arrangements. 3261. BEAME, THOM. "From a Black Perspective: Racism
(A Conversation)," Advocate, no. 339 (April 1, 1982), 23-25. Transcript of a discussion among three black gays regarding race and
class bias in the gay community in San Francisco. See also: "Mike Smith
(An Interview with the Founder of Black and White Men Together)," ibid., (December 23, 1982), 21-23. 3262. BULKIN, ELLY, MINNIE BRUCE PRATT, and BARBARA SMITH. Yours in Struggle: Three
Feminist Perspectives on Anti-Semitism and Racism. Brooklyn: Long Hall Press, 1984. 233 pp. Frank comments by three women of different identities and
backgrounds—white Southerner, Afro-American, Ashkenazi
Jewish. 3263. BUTTS, JUNE. "Is Homosexuality a Threat to the
Black Family?" Ebony (April 1981), 138-40, 142-44. After reviewing evidence from Africa and the U. S., concludes that
"homosexuality is not a threat either to the stability or the future of
the Black family." 3264. CLIFF, MICHELLE. Claiming an Identity They Taught Me to Despise, Watertown, MA: Persephone Press, 1980. 64 pp. A Jamaica-born
women's autobiographical prose-poetry recording her journey toward self-definition, 3265. CORNELL, MICHIYO. "Invisible among the
Invisible," Azalea, no. 4 (1981), 6-8. Reflections of a Japanese-American woman writer. 3266. CORNWALL, ANITA. Black Lesbian in White Anerica. Tallahassee: Naiad Press, 1983. 160 pp. Fiction, essays, and
interviews by an established writer. 3267. DANIELS, MATTHEW. "Breaking the Color
Barrier," Advocate, no. 331 (November 26, 1981), 17-18. On the success of Black and White Men Together, an interracial group
formed in San Francisco in March 1980. 3268. DAY, BETH. Sexual Life between Blacks and Whites: The Roots of
Racism. New York: World, 1972. 376 pp. Contends that the incidence of homosexuality is low in Africa, and
that whites imposed it on American blacks—a myth that has often been echoed.
For refutation, see: Wayne Dynes, "Homosexuality in Sub-Saharan
Africa," Gay Books Bulletin, no. 9 (1983), 20-21. 3269. GARBER, ERIC. "Tain't Nobody's Business:
Homosexuality in Harlem in the 1920s," Advocate, no. 342 (May 13, 1982), pp. 39-43+. Fascinating glimpses of famous literary figures and others of the
Harlem Renaissance. For a full exposition of the milieu, see David Levering
Lewis, When Harlem Was in Vogue (New York: Knopf, 1981; 381 pp.). 3270. GITECK, LENNY. "Gays from Other Ghettos," Advocate, no. 265 (April 19, 1979), 12-13, 15. Journalist's notes on homosexuals of color in the United States. 3271. HACKER, HELEN MAYER. "The Ishmael
Complex," American Journal of Psychotherapy, 6 (1952), 494-512. Explores themes in American literature (e.g. Moby Dick, Huckleberry Finn) of an "isolated aim-inhibited, homosexual
relationship between a declassed American lad and a colored outcast."
This article apparently represents a variant of the better-known thesis of
the literary critic Leslie Fiedler (as seen, e.g., in his 1952 collection, An End to Innocence.) 3272. HIDALGO, HILDA A., and ELIA H. CHRISTENSEN.
"The Puerto Rican Lesbian and the Puerto Rican Community," JH, 2
(1976-77), 109-21. From interviews and questionnaires with Puerto Rican persons living in
the United States, concluded that increasing numbers of Puerto Rican lesbians
are coming out, but that their horizons are restricted by the group's
Hispanic culture, which stigmatizes lesbians as mannish and repulsive. See
also Hidalgo, "The Puerto Rican Lesbian in the United States," in: Trudy Darty and Sandee
Potter (eds.), Women-Identified Women (Palo Alto, Ca: Mayfield, 1984), pp. 105-15. 3260. HUGHES, CHARLES W. "An Organization of Colored
Erotopaths," Alienist and Neurologist, 14 (1893), 731-32. Censorious account of a black drag ball in Washington, D. C. See also
his: "Homosexual Complexion Perverts in St. Louis,"
ibid., 28 (1907), 487-88. 3261. LORDE, AUDRE. Zami: A New Spelling of My Name. Trumansburg, NY: Crossing Press, 1983. 256 pp. A
"biomythography" by a noted black poet, recalling her growing up
"fat, Black, nearly blind, and ambidextrous in a West Indian
household" in Harlem in the 1930s and '40s, and her coming of age as a
lesbian in the 1950s. 3262. MALLON, GERALD L. (ed.). Resisting Racisms An Active Guide. Lafaytette Mill, PA: International Black and White Men Together,
1984. 114 pp. Chiefly reprints, including the bibliography of Harry Wiemhoff
(see below). 3263. MARKS, JIM. "From Politics to Poetry: Black Gay
Life in the Nation's Capital Presents a Strong Point," Advocate, no. 440 (February 18, 1986), 36-39. Black activists, social clubs, religious groups, poetry and art in
Washington, DC. 3264. MAYS, VICKIE M. "I Hear Voices But See No
Faces: Reflections on Racism and Women-Identified Relationships of
Afro-American Women," Heresies, no.12 (1981), 74-76. Contends that the climate created by the Euro-American world with its
capitalism, racism and patriarchy has kept the Afro-American lesbian
invisible. 3265. MORAGA, CHERRIE, and GLORIA ANZALDUA (eds.). This Bridge Called My Backs
Writings by Radical Women of Color. Watertown, MA: Persephone Press, 1981. 261 pp. Poetry, essays, personal narrative, and fiction by black, Latin and
Asian-American women, reflecting their passionate demand for an end to
invisibility. See also: Cherrie Moraga, Lo que nunca paso por sus
labioss Loving in the War Years (Boston: South End Press, 1983; 150 pp.—poems,
stories, essays). 3266. PARIN, PAUL. "'The Mark of Oppression': Ethnopsy- choanalytische Studie über Juden und Homosexuelle in einer relativ permissiven Kultur," Psyches Zeitschrift für Psychoanalyse und ihre Anwendungen, 39 (1985), .193-219. An ethnopsychiatric study of Jews and homosexuals revealed similarities between the two groups related to oppression. This
common experience results in similarities in the psychic constitution of the
two groups that are independent of early childhood development. Compare
Barry D. Adam, The Survival of Domination: Inferiorization and Everyday Life (New York: Elzevier, 1978; 179 pp.). 3267. RICH, ADRIENNE. "'Disloyal to Civilization':
Feminism, Racism, and Gynephobia," Chrysalis, no. 7 (1979), 9-27. Holds that much feminist thinking and writing labors under a burden of
false guilt. Real transcendence of the past demands difficult work, for which
lesbian-feminisjn is particularly suited. 3268. ROBERTS, J. R. Black Lesbians: An Annotated
Bibliography. Tallahassee, FL: Naiad Press, 1981. 93 pp. An exemplary bibliography and handbook, collecting a remarkable range
of information on life-ways, oppression and resistance, literature, music,
and the military. 3269. ROSCOE, WILL. "Gay Americn Indians: Creating an
Identity from Past Traditions," Advocate, no. 432 (October 29, 1985), 45-48. Profiles of Indian activists in San Francisco and elsewhere. 3270. SMITH, MICHAEL J. (ed.). Black Men/White Men: A Gay Anthology. San Francisco, CA: Gay Sunshine Press, 1983. 240 pp. Well-selected
and edited collection of short stories personal accounts, biographical
profiles, and research. 3271. SMITH, MICHAEL J. (ed.). Colorful People and Places. San Francisco: Quarterly, 1983. 123 pp. "A resource guide for Third World Lesbians
and Gay men" and for white people who share their interests. Entries
arranged by state and city, with some historical notes; also some data on
foreign countries. 3272. TSUI, KITTY. The Words of a Woman Who Breathes Fire. San Francisco: Spinsters Ink, 1983. 84 pp. Vivid and sensitive
account of the life of a Chinese- American woman in poems and stories. 3273. VASQUEZ, E. "Homosexuality in the Context of
the Mexican-American Culture," in: D. Kuhnel (ed.), Sexual Issues in Social Work:
Emerging Concerns in Education and Practice. Honolulu: University of Hawaii School of Social
Work, 1979, pp. 131-47. Problems vary depending on whether the person is still living in a
strongly Mexican culture with its polarized gender role behavior or has
become detached from it. 3287. VERNON, RON. "Growing Up in Chicago Black and Gay," Gay Sunshine, no. 6 (March 1971), 14-17. Autobiographical recollections from the
Second City's ghetto. 3288. WIEMHOFF, HENRY. Race, Racism and the Gay Male: A Preliminary
Bibliography and Resource Guide. New York: Black and White Men Together, n. d. [ca. 1982]. 7 pp. Fiction and nonfiction, including some general works on racism and
race relations. 3289. WOODEN, WAYNE S., HARVEY KAWASAKI, and RAYMOND
MAYEDA. "Identity Maintenance of Japanese-American Gays," Alternative Lifestyles, 6 (1983), 236-43. Evaluates questionnaire results from Los Angeles and San Francisco
concerning family roles and conflicting demands of gay "master
identity." The sociological term "role" has been defined as "the
expected behavior associated with a social position." Although the
concept is protean and sometimes confusing, it does not seem possible to
dispense with it. Derived terms are "role model" (reflecting the
notion that young people tend to imitate admired persons) and "role playing,"
which is sometimes used to critize ostensibly stereotyped behavior,
especially of the kind entailed by traditional male/female oppositions. 3290. COTTON, WAYNE L. "Role-Playing Substitutions
among Homosexuals," Journal of Sex Research, 8 (1972), 310-23. Studied 36 male homosexuals living in New York City, concluding that
(1) sexual partners are seldom considered part of the close circle of
friends; (2) close friends do not have sexual contacts with each other; and
(3) a means of making status distinctions is absent. 3291. COTTON, WAYNE L. "Social and Sexual
Relationships of Lesbians," Journal of Sex Research, 11 (1975), 139-48. A field study of New York City lesbians discloses major differences
between them and male homosexuals. The women tend to be coupled with partners
of the same socioeconomic status, and couples are integrated into each
partner's friendship network. 3292. GOODE, ERICH. "Comments on the Homosexual
Role," Journal of Sex Research, 17 (1981), 54-65. Disagrees with critics of the concept of the homosexual role who
assert that it has no validity, arguing that their views reflect an "essentialistic" misunderstanding
both of the nature of homosexuality and of the sociological concept of role.
See also F. L. Whitam, below. 3293. HARRY, JOSEPH. "On the Validity of Typologies
of Gay Males," JH, 2 (1976-77), 143-52. Analysis of data from 243 gay men did not validate the popular
stereotype of a dichotomy between inserter and insertee. The most popular set
of sexual preferences was for all roles combined, both
active and passive, anal and oral. 3294. MCINTOSH, MARY. "The Homosexual Role," Social Problems, 16 (1968), 182-92. Argues that homosexuality should not be conceptualized as a condition
but rather as a social role; however, not all those engaging in same-sex
relations are playing the role. Often cited as an illuminating breakthrough,
this article now seems truistic. Another pioneering article was Albert J.
Reiss, "The Social Integration of Queers and Peers," Social Problems, 9 (1961), 102-20. 3295. RIDDLE, DOROTHY I. "Relating to Children: Gays
as Role Models," Journal of Social Issues, 34 (1978), 38-58. A review of the literature on role modeling leads to the conclusions
that children internalize particular traits from a variety of models and that gays are more likely to serve as nontraditional
sex-role models than as determiners of same-sex sexual preference. 3296. SCHÄFER, SIEGRID. "Sociosexual Behavior in Male
and Female Homosexuals: A Study in Sex Differences," Archives of Sexual Behavior, 6 (1977), 355-64. Comparison of two West German studies on male and female homosexuals
respectively reveals major differences in coming out, heterosexual
experience, and sexual behavior. The author suggests that gay men adhere to
societal prescriptions for the male gender role, and lesbians to those for
the female gender role. 3297. WHITAM, FREDERICK L. "The Homosexual Role: A Reconsideration," Journal of Sex Research, 13 (1977), 1-11. Contends that to treat homosexuality as a social role violates the
definition of a role. Roles require anticipatory socialization and
structural prescriptions, and homosexuality, lacking both, should be
classified as a sexual orientation. This paper occasioned a considerable
controversy: Richard C. Omark, "A Comment on the Homosexual Role,"
ibid., 14 (1978), 273-74; Frederick L. Whitam, "Rejoinder to Omark's
Comment on the Homosexual Role," ibid, 14 (1978), 274-75; Frederick L.
Whitam, "A Reply to Goode on 'The Homosexual Role,'"ibid., 17
(1981), 66-72; and Richard C. Omark, "Further Comment on the Homosexual Role: A Reply to Goode," ibid.,
17 (1981), 73-75; Erich Goode, "The Homosexual Role: Rejoinder to Omark
and Whitam," ibid., 17 (1981), 76-83. See also E. L. Goode, above. The problem of alcoholism has been widely recognized in Western
society since the 18th century, when the availability of cheap distilled
spirits made it possible for the large number of the poor and other
disadvantaged persons to "drown their sorrows" in liquor. The role
that alcohol may play in the relaxation of sexual inhibitions has been known
for an even longer period. It remains curious that in the early decades of
the century, when psychiatrists and others were inclined to charge homosexuals
with every kind of deficiency, the problem of alcoholism was little
recognized. That it has now been singled out is largely the work of concerned
homosexuals and lesbians themselves. 3288. BEATON, STEPHEN, and NAOME GUILD. "Treatment
for Gay Problem Drinkers," Social Casework, 57 (1976), 302-08. Describes treatment of gay men and lesbians in a group with straight
therapists. 3289. CHRISTENSON, SUSAN, et al. Lesbians, Gay Men and Their Alcohol and Other Drug Use Resources. Madison, WI: Clearinghouse for Alcohol and Other Drug Use Information, 1980. 17 pp. Practical information from a social-work perspective. 3290. COLLA, I. E. "Drei Fälle von homosexuellen Handlungen im Rauschzuständen," Vierteljahres- schrift für gerichtliche-medizinisches und öffentliches Sanitätswesen, ser. 3, vol. 31 (1905), 50- 61. Alcohol intoxication as a facilitator of homosexual behavior: three
cases. 3291. DIAMOND, DEBORAH, and SHARON C. WILSNACK. "Alcohol
Abuse among Lesbians: A Descriptive Study," JH, 4 (1978), 123-42. Interviews with ten lesbian alcoholics indicate that lesbians with
this problem need therapists who will accept their sexual orientation and
treatment that will help them increase their sense of power and self-esteem
without alcohol. See also James L. Hawkins, "Lesbians and Alcoholism,"
in M. A. Greenblatt and M. A. Schlacht (eds.), Alcohol Problems in Women and
Children (New York: 1976), 137-53; and Brenda Weathers, "Alcoholism and
the Lesbian Community," in: Naomi Gottlieb, Alternative Social Services
for Women (New York: Columbia University Press, 1980), pp.
158-68. 3292. FINEGAN, DANA G., and DAVID COOK. "Special
Issues Affecting the Treatment of Male and Lesbian Alcoholics," Alcoholism Treatment
Quarterly, 1:3 (1984), 85-98. Counselors who treat gay alcoholics should examine their own
attitudes, become acquainted with healthy gay men and lesbians to dispel
stereotypes, learn to tolerate clients' defensive reactions, and be willing
to discuss sober sex and the question of gay bars. 3293. FORREST, GARY G. Alcoholism and Human Sexuality. Springfield, IL: Charles C. Thomas, 1983. 395 pp. Judgmental
therapeutic approach strongly influenced by psychoanalysis. Chapter 5,
"Alcoholism and Homosexuality" (pp.181-215), is followed by
discussions of child molestation, incest, rape, etc. Holds that clinicians
should treat alcoholism first, then homosexuality: "The total person
must recover." 3294. GAY COUNCIL ON DRINKING BEHAVIOR. The Way Back: The Stories of
Gay and Lesbian Alcoholics. Washington, DC: Whitman Walker Clinic, 1981. 90
pp. Personal accounts of ten persons who have recovered from alcoholism
with the help of Alcoholics Anonymous. 3295.
HIRSCHFELD,
MAGNUS. Der Einfluss des Alkohols auf das Geschlechtsleben.
Berlin: Michaelis,
1906. 16 pp. The affect of alcohol on sex life. Lecture given by the noted
sexologist—himself a teetotaller—before a workers' temperance group. 3296. ISRAELSTAM, S., and SILVIA LAMBERT.
"Homosexuality as a Cause of Alcoholism: A Historical Review," International Journal of the
Addictions, 18 (1983), 1085-1107. Critical examination of the psychoanalytic theory that linked
alcoholism causally with homosexuality. The development of the humanistic
model in the 1960s and 70s, the emergence of labeling theory, and the work of
better-informed social scientists and clinicians laid much of the old theory
to rest by the 1970s. 3297. LEWIS, COLLINS E., et al. "Drinking Patterns in
Homosexual and Heterosexual Women," Journal of Clinical
Psychiatry, 43: 7 (1982), 277-79. Heavy drinking was more common in a sample of 57 lesbians as compared
to a control group of 43 heterosexual women. 3298.
LOHRENZ,
LEANDER J., et al. "Alcohol Problems in Several Midwestern Homosexual
Communites," Journal of Studies on Alcohdl, 39 (1978), 1959-63. In 42 gay male alcoholics, drinking was perceived as a solution to
problems, and related to urban living, education, current sexual preference,
and reliance on prescription drugs, 3298. MICHAEL, JOHN. The Gay Drinking Problem ...
There is a Solution. Minneapolis, MN: CompCare Publications, 1976. 15 pp. Approach stemming from Alcoholics Anonymous. See also his: Sober, Clean and Gay (Minneapolis, MN: Compcare, Publications, 1978; 19
pp.), 3299. NARDI, PETER. "Alcohol Treatment and the
Non-traditional 'Family' Structures of Gays and Lesbians," Journal of Alcohol and Drug
Education, 27:2 (1982), 83-89. Sociological perspective showing that friendship networks and dyads
function otherwise in this context than they do for heterosexuals. See also
his: "Alcohol and Homosexuality: A Theoretical Perspective," JH, 7 (1981-82), 9-25. 3300. O'FARRELL, TIMOTHY J., CAROLYN
A. WEYLAND, and DIANE LOGAN. Alcohol and Sexuality: An Annotated Bibliography on
Alcohol Use, Alcoholism, and Human Sexual Behavior. Phoenix: Oryx Press, 1983. 131
pp. Provides 542 citations of materials published from 1900 to 1982. See
Chapter 3, Section C. See also: H.A.G.A.P. Bibliography: Resources on Alcoholism
and Lesbians/Gay Men (Oakland, NJ: National Association of Gay Alcoholism Professionals,
1980). 3301. SAUNDERS, F. J. "Homosexual Recovering Alcoholics:
A Descriptive Study," Alcoholic Health and Research World, 8 (1983-84), 18-22. Interviews with 28 male homosexuals and one lesbian highlighted the
role of bars as places for meeting and socializing. 3302. SHILTS, RANDY. "Alcoholism: A Look in Depth at
How a National Menace is Affecting the Gay Community," Advocate, no. 184 (February 25, 1976), 16-25. A somewhat alarmist view of the incidence of what is con- cededly a
grave problem among gay men and lesbians. 3303. SMALL, EDWARD J., and BARY LEACH. "Counseling
Homosexual Alcoholics," Journal of Studies on Alcohol, 38 (1977), 2077-86. Since homosexuality and alcoholism are independent states,
homosexuality need not be an obstacle to treatment for alcoholism. 3304. SWALLOW, JEAN (ed.). Out from Under: Sober Dykes
and Our Friends. San Francisco: Spinsters Ink, 1983. 275 pp. Anthology of
personal accounts of lesbian alcoholism and recovery. Replication of parental alcoholism patterns is
found to be significant. 3305. ZEHNER, MARTA A., and JOYCE LEWIS.
"Homosexuality and Alcoholism: Social and Developmental Perspectives," Journal of Social Work and
Human Sexuality, 2 (1983-84), 75-89. Inherent stresses, issues, and patterns engender
an alcoholism rate in the homosexual community that is two to three times
that of the general population. Regrettably, even the process of formation of
a positive gay identity can create stress situations that put one at risk for
alcoholism. 3306. ZIEBOLD, THOMAS 0., and
JOHN E. MONGEON (eds.). Alcoholism and Homosexuality. New York: Haworth Press, 1982. 128 pp. Ten papers offering theoretical, counseling, social-work, and
therapeutic perspectives by William E. Bittle, Ronnie W. Colcher, Rosanne
Driscoll, Emily B. McNally and Dana G. Finnegan, Mongeon and Ziebold, Peter
Nardi, Tom Mills Smith, Scott Whitney, and Tricia A. Zigrang. A key anthology
for the study of the subject. Reprint of JH, 7:4 (1982). See also Ziebold and Mongeon, Ways to Gay Sobriety (Washington, DC: Whitman-Walker Clinic, 1980; 15
pp.); and Ziebold, "Ethical Issues in Substance-Abuse Problems Relevant
to Sexual Minorities," Contemporary Drug Problems, 8 (1980), 413-18. The potential for drug addiction in Western society has been fostered
by a number of factors, including the spread of previously exotic substances
through international trade patterns, the chemical synthesis of new
stimulants, and the growth of a youth culture which tends to prefer drugs to
alcohol. The spread of drug use in the gay community was undoubtedly aided
by the 1960s symbiosis with the counterculture. The formerly widespread use
of amyl nitrites ("poppers") among gay men became a matter of
concern because of an alleged link with AIDS. 3307. ABEL, ERNEST L. Drugs and Sex: A Bibliography. Westport, CT: Greenwood Press, 1983. 129 pp. Provides 1432 annotated
items arranged under headings: alcohol, amphetamines, antidepressants,
antipsychotics, barbiturates, benzidiazepines, caffeine, cocaine, LSD,
marihuana, methaqualone, narcotics, nitrites, PCP, tobacco, and general. 3308. AMENDT, GUNTER. Haschisch und Sexualität: eine empirische Untersuchung über die Sexualität Jugendlicher in der Drogensubkultur . Stuttgart: Enke, 1974. 124 pp. Inquiry into drugs and sex among West
German youth. 3309. FREUDENBERGER, HERBERT J. "The Gay Addict in A
Drug and Alcohol Therapeutic Community," Homosexual Counseling Journal, 3 (1976), 34-45. On special problems encountered by gay members of drug abuse treatment
communities. 3310. GAY, GEORGE, et al. "The Sensuous Hippie: 1.
Drug/ Sex Practice in the Haight-Ashbury," Drug Forum, 6 (1977-78), 27-47. Examined individual subjective experiences regarding the effects of a
variety of drugs on sexual habits—aggressiveness; changes in libido;
pleasure derived; and general experience, practice, beliefs and attitudes.
See also: "Love and Haight: The Sensuous Hippie Revisited: Drug/Sex
Practices in San Francisco," Journal of Psychoactive Drugs, 14 (1982), 111-23. 3311. GONZALEZ, R. M. "Hallucinogenic Dependency
During Adolescence as a Defense against Homosexual Fantasies: A Reenactment
of the First Separation-In- dividuaion Phase in the Course of
Treatment," Journal of Youth and Adolescence, 8 (1979), 63-71. Psychoanalytic interpretation presenting a single case history. 3312. GOODE, ERICH, and RICHARD R. TROIDEN. "Amyl
Nitrite Use among Homosexual Men," American Journal of Psychiatry, 136 (1979), 1067-69. Interviews with 150 homosexual men suggest that use of amyl nitrite
(poppers) is strongly related to a number of unconventional practices and to
certain medically related problems. See also: Stephen Israelstam et al.,
"Use of Isobutyl Nitrite as a Recreational Drug," British Journal of Addiction, 73 (1978), 319-20; and Thomas P. Lowry,
"Psychosexual Aspects of the Volatile Nitrites," Journal of Psychoactive Drugs, 14 (1982), 77-79. 3313. LAURITSEN, JOHN, and HANK
WILSON. Death Rush: Poppers and AIDS: With Annotated Bibliography. New York: Pagan Press, 1986. 64 pp. A contentious, sometimes eccentric
statement of the case against amyl nitrites. While extensive, the
bibliography is selected and annotated to make the case against poppers more
alarming than it is. The brochure concludes with some unlikely speculations
about AIDS. 3314. MILLS, BRONWYN G., and MARIAH B. NELSON.
"Perspectives on Treatment of Drug Dependent Lesbians," H,I,D.
A Treatment Research Monograph Series: Treatment Services for Drug Dependent
Women, 2 (1982) [ADM82-1219], 443-76. Key issues that counselors need to
address are—apart from their own attitudes—the "coming out" process,
self-acceptance, and relationship issues. 3315. NEWMEYER, JOHN A. "The Sensuous Hippie: II.
Gay/ Straight Differences in Regard to Drugs and Sexuality," Drug Forum, 6 (1977-78), 49-55. Among other findings, gay men were found to have active, but separate
enjoyment of drugs and sex, while lesbians tended to combine the two. 3316. SCHOENER, GARY. "The Heterosexual Norm in
Chemical Dependency Treatment Programs: Some Personal Observations," Stash Capsules, 8 (1976), 1-4. On the need for greater sensitivity in therapeutic personnel
. 3317.
WELLISCH,
DAVID K., et al. "A Study of Therapy of Homosexual Adolescent Drug Users in a
Residential Treatment Setting," Adolescence, 16 (1981), 689-700. Finds that individual therapy is more helpful than group therapy in
the residential treatment of homosexual drug users. While claims by some historians that earlier centuries did not
recognize childhood as a separate stage of human development are
unconvincing, it is probably true that the conceptualization of adolescence as a stage between childhood and adulthood is
relatively recent. The rise of a "youth culture" with its special
preferences in the consumer society has become possible only through the
spread of prosperity in Western industrial countries. Focus on this stage of
life has caused particular problems for young gay and lesbian people,
inasmuch as the youth culture is highly conformist and sometimes punitively
anti- homosexual. For their part, heterosexual adults and parents tend to
decry homosexual activity and identity in the teen years as fixing supposedly
labile personalities in a state of permanent deviance. Serving as a counterweight
to these restrictive tendencies is an increasing awareness that young people,
at least those past the stage of puberty, are autonomous personalities who
should be permitted to develop according to their own nature. 3329. ALYSON, SASHA
(ed.). Young, Gay and Proud. Boston: Alyson, 1980. 94 pp. Young peoples' guide to the joys and hazards of
coming out, an adaptation of a publication of the same title prepared by the
Gay Teachers and Students Group of Melbourne, Australia. 3330.
AMSTERDAMSE
JONGEN AKTIE GROEPEN. Homoseksual-
iteit: jongen-jongen/meisje-meisje. The Hague: NVSH, 1971. 96 pp. Sympathetic presentation of the situation of male and female
homosexual youth in the Netherlands. 3331. BLÜHER,
HANS. Die deutsche Wandervogelbewegung als
erotisches Phänomenon: Ein Beitrag zur sexuellen Inversion.
Berlin: Weise, 1912. 160 pp. This exploration of the homoerotic substratum of the great German
youth movement, the Wandervogelbewegung, stirred up a storm of controversy
when it was first published. An enlarged edition appeared in 1914. For a
somewhat onesided interpretation of Bliiher's significance in this sphere,
see Gunther Schlpz, "Wandervogel, Volk, und Führer: Männergesellschaft
und Antisemitismus bei Hans Blüher," in: Propheten des Nationalismus (Munich: List, 1969), pp. 211-27, 279-80, 303-04.
For general background, see Walter Laqueur, Young Germany: A History of
the Youth Movement (London: Routledge & Kegan Paul, 1962). 3332. CAMPBELL, PATRICIA. Sex Education Books for Young
Adults, 1892-1979. New York: R. R. Bowker, 1979. 169 pp. In this narrative study, see index ("Homosexuality,"
"Lesbianism") for numerous references. 3333. COLES, ROBERT, and GEOFFREY STOKES. Sex and the American Teenager. New York: Harper and Row, 1985. 238 pp. Sometimes cloudy interpretation of results of a survey of 1067
respondents (commissioned by Rolling Stone magazine). See pp. 135-44, 190-93 for peer
pressures on attitudes toward homosexual behavior. 3334. DAHER, DOUGLAS. "Identity Confusion in Late
Adolescence: Therapy and Values," Psychotherapy: Theory,
Research and Practice, 14 (1977), 12-17. Questions the current practice of trying to explain homosexual
interests to adolescent clients as "sexual identity confusion." 3335. GADPAILLE, WARREN J. "Homosexuality in
Adolescent Males," Journal of the American Academy of Psychoanalysis, 3 (1975), 361-71. Attempts to discriminate three "treatment types": (a)
adolescents involved in experimental homoerotic activity; (b)
"pseudohomosexuals"; and (c) true, erotically motivated
homosexuals. 3336. GLASSER, MERVIN. "Homosexuality in
Adolescence," British Journal of Medical Psychology, 50 (1977), 217-25. Contends that different types of homosexuality emerge during
adolescence according to different psychodynamic conditions that occur in
different stages. 3337. HANCKEL, FRANCES, and JOHN CUNNINGHAM. A Way of Love, a Way of Life:
A Young Person's Introduction to What it Means to Be Gay. New York: Lothrop, Lee and Shepard, 1979. 192 pp. Down-to-earth, positive approach to self-understanding, family
relationships and friendships, as well as legal and medical aspects. Includes
personal testimonies, "a dozen gay lives." 3338. HEROLD, EDWARD S. Sexual Behavior of Canadian Young People. Markham, Ont.: Fitzhenry and Whiteside, 1984. 183 pp. Offers a
synthesis of predominately Canadian research, including government
statistics. The chapter on homosexuality acknowledges preference, behavior,
and identity as variables of sexual orientation. 3339. HERON, ANN (ed.). One Teenager in Ten: Writings by Gay and Lesbian
Youth. Boston: Alyson, 1983. 120 pp. Twenty-eight young people between 15 and 24 tell their own stories of
how their homosexual feelings took shape. See also: Michael Burbidge and
Jonathan Walters (eds.), Breaking the Silence: Gay Teenagers Speak for
Themselves (London: Joint Council for Gay Teenagers, 1981). 3340. HERTOFT,
PREBEN. Undersogelser over unge maends seksuelle
adfaerd, viden og holdning. Copenhagen: Akademisk Forlag,
1968. 2 vols. Sexologist's report on research on the sexual behavior, knowledge, and
attitudes of young people; see pp. 246-86. 3341. HETTLINGER, RICHARD F. Sex Isn't That Simple: The New
Sexuality on Campus. New York: Seabury Press, 1974. 250 pp. See Chapter 5,
"Gay Can Be Good" (pp. 138-54). 3342. HUNT, MORTON. Gay: What You Should Know
about Homosexuality. New York: Farrar, Straus and Giroux, 1977. 210 pp. A somewhat fuzzy book, in which the author attempts to explain to
young people matters about which he himself is not always clear. 3343. JENKINS, CHRISTINE, and JULIE MORRIS. A Look at Gayness: An
Annotated Bibliography of Gay Materials for Young People. Second ed. Ann Arbor, MI: Kindred Spirit Press,
1982. 19 pp. Excellent selection of fiction, nonfiction, comics, and records. See
also: Stephen McDonald, "Young, Gay and the Problem of Self-Identity: An
Annotated Bibliography," Emergency Librarian (September-October 1980), 8-11; and E. Paolella,
below. 3344. JONES, GERALD P. "Using Early Assessment of Prehomosexual
Boys as a Counseling Tool: An Exploratory Study," Journal of Adolescence,
4 (1981), 231-48. Early assessment of the
beginnings of lifelong homosexual adaptation is presented as a valuable tool
for the counselor or therapist to help the client adapt to a sometimes
hostile world. 3345. LE SHAN, EDA.
Sex and Your Teenager: A Guide for Parents. New York: David
McKay, 1969. 239 pp. Perhaps the first mainstream
guide for parents to sound a positive note on homosexuality, which is
regarded as natural. 3346. MARTIN, A. DAMIEN. "Learning to Hide: The Socialization of the
Gay Adolescent," Adolescent Psychiatry, 10 (1982),
52-65. In contrast with the present
situation, young people should have access to accurate information on
homosexuality and to the possibility of maintaining personal, social,
ethical, and professional integrity with a homosexual orientation. 3347. MCCLEARY, ROLAND D. "Patterns of Homosexuality in Boys:
Observations from Illinois," International Journal of Offender
Therapy and Comparative Criminology, 16 (1972), 139-42. Suggests that the neglected
children of the rich and of the ghetto tend to accept all types of sexuality
in a matter-of-fact manner, while those from more closely-knit middle-class
families have intense guilt feelings and tend to project blame. 3348. MORIN, STEPHEN F., and STEPHEN J. SCHULTZ. "The Gay Movement and
the Rights of Children," Journal of Social Issues,
34 (1978), 137-48. Based on the premise that a gay
identity and lifestyle is a positive option to which all adults have a right,
the developmental requirements for the acquisition of a positive gay
identity are explored. 3349. Ook zo? Informatie voor jongeren over homoseksualiteit. Amsterdam: NVIH-COC/Schorenstichting, 1981. 63 pp. Illustrated handbook prepared
by leading Dutch gay organizations for gay youth, covering such topics as
school, parents and siblings, venereal disease, and useful addresses. 3350. PAOLELLA, EDWARD. "Resources for and about Lesbian and Gay Youth:
An Annotated Survey," Reference Services Review, 12:2 (1984),
72-94. One hundred items are chosen
and annotated with additional readings suggested. Categories include
biography, reference, counseling, history, literature, minorities, parents,
religion, and sex education. Author and title indexes. See also: C. Jenkins
and J. Morris, above. 3351. ROESLER, THOMAS, and ROBERT W. DEISHER• "Youthful Male
Homosexuality: Homosexual Experience and the Process of Developing Homosexual
Identity in Males Aged 16 to 22 Years," JAMA: Journal of the American
Medical Association, 219 (1972), 1018-23. From interviews with 60 young
men, attempts to discern significant events that preceded the subject's
self-designation, "I am a Homosexual." 3352. SORENSON, ROBERT C. Adolescent Sexuality in Contemporary America.
New York: World, 1973. 549 pp. In this attempt at synthesis,
see pp. 283-329 (Chapter # 11). 3353. SPRING, MARJORIE P. "A Contribution to the Study of Homosexuality
in Adolescence," in: M. Harley (ed.), The Analyst and the Adolescent at
Work. New York: Quadrangle, 1974, pp. 68-109. Psychoanalytic
perspective. 3354. SULLIVAN, TERRENCE. "Adolescent Homosexuality: - Social
Constructions and Developmental Realities," Journal of Child Care,
1 (1984), 11-27. Suggests that for a number of
prehomosexual youngsters strong homosexual feelings lead them to identify
themselves as different from their peers, leading to a step- by-step
consolidation of a homosexual identity. 3355. TRENCHARD, LORRAINE, and HUGH WARREN. Something to Tell Ton ... The
Experiences and Reeds of Young Lesbians and Gay Men in London.
London: London Gay Teenagers Group, 1984. 165 pp. Report of the findings of a
research project undertaken in 1983 using a questionnaire completed by 416
persons. Treats income and social class, coming out to family, schooling,
unemployment, making contacts, going out, law, and police. 3356. WHITAM, FREDERICK L. "Childhood Indicators of Male
Homosexuality,"
Archives of Sexual Behavior, 6 (1977), 89-96. Arguing that there are
behavioral aspects related to one's sexual orientation which may begin to
emerge early in childhood, notes six significant factors: interest in dolls,
cross-dressing, preference for the company of girls, preference for the
company of older women, sissi- hood, and sexual interest in boys. See also
his book (with Robin M. Mathy), Male Homosexuality in Four Societies
(New York: Praeger, 1986; 240 pp.). XV. SOCIAL WORK A. COUNSELING AND SOCIAL SERVICES The social work approach to
human problems first appeared in Victorian England, but it quickly spread to
the United States, where its activist and pragmatic spirit had great appeal.
Counseling services have become established features of many state-supported
schools and other institutions. Private persons and organizations, including
professedly gay and lesbian ones, also provide counseling. The need for such
separate institutions suggests a limitation in the counseling/social work
ethos. To the extent that the counselor clings to unexamined societal
prejudices communication will be hindered. In fairness, it must be noted that
many heterosexual counselors are aware of this problem, and have sought to
make themselves more sensitive to the needs of gay and lesbian clients. There
is no doubt that counseling and social work has done much good. This is
especially true in the mental field, where large numbers of people,
particularly those who are young, cannot afford psychotherapy--which may in
fact be less effective. 3357.
ATKINSON,
DONALD R., et al. "Sexual Preference
Similarity, Attitude Similarity, and Perceived Counselor Credibility and
Attractiveness," Journal of Counseling Psychology,
28 (1981), 504-09. In a study of 84 homosexual
men, the counselor advising a male client on matters of sexual preference was
rated more expert, trustworthy and attractive, when he expressed a positive
sexual preference for men. 3358. BABUSCIO, JACK. We Speak for Ourselves: Experiences in Homosexual
Counseling. Philadelphia: Fortress Press, 1977. 146 pp. Case studies and sympathetic
practical advice by an American activist based in England. Intended for both
lay and religious counselors. 3359. BEANE, JEFFREY. "'I'd Rather Be Dead Than Gay': Counseling Gay
Men Who Are Coming Out," Personnel and Guidance Journal,
60:4 (1981), 222-26. Focusing on the initial phase
of counseling male clients who have a negative gay identity which they wish
to change, the article presents some basic concepts in Gestalt therapy. 3360. BERGER, RAYMOND M. "An Advocate Model for Intervention with
Homosexuals,"
Social Work, 22 (1977), 280-83. Proposes a model for social
work intervention that is based on the premise that homosexuality is a
legitimate lifestyle option. 3361. BERGSTROM, SAGE, and LAWRENCE CRUZ (eds.). Counseling Lesbians and Gay Male
Youth: Their Special Lives/Special Needs. Washington, DC:
National Network of Runaway and Youth Services, 1983. 85 pp. Focuses on the growing problem
of young people, many of them working class and minority, who have been
pushed out of their home situation because of their lifestyle. 3361A. BERNSTEIN, BARTON E.
"Legal and Social Interface in Counseling Homosexual Clients," Social
Casework, 58 (1977), 36-40. Although biological offspring are
not involved, almost every other problem facing a married couple must be considered
by a homosexual couple (e.g.,the homestead, personal
property, insurance, wills, and child custody). 3362. BLAIR, RALPH EDWARD. Vocational
Guidance and Gay Liberation. New York: National
Task Force on Student Personnel Services and Homosexuality, 1972. (Otherwise
Monograph Series, 19) Reflections by a pioneer in counseling services to the
gay and lesbian community. Blair, who is based in New York •City, edited the
Homosexual Counseling Journal, which contains much relevant
material. 3363. BOWLES, JAMES K. "Dealing with Homosexuality: A Survey of Staff
Training Needs," College Student Personnel, 22 (1981),
276-77. In 1979 the Department of
Residence Halls at the University of Tennessee, Knoxville, conducted a
survey on the need for floor counselors to be trained in dealing with
homosexuality. A large number of the men revealed hostility or aversion with
respect to the subject. 3364. BRITTON, JEFF, and SCOTT ANDERSON. "A Tale of Two Community
Centers,"
Advocate, no. 309 (January 8, 1981), 24-27. On the gay and lesbian service
centers in Philadelphia (since closed) and Los Angeles. See also: Linda M.
Pover- ny,
The Organizational Life Cycle and the Process of Adaptation: A Case Study of
the Los Angeles Gay and Lesbian Community Services Center (Ph.
D. dissertation; Los Angeles, University of Southern California, 1983). 3365. CARNES, PATRICK. The Sexual Addiction. Minneapolis:
CompCare,
1983. 185 pp. Self-help and group procedures
for sexual compulsives, heterosexual and homosexual, based on the twelve
steps of Alcoholic Anonymous. 3366. CORNELL, CARLTON W., and
ROSS A. HUDSON. "Social Work Practice, Homosexuality, and the
Psychoanalytic Approach," Journal of Social Work and Human
Sexuality, 3 (1984), 39-50. Contends that the acceptance of
psychoanalytic thought in the helping professions has made them complicitous
in the derogation of homosexuals that has been pervasive in American society. 3367. DECKER, BEVERLY. "Counseling Gay and Lesbian Couples," Journal
of Social Work and Human Sexuality, 2:2-3 (1983-84), 39-52. When dyadic fusion occurs, the
partners form a single unit, closing themselves off to outsiders, possibly
leading to problems of loss of ego boundaries, dissolution of the self, and
suppression of all aggressive and sexual drives. 3368. DULANEY, DIANA D., and JAMES KELLY. "Improving Services to Gay
and Lesbian Clients," Social Work, 27 (1982), 178-83. Among practitioners of the
mental health professions, homophobia has been found most prevalent among
social workers, who need to confront their own attitudes. 3369. ENRIGHT, MICHAEL A., and BRUCE V. PARSONS. "Training Crisis
Intervention Specialists and Peer Group Counselors as Therapeutic Agents in
the Gay Community," Community Mental Health Journal, 12
(1976), 383-91. Describes the development of a
training program, utilizing gay nonprofessionals. 3370. FERRIS, DAVE. Homosexuality and the Social Services: The Report
of an HCCL Survey of Local Authority Social Service Committees,
London: National Council for Civil Liberties, 1977. 89 pp. Reports a mixed pattern of
accomplishment in Britain. 3371. GAIR, CINDI, et al. Gay Peer Counseling at Michigan. New
York: National Task Force on Student Personnel Services and Homosexuality,
1972. 9 pp. (Otherwise Monograph Series, 9) Evaluates the pioneering work
of part-time assistants funded by the University of Michigan, Ann Arbor. 3372.
GAMBRILL,
EILEEN D., et al. "Social Services Use and
Need among Gay/Lesbian Residents of the San Francisco Bay Area," Journal of Social Work and Human Sexuality,
3 (1984), 51-69. Greatest needs reported were
employment counseling, help in locating housing and services, community
mental health clinics, assistance in meeting people, counseling for personal
growth, and treatment for depression. 3373. GOCHROS, HARVEY, et al. Helping
the Sexually Oppressed. Englewood Cliffs,
NJ: Prentice-Hall, 1986. 282 pp.
Twenty chapters by various writers. Part 1 offers an overview on human
sexuality and oppression. Part 2 discusses specific groups, including gay men
(Raymond M. Berger) and lesbians (Janne Dooley). 3374. GOULDEN, T. "The Gays Counseling Service of N.S.W.,"
Australian Social Work, 38 (1985), 38-41. A volunteer organization in
Sydney that operates a telephone Gayline, and offers counseling of various
types, including work with AIDS patients. 3375.
GRAHAM,
DEE L., et al. "Therapists' Needs for
Training in Counseling Lesbians and Gay Men," Professional
Psychology Research and Practice, 15 (1984), 482-96.
Therapists' major concerns in counseling gay clients were the maintenance of
objectivity, countertransference, and lack of knowledge of homosexuality. 3376. GRAMICK, JEANNINE. "Homophobia: A New Challenge," Social
Work, 28 (1983), 137-41. Contends that if social workers
are to be effective in helping their clients, they must deal with the
irrational fear of homosexuality. 3377. HART, JOHN. "Counseling Problems Arising from the Social
Categorization of Homosexuals," Bulletin of the British
Psychological Society, 35 (1982), 198- 200. Discusses the
therapeutic/counseling implications of a sociological challenge to the notion
of sexual orientation difference as being an essential characteristic of
certain people. 3378. HAYNES, ALPHONSO W. "The Challenge of Counseling the Homosexual
Client,"
Personnel and Guidance Journal, 56 (1977), 243-46. Counseling the homosexual
client must be fully contractual and consensual, and conducted with the
awareness that some individuals may have good reason to fear disclosure of
their homosexuality. 3379. HIDALGO, HILDA, TRAVIS L. PETERSON, and NATALIE JANE WOODMAN (eds.). Lesbian
and Gay Issues: A Resource Manual for Social Workers. Silver
Spring, MD: National Association of Welfare Workers, 1985. 220 pp. Part 1 deals with specific
subgroups (adolescents, couples, lesbian mothers, the disabled, rural gays,
etc.). Part 2 concerns institutional intervention. Part 3 scrutinizes agency
politics which negatively affect gays and lesbians as employees, offering
suggestions for change. 3380. JONES, CLINTON R. Homosexuality and Counseling. Philadelphia:
Fortress Press, 1974. 132 pp. The writer, Canon at Hartford Episcopal
Cathedral, offers humanistic and religious advice on how to help homosexuals
"out of pain and toward fulfillment" as self-accepting persons.
Includes case studies. 3381. JONES, GERALD P. "Counseling Gay Adolescents," Counselor
Education and Supervision, 18 (1978), 144-52. Counselors who would help
adolescent homosexuals toward self-acceptance and in confronting their
educational and career problems must expect to encounter some miscomprehension
on the part of the public. 3382. MACOURT, MALCOLM. Can We Help You? London: Gay Men's
Press, 1986. 112 pp. With ten years of experience in
gay counseling in Britain, the author evaluates gay helplines, designed for
both the counseling community and the lay public. 3383. MILLER, RHODA. "Counseling
the Young Adult Lesbian," Journal of the National Association for Women Deans, Administrators,
and Counselors,
43:3 (1980), 44-48. The author suggests that the
counselor (1) encourage the client to unburden herself of her thoughts and
feelings; (2) guide her in coming out; (3) explain the legal situation to
her; (4) facilitate socializing with other lesbians; and (5) publicly
promote gay rights. 3384. MOSES, A. ELFIN, and ROBERT 0. HAWKINS. Counseling Lesbian Women and Gay Men: A Life-Issues Approach. St.
Louis: C. V. Mosby, 1982. 263 pp. Background and recommendations for positive
intervention with gay clients, covering: how the world views gay people; the
gay experience; and special issues in counseling gay clients—Third World
persons, rural gays, confidentiality, gay college students, aging, and gay
parents. Bibliography, pp. 231-52. 3385. MYERS, MICHAEL F. "Counseling the Parents of Young Homosexual
Male Patients,"
JH, 7:2-3 (1981-82), 131-43. Describes the author's practice
of interviewing the parents of young homosexual men in therapy, specifically
parents traumatized by the discovery of their son's homosexuality. 3386. NEEDHAM, RUSSELL. "Casework Intervention with a Homosexual
Adolescent,"
Social Casework, 58 (1977), 387-94. Mental health professionals
need to see the gay client as a non-pathological subject who most often needs
supportive case work in adjusting to a commonly hostile, prejudicial
environment. 3387. NORTON, JOSEPH L. "The Homosexual and Counseling," Personnel
and Guidance Journal, 54 (1976), 374-77. The task of the counselor today
is to help gay clients to learn that they can lead happy, productive,
fulfilled lives. The standard fears and anxieties are discussed together with
the professional dilemma of coming out as a gay counselor. See also his:
"Integrating Gay Issues into Counselor Education,"
Counselor Education and Supervision, 21 (1982), 208-12. 3388. POTTER, SANDRA J., and TRUDY E. DARTY. "Social Work and the
Invisible Minority: An Exploration of Lesbianism," Social
Work, 26 (1981), 187-92. Experiencing the "double
jeopardy" of belonging to two minority groups, lesbians are the object
of many myths and false beliefs. Social workers must become knowledgeable and
comfortable with lesbianism as a sexual preference and a lifestyle. 3389. ROSS-REYNOLDS, GARY, and BARBARA HARDY. "Crisis Counseling for
Disparate Adolescent Sexual Dilemmas: Pregnancy and Homosexuality," School
Psychology Review, 14 (1985), 300-12. Holds that the school counselor
must be accepting of adolescents confronting these crises and create an environment
in which they feel safe to discuss their feeling and concerns. 3390. RUSSELL, A., and R. WINKLER. "Evaluation of Assertive Training
and Homosexual Guidance Service Groups Designed to Improve Homosexual
Functioning," Journal
of Consulting and Clinical Psychology, 45 (1977), 1-13. Reports a study with 27
Australian men that seems to validate the approach. 3391. RUTLEDGE, AARON L. "Treatment of Male Homosexuality through
Marriage Counseling: A Case Presentation," Journal of Marriage and Family
Counseling, 1 (1975), 51-62. Examines several theoretical
issues, including mixed sexual and dominance-submission dynamics, a
transference family concept, and the "economy" of the homosexual
syndrome. 3392. SANG, BARBARA E. "Psychotherapy with Lesbians: Some Observations
and Tentative Generalizations," in: Edna I. Rawlings and Dianne R.
Carter (eds.), Psychotherapy
for Women: Treatment toward Equality. Springfield, IL: Charles C. Thomas, 1977, pp. 266-75. A major obstacle to satisfactory
counseling and therapy is professionals' lack of practical knowledge about
homosexuality and homosexual lifestyles. Also, women entering a lesbian
relationship in mid-life have feelings of inadequacy and incompetence
because society has denied them early experience. 3393. SCHEPP, KAY FRANCES. Sexuality Counseling: A Training Program. Muncie, IN:
Accelerated Development, 1986. 510 pp. A comprehensive survey with emphasis
on psychological aspects, organized in terms of 51 learning experiences.
Presents numerous cases and reading lists. See esp. pp. 72-78, 296-303. 3394. SCHOENBERG, ROBERT, et al (eds.). Homosexuality and Social Work.
New York: Haworth Press, 1984. 156 pp. Nine papers on (1) life stages
and statuses; (2) life problems; and (3) professional issues. Reprinted from Journal
of Social Work and Human Sexuality, 2:2-3 (1983- 84). 3395. SIEGAL, RIVA L., and DAVID D. HOEFER. "Bereavement Counseling for
Gay Individuals," American Journal of Psychotherapy, 35
(1981), 517-25. Discusses the lack of societal
mechanisms, sanctions, and resources to aid in the bereavement process. 3396. SILVERBERG, ROBERT A. "Being Gay: Helping Clients Cope," Journal
of Psychosocial Nursing and Mental Health Services, 22 (1984),
19-25. The therapist should focus on
helping the client establish his/her own values in a nonjudgmental
atmosphere, avoiding premature labeling, in case the client is just beginning
to explore sexuality. 3396. SITTES, M. CYNARA. "Mental Health Services for Gay Students:
Gay-Straight Rap," Journal of American College Health, 32
(1983), 86-87. Describes a drop-in discussion
group which considers such topics as discovering one's homosexuality,
overcoming one's negative stereotypes, deciding how "out" to be,
handling dormitory roommates, and coping with harassment. 3397. SOPHIE, JOAN. "Counseling Lesbians,"
Personnel and Guidance Journal, 60 (1982), 341-45. This group is highly diverse
with respect to sexual/affec- tional history, lifestyle, and personal
identity. The counselor should help the client explore her feelings without
premature self-labeling, challenge the client's assumptions about sex roles,
become familiar with community resources, and prepare clients for coming out
to significant people. 3399. TARTAGNI, DONNA.
"Counseling Gays in a School Setting," School Counselor, 26
(1978), 26-32. Many high school counselors put their heads in the sand
whenever homosexuality becomes a public issue. The result is that "the
loneliest person in the country is the homosexual adolescent in the typical
high school of today." 3400. TULLY, CAROL, and JOYCE C. ALBRO. "Homosexuality: A Social
Worker's Imbroglio," Journal of Sociology and Social Welfare,
6 (1979), 154-67. Acceptance of the client by the
social worker, specialized counseling, an awareness of the homosexual
subculture within one's community and referral to competent legal
professionals are desiderata in providing services to homosexual clients. 3401. TURNER, RICHARD. "Byzantine Maneuverings Shake Community Services
Centre,"
Campaign (Australia), no. 68 (August 1981), 16-17. Turmoil at the Sydney Gay
Community Centre because of conflicting institutional interests and fears of
a leftist take-over. 3402. VERGARA, TACIE L. "Meeting the Needs of Minority Youth: One
Program's Response," Journal of Social Work and Human Sexuality,
2:2-3 (1983-84), 19-38. Describes the development of
services to meet the needs of sexual minority youth at the Eromin Center in
Philadelphia, since closed. 3403. WAY, PEGGY. "Homosexual Counseling as a Learning Ministry,"
Christianity and Crisis, 37 (1977), 123-31. Contends that women in ministry
are more open to discussion of homosexuality than are men, because the
latter have been emotionally scarred by homosexual advances in their youth. 3404. WESTEFELD, JOHN S., and WINKELPLECK, JUDY M. "University
Counseling Service Groups for Gay Students," Group Behavior, 14
(1983), 121-28. Describes a group counseling
program, the Student Counseling Service, for gay students at Iowa State
University, which uses a semistructured approach. 3405. WOODMAN, NATALIE JANE, and HARRY R. LENNA. Counseling with Gay Men and Women:
A Guide for Facilitating Positive Life-Styles. San Francisco:
Jossey- Bass, 1980. 144 pp. The book covers a whole range
of problems confronting the counselor. Topics include social and clinical
responses to homosexuality, basic concepts and counseling procedures, sexual
identity, promoting a positive self-image, dilemmas of social acceptance, special problems of youth, enhancing interpersonal
relationships, and building community-based support systems. Annotated
bibliography and list of references. Unlike psychoanalysis (XVII.C),
modern psychology generally eschews grand theories of sexual orientation and
behavior, preferring to concentrate of testable assertions regarding specific
aspects. For this reason there is little in the way of synthesis to guide the
neophyte. In compensation for this lack, the control of current progress in
research is facilitated through the monthly issues of
Psychological Abstracts (1927- ), in which each paper cited is
accompanied by a resume. (In addition to thorough coverage of
English-language work, PA offers some material on research in
other languages.) 3406. AKERS, RONALD L. Deviant Behavior: A Social Learning Approach.
Belmont, CA: Wadsworth, 1985. 421 pp. See pp. 192-203 for a
learning-theory analysis of homosexual careers and subcultures. 3407. BERNARD, LARRY C. "Sex-Role Factor Identification and Sexual
Preference of Men," Journal of Personality Assessment, 46
(1982), 292-99. Compared with heterosexual
subjects, homosexual subjects appeared to be more open, to engage in more
domestic activity, to be less concerned with practical and recreational
activities, and to be less conservative. 3408. COURT, JOHN H., and RAYMOND 0. JOHNSTON. "Psycho- sexuality: A
Three-Dimensional Model," Journal of Psychology and Theology,
6 (1978), 90-97. The proposed model includes
morality and "the spiritual aspects of humans." 3409. GONSIOREK, JOHN. Psychological Adjustment and Homosexuality. Washington, DC:
American Psychological Association, 1977. 49 pp. (MS 1478) Selective
evaluation of the literature organized according to various models, including
the cross-species, cross-cultural, demographic, biological, psychoanalytic,
psychometric, and sociological. Limited to English-language material,
chiefly recent. Bibliography, pp. 40-47. 3410. GONSIOREK, JOHN (ed.). "Homosexuality: The End of the
Illusion,"
American Behavioral Scientist, 25 (March-April 1982), 367-496. Symposium of nine papers
dealing with such issues as psychological testing, ethics, therapy, psychoanalysis,
and coming out. Substantially the same contents as Part 2 (pp. 57-161) of William Paul et
al. (eds.),
Homosexuality: Social, Psychological and Biological Issues
(Beverly Hills, CA: Sage, 1982). 3411. GREENBERG, JERROLD. "A Study of Male Homosexuals (Predominantly
College Students)," Journal of the American College Health Association,
22 (1973), 56-60. Results of a questionnaire
taken by 86 students on sexual behavior, family background, religious
attitudes, drug usage, and demography. 3412. HARRY, JOSEPH. Gay Children Grown Up. New York:
Praeger, 1982. 269 pp. A major study using survey data
from Chicago and the region (122 Illinois students and 1461 gay
non-students) to focus on childhood effeminate interests. 3413. HAYNES, STEPHEN N., and L. JEROME OZIEL. "Homosexuality:
Behaviors and Attitudes," Archives of Sexual Behavior,
5 (1976), 283-89. Of 4,251 university students,
the rate of homosexual experiences was appreciably lower than that commonly
reported in the literature and was not significantly related to race,
religion, or region of residence. 3414. HOWELLS, KEVIN (ed.). The Psychology of Sexual Diversity. Oxford: Basil
Blackwell, 1984. 270 pp. Papers covering gender identity, homosexuality,
harmless and harmful sexual disorders, and sexual inadequacy in men and
animals — including roles played by genetic, endo- crinologic, neurologic,
and postnatal factors in regard to sexual development. 3415. MACDONALD, A. C., JR. An Annotated Subject-indexed Bibliography of
Research on Bisexuality, Lesbianism and Male Homosexuality
(1975-78), Washington, DC: American Psychological
Association, 1981. 38 pp. (MS 2206) Summarizes "major
findings" of 115 English-language studies referenced in
Psychological Abstracts in the four-year period. Intended as a
continuation of S. F. Morin (3418), below. Subject index, pp. 35-37. 3416. MALLEN, C. ANNE. "Sex-Role Stereotypes, Gender Identity and
Parental Relationships in Male Homosexuals and Heterosexuals," JH,
9 (1983), 55-74. Data show a tendency of
homosexuals and heterosexuals to converge, that is, similarities are greater
than differences . 3417. MONEY, JOHN. "Sexual Dimorphism and Homosexual Gender
Identity,"
Psychological Bulletin, 74 (1970), 425-40. Arguing that the classification
of homosexuality as hereditary or constitutional vs. acquired is outmoded, suggests that the differentiation should be between chronic,
obligative, or essential vs. transient, facultative, or optional. 3418. MORIN, STEPHEN F. Annotated Bibliography of Research on Lesbianism and
Male Homosexuality (1967- 1974). Washington, DC: American
Psychological Association, 1976. 57pp. (MS 1191) Outlines "major
findings" of 139 studies published in English-language journals
referenced in
Psychological Abstracts during the eight-year period. Continued
by A. P. MacDonald (3415), above. 3419. MORIN, STEPHEN F. "Heterosexual Bias in Psychological Research
on Lesbianism and Male Homosexuality," American Psychologist,
32 (1977), 629-37. Argues that the reconceptualization
of homosexuality as a valid option for an adult lifestyle would suggest
changes in the questions formulated, the data collected, and the
interpretations made in research. Reply by G. A. Rekers, ibid.,
33 (1978), 510-12. See also: Morin, "Psychology and the Gay Community:
An Overview,"
Journal of Social Issues, 34:3 (1978), 1-6 (introduces a
special issue on homosexuality). 3420. NUNGESSER, LON G. Homosexual Acts, Actions and Identities.
New York: Praeger, 1983. 215 pp. Accessible presentation of
components of sexual identity; beliefs and systems of belief (including
stereotypes); prejudice; and fears and phobias. 3421. SOBEL, HARRY J. "Adolescent Attitudes toward Homosexuality in
Relation to Self Concept and Body Satisfaction," Adolescence,
11 (1976), 443-53. Findings of tests suggest that
an adolescent with high self-concept and body image has a propensity for
rigidity, and these individuals may project fears of losing social
reinforcement and status onto minorities such as homosexuals. 3422. STOLLER, ROBERT J. "Problems with the Term 'Homosexuality,'" Hillside
Journal of Clinical Psychiatry, 2 (1980), 3-25. Hold s that the word has been
used in so many ways that, unless one clearly states how it is employed at a
given moment, the surplus meanings stifle understanding. 3423. STRINGER, PETER, and TADEUSZ GRYGIER. "Male Homosexuality,
Psychiatric Patient Status, and Psychological Masculinity and
Femininity,"
Archives of Sexual Behavior, 5 (1976), 15-27. Results of the Dynamic
Personality Inventory administered to both psychiatric patients and others in
Britain show that homosexuality can be characterized independent of clinical
status. 3424. TEMPLER, DONALD I., et al. "The Death Anxiety of Gays," Omega:
Journal of Death and Dying, 14 (1983-84), 211-14.
Administration of the Death Anxiety Scale to 260 male and female homosexuals
show scores similar to those obtained for predominantly heterosexual
populations. Abnormality of gays is not supported by their DAS scores. 3425. VAN WYK, PAUL H., and CHRISANN S. GEIST.
"Psychosocial Development of Heterosexual, Bisexual, and Homosexual
Behavior," Archives
of Sexual Behavior, 13 (1984), 505-44. Results of a study of 7,669
adults indicate that intense sexual experiences and feelings of arousal,
pleasure or discomfort were the strongest precursors of adult sexual
orientation, followed by gender-related factors and family influences. The popular mind tends to regard
creativity as the product of suffering. To the extent that homosexuals are
considered unhappy, they are conceived as being sensitive and creative as a
consequence. This stereotype is complemented by a tendency among homosexuals
themselves (in common with members of other minorities) to conceive of themselves
as possessing special sensitivity and intelligence. Unfortunately, it has
not proved possible to obtain any solid evidence in support of these
assumptions. It may be, however, that "creativity" is itself
significantly unmeasurable and unverifiable, so that this matter is destined
to remain in the sphere of intuition. 3426. CORY, DONALD WEBSTER, and JOHN P. LEROY. "Are Homosexuals
Creative?"
Sexology, 29 (1962), 162-65. Cautioning against inferences
from clinical populations, argues that since the homosexual stands outside
the mainstream of life, he sees humanity differently, originally, and hence
"stands closer to the wellsprings from which true creativity
flows." 3427. DEMARTINO, MANFRED F. Sex and the Intelligent Woman. New York:
Springer, 1974. 308 pp. The first work to deal specifically and seriously
with the sexual attitudes, desires, experiences, and practices of women of
high intelligence as measured by the IQ test. Pages 171-77 discuss homosexual
activity, which was not widespread in the group; only 21% said that they had
ever had any lesbian experience. 3428. DOMINO, GEORGE P. "Homosexuality and
Creativity," JH,
2 (1977), 261-67. Administering a battery of nine
creativity measures to four separate groups of homosexuals and controls
yielded no support for the contention that homosexuals are more creative. 3418. HODGES, ANDREW. Alan Turing: The Enigma. New York: Simon
and Schuster, 1983. 587 pp. Definitive biography of the great British
scientist (1912- 1954), who committed suicide after official persecution.
Because of the detailed investigation of his personality, this monograph
offers vistas for the study of other homosexual scientists and their relation
to society. 3419. KAYY, W. H. (pseud, of William Howard Kupper). The Gay
Geniuses: Psychiatric and Literary Studies of Famous Homosexuals.
Glendale, CA: Marvin Miller, 1965. 223 pp. Contending that homosexuality,
overt and latent, is associated with genius, this popular work presents the
personal histories of more than 70 famous historical figures--intellectuals,
artists and musicians, military men, rulers, and religious leaders. 3420. RABOCH, JAN, and I. SIPOVA. "Intelligence in Homosexuals,
Transsexuals and Hypogonadal Eunuchoids," Journal of Sex Research, 10 (1974),
156-61. With respect to several groups
that exhibited an IQ above average, it is hypothesized that disorders in the
supply of steroid hormone during the formation period of hypothalamus
disturb the sexual development and also have a tendency to increase the
mental level. See also the article (in Czech) of I. Sipova,
Ceskoslovenska Psychia- trie, 71 (1975), 131-36. 3431A. TERMAN, LEWIS M., and
MELITA H. ODEN.
The Gifted Child Grows Up. Stanford: University Press, 1947.
448 pp. (Genetic Studies of Genius, 4) For 11 homosexual men and 6 women, see
pp. 120-22. See also the fifth volume in the series, The
Gifted Group at Mid-Life (Stanford: Stanford University Press,
1959), pp. 21, 46-51. On Terman's work, see May Violet Seagoe, Terman
and the Gifted (Los Altos, CA: W. Kaufmann, 1975), pp. 82-84
and 142-44. 3421. WEINRICH, JAMES D. "Nonreproduction, Homosexuality,
Transsexualism, and Intelligence: I. A Systematic Literature Search," JH,
3 (1978), 275-89. Most studies surveyed found the
more homosexual subject groups' scores to be higher than those of the more
heterosexual controls, and all exceptions to this
trend are concentrated in one subgroup: prisoners. 3422. WILMOTT, MARTIN, and HARRY BRIERLY. "Cognitive Characteristics
and Homosexuality," Archives of Sexual Behavior, 13 (1984),
311-19. No differences were found in IQ
between 20 homosexual males, 20 heterosexual males, and 20 females, but
"social differences in verbal and nonverbal ability were marked." The notion of inversion, which
lingers in the popular mind, suggests that male homosexual
are effeminate, while lesbians are mannish. There is some support for
the assertion that at some stage of development, at least, a significant
number of male homosexuals exhibit some effeminate traits—though this may
simply be a product of the internalization of societal attributions. 3423. BLANCHARD, ROY, et al. "Measuring Physical Aggressiveness in
Heterosexual, Homosexual, and Transsexual Males," Archives
of Sexual Behavior, 12 (1983), 511-24. Results of a self-report
measure of boyhood aggressiveness used with adult males suggest that
whatever underlying factor relates male homosexuality to feminine gender
identity in childhood relates this erotic preference to anomalously low
levels of physical aggressiveness in childhood as well. 3424. FREUND, KURT, et al. "Measuring Feminine Gender Identity in
Homosexual Males," Archives of Sexual Behavior, 3 (1974),
249-60. Questions the appropriateness
of measuring "femininity" in homosexual males by means of the usual
masculinity-fem- ininity tests, but holds that an appropriate scale can be
devised. See also: Freund et al., "Femininity and Preferred Partner Age
in Homosexual and Heterosexual Males," British Journal of Psychiatry,
125 (1974), 442-46. 3425. FRIEDMAN, RICHARD C., and LENORE 0. STERN. "Juvenile
Aggressivity and Sissiness in Homosexual and Heterosexual Males," Journal
of the American Academy of Psychoanalysis, 8 (1980), 427-40. A study of 34 adult males
suggests that male-male peer aggressiveness competency learned after the
juvenile period will not alter homosexual orientation. Contrast Marcel T.
Saghir and Eli Robins, Male and Female Homosexuality: A Comprehensive
Investigation (Baltimore: Williams and Wilkins, 1973; 341 pp.). 3426. GREEN, RICHARD. "One-Hundred Ten Feminine and Masculine Boys:
Behavioral Contrasts and Demographic Similarities," Archives
of Sexual Behavior, 5 (1976), 425-46. Characterizes a group of 60
feminine boys as against a matched control group of 50. See also:
"Diagnosis and Treatment of Gender Identity Disorders during
Childhood," Archives of Sexual Behavior, 1 (1971), 167-73; and "Childhood Cross-Gender Behavior and
Subsequent Sexual Preference," American Journal of Psychiatry,
136 (1979), 106-08. 3429. GRELLERT, EDWARD A. "Childhood Play Behavior of Homosexual and
Heterosexual Men," Psychological Reports, 51 (1982),
607-10. Differences were found on 11
activities: drawing, hiding, bicycling, baseball, basketball, football,
parties, hopscotch, kickball, marbles, and talking. Homosexuals also named
more girl playmates than did the comparison group. See also his:
"Childhood Play Activities of Male and Female Homosexuals and
Heterosexuals,"
Archives of Sexual Behavior, 11 (1982), 451-78. 3430. HARRY, JOSEPH. "Defeminization and Social Class," Archives
of Sexual Behavior, 14 (1985), 1-11. From interviews with 686
homosexual men concludes that gay men who become effeminate tend to come from
blue-collar backgrounds. See also his: Gay Children Grown Up
(New York: Praeger, 1982; 269 pp.). 3431. LEBOVITZ, PHIL S. "Feminine Behavior in Boys: Aspects of Its
Outcome,"
American Journal of Psychiatry, 128 (1972), 1283-89. Of 16 subjects who had
exhibited feminine behavior as young boys, there appeared to be two peaks for
the age of onset of symptoms: before age 6 and after age 10. 3432.
LUTZ,
DAVID J., et al. "Feminine Gender Identity
and Psychological Adjustment of Male Transsexuals and Male Homosexuals," Journal of Sex Research, 20 (1984),
350-62. Since the age of six
transsexuals reported preferring female activities and desiring to be female
significantly more than did homosexuals. 3433. REKERS, GEORGE A., et al. "Sex-Role Stereotypy and Professional
Intervention for Childhood Gender Disturbance,"
Professional Psychology, 9 (1978), 127-36. Contends that the psychological
profession should promote greater social tolerance for individuals with
deviant sex roles and individual tolerance in children for androgyny in their
own sex role. 3434.
SCHATZBERG,
ALAN F., et al. "Effeminacy: I. A
Quantitative Rating Scale," Archives of Sexual Behavior,
4 (1975), 31-41. Knowledge of subject's effeminacy
rating is of little predictive value in determining his sexual orientation. 3435. STOLLER, ROBERT C. "Boyhood Gender Aberrations: Treatment
Issues,"
Journal of the American Psychoanalytic Association, 26 (1978),
541-58. Once an evaluation has revealed that femininity is
in— tense, treatment should quickly begin and should, when
possible, include both mother and father. 3436. WESTFALL, MICHAEL P. "Effeminacy: II. Variation with Social
Context,"
Archives of Sexual Behavior, 4 (1975), 43-51. Videotapes of 19 subjects in
encounter groups showed large variations in expressivity of effeminacy. 3437. WHITAM, FREDERICK L., and MICHAEL ZENT. "A Cross- Cultural
Assessment of Early Cross-Gender Behavior and Familial Factors in Male
Homosexuality,"
Archives of Sexual Behavior, 13 (1984), 427-39. From studies in the U. S.,
Guatemala, Brazil, and the Philippines, concludes that (1) early cross-gender
behavior is an intrinsic characteristic of male homosexuals, wherever they
may be found, and (2) familial factors frequently regarded as conducive to
homosexuality are probably not causative but rather are culturally variable
reactions to emerging homosexuality. See also: Whitam and Robin M. Mathy, Male
Homosexuality in Four Societies (New York: Praeger, 1986; 240
pp.). 3438. ZUGER, BERNARD. "Effeminate Behavior Present in Boys from
Childhood: Ten Additional Years of Follow-up,"
Comprehensive Psychiatry, 19 (1978), 363-69. Reports a ten-year follow-up of
16 boys with early effeminate behavior, of whom 12 developed some form of
deviant behavior (homosexuality in 10, transvestism in 1, transsexualism in
1). The original article is: "Effeminate Behavior Present in Boys from
Early Childhood," Pediatrics, 69 (1966), 1089-1107. Once persuaded to reject
traditional constitutional and genetic theories of the etiology of
homosexuality, the popular mind focuses on the family as the incubator of
homosexual identity. Hence the self-lacerating complaint of parents: "What
did we do wrong?" More specifically, some American psychoanalysts tend
to attribute male homosexuality to the "close-binding mother" (see
XVII.C). Apart from proving or disproving particular theories, there is a
need to study in a descriptive and unbiased way the family backgrounds of gay
men and lesbians (in this regard, see the testimonies of parents of gays,
XVIII.F). 3447. BIEBER, IRVING. "A
Discussion of 'Homosexuality: The Ethical Challenge,'" Journal
of Consulting and Clinical Psychology, 44 (1976), 163-66. In
keeping with his earlier position, the psychoanalyst argues that homosexuality is pathological, being the outcome
of adverse experiences with both parents. See Bieber et al.,
Homosexuality: A Psychoanalytic Study (New York: Basic, 1962;
358 pp.); and John R. Snortum et al., "Family Dynamics and
Homosexuality,"
Psychological Reports, 24 (1969), 763-70. 3427. BENE, EVA. "On the Genesis of Male Homosexuality: An Attempt at
Clarifying the Role of Parents," British Journal of Psychiatry,
111 (1965), 803-13. From administering a
questionnaire to 85 male homosexuals and 84 married men concludes that,
compared to heterosexual men, homosexual men more often have poor relationships
with their fathers, whom they tend to consider ineffectual and unsuitable as
role models. 3428. BLOCH, DOROTHY. "The Threat of Infanticide and Homosexual
Identity,"
Psychoanalytic Review, 62 (1975-76), 579-99. Based on four patients,
contends that a defense against the fear of infanticide leads, inter alia, to
the acted- out fantasy of a sexual reversal. 3429. BUHRICH, NEIL, and NATHANIEL MCCONAGHY. "Parental Relationships
during Childhood in Homosexuality, Transvestism and Transsexualism,"
Australian and New Zealand Journal of Psychiatry, 12 (1978),
103-08. While all three groups reported
that, during childhood, their fathers lacked interest in them or were absent
from home, there was little evidence to support the view that homosexual,
transvestite, or transsexual subjects had pathological relationships with
their mothers. 3430. DEVINE, JACK L. "A Systemic Inspection of Affec- tional
Preference Orientation and the Family of Origin," Journal
of Social Work and Human Sexuality, 2:2-3 (1983-84), 9-17. Presents a five-stage
developmental model reflecting systematic changes undergone by a family in
which a child has a same-gender affectional preference. 3431. FREUND, KURT, and RAY BLANCHARD. "Is the Distant Relationship of
Fathers and Homosexual Sons Related to the Sons' Erotic Preference for Male
Partners, or to the Sons' Atypical Gender Identity, or Both?" JH,
9 (1983), 7-25. From three studies, the authors
conclude that the relationship is chiefly in terms of atypical childhood
gender identity. 3432. GUNDLACH, RALPH H. "Sibship Size, Sibsex, and Homosexuality among
Females,"
Transnational Mental Health Research Newsletter, 19 (1977), 1,
3-7. Concludes that birth order and
family atmosphere together influence lesbianism. 3433. IBRAHIM, AZMY. "The Home Situation and the Homosexual," Journal
of Sex Research, 12 (1976), 263- 82. From interviews with 31
subjects, contends that a positive relationship exists between the incidence
of homosexuality and the unhappy childhood of the homosexual. 3434. LANG, THEO. "Studies on the Genetic Determination of
Homosexuality,"
Journal of Nervous and Mental Disease, 92 (1940), 55-64. Based on police records in
Munich and Hamburg, Germany, finds that the families of male homosexuals have
a higher proportion of male to female siblings than would be expected. See
also: K. Jensch, "Zur Genealogie der Homosexualität," Archiv
für Psychiatrie und Nervenkrankheiten, 112 (1941), 527-40,
679-96; and William H. James, "Sex Ratios of Half-Sibs of Male
Homosexuals,"
British Journal of Psychiatry, 118 (1971), 93-94. 3435. LONEY, JAN. "Family Dynamics in Homosexual Women," Archives
of Sexual Behavior, 2 (1973), 343-50. With eleven healthy lesbian
subjects, finds that overall scores on the Family Adjustment Test confirm the
prediction that lesbians would show more evidence of adverse factors in
their upbringing than controls. 3436. MANOSEVITZ, MARTIN. "Early Sexual Behavior in Adult Homosexual
and Heterosexual Males," Journal of Abnormal Psychology,
3 [76:1] (1970), 396-402. Comparison of 28 homosexual
with 22 heterosexual men indicates that the developmental sequence of sexual
activity for homosexuals and heterosexuals follows orderly, though different
progressions. The prehomosexual child seems to become sexually active earlier
than the preheterosexual. See also his: "The Development of Male
Homosexuality," Journal of Sex Research, 8 (1972), 31-40. 3437. MILLER, JUDITH A,, et al. "Comparison of
Family Relationships: Homosexual versus Heterosexual Women,"
Psychological Reports, 46 (1980). 1127-32. Statistically significant
differences indicate that lesbians experienced less positive nuclear family
relationships. 3438. PERKINS, MURIEL W. "On Birth Order among Lesbians,"
Psychological Reports, 43 (1978), 814. From a study of 212 lesbians,
it was concluded that there is no significant relationship between being an
only child and the etiology of lesbianism. 3439. PILLARD, RICHARD C., et al. "A Family Study of Sexual
Orientation,"
Archives of Sexual Behavior, 11 (1982), 511-20. Fifty homosexual subjects
reported a significant excess of homosexual brothers and more distant male
relatives, but not of lesbian sisters or female relatives. About 25% of
brothers of homosexual men were reported to be homosexual. 3440.
SCHUBERT,
HERMAN J., et al. "Sibship Size, Sibsex,
Sibgap, and Homosexuality among Male Outpatients,"
Transnational
Mental Health Research Newsletter, 18:4 (1976), 1, 3-8. It was found that as outpatient
family size increased, so did the percentage of homosexuals. The percentage
of outpatient homosexuals who had a younger sister or who were later-borns
in all-male sibling groups was higher than for contrasting sibling
combinations. 3441. SHAVELSON, EILEEN, et al. "Lesbian Women's Perceptions of Their
Parent-Child Relationships," JH, 5 (1980), 205-15. In a comparison of 26 lesbians
with a group of 26 heterosexual women, no significant family background
variable or parental sex-role adherence variable was found that correlated
with sexual orientation. 3442. SIEGELMAN, MARVIN. "Birth Order and Family Size of Homosexual Men
and Women,"
Journal of Consulting and Clinical Psychology, 41 (1973), 164. Finds that neither birth order
nor family size represent distinct or meaningful contrasts between male or
female homosexuals or heterosexuals. 3443. SIEGELMAN, MARVIN. "Parental Background of Male Homosexuals and
Heterosexuals,"
Archives of Sexual Behavior, 3 (1974), 3-18. In a study involving 307
male homosexuals and
138 heterosexuals, results question the assumption that
negative parental behavior, esp. of mothers, plays a critical role in
differentiating the backgrounds of homosexuals and heterosexuals. See also
his: "Parental Background of Homosexual and Heterosexual Women," British
Journal of Psychiatry, 124 (1974), 14-21; "Parental
Backgrounds of Homosexual and Heterosexual Women: A Cross-National
Replication,"
Archives of Sexual Behavior, 10 (1981), 371-78; and
"Parental Backgrounds of Homosexual Men: A Cross-National Replication," ibid., pp. 505-513. 3444. SIPOVA, IVA, and ANTONIN BRZEK. "Parental and Interpersonal
Relationships of Transsexual and Masculine and Feminine Homosexual Men," JH, 9
(1983), 75-85. Finds that the fathers of
homosexuals and transsexuals were more hostile and less dominant than fathers
of controls. 3445. SLATER, ELIOT. "Birth Order and Maternal Age of
Homosexuals,"
Lancet, 1 (1962), 69-71. In a study of 401 British male
homosexuals, seen clinically, it was found that they were generally born
later in sibship and their mothers were older. See also: E. H. Hare and P. A.
Moran, "Parental Age and Birth Order in Homosexual Parents: A Replication of Slater's
Study," British
Journal of Psychiatry, 134 (1979), 178-82. 3467. THOMPSON, NORMAN L., et
al. "Parent-Child Relationships and Sexual Identity in Male and Female
Homosexuals and Heterosexuals," Journal of Consulting and Clinical
Psychology, 41 (1973), 120-27. In two studies lesbians were
more distant from both parents, while male homosexuals reported more close-
binding, intimate mothers and hostile, detached fathers than the heterosexual
controls. Fantasies, sometimes
dismissively termed "daydreaming," have only recently engaged the
interest of psychologists, though they have long been of central interest to
psychoanalysis. The "sexual revolution" of the 1960s has also
generated a good deal of interest in erotic fantasies, and the relation
between such imagings and the enacted scripts of sexual encounter. 3468. FRIDAY, NANCY. Men in Love: Men's Sexual Fantasies: The Triumph
of Love over Rage. New York: Delacorte, 1980. 527 pp. Personal accounts with the
author's pop psychological commentary. See "Straight Men, Gay
Fantasies" (pp. 345- 60), "Bisexuals" (pp. 361-82),
"Homosexuals" (pp. 383- 404), and "Transvestites" (pp.
405-22). 3469. FRIDAY, NANCY. My Secret Garden: Women's Sexual Fantasies.
New York: Trident, 1973. 361 pp. This first popular volume contains some lesbian
material. 3470. LEHNE, GREGORY K. "Gay Male Fantasies and Realities," Journal
of Social Issues, 34 (1978), 28-37. In 47 gay men, fantasies
occurring around age twelve preceded interpersonal sexual experience by an
average of four years. They functioned as a source of self- knowledge about
subjects' affectional preference and influenced early homosexual experiences. 3471. SCHIMEL, JOHN L. "Homosexual Fantasies in Heterosexual
Males,"
Medical Aspects of Human Sexuality, 6 (1972), 138-51. Although such fantasies are
deemed worthy of investigation, they need not be construed as an embodiment
of the subject's real life problems. 3472. STORMS, MICHAEL D. "Theories of Sexual Orientation," Journal
of Personality and Social Psychology, 38 (1980), 783-92. Tests administered to 185
heterosexual, bisexual, and homosexual undergraduates yielded strong support
for the hypothesis that sexual orientation relates primarily to erotic
fantasy orientation. The results support a two-dimensional model of sexual
orientation in which homosexuality and heterosexuality are treated as
separate, independent factors. See also his: "A Theory of Erotic Orientation
Development,"
Psychological Review, 88 (1981), 340-53. In its various forms, the
disease model of homosexuality suggests that homosexuals function less well
in society than heterosexuals. Inasmuch as for many decades most data
gathered about homosexuals came from clinical patients and prisoners, this
assumption seemed to have been confirmed. Following Evelyn Hooker's
pioneering investigations in the 1950s with unbiased samples, the notion that
homosexuals were, by virtue of their orientation alone, less well equipped
to cope with society than heterosexuals has been overturned. More work is now
needed on
how gay men and lesbians adjust, despite the social disapproval
that they still face. 3468. ARON, HENRY. "The Homosexual," Journal of Human Relations,
17 (1969), 58-70. Holds that homosexuality is
"not a problem, not a danger, not an illness, not immaturity." The
so-called "gay world" is in almost all measures indistinguishable
from the "non-gay world." 3469. CARLSON, HELENA M., and LESLIE A. BAXTER. "Androgyny,
Depression, and Self-Esteem in Irish Homosexual and Heterosexual Males and
Females,"
Sex Roles, 10 (1984), 457-67. While Irish homosexuals were
classified as androgynous more frequently than heterosexuals, they did not
differ from heterosexuals in self-esteem or depression scores. 3470. CATTELL, RAYMOND B., and JOHN H. MORONY. "The Use of the 16 PF in
Distinguishing Homosexuals, Normals and General Criminals," Journal
of Consulting Psychology, 26 (1962), 531-40. In an application of the
Sixteen Personality Factor Questionnaire, it was found that the profile of
homosexuals—all of them imprisoned felons—was similar to the profile of
neurotics. 3471. CLARK, THOMAS R. "Homosexuality and Psychopathol- ogy in
Nonpatient Males," American Journal of Psychoanalysis, 35
(1975), 163-68. In a comparison of seven groups
based on the Kinsey scale, no significant differences were found in terms of
self- criticism, defensiveness, self-concept, general emotional
maladjustment, neurosis personality-character disorder, and overall
personality integration. Homosexuality is not a criterion predictor of
psychopathology. 3473. EVANS, RAY B. "Adjective Check List Scores of Homosexual
Men,"
Journal of Personality Assessment, 35 (1971), 344-49. Analysis
of the scores suggests that the homosexuals had more problems in self-acceptance
and in relating to others, but that only a small minority differed from the
heterosexuals sufficiently to be considered neurotic. 3474. FREEDMAN, MARK. Homosexuality and Psychological Function.
Belmont, CA: Brooks/Cole, 1971. 124 pp. Stresses positive aspects,
based in large measure on studies done with women for his Ph.D. degree at
Case Western University (1967). In comparisons between homosexual and
heterosexual women he found significant differences between the two groups in
three areas: the lesbians had more independence and inner direction, had
greater acceptance of aggression, and found greater satisfaction in work
than the control group. See also his: "Homosexuals May Be Healthier Than
Straights,"
Psychology Today (March 1975), 28-32. 3475. GREENBERG, JERROLD. "A Study of Self-Esteem and Alienation of
Male Homosexuals," Journal of Psychology, 83 (1973),
137-43. The study indicated that
homosexuals had greater alienation than heterosexual men but similar
self-esteem levels. 3476. HAMMERSMITH, SUE K., and MARTIN S. WEINBERG. "Homosexual
Identity: Commitment, Adjustment, and Significant Others,"
Sociometry, 36 (1973), 56-79. Data from 2497 male homosexuals
in the U.S., the Netherlands, and Denmark indicate that commitment to a
homosexual identity is positively correlated with (a) psychological
adjustment, and (b) support of significant others. 3477. HART, MAUREEN, et al. "Psychological Adjustment of Nonpatient
Homosexuals: Critical Review of the Research Literature," Journal
of Clinical Psychiatry, 39 (1978), 604-08. Concludes that findings to date
have not demonstrated that homosexuals are any less psychologically adjusted
than heterosexuals. 3478. HOFFMAN, MARTIN. "Homosexual," Psychology Today, 3:2
(July 1969), 43-45, 70. While male homosexuals are not
necessarily ill, societal hostility tends to engender disorders related to
reaction formation, incorporative wishes toward the male, and the shallowness of the relationship, 3479. HOOKER, EVELYN. "The Adjustment of the Male Overt
Homosexual,"
Journal of Projective Techniques, 21 (1957), 18-31. Reports on a pioneering study
with nonclinical homosexuals, concluding that homosexuality is not a single
clinical entity; that it is a deviation in sexual pattern which is still
within the normal range psychologically; and that there is no necessary
relation between sexual orientation and other aspects of a person's
intrapsychic or interpersonal functioning. 3480. LIDDICOAT, RENEE. "A Study of Non-Institutionalized
Homosexuals,"
Journal of the National Institute of Personnel Research, 8
(1961), 217-49. In a study of 100 male and
female homosexuals in South Africa, no evidence of psychopathology was
discovered. 3481. MYRICK, FRED. "Attitudinal Differences between Heterosexually and
Homosexually Oriented Males and between Covert and Overt Male
Homosexuals,"
Journal of Abnormal Psychology, 83 (1974), 81-86. From questionnaires completed
by patrons of bars in Texas, the author claims to be able to discriminate
between heterosexuals and homosexuals. 3482. NURIUS, PAULA S. "Mental Health Implications of Sexual
Orientation,"
Journal of Sex Research, 19 (1983), 119-36. Using four measures of clinical
psychopathology (depression, self-esteem, marital discord, sexual discord), found significant mean differences among
sexual orientation groups, but the prediction of clinical psychopathology
based on these differences proved to be limited. 3483. OBERSTONE, ANDREA K., and HARRIET SUKONECK. "Psychological
Adjustment and Life Style of Single Lesbians and Single Heterosexual
Women,"
Psychology of Women Quarterly, 1 (1976), 172-88. Differences between lesbians
and heterosexual women were found only on items directly related to sexual orientation . 3484. OHLSON, E. LAMONTE. "A Preliminary Investigation into the
Self-Disclosing Ability of Male Homosexuals,"
Psychology, 11 (1974), 21-25. In this study of
undergraduates, negative findings were not confirmed, suggesting that
homosexuality should be viewed as a nonpsychopathological phenomenon. 3485. ROSS, MICHAEL W. "The Relationship of Perceived Societal
Hostility, Conformity, and Psychological Adjustment in Homosexual
Males,"
JH, 4 (1978), 157-68. Interpretation of a three-group sample indicated
that putative societal reaction was a critical variable producing
conformity and psychological maladjustment in homosexual males. 3486. SAGHIR, MARCEL, et al. "Homosexuality: III. Psychiatric
Disorders and Disability in the Male Homosexual," American
Journal of Psychiatry, 126 (1970), 1079-86. In a group of 35 unmarried men
little difference was demonstrated in the prevalence of psychopathology. 3487. SCHMITT, J. PATRICK, and LAWRENCE A. KURDEK. "Correlates of
Social Anxiety in College Students and Homosexuals," Journal
of Personality Assessment, 48 (1984), 403-09. Correlational patterns were
remarkably similar in both samples, homosexual and general, and sensitization
emerged as the best single predictor in both samples. 3488. SIEGELMAN, MARVIN. "Adjustment of Homosexual and Heterosexual
Women,"
British Journal of Psychiatry, 120 (1972), 477-81. In a battery of tests,
homosexual women were found to be as well adjusted as the heterosexuals. See
also his: "Adjustment of Male Homosexuals and Heterosexuals," Archives
of Sexual Behavior, 1 (1972), 9-25; "Adjustment of
Homosexual and Heterosexual Women: A Cross-National Replication," ibid., 8 (1979), 121-25; and "Psychological
Adjustment of Homosexual and Heterosexual Men," ibid., 7 (1978), 1-11. 3489. SKRAPEC, CANDICE, and K. R. MACKENZIE. "Psychological
Self-Perception in Male Transsexuals, Homosexuals, and Heterosexuals," Archives
of Sexual Behavior, 10 (1981), 357-70. Of the three groups,
transsexuals reflected lowest self- esteem. Homosexuals reported the highest
self-esteem and saw themselves the most similar to males and the most dissimilar
to females. 3490. STOKES, KIRK, et al. "Sexual Orientation and Sex Role
Conformity,"
Archives of Sexual Behavior, 12 (1983), 427-33. Admininistering the Bern
Sex-Role Inventory to 186 subjects showed no significant support for
prevailing stereotypes of effeminate male homosexuals and butch lesbians. 3491. THOMPSON, NORMAN L. "Personal Adjustment of Male and Female
Homosexual and Heterosexuals," Journal of Abnormal Psychology,
78 (1971), 237-40. Homosexuals did not differ in
important ways from heterosexuals in defensiveness, personal adjustment, or
self- confidence as measured by the Adjective Check List; or in self-evaluation
as measured by semantic differential. Compared with heterosexuals, male
homosexuals were less defensive and less self-confident, while lesbians were
more self-confident. 3492. TOWNES, BRENDA D., et al. "Differences in Psychological Sex,
Adjustment, and Familial Influences among Homosexual and Nonhomosexual
Populations," JH,
1 (1976) , 261-72. Findings from a battery of
tests suggest that variations in sexual lifestyle can be understood as
manifestations of different combinations of the components of psychological
sex and that a nurturant father is important in the development of a
heterosexual lifestyle. 3493. WILLMOTT, MARTIN, and HARRY BRIERLEY. "Cognitive Characteristics
and Homosexuality," Archives of Sexual Behavior, 13 (1984),
311-19. A battery of tests administered
in England to 20 homosexual men, 20 heterosexual men, and 20 women revealed
few differences among the groups. In the male groups, however, verbal
ability appeared to be strongly characteristic of a homosexual identity. 3494. WILSON, M. LEE. "Neuroticism and Extraversion of Female
Homosexuals,"
Psychological Reports, 51 (1982), 559-62. In the Eysenck Personality
Inventory, heterosexuals scored higher on the neuroticism scale than did
homosexuals. 3495. WILSON, MARILYN M., and ROGER L. GREENE. "Personality
Characteristics of Female Homosexuals," Psychological Reports,
28 (1971), 407-12. In a battery of tests, there
was only a slight personality pattern difference between the lesbians and
neither group showed a pathological personality pattern. 3496. ZUCKERMAN, MARVIN, and PATRICIA L. MYERS. "Sensation Seeking in
Homosexual and Heterosexual Males," Archives of Sexual Behavior,
12 (1983), 347-56. Concludes that male
homosexuals, as a general group, do not differ from heterosexuals on the
sensation-seeking trait, though the trait might be related to variety of
homosexual behavior and partners, just as it is to variety of heterosexual
experience. The emphasis on collective
activity that developed in 1960s social change movements, as well as in
social work, has prompted study of the social psychological-dynamics of such
groups. The vogue of "consciousness raising"
seems to have begun with leftist-feminist groups, and then spread to gay and
lesbian ones. 3497. BAKER, ANDREA J. "The Problem of Authority in Radical Movement
Groups: A Case Study of Lesbian- Feminist Organization," Journal
of Applied Behavior Science, 18 (1982), 323-41. A case study of four stages of
organization in a lesbian- feminist community shows how adherence to
principles of radical feminism hindered the maintenance of a bureaucratic
structure. 3498. CHESEBRO, JAMES W., et al. "Consciousness-Raising among Gay
Males," in: Chesebro (ed.), Gayspeak. New York:
Pilgrim Press, 1981, pp. 211-23. Study of small-group practice
common in the early 1970s, based on the expectation that face-to-face
interaction will serve to reshape personality, honing its "revolutionary"
edge. 3499. FEIN,|SARA B., and ELANE M. NUEHRING.
"Perspectives! on the Gender-Integrated Gay
Community: Its Formal Structure and Social Function,"
Homosexual Counseling Journal, 2 (1975), 150-63. Utilizing quasi-participant
observation and interviewing, studied a community of about 30 homosexuals who
were present for almost all social functions and a peripheral membership of
about 100. 3500. FITZGERALD, THOMAS K. "Suicide Prevention and Gay Self-Help
Groups in Sweden and Finland," Crisis: International Journal of
Suicide Studies, 2 (1981), 58-68. Study of crisis handling in
Scandinavia as compared to the United States. 3501. MASTERSON, JILL. "Lesbian Consciousness-Raising Discussion
Groups,"
Journal for Specialists in Group Work, 8 (1983), 24-30. Results of three discussion
groups in which 28 lesbian participants were led by a facilitator in a
structured, topic-oriented format. Concludes that the structured format
helped to lower the high anxiety level sometimes engendered by group therapy. 3502. MORSON, TOM, and ROBERT MCINNESS. "Sexual Identity Issues in
Group Work: Gender, Social Sex Role, and Sexual Orientation Conditions," Social
Work with Groups, 6 (1983), 67-77. Asserting that polarized thinking
about gender, social sex roles, and sexual orientation has resulted in sexual
identity confusion, presents group interventions for work with this
confusions, i 3503. STERN, RICHARD. "A Peer Self-Help Group of Homosexuals on the
North Side of Chicago," Psychotherapy: Theory, Research
and Practice, 12 (1975), 418-24. The success of the Loyola Gay Students group is
attributed to its flexibility, its lack of formal structure and
its avoidance of financial complications by finding a free place to meet. 3508. TWENTY-FIVE TO SIX BAKING
AND TRUCKING CO.
Great Gay in the Morning: One Group's Approach to Communal Living and Sexual
Politics. Washington, NJ: Times Change Press, 1972. 95 pp.
Experiential account of the values and practices of a rural countercultural
group, typical of the early 1970s. H. HOMOPHOBIA AND STEREOTYPING Aversion to homosexuality was
first studied in the context of prejudice and intolerance. This approach
brought out similarities between dislike of homosexuals and negative
attitudes toward ethnic groups. And, as in ethnic groups, negativism towards
ones group may be internalized, as in the self-hating homosexual.
Concentration on the prejudice perspective may have served, however, to
hinder recognition of specific features characterizing aversion to homosexual
behavior, which evokes deep-rooted irrational fears that differ
fundamentally from those involved in racial prejudice. The term
"homophobia," which will probably survive because it is convenient,
is nonetheless misleading since phobic reactions are only one aspect of
dislike of homosexuality. Some prefer the term "homoneg- ativism."
For extreme aspects of acting out of hatred of homosexuals, expressed as
violence and "fag bashing," see XX.A. 3509.
ADORNO,
THEODOR WIESENGRUND, et al. The Authoritarian Personality. New York: Harper and Row, 1950. 990 pp. Although this massive study
treats homosexuality only in passing, it fostered a kind of "unified
field" concept of prejudice to which some recent studies of homophobia
are implicitly indebted. The study's political subtext (it grew out of the
Marxist assumptions of the Frankfurt School) and its statistical procedures
have attracted some criticism. 3510. AGUERRO, JOSEPH A., et al. "The Relationship among Sexual
Beliefs, Attitudes, Experience, and Homophobia," JH,
10 (1984), 95-107. Finds that the greatest dislike
of homosexuals appears in subjects with negative affect and belief that
homosexuality was a learned orientation. 3511. BANENS, MAKS. De homo-aversie: een analyse van de
maatschappelijke onderdrukking van homoseksual- iteit.
Groningen: Historische Uitgeverij, 1981. A historical overview of
aversion to homosexuality, together with analysis of theories that attempt
to explain it. 3512. BLACK, KATHRYN N., and MICHAEL R. STEVENSON. "The Relationship of
Self-Reported Sex-Role Characteristics and Attitudes Towards
Homosexuality,"
JH, 10 (1984), 83-93. Seeks to measure links between
concepts of sex role and homonegativism. 3513. CERNY, JEROME, and JAMES POLYSON. "Changing Homonegative
Attitudes,"
Journal of Social and Clinical Psychology, 2 (1984), 366-71. In a college human-sexuality
course on homonegative attitudes, subjects showed significant decreases in
negative views at the end of the semester as compared with a control
group—suggesting that education can be effective in changing such prejudice. 3514. CUENOT, RANDALL G., and STEPHEN S. FUGITA. "Perceived
Homosexuality: Measuring Heterosexual Attitudinal and Nonverbal
Reactions,"
Personality and Social Psychology Bulletin, 8 (1982), 100-06. Investigation of the reactions
of 80 undergraduate heterosexuals to a perceived homosexual or nonhomosexual
inteviewer during an ongoing interaction. 3515. DAHME, G., et al. ["Identity as a Man and Attitude toward Male
Homosexuals: An Empirical Study of 104 Vocational and High School
Students,"]
Psychologie und Praxis, 25 (1981), 69-80. Interaction with homosexuals
threatened the male identity of heterosexuals. A positive correlation was
found between the strength of subjects' self concepts and their
discrimination against homosexuals. 3516. DE CECCO, JOHN P. (ed.). Bashers, Baiters, and Bigots: Homophobia in American Society. New York: Harrington Park
Press, 1984. 202 pp. Collection of eleven papers in psychology and sociology,
dealing directly and indirectly with prejudice against homosexuals. In
contrast with the impression that the title might suggest, does not deal with
criminological aspects (i.e.,the violent acting out
of homonegativism). Reprinted from JH, 10:1-2 (1984). 3517. DE CRESCENZO, TERESA A. "Homophobia: A Study of the Attitudes of
Mental Health Professionals toward Homosexuality," Journal
of Social Work and Human Sexuality, 2 (1983-84), 115-36. In a questionnaire administered
to 140 mental health professionals, social workers achieved the highest homophobia
scores, psychologists the lowest. 3518. DEW, MARY A. "The Effect of Attitudes on
Infer- ences of Homosexuality and Perceived Physical Attractiveness in
Women,"
Sex Roles, 12 (1985), 143-55. A study of 50 male and female
undergraduates supported the hypothesis that inferences of homosexuality
would be made more frequently about women perceived to be less physically
attractive than about women perceived to be more attractive. 3519. DUNBAR, JOHN, et al. "Some Correlates of Attitudes toward
Homosexuality,"
Journal of Social Psychology, 89 (1973), 271-79. In tests given to 126 male
undergraduates, the anti-homo- sexual subjects were more intolerant of a
variety of heterosexual behaviors and reported more personal sex guilt and
higher repression of their own sexual impulses than did pro-homosexual
subjects. Findings confirm those of W. Churchill, Homosexual Behavior among Males
(New York: Hawthorn, 1967). 3520. FARRELL, RONALD A., and THOMAS J. MORRIONE. "Social Interaction
and Stereotypic Responses to Homosexuals," Archives of Sexual Behavior,
3 (1974), 425-42. Interprets survey data from a
midwestern sample to ascertain in which settings gay men are most likely to
encounter homophobic responses and which types of gay men are most likely to
evoke them. 3521. FYFE, BILL. "'Homophobia' or Homosexual Bias Reconsidered," Archives
of Sexual Behavior, 12 (1983), 549-54. Argues that broad usage of the
concept of homophobia threatens to restrict understanding of negative
reaction to homosexuals. Recommends that the concept be abandoned in favor
of another concept such as homosexual bias--except in rare cases where
anxiety arousal leads to overt phobic avoidance. For an incisive critique of
the concept of homophobia, see: Lon G. Nungesser, Homosexual Acts, Actors and
Identities (New York: Praeger, 1983), pp. 133-63. 3522. GURWITZ, SHARON B., and MELINDA MARCUS. "Effects of Anticipated
Interaction, Sex, and Homosexual Stereotypes on First Impressions," Journal
of Applied Social Psychology, 8 (1978), 47-56. A simulation test yielded the
conclusion that both males and females liked the stimulus person less and
attributed stereotypic traits to him more when he was homosexual than when he
was not. 3523. HANSEN, GARY L. "Androgyny, Sex-Role Orientation, and
Homosexism,"
Journal of Psychology, 112 (1982), 39-45. In tests administered to
college students, "homosexism" (dislike of homosexuals) was
significantly related to sex-role orientation among males and to both androgyny and
sex-role orientation among females. See also his: "Measuring Prejudice
against Homosexuality (Homosexism) among College Students: A New Scale," Journal
of Social Psychology, 117 (1982), 233-36. 3524. HEINEMANN, WOLFGANG, et al. "Meeting a Deviant Person: Subjective
Norms and Affective Reactions," European Journal of Social
Psychology, 11 (1981), 1-25. Studied differences in
nonverbal and physiological responses during a confrontation with a male
confederate role-playing either a physically handicapped, homosexual, or
unmarked individual. Results supported a distinction between intended
(action-type) and unintended (reaction- type) components of behavior. 3525. HEREK, GREGORY M. "Beyond 'Homophobia': A Social Psychological
Perspective on Attitudes Toward Lesbians and Gay Men," JH, 10
(1984), 1-21. Proposes as tripartite model of
attitudes: experiential (reflecting past experiences with homosexual
persons); defensive; and symbolic (expressing abstract ideological concepts).
Concludes by stressing the importance of distinguishing attitudes toward
lesbians from those focused on gay men. See also his: "Attitudes toward
Lesbians and Gay Men: A Factor-Analytical Study," JH, 10
(1984),39-51; and "On
Heterosexual Masculinity: Some Psychical Consequences of the Social
Construction of Gender and Sexuality," American Behavioral Scientist, 29
(1986), 563-77. 3526. HUDSON, WALTER W., and WENDELL A. RICKETTS. "A Strategy for the
Measurement of Homophobia," JH, 5 (1980), 357-72. Homophobia is regarded as but
one facet of the larger phenomenon of homo-negativism. A new measure of
homophobia, the Index of Homophobia, is presented. 3527. ISTVAN, JOSEPH. "Effects of Sexual Orientation on Interpersonal
Judgment,"
Journal of Sex Research, 19 (1983), 173-91. Study of undergraduates testing
the hypotheses that homosexuals are regarded by heterosexuals as being
obsessed with sex and that the derogation of homosexuals extends to minor
aspects of their personality. 3528. KEPNER, JIM. "Homophobia is Not Just a Straight Disease," In
Touch, 1:5 (February 1973), 22-23, 60-62. A senior gay activist's
reflections on the internalization of oppressive stereotypes. See also Andrew
Hodges and David Hutter, With Downcast Gays. (London: Pomegranate
Press,
1974; 42 pp.); and, in a broader context, Barry D. Adam, The
Survival of Domination (New York: Elzevier, 1978; 179
pp.). 3529. KITE, MARY E. "Sex Differences in Attitudes toward Homosexuals: A
Meta-Analytic Review," JH, 10 (1984), 69-81. Males tend somewhat more to negative attitudes than females. 3530. KITSUSE, JOHN I. "Societal Reaction to Deviant Behavior: Problems
of Theory and Method," Social Problems, 9 (1962), 247-56. Interviews with college
students disclosing wide variation in response to homosexuals, reflecting
subjects' interpretation of what constitutes homosexuality and their relation
with persons thought to be homosexual. 3531. KRULEWITZ, JUDITH E., and JANET E. NASH. "Effects of Sex Role
Attitudes and Similarity on Men's Rejection of Male Homosexuals," Journal
of Personality and Social Psychology, 38 (1980), 67-74. Using a standard attraction
paradigm design, subjects rated a bogus "partner," who was
represented as having attitudes either similar or dissimilar to theirs. 3532.
LARSEN,
KNUD S., et al. "Anti-Black Attitudes,
Religious Orthodoxy, Permissiveness, and Sexual Information: A Study of the
Attitudes of Heterosexuals toward Homosexuality," Journal
of Sex Research, 19 (1983), 105-18. Results show significant
differences suggesting that sexual behavior still reflects a double standard
in U.S. society. See also Larsen et al., "Attitudes of Heterosexuals
toward Homosexuality: A Likert-Type Scale and Construct Validity," Journal
of Sex Research, 16 (1980), 245-57. 3533. LAUTMANN, RÜDIGER. "Stigma Homosexualität: Fälscher Ansatz der Forschung verstärkt Vorurteil," Sexualmedizin, 3 (1974), 443-46. Research misconceptions as
promoters of prejudice. For a fuller statement of his views, see: Lautmann
(ed.),
Seminar: Gesellschaft und Homosexualität (Frankfurt: Suhr-
kamp, 1977; 570 pp.). 3534. LEHNE, GREGORY K. "Homophobia among Men," in: D. S. David
and R. Brannon (eds.), The Forty-Hine Percent Majority.
Reading, MA: Addison-Wesley, 1976, pp. 66-88. Contends that homophobia
functions as an underlying motivation in maintaining traditional gender
roles. It is not an isolated trait, but tends to appear in individuals who
are generally sexist, conservative, and authoritarian . 3535. LEITENBERG, HAROLD, and LESLEY SLAVIN. "Comparison of Attitudes
toward Transsexuality and Homosexuality," Archives of Sexual Behavior,
12 (1983), 337- 46. Of 318 undergraduates, more
subjects felt that homosexuality was "wrong" than felt
transsexualism was "wrong." Hence homosexual denial and
"homophobia" in some transsexuals may reflect society's greater
condemnation of homosexuality. 3536. LEITNER, L. M., and SUZANA CADO. "Personal Constructs and
Homosexual Stress," Journal of Personality and Social Psychology,
43 (1982), 869-72. Evaluates a personal-construct
approach to the assessment of the potential for homosexual threat (homosexual
stress). 3537. MCDONALD, A. P. "Homophobia: Its Roots and Meanings,"
Homosexual Counseling Journal, 3 (1976), 23-33. Evaluates a number of
explanations which have been put forward for anxiety about homosexuality. See
also his: "The Importance of Sex-Role to Gay Liberation," ibid., 1 (1974), 169-80; and McDonald and Richard
G. Games, "Some Charactersties of Those Who Hold Positive and Negative
Attitudes toward Homosexuals," JH, 1 (1974), 9-27. 3538. MARET, STEPHEN M. "Attitudes of Fundamentalists toward
Homosexuality,"
Psychological Reports, 55 (1984), 205-06. While few fundamentalists would
advocate capital punishment for homosexuals, findings suggest a continuing
condemnation of homosexuality, as is consistent with biblical precepts. 3539. MARTIN, CLYDE V.
"Treatment of Homophobia: I." Corrective and Social Psychiatry and Journal of Behavior Technology,
Methods and Therapy, 29 (1983), 70-73. Findings indicate that negative
attitutds toward homosexuals persist even after attempts to explain
homosexuality and to remove myths associated with it. 3540.
MILLHAM,
JIM, and LINDA E. WEINBERGER. "Sexual
Preference, Sex Role Appropriateness, and Restriction of Social
Access,"
JH, 2 (1977), 343-57. Data from undergraduates show
that a significant proportion of aversion toward homosexuals resulted from
the belief that their behavior is incongruent with their anatomical sex. See
also: Weinberger and Millham, "Attitudinal Homophobia and Support of
Traditional Sex Roles," ibid., 4 (1978-79),
237-46. 3541. MORIN, STEPHEN F., and ELLEN M. GARFINKLE. "Male
Homophobia,"
Journal of Social Issues, 34 (1978), 29-47. Explores the literature on the
irrational fear of gay men, as well as the pervasiveness, manifestations, and
correlates of homophobia, which the authors hold serves to keep men within
the boundaries of traditionally defined roles. See also Morin and Lonnie
Nungesser, "Can Homophobia Be Cured?" in: Robert A. Lewis (ed.), Men in
Difficult Times: Masculinity Today and Tomorrow (Englewood
Cliffs, NJ: Prentice-Hall, 1981), pp. 264-74. 3542. NEVID, JEFFREY. "Exposure to Homoerotic Stimuli: Effects on
Attitudes and Affects of Heterosexual Viewers," Journal
of Social Psychology, 119 (1983), 249-55. Results show higher levels of
negative effects, such as anxiety and hostility, among subjects immediately
following the film presentation compared to subjects who had not yet been
exposed to the film. 3543. PLASEK, JOHN WAYNE, and JANICEMARIE ALLARD. "Misconceptions of
Homophobia,"
JH, 10 (1984), 23-37. Questions overly general
approaches, including the assumption of homosexuality itself as a
"master status trait." 3544. SAN MIGUEL, CHRISTOPHER I., and JIM MILLHAM. "The Role of
Cognitive and Situational Variables in Aggression toward Homosexuals," JH,
2 (1976), 11-27. Reports on a test intended to
give information on the "personal threat" and
"scapegoating" hypotheses of aggression toward homosexuals. 3545. SCHMIDT, GUNTER. "Homosexualität und Vorurteil," Studium generale, 19 (1966), 346-55. Reflections on homosexuality and prejudice. See also Schmidt and Volkmar Sigusch, Zur Frage des Vorurteils gegenüber sexuell devianten Gruppen (Stuttgart: Enke, 1967; 52 pp.; Beiträge zur Sexualforschung, 40). 3546. SMITH, KENNETH T. "Homophobia: A Tentative Personality
Profile,"
Psychological Reports, 29 (1971), 1091-94. A tentative profile suggests
that individuals with a negative attitude toward homosexuality may be status
conscious, authoritarian, and sexually rigid. 3547. STAATS, GREGORY R. "Stereotype Content and Social Distance:
Changing Views of Homosexuality," JH, 4 (1978), 15-27. From administering an adjective
checklist and the Bogardus Social Distance Scale to undergraduates, concludes
that stereotypes about homosexuals are changing in a more positive direction. 3548. STORMS, MICHAEL D. "Attitudes toward Homosexuality and Femininity
in Men,"
JH, 3 (1978), 257-63. Contrary to expectation, it was
found that homosexual men who do not conform to the feminine stereotype are
disliked even more than those who do. 3549. TAYLOR, ALAN. "Conceptions of Masculinity and Femininity as a
Basis for Stereotypes of Male and Female Homosexuals," JH,
9 (1983), 37-53. Literature review and results
of questionnaires administered to residents of Aberdeen, Scotland. A
majority of the subjects believed that most homosexuals behave like the
opposite sex. 3550. TILLY, PENELOPE, and RUDOLF KALIN. "Effects of Sex Role Deviance
in Disturbed Male Adlolescents on the Perception of Psychopathology,"
Canadian Journal of Behavioural Science, 11 (1979), 45-52. Gender stereotyping correlated
significantly with bias, while sex-role ideology was not significantly
correlated. 3551. WEISSBACH, THEODORE, and GARY ZAGON. "The Effect of Deviant Group
Membership upon Impressions of Personality," Journal of Social Psychology,
95 (1975), 263-66. In a videotape presentation the
person identified as homosexual was judged more feminine, emotional, submissive,
unconventional and weaker than when not so identified, but equally likeable. 3552.
WOLFGANG,
AARON, and JOAN WOLFGANG. "Exploration
of Attitudes via Physical Interpersonal Distance toward Obese, Drug Users,
Homosexuals, Police and Other Marginal Figures," Journal
of Clinical Psychology, 27 (1971), 510-12. Results of a stick figure test
given to college male and military personnel. 3553. WRIGHT, REX A., and MICHAEL D. STORMS. "Male Sexual Schemata and
Responses to Male Homosexuality," Personality and Social Psychology
Bulletin, 7 (1981), 444-50. College students were tested on
their responses to schemata that emphasized either the
"heterosexual" or "carnal" nature of male homosexuality. 3554. YARBER, WILLIAM L., and BERNADETTE YEE. "Heterosexuals'
Attitudes toward Lesbianism and Male Homosexuality: Their Affective
Orientation toward Sexuality and Sex Guilt," Journal of American College Health,
31:5 (1983), 203-08. Sex guilt was related to both
sexes' attitudes toward lesbianism and male homosexuality; affective
orientation was related to attitudes toward lesbianism found in both sexes,
and related to attitudes toward male homosexuality in female subjects only. Homosexual panic, sometimes
known as Kempf's Syndrome, is the irrational and stressful reaction to the
fear that one is, or is becoming homosexual. The intensity of the reaction,
which was first observed in the second decade of the present century,
probably reflects the extreme taboo placed on homosexuality during the first
half of the 20th century. With the easing of the taboo, homosexual panic is
probably becoming less common, 3542. BIEBER, IRVING, AND TOBY BIEBER. "Heterosexuals Who Are
Preoccupied with Homosexual Thoughts," Medical Aspects of Hunan Sexuality,
9:4 (April 1975), 152-68. Reflections by psychiatrists
who believe that homosexual acts display pathology; homosexual thoughts in
heterosexuals, evidently, do not. 3543. DANNELS, JOANNE C. "Homosexual Panic," Perspectives
in Psychiatric Care, 10 (1972), 106-111. Discusses the disruptive effect
of an assertive lesbian in a hospital psychiatric unit, where the other
patients exhibited anxiety, apprehension, uneasiness, and a sense of going to
pieces. 3544. GLICK, BURTON S. "Homosexual Panic: Clinical and Theoretical
Considerations," Journal of Nervous and Mental Disease,
129 (1959), 20-28. Defines acute homosexual panic
as an acute schizophrenic reaction, usually temporary and "based on the
patient's fear of loss of control of unconscious wishes to offer himself as a
homosexual object which he feels will result in the most
dire consequences." 3545. GOLDBERG, RICHARD L. "Heterosexual Panic," American
Journal of Psychoanalysis, 44 (1984), 209-11. Discusses the bizarre case of a
29-year-old male homosexual who experienced feelings of doom, palpitations,
diaphoresis, and lightheadedness—"heterosexual panic"—because of
the commencement of feelings of sexual attraction toward women. After
treatment the attacks abated, and he began a new homosexual relationship. 3546. KEMPF, EDWARD JOHN. Psychopathology. St. Louis: C. V. Mosby, 1920. 762 pp. As a result of Kempf's work
with disturbed soldiers and sailors in World War I, he introduced the concept
of homosexual panic, which is consequently sometimes known as "Kempf's
syndrome." See Chapter 10, "The Psychology of the Acute Homosexual
Panic" (pp. 477-515). 3547.
LEGRAND
DU SAULLE, HENRI. Le
délire des persecutions. Paris: H. Pion, 1871. 524 pp. See pp. 461-64 on morbid fear
of being taken for a "sodomite." Legrand du Saulje (1830-1886) was a French alienist who founded
the Société de Méidecine Légale. 3561 . MOSHER, DONALD L., and KEVIN E. 0' GRADY.
"Homosexual Threat, Negative Attitudes toward Masturbation, Sex Guilt,
and Males' Sexual and Affective Response to Explicit Sex Films," Journal
of Consulting and Clinical Psychology, 47 (1979), 860-73. From
evaluation of responses to films, differentiates the concept of homosexual
threat from the concepts of fear of homosexuals, homosexual panic, and
homosexual prejudice . 3562. RAKIC, ZORAN. "Homoseksualna panika,"
Psihijatrija Danas, 16 (1984), 93-99. The author, a Belgrade
physician, regards homosexual panic as an acute delusion episode that is not
followed by a process of psychotic development. 3563. SOLOFF, PAUL H. "Pseudohomosexual Psychosis in Basic Military
Training,"
Archives of Sexual Behavior, 7 (1978), 503-10. Viewing the military setting as
a culturally specific stress site generating pseudohomosexual anxieties in
predisposed individuals, presents three case studies illustrating the power
and dependency conflicts, sexual symbolization, projective defenses, and
restitutional violence which characterize these patients. With the increasing acceptance
in the beginning decades of the 20th century that male and female are a
spectrum rather than an absolute contrast, interest began to be felt in
measuring the presence of male and female characteristics in each
individual. Initially these inquiries were accompanied by an unconscious bias
that too much admixture was undesirable and abnormal—in fact an indication of male homosexuality or lesbianism. In the
1960s, however, the very androgyny which had been dispised or at any rate not
positively valued, came to be looked upon by some researchers—notably Sandra
L. Bern and her associates—as an asset. Thus, despite the seemingly
scientific character of the psychometric protocols, this field has been much
bedeviled by ideological expectations about sex roles, and many of the
apparent findings should be treated with a healthy dose of scepticism. 3564. ALTHOF, STANLEY E., et
al. "An MMPI Subscale (Gd): To Identify Males with Gender
Identity Conflicts," Journal of Personality Assessment, 47
(1983), 42-49. Reports on the development and cross-validation of a 31-item
MMPI Gender Dysphoria (Gd) subscale intended to discriminate
between gender identity patients and matched 179-204. Shows how the definition of
femininity in the Minnesota Multiphasic Personality Inventory (MMPI), which
is still widely used, was deeply flawed at the start by its confusion of
sexual inversion with gender identity (gay men were used to create the
feminine scale). Concludes: "Sixty years of MF testing have primarily
demonstrated what femininity and masculinity are not: they are not two sets
of matched traits." This book contains much else of direct and indirect
interest. 3577. LONEY, JAN. "Background Factors, Sexual Experiences, and
Attitudes toward Treatment in Two "Normal" Homosexual
Samples,"
Journal of Consulting and Clinical Psychology, 38 (1972),
57-65. In the MMPI and Family
Adjustment Test administered to 60 male and 11 female homosexuals,
differences between males and females were found in the proportion of
homosexual marriages, the number of homosexual partners, and expressed
satisfaction with the homosexual role. See also: Loney, "An MMPI Measure
of Maladjustment in a Sample of "Normal" Homosexual Men," Journal
of Clinical Psychology, 27 (1971), 486-88. 3578. MCCAULEY, ELIZABETH A., and ANKE A. EHRHARDT. "Role Expectations
and Definitions: A Comparison of Female Transsexuals and Lesbians," JH,
3 (1977), 137-47. In a battery of tests, the
female transsexual group reflected a more rigid gender role stereotype,
while the lesbians saw their options as more androgynous. 3579. MANOSEVITZ, MARTIN. "Item Analyses of the MMPI Mf Scale Using
Homosexual and Heterosexual Males," Journal of Consulting and Clinical
Psychology, 35 (1970), 395-99. The analyis of individual items
with total scores showed the 31 items were significantly associated in both
groups. See also his: "Education and MMPI Mf Scores in Homosexual and
Heterosexual Males," ibid., 36 (1971), 395-99. 3580. OHLSON, E., et al. "Differentiating Female Homosexuals from
Female Heterosexuals by Use of the MMPI," Journal of Sex Research,
10 (1974), 308-15. Concludes that a personality
scale could be developed using items from the MMPI to detect lesbianism. 3581. OLDS, DEBRA E., and PHILLIP SHAVER. "Masculinity, Femininity,
Academic Performance, and Health: Further Evidence Concerning the Androgyny
Controversy,"
Journal of Personality, 48 (1980), 323-41. Masculinity emerges as
beneficial for both sexes, correlating negatively with achievement conflicts
and stress symptoms but positively with mastery and work. 3582. SINGER, MICHAEL I. "Comparison of Indicators of Homosexuality on
the MMPI,"
Journal of Consulting and Clinical Psychology, 34 (1970),
15-18. A study of 97 male psychiatric
outpatients found that the MF-scale related measures differentiated subjects
who admit to and are worried about homosexuality from subjects who are
neither overt homosexuals nor worried about it. 3583. WILLIAMS, STEPHEN G. "Male Homosexual Responses to the MMPI Combined
Subscales MFx and MF2," Psychological Reports,
49 (1981), 606. Contends that the Mfj.2 scale
is useful for the study of personality variables in male homosexuality
independent of traditional male-female stereotypes. 3584. WONG, MARTIN R. "MMPI Scale Five: Its Meaning, or Lack
Thereof,"
Personality Assessment, 48 (1984), 279-84. A review of the literature
indicates that the
Mf scale fails in its intended purpose of measuring
homosexuality and of measuring characteristics that reliably divide males and
females. The concept of sex differences is inappropriately defined and
establishes artificial boundaries. 3585. ZELDOW, PETER B. "The Androgynous Vision: A Critical
Examination,"
Bulletin of the Henninger Clinic, 46 (1982), 401-13. Challenges S. Bern's contention
that sex-typed individuals are limited in their behavioral repertoire and
that persons with androgynous personality traits enjoy better mental health
than sex-typed individuals. K. RORSCHACH AND OTHER PROJECTIVE TESTS The Swiss psychiatrist Hermann
Rorschach began his experiments with inkblots in 1911. Although they enjoyed
a great vogue in the middle decades of the century, the blots have been shown
to be largely vitiated by subjectivism. In any event, these and similar
projective tests have no predictive value in determining sexual orientation
(though they may be of some use as an adjunct in some therapeutic
situations). The episode remains as an instructive chapter in intellectual
history. 3586. ADRADOS, ISABEL. "Rorschach: revision
critica de los contenidos predictivos de homosexualidad," Arquivos
Brasileiros de Psicologia, 36 (1984), 99-107. Suggests that today's
permissive sexual atmosphere may be responsible for the fact that
heterosexual subjects sometimes show homosexual tendencies on their
Rorschachs.
ANDERSEN,
DENNIS 0., and FRANK C. SEITZ. "Rorschach
Diagnosis of Homosexuality: Schafer's Content Analysis," Journal
of Projective Techniques and Personality Assessment, 33 (1969),
406-08. Contends that the signs
successfully discriminated three groups: heterosexual, sex-role disturbed,
and homosexual. See also Seitz, Andersen, and George N. Braucht, "A Comparative
Analysis of Rorschach Signs of Homosexuality," Psychological
Reports, 35 (1974), 1163-69.
ARMON, VIRGINIA. "Some Personality Variables in
Overt Female Homosexuality," Journal of Projective Techniques,
24 (1960), 292-309. From a study of 30 lesbians and
30 heterosexual women who took the Rorschach and Figure-Drawing Tests, Armon
concluded that projective techniques were of no use in differentiating
between homosexually oriented and hetero- sexually oriented women.
GOLDFRIED, MARVIN R. "Homosexual Signs,"
in: Goldfried et al. (eds.), Rorschach Handbook of Clinical and
Research Applications. Englewood Cliffs, NJ: Prentice-Hall,
1971, pp. 188-216. Standard exposition of the case
for the value of the signs.
HENDLIN, STEPHEN J. "Homosexuality in the Rorschach:
A New Look at the Old Signs," JH, 1 (1976), 303-12. In comparing 30 homosexuals
with 30 heterosexuals, concludes that the traditional index is not valid and
that it should not be used in a clinical setting as a measure to assess
homosexuality.
HOOKER, EVELYN. "Male Homosexuality in the Rorschach," Journal
of Projective Techniques, 22 (1958), 33-54. Some kinds of homosexual
records (anal orientation and feminine emphasis) could be distinguished, but
most could not. Without other substantiating evidence the Rorschach failed in
a large number of instances.
HOPKINS, JUNE H. "Lesbian Signs on the
Rorschach," British
Journal of Projective Psychology and Personality Study, 15
(1970), 7-14. Not surprisingly, male homosexual
signs were judged to be inadequate for lesbians.
JANZEN, WILLIAM R., and WILLIAM C. COE.
"Clinical and Sign Prediction: The Draw-a-Person and Female
Homosexuality,"
Journal of Clinical Psychology, 31 (1975), 757-65. Compared the validity of
predicting lesbianism from empirical signs from the Draw-a-Person Test with
the validity of psychologist's "blind" predictions from the same
DAP protocols.
KUETHE, JAMES L. "Children's Schemata of Man
and Woman: A Comparison with the Schemata of Heterosexual and Homosexual
Populations,"
Journal of Psychology, 90 (1975), 249-58. The schemata employed by the
children in their figure arrangements were significantly different from those
of adult heterosexuals and resembled those of adult homosexuals.
LASZLO, KARL. Die Homosexualität des Mannes im Szondi-Test: Ein
Beitrag zur Erforschung der Homosexualität und zur Kritik der Szondi-Methode.
Stuttgart:
F. Enke, 1956. 108 (Beitrage zur Sexualforschung, 8) Criticism of the use of
Szondi test, which consists of 48 cards bearing pictures of mental patients,
some of them homosexual. PASSI TOGNAZZO, D., and G. BARATELLA. "I contenuti umani alle tavole III e IV del Rorschach in un gruppo di omosessuali maschi dell'Italia Setten- trionale," Psichiatria generale e dell'etä evolu- tiva, 19 (1981), 1-8. From tests with northern
Italian men, the authors find no support for the claim that Rorschach
responses are useful in diagnosing homosexuality.
RAYCHAUDHURI, MANAS, and KAMAL MUKERJI.
"Rorschach Differentials of Homosexuality in Male Convicts: An
Examination of Wheeler and Schäfer Signs," Journal of Personality Assessment,
35 (1970), 22-26. Reports mixed results from use
of the signs with male convicts of a Calcutta jail.
ROBACK, HOWARD B. et al. "Sex of Free Choice
Figure Drawings by Homosexual and Heterosexual Subjects," Journal
of Personality Assessment, 38 (1974), 154-55. Concludes that the first figure
drawn on the Draw-a-Person Test is not a useful measure of sexual inversion
or gender identity.
STONE, NORMAN M., and ROBERT E. SCHNEIDER. "Concurrent
Validity of the Wheeler Signs of Homosexuality in the Rorschach: P
(Ci/Rj),"
Journal of Personality Assessment, 39 (1975), 573-79. Both homosexual and sex-role
disturbed groups displayed significantly more Wheeler signs than normals. For
rebuttal, see Elizabeth A. Anderson, "The Elusive Homosexual," ibid., 39 (1975), 580-82.
WHEELER, WILLIAM MARSHALL. "An Analysis of Rorschach
Indices of Male Homosexuality," Rorschach Research Exchange and
Journal of Projective Techniques, 13 (1949), 97-126. Reports on the use of twenty signs of the Rorschach, the "Wheeler content signs test," Contends
that there is a need to develop objective Rorschach signs, inasmuch as
therapists' clinical judgments tend to be unreliable. See also: Jay S.
Kwawer, "Male Homosexual Psychodynamics and the Rorschach Test," Journal
of Personality Assessment, 41 (1977), 10-18. Recent research, prompted in
part by changing social conditions, has sought to distinguish gender from sex
role, emphasizing the culturally contingent nature of the latter. It was of
course a commonplace of older stereotypes of homosexuality that
"inverts" were characterized by their compulsive adoption of traits
of the other sex. A more nuanced approach has made obsolete this notion,
though some have questioned whether--in view of the biological bedrock on
which every human organism rests—we can so confidently make an absolute
separation between gender and social sex role (see "Biology,"
XXIV.A). In an area of research that is to some extent in flux, some have
argued that in American society, the traditional male sex role is rigid,
constricting, and not conducive to psychological health, others (and
sometimes the same individuals) have urged that women incorporate these same
qualities, so as to more "androgynous" and effective at work and at
home.
ARCHER, JOHN, and BARBARA LLOYD. Sex and
Gender. Revised ed. New York: Cambridge University Press, 1985. 355
pp. Critical review for the lay
reader of the accumulating body of research on the extent to which men and
women differ, the origins and implications of the differences in physical
development, sexual experience, emotional expression, mental health,
aggression, power, family, life, work, and achievement. The authors tend to favor
sociocultural and environmental explanations, downplaying biological
approaches. For an opposing synthesis, see Jo Durden-Smith and Diane
Desimone,
Sex and the Brain (New York: Arbor House, 1983;
298 pp.).
BERNARD, LARRY C., and DAVID J. EPSTEIN. "Sex
Role Conformity in Homosexual and Heterosexual Males," Journal
of Personality Assessment, 42 (1978), 505-11. A battery of tests yielded nine
principal components.
BLANCHARD, RAY, and KURT FREUND. "Measuring
Masculine Gender Identity in Females," Journal of Consulting and Clinical
Psychology, 51 (1983), 205-14. Attempted to validate a
psychometric instrument intended to measure varying degrees of
"masculine gender identity" in women,
BRAKE, MIKE. "I May Be Queer, But at Least I Am
a Man: Male Hegemony and Ascribed Versus Achieved Gender," in: Diana
Leonard Barker and Sheila Allen (ed.), Sexual Divisions and Society:
Process and Change. London: Tavistock, 1976, pp. 174-198. From a gay liberation and
feminist standpoint, uses ethnological and other data to argue that gender
categories are socially conditioned rather than natural.
BROWN, DANIEL G. "The Development of Sex-Role
Inversion and Homosexuality," Journal of Pediatrics,
50 (1957), 613-19. Contends that while certain
forms of homosexuality (passive male and active female) are expressions of
personality inversion, other forms of homosexuality have nothing to do with
inversion.
CARRIGAN, TIM, et al. "Towards a New Sociology
of Masculinity," Theory and Society, 14 (1985), 551-604. Invaluble review of the
literature since the 1950s on the "male role," with special
attention to empirical discoveries, political assumptions and implications,
and theoretical framework.
CLINGMAN, JOY, and MARGUERITE G. FOWLER.
"Gender Roles and Human Sexuality," Journal of Personality Assessment,
40 (1976), 276-84. Suggests that homosexuality may
be appropriately conceived as an alternate lifestyle rather than a
nosological entity, and that gender role may, in some instances, be more
important than biological sex with respect to an individual's self-perceived
personality characteristics.
DITTES, JAMES E. The Male Predicament.
New York: Harper and Row, 1985. 223 pp. The author, a psychologist and
theologican at Yale Divinity School, holds that the problems of distorted
masculinity are essentially caused by males and must be resolved by them.
FRANKLIN, CLYDE W. The Changing Definition of Masculinity. New York: Plenum
Press,
1984. 234 pp. Questioning the
heterosexual-homosexual dichotomy, argues that sexuality is more
socialization than innate biology.
GRADY, KATHLEEN, ROBERT BRANNON, and JOSEPH H.
PLECK.
The Male Sex Role: A Selected and Annotated Bibliography,
Rockville, MD: National Institute of Mental Health, 1979. 196 pp. Provides detailed abstracts on ca. 400 items; note
esp. section VIII: "Relations with Men" (pp. 116-2). 3611. HOOKER, EVELYN. "An Empirical Study of Some
Relations between Sexual Patterns and Gender Identity in Male
Homosexuals," in: John Money (ed.), Sex Research: New
Developments. New York: Holt, Rinehart and Winston, 1965, pp. 24-52. Urges that the masculine-feminine dichotomy for male homosexuals be
abandoned. Role and gender practices are found to be highly variable. 3612. JONES, RANDALL W., and JOHN P. DE CECCO. "The
Femininity and Masculinity of Partners in Heterosexual and Homosexual
Relationships," JH, 8 (1982), 37-44. Examined whether (1) partners in homosexual relationships perceived
themselves as less stereotypically masculine or feminine than heterosexual
partners; (2) partners complement or match each other in their
self-perceived femininity and masculinity; and (3) partner's femininity and
masculinity correlate with their views on attachment and autonomy. 3613. KAPLAN, ALEXANDRA G., and JOAN P. BEAN. Beyond Sex-Role Stereotypes:
Readings toward a Psychology of Androgyny. Boston: Little, Brown, 1976. 392 pp. Reprints papers chosen for their support of a model of well-being that
draws from the valued characteristics of both men and women. This anthology
reflects a major strand of feminist research that emerged in the 1970s. 3614. KESSLER, SUZANNE J., and .WENDY MCKENNA. Gender: An Ethnomethodological
Approach. New York: John Wiley, 1978. 233 pp. Employing cross-cultural evidence, seeks to show that gender is not an
"irreducible fact" but a social construction, assumed by
investigators rather than demonstrated. Concentrates on the "gender
attribution process," whereby one classifies another as female or male. 3615. KRIEGEL, LEONARD. On Men and Manhood. New York: Hawthorn, 1979. 206 pp. Popular tilt at the windmills of the masculine myth in its demotic
forms. See esp. Chapter 7, "The Homosexual as Other" (pp. 157-72). 3616. LANGEVIN, RON (ed.). Erotic Preference, Gender
Identity, and Aggression in Men: New Research Studies. Hillsdale, NJ: Lawrence Erlbaum Associates, 1985.
375 pp. Twelve papers emphasizing results of controlled research, including
material on homosexuality, pedophilia, and cross-dressing. 3617. MACCOBY, ELEANOR E. (ed.). The Development of Sex
Differences. Stanford: Stanford University Press, 1966. 351 pp. Six papers on
biological, cognitive, sociological and psychological aspects. Note esp.
"Annotated Bibliography" by Roberta M. Oetzel (pp. 223-321). This
work is complemented by Maccoby and Carol Nagy Jacklin, The Psychology of Sex
Differences (Stanford: Stanford University Press, 1974; 634 pp.), with
"Annotated Bibliography," pp. 395-627. 3618. MACDONALD, GARY J., and ROBERT J. MOORE.
"Sex-Role Self-Concepts of Homosexual Men and Their Attitudes toward
Both Women and Male Homosexuality," JH, 4 (1978), 3-14. In terms of socially valued masculine and feminine characteristics,
the majority of 88 gay men tested viewed themselves as predominately
androgynous. 3619. MCGILL, MICHAEL E. The McGill Report on Male Intimacy. New York: Holt, Rinehart and Winston, 1985. 300 pp. Based on a decade
of work with some 500 men and women, aged 18-73, concludes that "[t]here
is no intimacy in most male friendships and none of what intimacy offers:
solace and support." 3620. MARECEK, JEANNE, et al. "Gender Roles in the
Relationships of Lesbians and Gay Men," JH, 8 (1982), 45-49. Recent research on gay male and lesbian couples suggests that
traditional gender role-playing sometimes occurs in their relationships,
though it is less common than in heterosexual relationships. 3621. MONEY, JOHN, and ANTHONY J. RUSSO. "Homosexual
Outcome of Discordant Gender Identity/Role in Childhood: Longitudinal
Follow-Up," Annual Progress in Child Psychiatry and Child Development (1980), 203-14. Nine of eleven males with prepubertal discordance of gender
identity/role have been maintained in the follow-up until young adulthood.
All are known to be homosexual or predominantly so. See also: Money,
"Sexual Dimorphism and Homosexual Gender Identity," Psychological Bulletin, 74 (1970), 425-40; as well as other papers by this
author. 3622. PLECK, JOSEPH H., and JACK SAWYER (eds.). Men and Masculinity. Englewood Cliffs, NJ: Prentice-Hall, 1974. 184 pp. Collection of essays generally maintaining that traditional concepts
of masculinity are constricting and stressful, and advocating their
attenuation in keeping with a major strand of the "men's
liberation" trend. 3623. ROBINSON, BRYAN E., et al. "Sex Role
Endorsement among Homosexual Men across the Life Span," Ar- chives of Sexual Behavior, 11 (1982), 355-59. A pattern of diverse sex-role
endorsement was found from adolescence to maturity in which subjects were
equally androgynous, masculine, feminine, and undifferentiated at each age
level. 3624. ROSS, MICHAEL W. "Homosexuality and Social Sex
Roles: A Re-evaluation," JH, 9 (1983), 1-6. Introduction to a special number of JH on social sex roles, which has also been separately
published as a book: Homosexuality and Social Sex Roles (New York: Ha- worth Press,1983;
107 pp.). See also: Ross et al., "Stigma, Sex, and Society: A New Look
at Gender Differentiation and Sexual Variation," JH 3 (1978), 315-30. 3625. ROSS, MICHAEL W. "Relationship between Sex Role
and Sex Orientation in Homosexual Men," New Zealand Psychologist, 4 (1975), 25-29. Concludes that sex role has no necessary correlation with sex
orientation and that high femininity scores on the MMPI and CPI should not be
taken as evidence of male homosexuality. 3626. SHIVELY, MICHAEL G., et al. "The Identification
of the Social Sex-Role Stereotypes," JH, 3 (1978), 225-34. Results of a test of 300 subjects support the hypothesis that
stereotypes for femininity and masculinity are dimorphous. 3627. SMITH, SIDNEY GREER. "A Comparison among Three
Measures of Social Sex Role," JH, 9 (1983), 99-107. Results of comparison of De Cecco-Shively Social Sex-Role Inventory
(DSI) with the Bern Sex-Role Inventory (BSRI) and the Personal Attributes
Questionnaire (PAQ). 3628. STORMS, MICHAEL D. "Theories of Sexual Orientation," Journal of Personality and
Social Psychology, 38 (1980), 783-92. Argues that homosexuality and heterosexuality may be separate,
orthogonal erotic dimensions rather than opposite extremes of a single
bipolar dimension. See also his: "Sex-Role Identity and Its Relationship
to Sex-Role Attributes and Sex-Role Stereotypes," ibid., 37 (1979),
1779-89; and "A Theory of Erotic Orientation Development," Psychological Review, 88 (1981), 340-53. 3629. TYSON, PHYLLIS. "A Developmental Line of Gender
Identity, Gender Role, and Choice of Love Object," Journal of the American
Psychoanalytic Association, 30 (1982), 61-86. Attempts to merge today's more complex concepts of
gender role with the traditional psychoanalytic sequence of oral, anal,
phallic, latency, and adolescent phases. 3630.
VETTERLING-BRAGGIN, MARY (ed.). "Femininity," "Masculinity,"
and "Androgyny": A Modern Philosophical Discussion, Totowa, NJ: Littlefield,
Adams, 1982. 326 pp. Collection of essays questioning straightforward identification of
sex and gender and canvasing the viability of the androgyny concept. Stimulus-response techniques are associated with behavior- istic
psychology, where they are central to the model of human behavior. Here a
more specific application is meant. In studying sexual orientation special
devices have been created to measure penile and vaginal response, as well as
eye movements and pupil changes that are regarded as significant. In some
instances, as with work with incarcerated pedophiles, there are serious
ethical problems in the use of these techniques. Devices of this kind are
sometimes used in behavior therapy (sometimes known as aversion therapy; see
XVII.H). 3631. BARR, RON, and ALEX BLACZYNSKI. "Autonomic
Responses of Transsexual and Homosexual Males to Erotic Film
Sequences," Archives of Sexual Behavior, 5 (1976), 211-22. Transsexual patients differ significantly from homosexual patients in
autonomic response as measured by penile volume and GSRs. See also: Barr,
"Responses to Erotic Stimuli of Transsexual and Homosexual Males," British Journal of Psychiatry, 123 (1973), 579-85; and Barr and N. McCon- aghy,
"Penile Volume Responses to Appetitive and Aversive Stimuli in Relation
to Sexual Orientation and Conditioning Performance," British Journal of Psychiatry, 119 (1971), 377-83. 3632. BURDICK, J. ALAN, et al. "Cardiac Activity and
Verbal Report of Homosexuals and Heterosexuals," Journal of Psychosomatic
Research, 18 (1974), 377-85. Tonic heart rate increases were higher in both groups for slides of
homosexual content. 3633. FREUND, KURT. "A Laboratory Method for
Diagnosing Predominance of Homo- or Hetero-erotic Interests in the
Male," Behaviour Research and Therapy, 1 (1963), 85-93. Report of a study at a psychiatric hospital in Prague conducted to
show that penile volume changes while the subject viewed erotic subjects
served to detect sexual deviations. Subsequently, Freund became identified
with this technique, sometimes termed "penile plethysmography." See
also his: "Diagnosing Homo- or Heterosexuality and Erotic Age-Preference by Means of a Psychophysiological Test," ibid., 5
(1967), 209-28; as well as Freund et al., "Heterosexual Aversion in
Homosexual Males," British Journal of Psychiatry, 122 (1973), 163-69; "Heterosexual Aversion in
Homosexual Males: A Second Experiment," ibid., 125 (1974), 177-80;
"The Phobic Theory of Male Homosexuality," Archives of General Psychiatry, 31 (1974), 495-99; and "Phallometric Diagnosis
with 'Nonadmitters,1" Behavior Research and Therapy, 17 (1979), 451-57. 3631. GILSON, MARK, et al. "Sexual Orientation as
Measured by Perceptual Dominance in Binocular Activity," Personality and Social Psychology
8 (1982), 494-500. Subjects reported what fit best with their sexual preference when
vital components were missing from their binocular vision. 3632. HESS, ECKHARD H. "Pupil Response of Hetero- and
Homo-sexual Males to Pictures of Men and Women: A Pilot Study," Journal of Abnormal and Social
Psychology, 70 (1965), 165-68. Measurement of changes in pupil size in response to pictorial
stimuli--slides of nude figures—permitted clear-cut discrimination between
the two groups; see the comments by Nicholas F. Skinner, Perceptual and Motor Skills, 51 (1980), 844 and 897-98; and response by Hess and
Slobodan B. Petrovich, ibid., 51 (1980), 845-46. 3633. LEE-EVANS, M. et al. "Penile Plethysmography
Assessment of Sexual Orientation," European Journal of
Behavioural Analysis and Modification, 1 (1975), 20-26. The influence of longer stimulus exposure times on the amplitude and
acceleration rate of penile colume change. See comment by Kurt Freund, pp.
27-28; and reply by Lee- Evans et al. , p. 29. 3634. MCCONAGHY, NATHANIEL. "Penile Volume Change to
Moving Pictures of Male and Female Nudes in Heterosexual and Homosexual
Males," Behaviour Research and Therapy, 5 (1967), 43-48. Confirms Freund's experiments in penile volume changes as a measure of
sexual orientation. Unlike Freund, however, McConaghy has sought to use the
technique to change homosexual behavior to heterosexual. Among other papers,
see his: "Subjective and Penile Plethmysinograph Responses Following
Aversion-Relief and Apomorphine Aversion Therapy for Homosexual
Impulses," British Journal of Psychiatry, 115 (1969), 723-30; "Penile Response
Conditioning and Its Relationship to Aversion Therapy in Homosexuals," Behavior Therapy, 1 (1970), 213-21; and "Measurements of Change
in Penile Dimensions," Archives of Sexual Behavior, 3 (1974), 381-88; "Heterosexual Experience,
Marital Status, and Orientation of Homosexual Males," ibid. 7 (1978),
575-81. 3635. 0' NEIL, MICHAEL T., and JOHN W. HINTON.
"Pupillo- graphic Assessment of Sexual Interest and Sexual
Arousal," Perceptual and Motor Skills, 44 (1977), 1278. Correlation analysis compared pupil diameter increases with degree of
sexual arousal (penis diameter) in thirteen male prisoners. 3636. PAPATHEOPHILOU, R., et al.
"Electroencephalograph- ic Findings in Treatment-Seeking Homosexuals: A
Controlled Study," British Journal of Psychiatry, 127 (1975), 63-66. Found that slow activity in the EEG in response to hyperventilation
occurred in a significantly greater number of homosexuals as compared with
heterosexual controls. 3637. SCHNELLE, JOHN F. "Pupillary Response as Indication
of Sexual Preference in a Juvenile Correctional Institution," Journal of Clinical
Psychology, 30 (1974), 146-50. Three months after a first exposure, a group of 20 female inmates was
retested with slides; a significant increase in interest in female figures
was found. 364OA. SCOTT, THOMAS R., et al. "Pupillary Response and Sexual Interest
Reexamined," Journal of Clinical Psychiatry, 23 (1967), 433-38. In contrast to E. H. Hess et
al., the researchers failed to find any difference in pupillary response for
males and females, or between heterosexuals and homosexuals. Modern psychiatry emerged as an independent medical speciality in
Europe in the 19th century (where, however, it had been preceded by forensic
medicine). See "Pioneers," I.B; and "Medical Archaeology,"
XXIII.D. The medical origins, which set it apart from psychology (XVI. A-M) , have fostered a disease model of homosexuality. This
tendency rears its head in the countless discussions of "etiology,"
which assume that the phenomenon of same-sex behavior is intrinsically
abnormal and undesirable, and hence must have a specific (and remediable)
cause. More recently, however, many psychiatrists have come to accept
homosexual orientation as lying within the normal range of human experience,
seeking only to alleviate other problems that are complicating life for the
patient. See "Psychotherapy," XVII.F. 3638. ACOSTA, FRANK X. "Etiology and Treatment of
Homosexuality: A Review," Archives of Sexual Behavior, 4 (1975), 9-29. While the author concedes that no existing body of theory--biological,
psychoanalytic, learning, or social learning—provides a convincing etiology
for homosexuality, he continues to favor prevention through the early
identification and treatment of the potential homosexual child. 3639. AIKEN, B. A. "The Stroke Economy and Gay
People," Transactional Analysis Journal, 6 (1976), 21-27. In keeping with the pop-psychiatric concepts of Eric Berne, holds that
"stroke deprivation" has led to an emotional stunting of
homosexuals. 3640. ALLEN, CLIFFORD. Homosexuality: Its Nature,
Causation and Treatment. London: Staples Press, 1958. 143 pp. While this is a relatively liberal work for its time, the author hold s that homosexuality is a psychological disorder, stemming from hostility
toward the mother or father, excessive affection for the mother, or affection
for an inadequately heterosexual father. Its treatment and cure are possible.
See also: Charles Berg and Clifford Allen, The Problem of Homosexuality (New York: Citadel Press, 1958; 221 pp.). 3641. AMERICAN PSYCHIATRIC ASSOCIATION, COMMISSION ON
PSYCHOTHERAPIES. Psychotherapy Research: Methodological and Efficacy Issues. Washington, DC: APA, 1982. 261 pp. Attempts to respond to the criticisms of H. J. Eysenck and others that outcomes of
psychotherapeutic intervention are no better that what is to be expected by
providing no treatment at all. Concludes cautiously, "[a]lthough
research in psychotherapy is still plagued by many problems connected with
assignment of patients, use of statistics, outcome measures, and
experimental designs, the data have shown empirically that psychotherapy is
effective with some populations and some problems." The report does
not deal specifically with its effectiveness with homosexuals. 3642. BLAIR, RALPH. Etiological and Treatment
Literature on Homosexuality. New York: Homosexual Community Counseling Center,
1972. 49 pp. (Otherwise Monograph Series, 5) Reviews the literature on the physical, psychological, and
environmental factors in the etiology of homosexuality and on various
treatment goals, patient population, and kinds of therapy. Concludes that
until the medical and psychiatric professions acknowledge that homosexuality
is not a pathological sexual orientation, little can be reliably said about
its causes. 3643. BRADY, JOHN, and H. KEITH H. BRODIE (eds.). Psychiatry at the Crossroads. Philadelphia: Saunders Press, 1980. 243 pp. This somewhat miscellaneous collection includes "Should
Homosexuals Adopt Children" by Richard Green (pp. 132-49) and "When
(If Ever) Should Sex Change Operations Be Performed" by John Money and
Richard Ambinder (pp. 150-64). 3644. CAPRIO, FRANK. Female Homosexuality: A Psychody- namic Study of
Lesbianism. New York: Citadel Press, 1954. 334 pp. Characteristically unsympathetic study of the period, covering
historical and literary matters, theories of causation, case history, and
therapy. Caprio's reliance on the invented stories found in "true
confessions" pulp magazines undermines credibility. 3645. CLECKLEY, HERVEY MILTON. The Caricature of Love: A Discussion of Social,
Psychiatric, and Literary Manifestations of Pathologic Sexuality. New York: Ronald Press, 1957. 319 pp. Opposing liberal trends then underway,
combats the idea that homosexuals can be fulfilled and happy if only they are
left alone, insisting that homosexuality is a psychiatric disorder that
causes misery. 3646. CORRAZE, JACQUES. Les dimensions de l'homosexualité. Toulouse: E.
Privât, 1968. 253 pp. A Sorbonne professor attempts a synthesis with particular stress on
psychoanalysis and then-current American work. 3647. EYSENCK, HANS J. Fact and Fiction in Psychology. Harmondsworth: Penguin, 1965. 300 pp. Eysenck, a London-based psychologist
and prolific writer, was one of the first to bring the therapeutic claims of
psychiatry into question. (Nonetheless, he has advocated a version of
behavior therapy.) See esp. pp. 179, 192, 214, 280. 3648. FRANK, K. PORTLAND. The Anti-Psychiatry Bibliography
and Resource Guide. Second ed. Vancouver: Press Gang, 1979. 160 pp. Includes chapters on the mental patient experience; the British
antipsychiatrу school; psychiatry and the law; institutions; women and third world
people; and the mental patients liberation movement. See esp. pp. 100-04. 3649. GONSIOREK, JOHN C. Homosexuality and Psychotherapy: A Practitioner's
Handbook of Affirmative Models. New York: Haworth Press, 1982. 212 pp. Sixteen papers on many topics, but all committed to helping gay men
and lesbians live more productive and fulfilling lives without attempting to
"cure" them. Many references. Reprinted from JH, 7:2-3 (1981-82).
See also Gonsiorek (ed.), "Homosexuality: The End of the Illusion,"
American
Behavioral Scientist, 25 (March-April 1982), 367-496 (symposium). 3650. GREEN, RICHARD. "Homosexuality as a Mental Illness," International Journal of
Psychiatry, 10 (1972), 77-98. Raises a number of questions, including potential biological and
hormonal determinants, the appropriateness of treatment, and the disease
model of homosexuality. Followed by commentary by Alan P. Bell (pp. 99-102),
Lawrence J. Hatterer (pp. 103-04), Martin Hoffman (pp. 105-07), and Arno
Karlen (pp. 108-13). 3651. HENRY, GEORGE W. Sex Variants: A Study of
Homosexual Patterns. New York: Hoeber, 1941. 2 vols. A New York psychiatrist presents the results of his study of male and
female homosexuality through the analysis of 80 explicit case histories.
Henry regards sex variance as the consequence of the pressures of
civilization, together with an overmasculinized or overfeminized family
background (resulting in lesbianism and male homosexuality respectively). See
also his: All the Sexes: A Study of Masculinity and Femininity (New York: Rinehart, 1955; 599 pp.). 3652.
IMIELINSKI,
KAZIMIERZ. Die Sexualperversionen. Vienna:
W. Maudrich, 1967. 146 pp. A Polish psychiatrist attempts to generate a unified- field theory of
sexual perversion by compiling data from earlier publications. See also his: Milieubedingte Ent- stehung
der Homo- und Bisexualitat (Munich: Ernst Rein- hardt, 1970; 79 pp.); and
"Homosexuality in Males with Particular Reference to Marriage," Psychotherapy and
Psychosomatics, 17 (1969), 126-32. 3653. KAMENY, FRANKLIN E. "Gay Liberation and Psychiatry," Psychiatric Opinion, 8 (February 1971), 18-27. Acerbic remarks of a militant gay activist, who led the public
campaign to induce psychiatrist's to retreat from their dogmatic claims that
homosexuality is a mental disease. 3654. KARPMAN, BENJAMIN. The Sexual Offender and His Offenses: Etiology,
Pathology, Psychodynamics and Treatment. New York: Julian Press, 1954.
744 pp. Part 1 offers a review of the literature from 1912-51. Homosexuality,
classified as a biological paraphilia and a sign of "retarded emotional
development," is discussed in Chapter 10. The etiology and treatment
literature cited in this work can be supplemented (for the period 1940-68)
by: Martin S. Weinberg and Alan P. Bell (eds.), Homosexuality: An Annotated
Bibliography (New York: Harper and Row, 1972; 550 pp.). 3655. KITTRIE, NICHOLAS N. The Right to Be Different:
Deviance and Enforced Therapy. Baltimore: Penguin, 1973. 443 pp. Comprehensive examination of assumptions and practices of enforced
therapy for those classified as deviants: the mentally ill, delinquent youth,
(sexual) psychopaths (including homosexuals, pp. 193-99), drug addicts, and
alcoholics. The final two chapters consider the evils of unchecked power
under the "therapeutic state" and the outlook for reducing the
dominance of the savers. 3656. LIVINGOOD, JOHN M. (ed.). National Institute of Mental Health Task Force on
Homosexuality: Final Report and Background Papers. Rockville, MD: National
Institute of Mental Health, 1972. 79 pp. The Final Report, approved October 10, 1969, is printed, followed by
Working Papers by Evelyn Hooker, Paul H. Geb- hard, Edwin M. Schur, John
Money, Judd Marmor, Robert L. Katz, and Jerome D. Frank. The papers are
generally enlightened and well informed, making this brochure a landmark in
the official discussion of the subject. 3657. LOWENSTEIN, L. F., and K. B. LOWENSTEIN.
"Homosexuality: A Review of the Research between 1978- 1983," British Journal of Projective
Psychology and Personality Study, 29 (1984), 21-24. The main shift has been to abandon the emphasis on "curing"
homosexuality and instead to adopt therapeutic goals and strategies designed
to improve the quality of life of homosexual clients. 3658. MOBERLY, ELIZABETH. "Homosexuality: Restating
the Conservative Case," Salmagundi, 58-59 (1980-81), 281-99. Contends that homosexuality results from non-fulfillment of
"legitimate homo-emotional developmental needs." This paper is a
sophisticated updating of traditional views, maintaining that homosexuals
should be cured. 3659. OLLENDORFF, ROBERT H. V. The Juvenile Homosexual Experience and Its Effect
on Adult Sexuality. New York: Julian Press, 1966. 245 pp. Holds that homosexuality is
generated by "sex-negative" societies, but not by sex-permissive
ones. "Vegetother- apy" is recommended—a technique combining
self-expression and character analysis with examination of the muscular
system, facial expression, breathing, digestion, and the sexual functions. 3660. ROSEN, ISMOND (ed.). The Pathology and Treatment of Sexual Deviation: A
Methodological Approach. London: Oxford University Press, 1964. 510 pp. A collection of
articles intended to summarize for both professional and lay readers
then-current thinking on the understanding and treatment of sexual deviation.
Sections on biology, general psychiatry, psychopatho- l°8y> psychology,
and sociology are included. 3661. ROSENFELS, PAUL. Homosexuality: The Psychology
of the Creative Process. New York: Libra Publishers, 1971. 169 pp. Highly abstract presentation, adhering to no known school of thought,
by an openly gay New York psychiatrist. 3662. SZASZ, THOMAS STEPHEN. The Myth of Mental Illness: Foundations of a Theory
of Personal Conduct. New York: Hoeber/Harper, 1961. 337 pp. The first in a series of
"emperor's new clothes" critiques by this author, who denies both
the theoretical cogency of psychotherapy and its practical efficacy. A
revised and shortened paperback edition appeared in 1974 (New York: Perennial
Library). See also Chapter 10, "The Product Conversion—From Heresy to
Illness" (pp. 160-79) in his: The Manufacture of Madness (New York: Harper and Row, 1970). 3663. WIDOM, CATHY SPATZ (ed.). Sex Roles and Psycho-
pathology. New York: Plenum Press, 1984. 387 pp. Most authors in this collection begin with the premise that the
problem stems from overly rigid gender role expectations against which
individuals are judged. 3664. WILLIS, STANLEY E. Understanding and Counseling
the Male Homosexual. Boston: Little, Brown, 1967. 225 pp. Argues that efforts at treatment have largely failed up to now owing
to an unwillingness to recognize that homosexuality is a complex, dynamic
phenomenon rather than a single static condition. 3668. WORLD
HEALTH ORGANIZATION. Manual of the International Statistical Classification of Diseases. Ninth ed. Geneva: WHO, 1977. 2 vols. Unlike the the third edition of
the Diagnostic and Statistical Manual of the American Psychiatric Association, which
modified its treatment of homosexuality as pathology (see XVII.G), this
work—-in use throughout much of the world—still regards homosexuality as a
disease. The concepts of Sigmund Freud (1856-1939), which have achieved an
extraordinary diffusion throughout the Western world, are commonly thought to
have introduced a central concern with sex into psychiatry. In fact sexology
began somewhat earlier (see "Pioneers," I.B), and much of Freud's
thinking is not directly involved with sex. The biographical and intellectual
setting in which Freud fashioned his theories is currently undergoing
detailed review. When this reexamination is completed, his image is likely to
emerge substantially different. 3669. BERNHEIMER, CHARLES, and CLARE KAHANE (eds.). In Dora's Case. New York: Columbia University Press, 1985. 291 pp. This book comprises an Introduction by the editors and 12 papers on
this famous case. There is considerable discussion of the "gynecophilic
friendships" of the eponymous Dora (Ida Bauer). 3670. CARROLL, MICHAEL P. "Freud on Homosexuality and
the Super-Ego: Some Cross-Cultural Tests," Behavioral Science Research, 13 (1978), 255-71. Claims that data from 51 societies support Freudian hypotheses
concerning the etiological role of attentuated father-son contact. 3671. ELLENBERGER, HENRI F. The Discovery of the Unconscious: The History and
Evolution of Dynamic Psychiatry. New York: Basic Books, 1970.
932 pp. Fundamental reexamination of sources of the ideas of Pierre Janet,
Sigmund Freud, Alfred Adler, and Carl Gustav Jung. Many useful references for
the reconstruction of the thought universe out of which modern depth
psychiatry arose. 3672. EYSENCK, HANS J., and GLENN D. WILSON. The Experimental Study of
Freudian Theories. London: Methuen, 1973. 405 pp. Reprints 21 papers which, in the opinion of the editors, constitute
the most serious efforts to find evidence in support of Freudian
psychoanalysis. In the editors' view, respondence with an eccentric Berlin physician throws light on
the psychoanalytic concept of bisexuality, which Freud developed in part
through the stimulus of his relationship with Fliess. 3683. MURPHY, TIMOTHY F. "Freud Reconsidered:
Bisexuality, Homosexuality, and Moral Judgment," JH, 9:2-3 (1983-84), 65-77. Without ethically justifying his procedure, Freud transformed the
course of psychosexual development as determined by psychoanalysis into a
moral imperative against which homosexuality is judged a fixated and immature
state. 3684. STANNARD, DAVID E. Shrinking History: On Freud
and the Failure of Psychohistory. New York: Oxford University Press, 1980. 187 pp. A sharp attack by an American historian, not only on the current vogue
of psychohistory, but also on its shaky Viennese foundations. See pp. 5-9,
14-16, 87, 109- 14, 160-61. For an opposing view, see Peter Gay, Freud for Historians (New York: Oxford University Press, 1985; 252 pp.). 3685. SULLOWAY, FRANK J. Freud, Biologist of the
Hind: Beyond the Psychoanalytic Legend. New York: Basic Books, 1979.
612 pp. Reconstructing the intellectual climate in
which Freud developed his theories, shows how the originally biologis- tic program
yielded to a psychodynamic one. Sulloway also unmasks the fabrication—by
Ernest Jones and others— of heroic legends (26 in all), designed to assure
good fortune for Freud and psychoanalysis. Numerous references to
homosexuality. Psychoanalysis is the body of theory and therapeutic practice that
grew out of the teaching of Sigmund Freud. Although no alternative
theoretical focus has appeared, many concepts of the creator of
psychoanalysis have been, at various times and places, tacitly or explicitly
revised. A salient example is the concept of universal bisexuality, which
has been largely abandoned by psychoanalysts as a result of Sandor Rado's
critique (3711; compare XIV.F). Many latter-day
psychoanalysis have adopted a harshly negative view of homosexuality,
contrasting with the founder's more humane practice (though these homoneg-
ative psychiatrists would doubtless argue that the premises for their
opinions are deeply embedded in psychoanalysis itself). Outside of
psychoanalysis—and sometimes within it—a debate rages as to the logical
status of the discipline: does it truly deserve the name of science, or is it rather a mythological or even literary system?
The therapeutic efficacy of psychoanalysis--its capacity to improve the
mental health of analysands—has also been brought into serious question. 3686.
AARDWEG,
GERARD J. VAN DEN. "A Grief Theory of Homosexuality," American Journal of
Psychotherapy, 26 (1972), 52-68. Contends that male homosexuality is best correlated with the concept
"inferior-pitiable." Recommends a technique based on the curative
value of humor and laughter, which destroy complaining and may
"restore" heterosexual impulses. See also his: On the Origins and Treatment
of Homosexuality (New York: Praeger, 1986). 3687. BARGUES, JEAN-FRANÇOIS. "Sodome: Aspects cliniques, mythologiques et métapsychologiques de 1' homosexualité," Annales médico-psychologiques, 132/2 (1974), 711-31. Discusses Freudian contributions on male homosexuality, linking them to themes derived
from mythology and to illustrative clinical examples. 3688. BERGLER, EDMUND. Homosexuality: Disease or Way
of Life? New York: Hill and Wang, 1956. 302 pp. Homosexuality is held to be a pathological disorder which stems from
the homosexual's longing for defeat^ humiliation, and rejection. The
homosexual is an "injustice collector," who courts and cherishes
disaster. Among the embittered diatribes of this neo-Freudian pundit (1899-
1962), probably the most widely circulated were: Counterfeit Sex:
Homosexuality, Impotence, Frigidity. Second ed. (New York: Grove Press, 1961; 380 pp.), and One Thousand Homosexuals: Conspiracy of Silence,
or Curing and Deglamorizing Homosexuals? (Paterson, NJ: Pageant Books, 1959; 249 pp.). 3689. BIEBER, IRVING (jet al). Homosexuality: A Psychoanalytic
Study. New York:
Basic Books, 1962. 358 pp. This study by a ten-member Research Committee of the Society of
Medical Psychoanalysts based its conclusions on 106 male homosexuals and 100
heterosexuals in clinical treatment. It is a major source of the
"close-binding mother" thesis of the etiology of male
homosexuality. Critics allege that defects in methodology and research design
mask an antihomosexual bias, and that the conclusions are essentially an
artifact of the design, and therefore scientifically valueless. See Fritz A.
Fluck- iger, "Research, through a Glass, Darkly: An Evaluation of the
Bieber Study on Homosexuality," Ladder, 10:10 (July 1966), 16-26; 10:11 (August 1966),
18-26; and 10:12 (September 1966), 22-26; and Richard C. Friedman,
"Psycho- dynamics and Sexual Object Choice: III. A Rereply to Drs. I.
Bieber and C. W. Socarides," Contemporary Psychoanal- ysis, 12 (1976), 379-85. Finally, see Irving Bieber and
Toby B. Bieber, "Male Homosexuality," Canadian Journal of
Psychiatry, 24 (1979), 409-21. 3690. BYCHOWSKI, GUSTAV. "The Structure of Homosexual
Acting Out," Psychoanalytic Quarterly, 23 (1954), 48-61. Contends that homosexual acting out stems from a weak ego structure
based upon a narcissistic and prenarcis- sistic disposition. 3691. CALEF, VICTOR, and WEINSHEL, EDWARD M. "Anxiety
and the Restitutional Function of Homosexual Cruising," International Journal of
Psycho-anal- ysis, 65 (1984), 45-53. Suggests that homosexual cruising is an act of restitution, an effort
to resurrect the father and to contradict the ambivalent wishes to rob and
murder him, and an attempt to idealize the father, rendering him into an object
of love. 3692. CAPPON, DANIEL. Toward an Understanding of
Homosexuality. Englewood Cliffs, NJ: Prentice-Hall, 1965. 302 pp. Views homosexuality as a product of "faulty development and
adaptation"—"a painful and destructive disorder, but one which can
be relieved and even cured." 3693. EISENBUD, RUTH-JEAN. "Early and Later
Determinants of Lesbian Choice," Psychoanalytic Review, 69 (1982), 85-109. Holds that primary lesbian erotic love originates in a precocious
turn-on of erotic desire mandated by the ego and that it is progresive, not
regressive. 3694. ENDLEMAN, ROBERT. Psyche and Society:
Explorations in Psychoanalytic Sociology. New York: Columbia University Press, 1981. 466 pp. In this wide-ranging study, see Part 4, "Homosexuality: Gay
Liberation Confronts Psychoanalysis and the Social Sciences" (pp.
235-337). 3695. EYSENCK, HANS J. Decline and Fall of the Freudian Empire. New York: Viking, 1986. 224 pp. Ambitious critique of psychoanalysis,
seeking to expose the paradoxes, limitations, and errors the author, a
London-based psychologist, believes to underlie Freudian theory and practice. 3696. FELDMAN, SANDOR S. "On Homosexuality," in:
Sandor Lorand and Michael Balint (eds.), Perversions: Psy- chodynamics
and Therapy. New York: Random House, 1956, 71-96. Holds that homosexuals of both sexes began as heterosexuals, but that
some traumatic situation shifted their heterosexual orientation toward
homosexuality. 3697. FENICHEL, OTTO. The Psychoanalytic Theory. New York: W. W. Norton, 1945. 703 pp. In a synthesis of psychoanalytic
doctrines, male and female homosexuality is discussed in relation to perversions
and impulse neuroses, as well as castration anxiety, regression to a state of
father fixation, and the Oedipal/ Electra complexes. Compare his
"Outline of Clinical Psychoanalysis: The Sexual Perversions," Psychoanalytic Quarterly, 2 (1933), 260-308, esp. 270-90. 3698. FERENCZI, SÄNDOR. "Zur Nosologie der männlichen Homosexualität," Zeitschrift für ärztliche Psychoanalyse, 2 (1914), 131-42. An influential statement by a member of Freud's circle, who
subsequently became estranged. Using his dichotomy between
"subject" (active) and "object" (passive) homosexuals,
Ferenczi sought in effect to explain away homosexuality by assimilating it
to heterosexual norms. For English version, see his: Contributions to
Psychoanalysis (New York: Brunner, 1950), pp. 296-318. 3699. GERSHMAN, HARRY. "Psychology of Compulsive Homosexuality," American Journal of Psychoanalysis,
17 (1957), 58-77. Seeks to distinguish between "homosexual behavior" and
"compulsive homosexuality." The latter, which
reflects a personality distortion originating in early childhood, is not
normal. See also his: "Reflections on the Nature of Homosexuality," American Journal of
Psychoanalysis, 26 (1966), 46-59; and "The Role of Core Gender Identity in the
Genesis of Perversions," American Journal of Psychoanalysis, 30 (1970), 58-67. 3700. GONEN, JAY. Y. "Negative Identity in Homosexuals,"
Psychoanalytic
Review, 58 (1971),
345-52. Utilizing ideas of Erik Erikson, contends
that the concept of negative identity can be fruitfully applied to an
understanding of various social phenomena, including homosexuality. 3701. HASSELGREEN, HELGE. ["Searching for the
Homococ- cus"], Nordisk Psykiatrisk Tidsskrift, 28 (1974), 605-11. Criticizing the psychiatric view that homosexuality is pathological
(as found in the works of I. Bieber and E. Kringlen), argues that this
assumption is without foundation, being simply a residue of Judeo-Christian
belief systems. 3702. HENDIN, HERBERT. The Age of Sensation: A Psychoanalytic
Exploration. New York: W. W. Norton, 1974. 354 pp. Study of college youth in New York City, portraying them as victims of
drugs, anomie, and sexual 'confusion, including homosexuality (esp. pp.
104-18). Catering to popular fears about adolescents, this work is undermined by statistical anomalies and preconceived formulations.
See also his: "Homosexuality: The Psychosocial Dimension," Journal of the American Academy
of Psychoanalysis, 6 (1978), 479-96. 3703. HOROWITZ, GAD. Repression: Basic and Surplus Repression in
Psychoanalytic Theory: Freud, Reich, and Narcuse. Toronto: University of Toronto
Press, 1977. 227 pp. Expository study, emphasizing Marcuse's critic of surplus repression,
holding that while his argument is flawed, it can be strengthened and made
viable. See esp. pp. 82-86. 3704. JACKMAN, A. J. The Paranoid Homosexual Basis of Anti-Semitism and
Kindred Hatred. New York: Vantage, 1979. 191 pp. An amateurish and subjective work, in some respects recalling Samuel
Igra, Germany's National Vice (London: Quality Press, 1945), which was a product
of wartime hatred. Despite their polemical character, it may be that such
works raise issues deserving more serious consideration. 3705. KARDINER, ABRAHAM. Sex and Morality. Indianapolis: Bobbs-Merrill, 1954. 266 pp. In "Flight from Masculinity" (pp. 160-92), he contends that
in our culture homosexuality is a social disease brought on by the pressures
of western civilization. 3706. KWAWER, JAY S. "Transference and
Countertransfer- ence in Homosexuality: Changing Psychoanalytic Views," American Journal of Psychotherapy, 34 (1980), 72-80. Identifies shifts in the dynamic understanding of transference
phenomena, from an early emphasis on Oedipal issues to the contemporary focus
on early maternal relations and how disturbances in these are recapitulated
in homosexual transference. 3707. MARCUSE, HERBERT. Eros and Civilization. Boston: Beacon Press, 1955. 277 pp. An attempt by a once-influential figure of the "Freudian
left" to posit a nonrepressive civilization. On Marcuse, see G.
Horowitz, above, and P. A. Robinson, below. 3708.
MORGENTHALER,
FRITZ. Homosexualität Heterosexual- ität
Perversion. Frankfurt am Main: Qumran, 1984.
192 pp. Revised texts of speeches and papers of an independent Swiss
psychiatrist (1961-83), who evolved a nonpatho- logical concept of
homosexuality. 3709. OVESEY, LIONEL, and ETHEL PERSON. "Gender
Identity and Sexual Psychopathology in Men: A Psychodynamic Analysis of
Homosexuality, Transsexualism, and Transvestism," Journal of the American
Academy of Psychoanalysis, 1 (1973), 53-72. For each "disorder" a psychodynamic analysis of the symptoms
is offered, as well as a hypothesis for developmental origins. 3710. PERETTI, PETER 0., et al.
"Self-image and Emotional Stability of Oedipal and Non-Oedipal Male
Homosexuals," Acta Psychiatrica Belgica, 76 (1976), 46-55. In a study of 168 "oedipal" and "non-oedipal" male
homosexuals, the former were found to be more negative, and to have less
self-worth, self-confidence, and self-acceptance than the latter. 3711. RADO, SANDOR. "A Critical Examination of the
Concept of Bisexuality," in: Judd Marmor (ed.), Sexual Inversion: The Multiple
Roots of Homosexuality. New York: Basic Books, 1965, pp. 175-89. In a widely read essay, first
published in 1940, Rado questions the earlier assumption of the universality
of bisexuality by Freud and others, maintaining that if the term is used in a
biologically limited sense, "there is no such thing as bisexuality
either in man or in any other of the higher vertebrates." 3712. REICH, WILHELM. Sex-Pol: Essays 1929-1934. Edited by Lee Baxandall. New York: Vintage Books,
1972. 378 pp. The early Reich, some of whose writings are translated here from the
original German publications, has been influential in his attempt to fuse
Freudian psychoanalysis with Marxism, relating both to sexual enlightenment.
Even at this period, however, he disliked homosexuality, associating it with
the right and the rise of Nazism (p. 297). For a contextualization of the
Sex-Pol milieu, see Hans-Peter Gente (ed.), Marxismus, Psychoanalyse,
Sex-Pol (Frankfurt: Fischer, 1976; 2 vols.). 3713. REICH, WILHELM. The Sexual Revolution: Towards
a Self-Governing Character. Translated by Theodore W. Wolfe. Revised ed. New
York: Farrar, Straus and Giroux, 1969. 273 pp. The final state of this book incorporates many changes since the
publication of the original core in Vienna in 1930. A careful study of
Reich's thought would have to distinguish its various strata; as it is, too
much of the writing about him is uncritical advocacy. This book does contain
some discussion of the repression of homosexuality in Stalin's Soviet Union
(pp. 153-57, 208-11). 3714. ROAZEN, PAUL. Helene Deutsch. New York: Anchor Press/Doubleday, 1985. 371 pp. Biography of Freud's leading woman disciple, using documentary
sources—including some that suggest a link between her experiences with close
associates and her negative concepts of homosexuality. Some discussion of
lesbianism appears in Deutsch's major work, The Psychology of Women (New York: Grune and Stratton, 1944-45; 2 vols.). 3715. ROBBINS, BERNARD S. "Psychological Implications
of the Male Homosexual Marriage," Psychoanalytic Review, 30 (1943), 428-37. Claims on the basis of the psychoanalysis of two men that the
homosexual's dominant neurotic drive is sadism. 3716. ROBINSON, PAUL A. The Freudian Left. New York: Harper and Row, 1969. Wilhelm Reich, Geza Roheim, and Herbert Marcuse seen through somewhat
rose-colored glasses. See also: Richard King, The Party of Eros: Radical
Social Thought and the Realm of Freedom (Chapel Hill: University of North Carolina Press,
1972; 227 pp.). 3717. RUSE, MICHAEL. "Are Homosexuals Sick?" in
A. Cap- Ian et al (eds.), Current Concepts of Health and Disease. Boston: Addison-Wesley, 1980, pp. 693- 723. Chiefly on the Freudian and other schools of clinical psychology. 3718. SADGER, ISIDOR. "Fragmente der Psychoanalyse eines Homosexuellen," JfsZ, 9 (1908), 339-424. Sadger was the first member of Freud's circle to give concentrated attention to homosexuality. Among his contributions is the notion that homosexuality is caused by an impulse to eat the father's testicles. See also his: "Ist die konträre Sexualempfindung heilbar?" Zeitschrift für Sexualwissenschaft, 1 (1908), 712-20; and Neue Forschungen zur Homosexualität (Berlin: Fischer, 1915; 32 pp.). 3719. SALZMAN, LEON. "'Latent' Homosexuality,"
in: Judd Marmor (ed.), Sexual Inversion: The Multiple Roots of
Homosexuality. New York: Basic Books, 1965, pp. 234-47. The term "latent homosexuality" has been loosely used and
abused by professionals as well as by laymen. Since it carries derogatory
connotations, its validity should be demonstrated or else the term should be
abandoned. See also his: "The Concept of Latent Homosexuality," American Journal of
Psychoanalysis, 17 (1957), 161-69. 3720. SIEGEL, ELAINE V. "Severe Body Image
Distortions in Some Female Homosexuals," Dynamic Psychotherapy, 2 (1984), 18-28. Attempts to apply the theories of Charles Socarides (see below) to
lesbians. See the discussion following by Bernard F. Riess, ibid., 29-30. 3721. SILVA, JORGE G. "Two Cases of Female Homosexuality:
A Critical Study of Sigmund Freud and Helene Deutsch," Contemporary Psychoanalysis, 11 (1975), 357-87. Criticizes their ideas on lesbianism, including Deutsch's claim that
the libido is never feminine. 3722. SOCARIDES, CHARLES W. The Overt Homosexual. New York: Grune and Stratton, 1968. 245 pp. Resumes of earlier literature and clinical reports by a neo-Freudian
who remains obdurately attached to the sickness theory. Together with other
contributions, the material of this book is recycled in his omnium gatherum, Homosexuality (New York: Jason Aronson, 1978; 642 pp.). 3723. STEKEL, WILHELM. The Homosexual Heurosis. Translated by James Van Teslaar. Brooklyn:
Physicians and Surgeons Book Co., 1922. 322 pp. Popularization of Freudian ideas with case histories. See also
"Is Homosexuality Curable?" Psychoanalytic Review, 17 (1930), 443-52. 3724. STOLLER, ROBERT. Observing the Erotic Imagination. New Haven: Yale University Press, 1985. 228 pp. Censorious and sex-negative studies on pornography, fantasies, and interpersonal
rituals as "perversions" and evidence of the hostility he believes
pervades our intimate relationships. See the other publications of this
prolific author, including: Splitting: A Case of Female Masculinity (New York: Quadrangle, 1975); Perversion: The Erotic Form
of Hatred (New York: Pantheon, 1977); Sexual Excitement (New York: Pantheon, 1979); and Presentations of Gender (New Haven: Yale University Press, 1985). 3725. STREAN, HERBERT S. "Homosexuality: A
Life-Style, A Civil Rights Issue or a Psycho-Social Problem?" Current Issues in
Psychoanalytic Practice, 1 (1984), 35-47. With regard to the homosexual client, who has frequently been
scapegoated as a child by his/her parents and discriminated against as an
adult, practitioners have to respect and accept his/her lifestyle, behave in
a way that guarantees his/her civil rights, and maintain an objective eye and
an empathetic ear. D. OTHER DEPTH PSYCHIATRY SCHOOLS Two of Freud's rivals (originally his associates) reflect the attitude
of many non-Freudian depth psychologists towards homosexuality: Adler hated
it with an almost unreasoning passion, while Jung tended to ignore it. Hence
the brevity of this section. 3726. ADLER, ALFRED. Cooperation between the Sexes: Vri- tings on Women, Love and Marriage,
Sexuality and Its Disorders. Edited and translated by Henz L. and Romena R.
Ansbacher. Garden City, NY: Anchor Books, 1978. 468 pp. For a time a close
associate of Freud in Vienna, Adler (1870-1937) seceded to form his own
school of Individual Psychology. He classed homosexuals among the
"failures of life," together with prostitutes and criminals. The
present collection includes two grimly anti-homosexual papers (145-70,
205-47), which incorporate material from several German texts (1917ff.). 3727. BOSS, MEDARD. Meaning and Content of Sexual Perversions: A
Daseinanalytic Approach to the Psychopathology of the Phenomenon of Love. Translated by Liese Lewis
Abell. Second ed. New York: Grune and Stratton, 1949. 153 pp. An existentialist approach,
based in part on the ideas of the philosopher Martin Heidegger. 3728. CHAPMAN, A. H. Harry Stack Sullivan: His Life and His Work. New York: Putnam, 1976. 280 pp. Sympathetic account of the only major
psychoanalyst (1892- 1949) known certainly to have been homosexual, suggesting
that the need to conceal this fact probably stunted both his life and his
career. His influence was largely exercised through personal contact during
his life, and his writings, which are rambling and often unfocused, do not
seem to deal explicitly with homosexuality. 3729. DONALD, PAUL. "Can the Homosexual Be
Helped?" Modern Psychologist, 1 (1933), 203-66. Negative article in an Adlerian vein, chiefly interesting for its
adumbration of the concept of injustice collecting, later exploited to the
hilt by the neo-Freudian Edmund Bergler. 3730. ELLIS, ALBERT. Homosexuality: Its Causes and
Cure. New York:
Lyle Stuart, 1965. 288 pp. Ellis, who achieved considerable notice during this period as a kind
of proto-pop psychiatrist, regarded exclusive homosexuality as the result of
emotional disturbance. He recommended his own technique of
"rational-emotive psychotherapy." Ellis gained the adherence of
some homophile figures at the time, notably Edward Sagarin (Donald Webster
Cory), who contributed an appendix to this book on the mystique of the
gigantic penis. For a strong contemporary critique, see Jim Kepner, "An
Examination of the Sex Theories of Albert Ellis, Ph.D." ONE Institute Quarterly, 2:2 (Spring 1959), 40-51. 3731. FRIEDBERG, RONALD L. "Early Recollections of
Homosexuals as Indicators of Their Life Styles," Journal of Individual
Psychology, 31 (1975), 197-204. An Adlerian study,
finding only partial support for Adler's assertion that the homosexual's most salient character traits
are inordinate ambition and pronounced caution and fear of life. 3732. JUNG, CARL GUSTAV. Collected Works. Edited by Herbert Read et al. New York: Pantheon;
and Princeton: Princeton University Press, 1953-79. 20 vols. in 21. The writings of Jung (1875-1961) generally avoid any direct discussion
of homosexuality and lesbianism. Some have found the Jungian concept of the
archetype to be useful in rethinking gender-role categories. The final of
volume of the Works is a general index; see entries: androgyny, bisexuality,
hermaphrodite. 3733. KIVEL, CAROL I. "Male
Homosexuals in a Changing Society," Individual Psychology: Journal of Ad- lerian
Theory, Research and Practice, 39 (1983), 218-21. Contends that societal changes require modification of Adler's
negative view of homosexuality, which should no longer be regarded as calling
for mandatory therapy. See comment by Harold H. Mosak, ibid.,
222-36. 3734. KRAUSZ, ERWIN 0. "Homosexuality as
Neurosis," International Journal of Individual Psychology, 1 (1935), 30-39. A negative article translated from the German to feature in the first
volume of Adler's English-language organ. 3735. LOPEZ-PEDRAZA, RAFAEL. "The Tale of Dryops and
the Birth of Pan: An Archetypal and Therapeutic Approach to Eros Between
Men," Spring (1976), 176-90. Venezuelan psychiatrist, influenced by C. Rogers, who holds that
invocation of the Pan factor could be of therapeutic
value in relation to homosexuality. 3736. MANASTER, GUY J., and MARC KING. "Early
Recollections of Male Homosexuals," Journal of Individual
Psychology, 29 (1973), 26-33. Adlerian interpretation of five cases, all of which show a
recollection of conflict with a woman. 3737. RISTER, ESTHER S. "The Male Homosexual Style of
Life: Contemporary Adlerian Interpretation," Journal of Individual
Psychology, 37 (1981), 86-94. Applies Adlerian theory to explain the seemingly great increase in
male homosexuality in the second half of the 20th century. Unable to meet the
challenge of women's equality, they retreat into an immature life style that
revolves around avoidance. E. PARANOIA AND HOMOSEXUALITY Freud hypothesized that paranoia originated in a desperate effort on
the part of the paranoid individual to repress homosexual desires. This
controversy is presented here in some detail as it is paradigmatic of the
fate of many Freudian theories: extensive and resourceful research has failed
to find confirmation for Freud's claim. 3738. CHALUS, GARY ANTON. "An Evaluation of the
Validity of the Freudian Theory of Paranoia." JH, 3 (1977), 171-88. In essence the theory states that delusional thinking arises as a
result of the reaction-formation and projection of threatening unconscious
homosexual wishes. Chalus suggests a more parsimonious explanation. Extensive
references. 3739. DASTON, PAUL G. "Perception of Homosexual Words
in Paranoid Schizophrenia," Perceptual and Motor Skills, 6 (1956), 45-55. Claims that selective responses to words provide support for the
psychoanalytic interpretation. However, "[w]heth- er homosexuality was a
major area of concern for paranoid individuals was not determined." 3740. DEB, SUBIMAL. "Repressed Homosexuality and
Symptom Formation Like Paranoid Jealousy and Erotomania," Samiksa, 30
(1976), 41-46. Contends that for the male paranoid jealousy begins with the choice of
the father as the homosexual partner; this wish is then repressed, leading to
erotomania. 3741. FERENCZI, SANDOR. "Uber die Rolle der Homosexualität in der Pathogenese der Paranoia," Jahrbuch für psychoanalytische und psychopathologische Forschungen, 3 (1911), 101-19. Early statement of the purported link between homosexuality and the
origins of paranoia, by a member of Freud's inner circle. 3742. FREUD, SIGMUND. "Psychoanalytic Notes on an
Autobiographical Account of a Case of Paranoia (Dementia paranoides)
[1911]," Standard Edition (London: Hogarth Press), 12 (1958), 12-84. Analysis of the case of Judge Daniel Schreber, the locus classicus for
the posited link. Holds that the type-sit- uation is represented by the
proposition: "I (a man) love him (a man)." On the single case on
which Freud based his ambitious theory, see William Niederman, The Schreber Case:
Psychoanalytic Profile of a Paranoid Personality (New York: Quadrangle, 1974; 172 pp.). 3743. HIGDON, JOHN F. "Paranoia: Power Conflict or Homosexual Projection?" Journal of Operational Psychiatry, 7 (1976), 32-45. A review of studies highlights the
confusion of power conflicts with homosexual dynamics, showing that past
research studies have not adequately distinguished between the two. 3744. KLAF, FRANLIN S. "Female Homosexuality and Paranoid
Schizophrenia: A Survey of 75 Cases and Controls," Archives of General
Psychiatry, 4 (1961), 84-86. With reference to Freud's hypothesis, found no significant difference
between the schizophrenics and the controls in the degree of their
preoccupation with homosexuality. 3745. KLAF, FRANKLIN S., and CHARLES A. DAVIS.
"Homosexuality and Paranoid Schizophrenia: A Survey of 150 Cases and
Controls," American Journal of Psychiatry, 116 (1960), 1070-75. Although Freud's theory appears to have been substantiated, more
studies are needed. The two trends, paranoia and homosexuality, may exist
together and yet not necessarily be related. 3746. LACAN, JACQUES. De la psychose paranoïaque dans ses rapports avec la personnalité. Paris: Editions du Seuil, 1975. 361 pp. In his 1932 M. D. thesis, now republished, the influential French psychoanalyst
discusses the Freudian theory of paranoia, stressing the value of his
approach for the understanding of "thèmes délirants à signification homosexuelle . " 3747. LESTER, DAVID. "The Relationship Between
Paranoid Delusions and Homosexuality," Archives of Sexual Behavior, 4 (1975), 285-94. A review of the literature on Freud's theory that paranoid delusions
are motivated by unconscious homosexual impulses does not support the
prediction. 3748. LIND, LIS. "Homosexuality and Paranoia," Scandinavian Psychoanalytic
Review, 5 (1982),
5-30. Uses case material to explore why the paranoiac and the manifestly
homosexual male react so differently to their homosexual libido. 3749. MCCAWLEY, AUSTIN. "Paranoia and Homosexuality:
Schreber Reconsidered," Hew York State Journal of Medicine, 71 (1971), 1506-13. Contends that, whether one subscribes to Freud's specific
interpretation or not, there seems to be a relationship between homosexuality
and paranoia. 3750. ROSSI, R., et al. "The Problem of the Relationship between Homosexuality and
Schizophrenia," Archives of Sexual Behavior, 1 (1971), 357-62. Questioning the appropriateness of generating a theory from a single
case (that of Schreber), concludes that "the data, examined from a
clinical-statistical point of view, do not support the analytical theory« ...
The frequency of homosexual elements does not appear to be high in paranoid
syndromes compared with other forms of schizophrenia." 3751. WOLOWITZ, HOWARD M. "The Validity of the Psychoanalytic
Theory of Paranoid Dynamics: Evaluated from the Available Experimental
Evidence," Psychiatry [Washington, DC], 34 (1971), 358-77. Reviews the relevant experimental research pertaining to homosexual actions,
fantasies, and defenses, finding that males are more likely to fit the theory
than females. 3752. ZAMANSKY, HAROLD S. "An Investigation of the
Psychoanalytic Theory of Paranoid Delusions," Journal of Personality, 26 (1958), 410-25. Finds that the homosexuality of the male paranoid appears as an
intermediary process in the development of his delusions, rather than being
the primary etiological agent. For critical comment, see Hans J. Eysenck and
Glenn D. Wilson, The Experimental Study of Freudian Theories (London: Methuen, 1973), pp. 312-15. See also:
Charles G. Watson, "A Test of the Relationship between Repressed
Homosexuality and Paranoid Mechanisms," Journal of Clinical
Psychology, 21 (1965), 380-84. The older model of psychotherapy with homosexuals was to replace the
deviant orientation with a heterosexual one acceptable to society. The term
"cure" encapsulates this attitude. In contrast, many therapists now
stress that they accept a homosexual orientation as normal and healthy, and
need not be changed. Their intervention is based on their claim to be able
help the patient remove obstacles to happy adjustment within it. See also
"Counseling and Social Services," XV.A. 3753. AGEL, JEROME (ed.). The Radical Therapist. New York: Ballantyne, 1971. 291 pp. Collection of short pieces by
psychiatric dissidents gathered under the rubric "therapy means change
not adjustment." Many reflect the viewpoint of the journal The Radical Therapist. 3754. ATKINS, MERRILEE, et al. "Brief Treatment of
Homosexual Patients, Comprehensive Psychiatry, 17 (1976), 115-24. A crisis-oriented
center must deal with challenges to therapists' value systems and speedy identification of patients'
priorities, 3755. BENDA, CLEMENS E. "Existential Psychotherapy of
Homosexuality," Review of Existential Psychology and Psychiatry, 3 (1963), 133-52. Existential therapy seeks to enable the homosexual to form loving,
"normal" sexual attachments, and to correct his "distorted view
of existence" by providing strong emotional experiences. 3756. BERG-CROSS, LINDA. "Existential Issues in the
Treatment of Lesbian Clients," Women and Therapy, 1 (1982), 67-83. The existential approach recommended is prolesbian without minimizing
the "contributing pathologies" afflicting many lesbians who seek
help in leading happier and more productive lives. 3757. BERILLON, EDGAR. "Le traitement psychologique, de l'homosexualité
basé sur la rééducation sensorielle," Revue de 1'hypnotisme, 23 (1908), 44-46. An early psychotherapeutic technique based on the premise
that "in the evocation of images capable of arousing his sexual
appetite, the male is olfactory and gustatory, while the female, on the
contrary, is in her sexual orientation visual and tactile." 3758. BLACKRIDGGE, PERSIMMON, and SHEILA GILHOOLY. Still Sane. Vancouver: Press Gang, 1985. 101 pp. Account of Gilhooly's three-year struggle with compulsory psychiatric
incarceration, in which shock treatments and drugs were employed in an attempt
to "cure" her lesbianism. 3759. BRADFORD, JOHN M. W.
"Organic Treatments for the Male Sexual Offender," Behavior Sciences and the Law, 3 (1985), 355-75. Discusses three treatments: antiandrogen or other hormonal agents;
surgical castration; and stereotaxic neurosurgery. Extensive references. See
also: Linda S. Gross, "Research Directions in the Evaluation and
Treatment of Sex Offenders: An Analysis," ibid.,
421-40; and R. M. Wettstein, below. 3760. BROOKS, VIRGINIA R. "Sex and Sexual Orientation
as Variables in Therapists' Biases and Therapy Outcomes," Clinical Social Work Journal, 9 (1981), 198-210. In responses of 675 lesbians, female therapists—heterosexual or
lesbian--were assessed as more beneficial than male therapists. The sex-role
ideology of therapists may be even more important. 3761. BROWN, LAURA S. "The Lesbian Feminist Therapist
in Private Practice and Her Community," Psychotherapy in Practice, 2:4 (Winter 1984), 9-16. Suggests that the lesbian
therapist's relationship to her community should be likened to living in a
small town, where many overlapping relationships occur. See also Jo- sette
Escamilla-Mondanaro, "Lesbians and Therapy," in: Edna Rawlings and
Dianne Carter, Psychotherapy for Women (Springfield, IL: Charles C. Thomas, 1977), pp.
256-65.
CLIPPINGER, JOHN A.
"Homosexuality Can Be Cured," Corrective and Social Psychiatry and Journal of
Behavior Technology» Methods and Therapy, 20 (1974), 15-28. Claims that cure rates are on the increase and, for the majority of homosexuals, it is a matter of choice if they desire to be
changed.
COLEMAN, ELI.
"Toward a New Model of Treatment of Homosexuality: A Review," JH, 3 (1978), 345-59. Challenging the illness or maladaptive presupposition, a new model is
emerging to assist homosexuals to recognize, accept and value their sexual
identity.
DAILEY, DENNIS M.
"Family Therapy with the Homosexual: A Search," Homosexual Counseling Journal, 1 (1974), 7-15. Discusses the applicability of concepts derived from family therapy to
work with homosexual couples.
DAVISON, GERALD C.
"Homosexuality: The Ethical Challenge," Journal of Consulting and Clinical Psychology, 44
(1976), 157-62. It is probable that the very existence of change-of-ori- entation
programs strengthens societal prejudices against homosexuality and
contributes to the self-contempt and embarrassment that are determinants of
the "voluntary" decision by some homosexuals to become
heterosexual. See discussion by Seymour L. Halleck, ibid., 167-70; and Ellie
T. Sturgis and Henry E. Adams, ibid., 46 (1978), 165-69. Davison replied to
the latter critique, ibid., 170-72. Davison's paper
was reprinted in JH, 2:3 (1977), 195-204, where it is followed by another discussion.
DI BELLA, GEOFFREY
A. "Family Psychotherapy with the Homosexual Family: A Community
Psychiatry Approach to Homosexuality," Community Mental Health
Journal, 15 (1979), 41-46. Points out that homosexual families are not
being treated by family psychotherapy despite an obvious need, and seeks to
uncover the reasons for the neglect.
DUEHN, WAYNE D.,
and NASNEEN S. MAYADAS. "The Use of Stimulus/Modeling Videotapes in
Assertive Training for Homosexuals," JH, 1 (1976), 373-81. The approach combines the use of stimulus-modeling videotapes with
behavioral rehearsals, videotape feedback, and home assignments.
FREUND, KURT.
"Should Homosexuality Arouse Therapeutic Concern?" JH, 2 (1977), 235-40. Holds that attempts to change homosexual's sexual orientation should
not continue because social changes may be sufficient to reduce distress in
these persons and because there is as yet no real "cure."
GERSHMAN, HARRY.
"The Use of the Dream in the Therapy of Homosexuality," American Journal of
Psychoanalysis, 31 (1971), 80-94. Advocates the use of the dream as a diagnostic, prognostic,
therapeutic, and curative index.
GILBERT, S. F.
"Homosexuality and Hypnotherapy," British Journal of Medical
Hypnotism, 5:3 (1954), 2-7. Discusses the therapeutic potential of hypnosis with several types of
homosexuals. See also R. G. Roden, "Threatening Homosexuality: A Case
Treated by Hypnosis," Medical Hypnoanalysis, 4 (1983), 166-69.
GOTLIND, ERIK. Basic Mechanisms of Psychotherapeutic
Significance: Three Examples of One Kind of Analysis. Stockholm: Almqvist &
Wiksell, 1974. 90 PP. "Some Mechanisms Involved in Homosexuality" (pp. 9-44)
offers recommendations for psychotherapy: if the resolution of the emotional
problem with the parent of the same sex is achieved, the homosexual
inclination will subside.
GROVES, PATRICIA
A., and VENTURA, LOIS A. "The Lesbian Coming Out Process: Therapeutic
Considerations," Personnel and Guidance Journal, 62 (1983), 146-49. Problems and therapeutic needs of women in the process of identifying
themselves as lesbian—including denial rationales.
GUILMOT, P. H.
["New Perspectives in Medico-psychological Help for Homosexuals"], Acta Psychi- atrica Belgica, 72 (1972), 265-315. Homosexuality is not connected with any typical psychiatric disorder,
and final acceptance is the goal of therapy.
HALL, MARNY. The Lavender Couch: A Consumer's Guide to
Psychotherapy for Lesbians and Gay Men. Boston: Alyson, 1985. 178 pp. Offers an overview of the "therapy
marketplace" together with strategies for engaging a therapist and
continuing the relationship. A veritable zoo of over 250 therapies is
presented by Richie Herink (ed.), The Psychotherapy Handbook (New York: New American Library, 1980; 724 pp.).
See also: Otto Ehrenberg and Miriam Ehrenberg, The Psychotherapy Maze: A
Consumer's Guide to the Ins and Outs of Therapy (New York: Holt, 1977; 192 pp.).
HART, JOHN.
"Therapeutic Implications of Viewing Sexual Identity in Terms of
Essentialist and Constructionist Theories," JH, 9:4 (1984), 39-51. Constructionist theory, while it holds promise, has not taken into
account clinical evidence that clients may adhere to "essentialist"
beliefs.
HATTERER, LAWRENCE. Changing Homosexuality in the Male: Treatment for
Men Troubled by Homosexuality. New York: McGraw-Hill, 1970. 492 pp. Dispensing with sophisticated
psychotherapeutic theories, Hatterer retreats to an old-fashioned reliance on
will power and moral conformity. Unlike other clinicians who have made
similar claims, he gives a clear, often disquieting picture of what occurs
in his therapy sessions.
HERRON, WILLIAM G.,
et al. "New Psychoanalytic Perspectives on the Treatment of a Homosexual
Male," JH, 5 (1980), 393-403. Emphasizes the value of a psychoanalytic model in helping people to
attain their desired sexual identities.
HETRICK, EMERY, and
TERRY STEIN (eds.). Innovations in Psychotherapy with Homosexuals, Washington, DC: American Psychiatric Press, 1984.
131 pp. Six papers addressing the question of how the therapeutic process can
aid in resolving the problems that result from negative attitudes about gay
and lesbian people.
HINRICHSEN,
JAMES J., and KATAHN, MARTIN. "Recent Trends and New Developments in the
Treatment of Homosexuality," Current Theory, Research and Practice, 12 (1975), 83-92. Treats psychoanalysis, hypnosis, brain surgery, aversive conditioning,
covert sensitization, and combined treatments—generally from the standpoint
of changing orientation. See the reply by Eugene May, ibid.,
14 (1977), 18- 20.
JANOV, ARTHUR. The Primal Revolution: Towards
a Real World. New York: Simon and Schuster, 1970. 447 In this account by its founder of one of the leading pop psychiatric
fashions of the 1970s, see pp. 83-97. See also his The Primal Scream: Primal
Therapy—The Case for Neurosis (New York: Putnam's Sons, 1970), pp. 281— 321; and
[anon.], "Can Primal Therapy Cure Homosexuality?" Journal of Primal Therapy, 3 (1976), 226-29.
KAUFMAN, P., et al.
"Distancing for Intimacy in Lesbian Relationships," American Journal of
Psychiatry, 141 (1984), 530-33. Describes a collaborative treatment approach for lesbian couples who
are experiencing problems within their relationships—especially those too
closely merged.
KRONEMEYER, ROBERT. Overcoming Homosexuality. New York: Macmillan, 1980. 220 pp. Advocates his own "Syntonic
Therapy," an eclectic mixture of Reich, Perls, and Reik.
LANGEVIN,
RON, and REUBEN A. LANG. "Psychological Treatment of Pedophiles," Behavioral Sciences and the
Law, 3 (1985),
403-19. Group therapy and image therapy have been found useful in overcoming
such difficulties as the egocentric, egosynton- ic, and erotically gratifying
nature of pedophilia to the patient, his unwillingness to give up his
behavior, his tendency to rationalize his acts, and to see the child as
consenting. Many references.
LEGO, SUZANNE M.
"Beginning Resolution of the Oedipal Conflict in a Lesbian about to
Become a 'Parent' to a Son," Perspectives in Psychiatric Care, 19 (1981), 107-11. The article presents a series of dreams of a lesbian patient, who was
contemplating having a child by artificial insemination.
MARSHALL, W. L.
"The Modification of Sexual Fantasies: A Combined Treatment Approach to
the Reduction of Deviant Sexual Behavior," Behavior Research and Therapy, 11 (1973), 557-64. Contends that direct modification of fantasies will provide an
effective treatment method, reporting on results with homosexuals,
fetishists, rapists, and pedophiles.
MARTIN, APRIL.
"Some Issues in the Treatment of Gay and Lesbian Patients," Psychotherapy: Theory,
Research and Practice, 19 (1982), 341-48. Homophobic attitudes are the major problem. The therapist may
inadvertently reinforce the patient's homophobia or inquiry into the causes
of the patient's homosexuality or into his/her failure to function
heterosexually.
MEREDITH, R. L.,
and ROBERT W. RIESTER. "Psychotherapy, Responsibility, and
Homosexuality: Clinical Examination of Socially Deviant Behavior," Professional Psychology, 11 (1980), 174-93. Focuses on professional and ethical issues, adopting an intermediate
position on the question of homosexual functioning.
MILLER,
PETER M., et al. "Review of Homosexuality Research (1960-1966) and Some
Implications for Treatment," Psychotherapy: Theory,
Research and Practice, 5 (1968), 3-6. Finds two schools: One focuses upon the replacement of homosexual
behavior with heterosexual behavior; the other has as its goal the
elimination of anxiety and discomfort in the homosexual, but not of his
homosexual behavior per se.
MITCHELL, STEPHEN
A. "The Psychoanalytic Treatment of Homosexuality: Some Technical
Considerations," International Review of Psycho-analysis, 8 (1981), 63-80. Holds that the directive-suggestive approach that has dominated the
treatment of homosexuality rests on unproven presuppositions, a conceptual
unclarity concerning the nature of activity and passivity, and an overvaluing
of behavioral alterations at the expense of internal constructive factors.
MORRISON, ELIZABETH
G. "Lesbians in Therapy," Journal of Psychosocial Nursing and Mental Health
Services, 22:8 (1984), 18-22. On the dynamics of lesbian dyads where there is intense fusion and the
devices that may be used to achieve distancing.
MORRISON, JAMES K.
"Homosexual Fantasies and the Reconstructive Use of Imagery," Journal of Mental Imagery, 4 (1980), 165-68. Claims that "imagery therapy" not only reduced unwanted
homosexual fantasies but other sumptoms as well.
MURRAY, ROSANNA.
"Lesbians in Therapy: An Examination of Some Issues in Theory and
Practice," Comprehensive Psychotherapy, 3 (1981), 141-56. Examines various theoretical frameworks—-developmental, experiential,
and feminist—and their impact on lesbians .
PHILIPS, DEBORA, et
al. "Alternative Behavioral Approaches to the Treatment of
Homosexuality," Archives of Sexual Behavior, 5 (1976), 223-28. The traditional mandatory attempt to eradicate homosexual behavior has
been expanded into three options: (a) modification of homosexual in favor of
heterosexual behavior; (b) enhancement of homosexual behavior; and '(c)
ignoring homosexual behavior if it is functionally unrelated to the
presenting symptoms.
RIDDLE, DOROTHY,
and BARBARA SANG. "Psychotherapy with Lesbians," Journal of Social Issues, 34 (1978), 84-100. Traces three aspects of women's socialization—self-concept, feminine
sex-role behavior, and sexuality—that have particular relevance for lesbians.
ROBINSON, LILLIAN
H. "Adolescent Homosexual Patterns: Psychodynamics and Therapy," Adolescent Psychiatry, 8 (1980), 422-36. Exami nes the issue of whether to treat or not treat adolescents with
sexual identity problems.
ROTHBERG, BARBARA,
and VIVIAN UBELL. "The Co-existence of System: Theory and Feminism in
Working with Heterosexual and Lesbian Couples," Women and Therapy, 4 (1985), 19-36. As feminists enter the field of
couple and family therapy, they are faced with the issue of how to integrate
feminism and family systems therapy. Offers some suggestions for achieving
this.
SHERNOFF, MICHAEL
J. "Family Therapy for Lesbian and Gay Clients," Social Work, 29 (1984), 393-96. Discusses self-disclosure to other family members such as parents or
children, including possible legal complications. Also describes the use of
"family sculpting" to clarify perceptions.
See also Scott Wirth, "Coming Out Close to Home: Principles for
Psychotherapy with Families of Lesbians and Gay Men," Catalyst: A Socialist Journal
of the Social Services, 1 (1979), 6-23.
SILVERSTEIN,
CHARLES. "Homosexuality and the Ethics of Behavioral Intervention: Paper
2," JH, 2 (1977), 205-11. Discusses the reasons why attempts to change sexual orientation are
doomed to fail and what an appropriate treatment would be. See reply by
Nathaniel McConaghy, ibid., 221-27. (For "Paper
1," see G. C. Davison, above).
SOLOMON, KENNETH,
and NORMAN B. LEVY (eds.). Men in Transition: Theory and Therapy. New York: Irv- ington, 1982. 515 pp. Collection of papers concerned with contemporary male roles and their
relationship to the practice of psychotherapy. Topics discussed include:
male inexpressiveness; the older man; men's groups; and the effect of
changing sex roles on male homosexuals.
STERLING, DAVID
LYN. Sex in the Basic Personality. Wichita, KN: Hubbard Dianetic Foundation, 1952. 180
pp. In Dianetics [i.e. Scientology], homosexuality is thought to endanger
"potential survival through the family unit." The hope of cure is
offered through dianetic processing.
SYMONDS, MARTIN.
"Homosexuality in Adolescence," Pennsylvania Psychiatric
Quarterly, 9 (1969), 15- 24. Therapy is to be directed primarily at reducing depression and
feelings of isolation. (Nonetheless, the writer makes an implicit comparison
with tuberculosis.)
WETTSTEIN, ROBERT
M. "A Pharmacological Approach to Sexually Deviant Behavior in the
Community," International Journal of Sociology of the Family, 12:2 (1982), 155-62. Advocates control of paraphilias (including fetishism, transvestism,
pedophilia, s & m) through hormonal alteration of sexual arousal with
antiandrogens. See also J. M. W. Bardford, above. 3803. WILLS, SUE.
"The Psychologist and the Lesbian," Refractory Girl, 9 (1975), 41-45. While most lesbians have never sought treatment from
a psychiatrist, most have suffered because of them through the ripple effect
of the sickness theory. G. DSM CONTROVERSY A prolonged controversy, described in the entries below, led the
American Psychiatric Association to abandon its earlier definitions of
homosexuality as an illness, while retaining the curious diagnostic category
of "ego-dystonic homosexuality." Apart from the outcome, the
history of the dispute is revealing for its indication of the major, in some
instances perhaps decisive role that political considerations may play in the
resolution of what the lay public regards as purely scientific issues. 3804. AMERICAN PSYCHIATRIC
ASSOCIATION [APA]. Diagnostic and Statistical Manual of Mental Disorders [DSM]. Second ed. Washington, DC: American Psychiatric Association, 1968. 134
pp. This version of the APA's standard manual, like the first edition of
1952, incorporated the classification of homosexuality as a mental disorder
(p. 44). After intense discussion and prodding by gay activists, on December
15, 1973, the APA Board of Trustees voted to remove homosexuality per se
from the manual, substituting "sexual orientation disturbance" for
those individuals "who are bothered by, in conflict with, or wish to
change their sexual orientation." When the third edition, often referred
to as "DSM-III," appeared (Washington, DC: APA, 1980; 494 pp.), it
was found to include controversial new material defining "Ego-Dystonic
Homosexuality" [302.00], pp. 281-83. Hence the continuing debate among
those who (1) insist that homosexuality is still "sick" and the
definition of DSM-II should not have been changed; (2) defenders of the
DSM-III compromise; and (3) those who feel that further liberalization should
take place, striking both "ego-dystonic homosexuality" and the paraphilias
from the DSM. 3805. BAYER, RONALD. Homosexuality and American Psychiatry: The
Politics of Diagnosis. New York: Basic Books, 1981. 216 pp. This excellent book is noteworthy not only for its clear and balanced
reconstruction of the discussions that lay behind the APA's 1973 decision,
but also for its presentation of the larger issue of psychiatry's saturation
with moral and political concerns. See also: Bayer and Robert L. Spitzer,
"Edited Correspondence on the Status of Homosexuality in DSM-III," Journal of the History of the
Be- havioral Sciences, 18 (1982), 32-52. 3806. FERLEMANN, MIMI. "Homosexuality," Menninger Perspective, 5 (1974), 24-27. The APA classification has spurred much dialogue, which may eventually
lead to a clearer understanding of homosexuality . 3807. FRIEDMAN, RICHARD F., et al. "Reassessment of
Homosexuality and Transsexualism," Annual Review of Medicine, 27 (1976), 57-62. Reviews changes in the DSM during the past quarter century reflecting
alterations in views about the relationship between sexual orientation and
psychopathology. 3808. HADDEN, SAMUEL B. "Homosexuality: Its
Questioned Classification," Psychiatric Annals, 6 (1976), 165- 69. Disapproves of the APA's efforts to eliminate the definition of
homosexuality as a disease. 3809. SILVERSTEIN, CHARLES. "The Ethical and Moral
Implications of Sexual Classification: A Commentary," JH, 9:4 (1984),
29-38. Offers two hypotheses to account for the APA's change in DSM-III: (1)
homosexuality is now viable as a lifestyle and therefore has become socially
regulated; and (2) the normal is the intractible. Further argues that there
is no reason to keep the paraphilias in DSM. See also his: "Even
Psychiatry Can Profit from Its Past Mistakes," JH, 2 (1976-77), 153-57. 3810. SMITH, JAIME. "Ego-Dystonic
Homosexuality," Comprehensive Psychiatry, 21 (1980), 119-27. An attempt to define the developmental stages and character of the
purported syndrome. See also his: "Treatment of Ego-Dystonic
Homosexuality: Individual and Group Psy- chotherapies," Journal of the American
Academy of Psychoanalysis, 13 (1985), 399-412. 3811. SOCARIDES, CHARLES W. "The Sexual Deviations
and the Diagnostic Manual," American Journal of Psychotherapy, 32 (1978), 414-26. Argues that the "normalizing" of homosexuality and the
consequent revision of DSM reflecting this position will slow scientific
progress, produce despair in those with a sexual deviation, and diminish
efforts at prophylaxis. 3812. SPITZER, ROBERT L. "The Diagnostic Status of
Homosexuality in DSM-III: A Reformulation of the Issues," American Journal of
Psychiatry, 138 (1981), 210-15. Describes the controversy surrounding the creation of the DSM-III
category of Ego-Dystonic Homosexuality, arguing that the major issue involves
a value judgment about heterosexuality rather than a factual dispute about homosexuality. 3804. STOLLER, ROBERT J., et al. "A Symposium: Should
Homosexuality Be in the APA Nomenclature," American Journal of
Psychiatry, 130 (1973), 1207-16. Summarizes papers on criteria for psychiatric diagnosis, homosexuality
as an adaptive disorder, homosexuality and cultural value systems, the gay
activist position, findings from fifteen years of clinical research, the
question of including heterosexuality in the APA nomenclature, homosexuality
as an irregular form of sexual behavior, and sexual orientation disturbance
as a psychiatric disorder. 3805. SUPPE, FREDERICK. "Classifying Sexual Disorders:
The Diagnostic and Statistical Manual of the American Psychiatric
Association," JH, 9:4 (1984), 9-28. Argues that that same criteria that led to
the removal of homosexuality per se as a mental disorder require the removal
of the paraphilias per se, and that while there is legitimacy for a
generalized ego-dystonic category, such ego dystonias are only incidentally
sexual. Suggests that the recent classification of sexual disorders is merely
the codification of social mores. This mode has sought to apply conditioning techniques in order to rid
the individual of presumably unwanted homosexual impulses. Although behavior
therapy has had some success with peripheral problems, such as phobias, it
does not seem well suited to effect such a profound change as the altering of
sexual orientation. A more appropriate use, employed by a few behavior
therapists, would be to adapt the technique to help homosexual persons
achieve a better adjustment to their orientation. 3806. ADAMS, HENRY E., and ELLIE T. STURGIS. "Status of Behavorial Reorientation
Techniques in the Modification of Homosexuality: A Review," Psychological Bulletin, 84 (1977), 1171-88. Attempts to summarize the critical components of the reorientation
programs developed since 1963, examine their outcomes, and discuss possible
shortcomings of the procedures currently used. 3807. CALLAHAN, EDWARD J., and HAROLD LEITENBERG.
"Aversion Therapy for Sexual Deviation: Contingent Shock and Covert
Sensitization, Journal of Abnormal Psychology, 81 (1973), 60-73. Covert sensitization, which provides an imagined aversive event following imagined sexual behavior, appears to be
more effective than contingent shock, which provides a physical aversive
event following erection to slides depicting sexually deviant material. 3808. COLSON, CHARLES E. "Olfactory Aversion Therapy
for Homosexual Behavior," Journal of Behavior Therapy and Experimental
Psychiatry, 3 (1972), 185-87. Describes the use of noxious olfactory stimuli—in particular, ampules
of aromatic ammonia—as a relatively simple method for inducing controlled
physical aversion. 3809. CONRAD, STANLEY R., and JOHN P. WINCZE.
"Orgasmic Reconditioning: A Controlled Study of Its Effects upon the
Sexual Arousal and Behavior of Adult Male Homosexuals," Behavior Therapy, 7 (1976), 155-66. Study does not support previous case reports of success with the
technique. Aversion therapy produced no change in arousal by deviant stimuli
and, only slight increases in arousal by heterosexual stimuli. 3810. EARLS, CHRISTOPHER M., and VERNON L. QUINSEY.
"What is To Be Done? Future Research on the Assessment and Behavioral
Treatment of Sex Offenders," Behavioral Sciences and the Law, 3 (1985), 377-90. With regard to the problem of aggressive men, recommends three
directions: the extension and refinement of assessment methods, the further
development of treatment techniques, and long-term follow-ups. 3811. FAUSTMAN, WILLIAM 0. "Aversive Control of
Maladaptive Sexual Behavior: Past Developments and Future Trends," Psychology, 13 (1976), 53-60. Traces the evolution and present status of the application of aversion
therapy to homosexuality, fetishism, and transvestism, noting the generally
poor outcomes obtained with homosexuals. 3812. FELDMAN, M. P. "The Treatment of Homosexuality
by Aversion Therapy," in: Hugh Freeman (ed.), Progress in Behaviour Therapy:
Proceedings of a Symposium. Bristol: John Wright, 1968, pp. 59-72. In this early report of the method, Feldman claims that of the 43
patients treated, 25 were rated as "improved" one year later. He
concedes that a pretreatment history of heterosexual interest is critical.
See also (among other contributions), Feldman and Malcolm J. MacCulloch, Homosexual Behaviour: Therapy
and Assessment (Oxford: Per- gamon, 1971; 288 pp.); as well as Tomi S. MacDonough,
"A Critique of the First Feldman and MacCulloch Avoidance Conditioning
Treatment for Homosexuals," Behavior Therapy, 3 (1972), 104-11; and Sheelah James, "Treatment
of Homosexuality," Behavior Therapy, 8 (1977), 840-48; 9 (1978), 28-36. 3813. GlJS, LUK. "Accepterende gedragstherapie, homosek- suele orientatie en uitbouw van een homoseksuele identiteit,11 Gedragstherapie (Netherlands), 16 (1983), 87-103. Reviews current viewpoints of behavior therapists on conversion
therapies for homosexuality and strategies for improving homosexual
functioning, discussing self-acceptance, coming out, and homosexual identity
formation. 3814. HERMAN, STEVEN H., et al. "An Experimental
Analysis of Classical Conditioning as a Method of Increasing Heterosexual
Arousal in Homosexuals," Behavior Therapy, 5 (1974), 33-47. Studies the use of classical conditioning of sexual response to female
stimuli, using slides and films. 3815. MCCONAGHY, NATHANIEL, et al. "Controlled Comparison
of Aversive Therapy and Covert Sensitization in Compulsive
Homosexuality," Behavior Research and Therapy, 19 (1981), 425-34. Attempted to evaluate behavior therapy for homosexuals in response to
ethical objections for such treatment. See also: McConaghy, "Aversive
Therapy of Homosexuality: Measures of Efficacy," American Journal of
Psychiatry, 127 (1971), 1221-24; "Is a Homosexual Orientation Irreversible?" British Journal of Psychiatry, 129 (1976), 556- 63; and "Subjective and
Penile Plethysmograph Responses to Aversion Therapy for Homosexuality: A
Follow-up Study," ibid., 117 (1970),
555-60—among other studies by this prolific Australian advocate of changing
homosexual behavior. 3816. MANDEL, K. H. "Probleme und Ansätze der Verhaltenstherapie bei männlichen Homosexuellen," Zeitschrift für Psychotherapie und medizinische Psychologie, 20 (1970), 115-25. Recommends covert sensitization of male homosexuals with the goal of
establishing a stable heterosexual partnership. 3817. PRADHAN, P. V. "Homosexuality: Treatment by
Behavior Modification," Indian Journal of Psychiatry, 24 (1982), 80-83. A marriageable age and indirect social pressures were positively correlated
with "improvement" in conjunction with chemical, verbal and
electrical aversive stimuli. 3818. ROSS, MICHAEL W. "Paradigm Lost or Paradigm
Regained? Behaviour Therapy and Homosexuality," New Zealand Psychologist, 6 (1977), 42-51. Critical examination of some ethical, ideological, and practical
problems posed by attempts to change sexual orientation through behavior
modification methods. 3819. WATSON, G. TERENCE, and GERALD C. DAVISON.
"Behavior Therapy and Homosexuality: A Critical Perspec- tive," Behavior Therapy, 5 (1974), 16-28. Examines the rationale for the use
of aversive techniques in behavior therapy of homosexuality, suggesting an
expanded therapeutic regimen derived from learning theory. Group therapy emerged in the 1960s as part of the trend toward
innovative therapies, and also as a way of reducing the high costs entailed
by individual therapy. The tendency also drew on the psychodrama model,
which had been pioneered in institutional settings. 3820. BIEBER, TOBY. "Group and Individual Therapy
with Male Homosexuals," Journal of the American Academy of Psychoanalysis, 2 (1974), 255-60. After an initial period of individual therapy, group work is
recommended in order to effect shifts to heterosex-
uality. 3821. BIRK, LEE. "Group Therapy for Men Who Are
Homosexual," Journal of Sex and Marital Therapy, 1 (1974), 29-52. Contends that male-female group psychotherapy can foster models,
support, and reinforcement for new behavior: heterosexual interest and
activity, increased assertiveness, identification with the male therapist,
and the emotional experience of simultaneous rapport with the man and the
woman. 3822.
BROMBERG,
WALTER, and GIRARD H. FRANKLIN. "The Treatment of Sexual Deviates with Group
Psycho- drama," Group Psychotherapy, 4 (1952), 274-89. Reports on work with men committed to Mendocino State Hospital under
California's sex psychopath law. 3823. GERSHMAN, HARRY. "The Effect of Group Therapy
on Compulsive Homosexuality in Men and Women," American Journal of
Psychoanalysis, 35 (1975), 303-12. Seeks not to convert the patient to heterosexuality, but to promote
personal growth and self-acceptance through confrontation, clarification,
interpretation, and working through his own feelings. 3824. HADDEN, SAMUEL B. "Group Psychotherapy of Male
Homosexuals," Current Psychiatric Therapies, 6 (1966), 177-86. In order to change orientation prefers groups consisting solely of
homosexuals to mixed groups (homosexuals and heterosexuals). See also: Hindy
Nobler, "Group Therapy with Male Homosexuals," Comparative Group Studies, 3 (1972), 161-78; and Frank S. Pittman and Carol D.
De Young, "The Treatment of Homosexuals in Heterogeneous
Groups," International Journal of Group Psychotherapy, 21 (1971), 62-73. 3829. JOHNSGARD, KEITH W., and RAY M. SCHUMACHER.
"The Experience of Intimacy in Group Psychotherapy with Male
Homosexuals," Psychotherapy: Theory, Research and Practice, 7 (1970), 173-76. In working with college students to assist them in adjusting to their
own homosexuality, it was found that "growth occurs in a therapeutic
environment where more than one therpaist is involved and where emphasis is
placed on increased therapist and client transparency in immediate emotional
confrontation." 3830. ROGERS, CARL, et al. "Group Therapy with
Homosexuals: A Review," International Journal of Group Therapy, 26 (1976), 3-27. In a comprehensive review of the clinical literature, a
"favorable outcome" was found in almost all cases whether the goal
was one of achieving a change in sexual orientation or a reduction in the
associated problems. 3831. SCOTT, JAMES M. and KENNETH N. ANCHOR. "Male
Homosexual Behavior and Ego Function Strategies in the Group Encounter," Journal of Clinical Psychology, 33 (1977), 1079-84. Analyzes characteristic patterns of interaction in a group treatment
context according to both psychodynamic and behavioral criteria. 3832. TRUAX, RICHARD, and GARFIELD TOURNEY. "Male
Homosexuals in Group Psychotherapy: A Controlled Study," Diseases of the Nervous
System, 32 (1971),
707-11. Contends that group work is efficacious in overcoming the homosexual's
defense mechanisms of isolation, rationalization, and denial. 3833. WALKER, CAROLYN B. "Psychodrama: An
Experiential Study of Its Effectiveness within the Homosexual Society," Group Psychotherapy and
Psychodrama, 27 (1974), 83-97. As an instrument of personal growth, psychodrama permits the
homosexual to be his private, real self and to face roles and situations to
which a successful adjustment has not been made. J. RELIGIOUS AND RELATED "CURES" From the first appearance of psychotherapy as an organized discipline
in North America, a certain affinity with established religion was evident.
Both fields take upon themselves the "care of souls." In recent years some
religionists, many of them fundamentalists, have claimed the capacity to
effect lasting sexual reorientation. However, the validity of these claims
has been sharply questioned as a result of follow-up studies. 3834. AARON, WILLIAM (pseud.). Straight: A Heterosexual Talks
about His Homosexual Past. Garden City, NY: Doubleday, 1972. 217 pp. In this popular autobiographical work the
writer perceives his past as empty and futile. 3835. BLAIR, RALPH. Ex-gay. New York: Homosexual Community Counseling Center,
1982. 50 pp. A vigorous and well-informed critique of ostensible "cures"
achieved by the Christian right, and the manipulation of reports of them for
ideological purposes. 3836. EYRICH, HOWARD A. "Help for the Homosexual: The
Case for Nouthetic Help," Journal of Pastoral Practice, 1:2 (1977), 19-33. Contends that as a learned behavior, homosexuality can be overcome
through sympathetic "nouthetic counseling." 3837. GIL, V. E. "Homosexuality: A Reparative
View," Social Work and Christianity, 11:2 (1984), 10-28. Rejecting the idea that a homosexual orientation is
"unchangeable," the author presents a reparative model to point the
individual to Jesus as the definitive answer to external anxiety. 3838. KRANZ, SHELDON. The H Persuasion: How Persons Have Permanently
Changed from Homosexuality through the Study of Aesthetic Realism. New York: Definition Press,
1971. 136 pp. Personal testimonies of individuals who claim to have achieved
permanent reorientation through techniques evolved within a metaphysical
system (regarded by some as a personality cult) founded by Eli Siegel. 3839. PATTISON, E. MANSELL and MYRNA L. PATTISON.
"Ex-gays: Religiously Mediated Change in Homosexuals," American Journal of
Psychiatry, 137 (1980), 1553-62. Discusses eleven men purported to have changed sexual orientation from
exclusive homosexuality through participation in a pentacostal church
fellowship. The claims were sharply criticized in the subsequent discussion, ibid., 138 (1980), 852-53. 3840. PERON, JIM. Homosexuality and the Miracle Makers. Glen Ellyn, IL: The author, 1978. 20 pp. Seeks to show that the
"cures" promised by various religious groups are not lasting or
significant. 3841. PHILPOTT, KENT. The Third Sex? Six Homosexuals
Tell Their Story. Plainfield, NJ: Logos International, 1975. 208 pp. Testimonies of changed lives, biblical passages concerning
homosexuality, and guidelines for counseling homosexuals "toward freedom
in Christ." See also his: The Gay Theology (Plainfield: Logos, 1977; 194 pp.). 3842. POWELL, JOHN R. "Understanding Male Homosexuality:
Developmental Recapitulation in a Christian Perspective," Psychology and Theology, 2:3 (1974), 163-73. Recommends the concept of developmental recapitulation, linked to
biblical teachings, as a means of guiding therapy. 3843. STRONG, STANLEY R. "Christian Counseling with
Homosexuals," Psychology and Theology, 8 (1980), 279-87. Presents a theological rationale and a therapeutic method for helping
homosexuals change orientation through "trusting in the power of the
Holy Spirit." The increased understanding of the mechanisms of coitus achieved by
Masters and Johnson encouraged many therapists to address the problem of
sexual dysfunction. Most of this work concerns heterosexual couples, though a
few therapists have addressed themselves wholly or partly to homosexuals. 3844. EVERAERD, WALTER, et al. "Treatment of
Homosexual and Heterosexual Sexual Dysfunction in Male-Only Groups of Mixed
Sexual Orientation," Archives of Sexual Behavior, 11 (1982), 1-10. Reports considerable success with subjects who were regarded as hard
to treat, having had a sexual dysfunction averaging six years. 3845. GUTSTADT, JOSEPH P. "Male Pseudoheterosexuality
and Minimal Sexual Dysfunction," Journal of Sex and Marital
Therapy, 2 (1976), 297-302. When the patient can be helped to a comfortable acceptance of his
homosexual feelings, very often the dysfunction is relieved, and there is a
marked change in the ability of the individual to achieve gratification in
genuine het- erosexuality. 3846. KAPLAN, HELEN SINGER. The Evaluation of Sexual Disorders: Psychological
and Medical Aspects. New York: Brunner/Mazel, 1983. 352 pp. A comprehensive work divided into
three major sections. The first section, on psychological aspects, emphasizes that it is
important clearly to separate organic and psychogenic causes. Section Two
analyzes the medical elements involved in sexual disorders. Section Three
offers a combined, integrative approach. See also her: Disorders of Sexual Desire; and
Other New Concepts and Techniques in Sex Therapy (New York: Simon and Schuster, 1979; 238 pp.). 3847. McWHIRTER, DAVID P., and ANDREW M. MATTISON.
"The Treatment of Sexual Dysfunction in Gay Male Couples," Journal of Sex and Marital
Therapy, 4 (1978), 213-18. Reports encouraging results in a two-year experience in treating
sexual dysfunction in 22 gay male couples. See also their: "Treatment of
Sexual Dysfunction in Homosexual Male Couples," in: S. R. Leiblum and
L. A. Pervin (eds.), Principles and Practice of Sex Therapy (New York: Guilford Press, 1980), pp. 321-45. 3848. MASTERS, WILLIAM H., and VIRGINIA E. JOHNSON. Homosexuality in Perspective. Boston: Little, Brown, 1979. 450 pp. After their two major studies of heterosexuals, the noted sex
researchers undertook a laboratory study of the sexual functioning of male
and female homosexuals. It was found that homosexual couples tend to
understand each other's sexual needs better than heterosexual ones. There was
no difference in sexual response between the two groups. The book presents a
therapeutic program for treating homosexual dysfunction and dissatisfaction.
Some doubts have been raised about claims for reorienting homosexuals to
heterosexuality, though in fairness it must be noted that this was not the
study's main purpose. XVIII. FAMILY A. HOMOSEXUALITY AND (HETEROSEXUAL) MARRIAGE Until recently it was common for some therapists and ministers to
advise male homosexuals and lesbians to marry in order to be
"cured." In many instances unhappiness and even tragedy ensued for
both parties. Perhaps more common, especially for the female partner, is the
situation whereby pre-lesbian (or pre-homosexual) individuals marry before
they have achieved an understanding of their orientation. A third type is
one in which a marriage is contracted, for friendship or convenience, or even
to deceive straight society, with the clear understanding that one or both
parties will remain homosexual. See also "Couples," XIV.H. 3849. BOZETT, FREDERICK W. "Heterogeneous Couples in
Heterosexual Marriages: Gay Men and Straight Women," Journal of Marital and Family
Therapy, 8 (1982), 81-89. Discusses the nature of the spousal relationships and the almost
inevitable marital disruption that occurs when a husband discloses his
homosexuality to his wife. 3850. DANK, BARRY M. "Why Homosexuals Marry
Women," Medical Aspects of Human Sexuality, 6:8 (1972), 14-23. Lacking any clear alternative at the age of marital eligibility, many
homosexuals follow the socially acceptable heterosexual marriage path,
sometimes later constructing a gay identity. 3851. HATTERER, MYRA S. "The Problems of Women
Married to Homosexual Men," American Journal of Psychiatry, 131 (1974), 275-78. Contends that in a therapeutic situation the wife's need to maintain
the "neurotic contract" of the marriage undermines her husband's
treatment. 3852.
HIRSCHFELD,
MAGNUS. "Sind sexuelle Zwischenstufen zur Ehe geeignet?"
JfsZ, 3 (1901), 39-71. An early canvasing by the noted sexologist of the suitability of
"sexual intermediates" for marriage. 3853. IMIELINSKI, KAZIMIERZ. "Homosexuality in Males
with Particular Reference to Marriage," Psychotherapy and
Psychosomatics, 17 (1969), 126-32. A Polish researcher suggests that marriage may be appropriate for
those who are (or who have attained through therapy) the Kinsey 1 and 2
classes. For the 3-6 groups it is not recommended. 3854. LATHAM, J. DAVID, and GEOFFREY D. WHITE.
"Coping with Homosexual Expression within Heterosexual Marriages: Five
Case Studies," Journal of Sex and Marital Therapy, 4 (1978), 198-212. Presents five case studies of marriages where the homosexual
partner's disclosure to the spouse was evident, examining the coping
mechanisms involved when such marriages do not end in divorce. 3855. MACKLIN, ELEANOR D. "Nontraditional Family
Forms: A Decade of Research," Journal of Marriage tod the Family, 42 (1980), 905-22. Reviews research in several areas of alternatives to the traditional
nuclear family (including voluntary childlessness, the binuclear family, and
intimate same-sex relationships)--with many references. 3856. MADDOX, BRENDA. Married and Gay. New York: Har- court Brace Jovanovich, 1982. 220
pp. "[J]ust as there are happy homosexual couples, there are some ...
homo-heterosexual marriages that are good by anybody's standards. ... [T]here
may be a compatibility and congruence in the man-woman relationship that
transcends sex." 3857. NUGENT, ROBERT. "Married Homosexuals," Journal of Pastoral Care, 37 (1983), 243-51. Discusses the issues of homosexuality in heterosexual marriage with
regard to motivations for marriage, church ministry with married homosexuals,
solutions to married homosexual dilemmas, and preventive approaches. 3858. ROSS, H. LAURENCE. "Modes of Adjustment of
Married Homosexuals," Social Problems, 18 (1971), 385-93. From interviews with eleven Belgian couples draws a profile of
reasons for marriage and the nature of the ongoing relationship (platonic
marriage, double-standard marriage, and innovative marriage). See also his:
"Odd Couples: Homosexuals in Heterosexual Marriages," Sexual Behavior, 2:7 (1972), 42-49. 3859. ROSS, MICHAEL W. The Married Homosexual Man: A
Psychological Study. Boston: Routledge and Kegan Paul, 1983. 184 pp. With regard to heterosexually married men, discusses the reasons for
marriage, internal problems, outside societal pressures, and comparisons with
other homosexuals (who are either married and separated or never married) and
bi- sexuals. Although the author works chiefly in Australia, he provides
international comparisons, together with a review of the literature. According to older stereotypes, lesbians and male homosexuals do not,
with a very few exceptions, have children. We now know that there are many
lesbian mothers who are bringing up their children either singly, or with a
female "significant other." The disapproval that these arrangements
sometimes incur unleashes custody battles; see XVIII.D. Another issue is
artificial insemination, an option chosen by some lesbians who wish to have a
child without having sexual relations with a man. 3860.
ABBITT,
DIANE, and BOBBIE BENNETT. "Being a Lesbian Mother," in: Betty Berzon
and Robert Leighton (eds.), Positively Gay. Millbrae, CA: Celestial Arts, 1979, 123-29. Experiences of two lesbian mothers who are raising two boys and two
girls; they stress candor and basic parenting skills. 3861. AGBAYEWA, M. OLUWAFEMI. "Fathers in the Newer
Family Forms: Male or Female?" Canadian Journal of Psychiatry, 29 (1984), 402-06. Suggests that women may function as fathers in the newer family forms. 3862. BLACKMON, MARY K. In the Best Interests of the Children. Binghamton, NY: Iris, 1977. 21 pp. Resource pamphlet for lesbian mothers by the
maker of the film of the same title. 3863. EBERT, ALLEN. "Lea
Hopkins: Just Different," Essence, 10:12 (April 1980), 88-89, 122, 124, 127, 128, 130, 134. Black lesbian mother living in the Midwest speaks of her relations
with her parents, her white lover, and her son. 3864. GIBSON, CLIFFORD G., and MARY JO RISHER. By Her Own Admission: A
Lesbian Mother's Fight to Keep Her Son. Garden City, NY: Doubleday, 1977. 276 pp. Sympathetic account of a much-publicized Texas case in which the
divorced heterosexual father used economic pressure and the courts to
alienate a son's affection from his mother. 3865. GOODMAN, BERNICE. "The Lesbian Mother," American Journal of
Orthopsychiatry, 43 (1973), 283-84. In a two-year study of heterosexual and lesbian mothers, found that
similarities far exceeded differences. Lesbian mothers did need, however, to
work through their sense of guilt. 3871. HALL, MARNY. "Lesbian Families: Cultural and Clinical Issues," Social Work, 23:5 (1978), 380-85. Showing that the feminist and
gay movement have fostered greater openness among
lesbian mothers and their companions, Hall urges social workers and other
professionals to be supportive so as to promote self-esteem. 3872. HANSCOMBE, GILLIAN E., and JACKIE FOSTER. Rocking the Cradle: Lesbian
Mothers: A Challenge in Family Living. Boston: Alyson, 1982. 153 pp. Based chiefly on English experience»offers considerable attention to
artificial insemination (AID) and the controversy this procedure has
aroused. See also: Roger Higgs et al., "Lesbian Couples: Should Help
Extend to AID?" Journal of Medical Ethics, 4 (1978), 91-95; and Donna Hitchens, Lesbians Choosing Motherhood:
The Implications of Donor Insemination. (San Francisco: Lesbian Rights Project, 1984); and
D. G. Wolf, below. 3873. HITCHENS, DONNA J., and ANN G.
THOMAS (eds.), Lesbian Mothers and Their Children: An Annotated Bibliography of Legal
and Psychological Materials. Second ed. San Francisco: Lesbian Rights Project, 1983. 67 pp. Useful handbook covering legal aspects (including case reports and law
review articles) and social science aspects (functioning and adjustment of
lesbians, mothering among lesbians, mental health, and children). Annotations
are detailed and critical; some sections preceded by
"Introduction and Summary." 3874. JULLION, JEANNE. Long Way Home: The Odyssey of a Lesbian Mother and
Her Children. Pittsburgh: Cleis Press, 1985. 272 pp. Personal account of the international campaign of a California
lesbian to recover custody of her two boys. 3875. KLEIN, CAROLE. The Single Parent Experience. New York: Walker, 1973. 241 pp. "Homosexual Parents" (pp. 77-90) argues that American
society is growing more receptive to alternative concepts of sex role and
sexual identity, which tends to make them more accepting of lesbians and male
homosexuals as parents . 3876. LEICK, NINI, and JOHN NIELSEN. Om
lesbiske fam- ilier. Copenhagen:
Studenterradet ved Kobenhavns Universitet, 1973. 162 pp. A study of Danish lesbian families undertaken in the psychology
department of Copenhagen University. 3877. LEWIN, ELLEN, and TERRIE A. LYONS. "Everything
in Its Place: The Coexistence of Lesbianism and Motherhood," in: William
Paul et al. (eds.), Homosexuality: Social, Psychological and Biological Issues. Beverly Hills, CA: Sage, 1982, pp. 249-73. Reports on a
four-year study in the San Francisco Bay area of adaptive strategies employed by lesbian and heterosexual single
mothers, which disclosed substantial similarities between the two groups
(salience of motherhood, support from kin, role of friendship ties, intimate
relationships, relations with ex-husbands, and threats to child custody). See
also: Lewin, "Lesbianism and Motherhood: Implications for Child
Custody," Human Organization, 40 (1981), 6-14. 3878. LYONS, TERRIE. "Lesbian Mothers'Custody
Fears," Women and Therapy, 2 (1983), 231-40. Comparison of lesbian and heterosexual mothers showed remarkable
congruence, with one exception: the lesbians were disturbed by persistent
custody fears. Court-awarded custody is never final and can be challenged
from a number of sources. 3879. MUCKLOW, BONNIE M., and GALDYS K. PHELAN.
"Lesbian and Traditional Mothers' Responses to Adult Response to Child
Behavior and Self-Concept," Psychological Reports, 44 (1979), 880-82. Analyses showed no difference in response to children's behavior or in
self-concept of lesbian and traditional mothers. 3880. OSMAN, SHELOMO. "My Stepfather is a She," Family Process, 11 (1972), 209-18. In this case presentation of a lesbian couple and their two sons in
treatment, the therapist holds that unresolved conflict about sexual
preference may produce therapeutic problems both for the adults and the
children. 3881. PAGELOW, MILDRED D. "Heterosexual and Lesbian
Single Mothers: A Comparison of Problems, Coping, and Solutions," JH, 5 (1980), 189-204. While both groups reported oppression in the areas of freedom of
association, employment, housing, and child custody, the degree of perceived
oppression was greater for lesbian mothers. 3882. SAPHIRA, MIRIAM. Amazon Mothers. Ponsonby, New Zealand: Papers, Inc., 1984. 86 pp. Presents results of four years of research of lesbian motherhood,
based on a questionnaire filled out by lesbians who have children, together
with interview. 3883. SCHLESINGER, BENJAMIN. The One-Parent Family in the
1980s: Perspectives and Annotated Bibliography. Toronto: University of Toronto Press, 1986. 284 pp. Five essays review the literature from a variety of perspectives, and
a comprehensive bibliography includes some 500 annotations of materials
published between 1978 and 1984. 3884. SHAVELSON, EILEEN, et al. "Lesbian Women's Percep- tions of Their Parent-Child Relationships," JH, 5 (1979-80), 205-15. In a comparison with
heterosexual mothers, differences were found concerning sex-role adherence,
with lesbian women being more masculinely sex-role typed and more satisfied
in their sex lives. 3885. SOMERVILLE, MARGARET A. "Birth Technology,
Parenting and 'Deviance,'" International Journal of Law and Psychiatry, 5 (1982), 123-53. Discusses the nature of the right to reproduce; birth technology and
homosexual, lesbian, transsexual, single, and unmarried parents; the mentally
retarded as parents; and custody of and access to children. 3886. SUTTON, STUART. "Lesbian Family: Rights in
Conflict under the California Uniform Parentage Act," Golden Gate University Law
Review, 10 (1980),
1007-41. On legal problems which may arise for lesbians who choose to have
children through artificial insemination or sexual intercourse. Reviews both
the U. S. Supreme Court cases concerning parental rights and the provisions
of California's Uniform Parentage Act. 3887. WOLF, DEBORAH GOLEMAN. "Lesbian Mothers and
Artificial Insemination: A Wave of the Future," in: Margarita Artschwager
Kay (ed.), Anthropology of Human Birth. Philadelphia: F. A. Davis, 1982, pp. 321-39. The number of lesbians who are choosing to have children through
artificial insemination is small but growing. The situation gives rise to two
needs to which the health care profession should respond; 1) a much greater
flexibility with hospital routine so that the mother's psychic needs are
considered; and 2) a health model of birth. Gay fathers are less likely than lesbian mothers to seek full custody
of their children, but they do generally aspire to visiting rights. In many
cities of North America support groups of gay fathers have come into
existence, providing practical and emotional self-help for these men. 3888. BOZETT, FREDERICK W. "Gay Fathers: Evolution of the
Gay-Father Identity," American Journal of Orthopsychiatry, 51 (1981), 55259. Interview data indicate that
identity congruence evolves over time as the men participate in both the
world of fathers and the world of gays. See also his "Gay Fath- ers: How and Why They Disclose Their Homosexuality to
Their Children," Family Relations, 29 (1980), 173-79; and "Gay Fathers: Identity
Conflict Resolution through Integrative Sanctioning," Alternate Lifestyles, 4 (1981), 90-107. 3889. FADIMAN, ANNE. "The Double Closet: How Two Gay
Fathers Deal with Their Children and Ex-Wives," Life Magazine, 6:5 (May 1983), 76-100. Presents the life of a gay male couple, including relations with the
men's former wives and the children of the broken marriages. 3890. Gay Fathers: Some of Their Stories, Experience and
Advice. Toronto: Gay Fathers of Toronto, 1981. 74 pp. Experiential account from one of the most successful of the gay
fathers' groups that have sprung up in North America. See also: Michael
Lynch, "Forgotten Fathers," in: Stan Persky and Ed Jackson (eds.), Flaunting It! (Vancouver: New Star, 1982), pp. 54-63. 3891. MILLER, BRIAN. "Unpromised Paternity:
Life-Styles of Gay Fathers," in: Martin P. Levine (ed.), Gay Men: The Sociology of Male
Homosexuality. New York: Harper and Row, 1979, pp. 239-52. Interviews with forty homosexual fathers disclose four distinct life
styles and the importance of relationships with spouse and children. See also
his: "Gay Fathers and Their Children," Family Coordinator, 28 (1979), 544-52; as well as Bruce Voeller and
James Walters, "Gay Fathers," ibid., 27
(1978), 149-57. 3892. ROBINSON, BRYAN E., and PATSY SKEEN. "Sex-Role
Orientation of Gay Fathers Versus Gay Nonfathers," Perceptual and Motor Skills, 55 (1982), 1055-59. Bern Sex-Role Inventory results show that gay fathers were no more
masculine than gay nonfathers. 3893. SKEEN, PATSY, and BRYAN E. ROBINSON. "Gay
Fathers' and Gay Nonfathers' Relationship with Their Parents," Journal of Sex Research, 21 (1985), 86- 91. Results of a study of 60 men (30 + 30) found no difference between the
father's and nonfathers' perceptions of their parents' acceptance of them.
This finding supports the growing body of research that questions the Freudian-
based concept of a causal relationship between early familial relationship
patterns and sexual orientation. The increasing visibility of lesbian mothers (and a few gay fathers) who seek to bring up their children after
separation from the heterosexual parent has focused attention on custody
problems. The legal literature on this subject is presented here, rather than
in the Law sections below. 3889. ARMANNO, BENNA F. "The Lesbian Mother: Her
Right to Child Custody," Golden Gate Law Review, 4 (1973), 1-18. Summarizes California law on the child custody issue and the
precedents existing at the time of writing. 3890. BROWNSTONE, HARVEY. "Homosexual Parent in
Custody Disputes," Queen's Law Journal (1980), 199-240. Surveys both Canadian and U.S. cases, comparing treatment of
"immoral" heterosexuals with that of homosexuals. 3891. CAMPBELL, ROSE W. "Child Custody When One
Parent is a Homosexual," Judges Journal, 17 (1978), 38-41; 51-52. A judge's reservations stemming from two lesbian mother cases she has
tried. 3892. CARDWELL, GARY L. "Doe vs. Doe: Destroying the
Presumption that Homosexual Parents Are Unfit—The New Burden of Proof," University of Richmond Law
Review, 16 (1982),
851-66. The precedent set in Doe v. Doe instructs Virginia courts to adhere to
some more precise burden of proof as to the homosexual factor in adoption,
and probably, custody proceedings. 3893. CHESSLER, PHYLLIS. Mothers on Trial: The Battle
for Children and Custody. New York: McGraw-Hill, 1985. 651 pp. Based on interviews with 60 women who were challenged for custody in
1960-81, this radical feminist statement of the case is marred by some
contestable statistics. 3894. EVANS, MARIE WESTON. "M. J. P. v. J. G. P.: An
Analysis of the Relevance of Parental Homosexuality in Child Custody
Determinations," Oklahoma Law Review, 35 (1982), 633-58. In child custody determinations, the best interests of the child are
served by continuing placement with the psychological parent. 3895. GOODMAN, ELLEN. "Homosexuality of a Parent: A
New Issue in Custody Disputes," Monash Law Review, 5 (1978-79), 305-15. Summary of Australian court decisions in child custody issues
involving lesbian mothers. While homosexuality per se has been held not to
render a parent unfit, some Australian courts have found children to be
adversely affected by their mother's orientation. See also: Kate Harrison, "Child Custody and Parental Sexuality: Just Another
Factor?" Refractory Girl, no. 20-21 (October 1980), 7-14; and Robyn Plaister, Lesbian Mothers, Campaign, no. 42 (April 1979), 13-14. 3896. HARRIS, BARBARA S. "Lesbian Mother Child
Custody: Legal and Psychiatric Aspects," Bulletin of the American
Academy of Psychiatry and Law, 5 (1977), 75-89. Summarizes the major reported cases, discussing misconceptions and
how they can be dispelled by scientific research findings. 3897. HITCHENS, DONNA. "Social Attitudes, Legal Standards,
and Personal Trauma in Child Custody Cases," JH, 5 (1979-80), 89-95. Lesbian mother cases and gay father visitation cases are increasingly
successful in the courts. The main hurdle continues to be the lack of
objective legal standards that could make the outcome of these cases
predictable. 3898. HITCHENS, DONNA, and BARBARA PRICE. "Trial
Strategy in Lesbian Mother Cases: The Use of Expert Testimony," Golden Gate University Law
Review, 9
(1978-79), 451-79. On the value of expert testimony in rebutting commonly held
misconceptions about the conseqences of raising children in a lesbian
household. 3899. HUNTER, NAN D., and NANCY D.POLIKOFF. "Custody
Rights of Lesbian Mothers: Legal Theory and Litigation Strategy," Buffalo Law Review, 25 (1976), 691-733. Summarizing current law, argues that
advocates should work toward establishing a requirement that a specific
logical nexus be shown between a mother's lesbianism and her ostensible
unfitness as a parent before she can be denied custody based on her
homosexuality. 3900. LEITCH, PATRICIA. "Custody: Lesbian Mothers in
the Courts," Gonzaga Law Review, 16 (1980), 147-70. Focusing on Washington State, surveys lesbian mother cases, esp.
Schuster v. Schuster. 3901. MILLER, SUZANNE. "Rights of Homosexual
Parents," Journal of Juvenile Law, 7 (1985), 155-59. Even though societal tolerance for alternative lifestyles seems to be
growing, the courts still tend to feel justified in restricting the amount of
exposure a child may have to an overt homosexual relationship on the part of
the mother. 3902. PAYNE, ANNE T. "Law and the Problem Parent: Custody
and Parental Rights of Homosexual, Mentally 111, Mentally Retarded, and
Incarcerated Parents," Journal of Family Law, 16 (1978), 797-818. Offers a comparative analysis, including elements of subjectivity and
bias that often enter into legal proceedings and decisions in these spheres. 3903. RILEY, MARILYN. "Avowed Lesbian Mothers and Her
Right to Child Custody: A Constitutional Challenge That Can No Longer Be
Denied," San Diego Law Review, 12 (1974-75), 799-864. Provides a detailed exposition of the constitutional arguments against
allowing a mother's lesbianism to influence custody cases when no specific
nexus of harm can be demonstrated. Reviews professional literature on sexual
orientation as it serves to buttress the argument. 3904. SMART, BARBARA. "Bezio v. Patenauda: The
"Coming Out" Custody Controversy of Lesbian Mothers in Court," New England Law Journal, 16 (1980-81), 331-65. Discusses a Massachusetts case in which a lesbian mother sought to
regain custody of her two children from a female friend. The mother was
successful on appeal in a decision that set limits on the trial judge's
discretion. 3905. SUSOEFF, STEVE. "Assessing Children's Best
Interests When a Parent Is Gay or Lesbian: Toward a Rational Custody
Standard," UCLA Law Review, 32 (1985), 852-903. Gay and lesbian parents seeking custody of their children have met
with increasing success in American courts since the California Court of
Appeal instructed a trial court that it could not rule that a mother's
homosexual orientation made her unfit to have custody of her child. See
also: Catherine Rand et al., "Psychological Health and Factors Court
Seeks to Control in Lesbian Mother Trials," JH, 8 (1982-83), 27-39. 3906. WHITTLIN, WILLIAM A. "Homosexuality and Child
Custody: A Psychiatric Viewpoint," Conciliation Courts Review, 21 (1983), 77-79. Although a specific incident will often trigger a legal battle, its
course may be determined by societal attitudes (including homophobia) and the
kind of research evidence that is brought to bear. E. CHILDREN OF LESBIANS AND GAY MEN The increasing visibility of households headed by lesbian and
homosexual single or coupled parents has evoked fears that the children's
psychological health might be adversely affected. Little if any support has
been found for this assumption of environmental determinism. 3901. GANTZ, JOE. Whose Child Cries: Children of Gay Parents
Talk^about Their Lives. Rolling Hills Estates, CA: Jalmar Press, 1983. 245 pp. Concerns five American families raising children in openly gay homes.
"Written from the perspective of the children, who range in age from
seven to seventeen." 3902. GOLOMBOK, SUSAN, et al. ' "Children in Lesbian
and Single-Parent Households: Psychological and Psychiatric Appraisal," Journal of Child Psychology
and Psychiatry and Allied Disciplines, 24 (1983), 551-72. Concludes that rearing in a lesbian household per se does not lead to
atypical psychosexual development or constitute a psychiatric risk factor. 3903. GREEN, RICHARD. "The Best Interests of the
Child with a Lesbian Mother," Bulletin of the American Academy of Psychiatry and
the Law, 10 (1982), 7-15. Concludes that difficulties experienced by children in lesbian mother
households stem from reaction to divorce and not from the mother's
lesbianism. See also his: "Sexual Identity of 37 Children Raised by
Homosexual or Transsexual Parents," American Journal of
Psychiatry, 135 (1978), 692-97. 3904. HOEFFER, BEVERLY. "Children's Acquisition of
Sex Role Behavior in Lesbian-Mother Families," American Journal of
Orthopsychiatry, 51 (1981), 536-44. Using Block's Toy Preference Test no differences were found between
children of lesbian and single heterosexual mothers. The writer suggests that
children's peers have the greatest influence on their development. 3905. HOTVEDT, MARY E., and JANE BARCLAY MANDEL.
"Children of Lesbian Mothers," in: William Paul et al. (eds.), Homosexuality: Social, Psychological and Biological Issues. Beverly Hills, CA: Sage, 1982, pp. 275-91. Examines
several areas of research, including impact of divorce, father absence, and
children's adjustment. 3906. KIRKPATRICK, MARTHA, et al. "Lesbian Mothers
and Their Children: A Comparative Survey," American Journal of
Orthopsychiatry, 51 (1981), 545-51. In this study of 40 children raised by lesbian and single parent
mothers, no significant differences were found in sexual or gender identity
between the groups. The lesbian mothers were more concerned with providing
male figures for their children than were the heterosexual mothers. 3907. KWESKIN, SALLY L., and ALICIA S. COOK.
"Heterosexual and Homosexual Mothers' Self-Described Sex-role Behavior
and Idea Sex-Role Behavior in Children," Sex Roles, 8 (1982), 967-75. Similarities in
sex-role behavior and attitudes of heterosexual and homosexual mothers far
outweigh the present subjects differences when
determined by self-description and attitudes toward ideal child behavior. 3908. LEWIS, KAREN GAIL. "Children of Lesbians: Their
Point of View," Social Work, 25 (1980), 198-203. Interviews with 21 children in the Greater Boston area brought out
several major problems. Early family discord and the mother's lesbianism
generated severe ambivalence, yet the children generally desired to accept
the mother's new lifestyle. 3909. MAYADAS, NAZNEEN S., and WAYNE D. DUEHN.
"Children in Gay Families: An Investigation of Services," Homosexual Counseling Journal, 3 (1976), 70-83. Argues that social service agencies and clinicians should reexamine
their value premises. 3910. MILLER, JUDITH ANN, et al. "The Child's Home Environment
for Lesbian vs. Heterosexual Mothers: A Neglected Area of Research," JH,7 (1981), 49-56. Children of lesbian mothers tend to live in a less affluent
socioeconomic setting. A strong child-development orientation was found among
lesbian mothers, undermining the stereotype of lesbians as aloof from
children. 3911. NUNGESSER, LONNIE G. "Theoretical Bases for
Research on the Acquisition of Social Sex-Roles by Children of Lesbian
Mothers," JH, 5:3 (1980), 177-87. Theories from developmental, behavioral, and social psychology are
applied in order to distinguish between the acquisition of sex-typed
behaviors and the actual performance of those behaviors. F. PARENTS OF GAYS AND LESBIANS The increasing number of gay men and lesbians
who have "come out" to their parents, has led to the formation in
many cities of North American of support groups for these parents. The literature
being produced by these groups enables one to understand the psychic process
of resistance and acceptance that these mothers and fathers undergo in
confronting the child's orientation. 3923. BACK, GLORIA. Are You Still My Mother? Are
You Still My Family? New York: Warner Books, 1985. 236 pp. Advice to parents of gay men and lesbians with an account of the
sex-session workshops which the author conducted before her death in 1985. 3924. BORHEK, MARY V. My Son Eric. New York: Pilgrim, 1979. 160 pp. Autobiographical account of a mother,
recently divorced from her clergyman husband, who discovers that her son is
homosexual. The book records her struggle towards acceptance, which was also
a journey in self-discovery. 3925. FAIRCHILD, BETTY, and NANCY HOWARD. Now That You Know: What Every
Parent Should Know about Homosexuality, New York: Harcourt Brace Jovanovich, 1979. 227 pp. Compassionate and practical advice by two women active in the national
organization Parents of Gays. 3926. GRIFFIN, CAROL WELCH, MARIAN J. WIRTH, and ARTHUR G.
WIRTH. Beyond Acceptance: Parents of Lesbians and Gays Talk about Their
Experiences. Englewood Cliffs, NJ: Prentice-Hall, 1986. 193 pp. Reports of real-life experience of parents, disclosing a sequence of
emotional stages—from the initial shock of the revelation that their
offspring is gay, through anger and denial, to acceptance and often beyond.
If this process is traversed to its logical completion, family relationships
will be transformed and deepened. 3927. GROSSMANN, THOMAS. Eine Liebe wie jede andere: Mit homosexuellen Jugendlichen leben und umgehen. Reinbek bei Hamburg, 1984. 141 pp. Advice and information to assist
parents in becoming comfortable with their child's homosexuality. 3928. SEABROOK, JEREMY. Mother and Son. New York: Pantheon, 1980. 189 pp. Sensitive autobiographical account of an English gay man's
relationship with his working-class mother. 3929. SILVERSTEIN, CHARLES. A Family Matter: A Parent's
Guide to Homosexuality. New York: McGraw-Hill, 1978. 214 pp. A gay New York psychiatrist (not himself a parent) offers explanations
and seeks to clear away myths. 3930. SWITZER, DAVID K., and SHIRLEY A. SWITZER. Parents of the Homosexual. Philadelphia: Westminster, 1980. 118 pp. Although this book is written from a Christian religious point of
view, it remains sympathetic. 3931. WYDEN, PETER, and BARBARA
WYDEN. Growing Up Straight: What Every Thoughtful Parent Should Know about Homosexuality. New York: Stein and Day, 1968.
256 pp. A somewhat dated book, offering psychiatrically biased etiological
theories and focusing on "the means of prevention." Rearing
children in a "sexually sound" home is the most effective
prophylaxis. Items 3932-3938 are omitted. XIX. BOUNDARY CROSSING The term intergenerational sex has been recently introduced to
describe relations between adults, on the one hand, and (a) adolescents and
(b) children, on the other. Properly speaking, these two forms should be
distinguished as pederasty and pedophilia, respectively, but current usage is
often imprecise, owing to the emotional charge such relations often evoke.
(Logically, the concept of intergenerational sex should also include
gerontophilia, sexual interest in old people, but this form of attraction has
been little studied; cf. "Aging," XIV.C.) In some civilizations of
the past, such as ancient Greece and Islam (see III.C and III.P), pederasty
has been the ideal, dominant, even socially recognized form of homosexuality.
This pederastic mode also prevails in many tribal cultures (see IV.A-F).
Recently, support groups for pederasts and pedophiles, such as the North
American Man/Boy Love Association and the (British) Paedophile Information
Exchange, have emerged in a number of Western countries; these groups remain
small and controversial, isolated from the larger movement, and often subjected
to official surveillance and harassment. 3939.
ABEL,
GENE G., et al. "Complications, Consent, and Cognitions in Sex Between Children
and Adults," International Journal of Law and Psychiatry, 7 (1984), 89-103. The author s hold that it is
extremely difficult for a child to give informed consent. The adult who is
attracted to children changes his inner world by developing cognitions and
beliefs that support his behavior, but these are markedly at variance with
those of the culture in which he lives. 3940. BANIS, VICTOR J. Men and Their Boys: The Homosexual Relationship
between Adult and Adolescent. Los Angeles: Medco Books, 1966. 144 pp. One of a series of
"soft-core" popularizations of the boy love theme, in this instance
closely dependent on the scholarly work of J. Z. Eglinton, cited below. See
also: Victor Dodson, Pederasty: Sex between Men and Boys (North Hollywood, CA: Barclay House, 1968; 192
pp.). 3941. BERNARD, FRITS. Paedophilia: A Factual Report. Rotterdam: Enclave Press, 1985. 101 pp. Concise version of a book
first published in Dutch in 1975, then in a fuller form in German in 1979 and
1982. Includes long-term effects on the child; description of a pedophile group; age limits; normality of pedophiles; and the
social question. On pp. 87-98 there is a complete bibliography of his
writings on pedophilia and pederasty between 1947 and 1985. Some of the early
ones (e.g., Ver- ▼olgde minderheid, 1960) appeared under the pseudonym Victor
Servatius. 3942. BLEIBTREU-EHRENBERG, GISELA. "Der padophile Impuls, Der Monat, N.S. no. 294 (1985), 175-92. Places pedophilia within the range of normality as an attempt to
reactivate the world of childhood. Treatment of pedophiles as criminals
reflects a lingering theological concept. 3943. BRANT, R., and V. B. TISZA. "The Sexually
Misused Child," American Journal of Orthopsychiatry, 47 (1977), 80-90. Attempts to
distinguish between sexual abuse and nonabuse. 3944. BRONGERSMA, EDWARD. "The Meaning of 'Indecency'
with Respect to Moral Offences Involving Children. With a Commentary by D. J.
West," British Journal Of Criminology, 20 (1980), 20-34. With reference to Dutch experience, which he has carefully monitored,
Brongersma contends that criminal prosecution of consensual acts always does
more harm than good. See also his: "Aggression against Pedophiles," International Journal of Law
and Psychiatry, 7 (1984), 79-87. The author has also used the pseudonym 0. Brunoz. 3945. BRONGERSMA, EDWARD. Das
Yerfemte Geschlecht. Munich: Lichtenberg,
1970. 267 pp. A scholarly advocate's major study of boy love with extensive
bibliography. An enlarged English edition is in preparation. 3946. BROWNE, ANGELA, and DAVID FINKELHOR. "Impact of
Child Sexual Abuse: A Review of the Research," Psychological Bulletin, 99 (1986), 66-77. Reviews the literature on short-term and long-term effects of child
sexual abuse. Discusses also the controversy over the impact of the
phenomenon, suggesting directions for future research efforts. 3947. CALIFIA, PAT. "The Age of Consent: An Issue and
Its Effects on the Gay Movement," Advocate, no.303 (October 16, 1980), 19-23, 45; no. 304
(October 30, 1980), 17-23, 45. Contends that the "Great Kiddy Porn Panic" of 1977 was
engineered by the right in order to disrupt the sexual freedom movement. 3948. CAMERON, PAUL. "Homosexual Molestation of Children/Sexual
Interaction of Teacher and Pupil," Psychological Reports, 57 (1985), 1227-36. The author, an
antihomosexual researcher, claims that one-third of reported child molestations involve homosexual
acts, while girls account for about two-thirds of children victimized.
Contrast D. Newton, below, 3949. CAMPAIGN AGAINST PUBLIC MORALS. Paedophilia and Public Morals. London: CAMP, 1980. 58 pp. Argues that the liberation of children and pedophiles should be
supported by the adult sexual political movement . 3950. CONSTANTINE, LARRY L., and FLOYD M. MARTINSON
(eds.). Children and Sex: New Findings, New Perspectives. Boston: Little, Brown, 1981. 288 pp. Papers by professional researchers representing a range of views
treating sex, heterosexual and homosexual, with and between children. 3951. COOK, MARK, and KEVIN HOWELLS (eds). Adult Sexual Interest in
Children. New York: Academic Press, 1981. 275 pp. Nine papers generally written from a prevention and social-control
perspective, though there is also some descriptive material. 3952. DANET, JEAN, et al. Fous d'enfance. Paris: Revue du Cerfi, 1979. 217 pp. (Recherches, 37) Collection of essays and interviews by Michel
Foucault, Jean-Luc Hennig, René Schérer, and others on sexual relations between adults and minors. 3953. DAVIDSON, MICHAEL. Some Boys. Kingston, NY: Oliver Layton Press, 1971. 251 pp. Frank reminiscences by an English journalist and world traveler.
Unlike the British edition (London: Bruce and Watson, 1969), this issue is
unexpurgated. See also Davidson's earlier memoir: The World, The Flesh, and
Myself. (London:
Arthur Barker, 1962; 354 pp.). 3954. DUVERT, TONY. Le bon sexe illustré. Paris: Editions de Minuit, 1974. 156 pp. Critique of sexual taboos, notably in regard to pedophilia,
by a French novelist. See also his L'enfant au masculin (Paris:
Editions de Minuit, 1980; 184 pp.). 3955. EGLINTON, J. Z. (pseud.). Greek Love. New York: Oliver Layton Press, 1964. 504 pp. Comprehensive historical study of pederasty and pedophilia,
emphasizing not only the origins of the Western tradition in Greece but the
subsequent development, which is presented as flowing from Hellenic practices
and ideals--in sharp contrast with modern androphile homosexuality. Despite
the sometimes overapologetic tone, this book is a remarkable and
well-documented conspectus, providing analyses of many literary works. 3956. ENNEW, JUDITH. The Sexual Exploitation of Chil- dren. London: Polity Press, 1986. 200 pp. Examines recent
cross-cultural evidence, and argues that the sexual exploitation of children
by adults is not an abnormal occurrence, but rather an overdeveloped expression
of normal attitudes to sexuality, women, and children. 3957. FISHER, GARY, and LEISLA M. HOWELL.
"Psychological Needs of Homosexual Pedophiliacs," Diseases of the Nervous
System, 31 (1970),
623-25. Finds that subjects had need structures similar to those of
heterosexual pedophiles but different from those of normal adult males; were
low in achievement orientation, inner direction, and assertiveness; and were
guilt-ridden. 3958. FRASER, MORRIS. The Death of Narcissus. London: Seeker and Warburg, 1976. 244 pp. Urbane, moderately judgmental study of pedophilia--mainly
heterosexual—as expressed in 19th-century literary sources, by a
psychiatrist. 3959. FREUND, KURT. "Bisexuality in Homosexual
Pedophilia," Archives of Sexual Behavior, 5 (1976), 415-23. The author, a Czech who emigrated to Canada
in 1968, found that bisexual pedophilic males responded more than an
androphile (adult-oriented homosexual) group to 6-8 year old female children,
but less than them to adult females. See also his "Erotic Preference in
Pedophilia," Behaviour Research and Therapy, 5 (1967), 339-48. 3960. FREUND, KURT, et al. "Pedophilia and
Heterosexual- ity vs. Homosexuality," Journal of Sex and Marital
therapy, 10 (1984), 193-200. Finds that the development of erotically preferred
partner sex and of partner age are not independent of each other. See
also: Freund et al., "Experimental Analysis of Pedophilia," Behaviour Research and
Therapy, 20 (1982), 105- 12. 3961. GEISER, ROBERT L. Hidden Victims: The Sexual Abuse of Children. Boston: Beacon Press, 1979. 191 pp. Treats mainly heterosexual abuse (rape and
incest), with discussion also of pederasty, "male sex rings," gay
kiddie porn, and teenage hustlings. Despite this seemingly sensational range
of topics, this book is low-keyed and relatively liberal. 3962. GROTH, A. NICHOLAS, and H. JEAN BIRNBAUM.
"Adult Sexual Orientation and Attraction to Underage Persons," Archives of Sexual Behavior, 7 (1978), 175-81. Suggests that homosexuality and homosexual pedophilia may be mutually
exclusive and that the adult heterosexual male constitutes a greater risk to
the underage child than does the adult homosexual male. 3963. HILLMAN, JAMES, et al. The Puer Papers. Irving, TX: Spring Publications, 1979. 245 pp. Nine essays, several strongly Jungian, treating the boy as an
archetypal figure. 3964. HOCQUENGHEM, GUY, and RENÉ SCHÉRER. Co-ires album systématique de l'enfance. Fontenay-sous-Bois:
Recherches, 1976. 146 pp. A sometimes opaque essay attempting to demythologize child sexuality.
See also: Schérer, Une érotique puérile (Paris: Galilee, 1978; 188 pp.). 3965. HOHMANN, JOACHIM S. (ed.). Pädophilie heute. Frankfurt am Main: Foerster, 1980. 200 pp. Positive essays by Hohmann, Edward Brongersma, Helmut Bendt, Peter Schult, Hans-Peter Reichelt, Wolfgang Selitsch, Gerd Talis, Hans-Dieter Horning and others. 3966. IVES, GEORGE. The Graeco-Roman View of Youth. London: Cayme Press, 1926. 90 pp. An Edwardian eccentric and diarist uses the cover of the values of ancient civilization to
advance a cautious defense of erotic interest in youth. 3967. JERSILD, JENS. The Normal Homosexual Male versus the Boy Molester. Translated by Eva Nissen. Copenhagen: Arnold
Busck, 1967. 112 pp. A statistical study by the head of the vice squad in
Copenhagen, based on Danish police records and files, which contrasts normal
homosexual males with pedophil- iacs. 3968. JONES, GERALD P. "The Social Study of
Pederasty: In Search of a Literature Base: An Annotated Bibliography of
Sources in English," JH, 8 (1982), 61-95. Offers fair-minded and often detailed annotations of items included.
As the author recognizes, the list could be extended. See also: "A
Select Bibliography on Paedophilia," Gay Information (Australia), no.7 (1981), 38-40; no. 14-15 (1984),
67; and Literatuurlijst (Antwerp: Studiegroep Pedofilie, 1978; 38 pp.). 3969. KRAEMER, WILLIAM (ed.). The Hormal and Abnormal Love of Children. London: Sheldon Press, 1976. 150 pp. Four papers largely reflecting Jungian perspectives. 3970. LINEDECKER, CLIFFORD L. Children in Chains. New York: Everest House, 1981. 334 pp. Journalistic, somewhat sensationalized account. See also Robin Lloyd, Boy Prostitution in America (New York: Vanguard Press, 1976; 236 pp.); and
Gitta Sereny, The Invisible Children: Child Prostitution in America, Vest Germany
and Great Britain (New York: Knopf, 1985; 254 pp.). 3971. Loving Boys. New York: Semiotext(e),
1980. Special number in tabloid format of Semiotext(e) magazine, comprising interviews with David
Thorstad, Mark Moffett (both of NAMBLA), Kate Millett, together with a
transcript of an April 1979 radio broadcast by Michel Foucault. 3972. MARIOTTI, ETTORE. La neofilia: contributo agli studi di
psicopatologia sessuale. Rome: Mediter- ranea, 1952. 212 pp. A pioneering work of the early postwar period that cost the author a
prison sentence. 3973.
MATZNEFF,
GABRIEL. Les moins de seize ans. Paris: Julliard, 1974. 116 pp. Holds that young people under 16 constitute a single sex apart, and
that the choice of them as one's sexual orientation is of special
significance. 3974. MOLLER, MONIQUE. Pedofiele relaties. Deventer: Van Loghum Slaterus, 1983. 113 pp. Based on interviews in the Netherlands, presents two possible
approaches to relations between children and adults. 3975. MOODY, ROGER. Indecent Assault. London: Word is Out/Peace News, 1980. 64 pp. Pedophile advocacy with autobiographical elements. 3976. NEDOMA, KAREL. "Sexualni chovani a jeho vyvoj u
pedofilnich muzti," Ceskoslovenska Psychiatrie, 65 (1969), 92-98. Pedophilic delinquents were oriented more towards a specific age than
toward the sex of the partner. See related articles, ibid.,
155-58, 366-70. 3977. NELSON, BARBARA. Making an Issue of Child Abuse: Political Agenda
Setting for Social Problems. Chicago: Chicago University Press, 1984. 176 pp. Traces the shift from
a small private-sector charity concern into a multi-million dollar social
welfare issue. The matter has become a platform for social-policy directives
rather than an area of compassion and humanistic concern. 3978. NEWTON, DAVID E. "Homosexual Behavior and Child
Molestation: A Review of the Evidence," Adolescence, 13 (1978), 29-43. Existing studies provide no reason to believe that anything other than
a random connection exists between homosexual behavior and child molestation.
The typical offender is a heterosexual man. 3979. NICHOLS, DENNISON W. Toward a Perspective for Boy Lovers. Lansing, MI: Editorial Creative Projects, 1976. 99 pp. Subjective approach by a rural boy lover who seeks to convey the
mystique, as it were, which characterizes the pédérastie sensibility and to formulate a code of ethics. 3980. 0'CARROLL, TOM. Paedophilia: The Radical Case. Boston: Alyson, 1982. 284 pp. Reasoned argument, by a British member
of the Paedophile Information Exchange, for tolerance of the practice.
Asserting the natural sexuality of children and their right to expression, he
rejects the historical idealization embodied in the Greek Love arguments of
J. Z. Eglin- ton and others. Asserts that police and parents frequently
cause great harm to children in their traumatic efforts at intervention. 3981. PINARD-LEGRY, J. L., and B. LAPOUGE. L'enfant et le pédéraste. Paris: Editions du Seuil, 1980. 128 pp. Adopts a critical stance toward pederasty and pedophilia. 3982.
POTRYKUS,
DAGMAR, and MANFRED WÖBCKE. Sexualität
zwischen Kindern und Erwachsenen. Munich: Goldmann, 1974. 112 pp. Comprehensive examination of the question of sexual relations between
adults and children, pointing out that punitive societal
reactions tend to be emotionally charged and disproportionate to the
objective consequences of the behavior. 3983. QUINSEY, VERNON L. "The Assessment and
Treatment of Child Molesters: A Review," Canadian Psychological
Review, 18 (1977),
204-220. Compared to heterosexual child molesters, homosexual offenders choose
older (pubescent) partners, are more likely to be recidivists, and are less
numerous. Incestuous child molesters are almost always heterosexual. 3984. RAILE, ARTHUR LYON (pseud, of Edward Perry Warren). A Defense of Uranian Love. London: Cayme Press, 1928-30. 3 vols. A neo-Hellenic apologia by a Boston aesthete who lived much of his
life in England. The three volumes are entitled: (1) The Boy Lover; (2) The
Uranian Eros; and (3) The Heavenly Wisdom and Conclusion. 3985. ROGERS, CARL M., and TREMAINE TERRY. "Clinical
Intervention with Boy Victims of Sexual Abuse," in: Irving R. Stuart and
Joanne G. Greer (eds.), Victims of Sexual Aggression. New York: Van Nostrand Reinhold, 1984, pp. 91-104. Psychotherapeutic
perspective. 3986. ROSSMAN, PARKER. Sexual Experience between Men and Boys: Exploring
the Pederast Underground. New York: Association Press, 1976. 247 pp. A well-balanced study by an
author sympathetic to pederasty, offering an international perspective.
Notes, index, and bibliography. See also: Dennis Drew and Jonathan Drake (pseud, of Parker Rossman), Boys for Sale: A Sociological
Study of Boy Prostitution (New York: Brown, 1969; 223 pp.). 3987. RUSH, FLORENCE. The Best Kept Secret: Sexual Abuse of Children. Englewood Cliffs, NJ: Prentice-Hall, 1980. 226 pp. A well-meaning work which reveals both the genuine concern and the
confusions underlying the current campaign against child sexuality. Fails
adequately to distinguish between sexual contact and physical harm. 3988. SANDFORT, THEO. The Sexual Aspect of Paedophile Relations: The
Experience of Twenty-five Boys. Amsterdam: Pan/Spartacus, 1982. 136 pp. Presents results of a study
conducted under the auspices of the Dutch government. The interviews,
portions of which are reproduced in translation, tend to show stable
relationships in which the boys take a positive attitude toward sexual
liaisons. See also his: "Pedophile Relationships in the Netherands:
Alternative Lifestyle for Children?" Alternative Lifestyles, 5 (1983), 164-83. 3989. SCHLESINGER, BENJAMIN. Sexual Abuse of Children: A
Resource Guide and Annotated Bibliography. Toronto: University of Toronto Press, 1982. 202 pp. In this useful reference work, see pp. 142-45, 152-53, 174-77. 3990. SERBER, MICHAEL, and CLAUDIA G. KEITH. "Atascadero
Project: Model of a Sexual Retraining Program for Incarcerated Homosexual
Pedophiles," JH, 1 (1974), 87-97. Describes the sexual retraining program at a maximum security prison
hospital that houses primarily pedophiles. 3991. TAYLOR, BRIAN. Perspectives on Paedophilia. London: Batsford, 1981. 148 pp. Eight papers representing a range of
viewpoints, from negative and punitive to liberal and descriptive. 3992. TINDALL, RALPH H. "The Male Adolescent Involved
with a Pederast becomes an Adult," JH, 3 (1978), 373-82. Reports a longitudinal study of nine cases; the outcomes are generally
heterosexual. 3993. TSANG, DANIEL. The Age Taboo: Gay Male Sexuality
, Power and Consent. Boston: Alyson, 1980. 178 pp. Papers generally from a leftist standpoint, rejecting the idealization
of Greek love in Eglinton's work, but some defending intergenerational sex as
liberating, others reflecting a feminist argument to the effect that
boy-love is a destructive abuse of phallic power. 3994. UNITED STATES. HOUSE OF REPRESENTATIVES. Sexual Exploitation of Children: A Problem of Unknown Magnitude. Washington, DC: U. S. Government Printing Office,
1983. 63 pp. Report to the Chairman of the Subcommittee of Select Education,
House Committee on Education and Labor, by the United States General
Accounting Office, April 20, 1982. One of a number of such reports, which
generally feature copious testimony by opponents of sexual freedom and others
who seem to be seeking to manipulate the issue for political gain. 3995.
VOGEL, WOLF.
Verbotene Liebe: Padophilie und strafende Gesellschaft.
Regensburg: Roderer, 1984. 130 pp. Pedosexuality and its legal repression. 3996. WILSON, GLENN, and DAVID N. COX. The Child Lov- ▼ers: A
Study of Paedophiles in Society. London: Peter Owen, 1983. 132 pp. A moderately negative presentation, of some sociological interest. 3997. WILSON, PAUL. The Man They Called a Monster: Sexual Experiences
between Men and Boys, Melbourne: Cassell, 1981. 150 pp. In-depth, sympathetic study of a Queensland boy lover, a kind of
sexual Stakhanovite, who kept detailed records on his several thousand
partners before committing suicide. While cross dressing has appealed to a certain number homosexuals, it
also has its adherents among heterosexuals. The subject thus belongs only
partly to the study of homosexuality; it deserves to be examined as an independent
cultural phenomenon. For cross dressing in the theatre, see VI.G. 3998. ALPERT, GEORGE. The Queens. New York: Da Capo/ Plenum Press, 1975. 90 pp. Photographic study of men who enjoy dressing as a woman or living as a
women part or all of the time. See also: C. L. Gondanoff, Mesdames "messieurs" (Brussels: Paul Le- grain, 1979); Kris Kirk and Ed
Heath, Men in Frocks (London: Gay Men's Press, 1984; 120 pp.); and Mike Phillips and
Barry Shapiro, Forbidden Fantasies: Men Who Dare to Dress in Drag (New York: Macmillan, 1980; 121 pp.). 3999. AMMANN, JEAN-CHRISTOPHE, and MARIANNE EIGENHEES (eds.). Transformer: Aspekte der Travestie. Lucerne: Kunstmuseum, 1974. 181 pp. Text to accompany an exhibition on
transvestism in photo- graphy and art. 3995. BRIERLEY, HARRY. Transvestism: A Handbook with Case Studies for
Psychologists, Psychiatrists, and Counsellors, New York: Pergamon, 1979. 259 pp. Somewhat diffuse account for a professional audience of major facets
of the question. 3996. BUHRICH, NEIL, and NATHANIEL MCCONAGHY.
"Clinical Comparison of Transvestism and Transssexualism: An
Overview," Australian and New Zealand Journal of Psychiatry, 11 (1977), 83-86. Compared 35 members of a club for heterosexual transvest ites with 29
male psychiatric patients seeking a full sex- change operation. See also
their: "The Clinical Syndromes of Femmifilic Behavior," Archives of Sexual Behavior, 6 (1977), 397-412; "Tests of Gender Feelings
and Behavior in Homosexuality, Transvestism and Transsexualism," Journal of Clinical Psychology, 35 (1979), 187-91; and "Three Clinically
Discrete Categories of Fetishistic Transvestism," Archives of Sexual Behavior, 8 (1979), 151-57. 3997. BULLIET, CLARENCE JOSEPH. Venus Castina: Famous Female
Impersonators, Celestial and Human. New York: Covici, Friede, 1928. 308 pp. Popular work on men cross-dressing as women over the centuries. See
also: Peter Ackroyd, Dressing Up: Transvestism and Drag: The History of
an Obsession (New York: Simon and Schuster, 1979; 160 pp.). 3998. BULLOUGH, VERN, et al. "A Comparative Study of
Male Transvestites, Male to Female Transsexuals, and Male Homosexuals," Journal of Sex Research, 19 (1983), 238-57. Current sexual orientation and lifestyles suggest a dominant pattern
for each group, but there were still enough subjects with variant patterns to
suggest that most generalizations still need to be tentative. 3999. CHESHIRE, DAVID. "Male Impersonator," Saturday Book, 29 (1969), 245-52. Women in men's attire. See also: Laurence Senelick, "The
Evolution of the Male Impersonator in the Nineteenth Century Stage," Essays in Theatre, 1 (1982),
31-44. 4000. ELLIS, HAVELOCK. Eonism and Other Supplementary Studies, Philadelphia: Davis, 1928. 539 pp. A historical and cultural survey
by the noted English sexologist, who promoted the term "Eonism"
(from the Chevalier d'Eon) for cross-dressing. 4001. FEINBLOOM, DEBORAH HELLER. Transvestism and Transsexuals:
Nixed Views, New York: Delacorte Press, 1976. 303 pp. Sociologist's data
and conclusions drawn from interviews, observations, and correspondence. The book deflates a number of
stereotypes. An appendix treats ethical problems that may be raised by
research of this kind. 4002. FRANKEL, HIERONIMUS. "Homo mollis," Medizinische Zeitung, Verein für Heilkunde in Preussen, 22 (1853), 102-03. Early case study of a German-Jewish homosexual and
trans- vestite. 4003. FREUND, KURT, et al. "Two Types of Cross-Gender
Identity," Archives of Sexual Behavior, 11 (1982), 49-63. Contends that transvestism, and closely related conditions of
cross-gender identity, occur almost exclusively in heterosexuals
. 4004. GILBERT, OSCAR PAUL. Men in Women's Guise: Some Historical Instances of
Female Impersonation. Translated by Robert B. Douglas. New York: Bren- tano's, 1926. 234 pp.
Biographical approach. See also this: Women in Men Guise. (London: John Lane, 1932; 224 pp.). 4005. GILBERT, SANDRA M. "Costumes of the Mind: Transvestism
as Metaphor in Modern Literature," Critical Inquiry, 7 (1980), 391-417. Coercive and voluntary cross-dressing in Joyce, Lawrence, Eliot,
Woolf, Carpenter and others. See also: Susan Gubar, "Blessings in
Disguise: Cross-Dressing as Redressing for Female Modernists," Massachusetts Review, 22 (1981), 477-508. 4006. HIRSCHFELD,
MAGNUS. Die Transvestiten: Eine Untersuchung über
den erotischen Verkleidungstrieb mit umfangreichem casuistischen und
historischen Material. Berlin: Pulvermacher, 1910. 562
pp. This major work of synthesis by the noted German sexologist introduced
the word "transvestite." Hirschfeld identified the phenomenon in
only a few cases out of the 7000 homosexuals he had interviewed and examined
by that time, 4007. HOWE, FREDERICK. "An Exploration of the History
of Female Impersonators," Advocate, no. 224 (September 21, 1977), 26-29; and no. 225
(October 5, 1977), 28-29. Popular account
emphasizing performance aspects. 4008. KING, DAVE. "Gender Confusions: Psychological
and Psychiatric Conceptions of Transvestism and Transsexualism," in:
Kenneth Plummer (ed.), The Making of the Modern Homosexual. Totowa, NJ: Barnes and Noble, 1981, pp. 155-83. Critique of some
widely held views. 4009. KUJATH, GERHARD. "Transvestitische Verhaltens- weisen im Kindesalter," Praxis der Kinderpsycho- logie und Kinderpsychiatric, 20 (1971), 117-25. Regards defects in rearing by mothers as releasing factors in
transvestism in childhood. 4010. LUKIANIEWICZ, NARCYZ. "Survey of Various
Aspects of Transvestism in the Light of our Present Knowledge," Journal of Nervous and Mental
Disease, 128 (1959), 36-64. Literature review with 104 citations. For others, see Vern Bullough et
al., An Annotated Bibliography of Homosexuality. (New York: Garland, 1976), vol. 2, pp. 351-84. 4011. MINETTE (pseud.). Recollections of a Part-Time Lady. Edited by Steven Watson. New York: Flower- beneath-the-Foot Press,
1979. Campy reminiscences. 4012. MONEY, JOHN, and ANTHONY J. RUSSO. "Homosexual
vs. Transvestite or Transsexual Gender-Identity/ Role: Outcome Studies in
Boys," International Journal of Family Psychiatry, 2 (1981), 139-45. Offers introspective data on males aged 23-29 years who, as children,
had overtly stated the wish to be a girl and had acted out this wish through
dress and play activities. 4013. MUNROE, ROBERT. "Male Transvestism and the
Couvade: A Psycho-Cultural Analysis," Ethos, 8 (1980), 49-59. A comparative ethnological approach. See also Robert Munroe and Ruth
Munroe, "Male Transvestism and Subsistence Economy," Journal of Social Psychology, 103 (1977), 307-08; and Robert Munroe et al.,
"Institutionalized Male Transvestism and Sex Distinctions," American Anthropologist, 71 (1969), 87-91. 4014. NEWTON, ESTHER. Mother Camp: Female
Impersonators in America. Englewood Cliffs, NJ: Prentice-Hall, 1972. 136 pp. Social scientist's participation-observation study of homosexual
transvestites who perform in drag shows. Analyzes professional aspects, the
work situation, and the effects of camp humor. 4015. PERKINS, ROBERTA. Drag Queen Scene: Transsexuals
in Kings Cross. North Sydney, NSW: Allen and Un- win, 1983. 176 pp. Attempts a composite picture of cross-dressers and transsexuals in
Sydney's bohemian quarter. 4016. PERSON, ETHEL, and LIONEL OVESEY.
"Transvestism: New Perspectives," Journal of the American
Academy of Psychoanalysis, 6 (1978), 301-23. Reappraises transvestism in the light of new concepts in psychoanalytic theory, which are purportedly applicable to the
analysis of other "perversions." See also their: "Homosexual
Cross-Dressing," ibid., 12 (1984), 167-84. 4017. PRINCE, VIRGINIA. The Transvestite and His Wife. Los Angeles: Argyle Books, 1967. 143 pp. One of a number of writings
by this author, who has tirelessly propagandized for the cause, publishing
an occasional journal Transvestia. 4018. ROBACK, HOWARD B., et al. "Self-Concept and Psychological
Adjustment Differences between Self- Identified Male Transsexuals and Male
Homosexuals," JH, 3 (1977), 15-20. Findings indicate that the homosexual group had a better self-image
and was better adjusted than the sex-change group. 4019. TALAMINI, JOHN T. Boys Will Be Girls: The Hidden
World of the Heterosexual Male Transvestite. Washington, DC: University Presses of America,
1982. 89 pp. Seeking to distinguish the transvestite subculture from others such as
homosexuality and bisexuality, female impersonation, transsexuality, argues
that it qualifies as a genuine minority. Discusses cross-cultural comparisons,
the transvestites cumulative construction of his
female self, motives for cross-dressing, wives' attitudes, and parent
child-relationships. Bibliography, pp. 73-87. 4020. UNDERWOOD, PETER. Life's a Drag: Danny LaRue and
the Drag Scene. London: Leslie Frewin, 1974. 192 pp. Journalistic account of the emergence of Britain's premier female
impersonator, star of stage and screen. 4021. WAAL,
MIEKE VAN. Vriendinnen onder elkaar, trav- estien en
transsexuelen in Hederland. Amsterdam: Arbeiderpers, 1983. Ethnographic account of transvestites and transsexuals in the
Netherlands today. 4022. WISE, THOMAS N., and JON K. MEYER.
"Transvestism: Previous Findings and New Areas for Inquiry," Journal of Sex and Marital
Therapy, 6 (1980), 116-28. Reviews the literature and notes that the phenomenology of the
"disorder" reveals individuals to be heterosexual males who have
usually married and fathered children. See also Wise et al., "Partners
of Distressed Transvestites," American Journal of Psychology, 138 (1981), 1221- 24. C. TRANSSEXUALISM AND SEX REASSIGNMENT Adopting the popular stereotype that a male homosexual is really
"a female soul trapped in a male body," and a lesbian the reverse,
some individuals have concluded that they would be better off changing their
sex. (For psychological reasons, most transsexuals deny that they are or
have ever been homosexual.) Although an experiment was reported as early as
1904, the real trend toward male-to-female operations emerged in Central
Europe in the 1930s; the more difficult female-to-male operations were
developed later. Follow-up studies have shown that many postoperative
transsexuals exist in a state of almost continual depression, and for this
reason the operation is now performed less often. 4023. BENJAMIN, HARRY. The Transsexual Phenomenon. New York: Julian Press, 1966. 286 pp. An analysis by an American pioneer
in the study of the subject of persons desiring to change their sex; with
case histories of transsexuals. 4024. BENTLER, PETER M. "A Typology of
Transsexualism: Gender Identity Theory and Data," Archives of Sexual Behavior, 5 (1976), 567-84. An analysis of postoperative data obtained from 42 male- to-female
transsexuals showed them to fall into three distinct categories: homosexual
transsexuals, asexual transsexuals, and heterosexual transsexuals. 4025. BILLINGS, DWIGHT B. and THOMAS URBAN. "The
Socio- medical Construction of Transsexualism: An Interpretation and
Critique," Social Problems, 29 (1982), 266-82. Contends that transsexualism is a socially constructed reality that
exists only in and through medical practice, which reflects and extends
late-capitalist logics of reification and commodification, while
simultaenously reaffirming traditional male and female gender roles. 4026. BINDER, HANS. "Verlangung nach Geschlechtsumwandlung," Zeitschrift für die gesamte Psychiatrie und Neurologie, 143 (1932), 84-174. On the desire for a sex change (then in practice not surgically
possible). 4027. CLARK, JOANNA M. Legal Aspects of Transsexualism. Second ed. Mission Viejo, CA: Renaissance Gender Identity Services,
1979. Manual treating such aspects as military service, civil rights,
criminal law, family law, health benefits identity and identification, and
social security. 4032 A. COLE, WAYNE S. "Transsexuals in Search of Legal Acceptance: The Constitutionality of the Chromosome Test," San Diego Law Review, 15 (1978), 331-55. Inasmuch as chromosomes cannot
be changed through surgical intervention, the acceptance of a chromosome test constitutes a
barrier to the achievement of legal status by transsexuals. See also: Douglas
K. Browell, "M. T. v. J. Т.: An Enlightened Perspective on Transsexualism,"
Capital
University Law Review, 6 (1977), 403-27. 4028. DE SAVITSCH, EUGENE. Homosexuality, Transvestism and Change of Sex. London: Heinemann Medical Books, 1958. 120 pp.
Attempts to separate the three phenomena, presenting in detail the history of
one individual who underwent a sex change. 4029. EDLBACHER, OSKAR. "Transsexualität im Zivil- und im Personenstandsrecht," Österreichische Juristen- Zeitung, 36 (1981), 173-81. Problems arising in Austrian public and private law. See
also: Arnulf Eberle, "Ausfüllung einer Gesetzlücke bei Transsexualismus
durch progressive Rechtsfindung oder gesetzliche Fiktion?"
Neue
juristische Wochenschrift, 24 (1971), 220-24. 4030. EHRHARDT, ANKE A., et al. "Female-to-Male Transsexuals
Compared to Lesbians: Behavioural Patterns of Childhood and Adolescent
Development," Archives of Sexual Behavior, 8 (1979), 481-90. The two groups differed significantly regarding childhood
cross-dressing, gender identity confusion in adolescence (absent in
lesbians), and negative reaction to breast development and menarche. See
also: Elizabeth A. Mc- Cauley and Anke A. Ehrhardt, "Sexual Behavior in
Female Transsexuals and Lesbians," Journal of Sex Research, 16 (1980), 202-11. 4031. FREUND, KURT, et al. "The Trans-Sexual Syndrome
in Homosexual Males," Journal of Nervous and Mental Disease, 158 (1974), 145-53. There was no evidence that the gross deviations of narcissism or
masochism, or aversion to their own penis, played a part in the syndrome. See
also: Freund et al., "Parent-Child Relations in Transsexual and
Non-Transsexual Homosexual Males," British Journal of Psychiatry, 124 (1974), 22-23. 4032. GREEN, DAVID. "Legal Aspects of
Transsexualism," Archives of Sexual Behavior, 1 (1971), 145-51. The author's experiences in acting as legal counsel to transsexuals
and the types of legal questions transsexuals in England are faced with,
e.g. changing one's name and birth certificate, marriage, and divorce. 4033. GREEN, RICHARD, and JOHN MONEY (eds.). Transsexualism and Sex
Reassignment. Baltimore: Johns Hopkins, 1969. 512 pp. Encyclopedic synthesis with contributions from more than thirty
authors in the U. S. and Europe. 4034. HOYER, NIELS. Man into Woman: An Authentic
Record of a Change of Sex. Translated from the German by J. J. Stanning. New
York: Dutton, 1933. 288 pp. Concerns the first widely publicized sex-change operation, which was
performed on Andreas Sparre, a Danish painter. 4035. JORGENSON, CHRISTINE. Christine Jorgenson: A
Personal Autobiography. New York: Paul S. Eriksson, 1967. 332 pp. Jorgenson's sex change in Denmark received wide publicity,
sensationalizing the matter in the United States, and probably contributing
to a marked increase in the number of applicants for the operation. 4036. KANDO, THOMAS. Sex Change: The Achievement of Gender Identity
among Feminized Transsexuals. Springfield, IL: Charles C. Thomas, 1973. 159 pp. Sociological study
of identity formation among postoperative male-to-female homosexuals. See
also his: "Males, Females, and Transsexuals," JH, 1 (1974), 64-69. 4037. LEVINE, EDWARD M., et al. "Behavioral
Differences and Emotional Conflict among Male-to-Female Transsexuals," Archives of Sexual Behavior, 5 (1976), 81-86. Used interview data to study aspects of transsexualism and
homosexuality, prostitution and employment, affect- lessness, need for
reassurance, and deprecation of others in eighteen transsexuals. See also:
Ron Langevin et al., "The Clinical Profile of Male Transsexuals Living as
Females vs. Those Living as Males," ibid., 6
(1977), 143-54; and Edward M. Levine, "Male Homosexuals in the
Homosexual Subculture," American Journal of Psychiatry, 133 (1976), 1318-21. 4038. LOTHSTEIN, LESLIE MARTIN. Female-to-Male Transsexualism:
Historical, Clinical and Theoretical Issues. Boston: Routledge and Kegan Paul, 1983. 336 pp. Following an approach derived from psychoanalysis, asserts that female
transsexualism is "not a normal variation of sexuality or an alternative
life style, but a profound psychological disorder" that originates in
intergener- ational family dynamics in the second year of a girl's life. 4039. MACKENZIE, K. ROY. "Gender Dysphoria Syndrome:
Towards Standardized Diagnostic Criteria," Archives of Sexual Behavior, 7 (1978), 251-62. Notes that gender dysphoria syndrome has demonstrated a propensity for
creating self-fulfilling, self-validating and reinforcing cycles on a number
of levels. 4040. MONEY, JOHN. "Prefatory Remarks on Outcome of
Sex Reassignment in 24 Cases of Transsexualism," Archives of Sexual Behavior, 1 (1971), 163-65. Reports a pattern of satisfaction (which subsequent studies do not
seem to have confirmed, leading to the cessation of the operations at Johns
Hopkins, Money's institution). See also: Money and George Wolff, "Sex
Reassignment: Male to Female to Male," ibid., 2
(1973), 245-50; Money, "Two Names, Two Wardrobes, Two Personalities," JH, 1 (1974), 65-70; and Money and John G. Bren- nan,
"Heterosexual vs. Homosexual Attitudes: Male Partner's Perception of
the Feminine Image of Male Transsexuals," Journal of Sex Research, 6 (1970), 193-209. 4041. NELSON, C., et al. "Medicolegal Aspects of Transsexualism," Canadian Psychiatric
Association Journal, 21 (1976), 557-64. Contends that because there is no legal definition of gender, the
transsexual person faces serious risks and disabilities in attempting to live
as a member of the gender into which he was not born. 4042. PAULY, IRA B. "Female Transsexualism," Archives of Sexual Behavior, 3 (1974), 487-507, 509-26. From a general study of the literature, concludes that transsexualism
would be far better prevented than treated. 4043. PAULY, IRA B., and MILTON T. EDGERTON. "The Gender Identity Movement: A Growing
Surgical-Psychiatric Liaison," Archives of Sexual Behavior, 15 (1986), 315-29. Discusses the origins of sex reassignment surgery and present practice
(about which the authors tend to be positive), including follow-up studies.
Extensive bibliography. 4044. RAYMOND, JANICE. The Transsexual Empire: The
Making of the She-Male. Boston: Beacon Press, 1979. 220 pp. Impassioned radical-feminist critique of male-to-female operations,
situating their rationale in a kind of hypertrophy of patriarchal
domination: the creation of an artificial female as a demonstration to
biological females that they are, or might be, superfluous. 4045. ROBERTO, L. G. "Issues in Diagnosis and
Treatment of Transsexualism," Archives of Sexual Behavior, 12 (1983), 445-73. Criticizing previous approaches, author argues that we should return
to a very conservative use of sex-reassign- ment surgery. 4046.
SCHERRER,
P. "Transexuels ou faux transexuels?" Annales médico-psychologiques, 143 (1985), 549-60. Transsexualism is an iatrogenic illness created by the advances in
surgery and endocrinology and the diffusion among the general public of an
illusory solution to the dilemma posed by K. H. Ulrichs' celebrated formula
"a female soul trapped in a male body." 4047. STEINER, BETTY W. (ed.). Gender Dysphoria: Development,
Research, Management. New York: Plenum Press, 1985. 430 pp. Fifteen papers on clinical, medical-legal, and cultural issues. See
also: Erwin K. Koranyi, Transsexualism in the Male: The Spectrum of Gender
Dysphoria. (Springfield, IL: Thomas, 1980; 198 pp.)» 4048. STOLLER, ROBERT J. "The Transsexual's Denial of
Homosexuality," in his: Sex and Gender: On the Development of Masculinity
and Femininity. New York: Science House, 1968, pp. 141-53. The answer to why
transsexuals and many transvestites insist that they are not homosexual may
lie in an understanding of the formation of, and the later struggle to
maintain, a gender identity. See also his: "The Bisexual Identity of
Transsexuals: Two Case Examples," Archives of Sexual Behavior, 1 (1971), 17-28. 4049. YUDKIN, MARCIA. "Transsexualism and Women: A
Critical Perspective," Feminist Studies, 4 (1978), 97-106. Regards transsexuals as victims of culture's confusion about gender
identity and stress on sex role in identity, and of society's insistence
that outward appearances correlate with biological and social identity. The fascination with hermaphrodites (sometimes also termed
androgynes), which began in classical antiquity (see II.C), has enjoyed a
long history. Hermaphroditism is sometimes confused with homosexuality
itself--either literally or quasimetaphorically ("psychic hermaphroditism").
Medically, true hermaphrodites are very rare, perhaps even nonexistent. For
current concern with androgyny as a dimension of personality, see XVI.L. 4050. BAYER, HEINRICH. "Wahres und scheinbares Zwitter- tum," Beiträge zur Geburtshilfe und Gynaekologie, 13 (1908), 180-97. On true and pseudo-hermaphrodites. 4051. FOUCAULT, MICHEL (ed.). Herculine Barbin. Translated by Richard McDougall. New York:
Pantheon, 1980. 200 pp. Memoirs of a French hermaphrodite who lived as a woman until
mid-teens, then was classified as a man and forced to live as such.
Accompanied by medical records and a romance, "Ein skandalöser
Fall," by Oscar Panizza, which is based on the case. 4052. JONES, HOWARD WILBUR, and W. W.
SCOTT. Hermaphroditism,
Genital Anomalies and Related Disorders. Second ed. Baltimore: Williams and Wilkins, 1971. 564 pp. Medical text; first edition published in 1958. 4053. MONEY, JOHN. "Matched Pairs of Hermaphrodites:
Behavioral Biology of Sexual Differentiation from Chromosomes to Gender
Identity," Engineering and Science, 33 (1970), 34-39. A modern explanation by a professor of medical psychology (Johns
Hopkins Medical Institutes). See also his: Sex Errors of the Body:
Dilemmas, Education, Counseling (Baltimore: Johns Hopkins Press, 1968; 145 pp.). 4054. NEUGEBAUER, FRANZ LUDWIG VON. "Zusammenstellung der Literatur über Hermaphroditismus beim Menschen," JfsZ, 7 (1905), 471-670. This ambitious bibliography by a Warsaw physician in Hirschfeld's circle covers not only the intense investigation of his own day, but also includes many curiosa of the older medical literature (16th-18th centuries). See also his magnum opus: Hermaphroditismus beim Menschen (Leipzig: Klinkhardt, 1908; 748 pp.). 4055. RÖMER, L. S. A. M. VON. "Ueber die androgynische Idee des Lebens," JfsZ, 5 (1903), 707-940. Encyclopedic survey of mythological themes of androgyny in the
literature and art of the European and Asian high cultures. 4056. ZAPPERI, ROBERTO. L'homme enceinte: l'homme, la
femme et le pouvoir. Paris: Presses Universitaires de France, 1983. Study of the myth of male pregnancy and its connections with the idea
of androgyny. Translated from an Italian original. 4057. ZOLLA, ELEMIRE. The Androgyne, London: Thames and Hudson, 1979. 96 pp. Useful collection of images of the hermetic tradition of the
androgyne/hermaphrodite. The text should be used with caution. The adoption of Christianity as the state religion of the late Roman
empire introduced a pattern of criminalizing male homosexuality that
persisted until the 18th century. Even today the effects of centuries of
legal stigmatiza- tion remain difficult to eradicate. While criminal
sanctions for adult homosexual conduct have disappeared from the law codes of
most advanced industrial countries (though this is the case in only half of
the American states), they linger in some Marxist nations and are even
spreading in the Third World. In the light of this mixed picture, a careful
study of the premises of sexual law and law reform is necessary. 4058. BARNETT, WALTER. Sexual Freedom and the Constitution: An Inquiry
into the Constitutionality of Repressive Sex Lavs. Albuquerque: University of New
Mexico Press, 1973. 333 pp. A valuable, if somewhat longwinded study of the history of homosexual
criminalization (chiefly in English-speaking countries), stressing the case
for reform. The extensive notes are useful for bibliographical references;
for others, see Vern Bullough et al., An Annotated Bibliography of
Homosexuality. (New York: Garland, 1976), vol. 1, pp. 278-316. 4059. BECCARIA, CESARE BONESANA, MARQUIS. Dei delitti e delle pene. Edited by Franco Venturi, with a collection of
related letters and documents. Turin: Einaudi, 1965. 680 pp. This scholarly edition of Beccaria's epochal contribution (1764) to
Enlightenment reform of the criminal law is recommended because of the
complementary material, showing the impact of his ideas throughout Europe.
See chapter 31 (36 in some editions) discussing l'attica venere (Greek love). Several English translations exist. 4060. BENTHAM, JEREMY. "Offenses against One's Self:
Paederasty," JH, 3:4 (Summer 1978), 389-405; 4:1 (Fall 1978), 91-107. This is the first publication, edited by Louis Crompton, of the
arguments for law reform developed by the English utilitarian thinker, ca.
1785. See also Bentham, The Theory of Legislation. Edited by C. K. Ogden. (London: Kegan Paul, 1931),
pp. 476-97 (essay "Offenses against Taste," 1814-16). Like the
material published in 1978, this essay drew extensively on continental
thinkers of the Enlightenment. 4061. BLACKBURN, CATHERINE E. "Human Rights in International
Context: Recognizing the Right of Intimate Association," Ohio State Law Journal, 43 (1982), 143-63. Assesses recent progress of the right of privacy both within the
United States and internationally (the latter with particular reference to
article 8 of the European Convention on Human Rights). 4062. DEVLIN, PATRICK, LORD. The Enforcement of Morals. London: Oxford University Press, 1965. 25 pp. British jurist's
critique of the Wolfenden Committee proposals for law reform; advocates
continuing repression of homosexual conduct in obeisance to "sound
public sentiment." See esp. H. L. A. Hart's rebuttal, below. 4063. DWORKIN, RONALD. Taking Rights Seriously. Second ed. Cambridge, MA: Harvard University Press,
1978. 371 pp. Chapter 10, "Liberty and Moralism" (pp. 240-58) offers a
sharp critique of Devlin's restrictivist arguments. 4064. DYNES, WAYNE. "Privacy, Sexual Orientation and
the Self-Sovereignty of the Individual: Continental Theories,
1762-1908," Gay Books Bulletin, 6 (Fall 1981), 20-23. Traces the development of the Enlightenment tradition of control over
one's body from Beccaria to Hiller. 4065. FILANGIERI, GAETANO. The Science of Legislation. Translated from the Italian by Richard Clayton. London: T. Ostell,
1806. 2 vols. This work, regarded as a classic of jurisprudential theory, is
unfortunately obsessed with the pronatalist notion that celibacy is opposed
to the "progress of population" (cf. e.g.,vol.
2, p. 4). 4066. GREY, THOMAS C. The Legal Enforcement of Morality. New York: Knopf, 1983. 212 pp. Textbook with many short quotations from legal opinions and articles.
See "Sexual Freedom and the Constitution," pp. 37-102. 4067. HARRIS, ROBERT N. "Private Consensual Adult Behavior:
The Requirement of Harm to Others in the Enforcement of Morality," UCLA Law Review, 14 (1966-67) , 581-603. Society is seen as dominated by a "condemn or condone"
syndrome with regard to sexual law reform. Argues that there is no criminal
harm in homosexual behavior in private between consenting adults, as long as
there is no underlying need to increase the population. 4068. HART, HERBERT LIONEL ADOLPHUS. Law, Liberty and Morality. Stanford: Stanford University Press, 1963. 88 pp. Concurring with the ideas of J. S. Mill and the Wolfenden Report, Hart
(a major English legal philosopher) refutes Lord Devlin's arguments for
enforcing morality through legal sanctions. On Hart see: Neil MacCormick, H. L. A. Hart (Stanford: Stanford University Press, 1981; 184
pp.; esp. pp. 150-53); and the bibliographical surveys of C. F. Cranor, Criminal Justice and Ethics, 2 (1983), 59ff., and Stephen W. Ball, ibid. (1984),
68ff. 4069. HEASMAN, D.J. "Sexuality and Civil
Liberties," Political Quarterly, 48 (1977), 313-37. Opposes gay rights on campus, questioning the value of "legally coerced acceptance." See reply by Rodney Barker, ibid., 49 (1978), 99-102. 4070. HILLER,
KURT. Das Recht über sich selbst: eine
strafrechtsphilosophische Studie. Heidelberg: Carl Winter, 1908.
114 pp. In this pathfinding work (the author's doctoral dissertation), the
concept of the right to control one's body is examined with reference to
suicide, abortion, incest, duelling, homosexuality, and bestiality. See
"Homosex- ualverkehr," pp. 67-89. 4071. INTERNATIONAL GAY ASSOCIATION. IGA Pink Book 1985. Amsterdam: COC, 1985. 192 pp. This collective volume offers a series of essays on the legal
situation for homosexuals and lesbians in several European countries,
followed by a world survey of laws. 4072. KLARE, RUDOLF. Homosexualität und Strafrecht. Hamburg: Hanseatisches Verlags-Anstalt, 1937. 172 pp. This monograph by a Nazi legal scholar defends the repressive
legislation of the "Nordic tradition" as progressive. Despite much
offensive, and fortunately dated material, this book
does offer a world survey of relevant laws, updating the tables found in
Magnus Hirschfeld, Die Homosexualität des Mannes und des Weibes. Second ed. (Berlin: Louis Marcus, 1920), pp.
841-69, which display the situation as of January 1, 1913. 4073. MACFARLANE, L. J. The Theory and Practice of Human Rights. London: Temple Smith, 1985. 193 pp. This book contains much
information on human rights practices and violations. The author also
provides a number of personal opinions, including the assertion that the
state may ban the promotion of a homosexual lifestyle on grounds of morality. 4074. MILL, JOHN STUART. On Liberty. London: J. W. Parker and Son, 1859. 207 pp. Although this fundamental essay by the English thinker does not deal
directly with sexual expression, its powerful and lucid advocacy of
individual liberty has exercized a continuing and beneficial influence. There are several modern editions with useful commentary, 4075. MONTESQUIEU, CHARLES LOUIS DE SECONDAT, BARON DE. De l'esprit des loix. Geneva: Barillot, 1748. 2 vols. In this many-sided and perennially influential Enlightenment work on
the foundations of law, see IV, 4; VI, 13; VII, 9; VIII, 12; XII, 4, 6, and
21; XXXIII, 17; XXIV, 15; and XXVI, 3. There have been many subsequent
editions and several English translations. 4076. PRAETORIUS, NUMA (pseud, of Eugen Wilhelm). "Die strafrechtlichen Bestimmungen gegen die gleichge- schlechtliche Verkehr historisch und kritisch dargestellt," JfsZ, 1 (1899), 97-158. Though uneven, this article is the earliest historical survey of
antihomosexual legislation from ancient times to the time of writing. See
also F, Wachenfeld, below, 4077. RICHARDS, DAVID A. J. The Moral Criticism of Law. Encino, CA: Dickenson, 1977. 278 pp. See "Deviant Sexual Conduct
and the Right of Privacy" (pp. 77-134), which discusses the problem of
the unnatural; the constitutional right of privacy; love as a primary good;
and the constitutionality of prohibiting sexual deviation. I 4083. RICHARDS, DAVID A. J. Sex, Drugs, Death and the Law: An Essay on Human Rights and Oyercriminaliza-
tion. Totowa, NJ: Rowan and Littlefield, 1982. 316 pp. Applies interdisciplinary perspectives to the problem of
overcriminalization, suggesting a new approach grounded in a basic respect of
the rights of persons and the foundations of American constitutional law. An
impressive plea for decriminalization and legislative reform. 4084. RUBINSTEIN, AMNON. "The Enforcement of Morals
in a Secular Society," Israel Yearbook on Human Rights, 2 (1972), 57-98. On the Wolfenden Report, the Hart-Devlin controversy,
and related matters. 4085. Sexual Behaviour and Attitudes and Their Implications
for Criminal Law: Reports Presented to the Fifteenth Criminological Research
Conference (1982). Strasbourg: Council of Europe, 1984. 207 pp. (Collected
Studies in Criminological Research, 21) Six papers by Western European scholars treating national differences,
changes in public opinion and scientific knowledge, "pressure
groups" (including homosexuals), the age of consent, etc. 4086. SZASZ, THOMAS S. Law, Liberty and Psychiatry. New York: Macmillan, 1963. 281 pp. One of a number of polemical libertarian works by this prolific
author, who argues against the alliance of law and psychiatry to regulate
personal conduct. 4087. WACHENFELD, FRIEDRICH.
Homosexualität und Strafgesetz: Ein Beitrag zur Untersuchung der Reformbedürftigkeit
des 175 St.G.B. Leipzig: Weicher,
1901. 148 pp. German jurist's examination of the background of criminalization of
homosexuality in canon, Roman and Germanic law. See the detailed review and
critique by Numa Prae- torius in: JfsZ, 4 (1902), 670-775. B. ANCIENT, CIVIL, AND CANON LAW Roman law, as codified at the behest of the Emperor Justinian in the
6th century, is the source of the civil law tradition which came to prevail
on the European continent and, ultimately, through much of the world (with
the major exception of the English-speaking countries; see XX.D-M). Canon law
is the legal tradition of the Roman Catholic church, which came—in the sexual
sphere as in others—to have a symbiotic relationship with the medieval civil
law tradition. 4088.
BIENER,
FRIEDRlfcH AUGUST. Geschichte der
Novellen Justinian's. Berlin: Ferdinand Dummler, 1824. 621 pp. On Justinian's Novellae 77 and 141 and his persecution of sodomites in
Byzantium, see pp. 23, 27, 44-46, 455-56, 470-71, 518, 526, 583-84. 4088A. CARPZOV [CARPZOVIUS], BENEDICT. Practica nova imperialis Saxonica rerum criminalium. Wittenberg and Leipzig, 1652. The influential
leader (1595-1666) of the German Practical School of legal scholars held that
sodomites incur divine vengeance in the form of famines, plagues, wars, earthquakes,
floods and "other general scourges of this kind" (Pars 11, Quaestio
LXXVI, 5). 4089. CHRIST, JOHANNES FRIEDRICH. Historia legis Scatiniae. Halle: Johannes Christoph Krebsius, 1727. 27 pp. To date the only comprehensive treatise (in Latin) on the obscure law
of the Roman republic, the Lex Sca(n)tinia. See now,
however, Saara Lilja, Homosexuality in Republican and Augustan Rome (Helsinki: Societas Scientiarum Fennica, 1983),
112-21. 4090.
DAMHOUDER,
JOOS DE. Praxis rerum criminalium. Antwerp: Beller, 1601. One of several editions of a treatise first issued in 1554 in Louvain.
See pp. 390-97 (chapter 98), where the learned author (1507-81) extends the
boundaries of sodomy to include bestiality, demonism, necrophilia, and
relations with heretics. 4091. D'AVACK, PIETRO AGOSTINO. "L1omosessualità nel diritto canonico," Ulisse, 3:18 (1953), 680-97. Well-documented study by a canonist on the history of church law. 4092. FLORENCE. REPUBLIC. Statuti della Repubblica Fiorentina. Edited by Romolo Caggese. Florence: Comune, 1910-21. 2 vols. See
Chapter LIV (2, pp. 218-19), for a law of 1325 which prescribes castration
for active sodomites and a fine for passive ones (if under age). An unusual
provision in this otherwise typical Italian law of the period is the prohibition
on composing or singing sodomite songs. 4093. GAUTHIER, ALBERT. "La sodomie dans le droit canonique médiéval," in: Bruno Rey (ed.), L'érot- isme au moyen âge. Montreal: Aurore, 1977, pp. 111-22. Brief account of the canon law tradition; inferior to P. A. D'Avack,
above. 4094. GOODICH, MICHAEL. "Sodomy in Medieval Secular
Law," JH, 1 (1976), 295-302. Shows that in 13th and 14th century Europe kings and lawmakers strove
to make secular law conform with Christian moral
theology. 4095. LOBINGIER, CHARLES SUMNER. "Lex Christiana: The
Connecting Link Between Ancient and Modern Law," Georgetown Law Journal, 20 (1931-32), 1-43, 160-95. Places in context the process whereby "the whole province of sex
crimes was annexed by the church courts" (pp. 6, 160, 181). 4096. ORBACH, WILLIAM. "Homosexuality and Jewish
Law," Journal of Family Law, 14 (1975), 353-81. On the whole an uncritical traditionalist compilation of Jewish law in
relation to homosexuality from the Bible to contemporary responsa, but useful
for the many references to traditional and modern sources. 4097. SABELLUS, MARCUS ANTONIUS (MARCO ANTONIO SAVELLI). Summa diversorum tractatum. New ed. Venice: Paulus Balleonium, 1707. 6 vols. The crime of sodomy is discussed with many learned references (4, pp.
128-32). 4098. SCHURIG, MARTIN. Gynaecologia historico-medica, hoc est congressus
muliebris: Consideratio physico-medico-forensis qua utriusque sexus salacitas et castitas ... necnon coitus ••• item nefandus et
sodomiticus raris observationibus et aliquot casibus medico-forensibus
exhihentur. Dresden and Leipzig: 1730. Chapter VII (pp. 368-413) deals with the
crime of sodomy in all its forms: with members of the same sex, with animals,
intercourse with the opposite sex per os et per anum, with corpses, and with inanimate objects. There are
extensive references to ancient and contemporary authors in Latin and in
German, including accounts of many little known cases. All in all, a compendium
of what was thought on the subject on the eve of the Enlightenment campaign
for reform. See also Schurig's earlier treatise: Spermat- ologia
historico-medica ... (Frankfurt am Main, 1720).
SINISTRARI D'AMENO, LUIGI MARIO. De delictis et poenis. Venice: Hieronymus Albiriccius, 1700. In this work written for the use of priests in the confessional, see
Section X, "Mollities" (pp. 250-68), for the crime against nature.
This section of Sinistral's treatise has been several times republished in
Latin, French, and English. The English version first appeared as Peccatum mutum (Paris: I. Liseux, 1893; 76 pp.).
The Theodosian
Code. Edited and
Translated by Clyde Pharr. Princeton: Princeton University Press, 1952. 643
pp. See pp. 231-32 (IX.vii.3) for the antihomosexual law of 342, and pp.
232 (IX.vii.6) for the shorter text of the 390 law.
VOET, JOHANNES. The Selective Voet: Being the Commentary on the
Pandects (Paris Edition of 1829) by Johannes Voet (1647-1713) and the
Supplement to That Work by Johannes van der Linden (1756-1835). Translated with explanatory notes by Percival Gane. Durban:
Butterworth Africa, 1955-58. 9 vols. See vol. 7, Book XLVIII, Title 5,
Section 24, where Voet lists a dozen legal authorities of the 16th and 17th
centuries. 4102. WOLFART, JOANNES HENRICUS.
Tractatio juridica de sodomia vera et spuria hermaphroditi; Von achter und
unachter Sodomiterey eines Zwittern. Frankfurt am Main: 1742. 32
pp. Part I deals with sodomy committed by
hermaphrodites of either sex with each other, or with ordinary men and women.
Part II gives an account of a lesbian scandal of 1740. The French Revolution marks a decisive turning point in the civil law tradition. With respect to homosexuality,
the French National Assembly decriminalized sodomy in 1791, and this omission
was replicated in the body of law known as the Code Napoleon, created in the
first decade of the 19th century. The decriminalization was imitated in many
countries under French influence, chiefly in southern Europe and in Latin
America. Change in the sodomy laws of northern Europe was a slower process,
but it was essentially achieved in the period after World War II. 4103. ANCEL, MARC (ed.). La réforme pénale soviétique. Paris: Centre Français de Droit Comparé, 1962. lxix, 248 pp. See p. 51 (Art. 121 of the Penal Code of the RSFSR: buggery = muzhelozhstvo); p. 118 (Art. 126 of the Code of Criminal
Procedure: obligatory character of preliminary investigation). 4104. ANDENAES, JOHS. "Recent Trends in the Criminal
Law and Penal System in Norway: I. Criminal Law," British Journal of
Delinquency, 5 (1954), 21-26. Describes the prereform situation in Norway. Since this time a
remarkable improvement has occurred; see, e.g., Lia Pedersen, "Norway: The Antidiscrimination Law:
The Experience So Far," IGA Pink Book (Amsterdam: COC, 1985), 117-19. 4105. ANOSSOW, J. J. (I. I. ANOSOV). "Die Homosexualität im sowietischen Recht," Monatsschrift für Kriminalpsychologie und Strafrechtsreform, 23 (1932), 583-86. The penal codes of the union republics of the USSR with a
predominately Moslem population (Uzbekistan, Tadjikistan, Turkmenistan)
already had prescriptions against pederasty, which was regarded as an aspect
of the "old way of life." 4106. AUGSTEIN-THALACKER, RENATE. "Argumente für eine ersatzlose Streichung von Paragraph 175 StGB," Liberal, 23 (1981), 931-40. Arguments for the complete abolition of Article 175. Concerning this
article of the German penal code, enacted in its original f orm in 1871,
there is an enormous literature, most of which is listed in Manfred Herzer, Bibliographie zur
Homosexualität (Berlin: Verlag Rosa Winkel, 1982). 4107. BASLER, WALTER. Homosexualität im Strafrecht. Zurich: The author, 1941. 239 pp. Legal dissertation with particular
application to the new liberalized Swiss code. 4108.
BAUER,
FRITZ, HANS BÖRGER-PRINZ, HANS GIESE, and HERBERT JÄGER.
Sexualität
und Verbrechen: Beiträge zur Strafrechtsreform, Frankfurt: Fischer, 1963. 438 pp. Twenty-two essays on various aspects of sex and the law assembled
during a period of intense discussion of law reform in West Germany. Of
particular interest are those by Helmut Thielicke (Protestant theology and
homosexuality in relation to the law) and Heinrich Ackermann (on the
question of punishing homosexual conduct: supports reform)
. 4099. BAUMANN,
JÜRGEN. Paragraph 175: über die Möglichkeit, die
einfache, nichtjugendgefährdende und nichtöffentliche Homosexualität unter
Erwachsenen straffrei zu lassen. Berlin-Neuwied: Luchterhand,
1968. 204 pp. An argument for the reform of Article 175 of the (West) German penal
code, a step which was taken the following year. 4100. BERGMANS, ALBERT, and J. DEBOIS. Verslag en advies met betrekking tot art. 372bis Belgisch Strafwet- boek. Antwerp: Federatie Werkgroepen Homofilie, 1973. 39
pp. On the antihomosexual article 372bis of the Belgian penal code. 4101. BIEDERICH,
PAUL HUGO. Die gleichgeschlechtliche Unzucht in
kriminal-politischer Sicht: eine stat- istische-taxonomische Untersuchung.
Hamburg: Arbeitsgemeinschaft zur Pflege der Humanität, 1953. 39 pp. A statistical and taxonomic inquiry concerning homosexual indecency
in criminal-political perspective. 4102. BIEDERICH, PAUL HUGO. Paragraph 175: die Homosexualität. Regensburg: Verlag für Sexualliteratur, 1950. 71 pp. In addition to Biederich's essay on Article 175, contains "Die lesbische Liebe im Spiegel der Gesetze" by Thea Booss-Rosenthal, and "Zwischen Mann und Weib: Zwitterbildung beim Menschen" by К. Koeniger. 4103. BONDY, HUGO. "Ueber die Sexualparagraphen im tschechoslowakischen Entwurf des Strafgesetzbuches," in: International Congress of Sex Research, Verhandlungen [Berlin], 1926, 1-29. On the sexual articles in the draft of the Czechoslovak penal code, which was unfortunately not adopted during the First Republic. 4104. BOUCHAL, M., and D. BARTOVÄ. "The Attitude of
Homosexuals after the Change in the Criminal Code," Activitas Nervosa Superior, 6 (1964), 100-01. Evaluates changes in attitudes among homosexuals following the 1962
law reform. 4105. BROCHER,
TOBIAS and others. Plädoyer für die
Abschaffung des Paragraph 175. Frankfurt am Main: Suhrkamp Verlag, 1966. 146 pp. Four essays by academic
authorities (Tobias Brocher, Armand Mengen, Hans Bolewski, and Herbert Ernst Müller) arguing in favor of
discarding Article 175. 4106. CHARLES, R. "Propos sur l'article 372bis du code pénal (article 87 de la loi du 8 avril sur la
protection de la jeunesse)," Revue de droit pénal et de criminologie, 62 (November 1982), 809-35. Complications of current Belgian law. 4107. COUROUVE, CLAUDE. Contre nature? Etude sur l'incrimination pénale de l'homosexualité. Paris: The author, 1981. 16 pp. Historical review of problems in French law concerning homosexuality,
esp. those stemming from the Vichy government's 1942 change of article 334
of the penal code, which set the age of consent at 21. 4108. COUROUVE, CLAUDE. "1791 Law Reform in
France," Cabirion, 12 (1985), 9-10. Sets forth some elements in Enlightenment thought that made possible
the decriminalization effected by the National Assembly during the
Revolution. 4109. DAMASKA, MIRJAM. "Les infractions contre la moralité sexuelle en droit yougoslave," Revue internationale de droit pénal, 35 (1964), 1011-33. Seriatim discussion of sexual law provisions in the Yugoslav penal code. Pp. 1022-27 contain
some historical material on the crime against nature. 4110. DANET, JEAN. Discours juridique et perversions sexuelles. Nantes: Faculté de Droit et des Sciences Politiques, 1977. 111 pp. Changes in French legal attitudes toward sexual deviation in the 19th and 20th centuries. 4111.
DIECKHOFF,
ALBRECHT DIEDRICH. Zur Rechtslage im
derzeitigen Sittenstrafrecht. Hamburg: Kriminalistik, 1958. 112 pp. Consideration of the German situation in the period leading to reform,
with extensive reference to the Griffin Report and the Wolfenden Report (UK). 4112. DOMINGO LORÉN, VICTORIANO. Los homosexuales frente a la ley. Second ed. Barcelona: Editorial Plaza y Janes, 1978. 320 pp. Somewhat prolix interviews with Spanish judges and legal authorities. 4113. EUROPEAN COURT OF HUMAN RIGHTS. "Dudgeon
Case," Publications of the European Court of Human Rights [Strasbourg], Series A, vol. 45, 1982. 48 pp. The existing statute in
Northern Ireland was held to violate Article 8 of the European Human Rights
Conven- tion ("right to privacy"), 4114. FONTÄN BALESTRA, CARLOS. Delitos sexuales, estudio
juridico, medico-legal y criminolögico. Buenos Aires: Depalma, 1945. 344 pp. See p. 138ff. for brief discussion of "corruption" (homosexuality
in its relation to sexual offenses). 4115. FRIEDRICHS,
KARL AUGUST. Homosexualität und Strafvollzugs
Probleme der Straf- und Strafvollzugszwecke.
Munich: Goldmann, 1971. 234 pp. Problems of the aims and methods of applying criminal penalties to
homosexuals; revision of author's doctoral dissertation. 4116. FRITZSCHE,
HANS. Gerichtsverfassung, Strafgesetzbuch und
Strafprozessordnung der RSFSR. Berlin: VEB Deutscher
Zentralverlag, 1962. See p. 84 (Art. 121 of the criminal code of the Russian Soviet
Federative Socialist Republic concerning muzhelo- zhstvo, "buggery"), and p. 195 (Art. 126 of the
Code of Criminal Procedure: preliminary investigation obligatory). 4117. GALLETTO, T. "Identité di sesso e rifiuto delle pubblicazioni per la celebrazione del
matrimonio," Giurisprudenza Italiana (February 1982), 169-73. Well-informed article focussing on the attempt of two men to marry in
Rome in 1980. 4118. GLASSL, KARL. "Zur Frage der Strafbarkeit der Homosexualität," Kriminalistik, 26 (1972), 47-51. On the criminalization of homosexuality in Austria. 4119. GOLLNER,
GUENTHER. Homosexualität: Ideologiekritik und
Entmythologisierung einer Gesetzgebung. Berlin: Duncker und Humblot, 1972. 264 pp. Attempts to exfoliate preconceptions
conditioning penalization of homosexuality, and in particular rationalizations
utilized by defenders of the existing law in Germany from 1897 to the time of
writing. 4120.
GOLLNER,
GUENTHER. "Homosexualität—Tradition gegen Recht?"
Zeitschrift
für Rechtspolitik, 8 (1975), 231-34. Discusses practical difficulties, esp. among the military, hindering
the full effect of the West German legal reform of 1969. 4121. GONZALEZ DE LA VEGA, FRANCISCO. Derecho penal mexicano: los
delitos. Seventh ed. Mexico City: Porrua, 1964. 463 pp. In this standard commentary on Mexican penal law, the author defends
the Latin pattern of exclusion of homosexuality from the penal code, for
"the law should not invade the territory proper to conscience and
individual morality" (pp. 323-25). 4122. GURY, CHRISTIAN. L'homosexuel et la loi. Lausanne: Editions de l'Aire, 1981. 380 pp. Ambitious, but sometimes capricious effort to treat the law of
homosexuality in Europe: civil, criminal, and institutional. Extensive, but
not always adequate references. 4123. GUSMÄO, CHRYSOLITO DE. Dos crimes sexuais: estup- ros ao pudor,
defloramento e corrupcäo de menores. Third ed. Rio de Janeiro: Freitas Bastos, 1945. 418 pp. Discussion of sexual crimes from a positivist standpoint, treating
medical background, Brazilian law, and comparative law (includes offences
against decency and corruption of minors). 4124. HAFTER, ERNST. "Homosexualität und Strafgesetzgeber," Schweizerische Zeitschrift für Strafrecht, 43 (1929), 37-71. Favors reform of Art. 169 of the draft of a penal
code for the Swiss confederation. 4125. HAMMELMANN, H. A. "Homosexuality and the Law in
Other Countries," in: J. T. Rees and H. V. Usill (eds.), They Stand Apart: A Critical
Survey of the Problems of Homosexuality. London: William Heine- mann, 1955, pp. 143-83. Summary of the state of the law in Western European countries at the
time of writing. 4126. HENTIG, HANS VON. Die Kriminalität des homophilen Mannes.
Stuttgart: F. Enke, 1960. 182 pp. Criminalistic study of the homosexual man conducted
before the 1969 law reform in West Germany. 4127. HENTIG, HANS VON. Die Kriminalität der lesbischen Frau.
Second ed. Stuttgart: F. Enke, 1965. 107 PP. After a discussion of the lesbian social situation, deals with
aberrations such as murder, crimes against property, and offenses against
public morals. 4128. HIRSCHFELD,
MAGNUS. Paragraph 175 des Reichsstrafgesetzbuchs:
Die homosexuelle Frage im Urteile der Zeitgenossen.
Leipzig: Spohr, 1898. 71 pp. One of scores of critiques of the antihomosexual Article 175 in the
Imperial German Penal Code which appeared in the period 1880-1933. For the
most recent developments, see R. Augstein-Thalacker, above. 4129. Homosexualität oder Politik mit Paragraph 175. With a forward by Hans Giese. Reinbek: Rowohlt, 1967. 180 pp. Political aspects of impending law reform in West Germany. 4140. JOUBERT, DIAN D. Tot dieselfde geslag: Debat oor homoseksualiteit in 1968. Capetown: Tafelberg, 1975. 95 pp. Analysis of discussions in South Africa in 1968 regarding legal
reform, with coverage of the negative position of Roman-Dutch law as
influenced by the Calvinist religious tradition. 4141. KIEL, PETER. "Paragraph 175 StGB: Relikt eines autoritären Sexualstrafrechts? Ein Beitrag zur Sexualpolitik der SPD," Demokratie und Recht 11 (1983), 428-37. On the attitude of the West German Social Democratic Party to Article 175. 4142. LADAME, P. L. "L'homosexualité dans 1'avant-projet du Code pénal suisse," Schweizerische Zeitschrift für Strafrecht, 27 (1914), 279-95. Psychiatrist comments on the ongoing discussions concerning changes
in the Swiss penal code, arguing for reform. 4143. MARTINEZ, JOSÉ AUGUSTIN. El homosexualismo y su tratamiento. Mexico City: Ediciones Botas, 1947. 150 pp. Three lectures delivered before the Tribunal Supremo of Cuba; hostile. 4144. MAURACH, REINHART. "Die Einführung der Strafbarkeit der Päderastie in der Sowetunion," Zeitschrift für osteuropäisches Recht, N.S. 1 (1934), 93-97. Account of the Soviet recriminalization of sodomy. There is a reply by
Sergei Iakovlevich Bulatov in Sovetskoe gosudarstvo, 1-2 (1935), 159-61. 4145. NABOKOFF, VLADIMIR. "Die Homosexualität im Russischen Strafgesetzbuch," JfsZ (1903), 1159-71. Russian jurist's account of Tsarist law before the Revolution of
1905. 4146. NORSKE FORBUNDET AV 1948. Kommentar til Straffel- ovradets instilling
om saerlig straffererenslig vern for homofilie. Oslo: Forbundet, 1980. 95 pp. Commentary on the current Norwegian situation by the leading
Norwegian homosexual rights association. 4147. RADDATZ, THOMAS F. "Quid leges sine moribus? Gedenken zur aktuellen Menschenrechtpolitik des Europarates," Liberal, 24 (1983), 4-13. Human rights, including those of homosexual persons, in the context of
the Council of Europe. 4148. SCHMUTZ, MARCEL, and PETER THOMMEN. Die
Unzuchtsparagraphen 191
und 194
im Schweiz. Strafgesetzbuch. Basel: Arcados, 1980. 57 pp. Current Swiss law sets the age of consent for heterosexual acts at 16
and for homosexual acts at 20. It is proposed to make the latter conform to
the former. 4149.
SCHWULE
INITIATIVE GEGEN DEN PARAGRAPHENSUMPF. Rechtschwul:
Rechtsratgeber für Schwule. Berlin: Verlag
Rosa Winkel. 288 pp. A legal guide put together by gay German law students
and lawyers offering comprehensive coverage from simple civil procedures to
felonies. The guide also provides advice for homosexuals in the civil
service, the church, and the army, as well as information about cohabitation
and inheritance rights. 4150. SEELBACH, SIEGFRIED. Die Beratungen der Grossen Strafrechtskomission über das Probien der Bestrafung gleichgeschlechtlicher Unzucht zwischen Mannern. Cologne: The author, 1965. 315 pp. (Doctoral dissertation) Account
of West German parliamentary and other official discussions preceding the
reform of 1969 stimulated by the English Wolfenden Report. Reissued as a book
with a somewhat different title by Enke in Stuttgart in 1966. 4151. STOKVÏS, B. J. "Frage der Homosexualität im Hollandischen Strafrecht," Monatsschrift für Kriminalpychologie, 24 (1933), 740-46. The Dutch law as amended in 1911. 4152. STURUP, GEORG K. "Sex Offenses: The
Scandinavian Experience," Law and Contemporary Problems, 25 (1960), 361-75. Reports decriminalization of homosexual behavior
between persons 18 years of age and over. 4153. SZABÔ, A., and G. POLLNER. "Appreciation de l'homosexualité à la base du nouveau Code Pénal
Hongrois," Acta Medicinae Legalis et Socialis, 19 (1966),
325-26. Discusses the exclusion of homosexual acts between men from the Hungarian penal code of 1962.
The age of consent is 20. 4154. TISSOT, OLIVIER DE. La liberté sexuelle et la loi. Paris: Ballard, 1984. 380 pp. Theoretical considerations on sexual liberty with particular reference to French
experience. 4155. VINCINEAU,
MICHEL. La débauche en droit, le droit à la débauche. Brussels: Université Libre, 1985. Reflections on the law by a Belgian professor, who is also part owner
of a gay sauna that has been harassed by the authorities. 4156. VINCINEAU, MICHEL. "Homosexuels devant la Commission européenne des droits de l'homme," Revue de Droit Criminel et de Pénologie, 59 (1979), 83-106. Reviews some cases brought before the European Commission on Human Rights. 4157. VIVAS MARZAL,
LUIS.
Contemplacion juridico-penal de la homosexualidad. Valencia: Academia Valen- ciana de Jurisprudencia y
Legislacion, 1963. 49 pp. Inaugural lecture
reflecting older Spanish attitudes. Britain's historic law tradition, known as the common law, stands
apart from the civil law tradition of the European continent. This British
legal tradition has been bequeathed to the other English-speaking countries,
including (with the major modification of the principle of constitutional
review) the United States. Accordingly, Henry VIII's law of 1533 against
buggery is a landmark not only for England, but for all jurisdictions in this
legal tradition. As far as modern research can determine, prosecutions were
relatively uncommon. However, the English-speaking countries have inherited a
body of commentary, as seen in the writings of Coke and Blackstone,
that is harshly antihomosexual. This hostile strand of our tradition
accounts in part for the fact that sodomy law reform has been slow to come to
the English-speaking world. The publication of the Wolfenden Report in
Britain in 1956 nonetheless marked an important turning point on the road to
reform. 4157. ANDREWS, JOHN. "Homosexual Relationships in
Northern Ireland," European Law Review, 7 (April 1982), 141-44. On the Dudgeon decision, which brought about
decriminalization in Northern Ireland, and virtually establishes the right
of adult males, in those states which are parties to the European Convention
on Human Rights, to engage in homosexual acts in private. 4158. AYER, ALFRED JULES, SIR. "Homosexuals and the
Law," Mattachine Review, 5:6 (1959), 5-11. A noted English philosopher urges adoption of the Wolfenden Committee
proposals. 4159. BERG, CHARLES. Fear, Punishment, Anxiety and
the Wolfenden Report. London: George Allen & Unwin, 1959. In "The Wolfenden Report on Homosexual Offenses" (pp. 11-
50), Berg argues that the Committee did not go far enough in separating the
realm of law from the realm of private morality. 4160. BLACKSTONE, WILLIAM, SIR. Commentaries on fhe Laws of
England: A Facsimile of the First Edition of 1765-1769. Chicago: University of Chicago Press, 1979. 4 vols. In this most famous of all English law commentaries, see vol., pp.
215-16, on "the infamous crime against nature ... a crime not fit to be
named." 4161. BLOM-COOPER, LOUIS. "A Miscarriage of Justice-
English Style," Medico-Legal Journal, 49:3 (1981), 98-117. On the murder of Maxwell Contait, a homosexual trans- vestite,
followed by the conviction of three delinquent boys, whose main activty was
setting fire to buildings. 4162. BRETON, JOHN LE, SIR. Britton. Edited and translated by F. M. Nichols. Oxford:
Clarendon Press, 1865. 2 vols. This 14th-century treatise prescribes burning for arsonists,
sorcerers, renegades, sodomites, and heretics publicly convicted (vol. 1, pp.
41-42). 4163. BRITISH MEDICAL ASSOCIATION. Homosexuality and Prostitution: A Memorandum of
Evidence Prepared by a Special Committtee of the British Medical Association ... London: BMA, 1955. 94 pp. Although this report straddles the legal issue, it suggests that
"essential" homosexuality should be treated differently from
"acquired" homosexuality. 4164. CHESSER, EUSTACE. Love and Let Live: The Moral of the Volfenden Report. London: William Heinemann, 1958. 125 pp. Affirms that the private behavior of consenting adults is not the
concern of the state. 4165. COHEN, STEVE, et al. The Law and Sexuality: How to Cope with the Law If You're Hot 100% Conventionally
Heterosexual. Manchester: Law Centre (Grass Roots Books), 1979. 176 pp. Practical
advice for homosexuals and other sexual minorities. 4166. COKE, EDWARD, SIR. The Third Part of the Institutes of the Laws of
England. London: W. Lee and D. Pakeman, 1644. 243 pp. This influential treatise is harshly
negative, prescribing death by hanging or drowning. "Buggery is a detestable, and abominable sin, amongst Christians not to
be named, committed by carnall knowledge against the ordinance of the
Creator, and order of nature, by mankind with mankind, or with brute beast,
or by womankind with brute beast." (pp. 58-59). See also: The Twelfth Part of the
Reports ... (London: Twyfford and Bassett, 1656), pp. 36-37. (These texts are
renderings from the original texts in Law French.) 4167. COULTER, CAROL. "No Earthquake in Dublin," Hew Statesman, 100 (1980), 34-35. On the trial of homosexual activists challenging Ireland's gross
indecency statute. 4157. CRANE, PAUL. Gays and the Law. London: Pluto Press, 1982. 244 pp. A comprehensive work covering both criminal
and civil law, as well as such topics as young homosexuals, pedophilia,
obscenity, employment, housing, immigration, and child custody. The book
concludes that further political action is needed to achieve complete reform. 4158. EDDY, J.P. "The Law and Homosexuality," Criminal Law Review (1956), 22-25. Arguing that punitive laws should be retained as a goad to homosexuals
to seek treatment, the author held that "a penal institution of a
special kind" was needed where homosexuals could be given appropriate
psychiatric attention. 4159. FAIRBURNE, NICHOLAS H. "Homosexuality and the
Law," in: J.A. Loraine (ed.). Understanding Homosexuality: Its Biological and
Psychological Bases. New York: American Elsevier, 1974, pp. 159- 64. Makes the significant but hitherto unmentioned point that "there
is no case recorded in Scotland of a prosecution of consenting adults in
private ... in the last 100 years." Thus Scottish practice has long preceded English statutory law reform. Concludes, however,
that homosexual rights are best exercised in private, lest the community be
offended. In this volume see also the pro-reform paper of Antony Grey,
"Homosexuality: Some Social and Legal Aspects" (pp. 143-149). 4160. GORDON, GERALD H. The Criminal Law of Scotland. Edinburgh: W. Green & Son, 1967. lxxiii,
1104 pp. On sodomy, attempted sodomy, gross indecency, rape ("a male
person cannot be raped"), and indecent practices with children. The rule
enunciated in a 1934 case is: All shamelessly indecent conduct is criminal.
(Pp. 31-32, 120, 156-57, 773-74, 825, 836, 847, 849-52.) 4161. GREAT BRITAIN, CRIMINAL LAW REVISION COMMITTEE. Working Paper on Sexual
Offenses, October 1980. London: H.M.S.O., 1980. 63 pp. See esp. pp. 28-29, 33-34, 47-53. Seeks to reevaluate the Wolfenden
recommendations on both private and public homosexual behavior. 4162. GREAT BRITAIN, POLICY COMMITTEE ON SEXUAL OFFENSES. Working Paper on the Age of
Consent in Relation to Sexual Offenses. London: H.M.S.O., 1979. Among other matters, considers whether the age of consent for
homosexual acts should be assimilated to that stipulated for heterosexual
acts. 4163. GREENLAND, CYRIL. "Sex Law Reform in an International
Perspective: England and Wales and Canada," Bulletin of the American
Academy of Psychiatry and the Law, 11:4 (1983), 309-30. Supports reform of the law, including protection of the civil rights
of homosexuals, but concedes that public opinion presents a formidable
obstacle, as astute politicians avoid being associated with attempts to
liberalize the law out of fear of being attacked by religious groups and
right-wing opponents. 4164. HAILSHAM, QUINTIN HOGG, 2ND VISCOUNT.
"Homosexuality and Society," in: J. T. Rees and H. V. Usill
(eds.). They Stand Apart: A Critical Survey of the Problems of Homosexuality, London: William Heinemann, 1955, pp. 21-35. Favors continued legal sanctions against homosexuality, arguing that
homosexual behavior is in the last analysis moral failure. Note also in this
volume: John Tudor Rees, "Homosexuality and the Law," pp. 3-20 (a
muddled, conservative approach). 4165. "Homosexuality, Prostitution, and the Law; and
Report of the Roman Catholic Advisory Committee on Prostitution ^nd
Homosexual Offenses and the Existing Law," Dublin Review, 230 (Summer 1956), 57-65. The Committee called for amendment of the criminal law so as to
exclude consensual acts in private by adult males, but retain penalties for
offenses against minors, public indecency, and criminal vice. 4166. HONORE, TONY. Sex Law in England. Hamden, CT: Archon Books, 1978. 200 pp. Scholarly, but accessible treatment by a major British legal historian
presenting a moderately conservative position with regard to homosexual
behavior (see pp. 41, 84-110, 124, 130-31, 149, 151, 165-67). 4167. JAMES, T. E. "Law and the Sexual
Offender," in: Ismond Rosen (ed.), Pathology and Treatment of
Sexual Deviation: A Methodological Approach. London: Oxford University Press, 1964, pp. 461-92. General review
naming three basic homosexual offenses: sodomy, indecent assault, and gross
indecency. 4168. JOHNSON, H. A. "Homosexual Propensity and
Corroboration," Hew Law Journal, 125 (February 20 and 27, 1974), 189-91 and 203-04. Problems of corroboration after the 1967 reform as seen in recent
English cases. 4169. LAWTON, FREDERICK. "Sexual Offenses: Lord
Justice Lawton," Medico-Legal Journal, 50 (1982), 19-31. On the problem of the age of consent and the inconsistency and
hypocrisy of the law. The author accepts the view that sexual orientation is fixed by the age of 16, but
maintains that the age of consent for homosexual activity should be 18 to
protect "the immature young man, who takes a little longer to fix his
sexual orientation." 4170. LYNCH, A. C. E. "Counseling and Assisting
Homosexuals," Criminal Law Review (1979), 630-44. On the legal status of a hypothetical Homosexual Advice Centre: would
it be guilty of corrupting public morals? Where the aim is to reduce the
psychic distress and isolation of homosexuals, the activity is lawful. Where
the furtherance of overt sexual activity by homosexuals is involved,
statutory—-and possibly common law--liability exists. 4171. PANNICK, DAVID. "Homosexuals, Transexuals and
the Sex Discrimination Act," Poblic Law (1983), 279- 302. The degree of protection afforded by the 1975 Sex Discrimination Act
to homosexuals and transsexuals will depend upon the judicial construction of
the opaque language of the legislation, the actual
decisions will reflect the willingness of the courts to protect weak and
oppressed minorities. 4172. ST. JOHN-STEVAS, NORMAN. Life, Death and the Law: Law and Christian Morals
in England and the U. S. Bloomington: Indiana University Press, 1961. 375 pp. A moralistic approach with comparative perspectives. See pp. 198-231
and esp. 310-35 ("Laws Concerning Homosexual Offences") . 4173. SMITH, F. B. "Labouchere's Amendment to the
Criminal Law Amendment Bill," Historical Studies (Melbourne), 17 (1976), 165-75. Provides background on the still somewhat obscure circumstances under
which gross indecency between males was appended to the 1885 Act, a provision
that remained in force until the reform of 1967. 4174. STURGESS, BOB. No Offence: The Case for
Homosexual Equality. Manchester: Campaign for Homosexual Equality, 1975. Statement representing the views of Britain's leading gay rights
organization. 4175. WALMSLEY, ROY. "Indecency between Males and the
Criminal Offenses Act 1967," Criminal Law Review (1978), 400-07. Retrospect: ten years after decriminalization in England and Wales. 4176. WALMSLEY, ROY, and KAREN WHITE. Sexual Offenses, Consent and
Sentencing. London: H.M.S.O., 1979. 77 pp. (Home Office Research Study, 54) Attempt to assess the results of recent changes in the law on
prosecutions for buggery, attempted buggery, and indecency between males
(see pp. 26-28, 38-48), 4188. WOLFENDEN, JOHN, SIR, et al.
Report of
the Committee on Homosexual Offenses and Prostitution. London: H.M.S.O., 1957. 155 pp. This pivotal work,
generally known as the Wolfenden Report, laid the foundation for the English
reform of 1957. The Report represented not only an idea whose time had come,
but persuaded with trenchant logic and remarkable clarity of exposition. In
the English-speaking world its beneficent effect has probably been second
only to that of the two Kinsey Reports. For some of the circumstances
surrounding its creation, see Lord Wolfenden's memoirs, Turning Points (London: Bod-ley Head, 1976), pp. 129-46. Australia, which became self-governing in 1901, inherited the British
legal system, with the exception of the fact that it has a federal structure
resembling that of the United States. Accordingly, it has been necessary to
proceed to homosexual law reform in each of the state jurisdictions
individually. New Zealand, where reform has been slow in coming, has a
unitary system. 4189.
BARTHOLOMEW,
ALLEN A., et al. "Homosexual Necrophilia," Medicine, Science, and the
Law, 18 (1978),
29-35. Based on two cases of homosexual necrophilia, argues that defense
based on the abnormal state of the accused should be excluded. 4190. CHAPPELL, DUNCAN, and PAUL R. WILSON. "Changing
Attitudes towards Homosexual Law Reform," Australian Law Journal, 46 (1972), 22-29. Public opinion on the subject of homosexuality is changing, but a
wide disparity still exists between urban and rural attitudes. 4191. GARDINER, JAMIE, et al, A Proposal for Reform of the
Law Relating to Homosexual Offenses. Second ed. Fitzroy, Victoria: Homosexual Law Reform
Coalition, 1979. 28 pp. Includes legislation. 4192. GRAHAM, CARBERY. "Conditioned Legal Responses
to Homosexuality," Gay Changes, 2:4 (1979), 23-28. Shows how in practice Australian lawyers and judiciary are influenced
by antihomosexual prejudices. 4189. MCCLINTOCK, IAN, and JOHN ANDREWS. "Homosexual
Law Reform in New Sotith Wales—Who Is Satisfied," Legal Service Bulletin (Clayton, Victoria), 9 (1984), 138-41. Compromises and maneuvres which led to (qualified) decriminalization
in that state: buggery and indecent assault on males are abolished where both
parties are over 18. 4190. MACKENZIE, D. F. "Homosexuality and the Justice
Department," New Zealand Medical Journal, 66 (1967), 745-48. Homosexual acts by males are punishable in New Zealand by imprisonment
for up to 10 years if the partner is under 16, and up to 5 years if the
partner is over 16. Women over 21 who participate in homosexual acts with
girls under 16 are liable to imprisonment for a term up to six years;
consenting adult women cannot be prosecuted for homosexuality. 4191. NEW SOUTH WALES. DEPARTMENT OF THE ATTORNEY GENERAL
AND OF JUSTICE, Homosexual Offenses. Sydney: New South Wales Bureau of Crime Statistics
and Research, 1977. 43 pp. Official statistics
from one Australian state. Canada has inherited the English common law tradition to which it has
largely adhered. Since Canada has a unitary system of law, sodomy has been
decriminalized throughout the country—though the legal age of consent is 21.
In addition, Quebec's Civil Rights Code includes "sexual
orientation." 4192. ADAM, BARRY D. "Stigma and Employability:
Discrimination by Sex and Sexual Orientation in the Ontario Legal
Profession," Canadian Review of Sociology and Anthropology, 18 (1981), 293-98. In matched personal resumes sent to law firms, employers' responses
were less likely to be favorable to gays and women. 4193. ADAM, BARRY D., and KATHLEEN A. LAHEY. "Legal
Oppression: A Survey of the Ontario Legal Profession," Canadian Bar Review, 59 (December 1981), 674-86. In a questionnaire sent to the entire 1974 graduating class of Ontario
law schools, 1.5% of the respondents indicated that they were homosexual or
bisexual. 4194. ADELMAN, HOWARD. "Publicizing Pedophilia: Legal
and Psychiatric Discourse," International Journal of Law and Psychiatry, 4 (1981), 311-25. Discusses the legal definition of pedophilia, the credibility and
objectivity of witnesses, and trial evidence as illustrative of
legal-psychiatric discourse. 4195. CARON, MADELEINE. "Les lois applicables au Québec concernant les
homosexuels," Revue Québécoise de Sexologie, 2 (1981),
31-36. The legal situation of homosexuals in Quebec. 4196. COHL, K. A. Sexuality and the Law. Toronto: I.P. I. Publishing Division, 1978. In this popular survey, see pp. 67-76. 4197. DELEURY, EDITH. "L'union homosexuelle et le droit de la famille," Cahiers du Droit (Laval University, Quebec), (December 1984), 751-75. One of a series of articles in this issue on homosexuality and the
law, including Robert Demers, "De la Lex scantinia aux recents amendements du Code criminel" (pp. 777-800); Nicole Duple, "Homosexualité et droits à l'égalité dans les chartes canadienne et québécoise" (pp. 801-42); and Richard A. Goreham, "Le droit à la vie privée des personnes
homosexuelles" (pp. 843-72). 4198. GIGEROFF, ALEX K. Sexual Deviations in the Criminal Law: Homosexual,
Exhibitionistic, and Pedo- philic Offenses in Canada. Toronto: University of Toronto
Press, 1968. 218 pp. See esp. pp. 39-50, 82-95, 100-24, 159-68. On
the crimes of buggery, indecent assault, gross indecency, and the like. One
legislator is quoted as saying that there are "fifty kinds of gross
indecency." 4199. GOREHAM, RICHARD A. "Human Rights Code of
British Columbia—Reasonable Cause for Discrimination—Discrimination against
Homosexuals—Freedom of the Press," Canadian Bar Review, 59 (1981), 165-79. In the case of Gay Alliance Toward Equality v. The Vancouver Sun, the
Supreme Court of Canada invoked the principle of freedom of the press to
diminish the scope of human rights legislation prohibiting discriminatory
practices. See also: W. W. Black, "Gay Alliance Toward Equality v.
Vancouver Sun (1979) (2 N R 117)," Osgoode Hall Law Journal, 17 (1979), 649-75; Harry Kopyto, "The Gay
Alliance Case Reconsidered," loc. cit., 18 (1980), 639-52; and Jeff Richstone and J. Stuart Russell,
"Shutting the Gate: Gay Civil Rights in the Supreme Court of
Canada," McGill Law Journal, 27 (1981), 92-117. 4200. RODGERS, RAYMOND SPENCER. Sex and Law in Canada: Text,
Cases and Comment. Ottawa: Policy Press, 1962. 62 pp. On "Deviate behaviour not dangerous" which
covers the offenses of buggery and gross indecency under Canadian law (pp.
67-74). 4205. RUSSELL, J. STUART. "The Offense of Keeping a
Common Bawdy House in Canadian Criminal Law," Ottawa Law Review, 14 (1982), 270-313. On the ambiguity of the term "acts of indecency" in the
Canadian and British Criminal Codes, and the question whether homosexual
baths and bars constitute "common baudy houses" because they
existed "for no other reason but to provide sexual gratification in the
homosexual sense." 4206. RUZOVSKY, L. E. and F. A. Legal Sex. Toronto: Doubleday Canada, 1982. Popular account. Although the United States has inherited the British common law
tradition, it has modified it in two significant respects. 1) According to
the principle of constitutional review, no enactment of positive law can
stand if it is in conflict with the Constitution of the United States. In
addition, state laws must not violate state constitutions. This principle
opens the door to challenges of sodomy laws on constitutional grounds. 2) In
keeping with the federal system, each of the fifty states has its own penal
code. In practice this federalism has meant that legal reform—in the absence
of a general decision on the part of the United States Supreme court on the
unconstitutionality of sodomy laws—must be achieved on a state-by- state
basis. The continuing production of law review articles may be monitored in Index to Legal Periodicals (1909- ). 4207. ACHTENBERG, ROBERTA (ed.). Sexual Orientation and the
Law. New York: Clark
Boardman, 1985. ca. 600 pp. (loose leaf) Intended for legal practitioners and scholars, the work organizes a
diverse body of material (with many case citations) under three major
categories: Family and Property; Civil Rights and Discrimination; and Criminal
Issues. Some users have felt that the volume has an overemphasis on
California. 4208. AMERICAN CIVIL LIBERTIES UNION OF SOUTHERN CALIFORNIA.
"Statement of Policy Regarding Sexual Behavior," One Magazine, 14 (January 1966), 6-8. After some years of sidestepping the issue, this was the first
positive ACLU statement, becoming a model for national policy. 4209. AMERICAN LAW INSTITUTE. Model Penal Code: Proposed
Official Draft. Philadelphia: American Law Insti- tute, 1962. 346 pp. Sections 213.0, 213.2, 213.2 and
213.6 refer to "deviate sexual
intercourse"; sections 251.1, 251.2, and 251.3 refer to open lewdness,
prostitution, and loitering. Various tentative and proposed drafts of the
code were published in the ten-year period prior to 1962, when this version
was finally adopted. The Institute draft codified and modernized law for the
use of legislators and commissions considering new codes or reforms of
existing portion of codes in the separate states. 4210.
APASU-GBOTSU,
YAO, et al. (eds). "Survey on the Constitutional Right to Privacy in the
Context of Homosexual Activity," University of Miami Law
Review, 40 (1986),
521-657. Comprehensive review of the historical background of privacy,
including purported state interest in the prohibition of sodomy. This
valuable survey was prepared by the editors of the Review in connection with the consideration of the
(Georgia) Bowers v. Hardwick case, which the U.S. Supreme Court resolved in
June 1986, restoring the state law. See also: "Elisa L. Fuller,
"Hardwick v. Bowers: An Attempt to Pull the Meaning of Doe v.
Commonwealth's Attorney out of the Closet," ibid.,
39 (1985), 973-95. 4211. BAER, JUDITH A. Equality under the Constitution. Ithaca: Cornell University Press, 1983. 308 pp. This scholarly work on
the philosophy of Constitutional law contains a relevant chapter. 4212. BLAIR, JERRY D. "Sex Offender Registration for
Section 647 Disorderly Conduct Conviction is Cruel and Unusual
Punishment," San Diego Law Review, 13 (1976), 391-409. Holds that the notorious California requirement that convicted sex
offenders maintain registration with the police for life is unconstitutional. 4213. BRADFORD, WILLIAM. An Enquiry How Far the Punishment of Death is
Necessary in Pennsylvania. London: J. Johnson, 1795. 80 pp. Following Montesquieu and Beccaria, supports the abolition of the
death penalty for the "crime against nature." "Laws might have
been proper for a tribe of ardent barbarians wandering through the sands of
Arabia, which are wholly unfit for an enlightened people of civilized and
gentle manners" (pp. 20-21). 4214. BRAGG, MORGAN STEVENSON. "Victimless Sex
Crimes: To the Devil, Not the Dungeon," University of Florida Law
Review, 25 (1972),
139-59. Summarizes the now-classic arguments from the literature of the 1950s
and 1960s to the effect that sodomy should not be a crime: separation of
church and state, violation of the right to privacy, victimless offense, and
the like. 4205. BRINKLEY, ROLAND, et al. The Laws against Homosexuality. Huntsville, TX: Institute of Contemporary
Corrections and the Behavioral Sciences, Sam Houston State University,
[1971]. 93 pp. (Criminal Justice Monographs, 2:4) Surveys historical development and recent legislative enactments as
well as social science research. Supports reform as embodied in the Model
Penal Code. 4206. CALVANI, TERRY. "Homosexuality and the Law—an
Overview," Hew York Law Forum, 17 (1971), 273-303. Examines the criminal laws and civil discriminations against
homosexuals, concluding that they originated in the efforts of theocratic
governments of past centuries to enforce morality by penal sanctions. 4207. CAMAZINE, ALISSE C. "Gay Lib v. University of
Missouri," St, Louis University Law Journal, 22 (1978-79), 711-20. The Eighth Circuit Court of Appeals reversed a district court ruling
that denied Gay Lib the right to gain formal recognition as a student
organization on the campus of the University of Missouri at Columbia. Later
the United States Supreme Court denied certiorari, part of a pattern of
reluctance to take up questions pertaining to homosexuality. See also: Chris
Elliott, "Gay Lib v. University of Missouri: 1st Amendment Rights in the
School Environment," University of Missouri at Kansas City Law Review, 46 (1978); and Richard E. McCleod, "Denial of
Recognition to Homosexual Group Abridges Freedom of Association," Missouri Law Review, 43 (1978), 109-15). 4208. CANTOR, DONALD J. "Deviation and the Criminal
Law," Journal of Criminal Law, Criminology, and Police Science, 55 (1964), 441-53. Maintains that laws regulating sexual behavior are ineffective,
serving neither a deterrent, a preventative, nor a
rehabilitative function. Calls for vigorous initiative for change by
the bar, the churches, and the medical profession. 4209. CAPORALE, DOMENICO, and DERYL F. HAMANN.
"Sexual Psychopathy[,] a Legal Labyrinth of
Medicine, Morals and Mythology," Hebraska Law Review, 36 (1957), 320-53. Assessing the impact of the 1949 Nebraska Sexual Psychopath Statute,
concludes that "the present status of medical and legal knowledge does
not provide an adequate basis for ... departure from the traditional criminal
methods of dealing" with the sex offender. 4210. CARTER, JESSE. "Searches and Seizures in
California," Mattachine Review, 2:2 (February 1956), 22- 24, 29-33. Problems commonly encountered by homosexuals before the restraints
imposed on the police by the Warren Supreme Court. 4211. CHAITLIN, ELLEN, and V. ROY LEFCOURT. "Is Gay
Suspect?" Lincoln Law Review, 8 (1973), 24-54. Concludes that "if homosexuality is immutable, homosexuals are
clearly entitled to suspect class protection. ... The issue, however, should
not hinge on the immutability of homosexuality. ... The legal burden should
fall upon those who discriminate." 4212. The Challenge and Progress of Homosexual Law Reform. San Francisco: Council on Religion and the
Homosexual, Daughters of Bilitis, Society for Individual Rights, Tavern
Guild, 1968. 72 pp. In its time a landmark statement of the harassment and exploitation of
homosexuals fostered by then-existing laws. 4213. COHAN, A. S. "Obstacles to Equality: Government
Responses to the Gay Rights Movement in the United states," Political
Studies, 30 (1982), 59-76. The gay rights movment has not progressed as rapidly or as successfully
as its adherents have wished for four reasons: the unpopularity of
homosexuals and lack of sympathy for their cause; the division of powers and
hierarchy of legal codes within the governmental system; the fragmented
character of the movement itself and the absence of cohesive support from its
own constituency; and the failure of the Supreme Court to accord homosexuals
the same rights it has extended to other minorities. 4214. COHN, STEVEN F., and JAMES E. GALLAGHER. "Gay
Movements and Legal Change: Some Aspects of the Dynamics of a Social
Problem," Social Problems, 32 (1984), 72-86. Examines public opinion and media coverage surrounding four important
events that affected the development of homosexual rights in Maine between
September 1973 and June 1975. 4215. COHN, STEVEN F., and JAMES E. GALLAGHER. "Crime
and the Creation of Criminal Law: A Partial Model," British Journal of Law and
Society, 4 (1977), 220- 36. A study of the struggle for gay rights in Maine inspired by Berger and
Luckman's Social Construction of Reality. The reactions of various segments
of the state's population to the clash of fundamentalist and liberal views
is analyzed. 4216. COLEMAN, THOMAS F. "Procedure and Strategy in
Gay Rights Litigation," Hew York University Review of Law and Social
Change, 8
(1978-79), 317-23. Securing gay rights through constitutional litigation involves much
more than merely having a grasp on substantive consititutional principles.
The procedures and strategy used in each case are equally important in laying
the groundwork for a favorable ruling by the United States Supreme Court. 4227. COLEMAN, THOMAS F., et al. Report of the Commission on Personal Privacy,
State of California. Sacramento: State of California, 1982. 489 pp. This massive report,
assembled by a Commission appointed by Governor Brown, provides an almost
encyclopedic discussion of privacy in current legal practice and thought,
with a strong emphasis on sexual orientation. 4228. COLEMAN, THOMAS F. "To Publish or Not to Publish:
That is the Question," SexuaLaw Reporter, no. 26 (1976), 18-20. Shows that in California many appellate courts habitually refuse
publication of opinions favorable to gay rights. 4229. "The Constitutionality of Laws Forbidding
Private Homosexual Conduct," Michigan Law Review, 72 (1974), 1613-37. There is a tactical reason for advocates of homosexual rights to
eschew novel constitutional theory. Homosexuality is too controversial to
expect a court to create new constitutional law in order to protect it. But
by extending the right of privacy to all forms of heterosexual conduct, the
courts have gone so far that the exclusion of homosexuality cannot be
justified. 4230. "Constitutional Protection of Private Sexual
Conduct among Consenting Adults: Another Look at Sodomy Statutes," Iowa Law Review, 62 (1976), 568- 90. Consenting male homosexual relations between adults in private should
be protected by a fundamental right of privacy. None of the hypothetical interests
of the state in preventing private, male homosexual conduct can be shown to
be valid. 4231. "Constitutipnal Status of Sexual Orientation:
Homosexuality as a Suspect Classification," Harvard Law Review, 98 (1985), 1285-1309. Finding homosexuality to be a suspect classification requires not
that a court invalidate every law that discriminates on that basis, but that
the court make a finding of actual harm rather than perceived immorality
before upholding such a classification. 4232. COURIS, THOMAS F. "Sexual Freedom for
Consenting Adults—Why Not?" Pacific Law Journal, 2 (1971), 206-25. Argues for reform of California's "anachronistic penal laws"
prescribing "deviant sexual behavior" between adults, reaffirming
the conclusion of the Wolfenden Report. 4217. CRAFT, LAURA R., and MATTHEW A. HODEL. "City of
Chicago v. Wilson and Constitutional Protection for Personal Appearance:
Cross-dressing as an Element of Sexual Identity," Hastings Law Journal, 30 (1979), 1151-81. On a decision which invalidated a local ordinance prohibiting an
individual from appearing in public dressed as a member of the opposite sex
with an intent to conceal his or her gender in the
specific case of two transsexuals who were required to wear women's clothing
as part of "psychiatric therapy in preparation for sex-reassignment
operations." 4218. CROMPTON, LOUIS. "Homosexuals and the Death Penalty
in Colonial America," JH 1 (1976), 277-93. Shows that Biblical prohibitions played an important role even after
the American Revolution, when, however, fines and imprisonment were
substituted for the death penalty. 4219. CURRY, HAYDN, and DENNIS CLIFFORD. A Legal Guide for Lesbian and
Gay Couples. Third ed. Reading, MA: Addison-Wesley, 1985. ca. 300 pp. Two attorneys provide a comprehensive guide for lay readers covering
such topics as buying and selling property, relating to former spouses, child
custody and visitation rights, living-together arrangements, and estate
planning. Includes sample contracts, forms, agreements and wills. 4220. P. L. D. "Sexual Assaults and Forced Homosexual
Relationships in Prison: Cruel and Unusual Punishment," Albany Law Review, 36 (1972), 428-38. Courts have begun to recognize that subjecting prisoners to forced
homosexual relations and sexual assaults does constitute unusual punishment.
The failure of prison authorities to check such abuses may violate an
inmate's right under the Eighth Amendment to be free from cruel and unusual
punishment. 4221. DELGADO, RICHARD. "Fact, Norm, and Standard of
Review—The Case of Homosexuality," University of Dayton Law
Review, 10 (1985),
575-98. Designation of a model of judicial review requires that the court
commit itself to a view of homosexuality and the part that sexual orientation
and behavior play in the life of the homosexual, 4222. DONNELLY,
RICHARD C., JOSEPH GOLDSTEIN, and RICHARD D. SCHWARTZ.
Criminal Laws
Problems for Decision in the Promulgation, Invocation, and Administration of
a Law of Crimes. New York: Free Press, 1962. 1169 pp. See Chapter 1, Part 3, "Consensual Homosexual Acts between Adults
in Private—a Crime? A Problem for the Legislature" (pp. 123-201). A
digest of opinions by lawyers, sociologists, anthropologists, psychiatrists,
and members of investigative and legislative commissions between
1935 and 1960. 4223. DRUMMOND, ISABEL. Tlie Sex Paradox. New York: Putnam's Sons, 1953. 369 pp. "An analytical survey of sex and the law in the United States
today," citing historical and anthropological records. See Chapter 4:
"Sodomy, Exhibitionism and Other Acts 'Contrary to Nature'" (esp.
pp. 119-29). 4224. DRZAZGA, JOHN. Sex Crimes. Springfield, IL: Thomas, 1960. 241 pp. Chapter 32, "Homosexuality" (pp. 205-16), constitutes a
semipornographic survey of "vice" and vice laws throughout history,
drawing upon earlier sexological literature for piquant details. 4225. DUNLAP, MARY C. "Thé Constitutional Rights of Sexual Minorities: A Crisis of the
Male/Female Dichotomy," Hastings Law Journal, 30 (1979), 1131-49. Challenges the right of the legal system to impose an absolute
dichotomy of male/female sex roles and sexual identities; holds that greater
sexual differentiation in fact contains the greater evolutionary potential. 4226. GALLO, JOHN J., et al. "The Consenting Adult Homosexual and the Law: An Empirical Study
of Enforcement and Administration in Los Angeles County," UCLA Law Review, 13 (1966), 643-832. Evaluating a massive project of data collection, describes the use of
police decoys, observation, routine patrol and harassment, and abatement and
licensing controls over establishments frequented by homosexuals. Concludes
that adult consensual homosexuality should be of legal concern only in the
case of public displays, and then only because they involve an element of
public outrage. 4227. GARDNER, MARTIN R. "The Defense of Necessity
and the Right to Escape from Prison—a Step towards Incarceration Free from
Sexual Assault," Southern California Law Review, 49 (1975), 110-52. On a California case (People v. Lovercamp) in which an appellate court
held that an escape from prison motivated by "threatened imminent
homosexual asault by other inmates" may be justified if the inmate
eschews violence and subsequently places himself in the hands of the proper authorities. 4228. GAY AND LESBIAN ADVOCATES OF
BOSTON. The Attorney's Directory for Lesbian and Gay Rights. Boston: GLAB, 1983. A state-by-state listing of attorneys, including
information about areas of expertise. 4229. "Gay Students Organization v. Bonner:
Expressive Conduct and the First Amendment Protection," Maine Law Review, 26 (1974), 397-414. Forbidding of a dance on the
campus of the University of New Hampshire led to a decision affirming the
First Amendment rights of the organization. 4230. GEIS, GILBERT. Mot the Law's Business? An
Examination of Homosexuality, Abortion, Prostitution, Har- cotics and
Gambling in the United States. Rock- ville, MD: National Institute of Mental
Health, Center for Studies of Crime and Delinquency, 1972. 262 pp. Well-reasoned presentation of the case for decriminalization of
"victimless crimes." Chapter 2, "Consensual Adult
Homosexuality" (pp. 15-52), discusses the damage inflicted on
homosexuals, and on society as a whole, by imposing penalties which are clearly
counterproductive. 4231. GEIS, GILBERT, et al. "Reported
Decriminalization of Consensual Adult Homosexuality in Seven American
States," JH, 1 (1976), 419-26. Reporting results of a mail survey of police officials, prosecuting
attorneys, and members of homosexual groups in the seven states that had
decriminalized homosexuality between consenting adults, concludes that
decriminalization had no effect on the involvement of homosexuals with
minors, the use of force by homosexuals, or the amount of private same-sex
behavior. 4232. GITCHOFF, G. THOMAS, and JOSEPH ELLENBOGEN.
"Victimless Crimes: The Case against Continued Enforcement," Journal of Police Science and
Adminstration, 1 (1973), 401-08. See esp. p. 403. 4233. GOMEZ, JOSE. "The Public Expression of
Lesbian/Gay Personhood as Protected Speech," Journal of Law and Inequality, 1 (1983), 121-53. Includes survey of discussions of applicability of First Amendment
protections to homosexual rights. 4234. GOULD, MEREDITH. "Lesbians and the Law: Where
Sexism and Heterosexism Meet," in: Trudy Darty and Sandee Potter (eds.), Women-Identified Women, Palo Alto, CA: Mayfield, 1984, pp. 149-62. While sodomy laws have a penumbra! effect on
lesbians, their chief problems lie in the area of divorce and custody—and the
difficulties that all women face in our social system. 4235. HAFEN, BRUCE C. "The Constitutional Status of
Marriage, Kinship, and Sexual Privacy—Balancing the Individual and Social
Interests," Michigan Law Review, 81 (1983), 463-574. Ambitious attempt to synthesize a conservative "pro-family"
legal philosophy, with a number of anti-gay-rights implications. Opposes the "duty" of family tradition
to the "liberty" of economic individualism. 4236. HARKAVY, JEFFREY M. "The Defending of Accused
Homosexuals: Will Society Accept Their Use of the Battered Wife
Defense?" Glendale Law Review, 4 (1982), 208-32. The "battered wife defense" is not available to the homosexual
who kills a violent lover in self-defense, because of prejudice among judges
and jurors against homosexual "marriage." 4237. HARPER, JAMES. Hobo Laws. San Diego: Publishers Export Co., 1968. 208 pp. Pulp compilation illustrative of then-current popular attitudes. 4238. HINDES, THOMAS L. "Morality Enforcement through
the Criminal Law and the Modern Doctrine of Substantive Due Process," University of Pennsylvania Law
Review, 126 (1977),
344-84. Concludes that "the power of government to levy criminal
sanctions should not be used to impose majoritarian moral values on the rest
of society," but only to protect persons and property against the
"tangibly harmful acts of others." 4239. HOOK, RONALD W. The Constitutional Right of
Privacy: Sodomy Laws. Minneapolis: Minnesota Civil Liberties Union Foundation, 1981. 13 pp. To make criminals out of otherwise law-abiding productive citizens
merely because of their mode of sexual expression is a "crime in and of
itself." Consensual sodomy legislation infringes the privacy of the
individual and is oppressive of the personality of those stigmatized as
criminals. 4240. HOWARTH, JOAN W. "The Rights of Gay Prisoners:
A Challenge to Protective Custody," Southern California Law
Review, 53 (1980),
1225-76. Concludes that Constitutional provisions compel reform of current
practices of confinement of homosexuals. 4241. ILLINOIS STATE AND CHICAGO BAR ASSOCIATION'S JOINT
COMMITTEE TO REVISE THE ILLINOIS CRIMINAL CODE. Proposed Illinois Revised
Criminal Code of 1961. Chicago: Burdette Smith Co., 1961. 318 pp. An impressive official study completed and published prior to the
implementation of the Wolfenden reforms in Britain. 4242. JEFFERSON, THOMAS. The Papers of Thomas Jefferson. Edited by Julian P. Boyd and others. Princeton:
Princeton University Press, 1950- Advocated castration as a punishment for sodomy (vol. 2, pp. 325,
497). 4243. JOHNSON, LEE ANN. "Gay Law Students Association
v. Pacific Telephone and Telegraph Co.—Constitutional and Statutory
Restraints on Employment—Discrimination against Homosexuals by Public Utilities," California Law Review, 68 (1980), 680-715. Criticizes the decision in favor of the homosexual plaintiffs,
concluding that "each cause of action rests on questionable grounds and
contains broad implications that the majority failed to address
adequately." 4244. JULBER, ERIC. "The Law of Mailable
Material," ONE Magazine, 2:8 (October 1954), 4-6. This article, by ONE's attorney, seemed to goad the U.S. Postal
Service into declaring the issue unmailable. At length a 1958 per curiam
decision was obtained from the United States Supreme Court, rejecting the
government's claim and establishing full freedom to write and publish about
homosexuality in other than narrowly defined medical, psychological or legal
terms. 4245. KARST, KENNETH. "The Freedom of Intimate
Association," Yale Law Journal, 89 (1980), 624-92. The freedom of intimate association extends to homosexual associations
as much as to heterosexual ones. To affirm that freedom is to extend the area
of moral choice and moral responsibility. 4246. KATZER, PEGGY R. "Civil Rights—Title VII and
Section 1985(3)—Discrimination against Homosexuals," Wayne Law Review, 26 (1980), 1611-23. Protection under Title VII or section 1983(3) against discrimination
because of "sex" does not extend to homosexuals. 4247. KLING, SAMUEL G. Sexual Behavior and the Law. New York: Bernard Geis Associates, 1965. "Homosexual Behavior"
(pp. 97-128) offers a broad survey of major aspects in question-and-answer
format. 4248. KNUTSON, DONALD C. "Homosexuality and the Law:
Introduction," JH, 5:1/2 (1979-80), 5-23. Introduction to a special issue of Journal of Homosexuality on the state of American laws and their effect on
homosexuals. The issue has also been published separately as a book, Homosexuality and the Law, by Haworth Press, New York. 4249. LAMBDA LEGAL DEFENSE. AIDS Legal Guide. New York: Lambda Legal Defense, 1984. 100 pp. A general legal guide by the New York activist group, with special
emphasis on the consequences of the AIDS epidemic. 4250. LASSON, KENNETH. "Homosexual Rights: The Law in
Flux and Conflict," University of Baltimore Law Review, 9 (1979), 47-74. The law regarding homosexual rights is clearly in a state of flux, and
this uncertainty extends far beyond the classroom or military cases. In most
jurisdictions, even apart from the criminal sanction, homosexuals may be
legally discriminated against—a situation that seems to conflict with our
claim to be a free society. See also his: "Civil Liberties for
Homosexuals: The Law in Limbo," University of Dayton Law Review, 10 (1985), 645- 79. 4251. Lesbian Rights Handbook. San Francisco: Lesbian Rights Project, 1980. Covers unemployment, wills, shared property, crisis issues, housing,
rights of young lesbians, lesbian businesses, and so forth. 4252. LEVY, MARTIN R., and C. THOMAS HECTUS. "Privacy
Revisited: The Downfall of Griswold," University of Richmond Law
Review, 12 (1978),
627-46. In Doe v. Commonwealth's Attorney for City of Richmond, the Supreme
Court summarily affirmed a lower court decision denying homosexuals
constitutional protection of the right to privacy in sexual acts among
consenting adults in the privacy of the home. The court has upheld freedom of
speech in this area while denying freedom of conduct. The decision erodes the
precedential value of the opinion in Griswold. 4253. LODGE, THOMAS E. "There May Be Harm in Asking: Homosexual Solicitations and the Fighting Words Doctrine," Case Western Reserve Law
Review, 30 (1980),
461-93. Statutes against homosexual solicitation should be drafted only to
prohibit those solicitations which cause "severe emotional
disturbance," and should require a private citizen's complaint
containing specific allegations of harassment. 4254. LUDD, STEVEN 0. "The Aftermath of Doe v. Commonwealth's
Attorney: In Search of the Right to Be Left Alone," University of Dayton Law
Review, 10 (1985), 705-43. The Supreme Court's summary affirmance has produced
wide variation in state and federal court determinations of whether private,
adult, consensual behavior is constitutionally protected. 4255. MEYER, ROBERT C. "Legal and Social Ambivalence
Regarding Homosexuality," JH, 2:3 (1977), 281-87. Finds a mixed pattern in progress towards decriminalization and
securing of civil rights for homosexuals. 4256. MILLER, H. "An Argument for the Application of
Equal Protection Heightened Scrutiny to Classifications Based on
Homosexuality," Southern California Law Review, 57 (1984), 797-836. Contends that
homosexuals should be granted the advantages of "heightened scrutiny" because they are
the subject of official discrimination. As a status, rather than a chosen
activity, homosexuality is not subject to individual control. 4257. MITCHELL, ROGER S. The Homosexual and the Law. New York: Arco, 1969. 96 pp. Reasonably adequate in its day as an
introduction for the lay public. 4258. MOHR, RICHARD. "Gay Rights," Social Theory and Practice, 8 (1982), 31-41. Argues that homosexuals should enjoy the protection of the 1964 Civil
Rights Act, and that antihomosexual arguments cast as "good faith
discriminations" are examples of circular reasoning or are
self-fulfilling prophecies-- rationalizations of religious prejudice. 4259. MORRIS, KATRINA K. "Gay Law Students As'n v. Pacific
Telephone and Telegraph Co.," Santa Clara Law Review, 20 (1980), 263-67. The California Supreme Court concluded that where a state entity is
the employer, homosexuality should not be a basis for discrimination against
any qualified individual. 4260. MULLINS, CHARLES E. "Case Notes: Schools:
Fricke v. Lynch," Journal of Family Law, 19 (1980-81), 541-44. On the attempt to prevent Aaron Fricke from bringing a male date to
his high school prom: the court held that this amounted to abridgement of
First Amendment rights. See also Fricke's own account of the affair: Reflections of a Rock Lobster (Boston: Alyson, 1980). 4261. OAKS, ROBERT. "Perceptions of Homosexuality by
Justices of the Peace in Colonial Virginia," JH, 5 (1979-80), 35-41. Unlike other colonies, Virginia did not have its own sodomy statute,
but relied on the English law of 1533. The powerful justices of the peace had
the responsibility of interpreting it. See also Oaks: "Things Fearful
to Name: Sodomy and Buggery in Seventeenth-century New England," Journal of Social History, 12 (1978), 68-81. 4262.
OLIVIERI,
ANTONIO, and IRWIN FINKELSTEIN. "Report on ' Victimless Crime' in New York
State," Hew York Law Forum, 18 (1972), 77-120. The changing attitude of society toward homosexuality has vastly
increased the support for the repeal of the laws which prohibit it (pp.
114-20). 4263. PAKALKA, WILLIAM R. "Texas Statue Prohibiting
Sodomy is Unconstitutionally Overbroad in Proscribing Private Consensual
Acts of Married Couples; Buchanan v. Batchelor," Texas Law Review, 49 (1971), 400-06. The sodomy laws should be challenged on other constitutional grounds
than privacy: as representing an establishment of religion as prohibited by
the First Amendment, and as punishing a person for a particular condition in
contravention of the Eighth Amendment. 4264. PALAIS, DOUGLAS M. "Sexual Privacy," Journal of Criminal Law and Criminology, 68 (1977), 77-82. The discrepancy between the Supreme Court's rulings in Griswold and
Doe will create even more variation in lower court interpretations of the
privacy right, with the constitutionally intolerable result of varying individual
constitutional rights in different jurisdictions. 4265. PERETTI, P. 0., et al. "Sexual Assaults and Forced Homosexual
Relationships in Prison: Cruel and Unusual Punishment," Albany Law Review, 36 (1972), 428-38. Courts have begun to recognize that sexual assaults and forced
homosexual relations in prison constitute cruel and unusual punishment.
Toleration of these abuses by prison authorities may violate Eighth Amendment
rights of prisoners. 4266. PLOSCOWE, MORRIS. Sex and the Law. Revised ed. New York: Ace Books, 1962. 288 pp. Because many sex acts classified as deviant are engaged in by a broad
range of the population, heterosexual as well as homosexual, laws against
them are virtually unenforceable, and should be abolished for consenting
adults. 4267. RAGAN, JAMES ARTHUR. "Substantial Threats of
Homosexual Attack May Support the Defence of Duress in a Prosecution for
Prison Escape. People v. Harmon ... 220 N. W. 2d 212 (1974)," American Journal of Criminal
Law, 3 (1975),
331-40. The decision in this case marks a new view by the courts of forced
homosexuality as a coercive experience and as a valid defense issue to a
charge of escape from prison. 4268. REESE, SUSAN ELIZABETH. "The Forgotten Sex: Lesbians,
Liberation, and the Law," Willamette Law Journal, 11 (1975), 354-77. The legal system alone can never exorcise society's discrimination
against lesbians. What is needed is a far- reaching réévaluation of attitudes toward sexuality in general and toward
women in particular. The extent to which the lesbian is ignored by the law
reflects society's prejudice against homosexuality as well. 4269. RICE, CHARLES E. Legalizing Homosexual Conduct: The Role of the
Supreme Court in the Gay Rights Movement. Cumberland, VA: Center for Judicial Studies,
1984. 29 pp. Study by a scholar
who has specialized in civil rights issues in relation to the United States Supreme Court. 4270. RICHARDS, DAVID A. J. "Conscience, Human
Rights, and the Anarchist Challenge to the Obligation to Obey the Law," Georgia Law Review, 18 (1984), 771-89. The anarchist challenge denies the very belief that the state has a
claim to obedience to the law. Free acceptance is often so problematic and
basic injustice so often in controversy that citizens of a democracy frequently
regard themselves as not bound by law or by the state's view of law. 4271. RICHARDS, DAVID A. J. "Sexual Autonomy and the
Constitutional Right to Privacy: A Case Study in Human Rights and the
Unwritten Constitution," Hastings Law Journal, 30 (1979), 957-1018. Seeks to apply the right of privacy to homosexual activity among
consenting adults by affirming the principle of love as a civil liberty. 4272. RICHARDS, DAVID A. J. "Unnatural Acts and the
Constitutional Right to Privacy: A Moral Theory," Fordham Law Review, 45 (1977) 1281-1348. An examination of moral and philsophical theory can fundamentally
clarify the constitutional right to privacy. It is wholly improper for the
state to impose criminal sanctions on certain forms of consensual sexual
activity between adults in private. 4273. RICHTER, ROSALYN. Anti-gay Legislation: An
Attempt to Sanction Inequality. New York: Lambda Legal and Education Fund, 1982.
210 pp. The belief that homosexuality per se is immoral lies at the heart of
this anti-gay legislation. It is difficult to refute the argument that
homosexuality is immoral, since no specific evidence is often introduced to
support it. Attorneys challenging such legislation may have to argue that
homosexuality is not immoral, but in fact constitutes "a valid and moral
lifestyle." 4274. RITTER, GEORGE P. "Property Rights of Same Sex
Couples: The Outlook after Marvin," Loyola University Law Review (Los Angeles), 12 (1979), 409-23. Although numerous federal and state courts, as well as state
legislatures, still feel that "questionable standards of morality
justify denial of rights" to homosexuals, arguments can be made that
the contractual and equitable remedies in Marvin should extend to couples of
the same sex, particularly in view of the growing recognition that many
homosexual couples "lead relatively stable and conventional life
styles." 4275. RIVERA, RHONDA H. "Our Straight-laced Judges:
The Legal Postion of Homosexual Persons in the United States," Hastings Law Journal, 30 (1979), 799-955. Describes "every civil case dealing with homosexuality available
to the author until August 1979." Somewhat sprawling, but well
documented (938 footnotes). This and the following item should be consulted
for references not included herein. 4276. RIVERA, RHONDA H. "Recent Developments in
Sexual Preference Law," Drake Law Review, 30 (1980), 311- 46. Updates the previous article with some overlooked cases, as well as new
cases decided since 1979. Remarks that "the decisions often seem clearly
to be influenced more by social and religious thought than by legal
precedent." A further update is her: "Queer Law: Sexual Orientation
Law in the Mid-Eighties," University of Dayton Law Review, 10 (1985), 459-540. 4277. ROSS, H. LAURENCE (ed.). Law and Deviance. Beverly Hills, CA: Sage, 1981. 278 pp. (Sage Annual
Reviews of Studies in Deviance, 5) Nine papers on the subject of deviance and the use of the law as an
instrument of social control. Only occasional mention of homosexuality in
its legal aspects. 4278. SAPHIRE, RICHARD B. "Gay Rights and the
Constitution: An Essay on Constitutional Theory, Practice, and Dronenburg v.
Zech," University of Dayton Law Review, 10 (1985), 767-813. The decision constitutes one more precendent against a plaintiff
challenging the constitutionality of laws against sodomy, but also raises
fundamental questions about the role of judicial review. 4279. SCHUR, EDWIN M. Crimes without Victims—Deviant Behavior and Public
Policy: Abortion, Homosexuality, and Drug Addiction. Englewood Cliffs, NJ:
Prentice-Hall, 1965. 180 pp. Since homosexuality involves the willing exchange between consenting
persons of a desired product or service, the need for reforming the laws
prohibiting such behavior is urgent. Because laws are unenforceable owing to
the lack of a complaining victim, they often give rise to secondary offenses
such as blackmail and police corruption. An influential statement of this
point of view. 4280. SCHWARTZ, LOUIS B. "Morals Offenses and
theModel Penal Code," Columbia Law Review, 63 (1963), 669- 86. Loitering for purposes of solicitation by homosexual men is equated
with the same activity by female prostitutes. 4281. SHANK, S. ADELE. "Sticks and Stones: Homosexual
Solicitation and the Fighting Words Doctrine," Ohio State Law Journal, 41 (1980), 553-74. The Ohio Supreme Court in the decision in Phipps, upholding the
state's same-sex solicitation statute, relied on an outdated concept of the fighting words doctrine. It
has carved out a substantial exception to First Amendment protections, and
its poorly reasoned decision demonstrates its prejudice against homosexual
lifestyles. 4282. SHERWIN, ROBERT VEIT. "Sodomy," in: Ralph
Slovenko (ed.), Sexual Behavior and the Law. Springfield, IL: Charles C. Thomas, 1965, pp.
425-33. Inasmuch as the sex laws of the United States tend to punish a
person's sexual desires rather than the methods used to fulfill these
desires, they may be considered antisexual. This volume contains several
other contributions of interest. 4283. SILVERMAN, HILDA, et al. Lesbians and Gay Hens The Law in Pennsylvania. Philadelphia: American Civil Liberties Foundation
of Pennsylvania, 1981. 59 pp. A model guide for a major state covering
criminal law, privacy, relationships, parenting, employment, housing, social
services, finances, associations, prisons, military law, immigration and
naturalization, and media. 4284. SOLOMON, DONALD M. "The Emergence of
Associational Rights for Homosexual Persons," JH, 5 (1979-80), 147-55. Court decisions involving the rights of homosexuals to meet together
for social and political purposes have begun to acknowledge that such association are to some extent constitutionally protected. 4285. STANLEY, WILLIAM R. "The Rights of Gay Student
Organizations," Journal of College and University Law, 10 (1983-84), 397-418. Overview of the problem, including successes and failures. 4286. STODDARD, THOMAS B., E. CARRINGTON BOGGAN, et al. The Rights of Gay People. Revised ed. New York: Bantam Books, 1983. 194 pp.
(An American Civil Liberties Union Handbook) Comprehensive guide for the lay reader arranged in a
question-and-answer format, and covering such subjects as free speech,
employment, the military, immigration, the gay family, criminal law, and the
rights of trans- vestites and transsexuals. 4287. TABER, CARLETON H. A. "Consent Not Morality as
the Proper Limitation on Sexual Privacy," Hastings Constitutional Law
Quarterly, 4 (1977), 637-64. The Supreme Court has recognized the existence of the right to
decisional privacy, but not delineated the boundaries of that right. By
adopting a standard of seclusion as against the public, the courts could
allow the state to regulate public manifestations of sexual conduct, while
protecting those who prefer unconventional modes of private sexual
fulfillment. 4288. TAYRIEN, MARY LEE. "California 'Consenting
Adults' Law: The Sex Act in Perspective," San Diego Law Review, 13 (1976), 439-53. The California legislature has acknowledged that the private and
voluntary sexual behavior of adults is not properly the concern of the state.
The "consenting adults" law constitutes a victory for individual
freedoms through the elimination of unwarranted intrusion by the state into
the private sexual lives of adults. 4289. TONG, ROSEMARIE. "Lesbian Perspectives on
Women, Sex and the Law," in: Women, Sex and the Law. Totowa, NJ: Rowman and Allenheld, 1984, pp. 175-92. A survey of lesbian attitudes and political demands in such areas as
sado-masochism, family protection, pornography, heterosexual prostitution,
cross-generational sex, sexual harassment, and rape. 4290. VETRI, DOMENICK. "The Legal Arena: Progress for
Gay Civil Rights," JH, 5 (1979-80), 25-30. Asserts that contrary to some misperceptions, the homosexual
community does not seek special legal protection but equal treatment without
regard to one's sexual orientation. 4291. VON BEITEL, RANDY. "The Criminalization of
Private Sex Acts: A Jurisprudential Case Study of a Decision by the Texas Bar
Penal Code Revision Committee," Human Rights, 6 (1977), 23-73. On the question of the suitability of a state bar committee to decide
upon the criminalization of the private homosexual acts of consenting adults.
If the question were one of morality, then some moral philsophers should have
been included; if the considerations were empirical, then some psychologists
and sociologists were needed. The committee failed to include any
representatives of the homosexual community. 4292. WARNER, ARTHUR C. "Non-commercial Sexual
Solicitation: The Case for Judicial Invalidation," SexuaLaw Reporter, 4:1 (January-March 1978), 1, 10-20. Originally submitted as an amicus brief in the case of Pryor v.
Municipal Court to the Supreme Court of California. The victory in this case
was a landmark in legal reform in that state. 4293. WARNER, DOUGLAS. "Homophobia, 'Manifest Homosexuality,'
and Political Activity: A New Approach to Gay Rights and the 'Issue' of
Homosexuality," Golden Gate Law Review, 11 (1981), 635-716. On a California case in which the state Supreme Court held that
homosexual employees of a privately owned public utility could sue to
challenge the employer's policy of arbitrary discrimination against
homosexuals. 4310. WEISBERG, D. KELLY. "Children of the Night: The Adequacy of Statutory Treatment of Juvenile Prostitution," American Journal of Criminal
Law, 12 (1984),
1-67. Based largely on a San Francisco study, evaluates the workings of the
criminal justice system for both male and female juvenile prostitutes. 4311. WILKINSON, J. HARVIE, III, and G. EDWARD WHITE.
"Constitutional Protection for Personal Lifestyles," Cornell Law Review, 62 (1977), 563-625. Calls for a balanced and sensitive approach to the central dilemma
examined in the article. Accomodation must be reached with the rights of
dissident members of society, but not such as to leave the fabric of conventional
society without legal support. 4312. WILSON, LAWRENCE A., and RAPHAEL SHANNON. "Homosexual
Organizations and the Right of Association," Hastings Law Journal, 30 (1979), 1029-74. Examines a series of decisions in the area of gay rights, and
concludes that they can best be furthered through the litigation process when
the well-established right of association is used as the rationale for
challenging restrictive actions on the part of the state. 4313. WOLFF, BENNETT. "Expanding the Right of Sexual
Privacy," Loyola Law Review, 27 (1981), 1279-1300. On the constitutional challenge to the sodomy laws. By its summary
affirmation in Doe v. Commonwealth's Attorney, the Supreme Court failed to
provide the necessary guidance to state and federal courts as to the validity
of similar statutes proscribing consensual sodomy. On the other hand, the New
York State Court of Appeals, in its decision in Onofre, created a new
fundamental value for both right of privacy and equal protection claims. 4314. ZERINGER, BRIAN D. "Tort Liability of the State
for Injuries Suffered by Prisoners Due to Assault by Other Inmates," Tulane Law Review, 51 (1977), 1300-06. On a case in which an inmate of the Louisiana State Penitentiary was
fatally stabbed while attempting to move a newly admitted prisoner from a
dormitory where the latter had received threats upon his life. The Louisiana
Supreme Court affirmed the state's liability on the basis of the failure of
prison officials to take reasonable precautions against the attack. The sodomy laws are generally recognized as the linchpin on which
discrimination against homosexuals, legal and extralegal, depends.
Accordingly, much effort has gone into studying their origin, nature, and modus operandi
to prepare the way for the dismantling of this legislation. 4311. BADER, LOUIS. "Commonwealth v. Bonadio," Duquesne Law Review, 19 (1981), 793-800. On the 1980 Pennsylvania Supreme Court decision that struck down the
state's Deviate Sexual Intercourse statute. The court held that the statute
exceeded the valid bounds of the state's police power, and violated the equal
protection clauses of the the Federal and state constitutions. Compare D.
M.Barnhart, below. 4312. BARNETT, WALTER, and ARTHUR C. WARNER. Why Reform the Sodomy Laws? Princeton: National Committee for Sexual Civil
Liberties, 1971. 24 pp. This pithy and comprehensive marshalling of the arguments for reform
set the stage for the ensuing decade of progress. 4313. BARNHART, DEBRA MCCLOSKEY. "Commonwealth v.
Bonadio: Voluntary Deviate Intercourse—A Comparative Analysis," University of Pittsburgh Law
Review, 43 (1981),
253-84. Argues that such changes in the law reflect concurrent shifts in the
concept of the immoral and the unnatural. 4314. COONEY, LESLIE LARKIN. "Constitutional
Law—Right of Privacy—Sodomy Statutes—Supreme Court Summary Affirmance," Duquesne Law Review, 15 (1976), 123- 32. The Supreme Court's summary affirmance in Doe v. Commonwealth's
Attorney leaves the breadth of the right to privacy uncertain. Virginia and
states with like statutes can continue to criminalize intimate sexual
activity between consenting adults. 4315. "Deviate Sexual Behavior under the New Illinois
Criminal Code," Washington University Law Quarterly (1965), 220-35. The new Illiniois criminal code attempted to solve the problems
resulting from the existence of an ambiguous "crime against nature"
provision by regrouping the sanctions around four concerns considered to
fall within the scope of legislative activity. 4316. FADELEY, EDWARD N. "Sex Crime in the New
Code," Oregon Law Review, 51 (1972), 515-24. Victimless crimes have been eliminated from the Oregon Criminal Code,
but the age of consent to sexual intercourse has been raised to eighteen
without any social or psychological justification. 4317. FISHER, ROBERT G. "The Sex Offender Provisions
of the Proposed New Maryland Criminal Code: Should Private, Consenting,
Homosexual Behavior Be Ex- eluded?" Maryland Law Journal, 30 (1970), 91-113. The Sodomy and Perverted
Practice crimes should be redefined so that private consensual behavior
between adults is no longer prohibited, only homosexual rape and statutory
rape (where the victim in a minor). 4318. IGLOW, ROBERT A. "Oral Copulation: A
Constitutional Curtain Must Be Drawn," San Diego Law Review, 11 (1974), 523-34. California Penal Code Section 288(a), which prohibits oral copulation,
is unconstitutionally overbroad in that it is "an attempt by the State
to regulate atypical sexual behavior between consenting adults in private
and as such constitutes an unconstitutional infringement on the individual's
fundamental right to privacy in matters relating to sex. 4319. JOPLIN, LARRY E. "Criminal Law: One Examination
of the Oklahoma Laws concerning Sexual Behavior," Oklahoma Law Review, 23 (1970), 459-72. See esp. pp. 466-70, "The Crime against Nature." If society
were really opposed to adultery and private homosexuality, it would insist
that the present laws be rigidly upheld. It is unrealistic to
"legislate against sin where a clear consensus is lacking and social
change challenges old values." Retaining unenforceable laws forbidding
private sexual activity brings the law itself into disrespect. 4320. KATZ, KATHERINE D. "Sexual Morality and the
Constitution: People v. Onofre," Albany Law Review, 46 (1982), 311-62. On the landmark New York state decision, which
effectively decriminalized sodomy. As a matter of federal constitutional
law, society may not invoke criminal sanctions to punish sexual conduct
deemed immoral by the majority of the population unless harm to an interest
other than morality is demonstrated. 4321. KETCHAM, CARLETON P., JR. "Criminal Law—Sodomy
Statute Not Describing Prohibited Conduct but Referring Only to 'Crime
against Nature' Held Unconstitutionally Overbroad," Cumberland-Samford Law Review, 3 (1972), 525-31. In a Florida case, Franklin v. State, the Supreme Court of Florida
overturned the "crime against nature" statute on grounds of
vagueness and uncertainty. Though limited in its holding, Franklin can have a
far-reaching effect in that new laws will, it may hoped,
cope with real criminal activity rather than attempt to enforce a moral code. 4322. LEVINE, LAWRENCE CARL. "Pryor v. Municipal
Court: California's Narrowing Definitions of Solicitation for Public Lewd
Conduct," Hastings Law Journal, 32 (1980-81), 461-98. Examines the
conclusion of California's Supreme Court that the phrase "lewd or dissolute conduct"
[Calif. Penal Code, 647(a)] is unconstitutionally vague. However, Levine
warns that the decision may be weakened unless the court soon clarifies its
holding. 4323. O'NEILL, TIM. "Doe v. Commonwealth's Attorney:
A Set-back for the Right of Privacy," Kentucky Law Journal, 65 (1976-77), 748-63. The Supreme Court's decision that the Virginia sodomy statute had a
rational basis of state interest may lend credence to the continued existence
of these statutes as well as limit the right of personal privacy. 4324. RIZZO, JAMES J. "The Constitutionality of
Sodomy Statutes," Fordham Law Review, 45 (1976-77), 553- 95. Offers an overview of constitutional arguments against the statutes
including void for vagueness, overbreadth, cruel and unusual punishment,
right of privacy, and equal protection. 4325. SIMMONS, JOHN F. "Constitutional Law—Sodomy
Statutes: The Question of Constitutionality," Nebraska Law Review, 50 (1970-71), 567-75. On the Buchanan decision of the Nebraska Supreme Court, which extended legal protection to married couples, but not to
others. 4326. "State Statute Prohibiting Private Consensual
Sodomy is Constitutional," Brigham Toung University Law Review (1977), 170-88. On the United States Supreme Court's decision to uphold the Virginia
sodomy statute [Doe v. Commonwealth's Attorney (1976)]. It is generally recognized that there may be a gap between legal
theory and actual practice. Accordingly, it is necessary to examine courtroom
procedures with respect to possible prejudice on the part of judges, district
attorneys, and other significant figures. A special problem is the risk that
some openly homosexual attorneys run of disbarment under the "good moral
character" provisions of the bar. 4331. BAGNALL,
ROBERT G., PATRICK C. GALLAGHER, and JONI L. GOLDSTEIN. "Burdens on Gay
Litigants and Bias in the Court System: Homosexual Panic, Child Custody, and
Anonymous Parties," Harvard Civil Rights—Civil Liberties Law Review, 19 (1984), 497-559. Discusses the pleas of homicide defendants that they were the victims
of homosexual rape; restrictions on parental rights of gays; and the ability
of gay litigants to proceed anonymously. Courts are
urged to be sensitive to the special burdens on gays caused by the loss of
privacy. 4332. BLACKFORD, BARBARA. "Good Moral Character and
Homosexuality," Journal of the Legal Profession, 5 (1980), 139-49. Concludes that "at least under certain
circumstances, homosexual acts may illustrate to the bar that an attorney is
lacking good moral character." In an attorney honesty and
trustworthiness are essential. 4333. DRESSLER, JOSHUA. "Judicial Homophobia: Gay
Rights' Biggest Roadblock," The Civil Liberties Review (January-February 1979), 19-27. Shows the persistence of myths and emotional thinking in the courts. 4334. FARRELL, RONALD A. "Class Linkages of Legal
Treatment of Homosexuals," Criminology, 9 (1971), 49-68. Sociological study of 108 offenders held for court supports the
hypothesis that they show a disproportionately large number of offenders
from the lower classes, and that these offenders received more severe
treatment than comparable higher status persons. 4335. GOLDYN, LAWRENCE. "Gratuitous Language in Appellate
Cases Involving Gay People: 'Queer Baiting' from the Bench," Political Behavior, 3 (1981), 31-48. Although gay litigants are frequently the target of abuse, this
practice varies depending on the type of case and the level of court
involved. There is some indication that the abuse is declining. 4336. KNUTSON, DONALD. "Representing the Unpopular
Client ... Gays," Law Library Journal, 72 (1979), 677-79. Indicates three main problems confronting gay men: access to adequate
legal representation; need for anonymity; and homophobia in the legal system. 4337. LUDWIG, FREDERICK J. "Case for Repeal of the
Sex Corroboration Requirement in New York," Brooklyn Law Review, 36 (1970), 378-89. Article by the Chief Assist;ant District
Attorney, Queens County, who claims that the "corroboration requirement
has nullified the prosecution of practically every sex offense in the current
Penal Law." 4338. ROBERTS, LESLIE A. "Private Homosexual Activity
and Fitness to Practice Law: Florida Board of Bar Examiners in re
N.R.S," Mova Law Journal, 6 (1981- 82) , 519-34. The Florida Supreme Court denied the Board authority to question an applicant
regarding private homosexual conduct. 4339. SHAFFER, DAVID R., and THOMAS CASE. "On the
Decision to Testify in One's Own Behalf: Effects of Withheld Evidence,
Defendants' Sexual Preference, and Juror Dogmatism on Juridical Decisions, Journal of Personality and Social Psychology, 42 (1982), 335-46. A study of 360 University of Georgia students simulating roles as
jurors showed that while high dogmatic jurors were no more punitive to
homosexual than heterosexual defendants, jurors low in dogmatism were
actually more lenient toward homosexual than heterosexual defendents. 4340. SHERMAN, JEFFREY G. "Undue Influence and the
Homosexual Testator," University of Pittsburgh Law Review, 42 (1981), 225-67. Suggests that "a homosexual testator who bequeaths the bulk of
his estate to his lover stands in greater risk of having his testamentary
plans overturned than does a heterosexual testator who bequeaths the bulk of
his estate to a spouse or a lover." The risk may be somewhat reduced
through employing the device of adoption or the revocable inter vivos trust. 434OA. WILLIAMS, MARK A. "Homosexuality and the Good Moral Character Requirement," University of Detroit Journal of Urban Law, 56 (1978), 123-39. With respect to the bar, the
author argues that "[consensual homosexual conduct practiced discretely
in private no more jeopardizes the values protected by the good moral
character requirement than does consensual heterosexual conduct practiced
discretely in private." Unless this principle is followed, the bar will
become the ultimate arbiter of the private morals of its members. 4341. WILLICK,
DANIEL H., GRETCHEN GEHLKER, and ANITA M. WATTS. "Social Class as a
Factor Affecting Judicial Disposition: Defendants Charged with Criminal
Homosexual Acts," Criminology, 13 (1975), 55-77. Published data are reviewed, and it is concluded that evidence from
cases involving felonious homosexual acts does not lend much support to the
proposition that there is social class bias in judicial disposition of
criminal cases. Recent efforts to protect the employment rights of disadvantaged groups have suggested that similar strategies may
be pursued with respect to homosexual employees. This problem arises in
particular with teachers. See also "Teachers," XI.B. 4341A. BENEDICT, JAMES N. "Homosexuality and the Law — A Right to
Be Different," Albany Law Review, 38 (1973), 84-104. Primarily concerned with the
status of homosexuals in positions of public employment, providing an
analysis of some recent cases. Suggests possible grounds upon which future
constitutional challenges to existing discrimination may be founded. 4342. "Burton
v. Cascade School District Union High School," Brigham Young University Law
Review (1976), 531-48. On the discharge, in July 1970, of teacher Peggy
Burton, who filed an action under Section 1983 leading to her reinstatement. This note argues that the reinstatement
was a mistake. 4342A. CLARK, PENNY
M. "Homosexual Public Employees: Utilizing Section 1983 to Remedy Discrimination," Hastings Constitutional Law
Quarterly, 8 (1981), 255-311. The increasing role of government agencies renders it imperative to
use Section 1983 as a remedy for discrimination; other options should also
be pursued. 4343. CRUMPLER, WILLIAM B. "Administrative
Law—Constitutional Law—Is Government Policy Affecting the Employment of
Homosexuals Rational?" North Carolina Law Review, 48 (1970), 912-214. Hold that discharges should be considered on a case-by- case basis
according to the overall character and performance of the individual. 4343A. DAVIS, ELAINE. "Homosexuals in Government Employment: The
Boys in the Bureau," Seton Hall Law Review, 3 (1971), 89-107. The Grimm, Gayer, and Ulrich
decisions challenging the right of government agencies to withhold security
clearance from homosexuals set a precedent: homosexuals should certainly
also be allowed to hold jobs that do not involve national security as well.
Court tests are needed. 4344. DECKER, PHILIP J. "Homosexuality and
Employment: A Case Law Review," Personnel Journal, 59 (1980), 756-60. Societal factors, including changing attitudes and lifestyles, appear
to be influencing the direction of case law dealing with homosexual
employees. 4344A.
"Dismissal of Homosexuals from Government Employment: The Developing
Role of Due Process in Admin- istration Adjudications," Georgetown Law Journal, 58 (1970), 632-45. Legal background on advances in
the courts in the 'sixties, including Norton v. Macy, in which
a homosexual man was found to be unlawfully dismissed from his government
job. 4345. DRESSLER, JOSHUA. "Survey of School Principals Regarding
Alleged Homosexual Teachers in the Classroom: How Likely (Really) Is
Discharge?" University of Dayton Law Review, 10 (1985), 599-620. A substantial minority of
pricipals favor loss of licence if the teacher is a gay activist in the
classroom or outside it. But in practice the treatment of teachers has been
more lenient, and retention of a teacher accused of being homosexual rarely
causes long-term problems for the administrator. 4345A. FREIMANN, ARLENE. "Acanfora v. Board of Education: New
Interpretations on Standing; Section 1983 and Judicial Review of
Administrative Determination," Temple Law Quarterly, 48 (1975), 384-96. Complications ensuing from the
dismissal of a Pennsylvania teacher. 4346. FRIEDMAN, JOEL. "Constitutional and Statutory Challenges to Discrimination in Employment Based on Sexual
Orientation," Iowa Law Review, 64 (1978-79), 527-72. Examines employment practices that discriminate against homosexuals in
the light of governmental obligations under the Constitution and the Civil
Rights Acts of 1866 and 1964. 4346A.
"Government-created Employment Disabilities of the Homosexual," Harvard Law Review, 82 (1969), 1738- 51. Challenges the legal rationale used to exclude homosexuals from
federal civil service and from private employment. Suggests a program of
"graduated liberalization." 4347. "Government Employment and the Homosexual," St. Johns Law Review, 45 (1970-71), 303-23. Reviews recent cases
(Morrison, Norton, and Schlegel), indicating that dismissal of homosexuals is
counterproductive, inasmuch as it makes it more
difficult for them to lead socially useful lives. 4347A. GRAHAM, KATHLEEN M. "Security Clearances for Homosexuals," Stanford Law Review, 25 (1972-73), 403-29. Details the operations of the Industrial Security Clearance Review
Office, the agency that processes security clearances and continues to deny
them to homosexuals, despite court victories in Ulrich and Gayer. 4348. HANSEN, KENT A. "Gaylord v. Tacoma School
District No. 10: Homosexual Held Immoral for Purposes of Teacher
Discharge," Willamette Law Journal, 14 (1977), 101-14. Reviews the case, including legal background and the rationale for the
decision. See also John H. Lowe, "Homosexual Teacher Dismissal: A
Deviant Dismissal," Washington Law Review, 53 (1977), 499-510 (critical of the court's findings). 4348A. HEDGPETH,
JUDITH M. "Employment Discrimination Law and the Rights of Gay
Persons," JH, 5 (1979- 80), 67-78. While considerable progress has been achieved in the struggle against
employment discrimination against homosexuals, administrative and judicial
protection has generally been sporadic and unreliable. 4349. HOFFMAN, STEPHEN CLARE. "Analysis of Rationales
in Homosexual Public Employment Cases," South Dakota Law Review, 23 (1978), 338-57. Concludes that the most common arguments used against homosexuals—the
prevention of activity contrary to public mores, the prevention of emotional
instability in employees, and the prevention of the spread of
homosexuality--do not seem to stand up under close examination.
"[EJither the policy of refusing relief to discharged homosexuals should
be abandoned or a firmer basis for its application should be found." 4349A.
"Homosexual Public Employees and the Right to Privacy," Harvard Law Review, 97 (1984), 1753-56. The arguments revisited. 4350. JOHNSON, LEE ANN. "Gay Law Students Ass'n v.
Pac'c Tel' & Tel' Co.: Constitutional and Statutory Restraints on
Employment Discrimination against Homosexuals by Public Utilities," California Law Review, 68 (1980), 680-715. The California Supreme Court found three distinct sources of law that
bar a public utility from engaging in arbitrary employment discrimination:
the equal protection clause in the California constitution; section 453(a) of
the Public Utilities Code; and sections 1101 and 1102 of the Labor Code. 4351. KAMENY, FRANK. "Government Grants Richard Gayer
Security Clearance," Vector, 7:10 (October 1971), 32-33, 53. On the advice of Kameny, a gay activist and lay advocate, Gayer, a
civil service employee successfully fought employment discrimination. 4352. KNUTSON, KIRBIE. "Constitutional Law—Due Process—Dismissal
of a Transsexual from a Tenured Teaching Position in a Public School," Wisconsin Law Review (1976), 670-89. In the case of Paula Grossman, a dismissed tenured
teacher, the New Jersey Superior Court, Appellate Division, upheld the
dismissal on the grounds that her negative impact hindered her effectiveness
as a teacher. 4353. LAMORTE, MICHAEL W. "Legal Rights and
Responsibilities of Homosexuals in Public Education," Journal of Law and Education, 4 (1975), 449-67. Examines reported decisions dealing with hiring, contract renewal or
dismissal, and revocation of teaching certificates. Perceives an emerging
pattern that it is incumbent on the employer to demonstrate that a dismissed
teacher's homosexuality interferes with his or her actual performance (the
nexus test), 4354. LAVINE, KAREN S. "Free Speech Rights of
Homosexual Teachers," Columbia Law Review, 80 (1980), 1513-34. Examines the extent to which the First Amendment protects teachers who
discuss the subject of homosexuality in class. 4355. LEONARD, ARTHUR S. "Employment Discrimination
against Persons with AIDS," University of Dayton Law Review, 10 (1985), 681-703. Innovative use of the existing statutory framework, focusing on the
disease itself, should provide significant protection for many who suffer
discrimination because of the AIDS crisis. 4356. LEVINE, ELLEN. "Legal Rights of Homosexuals in
Public Employment," Annual Survey of American Law (1978), 455-91. Analyzes the leading cases in the fields of teaching and federal
government service, showing use of the nexus test and First Amendment claims. 4357. MEEKER, JAMES W., et al. "State Law and Local
Ordinances in California Barring Discrimination on the Basis of Sexual
Orientation," University of Dayton Law Review, 10 (1985), 745-65. Local ordinances are most effective in filling the void that is
currently left by state statutes and the common law. It remains questionable,
however, whether the protection afforded is of any substance or is primarily
a symbolic gesture. 4358. MYERS, JOHN E. B. "Singer v. U.S. Civil Service
Commission: Dismissal of Government Employee for Advocacy of Homosexuality," Utah Law Review (1976), 172-85. Singer was dismissed as a clerk typist in federal employment for
"immoral and notoriously disgraceful conduct." The dismissal was
upheld by the Ninth Circuit Court of Appeals. The article explores the
relevant legal principles, claiming that "the Singer opinion marks a
major reversal in the current trend of cases." 4359. PEARLDAUGHTER, ANDRA. "Employment
Discrimination against Lesbians: Municipal Ordinances and Other
Remedies," Golden Gate University Law Review, 8 (1979), 537-58. In addition to pursuing existing remedies for the double
discrimination that lesbians may be subjected to, electoral and legislative
initiatives are needed. 4360. "Remedial Balancing Decisions and the Rights of
Homosexual Teachers: A Pyrrhic Victory," Iowa Law Review, 61 (1976), 1080-98. Problems of teachers' rights are highlighted by a recent decision of
the Ninth Circuit, Burton v. Cascade School District Union High School No. 5. 4361. RUBINSTEIN, RONALD A., and PATRICIA B. FRY. Of a Homosexual Teacher:
Beneath the Mainstream of Constitutional Equalities. Frederick, MD: Associated Faculty Press, 1981. 92
pp. Also in: Texas Southern University Law Review, 6 (1981), 183-275. Reflections based on the
disturbing ramifications of the Gaylord case, where a highly competent
teacher was removed because of his homosexual orientation. 4362. SCHOLZ, JEANNE L. "Out of the Closet, Out of a
Job: Due Process in Teacher Disqualification," Hastings Constitutional Law
Quarterly, 6 (1978-79), 663-717. Presents the legal-conceptual background and a review of leading
cases. Argues that "any morally based disqualification of teachers for
conduct which is private and consensual, or which is otherwise protectible
under the First Amendment, offends due process because it is patently
arbitrary." 4363. SHAFFER, JOHN SCOTT, JR. "The Boundaries of a
Church's First Amendment Rights as an Employer," Case Western Reserve Law
Review, 31 (1981),
363-85. Focuses on issues raised by a church's discharge of a homosexual
employeee under the Free Exercise clause, the Establishment Clause, and
general constitutional theory. Concludes that providing certain conditions
are met, a church's dismissal of a homosexual employee may be upheld. 4364. SINISCALCO, GARY R. "Homosexual Discrimination
in Employment," Santa Clara Law Review, 16 (1976), 495-512. Analyzes recent legal developments, esp. as regards the law governing
private employment. Studies of adverse impact in the private sector may
elicit beneficial government prodding. 4365. TEWKSBURY, MICHAEL D. "Gaylord and Singer: Washington's
Place in the Emerging Laws Concerning Homosexuals," Gonzaga Law Review, 14 (1978), 167-96. Discusses two cases—one involving a teacher, the other a clerk typist
in federal employment, related cases, and other areas of the law in relation
to homosexuality.
WEIN, STUART A.,
and CYNTHIA LARK REMMERS. "Employment Protection and Gender Dysphoria:
Legal Definitions of Unequal Treatment on the Basis of Sex and
Disability," Hastings Law Journal, 30 (1979), 1079-1130. Argues that "gender dysphoria persons who have already borne the
psychological and social stigma of their condition, should bear no special
legal burden because of a a sexual characteristic
having no relation to their ability to perform and contribute."
WISE, DONNA L.
"Challenging Sexual Preference Discrimination in Private
Employment," Ohio State Law Journal, 41 (1980), 501-31. Argues that in addition to pursuing existing remedies, as provided by
federal civil rights statutes, state statutes, and the common law, supporters
of homosexual rights need to secure new protective legislation. Although most legal sanctions against homosexual behavior are focused
in the states, immigration is under federal jurisdiction. In this field the
situation is complicated and difficult to resolve without remedial
legislation to undo the discriminatory provisions that have been added to the
law ever since homosexuality came to be recognized as a "mental
illness" in the second decade of this century.
BOGATIN, MARC. "Immigration and Nationality Act and the
Exclusion of Homosexuals: Boutelier v. INS Revisited," 2 (1981), 359-96. Analyzes the effects of the 1952 McCarran-Walter Act [section 212(a)
(4)], esp. with regard to the interface of the medical profession and federal
administrative agencies.
FOWLER, PETER N.. and LEONARD GRAFF. "Gay
Aliens and Immigration: Resolving the Conflict between Hill and
Longstaff," University of Dayton Law Review, 10 (1985), 621-44. The Fifth and Ninth Circuits have reached contradictory conclusions
regarding the requirement of a medical certificate in medical exclusion
cases. The issue may be ultimately be resolved by Congressional enactment.
"Homosexual
Resident Alien Deportable as a Psychopathic Personality," Catholic Lawyer, 13 (1967), 82-90. Concludes that "[w]hile the choice of whom to admit is rightfully
left to Congress, there is little doubt that changes are needed in the area
of deportation." Present law and practice are contradictory and
unpredictable.
"Immigration
and Naturalization: Good Moral Character Requirement is a Question of
Federal Law," Suffolk Transnational Law Journal, 6 (1982), 383-94. On Nemetz v. INS (647 F. 2d 432). See also: "Immigration—Aliens—The Invalidation
of a Homosexual Marriage for Immigration Purposes,"
ibid., 7 (1983), 267-78 (on Adams v. Howerton, 673 F 2d 1036).
LEGGETT, WALTER E.
"Immigration and Naturalization—Petition for Naturalization," Georgia Journal of
International and Comparative Law, 6 (1976), 333-38. On the Brodie case, concerning an alien who had served honorably in
the United States Army for two years.
POZNANSKI, ROBERT.
"The Propriety of Denying Entry to Homosexual Aliens: Examining the
Public Health Service's Authority over Medical Exclusions," University of Michigan Journal
of Law Reform, 17 (1984), 331-59. The fate of homosexual aliens wishing to enter, reside in, or become
citizens of the United States remains unsettled, The resolution of this
conflict depends upon a determinaton of the Public Health Service's role in
the exclusionary process. The writer holds that the INS should acknowledge
the authority of the PHS by complying with the decision to not to exclude
aliens on grounds of homosexuality.
REYNOLDS, WILLIAM
T. "The Immigration and Nationality Act and the Rights of Homosexual
Aliens," JH, 5 (1979-80), 79-87. While prospects for naturalization of openly gay aliens have improved
in recent years, the present statutory and administrative frameworks are
still riddled with exceptions and outdated standards.
ROBERTS, MAURICE A.
"Sex and the Immigration Laws," San Diego Law Review, 14 (1976), 9-41. Surveying a range of sexual activities, including adultery,
homosexuality, prostitution, and sham marriage, the writer concludes that
changes are long overdue.
SEDLAK, ERIC W.
"Nemetz v. INS: The Rights of Gay Aliens under the Constitutional
Requirement of Uniformity and Mutable Standards of Moral Turpitude," New York University Journal of
International Law and Politics, 16 (1984), 881-912. Concerns a petition of naturalization and the
issue of variation in the state laws on homosexuality. 4366. SILVERS, SAMUEL M. "The Exclusion and Expulsion
of Homosexual Aliens," Columbia Human Rights Law Review, 15 (1984), 295-332. Examines recent contradictory decisions against a background that
begins in the 1952 McCarran-Walters Act. Concludes that our constitutional
ideals require that we welcome aliens rather than exclude them on arbitrary
bases such as homosexuality. 4367. WINDHAM, MELISSA QUINN. "Aliens—Immigration and
Naturalization Service Policy of Excluding Homosexual Aliens without a
Medical Certificate is Invalid. Hill v. United States Immigration and
Naturalization Service. 714 F. 2d 1470," Vanderbilt Journal of
Transnational Law, 16 (1983), 689-709. On the case of an English visitor who was turned away at San
Francisco. The district court opinion in this case was exceedingly
far-reaching, invalidating the INS policy that excluded homosexuals without a
medical certificate and, more significantly, broadening judicial review of
exclusion policies. The Ninth Circuit, however, narrowed the district court's
holding to the point that congressional power over exclusion will remain
undaunted. While in practice the (nonlegal) definition of couples (see XIV.H) has
been broadened to include homosexual and lesbian dyads, the question of
whether unions between two persons of the same sex should receive official
sanction remains uncertain. Even many prohomosexual persons would say that
such a recognition would not be desirable, and it
seems that this is an idea whose time has not yet come—if indeed it ever
will. For problems related to the custody of children, see XVIII.D. 4379. BUCHANAN, G. SIDNEY. "Same-Sex Marriage: The Linchpin Issue," University of Dayton Law Review, 10 (1985), 541-73. A modified version of a chapter
in the author's book Morality, Sex and the Constitution: A Christian
Perspective on the Power of Government to Regulate Private Sexual Conduct
between Consenting Adults (1985). Argues that recognition of same-sex
marriages poses a significant threat to the values traditionally promoted by
opposite- sex marriage. Buchanan concedes that non-recognition impinges on
the right of privacy. 4380. COBURN, VINCENT P. "Homosexuality and the
Invalidation of Marriage," Jurist, 20 (1960), 441-59. Examines heterosexual marriage in which one partner is homosexual from
the point of view of canon law, esp. with respect to annulment. 4381. COLE, ROB. "Two Men Ask Minnesota License for
First Legal U.S. Gay Marriage: Take Advantage of Vague Law, Expect Court Case
to Follow," Advocate, no. 35 (June 10-23, 1970), pp. 1, 4. First widely publicized effort (by Minnesotans James McConnell and
Jack Baker) to obtain a valid marriage certificate; the effort ultimately
failed. 4382. CULLEM, CATHERINE M. "Fundamental Interests and
the Question of Same-Sex Marriage," Tulsa Law Journal, 15 (1979),
141-63. Argues that the individual's fundamental right to enter the marital
relationship is broad enough to encompass same-sex marriage. 4383. ELLISTON, FREDERICK. "Gay Marriage," in:
R. Baker and F. Elliston (eds.), Philosophy and Sex. Buffalo: Prometheus Books, 1984, pp. 146-66. Philosophical reflections tending to justify legal sanction for
homosexual unions. 4384. HANSEN, TED L. "Domestic Relations—Minnesota
Marriage Statute Does Not Permit Marriage between Persons of the Same Sex and
Does Not Violate Constitutionally Protected Rights," Drake Law Review, 22 (1972), 206-12. The negative decision in Baker v. Nelson (Minn. 1971), did not provide
the answer to the question of whether there is sufficient moral or medical
reason to restrict the right to same-sex marriage. 4385. "Homo sexuals Right to Marry: A Constitutional
Test and a Legislative Solution," University of Pennsylvania
Law Review, 128 (1979), 193-216. In decisions beginning in the early 1970s, homosexual couples were
repeatedly denied the possibility of marriage. The article explores the
issue by a comparative analysis, arguing that the concept of equal protection
means that marriage restrictions are unconstitutional: "the state must
afford homosexuals the opportunity to make a marriage commitment." 4386. INGRAM, J. D. "A Constitutional Critique of
Restrictions on the Right to Marry—Why Can't Fred Marry George—or Mary and
Alice at the Same Time?" Journal of Contemporary Law, 10 (1984), 33-55. Advances arguments supporting same-sex unions, while conceding that
this is not yet an idea whose time has come. 4387. KENNY, WALTER F., REV. "Homosexuality and Nul- lity—Developing Jurisprudence," Catholic Lawyer, 17 (1971), 110-22. Concludes with respect to
ecclesiastical tribunals: "We now have a basis in jurisprudence for
annulling the marriage of homosexuals and other deviates." 4388. "The Legality of Homosexual Marriage," Yale Law Review, 82 (1973), 573-89. Concludes that "[t]he stringent requirements of the proposed
Equal Rights Amendment argue strongly for . . . granting marriage licenses to
homosexual couples who satisfy reasonable and non-discriminatory
qualifications." 4389. RITTER, GEORGE P. "Property Rights of Same-Sex
Couples: The Outlook after Marvin," Loyola of Los Angeles Law
Review, 12 (1979),
409-23. Arguments can be made that Marvin's [a heterosexual cohabitation
case] contractual and equitable remedies should extend to couples of the same
sex. 4390. SCHMIDT, JOHN R. "Homosexuality and Validity of
Marriage—A Study of Homopsychosexual Inversion," Catholic Lawyer, 19 (1973),
84-101 and 169-99; and 21 (1975), 85-121. Reprinted from Jurist, 32 (1972), 381-99 and 494-530. Extensively documented study seeking to combine
psychiatric and canon-law perspectives. Homosexual persons may be so
disturbed as to make their condition "fatally detrimental to the
matrimonial consortium." 4391. SILVERSTEIN, ARTHUR J. "Constitutional Aspects
of the Homosexual's Right to a Marriage License," Journal of Family Law, 12 (1973), 607-34. Concludes that propsects for acceptance of homosexual marriage are
uncertain for they turn upon future societal developments which are difficult
to predict, inasmuch as the law of equal protection at present provides no
clear guidance. 4392. THOMAS, PAUL K. "Marriage Annulments for Gay Men
and Lesbian Women: New Canonical and Psychological Insights," Jurist 43 (1983), 318-42. Seeks to go beyond Schmidt, above, and Tobin, below. 4393. TOBIN, WILLIAM J. Homosexuality and Marriage: A Canonical Evaluation on the Relationship of Homosexuality
to the Validity of Marriage in the Light of Recent Rotal Jurisprudence. Rome: Catholic Book Agency,
1964. Discusses two bases for annulling a marriage where one party suffers
from "mental illness": (1) his consent is deficient; (2) he is
unfit to undertake, fulfill, and receive marital rights (contractus matrimonialis
inexis- tens). 4394. VEITCH, EDWARD. "Essence of Marriage—A Comment on the Homosexual Challenge," Anglo-American Law Review, 5 (1976), 41-49. Concludes, after reviewing several
Canadian and US cases, that "there would appear to be a distinct state
advantage in the recognition of same-sex marriage." The attempt to extend homosexual rights to the military is difficult,
owing to the fact that military justice does not recognize many of the civil
rights protections that are enshrined in our general legal situation. In addition,
the armed services have fought doggedly to retain their right to exclude male
homosexuals and lesbians from service, despite the prevalence of the latter
in women's branches of the military. 4395. CANEPA, THERESA J. "Aftermath of Saal v. Middendorf:
Does Homosexuality Preclude Military Fitness?" Santa Clara Law Review, 22 (1982), 491-511. Navy servicewoman Mary Sal was honorably discharged, but assigned an
enlistment code that made her ineligible for reenlistment. Although the
district court found in her favor, this was reversed by the US Court of
Appeals, Ninth Circuit. 4396. CARBETTA-SCANDY, KELLY. "The Armed Services Continued
Degradation and Expulsion of Their Homosexual Members: Dronenburg v.
Zech," University of Cincinnati Law Review, 54 (1986), 1055-67. Criticizes the decision of the United States District Court for the
District of Columbia in a Navy case for inconsistency and insufficiency of
judicial reasoning. 4397. DEITER, LAWRENCE R. "Employment Discrimination
in the Armed Services—An Analysis of Recent Decisions Affecting Sexual
Preference Discrimination'in the Military," Villanova Law Review, 27 (1981-82), 351- 73. Discusses recent cases which "have left the law in a perplexing
state of uncertainty." 4398. DUBAN, PATRICIA DODGE. "Matlovich v. Secretary
of the Air Force, 591 F. 2d 852 (D.C. Cir. 1978)," Dnquesne Law Review, 18 (1979), 151-60. Reviews the denial of the action filed in the U.S. District Court for
the District of Columbia by Sergeant Leonard Matlovich to restrain the Air
Force from discharging him. 4399. EVERHARD, JOHN A. "Problems Involving .the
Disposition of Homosexuals in the Service," United States Air Force Judge Advocate General's Bulletin, 2 (1960)
,
20-23. Traditional interpretation holding that a known homosexual is a
liability to a military organization by lowering the "moral fiber"
of the military community. 4400. HEILMAN, JOHN. "The Constitutionality of
Discharging Homosexual Military Personnel," Columbia Human Rights Law Review, 12 (1980), 191-204. After a review of some salient cases, concludes: "The military's
[negative] policy toward homosexuality has led to extensive litigation. The
policy is irrational to some extent, unnecessary to some extent, and unwise in toto. 4401. HIRSCHHORN, JAMES M. "Due Process in Undesirable Discharge Proceedings," University of Chicago Law
Review, 41 (1973),
164-89. Holds that the present regulations governing undesirable discharges
are unsatisfactory inasmuch as they do not afford service personnel
intelligent standards of behavior and the rights necessary to contest fully
the basis for the discharge action. 4402. "Homosexuals in the Military," Fordham Law Review, 37 (1969), 465-76. Discusses some of the problems and inequities of the military
treatment of the homosexual, in the hope that a réévaluation will lead to a more rational approach. 4403. HOWARD, ROLAND (pseud.). "The Homosexual's
Right to Serve," Mattachine Review, 8:12 (December 1962), 4-13. Argument by a patriotic homophile for access to military service, 4404. JONES, WILLIAM K., CLIFFORD DOUGHERTY, and NORMAN
LYNCH. "The Administrative Discharge—Military Justice?" George Washington University
Law Review, 33 (1964), 498-528. Documents the relatively harsh methods of military separation that
became common towards the end of World War II. 4405. LERNER, HARRY V. "Effect of Character of Discharge
and Length of Service on Eligibility to Veterans' Benefits," Military Law Review, 12 (1961)
,
121-42. Discusses loss of benefits to those discharged under "conditions
less than honorable," including Veterans Administration regulations. 4406. LODA, GIFFORD. "Homosexual Conduct in the Military: No Faggots in Military
Woodpiles," Arizona State Law Journal (1983), 79-112. Argues that
decisions supporting blanket proscriptions of homosexual behavior unfairly reject the key issue
of procedural due process, "[W]here the conduct in question is private
and consensual the only appropriate [procedure] is the individualized
fitness hearing." 4407. LUNDING, CHRISTOPHER J. "Judicial Review of
Military Discharges," Yale Law Journal, 83 (1973), 33-74. General discussion of types of discharge, hearings, consequences, and
remedial bases for judicial relief. 4408. LYNCH, NORMAN B. "The Administrative Discharge:
Changes Needed?" Maine Law Review, 22 (1970), 141-69. Points out changes in the military administrative discharge process
which either do or may cause injustice. There is a need for adequate
protections and due process of law for service personnel subjected to
dismissal proceedings. 4409. SEIDENBERG, FAITH. "Military Justice is to
Justice ..." Criminal Law Bulletin, 17 (1981), 45-59. Personal account by a Syracuse NY attorney of a case involving an Air
Force second lieutenant illustrating the arbitrary workings of the military
justice system. 4410. WEST, LOUIS, and ALBERT GLASS. "Sexual Behavior
and Military Law," in: Ralph Slovenko (ed.), Sexual Behavior and the Law. Springfield, IL: Charles C. Thomas, 1965, pp.
250-72. Asserts that the primary objective of the military should be the
prompt elimination of homosexuals, rather than harsh management or punitive
discharge. 4411. WILLIAMS, COLIN J., and MARTIN S. WEINBERG.
"The Military: Its Processing of Accused Homosexuals," American Behavioral Scientist, 14 (1970), 203-17. Reviews the process whereby homosexuals are discharged from the armed
forces, demonstrating how constitutional rights are infringed. See also their Homosexuals and the Military:
A Study of Less than Honorable Discharge« (New York: Harper and Row, 1971; 221 pp.). XXI. LAW ENFORCEMENT Police surveillance of homosexuals —attested apparently for the first
time in 18th-century France (see III.G)--has served to fuel animosity between
police and gay people, aggravated in some instances by bigoted attitudes on
the part of officers who believed that they had a moral obligation to punish
"deviates" because society was failing to penalize them. Particular
problems have been the aggressive activities of vice squads, and, especially
in North America, police harassment of bars, ostensibly to enforce liquor
laws (see XIV.D). Under these circumstances corruption was rife. In recent
decades this confrontational relationship has begun to change thanks to
better educated, more tolerant officers, the gradual dismantling of legal sanctions, and the admission of openly gay and lesbian
officers to the force. 4412. AANDEWIEL, JAN, THEO VAN SOERLAND, and PETER VAN WEERT. Politie
en Homoseksualiteit. Utrecht:
Homostudies, 1985. 99 pp. Studies by three Dutch police officers of gay-police relations and of
gays and lesbians who are police officers in the Netherlands. 4413. AVERILL, BRETT, and LENNY GITECK. "On the Beat
with Gay Cops," Advocate, no. 317 (May 14, 1981), 15-17. Reports from New York City and San Francisco. See also Gitecks's
earlier story: "Recruiting Gay Rookies," Advocate, no. 276 (September 20, 1979), 20-23; as well as Thom Willenbecher and Scott Anderson,
"Police-Gay Relations," Advocate, no. 291 (May 1, 1980), 13-15. 4414. BASKETT, EDWARD EUGENE. Entrapped: An Accused Homosexual Looks at American
Justice. Westport, CT: Lawrence Hill, 1976. 151 pp. Personal record of an uphill struggle against discriminatory law
enforcement in Long Beach, CA. See also Roy McCoy, Entrapment (Los Angeles: Argyle Books, 1965; 160 pp.). 4415. BERNSTEIN, HAL. "When a Cop Comes Out," Mandate (July 1981), 48-52. On Steve Horn of Mesa, AZ, who was dismissed, appealing the case
without success to the U.S. Supreme Court. 4416. BUSH, LARRY. "Has the FBI Been in Your
Closet?" Advocate, no. 346 (July 8, 1982), 16-20, 24. The functioning at least since 1954 of a concerted nationwide
surveillance and investigation program by the FBI into the lives of wealthy,
prominent closeted homosexuals, as well as gay civil rights groups, was
confirmed by senior FBI officials and substantiated by FBI documents acquired
under the Freedom of Information Act. 4417. "Clandestine Police Surveillance of Public
Toilet Booth Held to Be Unreasonable Search," Columbia Law Review, 63 (1963), 955-61. Clandestine surveillance of an enclosed public john booth—a common
police practice during the period--was ruled unreasonable search if there is
not probable cause to believe that a particular illegal act is being committed
at the time. See also: Clare W. Kyler, "Camera Surveillance of Sex
Deviates," Law and Order, 11 (1963), 16-18, 20; and William F. McKee, "Camera Surveillance
of Sex Deviates: Evidentiary Problems," ibid.,
12 (1964), 72- 74. 4418. ELLIOTT, RICHARD H. "Enforcement of Laws
Directed at Homosexuals: A Typical Metropolitan Approach," Drum, no. 26 (September 1967), 10-13, 26-28. Documents a pattern of solicitation arrests by the Philadelphia
Police Morals Squad. For a detailed picture of another city during this
period, see John J. Gallo et al., "The Consenting Adult Homosexual and
the Law: An Empirical Study of Enforcement and Administration in Los Angeles
County," UCLA Law Review, 13 (1966), 643-832. 4419. FARRELL, RONALD A. "Class Linkages of Legal
Treatment of Homosexuals," Criminology, 9 (May 1971), 49-68. Analysis of court case records of 108 homosexual offenders shows that
men from the lower class are disproportionately involved in such offenses,
receiving harsher penalties as well. 4420. FIAUX, LOUIS. La police des moeurs en France et dans les
principaux pays de l'Europe. Paris: E. Dentu, 1888. 1010 pp. In this massive study of the operation of police vice squads
throughout Europe, see pp. 15, 26, 135-50, 919-23, which discuss arrests of
homosexuals (including false arrests). 4421. FREIBERG, PETER. "Gays and Police: Old
Problems, New Hope," Advocate, no. 422 (June 11, 1985), 10-11, 19. Surveys gay-police relations, esp. gay people as police, in a number
of cities. 4422. FREIBERG, PETER. "Policing Rest-Stop Sex,"
Advocate, no. 449 (June 24, 1986), 10-11, 22-23. On the the arrests of 41 Michigan men at their homes, after allegedly
engaging in rest-stop sex. 4423. GROEN, K. Kamer 13: Hallo hier de zedenpolitie. The Hague: Daamen, 1951. 223 pp. Memoirs of the chief of the Amsterdam
vice squad. See also his: Misdaad in de hoofdstad (The Hague: Daamen, 1955; 192 pp.). 4424. GUYOT, YVES. La prostitution. Paris: Charpentier, 1882. 577 pp. See pp. 60, 68, 107-08, 110 and 113-14 for police surveillance of
homosexuals. See also the English version: Prostitution under the
Regulation System, French and English (London: Redway, 1884; 348 pp.). 4425. HONGISTO, RICHARD. "Why Are There No Gay Choir
Boys? Ask Your Friendly Chief of Police," Perspectives, 12 (1980), 39-42. San Francisco official explores police-management homophobia. See
also: Pam David, and Lois Helmbold, "San Francisco: Courts and Cops vs.
Gays," Radical America, 12 (1979), 27-32; and Randy Shilts, "Police Come to Terms with
the Gay Community," Police Magazine, 3 (January 1980), 218-31, 34-36. 4426. JACOBS, HAROLD. "Decoy Enforcement of
Homosexual Laws," University of Pennsylvania Law Review, 112 (1963), 259-84. While the writer supports continuation of the
practice, he concedes that it poses legal problems. 4427. KEARFUL, JAMES F. "The New Nazism," ONE Magazine, 11:5 (May 1963), 5-11. Homophile writer's analysis of the links between street crime, police
repression, and the homosexual as scapegoat. 4428. KEPNER, JIM (ed.). Quotations from Chief Ed. Los Angeles: Gay Radio Collective, 1976. 31 pp. Collection of anti-gay
comments by Chief Ed Davis of Los Angeles, together with Kepner's commentary
on police activity during the period. Since retiring from the force Davis has
entered the State Assembly, where he has emerged as a friend of gay people. 4429. KIRKWOOD, JAMES, JR. American Grotesque. New York: Simon and Schuster, 1970. 669 pp. Revealing exposure of New Orleans District Attorney's self-serving
gay-baiting in his futile attempt to prove that Clay Shaw led a conspiracy to
kill President Kennedy. 4430. MASSA, ROBERT. "One of New York's Finest," Village Voice (November 25, 1981), 15, 106. On the coming out of Sgt. Charles Cochrane, who says: "I love
being a cop and I love being gay and I'm not ashamed of either."
Subsequently, Cochrane and some associates formed the Gay Officers' Action
League (GOAL). 4431. PROTHERO, BARRY. "Police," Gay News (London), no. 204 (November-December 1980), 12-13. Shows
continuing harassment and oppression of gay people by the British police. 4432. ROSEN, STEVEN A. "Police Harassment of
Homosexual Women and Men in New York City, 1960-1980," Columbia Human Rights Law
Review, 12:2
(1980-81), 159-90. Useful retrospective study, particularly for the crackdown in the
1960s under Mayor Robert Wagner, Jr. 4433. SHERMAN, LAWRENCE W. Police Corruption. Garden City, NY: Anchor Books, 1974. 346 pp. In this overview of a perennial problem, see pp. 8, 179-80, 313-14. 4434.
TRESCKOW,
HANS VON. Von Fürsten und anderen
Sterblichen. Berlin: Fontane, 1922. 240 pp. Recollections of a Berlin police official concerning the Krupp and Eulenburg
scandals, and the situation of the homosexual subculture in the Wilhelmine
capital. 4435. WILSON, GEORGE P., et al. "State Intervention
and Victimless Crimes: A Study of Police Attitudes," Journal of Police Science and
Administration, 13 (1985), 22-29. Questionnaires completed by 88 officers show that the majority did not
consider vice a serious problem, saw no public mandate to increase current
surveillance procedures, and tended to believe that it is futile to attempt
to control victimless crimes. Sodomy laws, primarily directed against male homosexuals, have caused
the incarceration of homosexuals as such. Yet by far the greatest number of homosexual acts in prison are committed by those
who have led predominately heterosexual lives "outside" and who
generally revert to this behavior pattern on release. The male prison
subculture has preserved a premodern form in which the role of the active
partner (who usually continues to think of himself as "straight")
is sharply distinguished from that of the passive one, who bears the full
stigma attached to the effeminate homosexual. 4436. ABBOTT, JACK HENRY. In the Belly of the Beast. New York: Random House, 1981. 166 pp. Reflections of a
"Marxist-Leninist" convict who, in a well-publicized case, having
obtained his release in part through the intervention of his admirer Norman
Mailer, then committed murder in New York. 4437. ADLEMAN, ROBERT H. Alias Big Cherry: The Confessions
of a Master Criminal. New York: Dial Press, 1973. 334 pp. Reminiscences of Sylvan Scolnick, with some indications of prison sex. 4438. AKERS, RONALD L., et al. "Homosexual and Drug
Behavior in Prison: A Test of the Functional and Importation Models of the
Inmate System," Social Problems, 21 (1974), 410-22. Finds that the amount of drug and homosexual behavior among inmates
was more a function of the type of prison than of the social characteristics
which they brought with them from the outside. 4439. AMRAIN, KARL. "Beiträge zur Erforschung des Trieblebens," Anthropophyteia, 5 (1908), 361-69. On homosexuality in German prisons. See also his: "Ge- fangnispoesie," ibid., 9 (1912), 329-32; and Johannes Jaeger, "Hinter Kerkermauern: Autobiographien, Selbstbe- kentnisse, etc. von Verbrechern," Archiv für Kriminalanthropologie und Kriminalistik, 19 (1904), 1-48. 4440. APPERT, BENJAMIN NICOLAS MARIE. Bagnes, prisons et criminels. Paris: Guibert, 1836. 4 vols. Pioneering comprehensive study of conditions in French prisons. 4441. BARTOLLAS, CLEMENS, et al. "The 'Booty Bandit':
A Social Role in a Juvenile Institution," JH, 1 (1974-75), 203-212. The booty bandit is a sexual exploiter of weaker males in juvenile
correctional institutions. An inmate pecking order defines who becomes
exploited. See also their: Juvenile Victimization: The Institutional Paradox (New York: Wiley, 1976; 324 pp.). 4442. BARTOLLAS, CLEMENS, and CHRISTOPHER M. SIEVERDES.
"The Sexual Victim in a Coeducational Juvenile Correctional
Institution," Prison Journal (Philadelphia), 58 (1983), 80-90. In training schools in a southeastern state, sexual victims are usually 14 or 15 years old; they include both males and females, as well as equal proportions of blacks and whites. Sexual exploiters are frequently older black youths. 4443.
BARWASSER,
KARLHEINZ A. Schwulenhetz im Knast: eine
Dokumentation. Bielefeld: Pusteblume, 1982. 162 pp. Problems of gays in
West German prisons, by an inmate. 4444. BELLONI, GIULIO. Eros incatenato. Milan: Bocca, 1939. 103 pp. Freudian-influenced study recommending an end to (heterosexual)
sexual repression in prison, which is held to cause homosexual behavior. 4445. BERKMAN, ALEXANDER. Prison Memoirs of an Anarchist. New York: Mother Earth, 1912. 512 pp. Although he was not a participant, Berkman (1870-1936) perceived
prison sex sympathetically (pp. xix, 167-73, 318-24, 348, 433-34, 437-40). 4446. BILLANY, DAN, and DAVID DOWIE. The Cage. London: Longmans Green, 1949. 190 pp. Reminiscences of life in Italian prison camps in World War II. 4447. BLAKE, JAMES. The Joint. Garden City, NY: Double- day, 1971. 382 pp. Autobiographical account, considered by some to have literary merit,
of prison life (including homosexuality). 4448. BLOCH, HERBERT A. "Social Pressures of
Confinement toward Sexual Deviation," Journal of Social Therapy, 1:3 (1955), 112-25. Contends that personality variables, situational occurrences,
motivation, and involvement with the inmate peer culture are the primary
factors. 4449. BOCHMANN, HEINRICH VON. "Zum Problem der Homosexualität," Blätter für Gefängniskunde, 75 (1944), 34-72. Nazi-era study dealing with prisoners serving sentences under articles
175 and 175a (homosexual offenses) of the Penal Code of the German Reich. 4450. BOLINO, GIUSEPPE, and ALFONSO
DE DEO. II sesso nelle carceri italiane: inchieste e document!. Milan: Feltrinelli, 1970. 114 pp. Well-documented sociological study
on sex in Italian prisons; includes personal testimonies. 4451. BOYD, ROBERT N. Sex behind Bars: A Novella,
Short Stories, and True Accounts. San Francisco: Gay Sunshine Press, 1984. 237 pp. The non-fiction parts, evidently based largely on experiences in
Western prisons, are eight sections, pp. 9-85. Note esp. "Prison
Slang," pp. 18-27. 4452. BUFFUM, PETER C. Homosexuality in Prisons. Washington, DC: U. S. Department of Justice, Law
Enforcement Assistance Administration, 1972. 48 pp. Overview of current administrative problems, including racial
tensions. 4453. CARDOZO-FREEMAN, INEZ. The Joint: Language and
Culture in a Maximum Security Prison. Springfield, IL: Charles Thomas, 1984. 579 pp. Anthropologist's report of field work as Washington State Penitentiary
at Walla Walla, reporting inmates' views on interaction, subsistence, sexuality, and territoriality.
Glossary of 800 words and expressions. See also: Ethan Hoffman, Concrete Mama: Prison Profiles
from Walla Walla (Columbia, MO: University of Missouri Press, 1981; 240 pp.)—150
photographs. 4454. CARROLL, LEO. "Humanitarian Reform and Biracial
Sexual Assault in a Maximum Security Prison," Urban Life, 5 (1977), 417-37. Concludes that "the prison ... is an arena within which the rage
of black males at their social and psychological oppression is vented
against while males, thereby reversing the traditional scale of sexual
dominance. ... Humanitarian reforms of the prison social structure facilitate
this pattern of assault." 4455. CLEMMER, DONALD. The Prison Community. New York: Holt, Rinehart and Winston, 1940. 341 pp. Estimates that 30% of 2,300 adult male prisoners were involved in some
type of sexual deviation and another 10% were true homosexuals. See also his:
"Some Aspects of Sexual Behavior in the Prison Community," Proceedings of the American
Correctional Association, 88 (1958), 377-85. 4456. COTTON, DONALD J., and A. NICHOLAS GROTH.
"Sexual Assault in Correctional Institutions: Prevention and
Intervention," in: Irving R. Stuart and Joanna G. Greer (eds.), Victims of Sexual Aggression. New York: Van Nostrand Reinhold, 1984, pp. 127-55. The seriousness of the problem of male rape in correctional
facilities is often neglected, owing to the nature of prison conditions,
inmate codes, and staff attitudes. Civil litigation regarding institutional
liability is increasing. The paper presents a model for identifying,
treating, and preventing the sexual abuse of inmates. 4457. CROFT-COOKE, RUPERT. The Verdict of You All. London: Seeker and Warburg, 1955. 254 pp. The author, a well-known British literary figure, tells of his arrest,
trial, and conviction for homosexual offenses (1953) and of his prison
experiences. 4458. DALLA VOLTA, AMEDEO. Studi di psicologia e psichiatria sulle prigioni di
guerra. Florence: Ricci, 1919. 55 pp. Discusses homosexual behavior in prisoner-of-war camps during World
War I, using letters and poetry as evidence. 4459. DAVIS, ALAN J. "Sexual Assaults in the Philadelphia
Prison System and Sheriff's Vans," Transaction, 6:2 (December 1968), 8-16. Virtually every slightly-built young man is sexually approached within
hours of his admission to prison. Blacks tend to victimize blacks, with the
aggressors not regarding themselves as homosexual. 4460. DEVEREUX, GEORGE, and MALCOLM MOOS. "The Social
Structure of Prisons, and the Organic Tensions," Journal of Criminal
Psychopathology, 4 (1942), 306-24. From observations of the Alabama penal system, concludes that the
structure of the prison environment itself fosters homosexual behavior. 4461. DRTIL, J. "Sexu&lni zivot muzu pri
dlouhodobe vykonavanem trestu odneti svobody," Ceskoslovenska Psychiatrie, 65 (1969), 24-5-50. Self-inflicted wounds of long-term homosexual prisoners reflect their
anguish at being separated from their partners. 4462. DUFFY, CLINTON T., and AL HIRSCHBERG. Sex and Crime. New York: Doubleday, 1965. 203 pp. Observations of Duffy, noted warden of San Quentin Prison in
California. See Chapter 4, "The Homosexuals" (pp. 28- 39). 4463. ELIA, BIANCA. Emarginazione e omosessualita negli istituti di
rieducazione. Milan: Mazzotta, 1974. 112 pp. Criticizes correctional institutions as places that foster deviance,
alienation, and violence, wherein homosexuality appears in a dehumanized
form. 4464. ENGEL, KATHLEEN, and STANLEY ROTHMAN. On the Rule of Violence in
Prisons. New York: The Public Interest, 1983. Contends that, as the authority of the officials and guards weakens,
prisons are increasingly being ruled by bullying inmates, and rape is
becoming more common. 4465. FALCHI, PERSIO. Un anno di prigionia in Austria. Florence: Libreria della Voce, 1918. 221 pp. Memoirs of an Italian
prisoner of war in Austria during World War I; for "love behind barbed
wire," see pp. 20, 25-27 and esp. 83-90. 4466. FISHMAN, JOSEPH F. Sex in Prison: Revealing Sex
Conditions in American Prisons. New York: National Library Press, 1934. 256 pp. In its day, a shocking expose, based largely on Pennsylvania jails,
with proposals for reform. 4467. GAGNON, JOHN H., and WILLIAM SIMON. "The Social
Meaning of Prison Homosexuality," Federal Probation, 32 (1968), 23-29. Homosexuality flourishes in prison because it serves as a way of
satisfying needs not met by the institution. For men, it fulfils affectional
needs, validates masculinity, and helps in coping with prison life; for
women, it tends to be integrated into the system of pseudo-families. 4468.
GEBHARD,
PAUL H., et al. Sex Offenders: An Analysis of
Types. New York:
Harper and Row, 1965. 923 pp. This comparative study of 14 types of convicted sex offender includes
three homosexual types: offenders against children aged 12 or under, against
minors, and against adults. Contends that homosexual offenders had a poor
relationship with their parents and had more sex. 4469. GIZA, JERZY S. "Homoseksualizm w srodowisku
wiesniow mlodocianych," Przeglad penitencjarny, 20:4 (1968), 45-60. Polish criminologist's study of homosexuality in the environment of
young prisoners. 4470. GRECO, MARSHALL C., and JAMES C. WRIGHT. "The
Correctional Institution in the Etiology of Chronic Homosexuality," American Journal of
Orthopsychiatry, 14 (1944), 295-307. Some inmates succumbed to homosexual practices under the same set of
influences--erotic talk, solicitation by older inmates, and witnessing
acts—that left others unaffected. 4471. HAINES, WILLIAM H. "Homosexuality," Journal of Social Therapy, 1 (1955), 132-36. Distinguishes three types found in prison: the frank homosexual
(inluding the "wolf" and effeminate inmates); the feeble-minded,
mentally ill or insane inmates, of whom others take advantage; and the
occasional or situational homosexual. 4472. HAYES, BILLY and WILLIAM HOFFER. Midnight Express. New York: Dutton, 1977. 280 pp. Harrowing story of young American's drug bust and experiences in a
Turkish prison; freely translated into a movie featuring Brad Davis, with the
homoerotic element suppressed . 4473. HEALY, WILLIAM. The Individual Delinquent: A Text-Book of Diagnosis
and Prognosis for All Concerned in Understanding Offenders. Boston: Little, Brown, 1915.
830 pp. Contends that life in penal institutions is notorious for inciting to
unnatural sexual practices even those not otherwise inclined to them.
Provides a few homosexual case histories (pp. 197-98, 313, 411-12, 584-87,
734-35, 779). 4474. HENRY, GEORGE W., and ALFRED A. GROSS. "The
Homosexual Delinquent," Mental Hygiene, 25 (1941), 420-42. The delinquent homosexual (as opposed to the middle- class homosexual)
is handicapped by a "poor biological start," inferior housing,
limited education, and little vocational training. 4475. HERNETT, MICHAEL. "Das Geschlechtsleben im Ker- ker," Zeitschrift fur Sexualvissenschaft, 15 (1928), 305-13• On sexual activity in Soviet prisons. 4476. HOENE, ROBERT E. Annotated Bibliography on Delinquent Girls and
Related Research (1915-1970s). Washington: American Psychological Association, 1978. 165 pp. (MS
1686) Emphasizes empirical studies. 4477. HUFFMAN, ARTHUR V. "Problems Precipitated by
Homosexual Approaches of Youthful First Offenders," Journal of Social Therapy, 7 (1961), 216-22. Suggests that the existing environment of correctional institutions
favors the development of sexual deviation. See also his: "Sex Deviation
in a Prison Community," Journal of Social Therapy, 6:3 (1960), 170-81. 4478. IBRAHIM, AZMY I. "Deviant Behavior in Men's
Prisons," Crime and Delinquency, 20 (1974), 38-44. Proposes ways of reducing homosexual activity, such as conjugal
visits. 4479. IVES, CHARLES CECIL. A History of Penal Methods: Criminals, Witnesses,
Lunatics. London: S. Paul, 1914. 409 pp. The writer, a closeted English scholar, was an advocate of prison
reform; see pp. 292-301. 4480. JACKSON, BRUCE. In the Life: Versions of the
Criminal Experience. New York: Holt, Rinehart and Winston, 1972. 412 pp. "Queens, Punks, and Studs" (pp. 351-412) covers the whole
gamut of homosexual relationships inside men's prisons. Inmates who would
like to be homosexual on the outside, but are unable to learn "the
role" are enabled to do so by the prison culture, which—when
internalized—actually makes them unfit for life in civil society. 4481. JOHNSON, EDWIN. "The Homosexual in
Prison," Social Theory and Practice, 1:4 (1971), 83-95. Presents insiders' interpretations of prison homosexuality as
contributing to the maintenance of institutional stability. 4482. KARPMAN, BENJAMIN. "Sex Life in Prison," Journal of Criminal Law and
Criminology, 38 (1948), 475-86. In their isolation prisoners turn to masturbation and homosexuality.
These practices have long-term effects, lasting past the prison term. 4483. KERN, WILLIAM, JR. "Petition to the President
of the U. S.," ONE Magazine, 14:4 (April-May 1966), 7-10. Appeal from a prisoner then in the Michigan State Penitentiary at
Jackson. 4484. LAITE, WILLIAM E., JR. The United States vs. William Laite. Washington,
DC: Acropolis Books, 1972. 250 pp. The experiences and observations of a "white collar"
offender in a prison in Fort Worth, TX, including witnessing the gang rape
of a white adolescent prisoner (pp. 10, 42-45, 110, 123, 126, 181). 4485. LAMOTT, KENNETH. Chronicles of San Quentin: The Biography of a Prison. New York: McKay, 1961. 278 pp. Includes data going back to the 1850s (pp. 12, 144, 200, 249, 268). 4486. LEE, DONALD. "Seduction of the Guilty:
Homosexuality in American Prisons," in: Ralph Ginzburg and Warren
Boroson (eds.), The Best of Fact. New York: Trident Press, 1967, pp. 81-90. Experiences of the author as an inmate in Western State Penitentiary
in Pennsylvania, where young men predominate among the prisoners; having no
female partners, they turn to one another. 4487. LEINWAND, GERALD (ed.). Prisons. New York: Pocket Books, 1972. 256 pp. The true homosexuals have an esoteric, isolated community of their
own. One prison hospital was controlled by homosexuals, who forced others to
submit sexually for medication. See pp. 32, 35, 58, 81, 82, 116, 161, 175,
176, 189, 196, 199, 217. 4488. LEMOS BRITTO, JOSÉ GABRIEL DE. A questiâo nas prisöes. Rio de Janeiro: J. Ribeiro dos Santos, 1934. 202 pp. Sexual problems in Brazilian prisons, with international comparisons.
See pp. 113-26. 4489. LEON SÂNCHEZ, JOSÉ. God Was Looking the Other Way. Boston: Little, Brown, 1973. 271 pp. Personal account of the
Penitentiary of San Lucas in Costa Rica in the early years of the century
(translation of La isla de los hombres solos). Unsympathetic presentation (pp. 51-54, 211-16). 4490. LEVY, HOWARD, and DAVID MILLER.
"Homosexuality," in: Going to Jail: The Political Prisoner. New York: Grove Press, 1972, pp. 137-63. Problems faced by radicals of the
Vietnam-protest era. 4491. LINDNER, ROBERT. "Sex in Prison," Complex, 6 (1951), 5-20. Psychoanalytic approach, contending that "latent tendencies"
are exposed by the institutional setting—even though most sexual deviants in
prison are not homosex- ual. 4492. LIPTON, HARRY R. "Stress in Correctional
Institutions," Journal of Social Therapy, 6 (1960), 216-23. Contends that homosexuality is a frequent source for acute anxiety
states—either among those who are undergoing an internal struggle or those
who fear loss of a partner. 4493. LOCKWOOD, DANIEL. Prison Sexual Violence. New York: Elsevier, 1980. 167 pp. A study of 45 inmate "aggressors" and 107
"targets" in New York State male prisons. Sexual aggression is most
intense in youth institutions: 46% of prison aggressors were 19 or younger.
The young black male subculture of violence underlies sexual aggression in
prison. 4494. MACARTNEY, WILFRED. Walls Have Mouths: A Record of Ten Years Penal
Servitude. London: Gollancz, 1936. 440 pp. Account of his incarceration in Parkhurst Prison; with comments by
Compton Mackenzie. 4495. MCMURTRIE, DOUGLAS C. "Notes on Pederastic Practices
in Prison," Chicago Medical Recorder, 36 (1914), 15-17. McMurtrie, a physician in contact with contemporary work in Germany,
was probably the first American researcher to give sustained attention to
prison homosexuality. 4496. MARTIN, JOHN BARTLOW. Break Down the Walls. New York: Ballantine Books, 1953. 310 pp. Contends that homosexuality is the most difficult problem a warden
faces, since it causes more quarrels, fights, and punishment in prison than
any other single problem. 4497. MARTINEZ, JOSE AGUSTIN. Eros encatenado (el problems
sexual en las prisiones). Havana: J. Mon- tero, 1938. 15 pp. Criticizes Cuban prison authorities for laxity regarding homosexual
behavior. Needed are hard work, better super- vison, and "sublimation." 4498. MICKLEY, RICHARD R. Prison Ministry Handbook. Third ed. Los Angeles: United Fellowship of Metropolitan Community
Churches, 1980. Reflects the success of the MCC, esp. in California, in
ministering to prison populations. 4499. MONEY, JOHN, and CAROL BÖHMER. "Prison
Sexology: Two Personal Accounts of Masturbation, Homosexuality, and
Rape," Journal of Sex Research, 16 (198), 258-66. Presents a typology of prison homosexuality. Recommends conjugal
visits. 4500. MORTON, D. R. "Strategies in Probation:
Treating Gay Offenders," Social Casework, 64 (1983), 33-38. The improvement in services to gay probationers depends on the
willingness of the probation departments to gather knowledge on available
community resources and to sensitize the probation officers to the needs of
their gay clients. 4501. MOSS, C. SCOTT. "Sexual Assault in a
Prison," Psychological Reports, 44 (1979), 823-28. Suggest that high rates posited for sexual assault in federal prisons
may be exaggerated. 4502. NACCI, PETER L., and THOMAS R. KANE. "The Incidence
of Sex and Sexual Aggression in Federal Prisons," Federal Probation, 47:4 (December 1983), 31-36. Analyzing results of interviews with 330 male inmates,
contends that federal prisons are "relatively free of problems
associated with homosexuality and sexual aggression." This article was
followed by their: "Sex and Sexual Aggression in Federal Prisons," Federal Probation, 48:1 (March 1984), 46-53. See also Nacci and Kane,
"Inmate Sexual Aggression: Some Evolving Propositions, Empirical
Findings, and Mitigating Counter-Forces," Journal of Offender
Counseling, Services and Rehabilitation, 9 (1984), 1-20. 4503. NEESE, ROBERT. Prison Exposures. Philadelphia: Chilton, 1959. 135 pp. Experiences as an inmate in the Iowa State Prison at Fort Madison. 4504. NEIER, ARYEH. "Sex and Confinement," Civil Liberties Review, 5:2 (1978), 6-16. An overview of current knowledge and concerns, including the special
plight of youth and racial aspects. 4505. NELSON, VICTOR F. Prison Days and Nights. Boston: Little, Brown, 1933. 282 pp. "Men without Women" (pp. 140-69) attempts to distinguish
between "pseudo-homosexuality" induced by deprivation and the
constitutional homosexuality of the prison "fairies and gonsils." 4506. NEUMAN, ELIAS. El problema sexual en las carcel- es. Buenos Aires: Editorial Criminalia, 1955. 204 pp. Offers an Argentine
and international perspective. 4507. NORMAN, FRANK. Bang to Rights. London: Pan Books, 1958. 158 pp. Account of two
years in a British prison. 4508. OSBORNE,
THOMAS MOTT. Prisons and Comnon Sense. Philadelphia: J. Lippincott, 1924. 105 pp. Compares the "problem'
of homosexuality in prisons with that encountered on naval ships at sea (pp.
88-93). 4509. PANTON, JAMES H. "Characteristics Associated
with Male Homosexuality within a State Correctional Population," Corrections (Memphis), 2 (1978), 26-31. Forty "active homosexual" inmates in North Carolina were
found to exhibit greater difficulties in handling stress, frustration, and
impulse control; they were more alienated from both staff and other inmates. 4510. PARKER, JACK B., and ROBERT A. PERKINS. "The
Influence of Type of Institution on Attitudes toward the Handling of the
Homosexual among Inmates," Offender Rehabilitation, 2 (1978), 245-54. Tn four different types of correctional facility, attitudes of
inmates appear to be independent of those of staff and to be more liberal in
the adult institutions. 4511. PERRIER, CHARLES. Les criminels. Paris: Masson/ Maloine, 1900-05. 2 vols. In this comprehensive study by a French physician, see vol. 1, pp.. 184-212, 343-45; vol. 2, pp. 195-243. 4512.
PLATTNER,
KARL. Eros im Zuchthaus. Berlin: Mopr- Verlag, 1929. 225 pp. Personal account of eight years' imprisonment. See esp. pp. 139-48. 4513. PRICE, JOHN. "Homosexuality in a Victorian Male
Prison," Mental Health in Australia (July 1984), 3-12. Information collected by participant observation in Northern
Sub-prison, Pentridge, Australia. Distinguishes three types of prisoners
involved in homosexual activity: cats (young ingenues); hocks (jockers); and
queens. 4514. RICHMOND, KATY. "Fear of Homsexuality and Modes
of Rationalisation in Male Prisons," Australian and New Zealand
Journal of Sociology, 14 (1978), 51-57. In Australia, emotional involvement is the homosexual norm in female
prisons, but the absence of emotion is the dominant ideology for homosexual
encounters among male prisoners. This taboo tends to make sex-roles more
rigid and to hinder reintegration into society after release. 4515. ROTH, LOREN H. "Territoriality and
Homosexuality in a Male Prison Population," American Journal of
Orthopsychiatry, 41 (1971), 510-13. Found that in a large prison population sexual aggressors were kept in
relative isolation, but with access to "punks." 4516. ROTHENBERG, DAVID. "Prisoners," in Harvey
L. Goch- ros and Jean S. Gochros (eds.), The Sexually Opppressed. New York: Association Press, 1977, pp. 225-36. Views of the director of New York's Fortune Society, a rehabilitation and reentry
group. See also his: "Group Rip-off: The Prison Rape," Advocate, no. 189 (May 5, 1976), 9-11. 4517. SAGARIN, EDWARD. "Prison Homosexuality and Its
Effects on Post-Prison Sexual Behavior," Psychiatry, 39 (1976), 245-57. Interviews with nine ex-inmates show that some were able to switch to
a homosexual behavior pattern in prison, while returning to heterosexuality
on release. In a few instances, however, the change to homosexuality
persisted after release. 4518. SALIERNO, GIULIO. La ripressione sessuale nelle
carceri italiane. Rome: Tattilo, 1973. 280 pp. Homosexuality often appears in prison as a desire for the humiliation
of other inmates. 4519. SCACCO, ANTHONY M., JR. Rape in Prison. Springfield, IL: Charles C. Thomas, 1975. 127 pp. Based on studies in Connecticut state prisons. Emphasizes the racial
aspect ("the scapegoat is almost always white"), as well as the
place of violence in American life generally. 4520. SCACCO, ANTHONY M., JR. (ed.). Male Rape: A Casebook of
Sexual Aggression. New York: AMS Press, 1982. 326 pp. Collection of 27 papers on sexual victimization, most reprinted; some
commissioned for the volume. Most reflect conditions in total institutions. 4521. SEATON, GEORGE JOHN. Isle of the Damned: Twenty
Years in the Penal Colony of French Guinea [sic]. New York: Farrar, Straus and Young, 1951.
302 pp. Autobiography of an Englishman sentenced to the penal colony in French
Guiana. A few references to the momes (catamites) of the inmates (pp. 25-26, 194-95, 267,
301). 4522. SHORE, DAVID A. Sex-related Issues in Correctional Facilities: A
Classified Bibliography. Chicago: Playboy Foundation, 1981. 37 pp. Carefully compiled (but unannotated) list of 203 entries, mainly
reflecting American conditions. The books and articles cited cover social
work, social science, and correctional points of view, but do not include
personal testimonies of the offenders themselves. 4523. SHORE, DAVID A. "Sexual Abuse and Sexual
Education in Child-Caring Institutions," Journal of Social Work and
Human Sexuality, 1 (1982), 171-84. Suggests programs and procedures for reducing sexual neglect and abuse
and enhancing the sexual self-worth of the inmates. See also: Shore and
Harvey L. Gochros, Sexual Problems of Adolescents in Institutions (Springfield, IL: Charles C. Thomas, 1981; 240
pp.). 4524. SHORT, JAMES F., JR., and IVAN NYE. "Extent of
Unrecorded Juvenile Delinquency," Journal of Criminal Law,
Criminology and Police Science, 49 (1958), 296-302. In a comparison with the general population, the
inmate boys had had homosexual relations about as frequently as those in
regular high schools, while the institutionalized girls had had them far more frequently. 4525. SLAVSON, SAMUEL R. Reclaiming the Delinquent: Para-Analytic Group
Psychotherapy and the Inversion Technique. New York: Free Press, 1965.
766 pp. "Sex and Homosexuality" (pp. 45-60) contends that the sexual
conflicts of delinquent boys stem from "Oedipal guilt." 4526. SMITH, CHARLES E. "The Homosexual Offender: A
Study of 100 Cases," Journal of Criminal Law, Criminology and Police
Science, 44 (1954), 582-92. Finds that certain types of crimes—car theft, mail theft, robbery, and
forgery—were more common among homosexual inmates than among the general
prison population. See also his: "Some Problems in Dealing with
Homosexuals in the Prison Situation," Journal of Social Therapy, 2 (1956), 37-45. 4527. SOLAN, NELLIE, et al. "Sex," in: Robert J.
Minton, Jr. (ed.), Inside Prison American Style. New York: Random House, 1971, pp. 113-22. Asserts that the present penal
system fails to "rehabilitate" those who have decided on a
homosexual life. 4528. SRIVASTAVA, S. P. "Social Profile of Homosexuals
in an Indian Male Prison," Eastern Anthropologist, 26 (1973) 313-22. From a study of 400 inmates in an Uttar Pradesh prison, concludes that
the incidence of homosexuality in Indian facilities is far lower than the one
prevalent in Western prisons. However, upper-caste inmates dominate the underdogs
in the prison and exploit them for their sexual gratification. Appears in a
longer form as: "Sex Life in an Indian Male Prison," Indian Journal of Social Work, 35 (1974), 21-33. See also: Amal K. Maitra and
Dipali Banerjea, "Homosexual Practices in Institutionalised Neglected
Adolescents: Intra-Family Dynamics and Thematic Fantasy," Bulletin of the Council of
Social and Psychological Research, Calcutta, no. 8 (1967), 13-19. 4529. STONE, W. G., and I. HIRLIMAN. The Hate Factor: The Story of the New Mexico Prison
Riot. New York: Dell, 1982. 272 pp. Acount of an extremely violent 1980
takeover, in which homosexuals were among the victims. 4530. SYKES, GRESHAM M. The Society of Captives: A
Study of a Maximum Security Prison. Princeton: Princeton University Press, 1958. 144
pp. Describes the contrasting roles of "wolves,"
"punks," and "fags" in a prison in Trenton, NJ, the last
two being regarded as having forfeited their masculinity. 4531.
SYLVESTER,
S. F., et al. Prison Homicide. New York: Spectrum Publications, 1977. 126 pp. Claims that homosexual involvement and interests are the leading
motive for prison homicides. 4532. THOMAS, PIRI. Seven Long Times. New York: Prae- ger, 1974. 246 pp. "Nothing Like the Real Thing" (pp. 136-49) presents an
ex-inmate's analysis of the fantasies of the prisoners, with prison
homosexual behavior as an (unsatisfactory) substitute for heterosexual
gratification. 4533. TOCH, HANS. Living in Prison: The Ecology of Survival. New York: Free Press, 1977. 318 pp. Contends that rape, while
relatively uncommon in most prisons, is always figuratively present as the
ultimate threat. See pp. 143-44, 147-53, 158-74, 207, 212-17. 4534. VEDDER, CLYDE B., and PATRICIA G. KING. Problems of Homosexuality in
Corrections. Springfield, IL: Charles C. Thomas, 1967. 63 pp. Favors conjugal visits as a way of reducing the incidence of
frustration and homosexual behavior, while recognizing that a majority of
prison administrators oppose this innovation. 4535. WARD, JACK B. "Homosexual Behavior of the
Institutionalized Delinquent," Psychiatric Quarterly Supplement, 32 (1958), 301-14. Contends that much of the homosexual behavior of institutionalized
delinquents represents the suymbolic acting out of problems of dependency and
power. 4536. WEISS, CARL, and DAVID JAMES
FRIAR. Terror in the Prisons: Homsexual Rape and Why Society Condones It. Indianapolis: Bobbs Merrill, 1974. 247 pp. Popular, somewhat
sensationalized approach. 4537. WILSON, JOSEPH G., and MICHAEL J. PESCOR. Problems in Prison Psychiatry. Caldwell, ID: Caxton Printers, 1939. 275 pp. "The Homosexual Prisoner" (pp. 195-210) is a horrifying
period document. ".,.[H]e who would excuse
homosexuality is an enemy of the human race." Homosexual prisoners ought
to receive "a reasonable dose of violence at the hands of the other prisoners. In the design of the prison
all opportunity for privacy should be eliminated. 4538. WOODEN, KENNETH. Weeping in the Playtime of Others: America's
Incarcerated Children. New York: McGraw-Hill, 1976. 264 pp. On the sexual exploitation of runaway
boys by pimps and chicken queens; also on sexual abuse and rape in correctional
institutions. See pp. 12, 50, 79-91, 110-11, 118- 28, 207, 236. 4538A. WOODEN, WAYNE, and JAY PARKER. Men behind Bars: Sexual
Exploitation in Prison. New York: Plenum Press, 1982. 264 pp. Serious ethnographic study of a
medium security prison in California, one of the authors (Parker) having
gathered some of the information while on the "inside." Presents a
more complex model of ethnic and class interaction in relation to sexual
behavior than the bipolar black-white model that is usually adopted. The homosexual subcultures that prevail in women's prisons differ
markedly from those found in men's institutions. They are less violent, show
a less sharp distinction between dominant and dominated individuals, and are
positively characterized by the formation of ad hoc kinship groups
("families"). 4539. BLUESTONE, HARVEY, et al. "Homosexuals in Prison," Corrective Psychiatry and
Journal of Social Therapy, 12 (1966), 13-24. Based on interviews in psychiatric clinics of the Women's House of
Detention in New York City, where an estimated 80% to 90% of the inmates have
a history of lesbianism. Asserts that the sado-masochistic nature of many
lesbian relationships is a threat to the security of the prison. 4540. BOUCARD, ROBERT. Le dessous des prisons des femmes: "des documents, des faits": comment ils vivent,
expient, se pervertissent. Paris: Editions Documentaires, 1930. 255 pp. Popular expose of conditions in French women's prisons. 4541. BRUUN, KETTIL.
"Koulokotijaerjestelmaemme Ja Sukupuolisesti Hairahtuneet Tytot," Sosiologia (Finland), 1 (1965) 3-14. On youth correction institutions and sexually deviant girls in Finland. 4542. BURKHART, KATHRYN WATTERSON. Women in Prison. Garden City, NY: Doubleday, 1973. 465 pp. A woman going to prison
effectively loses her family on the outside, hence the pseudo-families on the
inside. Problems have been exaggerated by the focus of many matrons and staff
on real or imagined lesbianism. In an Iowa prison, women thought to be
lesbian must wear a yellow uniform. See pp. 361-93. 4543. BURNHAM, CREIGHTON BROWN. Born Innocent. Engle- wood Cliffs, NJ: Prentice-Hall, 1958. 293
pp. Study of delinquent girls in the Oklahoma State Industrial School for
White Girls, Tecumseh. 4544. CARTER, BARBARA. "Reform School Families," Society, 11:1 (1973), 36, 39-43. The informal subculture of reform school girls is one of make-believe
families, homosexual courtship, and adolescent peer-group culture. 4545. CHOISY, MARISE. A Month among the Girls. New York: Pyramid, 1960. Journalistic expose of life in French women's
prisons. Translation of: L'amour dans les prisons (Paris: Montaigne, 1930). See also: Francis Carco, Prisons de femmes (Paris: Editions de France, 1931; 296 pp.). 4546. CLIMENT, CARLOS E., et al. "Epidemiological Studies of Female Prisoners:
IV. Homosexual Behavior," Journal of Nervous and Mental Disease, 164 (1977), 25-29. Suicidal thoughts, suicide attempts, psychiatric
problems during menstruation, and a history of violent crimes against persons
were found to characterize the lesbian offender group, while a history of
crimes against self and property, as well as a history of alcoholism, was
common in the nonhomosexual group. 4547. FITZGERALD, WILLIAM A. Pseudohomosexuality in Prison
and Out: A Study of the Lower Class Black Lesbian. New York: City University, 1977. 357 pp.
(unpublished Ph. D. dissertation—sociology) The most salient feature of lower-class black lesbianism— which also
largely influences the incidence of homosexuality in penal institutions--is
an adaptational or instrumental response to the deprivation of poverty. The
dissertation addressed the question of whether lesbian initiation preceded
incarceration or took place during the experience. 4548. FORD, CHARLES A. "Homosexual Practices of
Institutionalized Females," Journal of Abnormal and Social Psychology, 23 (1929), 442-48. Presents data gathered in a correctional institution for female
delinquents, many of them mentally retarded. Homosexual
"friendships" are a tradition at the school; entering them is a
voluntary matter. 4549. FORD, CHARLES A. "Homosexual Practices of
Institutionalized Females," Journal of Abnormal and Social Psychiatry, 23 (1929), 442-48. An early report on types of relationship, inmate communities, and
language. 4550. FOSTER, THOMAS W. "Make-Believe Families: A Response
of Women and Girls to the Deprivations of Imprisonment," International Journal of
Criminology and Penology, 3 (1975), 71-78. In some instances, the lesbian dyad has been found to be the nodal
point around which the inmate social structure of the prison revolves, while
elsewhere the families were mostly matricentric, or homosexual marriages were
observed as isolated units, without developing any kinship satellites. 4551. GIALLOMBARDO, ROSE. Society of Women: A Study of a Women's Prison. New York: Wiley, 1966. 244 pp. This classic sociological study covers
relationships between inmates and staff, organizational goals, and the nature
of the prison experience. With social relations characterized by isolation
and an oppressive sense of time, adjustment often takes the form of a
"marriage," that is, a homosexual alliance. Integration occurs
through various kinship ties created ad hoc. See also her: "Social Roles
in a Prison for Women," Social Problems, 13 (1966), 268-88; and The Social World of Imprisoned
Girls: A Comparative Study of Institutions for Juvenile Delinquents (New York: Wiley, 1974; 317 pp.). 4552. HALLECK, SEYMOUR L., and MARVIN HERSKO.
"Homosexual Behavior ih a Correctional Institution for Adolescent
Girls," American Journal of Orthopsychiatry, 32 (1962), 911-17. The majority of girls were drawn into "homosexually tinged
relationships," with different degrees of emotional involvement. Most
had had poor relationships with men and had found that lesbian involvement
provided a chance to be loved and accepted. 4553. HAMMER, MAX. "Hypersexuality in Reformatory Women," Corrective Psychiatry and
Journal of Social Therapy, 15:4 (1969), 20-26. When women who have drifted into hypersexuality are sent to
correctional institutions where they cannot relieve their tensions through
heterosexual activity, they frequently turn to homosexuality or masturbation. 4554. HARPER, IDA. "The Role of the 'Fringer' in a
State Prison for Women," Social Forces, 31 (1952), 53-60. Profiles a "disorganized personality" who engaged in lesbian
activity, itself an acceptable activity within the prison, but whose
intensity made inmates and staff fearful of her. 4555. HARRIS, SARA. Hellhole: The Scandalous Story of the Inmates and Life in the New York City House of Detention for Women. New York: E. P. Dutton, 1967.
288 pp. Popular expose by an investigative reporter with a particular
interest in lesbianism. The old Women's House of Detention was well known to
the public because of its location in the heart of Greenwich Village. 4556. HUMBERT, JEANNE. Le pourrissoire Saint-Lazare: choses vues, entendues et vécues. Paris: Editions Prima, 1932. 186 pp. Account of a French
women's prison; see esp. Chapter 6. 4557. KATES, ELIZABETH M. "Sexual Problems in Women's Institutions," Journal of Social Therapy, 1 (1955), 187-91. Recommends the development of a "sexualmetric
scale" to identify potential lesbians. 4558. MITCHELL, ARLENE E. Informal Inmate Social
Structure in Prisons for Women: A Comparative Study. Palo Alto, CA: R & E Research Associates, 1975.
81 pp. Reprint of dissertation in sociology, University of Washington, 1969.
Compares a treatment-oriented prison with a custody-oriented one. See esp.
Chapter 5, "Inmates Involved in Homosexual Behavior" (pp. 35-46). 4559. NORRIS, LINDA. "Comparison of Two Groups in a Southern
State Women's Prison: Homosexual Behavior versus Non-Homosexual
Behavior," Psychological Reports, 34 (1974), 75-78. Of 376 inmates in one prison, found that 52% were lesbian, 48% not.
Among other differences, the lesbians averaged 9.5 years younger. 4560. O'BRIEN, PATRICIA. The Promise of Punishment:
Prisons in Hineteenth-Century France. Princeton: Princeton University Press, 1982. 330
pp. Contains material on male and female homosexuality, the latter derived
froma cache of biftons, lesbian love letters. 4561. OTIS, MARGARET. "A Perversion Not Commonly
Noted," Journal of Abnormal Psychology, 8 (1913), 113-16. An early report of lesbian relations between black and white girls in
a reform school. 4562. PROPPER, ALICE M. Prison Homosexuality: Myth and
Reality. Lexington, MA: D. C. Heath, 1981. 239 PP. Summarizing the available research on prison homosexuality among adult
and juvenile populations of women and men, argues that the fragmented
hypotheses can be subsumed under the more general concepts of importation and
deprivation. Substantiated with empirical data from girls in three coed and
four all-female institutions. See also her: "Lesbianism in Female and
Goed Correctional Institutions," JH, 3 (1978), 265-74; and "Make-Believe Families
and Homosexuality among Imprisoned Girls," Criminology: An
Interdisciplinary Journal, 20 (1982), 127-38. 4563. SELLING, LOWELL S. "The Pseudo Family," American Journal of Sociology, 37 (1931), 247-53. Pseudo-family relationships among girls in
correctional institutions seems to grow up as a natural substitute for the family
which the institution cannot supply. Contends that these relationships are
not overtly lesbian, 4564. TAYLOR, A. J. W. "The Significance of 'Darls'
or 'Special Relationships' for Borstal Girls," British Journal of
Criminology, 5 (1965), 406-18. On dyadic relationships in British juvenile correctional facilities
(Borstals). 4565. VAN WORMER, KATHERINE. Sex Role Behavior in a Women's Prison, An
Ethnological Analysis. San Francisco: R & E Research Associates, 1978. 113 pp. Found that, in
an Alabama prison, while masculinity and violence of crime were significantly
related to the active (butch) role, it is doubtful whether a true dom-
inance-submission hierarchy existed. 4566. VEDDER, CLYDE B., and DORA B. SOMERVILLE, The Delinquent Girl. Second ed. Springfield, IL: Charles C. Thomas,
1975. 174 pp. In a correctional school sample 25% of the girls admitted to having
had lesbian relations, as against 3.6% in a comparable high school sample (p.
87). 4567.
WARD,
DAVID A., and GENE G. KASSEBAUM. "Homosexuality: A Mode of Adaptation in a
Prison for Women," Social Problems, 12 (1974), 159-77. Loss of emotional support is perceived as the chief source of inmates
turning to lesbianism. Inmate estimates of the incidence of lesbianism (much
at variance with official claims) ran as high as 90%. See also their book: Women's Prison: Sex and Social
Structure (Chicago: Aldine, 1965; 269 pp.) XXII. VIOLENCE Viewed in the perspective of functionalist sociology, violence or the
threat of violence serves the dominant majority as a device to set limits to
the aspirations of deviant groups. Hence it is not surprising that the increasing
visibility of gay people from the late 1960s on should be accompanied by
increasing number of violent acts against them ("fag bashing"). A
quite different aspect of violence appears in the very rare, but often
sensationalized instances of mass murders committed by homosexual men. Public
reactions to media reports on such individuals offer an interesting barometer
of attitudes. 4568. BAUER, GÜNTER. "Jürgen Bartsch: Ein Bericht über den vierfachen Knabenmörder," Archiv für Kriminologie, 144 (1969), 61-91. On a German murderer of boys active in the 1960s. See also the volume
recording responses to Rolf Schubel's film on Bartsch: Nachruf auf eine
"Bestie": Dokumente— Bilder—Interviews (Essen: Torso Verlag, 1984; 237 pp.). 4569. BELL, ARTHUR. Kings Don't Mean a Thing: The
John Knight Murder Case. New York: William Morrow, 1978. 228 pp. Account by the late gay Village Voice columnist of the savage murder
of a closeted publisher in Philadelphia on December 7, 1975, and the ensuing
events. 4570. BERGSMA, WIEGO, et al. Homoseksualiteit en aggres- sie. The Hague: De Woelrat, 1983. 110 pp. Various articles and personal testimonies documenting recent incidents of violence against gay men and lesbians, chiefly in the Netherlands, together with suggestions for combatting the trend. See also: Leren van je vijand ... Over pot/t/tenrammerij en alternative sankties (Amsterdam: N.V.I.H.-C.O.C., 1985; 31 pp.). 4571. BOHN, TED R. "Homophobic Violence: Implications
for Social Work Practice," Journal of Social Work and Human Sexuality, 2:2-3 (1983-84), 91-112. Contends that homophobic violence serves a function in society by
providing scpaegoating and maintenance of the male sex role. 4572. BOLITHO, WILLIAM. Murder for Profit. Garden City, NY: Garden City Publishing Co., 1926. 332
pp. Contains the most detailed account of the German mass-murderer Fritz Haarmann in English. See also the German monographs: Hans Hyan, Massenmörder Haarmann (Berlin: Verlag Es werde Licht, 1924; 68 pp.); and Theodor Lessing, Haarmann: die Geschichte eines Wehrwolfs (Berlin: Die Schmiede, 1925; 271 pp.). 4573. BRONGERSMA, EDWARD. "Aggression against Pedophiles," International Journal of Law
and Psychiatry, 7 (1984), 79-87. Argues that pedophilia has been considered a crime only since the
imposition of Christian taboos and that the difficulties caused by the
repression of pedophilia make people violent in their rejection of
pedophiles. 4574. CALIFIA, PAT. "Battered Lovers: The Hidden
Problem of Gay Domestic Violence," Advocate, no. 441 (March 4, 1986), 42-46. Discussion of a neglected problem, including lesbian battery, which
has been denied because admitting its existence
would be "politically incorrect." 4575. CALIFIA, PAT. "Queer-Bashing," Advocate, no. 314 (April 1981), 20, 22-24. Contends that the media are being used to turn gays into a target to
relieve the frustrations of Middle America. See also: Douglas Ireland,
"New Homophobia: Open Season on Gays," Nation, 229 (September 15, 1979), 207-10; and "Rendezvous
in the Ramble," New York (July 24, 1978), 39-42. 4576. GADDIS, THOMAS, and JAMES 0. LONG. Killer: A Journal of Murder. New York: Macmillan, 1970. 388 pp. Biography of Carl Panzram, who styled himself the "world's worst
murderer." 4577. GAUTE, J. H. H., and ROBIN
ODELL. The Murderer's Who's Who: Outstanding International Cases ... in the
Last 150 Years. New York: Methuen, 1979. 269 pp. In this omnium gatherum, see pp. 27, 72-73, 101, 102-03, 118, 141,
150-51, 166, 223. 4578. GIBSON, IAN. The Death of Lorca. London: Paladin, 1974. 222 pp. Shows how vicious homophobic prejudice presided over the murder of the
great poet Federico Garcia Lorca near Granada in 1936. See now the revised
version of this book (New York: Penguin Books, 1983). 4579. HARRY, JOSEPH. "Derivative Deviance: The Cases
of Extortion, Fag-Bashing, and Shakedown of Gay Men," Criminology, 19 (1982), 546-64. Sociological
analysis linking several related phenomena. 4580. HINCKLE, WARREN. Gayslayer. Reno: Silver Dollar Press, 1985. 100 pp. On Dan White (who committed suicide in 1985), the murderer of San Francisco Mayor George Moscone and gay Supervisor Harvey Milk in 1978. See also M. Weiss, below. 4581. HIRSCHFELD, MAGNUS. "Morde an Homosexuellen," Vierteljahrsbericht des wissenschaftlich-humanitären Komites, 2 (1910), 142-94. Comments by the noted German sexologist on the risk homosexuals run
of being murdered. 4582. KIDDER, TRACY. The Road to Yuba City: A Journey into the Juan
Corona Murders. Garden City, NY: Doubleday, 1974. 317 pp. On a still controversial case of mass murder in Northern California. 4583. KLUGE, P. F., and THOMAS MOORE. "Boys in the
Bank," Life, 73 (September 22, 1972), 64-65, 68-70, 72, 74. On the Brooklyn, NY, bank robbery organized by John Wojte- wicz to
obtain money for his lover's sex change operation. This incident was the
basis for the film "Dog Day Afternoon." 4584. LEOPOLD, NATHAN FREUDENTHAL. Life Plus 99 Years. Garden City, NY: Doubleday, 1958. 381 pp. Reminiscences of the man who was notorious for the murder, in concert
with his lover Richard Loeb, of a young boy. Meyer Levin's novel Compulsion, and the subsequent film, were based on this event.
See also: Maureen McKerman, The Amazing Crime and Trial of Leopold and Loeb (New York: New American Library, 1957; 300 pp.). 4585. MASTERS, BRIAN. Killing for Company: The Case
of Dennis Nilson. London: Cape, 1985. 336 pp. On a British pedophile-necrophile mass murderer arrested in 1983. See
also J. Lisners, House of Horrors (London: Corgi, 1983). 4586. MELDRIM, JULIAN. Attacks on Gay People: A Report. Second ed. London: Campaign for Homosexual Equality, 1980. 41 pp.
Well-documented report of a problem that became more acute in the 1970s as
gay people became more visible in the United Kingdom. 4587. MILLER, BRIAN, and LAUD HUMPHREYS. "Lifestyles
and Violence: Homosexual Victims of Assault and Murder," Qualitative Sociology, 3 (1980), 169-85. Offers a composite profile of homosexual victims of assault, showing
that they are generally detached from the gay subcultures—including the S
& M world. [Compare John A. Lee, "The Social Organization of Sexual
Risk," Alternative Lifestyles, 2 (1979), 69-100]. 4588. OLSEN, JACK. The Man with the Candy: The Story of the Houston Mass Murders. New York: Simon and Schuster, 1974. 218 pp. The
story of Dean Corll and his two teenage accomplices, who violated and
murdered at least 27 boys between 1971 and 1973. See also: John K. Gurwell, Mass Murder in Houston (Houston: Cordovan Press, 1974r 160 pp.). 4589. PRESTON, JOHN. "White Candles at the
Ramrod," The Witness, 64 (November 1981), 18-19. On a homophobic shooting spree at a New York City waterfront bar. 4590.
REE,
FRANK VAN. De man die een kind doodde: een
psychiatrische Studie. Amsterdam: Boom Meppel, 1984. 163 pp. Story of a conflict-ridden pedophile who killed a boy becuase he was
afraid of the consequences of falling in love with him. 4591. RIORDON, MICHAEL. "The Mirror of
Violence," Body Politic (May 1980), 25-28. On gay men in Toronto organizing for self-defence. 4592. SAGARIN, EDWARD, and DONAL E. MACNAMARA. "The
Homosexual as a Crime Victim," International Journal of Criminology and Penology, 3 (1975), 13-25. The fast-changing scene in America, in which homosexual behavior is
increasingly visible, may produce a reduc- ltion of some types of criminal
victimization, while facilitating others, owing to lack of caution among homosexuals. 4593. SAN MIGUEL, CHRISTOPHER, and JIM MILLHAM. "The
Role of Cognitive and Situational Variables in Aggression toward
Homosexuals," JH, 2 (1976), 11-27. Aggressiveness was found to be related to attitudes toward
homosexuality, perceived similarity toward the target homosexual, and type of
prior contact with the target homosexual. 4594. SPAZIER, DIETER. Der Tod des Psychiaters. Frankfurt am Main: Syndikat, 1982. 235 pp. Concerns a closeted forensic psychiatrist murdered by a patient who
had become his lover and manservant. 4595. SULLIVAN, TERRY, and PETER T. MAIKIN. Killer Clovn: The John Wayne
Gacy Murders. New York: Pinnacle Books, 1984. 375 pp. An Assistant State's Attorney (Illinois) retraces the investigation
that led to the apprehension and conviction of the killer of at least 33
young men and boys. See also: Tim Cahill and Russ Ewing, Buried Dreams: Inside the
Mind of a Serial Killer (New York: Bantam, 1986); and Clifford L. Linedecker, The Man Who Killed Boys (New York: St. Martin's Press, 1980; 222 pp.). 4596. WEINBERG, DAVID. "Blood of a Critic: Gregory
Battcock's Rise to Stardom and Fall from Grace," Soho News (October 13, 1981), 12-16. Reconstruction of the lifestyle and brutal murder, in Puerto Rico, of a noted gay art critic. 4597. WEISS, MIKE. Double-Play: The San Francisco
City Hall Killings. San Francisco: Addison Wesley, 1984. 400 pp. Tells the story of the murder of Mayor George Moscone and Supervisor Harvey Milk by Dan White in 1978. See also: Randy Shilts, The Mayor of Castro Street: The Life and Times of Harvey Milk (New York: St. Martin's Press, 1982; 388 pp.); and W. Hinckle, above. 4598. WEISSMAN, ERIC. "Kids Who Attack Gays," Christopher Street (August 1978), 9-13. On teen-age fag-bashers and their motivations. Thanks to the women's movement, forcible rape has emerged as a major
area of social concern. As yet, however, relatively little attention has
been devoted to the problem of males raping other males, and the trauma
suffered by victims. See also "Prisons: Male," XXI.B. Cases of
women raping other women are virtually nonexistent. 4599. ANDERSON, CRAIG L. "Males as Sexual Assault Victims:
Multiple Levels of Trauma," JH, 7 (1981-82), 145-62. Offers a paradigm consisting of "set-up,"
"attack," and "aftermath" phases. Male victims suffer
rape trauma syndrome, as well as various forms of stigmatization and
secondary trauma. Bibliography, pp. 159-62. 4600. BURGESS, ANN WOLBERT, et al. Sexual Assault of Children and
Adolescents. Lexington, MA: Lexington Books, 1978. 272 pp. Directed at professionals who work with victims and offenders. 4601. GROTH, A. NICHOLAS, and ANN WOLBERT BURGESS.
"Male Rape: Offenders and Victims," American Journal of
Psychiatry, 137 (1980), 806-10. Men tend to avoid reporting rape because of (1) societal beliefs that
a man should be able to defend himself; (2) the victim's fear that his sexual
orientation will become suspect; and (3) the fact that the telling is highly disturbing . 4602. GUNDLACH, RALPH H. "Sexual Molestation and Rape
Reported by Homosexual and Heterosexual Women," JH, 2 (1977), 367-84. Some girls, molested as teenagers, became lesbians. Adult lesbians
were less likely to blame themselves than heterosexual women. 4603. JOSEPHSON, GORDON W. "The Male Rape Victim:
Evaluation and Treatment," Journal of the American College of Emergency
Physicians, 8 (1979), 13-15. While the medical literature offers little guidance in the evaluation
of male victims of sexual assault, the writer makes some practical
suggestions. 4604. KAUFMAN, ARTHUR. "Rape of Men in the
Community," in: Irving R. Stuart and Joanne G. Greer (eds.). Victims of Sexual Aggression:
Treatment of Children, Women, and Men. New York: Van Nostrand Reinhold, 1984, pp. 156-69. Analysis of data sheets of fifteen New Mexico victims. Compared with
female victims, the male victims as a group sustained more physical trauma
and were more likely to be subjected to multiple assaults from several
assailants. See also his: "Male Rape Victims: Nonin- stitutionalized
Assault," American Journal of Psychiatry, 137 (1980), 221-23. 4605. MARTIN, ROBERT ("DONALD TUCKER").
"The Account of the White House Seven," in: Anthony M. Scacco, Jr.
(ed.), Male Rape: A Casebook of Sexual Aggressions. New York: AMS Press, 1982, pp. 30-57. Reflective first-person account by a gay activist of his being
gang-raped in a Washington prison in 1973 after his arrest for participating
in a non-violent demonstration inside the White House. He relates further
details, together with his ideological analysis of the experience, in the
same volume in "A Punk's Song: View from the Inside" (pp. 58-79). 4606. PORTER, EUGENE. Treating the Toung Male Victime of Sexual Assault:
Issues and Intervention Strategies. Syracuse, NY: Safer Society
Press, 1986. 96 pp. Directed at both professionals and laypersons, this pamphlet provides
an understanding of the context in which male sexual victimization occurs,
the ways in which boys are likely to repsond, and the primary approaches to
their treatment. 4607. SCHIFF, ARTHUR F. "Examination and Treatment of
the Male Rape Victim," Southern Medical Journal, 73 (1980), 1498-1502. The number of known male rape victims is on the increase, and
practitioners have need for information on examination and treatment
(described). C. SUICIDE As with stigmatized groups generally, it is to be
expected that suicide rates would be higher among male homosexuals and
lesbians than among the population at large. Owing in part to the fact that
the details are often not adequately recorded, it has been difficult to
obtain adequate data on the specific character of gay suicide, despite the
belief that homosexuals are prone to end their own lives because of the intolerable
burdens that society imposes on them. 4608. ANTHEAUME, ANDRÉ, and PARROT (eds.). "Un cas d'inversion sexuelle," Annales médico-psycholog- iques (May 1905), 459-72. Letter of a despondent homosexual who committed suicide. Reprinted in Masques, 3 (1979-80, 88-93. 4609. BADEN, HANS JURGEN. Literatur und Selbstmord. Stuttgart: Klett, 1965. 229 pp. In this study of literature and
suicide, see pp. 91-146 on the novelist Klaus Mann, who killed himself in 1949. 4610. FONTANIE, PIERRE. "Suicide et homosexualité," Arcadie, no. 314 (February 1980), 108-13; no. 315 (March
1980), 176-83. Review of noted male and female homosexuals who have attempted or
actually committed suicide, followed by a critique of contemporary social
pressures that aggravate the problem. 4611. HAZLEWOOD, ROBERT K. et al (eds.). Autoerotic Fatalities. Lexington, MA: Lexington Books, 1983. 208 pp. On apparently accidental deaths that are caused by asphyxiation for
sexual stimulation; includes several homosexual cases. See also: H. L. Resnik, "Eroticized Repetitive Hangings: A
Form of Self-Destructive Behavior," American Journal of
Psychotherapy, 26 (1972), 4-21. 4612. HENDIN, HERBERT. Black Suicide. New York: Basic Books, 1969. This psychoanalytical work contains a chapter "Suicide and Male
Homosexuality." See also his: "Black Suicide," Archives of General
Psychiatry, 21 (1969), 407-22. 4613. ROFES, ERIC E. Lesbians, Gay Men and Suicide. San Francisco: Grey Fox Press, 1983. 162 pp. Sympathetic study focusing
attention on an important problem of gay self-oppression, discussing
interactions with blackmail—real or feared—and alcoholism. Contends that
social stigmatization places an added burden on the normal stresses of
everyday life. 4614. SCHUMANN, HANS-JOACHIM VON. Homosexualität und XXIII. MEDICAL At the end of the 15th century, Europeans began to be aware that there
were diseases whose principal characteristic was that they are transmitted
through sexual contact. For a long time these diseases were known as
"venereal," from Venus, the goddess of love. More recently they
have come to be termed "sexually transmitted diseases" (STDs). The
homosexual aspect of STDs before the last few decades is largely unknown
because of the double taboo surrounding the subject, but the AIDS crisis
(XXIII.C) has thrown a glaring searchlight on the problem. 4617. CORSARO, MARIA, and CAROLE KORZENIOWSKY. STD: A Commonsense Guide. New York: St. Martin's Press, 1980. 135 pp. Practical guide for the lay public of 13 sexually transmitted
diseases, now somewhat dated. 4618. EBBESEN, PETER, MADS
MELBYE, and ROBERT BIGGAR. "Sex Habits, Recent Disease, and Drug Use in
Two Groups of Danish Homosexuals," Archives of Sexual Behavior, 13 (1984), 291-300. Two-hundred fifty-nine Danish homosexuals interviewed with regard to
health; results resemble those for San Francisco in 1970. 4619. FENWICK, R. D. The Advocate Guide to Gay Health. Revised ed. Boston: Alyson, 1982. 236 pp. Information and advice for
gay men, now somewhat out of date. Considerable emphasis on holistic
medicine, some aspects of which are controversial. 4620. FLUKER, J. L. "A 10-Year Study of Homosexually
Transmitted Infections," British Journal of Venereal Diseases, 52 (1976), 155-60. A considerably higher incidence of VD as a result of homosexual
contact has probably always existed than was formerly realized, and recent
years have seen a massive further increase. 4621. HOLMES, KING K., PER-ANDERS MARDH, et al. (eds). Sexually Transmitted Diseases. New York: McGraw- Hill, 1983. 1104 pp. This massive volume offers a truly multifaceted presentation,
including social, political, and legal aspects. 4622. JUDSON, FRANKLYN N. "Comparative Prevalence Rates of Sexual Transmitted Diseases in
Heterosexual and Homosexual Men," American Journal of
Epidemiology, 112 (1980), 836-43. Confirms the substantially higher homosexual rates
that obtained in the late 1970s. 4623. KASSLER, JEANNE. Gay Hen's Health: A Guide to the AID Syndrome and
Other Sexually Transmitted Diseases. New York: Harper and Row, 1983. 166 pp. General survey by
an M.D. for the lay reader. 4624. KAZAL, HENRY L., et al. "The Gay Bowel
Syndrome: Clinicopathological Correlation in 260 Cases," Annals of Clinical and
Laboratory Science, 6 (1976), 184-92. A group of New York City male homosexuals constituting about 10% of a
proctological practice presented a distinct pattern of anorectal and colon
disease. See also Norman Sohn and James G. Robilotti, "The Gay Bowel
Syndrome," American Journal of Gastroenterology, 67 (1977), 478-84. 4625. LANGSTON, DEBORAH. Living with Herpes: The Comprehensive and
Authoritative Guide to the Causes, Symptoms, and Treatment of Herpes Virus
Illnesses. Garden City, NY: Doubleday, 1983. 198 pp. Guide for the lay reader by
a Professor at Harvard Medical School; see esp. pp. 42-45, 158-64. 4626. LLEWELYN-JONES, DEREK. Herpes, AIDS and Other
Sexually Transmitted Diseases. New York: Faber and Faber, 1985. 155 pp. An up-to-date survey that, without minimizing the seriousness of
AIDS, shows its relative rarity. 4627. MA, PEARL, and DONALD ARMSTRONG (eds.). The Acquired Immune Deficiency
Syndrome and Infections of Homosexual Men. Brooklyn, NY: Yorke Medical Books, 1984. 442 pp. Collection of
technical papers by medical authorities. 4628. MARGOLIS, STEPHEN. Sexually Transmitted Diseases: An Annotated,
Selective Bibliography. New York: Garland, 1984. 176 pp. Covers history, disease control modalities, patient education/behavior
and compliance, information sources, and epidemiological and medical
resources. Emphasis is on very recent material, with selected references to
earlier studies. For other bibliographies see XXIII.C. 4629. MORTON, R. S. Venereal Diseases. Baltimore: Penguin Books, 1966. 185 pp. Mainly a factual account reflecting then-current knowledge, but
occasionally descending to moralism regarding homosexual behavior, 4630. O'DONNELL, MARY, etal. Lesbian Health Matters! Santa Cruz, CA: Santa Cruz Women's Health Collec- tive, 1979. 101 pp. Lesbian perspectives on such
subjects as alternative fertilization, alcoholism, menopause, and feminist
therapy. 4631. OSTROW, DAVID G., et al. (eds.). Sexually Transmitted Diseases
in Homosexual Men. New York: Plenum Medical Book Co., 1983. 272 pp. A comprehensive professional handbook, covering medical practice,
bacterially sexually transmitted diseases, enterically transmitted diseases,
anal disorders, dermato- logical problems, AIDS, and volatile nitrates
("poppers"). 4632. POLLAK, MICHAEL, and LINDINALVA LAURINDO. "1000
homosexuels temoignent," Le Gai pied, no. 193 (November 15, 1985), 18-22. Results of a questionnaire distributed by the gay weekly show that
French gays are seriously concerned about the health crisis, but not panicky.
Some change in sexual behavior is documented, but "safe sex" has
not been generally adopted. A companion article by Frank Arnal (pp. 14-15)
reports on an opinion poll conducted among the French population at large,
showing that they reject alarmism. 4633. SCHILLER, F., and G. KAHLERT. "Homosexualität ein aktuelles venereologisches
Problem?" Dermatologische Wochenschrift, no. 42 (1967), 1161-65. Medical report on increasing numbers of homosexual cases in East
German hospitals at the time of legal reform. 4634. SCHWABER, FERN A., and MICHAEL SHERNOFF (eds.). Sourcebook on Lesbian/Gay
Health Care. New York: National Gay Health Education Foundation, 1984. 282 pp. Includes presentations given at the First International Lesbian and
Gay Health Conference (New York, Hunter College, 1984), a bibliography, and
the fourth edition of the National Lesbian/Gay Health Directory, listing
practitioners and other health professionals. 4635.
SCHWULE
MEDIZINMANNER. Sumpffieber:
Medizin für schwule Männer. Fourth ed. Berlin: Verlag Rosa Winkel, 1984. 180 +
34 pp. Handbook on disease and health for gay men. This edition contains a
special AIDS supplement ("AIDS Nachtrag"). 4636. SZMUNESS, WOLF, et al, "Hepatitis B Vaccine:
Demonstration of Efficacy in a Controlled Clinical Trial in High-Risk Population," New England Journal of
Medicine, 303 (1980), 833-41. Account by the team that successfully developed and tested a vaccine
for hepatitis B, with the cooperation of the gay-male community. See also
Szmuness et al., "On the Role of Sexual Behavior in the Spread of
Hepatitis B Infection," Annals of Internal Medicine, 83 (1975), 489-95. B. PROFESSIONALS AND PATIENTS Gay men and lesbians have for long been hesitant to discuss their
sexuality with health care givers, a reticence that has tended to hamper
treatment. Another form of concealment--all-too-often a necessary one-- is
the closeted sexuality of gay and lesbian doctors and nurses
. 4637. ANDERSON, CARLA LEE. "The Effect of a Workshop
on Attitudes of Female Nursing Students toward Male Homosexuality," JH, 7 (1981), 57-69. Responses of 64 female nursing students indicated that they held more
negative attitudes and stereotyped beliefs that did a sample of male
counselors and psychologists. After a two-hour workshop attitudes of 37 had
changed. 4638. BELL, ALAN P. "The Homosexual as Patient"
and "The Homosexual as Physician," in: Richard Green (ed.), Human Sexuality: A Health
Practitioner's Text. Baltimore: Williams and Wilkins, 19?\5, pp.
54-72 and 74-81. Inasmuch as homosexuality involves a large number of divergent
experiences, the label affords little predictability. The physician should
listen carefully to the patient's own statements, so as to help enhance his
or her coping strategies. 4639. BERGER, RAYMOND M. "Health Care for Lesbians
and Gays: What Social Workers Should Know," Journal of Social Work and
Human Sexuality, 1:3 (Spring 1983), 59-73. Urges commitment ot the social-work values of self-determination and
nonjudgmental service. 4640. BROWN, HOWARD. Familiar Faces, Hidden Lives: The Story of
Homosexual Men in America Today. New York: Harcourt Brace Jovanovich, 1976. 246 pp. The late New York City
activist describes his life and medical career with asides on the experiences
of others. 4641. DARDICK, LARRY, and KATHLEEN E. GRADY.
"Openness between Gay Persons and Health Professionals," Annals of Internal Medicine, 93 (1980), 115-19. Health professionals need to avoid not only overt expres sions of
prejudice, but also procedures that prematurely foreclose the possibility of
patients disclosing their sexual orientation to practitioners. 4642. HARRISON, HOWARD. "Straight Talk from a Gay
Doctor," The Hew Physician, 26 (April 1977), 34-36. Psychiatrist relates his own difficulties in coming to terms with his
homosexuality. 4631. HENDERSON, RALPH H. "Improving Sexually Transmitted
Disease Health Services for Gays: A National Prospective," Sexually Transmitted Diseases, 4:2 (April-June 1977), 58-62. Vigorous efforts must be undertaken to combat the society's tendency
to punish those who have contracted sexually transmitted diseases (STDs) and
homosexuals. 4632. HIRSH, HERMAN. "The Homosexual and the Family
Doctor," GP [General Practitioner], 26:5 (November 1962), 103-07. Traditional attitudes that flourished during the period. 4633. "Homosexual Doctors: Their Place and Influence
in Medicine Today," Medical World News, 15:4 (January 25, 1974), 41-45, 49, 51. Asserts that the typical homosexual physician is likely to live in a
large city; probably not married; more likely to specialize in pathology or
anaesthesiology or some other non-patient-contact discipline than pediatrics,
orthopedics, or internal medicine; and living in mortal terror of being
exposed. 4634. HULL, MICHAEL. "Sexual Orientation
Discrimination in Medical Statistics," Australian and New Zealand
Journal of Sociology, 13 (1977), 146-48. Argues that officially accepted statistics for the incidence of STDs
among homosexuals are questionable. 4635. "I Am a Homosexual Physician," Medical Opinion, 2:1 (January 1973), 49-50, 54-55, 58. Personal account describing wrongs suffered and difficulties of
"coming out." 4636. JOHNSON, SUSAN R., et al. "Factors Influencing
Lesbian Gynecologic Care: A Preliminary Study," American Journal of Obstetrics
and Gynecology, 140 (May 1, 1981), 20-28. A study of 117 lesbians showed that these women
actively utilized the health care system, though many chose less traditional
sources. No medical problems specific to lesbians were identified. 4637. LAWRENCE, JOHN C. "Homosexuals,
Hospitalization, and the Nurse," Nursing Forum, 14 (1975), 304-17. Students need to be reminded that passing moral judgments is not a
function of nursing and that such judgments merely impede the ability to give
quality care. 4638. MATHEWS, CHRISTOPHER, et al. "Physician
Attitudes toward Homosexuality," Western Journal of Medicine, 140 (1984), 290-91. Before AIDS became prominent, 40% of physicians surveyed reported
feeling uncomfortable treating homosexual patients. 4639. MAURER, TOM B. "Health Care and the Gay Community," Postgraduate Medicine, 58 (1975), 127-30. Health care professionals who are the most rejecting of homosexuals
are usually uncomfortable with sexuality in general and with some aspect of
their own sexuality in particular. 4640. MESSING, ALICE E., ROBERT SCHOENBERG, and ROGER K. STEPHENS. "Confronting Homphobia in Health Care Settings:
Guidelines for Social Work Practice," Journal of Social Work and
Human Sexuality, 2:2/3 (Winter-Spring 1984), 65-74. Urges humanistic, nonjudgmental
practices and attitudes. 4641. 0'DONNELL, MARY. "Lesbian Health Care: Issues
and Literature," Science for the People, 10:3 (May-June 1978), 8-19. Lesbian activist's appraisal of shortcomings of the health-care
delivery system. 4642. PATTERSON, JANE, and LYNDA MADARAS. Woman/Doctor. New York: Avon, 1983. 217 pp. Patterson, a physician, recounts her struggles against discrimination
as a woman and a lesbian. 4643. PAULY, IRA B., and STEVEN G. GOLDSTEIN. "Physicians'
Attitudes in Treating Male Homosexuals," Medical Aspects of Human
Sexuality, 4:12 (1970), 26-27, 31-32, 36-37, 41, 44-45. Results of a questionnaire study of 937 Oregon physicians show that
attitudes vary to some extent according to field of specialization and age. 4644. PETTYJOHN, RODGER D. "Health Care of the Gay
Individual," Nursing Forum, 18 (1979), 366-93. An overview of the subject of homosexuality for the health-care
practitioner, including a glossary of slang. 4645. POGONCHEFF, ELAINE, and JEANNE BROSSART. "The
Gay Patient: What Not to Do, What You Should Be Doing," RN, 42:4 (April 1979), 46-52. If there are problems in treating the homosexual patient, they
probably stem from the attitudes of the staff. 4646. SANDHOLZER, TERRY A. "Physician Attitudes and
Other Factors Affecting the Incidence of Sexually Transmitted Diseases in
Homosexual Males," JH , 5 (1980), 325-27. Previous research indicates that the views of private physicians are
more liberal towards homosexuals and STDs in homosexual males than might be
expected. 4647. TULNER, H. J. Reis
alleen: Memoires van een homofiele arts. Amsterdam: Tiebosch, 1981. 240 pp. Memoirs of a Dutch physician (born 1911), including his work abroad, his marriage, and his homosexuality. 4659A. WALKER, JIM. "Homosexuality in Australia," New Doctor, 17 (August-October 1980), 28-30. Problems encountered by homosexual
physicians in disclosing their orientation, and uneasiness felt by homosexual
patients in consulting a physician whom they believe to be heterosexual. The Acquired Immune Deficiency Syndrome (AIDS) first drew significant
attention in the spring of 1981. The chief groups affected by this
extraordinarily lethal disease are male homosexuals and intravenous drug
users. The following section does not pretend to offer any control over the
thousands of professionally medical reports that have been published—though
these can be approached through the bibliographies that have been cited.
Instead the coverage focuses chiefly on the social and political aspects: the
effects of the disease on the life patterns and self-concept of homosexuals,
changes in the structure of gay service organizations, and the response of
the larger political community. 4648. ALTMAN, DENNIS. AIDS in the Mind of America. New York: Doubleday, 1986. 228 pp. Attempts an overview of how the AIDS
crisis has altered attitudes about sex, disease, medicine, and death. While
the final chapter offers an account of what is specifically American about
the response, this ambitious study lacks comparative depth. See also his:
"AIDS: The Polit- icization of an Epidemic," Socialist Review, no. 78 (November-December 1984), 93-109. 4649. BATCHELOR, WALTER F. "AIDS: A Public Health and
Psychological Emergency," American Psychologist, 39 (1984), 1279-84. The psychological ramifications of AIDS involve the social stigmas
attached to the lifestyles of high-risk groups and the fear of contracting
AIDS held by the general public. 4650. BAYER, RONALD. "AIDS and the Gay Community: Between
the Specter and the Promise of Medicine," Social Research, 52 (1985), 581-606. Fearful of how medical authority might be abused, the gay community
has sought to invoke protections enunciated in the liberal tradition of
biomedical ethics. 4663. BAYER, RONALD. "Gays and the Stigma of 'Bad Blood,'" Hastings Center Report, 13:2 (April 1983), 5-7. On March 4, 1983, the U.S. Public Health Service recommended that
"sexually active homosexual and bisexual men with multiple
partners" be prohibited from donating or selling their blood. Success of
the ban depends on the cooperation and honesty of gay men. 4664. BAYER, RONALD, CAROL LEVINE, and THOMAS MURRAY.
"Guidelines for Confidentiality in Research on AIDS," IRB: A Review of Human
Subjects Research, 6:6 (November-December 1984), 1-7. Increasing knowledge about AIDS and the social problems consequent on
this knowledge pose new challenges in the area of personal privacy. 4665. BERGEN, INEKE VAN DEN, and REIJER BREED. Is het waar dat Lefert AIDS
heeft? Amsterdam:
Van Gennep, 1985. 84 pp. Traces the effects of AIDS on a Dutchman, Lefert Schee- pert, diagnosed
on November 27, 1984, and his friend Reijer Breed. 4666.
BERGMANN,
THOMAS, HANS JAGER, and FRANK RUEHMANN. AIDS:
was tun? Berlin: Bruno Gmunder, 1983. 80 pp. Objective overview for the lay public by West German gay physicians,
now somewhat dated. 4667. BERKOWITZ, RICHARD, MICHAEL CALLEN, and RICHARD
DWORKIN. How to Have Sex in an Epidemic: One Approach. New York: News from the Front, 1983. 40 pp. Advice on "safer sex," some of it sensible, some problem
atic. 4668. BLACK, DAVID. The Plague Years: A Chronicle of AIDS, the Epidemic
of Our Times. New York: Simon & Schuster, 1986. 224 pp. An expanded version of a series of articles written for Rolling Stone magazine; in keeping with this origin, the book is
irritating and sometimes unconsidered, but occasionally insightful. 4669. CAHILL, KEVIN M. (ed.). The AIDS Epidemic. New York: St Martins Press, 1983. 173 pp. A first attempt at a comprehensive assessment: thirteen papers, mainly
by physicians, presented at a symposium at Lenox Hill Hospital in New York
City and covering epidemiology, immunology, the clinical picture, and implications. 4670. CAPUTO, L. "Dual Diagnosis: AIDS and
Addiction," Social Work (July-August 1985), 361-64. Offers some light
on an understudied phenomenon. 4671. CECCHI,
ROBERT L. "Stress: Prodrome to Immune Deficiency," Annals of the New York Academy of Sciences, 437 (1984), 286-89. Suggests that communities
affected by AIDS may be immune- deficient as a result of stress associated
with a negative self-image, inability to express feelings and anger, and a
lack of community support. 4672. CENTERS FOR DISEASE CONTROL, ATLANTA. "Report
on AIDS," Morbidity and Mortality Weekly Reports (June 1981ff.). These continuing weekly reports are the basis for the nationwide
statistics on AIDS. 4673. COATES, THOMAS J., LYDIA TEMOSHOK, and JEFFREY
MANDEL. "Psychosocial Research is Essential to Understanding and
Treating AIDS," American Psychologist, 39 (1984), 1309-14. In terms of the interface between biological and psychological
variables, focuses on the psychological consequences of AIDS, psychosocial
determinants of health- promoting and health-damaging behaviors, and factors
related to disease incidence and progression. 4674. CONTE, J. E., JR., et al. "Infection-Control
Guidelines for Patients with the Acquired Immunodeficiency Syndrome," New England Journal of \
Medicine, 309:12 (September 22, 1983), 740-44. Professional assessment of infection risks and the means of their
control, a subject which has occasioned much fear among the lay public. 4675. DE VITA, VINCENT T., S. HELLMAN, and S. A. ROSENBERG. AIDS: Etiology, Diagnosis,
Treatment and Prevention. New York: J. B. Lippincott, 1985. 352 pp. A coordinated collection of contributions designed to serve as a
textbook for physicians and medical researchers. 4676. EBBESEN, PETER, ROBERT J. BIGGER, and MALS MELBYE. AIDS: A Basic Guide for
Clinicians. Philadelphia: W. B. Saunders, 1984. 313 pp. Medical papers by European and North American investigators. Includes
bibliography from the [US] National Institute of Allergy. 4677. FERRACINI, RICCARDO (ed.). AIDS: Che cos'e: le cause, la diffusione, come si
previeni, a chi rivolgersi. Turin: Edizione Gruppo Abele, 1985. 168 pp. Manual written in nontechnical language, combining material from
physicians and activists. Italian and international focus. 4678. FERRARA,
ANTHONY J. "My Personal Experience with AIDS," American Psychologist, 39 (1984), 1285-87. The author, now deceased, recounts the emotional and physical
problems, including his experience with four treatment regimens. 4679. FETTNER, ANN GIUDICI, and WILLIAM A. CHECK. The Truth About AIDS:
Evolution of an Epidemic. New York: Holt, Rinehart and Winston, 1984. 288 pp. This overview for the
lay public stressing social rather than medical aspects,
includes discussion of fears and prejudices, rivalries among researchers, and
problems in securing funds. A somewhat revised edition appeared in 1985. 4680. FISHER, JAMES L. "Homosexuality: Kick and Kickback," Southern Medical Journal, 77 (1984), 149-50. Representative specimen of the conservative backlash trend. 4681. FISHER, RICHARD B. AIDS: Your Questions Answered. London: Gay Men's Press, 1984. 126 pp. Popular work
in question-and-answer format addressed to British gay men. See also: Graham
Hancock and Enver Carim, AIDS: The Deadly Epidemic (London: Gollancz, 1986; 191 pp.). 4682.
FRIEDMAN-KIEN,
ALVIN E., and LINDA J. LAUBENSTEIN (eds.).
AIDS: The
Epidemic of Kaposi's Sarcoma and Opportunistic Infections. New York: Masson, 1984. 351 pp. Forty-four papers by physicians and medical investigators; many charts
and photographs; index. The original article by the dermatologist Moritz
Kaposi (1837-1902) was entitled "Idiopathisches multiples Pigmentsarkom der
Haut," Archiv fttr Dermatologie und Syphilis, 4 (1872), 265-73. 4683.
FURSTENBERG,
ANNE-LINDA, and MIRIAM OLSON. "Social Work and AIDS," Social Work in Health Care, 9:4 (Summer 1984), 45-62. General principles of practice are applied to the specifics of
dealing with AIDS and with social work tasks involving patients, families and
significant others. 4684. GAROOGIAN, RHODA. AIDS, 1981-1983: An Annotated Bibliography« Brooklyn: Compubibs, 1984. 92 pp. About 400 entries, many with
descriptive annotations, arranged semestrally. Excludes "highly clinical
references from the medical literature." 4685. GONG, VICTOR (ed.). Understanding AIDS: A Comprehensive
Guide, New
Brunswick, NJ: Rutgers University Press, 1985. 240 pp. Papers by medical personnel written for the lay public covering
definitions; the clinical spectrum, implications; treatment; avoiding and
coping with AIDS; and health resources. Bibliography and index. 4686. GREENLY, MICHAEL (ed.). Chronicles The Human Side of AIDS. New York: Irvington, 1986. 439 pp. Assembles input
from more than 100 people, to present a composite picture of the impact of
the disease. 4687.
HINZ,
STEFAN. AIDS: Die Lust an der Seuche.
Rein- bek bei Hamburg: Rowohlt, 1984. 249 pp. Medical information, together with interviews with people with AIDS
and others in West Germany. 4688. HIRSCH, DAN A., and ROGER W. ENLOW. "The Effects
of the Acquired Immune Deficiency Syndrome on Gay Lifestyles and the Gay
Individual," Journal of the American Academy of Sciences, 437 (1984), 273-82. AIDS has elicited a spectrum of responses ranging from panic, fear,
and despair to feelings of closeness and unity that have helped the gay
community to organize a long-term response to the epidemic. 4689. JOSEPH, JILL G., et al. "Coping with the Threat
of AIDS: An Approach to Psychosocial Assessment," American Psychologist, 39 (1984), 1297-1302. Focuses on five areas of the psychosocial welfare of gay males:
obtaining qualitative data, developing inventories, sampling in the gay
community, building community networks, and characterizing the AIDS crisis. 4690. KAYAL, PHILIP. "'Morals,' Medicine and the AIDS
Epidemic," Journal of Religion and Health, 24 (1985), 218-38. Evidence is given of the connnection between moralizing—largely of
religious origin--and the response of the medical establishment, leading to a
tendency to blame the victim. 4691. KRAMER, LARRY. The Normal Heart. New York: New American Library, 1985. 123 pp. This play, an eviscerating work that has been frequently performed, is
largely autobiographical, reflecting the author's passionate, sometimes
strident campaign to educate the public on AIDS. The play is part of a
growing body of drama and fiction reflecting the AIDS crisis. 4692. LANDBECK, G. (ed.). AIDS: Opportunistic Infections and Hemophilia:
Proceedings of the First German Round Table Discussion on AIDS and Its
Implications in Hemophilia. Stuttgart: Schattauer, 1984. 128 pp. Emphasizes a non-homosexual risk group. 4693. LAURENCE, JEFFREY. "The Immune System in
AIDS," Scientific American, 253:6 (December 1985), 84-93. New knowledge of how the AIDS virus alters the growth and function of
T4 lymphocytes may lead to treatments and ultimately a vaccine. 4694. LAYGUES, HELENE. SIDA: Temoignage sur la vie et la mort de Martin. Paris: Hachette, 1985. 300 pp. Narrates the
experiences of a French victim of AIDS. 4695. LEIBOWITCH, JACQUES. A Strange Virus of Unknown Origin« Translated by Richard Howard. New York: Ballantine, 1985. 172 pp.
Overview by a French physician and medical researcher, who posits an African
origin for the disease. 4696. LIEBERSON, JONATHAN. "Anatomy of an
Epidemic," New York Review of Books (August 18, 1983), 17-22. Thoughts on the social implications of AIDS prompted by ten recent
books. See also his: "The Reality of AIDS," ibid. (January 16,
1986), pp. 43-48. 4697. LOPEZ, DIEGO J., and GEORGE S. GETZEL. "Helping
Gay AIDS Patients in Crisis," Social Casework, 65 (1984), 387-94. From experiences at the Gay Men's Health Crisis (NYC), outlines seven
phases of service to the gay AIDS patient: engagement and assessment, support
of autonomy, explanation, support of the patient and indirect recognition of
death, monitoring of health status, personal support networks and grief work,
and care and advocacy for the dying patient. 4698. MARTIN, JOHN L., and CAROLE S. VANCE. "Behavioral
and Psychosocial Factors in AIDS: Methodological and Substantive
Issues," American Psychologist, 39 (1984), 1303-07. Argues that dominance of the germ-theory model has led to research
that neglects lifestyle factors. 4699. McKUSICK, LEON, WILLIAM HORSTMAN, and THOMAS J. COATES. "AIDS and Sexual Behavior Reported by Gay Men in San
Francisco," American Journal of Public Health, 75 (May 1985), 493-96. Survey of 655 gay men
conducted at the University of California at San Francisco shows substantial
decrease in number of sex partners and in "unsafe sex" among men in
low-risk situations. Those in high risk situations evidenced little change. 4700. MELDRUM, JULIAN. A.I.D.S. through the British
Media. London:
AIDS Action Group, 1984. ca. 64 pp. Bibliographical entries through June 1984 with some annotations, and
index. Useful in tracing the evolution of public awareness and emotion in one
country. 4701. MILLER, ALAN V. Gays and Acquired Immune
Deficiency Syndrome. Second ed. Toronto: Canadian Gay Archives, 1983. 67 pp. (Canadian Gay
Archives Publication no. 7) This invaluable
bibliography has about 1000 items, divided according to medical press; the gay press (often neglected in
such lists); and the mainstream press. Items in the Canadian Gay Archives are
starred. 4702. MORIN, STEPHEN F., KENNETH A. CHARLES, and ALAN K.
MALYON. "The Psychological Impact of AIDS on Gay Men," American Psychologist, 39 (1984), 1288- 93. Finds fear of death and dying, guilt, fear of lifestyle exposure, fear
of contagion, loss of self-esteem, and a general sense of gloom among
counseling clients. Psychologists should adopt a delicate balance of
remaining sex- positive while recommending safer sex. 4703. NICHOLS, EVE K. Mobilizing Against AIDS: The
Unfinished Story of a Virus. Cambridge, MA: Harvard University Press, 1986. 212
pp. Synthesizes the AIDS session of the 1985 annual meeting of the
Institute of Medicine of the National Academy of Sciences. 4704. NICHOLS, STUART E., and DAVID G. OSTROW. Psychiatric Implications of
Acquired Immune Deficiency Syndrome. Washington, DC: American Psychiatric Press, 1984.
137 pp. (Clinical Insights Monographs) Thirteen papers on medical aspects, psychiatric treatment, and social
responses. 4705. NUNGESSER, LON G. Epidemic of Courage: Facing AIDS in America. New York: St. Martin's Press, 1986. 256 pp. Frank interviews with seven PWAs (persons with AIDS), and with other
concerned individuals. 4706. PANEM, SANDRA. "AIDS, Public Policy and
Biomedical Research," Chest, 85 (1984), 416-22. Documents the
influence of the conservative backlash. 4707. PATTON, CINDY. Sex and Germs: The Politics of AIDS. Boston: South End Press, 1985. 250 pp. Arguing for a more comprehensive understanding
of sexuality and the body in political discourse, relates the fear of
sexuality to the AIDS climate and the New Right attacks on gay people. 4708. PAUL, GERD, and LORETTA WALZ. Hilfe
und Selbsthilfe in San Francisco. Berlin: Nissen, 1986. 144 pp. Contrasts the pragmatic approach to AIDS in San Francisco with the
more emotional response in Germany. Uses interview material. 4709. PAYNE, KENNETH W., and STEPHEN J. RISCH. "The
Politics of AIDS," Science for the People, 16:5 (1984), 17-22. Argues that an assault on the gay bathhouses is likely to be the first
step in a wide-ranging campaign against gay institutions and freedoms. 4710. PEABODY, BARBARA. The Screaming Room. San Diego: Oak Tree, 1986. 254 pp. A moving and literate account by a mother's ultimately unsuccessful
effort to save her son from death by AIDS. See also Betty Clare Moffatt, When Someone You Love Has
AIDS: A Book of Hope for Family and Friends (Santa Monica: IBS Press, 1986; 154 pp.). 4711. PURTILO, RUTH, JOSEPH SONNABEND, and DAVID PUR-
TILO. "Confidentiality, Informed Consent and Untoward Social
Consequences in Research on a 'New Killer Disease' (AIDS)," Clinical Research, 31:4 (October 1983), 464-72. Discusses some serious consequences for civil liberties. 4712. RELMAN, ARNOLD S., et al. "AIDS: The Emerging Ethical Issues," Hastings Center Report: Special Supplement (August 1985), 1-32. Includes discussion of screening, epidemiological investigation,
clinical care, public health, and media coverage. 4713.
ROZENBAUM,
WILLY, DIDIER SEUX,
and ANNIE KOUCHNER. SIDA: Réalités et fantasmes. Paris: Editions P.O.L., 1984. 168 pp. Account for the lay public in France, where despite a relatively high
number of cases, the public remained remarkably calm. (SIDA = AIDS.) 4714. SCHMIDT, CASPER G. "The Group-Fantasy Origins
of AIDS," Journal of Psychohistory, 12 (Summer 1984), 37-78. This eccentric article posits "a psychosocial origin for
AIDS," which is presented as group fantasy of scapegoat- ing, somehow
linked to fear of nuclear attack and neo-con- servative political trends. 4715. SIMKINS, LAWRENCE, and MARK G. EBERHAGE. "Attitudes toward AIDS, Herpes II,
and Toxic Shock Syndrome," Psychological Reports, 55 (1984), 779-86. A questionnaire administered to 232 Kansas City College students
showed that although male homosexuals were concerned about AIDS they did not
appear to have lowered their level of sexual activity. 4716. SLAFF, JAMES I., and JOHN K. BRUBAKER. The AIDS Epidemic. New York: Warner Books, 1985. 285 pp. Comprehensive account for the lay (esp. heterosexual) public. Part I
is question-and-answer in format; part II traces the history of the disease
and future outlook, with references. 4717. STAVER, SARI. "Psychiatrists' Broad Definition
of f Pre-AIDS' Stirs Debate," American Medical News, 27 (1984), 3-8. Ideological overtones of the problem of determining the onset of the
disease proper. 4718. TIELMAN, ROB, and FRITS VAN GRIENSVEN.
"Sociaal- wetenschappelijk AIDS-onderzoek," Sociologische Gids, 32 (1985), 416-30. Reports on a psycho-social study of 1000 gay men begun at Utrecht
University which will examine such variables as the frequency and character
of blood-to-blood and sperm- to-blood contacts, participation in networks,
depression, identity, coping behavior, addiction, and lifestyle. 4718A. WINSTEN, JAY A. "Science and the Media: The Boundaries of Truth," Health Affairs (Spring 1985), 5-23. AIDS reporting in the broad context of the problematics of publicity
for medical research, including grandstanding and sensationalism. The history of medical theorizing about the causes of homosexual
behavior is a veritable museum of pddity. Nonetheless, the story is
interesting as a series of chapters in the history of ideas. Moreover, some
of these notions are still active today as religious moralizing and folklore,
even sometimes as "science." For medical writers of the 19th and
early 20th century who were specifically concerned with homosexuality, see
"Pioneers," I.B; see also "Psychiatry," XVII.A-K. 4719. ARON, JEAN-PAUL, and ROGER KEMPF. Le pénis et la démoralisation de l'Occident, Paris: Grasset, 1978. 310 pp. Claims, improbably, that homosexuality was a taboo subject in France
until the time of Dr. Ambroise Tardieu in the mid-19th century. Reissued
unchanged as La bourgeoisie y le sexe et l'honneur (Paris: Editions Complexe, 1984). 4720. AURELIANUS, CAELIUS. On Acute Diseases & On Chronic Diseases, Translated by I. E. Drabkin. Chicago: University of
Chicago Press, 1950. 1019 PP» Translation of De morbis acutis and De morbis chronicis; text and translation on facing pages. These texts, possibly
composed in the 5th century of our era, are based on Greek treatises by
Soranus of Ephesus (early 2d century). See pp. 901-05 for the ancient origin
of the sickness theory of homosexuality. A detailed commentary on the relevant passages is provided by P. H. Schrijvers, Eine medizinische Erklärung
der männlichen Homosexualität aus der Antike (Amsterdam: B. R. Grüner, 1985; 75 pp.); see also
Giuseppe Roccatagliata and Sandra Isetta, "Celio Aureliano e il problema dell'omosessualità," Archivio di psicologia neurologia e psichiatria (April-June 1980), 276-81. 4721. BRANDT, ALLAN M. No Magic Bullet: A Social History of Venereal Disease in the United
States since 1880. New York: Oxford University Press, 1985. 320 pp. Traces America's response to sexually transmitted diseases from
Victorian anxieties about syphilis to the current fears about herpes and
AIDS. 4722. BULLOUGH, VERN L. "Homosexuality and the
Medical Model," JH, 1 (1974), 99-110. Holds that in the 18th and especially the 19th century, medical
concepts about sexual deviation arose to reinforce traditional religious
concepts which were undergoing erosion. For some latter-day US documents of
these currents, see Jonathan Katz (ed.) Gay American History (New York: Crowell, 1976), 129-207. 4723. BURNHAM, JOHN. "Early References to Homosexual
Communities in American Medical Writings," Medical Aspects of Human
Sexuality, 7 (August 1973), 36, 40-49. Claims that only in the early years of the 20th century, as a result
of vice raids, venereal disease, and the writings of psychiatrists, did the
American medical profession slowly learn of the existence of homosexual
communities in major cities. 4724. CASPER, JOHANN LUDWIG. A Handbook of the Practice of
Forensic Medicine. Translated by G. W. Balfour.
London: New Sydenham Society, 1859-65. 4 vols. In this influential text by a German physician (1796- 1864), see vol.
3, pp. 328-46 on "disputed unnatural lewdness." Translation of Handbuch der gerichtlichen
Medicin (Berlin:
Hirschwald, 1856-58), of which a thoroughly revised edition was prepared by
Carl Liman in 1881 (Berlin: Hirschwald). As the "Casper-Liman" it
was the standard textbook of forensic medicine in German universities until
1933. 4725. CHARCOT, JEAN-MARTIN, and VALENTIN MAGNAN. "Inversions
du sens genital et autres perversions génitales," Archives de Heurologie, nos. 7 and 12 (January-February and November 1882),
55-60; 296-322. Charcot (1825-1893) was a noted French alienist, who influenced Freud
and others. He introduced the term inversion (coined by Arrigo Tamassia in Italy in 1878) into French medical
discourse. 4718. CHAUNCEY, GEORGE, JR. "From Sexual Inversion to
Homosexuality: Medicine and the Changing Conceptualization of Female
Deviance," Salmagundi, no. 58-59 (1982-83), 114-46. Scholarly study of how "homoerotic desire and relations"
between women were understood by U.S. medical professionals during the
period 1880-1930. 4719. CHEVALIER,
JULIEN. Une maladie de la personnalité: l'inversion sexuelle:
psychophysiologie, sociologie, tératologie, aliénation mentale, psychologie
morbide, anthropologie, médecine judiciaire. Lyon: Storck, 1893. 520 pp. An expansion of his 1886 medical thesis, this massive work helped
to spread the inversion model of homosexuality. 4720. COMFORT, ALEX. The Anxiety Makers: Some Curious Preoccupations of
the Medical Profession. New York: Dell, 1969. 208 pp. Popular account of medically based scares,
esp. the mania concerning masturbation. 4721. CONRAD, PETER, and JOSEPH W.
SCHNEIDER. Deviants and Medicalization: From Badness to Sickness. St. Louis: С. V. Mosley, 1980. 311 pp. Chapter 7, "Homosexuality from
Sickness to Lifestyle" (pp. 172-214), seeks to chart the transition in
Western civilization from a religious conception of homosexuality as sin to
a medico-psychiatric conception, and (finally) to the notion of homosexuality
as an alterna- tige lifestyle. Useful as a survey, but theoretically disappointing. 4722. DRINKA, GEORGE FREDERICK. The Birth of Neurosis: Myth,
Malady, and the Victorians. New York: Simon & Schuster, 1984. 431 pp. Concentrates on the typology of neurotic illnesses developed by
physicians and psychiatrists, ca. 1870-1900. See esp. Chapter 7, "A
Proliferation of Perversions, an Epidemic of Murder" (pp. 152-83).
Superficial. 4723. FADERMAN, LILLIAN. "The Morbidification of Love
Between Women by 19th-century Sexologists," JH, 4 (1978), 73-98. Argues that for the past 100 years medical science and psychology have
"moribidified" intense love relationships between women by
inventing ills that ostensibly accompany such affection and by denying the
seriousness of the affection where such ills are not present. 4724. HALLER, JOHN S., and ROBIN M. HALLER. The Physician and Sexuality in Victorian America. Urbana: University of Illinois Press, 1974. 331 pp. Analysis of 19th-century medical writings on sex, with many useful
references. 4725.
HENKE,
ADOLF CHRISTIAN HEINRICH. Lehrbuch der gerichtlichen
Medicin. Seventh ed. Stuttgart: E. F. Walters, 1832. 471 pp. Seventh considerably revised edition of an influential handbook of
forensic medicine first published in 1812. See pp. 105-06 on "unnatural
copulation," where Henke claims that physical injury invariably results. 4726. "HIPPOCRATES." Hippocratic Writings. Edited by G. E. R. Lloyd.
Translated by J. Chadwick, W. N. Mann, and others. New York: Penguin, 1978.
380 pp. See pp. 67 (The Oath) and 160-67 (Airs, Waters and Places, 22; on the causes of
effeminacy among the Scythians). The Hippocratic corpus was actually
composed by a number of Greek medical writers over several centuries. For a
fuller selection with Greek texts, see Hippocrates. Edited by W. H. S. Jones, (Cambridge, MA: Harvard University Press: Loeb Classical
Library, 1923-31; 4 vols.). 4727. - HOPFNER, THEODOR. Das Sexualleben der Griechen und Römer. Prague: J. G. Calve, 1938. First vol., first half (all issued), 455
pp. This monograph by a professor at the German university in Prague, on the
primary secondary sex characteristics of the human male and female, is the fullest modern account of the knowledge of
the Greeks and Romans of the physical aspects of sexuality. 4728. IRELAND, WILLIAM. The Blot upon the Brain. Edinburgh: Bell and Bradfute, 1885. 374 pp. In its day an influential treatise on insanity and "moral
insanity" (including sexual deviation). 4729. JACQUART, DANIELLE, and CLAUDE THOMASSET. Sexualité et savoir médical au moyen âge. Paris: Presses Universitaires de France, 1985. 269 pp. Attempts a synthesis of
medieval medical knowledge about sexuality, esp. as derived from Greek and
Arabic sources. Homosexuality is briefly discussed, pp. 213-28. 4730. JAMES, ROBERT. A Medical Dictionary. London: T. Osborne, 1743-45. 3 vols. See articles on Ganymede, malthacos, tribade, etc. A French edition
was prepared by Denis Diderot and others: Dictionnaire universel de medecine (Paris: Briasson, 1746-48; 6 vols.). 4731.
KAAN,
HEINRICH. Psychopathia sexualis.
Leipzig: Leopold Voss, 1844. 124 pp. Said to be the first comprehensive nosology of human sexual behavior.
Argues for a universal perception of sexual pathology as demonstrated by
childhood sexual deviancy. The title was purloined by Richard von Krafft-Ebing for his famous
work of four decades later. 4732. LANTÉRI-LAURA, GEORGES. Lecture des perversions: histoire de leur appropriation médicale. Paris: Masson, 1979. 160 pp. Study of the entry of the idea of perversion into medical discourse,
focusing on the 19th century. 4733. LAUMONIER, DE. "La thérapeutique individuelle de l'inversion sexuelle," Revue de l'hypnotisme, 23 (1908), 41-42. This entire issue of the journal is devoted to homosexuality. 4734.
LESKY,
ERNA. Die Zeugungs- und Vererbungslehren der
Antike und ihr Nachwirken. Mainz: 1950. 201 pp. (Abhandlungen der Akademie der
Wissenschaft und Literatur, 19) Careful study of Greco-Roman theories of procreation, including their
role in explaining the etiology of same-sex behavior. 4735. LYNCH, MICHAEL. "'Here Is Adhesiveness': From
Friendship to Homosexuality," Victorian Studies, 29 (1985), 67-96. Traces the concept of "adhesiveness" with reference to
same-sex affection as it was developed by phrenological circles in Britain
and North America in the 19th century. 4736. MONEY, JOHN. The Destroying Angel: Sex, Fitness and Food in the
legacy of Degeneracy Theory, Graham Crackers, Kellogg's Corn Flakes, and
American Health History, Buffalo: Prometheus Books, 1985. 213 pp. Attempts to chart, from their beginnings in European tradition, the
origins of antisexualism in American health care. 4737.
MUELLER,
JOHANN VALENTIN. Entwurf einer gerichtlichen
Arzneiwissenschaft. Frankfurt am Main: Andrea,
1796. In Chapter 7 ("On Unnatural Indecency, or Sodomy," pp.
131-41), Mueller holds that masturbation leads to homosexual behavior, and
that there are really no essential differences among sexual sins. The
sinner's demeanor reveals his practice. 4738. NYE, ROBERT A. Crime, Madness, and Politics in Modern France: The
Medical Concepts of Hational Decline. Princeton: Princeton
University Press, 1985. 368 pp. Discusses a medical concept of deviance that developed in France in
the second half of the 19th century, when medical models of cultural crisis
linked thinking about crime, mental illness, prostitution, alcoholism,
suicide and other pathologies to French national decline. 4739.
PACHARZINA,
KLAUS, and KARIN ALBRECHT-DESIRAT. "Die Last der Aerzte: Homosexualität
als klinisches Bild von den Anfängen bis heute,"
in J. S. Hohmann (ed.), Der unterdrückte
Sexus. Lollar: Achenbach, 1977, pp. 97-112. A somewhat turgid survey of medical opinion on homosexuality over the
centuries. The main part of the volume, however, reprints some hard-to-find
older texts. 4740. REYDELLET, PIERRE. "Pédérastie." In: Dictionnaire des sciences médicales. Paris:
Panckoucke, 1819, vol. 40, pp. 37-45. An inquiry on the probable causes of homosexuality; influential. 4741. SALLE, EUSEBE DE. "Médecine legale." In: Encyclopédie des sciences médicales. Paris: 1835,
vol. 9, chapter 41, pp. 2246-56. Perhaps the first mention in modern medical literature of the contrast
between acquired and congenital homosexuality. 4742. SCHRENK-NOTZING, ALBERT VON. "Zur suggestiven Behandlung der konträren Geschlechtsempfindung," Centralblatt für Nervenheilkunde und Psychiatrie, 1899, 257-60. Advocated hypnotism as a cure for inversion. See also his: The Use of Hypnotism in
Psychopathia Sexualis, with Especial Reference to Contrary Sexual Instinct. [German original 1895] Translated by C. G.
Chaddock. (New York: Institute for Research in Hypnosis Publication Society,
1956; 320 pp.). 4743. SZASZ, THOMAS. The Manufacture of Madness: A Com- Comparative
Study of the Inquisition and the Mental Health Movement. New York: Harper and Row, 1970. 385 pp. One of a number of books by a prolific author who has done much to
delegitimize coercive psychiatry. This volume offers considerable discussion
of sodomy in relation to heresy and witchcraft in the late middle ages. 4744. TARCZYLO, THÉODORE. Sexe et liberté au siècle des Lumières. Paris: Presses de la Renaissance, 1983. 311 pp. Presents some unenlightened medical attitudes in the 18th century,
with special reference to the masturbation phobia popularized by Dr. Tissot. 4745. WEEKS, JEFFREY. "'Sins and Diseases': Some
Notes on Homosexuality in the Nineteenth Century," History Workshop, 1 (1976), 211-19. Some British data, reviewed by a social-constructionist historian. 4754. ZACCHIA, PAOLO (PAULUS). Questiones medico- legales. Revised ed. Frankfurt am
Main: Johannes Melchior Bencard, 1688. 3 vols. First edition, Rome and
Amsterdam, 1621-35. Zacchia, a Roman physician at the papal court
(1584-1659), is regarded as the founder of the discipline of forensic medicine.
In Book IV, quaestio V, he deals with the forensic signs of the violation of
boys. XXIV. BIOLOGY It is tempting, but simplistic to attribute homosexual behavior simply
to biological factors. Yet to exclude such factors altogether, stigmatizing
this kind of study as "biologism," as is done by some
environmentalists and egalitarians, would be to err in the opposite
direction. It is true that some studies seeking to demonstrate biological
foundations of homosexual behavior have been poorly designed and tendentious,
but future work may be more convincing. See also "Social Sex
Roles," XIV.L. 4755. BAKER, SUSAN W. "Biological Influences on Human
Sex and Gender," Signs, 6 (1980), 80-96. Holds that the bulk of evidence from studies on human beings does not
support the thesis that prenatal environment is responsible for sex object
choice in adolescence. 4756. BARLOW, DAVID H. "Plasma Testosterone Levels in
Male Homosexuality: A Failure to Replicate," Archives of Sexual Behavior,(1974), 571-75. Findings fail to confirm the relation, posted by R. Kolod- ny's group
and others, between degree of homosexuality and plasma testosterone level.
See also: L. Birk et al., "Serum Testosterone Levels in Homosexual
Men," Hew England Journal of Medicine, 289 (1973), 1236-38. 4757. BEACH, FRANK A. Hormones and Behavior. New York: Paul B. Hoeber, 1949. 368 pp Concludes that, in comparison with animals, hormonal effects are far
less influential in man, where they are overriden by psychological and social
factors. This difference accounts for the lack of success of etiological
studies in human homosexuality that attribute it to
biological/constitutional factors. 4758. BIRKE, LYNDA I. A. "Is Homosexuality Hormonally
Determined?" JH, 6:4 (1981), 35-49. Considers two types of research (1) mesurement of hormone levels in
adult populations; and (2) hypothesis of behavioral determination
byjprenatal hormones. Concludes that the underlying theories are generally
naive; their popularity is to be explained by the their
perceived potential in "controlling" homosexuality. See also her:
"From Sin to Sickness: Hormonal Theories of Lesbianism," in Ruth
Hubbard et al. (eds.), Biological Woman—The Convenient Myth. (Cambridge, MA: Schenkman, 1982), 71-90. 4759. DOERR, PETER, et al. "Plasma Testosterone, Estradiol, and Semen Analysis in Male Homosexuals," Archives of General
Psychiatry, 29 (1973), 829-33. Contends that elevated plasma estradiol concentrations of the
homosexual group are a biological feature of this group and may be associated
with homosexual behavior. See also Doerr et al., "Further Studies on Sex
Hormones in Male Homosexuals," ibid., 33
(1976), 611-14. 4755. DÖRNER, GÜNTER, et al. "A Neuroendocrine Predisposition
for Homosexuality in Men," Archives of Sexual Behavior, 4 (1975), 1-8. Reports that, in male rats, androgen deficiency during a critical
hypothalamic organizational period was found to give rise to a predominantly
female-differentiated brain, homosexual behavior, and demonstration of a
positive estrogen feedback effect. Despite methodological criticisms on
various grounds, this East German researcher and his colleagues have
presented their thesis in over a hundred articles and papers. See, e.g.,
Paul H. Van Dyck, "A Critique of Dörner's Analysis of Hormonal Data from
Bisexual Males," Journal of Sex Research, 20 (1984), 412-14. See also: Anke Ehrhardt et al.,
"Sexual Orientation after Prenatal Exposure to Exogenous Estrogen," Archives of Sexual Behavior, 14 (1985), 57-77. 4756. FAUSTO-STERLING, ANNE. Myths of Gender: Biological
Theories about Women and Men. New York: Basic Books, 1985. 258 pp. A feminist scientist argues that there is no unbiased research in the
socially charged area of sex differences, which (she holds) are much less
significant than usually believed. 4757. FRIEDLÄNDER, BENEDICT. "Entwurf zu reizphysiologischen Auslese der erotischen Anziehung unter Zugrundelegung vorwiegend homosexuellen Materials," JfsZ, 7 (1905), 387-462. This study expands the ideas of physiological attraction—based in
part on what would now be termed phero- mones—adumbrated in his better known
book of 1904, Renaissance des Eros Uranios. 4758. FRIEDMAN, RICHARD C., et al. "Hormones and
Sexual Orientation in Men," American Journal of Psychiatry, 134 (1977), 571-72. Finds that the mean plasma androstenedione level for homosexuals was
significantly greater than for heterosexuals. See also Friedman and Andrew
G. Frantz, "Plasma Prolactin Levels in Male Homosexuals," Hormones and Behavior, 9 (1977), 19-22; and Friedman et al., "Psychological
Development and Blood Levels of Sex Steroids in Male Identical Twins of
Divergent Sexual Orientation," Journal of Hervous and Mental Disease, 163 (1976), 282-88. 4764. GARTRELL,
NANETTE K. "Hormones and Homosexuality," in: William Paul et al.
(eds.)> Homosexuality: Social, Psychological and Biological Issues. Beverly Hills, CA: Sage, 1982, pp. 169-82. Examines research with
respect to testosterone levels hypothesized as lower in homosexual men and
higher in lesbian women, and with respect to purported hormonal excesses or
deficiencies in the fetus in the uterus. Concludes that the evidence for
hormonal theories of homosexuality is weak. See also Gartrell et al.,
"Plasma Testosterone in Homosexual and Heterosexual Women," American Journal of
Psychiatry, 134 (1977), 1117-19. 4765. GLADUE, BRIAN A., et al. "Neuroendocrine
Response to Estrogen and Sexual Orientation," Science, 225 (September 9, 1984), 1496-99. Presents evidence for suggesting that homosexual men process hormones
differently from heterosexual men. 4766. GOLDSCHMIDT, RICHARD. "Die biologischen Grundlagen der konträren Sexualität und des Hermaphroditismus beim Menschen," Archiv für Rassen- und Gesellschaf ts-Biologie , 12 (1916), 1-14. On the basis of experiments in breeding intersexes in butterflies,
the author argues that homosexuality is part of a continuum of normal
variations within homo sapiens. On him see Leonie K. Piternick (ed.), Richard Goldschmidt,
Controversial Geneticist and Creative Biologist (Basel and Boston: Birkhauser Verlag, 1980; 154
pp.; Experientia Supplementum, 35), which concludes that his work on sex
determination and intersexuality remains controversial and in need of further
verification. 4767. HODANN, MAX. "Neue Forschungen zur Kenntnis der hereditarphysiologischen Grundlagen sexueller Zwischenstufen," JfsZ, 15 (1915), 59-68. Presents then-new research on the hereditary-physiological basis of
sexual intermediate types. 4768. HOULT, THOMAS F. "Human Sexuality in Biological
Perspective: Theoretical and Methodological Considerations," JH, 9:2-3 (1983-84), 137-55. The results of a review of the evidence suggest that claims for the
biological model are questionable inasmuch as the evidence for the model
either extrapolates from animal studies (and thus is not as such applicable
to human behavior) or is inconclusive, contradictory, and methodologically
deficient. Hoult prefers a social-learn- ing model. 4769. JAMES, SHEELAH, et al. "Significance of
Androgen Levels in the Aetiology and Treatment of Homosexuality," Psychological Medicine, 7 (1977), 427-29. Finds that androgen levels have no etiological significance in
treatment-seeking homosexuals and have no relevance as indicators of
treatment outcome. 4770. KINSEY, ALFRED C. "Criteria for Hormonal
Explanation of the Homosexual," Journal of Clinical
Endocrinology, 1 (1941), 424-28. Weighing previous research, Kinsey seeks to set forth standards for
judging future endocrinological studies. Contends that it is a mistake to
regard homosexuals and heterosexuals as two distinct types, rather than as
points on a continuum. 4771.
KOLODNY,
ROBERT C., et al. "Plasma Testosterone and Semen Analysis in Male Homosexuals," New England Journal of
Medicine, 285 (1971), 1170-74. This much discussed study reports finding that testosterone
measurements in predominantly or exclusively homosexual men were
significantly lower than in heterosexual controls. Other studies failed to
replicate the findings; cf. e.g. D. H. Barlow, above. 4772. KRELL, L., et al. "Beziehungen zwischen klinisch manifester Homosexualität und dem Oestrogenfeed- back-Effekt," Dermatologische Monatschrift, 165 (1975), 567-72. Reports that under experimental conditions homosexual men have a
positive feedback effect in resonse to LH serum, while heterosexual men do
not. 4773. LANG, THEO. The Difference Between a Man and a Woman. New York: John Day, 1971. 413 pp. See pp. 19, 52-57, 107-08, 154,
155-61, 222, 329-30, 332, 340. A constitutional
biologist treats the problems of homosexuality, transvestism, and
transsexualism with insight and tolerance. 4774. MACCULLOCH, MALCOLM J. "Biological Aspects of
Homosexuality," Journal of Medical Ethics, 6 (1980), 133-38. Contends that the behavior of primary male homosexuals has as its
essential cause a female differentiated brain. See also MacCulloch and John
L. Waddington, "Neuroendocrine Mechanisms and the Aetiology of Male and
Female Homosexuality," British Journal of Psychiatry, 139 (1981), 341-45. 4775. MARGOLIESE, M. SYDNEY. "Homosexuality: A New
Endocrine Correlate," Hormones and Behavior, 1 (1970), 151-55. A well-publicized report on testosterone breakdown, which further research
failed to substantiate. 4776. MEYER-BAHLBURG, HEINO F. L. "Sex Hormones and
Male Homosexuality in Comparative Perspective," Archives of Sexual Behavior, 6 (1977), 297-325. Well-informed review of literature and critique of results of the
endocrinological/hormonal approach to the measurement and therapy of male
homosexuality. See also his: "Sex Hormones and Female Homosexuality: A
Critical Exam- ination," ibid., 8 (1979), 101-19. 4777. MONEY, JOHN. "Gender-Transposition Theory and
Homosexual Genesis," Journal of Sex and Marital Therapy, 10 (1984), 75-82. Discusses the implications of prenatal hormonal
programming of the sexual brain, as well as postnatal social programming for
gender transposition, in relation to the genesis of homosexuality. 4778. MONEY, JOHN. "Genetic and Chromosomal Aspects
of Homosexuality," in: Judd Marmor (ed.), Homosexual Behavior: A Modern
Reappraisal. New York: Basic Books, 1980, 59-72. Reviews the history of "speculative genetics" about homosexuality;
statistical genetics; cytogenetics; and matched-pair studies. With 45
references. See also Money and Jean Dalery, "Iatrogenic Homosexuality:
Gender Identity in Seven 46,XX Chromosomal Females with Hyperadren-
ocortical Hermaphroditism Born with a Penis, Three Reared as Boys, Four
Reared as Girls," JH, 1 (1976), 357-71. 4779.
NEWMARK,
STEPHEN R., et al. "Gonadotropin, Estradiol, and Testosterone Profiles in
Homosexual Men," American Journal of Psychiatry, 136 (1979), 767-71. Results suggest that there may be subtle differences in gonadotropin
and estradiol secretion in homosexual subjects that can be detected only by
repeated sampling. 4780. PERLOFF, WILLIAM H. "Hormones and
Homosexuality," in: Judd Marmor (ed.), Sexual Inversion: The Multiple
Roots of Homosexuality. New York: Basic Books, 1965, pp. 44-70. Emphasizes the lack of definite evidence for hormonal factors in
homosexual behavior. 4781. PILLARD, RICHARD C., et al. "Plasma
Testosterone Levels in Homosexual Men," Archives of Sexual Behavior, 3 (19740, 453-58. Testosterone levels were not related to relative masculinity or
femininity or to any other psychological variables measured. 4782. RABOCH, JAN, and KAREL NEDOMA. "Sex Chromatin
and Sexual Behavior: A Study of 36 Men with Female Nuclear Pattern and of 194
Homosexuals," Psychosomatic Medicine, 20 (1958), 55-59. In the adult group of exclusive or nearly exclusive homosexuals,
testes of subnormal size were found in only 9 of the total 194 cases. The
finding of female sex chromatin in homosexual men is likely to be pure
coincidence. 4783. RICHARDSON, DIANE. "Theoretical Perspectives on
Homosexuality," in: John Hart and Diane Richardson (eds.), The Theory and Practice of
Homosexuality. Boston: Routledge and Kegan Paul, 1981, pp. 5-37. Clear presentation for the lay reader of the theoretical parameters
which should govern hypothesis formation and research in this sphere. 4784. RICKETTS, WENDELL. "Biological Research on Homosexuality:
Ansell's Cow or Occam's Razor?" JH, 10 (1984), 65-93. Reviews research based on the assumption that
homosexuality can be traced to heredity, prenatal brain differentiation, or
effects of gonadotropins in adulthood, finding it inadequate. Useful
bibliography (86 references). 4785. RUSE, MICHAEL. "Nature/Nurture: Reflections on
Approaches to the Study of Homosexuality," JH, 10:3-4 (1984), 141-51. Cautions against undue fear of biological approaches to the study of
homosexuality, which should not hamper worthwhile research. Urges that both
biological and environmental factors be considered in seeking to render a
true picture of homosexuality. 4786. SEABORG, DAVID M. "Sexual Orientation,
Behavioral Plasticity, and Evolution," JH, 10:3-4 (1984), 153- 58. Proposes that the species flexibility that allows human beings to
become homosexual may result from the evolution of the capacity to learn,
the complexity of the central nervous system, and behavioral plasticity in general . 4787. TOURNEY, GARFIELD. "Hormones and
Homosexuality," in: Judd Marmor (ed.), Homosexual Behavior: A Modern
Reappraisal, New York: Basic Books, 1980, pp. 41-58. Reviews the literature, regarding the state of the question at the
time of writing as largely inconclusive, but with some optimism for future
progress. Contrast L. I. A. Birke; and W. Ricketts, above. See also: Tourney
and Lon M. Hatfield, "Androgen Metabolism in Schizophrenics,
Homosexuals, and Normal Controls," Biological Psychiatry, 6 (1973), 23-36; Tourney et al., "Hormonal
Relationships in Homosexual Men," American Journal of
Psychiatry, 132 (1975), 288-90. 4788. WEINBERG, THOMAS F. "Biology, Ideology, and the
Reification of Developmental Stages in the Study of Homosexual
Identities," JH, 10:3/4 (1984), 77-84. Discerns several problems stemming from the use of biologically
derived models: (1) stages, which are researchers' constructs rather than
reflections of the subjects' perceptions, become reified; (2) moral
assumptions embedded in biologically derived models become incorporated in
sociopsychological theories of identity; and (3) the models tend to be
constructed in a monistic, linear fashion, excluding the consideration of
other approaches. 4789. WILSON,
WILLIAM P., et al. "Arousal from Sleep of Male Homosexuals," Biological Psychiatry, 6 (1973), 81-84. Homosexual males differed from normal males in being significantly
more arousable in Stage 3 and 4 of the sleep cycle, as are normal females. Through the publications of Edwin 0. Wilson and his colleagues at
Harvard, sociobiology became a much-discussed topic in the 1970s. Most of the
controversy revolves around human behavior, since it is generally conceded
that the sociobiological approach has proved valuable in some animal studies.
With regard to human homosexuality, sociobiology purports to solve the riddle
of how this behavior pattern can accord with the evolutionary theory of
sexual selection focusing on procreation by proposing models of "inclusive
fitness" in which homosexual behavior is genetically functional. 4790. FUTUYMA, DOUGLAS J., and STEPHEN J. RISCH.
"Sexual Orientation, Sociobiology, and Evolution," JH, 9:2-3 (1983-84), 157-68. Concludes that there is no reliable evidence that homosexual and
heterosexual orientations are caused by genetic differences. Evolutionary
theory provides no guide to morality or ethical progress, nor
for appropriate social attitudes toward homosexuality. 4791. GENGLE, DEAN, and NORMAN D. MURPHY. "Why We Are
Gay: Revolutionary Extinction? An Evolutionary Model of the Origin of
Sexualities," Advocate, no. 253 (November 1, 1978), 15-21. Speculative theoretical model of the psychobiological components of
gender, gender identity, and sexual orientation. 4792. KIRSCH, JOHN, and JAMES RODMAN. "The Natural
History of Homosexuality," Yale Scientific Magazine, 51:3 (1977), 7-13. Concise statement of the case for the sociobiological approach. 4793. MILLER, ALAN V. The Genetic Imperative: Fact
and Fantasy in Sociobiology: A Bibliography. Toronto: Canadian Gay Archives, 1979. 107 pp. (CGA
Publications, 2) In this useful roster, presenting both pro and con publications, see
esp. "Gays," pp. 82-83. For representative papers on general
questions posed by the emergence of this controversial discipline in the
1970s, see Arthur L. Caplan (ed.), The Sociobiology Debate: Readings on Ethical and
Scientific Issues. (New York: Harper and Row, 1978; 514 pp.).
RUSE, MICHAEL. Is Science Sexist? And Other Problems of Biological
Science. Boston: D. Reidel, 1981. 299 pp. Rebuttal of some current critiques of the biological theory of
evolution (neo-Darwinism). See esp. Chapter 10, "Are Homosexuals
Sick?" (pp. 245-72). See also his: Sociobiology: Sense or
Nonsense? (Boston: D. Reidel, 1979; 231 pp.).
SYMONDS, DONALD. The Evolution of Human Society. New York: Oxford University Press, 1979. 358 pp. Primatologist's
presentation situating the emergence of the difference between men and women
in the long hunting— and-gathering stage of human evolution. See Chapter 9,
"Test Cases: Hormones and Homosexuals" (pp. 286-305).
TRIVERS, ROBERT L.
"The Evolution of Reciprocal Altruism," Quarterly Review of Biology, 46 (1971), 35-57. Influential study by a Harvard ornithologist and sociobi- ologist,
setting forth a general theory which has been used to explain the
"inclusive fitness" of homosexuality.
WEINRICH, JAMES D. Human Reproductive Strategy: I. Environmental
Predictability and Reproductive Strategy; Effects of Social Class and Race.
II. Homosexuality and Non-Reproduction; Some Evolutionary Models. Cambridge, MA: Harvard University, 1976. 231 pp.
(unpublished Ph.D. dissertation— biology) Part 1 mainly concerns heterosexual behavior. Part 2 is a theoretical
exposition of the ways in which certain post-Darwinian evolutionary
models--esp. Hamilton's kin selection—can be used to understand
homosexuality, transvestism, and transsexualism.
WILSON, EDWARD 0. On Human Nature. Cambridge, MA: Harvard University Press, 1978. 260
pp. Presentation of sociobiology for the lay reader by the Harvard
entomologist who is its best known proponent. See pp. 142-47 for his argument
in favor of "a strong possibility that homosexuality is normal in a
biological sense." Twins have for some time interested researchers as an opportunity for
testing the inherited nature of specific traits—among them homosexual
behavior. To be valid, however, such studies must be on twins who are both monozygotic
(i.e. from a single egg: "identical" twins) and reared apart. The
difficulty of building up a sufficient pool of such individuals, as well as
defects that have been detected in research designs, have thus far kept such
reports from making any significant impact. 4794. DAVISON, K., et al. "A Male Monozygotic
Twinship Discordant for Homosexuality: A Repertory Grid Study," British Journal of Psychiatry, 118 (1971), 675-82. Reports on a pair of 18-year old male identical twins discordant for
overt homosexuality. Subsequently, the deviant twin was apparently
"cured" through aversion therapy. 4795. DIAMOND, MILTON. "Sexual Identity, Monozygotic
Twins Reared in Discordant Sex Roles and a BBC Follow-up," Archives of Sexual Behavior, 11 (1982), 181-86. Controversy over a pair of monozygotic twin boys, of whom one
accidentally had his penis oblated during circumcision. The child was
reassigned as a girl. Concludes that nature rather than nurture determines
one's sexual identity. 4796. FÄRBER, SUSAN. Identical Twins Reared Apart. New York: Basic Books, 1981. 383 pp. Although this book discusses many
striking behavioral similarities between twins, the evidence presented regarding
homosexual behavior is inconclusive (pp. 221-24). 4801.
GEDDA, LUIGI. Studio dei
gemelli. Rome: Edizioni Orizzonte Medico, 1951. 1381 pp. On pp. 738-39 the author summarizes the work of several previous
investigators on homosexuality in monozygotic twins. The twins concordant for
homosexuality were all male. There is also a useful 240-page bibliography on
twin studies in general. 4802. HABEL, H. "Zwillingsuntersuchungen an Homosexuellen," Zeitschrift für Sexualforschung, 1 (1950), 168-80. Presents five pairs of identical twins concordant for homosexuality. 4803. HESTON, L. L., and JAMES SHIELDS.
"Homosexuality in Twins: A Family Study and a Registry Study," Archives of General Psychiatry, 18 (1968), 149-60. Considers an unusual family of 14 siblings, including three pairs of
male monozygotic twins, two pairs of which were homosexual. 4804. KALLMANN, FRANZ J. "Comparative Twin Study on
the Genetic Aspects of Male Homosexuality," Journal of Nervous and Mental Disease, 115 (1952) , 283-98. From
case histories of 85 twin male homosexuals, found
that monozygotic twins were very similar in their sex behavior, even when
reared apart. See also his: "Twin and Sibship Study of Overt Male
Homosexuality," American Journal of Human Genetics, 4 (1952), 136-46. On the author, and the political
opposition to his approach, see Elliot S. Gershon, "The Historical
Context of Franz Kallmann and Psychiatric Genetics," Archiv fur Psychiatrie und
Nervenkrankheiten, 229 (1981), 273-76. 4805. KLINTWORTH, GORDON K. "A Pair of Male
Monozygotic Twins Discordant for Homosexuality," Journal of Nervous and Mental
Disease, 135 (1962), 113-25. Study of a pair of 20-year old male twins in South Africa, one
homosexual, the other heterosexual. Holds that this discordance does not
invalidate the hypothesis of genetic determination of sexual orientation. 4806.
LANGE, JOHANNES.
Verbrechen als Schicksal: Studien an kriminellen Zwillingen.
Leipzig: Georg
Thieme Verlag, 1929. 96 pp. On pp. 73-76 the author describes a pair of monozygotic male twins
discordant for homosexuality, which he assigns to brain damage suffered in
early childhood by the twin who later became a hustler. The heterosexual twin
exhibited no criminal activity. 4807. PERKINS, MURIEL W. "Homosexuality in Female
Monozygotic Twins," Behavior Genetics, 3 (1973), 387-88. Describes a set of 45-year old identical female twins with a history
of homosexuality. 4808. PUTERBAUGH, GEOFF. "Born Gay? Hand Preference
and Sex Preference," Cabirion, 10 (1984), 12-18. Reexamines the research data on twins, concluding that there is a
significant concordance for identical (though not for fraternal) twins for
homosexuality. 4809. RAINER, JOHN D., et al. "Homosexuality and
Hetero- sexuality in Identical Twins," Psychosomatic Medicine, 22 (1960), 251-59. Seeks to discount evidence for concordance of monozygotic twins for
homosexuality. 4810. SANDERS, JACOB. "Homosexuelle Zwillingen," Genet- ica, 16 (1934), 401-34. Reports six pairs of monozygotic twins concordant for homosexuality. A
seventh case was discordant but pseudo- homosexual, probably the result of
earlier epileptic fits. The author upholds Hirschfeld's theories and
classifications. A summary of the article also appeared under the title
"Homosexueele tweelingen," Nederlands Tijdschrift voor Geneeskunde, 78 (1934), 3346-52. 4811. ZUGER,
BERNARD. "Monozygotic Twins Discordant for Homosexuality: Report of a
Pair and Significance of the Phenomenon," Comprehensive Psychiatry, 17 (1976), 661-69 Case study of a pair of male identical twins who showed differences in
gender role behavior from early childhood, one following an essentially
feminine-type pattern and later becoming homosexual, the other following a
masculine pattern and becoming heterosexual. The difference does not seem due
to familial factors. A corollary of the "third sex" hypothesis popular in the
early years of this century was the assumption that homosexuals, both male
and female, represent an intermediate body type. While this hypothesis has
not been confirmed, it is not impossible that some evidence may one day be
forthcoming to indicate that homosexual body types show statistically
significantly differences from those of the rest of the population--though
not necessarily in the direction of intermediacy between male and female. 4812. COPPEN, A. J. "Body Build of Male
Homosexuals," British Medical Journal, no. 5164 (1959), 1443-45. In a study of patients admitted to a London hospital, it was found
that homosexuals could not be distinguished by body build. 4813. DELLA PORTA, GIOVANNI BATTISTA. De humana physiog- nomia. Vico Equense, Italy: J. Cacchium, 1586. 272 pp. This once influential pseudo-scientific treatise (translated into
several languages) compared human character types physiognomically to animal
prototypes. 4814. EVANS, RAY B. "Physical and Biochemical
Characteristics of Homosexual Men," Journal of Consulting and
Clinical Psychology, 39 (1972), 140-47. Found that male homosexuals had less subcutaneous fat and smaller
muscle/bone development and were longer in proportion to bulk. 4815. KENYON, F. E. "Physique and Physical Health of
Female Homosexuals," Journal of Neurology, Neurosurgery and Psychiatry, 31 (1968), 487-89. Found that lesbians were significantly heavier, with bigger busts and
waists, but less tall than controls, and with slightly bigger hips. 4816. KRETSCHMER, ERNST. Korperbau und Character: Untersuchungen zum Konstitutionsproblem und zur Lehre von den Temperamenten.
Berlin: Springer, 1921. 192 pp. There is an English translation by W. J. H. Sprott, Physique and Character: An
Investigation of the Nature of Constitution and of the Theory of Temperament (New York: Humanities Press, 1951; 282 pp.).
Kretschmer (1888-1964) was a German psychologist who created an influential,
but still controversial theory correlating character with body types. 4812. PERKINS, MURIEL WILSON. "Female Homosexuality
and Body Build," Archives of Sexual Behavior, 10 (1981), 337-45. Data show lesbians as having narrower hips, increased
arm and leg girths, less subcutaneous fat, and more muscle than heterosexual
women. However, "psychologically passive" lesbians most closely
approach the physiques of control groups. 4813. SCHLEGEL, WILLHART SIEGMAR. "Die konstitutionsbiologischen Grundlagen der Homosexualität," Zeitschrift für menschliche Vererbungs- und Konstitutionslehre, 36 (1961-62), 341-64. Believes that body types, esp. in the pelvic region, play a large role
in determining the sexual orientation of males. 4814. WEIL, ARTHUR. "Körpermasse der Homosexuellen als Ausdrucksform ihrer speziellen Konstitution," Archiv für Entvicklungsmechanik der Organismen, 49 (1921), 538-44. Argues that the body build of homosexuals is
intermediate between the normal male and the normal female body
build. First of a series of such articles by Weil--a former associate
of Magnus Hirschfeld—in various German periodicals. 4815. WORTIS, JOSEPH. "A Note on the Body Build of
the Male Homosexual," American Journal of Psychiatry, 93 (1937), 1121-25. Most homosexuals [at that time] preferred to think
of their anomaly as anchored in their constitution, but the actual evidence
for constant or typical intersexual traits among male homosexuals is wanting. Since classical antiquity the question of homosexual behavior among
animals has been much discussed. Those who denied that animals engage in it
generally regarded this lack as a confirmation of their assumption that
homosexuality was "unnatural." Recent zoological studies have
provided abundant evidence for same-sex behavior among animals, not only in captivity, but also in the wild. In
some discussions, however, as when opposite-sex mimicry is termed
"transvestism," researchers seem to have yielded to a seductive,
but deceptive anthropomorphism. Also, since the decline of such reductionist fashions
as "rat psychology»" the scientific community has become sceptical
of research programs that derive complex human behaviors from simple animal
models. The question of animal homosexuality is therefore not a simple one. 4817. ABELE, LAURENCE G. and SANDRA GILCHRIST.
"Homosexual Rape and Sexual Selection in Acanthocephalan Worms," Science, 197 (1977), 81-83. "Homosexual rape" occurs when an assailant seals the male
victim's genital region with cement, so that the worm is effectively removed
from the reproductive pool. 4818. AKERS, JEAN S., and CLINTON H. CONAWAY. "Female
Sexual Behavior in Macaca mulatta," Archives of Sexual Behavior, 8 (1979), 63-80. Documents homosexual activity among adult females in a heterosexual
group of rhesus monkeys, which seemed to be linked with affection and not
with aggression. See also: C. R. Carpenter, "Sexual Behavior of Free
Ranging Rhesus Monkeys (Macaca mulatta). II. Periodicity of Estrus,
Homosexual, Autoerotic, and Non-Conformist Behavior," Journal of Comparitive Psychology, 33 (1942), 143-62. 4819. ALLEN, JOHN A., and ROBERT BOICE. "Effects of
Rearing on Homosexual Behavior in the Male Laboratory Rat," Psychonomic Science, 23 (1971), 321-22. Male interlopers introduced into the individual cages of adults
elicited mounting and thrusting in isolates. 4820. ARONSON, L. R. "The Sexual Behavior of
Anura," Natural History, 6 (1944), 1-15. Mechanisms of sexual contact among frogs and toads. 4821. BEACH, FRANK A. "Animal Models for Human Sexuality,"
in: Sex Hormones and Behavior (Ciba Foundation Symposium, new series, 62).
Amsterdam: Ex- cerpta Medica, 1979, pp. 113-43. Points out that while the existence of homosexual behavior in nonhuman
primates is known, the reasons why it is initiated are obscure. Beach offers
some suggestions for clarifying this problem, 4822. BETZ, H. D. "Lukian von Samosata und das Neue
Testament," Theologische Untersuchungen, 76 (1961), 199-201. Includes discussion of the claim, found in Lucian's
"Gryllos" (second century of our era), that homosexual behavior is
not found among animals. 4827. BUFFON, GEORGES LOUIS LECLECQ, COUNT DE. Histoire naturelle générale et particulière avec la description
du Cabinet du Roi, Paris: 1749-67. 15 vols. This epochal work fostered much comparative and developmental work in
biology. More specifically, Buffon reported observations of same-sex
behavior among birds. 4828. CELLI, GIORGIO. L'omosessualita negli animali: l'omosessualita come
strumento naturale di difesa contro la sovrapopulazione. Milan: Longanesi, 1973. 170
pp. One of the few works of synthesis in this field, organized around the
idea that homosexuality functions among animals as a device to limit
population growth. See also: Pietro Ghisleni, "Pervertimenti omosessuali
negli animali domes- titici: proctiti da coito contra natura," Nuovo Ercolani (Turin), 22 (1917), 303-09. 4829. CHEVALIER-SKOLNIKOFF, SUZANNE. "Male-Female, Female-Female, and
Male-Male Sexual Behavior in the Stumptail Monkey, with Special Attention to
the Female Orgasm," Archives of Sexual Behavior, 3 (1974), 95-116. In a laboratory setting, homosexual encounters were numerous and
always involved sexual inversions (i.e. the assumption of the coital role
assumed by the opposite sex). Orgasms were observed in females during the
homosexual interactions. See also her: "Homosexual Behavior in
Laboratory of Stumptail Monkeys (Nacaca arctoides): Forms, Contexts, and Possible Social Functions," ibid., 5 (1976), 511-27. 4830. COOK, ROBERT. "'Lesbian' Phenotype of Drosophila melanogaster?"
Nature, 254 (1975),
241-42. Reports the existence of a behavioral phenotype of this fly directing
rudimentary male courtship behavior towards other females and toward males. 4831. DENNISTON, R. H. "Ambisexuality in
Animals," in: Judd Marmor (ed.), Homosexual Behavior: A Modern Reappraisal. New York: Basic Books, 1980, pp. 25- 40. Shows homosexual behavior in a range of animal species. Suggests that
conditioning, rather than hormones or structure, is of primary importance. 4832. EBERHARD, WILLIAM G. Sexual Selection and Animal Genitalia. Cambridge, MA: Harvard University Press, 1986. 244 pp. A pathfinding
biological study of considerable indirect relevance because of its critique
of the "lock and key" notion of the perfect complementarity of male
and female genitalia, an important component of the ideology of the
"naturalness" of heterosexuality. 4833. ECKHOLM, ERIK. "Male Snakes Find Advantage in Appearing Female," Hew York Times (July 23, 1985), Studies of red-sided garter snakes in Canada show that about 1/7 of
them are able to mimic being female by exuding pheromones, and thus increase
their chances of copulating with true females. 4834. EDWARDS, GEORGE. Gleanings of Natural History. London: Royal College of Physicians, 1758-64. 3 vols. Includes observations by the British ornithologist (1694- 1773) on
same-sex behavior among birds (pp. xxi-xxiv). Text in English and French in
parallel columns. 4835. FISCHER, ROBERT B., and RONALD D. NADLER.
"Affil- iative, Playful, and Homosexual Interactions of Adult Female
Lowland Gorillas," Primates, 19 (1978), 657-64. Sexual interactions in four wild-born adult female gorillas included
partner positioning and thrusting and usually were accomplished through
ventral-ventral genital approximations. 4836. GADEAU DE KERVILLE, HENRI. Observations relatives a ma note intitulée "Perversion sexuelle chez des coléoptères mâles." Rouen: J. Lecerf, 1896. 12 pp. The author recognizes "pederastie de gout," or preferential homosexuality among insects. This
brochure was reprinted from Bulletin de la Société entomologique de France (1896). 4837. GADPAILLE, WARREN J. "Cross-Species and Cross-
Cultural Contributions to Understanding Homosexuality," Archives of General
Psychology, 37 (1980), 349-56. Contends that Homo sapiens is the only
species, however, in which adult preferential or obligatory homosexuality
occurs naturally. 4838. GEIST, VALERIUS. Mountain Sheeps A Study in
Behavior and Evolution. Chicago: University of Chicago Press, 1971. 383 pp. This study by an authority in the field includes data on observation
of male-male sexual mounting in wild sheep. See also his: Mountain Sheep and Man in the
Horthern Wilds (Ithaca, NY: Cornell University Press, 1975; 248 pp.). 4839. GROLLET and L. LEPINAY. "L'inversion sexuelle chez les animaux," Revue de 1'hypnotisme, 23 (1908),
34-37. On same-sex
relations in male apes, bitches, and cows. Asserts that only occasional, not
true homosexuality occurs in animals. 4840.
GROOS, KARL. Die Spiele der Tiere.
Jena: G. Fischer, 1896. 359 pp. Deals primarily with animal play, but summarizes related studies. 4841. GUHL, A. M. "Unisexual
Mating in a Flock of Wild Leghorn Hens," Transactions of the Kansas Academy of Science, 5
(1948), 107-11. Socially high status hens took the male role, but without crowing or
waltzing. See also his: "Social Behavior of the Domestic Fowl," Technical Bulletin of the
Agricultural Experiment Station, 73 (1953), 1-48; as well as: E. B. Hale, "Defects in Sexual
Behavior as Factors Affecting Fertility in Turkeys," Poultry Science, 34 (1955),
1059-67. ' 4842. HORAPOLLO. Hieroglyphica. Greek text edited by Conradus Leemans. Amsterdam:
J. Muller, 1835. 446 pp. In this work, influential in the Renaissance, by an obscure Egyptian
savant who lived possibly in the 5th century of our era, see II, 69 (pp.
88-89), and 95 (p. 101), on the hyena and the two partridges as homosexual.
The English version, by George Boas (New York: Pantheon, 1950), is
inadequately annotated. There is a related work by the Renaissance scholar
Valeriano. 4843. HÜNEMÖRDER, CHRISTIAN. "Studien zur Wirkungsgeschichte biologischer Motive in den pseudo-Klernen- tinen," Medizinhistorisches Journal, 13 (1978), 15-28. \0n the Early Christian folklore of the hare and hyena as ^sexually
aberrant creatures (pp. 17-20). 4844. HUNT, G. L., and M. W. HUNT. "Female Pairing in
Western Gulls (Larus occidentalis) in Southern California," Science, 196 (1977), 1466-67. Widely publicized research on female pairings during nesting. 4845. KARSCH-HAACK, FERDINAND. "Pederastie und Tribadie bei den Tieren auf Grund der Literatur," JFsZ, 2 (1900), 126-60. Surveys Greco-Roman theorizing on homosexual behavior in animals; then
presents studies by modern biologists. Still a useful literature review. See,
however, two more recent general studies in German: Monika Meyer-Holzapfel,
"Homosexualität bei Tieren," Praxis (Bern), 5 (1961), 1266-72; and Friedrich Schutz,
"Homosexualität bei Tieren," Studium generale 19 (1966), 273-85. 4846. KEVLES, BETTYANN. Females of the Species. Cambridge, MA: Harvard University Press, 1986. 270 pp. This evolutionary synthesis concentrating on female animals contains
some observations on both male and female homosexuality. 4847. LABOULMÈNE, ALEXANDRE. "Examen.anatomique de deux Melolontha vulgaris trouvés accouplés et paraissant du sexe mâle," Annales de la Société Entomologiqne de France (1859), 567-70. Observations of the coupling of two male insects. 4848. MCBRIDE, A. F., and D. 0. HEBB. "Behavior of
the Captive Bottle-Nose Dolphin," Journal of Comparative and
Physiological Psychology, 41 (1948), 111-23. Observed two kinds of homosexual activity among the larger male
dolphins: external masturbation on the bodies of smaller males, and attempts
at intromission. 4849. MCROBERT, SCOTT, and LAURIE TOMPKINS.
"Courtship of Young Males is Ubiquitous in Drosophila melano-
gaster," Behavior Genetics, 13 (1983A), 517—23. In this fly, young males that were only a few hours old stimulated
courtship that was indistinguishable from that elicited by virgin females. 4850. MAPLE, TERRY, et al. "Dominance-Related Ambisex- uality in Two Male Rhesus Monkeys (Macaca mu- latta),"
Journal of Biological Psychology, 19 (1977), 25-28. Homosexual behavior was repeatedly observed in two young male rhesus
monkeys raised with two older female baboons. 4851. MORRIS, DESMOND. "Homosexuality in the
Ten-Spined Stickleback," Behaviorism, 4:4 (1952), 233-61. Male sexual behavior in experiments in crowding with fish. See also
his: "Reproductive Behavior in the Zebra Finch with Special Reference to
Pseudo-Female Behavior and Displacement Activities,"
ibid., 6 (1954), 271-322; and "The Causation of Pseudo-Female and
Pseudo-Male Behavior: A Further Comment," ibid., 8 (1955), 45-56. 4852. NOBLE, RALPH G. "Male Hamsters Display Female
Sexual Responses," Hormones and Behavior, 12 (1979), 293-98. Compared to the commonly studied mammalian species, the male hamster
is highly bisexual. However, more intense stimulation is required to elicit
the lordosis response in contrast with females. 4853. PRESCOTT, R. G. W.
"Mounting Behaviour in the Female Cat," Nature, 228 (December 12, 1970), 1106-07. Among female cats mounting behavior occurs at oestrus and is directed
preferentially toward other oestrous cats. 4854. RASMUSSEN, E. WULFF. "Experimental Homosexual
Behavior in Male Albino Rats," Acta Psychologica, 11 (1955), 303-34. An attempt to obtain data through conditioning rats that would help to
understand human homosexual behavior. 4855. SHARMA, R. P. "Light-Dependent Homosexual
Activity in Males of a Mutant of Drosphila Monogaster," Experientia, 33 (1977), 171-73. Cytogenetic and behavioral studies on an x-ray induced mutant of the
fly Drosophila melanogaster revealed light- dependent homosexual activity in
the males of the mutant. 4856. THOR, D. H. "Reciprocal Homosexual Mounting
Behavior in Paired Anosmic Male Rats," Psychological Reports, 47 (1980), 349-50. Four isolate male rats when paired with anosmia treatment with InSO4
engaged in repeated copulatory mounts with three partners. 4857. WARD, INGEBORG L. "Prenatal Stress Feminizes
and Demasculinizes the Behavior of Males," Science, 175 (1972), 82-84. Prenatally stressed rats showed low levels of male copulatory
behavior and high rates of female lordotic response. 4858. WEINRICH, JAMES D. "Is Homosexuality Biologically
Normal?" in: William Paul (ed.), Homosexuality: Social,
Psychological and Biological Issues. Beverly Hills, CA: Sage, 1982, pp. 197-208.
Discusses homosexual behavior in animals, pointing out that it is important
to differentiate studies which have been made in animals in the wild from
those derived from laboratory situations, where behavior patterns may be
modified significantly (and deliberately). Also examines the concept of the
natural in its biological and general contexts. |